Konica Minolta Bizhub PRESS C1070 C1070P C71hc C1060 Bizhub PRO C1060L Service Manual

SERVICE MANUAL
Date: 2015/10/30
Table of Contents
Revision list............................................................................................................................................1
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C1060/PRO C1060L Version 1.1......................................................................................1
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L Version 1.8.........................................................................10
A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS............................................................................A-1
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE.................................................................................................................................................A-2
2. DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION..........................................................................A-3
2.1 Description items in this Service Manual...................................................................................................................................A-3
2.2 Description items for safety and important warning items.........................................................................................................A-3
3. SAFETY WARNINGS..................................................................................................................................................A-4
3.1 MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY KONICA MINOLTA, INC.......................................................................................A-4
3.1.1 Actions requiring special attention...................................................................................................................................A-4
3.2 POWER PLUG SELECTION.....................................................................................................................................................A-5
3.2.1 Power Cord Set or Power Plug.......................................................................................................................................A-5
3.3 CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE...................................................................................................A-6
3.3.1 Power Supply..................................................................................................................................................................A-7
3.3.2 Installation Requirements..............................................................................................................................................A-11
3.3.3 After Service..................................................................................................................................................................A-13
3.4 FUSE.......................................................................................................................................................................................A-18
3.5 Used Batteries Precautions.....................................................................................................................................................A-19
3.5.1 ALL Areas......................................................................................................................................................................A-19
3.5.2 Germany........................................................................................................................................................................A-19
3.5.3 France...........................................................................................................................................................................A-19
3.5.4 Denmark........................................................................................................................................................................A-19
3.5.5 Finland, Sweden............................................................................................................................................................A-19
3.5.6 Norway..........................................................................................................................................................................A-19
4. WARNING INDICATIONS ON THE MACHINE.........................................................................................................A-20
4.1 Warning indications inside the machine..................................................................................................................................A-20
4.2 Warning indications on the boards..........................................................................................................................................A-36
5. MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT...............................................................................................A-40
B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS..................................................................................................B-1
1. PRECAUTION ON HANDLING THIS MANUAL .........................................................................................................B-1
2. PRODUCT NAME.......................................................................................................................................................B-2
3. TRADEMARK .............................................................................................................................................................B-3
3.1 TRADEMARKS OF OTHER COMPANIES ..............................................................................................................................B-3
3.2 OWN TRADEMARKS ...............................................................................................................................................................B-3
4. ELECTRICAL PARTS AND SIGNALS........................................................................................................................B-4
5. PAPER FEED DIRECTION ........................................................................................................................................B-6
C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS......................................................................................................C-1
1. bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060, bizhub PRO C1060L.........................................................................C-1
1.1 Type..........................................................................................................................................................................................C-1
1.2 Functions...................................................................................................................................................................................C-1
1.3 Paper.........................................................................................................................................................................................C-2
(1) Size and weight..................................................................................................................................................................C-2
(2) Type of paper......................................................................................................................................................................C-2
1.4 Recommended paper................................................................................................................................................................C-2
1.4.1 Inch.................................................................................................................................................................................C-2
1.4.2 Metric..............................................................................................................................................................................C-3
1.5 Materials....................................................................................................................................................................................C-3
(1) C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, C1060L...........................................................................................................................C-3
1.6 Maintenance..............................................................................................................................................................................C-4
1.7 Machine data.............................................................................................................................................................................C-4
1.8 Operating environment..............................................................................................................................................................C-5
1.9 Note regarding the specifications .............................................................................................................................................C-5
2. HT-511........................................................................................................................................................................C-6
2.1 Type .........................................................................................................................................................................................C-6
2.2 Machine data ............................................................................................................................................................................C-6
i
2.3 Operating environment .............................................................................................................................................................C-6
3. DF-626........................................................................................................................................................................C-7
3.1 Type..........................................................................................................................................................................................C-7
3.2 Functions...................................................................................................................................................................................C-7
3.3 Type of paper............................................................................................................................................................................C-7
3.4 Originals that are not allowed to be fed.....................................................................................................................................C-7
3.5 Originals other than the paper feed and the throughput can be guaranteed.............................................................................C-7
3.6 Table of mixed combinations.....................................................................................................................................................C-8
(1) Inch.....................................................................................................................................................................................C-8
(2) Metric..................................................................................................................................................................................C-8
3.7 Machine data.............................................................................................................................................................................C-8
3.8 Operating environment..............................................................................................................................................................C-9
4. PF-602m...................................................................................................................................................................C-10
4.1 Type .......................................................................................................................................................................................C-10
4.2 Functions ................................................................................................................................................................................C-10
4.3 Type of paper..........................................................................................................................................................................C-10
4.4 Maintenance ...........................................................................................................................................................................C-10
4.5 Machine data ..........................................................................................................................................................................C-10
4.6 Operating environment ...........................................................................................................................................................C-10
4.7 Note regarding the specifications ...........................................................................................................................................C-10
5. HT-504......................................................................................................................................................................C-11
5.1 Type .......................................................................................................................................................................................C-11
5.2 Machine data ..........................................................................................................................................................................C-11
6. PF-707......................................................................................................................................................................C-12
6.1 Type........................................................................................................................................................................................C-12
6.2 Functions.................................................................................................................................................................................C-12
(1) Paper feed........................................................................................................................................................................C-12
6.3 Type of paper..........................................................................................................................................................................C-12
6.4 Machine data...........................................................................................................................................................................C-12
7. HT-506......................................................................................................................................................................C-13
7.1 Type .......................................................................................................................................................................................C-13
7.2 Machine data ..........................................................................................................................................................................C-13
8. LU-202......................................................................................................................................................................C-14
8.1 Type .......................................................................................................................................................................................C-14
8.2 Functions ................................................................................................................................................................................C-14
8.3 Type of paper .........................................................................................................................................................................C-14
8.4 Maintenance ...........................................................................................................................................................................C-14
8.5 Machine data ..........................................................................................................................................................................C-14
9. HT-503......................................................................................................................................................................C-15
9.1 Type .......................................................................................................................................................................................C-15
9.2 Machine data ..........................................................................................................................................................................C-15
10. MB-506....................................................................................................................................................................C-16
10.1 Type......................................................................................................................................................................................C-16
10.2 Functions...............................................................................................................................................................................C-16
10.3 Type of paper........................................................................................................................................................................C-16
10.4 Machine data.........................................................................................................................................................................C-16
10.5 Operating environment..........................................................................................................................................................C-16
10.6 Note regarding the specifications .........................................................................................................................................C-16
11. OT-502....................................................................................................................................................................C-17
11.1 Type......................................................................................................................................................................................C-17
11.2 Functions...............................................................................................................................................................................C-17
11.3 Type of paper........................................................................................................................................................................C-17
11.4 Machine data.........................................................................................................................................................................C-17
11.5 Operating environment .........................................................................................................................................................C-17
ii
12. EF-103....................................................................................................................................................................C-18
12.1 Type......................................................................................................................................................................................C-18
12.2 Functions...............................................................................................................................................................................C-18
12.3 Type of paper........................................................................................................................................................................C-18
12.4 Recommended paper............................................................................................................................................................C-19
12.4.1 Inch.............................................................................................................................................................................C-19
12.4.2 Metric..........................................................................................................................................................................C-19
12.5 Machine data.........................................................................................................................................................................C-19
13. RU-516....................................................................................................................................................................C-21
13.1 Type......................................................................................................................................................................................C-21
13.2 Functions...............................................................................................................................................................................C-21
13.3 Type of paper........................................................................................................................................................................C-21
13.4 Machine data.........................................................................................................................................................................C-21
14. RU-517....................................................................................................................................................................C-22
14.1 Type......................................................................................................................................................................................C-22
14.2 Functions...............................................................................................................................................................................C-22
14.3 Type of paper........................................................................................................................................................................C-22
14.4 Machine data.........................................................................................................................................................................C-22
15. MK-740....................................................................................................................................................................C-23
15.1 Type......................................................................................................................................................................................C-23
15.2 Functions...............................................................................................................................................................................C-23
15.3 Type of paper........................................................................................................................................................................C-23
15.4 Machine data.........................................................................................................................................................................C-23
16. RU-509 ...................................................................................................................................................................C-24
16.1 Type .....................................................................................................................................................................................C-24
16.2 Functions...............................................................................................................................................................................C-24
16.3 Type of paper........................................................................................................................................................................C-24
16.4 Machine data ........................................................................................................................................................................C-24
17. HM-102 ..................................................................................................................................................................C-25
17.1 Type .....................................................................................................................................................................................C-25
17.2 Function ................................................................................................................................................................................C-25
17.3 Type of paper........................................................................................................................................................................C-25
17.4 Machine data ........................................................................................................................................................................C-25
18. RU-510....................................................................................................................................................................C-26
18.1 Type......................................................................................................................................................................................C-26
18.2 Functions...............................................................................................................................................................................C-26
18.3 Type of paper........................................................................................................................................................................C-26
18.4 Machine data.........................................................................................................................................................................C-26
19. FS-531 ...................................................................................................................................................................C-27
19.1 Type .....................................................................................................................................................................................C-27
19.2 Function.................................................................................................................................................................................C-27
(1) Functions..........................................................................................................................................................................C-27
(2) Staple................................................................................................................................................................................C-27
(3) Maximum tray capacity.....................................................................................................................................................C-27
19.3 Type of paper .......................................................................................................................................................................C-27
(1) Staple mode......................................................................................................................................................................C-27
19.4 Machine data ........................................................................................................................................................................C-28
20. FS-612 ...................................................................................................................................................................C-29
20.1 Type .....................................................................................................................................................................................C-29
20.2 Functions...............................................................................................................................................................................C-29
(1) Function............................................................................................................................................................................C-29
(2) Staple ...............................................................................................................................................................................C-29
iii
(3) Folding .............................................................................................................................................................................C-29
(4) Maximum tray capacity*1..................................................................................................................................................C-29
20.3 Type of paper........................................................................................................................................................................C-30
(1) Staple mode......................................................................................................................................................................C-30
(2) Saddle stitching mode......................................................................................................................................................C-30
(3) Half-Fold mode.................................................................................................................................................................C-30
(4) Tri-folding mode................................................................................................................................................................C-31
20.4 Machine data ........................................................................................................................................................................C-31
21. PI-502 .....................................................................................................................................................................C-32
21.1 Type .....................................................................................................................................................................................C-32
21.2 Functions...............................................................................................................................................................................C-32
21.3 Type of paper .......................................................................................................................................................................C-32
21.4 Machine data ........................................................................................................................................................................C-32
22. PK-512/513.............................................................................................................................................................C-34
22.1 Type......................................................................................................................................................................................C-34
22.2 Functions...............................................................................................................................................................................C-34
22.3 Type of paper........................................................................................................................................................................C-34
22.4 Machine data.........................................................................................................................................................................C-34
23. FS-532....................................................................................................................................................................C-35
23.1 Type......................................................................................................................................................................................C-35
23.2 Functions...............................................................................................................................................................................C-35
(1) Functions..........................................................................................................................................................................C-35
(2) Staple sheet......................................................................................................................................................................C-35
(3) Staple position..................................................................................................................................................................C-35
23.3 Type of paper........................................................................................................................................................................C-36
................................................................................................................................................................................................C-36
23.3.1 Allowable amount of curling........................................................................................................................................C-37
23.4 Machine data.........................................................................................................................................................................C-37
24. SD-510....................................................................................................................................................................C-38
24.1 Type......................................................................................................................................................................................C-38
24.2 Functions...............................................................................................................................................................................C-38
(1) Functions..........................................................................................................................................................................C-38
(3) Performance.....................................................................................................................................................................C-38
24.3 Type of paper........................................................................................................................................................................C-38
(1) Saddle stitching mode......................................................................................................................................................C-38
(2) Half-Fold mode.................................................................................................................................................................C-39
(3) Tri-folding mode................................................................................................................................................................C-40
(4) Allowable amount of curling..............................................................................................................................................C-40
24.4 Machine data.........................................................................................................................................................................C-40
25. PK-522....................................................................................................................................................................C-41
25.1 Type......................................................................................................................................................................................C-41
25.2 Functions...............................................................................................................................................................................C-41
25.3 Type of paper........................................................................................................................................................................C-41
25.4 Machine data.........................................................................................................................................................................C-41
26. MK-732....................................................................................................................................................................C-43
26.1 Type......................................................................................................................................................................................C-43
26.2 Type of paper........................................................................................................................................................................C-43
26.3 Machine data.........................................................................................................................................................................C-43
27. LS-505.....................................................................................................................................................................C-44
27.1 Type .....................................................................................................................................................................................C-44
27.2 Functions...............................................................................................................................................................................C-44
(1) Function............................................................................................................................................................................C-44
iv
(2) Maximum tray capacity ....................................................................................................................................................C-44
27.3 Type of paper........................................................................................................................................................................C-44
27.4 Machine data.........................................................................................................................................................................C-45
28. LS-506.....................................................................................................................................................................C-46
28.1 Type .....................................................................................................................................................................................C-46
28.2 Functions...............................................................................................................................................................................C-46
(1) Function............................................................................................................................................................................C-46
28.3 Type of paper........................................................................................................................................................................C-46
28.4 Machine data.........................................................................................................................................................................C-47
29. FD-503....................................................................................................................................................................C-48
29.1 Type .....................................................................................................................................................................................C-48
29.2 Functions...............................................................................................................................................................................C-48
(1) Function............................................................................................................................................................................C-48
29.3 Type of paper........................................................................................................................................................................C-49
(1) Punching function ............................................................................................................................................................C-49
(2) Folding functions ..............................................................................................................................................................C-49
(3) PI functions ......................................................................................................................................................................C-50
29.4 Machine data.........................................................................................................................................................................C-50
30. SD-506....................................................................................................................................................................C-51
30.1 Type .....................................................................................................................................................................................C-51
30.2 Functions ..............................................................................................................................................................................C-51
(1) Function............................................................................................................................................................................C-51
30.3 Type of paper........................................................................................................................................................................C-51
(1) Straight/sub tray mode .....................................................................................................................................................C-51
(2) Saddle stitching mode .....................................................................................................................................................C-52
(3) Trimming mode ................................................................................................................................................................C-53
(4) Multi-center folding mode ................................................................................................................................................C-53
(5) Overlap tri-folding mode ..................................................................................................................................................C-54
30.4 Machine data.........................................................................................................................................................................C-54
31. SD-513....................................................................................................................................................................C-55
31.1 Type......................................................................................................................................................................................C-55
31.2 Functions...............................................................................................................................................................................C-55
(1) Functions..........................................................................................................................................................................C-55
(2) Maximum tray capacity ...................................................................................................................................................C-55
(3) Performance.....................................................................................................................................................................C-56
31.3 Type of paper........................................................................................................................................................................C-57
(1) Straight, sub tray mode ...................................................................................................................................................C-57
(2) Saddle stitching mode ....................................................................................................................................................C-58
(3) Trimming mode ...............................................................................................................................................................C-60
(4) Multi folding mode ...........................................................................................................................................................C-61
(5) Allowable amount of curling ............................................................................................................................................C-61
31.4 Machine data.........................................................................................................................................................................C-61
31.6 Note regarding the specifications..........................................................................................................................................C-61
32. CR-101....................................................................................................................................................................C-62
32.1 Type......................................................................................................................................................................................C-62
32.2 Functions...............................................................................................................................................................................C-62
(1) Functions..........................................................................................................................................................................C-62
(2) Applicable mode and number of creases .......................................................................................................................C-62
(3) Performance.....................................................................................................................................................................C-63
32.3 Type of paper........................................................................................................................................................................C-64
32.4 Machine data.........................................................................................................................................................................C-64
33. TU-503....................................................................................................................................................................C-65
33.1 Type......................................................................................................................................................................................C-65
33.2 Functions...............................................................................................................................................................................C-65
(1) Functions..........................................................................................................................................................................C-65
v
(2) Applicable mode list ........................................................................................................................................................C-65
(3) Performance.....................................................................................................................................................................C-65
33.3 Type of paper........................................................................................................................................................................C-66
(1) Slit mode .........................................................................................................................................................................C-66
33.4 Machine data.........................................................................................................................................................................C-66
34. FD-504....................................................................................................................................................................C-67
34.1 Type......................................................................................................................................................................................C-67
34.2 Functions...............................................................................................................................................................................C-67
(1) Functions..........................................................................................................................................................................C-67
(2) Applicable mode list ........................................................................................................................................................C-67
(4) Performance.....................................................................................................................................................................C-67
34.3 Type of paper........................................................................................................................................................................C-67
34.4 Machine data.........................................................................................................................................................................C-68
35. PB-503....................................................................................................................................................................C-69
35.1 Type .....................................................................................................................................................................................C-69
35.2 Functions...............................................................................................................................................................................C-69
(1) Function............................................................................................................................................................................C-69
(2) Binding sheets..................................................................................................................................................................C-69
(4) Others...............................................................................................................................................................................C-69
35.3 Type of paper........................................................................................................................................................................C-69
(1) Paper size ........................................................................................................................................................................C-69
(2) Paper weight ....................................................................................................................................................................C-70
(3) Applicable paper in each mode........................................................................................................................................C-70
35.4 Machine data ........................................................................................................................................................................C-72
36. IC-602.....................................................................................................................................................................C-73
36.1 Type......................................................................................................................................................................................C-73
36.2 Functions...............................................................................................................................................................................C-73
36.3 Paper ....................................................................................................................................................................................C-73
36.4 Machine data.........................................................................................................................................................................C-73
37. GP-501....................................................................................................................................................................C-74
37.1 Type......................................................................................................................................................................................C-74
37.2 Modes of Operation...............................................................................................................................................................C-74
37.3 Machine data.........................................................................................................................................................................C-74
37.4 Software................................................................................................................................................................................C-74
37.5 Electronic...............................................................................................................................................................................C-74
37.6 Inputs.....................................................................................................................................................................................C-74
(1) Media Input from Printer...................................................................................................................................................C-74
(2) Power................................................................................................................................................................................C-75
37.7 Outputs..................................................................................................................................................................................C-75
37.8 Performance..........................................................................................................................................................................C-75
(1) Reliability..........................................................................................................................................................................C-75
37.9 Operation Environment, Storage, Transportation..................................................................................................................C-75
37.10 Safety/Regulatory................................................................................................................................................................C-75
(1) Safety Compliance............................................................................................................................................................C-75
(2) Electromagnetic Compliance............................................................................................................................................C-75
37.11 Appendix A..........................................................................................................................................................................C-76
37.12 Appendix B..........................................................................................................................................................................C-76
37.13 Appendix C..........................................................................................................................................................................C-77
37.14 Glossary of Terms...............................................................................................................................................................C-78
38. GP-502....................................................................................................................................................................C-79
38.1 Type......................................................................................................................................................................................C-79
38.2 Functions...............................................................................................................................................................................C-79
(1) Function............................................................................................................................................................................C-79
(2) Binding sheets..................................................................................................................................................................C-79
(3) Book stock quantity...........................................................................................................................................................C-79
(4) Others...............................................................................................................................................................................C-79
38.3 Type of paper........................................................................................................................................................................C-79
(1) Paper size.........................................................................................................................................................................C-79
(2) Paper weight.....................................................................................................................................................................C-80
vi
(3) Type of paper....................................................................................................................................................................C-80
(4) Recommended paper.......................................................................................................................................................C-80
38.4 Performance Specifications...................................................................................................................................................C-80
(1) Input conditions.................................................................................................................................................................C-80
(2) Sticking specifications.......................................................................................................................................................C-81
(3) Book specifications...........................................................................................................................................................C-82
38.5 Materials................................................................................................................................................................................C-82
38.6 Machine data.........................................................................................................................................................................C-83
D OVERALL COMPOSITION............................................................................................................D-1
1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION......................................................................................................................................D-1
1.1 System configuration (C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060)..............................................................................................................D-1
1.2 System configuration when installing MK-740 (C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060)........................................................................D-2
1.3 Configuration for optional device (C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060)............................................................................................D-3
1.3.1 Coupling combination of the main body and the paper feed option................................................................................D-3
1.3.2 Coupling combination of the main body and the finisher option......................................................................................D-4
1.3.3 Combination of the main body and the image controller (IC) option...............................................................................D-6
1.4 System configuration (C1060L).................................................................................................................................................D-6
1.5 Configuration for optional device (C1060L)...............................................................................................................................D-7
1.5.1 Coupling combination of the main body and the paper feed option................................................................................D-7
1.5.2 Coupling combination of the main body and the finisher option......................................................................................D-7
1.5.3 Combination of the main body and the image controller (IC) option...............................................................................D-8
2. MAIN BODY UNIT CONFIGURATION.......................................................................................................................D-9
3. PAPER PATH...........................................................................................................................................................D-10
3.1 Straight paper exit mode.........................................................................................................................................................D-10
3.2 Reversing exit mode................................................................................................................................................................D-11
3.3 Duplex mode...........................................................................................................................................................................D-12
4. CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM..................................................................................................................................D-13
5. IMAGE CREATION PROCESS................................................................................................................................D-14
5.1 Image creation flow and functions...........................................................................................................................................D-14
5.2 Charging process (Step 1)......................................................................................................................................................D-14
5.3 Laser exposure process (Step2).............................................................................................................................................D-15
5.4 Developing process (Step 3)...................................................................................................................................................D-15
5.5 Intermediate transfer process (Step 4)....................................................................................................................................D-15
5.6 2nd transfer process (Step 5)..................................................................................................................................................D-16
5.7 Separation process (Step 6)....................................................................................................................................................D-16
5.8 Drum cleaning (Sub step 1).....................................................................................................................................................D-17
5.9 Exposure before the charge (Sub step 2)...............................................................................................................................D-17
5.10 Transfer belt cleaning (Sub step 3).......................................................................................................................................D-17
5.11 2nd transfer roller/Lw cleaning (Sub step 4)..........................................................................................................................D-18
5.12 Toner collection (Sub step 5)................................................................................................................................................D-18
6. IMAGE CREATION CONTROL................................................................................................................................D-20
7. PROCESS SPEED...................................................................................................................................................D-23
7.1 bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc....................................................................................................................................D-23
7.2 bizhub PRESS C1060/PRO C1060L.......................................................................................................................................D-23
E SERVICE TOOL.............................................................................................................................E-1
1. bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060, bizhub PRO C1060L.........................................................................E-1
1.1 Service material list...................................................................................................................................................................E-1
1.1.1 Service material list ........................................................................................................................................................E-1
1.2 Jig list.........................................................................................................................................................................................E-1
1.2.1 Jig list..............................................................................................................................................................................E-1
1.3 Tool list......................................................................................................................................................................................E-3
1.3.1 Tool list............................................................................................................................................................................E-3
1.4 Mail remote notification system.................................................................................................................................................E-3
1.4.1 Outline ............................................................................................................................................................................E-3
1.4.2 Operating environment ...................................................................................................................................................E-3
1.4.3 Major functions ...............................................................................................................................................................E-3
1.4.4 Initial setting....................................................................................................................................................................E-4
1.4.5 Operating instructions of the mail remote notification system.........................................................................................E-6
1.4.6 Mail sending....................................................................................................................................................................E-6
1.5 Machine setting data Import......................................................................................................................................................E-7
1.5.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................E-7
1.5.2 Setting method................................................................................................................................................................E-7
1.6 Job history list............................................................................................................................................................................E-9
1.6.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................E-9
1.6.2 Major functions................................................................................................................................................................E-9
vii
1.6.3 Setting method................................................................................................................................................................E-9
1.7 Counter list acquisition using USB memory............................................................................................................................E-11
1.7.1 Outline ..........................................................................................................................................................................E-11
1.7.2 List that can be acquired ..............................................................................................................................................E-11
1.7.3 Acquisition method .......................................................................................................................................................E-12
1.8 Panel log..................................................................................................................................................................................E-12
1.8.1 Outline...........................................................................................................................................................................E-12
1.8.2 Log acquisition method.................................................................................................................................................E-12
1.9 ORU-M Counter Rewrite.........................................................................................................................................................E-13
1.9.1 Load from external memory..........................................................................................................................................E-13
1.9.2 Store to external memory..............................................................................................................................................E-14
1.10 Management Tool..................................................................................................................................................................E-15
1.10.1 Outline.........................................................................................................................................................................E-15
1.10.2 Installation of Management Tool ................................................................................................................................E-17
1.10.3 Starting up of Management Tool ................................................................................................................................E-18
1.10.4 Technician mode.........................................................................................................................................................E-20
1.10.5 bizhub PRESS C8000 replacement procedure...........................................................................................................E-29
1.10.6 bizhub PRESS C7000/6000 replacement procedure..................................................................................................E-31
1.10.7 bizhub PRESS 1250/1250P/1052 replacement procedure.........................................................................................E-35
1.10.8 bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060 and bizhub PRO C1060L replacement procedure.............................E-39
1.10.9 bizhub PRESS C1100, 1085 replacement procedure.................................................................................................E-43
1.10.10 Backup file.................................................................................................................................................................E-45
1.10.11 Administrator mode ..................................................................................................................................................E-46
1.10.12 Various setting for the software ................................................................................................................................E-49
1.10.13 Error message list.....................................................................................................................................................E-54
1.11 Machine state log store.........................................................................................................................................................E-55
1.11.1 Outline.........................................................................................................................................................................E-55
1.11.2 Log acquisition............................................................................................................................................................E-55
1.12 Real-time Remote Panel.......................................................................................................................................................E-56
1.12.1 Setting Up Real-time Remote Panel...........................................................................................................................E-56
1.12.2 Installing Web plugin...................................................................................................................................................E-56
1.12.3 Enabling VNC Function of the Machine......................................................................................................................E-60
1.12.4 Setting Connection to VNC Viewer.............................................................................................................................E-61
1.12.5 Remote Panel Advanced Settings...............................................................................................................................E-62
F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE.......................................................................................................F-1
1. MAINTENANCE ITEM.................................................................................................................................................F-1
1.1 Maintenance item......................................................................................................................................................................F-1
1.1.1 Procedure of the periodical maintenance........................................................................................................................F-1
1.1.2 Condition of the count......................................................................................................................................................F-1
1.2 bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc......................................................................................................................................F-1
1.2.1 Total counter ..................................................................................................................................................................F-1
1.2.2 Special parts counter .....................................................................................................................................................F-1
1.3 bizhub PRESS C1060/bizhub PRO C1060L.............................................................................................................................F-6
1.3.1 Total counter ..................................................................................................................................................................F-6
1.3.2 Special parts counter .....................................................................................................................................................F-6
1.4 DF-626.....................................................................................................................................................................................F-11
1.4.1 Special parts counter.....................................................................................................................................................F-11
1.5 PF-602m..................................................................................................................................................................................F-11
1.5.1 Total counter..................................................................................................................................................................F-11
1.6 PF-707.....................................................................................................................................................................................F-12
1.6.1 Total counter..................................................................................................................................................................F-12
1.7 LU-202.....................................................................................................................................................................................F-13
1.7.1 Total counter..................................................................................................................................................................F-13
1.8 MB-506....................................................................................................................................................................................F-14
1.9 OT-502.....................................................................................................................................................................................F-14
1.10 EF-103...................................................................................................................................................................................F-14
1.10.1 Special parts counter .................................................................................................................................................F-14
1.11 RU-516..................................................................................................................................................................................F-16
1.11.1 Special parts counter...................................................................................................................................................F-16
1.12 RU-517..................................................................................................................................................................................F-16
1.13 RU-509, HM-102....................................................................................................................................................................F-16
1.13.1 Total counter................................................................................................................................................................F-16
viii
1.14 RU-510..................................................................................................................................................................................F-17
1.14.1 Total counter................................................................................................................................................................F-17
1.15 FS-531...................................................................................................................................................................................F-17
1.15.1 Total counter................................................................................................................................................................F-17
1.16 FS-612...................................................................................................................................................................................F-18
1.16.1 Total counter................................................................................................................................................................F-18
1.17 PI-502....................................................................................................................................................................................F-19
1.17.1 Total counter................................................................................................................................................................F-19
1.18 FS-532...................................................................................................................................................................................F-19
1.18.1 Total counter................................................................................................................................................................F-19
1.19 SD-510...................................................................................................................................................................................F-20
1.19.1 Total counter................................................................................................................................................................F-20
1.20 PK-522...................................................................................................................................................................................F-21
1.20.1 Total counter................................................................................................................................................................F-21
1.21 MK-732..................................................................................................................................................................................F-21
1.21.1 Total counter................................................................................................................................................................F-21
1.22 LS-505/LS-506.......................................................................................................................................................................F-21
1.22.1 Total counter................................................................................................................................................................F-21
1.23 FD-503...................................................................................................................................................................................F-22
1.23.1 Total counter................................................................................................................................................................F-22
1.24 SD-506...................................................................................................................................................................................F-23
1.24.1 Total counter................................................................................................................................................................F-23
1.25 SD-513...................................................................................................................................................................................F-25
1.25.1 Periodical maintenance...............................................................................................................................................F-25
1.25.2 Spotted replacement...................................................................................................................................................F-26
1.26 CR-101..................................................................................................................................................................................F-28
1.27 TU-503...................................................................................................................................................................................F-28
1.28 FD-504...................................................................................................................................................................................F-28
1.29 PB-503...................................................................................................................................................................................F-29
1.29.1 Total counter................................................................................................................................................................F-29
1.30 GP-501..................................................................................................................................................................................F-31
1.30.1 Total counter................................................................................................................................................................F-31
1.31 GP-502..................................................................................................................................................................................F-33
1.31.1 Total counter................................................................................................................................................................F-33
2. PERIODICALLY REPLACED PARTS LIST..............................................................................................................F-34
2.1 Periodical replacement parts...................................................................................................................................................F-34
2.2 bizhub PRESS C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, bizhub PRO C1060L..................................................................................F-34
2.3 DF-626.....................................................................................................................................................................................F-35
2.4 PF-602m..................................................................................................................................................................................F-35
2.5 PF-707.....................................................................................................................................................................................F-36
2.6 LU-202.....................................................................................................................................................................................F-36
2.7 MB-506....................................................................................................................................................................................F-36
2.8 OT-502.....................................................................................................................................................................................F-37
2.9 EF-103.....................................................................................................................................................................................F-37
2.10 RU-516..................................................................................................................................................................................F-37
2.11 RU-517..................................................................................................................................................................................F-37
2.12 RU-509, HM-102....................................................................................................................................................................F-37
2.13 RU-510..................................................................................................................................................................................F-38
2.14 FS-531...................................................................................................................................................................................F-38
2.15 FS-612...................................................................................................................................................................................F-38
2.16 PI-502....................................................................................................................................................................................F-38
2.17 FS-532...................................................................................................................................................................................F-39
2.18 SD-510...................................................................................................................................................................................F-39
2.19 LS-505/LS-506.......................................................................................................................................................................F-39
ix
2.20 FD-503...................................................................................................................................................................................F-39
2.21 SD-506...................................................................................................................................................................................F-39
2.22 SD-513...................................................................................................................................................................................F-40
2.22.1 Spotted replacement parts list.....................................................................................................................................F-40
2.23 TU-503...................................................................................................................................................................................F-40
2.24 FD-504...................................................................................................................................................................................F-40
2.25 PB-503...................................................................................................................................................................................F-40
2.26 GP-501..................................................................................................................................................................................F-41
2.26.1 Option..........................................................................................................................................................................F-41
2.27 GP-502..................................................................................................................................................................................F-41
3. ORU-M PARTS.........................................................................................................................................................F-42
3.1 Life value of the ORU-M parts ................................................................................................................................................F-42
(1) ORU-M corresponding parts.............................................................................................................................................F-42
3.2 ORU-M parts list......................................................................................................................................................................F-42
(1) ORU-M parts list................................................................................................................................................................F-42
3.3 ORU-M parts replacement timing............................................................................................................................................F-45
(1) ORU-M target unit life setting............................................................................................................................................F-45
(2) ORU-M warning icon display.............................................................................................................................................F-45
3.4 Management of ORU-M parts counter.....................................................................................................................................F-45
(1) Counter display.................................................................................................................................................................F-45
(2) Counter clear.....................................................................................................................................................................F-45
4. LIFE VALUE..............................................................................................................................................................F-46
4.1 Life value of materials/parts.....................................................................................................................................................F-46
4.2 Life value determining condition..............................................................................................................................................F-48
5. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L..........F-49
5.1 External section.......................................................................................................................................................................F-49
5.1.1 Replacement of the developing dust-proof filter/1, the developing dust-proof filter/2, the PH dust-proof filter and the
suction dust-proof filter............................................................................................................................................................F-49
5.1.2 Replacement of the filter box.........................................................................................................................................F-50
5.1.3 Replacement of the electric component cooling filter....................................................................................................F-50
5.2 Write section............................................................................................................................................................................F-51
5.2.1 Cleaning the dust proof glass........................................................................................................................................F-51
5.3 Photo conductor section..........................................................................................................................................................F-51
5.3.1 Pulling out the process unit...........................................................................................................................................F-51
5.3.2 Cleaning around the process unit..................................................................................................................................F-52
5.3.3 Replacing the drum unit.................................................................................................................................................F-54
5.4 Charging section......................................................................................................................................................................F-56
5.4.1 Replace the charging corona.........................................................................................................................................F-56
5.4.2 Cleaning the charging corona........................................................................................................................................F-56
5.5 Developing section..................................................................................................................................................................F-58
5.5.1 Developer charging procedures....................................................................................................................................F-58
5.5.2 Replacing the Developing unit/Y, /M, /C, /K..................................................................................................................F-59
5.6 Intermediate transfer section...................................................................................................................................................F-60
5.6.1 Removing/reinstalling the intermediate transfer unit.....................................................................................................F-60
5.6.2 Replacing the transfer belt cleaning unit.......................................................................................................................F-62
5.6.3 Replacing the belt cleaning blade and the side seal.....................................................................................................F-65
5.6.4 Replacing the toner collection sheet..............................................................................................................................F-66
5.6.5 Replacing the transfer belt separation claw...................................................................................................................F-66
5.6.6 Replacing the intermediate transfer belt, and cleaning of the rollers and the cleaning sheet.......................................F-67
5.6.7 Replacing the 1st transfer roller/Y, /M, /C and /K and the transfer roller bearing/Y, /M, /C and /K................................F-70
5.6.8 Replacing the 2nd transfer roller/Up..............................................................................................................................F-74
5.6.9 Replacing the belt separation claw solenoid (SD2).......................................................................................................F-74
5.6.10 Removing and reinstalling the 2nd transfer unit..........................................................................................................F-76
5.6.11 Replacing the 2nd transfer roller/Lw and the C-clip, and cleaning around the 2nd transfer unit.................................F-76
5.6.12 Replacing the separate discharging unit.....................................................................................................................F-78
5.6.13 Replacing the 2nd transfer earth plate assy................................................................................................................F-78
5.7 Toner collection section...........................................................................................................................................................F-79
5.7.1 Replacing the waste toner box......................................................................................................................................F-79
5.8 Paper feed section...................................................................................................................................................................F-79
5.8.1 Replacement of the pick-up roller/1, pick-up roller/2, paper feed roller rubber/1 and paper feed roller rubber/2..........F-79
5.8.2 Replacement of the separation roller rubber/1 and separation roller rubber/2..............................................................F-80
5.8.3 Cleaning the slide sheet................................................................................................................................................F-81
5.8.4 Replacement of the paper feed clutch/1 (CL1), paper feed clutch/2 (CL2), pre-registration clutch/1 (CL3) and pre-
registration clutch/2 (CL4)........................................................................................................................................................F-81
5.9 Vertical conveyance section....................................................................................................................................................F-83
5.9.1 Replacement of the intermediate conveyance clutch/1 (CL5).......................................................................................F-83
5.10 Registration section...............................................................................................................................................................F-84
5.10.1 Replacing the registration cleaning sheet assy...........................................................................................................F-84
x
5.10.2 Cleaning of the registration cleaning sheet assy.........................................................................................................F-85
5.10.3 Replacing the registration roller and the registration roller bearing, cleaning the registration swing home sensar (PS20)
.................................................................................................................................................................................................F-85
5.10.4 Replacing the registration idler gear............................................................................................................................F-90
5.11 Fusing section........................................................................................................................................................................F-91
5.11.1 How to distinguish the new fusing unit and the old fusing unit....................................................................................F-91
5.11.2 Removing/reinstalling the fusing unit...........................................................................................................................F-92
5.11.3 Replacement of the fusing heater lamp assy/Up and the neutralizing flat spring assy...............................................F-93
5.11.4 Replacement of the fusing bearing/Up, /Lw1, the heat insulating sleeve/Up, /Lw1, the belt regulating sleeve, the fusing
belt, the fusing roller/1, /2, and the neutralizing ring................................................................................................................F-97
5.11.5 Replacement of the fusing temperature sensor/3 (TH3)...........................................................................................F-103
5.11.6 Replacement of the fusing gear/1, fusing bearing/Lw2, heat insulating sleeve/Lw2, fusing roller/Lw.......................F-104
5.11.7 Replacement of the fusing temperature sensor/4 (TH4)...........................................................................................F-108
5.11.8 Replacement of the fusing gear/2, the fusing gear/3.................................................................................................F-110
5.11.9 Replacement of the fusing separating claw assy......................................................................................................F-112
5.11.10 Replacing the fusing paper exit roller/Up.................................................................................................................F-113
5.12 Duplex section.....................................................................................................................................................................F-113
5.12.1 Replacement of the intermediate conveyance clutch/2 (CL6), and the intermediate conveyance clutch/3 (CL7).....F-113
5.13 Reverse and exit section.....................................................................................................................................................F-115
5.13.1 Replacing the reverse de-curler roller.......................................................................................................................F-115
5.13.2 Replacement of the paper exit drive gear and the paper exit decurler roller.............................................................F-117
6. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE DF-626...........................................................................................F-121
6.1 Paper feed section.................................................................................................................................................................F-121
6.1.1 Clean the pick-up roller and the paper feed roller.......................................................................................................F-121
6.1.2 Cleaning the separation roller......................................................................................................................................F-121
6.1.3 Replace the pick-up roller and the paper feed roller....................................................................................................F-121
6.1.4 Replacing the separation roller....................................................................................................................................F-122
6.2 Conveyance section..............................................................................................................................................................F-123
6.2.1 Cleaning of the miscellaneous rolls.............................................................................................................................F-123
6.2.2 Cleaning of the miscellaneous rollers..........................................................................................................................F-124
6.2.3 Cleaning of the scanning guide...................................................................................................................................F-125
6.2.4 Cleaning of the reflective sensor section.....................................................................................................................F-126
7. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE PF-602m........................................................................................F-127
7.1 Precautions on maintenance ................................................................................................................................................F-127
7.2 Tray section...........................................................................................................................................................................F-127
7.2.1 Precautions on maintenance of the tray section..........................................................................................................F-127
7.2.2 Replacing the Pick-up rubber/paper feed roller...........................................................................................................F-127
7.2.4 Replacing the paper feed clutch (CL1/CL4) and the separation clutch (CL2/CL5)......................................................F-132
7.3 Conveyance section..............................................................................................................................................................F-133
7.3.1 Replacing the vertical conveyance clutch/1 (CL7), /2 (CL8), and /3 (CL9)..................................................................F-133
7.3.2 Replacing the horizontal conveyance clutch/1 (CL10), /2 (CL11), and pre-registration clutch (CL12)........................F-134
8. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE PF-707...........................................................................................F-136
8.1 Precautions on maintenance ................................................................................................................................................F-136
8.2 Paper feed tray section..........................................................................................................................................................F-136
8.2.1 Replacing the loop roller/Lw and the loop roller bearing/Lw........................................................................................F-136
8.3 Paper feed suction section....................................................................................................................................................F-137
8.3.1 Replacing the suction belt clutch/1 (CL15), the suction belt clutch/2 (CL16), the suction belt clutch/3 (CL17)...........F-137
8.4 Vertical conveyance section..................................................................................................................................................F-137
8.4.1 Replacement of the exit clutch/1 (CL1), /2 (CL2), the vertical conveyance clutch/1 (CL3), /2 (CL4) ,the vertical
conveyance clutch/3 (CL5) and /4 (CL6)...............................................................................................................................F-137
8.5 Horizontal conveyance section..............................................................................................................................................F-138
8.5.1 Replacing the pre-registration clutch (CL7) and the horizontal conveyance clutch/1 (CL8), horizontal conveyance clutch/
2 (CL9)...................................................................................................................................................................................F-138
8.5.2 Replacing the pre-registration roller and the pre-registration bearing.........................................................................F-138
8.5.3 Replacing the horizontal conveyance roller/1, /2, the horizontal conveyance roller bearing/1, /2...............................F-139
8.5.4 Replacing the loop roller/Up........................................................................................................................................F-142
8.5.5 Replacement of the roller pressure release motor (M10)............................................................................................F-142
9. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE LU-202...........................................................................................F-145
9.1 Paper feed section.................................................................................................................................................................F-145
9.1.1 Precautions on maintenance ......................................................................................................................................F-145
9.1.2 Cleaning the pre-registration roller..............................................................................................................................F-145
9.1.3 Removing/installing paper feed roller Assy ................................................................................................................F-145
9.1.4 Replacing the paper feed roller/pick-up roller..............................................................................................................F-145
9.1.6 Replacing paper feed clutch (CL101) /pre-registration clutch (CL102).......................................................................F-147
10. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE MB-506........................................................................................F-149
10.1 Precautions on maintenance ..............................................................................................................................................F-149
10.2 Paper feed section...............................................................................................................................................................F-149
xi
10.2.1 Replacing the pick-up roller/BP, the paper feed roller rubber/BP, and the paper feed clutch/BP (CL14).................F-149
10.2.2 Replacing the separation roller rubber/BP.................................................................................................................F-151
11. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE OT-502........................................................................................F-152
11.1 Replacing the paper hold roller............................................................................................................................................F-152
11.1.1 Periodically replaced parts and cycle........................................................................................................................F-152
11.1.2 Procedure..................................................................................................................................................................F-152
11.2 Replacing the paper exit roller.............................................................................................................................................F-152
11.2.2 Procedure..................................................................................................................................................................F-152
11.3 Replacing the paper exit driven roller/2...............................................................................................................................F-153
11.3.2 Procedure..................................................................................................................................................................F-153
12. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE EF-103.........................................................................................F-155
12.2 Fusing section......................................................................................................................................................................F-155
13. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE RU-516........................................................................................F-156
13.2 Conveyance section............................................................................................................................................................F-156
13.2.1 Replacing the charging roller and the charging driven roller.....................................................................................F-156
13.2.2 Replacing the charging roller bearing........................................................................................................................F-159
14.1.1 Replacing the charging roller and the charging driven roller.....................................................................................F-161
14.1.2 Replacing the charging roller bearing........................................................................................................................F-165
15. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE RU-509/HM-102 .........................................................................F-167
15.2 Output paper density detection section ..............................................................................................................................F-167
15.2.1 Cleaning the shutter .................................................................................................................................................F-167
15.3 Humidification section (HM-102) .........................................................................................................................................F-167
15.3.1 Replacing the humidification rollers/Rt, /Lt and the water feed roller........................................................................F-167
15.3.2 Replacing the water feed filter...................................................................................................................................F-173
16.2.1 Replacing the paper re-feed roller drive gear/1 and the paper re-feed roller drive gear/2........................................F-175
16.2.2 Replacing the entrance conveyance motor (M1), the entrance conveyance belt, the paper exit motor (M2), the paper
exit conveyance belt..............................................................................................................................................................F-175
16.2.3 Replacing the paper exit pulley and the conveyance pulley......................................................................................F-176
16.2.4 Replacing the entrance roller/1, /2, paper exit roller, bearing /K and bearing assy...................................................F-177
16.2.5 Replacing the merging section roller and bearing/K..................................................................................................F-178
16.2.6 Replacing the stacker entrance roller and bearing/K.................................................................................................F-179
16.2.7 Replacing the re-feed roller and bearing/K................................................................................................................F-180
16.2.8 Replacing the driven roller.........................................................................................................................................F-181
16.2.9 Replacing the straight gate........................................................................................................................................F-184
16.2.10 Replacing the stack switch motor (M6)....................................................................................................................F-185
17. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE FS-531 ........................................................................................F-186
17.2 Conveyance section ...........................................................................................................................................................F-186
17.2.1 Replacing the intermediate conveyance roller (sponge roller)..................................................................................F-186
17.3 Main tray section..................................................................................................................................................................F-186
17.3.1 Replacing the paper exit roller (sponge roller)...........................................................................................................F-186
17.4 Stacker section ...................................................................................................................................................................F-187
17.4.1 Replacing the paper assist roller (sponge roller).......................................................................................................F-187
17.4.2 Replacement of the cleaning plate Assy...................................................................................................................F-188
17.5 Stapler section ....................................................................................................................................................................F-188
17.5.1 Replacing the stapler unit..........................................................................................................................................F-188
18. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE FS-612 ........................................................................................F-190
18.2.1 Replacing the intermediate conveyance roller (sponge roller)..................................................................................F-190
18.3.1 Replacing the paper exit roller (sponge roller)...........................................................................................................F-190
18.4 Stacker section ...................................................................................................................................................................F-192
18.4.1 Replacing the paper assist roller (sponge roller).......................................................................................................F-192
18.5 Stapler section ....................................................................................................................................................................F-192
18.5.1 Removing/reinstalling the stapler unit cover .............................................................................................................F-192
19. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE PI-502 .........................................................................................F-196
xii
19.2 Paper feed section ..............................................................................................................................................................F-196
19.2.1 Replacing the pick-up roller/Up and the paper feed roller/Up....................................................................................F-196
19.2.2 Replacing the pick-up roller/Lw and the paper feed roller/Lw....................................................................................F-197
19.2.3 Replacing the separation roller/Up and the torque limiter/Up....................................................................................F-197
19.2.4 Replacing the separation roller/Lw and the torque limiter/Lw....................................................................................F-198
19.2.5 Replacing the paper feed clutch/Up (CL201) and the paper feed clutch/Lw (CL202)...............................................F-199
20. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE FS-532.........................................................................................F-201
20.2 Paper conveyance section...................................................................................................................................................F-201
20.2.1 Lubrication of the FNS entrance roller conveyance switching cam, the FNS entrance roller conveyance switching gate/
Up..........................................................................................................................................................................................F-201
20.3 Stacker section....................................................................................................................................................................F-201
20.3.1 Replacing the paddle.................................................................................................................................................F-201
20.3.2 Lubrication of the stapler shaft and the rear stopper shaft........................................................................................F-202
20.4 Stapler section.....................................................................................................................................................................F-203
20.5.1 Cleaning and lubrication of the paper exit alignment plate shaft...............................................................................F-205
21. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE SD-510........................................................................................F-207
21.2 Alignment section................................................................................................................................................................F-207
21.2.1 Replacing the paddle/1, the paddle/2, and the paddle/3...........................................................................................F-207
21.3 Stapler section.....................................................................................................................................................................F-208
21.3.2 Cleaning and lubrication of the staple guide/Up and the staple guide/Lw.................................................................F-211
21.4 Half-fold/folding&staple/tri-folding section............................................................................................................................F-212
21.4.1 Cleaning the folding roller/1, the folding roller/2........................................................................................................F-212
22. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE LS-505/LS-506............................................................................F-213
22.2.1 Replacing the stacker tray up down motor (M1)........................................................................................................F-213
22.2.2 Replacing the paper press solenoid/3 (SD8).............................................................................................................F-213
22.2.5 Replacing the rear stopper solenoid (SD3)...............................................................................................................F-217
23. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE FD-503 ........................................................................................F-220
23.2.1 Replacing roller solenoids/1 (SD5) to /4 (SD8)..........................................................................................................F-220
23.3 Punch section .....................................................................................................................................................................F-220
23.3.1 Replacing the punch unit...........................................................................................................................................F-220
23.3.2 Cleaning the punch shaft and the punch support board............................................................................................F-221
23.3.3 Lubricating the punch drive section...........................................................................................................................F-221
23.4 Folding conveyance section................................................................................................................................................F-222
23.4.1 2nd folding roller solenoid (SD18).............................................................................................................................F-222
23.5 Main tray section .................................................................................................................................................................F-224
23.5.1 Replacing the tray up down motor (M11)..................................................................................................................F-224
23.6 PI section ............................................................................................................................................................................F-224
23.6.1 Replacing the pick-up rubber (Upper stage)..............................................................................................................F-224
23.6.2 Replacing the paper feed rubber (Upper stage)........................................................................................................F-227
23.6.3 Replacing the separation rubber (upper stage).........................................................................................................F-228
23.6.4 Replacing the pick-up rubber (Lower stage)..............................................................................................................F-229
23.6.5 Replacing the paper feed rubber (lower stage).........................................................................................................F-230
23.6.6 Replacing the separation rubber (lower stage)..........................................................................................................F-230
24. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE SD-506 .......................................................................................F-232
24.2 Right angle conveyance section .........................................................................................................................................F-232
24.2.1 Replacing the roller release solenoid/1 (SD5)...........................................................................................................F-232
24.2.3 Replacing the right angle conveyance gate solenoid (SD2)......................................................................................F-233
24.3 Saddle stitching section ......................................................................................................................................................F-238
24.3.1 Replacing the stapler assy........................................................................................................................................F-238
24.3.2 Replacing the slope unit............................................................................................................................................F-241
24.3.3 Pulling out the saddle stitching unit ..........................................................................................................................F-243
24.3.4 Replacing the saddle stitching unit............................................................................................................................F-245
24.4 Bundle processing section ..................................................................................................................................................F-245
24.4.1 Replacing the bundle press stage gear.....................................................................................................................F-245
xiii
24.4.2 Replacing the bundle press stage unit......................................................................................................................F-247
24.5 Trimmer section ..................................................................................................................................................................F-252
24.5.1 Removing/installing the trimmer paddle assy ...........................................................................................................F-252
24.5.2 Replacing the trimmer board assy.............................................................................................................................F-252
24.5.3 Replacing the trimmer blade kit.................................................................................................................................F-253
24.5.4 Replacing the trimmer press motor (M32).................................................................................................................F-256
24.5.5 Replacing the trimmer blade motor (M31).................................................................................................................F-257
24.5.6 Replacing the trimming unit.......................................................................................................................................F-261
24.5.7 Lubrication to the trimmer unit...................................................................................................................................F-263
25. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE SD-513........................................................................................F-265
25.1 Precautions on maintenance...............................................................................................................................................F-265
25.2 Entrance conveyance section..............................................................................................................................................F-265
25.2.1 Replacing the reverse exit roller pressure release motor (M102)..............................................................................F-265
25.2.2 Cleaning of the paper re-feed roller/Lt.......................................................................................................................F-265
25.2.3 Cleaning of the reverse exit roller/Rt.........................................................................................................................F-265
25.3 Folding conveyance section................................................................................................................................................F-266
25.3.1 Replacing the 1st folding knife motor (M13)..............................................................................................................F-266
25.3.2 Replacing the 2nd folding knife motor (M14).............................................................................................................F-267
25.3.3 Cleaning of the half-folding roller, tri-folding roller.....................................................................................................F-269
25.3.4 Lubrication to the front stopper shaft.........................................................................................................................F-270
25.4 Sub tray, tri-folding tray section...........................................................................................................................................F-270
25.4.1 Cleaning the tri-folding tray conveyance roller/3.......................................................................................................F-270
25.5 Saddle stitching section.......................................................................................................................................................F-271
25.5.1 Replacing the staple unit...........................................................................................................................................F-271
25.5.2 Replacing the clincher...............................................................................................................................................F-271
25.5.3 Replacing the booklet holding motor (M17)...............................................................................................................F-272
25.5.4 Lubrication to the saddle stitching alignment plate/Rr...............................................................................................F-272
25.5.5 Lubrication to the saddle stitching alignment plate shaft/Fr.......................................................................................F-273
25.5.6 Replacing the conveyance guide assy/Up.................................................................................................................F-273
25.5.7 Replacing the alignment plate solenoid wiring..........................................................................................................F-274
25.6 Booklet movement section...................................................................................................................................................F-275
25.6.1 Lubrication to the booklet movement unit slide shaft.................................................................................................F-275
25.6.2 Lubrication to the booklet holding unit slide shaft......................................................................................................F-276
25.6.3 Lubrication to the booklet set unit slide shaft.............................................................................................................F-277
25.7 Clamp section......................................................................................................................................................................F-277
25.7.1 Replacing the fore edge stopper motor (M24)...........................................................................................................F-277
25.7.2 Replacing the fore edge finger motor (M52), the fore-edge finger gear, and the finger torque limiter......................F-278
25.7.3 Replacing the clamp motor (M23).............................................................................................................................F-280
25.7.4 Replacing the booklet holding wire/1, booklet holding wire/2 and booklet holding wire/3.........................................F-281
25.7.5 Replacing the clamp hanging wire.............................................................................................................................F-286
25.8 Trimmer section...................................................................................................................................................................F-291
25.8.1 Replacing the trimmer blade......................................................................................................................................F-291
25.8.2 Replacing the trimmer board.....................................................................................................................................F-294
25.8.3 Replacing the trimming unit.......................................................................................................................................F-296
25.8.4 Replacing the trimmer blade motor (M31).................................................................................................................F-302
25.8.5 Replacing the trimmer press motor (M32).................................................................................................................F-303
25.8.6 Lubrication to the press drive screw, the gear...........................................................................................................F-304
25.9 Booklet tray section.............................................................................................................................................................F-305
25.9.1 Replacing the gripper motor (M26)............................................................................................................................F-305
25.9.2 Lubrication to the gripper paper exit gear/Fr, the gripper paper exit gear/Rr............................................................F-306
25.9.3 Lubrication to the gripper lock plate...........................................................................................................................F-306
25.9.4 Lubrication to the shutter slide shaft and the shutter slide plate................................................................................F-307
26. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE CR-101........................................................................................F-308
26.2 Creaser section....................................................................................................................................................................F-308
26.2.1 Cleaning the crease blade.........................................................................................................................................F-308
27. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE TU-503.........................................................................................F-309
27.2.1 Cleaning the registration roller...................................................................................................................................F-309
27.2.2 Replacing the registration roller.................................................................................................................................F-309
27.3 Slitter section.......................................................................................................................................................................F-310
27.3.1 Lubrication to the slit cutter shaft...............................................................................................................................F-310
27.3.2 Lubrication to the slit cutter drive gear.......................................................................................................................F-310
27.3.3 Replacing the slit cutter assy/Fr, /Rr..........................................................................................................................F-311
27.4 Rotary cutter section............................................................................................................................................................F-315
27.4.1 Replacing the rotary cutter assy................................................................................................................................F-315
27.4.2 Cleaning the slit scraps roller/Lt and slit scraps roller/Rt...........................................................................................F-316
28. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE FD-504.........................................................................................F-318
xiv
28.2 Clamp section......................................................................................................................................................................F-318
28.2.1 Lubrication to SQF clamp..........................................................................................................................................F-318
28.2.2 Replacing the SQF clamp motor/Rr (M202)..............................................................................................................F-318
28.2.3 Replacing the SQF clamp motor/Fr (M203)...............................................................................................................F-319
28.3 Square-fold sction................................................................................................................................................................F-319
28.3.1 Replacing the SQF roller motor (M201).....................................................................................................................F-319
28.3.2 Replacing the SQF roller cleaning assy/Fr, /Rr.........................................................................................................F-320
29. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE PB-503 ........................................................................................F-322
29.1.1 Replacement of the entrance gate solenoid (SD1), the sub tray paper exit solenoid (SD4).....................................F-322
29.2 Sub compile (SC) section ...................................................................................................................................................F-325
29.2.1 Precautions on maintenance ....................................................................................................................................F-325
29.2.2 Replacing the switchback roller.................................................................................................................................F-325
29.2.3 Replacing the SC switchback release motor (M13) and the one-way clutches/A and /B..........................................F-326
29.2.4 Replacing the SC pressure arm solenoid (SD13)......................................................................................................F-329
29.2.5 Replacing the FD alignment solenoid (SD11)...........................................................................................................F-330
29.2.6 Lubrication to the sub scan alignment plate shaft.....................................................................................................F-331
29.3 Clamp section .....................................................................................................................................................................F-332
29.3.1 Lubrication to the clamp pressing board shaft...........................................................................................................F-332
29.4 Glue tank section ................................................................................................................................................................F-333
29.4.1 Replacing the glue apply roller drive gear bearing....................................................................................................F-333
29.4.2 Lubrication to the glue apply roller drive gear............................................................................................................F-335
29.4.3 Replacing the pellet supply cooling fan (FM4)...........................................................................................................F-336
29.4.4 Replacing the glue tank assy.....................................................................................................................................F-336
29.5 Cover paper supply section ................................................................................................................................................F-339
29.5.1 Removing/reinstalling the pick-up roller assy and the separation roller assy ...........................................................F-339
29.5.2 Replacing the pick-up roller and the paper feed roller...............................................................................................F-342
29.5.3 Replacing the separation roller..................................................................................................................................F-343
29.5.4 Replacing the cover paper pick-up clutch (CL71) and the cover paper separation clutch (CL72)............................F-344
29.6 Cover paper table section ...................................................................................................................................................F-345
29.6.1 Precautions on maintenance ....................................................................................................................................F-345
29.6.2 Replacing the roller cutter blade assy.......................................................................................................................F-345
29.6.3 Cleaning the cover paper folding plate and the book spine backing plate................................................................F-346
29.6.4 Lubrication to the cover paper alignment plate shaft.................................................................................................F-347
29.7 Book stock section ..............................................................................................................................................................F-348
29.7.1 Lubrication to the guide shafts/Rt and /Lt..................................................................................................................F-348
29.8 Framework section .............................................................................................................................................................F-349
29.8.1 Replacing the exhaust filters/A and /B.......................................................................................................................F-349
30. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE GP-501........................................................................................F-351
30.1 Caution for maintenance procedure....................................................................................................................................F-351
30.2 DIE SET SERVICE..............................................................................................................................................................F-351
30.2.1 Die Set Service..........................................................................................................................................................F-351
30.2.2 Die Set Life Expectancy............................................................................................................................................F-351
30.2.3 Die Set Components.................................................................................................................................................F-351
30.2.4 Checking and Replacing the Die Set.........................................................................................................................F-353
30.2.5 Checking and lubricating the Die Set pins and Die Set shoulder bolts......................................................................F-353
30.2.6 Hole Alignment inspection.........................................................................................................................................F-354
30.3 CHECK, CLEANING, AND LUBRICATION.........................................................................................................................F-354
30.3.1 CHECK, CLEANING, AND LUBRICATION...............................................................................................................F-354
30.3.2 External Cleaning......................................................................................................................................................F-355
30.3.3 Internal Cleaning.......................................................................................................................................................F-355
30.3.4 Operational Inspection...............................................................................................................................................F-355
30.3.5 Internal Inspection.....................................................................................................................................................F-355
30.3.6 Cleaning the base......................................................................................................................................................F-355
30.3.7 Cleaning the Die guide..............................................................................................................................................F-356
30.3.8 Checking the Door Latch...........................................................................................................................................F-356
30.3.9 Cleaning and Checking the aligner paper path and panels.......................................................................................F-357
30.3.10 Cleaning and Checking the Aligner Idler Roller.......................................................................................................F-357
30.3.11 Cleaning the Aligner (Green) Drive Belt..................................................................................................................F-358
30.3.12 Cleaning and Checking the Back Gauge Solenoid..................................................................................................F-358
30.3.13 Cleaning and Checking the Idler Rollers.................................................................................................................F-359
30.3.14 Cleaning and Checking the punch idler rollers........................................................................................................F-361
30.3.15 Cleaning and Checking the Drive Rollers................................................................................................................F-363
30.3.16 Checking the Aligner Latch......................................................................................................................................F-363
30.3.17 Cleaning the Optical Sensors..................................................................................................................................F-364
30.3.18 Cleaning and Checking the Bypass Paper Path......................................................................................................F-365
30.3.19 Cleaning and Checking the Punch Paper Path.......................................................................................................F-365
30.3.20 Cleaning and Checking the Timing Belt..................................................................................................................F-366
30.3.21 Bypass panel...........................................................................................................................................................F-366
xv
30.3.22 Bypass panel Removal............................................................................................................................................F-367
30.3.23 Aligner panels..........................................................................................................................................................F-368
30.3.24 Aligner Panel Removal............................................................................................................................................F-368
30.3.25 Aligner Idler Roller Replacement.............................................................................................................................F-369
30.3.26 Aligner Drive Belt Replacement...............................................................................................................................F-370
30.3.27 Cleaning and checking the energy drive roller........................................................................................................F-375
30.3.28 Replacing the back gauge mechanism....................................................................................................................F-375
30.3.29 Back Gauge Removal..............................................................................................................................................F-376
30.3.30 Solenoid Spring Replacement.................................................................................................................................F-378
30.3.31 Back Gauge Paddle.................................................................................................................................................F-378
30.3.32 Back Gauge Assembly Adjustment.........................................................................................................................F-379
30.3.33 Punch module..........................................................................................................................................................F-379
30.3.34 Punch Module Removal..........................................................................................................................................F-380
30.3.35 Lubricating to the Punch Drive Cams......................................................................................................................F-382
30.3.36 Punch Clutch Replacement.....................................................................................................................................F-382
30.3.37 Punch Module Brake Replacement and Adjustment...............................................................................................F-384
30.3.38 Punch Module Brake Replacement.........................................................................................................................F-385
30.3.39 Punch Module Brake Adjustment............................................................................................................................F-385
30.3.40 Punch Module Motor Replacement.........................................................................................................................F-385
30.3.41 Punch Module Motor Drive Belt Replacement.........................................................................................................F-386
30.3.42 Punch Module Drive Roller Replacement................................................................................................................F-386
30.3.43 Belt replacement......................................................................................................................................................F-388
30.3.44 Tools........................................................................................................................................................................F-388
31. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE GP-502........................................................................................F-390
G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING............................................................................................G-1
1. ITEMS THAT YOU MUST NOT DISASSEMBLE........................................................................................................G-1
1.1 List of Items that you must not disassemble.............................................................................................................................G-1
1.2 Items that you must not disassemble........................................................................................................................................G-1
1.2.1 Screw-lock applied screw...............................................................................................................................................G-1
1.2.2 Prohibition of adjusting the volume of boards.................................................................................................................G-1
1.2.3 CCD unit.........................................................................................................................................................................G-1
1.2.4 Mirror unit and exposure unit..........................................................................................................................................G-2
1.2.5 Writing unit cover............................................................................................................................................................G-2
1.2.6 Photo conductor section.................................................................................................................................................G-2
1.2.7 Intermediate transfer section..........................................................................................................................................G-3
1.2.8 Registration section........................................................................................................................................................G-4
1.2.9 Fusing section.................................................................................................................................................................G-4
2. WARNING AND PRECAUTION ON DISASSEMBLING.............................................................................................G-6
2.1 Precaution on removing the boards..........................................................................................................................................G-6
3. bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L.....................................................................................G-7
3.1 List of disassembling and assembling parts..............................................................................................................................G-7
3.2 Disassembling and assembling procedures..............................................................................................................................G-8
3.2.1 Precautions on disassembling and assembling..............................................................................................................G-8
3.2.2 Duct cover.......................................................................................................................................................................G-8
3.2.3 Rear cover......................................................................................................................................................................G-8
3.2.4 Left cover........................................................................................................................................................................G-8
3.2.5 Right cover/Up1, right cover/Up2, right cover/Up3, right cover/Up4, right cover/Lw1, right cover/Lw2..........................G-9
3.2.6 Top cover/Fr, top cover/Rt, top cover/Rr1, top cover/Rr2, top cover/Lt, arm cover/Fr, arm cover/Rr...........................G-10
3.2.7 Main board unit.............................................................................................................................................................G-12
3.2.8 Overall control board (OACB).......................................................................................................................................G-15
3.2.9 SSD (SSD)....................................................................................................................................................................G-16
3.2.10 Original glass assy......................................................................................................................................................G-17
3.2.11 WT-511 (Option).........................................................................................................................................................G-17
3.2.12 CCD unit.....................................................................................................................................................................G-18
3.2.13 Exposure unit, Exposure lamp....................................................................................................................................G-19
3.2.14 Scanner unit................................................................................................................................................................G-20
3.2.15 Removing the scanner wire........................................................................................................................................G-21
3.2.16 Reinstalling the scanner wire......................................................................................................................................G-23
3.2.17 Writing unit..................................................................................................................................................................G-27
3.2.18 Process unit................................................................................................................................................................G-30
3.2.19 Image correction unit..................................................................................................................................................G-31
3.2.20 Toner bottle motor, toner bottle clutch, remaining toner sensor, toner supply motor..................................................G-32
3.2.21 Duplex section............................................................................................................................................................G-34
3.2.22 Paper feed tray...........................................................................................................................................................G-37
3.2.23 Tray up down wire/1, tray up down wire/2 (Tray1)......................................................................................................G-37
3.2.24 Tray up down wire/3, tray up down wire/4 (Tray2)......................................................................................................G-39
3.2.25 Tray up down wire/5 (Tray2).......................................................................................................................................G-42
3.2.26 Fusing paper exit plate assy.......................................................................................................................................G-44
3.2.27 Temperature sensor/1 (TH1), temperature sensor/2 (TH2), thermostat/1 (TS1), thermostat/2 (TS2)........................G-45
xvi
3.2.28 Thermostat/3 (TS3).....................................................................................................................................................G-46
3.2.29 Temperature sensor/5 (TH5)......................................................................................................................................G-48
3.2.30 HDD1, HDD2, HDD3...................................................................................................................................................G-49
3.2.31 Hard disk/4 (HDD4).....................................................................................................................................................G-50
4. DF-626......................................................................................................................................................................G-52
4.1 List of disassembling and assembling parts............................................................................................................................G-52
4.2 Disassembling and assembling procedures............................................................................................................................G-52
4.2.1 Precautions on disassembling and assembling ...........................................................................................................G-52
4.2.2 DF.................................................................................................................................................................................G-52
4.2.3 The paper feed cover....................................................................................................................................................G-53
4.2.4 Front cover....................................................................................................................................................................G-54
4.2.5 Rear cover....................................................................................................................................................................G-55
4.2.6 Original feed tray front cover.........................................................................................................................................G-55
4.2.7 Paper feed motor (M8)..................................................................................................................................................G-56
4.2.8 Registration motor (M2)................................................................................................................................................G-56
4.2.9 Reading motor (M1)......................................................................................................................................................G-57
4.2.10 Reading roller pressure release motor (M4)...............................................................................................................G-57
4.2.11 Glass cleaning motor (M9)..........................................................................................................................................G-58
4.2.12 Glass cleaning roller unit.............................................................................................................................................G-58
4.2.13 Reverse path switching solenoid (SD1)......................................................................................................................G-60
4.2.14 Reverse exit path switching solenoid (SD2)...............................................................................................................G-60
4.2.15 Exit motor (M3)...........................................................................................................................................................G-61
4.2.16 DF control board (DFCB)............................................................................................................................................G-61
4.2.17 Restriction plate positional VR (VR1)..........................................................................................................................G-62
4.2.18 Cooling fan (FM1).......................................................................................................................................................G-63
5. PF-602m...................................................................................................................................................................G-64
5.2.2 Right cover ...................................................................................................................................................................G-64
5.2.3 Rear cover/Lt2..............................................................................................................................................................G-65
5.2.4 The rear cover/Lt1 and /Rt ...........................................................................................................................................G-65
5.2.5 Front door ....................................................................................................................................................................G-66
5.2.6 Tray ..............................................................................................................................................................................G-66
5.2.7 Lift wire .........................................................................................................................................................................G-68
5.2.8 Paper lift motor/1 (M2) and /2 (M3) ..............................................................................................................................G-73
5.2.9 Vertical conveyance unit...............................................................................................................................................G-74
5.2.10 Horizontal conveyance unit.........................................................................................................................................G-75
5.2.11 The multi feed detection board (MFDBR and MFDBS)...............................................................................................G-76
6. PF-707......................................................................................................................................................................G-79
6.1 Items you must not disassemble or reassemble.....................................................................................................................G-79
6.1.1 Framework panel/1, framework panel/2........................................................................................................................G-79
6.3.2 Right cover....................................................................................................................................................................G-80
6.3.3 Rear cover/Lt4..............................................................................................................................................................G-80
6.3.4 Rear cover/Lt2, rear cover/Lt3......................................................................................................................................G-80
6.3.5 Rear cover/Lt1..............................................................................................................................................................G-81
6.3.6 Rear cover/Rt................................................................................................................................................................G-81
6.3.7 Front door ....................................................................................................................................................................G-81
6.3.8 Tray front cover ............................................................................................................................................................G-82
6.3.9 Tray ..............................................................................................................................................................................G-82
6.3.10 Lift wire........................................................................................................................................................................G-84
6.3.11 Paper leading edge separation fan /Fr1 (FM9), /Fr2 (FM13), /Fr3 (FM17), /Rr1 (FM4), /Rr2 (FM8), /Rr3 (FM12).....G-85
6.3.12 Paper leading edge shutter solenoid /1 (SD10), /2 (SD14), /3 (SD18) ......................................................................G-87
6.3.13 Paper lift motor /1 (M7), /2 (M8), /3 (M9) ...................................................................................................................G-89
6.3.14 Paper feed suction unit ..............................................................................................................................................G-92
6.3.15 Paper feed belt............................................................................................................................................................G-93
6.3.16 Paper suction fan/1 (FM1), /2 (FM2), /3 (FM3), /4 (FM4), /5 (FM5), /6 (FM6)............................................................G-95
6.3.17 Paper feed assist fan/Fr1 (FM11), /Fr2 (FM15), /Fr3 (FM19), /Rr1 (FM12), /Rr2 (FM16), /Rr3 (FM20).....................G-96
6.3.18 Shutter solenoid/Fr1 (SD5), /Fr2 (SD10), /Fr3 (SD15), /Rr1 (SD6), /Rr2 (SD11), /Rr3 (SD16)................................G-100
6.3.19 Paper feed check window.........................................................................................................................................G-102
6.3.20 Vertical conveyance unit ..........................................................................................................................................G-103
6.3.21 Horizontal conveyance unit.......................................................................................................................................G-104
6.3.22 Multi feed detection board (MFDBR, MFDBS)..........................................................................................................G-105
7. LU-202 ...................................................................................................................................................................G-108
7.1 List of disassembling and assembling parts .........................................................................................................................G-108
7.2 Disassembling and assembling procedures .........................................................................................................................G-108
xvii
7.2.1 Precautions on disassembling and assembling .........................................................................................................G-108
7.2.2 Upper door .................................................................................................................................................................G-108
7.2.3 The clutch cover .........................................................................................................................................................G-108
7.2.4 The paper feed cover .................................................................................................................................................G-109
7.2.5 Right cover .................................................................................................................................................................G-109
7.2.6 Front cover .................................................................................................................................................................G-109
7.2.7 Rear cover .................................................................................................................................................................G-110
7.2.8 Replacing the lift wire..................................................................................................................................................G-110
7.2.9 Paper size VR (VR1) ..................................................................................................................................................G-118
8. MB-506...................................................................................................................................................................G-119
8.1 List of disassembling and assembling parts..........................................................................................................................G-119
8.2 Disassembling and assembling procedures..........................................................................................................................G-119
8.2.1 Precautions on disassembling and assembling .........................................................................................................G-119
8.2.2 Paper size VR/BP (VR3).............................................................................................................................................G-119
9. OT-502....................................................................................................................................................................G-121
9.1 List of disassembling and assembling parts..........................................................................................................................G-121
9.2 Disassembling and assembling procedures..........................................................................................................................G-121
9.2.1 OT-502........................................................................................................................................................................G-121
10. EF-103..................................................................................................................................................................G-122
10.1 List of disassembling and assembling parts........................................................................................................................G-122
11. RU-516..................................................................................................................................................................G-123
11.2 Disassembling and assembling procedures........................................................................................................................G-123
11.2.1 Charging control framework unit...............................................................................................................................G-123
12. RU-517..................................................................................................................................................................G-126
12.2.1 Left cover/Up, /Lw.....................................................................................................................................................G-126
12.2.2 Rear cover................................................................................................................................................................G-126
12.2.3 Conveyance door......................................................................................................................................................G-126
12.2.4 Charging control framework unit...............................................................................................................................G-129
13. MK-740.................................................................................................................................................................G-132
13.2.1 Paper feed tray.........................................................................................................................................................G-132
14. RU-509/HM-102 ...................................................................................................................................................G-133
14.1 Items you must not disassemble or reassemble.................................................................................................................G-133
14.1.1 Color density sensor unit .........................................................................................................................................G-133
14.2 List of disassembling and assembling parts .......................................................................................................................G-133
14.3 Disassembling and assembling procedures .......................................................................................................................G-133
14.3.1 Precautions on disassembling and assembling .......................................................................................................G-133
14.3.2 Front door ................................................................................................................................................................G-134
14.3.3 Rear cover ...............................................................................................................................................................G-134
14.3.4 Upper cover .............................................................................................................................................................G-135
14.3.5 Humidification unit ....................................................................................................................................................G-135
14.3.6 Water feed tank ........................................................................................................................................................G-138
14.3.7 Pump motor (P1) ......................................................................................................................................................G-139
14.3.8 Color density sensor unit .........................................................................................................................................G-139
14.3.9 Shutter .....................................................................................................................................................................G-140
14.3.10 Note for replacing the board ..................................................................................................................................G-140
15. RU-510..................................................................................................................................................................G-142
15.2.2 Front door.................................................................................................................................................................G-142
15.2.3 Rear cover................................................................................................................................................................G-143
15.2.4 Left cover..................................................................................................................................................................G-143
15.2.5 Upper cover..............................................................................................................................................................G-144
15.2.6 Note for replacing the board.....................................................................................................................................G-144
16. FS-531 .................................................................................................................................................................G-146
16.2.2 Upper cover/1...........................................................................................................................................................G-146
16.2.3 Upper cover/2...........................................................................................................................................................G-146
16.2.4 Front door ................................................................................................................................................................G-147
16.2.5 Rear cover ...............................................................................................................................................................G-147
16.2.6 Left cover .................................................................................................................................................................G-147
xviii
16.2.7 Main tray ..................................................................................................................................................................G-147
16.2.8 Replacing the up down wire......................................................................................................................................G-148
16.2.9 Stacker unit ..............................................................................................................................................................G-151
16.2.10 Paper exit opening unit ..........................................................................................................................................G-153
17. FS-612 .................................................................................................................................................................G-155
17.1 Items that you must not disassemble or reassemble..........................................................................................................G-155
17.1.1 Screw not allowed to be removed on the folding stopper ........................................................................................G-155
17.3.2 Upper cover/1...........................................................................................................................................................G-156
17.3.3 Upper cover/2...........................................................................................................................................................G-156
17.3.4 Front door ................................................................................................................................................................G-156
17.3.5 Rear cover ...............................................................................................................................................................G-157
17.3.6 Left cover .................................................................................................................................................................G-157
17.3.7 Main tray ..................................................................................................................................................................G-157
17.3.8 Replacing the up down wire......................................................................................................................................G-158
17.3.9 Stacker unit cover ....................................................................................................................................................G-161
17.3.10 Stacker unit ............................................................................................................................................................G-161
17.3.11 Paper exit opening unit ..........................................................................................................................................G-163
18. PK-512/513...........................................................................................................................................................G-165
18.1 Items that you must not disassemble and adjust................................................................................................................G-165
18.1.1 Punch unit.................................................................................................................................................................G-165
18.2 Disassembly/reassembly parts list......................................................................................................................................G-165
18.3 Disassembly/reassembly procedure...................................................................................................................................G-165
18.3.2 Punch unit.................................................................................................................................................................G-165
19. PI-502 ..................................................................................................................................................................G-168
19.2.2 Upper cover .............................................................................................................................................................G-168
19.2.3 Rear cover ...............................................................................................................................................................G-168
19.2.4 Operation panel cover ..............................................................................................................................................G-168
19.2.5 PI unit........................................................................................................................................................................G-169
20. FS-532..................................................................................................................................................................G-170
20.1.1 Red-painted screws..................................................................................................................................................G-170
20.3.2 Front door.................................................................................................................................................................G-171
20.3.3 Rear cover................................................................................................................................................................G-171
20.3.4 Upper cover/Rt1........................................................................................................................................................G-172
20.3.5 Upper cover/Rt2........................................................................................................................................................G-172
20.3.6 Upper cover/Fr1........................................................................................................................................................G-173
20.3.7 Upper cover/Fr2........................................................................................................................................................G-173
20.3.8 Upper cover/Rr..........................................................................................................................................................G-174
20.3.9 Upper cover/Md........................................................................................................................................................G-174
20.3.10 Front cover..............................................................................................................................................................G-174
20.3.11 Sub tray...................................................................................................................................................................G-175
20.3.12 Stacker unit.............................................................................................................................................................G-175
20.3.13 Main tray.................................................................................................................................................................G-177
20.3.14 Main tray up down motor (M11), main tray up-down drive assy.............................................................................G-177
20.3.15 Note for replacing the board...................................................................................................................................G-179
21. SD-510..................................................................................................................................................................G-181
21.3.2 Front cover................................................................................................................................................................G-185
21.3.3 Stapler unit cover......................................................................................................................................................G-185
21.3.4 SD unit......................................................................................................................................................................G-186
21.3.5 Folding knife assy/1..................................................................................................................................................G-189
21.3.6 Folding knife assy/2..................................................................................................................................................G-191
22. PK-522..................................................................................................................................................................G-195
xix
22.3.2 Punch unit.................................................................................................................................................................G-195
23. LS-505/LS-506......................................................................................................................................................G-197
23.2.2 Cover .......................................................................................................................................................................G-197
23.2.3 Replacing the stacker tray up/down wire .................................................................................................................G-199
23.2.4 Caution when setting models using toggle SW (LS-505)..........................................................................................G-203
24. FD-503 .................................................................................................................................................................G-204
24.1.1 Folding/conveyance switching position adjustment section .....................................................................................G-204
24.3.2 Upper cover/Fr + PI cover/Fr....................................................................................................................................G-205
24.3.3 Upper cover/Rr + PI cover/Rr....................................................................................................................................G-205
24.3.4 Upper door ...............................................................................................................................................................G-206
24.3.5 Rear cover ...............................................................................................................................................................G-206
24.3.6 Left cover/Fr..............................................................................................................................................................G-206
24.3.7 Left cover/Rr.............................................................................................................................................................G-207
24.3.8 Paper exit stopper cover ..........................................................................................................................................G-207
24.3.9 Right cover ...............................................................................................................................................................G-207
24.3.10 Left cover/Up...........................................................................................................................................................G-208
24.3.11 Mount cover............................................................................................................................................................G-208
24.3.12 Front door ..............................................................................................................................................................G-208
24.3.13 Cleaning the 2nd folding conveyance sensor (PS53) ............................................................................................G-209
24.3.14 Cleaning the 3rd folding conveyance sensor (PS54) .............................................................................................G-210
24.3.15 Cleaning the 3rd folding roller ................................................................................................................................G-210
24.3.16 Folding conveyance section ...................................................................................................................................G-211
24.3.17 Main tray up/down wire ..........................................................................................................................................G-214
24.3.18 Way to distinguish between new and old types of the multi feed detection board /1 (MFDB/1) and /2 (MFDB/2)..G-219
24.3.19 Multi feed detection board /1 (MFDB/1) and /2 (MFDB/2) (new type).....................................................................G-220
24.3.20 Multi feed detection board /1 (MFDB/1) and /2 (MFDB/2) (old type)......................................................................G-222
25. SD-506 .................................................................................................................................................................G-225
25.1 Items not allowed to be disassembled/reassembled ..........................................................................................................G-225
25.1.1 Trimmer blade home sensor (PS50), Trimmer blade upper limit sensor (PS51) .....................................................G-225
25.1.2 Trimmer completion sensor (PS62) .........................................................................................................................G-225
25.1.3 Wire slack prevention sensor (PS66) .......................................................................................................................G-225
25.1.4 Trimmer press upper limit sensor (PS52), Trimmer press home sensor (PS53) .....................................................G-226
25.1.5 Trimmer press brake ................................................................................................................................................G-227
25.1.6 Fixing screw of the trimmer press timing belt ...........................................................................................................G-227
25.3.2 Rear cover/Lt............................................................................................................................................................G-228
25.3.3 Rear cover/Rt............................................................................................................................................................G-228
25.3.4 Left cover .................................................................................................................................................................G-229
25.3.5 Upper cover/Fr..........................................................................................................................................................G-229
25.3.6 Upper cover/Rr3........................................................................................................................................................G-230
25.3.7 Sub tray cover ..........................................................................................................................................................G-230
25.3.8 Front door/Lt.............................................................................................................................................................G-231
25.3.9 Front door/Rt.............................................................................................................................................................G-231
25.3.10 Folding unit ............................................................................................................................................................G-232
26. SD-513..................................................................................................................................................................G-235
26.3.1 Precautions on disassembling and assembling........................................................................................................G-235
26.3.2 Rear cover/Rt, /Lt......................................................................................................................................................G-235
26.3.3 Right cover/1, /2, /3...................................................................................................................................................G-236
26.3.4 Front cover/1, /2, /3...................................................................................................................................................G-237
xx
26.3.5 Left cover/Fr1, left cover/Fr2, left cover/Fr3..............................................................................................................G-238
26.3.6 Left cover/Rr.............................................................................................................................................................G-239
26.3.7 Upper cover/RrRt1, /RrRt2, /RrRt3, /RrRt4, /RrRt5, /RrRt6......................................................................................G-239
26.3.8 Upper cover/FrRt1, /FrRt2, /FrRt3............................................................................................................................G-241
26.3.9 Upper cover/FrLt1, /FrLt2..........................................................................................................................................G-242
26.3.10 Upper cover/RrLt1, /RrLt2, /RrLt3, sub tray cover..................................................................................................G-243
26.3.11 Opening and closing of the front console................................................................................................................G-244
26.3.12 Front console..........................................................................................................................................................G-245
26.3.13 Gripper paper exit unit............................................................................................................................................G-247
26.3.14 Open and close of the booklet tray section door.....................................................................................................G-249
26.3.15 Moving up and down of the booklet holding............................................................................................................G-250
26.3.16 Note for replacing the board...................................................................................................................................G-250
27. CR-101..................................................................................................................................................................G-252
27.1 Items not allowed to be disassembled/reassembled...........................................................................................................G-252
27.1.1 Creaser unit..............................................................................................................................................................G-252
27.3.2 Creaser unit..............................................................................................................................................................G-255
28. TU-503..................................................................................................................................................................G-256
28.1 Items not allowed to be disassembled/reassembled...........................................................................................................G-256
28.1.1 Slitter unit..................................................................................................................................................................G-256
28.3.2 Slitter unit..................................................................................................................................................................G-260
29. FD-504..................................................................................................................................................................G-262
29.3.2 Square-fold unit.........................................................................................................................................................G-262
29.3.3 Note for disassembling the FD-504 (1).....................................................................................................................G-263
29.3.4 Note for disassembling the FD-504 (2).....................................................................................................................G-265
30. PB-503 .................................................................................................................................................................G-266
30.2.2 Front door ................................................................................................................................................................G-267
30.2.3 Front cover ...............................................................................................................................................................G-268
30.2.4 Booklet door .............................................................................................................................................................G-269
30.2.5 Rear cover/Rt............................................................................................................................................................G-269
30.2.6 Rear cover/Lt............................................................................................................................................................G-270
30.2.7 Left cover .................................................................................................................................................................G-270
30.2.8 Relay conveyance gear cover/Fr..............................................................................................................................G-271
30.2.9 Relay conveyance gear cover/Rr..............................................................................................................................G-271
30.2.10 Pellet supply cover .................................................................................................................................................G-271
30.2.11 SC cover/Fr.............................................................................................................................................................G-272
30.2.12 SC cover/Up............................................................................................................................................................G-273
30.2.13 Upper cover/FrRt....................................................................................................................................................G-274
30.2.14 Upper cover/FrLt.....................................................................................................................................................G-274
30.2.15 Upper cover/RrRt....................................................................................................................................................G-274
30.2.16 Upper cover/RrLt.....................................................................................................................................................G-275
30.2.17 Upper cover/Md......................................................................................................................................................G-275
30.2.18 Deodorant unit .......................................................................................................................................................G-275
30.2.19 Pellet supply unit ....................................................................................................................................................G-277
30.2.20 Glue tank unit .........................................................................................................................................................G-278
30.2.21 SC unit ...................................................................................................................................................................G-280
30.2.22 Clamp unit ..............................................................................................................................................................G-282
30.2.23 PB left unit ..............................................................................................................................................................G-283
30.2.24 Book lift wire ...........................................................................................................................................................G-286
30.2.25 Cart wire .................................................................................................................................................................G-289
30.2.26 Conveyance unit/Lw................................................................................................................................................G-290
30.2.27 Relay conveyance unit ...........................................................................................................................................G-291
30.2.28 Cover paper tray ....................................................................................................................................................G-292
30.2.29 Cover paper lift wire ...............................................................................................................................................G-294
30.2.30 Binding mode procedure with manual operating function ......................................................................................G-297
30.2.31 Multi feed detection boards/S (MFDBS) and /R (MFDBR)......................................................................................G-298
xxi
31. GP-501..................................................................................................................................................................G-301
31.1 Centering punched holes....................................................................................................................................................G-301
31.2 Door latch............................................................................................................................................................................G-303
31.2.1 Door latch check.......................................................................................................................................................G-303
31.2.2 Door Latch Adjustment.............................................................................................................................................G-303
31.2.3 Door Latch and Switch Replacement........................................................................................................................G-303
31.3 Preparing the GP-501 punch for service.............................................................................................................................G-304
31.3.1 Preparing the GP-501 punch for service...................................................................................................................G-304
31.3.2 Separating the Punch From the Printer....................................................................................................................G-304
31.3.3 Removing the Rear Cover........................................................................................................................................G-304
31.4 Leveling and aligning to the printer.....................................................................................................................................G-304
(1) Procedure.......................................................................................................................................................................G-305
(2) Tool Required.................................................................................................................................................................G-305
(3) To level the punch:.........................................................................................................................................................G-305
32. GP-502..................................................................................................................................................................G-306
33. COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE PARTS................................................................................................................G-307
33.1 Reinstalling the status indicator light...................................................................................................................................G-307
33.1.1 Configuration.............................................................................................................................................................G-307
33.1.2 Connector.................................................................................................................................................................G-307
33.1.3 Procedure.................................................................................................................................................................G-308
33.2 Key counter (KCT)..............................................................................................................................................................G-309
33.2.1 Connector.................................................................................................................................................................G-309
33.2.2 Procedure.................................................................................................................................................................G-309
H CLEANING/LUBRICATION...........................................................................................................H-1
1. CLEANING/LUBRICATION PROCEDURES .............................................................................................................H-1
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING.................................................................................................................I-1
1. CHECKPOINTS............................................................................................................................................................I-1
1.1 Checking before you start work..................................................................................................................................................I-1
1.2 Checkpoints when you conduct the on-site service....................................................................................................................I-1
2. UTILITY........................................................................................................................................................................I-2
2.1 List of utility menus.....................................................................................................................................................................I-2
2.1.1 Hierarchy..........................................................................................................................................................................I-2
2.2 Start and exit...............................................................................................................................................................................I-5
2.2.1 Start method ....................................................................................................................................................................I-5
2.2.2 Exit method ......................................................................................................................................................................I-5
3. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS...................................................................................................................................I-6
3.1 Priority for Adjustment/Setting after replacing parts....................................................................................................................I-6
4. SERVICE MODE........................................................................................................................................................I-10
4.1 Service Mode List.....................................................................................................................................................................I-10
4.1.1 Hierarchy........................................................................................................................................................................I-10
4.2 Start and exit.............................................................................................................................................................................I-14
4.2.1 Start method ..................................................................................................................................................................I-14
4.2.2 Exit method ....................................................................................................................................................................I-14
4.3 Machine Adjustment.................................................................................................................................................................I-14
4.3.1 Restart Timing Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)............................................................................................................I-14
4.3.2 Centering auto adjustment (printer adjustment - centering adjustment).........................................................................I-15
4.3.3 Centering sensor gap adjustment (printer adjustment - centering adjustment)..............................................................I-16
4.3.4 Centering adjustment (printer adjustment - centering adjustment).................................................................................I-16
4.3.5 FD-Mag. Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)......................................................................................................................I-17
4.3.6 CD-Mag. Adjustment (Printer Adjustment).....................................................................................................................I-18
4.3.7 Lead Edge Erase Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)........................................................................................................I-18
4.3.8 Registration Loop Adj. (Printer Adjustment)...................................................................................................................I-19
4.3.9 Pre-registration Adj. (Printer Adjustment).......................................................................................................................I-19
4.3.10 Belt Line Speed Adj. (Printer Adjustment)....................................................................................................................I-20
4.3.11 Skew Initial Position Memory (Printer Adjustment - Writing Initial Pos. Memory).........................................................I-21
4.3.12 Color Registration Auto.Adj. (Printer Adjustment)........................................................................................................I-21
4.3.13 Color Regist.Gap Measurement (Printer Adjustment)..................................................................................................I-21
4.3.14 Adjustment when you replace the multi feed detection board (PF)..............................................................................I-23
4.3.15 Crosswise Dir. Skew Adj. (Printer Adjustment).............................................................................................................I-25
4.3.16 Beam Pitch Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)...............................................................................................................I-26
4.3.17 Color Registration Manual Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)........................................................................................I-27
4.3.18 Recall Standard Data (Printer Adjustment)...................................................................................................................I-28
4.3.19 Restart Timing Adjustment (Scan Adjustment).............................................................................................................I-28
4.3.20 Centering Adjustment (Scan Adjustment).....................................................................................................................I-29
4.3.21 FD-Mag. Adjustment (Scan Adjustment)......................................................................................................................I-30
4.3.22 Scan Gradation/Color Adj. (Scan Adjustment).............................................................................................................I-30
4.3.23 CD-Mag. adjustment (scan adjustment).......................................................................................................................I-31
xxii
4.3.24 Sensor check (scan adjustment)..................................................................................................................................I-31
4.3.25 CCD check (scan adjustment)......................................................................................................................................I-32
4.3.26 Line magnification setting (scan adjustment)................................................................................................................I-32
4.3.27 Recall Standard Data (Scan Adjustment).....................................................................................................................I-33
4.3.28 Printer gamma offset adjustment (quality adjustment - printer gamma adjustment)....................................................I-33
4.3.29 Printer Gamma Offset Auto. (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment).........................................................I-34
4.3.30 Printer Gamma Sensor Adj. (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment)..........................................................I-35
4.3.31 Printer gamma curve adjustment (quality adjustment - printer gamma adjustment)....................................................I-37
4.3.32 Printer Gamma Offset Auto. (RU) (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment).................................................I-37
4.3.33 Printer Gamma Sensor Adj. (RU) (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment).................................................I-38
4.3.34 Sharpness Adjustment (Quality Adjustment)................................................................................................................I-38
4.3.35 Contrast Adjustment (Quality Adjustment)....................................................................................................................I-39
4.3.36 Dot Detect Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Image Distinction Level)........................................................................I-39
4.3.37 Color Text Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Image Distinction Level)........................................................................I-40
4.3.38 Dot/Text Area Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Image Distinction Level)...................................................................I-40
4.3.39 ACS Adjustment (Quality Adjustment)..........................................................................................................................I-41
4.3.40 AE(AES) Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Density Adjustment).................................................................................I-41
4.3.41 Copy Density Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Density Adjustment)..........................................................................I-42
4.3.42 Back. Removal (Quality Adjustment - Density Adjustment)..........................................................................................I-42
4.3.43 Tone Adjustment (RGB/YMC) (Quality Adjustment - Tone Adjustment)......................................................................I-42
4.3.44 Non-Image Area Erase Check......................................................................................................................................I-43
4.3.45 Tray size adjustment (Tray adjustment).......................................................................................................................I-43
4.3.46 Recall Standard Data (Quality Adjustment)..................................................................................................................I-44
4.4 Process adjustment..................................................................................................................................................................I-44
4.4.1 1st Transfer Manual Adj. (High Voltage Adjustment)......................................................................................................I-44
4.4.2 2nd Transfer Manual Adj. (High Voltage Adjustment)....................................................................................................I-44
4.4.3 Separation current manual adjustment (High voltage adjustment).................................................................................I-44
4.4.4 Pre-transfer Guide Confirm (High Voltage Adjustment)..................................................................................................I-44
4.4.5 Blade Setting Mode (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment)........................................................................................................I-44
4.4.6 Gamma Automatic Adjustment (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment)......................................................................................I-45
4.4.7 Toner Density Sensor Init. (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment).............................................................................................I-45
4.4.8 Toner Density Revert (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment).....................................................................................................I-45
4.4.9 Maximum density initial adjustment (drum peculiarity adjustment).................................................................................I-46
4.4.10 All developing unit replacement adjustment.................................................................................................................I-69
4.4.11 IDC sensor output (sensor output confirm)...................................................................................................................I-70
4.4.12 Toner Density Sensor Output (Sensor Output Confirm)...............................................................................................I-70
4.4.13 Humidity/Temperature Output (Sensor Output Confirm)..............................................................................................I-70
4.4.14 1st transfer resistance measurement (sensor output confirm).....................................................................................I-70
4.4.15 2nd transfer resistance measurement (sensor output confirm)....................................................................................I-71
4.4.16 Background Margin Fine Adj. (Process Fine Adjustment)............................................................................................I-71
4.4.17 Develop AC Bias Fine Adj. (Process Fine Adjustment)................................................................................................I-71
4.4.18 Develop AC Frequency (Process Fine Adjustment).....................................................................................................I-72
4.4.19 Toner Density Fine Adj. (Process Fine Adjustment).....................................................................................................I-72
4.4.20 Fine adjustment of fusing temperature (process fine adjustment)................................................................................I-73
4.4.21 Drum Small Rotation Interval (Interval/Quantity Adj.)...................................................................................................I-73
4.4.22 Recall Standard Data....................................................................................................................................................I-73
4.5 System setting..........................................................................................................................................................................I-74
4.5.1 Software DIPSW setting procedures .............................................................................................................................I-74
4.5.2 Software DIPSW setting list............................................................................................................................................I-74
4.5.3 Service Center TEL/FAX .............................................................................................................................................I-118
4.5.4 Serial Number Setting...................................................................................................................................................I-118
4.5.5 Setup date/type of business setting..............................................................................................................................I-118
4.5.6 Toner band creation condition (productivity priority setting).........................................................................................I-118
4.5.7 Restrictions on banner print..........................................................................................................................................I-119
4.5.8 Setting of the toner amount and the replacement count of the toner bottle..................................................................I-120
4.5.9 Troubleshooting for image errors..................................................................................................................................I-121
4.5.10 New model of the fusing belt and the fusing paper exit assy......................................................................................I-123
4.5.11 Remaining staple amount display setting...................................................................................................................I-125
4.6 Counter and data....................................................................................................................................................................I-128
4.6.1 Maintenance Counter...................................................................................................................................................I-128
4.6.2 Data collection procedures...........................................................................................................................................I-128
4.6.3 Paper Size Counter (Total/copy/print)..........................................................................................................................I-129
4.6.4 ADF Counter.................................................................................................................................................................I-130
4.6.5 Coverage Data History ................................................................................................................................................I-130
4.6.6 Paper JAM History .......................................................................................................................................................I-132
4.6.7 JAM/JAM Counter Individual Sec.................................................................................................................................I-132
4.6.8 Counter of Each Copy Mode(1)....................................................................................................................................I-141
4.6.9 Counter of Each Copy Mode(2)....................................................................................................................................I-146
4.6.10 SC Counter/SC Counter Individual Sec......................................................................................................................I-151
4.6.11 SC data of time series ...............................................................................................................................................I-169
xxiii
4.6.12 Maintenance Counter Reset (Maintenance History) ..................................................................................................I-169
4.6.13 Parts History in Time Series (Maintenance History) ..................................................................................................I-169
4.6.14 Counter of each paper type........................................................................................................................................I-170
4.6.15 ORU-M Maintenance History ....................................................................................................................................I-171
4.6.16 Check, setting and reset procedure of the Special Parts Counter..............................................................................I-173
4.6.17 Special Parts Counter.................................................................................................................................................I-173
4.6.18 Voluntary Part Counter (Parts Counter) .....................................................................................................................I-191
4.6.19 Total Counter History..................................................................................................................................................I-192
4.6.20 Custom Counter Threshold Set..................................................................................................................................I-192
4.7 State confirmation...................................................................................................................................................................I-193
4.7.1 I/O Check Mode ...........................................................................................................................................................I-193
4.7.2 Input check procedures ...............................................................................................................................................I-193
4.7.3 Output check procedures .............................................................................................................................................I-193
4.7.4 IO check mode list........................................................................................................................................................I-194
4.7.5 Adjustment when you replace the multi feed detection board (PI) (new type)..............................................................I-258
4.7.6 Adjustment when you replace the multi feed detection board (PI) (old type)...............................................................I-259
4.7.7 Adjustment when you replace the cover paper multi feed detection board (PB)..........................................................I-261
4.7.8 FD, SD-506, SD-513, FS-531/612 and PB adjustment data EEPROM storage...........................................................I-263
4.7.9 Main body adjustment data NVRAM board storage ....................................................................................................I-263
4.7.10 Printer image processing board line memory check ..................................................................................................I-263
4.7.11 Hard disk check..........................................................................................................................................................I-263
4.7.12 Hard disk replacing procedure....................................................................................................................................I-264
4.7.13 Replacing procedure of the write unit.........................................................................................................................I-264
4.7.14 Procedure when IO35-21 or IO35-25 is used.............................................................................................................I-264
4.8 ADF adjustment......................................................................................................................................................................I-265
4.8.1 ADF original size adjustment........................................................................................................................................I-265
4.8.2 ADF original stop position.............................................................................................................................................I-266
4.8.3 ADF original stop position auto adjustment..................................................................................................................I-267
4.8.4 ADF Registration Loop Adj...........................................................................................................................................I-268
4.8.5 Feed paper check.........................................................................................................................................................I-268
4.8.6 Sensor check................................................................................................................................................................I-268
4.8.7 Read Position Adjustment............................................................................................................................................I-269
4.8.8 Read Position Auto Adjustment....................................................................................................................................I-270
4.8.9 FD-Mag. Adjustment.....................................................................................................................................................I-270
4.8.10 FD-Mag. Auto Adjustment..........................................................................................................................................I-271
4.8.11 Scanning light adjustment...........................................................................................................................................I-271
4.8.12 Mixed original size adjustment....................................................................................................................................I-272
4.8.13 Line detection setting..................................................................................................................................................I-272
4.8.14 ADF scan glass auto cleaning....................................................................................................................................I-272
4.9 Finisher adjustment.................................................................................................................................................................I-273
4.9.1 FS-532 Staple Position Adjustment (staple finisher (main) adjustment).......................................................................I-273
4.9.2 FS-532 Staple paper width adjustment (staple finisher (main) adjustment).................................................................I-274
4.9.3 FS-532 FD alignment plate adjustment (staple finisher (main) adjustment).................................................................I-275
4.9.4 FS-532 Exit guide unit paper width adjustment (staple finisher (main) adjustment).....................................................I-276
4.9.5 FS-532 Rewind paddle descent adjustment (staple finisher (main) adjustment)..........................................................I-277
4.9.6 SD-510 Fold&staple pitch adjustment (staple finisher (fold) adjustment).....................................................................I-278
4.9.7 SD-510 Fold&staple paper width adjustment (staple finisher (fold) adjustment)..........................................................I-279
4.9.8 SD-510 Fold&staple staple position adjustment (staple finisher (fold) adjustment)......................................................I-280
4.9.9 SD-510 Fold&staple fold position adjustment (staple finisher (fold) adjustment).........................................................I-280
4.9.10 SD-510 Half-fold fold position adjustment (staple finisher (fold) adjustment).............................................................I-281
4.9.11 SD-510 Tri-fold position adjustment (staple finisher (fold) adjustment)......................................................................I-282
4.9.12 SD-510 Double fold plate adjustment (staple finisher (fold) adjustment)....................................................................I-282
4.9.13 SD-510 Half-fold strength adjustment (staple finisher (fold) adjustment)...................................................................I-283
4.9.14 PK-522 Vertical position adjustment (crosswise direction) (staple finisher (punch) adjustment)................................I-283
4.9.15 PK-522 Horizontal position adjustment (paper feed direction) (staple finisher (punch) adjustment)..........................I-284
4.9.16 PK-522 Registration adjustment (staple finisher (punch) adjustment)........................................................................I-285
4.9.17 PK-522 Paper edge sensor adjustment (staple finisher (punch) adjustment)............................................................I-285
4.9.18 PI-502 Tray size adjustment (staple finisher (PI) adjustment)....................................................................................I-286
4.9.19 PI-502 PI registration adjustment (staple finisher (PI) adjustment)............................................................................I-286
4.9.20 FD-503 Paper width adjustment (multi folder (punch) adjustment)............................................................................I-286
4.9.21 FD-503 Punch vertical position adjustment (multi folder (punch) adjustment)...........................................................I-287
4.9.22 FD-503 Half fold position adjustment (multi folder (fold) adjustment).........................................................................I-288
4.9.23 FD-503 Tri-fold-in position adjustment (multi folder (fold) adjustment).......................................................................I-289
4.9.24 FD-503 Tri-fold-out position adjustment (multi folder (fold) adjustment).....................................................................I-290
4.9.25 FD-503 Double parallel position adjustment (multi folder (fold) adjustment)..............................................................I-291
4.9.26 FD-503 Z-fold position adjustment (multi folder (fold) adjustment).............................................................................I-292
4.9.27 FD-503 Gate position adjustment (multi folder (fold) adjustment)..............................................................................I-294
4.9.28 FD-503 Fold registration loop adjustment (multi folder (fold) adjustment)..................................................................I-295
4.9.29 LS-505/LS-506 Paper width adjustment (stacker adjustment)...................................................................................I-295
4.9.30 LS-505/LS-506 Paper length adjustment (stacker adjustment)..................................................................................I-296
xxiv
4.9.31 SD-506 Staple center position adjustment (saddle stitcher position adjustment).......................................................I-296
4.9.32 SD-506 Staple paper width adjustment (saddle stitcher position adjustment)............................................................I-297
4.9.33 SD-506 Staple pitch adjustment (saddle stitcher position adjustment).......................................................................I-298
4.9.34 SD-506 Half-fold position adjustment (saddle stitcher position adjustment)...............................................................I-299
4.9.35 SD-506 Tri-fold position adjustment (saddle stitcher position adjustment).................................................................I-299
4.9.36 SD-506 Fold paper width adjustment (saddle stitcher position adjustment)...............................................................I-300
4.9.37 SD-506 Trimming adjustment (saddle stitcher position adjustment)..........................................................................I-301
4.9.38 SD-506 Trimmer receiver adjustment (saddle stitcher position adjustment)..............................................................I-302
4.9.39 SD-513 Staple Center Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)...............................................................................I-302
4.9.40 SD-513 Staple Paper Width Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)......................................................................I-304
4.9.41 SD-513 Staple Pitch Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)..................................................................................I-304
4.9.42 SD-513 Tri-Fold Position Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)...........................................................................I-306
4.9.43 SD-513 Fold Skew Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)....................................................................................I-307
4.9.44 SD-513 Half-Fold Position Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)........................................................................I-308
4.9.45 SD-513 Fold Paper Width Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment).........................................................................I-309
4.9.46 SD-513 Fore-edge Trimming Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)....................................................................I-310
4.9.47 SD-513 Parallel Trimming Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment).........................................................................I-311
4.9.48 SD-513 Trans. Entrance Paper Width (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment).........................................................................I-312
4.9.49 TU-503 2-Side Slitting Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)...............................................................................I-313
4.9.50 CR-101 Crease Position Adjustment - Half-Fold Crease Position (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)...............................I-314
4.9.51 CR-101 Crease Position Adjustment - Tri-Fold Crease Position (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment).................................I-315
4.9.52 CR-101 Crease Position Adjustment - PB Cover Crease Position (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)..............................I-316
4.9.53 FD-504 Flattening a Fold (Strength) (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)............................................................................I-317
4.9.54 FD-504 Flattening a Fold (Frequency) (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment).........................................................................I-318
4.9.55 FD-504 Spine Fold Line Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)............................................................................I-318
4.9.56 SD-513 Staple Offset Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)................................................................................I-318
4.9.57 TU-503 Registration Loop Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment).........................................................................I-319
4.9.58 SD-513 Staple Tip Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment).....................................................................................I-320
4.9.59 SD-513 Saddle Position Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)............................................................................I-321
4.9.60 SD-513 Trimmer Receiver Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)........................................................................I-322
4.9.61 PB-503 Cover trimming adjustment (perfect binder adjustment)................................................................................I-322
4.9.62 PB-503 Cover lead edge adjustment (perfect binder adjustment)..............................................................................I-323
4.9.63 PB-503 Spine corner form position adjustment (perfect binder adjustment)..............................................................I-324
4.9.64 PB-503 Glue start position adjustment (perfect binder adjustment)...........................................................................I-324
4.9.65 PB-503 Glue finish position adjustment (perfect binder adjustment)..........................................................................I-326
4.9.66 PB-503 Temperature adjustment (perfect binder adjustment)....................................................................................I-327
4.9.67 PB-503 Sub compile CD width adjustment (perfect binder adjustment).....................................................................I-327
4.9.68 PB-503 Clamp CD width adjustment (perfect binder adjustment)..............................................................................I-328
4.9.69 PB-503 Cover up down CD width adjustment (perfect binder adjustment)................................................................I-329
4.9.70 PB-503 Clamp FD position adjustment (perfect binder adjustment)...........................................................................I-329
4.9.71 RU-510 Paper Width Adjustment (Relay Stacker Adjustment)...................................................................................I-330
4.9.72 RU-510 Paper Length Adjustment (Relay Stacker Adjustment).................................................................................I-331
4.9.73 FS-612 Fold & Staple Stopper Adjustment.................................................................................................................I-331
4.9.74 FS-612 Half-Fold stopper adjustment.........................................................................................................................I-332
4.9.75 PK-512/513 Vertical Position Adj. (Punch Adjustment)..............................................................................................I-333
4.9.76 PK-512/513 Horizontal Position Adj. (Punch Adjustment)..........................................................................................I-333
4.9.77 PK-512/513 Registration Adjustment (Punch Adjustment).........................................................................................I-334
4.9.78 PK-512/513 Paper Edge Detect Sensor (Punch Adjustment)....................................................................................I-335
4.9.79 FS-612 Tri-Fold Adjustment........................................................................................................................................I-335
4.9.80 FS-612 2 Position Staple Pitch...................................................................................................................................I-336
4.9.81 PI-502 Post Inserter Tray Size....................................................................................................................................I-337
4.9.82 FS-531/612 Output Quantity Limit..............................................................................................................................I-337
4.9.83 FS-531/612 Curl Adjustment......................................................................................................................................I-337
4.9.84 Recall Standard Data..................................................................................................................................................I-338
4.10 Firmware Version..................................................................................................................................................................I-338
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-338
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-338
4.11 CS Remote Care...................................................................................................................................................................I-338
4.11.1 Outline .......................................................................................................................................................................I-338
4.11.2 Setup procedure of the CS Remote Care (When using E-mail).................................................................................I-338
4.11.3 Setup procedure of the CS Remote Care (When using phone line modem)..............................................................I-340
4.11.4 Setup procedure of the CS Remote Care (When using WebDAV server)..................................................................I-341
4.11.5 List of combinations of E-mail CS Remote Care and Mail remote notification system...............................................I-344
4.11.6 Mail initial setting........................................................................................................................................................I-344
4.11.7 http communication setting.........................................................................................................................................I-345
4.11.8 Log forwarding function..............................................................................................................................................I-345
4.11.9 Input procedure of software DIPSW for CS Remote Care..........................................................................................I-345
4.11.10 List of software DIPSW for CS Remote Care...........................................................................................................I-346
4.11.11 Setup confirmation ...................................................................................................................................................I-352
4.11.12 Maintenance call ......................................................................................................................................................I-352
xxv
4.11.13 Center call from administrator ..................................................................................................................................I-353
4.11.14 Confirm communication log .....................................................................................................................................I-353
4.11.15 Initialization of RAM for CS Remote Care ...............................................................................................................I-353
4.11.16 CS Remote Care error code list................................................................................................................................I-353
4.11.17 TROUBLESHOOTING..............................................................................................................................................I-355
4.12 List Output ............................................................................................................................................................................I-355
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-355
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-355
4.13 Test mode.............................................................................................................................................................................I-356
4.13.1 Running Test Mode ...................................................................................................................................................I-356
4.13.2 Test Pattern Output Mode..........................................................................................................................................I-356
4.13.3 Test pattern number 11 Beam check..........................................................................................................................I-357
4.13.4 Test pattern number 16 Linearity evaluation pattern..................................................................................................I-357
4.13.5 Test pattern number 25 registration mark position check pattern...............................................................................I-358
4.13.6 Test pattern number 33 Linearity evaluation pattern..................................................................................................I-358
4.13.7 Test pattern number 40 Image skew check pattern (full-bleed print of test pattern number 16)................................I-359
4.13.8 Test pattern number 43 Output 12 test patterns at a time..........................................................................................I-359
4.13.9 Test pattern number 49 RU color sensor gamma correction (output paper density adjustment chart i1-iSis/i1-Pro).I-360
4.13.10 Test pattern number 51 Gradation evaluation pattern (main scan)..........................................................................I-361
4.13.11 Test pattern number 52 Gradation evaluation pattern (sub scan)............................................................................I-361
4.13.12 Test pattern number 53 Overall halftone..................................................................................................................I-362
4.13.13 Test pattern number 54 Gradation evaluation pattern..............................................................................................I-362
4.13.14 Test pattern number 55 5% coverage......................................................................................................................I-363
4.13.15 Test pattern number 58 Stripe check pattern...........................................................................................................I-363
4.13.16 Test pattern number 62 Uneven density check pattern............................................................................................I-364
4.13.17 Test pattern number 69 Maximum density adjustment pattern.................................................................................I-365
4.13.18 Test pattern number 75 Density correction pattern i1-iSis XL (Type1/Type2)..........................................................I-366
4.13.19 Test pattern number 76 Density correction pattern i1-Pro (Type1/Type2)...............................................................I-367
4.13.20 Test pattern number 77 Density correction pattern manual......................................................................................I-368
4.13.21 Test pattern number 80 Print peculiarity evaluation pattern.....................................................................................I-368
4.13.22 Test pattern number 88 Chart file output..................................................................................................................I-369
4.14 Setting Data..........................................................................................................................................................................I-369
4.14.1 Load from external memory .......................................................................................................................................I-369
4.14.2 Store to external memory...........................................................................................................................................I-370
4.15 Log Store..............................................................................................................................................................................I-371
4.15.1 Log Store Setting........................................................................................................................................................I-371
4.15.2 Execute Log Storing...................................................................................................................................................I-371
4.15.3 Download of the log from Web Utilities.......................................................................................................................I-372
4.15.4 Acquire the logs for the controller via WebDAV..........................................................................................................I-372
4.16 ORU-M Setting......................................................................................................................................................................I-373
4.16.1 ORU-M Item/Life setting.............................................................................................................................................I-373
4.16.2 ORU-M Life Threshold Setting....................................................................................................................................I-373
4.16.3 ORU-M Password Setting...........................................................................................................................................I-374
4.17 HDD Setting..........................................................................................................................................................................I-374
4.17.1 HDD Replace Initial Setting........................................................................................................................................I-374
4.17.2 Format HDD All Data..................................................................................................................................................I-376
4.17.3 Format Controller HDD Data......................................................................................................................................I-378
4.17.4 Transfer HDD Data.....................................................................................................................................................I-379
4.18 Auth. Device Setting.............................................................................................................................................................I-381
4.18.1 Auth. Unit Selection....................................................................................................................................................I-381
4.18.2 Loadable Driver Install................................................................................................................................................I-381
4.19 Startup Setting......................................................................................................................................................................I-382
4.19.1 Package Adjustment...................................................................................................................................................I-382
4.19.2 Setup Setting 1...........................................................................................................................................................I-382
4.19.3 Setup Setting 2...........................................................................................................................................................I-382
5. IC-602 SERVICE MODE..........................................................................................................................................I-384
5.1 IC Service Mode List...............................................................................................................................................................I-384
5.2 Start and exit of IC service mode............................................................................................................................................I-384
5.2.1 Method to activate the IC service mode.......................................................................................................................I-384
5.2.2 Method to exit the IC service mode..............................................................................................................................I-384
5.3 System setting........................................................................................................................................................................I-384
5.3.1 IC software DIPSW setting procedures .......................................................................................................................I-384
5.3.2 IC software DIPSW list.................................................................................................................................................I-385
5.4 CSV File Import/Export...........................................................................................................................................................I-386
5.4.1 Outline..........................................................................................................................................................................I-386
5.4.2 Procedure.....................................................................................................................................................................I-386
5.5 Font Backup............................................................................................................................................................................I-387
5.5.1 Outline .........................................................................................................................................................................I-387
5.5.2 Preparation of backup/restore .....................................................................................................................................I-387
5.5.3 Backup method.............................................................................................................................................................I-387
xxvi
5.5.4 Method to restore..........................................................................................................................................................I-388
5.6 HP Tray Mapping....................................................................................................................................................................I-389
5.6.1 Outline..........................................................................................................................................................................I-389
5.6.2 Procedure.....................................................................................................................................................................I-389
5.7 Controller Capture Setting......................................................................................................................................................I-391
(1) Outline..............................................................................................................................................................................I-391
(2) Spool setting.....................................................................................................................................................................I-391
(3) Acquisition procedure.......................................................................................................................................................I-391
6. CE/ADMINISTRATOR SECURITY SETTING..........................................................................................................I-393
6.1 CE/Administrator Security Setting list.....................................................................................................................................I-393
6.2 Start/exit .................................................................................................................................................................................I-393
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-393
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-393
6.3 CE Authentication ..................................................................................................................................................................I-393
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-393
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-393
6.4 CE Auth. Password ................................................................................................................................................................I-393
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-393
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-393
6.5 Admin. Authentication ............................................................................................................................................................I-394
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-394
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-394
6.6 Administrator Password .........................................................................................................................................................I-394
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-394
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-394
7. FEE COLLECTION SETTING..................................................................................................................................I-395
7.1 Fee Collection Setting list.......................................................................................................................................................I-395
7.2 Start/exit .................................................................................................................................................................................I-395
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-395
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-395
7.3 Management Function ...........................................................................................................................................................I-395
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-395
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-395
7.4 Manage OpenAPI Auth...........................................................................................................................................................I-395
7.4.1 Restriction Code...........................................................................................................................................................I-395
7.5 Billing Coefficient Setting........................................................................................................................................................I-395
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-395
(2) Function............................................................................................................................................................................I-395
(3) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-395
8. ADJUSTMENT FOR POD........................................................................................................................................I-397
8.1 Process adjustment................................................................................................................................................................I-397
8.1.1 Outline .........................................................................................................................................................................I-397
8.1.2 Preset...........................................................................................................................................................................I-397
8.1.3 2nd Transfer Output Adj. (Front)...................................................................................................................................I-398
8.1.4 2nd Transfer Output Adj. (Back)...................................................................................................................................I-399
8.1.5 2nd Transfer-Lead Edge(Front)....................................................................................................................................I-399
8.1.6 2nd Transfer-Lead Edge(Back)....................................................................................................................................I-399
8.1.7 2nd Transfer-Rear Edge(Front)....................................................................................................................................I-400
8.1.8 2nd Transfer-Rear Edge(Back).....................................................................................................................................I-400
8.1.9 Separation AC(Front)....................................................................................................................................................I-401
8.1.10 Separation AC(Back)..................................................................................................................................................I-401
8.1.11 Separation DC(Front).................................................................................................................................................I-402
8.1.12 Separation DC(Back)..................................................................................................................................................I-402
8.1.13 Temperature of the upper fusing roller.......................................................................................................................I-403
8.1.14 Lead edge erase quantity...........................................................................................................................................I-403
8.1.15 Temperature gap of the fusing edge and the middle..................................................................................................I-404
8.1.16 Temperature of the lower fusing roller........................................................................................................................I-404
8.1.17 Trailing edge erase amount........................................................................................................................................I-405
8.1.18 ADU reverse timing adjustment..................................................................................................................................I-405
8.1.19 Fusing Speed(Front Side)...........................................................................................................................................I-405
8.1.20 Fusing Speed(Back Side Offset)................................................................................................................................I-407
8.1.21 Up fusing initial temperature.......................................................................................................................................I-408
8.1.22 2nd transfer pressure..................................................................................................................................................I-408
8.1.23 CPM Down..................................................................................................................................................................I-409
8.1.24 Toner amount save.....................................................................................................................................................I-409
8.1.25 Density adjustment per tray (YMC).............................................................................................................................I-409
8.1.26 Density adjustment per tray (K)..................................................................................................................................I-409
8.1.27 Mis-centering detect JAM...........................................................................................................................................I-410
8.1.28 Double Feed Detection...............................................................................................................................................I-410
8.1.29 Intermediate transfer separation setting.....................................................................................................................I-410
xxvii
8.1.30 Thick BK mode...........................................................................................................................................................I-410
8.1.31 Correction level for the paper registration...................................................................................................................I-411
8.1.32 Curl Adjustment of Output..........................................................................................................................................I-411
8.1.33 Back on top output curl adjustment............................................................................................................................I-411
8.1.34 Mis-centering Detection..............................................................................................................................................I-412
8.1.35 Fusing air separation air level setting.........................................................................................................................I-412
8.1.36 Change fusing pressure..............................................................................................................................................I-413
8.1.37 Hard paper mode........................................................................................................................................................I-413
8.1.38 PFU Suction Air Level Setting....................................................................................................................................I-413
8.1.39 Output Paper Separation Setting................................................................................................................................I-414
8.2 Image quality/improving paper feeding adjustment................................................................................................................I-414
8.2.1 Transfer jitter adjustment..............................................................................................................................................I-414
9. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060, bizhub PRO C1060L.....................I-417
9.1 Scanner motor belt adjustment...............................................................................................................................................I-417
9.1.1 Purpose........................................................................................................................................................................I-417
9.1.2 Procedure.....................................................................................................................................................................I-417
9.2 Positioning adjustments of the exposure unit and the mirror unit...........................................................................................I-417
9.2.1 Purpose........................................................................................................................................................................I-417
9.2.2 Procedure.....................................................................................................................................................................I-417
9.3 Centering adjustment of the paper feed tray/1 and the paper feed tray/2..............................................................................I-418
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-418
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-418
9.4 Separation pressure adjustment of the paper feed tray/1 and the paper feed tray/2..............................................................I-418
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-418
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-419
9.5 Separation discharging plate assy position adjustment..........................................................................................................I-419
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-419
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-420
9.6 Registration unit skew adjustment..........................................................................................................................................I-420
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-420
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-420
9.7 Fusing unit skew adjustment...................................................................................................................................................I-425
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-425
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-425
9.8 Fusing paper exit rollerr pressure adjustment.........................................................................................................................I-428
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-428
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-429
9.9 Tilt adjustment.........................................................................................................................................................................I-429
9.9.1 Usage...........................................................................................................................................................................I-429
9.9.2 Procedure.....................................................................................................................................................................I-430
10. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT DF-626..................................................................................................................I-432
10.1 Height adjustment.................................................................................................................................................................I-432
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-432
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-432
10.2 Lead skew adjustment..........................................................................................................................................................I-432
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-432
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-432
11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PF-602m...............................................................................................................I-434
11.1 Paper feed pick-up amount adjustment ...............................................................................................................................I-434
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-434
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-434
11.2 Pick-up roller height adjustment ...........................................................................................................................................I-435
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-435
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-435
11.3 Separation pressure adjustment ..........................................................................................................................................I-437
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-437
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-437
11.4 Lift plate horizontal adjustment ............................................................................................................................................I-437
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-437
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-437
11.5 Horizontal adjustment...........................................................................................................................................................I-438
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-438
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-438
12. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PF-707..................................................................................................................I-440
12.1 Paper feed pressure adjustment...........................................................................................................................................I-440
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-440
(2) Preparation.......................................................................................................................................................................I-440
(3) Multi-feed adjustment (J-1610).........................................................................................................................................I-440
(4) No feed adjustment (J-1601 to J-1603)............................................................................................................................I-440
xxviii
(5) Paper lead edge buckle adjustment.................................................................................................................................I-440
(6) Feed failed jam adjustment (J-1601 to J-1603)................................................................................................................I-440
12.2 Centering adjustment (for each tray)....................................................................................................................................I-440
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-440
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-441
12.3 Centering Adjustment (PF)...................................................................................................................................................I-441
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-441
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-441
12.4 Height and tilt adjustment.....................................................................................................................................................I-442
12.4.1 Usage.........................................................................................................................................................................I-442
12.4.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-442
12.5 Tilt adjustment.......................................................................................................................................................................I-446
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-446
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-446
13. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT LU-202..................................................................................................................I-447
13.1 Separation pressure adjustment ..........................................................................................................................................I-447
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-447
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-447
13.2 Paper lift plate horizontal adjustment ...................................................................................................................................I-447
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-447
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-448
13.3 Paper centering adjustment..................................................................................................................................................I-448
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-448
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-449
13.4 Paper skew adjustment.........................................................................................................................................................I-449
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-449
(2) Preparation.......................................................................................................................................................................I-449
(3) Adjustment procedure of all the paper skew regularly.....................................................................................................I-450
(4) Adjustment procedure of each paper skew irregularly.....................................................................................................I-450
13.5 (Maximum) Paper feed height adjustment ...........................................................................................................................I-450
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-450
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-451
13.6 Pick-up roller separation adjustment ....................................................................................................................................I-451
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-451
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-452
14. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT MB-506.................................................................................................................I-453
14.1 Pick-up roller/BP load adjustment.........................................................................................................................................I-453
14.1.1 Usage.........................................................................................................................................................................I-453
14.1.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-453
14.2 Paper feed (Maximum) height adjustment (bypass).............................................................................................................I-453
14.2.1 Usage.........................................................................................................................................................................I-453
14.2.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-453
14.3 Pick-up shift amount adjustment (bypass)............................................................................................................................I-454
14.3.1 Usage.........................................................................................................................................................................I-454
14.3.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-454
14.4 Separation roller/BP separation pressure adjustment..........................................................................................................I-454
14.4.1 Usage.........................................................................................................................................................................I-454
14.4.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-454
15. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT EF-103..................................................................................................................I-455
15.1 Fusing unit skew adjustment.................................................................................................................................................I-455
15.2 Fusing paper exit roller pressure adjustment........................................................................................................................I-455
16. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT RU-517..................................................................................................................I-456
16.1 Conveyance door position adjustment..................................................................................................................................I-456
16.1.1 Usage.........................................................................................................................................................................I-456
16.1.2 Adjustment procedure of the old type.........................................................................................................................I-456
16.1.3 Adjustment procedure of the new type.......................................................................................................................I-458
17. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT RU-509 .................................................................................................................I-460
17.1 Height adjustment ................................................................................................................................................................I-460
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-460
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-460
17.2 Position adjustment of the shutter solenoid (SD5)................................................................................................................I-460
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-460
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-461
17.3 Image scratch reduction........................................................................................................................................................I-461
(1) Function............................................................................................................................................................................I-461
(2) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-461
(3) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-462
18. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT RU-510..................................................................................................................I-463
18.1 Height adjustment.................................................................................................................................................................I-463
xxix
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-463
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-463
19. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT FS-531 .................................................................................................................I-464
19.1 Adjustment the bypass gate .................................................................................................................................................I-464
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-464
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-464
19.2 Adjusting the shift position ...................................................................................................................................................I-465
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-465
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-465
19.3 Adjusting the paper exit opening solenoid ...........................................................................................................................I-465
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-465
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-466
19.4 Adjusting the mounting position of the paper exit arm .........................................................................................................I-467
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-467
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-467
19.5 Adjusting the mounting position of the alignment plate/Up...................................................................................................I-468
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-468
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-468
19.6 Staple position adjustment ...................................................................................................................................................I-469
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-469
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-469
20. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT FS-612 .................................................................................................................I-471
20.1 Adjustment the bypass gate .................................................................................................................................................I-471
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-471
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-471
20.2 Adjusting the shift position ...................................................................................................................................................I-472
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-472
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-472
20.3 Adjusting the paper exit opening solenoid ...........................................................................................................................I-472
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-472
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-473
20.4 Adjusting the mounting position of the paper exit arm .........................................................................................................I-474
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-474
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-474
20.5 Adjusting the mounting position of the alignment plate/Up...................................................................................................I-475
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-475
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-475
20.6 Adjusting the mounting position of the alignment plate/Lw...................................................................................................I-476
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-476
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-476
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-477
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-477
20.8 Staple position adjustment (Saddle stitching) ......................................................................................................................I-478
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-478
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-478
20.9 Staple up/down position adjustment ....................................................................................................................................I-479
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-479
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-479
20.10 Half-fold stopper tilt adjustment .........................................................................................................................................I-480
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-480
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-481
20.11 Folding pressure adjustment ..............................................................................................................................................I-481
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-481
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-482
20.12 Tri-folding position adjustment ...........................................................................................................................................I-482
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-482
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-482
21. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PK-512/513 ..........................................................................................................I-483
21.1 Punch hole position skew adjustment ..................................................................................................................................I-483
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-483
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-483
22. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PI-502 ..................................................................................................................I-484
22.1 PI tilt adjustment (When PK is connected) ...........................................................................................................................I-484
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-484
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-484
22.2 PK punch position centering adjustment...............................................................................................................................I-484
22.2.1 Usage.........................................................................................................................................................................I-484
22.2.2 Adjustment procedure for the cover sheet tray/Up.....................................................................................................I-484
xxx
22.2.3 Adjustment procedure for the cover sheet tray/Lw.....................................................................................................I-485
23. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT FS-532..................................................................................................................I-487
23.1 Staple position adjustment....................................................................................................................................................I-487
23.1.1 Usage.........................................................................................................................................................................I-487
23.1.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-487
23.2 Main tray horizontal adjustment............................................................................................................................................I-488
23.2.1 Purpose......................................................................................................................................................................I-488
23.2.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-488
24. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT SD-510..................................................................................................................I-490
24.1 Adjustment for Staple Clinch Failure.....................................................................................................................................I-490
24.1.1 Usage.........................................................................................................................................................................I-490
24.1.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-490
24.2 1st folding skew adjustment..................................................................................................................................................I-490
24.2.1 Usage.........................................................................................................................................................................I-490
24.2.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-490
25. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PK-522..................................................................................................................I-492
25.1 Punch hole position skew adjustment...................................................................................................................................I-492
25.1.1 Usage.........................................................................................................................................................................I-492
25.1.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-492
25.2 Punch unit adjustment mounting position adjustment...........................................................................................................I-492
25.2.1 Usage.........................................................................................................................................................................I-492
25.2.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-492
26. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT LS-505/LS-506......................................................................................................I-494
26.1 Adjusting the paper press solenoid/1 (SD6).........................................................................................................................I-494
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-494
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-494
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-494
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-494
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-494
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-495
26.4 Adjusting the job partition solenoid (SD2) ............................................................................................................................I-495
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-495
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-495
26.5 Horizontal adjustment (LS-505)............................................................................................................................................I-495
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-495
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-496
26.6 Horizontal adjustment (LS-506)............................................................................................................................................I-496
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-496
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-496
26.7 Grip conveyance home sensor adjustment ..........................................................................................................................I-497
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-497
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-497
26.8 Stacker tray height adjustment (LS-506)..............................................................................................................................I-498
26.8.1 Purpose ....................................................................................................................................................................I-498
26.8.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................I-498
26.9 Stacker tray levelness adjustment (LS-506).........................................................................................................................I-499
26.9.1 Purpose.....................................................................................................................................................................I-499
26.9.2 Procedure..................................................................................................................................................................I-499
27. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT FD-503 .................................................................................................................I-501
27.1 Roller solenoids/1 (SD5), /2 (SD6), /3 (SD7) and /4 (SD8) position adjustment...................................................................I-501
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-501
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-501
27.2 2nd folding roller solenoid (SD18) position adjustment ........................................................................................................I-501
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-501
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-502
27.3 Punch centering adjustment.................................................................................................................................................I-502
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-502
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-502
27.4 Horizontal adjustment ..........................................................................................................................................................I-503
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-503
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-503
27.5 Paper feed control gear position adjustment (PI tray) ..........................................................................................................I-503
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-503
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-503
27.6 Paper feed pick-up volume adjustment (PI tray) ..................................................................................................................I-504
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-504
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-504
xxxi
28. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT SD-506 .................................................................................................................I-505
28.1 Horizontal adjustment ..........................................................................................................................................................I-505
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-505
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-505
28.2 Folding skew adjustment .....................................................................................................................................................I-505
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-505
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-505
28.3 Second folding position stabilization adjustment..................................................................................................................I-506
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-506
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-506
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-507
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-507
(3) Adjustment Procedure/1...................................................................................................................................................I-507
(4) Adjustment Procedure/2...................................................................................................................................................I-508
28.5 Stapler position adjustment ..................................................................................................................................................I-508
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-508
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-508
28.6 Tilt/gap adjustment of the clincher .......................................................................................................................................I-509
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-509
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-509
28.7 Trimming skew adjustment...................................................................................................................................................I-510
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-510
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-511
28.8 Trimming adjustment ...........................................................................................................................................................I-511
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-511
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-512
29. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT SD-513..................................................................................................................I-513
29.1 Front stopper position adjustment.........................................................................................................................................I-513
29.1.1 Usage.........................................................................................................................................................................I-513
29.1.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-513
29.2 1st folding skew adjustment..................................................................................................................................................I-513
29.2.1 Usage.........................................................................................................................................................................I-513
29.2.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-513
29.3 Horizontal adjustment...........................................................................................................................................................I-514
29.3.1 Usage.........................................................................................................................................................................I-514
29.3.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-514
29.4 Front console open close caster height adjustment..............................................................................................................I-516
29.4.1 Usage.........................................................................................................................................................................I-516
29.4.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-517
29.5 Staple adjustment.................................................................................................................................................................I-517
29.5.1 Usage.........................................................................................................................................................................I-517
29.5.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-517
29.6 Clincher position adjustment.................................................................................................................................................I-528
29.6.1 Usage.........................................................................................................................................................................I-528
29.6.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-528
29.7 Saddle stitching alignment plate/Md position adjustment.....................................................................................................I-534
29.7.1 Usage.........................................................................................................................................................................I-534
29.7.2 Prior check..................................................................................................................................................................I-534
29.7.3 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-537
29.8 Trimmer skew adjustment.....................................................................................................................................................I-539
29.8.1 Usage.........................................................................................................................................................................I-539
29.8.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-539
30. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT CR-101..................................................................................................................I-542
30.1 Creaser unit skew adjustment...............................................................................................................................................I-542
30.1.1 Usage.........................................................................................................................................................................I-542
30.1.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-542
31. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT TU-503..................................................................................................................I-543
31.1 Slitter unit skew adjustment..................................................................................................................................................I-543
31.1.1 Usage.........................................................................................................................................................................I-543
31.1.2 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................I-543
32. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PB-503 .................................................................................................................I-544
32.1 Clamp sub scan direction alignment adjustment..................................................................................................................I-544
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-544
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-544
32.2 Clamp main scan direction alignment adjustment ...............................................................................................................I-544
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-544
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-545
32.3 Pellet supply arm angle adjustment .....................................................................................................................................I-545
xxxii
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-545
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-545
32.4 Glue apply roller gap adjustment .........................................................................................................................................I-546
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-546
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-546
32.5 Cover paper glue gap adjustment ........................................................................................................................................I-546
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-546
(2) Gap adjustment procedure in thin coat mode..................................................................................................................I-547
(3) Gap adjustment procedure in thick coat mode.................................................................................................................I-548
32.6 Glue tank movement rail tilt adjustment ...............................................................................................................................I-548
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-548
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-549
32.7 Cover paper folding plate nipping adjustment ......................................................................................................................I-549
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-549
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-550
32.8 Cover paper folding plate parallel adjustment ......................................................................................................................I-550
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-550
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-550
32.9 Cover paper table up down belt adjustment ........................................................................................................................I-551
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-551
(2) Check point......................................................................................................................................................................I-551
(3) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-552
32.10 Cover paper alignment plate adjustment ...........................................................................................................................I-552
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-552
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-553
32.11 Cover paper cutting skew adjustment ................................................................................................................................I-553
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-553
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-553
32.12 Cover paper table positioning ............................................................................................................................................I-554
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-554
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-554
32.13 Cover paper tray pick-up adjustment .................................................................................................................................I-555
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-555
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-555
32.14 Cover paper tray pick-up roller height adjustment .............................................................................................................I-556
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-556
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-557
32.15 Cover paper tray separation pressure adjustment .............................................................................................................I-558
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-558
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-559
32.16 Cover paper tray Centering Adjustment .............................................................................................................................I-559
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-559
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-559
32.17 Cover paper tray lift plate horizontal adjustment ................................................................................................................I-559
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-559
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-560
32.18 Height adjustment ..............................................................................................................................................................I-562
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-562
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-563
J REWRITING OF FIRMWARE.........................................................................................................J-1
1. OUTLINE.....................................................................................................................................................................J-1
1.1 Type...........................................................................................................................................................................................J-1
1.1.1 USB MEMORY ISW.........................................................................................................................................................J-1
1.1.2 Internet ISW.....................................................................................................................................................................J-1
1.2 Board to be rewritten and firmware............................................................................................................................................J-1
1.3 Firmware data flow.....................................................................................................................................................................J-1
1.4 Precautions on rewriting the firmware........................................................................................................................................J-2
1.4.1 ISW execution procedures...............................................................................................................................................J-2
1.4.2 DIPSW on the board........................................................................................................................................................J-2
1.4.3 Connect short connector when the firmware is rewrote...................................................................................................J-2
1.5 Error list......................................................................................................................................................................................J-3
1.5.1 Main body error list..........................................................................................................................................................J-3
1.5.2 Troubleshooting procedure for the main body error.........................................................................................................J-3
1.5.3 Operation when firmware abnormality occurs..................................................................................................................J-3
2. ISWTRNS_G................................................................................................................................................................J-5
2.1 Specifications.............................................................................................................................................................................J-5
2.1.1 ISWTrns_G (PC software)...............................................................................................................................................J-5
2.2 Installation of the ISWTrns_G ...................................................................................................................................................J-5
(1) Procedure............................................................................................................................................................................J-5
xxxiii
2.3 Usage of the ISWTrns_G ..........................................................................................................................................................J-6
2.3.1 Firmware checksum check..............................................................................................................................................J-6
2.4 Error list......................................................................................................................................................................................J-7
(1) ISWTrns_G error list............................................................................................................................................................J-7
(2) ISWTrns_G troubleshooting................................................................................................................................................J-7
3. USB MEMORY ISW.....................................................................................................................................................J-8
3.1 Usage of the USB memory ISW.................................................................................................................................................J-8
3.1.1 Procedure........................................................................................................................................................................J-8
3.1.2 Main body error list........................................................................................................................................................J-10
3.2 ISW procedure for ADF and the scanner.................................................................................................................................J-10
3.2.1 Preparation....................................................................................................................................................................J-10
3.2.2 Procedure for moving to the ISW rewriting screen........................................................................................................J-10
3.2.3 Procedure for rewriting the firmware..............................................................................................................................J-11
3.3 ISW Procedure of GP-502.......................................................................................................................................................J-12
3.3.1 Preparation....................................................................................................................................................................J-12
3.3.2 Procedure of rewriting M1..............................................................................................................................................J-13
4. INTERNET ISW.........................................................................................................................................................J-20
4.1 Outline .....................................................................................................................................................................................J-20
4.2 Operating environment ............................................................................................................................................................J-20
4.3 Usage precautions...................................................................................................................................................................J-20
4.3.1 Notice to administrator...................................................................................................................................................J-20
4.3.2 Power cut during writing.................................................................................................................................................J-20
4.4 Initial setting.............................................................................................................................................................................J-20
(1) Setting from the operation panel.......................................................................................................................................J-20
(2) Setting from the Web browser...........................................................................................................................................J-20
4.5 Internet ISW using the Web Utilities.........................................................................................................................................J-23
4.5.1 Procedure......................................................................................................................................................................J-23
4.6 Internet ISW using the operation panel....................................................................................................................................J-24
4.6.1 Procedure......................................................................................................................................................................J-24
4.7 Authentication of the proxy server in Internet ISW ..................................................................................................................J-26
(1) Proxy server......................................................................................................................................................................J-26
(2) Authentication of the proxy server.....................................................................................................................................J-26
(3) Authentication type of the proxy server and the command list..........................................................................................J-26
(4) Remark..............................................................................................................................................................................J-26
K TROUBLESHOOTING...................................................................................................................K-1
1. JAM INDICATION.......................................................................................................................................................K-1
1.1 Jam code list..............................................................................................................................................................................K-1
2. MALFUNCTION CODE.............................................................................................................................................K-30
2.1 Trouble reset method..............................................................................................................................................................K-30
2.2 Function to detach defective sections ....................................................................................................................................K-30
(1) User operation..................................................................................................................................................................K-30
(2) DIPSW setting...................................................................................................................................................................K-30
2.3 Malfunction code list................................................................................................................................................................K-30
2.4 Malfunction code due to the connector disconnection...........................................................................................................K-113
2.4.1 bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060, bizhub PRO C1060L.........................................................................K-113
2.4.2 PF-707.........................................................................................................................................................................K-118
2.5 Solution 1 (C-0001_0300).....................................................................................................................................................K-119
2.5.1 C-0001 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-119
2.5.2 C-0002 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-119
2.5.3 C-0101.........................................................................................................................................................................K-120
2.5.4 C-0102 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-120
2.5.5 C-0103.........................................................................................................................................................................K-120
2.5.6 C-0104.........................................................................................................................................................................K-121
2.5.7 C-0113.........................................................................................................................................................................K-121
2.5.8 C-0114.........................................................................................................................................................................K-122
2.5.9 C-0115.........................................................................................................................................................................K-122
2.5.10 C-0116.......................................................................................................................................................................K-123
2.5.11 C-0117.......................................................................................................................................................................K-123
2.5.12 C-0130.......................................................................................................................................................................K-123
2.5.13 C-0201.......................................................................................................................................................................K-124
2.5.14 C-0202.......................................................................................................................................................................K-124
2.5.15 C-0204 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-125
2.5.16 C-0205 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-125
2.5.17 C-0208.......................................................................................................................................................................K-125
2.5.18 C-0209.......................................................................................................................................................................K-126
xxxiv
2.5.19 C-0211.......................................................................................................................................................................K-126
2.5.20 C-0212.......................................................................................................................................................................K-127
2.5.21 C-0213.......................................................................................................................................................................K-127
2.5.22 C-0215.......................................................................................................................................................................K-128
2.5.23 C-0230.......................................................................................................................................................................K-128
2.5.24 C-0231.......................................................................................................................................................................K-128
2.5.25 C-0232.......................................................................................................................................................................K-129
2.5.26 C-0233.......................................................................................................................................................................K-129
2.5.27 C-0234.......................................................................................................................................................................K-130
2.5.28 C-0235.......................................................................................................................................................................K-130
2.5.29 C-0236.......................................................................................................................................................................K-131
2.5.30 C-0237.......................................................................................................................................................................K-131
2.6 Solution 2 (C-0301_0400).....................................................................................................................................................K-132
2.6.1 C-0301*.......................................................................................................................................................................K-132
2.6.2 C-0302*.......................................................................................................................................................................K-132
2.6.3 C-0303.........................................................................................................................................................................K-133
2.6.4 C-0304*.......................................................................................................................................................................K-133
2.6.5 C-0306 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-133
2.6.6 C-0307 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-133
2.6.7 C-0308.........................................................................................................................................................................K-134
2.6.8 C-0309.........................................................................................................................................................................K-134
2.6.9 C-0310.........................................................................................................................................................................K-134
2.6.10 C-0311.......................................................................................................................................................................K-135
2.6.11 C-0312.......................................................................................................................................................................K-135
2.6.12 C-0313.......................................................................................................................................................................K-135
2.6.13 C-0314.......................................................................................................................................................................K-136
2.6.14 C-0315.......................................................................................................................................................................K-136
2.6.15 C-0316.......................................................................................................................................................................K-136
2.6.16 C-0317.......................................................................................................................................................................K-137
2.6.17 C-0318.......................................................................................................................................................................K-137
2.6.18 C-0320 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-137
2.6.19 C-0321 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-138
2.6.20 C-0322.......................................................................................................................................................................K-138
2.6.21 C-0323*.....................................................................................................................................................................K-138
2.6.22 C-0324*.....................................................................................................................................................................K-138
2.6.23 C-0325.......................................................................................................................................................................K-139
2.6.24 C-0326.......................................................................................................................................................................K-139
2.6.25 C-0327.......................................................................................................................................................................K-139
2.6.26 C-0328.......................................................................................................................................................................K-140
2.6.27 C-0329.......................................................................................................................................................................K-140
2.6.28 C-0330.......................................................................................................................................................................K-140
2.6.29 C-0331.......................................................................................................................................................................K-141
2.6.30 C-0332.......................................................................................................................................................................K-141
2.6.31 C-0333.......................................................................................................................................................................K-141
2.6.32 C-0334.......................................................................................................................................................................K-142
2.6.33 C-0335.......................................................................................................................................................................K-142
2.6.34 C-0336.......................................................................................................................................................................K-142
2.6.35 C-0337.......................................................................................................................................................................K-143
2.6.36 C-0338.......................................................................................................................................................................K-143
2.6.37 C-0339.......................................................................................................................................................................K-143
2.6.38 C-0340.......................................................................................................................................................................K-144
2.6.39 C-0373*.....................................................................................................................................................................K-144
2.6.40 C-0374*.....................................................................................................................................................................K-144
2.7 Solution 3 (C-0401_0500).....................................................................................................................................................K-145
2.7.1 C-0401 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-145
2.7.2 C-0402 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-145
2.7.3 C-0403.........................................................................................................................................................................K-145
2.7.4 C-0404.........................................................................................................................................................................K-146
2.7.5 C-0405.........................................................................................................................................................................K-146
2.7.6 C-0406.........................................................................................................................................................................K-146
2.7.7 C-0407.........................................................................................................................................................................K-147
2.7.8 C-0408.........................................................................................................................................................................K-147
2.7.9 C-0409.........................................................................................................................................................................K-147
2.7.10 C-0410.......................................................................................................................................................................K-148
2.7.11 C-0411.......................................................................................................................................................................K-148
2.7.12 C-0412.......................................................................................................................................................................K-149
2.7.13 C-0413.......................................................................................................................................................................K-149
2.7.14 C-0414.......................................................................................................................................................................K-149
2.7.15 C-0415.......................................................................................................................................................................K-150
2.7.16 C-0416.......................................................................................................................................................................K-150
xxxv
2.7.17 C-0417 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-151
2.7.18 C-0418 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-151
2.7.19 C-0419.......................................................................................................................................................................K-152
2.7.20 C-0420.......................................................................................................................................................................K-152
2.7.21 C-0421.......................................................................................................................................................................K-152
2.8 Solution 4 (C-1001_1126).....................................................................................................................................................K-153
2.8.1 C-1005 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-153
2.8.2 C-1006 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-153
2.8.3 C-1007 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-153
2.8.4 C-1007.........................................................................................................................................................................K-154
2.8.5 C-1009 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-154
2.8.6 C-1010 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-154
2.8.7 C-1011 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-155
2.8.8 C-1012.........................................................................................................................................................................K-155
2.8.9 C-1013 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-155
2.8.10 C-1014.......................................................................................................................................................................K-156
2.8.11 C-1101 (FS-531/612) ...............................................................................................................................................K-156
2.8.12 C-1102 (FS-531/612) ...............................................................................................................................................K-157
2.8.13 C-1102 (FS-532).......................................................................................................................................................K-157
2.8.14 C-1103 (FS-531/612) ...............................................................................................................................................K-157
2.8.15 C-1103 (FS-532).......................................................................................................................................................K-158
2.8.16 C-1104 (FS-531/612) ...............................................................................................................................................K-158
2.8.17 C-1105 (FS-531/612) ...............................................................................................................................................K-159
2.8.18 C-1105 (FS-532).......................................................................................................................................................K-159
2.8.19 C-1106 (FS-531/612) ...............................................................................................................................................K-159
2.8.20 C-1106 (FS-532).......................................................................................................................................................K-160
2.8.21 C-1107 (FS-612) ......................................................................................................................................................K-160
2.8.22 C-1108 (FS-612) ......................................................................................................................................................K-161
2.8.23 C-1109 (FS-531/612) ...............................................................................................................................................K-161
2.8.24 C-1109 (FS-532).......................................................................................................................................................K-162
2.8.25 C-1110 (FS-531/612) ...............................................................................................................................................K-162
2.8.26 C-1111 (FS-612) ......................................................................................................................................................K-162
2.8.27 C-1112 (FS-612) ......................................................................................................................................................K-163
2.8.28 C-1113 (FS-612) ......................................................................................................................................................K-163
2.8.29 C-1113 (FS-532).......................................................................................................................................................K-163
2.8.30 C-1114 (FS-612) ......................................................................................................................................................K-164
2.8.31 C-1114 (FS-532).......................................................................................................................................................K-164
2.8.32 C-1115 (FS-612) ......................................................................................................................................................K-165
2.8.33 C-1115.......................................................................................................................................................................K-165
2.8.34 C-1116 (FS-612) ......................................................................................................................................................K-166
2.8.35 C-1124.......................................................................................................................................................................K-166
2.8.36 C-1125.......................................................................................................................................................................K-167
2.8.37 C-1126.......................................................................................................................................................................K-167
2.9 Solution 5 (C-1127_1230).....................................................................................................................................................K-168
2.9.1 C-1127 (PK-512/513)..................................................................................................................................................K-168
2.9.2 C-1127 (PK-522).........................................................................................................................................................K-168
2.9.3 C-1132 (PK-512/513)..................................................................................................................................................K-169
2.9.4 C-1132 (PK-522).........................................................................................................................................................K-169
2.9.5 C-1137 (FS-531/612) .................................................................................................................................................K-170
2.9.6 C-1137 (FS-532).........................................................................................................................................................K-170
2.9.7 C-1141 (FS-532).........................................................................................................................................................K-170
2.9.8 C-1144 (FS-532).........................................................................................................................................................K-171
2.9.9 C-1147 (FS-532).........................................................................................................................................................K-171
2.9.10 C-1153 (FS-532).......................................................................................................................................................K-172
2.9.11 C-1154 (FS-532).......................................................................................................................................................K-172
2.9.12 C-1155 (FS-532).......................................................................................................................................................K-173
2.9.13 C-1156 (FS-532).......................................................................................................................................................K-173
2.9.14 C-1157 (FS-532).......................................................................................................................................................K-174
2.9.15 C-1158 (FS-532).......................................................................................................................................................K-174
2.9.16 C-1159 (FS-532).......................................................................................................................................................K-174
2.9.17 C-1170 (FS-532).......................................................................................................................................................K-175
2.9.18 C-1171 (FS-532).......................................................................................................................................................K-175
2.9.19 C-1172 (FS-532).......................................................................................................................................................K-176
2.9.20 C-1173.......................................................................................................................................................................K-176
2.9.21 C-1174.......................................................................................................................................................................K-177
2.9.22 C-1175.......................................................................................................................................................................K-177
2.9.23 C-1176.......................................................................................................................................................................K-178
2.9.24 C-1177.......................................................................................................................................................................K-178
2.9.25 C-1179 (FS-532).......................................................................................................................................................K-179
2.9.26 C-1180.......................................................................................................................................................................K-179
xxxvi
2.9.27 C-1181.......................................................................................................................................................................K-179
2.9.28 C-1201 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-180
2.9.29 C-1202 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-180
2.9.30 C-1203 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-181
2.9.31 C-1204 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-181
2.9.32 C-1205 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-182
2.9.33 C-1206 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-182
2.9.34 C-1211 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-183
2.9.35 C-1212 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-183
2.9.36 C-1213 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-184
2.9.37 C-1214 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-184
2.9.38 C-1215 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-185
2.9.39 C-1216 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-185
2.9.40 C-1221 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-185
2.9.41 C-1222 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-186
2.9.42 C-1223 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-186
2.9.43 C-1224 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-187
2.9.44 C-1225 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-187
2.9.45 C-1226 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-188
2.9.46 C-1227 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-188
2.9.47 C-1228 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-189
2.9.48 C-1229 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-189
2.9.49 C-1230 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-190
2.10 Solution 6 (C-1231_1270) ..................................................................................................................................................K-190
2.10.1 C-1231 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-190
2.10.2 C-1232 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-191
2.10.3 C-1233 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-191
2.10.4 C-1234 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-191
2.10.5 C-1235 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-192
2.10.6 C-1241 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-192
2.10.7 C-1242 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-193
2.10.8 C-1242.......................................................................................................................................................................K-193
2.10.9 C-1243 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-194
2.10.10 C-1243.....................................................................................................................................................................K-194
2.10.11 C-1244 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-195
2.10.12 C-1244.....................................................................................................................................................................K-195
2.10.13 C-1245 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-196
2.10.14 C-1245.....................................................................................................................................................................K-196
2.10.15 C-1246 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-197
2.10.16 C-1246.....................................................................................................................................................................K-198
2.10.17 C-1247 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-198
2.10.18 C-1247.....................................................................................................................................................................K-199
2.10.19 C-1248 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-199
2.10.20 C-1248.....................................................................................................................................................................K-200
2.10.21 C-1249 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-200
2.10.22 C-1249.....................................................................................................................................................................K-201
2.10.23 C-1250 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-201
2.10.24 C-1250.....................................................................................................................................................................K-202
2.10.25 C-1251 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-202
2.10.26 C-1251.....................................................................................................................................................................K-203
2.10.27 C-1252 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-203
2.10.28 C-1252.....................................................................................................................................................................K-204
2.10.29 C-1253 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-205
2.10.30 C-1253.....................................................................................................................................................................K-205
2.10.31 C-1254 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-206
2.10.32 C-1254.....................................................................................................................................................................K-206
2.10.33 C-1255 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-207
2.10.34 C-1256 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-207
2.10.35 C-1256.....................................................................................................................................................................K-208
2.10.36 C-1257 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-208
2.10.37 C-1258 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-209
2.10.38 C-1258.....................................................................................................................................................................K-209
2.10.39 C-1259 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-210
2.10.40 C-1259.....................................................................................................................................................................K-211
2.10.41 C-1260 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-211
2.10.42 C-1260.....................................................................................................................................................................K-212
2.10.43 C-1261 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-212
2.10.44 C-1261.....................................................................................................................................................................K-213
2.10.45 C-1262 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-213
2.10.46 C-1262.....................................................................................................................................................................K-213
xxxvii
2.10.47 C-1263 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-214
2.10.48 C-1263.....................................................................................................................................................................K-214
2.10.49 C-1264 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-215
2.10.50 C-1264.....................................................................................................................................................................K-215
2.10.51 C-1265 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-216
2.10.52 C-1265.....................................................................................................................................................................K-216
2.10.53 C-1266 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-217
2.10.54 C-1266.....................................................................................................................................................................K-217
2.10.55 C-1267 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-218
2.10.56 C-1267.....................................................................................................................................................................K-218
2.10.57 C-1268 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-219
2.10.58 C-1268.....................................................................................................................................................................K-219
2.10.59 C-1269 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-220
2.10.60 C-1269.....................................................................................................................................................................K-220
2.10.61 C-1270 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-221
2.10.62 C-1270.....................................................................................................................................................................K-221
2.11 Solution 7 (C-1271_1400) ..................................................................................................................................................K-222
2.11.1 C-1271 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-222
2.11.2 C-1271.......................................................................................................................................................................K-222
2.11.3 C-1272 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-223
2.11.4 C-1272.......................................................................................................................................................................K-223
2.11.5 C-1273 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-224
2.11.6 C-1273.......................................................................................................................................................................K-224
2.11.7 C-1274.......................................................................................................................................................................K-225
2.11.8 C-1275 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-225
2.11.9 C-1275.......................................................................................................................................................................K-225
2.11.10 C-1276.....................................................................................................................................................................K-226
2.11.11 C-1277.....................................................................................................................................................................K-226
2.11.12 C-1278.....................................................................................................................................................................K-227
2.11.13 C-1279.....................................................................................................................................................................K-227
2.11.14 C-1280.....................................................................................................................................................................K-228
2.11.15 C-1281.....................................................................................................................................................................K-229
2.11.16 C-1282.....................................................................................................................................................................K-229
2.11.17 C-1290 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-229
2.11.18 C-1291 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-230
2.11.19 C-1292 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-230
2.11.20 C-1293 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-230
2.11.21 C-1294 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-231
2.11.22 C-1295 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-231
2.11.23 C-1296 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-232
2.11.24 C-1297 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-232
2.11.25 C-1298 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-233
2.11.26 C-1299 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-233
2.11.27 C-1301 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-234
2.11.28 C-1302 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-234
2.11.29 C-1303 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-234
2.11.30 C-1304 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-235
2.11.31 C-1305 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-235
2.11.32 C-1306 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-235
2.11.33 C-1307 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-236
2.11.34 C-1308 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-236
2.11.35 C-1309 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-236
2.11.36 C-1310 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-237
2.11.37 C-1311 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-237
2.11.38 C-1312.....................................................................................................................................................................K-237
2.11.39 C-1313.....................................................................................................................................................................K-238
2.11.40 C-1330 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-238
2.11.41 C-1331 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-239
2.11.42 C-1332 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-239
2.11.43 C-1333 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-240
2.11.44 C-1334 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-240
2.11.45 C-1341.....................................................................................................................................................................K-240
2.11.46 C-1342.....................................................................................................................................................................K-241
2.11.47 C-1351 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-241
2.11.48 C-1352 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-241
2.11.49 C-1353 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-242
2.11.50 C-1354 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-242
2.11.51 C-1355 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-242
2.11.52 C-1356 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-243
2.11.53 C-1357 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-243
xxxviii
2.11.54 C-1358 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-244
2.11.55 C-1359 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-244
2.11.56 C-1360 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-245
2.11.57 C-1361 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-245
2.11.58 C-1364 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-245
2.12 Solution 8 (C-1401_1500)...................................................................................................................................................K-246
2.12.1 C-1402 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-246
2.12.2 C-1403 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-246
2.12.3 C-1404 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-246
2.12.4 C-1404.......................................................................................................................................................................K-247
2.12.5 C-1406 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-247
2.12.6 C-1407 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-247
2.12.7 C-1408.......................................................................................................................................................................K-248
2.12.8 C-1411 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-248
2.12.9 C-1412.......................................................................................................................................................................K-248
2.12.10 C-1413.....................................................................................................................................................................K-249
2.12.11 C-1431 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-249
2.12.12 C-1432 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-249
2.12.13 C-1433 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-250
2.12.14 C-1433.....................................................................................................................................................................K-250
2.12.15 C-1435 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-250
2.12.16 C-1436 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-251
2.12.17 C-1437 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-251
2.12.18 C-1438 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-251
2.12.19 C-1439.....................................................................................................................................................................K-251
2.12.20 C-1440 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-252
2.12.21 C-1441 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-252
2.12.22 C-1442.....................................................................................................................................................................K-253
2.12.23 C-1451 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-253
2.12.24 C-1452 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-253
2.12.25 C-1454 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-254
2.12.26 C-1455 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-254
2.12.27 C-1456.....................................................................................................................................................................K-254
2.12.28 C-1480.....................................................................................................................................................................K-254
2.12.29 C-1499.....................................................................................................................................................................K-255
2.13 Solution 9 (C-1501_1539) ..................................................................................................................................................K-255
2.13.1 C-1501 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-255
2.13.2 C-1502 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-256
2.13.3 C-1504 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-256
2.13.4 C-1505 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-257
2.13.5 C-1506 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-257
2.13.6 C-1507 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-258
2.13.7 C-1508 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-258
2.13.8 C-1509 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-258
2.13.9 C-1510 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-259
2.13.10 C-1511 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-259
2.13.11 C-1512 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-260
2.13.12 C-1513 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-260
2.13.13 C-1514 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-261
2.13.14 C-1515 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-261
2.13.15 C-1516 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-262
2.13.16 C-1517 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-262
2.13.17 C-1518 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-263
2.13.18 C-1519 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-263
2.13.19 C-1520 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-263
2.13.20 C-1521 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-264
2.13.21 C-1522 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-264
2.13.22 C-1523 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-265
2.13.23 C-1524 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-265
2.13.24 C-1525 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-266
2.13.25 C-1526 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-266
2.13.26 C-1527 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-267
2.13.27 C-1528 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-267
2.13.28 C-1530 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-268
2.13.29 C-1531 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-268
2.13.30 C-1532 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-268
2.13.31 C-1534 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-269
2.13.32 C-1537 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-269
2.13.33 C-1538 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-270
2.14 Solution 10 (C-1540_1633).................................................................................................................................................K-270
xxxix
2.14.1 C-1540 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-270
2.14.2 C-1541 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-271
2.14.3 C-1542 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-271
2.14.4 C-1543 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-272
2.14.5 C-1544 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-272
2.14.6 C-1545 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-273
2.14.7 C-1546 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-274
2.14.8 C-1547 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-274
2.14.9 C-1548.......................................................................................................................................................................K-275
2.14.10 C-1549 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-275
2.14.11 C-1550 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-276
2.14.12 C-1551 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-276
2.14.13 C-1552 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-277
2.14.14 C-1553 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-277
2.14.15 C-1554 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-278
2.14.16 C-1555 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-278
2.14.17 C-1556 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-279
2.14.18 C-1557 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-279
2.14.19 C-1558 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-280
2.14.20 C-1559 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-280
2.14.21 C-1560 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-281
2.14.22 C-1561 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-281
2.14.23 C-1562 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-282
2.14.24 C-1565 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-283
2.14.25 C-1566 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-283
2.14.26 C-1567 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-283
2.14.27 C-1620.....................................................................................................................................................................K-284
2.14.28 C-1621.....................................................................................................................................................................K-284
2.14.29 C-1622.....................................................................................................................................................................K-285
2.14.30 C-1623.....................................................................................................................................................................K-285
2.14.31 C-1625.....................................................................................................................................................................K-286
2.14.32 C-1626.....................................................................................................................................................................K-286
2.14.33 C-1627.....................................................................................................................................................................K-287
2.14.34 C-1628.....................................................................................................................................................................K-287
2.14.35 C-1629.....................................................................................................................................................................K-288
2.14.36 C-1630.....................................................................................................................................................................K-288
2.14.37 C-1632.....................................................................................................................................................................K-288
2.14.38 C-1633.....................................................................................................................................................................K-289
2.15 Solution 11 (C-2001_2400).................................................................................................................................................K-290
2.15.1 C-2001.......................................................................................................................................................................K-290
2.15.2 C-2004.......................................................................................................................................................................K-290
2.15.3 C-2201.......................................................................................................................................................................K-290
2.15.4 C-2202.......................................................................................................................................................................K-291
2.15.5 C-2203.......................................................................................................................................................................K-291
2.15.6 C-2204.......................................................................................................................................................................K-291
2.15.7 C-2211.......................................................................................................................................................................K-292
2.15.8 C-2212.......................................................................................................................................................................K-292
2.15.9 C-2213.......................................................................................................................................................................K-292
2.15.10 C-2214.....................................................................................................................................................................K-293
2.15.11 C-2220.....................................................................................................................................................................K-293
2.15.12 C-2221.....................................................................................................................................................................K-294
2.15.13 C-2222.....................................................................................................................................................................K-294
2.15.14 C-2223.....................................................................................................................................................................K-295
2.15.15 C-2224.....................................................................................................................................................................K-295
2.15.16 C-2225.....................................................................................................................................................................K-295
2.15.17 C-2302*...................................................................................................................................................................K-296
2.15.18 C-2303*...................................................................................................................................................................K-296
2.15.19 C-2304*...................................................................................................................................................................K-296
2.15.20 C-2305*...................................................................................................................................................................K-297
2.15.21 C-2306*...................................................................................................................................................................K-297
2.15.22 C-2307*...................................................................................................................................................................K-297
2.16 Solution 12 (C-2401_2500).................................................................................................................................................K-298
2.16.1 C-2401.......................................................................................................................................................................K-298
2.16.2 C-2402.......................................................................................................................................................................K-298
2.16.3 C-2403.......................................................................................................................................................................K-298
2.16.4 C-2404.......................................................................................................................................................................K-299
2.16.5 C-2431.......................................................................................................................................................................K-299
2.16.6 C-2432.......................................................................................................................................................................K-300
2.16.7 C-2433.......................................................................................................................................................................K-300
2.16.8 C-2434.......................................................................................................................................................................K-300
xl
2.16.9 C-2441.......................................................................................................................................................................K-301
2.16.10 C-2442.....................................................................................................................................................................K-301
2.16.11 C-2443.....................................................................................................................................................................K-301
2.16.12 C-2444.....................................................................................................................................................................K-302
2.16.13 C-2451.....................................................................................................................................................................K-302
2.16.14 C-2452.....................................................................................................................................................................K-303
2.16.15 C-2453.....................................................................................................................................................................K-303
2.16.16 C-2454.....................................................................................................................................................................K-303
2.16.17 C-2455.....................................................................................................................................................................K-304
2.16.18 C-2456.....................................................................................................................................................................K-304
2.16.19 C-2457.....................................................................................................................................................................K-305
2.16.20 C-2458.....................................................................................................................................................................K-305
2.16.21 C-2470 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-306
2.17 Solution 13 (C-2701_2800).................................................................................................................................................K-306
2.17.1 C-2701.......................................................................................................................................................................K-306
2.17.2 C-2702.......................................................................................................................................................................K-306
2.17.3 C-2703.......................................................................................................................................................................K-307
2.17.4 C-2704.......................................................................................................................................................................K-307
2.17.5 C-2711.......................................................................................................................................................................K-307
2.17.6 C-2712.......................................................................................................................................................................K-308
2.17.7 C-2713.......................................................................................................................................................................K-308
2.17.8 C-2714.......................................................................................................................................................................K-309
2.17.9 C-2720.......................................................................................................................................................................K-309
2.17.10 C-2721.....................................................................................................................................................................K-309
2.18 Solution 14 (C-2801_3000).................................................................................................................................................K-310
2.18.1 C-2801.......................................................................................................................................................................K-310
2.18.2 C-2802.......................................................................................................................................................................K-310
2.18.3 C-2803.......................................................................................................................................................................K-310
2.18.4 C-2804.......................................................................................................................................................................K-311
2.18.5 C-2811.......................................................................................................................................................................K-311
2.18.6 C-2812.......................................................................................................................................................................K-312
2.18.7 C-2813.......................................................................................................................................................................K-312
2.18.8 C-2814.......................................................................................................................................................................K-313
2.18.9 C-2821.......................................................................................................................................................................K-313
2.18.10 C-2822.....................................................................................................................................................................K-313
2.18.11 C-2823.....................................................................................................................................................................K-314
2.18.12 C-2824.....................................................................................................................................................................K-314
2.18.13 C-2831.....................................................................................................................................................................K-315
2.18.14 C-2832.....................................................................................................................................................................K-315
2.18.15 C-2833.....................................................................................................................................................................K-315
2.18.16 C-2834.....................................................................................................................................................................K-316
2.18.17 C-2840.....................................................................................................................................................................K-316
2.18.18 C-2841.....................................................................................................................................................................K-317
2.19 Solution 15 (C-3001_3500).................................................................................................................................................K-317
2.19.1 C-3101.......................................................................................................................................................................K-317
2.19.2 C-3102.......................................................................................................................................................................K-318
2.19.3 C-3103.......................................................................................................................................................................K-318
2.19.4 C-3104.......................................................................................................................................................................K-318
2.19.5 C-3105.......................................................................................................................................................................K-319
2.19.6 C-3301*.....................................................................................................................................................................K-319
2.19.7 C-3302*.....................................................................................................................................................................K-320
2.19.8 C-3303.......................................................................................................................................................................K-320
2.19.9 C-3304*.....................................................................................................................................................................K-320
2.19.10 C-3305*...................................................................................................................................................................K-321
2.19.11 C-3307*...................................................................................................................................................................K-321
2.19.12 C-3308*...................................................................................................................................................................K-321
2.20 Solution 16 (C-3501_4000).................................................................................................................................................K-322
2.20.1 C-3501 *....................................................................................................................................................................K-322
2.20.2 C-3502 *....................................................................................................................................................................K-322
2.20.3 C-3503 *....................................................................................................................................................................K-323
2.20.4 C-3504 *....................................................................................................................................................................K-323
2.20.5 C-3508*.....................................................................................................................................................................K-324
2.20.6 C-3509*.....................................................................................................................................................................K-325
2.20.7 C-3510*.....................................................................................................................................................................K-325
2.20.8 C-3511*.....................................................................................................................................................................K-326
2.20.9 C-3512*.....................................................................................................................................................................K-327
2.20.10 C-3513*...................................................................................................................................................................K-327
2.20.11 C-3515*...................................................................................................................................................................K-328
2.20.12 C-3517*...................................................................................................................................................................K-329
2.20.13 C-3518*...................................................................................................................................................................K-329
xli
2.20.14 C-3519*...................................................................................................................................................................K-330
2.20.15 C-3801*...................................................................................................................................................................K-331
2.20.16 C-3802*...................................................................................................................................................................K-331
2.20.17 C-3803*...................................................................................................................................................................K-332
2.20.18 C-3807*...................................................................................................................................................................K-332
2.20.19 C-3901*...................................................................................................................................................................K-333
2.20.20 C-3902*...................................................................................................................................................................K-334
2.20.21 C-3903*...................................................................................................................................................................K-334
2.20.22 C-3904*...................................................................................................................................................................K-335
2.20.23 C-3905*...................................................................................................................................................................K-335
2.20.24 C-3906*...................................................................................................................................................................K-336
2.20.25 C-3907*...................................................................................................................................................................K-337
2.20.26 C-3908*...................................................................................................................................................................K-337
2.20.27 C-3909*...................................................................................................................................................................K-338
2.20.28 C-3910*...................................................................................................................................................................K-338
2.20.29 C-3911*...................................................................................................................................................................K-339
2.20.30 C-3912*...................................................................................................................................................................K-340
2.20.31 C-3913*...................................................................................................................................................................K-340
2.20.32 C-3917*...................................................................................................................................................................K-341
2.21 Solution 17 (C-4001_5000).................................................................................................................................................K-341
2.21.1 C-4101.......................................................................................................................................................................K-341
2.21.2 C-4102.......................................................................................................................................................................K-342
2.21.3 C-4103.......................................................................................................................................................................K-342
2.21.4 C-4104.......................................................................................................................................................................K-342
2.21.5 C-4501.......................................................................................................................................................................K-343
2.21.6 C-4502.......................................................................................................................................................................K-343
2.21.7 C-4503.......................................................................................................................................................................K-344
2.21.8 C-4504.......................................................................................................................................................................K-344
2.21.9 C-4505.......................................................................................................................................................................K-344
2.21.10 C-4506.....................................................................................................................................................................K-345
2.21.11 C-4507.....................................................................................................................................................................K-345
2.21.12 C-4508.....................................................................................................................................................................K-346
2.21.13 C-4511.....................................................................................................................................................................K-346
2.21.14 C-4512.....................................................................................................................................................................K-347
2.21.15 C-4513.....................................................................................................................................................................K-347
2.21.16 C-4514.....................................................................................................................................................................K-347
2.21.17 C-4515.....................................................................................................................................................................K-348
2.21.18 C-4516.....................................................................................................................................................................K-348
2.21.19 C-4517.....................................................................................................................................................................K-348
2.21.20 C-4518.....................................................................................................................................................................K-349
2.21.21 C-4520.....................................................................................................................................................................K-349
2.21.22 C-4521.....................................................................................................................................................................K-350
2.21.23 C-4522.....................................................................................................................................................................K-350
2.21.24 C-4601.....................................................................................................................................................................K-350
2.21.25 C-4602.....................................................................................................................................................................K-351
2.21.26 C-4603.....................................................................................................................................................................K-351
2.21.27 C-4604.....................................................................................................................................................................K-352
2.21.28 C-4611.....................................................................................................................................................................K-352
2.21.29 C-4612.....................................................................................................................................................................K-353
2.21.30 C-4613.....................................................................................................................................................................K-353
2.21.31 C-4614.....................................................................................................................................................................K-353
2.21.32 C-4631.....................................................................................................................................................................K-354
2.21.33 C-4632.....................................................................................................................................................................K-354
2.21.34 C-4633.....................................................................................................................................................................K-355
2.21.35 C-4634.....................................................................................................................................................................K-355
2.21.36 C-4641.....................................................................................................................................................................K-356
2.21.37 C-4642.....................................................................................................................................................................K-356
2.21.38 C-4643.....................................................................................................................................................................K-356
2.21.39 C-4644.....................................................................................................................................................................K-357
2.21.40 C-4661.....................................................................................................................................................................K-357
2.21.41 C-4662.....................................................................................................................................................................K-358
2.21.42 C-4663.....................................................................................................................................................................K-358
2.21.43 C-4705.....................................................................................................................................................................K-358
2.21.44 C-4709.....................................................................................................................................................................K-359
2.21.45 C-4713.....................................................................................................................................................................K-359
2.21.46 C-4714 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-359
2.21.47 C-4715 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-360
2.21.48 C-4716 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-360
2.21.49 C-4717 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-360
2.21.50 C-4718.....................................................................................................................................................................K-361
xlii
2.21.51 C-4719.....................................................................................................................................................................K-361
2.21.52 C-4720.....................................................................................................................................................................K-361
2.21.53 C-4721.....................................................................................................................................................................K-362
2.21.54 C-4722 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-362
2.21.55 C-4723 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-362
2.21.56 C-4724 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-363
2.21.57 C-4725 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-363
2.21.58 C-4726.....................................................................................................................................................................K-363
2.21.59 C-4727.....................................................................................................................................................................K-364
2.21.60 C-4728.....................................................................................................................................................................K-364
2.21.61 C-4840 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-364
2.21.62 C-4850*...................................................................................................................................................................K-365
2.22 Solution 18 (C-5001_6000).................................................................................................................................................K-365
2.22.1 C-5001.......................................................................................................................................................................K-365
2.22.2 C-5002 *....................................................................................................................................................................K-365
2.22.3 C-5003.......................................................................................................................................................................K-366
2.22.4 C-5006.......................................................................................................................................................................K-366
2.22.5 C-5007.......................................................................................................................................................................K-366
2.22.6 C-5010 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-367
2.22.7 C-5014.......................................................................................................................................................................K-367
2.22.8 C-5025.......................................................................................................................................................................K-368
2.22.9 C-5100.......................................................................................................................................................................K-368
2.22.10 C-5101.....................................................................................................................................................................K-368
2.22.11 C-5121.....................................................................................................................................................................K-369
2.22.12 C-5301*...................................................................................................................................................................K-369
2.22.13 C-5305*...................................................................................................................................................................K-369
2.22.14 C-5307*...................................................................................................................................................................K-370
2.22.15 C-5309*...................................................................................................................................................................K-370
2.22.16 C-5310*...................................................................................................................................................................K-370
2.22.17 C-5311*...................................................................................................................................................................K-371
2.22.18 C-5401.....................................................................................................................................................................K-371
2.22.19 C-5402.....................................................................................................................................................................K-371
2.22.20 C-5403.....................................................................................................................................................................K-372
2.22.21 C-5404.....................................................................................................................................................................K-372
2.23 Solution 19 (C-6001_7000).................................................................................................................................................K-372
2.23.1 C-6102.......................................................................................................................................................................K-372
2.23.2 C-6103.......................................................................................................................................................................K-373
2.23.3 C-6104.......................................................................................................................................................................K-373
2.23.4 C-6105.......................................................................................................................................................................K-374
2.23.5 C-6401.......................................................................................................................................................................K-374
2.23.6 C-6702.......................................................................................................................................................................K-374
2.23.7 C-6703.......................................................................................................................................................................K-375
2.23.8 C-6704.......................................................................................................................................................................K-375
2.23.9 C-6706.......................................................................................................................................................................K-375
2.23.10 C-6720 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-376
2.23.11 C-6725.....................................................................................................................................................................K-376
2.23.12 C-6751.....................................................................................................................................................................K-376
2.23.13 C-6801 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-377
2.23.14 C-6802.....................................................................................................................................................................K-377
2.23.15 C-6F01....................................................................................................................................................................K-377
2.24 Solution 20 (C-7001_9999).................................................................................................................................................K-378
2.24.1 C-7001 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-378
2.24.2 C-8001.......................................................................................................................................................................K-378
2.24.3 C-8002.......................................................................................................................................................................K-378
2.24.4 C-8101.......................................................................................................................................................................K-379
2.24.5 C-8102.......................................................................................................................................................................K-379
2.24.6 C-8103.......................................................................................................................................................................K-379
2.24.7 C-8106.......................................................................................................................................................................K-380
2.24.8 C-8107.......................................................................................................................................................................K-380
2.24.9 C-8302.......................................................................................................................................................................K-381
2.24.10 C-8401.....................................................................................................................................................................K-381
2.24.11 C-9401.....................................................................................................................................................................K-381
2.24.12 C-9402.....................................................................................................................................................................K-382
2.25 Solution 20 (C-C001_C200)................................................................................................................................................K-382
2.25.1 C-C101 .....................................................................................................................................................................K-382
2.25.2 C-C102 .....................................................................................................................................................................K-383
2.25.3 C-C104 .....................................................................................................................................................................K-383
2.25.4 C-C109 .....................................................................................................................................................................K-383
2.25.5 C-C111 .....................................................................................................................................................................K-384
2.25.6 C-C112 .....................................................................................................................................................................K-384
xliii
2.25.7 C-C113 .....................................................................................................................................................................K-384
2.25.8 C-C114 .....................................................................................................................................................................K-385
2.25.9 C-C114......................................................................................................................................................................K-385
2.25.10 C-C116 ...................................................................................................................................................................K-385
2.25.11 C-C117....................................................................................................................................................................K-386
2.25.12 C-C118....................................................................................................................................................................K-386
2.25.13 C-C119 ...................................................................................................................................................................K-386
2.25.14 C-C120 ...................................................................................................................................................................K-387
2.25.15 C-C121....................................................................................................................................................................K-387
2.25.16 C-C123....................................................................................................................................................................K-387
2.25.17 C-C124....................................................................................................................................................................K-388
2.25.18 C-C131....................................................................................................................................................................K-388
2.25.19 C-C132....................................................................................................................................................................K-388
2.25.20 C-C136....................................................................................................................................................................K-389
2.25.21 C-C137....................................................................................................................................................................K-389
2.25.22 C-C138....................................................................................................................................................................K-389
2.25.23 C-C139....................................................................................................................................................................K-389
2.25.24 C-C140....................................................................................................................................................................K-390
2.25.25 C-C150....................................................................................................................................................................K-390
2.25.26 C-C151....................................................................................................................................................................K-390
2.25.27 C-C152....................................................................................................................................................................K-391
2.25.28 C-C156....................................................................................................................................................................K-391
2.25.29 C-C170....................................................................................................................................................................K-391
2.26 Solution 22 (C-C201_E100)................................................................................................................................................K-391
2.26.1 C-D010......................................................................................................................................................................K-391
2.26.2 C-D020......................................................................................................................................................................K-392
2.26.3 C-D030......................................................................................................................................................................K-392
2.26.4 C-D040......................................................................................................................................................................K-393
2.26.5 C-D050......................................................................................................................................................................K-394
2.26.6 C-D060......................................................................................................................................................................K-394
2.26.7 C-D070......................................................................................................................................................................K-395
2.26.8 C-D080......................................................................................................................................................................K-395
2.26.9 C-D0C0.....................................................................................................................................................................K-396
2.26.10 C-D0D0...................................................................................................................................................................K-396
2.26.11 C-D0D1...................................................................................................................................................................K-397
2.26.12 C-D0E1....................................................................................................................................................................K-397
2.26.13 C-D0E3....................................................................................................................................................................K-398
2.26.14 C-D0E4....................................................................................................................................................................K-398
2.26.15 C-D0E5....................................................................................................................................................................K-398
2.26.16 C-D0E8....................................................................................................................................................................K-399
2.26.17 C-D0EF...................................................................................................................................................................K-399
2.26.18 C-D0F0....................................................................................................................................................................K-400
2.26.19 C-D0F1....................................................................................................................................................................K-400
2.26.20 C-D0F5....................................................................................................................................................................K-400
2.26.21 C-D0F6....................................................................................................................................................................K-401
2.26.22 C-D0F8....................................................................................................................................................................K-401
2.26.23 C-E001....................................................................................................................................................................K-401
2.26.24 C-E002....................................................................................................................................................................K-402
2.26.25 C-E003....................................................................................................................................................................K-402
2.26.26 C-E004....................................................................................................................................................................K-402
2.26.27 C-E005....................................................................................................................................................................K-403
2.26.28 C-E006....................................................................................................................................................................K-403
2.26.29 C-E007....................................................................................................................................................................K-404
2.26.30 C-E008 ...................................................................................................................................................................K-404
2.26.31 C-E009....................................................................................................................................................................K-404
2.26.32 C-E012....................................................................................................................................................................K-405
2.26.33 C-E013....................................................................................................................................................................K-405
2.26.34 C-E014....................................................................................................................................................................K-405
2.26.35 C-E015....................................................................................................................................................................K-405
2.26.36 C-E017....................................................................................................................................................................K-406
2.26.37 C-E018....................................................................................................................................................................K-406
3. TROUBLES THAT DO NOT DISPLAY THE MALFUNCTION CODE.....................................................................K-407
3.1 The power of main body does not become active.................................................................................................................K-407
3.1.1 Activate the main power switch but the power LED of the operation panel does not light up in red...........................K-407
3.1.2 Activate the main power switch and the sub power switch, but the touch panel does not display anything...............K-407
3.1.3 Activate the sub power switch but the power LED does not switch from red to green................................................K-408
3.1.4 The operation panel stops on the "Please wait starting system" screen.....................................................................K-408
3.2 The power is not supplied to DF............................................................................................................................................K-408
3.3 The power is not supplied to the paper feed option...............................................................................................................K-408
3.3.1 PF-602m......................................................................................................................................................................K-408
xliv
3.3.2 PF-707.........................................................................................................................................................................K-409
3.3.3 LU-202 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-409
3.4 The power is not supplied to the finishing option...................................................................................................................K-410
3.4.1 RU-509 .......................................................................................................................................................................K-410
3.4.2 RU-510........................................................................................................................................................................K-410
3.4.3 FS-531 /FS-612...........................................................................................................................................................K-410
3.4.4 FS-532.........................................................................................................................................................................K-410
3.4.5 LS-505/LS-506............................................................................................................................................................K-411
3.4.6 FD-503 .......................................................................................................................................................................K-411
3.4.7 SD-506 .......................................................................................................................................................................K-411
3.4.8 SD-513........................................................................................................................................................................K-412
3.4.9 PB-503 .......................................................................................................................................................................K-412
3.4.10 GP-501......................................................................................................................................................................K-413
4. IMAGE TROUBLE...................................................................................................................................................K-414
4.1 Outline of solution..................................................................................................................................................................K-414
4.1.1 Test pattern print.........................................................................................................................................................K-414
4.2 Solution..................................................................................................................................................................................K-415
4.2.1 Image trouble sample illustrations...............................................................................................................................K-415
4.2.2 White line 1, white band 1, color stripe 1, color band 1...............................................................................................K-416
4.2.3 White line 2, white band 2, color stripe 2, color band 2...............................................................................................K-418
4.2.4 Uneven density 1.........................................................................................................................................................K-420
4.2.5 Uneven density 2.........................................................................................................................................................K-423
4.2.6 Gradation error............................................................................................................................................................K-426
4.2.7 Inky backside...............................................................................................................................................................K-427
4.2.8 Color reproduction error..............................................................................................................................................K-428
4.2.9 Color registration error................................................................................................................................................K-428
4.2.10 Gray background.......................................................................................................................................................K-429
4.2.11 Low image density.....................................................................................................................................................K-431
4.2.12 Color spots................................................................................................................................................................K-435
4.2.13 White spots, void areas.............................................................................................................................................K-437
4.2.14 Blurry white spots, blurry color spots.........................................................................................................................K-440
4.2.15 Image erasure at leading edge, image erasure at trailing edge................................................................................K-440
4.2.16 Thick paper leading edge repelling, Thick paper trailing edge repelling...................................................................K-441
4.2.17 Blank print, black print...............................................................................................................................................K-442
4.2.18 Ripple unevenness (solid images of R, B, G)............................................................................................................K-443
4.2.19 Moire.........................................................................................................................................................................K-443
4.2.20 Uneven gloss, trails of rollers....................................................................................................................................K-444
4.2.21 Image memory, size memory....................................................................................................................................K-445
4.2.22 Darker at trailing edge, faint at leading edge.............................................................................................................K-446
4.2.23 Pitch unevenness......................................................................................................................................................K-446
4.2.24 Periodical white dot, color dot...................................................................................................................................K-447
4.2.25 Poor fusing performance, offset................................................................................................................................K-448
4.2.26 Blurred image............................................................................................................................................................K-449
4.2.27 Brush effect, image bleeding.....................................................................................................................................K-450
4.2.28 Paper crease, bleeding.............................................................................................................................................K-451
4.2.29 Developing ghost.......................................................................................................................................................K-452
4.2.30 Image skew...............................................................................................................................................................K-453
4.2.31 Image distortion.........................................................................................................................................................K-453
4.2.32 ACS abnormality.......................................................................................................................................................K-454
4.2.33 Image abnormality.....................................................................................................................................................K-454
4.2.34 The density differs between the original and copy outputs.......................................................................................K-455
4.2.35 The color differs between the original and copy outputs...........................................................................................K-456
5. IC PROTECTOR.....................................................................................................................................................K-458
5.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................K-458
5.2 IC protector list......................................................................................................................................................................K-458
5.2.1 bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060............................................................................................................K-458
5.2.2 PF-602m, HT-504........................................................................................................................................................K-460
5.2.3 PF-707, HT-506...........................................................................................................................................................K-461
5.2.4 LU-202.........................................................................................................................................................................K-463
5.2.5 RU-509, HM-102.........................................................................................................................................................K-463
5.2.6 FS-531.........................................................................................................................................................................K-464
5.2.7 FS-612.........................................................................................................................................................................K-465
5.2.8 PI-502..........................................................................................................................................................................K-466
5.2.9 FS-532.........................................................................................................................................................................K-466
5.2.10 SD-510......................................................................................................................................................................K-467
5.2.11 PK-522......................................................................................................................................................................K-467
5.2.12 LS-505.......................................................................................................................................................................K-467
5.2.13 LS-506.......................................................................................................................................................................K-468
5.2.14 FD-503......................................................................................................................................................................K-469
5.2.15 SD-506......................................................................................................................................................................K-470
xlv
5.2.16 SD-513......................................................................................................................................................................K-471
5.2.17 TU-503......................................................................................................................................................................K-472
5.2.18 FD-504......................................................................................................................................................................K-472
5.2.19 PB-503......................................................................................................................................................................K-472
5.3 IC protector location..............................................................................................................................................................K-475
5.3.1 bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060............................................................................................................K-475
5.3.2 PF-602m, HT-504........................................................................................................................................................K-477
5.3.3 PF-707, HT-506...........................................................................................................................................................K-478
5.3.4 LU-202.........................................................................................................................................................................K-479
5.3.5 RU-509, HM-102.........................................................................................................................................................K-479
5.3.6 FS-531.........................................................................................................................................................................K-481
5.3.7 FS-612.........................................................................................................................................................................K-482
5.3.8 PI-502..........................................................................................................................................................................K-483
5.3.9 FS-532.........................................................................................................................................................................K-483
5.3.10 SD-510......................................................................................................................................................................K-484
5.3.11 PK-522......................................................................................................................................................................K-484
5.3.12 LS-505.......................................................................................................................................................................K-485
5.3.13 LS-506.......................................................................................................................................................................K-485
5.3.14 SD-506......................................................................................................................................................................K-486
5.3.15 SD-513......................................................................................................................................................................K-487
5.3.16 TU-503......................................................................................................................................................................K-488
5.3.17 FD-504......................................................................................................................................................................K-488
6. TROUBLESHOOTING (IC-602)..............................................................................................................................K-489
6.1 IC malfunction code list.........................................................................................................................................................K-489
6.2 IC solution..............................................................................................................................................................................K-489
6.2.1 00-001.........................................................................................................................................................................K-489
6.2.2 00-002.........................................................................................................................................................................K-489
6.2.3 01-001.........................................................................................................................................................................K-490
6.2.4 01-002.........................................................................................................................................................................K-490
7. TROUBLESHOOTING (GP-501)............................................................................................................................K-491
7.1 TROUBLESHOOTING (GP-501)...........................................................................................................................................K-491
7.2 Troubleshooting.....................................................................................................................................................................K-491
7.2.1 Troubleshooting...........................................................................................................................................................K-491
7.2.2 General........................................................................................................................................................................K-491
7.2.3 Back Gauge.................................................................................................................................................................K-492
7.2.4 Die Set.........................................................................................................................................................................K-492
7.3 Initial Service Action..............................................................................................................................................................K-492
7.3.1 Initial Service Action....................................................................................................................................................K-492
7.4 Mis-Feed Service Action........................................................................................................................................................K-492
7.4.1 Mis-Feed Service Action.............................................................................................................................................K-492
7.5 Final Service Action...............................................................................................................................................................K-495
7.5.1 Final Service Action.....................................................................................................................................................K-495
8. OTHER ABNORMALITIES (ERROR CODES, TROUBLESHOOTINGS)...............................................................K-496
L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING..................................................................................L-1
1. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING.......................................................................................................................................L-1
1.1 bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060, bizhub PRO C1060L........................................................................................L-1
1.1.1 Main body rear side 1......................................................................................................................................................L-1
1.1.2 Main body rear side 2......................................................................................................................................................L-3
1.1.3 Main body upper surface.................................................................................................................................................L-4
1.1.4 Main body left side...........................................................................................................................................................L-4
1.1.5 Main body front side1......................................................................................................................................................L-5
1.1.6 Main body front side2......................................................................................................................................................L-6
1.1.7 Write section....................................................................................................................................................................L-6
1.1.8 Developing section..........................................................................................................................................................L-7
1.1.9 Intermediate transfer section...........................................................................................................................................L-7
1.1.10 Image correction unit section.........................................................................................................................................L-8
1.1.11 Paper feed tray..............................................................................................................................................................L-8
1.1.12 Vertical conveyance section..........................................................................................................................................L-9
1.1.13 Registration section.......................................................................................................................................................L-9
1.1.14 Duplex section 1..........................................................................................................................................................L-10
1.1.15 Duplex section 2..........................................................................................................................................................L-11
1.1.16 Duplex section 3..........................................................................................................................................................L-12
1.1.17 Fusing section..............................................................................................................................................................L-13
1.1.18 Paper exit section........................................................................................................................................................L-14
1.1.19 Operation panel section...............................................................................................................................................L-14
1.2 DF-626.....................................................................................................................................................................................L-15
1.2.1 Front side.......................................................................................................................................................................L-15
1.2.2 Top face side.................................................................................................................................................................L-15
1.2.3 Left side.........................................................................................................................................................................L-16
xlvi
1.2.4 Rear side.......................................................................................................................................................................L-17
1.3 PF-602m/HT-504/505..............................................................................................................................................................L-17
1.3.1 Configuration front side .................................................................................................................................................L-17
1.3.2 Configuration rear side .................................................................................................................................................L-18
1.3.3 Vertical conveyance section..........................................................................................................................................L-18
1.3.4 Horizontal conveyance section .....................................................................................................................................L-19
1.3.5 Tray section 1 ...............................................................................................................................................................L-19
1.3.6 Tray section2 ................................................................................................................................................................L-20
1.4 PF-707, HT-506.......................................................................................................................................................................L-21
1.4.1 Front side ......................................................................................................................................................................L-21
1.4.2 Rear side.......................................................................................................................................................................L-22
1.4.3 Vertical conveyance section front side .........................................................................................................................L-23
1.4.4 Vertical conveyance section rear side ..........................................................................................................................L-24
1.4.5 Vertical conveyance section top side ............................................................................................................................L-25
1.4.6 Horizontal conveyance section bottom side..................................................................................................................L-25
1.4.7 Horizontal conveyance section rear side ......................................................................................................................L-26
1.4.8 Paper feed trays 1 to 3 section .....................................................................................................................................L-26
1.4.9 Paper feed suction section ...........................................................................................................................................L-27
1.4.10 HT-506 ........................................................................................................................................................................L-27
1.5 LU-202/HT-503 .......................................................................................................................................................................L-28
1.5.1 Paper feed/up/down section .........................................................................................................................................L-28
1.5.2 Inside the machine ........................................................................................................................................................L-28
1.5.3 HT-503 ..........................................................................................................................................................................L-29
1.6 MB-506....................................................................................................................................................................................L-29
1.7 OT-502.....................................................................................................................................................................................L-30
1.8 EF-103.....................................................................................................................................................................................L-30
1.9 RU-516.....................................................................................................................................................................................L-30
1.10 RU-517...................................................................................................................................................................................L-31
1.11 RU-509/HM-102 ....................................................................................................................................................................L-31
1.11.1 Right side ....................................................................................................................................................................L-31
1.11.2 Left-side view ..............................................................................................................................................................L-32
1.11.3 Rear side 1 .................................................................................................................................................................L-33
1.11.4 Rear side2 ..................................................................................................................................................................L-34
1.11.5 Humidification section front side .................................................................................................................................L-35
1.11.6 Humidification section rear side ..................................................................................................................................L-35
1.11.7 Output paper density detection section ......................................................................................................................L-36
1.12 RU-510...................................................................................................................................................................................L-36
1.12.1 Right side.....................................................................................................................................................................L-36
1.12.2 Left-side view...............................................................................................................................................................L-37
1.12.3 Rear side.....................................................................................................................................................................L-37
1.13 FS-531 ..................................................................................................................................................................................L-38
1.13.1 Front side ....................................................................................................................................................................L-38
1.13.2 Rear side ....................................................................................................................................................................L-38
1.13.3 Stacker section rear side ............................................................................................................................................L-39
1.13.4 Stapler section ............................................................................................................................................................L-39
1.14 FS-612 ..................................................................................................................................................................................L-40
1.14.1 Front side ....................................................................................................................................................................L-40
1.14.2 Rear side ....................................................................................................................................................................L-41
1.14.3 Folding section ............................................................................................................................................................L-41
1.14.4 Stapler section ............................................................................................................................................................L-42
1.15 PK-512/513 ...........................................................................................................................................................................L-42
1.16 PI-502 ...................................................................................................................................................................................L-43
1.17 FS-532...................................................................................................................................................................................L-44
1.17.1 Rear side.....................................................................................................................................................................L-44
1.17.2 Right side.....................................................................................................................................................................L-45
1.17.3 Left side 1....................................................................................................................................................................L-46
1.17.4 Left side 2....................................................................................................................................................................L-47
1.17.5 Front side.....................................................................................................................................................................L-48
1.17.6 Upper surface..............................................................................................................................................................L-49
1.17.7 Stacker 1......................................................................................................................................................................L-49
1.17.8 Stacker 2......................................................................................................................................................................L-50
1.17.9 Stacker 3......................................................................................................................................................................L-51
1.17.10 Stapler.......................................................................................................................................................................L-51
1.18 SD-510...................................................................................................................................................................................L-52
1.18.1 Rear side.....................................................................................................................................................................L-52
1.18.2 Front side.....................................................................................................................................................................L-52
1.18.3 Bottom 1......................................................................................................................................................................L-53
1.18.4 Bottom 2......................................................................................................................................................................L-54
1.18.5 Stapler.........................................................................................................................................................................L-54
1.19 PK-522...................................................................................................................................................................................L-55
xlvii
1.20 MK-732..................................................................................................................................................................................L-55
1.21 LS-505 ..................................................................................................................................................................................L-56
1.21.1 Front side ....................................................................................................................................................................L-56
1.21.2 Upper surface .............................................................................................................................................................L-56
1.21.3 Rear side ....................................................................................................................................................................L-57
1.21.4 Shift unit ......................................................................................................................................................................L-57
1.22 LS-506...................................................................................................................................................................................L-58
1.22.1 Front side.....................................................................................................................................................................L-58
1.22.2 Upper surface .............................................................................................................................................................L-58
1.22.3 Rear side.....................................................................................................................................................................L-59
1.22.4 Shift unit ......................................................................................................................................................................L-59
1.23 FD-503 ..................................................................................................................................................................................L-60
1.23.1 Conveyance section front side/right side ....................................................................................................................L-60
1.23.2 Major boards in the power source section ..................................................................................................................L-60
1.23.3 Conveyance section rear side/left side .......................................................................................................................L-61
1.23.4 PI rear side .................................................................................................................................................................L-61
1.23.5 PI upper surface .........................................................................................................................................................L-62
1.23.6 PI lower tray ................................................................................................................................................................L-62
1.23.7 Punch section .............................................................................................................................................................L-63
1.23.8 Folding unit front side/right side ..................................................................................................................................L-63
1.23.9 Folding unit rear side/left side .....................................................................................................................................L-64
1.24 SD-506 ..................................................................................................................................................................................L-64
1.24.1 Horizontal conveyance section ...................................................................................................................................L-64
1.24.2 Right angle conveyance section .................................................................................................................................L-65
1.24.3 Folding section ............................................................................................................................................................L-65
1.24.4 Saddle stitching section ..............................................................................................................................................L-68
1.24.5 Bundle processing section ..........................................................................................................................................L-70
1.24.6 Trimmer section ..........................................................................................................................................................L-71
1.24.7 Left-side view ..............................................................................................................................................................L-72
1.24.8 Front side ....................................................................................................................................................................L-72
1.24.9 Rear side ....................................................................................................................................................................L-73
1.25 SD-513...................................................................................................................................................................................L-74
1.25.1 Rear console front side 1.............................................................................................................................................L-74
1.25.2 Rear console front side 2.............................................................................................................................................L-75
1.25.3 Rear console rear side.................................................................................................................................................L-76
1.25.4 Front console...............................................................................................................................................................L-77
1.25.5 Entrance conveyance section......................................................................................................................................L-78
1.25.6 Folding conveyance section........................................................................................................................................L-79
1.25.7 Sub tray/tri-folding tray section 1.................................................................................................................................L-80
1.25.8 Sub tray/tri-folding tray section 2.................................................................................................................................L-81
1.25.9 Saddle stitching section...............................................................................................................................................L-82
1.25.10 Booklet movement section.........................................................................................................................................L-83
1.25.11 Clamp section............................................................................................................................................................L-84
1.25.12 Trimmer section.........................................................................................................................................................L-85
1.25.13 Booklet tray section...................................................................................................................................................L-86
1.26 CR-101...................................................................................................................................................................................L-87
1.27 TU-503...................................................................................................................................................................................L-87
1.28 FD-504...................................................................................................................................................................................L-88
1.28.1 Clamp up down section...............................................................................................................................................L-88
1.28.2 Square-fold section......................................................................................................................................................L-88
1.28.3 SD-513 left side...........................................................................................................................................................L-89
1.29 PB-503 ..................................................................................................................................................................................L-89
1.29.1 SC section ..................................................................................................................................................................L-89
1.29.2 Clamp section .............................................................................................................................................................L-90
1.29.3 Pellet supply section ...................................................................................................................................................L-91
1.29.4 Glue tank section ........................................................................................................................................................L-92
1.29.5 Cover paper supply section ........................................................................................................................................L-93
1.29.6 Cover paper table section ...........................................................................................................................................L-94
1.29.7 Book stock section ......................................................................................................................................................L-95
1.29.8 Conveyance section and framework section ..............................................................................................................L-96
1.29.9 Relay conveyance section ..........................................................................................................................................L-98
1.30 GP-501...................................................................................................................................................................................L-99
1.30.1 Rear side 1/Right side 1..............................................................................................................................................L-99
1.30.2 Rear side 2/Left side....................................................................................................................................................L-99
1.30.3 Right side 2................................................................................................................................................................L-100
1.30.4 Front side...................................................................................................................................................................L-100
1.30.5 Bypass conveyance section......................................................................................................................................L-100
1.30.6 Punch conveyance section........................................................................................................................................L-101
1.31 GP-502.................................................................................................................................................................................L-102
2. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING IN BOARD.....................................................................................................L-103
xlviii
2.1 bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060, bizhub PRO C1060L....................................................................................L-103
2.1.1 Overall control board...................................................................................................................................................L-103
2.1.2 Printer control board....................................................................................................................................................L-103
2.1.3 Printer image processing board...................................................................................................................................L-104
2.1.4 Scanner image processing board................................................................................................................................L-104
2.1.5 Scanner drive board....................................................................................................................................................L-104
2.1.6 Conveyance drive board..............................................................................................................................................L-105
2.1.7 Drum drive board.........................................................................................................................................................L-105
2.1.8 DC power supply/1......................................................................................................................................................L-106
2.1.9 DC power supply/2......................................................................................................................................................L-106
2.1.10 High voltage unit/1.....................................................................................................................................................L-107
2.1.11 High voltage unit/2.....................................................................................................................................................L-107
2.1.12 Operation board/1......................................................................................................................................................L-108
2.1.13 Operation board/2......................................................................................................................................................L-108
2.1.14 LCD board.................................................................................................................................................................L-108
2.1.15 CCD board.................................................................................................................................................................L-108
2.1.16 Scanner inverter board..............................................................................................................................................L-108
2.1.17 NVRAM board............................................................................................................................................................L-109
2.1.18 USB relay board........................................................................................................................................................L-109
2.1.19 Fusing control board/1 (only for Europe)...................................................................................................................L-109
2.1.20 Fusing control board/2 (only for Europe)...................................................................................................................L-110
2.1.21 Fusing control board/3 (FUSCB3) (only for Europe)..................................................................................................L-110
2.2 DF-626...................................................................................................................................................................................L-111
2.2.1 DF control board (DFCB).............................................................................................................................................L-111
2.2.2 Relay board (REYB)....................................................................................................................................................L-111
2.3 PF-602m/HT-504/505............................................................................................................................................................L-112
2.3.1 PF drive board (PFDB) ...............................................................................................................................................L-112
2.4 PF-707/HT-506......................................................................................................................................................................L-112
2.4.1 PF drive board (PFDB)................................................................................................................................................L-112
2.4.2 AC drive board (ACDB)...............................................................................................................................................L-113
2.4.3 DC power supply/1, /2 (DCPS/1, /2)............................................................................................................................L-113
2.4.4 Multi-feed detection board/R, /S (MFDBR, MFDBS)...................................................................................................L-113
2.5 LU-202/HT-503 .....................................................................................................................................................................L-113
2.5.1 LU drive board (LUDB) ...............................................................................................................................................L-113
2.5.2 AC drive board (ACDB) ..............................................................................................................................................L-114
2.6 RU-516/RU-517.....................................................................................................................................................................L-114
2.6.1 High voltage unit (HV)..................................................................................................................................................L-114
2.7 RU-509/HM-102 ....................................................................................................................................................................L-114
2.7.1 RU control board (RUCB)............................................................................................................................................L-114
2.7.2 HM drive board (HMDB) .............................................................................................................................................L-115
2.7.3 DC power supply (DCPS) ...........................................................................................................................................L-115
2.7.4 Color density detection board/Y, /M, /C, /K (CDDBY, CDDBM, CDDBC, CDDBK).....................................................L-115
2.7.5 Color density control board (CDCB) ...........................................................................................................................L-116
2.7.6 Color density relay board (CDRLB) ............................................................................................................................L-116
2.7.7 Jam indication board (JAMIB) .....................................................................................................................................L-116
2.8 RU-510...................................................................................................................................................................................L-117
2.8.1 RU control board (RUCB)............................................................................................................................................L-117
2.8.2 Jam indication board (JAMIB)......................................................................................................................................L-117
2.9 FS-531 ..................................................................................................................................................................................L-117
2.9.1 FNS control board (FNSCB) .......................................................................................................................................L-117
2.9.2 Relay board (RB) ........................................................................................................................................................L-118
2.10 FS-612 ................................................................................................................................................................................L-118
2.10.1 FNS control board (FNSCB) .....................................................................................................................................L-118
2.10.2 Relay board (RB) ......................................................................................................................................................L-118
2.11 PK-512/513..........................................................................................................................................................................L-119
2.11.1 Punch drive board (PDB)...........................................................................................................................................L-119
2.11.2 Paper size sensor board............................................................................................................................................L-119
2.12 PI-502 .................................................................................................................................................................................L-119
2.12.1 PI drive board (PIDB) ................................................................................................................................................L-119
2.12.2 PI operation board (PIOB) ........................................................................................................................................L-119
2.13 FS-532.................................................................................................................................................................................L-120
2.13.1 FNS control board......................................................................................................................................................L-120
2.13.2 Jam indication board..................................................................................................................................................L-120
2.14 SD-510.................................................................................................................................................................................L-120
2.14.1 SD control board........................................................................................................................................................L-120
2.15 PK-522.................................................................................................................................................................................L-121
2.15.1 Punch drive board (PDB)...........................................................................................................................................L-121
2.15.2 Paper size sensor board............................................................................................................................................L-121
2.16 LS-505/LS-506.....................................................................................................................................................................L-121
2.16.1 LS control board (LSCB) ...........................................................................................................................................L-121
xlix
2.16.2 Relay board/1 (RLB/1)...............................................................................................................................................L-121
2.16.3 Relay board/2 (RLB/2)...............................................................................................................................................L-121
2.16.4 DC power supply (DCPS) .........................................................................................................................................L-122
2.16.5 Relay board (RLB) ....................................................................................................................................................L-122
2.17 FD-503 ................................................................................................................................................................................L-122
2.17.1 FD control board (FDCB) ..........................................................................................................................................L-122
2.17.2 Punch drive board (PDB) ..........................................................................................................................................L-123
2.17.3 Folding drive board (FDB) ........................................................................................................................................L-123
2.17.4 PI drive board (PIDB) ................................................................................................................................................L-123
2.17.5 FD operation board (FDOB) .....................................................................................................................................L-124
2.17.6 Jam indication board (JAMIB) ...................................................................................................................................L-124
2.17.7 DC power supply (DCPS) .........................................................................................................................................L-124
2.17.8 Multi feed detection board/1, /2 (MFDB1, 2)..............................................................................................................L-124
2.18 SD-506 ................................................................................................................................................................................L-125
2.18.1 SD control board (SDCB) .........................................................................................................................................L-125
2.18.2 SD drive board (SDDB) ............................................................................................................................................L-125
2.18.3 SD drive board/2 (SDDB/2).......................................................................................................................................L-126
2.18.4 DC power supply/1 (DCPS1).....................................................................................................................................L-126
2.18.7 Jam indication board/1 (JAMIB/1)..............................................................................................................................L-126
2.18.8 Jam indication board/2 (JAMIB/2)..............................................................................................................................L-127
2.19 SD-513.................................................................................................................................................................................L-127
2.19.1 SD control board (PCB1)...........................................................................................................................................L-127
2.19.2 SD drive board (PCB2)..............................................................................................................................................L-128
2.19.3 Rear console jam indication board (PCB5)................................................................................................................L-128
2.19.4 Front console jam indication board (PCB6)...............................................................................................................L-129
2.20 TU-503.................................................................................................................................................................................L-130
2.20.1 Slitter drive board (TUDB).........................................................................................................................................L-130
2.21 FD-504.................................................................................................................................................................................L-130
2.21.1 SQF drive board (SQFDB).........................................................................................................................................L-130
2.22 PB-503 ................................................................................................................................................................................L-130
2.22.1 PB control board (PBCB) ..........................................................................................................................................L-130
2.22.2 AC drive board (ACDB) ............................................................................................................................................L-131
2.22.3 PB drive board/1 (PBDB1).........................................................................................................................................L-131
2.22.6 Jam indication board/1 (JAMB1)................................................................................................................................L-132
2.22.7 Jam indication board/2 (JAMB2)................................................................................................................................L-132
2.22.8 Manual operation board (OB1) .................................................................................................................................L-132
2.22.9 Booklet stock operation board (OB2) ........................................................................................................................L-132
2.22.10 DC power supply/1 (DCPU/1)..................................................................................................................................L-133
2.23 GP-501.................................................................................................................................................................................L-134
2.23.1 Punch Controller PCB................................................................................................................................................L-134
2.24 GP-502.................................................................................................................................................................................L-134
3. RELAY CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING ..........................................................................................................L-135
3.1 SD-506 ..................................................................................................................................................................................L-135
3.1.1 Right side.....................................................................................................................................................................L-135
3.1.2 Left side.......................................................................................................................................................................L-136
3.1.3 Rear side-1..................................................................................................................................................................L-137
3.1.4 Rear side-2..................................................................................................................................................................L-137
3.1.5 Folding section.............................................................................................................................................................L-138
3.1.6 Saddle stitching section-1............................................................................................................................................L-139
3.1.7 Saddle stitching section-2............................................................................................................................................L-139
3.2 PB-503 ..................................................................................................................................................................................L-140
3.2.1 Rear side-1..................................................................................................................................................................L-140
3.2.2 Rear side 2..................................................................................................................................................................L-141
3.2.3 Rear side 3..................................................................................................................................................................L-142
3.2.4 Rear side 4..................................................................................................................................................................L-143
3.2.5 Rear side 5..................................................................................................................................................................L-144
3.2.6 Front side.....................................................................................................................................................................L-145
3.2.7 Sub compile (SC) section............................................................................................................................................L-145
3.2.8 Clamp section..............................................................................................................................................................L-146
3.2.9 Cover paper supply section.........................................................................................................................................L-146
l
3.2.10 Cover paper table section..........................................................................................................................................L-147
3.2.11 Book stock section.....................................................................................................................................................L-147
3.2.12 Conveyance section..................................................................................................................................................L-148
3.2.13 Pellet supply section..................................................................................................................................................L-148
3.2.14 Relay conveyance section.........................................................................................................................................L-148
M TIMING CHART............................................................................................................................M-1
1. bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060, bizhub PRO C1060L........................................................................M-1
1.1 Timing chart when the sub power switch becomes active (in the morning)..............................................................................M-1
1.2 Timing chart when the sub power switch becomes active (not in the morning)........................................................................M-1
1.3 Timing chart of the duplex mode...............................................................................................................................................M-2
1.3.1 Operation condition.........................................................................................................................................................M-2
1.3.2 Timing chart....................................................................................................................................................................M-2
2. DF-626........................................................................................................................................................................M-3
2.1 Timing chart of the simplex mode.............................................................................................................................................M-3
2.1.2 Timing chart diagram......................................................................................................................................................M-3
2.2 Timing chart of the duplex mode...............................................................................................................................................M-4
2.2.2 Timing chart diagram......................................................................................................................................................M-5
3. PF-602m.....................................................................................................................................................................M-6
3.1 Tray4, A4, 2 sheets of original..................................................................................................................................................M-6
4. PF-707........................................................................................................................................................................M-7
4.1 Timing chart of the simplex mode.............................................................................................................................................M-7
4.1.2 Timing chart....................................................................................................................................................................M-7
5. LU-202........................................................................................................................................................................M-8
5.1 A4, simplex, 2 sheets ...............................................................................................................................................................M-8
5.2 A3, simplex, 2 sheets ...............................................................................................................................................................M-8
6. RU-509/HM-102 .........................................................................................................................................................M-9
6.1 Timing chart of the humidifier OFF mode (bypass conveyance) .............................................................................................M-9
6.1.2 Timing chart....................................................................................................................................................................M-9
6.2 Timing chart of the humidification mode ..................................................................................................................................M-9
6.2.2 Timing chart....................................................................................................................................................................M-9
7. RU-510.....................................................................................................................................................................M-10
7.1 Timing chart of the straight exit mode.....................................................................................................................................M-10
7.1.1 Operation condition.......................................................................................................................................................M-10
7.1.2 Timing chart..................................................................................................................................................................M-10
7.2 Timing chart of the single sheet reverse/exit mode................................................................................................................M-10
7.2.2 Timing chart..................................................................................................................................................................M-11
7.3 Timing chart of the double sheets reverse/exit conveyance mode.........................................................................................M-11
7.3.2 Timing chart..................................................................................................................................................................M-12
8. FS-531 .....................................................................................................................................................................M-13
8.1 Timing chart of the sort mode ................................................................................................................................................M-13
8.1.2 Timing chart..................................................................................................................................................................M-13
8.2 Timing chart of the flat-stapling mode ....................................................................................................................................M-13
8.2.2 Timing chart..................................................................................................................................................................M-14
9. FS-612 .....................................................................................................................................................................M-15
9.1 Timing chart of the sort mode ................................................................................................................................................M-15
9.1.2 Timing chart..................................................................................................................................................................M-15
9.2 Timing chart of the flat-stapling mode ....................................................................................................................................M-15
9.2.2 Timing chart..................................................................................................................................................................M-16
9.3 Timing chart of the saddle stitching mode .............................................................................................................................M-16
9.3.2 Timing chart..................................................................................................................................................................M-17
9.4 Timing chart of the tri-folding mode .......................................................................................................................................M-17
9.4.2 Timing chart..................................................................................................................................................................M-18
10. PK-512/513.............................................................................................................................................................M-19
10.1 Punch, 2 flat stitching staples, A4, 2 originals, 3 copies, Single side....................................................................................M-19
li
11. PI-502 ....................................................................................................................................................................M-20
11.1 Timing chart of the PI automatic paper feed mode ..............................................................................................................M-20
11.1.1 Operation condition.....................................................................................................................................................M-20
11.1.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-20
12. FS-532....................................................................................................................................................................M-21
12.1 Timing chart of the straight mode.........................................................................................................................................M-21
12.1.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-21
12.2 Timing chart of the staple mode............................................................................................................................................M-21
12.2.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-22
13. SD-510....................................................................................................................................................................M-23
13.1 Time chart of the saddle stitching mode...............................................................................................................................M-23
13.1.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-23
13.2 Timing chart of the folding mode...........................................................................................................................................M-23
13.2.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-24
13.3 Timing chart of the tri-folding mode......................................................................................................................................M-24
13.3.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-25
14. PK-522....................................................................................................................................................................M-26
14.1 Timing chart of the punch mode...........................................................................................................................................M-26
14.1.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-26
15. LS-505 ...................................................................................................................................................................M-27
15.1 Timing chart of the straight mode ........................................................................................................................................M-27
15.1.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-27
15.2 Timing chart of the shift mode ..............................................................................................................................................M-27
15.2.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-28
15.3 Timing chart of the sub tray mode .......................................................................................................................................M-28
15.3.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-29
15.4 Timing chart of the coupling mode .......................................................................................................................................M-29
15.4.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-30
16. LS-506....................................................................................................................................................................M-31
16.1.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-31
16.2 Timing chart of the shift mode ..............................................................................................................................................M-31
16.2.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-32
16.3.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-33
16.4 Timing chart of the coupling mode .......................................................................................................................................M-33
16.4.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-34
17. FD-503 ...................................................................................................................................................................M-35
17.1 Timing chart of the letter fold-in mode .................................................................................................................................M-35
17.1.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-35
17.2 Timing chart of the letter fold-out mode ...............................................................................................................................M-35
17.2.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-36
17.3 Timing chart of the double parallel mode .............................................................................................................................M-36
17.3.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-37
17.4 Timing chart of the half-folding mode ...................................................................................................................................M-37
17.4.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-38
17.5 Timing chart of the gate fold mode ......................................................................................................................................M-38
17.5.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-39
17.6 Timing chart of the Z-fold mode ...........................................................................................................................................M-39
lii
17.6.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-40
17.7 Timing chart of the PI cover paper insertion mode ..............................................................................................................M-40
17.7.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-41
17.8 Timing chart of the punch mode ..........................................................................................................................................M-41
17.8.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-42
18. SD-506 ...................................................................................................................................................................M-43
18.1.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-43
18.2.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-44
18.3 Timing chart of the overlap tri-folding mode .........................................................................................................................M-44
18.3.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-45
18.4 Timing chart of the saddle stitching (trimmer) mode ............................................................................................................M-46
18.4.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-47
19. SD-513....................................................................................................................................................................M-49
19.1 Timing chart of the straight mode.........................................................................................................................................M-49
19.1.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-49
19.2 Timing chart of the sub tray mode........................................................................................................................................M-49
19.2.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-49
19.3 Timing chart of the overlap tri-folding mode..........................................................................................................................M-49
19.3.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-50
19.4 Timing chart of the multi half-folding mode...........................................................................................................................M-50
19.4.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-51
19.5 Time chart of the saddle stitching mode...............................................................................................................................M-52
19.5.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-53
19.6 Time chart of the square-fold mode......................................................................................................................................M-54
19.6.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-55
19.7 Time chart of the crease and slit mode.................................................................................................................................M-55
19.7.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-56
20. PB-503 ...................................................................................................................................................................M-57
20.1 Timing chart of the sub tray paper exit mode .......................................................................................................................M-57
20.1.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-57
20.2 Timing chart of the perfect binding mode (PB cover paper supply) .....................................................................................M-57
20.2.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-58
20.3 Timing chart of the perfect binding mode (Main body cover paper supply) .........................................................................M-58
20.3.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-59
20.4 Timing chart of the relay conveyance mode ........................................................................................................................M-59
20.4.2 Timing chart................................................................................................................................................................M-60
N WIRING DIAGRAM........................................................................................................................N-1
1. bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L.....................................................................................N-1
1.1 bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L (1/4)...........................................................................................N-1
2. DF-626........................................................................................................................................................................N-5
3. PF-602m.....................................................................................................................................................................N-6
4. PF-707........................................................................................................................................................................N-7
4.1 PF-707 (1/2)..............................................................................................................................................................................N-7
4.2 PF-707 (2/2)..............................................................................................................................................................................N-8
5. LU-202........................................................................................................................................................................N-9
liii
6. EF-103......................................................................................................................................................................N-10
7. RU-516......................................................................................................................................................................N-11
8. RU-517......................................................................................................................................................................N-12
9. RU-509......................................................................................................................................................................N-13
10. RU-510....................................................................................................................................................................N-14
11. FS-531....................................................................................................................................................................N-15
12. FS-612....................................................................................................................................................................N-16
13. PK-512/513.............................................................................................................................................................N-17
14. PI-502......................................................................................................................................................................N-18
15. FS-532....................................................................................................................................................................N-19
16. SD-510....................................................................................................................................................................N-20
17. PK-522....................................................................................................................................................................N-21
18. LS-505.....................................................................................................................................................................N-22
19. LS-506.....................................................................................................................................................................N-23
20. FD-503....................................................................................................................................................................N-24
21. SD-506....................................................................................................................................................................N-25
22. SD-513....................................................................................................................................................................N-26
22.1 SD-513 (1/2)..........................................................................................................................................................................N-26
22.2 SD-513 (2/2)..........................................................................................................................................................................N-27
23. CR-101....................................................................................................................................................................N-28
24. TU-503....................................................................................................................................................................N-29
25. FD-504....................................................................................................................................................................N-30
26. PB-503....................................................................................................................................................................N-31
27. GP-501....................................................................................................................................................................N-32
28. GP-502....................................................................................................................................................................N-33
O THEORY OF OPERATION bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L............O-1
1. OUTLINE....................................................................................................................................................................O-1
1.1 Unit configuration......................................................................................................................................................................O-1
1.2 Paper path.................................................................................................................................................................................O-1
2. INTERFACE SECTION...............................................................................................................................................O-2
2.1 Configuration.............................................................................................................................................................................O-2
2.1.1 Main body right side........................................................................................................................................................O-2
2.1.2 Main body left side..........................................................................................................................................................O-2
2.1.3 Main body upper side......................................................................................................................................................O-3
3. SCANNER SECTION.................................................................................................................................................O-4
3.1 Configuration.............................................................................................................................................................................O-4
3.2 Drive..........................................................................................................................................................................................O-4
3.3 Operation..................................................................................................................................................................................O-5
3.3.1 The control when the sub power is activated..................................................................................................................O-5
3.3.2 Control when the start button is enabled........................................................................................................................O-5
3.3.3 Original reading area......................................................................................................................................................O-7
3.3.4 Original size detection control.........................................................................................................................................O-7
3.3.5 ACS processing..............................................................................................................................................................O-8
3.3.6 Line detection control......................................................................................................................................................O-8
3.3.7 The dust removal control................................................................................................................................................O-9
3.3.8 Image processing............................................................................................................................................................O-9
4. WRITING SECTION.................................................................................................................................................O-10
4.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................O-10
4.2 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................O-11
4.2.1 Exposure path...............................................................................................................................................................O-11
4.2.2 Writing control...............................................................................................................................................................O-11
4.2.3 Writing area...................................................................................................................................................................O-12
4.2.4 Color registration control...............................................................................................................................................O-12
4.2.5 Front and back sides skew correction in the main scan direction.................................................................................O-15
4.2.6 Back side magnification adjustment in sub scan direction............................................................................................O-15
4.2.7 Image stabilization control............................................................................................................................................O-15
5. PHOTO CONDUCTOR SECTION............................................................................................................................O-16
5.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................O-16
5.2 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................O-17
5.3 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................O-17
5.3.1 Erase lamp (EL) control................................................................................................................................................O-17
liv
6. CHARGING SECTION..............................................................................................................................................O-18
6.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................O-18
6.2 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................O-18
6.2.1 Charging control............................................................................................................................................................O-18
7. DEVELOPING SECTION..........................................................................................................................................O-19
7.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................O-19
7.2 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................O-19
7.3 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................O-20
7.3.1 Developer conveyance.................................................................................................................................................O-20
7.3.2 Developing bias............................................................................................................................................................O-20
7.3.3 Developing suction control............................................................................................................................................O-20
7.3.4 Developing cooling control............................................................................................................................................O-22
7.3.5 Auto refining developing system...................................................................................................................................O-23
8. TONER SUPPLY SECTION.....................................................................................................................................O-25
8.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................O-25
8.2 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................O-26
8.2.1 Toner bottle drive..........................................................................................................................................................O-26
8.2.2 Toner supply drive........................................................................................................................................................O-26
8.3 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................O-27
8.3.1 Toner conveyance device.............................................................................................................................................O-27
8.3.2 Toner supply control to the toner hopper......................................................................................................................O-28
8.3.3 Toner supply control to the developing unit..................................................................................................................O-28
8.3.4 Remaining toner amount detection control...................................................................................................................O-28
8.3.5 Stop control of printing without toner............................................................................................................................O-28
9. INTERMEDIATE TRANSFER SECTION..................................................................................................................O-29
9.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................O-29
9.2 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................O-30
9.2.1 Transfer belt conveyance pressure drive......................................................................................................................O-30
9.2.2 2nd transfer pressure release mechanism....................................................................................................................O-31
9.3 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................O-31
9.3.1 Transfer belt conveyance, 1st transfer roller pressure and release mechanism..........................................................O-31
9.3.2 1st transfer control........................................................................................................................................................O-32
9.3.3 2nd transfer mechanism...............................................................................................................................................O-32
9.3.4 2nd transfer control.......................................................................................................................................................O-33
9.3.5 Separation claw control.................................................................................................................................................O-34
9.3.6 Image correction unit shutter mechanism.....................................................................................................................O-35
9.3.7 Blade setting mode control...........................................................................................................................................O-36
9.3.8 Belt filming prevention control.......................................................................................................................................O-36
10. TONER COLLECTION SECTION..........................................................................................................................O-37
10.1 Configuration.........................................................................................................................................................................O-37
10.2 Drive......................................................................................................................................................................................O-38
10.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................O-38
10.3.1 Toner collection control...............................................................................................................................................O-38
10.3.2 Waste toner box detection control..............................................................................................................................O-38
10.3.3 Waste toner box full detection control.........................................................................................................................O-39
11. PAPER FEED SECTION........................................................................................................................................O-40
11.1 Configuration.........................................................................................................................................................................O-40
11.2 Drive......................................................................................................................................................................................O-41
11.2.1 Paper feed drive..........................................................................................................................................................O-41
11.2.2 Tray up down drive.....................................................................................................................................................O-42
11.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................O-42
11.3.1 Up down control..........................................................................................................................................................O-42
11.3.2 Paper size detection control........................................................................................................................................O-43
11.3.3 Paper feed control.......................................................................................................................................................O-45
11.3.4 Remaining paper detection control.............................................................................................................................O-46
11.3.5 Dehumidification heater control (HT-511 option)........................................................................................................O-48
12. VERTICAL CONVEYANCE SECTION...................................................................................................................O-50
12.1 Configuration.........................................................................................................................................................................O-50
12.2 Drive......................................................................................................................................................................................O-50
12.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................O-50
12.3.1 Vertical conveyance control........................................................................................................................................O-50
13. REGISTRATION SECTION....................................................................................................................................O-52
13.1 Configuration.........................................................................................................................................................................O-52
13.2 Drive......................................................................................................................................................................................O-53
lv
13.2.1 Registration roller drive, registration roller swing drive...............................................................................................O-53
13.2.2 Registration roller pressure release drive...................................................................................................................O-53
13.2.3 Loop roller drive..........................................................................................................................................................O-54
13.2.4 Loop roller pressure release drive..............................................................................................................................O-54
13.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................O-54
13.3.1 Loop control................................................................................................................................................................O-54
13.3.2 Loop roller pressure release control...........................................................................................................................O-55
13.3.3 Registration roller pressure release control................................................................................................................O-56
13.3.4 Centering adjustment control......................................................................................................................................O-56
13.3.5 Registration operation.................................................................................................................................................O-57
13.3.6 Paper leading edge timing adjustment control............................................................................................................O-58
13.3.7 Registration speed control..........................................................................................................................................O-59
14. FUSING SECTION.................................................................................................................................................O-60
14.1 Configuration.........................................................................................................................................................................O-60
14.2 Drive......................................................................................................................................................................................O-61
14.2.1 Fusing roller drive.......................................................................................................................................................O-61
14.2.2 Fusing pressure release drive.....................................................................................................................................O-62
14.2.3 Fusing swing drive......................................................................................................................................................O-63
14.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................O-63
14.3.1 Fusing roller drive control............................................................................................................................................O-63
14.3.2 Pressure release control.............................................................................................................................................O-65
14.3.3 Fusing temperature control.........................................................................................................................................O-65
14.3.4 Malfunction protection.................................................................................................................................................O-67
14.3.5 Fusing roller/Lw cooling control..................................................................................................................................O-68
14.3.6 Fusing recovery control...............................................................................................................................................O-68
14.3.7 Fusing air separation control.......................................................................................................................................O-68
14.3.8 Fusing swing control...................................................................................................................................................O-69
15. DUPLEX SECTION.................................................................................................................................................O-71
15.1 Configuration.........................................................................................................................................................................O-71
15.2 Drive......................................................................................................................................................................................O-71
15.2.1 Intermediate conveyance, ADU conveyance drive.....................................................................................................O-71
15.2.2 ADU reverse roller drive..............................................................................................................................................O-72
15.2.3 Intermediate conveyance roller pressure and release drive.......................................................................................O-72
15.2.4 ADU roller pressure and release drive........................................................................................................................O-73
15.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................O-73
15.3.1 Intermediate conveyance roller pressure and release mechanism.............................................................................O-73
15.3.2 ADU roller pressure and release drive........................................................................................................................O-74
15.3.3 Paper reverse control..................................................................................................................................................O-75
15.3.4 ADU conveyance control............................................................................................................................................O-77
16. REVERSE AND EXIT SECTION............................................................................................................................O-79
16.1 Configuration.........................................................................................................................................................................O-79
16.2 Drive......................................................................................................................................................................................O-80
16.2.1 Reverse and exit conveyance drive 1.........................................................................................................................O-80
16.2.2 Reverse and exit conveyance drive 2.........................................................................................................................O-81
16.2.3 Paper exit drive...........................................................................................................................................................O-81
16.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................O-82
16.3.1 Conveyance control....................................................................................................................................................O-82
16.3.2 Reverse and exit timing control...................................................................................................................................O-83
16.3.3 Paper exit de-curler roller pressure control.................................................................................................................O-84
16.3.4 Reverse de-curler roller pressure control....................................................................................................................O-84
17. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL......................................................................................................................O-86
17.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................O-86
17.2 Long correction control..........................................................................................................................................................O-86
17.2.1 Outline.........................................................................................................................................................................O-86
17.2.2 Automatic long correction control................................................................................................................................O-86
17.2.3 Manual long correction control....................................................................................................................................O-87
17.2.4 Operation flow of the long correction control..............................................................................................................O-88
17.2.5 Long correction control and color density control (periodical adjustment) with RU-509.............................................O-89
17.3 Stabilization control between images....................................................................................................................................O-90
17.3.1 Outline.........................................................................................................................................................................O-90
17.3.2 Dot diameter correction between images...................................................................................................................O-90
17.4 Middle correction control.......................................................................................................................................................O-91
17.4.1 Outline.........................................................................................................................................................................O-91
17.4.2 Automatic middle correction control............................................................................................................................O-91
17.4.3 Middle correction for the measurement (only when RU-509 is installed)....................................................................O-91
17.4.4 Operation flow of the middle correction control...........................................................................................................O-92
17.5 Other image stabilization controls.........................................................................................................................................O-92
17.5.1 Color registration correction control............................................................................................................................O-92
18. IMAGE PROCESSING SECTION..........................................................................................................................O-94
lvi
18.1 Image processing in the scanner section..............................................................................................................................O-94
18.1.1 Image processing flow in the scanner section............................................................................................................O-94
18.1.2 Photoelectric conversion.............................................................................................................................................O-94
18.1.3 A/D conversion............................................................................................................................................................O-94
18.1.4 Shading correction......................................................................................................................................................O-94
18.1.5 RGB gap correction....................................................................................................................................................O-94
18.1.6 Chroma aberration correction.....................................................................................................................................O-94
18.1.7 Color space conversion..............................................................................................................................................O-95
18.1.8 Magnification processing in the main scan direction...................................................................................................O-95
18.1.9 Color conversion, character edge regeneration, color balance adjustment................................................................O-95
18.1.10 Area discrimination...................................................................................................................................................O-95
18.1.11 Image distinction.......................................................................................................................................................O-95
18.1.12 AE control.................................................................................................................................................................O-95
18.1.13 Reduction processing in the main and sub scan direction........................................................................................O-95
18.2 Image processing in the write section...................................................................................................................................O-95
18.2.1 Image processing flow in the write section.................................................................................................................O-95
18.2.2 DRAM (Local), DRAM (System), HDD........................................................................................................................O-96
18.2.3 Color conversion, ACS process..................................................................................................................................O-96
18.2.4 Image compressing (Scanner)....................................................................................................................................O-97
18.2.5 Image expansion (Scanner)........................................................................................................................................O-97
18.2.6 Magnification processing in the sub scan direction.....................................................................................................O-97
18.2.7 Cell average (Scanner)...............................................................................................................................................O-97
18.2.8 Image compressing (IC-602)......................................................................................................................................O-97
18.2.9 Image enlargement (IC-602, IC-308, IC-415).............................................................................................................O-97
18.2.10 Skeletonization/Outline letter emphasis....................................................................................................................O-97
18.2.11 Outline emphasis......................................................................................................................................................O-97
18.2.12 Smoothing.................................................................................................................................................................O-97
18.2.13 Toner amount save...................................................................................................................................................O-97
18.2.14 Color sensor correction.............................................................................................................................................O-97
18.2.15 IC-602 calibration correction (Standard)...................................................................................................................O-97
18.2.16 Density balance........................................................................................................................................................O-97
18.2.17 Gradation correction gamma....................................................................................................................................O-97
18.2.18 G7 calibration correction...........................................................................................................................................O-97
18.2.19 Screen processing, Error diffusion operation............................................................................................................O-97
18.2.20 Delay control between drums...................................................................................................................................O-98
18.2.21 PWM gamma............................................................................................................................................................O-98
18.2.22 PWM conversion.......................................................................................................................................................O-98
18.2.23 Writing unit/Y, writing unit/M, writing unit/C, writing unit/K........................................................................................O-98
19. POWER SOURCE SECTION.................................................................................................................................O-99
19.1 Operating parts with the connection of the power cord.........................................................................................................O-99
19.1.1 Configuration...............................................................................................................................................................O-99
19.1.2 Operation....................................................................................................................................................................O-99
19.2 Operating parts when the main power switch (SW1) becomes active..................................................................................O-99
19.2.1 Configuration...............................................................................................................................................................O-99
19.2.2 Operation....................................................................................................................................................................O-99
19.3 Operating parts when the sub power switch (SW2) becomes active..................................................................................O-100
19.3.1 Configuration.............................................................................................................................................................O-100
19.3.2 Operation..................................................................................................................................................................O-100
19.4 Power cord..........................................................................................................................................................................O-101
19.4.1 Configuration.............................................................................................................................................................O-101
19.5 Operating parts when the dehumidification heater switch (SW5) becomes active.............................................................O-101
19.5.1 Configuration.............................................................................................................................................................O-101
19.5.2 Operation..................................................................................................................................................................O-101
20. FAN SECTION......................................................................................................................................................O-102
20.1 Configuration.......................................................................................................................................................................O-102
20.2 Operation............................................................................................................................................................................O-103
20.2.1 Image processing cooling fan (FM1) control.............................................................................................................O-103
20.2.2 Power supply cooling fan/1 (FM2) control.................................................................................................................O-103
20.2.3 Power supply cooling fans/2 (FM3), power supply cooling fans/3 (FM4), power supply cooling fans/4 (FM5) control.....
O-103
20.2.4 Drum motor cooling fan/1 (FM6), drum motor cooling fan/2 (FM7) control...............................................................O-103
20.2.5 Fusing exhaust fan (FM8) control.............................................................................................................................O-103
20.2.6 Fusing belt exhaust fan (FM9) control......................................................................................................................O-104
20.2.7 Fusing separation fan/1 (FM10), fusing separation fan/2 (FM11), fusing separation fan/3 (FM12) control..............O-104
20.2.8 Fusing intake fan (FM13) control..............................................................................................................................O-104
20.2.9 Exhaust fan/Rr (FM14) abnormality..........................................................................................................................O-104
20.2.10 Exhaust fan/Fr (FM15) control................................................................................................................................O-104
20.2.11 Transfer belt fan (FM17) control.............................................................................................................................O-104
20.2.12 PH cooling fan (FM18) control................................................................................................................................O-105
20.2.13 Tacking fan/1 (FM19), Tacking fan/2 (FM20), Tacking fan/3 (FM21) control..........................................................O-105
lvii
20.2.14 Cyclone exhaust fan (FM22) control.......................................................................................................................O-105
20.2.15 Paper exit cooling fan/1 (FM23), paper exit cooling fan/2 (FM25) control..............................................................O-105
20.2.16 ADU exhaust fan (FM24) control............................................................................................................................O-106
20.2.17 Developing fan/1 (FM26), Developing fan/2 (FM27) and Developing fan/3 (FM28) control...................................O-106
20.2.18 ADU cooling fan (FM29) control..............................................................................................................................O-106
20.2.19 ADU reverse motor fan (FM30) control...................................................................................................................O-106
20.2.20 Fusing roller cooling fans/1 (FM33) and Fusing roller cooling fans/2 (FM34) control.............................................O-106
21. COUNTER SECTION...........................................................................................................................................O-107
21.1 Configuration.......................................................................................................................................................................O-107
21.2 Operation............................................................................................................................................................................O-107
22. ACS CONTROL....................................................................................................................................................O-108
22.1 Switching from color mode to black and white mode..........................................................................................................O-108
22.1.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................O-108
22.1.2 Sequence of switching from color mode to black and white mode...........................................................................O-108
22.1.3 Sequence of switching from black and white mode to color mode...........................................................................O-108
22.1.4 Timing of switching from color mode to black and white mode.................................................................................O-108
22.2 Count at ACS......................................................................................................................................................................O-108
22.2.1 Black and white mode (1st transfer roller/Y, 1st transfer roller/M, 1st transfer roller/C released).............................O-108
22.2.2 Color mode (1st transfer roller/Y, 1st transfer roller/M, 1st transfer roller/C, 1st transfer roller/K pressed)..............O-108
23. IC-602/HDD/UPGRADE KIT (UK).........................................................................................................................O-109
23.1 Configuration.......................................................................................................................................................................O-109
23.2 Operation............................................................................................................................................................................O-109
23.2.1 Components of IC-602A (Option for C1070, C1060, C1060L).................................................................................O-109
23.2.2 Components of IC-602B (Option for C1070P, C71hc)..............................................................................................O-109
23.2.3 HDD section components.........................................................................................................................................O-109
23.2.4 Components of UK-104............................................................................................................................................O-110
23.2.5 Components of UK-207............................................................................................................................................O-110
24. AUTHENTICATION DEVICE................................................................................................................................O-111
24.1 Authentication unit (IC card type: AU-201/AU-201S)..........................................................................................................O-111
PA THEORY OF OPERATION DF-626..........................................................................................PA-1

1. OUTLINE..................................................................................................................................................................PA-1
1.1 Unit configuration....................................................................................................................................................................PA-1
1.2 Paper path...............................................................................................................................................................................PA-1
1.2.1 Normal original mode....................................................................................................................................................PA-1
1.2.2 Mixed original mode......................................................................................................................................................PA-2
1.2.3 Z-Folded original mode.................................................................................................................................................PA-4
2. PAPER FEED SECTION..........................................................................................................................................PA-5
2.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................PA-5
2.2 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................PA-5
2.2.1 Tray up and down drive................................................................................................................................................PA-5
2.2.2 Paper feed drive............................................................................................................................................................PA-5
2.3 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................PA-6
2.3.1 Original feed tray ascent and descent mechanism.......................................................................................................PA-6
2.3.2 Original feed mechanism..............................................................................................................................................PA-6
2.3.3 Original set detection....................................................................................................................................................PA-7
2.3.4 Original size detection mechanism...............................................................................................................................PA-7
3. CONVEYANCE SECTION........................................................................................................................................PA-9
3.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................PA-9
3.2 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................PA-9
3.2.1 Registration roller drive.................................................................................................................................................PA-9
3.2.2 Reading roller drive.....................................................................................................................................................PA-10
3.2.3 Reading roller pressure release lever.........................................................................................................................PA-10
3.2.4 Glass cleaning drive....................................................................................................................................................PA-11
3.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................PA-11
3.3.1 Paper feed mechanism...............................................................................................................................................PA-11
3.3.2 Reading section roller pressure release control..........................................................................................................PA-11
3.3.3 DF original glass contamination prevention control....................................................................................................PA-12
4. REVERSE AND EXIT SECTION............................................................................................................................PA-14
4.1 Configuration.........................................................................................................................................................................PA-14
4.2 Drive......................................................................................................................................................................................PA-14
4.2.1 Reverse and exit drive................................................................................................................................................PA-14
4.2.2 Reverse roller pressure release drive.........................................................................................................................PA-15
4.2.3 Conveyance path switching drive...............................................................................................................................PA-15
4.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................PA-15
4.3.1 Original conveyance mechanism................................................................................................................................PA-15
4.3.2 Reverse and exit section switching mechanism.........................................................................................................PA-16
4.3.3 Reverse roller pressure release control......................................................................................................................PA-17
lviii
5. OTHERS.................................................................................................................................................................PA-18
5.1 Open and close detection section.........................................................................................................................................PA-18
5.1.1 DF angle open and close detection mechanism.........................................................................................................PA-18
5.1.2 DF open and close detection mechanism...................................................................................................................PA-18
5.2 Machine internal cooling mechanism....................................................................................................................................PA-18
PB THEORY OF OPERATION PF-602m/HT-504/505..................................................................PB -1

1. OUTLINE.................................................................................................................................................................PB -1
1.1 Unit configuration ..................................................................................................................................................................PB -1
1.2 Paper path .............................................................................................................................................................................PB -2
2. PAPER FEED SUCTION SECTION........................................................................................................................PB -3
2.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................PB -3
2.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................PB -4
2.2.1 Tray lift drive ...............................................................................................................................................................PB -4
2.2.2 Paper feed drive ..........................................................................................................................................................PB -4
2.2.3 Pick-up drive ...............................................................................................................................................................PB -5
2.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................PB -5
2.3.1 Up down control...........................................................................................................................................................PB -5
2.3.2 Size detection control ..................................................................................................................................................PB -6
2.3.3 Pick-up mechanism .....................................................................................................................................................PB -7
2.3.4 Separation mechanism ...............................................................................................................................................PB -7
2.3.5 Air assist mechanism ..................................................................................................................................................PB -8
2.3.6 Paper empty detection control ....................................................................................................................................PB -9
2.3.7 Remaining paper detection control .............................................................................................................................PB -9
2.3.8 Tray lock control ..........................................................................................................................................................PB -9
3. CONVEYANCE SECTION.....................................................................................................................................PB -10
3.1 Configuration .......................................................................................................................................................................PB -10
3.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PB -11
3.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PB -11
3.3.1 Pre-registration control ..............................................................................................................................................PB -11
3.3.2 Conveyance control ..................................................................................................................................................PB -11
3.3.3 Multi feed detection control .......................................................................................................................................PB -12
4. OTHERS................................................................................................................................................................PB -13
4.1 Dehumidification heater control ...........................................................................................................................................PB -13
4.2 Tray damper mechanism ....................................................................................................................................................PB -13
4.3 Main body assist mechanism ..............................................................................................................................................PB -13
4.3.1 Filter replacement assy retaining mechanism ...........................................................................................................PB -13
4.3.2 Filter replacement assy ventilation mechanism ........................................................................................................PB -13
5. HT-504/505 (OPTIONAL) .....................................................................................................................................PB -15
5.1 Configuration .......................................................................................................................................................................PB -15
5.2 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PB -15
5.2.1 Dehumidifier fan heater control .................................................................................................................................PB -15
PC THEORY OF OPERATION PF-707/HT-506.............................................................................PC-1

1. OUTLINE .................................................................................................................................................................PC-1
1.1 UNIT CONFIGURATION........................................................................................................................................................PC-1
1.2 Paper path..............................................................................................................................................................................PC-1
2. PAPER FEED TRAY SECTION ..............................................................................................................................PC-2
2.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................PC-2
2.2 Drive .......................................................................................................................................................................................PC-3
2.2.1 Tray lift drive ................................................................................................................................................................PC-3
2.2.2 Side guide shutter drive................................................................................................................................................PC-3
2.2.3 Paper leading edge shutter drive .................................................................................................................................PC-4
2.2.4 Paper feed drive ..........................................................................................................................................................PC-4
2.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................PC-5
2.3.1 Up down control............................................................................................................................................................PC-5
2.3.2 Size detection control ..................................................................................................................................................PC-5
2.3.3 Air control .....................................................................................................................................................................PC-6
2.3.4 Paper empty detection control ...................................................................................................................................PC-11
2.3.5 Remaining paper detection control ............................................................................................................................PC-11
2.3.6 Tray lock control ........................................................................................................................................................PC-11
3. PAPER FEED SUCTION SECTION ......................................................................................................................PC-12
3.1 Configuration.........................................................................................................................................................................PC-12
3.2 Drive......................................................................................................................................................................................PC-12
3.2.1 Paper feed drive.........................................................................................................................................................PC-12
3.2.2 Paper feed suction drive.............................................................................................................................................PC-13
3.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PC-13
3.3.1 Suction control ...........................................................................................................................................................PC-13
lix
3.3.2 Paper feed belt control................................................................................................................................................PC-13
4. VERTICAL CONVEYANCE SECTION...................................................................................................................PC-15
4.1 Configuration ........................................................................................................................................................................PC-15
4.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PC-15
4.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PC-16
4.3.1 Vertical conveyance control .......................................................................................................................................PC-16
5. HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE SECTION ............................................................................................................PC-17
5.1 Configuration.........................................................................................................................................................................PC-17
5.2 Drive......................................................................................................................................................................................PC-17
5.2.1 Horizontal conveyance drive.......................................................................................................................................PC-17
5.2.2 Horizontal conveyance roller pressure release drive..................................................................................................PC-18
5.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PC-18
5.3.1 Pre-registration control ..............................................................................................................................................PC-18
5.3.2 Horizontal conveyance control ...................................................................................................................................PC-18
5.3.3 Horizontal conveyance roller pressure release control...............................................................................................PC-18
5.3.4 Multi-feed detection control ........................................................................................................................................PC-19
6. OTHERS ................................................................................................................................................................PC-20
6.1 Internal heater control ..........................................................................................................................................................PC-20
6.2 Main body assist mechanism ...............................................................................................................................................PC-20
6.2.1 Machine internal cooling mechanism .........................................................................................................................PC-20
7. HT-506 (Option) .....................................................................................................................................................PC-21
7.1 Configuration ........................................................................................................................................................................PC-21
7.2 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PC-21
7.2.1 Dehumidifier fan heater control...................................................................................................................................PC-21
PD THEORY OF OPERATION LU-202/HT-503.............................................................................PD-1

1. OUTLINE..................................................................................................................................................................PD-1
1.1 Unit configuration ...................................................................................................................................................................PD-1
1.2 Paper path .............................................................................................................................................................................PD-1
2. PAPER FEED SECTION .........................................................................................................................................PD-2
2.1 Configuration ..........................................................................................................................................................................PD-2
2.2 Drive .......................................................................................................................................................................................PD-2
2.2.1 Paper feed drive ..........................................................................................................................................................PD-2
2.2.2 Pick-up drive ................................................................................................................................................................PD-3
2.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................PD-3
2.3.1 Paper feed control........................................................................................................................................................PD-3
2.3.2 Paper empty detection control .....................................................................................................................................PD-6
2.3.3 Remaining paper detection control ..............................................................................................................................PD-6
2.3.4 Size detection control...................................................................................................................................................PD-7
3. UP DOWN SECTION...............................................................................................................................................PD-9
3.1 Configuration ..........................................................................................................................................................................PD-9
3.2 Drive .......................................................................................................................................................................................PD-9
3.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PD-10
3.3.1 Up down control..........................................................................................................................................................PD-10
4. OTHERS.................................................................................................................................................................PD-11
4.1 Dehumidification heater control ...........................................................................................................................................PD-11
4.2 Interlock switch control .........................................................................................................................................................PD-11
5. HT-503 (OPTIONAL) .............................................................................................................................................PD-12
5.1 Configuration ........................................................................................................................................................................PD-12
5.2 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PD-12
5.2.1 Dehumidifier fan heater control ..................................................................................................................................PD-12
PE THEORY OF OPERATION MB-506..........................................................................................PE-1

1. OUTLINE..................................................................................................................................................................PE-1
1.1 Unit configuration ...................................................................................................................................................................PE-1
1.2 Paper path ..............................................................................................................................................................................PE-1
2. PAPER FEED SECTION..........................................................................................................................................PE-2
2.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................PE-2
2.2 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................PE-2
2.2.1 Paper feed drive............................................................................................................................................................PE-2
2.2.2 Up down drive...............................................................................................................................................................PE-3
2.3 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................PE-3
2.3.1 Up down control............................................................................................................................................................PE-3
2.3.2 Paper size detection control..........................................................................................................................................PE-3
2.3.3 Paper feed control.........................................................................................................................................................PE-3
2.3.4 Paper empty control......................................................................................................................................................PE-4
2.3.5 Remaining paper detection control...............................................................................................................................PE-5
lx
PF THEORY OF OPERATION OT-502...........................................................................................PF-1
1. Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................PF-1
1.1 Unit configuration....................................................................................................................................................................PF-1
1.2 Paper path...............................................................................................................................................................................PF-1
2. Conveyance section..................................................................................................................................................PF-2
2.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................PF-2
2.2 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................PF-2
2.3 Operation.................................................................................................................................................................................PF-2
2.3.1 Conveyance control......................................................................................................................................................PF-2
2.3.2 Paper exit full detection control.....................................................................................................................................PF-2
PG THEORY OF OPERATION EF-103..........................................................................................PG-1

1. OUTLINE..................................................................................................................................................................PG-1
1.1 Way to distinguish the fusing unit between C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060 and EF-103.....................................................PG-1
1.2 Unit configuration....................................................................................................................................................................PG-1
1.3 Paper path..............................................................................................................................................................................PG-2
2. FUSING SECTION...................................................................................................................................................PG-3
2.1 Configuration..........................................................................................................................................................................PG-3
2.2 Drive.......................................................................................................................................................................................PG-4
2.2.1 Fusing roller drive.........................................................................................................................................................PG-4
2.2.2 Fusing pressure release drive......................................................................................................................................PG-4
2.2.3 Fusing swing drive........................................................................................................................................................PG-4
2.3 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................PG-4
2.3.1 Fusing roller drive control.............................................................................................................................................PG-4
2.3.2 Pressure release control...............................................................................................................................................PG-4
2.3.3 Fusing temperature control...........................................................................................................................................PG-5
2.3.4 Malfunction protection..................................................................................................................................................PG-6
2.3.5 Fusing roller/Lw cooling control....................................................................................................................................PG-6
2.3.6 Fusing recovery control................................................................................................................................................PG-6
2.3.7 Fusing air separation control........................................................................................................................................PG-6
2.3.8 Fusing swing control.....................................................................................................................................................PG-7
3. PAPER FEED ASSIST SECTION............................................................................................................................PG-8
3.1 Configuration..........................................................................................................................................................................PG-8
3.2 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................PG-8
PH THEORY OF OPERATION RU-516..........................................................................................PH-1

1. OUTLINE..................................................................................................................................................................PH-1
1.1 Unit configuration....................................................................................................................................................................PH-1
1.2 Paper path..............................................................................................................................................................................PH-2
2. CONVEYANCE SECTION........................................................................................................................................PH-3
2.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................PH-3
2.2 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................PH-3
2.3 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................PH-3
2.3.1 Conveyance control......................................................................................................................................................PH-3
3. POWER SOURCE SECTION...................................................................................................................................PH-4
3.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................PH-4
3.2 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................PH-4
3.2.1 Outline..........................................................................................................................................................................PH-4
3.2.2 Operation condition.......................................................................................................................................................PH-4
3.2.3 Operation timing...........................................................................................................................................................PH-5
PI THEORY OF OPERATION RU-517.............................................................................................PI-1

1. Outline........................................................................................................................................................................PI-1
1.1 Unit configuration......................................................................................................................................................................PI-1
1.2 Paper path................................................................................................................................................................................PI-2
2. Conveyance section...................................................................................................................................................PI-3
2.1 Configuration............................................................................................................................................................................PI-3
2.2 Drive.........................................................................................................................................................................................PI-3
2.3 Operation..................................................................................................................................................................................PI-3
2.3.1 Conveyance control........................................................................................................................................................PI-3
3. POWER SOURCE SECTION....................................................................................................................................PI-4
3.1 Configuration............................................................................................................................................................................PI-4
3.2 Operation..................................................................................................................................................................................PI-4
3.2.1 Outline............................................................................................................................................................................PI-4
3.2.2 Operation condition........................................................................................................................................................PI-4
3.2.3 Operation timing.............................................................................................................................................................PI-5
3.2.4 Interlock switch control...................................................................................................................................................PI-5
lxi
PJ THEORY OF OPERATION MK-740...........................................................................................PJ-1
1. Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................PJ-1
1.1 Unit configuration.....................................................................................................................................................................PJ-1
1.2 Paper path...............................................................................................................................................................................PJ-1
1.2.1 Paper path of Main Body + MB-506 + OT-502 + MK-740.............................................................................................PJ-1
1.2.2 Paper path of Main Body + MB-531 + FS-531/612 + MK-740.......................................................................................PJ-2
PK THEORY OF OPERATION RU-509/HM-102............................................................................PK-1

1. OUTLINE .................................................................................................................................................................PK-1
1.1 Unit configuration ...................................................................................................................................................................PK-1
1.2 Paper path ..............................................................................................................................................................................PK-2
1.2.1 Straight conveyance/de-curler conveyance/humidification conveyance mode ............................................................PK-2
2. ENTRANCE CONVEYANCE SECTION ..................................................................................................................PK-3
2.1 Configuration ..........................................................................................................................................................................PK-3
2.2 Drive .......................................................................................................................................................................................PK-3
2.2.1 Conveyance drive ........................................................................................................................................................PK-3
2.2.2 Humidification section gate drive .................................................................................................................................PK-4
2.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................PK-4
2.3.1 Conveyance control .....................................................................................................................................................PK-4
2.3.2 Humidification section gate control ..............................................................................................................................PK-5
3. DE-CURLER SECTION ...........................................................................................................................................PK-7
3.1 Configuration ..........................................................................................................................................................................PK-7
3.2 Drive .......................................................................................................................................................................................PK-8
3.2.1 De-curler section conveyance drive .............................................................................................................................PK-8
3.2.2 De-curler gate/1 and /2 drive........................................................................................................................................PK-9
3.2.3 De-curler/3 and /4 pressure drive.................................................................................................................................PK-9
3.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PK-10
3.3.1 Outline of de-curler ....................................................................................................................................................PK-10
3.3.2 De-curler section conveyance control ........................................................................................................................PK-15
3.3.3 De-curler/1 and /2 control...........................................................................................................................................PK-16
3.3.4 De-curler/3 and /4 control...........................................................................................................................................PK-16
4. OUTPUT PAPER DENSITY DETECTION SECTION ............................................................................................PK-17
4.1 Configuration ........................................................................................................................................................................PK-17
4.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PK-18
4.2.1 Conveyance drive ......................................................................................................................................................PK-18
4.2.2 Shutter drive ...............................................................................................................................................................PK-18
4.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PK-19
4.3.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................................PK-19
4.3.2 Output paper density detection section ......................................................................................................................PK-21
5. PAPER EXIT SECTION .........................................................................................................................................PK-22
5.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PK-23
5.2.1 Paper exit conveyance drive ......................................................................................................................................PK-23
5.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PK-24
5.3.1 Paper exit conveyance control ...................................................................................................................................PK-24
6. HUMIDIFICATION SECTION (HM-102) ................................................................................................................PK-27
6.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PK-28
6.2.1 Humidification section entrance conveyance drive ....................................................................................................PK-28
6.2.2 Humidification section conveyance drive ...................................................................................................................PK-28
6.2.3 Humidification roller pressure drive (HM-102)............................................................................................................PK-29
6.2.4 Water feed pump drive ...............................................................................................................................................PK-29
6.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PK-29
6.3.1 Outline of humidification section ................................................................................................................................PK-29
6.3.2 Humidification section conveyance control ................................................................................................................PK-30
6.3.3 Humidification roller / water feed roller pressure control ............................................................................................PK-31
6.3.4 Water feed control ......................................................................................................................................................PK-34
7. OTHER CONTROLS .............................................................................................................................................PK-36
7.1 Fan control ...........................................................................................................................................................................PK-36
7.1.1 Configuration ..............................................................................................................................................................PK-36
7.1.2 Control .......................................................................................................................................................................PK-36
7.2 Door detection control ..........................................................................................................................................................PK-37
PL THEORY OF OPERATION RU-510...........................................................................................PL-1

1. OUTLINE...................................................................................................................................................................PL-1
1.1 Unit configuration.....................................................................................................................................................................PL-1
1.2 PAPER PATH..........................................................................................................................................................................PL-1
1.2.1 Straight conveyance......................................................................................................................................................PL-1
lxii
1.2.2 Reverse exit conveyance..............................................................................................................................................PL-2
2. CONVEYANCE SECTION........................................................................................................................................PL-3
2.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................PL-3
2.2 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................PL-3
2.2.1 Conveyance drive..........................................................................................................................................................PL-3
2.2.2 Straight gate drive.........................................................................................................................................................PL-4
2.3 Operation.................................................................................................................................................................................PL-4
2.3.1 Conveyance path switching control...............................................................................................................................PL-4
2.3.2 Paper feed mechanism.................................................................................................................................................PL-5
2.3.3 Line speed switch control..............................................................................................................................................PL-5
2.3.4 Conveyance control.......................................................................................................................................................PL-5
3. STACKER SECTION................................................................................................................................................PL-9
3.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................PL-9
3.2 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................PL-9
3.2.1 Assist guide drive..........................................................................................................................................................PL-9
3.2.2 CD alignment drive......................................................................................................................................................PL-10
3.2.3 FD alignment drive......................................................................................................................................................PL-10
3.3 Operation...............................................................................................................................................................................PL-10
3.3.1 Conveyance path switching control.............................................................................................................................PL-10
3.3.2 Horizontal alignment control........................................................................................................................................PL-11
3.3.3 Vertical alignment control............................................................................................................................................PL-12
3.3.4 Reverse exit control.....................................................................................................................................................PL-14
3.3.5 Stack assist fan control...............................................................................................................................................PL-17
PM THEORY OF OPERATION FS-531.........................................................................................PM-1

1. OUTLINE .................................................................................................................................................................PM-1
1.1 Unit configuration ...................................................................................................................................................................PM-1
1.2 Paper path .............................................................................................................................................................................PM-2
1.2.1 None sort/sort/group mode ..........................................................................................................................................PM-2
1.2.2 Sub tray mode .............................................................................................................................................................PM-2
1.2.3 Staple mode ................................................................................................................................................................PM-3
2. CONVEYANCE SECTION ......................................................................................................................................PM-4
2.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................PM-4
2.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................PM-5
2.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................PM-5
2.3.1 Punch registration control (Only when PK is installed) ................................................................................................PM-5
2.3.2 FS conveyance control ................................................................................................................................................PM-6
2.3.3 Gate drive control ........................................................................................................................................................PM-6
2.3.4 Bypass gate control .....................................................................................................................................................PM-7
2.3.5 Shift control .................................................................................................................................................................PM-8
2.3.6 Paper exit roller control ...............................................................................................................................................PM-9
2.3.7 Paper exit opening solenoid control ............................................................................................................................PM-9
2.3.8 Paper exit opening control .........................................................................................................................................PM-10
2.3.9 Sub tray paper exit control ........................................................................................................................................PM-10
3. MAIN TRAY SECTION ..........................................................................................................................................PM-12
3.1 Configuration .......................................................................................................................................................................PM-12
3.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PM-12
3.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PM-13
3.3.1 Tray up down control .................................................................................................................................................PM-13
4. STACKER SECTION ............................................................................................................................................PM-15
4.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PM-15
4.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PM-16
4.3.1 Alignment control .......................................................................................................................................................PM-16
4.3.2 Stopper control ..........................................................................................................................................................PM-16
4.3.3 Stacker entrance conveyance control .......................................................................................................................PM-16
4.3.4 Stacker paper exit control ..........................................................................................................................................PM-18
5. STAPLER SECTION .............................................................................................................................................PM-19
5.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PM-19
5.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PM-19
5.3.1 Stapler movement control .........................................................................................................................................PM-19
5.3.2 Stapler control ...........................................................................................................................................................PM-20
PN THEORY OF OPERATION FS-612..........................................................................................PN-1

1. OUTLINE .................................................................................................................................................................PN-1
1.1 Unit configuration ...................................................................................................................................................................PN-1
1.2 Paper path .............................................................................................................................................................................PN-2
1.2.1 None sort/sort/group mode ..........................................................................................................................................PN-2
lxiii
1.2.2 Sub tray mode .............................................................................................................................................................PN-2
1.2.3 Staple mode .................................................................................................................................................................PN-3
1.2.4 Center folding/saddle stitching mode ...........................................................................................................................PN-3
1.2.5 Tri-folding mode ...........................................................................................................................................................PN-4
2. CONVEYANCE SECTION .......................................................................................................................................PN-5
2.1 Configuration ..........................................................................................................................................................................PN-5
2.2 Drive .......................................................................................................................................................................................PN-6
2.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................PN-6
2.3.1 Punch registration control (Only when PK is installed) ................................................................................................PN-6
2.3.2 FS conveyance control ................................................................................................................................................PN-7
2.3.3 Gate drive control ........................................................................................................................................................PN-7
2.3.4 Bypass gate control .....................................................................................................................................................PN-8
2.3.5 Shift control ..................................................................................................................................................................PN-9
2.3.6 Paper exit roller control ..............................................................................................................................................PN-10
2.3.7 Paper exit opening solenoid control ...........................................................................................................................PN-10
2.3.8 Paper exit opening control .........................................................................................................................................PN-11
2.3.9 Sub tray paper exit control .........................................................................................................................................PN-12
3. MAIN TRAY SECTION ..........................................................................................................................................PN-13
3.1 Configuration ........................................................................................................................................................................PN-13
3.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PN-13
3.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PN-14
3.3.1 Tray up down control .................................................................................................................................................PN-14
4. STACKER SECTION .............................................................................................................................................PN-16
4.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PN-17
4.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PN-17
4.3.1 Alignment/Up control..................................................................................................................................................PN-17
4.3.2 Alignment/Lw control..................................................................................................................................................PN-18
4.3.3 Stopper control ..........................................................................................................................................................PN-18
4.3.4 Stacker entrance conveyance control ........................................................................................................................PN-20
4.3.5 Stacker paper exit control ..........................................................................................................................................PN-22
5. STAPLER SECTION .............................................................................................................................................PN-24
5.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PN-24
5.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PN-25
5.3.1 Stapler movement control ..........................................................................................................................................PN-25
5.3.2 Stapler control ............................................................................................................................................................PN-26
6. HALF-FOLDING/SADDLE-STITCHING/TRI-FOLDING SECTION .......................................................................PN-28
6.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PN-28
6.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PN-29
6.3.1 Folding knife control ...................................................................................................................................................PN-29
6.3.2 Folding conveyance control .......................................................................................................................................PN-29
6.3.3 Tri-folding gate control ...............................................................................................................................................PN-30
PO THEORY OF OPERATION PK-512/513...................................................................................PO-1

1. OUTLINE..................................................................................................................................................................PO-1
1.1 Unit configuration....................................................................................................................................................................PO-1
1.2 Paper path..............................................................................................................................................................................PO-1
2. PUNCH SECTION....................................................................................................................................................PO-2
2.1 Composition............................................................................................................................................................................PO-2
2.2 Drive.......................................................................................................................................................................................PO-2
2.2.1 Punch shift drive...........................................................................................................................................................PO-2
2.2.2 Punch drive...................................................................................................................................................................PO-3
2.3 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................PO-5
2.3.1 Punch standby position movement control...................................................................................................................PO-5
2.3.2 Punch position correction control.................................................................................................................................PO-5
2.3.3 Punch control................................................................................................................................................................PO-6
3. PUNCH SCRAPS BOX SECTION...........................................................................................................................PO-9
3.1 Composition............................................................................................................................................................................PO-9
3.2 Drive.......................................................................................................................................................................................PO-9
3.3 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................PO-9
3.3.1 Punch scraps box control.............................................................................................................................................PO-9
PP THEORY OF OPERATION PI-502............................................................................................PP-1

1. OUTLINE .................................................................................................................................................................PP-1
1.1 Unit configuration ...................................................................................................................................................................PP-1
1.2 Paper path ..............................................................................................................................................................................PP-1
lxiv
1.2.1 Automatic sheet feed (Online operation) .....................................................................................................................PP-1
1.2.2 Manual sheet feed (Offline operation) ..........................................................................................................................PP-1
2. PAPER FEED SECTION .........................................................................................................................................PP-2
2.1 Configuration ..........................................................................................................................................................................PP-2
2.2 Drive .......................................................................................................................................................................................PP-2
2.2.1 Paper feed drive ...........................................................................................................................................................PP-2
2.2.2 Tray lift drive ................................................................................................................................................................PP-3
2.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................PP-3
2.3.1 Tray lift mechanism ......................................................................................................................................................PP-3
2.3.2 Pick-up mechanism ......................................................................................................................................................PP-3
2.3.3 Separation mechanism ................................................................................................................................................PP-4
2.3.4 Registration control ......................................................................................................................................................PP-4
2.3.5 Paper size detection control .........................................................................................................................................PP-5
PQ THEORY OF OPERATION FS-532..........................................................................................PQ-1

1. UNIT CONFIGURATION..........................................................................................................................................PQ-1
2. PAPER PATH...........................................................................................................................................................PQ-2
3. PAPER CONVEYANCE SECTION..........................................................................................................................PQ-3
3.1 Configuration..........................................................................................................................................................................PQ-3
3.2 Drive.......................................................................................................................................................................................PQ-4
3.2.1 FNS entrance roller drive/conveyance gate drive.........................................................................................................PQ-4
3.2.2 Bypass conveyance roller/stacker entrance roller drive...............................................................................................PQ-4
3.2.3 Sub tray conveyance roller/PK exit roller/stacker conveyance roller drive...................................................................PQ-5
3.2.4 Sub tray exit roller/horizontal conveyance roller drive..................................................................................................PQ-5
3.2.5 Bypass gate drive.........................................................................................................................................................PQ-6
3.3 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................PQ-6
3.3.1 Line speed switch control.............................................................................................................................................PQ-6
3.3.2 Conveyance path switching control..............................................................................................................................PQ-6
4. SUB TRAY SECTION...............................................................................................................................................PQ-9
4.1 Configuration..........................................................................................................................................................................PQ-9
4.2 Drive.......................................................................................................................................................................................PQ-9
4.3 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................PQ-9
4.3.1 Sub tray paper exit control............................................................................................................................................PQ-9
4.3.2 Sub tray paper full detection control...........................................................................................................................PQ-10
5. STACKER SECTION..............................................................................................................................................PQ-11
5.1 Configuration........................................................................................................................................................................PQ-11
5.2 Drive.....................................................................................................................................................................................PQ-11
5.2.1 Stacker entrance roller pressure release drive...........................................................................................................PQ-11
5.2.2 Rewind paddle pressure release/rewind paddle drive................................................................................................PQ-12
5.2.3 Stack assist plate drive...............................................................................................................................................PQ-13
5.2.4 Alignment plate/rear stopper drive/bundle exit claw drive..........................................................................................PQ-13
5.2.5 Paper pressure drive..................................................................................................................................................PQ-14
5.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................PQ-14
5.3.1 Paper overlap control.................................................................................................................................................PQ-14
5.3.2 Stacker entrance roller pressure release control........................................................................................................PQ-16
5.3.3 Stack assist control.....................................................................................................................................................PQ-16
5.3.4 Paper stopper control.................................................................................................................................................PQ-17
5.3.5 Rear stopper position control......................................................................................................................................PQ-18
5.3.6 Paper pressure control...............................................................................................................................................PQ-18
5.3.7 Horizontal alignment control.......................................................................................................................................PQ-19
5.3.8 Vertical alignment control...........................................................................................................................................PQ-20
5.3.9 Small-size paper exit auxiliary control........................................................................................................................PQ-21
6. STAPLER SECTION..............................................................................................................................................PQ-22
6.2 Drive.....................................................................................................................................................................................PQ-22
6.2.1 Stapler movement/rotation control..............................................................................................................................PQ-22
6.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................PQ-22
6.3.1 Stapler movement control...........................................................................................................................................PQ-22
6.3.2 Staple control..............................................................................................................................................................PQ-23
7. MAIN TRAY SECTION...........................................................................................................................................PQ-25
7.2 Drive.....................................................................................................................................................................................PQ-26
7.2.1 Main tray up-down drive.............................................................................................................................................PQ-26
7.2.2 Paper exit roller/paper exit opening drive...................................................................................................................PQ-26
7.2.3 Gripper/paper exit pressure drive...............................................................................................................................PQ-27
7.2.4 Paper exit alignment plate drive.................................................................................................................................PQ-28
7.2.5 Main tray shift drive....................................................................................................................................................PQ-28
7.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................PQ-28
lxv
7.3.1 Paper exit opening control..........................................................................................................................................PQ-28
7.3.2 Gripper control............................................................................................................................................................PQ-29
7.3.3 Paper pressure control...............................................................................................................................................PQ-30
7.3.4 Main tray up/down control..........................................................................................................................................PQ-30
7.3.5 Paper exit alignment control.......................................................................................................................................PQ-32
7.3.6 Main tray shift control.................................................................................................................................................PQ-32
PR THEORY OF OPERATION SD-510..........................................................................................PR-1

1. UNIT CONFIGURATION..........................................................................................................................................PR-1
2. PAPER PATH...........................................................................................................................................................PR-2
2.1 Half-folding/saddle stitching....................................................................................................................................................PR-2
2.2 Tri-folding................................................................................................................................................................................PR-3
3. PAPER CONVEYANCE SECTION..........................................................................................................................PR-4
3.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................PR-4
3.2 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................PR-4
3.3 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................PR-4
3.3.1 SD entrance conveyance..............................................................................................................................................PR-4
4. ALIGNMENT SECTION............................................................................................................................................PR-5
4.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................PR-5
4.2 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................PR-5
4.2.1 Paddle/Md drive............................................................................................................................................................PR-5
4.2.2 Rear stopper/rear gripper drive.....................................................................................................................................PR-6
4.2.3 Paddle/Lw drive............................................................................................................................................................PR-6
4.2.4 Alignment Plate drive....................................................................................................................................................PR-7
4.3 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................PR-7
4.3.1 Paper stopper control mechanism................................................................................................................................PR-7
4.3.2 Rear stopper mechanism..............................................................................................................................................PR-8
4.3.3 Alignment mechanism..................................................................................................................................................PR-9
4.3.4 Alignment control........................................................................................................................................................PR-10
5. STAPLER SECTION..............................................................................................................................................PR-13
5.1 Configuration.........................................................................................................................................................................PR-13
5.2 Drive......................................................................................................................................................................................PR-13
5.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................PR-13
5.3.1 Stapler movement control...........................................................................................................................................PR-13
5.3.2 Staple control..............................................................................................................................................................PR-14
6. HALF-FOLD/FOLD&STAPLE/TRI-FOLDING SECTION........................................................................................PR-16
6.2 Drive......................................................................................................................................................................................PR-17
6.2.1 Folding roller drive......................................................................................................................................................PR-17
6.2.2 1st Fold knife drive......................................................................................................................................................PR-17
6.2.3 2nd folding knife drive.................................................................................................................................................PR-17
6.2.4 2nd Fold gate drive.....................................................................................................................................................PR-17
6.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................PR-18
6.3.1 1st folding knife control...............................................................................................................................................PR-18
6.3.2 Half-folding/saddle stitching conveyance control........................................................................................................PR-18
6.3.3 2nd folding gate control..............................................................................................................................................PR-19
6.3.4 2nd Folding knife control.............................................................................................................................................PR-20
6.3.5 Tri-folding conveyance control....................................................................................................................................PR-20
7. PAPER EXIT SECTION..........................................................................................................................................PR-22
7.2 Drive......................................................................................................................................................................................PR-22
7.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................PR-22
7.3.1 Paper exit control........................................................................................................................................................PR-22
7.3.2 Output tray lift up control.............................................................................................................................................PR-22
PS THEORY OF OPERATION PK-522..........................................................................................PS-1

1. OUTLINE..................................................................................................................................................................PS-1
1.1 Unit configuration....................................................................................................................................................................PS-1
1.2 PAPER PATH.........................................................................................................................................................................PS-1
2. PUNCH SECTION....................................................................................................................................................PS-2
2.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................PS-2
2.2 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................PS-2
2.2.1 Punch shift drive...........................................................................................................................................................PS-2
2.2.2 Punch drive...................................................................................................................................................................PS-2
2.3 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................PS-3
2.3.1 Punch ready position movement control.......................................................................................................................PS-3
2.3.2 Punch position correction control..................................................................................................................................PS-4
2.3.3 Punch control................................................................................................................................................................PS-4
lxvi
3. PUNCH-HOLE SCRAPS BOX SECTION...............................................................................................................PS-12
3.1 Configuration.........................................................................................................................................................................PS-12
3.2 Drive......................................................................................................................................................................................PS-12
3.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................PS-12
3.3.1 Punch scraps dropping...............................................................................................................................................PS-12
3.3.2 Punch scraps box control............................................................................................................................................PS-12
PT THEORY OF OPERATION MK-732..........................................................................................PT-1

1. OUTLINE...................................................................................................................................................................PT-1
1.1 Unit configuration....................................................................................................................................................................PT-1
1.2 PAPER PATH..........................................................................................................................................................................PT-1
2. CONVEYANCE SECTION........................................................................................................................................PT-2
2.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................PT-2
2.2 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................PT-2
2.2.1 Conveyance drive.........................................................................................................................................................PT-2
2.3 Operation.................................................................................................................................................................................PT-2
2.3.1 Conveyance control......................................................................................................................................................PT-2
PU THEORY OF OPERATION LS-505..........................................................................................PU-1

1. OUTLINE .................................................................................................................................................................PU-1
1.1 Unit configuration ...................................................................................................................................................................PU-1
1.2 Paper path .............................................................................................................................................................................PU-2
2. COUPLING CONVEYANCE SECTION ...................................................................................................................PU-3
2.1 Configuration ..........................................................................................................................................................................PU-3
2.2 Drive .......................................................................................................................................................................................PU-3
2.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................PU-3
2.3.1 Door open/close mechanism .......................................................................................................................................PU-3
2.3.2 Jam release lever lock mechanism ..............................................................................................................................PU-3
3. ENTRANCE CONVEYANCE SECTION ..................................................................................................................PU-4
3.2 Drive .......................................................................................................................................................................................PU-4
3.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................PU-4
3.3.1 Path switching ..............................................................................................................................................................PU-4
3.3.2 Conveyance line speed control ....................................................................................................................................PU-6
3.3.3 Paper cooling mechanism ...........................................................................................................................................PU-6
4. CONVEYANCE SECTION .......................................................................................................................................PU-7
4.2 Drive .......................................................................................................................................................................................PU-8
4.2.1 Entrance conveyance drive .........................................................................................................................................PU-8
4.2.2 Stacker tray conveyance drive (M3 reverse) ...............................................................................................................PU-8
4.2.3 Sub tray conveyance drive (M3 forward) .....................................................................................................................PU-9
4.2.4 Coupling conveyance/grip belt/paper press arm drive .................................................................................................PU-9
4.2.5 Stacker tray up down drive ........................................................................................................................................PU-10
4.2.6 Shift unit/alignment plate drive ...................................................................................................................................PU-10
4.2.7 Rear stopper/job partition plate drive .........................................................................................................................PU-11
4.2.8 Front stopper/paper press arm drive .........................................................................................................................PU-11
4.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PU-11
4.3.1 Stacker tray conveyance ...........................................................................................................................................PU-11
4.3.2 Coupling conveyance ................................................................................................................................................PU-16
4.3.3 Sub tray conveyance .................................................................................................................................................PU-16
PV THEORY OF OPERATION LS-506...........................................................................................PV-1

1. OUTLINE .................................................................................................................................................................PV-1
1.1 Unit configuration....................................................................................................................................................................PV-1
1.2 Paper path...............................................................................................................................................................................PV-2
2. COUPLING CONVEYANCE SECTION ...................................................................................................................PV-3
2.1 Configuration ..........................................................................................................................................................................PV-3
2.2 Drive .......................................................................................................................................................................................PV-3
2.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................PV-3
2.3.1 Door open/close mechanism .......................................................................................................................................PV-3
2.3.2 Jam release lever lock mechanism ..............................................................................................................................PV-3
3. ENTRANCE CONVEYANCE SECTION ..................................................................................................................PV-4
3.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................PV-4
3.2 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................PV-4
3.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................PV-4
3.3.1 Path switching...............................................................................................................................................................PV-4
3.3.2 Conveyance line speed control ....................................................................................................................................PV-6
3.3.3 Paper cooling mechanism.............................................................................................................................................PV-6
lxvii
4. CONVEYANCE SECTION .......................................................................................................................................PV-7
4.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................PV-7
4.2 Drive .......................................................................................................................................................................................PV-8
4.2.1 Entrance conveyance drive ..........................................................................................................................................PV-8
4.2.2 Stacker tray conveyance drive (M3 reverse)................................................................................................................PV-8
4.2.3 Sub tray conveyance drive (M3 forward) .....................................................................................................................PV-9
4.2.4 Coupling conveyance/grip belt/paper press arm drive .................................................................................................PV-9
4.2.5 Stacker tray up down drive ........................................................................................................................................PV-10
4.2.6 Shift unit/alignment plate drive ...................................................................................................................................PV-10
4.2.7 Rear stopper/job partition plate drive .........................................................................................................................PV-11
4.2.8 Front stopper/paper press arm drive ..........................................................................................................................PV-11
4.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PV-11
4.3.1 Stacker tray conveyance.............................................................................................................................................PV-11
4.3.2 Coupling conveyance .................................................................................................................................................PV-16
4.3.3 Sub tray conveyance .................................................................................................................................................PV-16
PW THEORY OF OPERATION FD-503........................................................................................PW-1

1. OUTLINE ................................................................................................................................................................PW-1
1.1 Unit configuration ..................................................................................................................................................................PW-1
1.2 Paper path .............................................................................................................................................................................PW-2
(1) Straight mode..................................................................................................................................................................PW-2
(2) Sub tray mode.................................................................................................................................................................PW-3
(3) Punch mode (L and S sizes)...........................................................................................................................................PW-4
(4) Z-Fold mode....................................................................................................................................................................PW-5
(5) Letter fold-out mode........................................................................................................................................................PW-6
(6) Tri-Fold-in/double parallel mode......................................................................................................................................PW-7
(7) Gate fold mode................................................................................................................................................................PW-8
(8) Half-fold mode.................................................................................................................................................................PW-9
2. CONVEYANCE SECTION ....................................................................................................................................PW-10
2.1 Configuration .......................................................................................................................................................................PW-10
2.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PW-11
2.2.1 Conveyance drive .....................................................................................................................................................PW-11
2.2.2 Gate drive .................................................................................................................................................................PW-12
2.2.3 Alignment drive .........................................................................................................................................................PW-12
2.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PW-13
2.3.1 Conveyance path switching ......................................................................................................................................PW-13
2.3.2 Conveyance line speed control .................................................................................................................................PW-16
2.3.3 Alignment control ......................................................................................................................................................PW-16
2.3.4 Gap recovery control .................................................................................................................................................PW-17
3. PUNCH SECTION ................................................................................................................................................PW-19
3.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PW-19
3.2.1 Rear registration drive ...............................................................................................................................................PW-19
3.2.2 Punch drive ...............................................................................................................................................................PW-20
3.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PW-20
(1) Punch control.................................................................................................................................................................PW-20
(2) Punch hole switching control.........................................................................................................................................PW-20
(3) Punch-hole scraps box control......................................................................................................................................PW-20
4. FOLDING CONVEYANCE SECTION ...................................................................................................................PW-21
4.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PW-21
4.2.1 Conveyance drive .....................................................................................................................................................PW-21
4.2.2 Folding drive .............................................................................................................................................................PW-22
4.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PW-22
4.3.1 Registration control ...................................................................................................................................................PW-22
4.3.2 Conveyance path switching ......................................................................................................................................PW-23
4.3.3 1st folding control ......................................................................................................................................................PW-23
4.3.4 2nd folding control .....................................................................................................................................................PW-24
4.3.5 3rd folding control .....................................................................................................................................................PW-26
5. MAIN TRAY SECTION .........................................................................................................................................PW-28
5.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PW-29
5.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PW-29
5.3.1 Main tray up down control..........................................................................................................................................PW-29
6. SUB TRAY SECTION ...........................................................................................................................................PW-31
6.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PW-31
6.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PW-31
6.3.1 Sub tray full-status detection control .........................................................................................................................PW-31
lxviii
6.3.2 Line speed switching .................................................................................................................................................PW-32
7. PI SECTION ..........................................................................................................................................................PW-33
7.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PW-33
7.2.1 Tray lift drive .............................................................................................................................................................PW-33
7.2.2 Paper feed drive ........................................................................................................................................................PW-34
7.2.3 Pick-up drive .............................................................................................................................................................PW-34
7.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PW-34
7.3.1 Size detection control ................................................................................................................................................PW-34
7.3.2 Up down control.........................................................................................................................................................PW-35
7.3.3 Pick-up mechanism ...................................................................................................................................................PW-36
7.3.4 Separation mechanism .............................................................................................................................................PW-36
7.3.5 Multi feed detection control .......................................................................................................................................PW-37
7.3.6 Paper empty detection control ..................................................................................................................................PW-37
PX THEORY OF OPERATION SD-506..........................................................................................PX-1

1. OUTLINE .................................................................................................................................................................PX-1
1.1 Unit configuration ...................................................................................................................................................................PX-1
1.2 Paper path ..............................................................................................................................................................................PX-2
(1) Coupling exit/sub tray exit mode......................................................................................................................................PX-2
(2) Overlap tri-folding mode...................................................................................................................................................PX-2
(3) Center folding/saddle stitching mode...............................................................................................................................PX-3
2. HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE SECTION ...............................................................................................................PX-5
2.1 Configuration ..........................................................................................................................................................................PX-5
2.2 Drive .......................................................................................................................................................................................PX-5
2.2.1 Entrance conveyance drive ..........................................................................................................................................PX-5
2.2.2 Horizontal conveyance drive ........................................................................................................................................PX-5
2.2.3 Gate drive/sub tray pressure release drive ..................................................................................................................PX-6
2.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................PX-6
2.3.1 Conveyance path switching control .............................................................................................................................PX-6
2.3.2 Conveyance line speed switch control .........................................................................................................................PX-6
2.3.3 Sub tray paper exit control ...........................................................................................................................................PX-7
2.3.4 Sub tray paper full detection control ............................................................................................................................PX-7
3. RIGHT ANGLE CONVEYANCE SECTION .............................................................................................................PX-8
3.1 Configuration ..........................................................................................................................................................................PX-8
3.2 Drive .......................................................................................................................................................................................PX-8
3.2.1 Right angle conveyance drive/alignment drive ............................................................................................................PX-8
3.2.2 Overlap drive ................................................................................................................................................................PX-9
3.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................PX-9
3.3.1 Paper overlap control ...................................................................................................................................................PX-9
3.3.2 Alignment control .......................................................................................................................................................PX-11
3.3.3 Right angle conveyance control .................................................................................................................................PX-12
4. FOLDING SECTION ..............................................................................................................................................PX-14
4.1 Configuration ........................................................................................................................................................................PX-14
4.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PX-14
4.2.1 Folding entrance drive ...............................................................................................................................................PX-14
4.2.2 Folding conveyance drive ..........................................................................................................................................PX-15
4.2.3 Folding blade drive .....................................................................................................................................................PX-15
4.2.4 Folding main scan alignment drive ............................................................................................................................PX-16
4.2.5 Folding sub scan alignment/center folding exit drive .................................................................................................PX-16
4.2.6 Guide shaft drive ........................................................................................................................................................PX-17
4.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PX-17
4.3.1 Folding entrance conveyance control ........................................................................................................................PX-17
4.3.2 Folding main scan alignment control .........................................................................................................................PX-18
4.3.3 Folding control ...........................................................................................................................................................PX-19
4.3.4 Folding sub scan alignment control ...........................................................................................................................PX-22
4.3.5 Guide shaft control .....................................................................................................................................................PX-23
5. SADDLE STITCHING SECTION ...........................................................................................................................PX-25
5.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PX-25
5.2.1 Saddle stitching alignment drive ................................................................................................................................PX-25
5.2.2 Saddle stitching hold drive .........................................................................................................................................PX-26
5.2.3 Clincher up down drive ..............................................................................................................................................PX-26
5.2.4 Stapler/clincher movement drive ................................................................................................................................PX-27
5.2.5 Stapler/clincher drive .................................................................................................................................................PX-27
5.2.6 Bundle arm rotation drive ...........................................................................................................................................PX-28
5.2.7 Bundle arm movement drive ......................................................................................................................................PX-28
5.2.8 Bundle arm assist drive ..............................................................................................................................................PX-29
5.2.9 Bundle clip drive .........................................................................................................................................................PX-29
lxix
5.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PX-29
5.3.1 Saddle stitching alignment control .............................................................................................................................PX-29
5.3.2 Stapler/clincher movement control .............................................................................................................................PX-30
5.3.3 Saddle stitching hold control ......................................................................................................................................PX-31
5.3.4 Clincher up down control ...........................................................................................................................................PX-32
5.3.5 Stapler control ............................................................................................................................................................PX-34
5.3.6 Bundle arm control .....................................................................................................................................................PX-35
5.3.7 Bundle arm assist control ...........................................................................................................................................PX-38
5.3.8 Bundle clip control ......................................................................................................................................................PX-39
6. BUNDLE PROCESSING SECTION ......................................................................................................................PX-43
6.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PX-43
6.2.1 Bundle press stage lift drive .......................................................................................................................................PX-43
6.2.2 Bundle press movement drive ...................................................................................................................................PX-44
6.2.3 Bundle registration drive ............................................................................................................................................PX-44
6.2.4 Bundle press drive .....................................................................................................................................................PX-45
6.2.5 Bundle exit drive ........................................................................................................................................................PX-45
6.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PX-46
6.3.1 Bundle press stage up down control ..........................................................................................................................PX-46
6.3.2 Bundle press movement control ................................................................................................................................PX-48
6.3.3 Bundle press control ..................................................................................................................................................PX-49
6.3.4 Bundle registration control .........................................................................................................................................PX-51
6.3.5 Bundle exit control .....................................................................................................................................................PX-52
7. TRIMMER SECTION .............................................................................................................................................PX-57
7.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PX-57
7.2.1 Trimmer press drive ...................................................................................................................................................PX-57
7.2.2 Trimmer blade drive ...................................................................................................................................................PX-57
7.2.3 Trimmer board drive ...................................................................................................................................................PX-59
7.2.4 Paddle drive ...............................................................................................................................................................PX-59
7.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PX-59
7.3.1 Trimmer press control ................................................................................................................................................PX-59
7.3.2 Trimmer blade control ................................................................................................................................................PX-61
7.3.3 Trimmer board control ................................................................................................................................................PX-63
7.3.4 Trimmer paddle control ..............................................................................................................................................PX-63
PY THEORY OF OPERATION SD-513..........................................................................................PY-1

1. Unit configuration......................................................................................................................................................PY-1
1.1 Entire system..........................................................................................................................................................................PY-1
1.2 Rear console...........................................................................................................................................................................PY-1
1.3 Front console..........................................................................................................................................................................PY-2
2. Paper path................................................................................................................................................................PY-3
2.1 Straight mode, sub tray mode.................................................................................................................................................PY-3
2.2 Overlap tri-folding mode..........................................................................................................................................................PY-3
2.3 Multi half-fold mode, fold & staple and trimming mode...........................................................................................................PY-4
2.3.1 Conveyance path of the rear console...........................................................................................................................PY-4
2.3.2 Conveyance path from the rear console to the front console.......................................................................................PY-4
2.3.3 Conveyance path of the front console..........................................................................................................................PY-5
3. ENTRANCE CONVEYANCE SECTION...................................................................................................................PY-6
3.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................PY-6
3.2 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................PY-7
3.2.1 Entrance gate drive.......................................................................................................................................................PY-7
3.2.2 Reverse/exit gate drive.................................................................................................................................................PY-7
3.2.3 Entrance conveyance drive...........................................................................................................................................PY-8
3.2.4 Reverse exit drive, reverse exit roller pressure release drive.......................................................................................PY-9
3.2.5 Paper re-feed drive, paper re-feed roller pressure release drive................................................................................PY-10
3.2.6 CD alignment plate drive.............................................................................................................................................PY-11
3.2.7 Front stopper drive......................................................................................................................................................PY-12
3.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................PY-12
3.3.1 Conveyance path switching control............................................................................................................................PY-12
3.3.2 Line speed switch control............................................................................................................................................PY-14
3.3.3 Overlap conveyance control.......................................................................................................................................PY-15
3.3.4 Reverse exit roller pressure release control...............................................................................................................PY-16
3.3.5 Stack assist control.....................................................................................................................................................PY-17
3.3.6 Alignment control........................................................................................................................................................PY-18
3.3.7 Paper re-feed roller pressure release control.............................................................................................................PY-20
4. FOLDING CONVEYANCE SECTION.....................................................................................................................PY-23
4.1 Configuration.........................................................................................................................................................................PY-23
4.2 Drive......................................................................................................................................................................................PY-24
lxx
4.2.1 Horizontal conveyance drive/1....................................................................................................................................PY-24
4.2.2 Sub tray gate drive......................................................................................................................................................PY-24
4.2.3 Horizontal conveyance drive/2....................................................................................................................................PY-25
4.2.4 Horizontal conveyance pressure release drive/1........................................................................................................PY-25
4.2.5 Horizontal conveyance pressure release drive/2........................................................................................................PY-26
4.2.6 1st folding stopper drive..............................................................................................................................................PY-26
4.2.7 1st folding FD alignment drive....................................................................................................................................PY-27
4.2.8 Folding roller drive, tri-folding conveyance drive.........................................................................................................PY-27
4.2.9 1st folding knife drive..................................................................................................................................................PY-28
4.2.10 2nd folding knife drive...............................................................................................................................................PY-29
4.2.11 Folding roller guide drive...........................................................................................................................................PY-29
4.2.12 Half-folding conveyance drive...................................................................................................................................PY-30
4.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................PY-30
4.3.2 Horizontal conveyance control....................................................................................................................................PY-31
4.3.3 Horizontal conveyance pressure release control........................................................................................................PY-32
4.3.4 Vertical alignment control............................................................................................................................................PY-35
4.3.5 1st Fold knife control...................................................................................................................................................PY-36
4.3.6 Folding control............................................................................................................................................................PY-38
4.3.7 2nd Folding knife control.............................................................................................................................................PY-40
4.3.8 Half-folding conveyance control..................................................................................................................................PY-42
5. SUB TRAY, TRI-FOLDING TRAY SECTION.........................................................................................................PY-43
5.2 Drive......................................................................................................................................................................................PY-44
5.2.1 Sub tray, tri-folding tray paper exit drive.....................................................................................................................PY-44
5.2.2 Tri-folding paper exit gate drive..................................................................................................................................PY-44
5.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................PY-44
5.3.2 Sub tray, tri-folding tray paper exit control..................................................................................................................PY-45
5.3.3 Sub tray paper, tri-folding tray paper full detection control.........................................................................................PY-46
6. SADDLE STITCHING SECTION............................................................................................................................PY-48
6.2 Drive......................................................................................................................................................................................PY-49
6.2.1 Saddle stitching alignment drive/Rr............................................................................................................................PY-49
6.2.2 Saddle stitching alignment drive/Md...........................................................................................................................PY-49
6.2.3 Saddle stitching alignment plate release drive............................................................................................................PY-50
6.2.4 Saddle stitching alignment drive/Fr.............................................................................................................................PY-50
6.2.5 Booklet holding drive...................................................................................................................................................PY-51
6.2.6 Stapler head drive.......................................................................................................................................................PY-52
6.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................PY-52
6.3.1 Saddle stitching alignment control..............................................................................................................................PY-52
6.3.2 Stapler movement control...........................................................................................................................................PY-55
6.3.3 Booklet holding control................................................................................................................................................PY-56
6.3.4 Stapler control.............................................................................................................................................................PY-57
7. BOOKLET MOVEMENT SECTION........................................................................................................................PY-59
7.2 Drive......................................................................................................................................................................................PY-60
7.2.1 Booklet holding unit drive............................................................................................................................................PY-60
7.2.2 Booklet holding drive...................................................................................................................................................PY-61
7.2.3 Booklet set drive.........................................................................................................................................................PY-62
7.2.4 Book movement drive.................................................................................................................................................PY-63
7.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................PY-63
7.3.1 Booklet holding control................................................................................................................................................PY-63
7.3.2 Booklet movement control..........................................................................................................................................PY-64
8. CLAMP SECTION...................................................................................................................................................PY-66
8.2 Drive......................................................................................................................................................................................PY-67
8.2.1 Clamp up down drive..................................................................................................................................................PY-67
8.2.2 Clamp/Lt drive.............................................................................................................................................................PY-68
8.2.3 Clamp/Rt drive............................................................................................................................................................PY-68
8.2.4 Lifter plate drive..........................................................................................................................................................PY-69
8.2.5 Lifter plate up down drive............................................................................................................................................PY-69
8.2.6 Fore edge stopper drive..............................................................................................................................................PY-70
8.2.7 Fore edge finger drive.................................................................................................................................................PY-71
8.2.8 Trimmer booklet holding drive.....................................................................................................................................PY-72
8.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................PY-72
8.3.1 Clamp control..............................................................................................................................................................PY-72
8.3.2 Lifter control................................................................................................................................................................PY-76
8.3.3 Fore edge stopper control...........................................................................................................................................PY-77
lxxi
8.3.4 Trimmer booklet holding control..................................................................................................................................PY-79
8.3.5 Front console lock control...........................................................................................................................................PY-80
9. TRIMMER SECTION..............................................................................................................................................PY-82
9.2 Drive......................................................................................................................................................................................PY-83
9.2.1 Trimmer press drive....................................................................................................................................................PY-83
9.2.2 Trimmer brake drive....................................................................................................................................................PY-84
9.2.3 Trimmer blade drive....................................................................................................................................................PY-85
9.2.4 Trimmer board drive....................................................................................................................................................PY-86
9.2.5 Trimmer paddle drive..................................................................................................................................................PY-86
9.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................PY-86
9.3.1 Trimmer press control.................................................................................................................................................PY-86
9.3.2 Trimmer blade control.................................................................................................................................................PY-89
9.3.3 Trimmer board control.................................................................................................................................................PY-90
9.3.4 Trimmer paddle control...............................................................................................................................................PY-91
9.3.5 Trimmer shutter control...............................................................................................................................................PY-92
9.3.6 Trimmer scraps box full detection control...................................................................................................................PY-93
10. BOOKLET TRAY SECTION.................................................................................................................................PY-95
10.1 Configuration.......................................................................................................................................................................PY-95
10.2 Drive....................................................................................................................................................................................PY-96
10.2.1 Grip roller pressure drive..........................................................................................................................................PY-96
10.2.2 Grip roller rotation drive............................................................................................................................................PY-97
10.2.3 Booklet tray paper exit drive.....................................................................................................................................PY-98
10.2.4 Paper exit belt drive..................................................................................................................................................PY-99
10.3 Operation............................................................................................................................................................................PY-99
10.3.1 Grip roller control......................................................................................................................................................PY-99
10.3.2 Booklet tray paper exit control................................................................................................................................PY-102
10.3.3 Paper exit belt control.............................................................................................................................................PY-103
10.3.4 Paper exit shutter control........................................................................................................................................PY-104
10.3.5 Booklet tray paper full detection control..................................................................................................................PY-106
PZ THEORY OF OPERATION CR-101..........................................................................................PZ-1

1. OUTLINE...................................................................................................................................................................PZ-1
1.1 Unit configuration....................................................................................................................................................................PZ-1
1.2 Paper path...............................................................................................................................................................................PZ-1
2. CREASER SECTION................................................................................................................................................PZ-2
2.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................PZ-2
2.2 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................PZ-2
2.2.1 Creaser drive.................................................................................................................................................................PZ-2
2.3 Operation.................................................................................................................................................................................PZ-2
2.3.1 Paper conveyance control.............................................................................................................................................PZ-2
2.3.2 Paper alignment control................................................................................................................................................PZ-2
2.3.3 Creaser control..............................................................................................................................................................PZ-3
PAA THEORY OF OPERATION TU-503......................................................................................PAA-1

1. OUTLINE................................................................................................................................................................PAA-1
1.1 Unit configuration..................................................................................................................................................................PAA-1
1.2 Paper path............................................................................................................................................................................PAA-1
2. CONVEYANCE SECTION.....................................................................................................................................PAA-2
2.1 Configuration........................................................................................................................................................................PAA-2
2.2 Drive.....................................................................................................................................................................................PAA-2
2.2.1 Conveyance gate drive...............................................................................................................................................PAA-2
2.2.2 Conveyance drive.......................................................................................................................................................PAA-3
2.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................PAA-3
2.3.1 Gate open close control..............................................................................................................................................PAA-3
2.3.2 Registration control.....................................................................................................................................................PAA-4
3. SLITTER SECTION................................................................................................................................................PAA-6
3.2 Drive.....................................................................................................................................................................................PAA-6
3.2.1 Slitter position shift drive.............................................................................................................................................PAA-6
3.2.2 Slit cutter drive............................................................................................................................................................PAA-7
3.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................PAA-7
3.3.1 Trimmer control..........................................................................................................................................................PAA-7
4. ROTARY CUTTER SECTION................................................................................................................................PAA-9
4.2 Drive.....................................................................................................................................................................................PAA-9
4.2.1 Slit scraps trimmer drive.............................................................................................................................................PAA-9
4.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................PAA-9
4.3.1 Slit scraps trimmer control..........................................................................................................................................PAA-9
lxxii
4.3.2 Slitter shutter control.................................................................................................................................................PAA-11
5. SLIT SCRAPS BOX SECTION.............................................................................................................................PAA-13
5.1 Configuration......................................................................................................................................................................PAA-13
5.2 Operation............................................................................................................................................................................PAA-13
5.2.1 Slit scraps box set detection control.........................................................................................................................PAA-13
5.2.2 Slit scraps box full detection control.........................................................................................................................PAA-13
PAB THEORY OF OPERATION FD-504......................................................................................PAB-1

1. OUTLINE................................................................................................................................................................PAB-1
1.1 Unit configuration..................................................................................................................................................................PAB-1
1.2 Paper path............................................................................................................................................................................PAB-1
2. CLAMP UP DOWN SECTION................................................................................................................................PAB-2
2.1 Configuration........................................................................................................................................................................PAB-2
2.2 Drive.....................................................................................................................................................................................PAB-2
2.2.1 SQF clamp up and down drive...................................................................................................................................PAB-2
2.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................PAB-3
2.3.1 SQF clamp up and down control................................................................................................................................PAB-3
3. CLAMP SECTION..................................................................................................................................................PAB-5
3.1 Configuration........................................................................................................................................................................PAB-5
3.2 Drive.....................................................................................................................................................................................PAB-5
3.2.1 SQF clamp drive.........................................................................................................................................................PAB-5
3.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................PAB-5
3.3.1 SQF clamp control......................................................................................................................................................PAB-5
4. SQUARE-FOLD SECTION...................................................................................................................................PAB-11
4.1 Configuration......................................................................................................................................................................PAB-11
4.2 Drive...................................................................................................................................................................................PAB-11
4.2.1 Square-fold drive......................................................................................................................................................PAB-11
4.3 Operation............................................................................................................................................................................PAB-11
4.3.1 Square-fold control...................................................................................................................................................PAB-11
PAC THEORY OF OPERATION PB-503.....................................................................................PAC-1

1. OUTLINE ...............................................................................................................................................................PAC-1
1.1 Unit configuration .................................................................................................................................................................PAC-1
1.2 Paper path ...........................................................................................................................................................................PAC-2
1.2.1 Sub tray exit ..............................................................................................................................................................PAC-2
1.2.2 Perfect binding mode ................................................................................................................................................PAC-2
1.2.3 Relay conveyance mode ...........................................................................................................................................PAC-4
2. CONVEYANCE SECTION ....................................................................................................................................PAC-5
2.1 Configuration .......................................................................................................................................................................PAC-5
2.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................PAC-6
2.2.1 Entrance conveyance drive/Intermediate conveyance drive/Cover paper conveyance drive ...................................PAC-6
2.2.2 Entrance gate drive/Bypass gate drive/Sub tray gate drive/Sub tray exit and separation drive ................................PAC-6
2.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PAC-7
2.3.1 Gate control ...............................................................................................................................................................PAC-7
2.3.2 Entrance conveyance control ....................................................................................................................................PAC-8
2.3.3 Intermediate conveyance control ..............................................................................................................................PAC-9
2.3.4 Cover paper conveyance control ...............................................................................................................................PAC-9
2.3.5 Sub tray paper exit release control ............................................................................................................................PAC-9
2.3.6 Sub tray full-status detection control .........................................................................................................................PAC-9
2.3.7 Cover paper multi feed detection control ...................................................................................................................PAC-9
3. SUB COMPILE (SC) SECTION ..........................................................................................................................PAC-11
3.1 Configuration .....................................................................................................................................................................PAC-11
3.2 Drive ..................................................................................................................................................................................PAC-12
3.2.1 SC entrance conveyance drive/Switchback conveyance drive/Paper bundle conveyance drive ............................PAC-12
3.2.2 Switchback release drive .........................................................................................................................................PAC-12
3.2.3 SC roller release drive/Clamp entrance release drive .............................................................................................PAC-13
3.2.4 Clamp entrance movement drive ............................................................................................................................PAC-13
3.2.5 SC main scan alignment drive .................................................................................................................................PAC-14
3.2.6 Sub scan alignment drive ........................................................................................................................................PAC-14
3.2.7 SC stopper drive/SC pressure arm drive/Straight gate drive ..................................................................................PAC-14
3.3 Operation ...........................................................................................................................................................................PAC-15
3.3.1 SC section operation overview ................................................................................................................................PAC-15
3.3.2 Gate control of the relay conveyance ......................................................................................................................PAC-17
3.3.3 SC entrance conveyance control ............................................................................................................................PAC-17
3.3.4 SC switchback conveyance control .........................................................................................................................PAC-17
3.3.5 SC main scan alignment control ..............................................................................................................................PAC-20
3.3.6 Sub scan alignment control .....................................................................................................................................PAC-21
3.3.7 SC paper bundle conveyance control .....................................................................................................................PAC-21
3.3.8 Clamp entrance movement control .........................................................................................................................PAC-22
lxxiii
3.3.9 SC stopper control ...................................................................................................................................................PAC-23
3.3.10 SC pressure arm control .......................................................................................................................................PAC-23
4. CLAMP SECTION ...............................................................................................................................................PAC-25
4.2 Drive ..................................................................................................................................................................................PAC-25
4.2.1 Clamp drive .............................................................................................................................................................PAC-25
4.2.2 Clamp rotation drive ................................................................................................................................................PAC-26
4.2.3 Clamp alignment drive .............................................................................................................................................PAC-26
4.3 Operation ...........................................................................................................................................................................PAC-26
4.3.1 Clamp alignment control ..........................................................................................................................................PAC-26
4.3.2 Clamp control ..........................................................................................................................................................PAC-27
4.3.3 Clamp rotation control .............................................................................................................................................PAC-28
4.3.4 Book thickness detection control .............................................................................................................................PAC-31
5. PELLET SUPPLY SECTION ...............................................................................................................................PAC-33
5.2 Drive ..................................................................................................................................................................................PAC-33
5.2.1 Pellet supply drive ...................................................................................................................................................PAC-33
5.2.2 Pellet supply arm drive ............................................................................................................................................PAC-34
5.3 Operation ...........................................................................................................................................................................PAC-34
5.3.1 Pellet supply operation overview .............................................................................................................................PAC-34
5.3.2 Pellet supply arm control .........................................................................................................................................PAC-35
5.3.3 Pellet supply amount control ...................................................................................................................................PAC-36
5.3.4 Pellet remaining amount detection control ..............................................................................................................PAC-38
5.3.5 Pellet supply door opening and closing detection control........................................................................................PAC-38
6. GLUE TANK SECTION .......................................................................................................................................PAC-39
6.2 Drive ..................................................................................................................................................................................PAC-39
6.2.1 Drive ........................................................................................................................................................................PAC-39
6.2.2 Glue apply roller drive .............................................................................................................................................PAC-40
6.2.3 Tank up drive ...........................................................................................................................................................PAC-40
6.2.4 Cover paper glue lifting drive ...................................................................................................................................PAC-40
6.3 Operation ...........................................................................................................................................................................PAC-41
6.3.1 Glue tank unit movement control .............................................................................................................................PAC-41
6.3.2 Glue apply roller control...........................................................................................................................................PAC-41
6.3.3 Glue tank lifting control ............................................................................................................................................PAC-42
6.3.4 Cover paper glue control .........................................................................................................................................PAC-43
6.3.5 Glue temperature control..........................................................................................................................................PAC-44
7. COVER PAPER SUPPLY SECTION ..................................................................................................................PAC-46
7.2 Drive ..................................................................................................................................................................................PAC-46
7.2.1 Cover paper tray lift drive ........................................................................................................................................PAC-46
7.2.2 Paper feed drive ......................................................................................................................................................PAC-47
7.2.3 Pick-up drive ............................................................................................................................................................PAC-47
7.3 Operation ...........................................................................................................................................................................PAC-48
7.3.1 Up down control.......................................................................................................................................................PAC-48
7.3.2 Pick-up mechanism .................................................................................................................................................PAC-49
7.3.3 Separation mechanism ............................................................................................................................................PAC-49
7.3.4 Paper feed mechanism ...........................................................................................................................................PAC-50
7.3.5 Air assist mechanism ..............................................................................................................................................PAC-50
7.3.6 Cover paper empty detection control ......................................................................................................................PAC-50
7.3.7 Paper feed assist plate ............................................................................................................................................PAC-50
8. COVER PAPER TABLE SECTION .....................................................................................................................PAC-52
8.2 Drive ..................................................................................................................................................................................PAC-53
8.2.1 Cover paper table up down/Fr and /Rr drive ...........................................................................................................PAC-53
8.2.2 Cover paper alignment drive ...................................................................................................................................PAC-53
8.2.3 Cover paper conveyance drive ................................................................................................................................PAC-54
8.2.4 Book exit drive .........................................................................................................................................................PAC-54
8.2.5 Cover paper folding plate/Rt and /Lt drive................................................................................................................PAC-54
8.2.6 Cover paper conveyance arm/Rr and /Lt drive.........................................................................................................PAC-55
8.2.7 Cover paper lift drive ...............................................................................................................................................PAC-55
8.2.8 Cutter drive ..............................................................................................................................................................PAC-55
8.3 Operation ...........................................................................................................................................................................PAC-55
8.3.1 Cover paper table section operation overview ........................................................................................................PAC-55
8.3.2 Cover paper conveyance control .............................................................................................................................PAC-59
8.3.3 Cover paper trimming control ..................................................................................................................................PAC-60
8.3.4 Cover paper alignment drive ...................................................................................................................................PAC-60
8.3.5 Cover paper table up down control .........................................................................................................................PAC-62
8.3.6 Cover paper folding plate control ............................................................................................................................PAC-63
lxxiv
8.3.7 Cover paper conveyance arm control .....................................................................................................................PAC-65
8.3.8 Cover paper lifting (supporting) control ...................................................................................................................PAC-67
8.3.9 Book paper exit control ............................................................................................................................................PAC-68
8.3.10 Waste paper control ..............................................................................................................................................PAC-68
9. BOOK STOCK SECTION ....................................................................................................................................PAC-69
9.2 Drive ..................................................................................................................................................................................PAC-69
9.2.1 Book conveyance drive ...........................................................................................................................................PAC-69
9.2.2 Book conveyance belt drive ....................................................................................................................................PAC-70
9.2.3 Book conveyance up down drive .............................................................................................................................PAC-70
9.2.4 Book movement drive ..............................................................................................................................................PAC-71
9.2.5 Book stopper drive ..................................................................................................................................................PAC-71
9.3 Operation ...........................................................................................................................................................................PAC-71
9.3.1 Book stock section operation overview ...................................................................................................................PAC-71
9.3.2 Book conveyance and movement control ...............................................................................................................PAC-72
9.3.3 Book conveyance belt control .................................................................................................................................PAC-74
9.3.4 Book conveyance up down control ..........................................................................................................................PAC-74
9.3.5 Book movement control ...........................................................................................................................................PAC-75
9.3.6 Book stopper control ...............................................................................................................................................PAC-76
9.3.7 Book full status detection control .............................................................................................................................PAC-76
10. RELAY CONVEYANCE SECTION ...................................................................................................................PAC-77
10.1 Configuration ...................................................................................................................................................................PAC-77
10.2 Drive ................................................................................................................................................................................PAC-77
10.2.1 Relay conveyance roller drive / Relay paper exit roller drive ................................................................................PAC-77
10.3 Operation .........................................................................................................................................................................PAC-78
10.3.1 Relay conveyance control .....................................................................................................................................PAC-78
11. OTHERS ...........................................................................................................................................................PAC-79
11.1 Fan control .......................................................................................................................................................................PAC-79
11.1.1 ...............................................................................................................................................................................PAC-79
11.2 Door opening and closing control.....................................................................................................................................PAC-79
PAD THEORY OF OPERATION GP-501.....................................................................................PAD-1

1. PREFACE..............................................................................................................................................................PAD-1
1.1 INTRODUCTION..................................................................................................................................................................PAD-1
1.1.1 Setting the Right Expectations...................................................................................................................................PAD-1
1.2 PRODUCT POSITIONING...................................................................................................................................................PAD-1
1.3 LONG EDGE FEED (LEF) ONLY.........................................................................................................................................PAD-1
2. OUTLINE................................................................................................................................................................PAD-2
2.1 Unit configuration diagram....................................................................................................................................................PAD-2
2.2 Paper path............................................................................................................................................................................PAD-3
3. CONVEYANCE SECTION.....................................................................................................................................PAD-4
3.1 Configuration........................................................................................................................................................................PAD-4
4. PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION................................................................................................................................PAD-5
4.1 Punch conveyance control...................................................................................................................................................PAD-5
4.2 Punch operation...................................................................................................................................................................PAD-6
4.3 Chip tray control...................................................................................................................................................................PAD-7
4.4 Bypass conveyance control..................................................................................................................................................PAD-7
5. PUNCH MODULE..................................................................................................................................................PAD-9
5.1 Tools Required.....................................................................................................................................................................PAD-9
5.2 Procedure.............................................................................................................................................................................PAD-9
PAE THEORY OF OPERATION GP-502.....................................................................................PAE-1

1. THEORY OF OPERATION....................................................................................................................................PAE-1
Q IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT................................................................................................Q-1
1. UNDERSTANDING THE CHARACTER OF THE PAPER..........................................................................................Q-1
1.1 The shrinkage of the paper.......................................................................................................................................................Q-1
1.2 The dimensional accuracy of the paper....................................................................................................................................Q-1
1.3 Precautions on supplying papers..............................................................................................................................................Q-1
2. BASIC OPERATION...................................................................................................................................................Q-2
2.1 Both sides adjustment (Preparation).........................................................................................................................................Q-2
2.1.1 Preparation for papers....................................................................................................................................................Q-2
2.1.2 About the adjustment procedure.....................................................................................................................................Q-2
2.2 Both sides adjustment (Mechanical adjustment and Software adjustment)..............................................................................Q-2
2.2.1 Skew mechanical adjustment (In the sub scan direction)...............................................................................................Q-2
2.2.2 Skew adjustment (In the main scan direction)................................................................................................................Q-5
2.2.3 Skew mechanical adjustment (main scan)......................................................................................................................Q-6
2.3 Both sides adjustment (Software adjustment)...........................................................................................................................Q-8
lxxv
2.3.1 Belt line speed adjustment..............................................................................................................................................Q-8
2.3.2 Restart timing adjustment (Side2) rough adjustment......................................................................................................Q-9
2.3.3 CD-Mag. adjustment (Side2)........................................................................................................................................Q-10
2.3.4 Centering auto adjustment............................................................................................................................................Q-11
2.3.5 Centering sensor gap adjustment.................................................................................................................................Q-12
2.3.6 Both Sides Adj. Image Shift for the upper and lower (Side2)........................................................................................Q-12
2.4 About the Both Sides Adj........................................................................................................................................................Q-13
2.4.1 About the adjustment procedure of the [12. Adjustment] - [Both Sides Adjust] in "User's Guide"................................Q-13
2.4.2 About the adjustment procedure of the [12. Adjustment] - [Machine Adjustment] in "User's Guide"............................Q-13
2.5 About the line speed adjustment.............................................................................................................................................Q-13
3. ADVANCED OPERATION........................................................................................................................................Q-14
3.1 When the mis-centering unexpectedly occurs........................................................................................................................Q-14
3.1.1 Checkpoint....................................................................................................................................................................Q-14
3.1.2 Centering......................................................................................................................................................................Q-14
3.1.3 Curve (Tilt)....................................................................................................................................................................Q-15
3.1.4 The trouble with the paper conveyance timing.............................................................................................................Q-15
3.2 When the particular paper is curved.......................................................................................................................................Q-15
3.2.1 Paper types that are easily skewed..............................................................................................................................Q-15
3.2.2 Checkpoint and handling..............................................................................................................................................Q-16
3.3 When the mis-centering is excessive......................................................................................................................................Q-16
3.3.1 Checkpoint and handling..............................................................................................................................................Q-16
R COLOR ADJUSTMENT.................................................................................................................R-1
1. COMBINATION OF EXECUTION TIMING AND ITEMS.............................................................................................R-1
2. QUALITY ADJUSTMENT............................................................................................................................................R-5
2.1 Select screen.............................................................................................................................................................................R-5
2.1.1 Execution timing..............................................................................................................................................................R-5
2.1.2 Procedure........................................................................................................................................................................R-5
2.2 Gamma automatic adjustment..................................................................................................................................................R-6
2.2.2 Procedure........................................................................................................................................................................R-6
2.3 Density balance adjustment......................................................................................................................................................R-6
2.3.2 Procedure........................................................................................................................................................................R-7
2.4 Maximum density initial adjustment.........................................................................................................................................R-31
2.4.1 Execution timing............................................................................................................................................................R-31
2.4.2 Adjustment target value of C1070/C1070P/C1060/C1060L (reference).......................................................................R-31
2.4.3 Adjustment target value of C71hc (reference)..............................................................................................................R-32
2.4.4 Preparation....................................................................................................................................................................R-33
2.4.5 Procedure for the setup.................................................................................................................................................R-34
2.4.6 Procedure for maintenance...........................................................................................................................................R-37
2.4.7 Measure the density with the spectrophotometer.........................................................................................................R-39
2.5 Maximum density auto adjustment (RU).................................................................................................................................R-54
2.5.2 Procedure......................................................................................................................................................................R-54
2.6 Maximum density adjustment..................................................................................................................................................R-56
2.6.2 Procedure......................................................................................................................................................................R-56
2.7 Color Density Control Setting..................................................................................................................................................R-57
2.7.2 Procedure......................................................................................................................................................................R-57
2.8 Color Density Control (Manual Adjustment)............................................................................................................................R-59
2.8.2 Procedure......................................................................................................................................................................R-59
2.9 IC-602 Calibration...................................................................................................................................................................R-60
2.9.2 Procedure (for i1Pro/i1Pro2/ES-1000/ES-2000, or FD-5BT)........................................................................................R-61
2.10 Exact Color............................................................................................................................................................................R-66
2.10.1 Execution timing..........................................................................................................................................................R-66
2.10.2 Procedure (for i1Pro/i1Pro2/ES-1000/ES-2000, or FD-5BT)......................................................................................R-66
2.11 G7 Calibration.......................................................................................................................................................................R-71
2.11.2 Procedure (for i1Pro/i1Pro2/ES-1000/ES-2000, or FD-5BT)......................................................................................R-71
2.12 IC-308/IC-415 Calibration......................................................................................................................................................R-76
2.12.2 Procedure (for i1Pro/i1Pro2/ES-1000/ES-2000).........................................................................................................R-76
2.13 Printer Gamma Sensor Adj...................................................................................................................................................R-79
2.13.2 Procedure....................................................................................................................................................................R-80
2.14 Printer Gamma Offset Auto...................................................................................................................................................R-81
lxxvi
2.14.2 Procedure....................................................................................................................................................................R-81
S TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE Ver1.8 (REPORTS FROM THE MARKET)...................................S-1

1. IMAGE QUALITY........................................................................................................................................................S-1
1.1 Spot...........................................................................................................................................................................................S-1
1.1.1 Cyclic white spot/black spot............................................................................................................................................S-1
1.1.2 Color Spots due to soilage inside machine.....................................................................................................................S-1
1.1.3 Color spots (black spots).................................................................................................................................................S-2
1.1.4 White Spot due to the developing leakage (foreign material)..........................................................................................S-3
1.1.5 White dots from 2nd transfer unit....................................................................................................................................S-4
1.1.6 First thing in the morning, Attachment of white dusts like a eraser shaving on the paper..............................................S-4
1.2 Line/Band..................................................................................................................................................................................S-5
1.2.1 Line and uneven density countermeasure flow...............................................................................................................S-5
1.2.2 White lines (to sub-scan direction)..................................................................................................................................S-7
1.2.3 Gloss line caused by fusing paper exit roller...................................................................................................................S-8
1.2.4 Banding in the main scan direction on halftone image printed on thick paper(Jitter problem)........................................S-9
1.2.5 Line like ripple on image................................................................................................................................................S-11
1.2.6 Waste toner packing......................................................................................................................................................S-11
1.2.7 Darker image up to 44mm from leading edge or after 44mm from white area (Developing memory)..........................S-12
1.2.8 Lines or banding to the main scan direction (CD) due to speed difference between 2nd transfer and fusing..............S-13
1.2.9 Image got blurred affected by ozone (cyclic white band)..............................................................................................S-14
1.2.10 Photoconductor (Drum) memory.................................................................................................................................S-15
1.2.11 Developing screw mark (at low speed).......................................................................................................................S-16
1.2.12 Lines or banding on image due to speed change (shock noise).................................................................................S-17
1.2.13 Developing roller (44mm) cycle banding (different density)........................................................................................S-22
1.2.14 Irregular darker or lighter density band appears after leaving machine under high humidity environment (Green)....S-23
1.2.15 Jittering lines at trailing edge.......................................................................................................................................S-24
1.2.16 8mm interval FD lines..................................................................................................................................................S-24
1.2.17 Density change by static electricity.............................................................................................................................S-25
1.2.18 FD Lines and Banding.................................................................................................................................................S-26
1.2.19 5mm cycle density difference caused by the fusing unit.............................................................................................S-28
1.2.20 Color lines in CD at 13mm from the leading edge.......................................................................................................S-29
1.2.21 White line due to separation claw mark.......................................................................................................................S-30
1.2.22 Gloss band in CD with margin width...........................................................................................................................S-30
1.2.23 Image lacks at the corner of the trailing edge (Soilage in main scan direction (CD))..................................................S-31
1.3 Others......................................................................................................................................................................................S-32
1.3.1 Image after white part becomes darker (Developing ghost)..........................................................................................S-32
1.3.2 Darker at the trailing edge of image..............................................................................................................................S-33
1.3.3 Background or toner scattering after continuous low coverage....................................................................................S-33
1.3.4 How to maintain consistent color during continuous printing........................................................................................S-34
1.3.5 Small blank area or color registration error...................................................................................................................S-35
1.3.6 Too high gloss...............................................................................................................................................................S-35
1.3.7 Rough image on the 1st side of duplex.........................................................................................................................S-36
1.3.8 White or color banding at thick paper leading and trailing edges..................................................................................S-36
1.3.9 C-2451, C-2452, C-2453 or C-2454, Low toner density................................................................................................S-37
1.3.10 Poor transfer at image front.........................................................................................................................................S-38
1.3.11 Prevention of the backside soilage..............................................................................................................................S-39
1.3.12 Fainted outline, darker at edge....................................................................................................................................S-39
1.3.13 Image bacground under high temperature..................................................................................................................S-40
1.3.14 Backside image soilage...............................................................................................................................................S-41
1.3.15 Toner is not cleaned at the edge of the transfer belt...................................................................................................S-42
1.3.16 Transferability at Feeding Emboss Paper...................................................................................................................S-43
1.3.17 Image density is lighter on uncoated paper (rough paper)..........................................................................................S-45
1.3.18 Gloss memory.............................................................................................................................................................S-46
1.3.19 Center of line gets broken...........................................................................................................................................S-47
1.3.20 Secondary color text scatters......................................................................................................................................S-48
1.3.21 Image offset caused by fusing unit..............................................................................................................................S-49
1.3.22 Coverage setting for the exit toner band.....................................................................................................................S-53
2. PAPER......................................................................................................................................................................S-57
2.1 Others......................................................................................................................................................................................S-57
2.1.1 Paper waving.................................................................................................................................................................S-57
2.1.2 Setting for OHP sheet printing.......................................................................................................................................S-57
2.1.3 Trailing edge skews.......................................................................................................................................................S-58
2.1.4 Printed paper curls (without RU connection).................................................................................................................S-58
2.1.5 Fusing wrapping jam.....................................................................................................................................................S-59
2.1.6 No feed jam (J-1101/J-1201).........................................................................................................................................S-61
2.1.7 Dents on paper at 48mm cycle in FD............................................................................................................................S-63
2.1.8 Centering error (±5 mm or more)..................................................................................................................................S-65
2.1.9 Paper stick with each other due to static electricity.......................................................................................................S-67
lxxvii
2.1.10 Paper removing procedure on fusing wrap up JAM....................................................................................................S-72
2.1.11 J-3102, Thin paper feed failure at the 2nd transfer unit..............................................................................................S-75
2.1.12 Paper wrinkle at duplex printing..................................................................................................................................S-77
2.1.13 J-3201 paper is caught by the fusing separation claw................................................................................................S-77
2.1.14 Corner folding at the paper leading edge, machine front side.....................................................................................S-77
3. MACHINE TROUBLES.............................................................................................................................................S-80
3.1 Control.....................................................................................................................................................................................S-80
3.1.1 Printer gamma offset automatic adjustment does not complete normally after trying several times.............................S-80
3.1.2 Print job is not accepted while machine indicates dehumidifying..................................................................................S-80
3.1.3 Notes of updating the FW from earlier than ver1.5 (Scan Address/E-mail Title & Text)...............................................S-80
3.2 Error code................................................................................................................................................................................S-82
3.2.1 C-2451, C-2452, C-2453 and C-2454 occur.................................................................................................................S-82
3.2.2 C-3102 ADU wiring connector is disconnected.............................................................................................................S-83
3.2.3 C-4521, color registration unit is not positioned correctly..............................................................................................S-85
3.3 Others......................................................................................................................................................................................S-88
3.3.1 Options cannot be recognized. System configuration display without options..............................................................S-88
3.3.2 How to eject developer..................................................................................................................................................S-89
3.3.3 Image shift.....................................................................................................................................................................S-90
3.3.4 Hard to pull out process mount.....................................................................................................................................S-91
3.3.5 Note for the developing shutter installation work...........................................................................................................S-94
3.3.6 Productivity decrease at first in the morning under low temperature, low humidity.......................................................S-96
3.3.7 Release of productivity down mode for small size print under high temperature (Adjustment of toner band creation cycle
for cleaning blade)...................................................................................................................................................................S-96
3.3.8 ADU MT lever is very hard to release...........................................................................................................................S-97
4. Options....................................................................................................................................................................S-100
4.1 PF-707...................................................................................................................................................................................S-100
4.1.1 Multi-feed of Plain Fine paper under high temperature and high humidity..................................................................S-100
4.1.2 PF-707 Wrinkle on paper............................................................................................................................................S-100
4.1.3 PF-707 Paper skew of small size paper......................................................................................................................S-101
4.1.4 PF-707 Corner fold (dog ear) and conveyance JAM of small size..............................................................................S-104
4.2 PF-602m................................................................................................................................................................................S-105
4.2.1 J-1710 countermeasue................................................................................................................................................S-105
4.3 FS-532...................................................................................................................................................................................S-112
4.3.1 Irregular correspondence of the main tray exit............................................................................................................S-112
T CONTROLLER FAQ.......................................................................................................................T-1
1. IC-308, IC-310.............................................................................................................................................................T-1
1.1 Specification..............................................................................................................................................................................T-1
1.2 Features / Function....................................................................................................................................................................T-2
1.3 Service Support.........................................................................................................................................................................T-3
1.4 Printing.......................................................................................................................................................................................T-4
1.5 Driver.........................................................................................................................................................................................T-4
1.6 Network......................................................................................................................................................................................T-5
1.7 Security......................................................................................................................................................................................T-5
1.8 Application / Utility.....................................................................................................................................................................T-6
2. IC-415..........................................................................................................................................................................T-7
2.1 Specification..............................................................................................................................................................................T-7
2.2 Features / Function....................................................................................................................................................................T-7
2.3 Service Support.........................................................................................................................................................................T-8
2.4 Printing.......................................................................................................................................................................................T-8
2.5 Driver.........................................................................................................................................................................................T-8
2.6 Network......................................................................................................................................................................................T-8
2.7 Security......................................................................................................................................................................................T-9
2.8 Application / Utility.....................................................................................................................................................................T-9
3. IC-602........................................................................................................................................................................T-10
3.1 Controller related.....................................................................................................................................................................T-10
3.2 Printer driver /Printing Related.................................................................................................................................................T-11
3.3 Application Related..................................................................................................................................................................T-12
lxxviii
Revision list > bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C1060/PRO C1060L
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L Version 1.1
Revision list
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C1060/PRO C1060L Version 1.1
No. ID Title Ver. Descriptions of revision Date
D00009601 I.4.10 Firmware Version The authentication firmware version is modified.
1 2 2014/04/11
36
This Service Manual is also applicable to bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C1060, bizhub PRO C1060L and ineo+ 1070/1060/1060L.
1

1 - - - Addition of information of the C1100, C1085 2014/05/30
2 - - - Addition of information of the LS-506 2014/05/30
3 - - - Deletion of information of the Windows XP 2014/05/30
D00009618 A.1. IMPORTANT NOTICE Addition of information of security
4 3 2014/05/30
51
D00009586 C.1.3 Paper Addition of note of the label
5 2 2014/05/30
84 Addition of information of the tab paper guide
D00009586 C.1.7 Machine data Correction of error in writing
6 2 2014/05/30
88
D00009587 C.6.3 Type of paper Addition of information of the tab paper guide
7 2 2014/05/30
13
D00009587 C.10.3 Type of paper Addition of note of the label
8 2 2014/05/30
34
D00009587 C.11.2 Functions Addition of information of the DIPSW57-3
9 2 2014/05/30
39
D00009587 C.11.3 Type of paper Addition of information of the DIPSW57-3
10 2 2014/05/30
40
D00009624 C.23.2 Functions Correction of error in writing
11 5 2014/05/30
98
D00009624 C.23.3 Type of paper Correction of error in writing
12 5 2014/05/30
99
D00009625 C.25.3 Type of paper Addition of note of the custom size paper
13 5 2014/05/30
05
D00009587 C.28.2 Functions Addition of compliant OS for printer driver
14 2 2014/05/30
46 Correction of error in writing
D00009587 D.1.2 Configuration for optional device Increase of option combination of SD-510, PK-522 or
15 2 2014/05/30
52 (C1070/C1070P/C1060) PI-502(MK732)
D00009587 D.1.3 System configuration (C1060L) Correction of error in writing
16 2 2014/05/30
53
D00009625 E.1.3.3 Major functions Standardization of the content with C1100/C1085
17 3 2014/05/30
82
D00012777 E.1.3.5 Operating instructions of the mail Standardization of the content with C1100/C1085
18 1 2014/05/30
22 remote notification system
D00012777 E.1.3.6 Mail sending Standardization of the content with C1100/C1085
19 1 2014/05/30
23
E.1.4 Machine setting data Import Addition of information of the machine setting data
20 - 1 2014/05/30
Import
21 - E.1.5 Job history list 2 Standardization of the content with C1100/C1085 2014/05/30
22 - E.1.7 Panel log 1 Standardization of the content with C1100/C1085 2014/05/30
23 - E.1.10 Machine state log store 1 Addition of information of machine state log store 2014/05/30
D00009588 F.1.2 bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P Addition of items
24 2 2014/05/30
19
D00009588 F.1.3 bizhub PRESS C1060/bizhub PRO Addition of items
25 2 2014/05/30
20 C1060L
D00009588 F.1.6 PF-707 Correction of error in writing
26 2 2014/05/30
23
D00009588 F.2.2 bizhub PRESS C1070, C1070P, Addition of items
27 2 2014/05/30
39 C1060, bizhub PRO C1060L
D00009588 F.2.5 PF-707 Correction of error in writing
28 2 2014/05/30
42
D00009588 F.2.20 PB-503 Correction of error in writing
29 2 2014/05/30
54
D00009588 F.3.2 ORU-M parts list Correction of error in writing
30 2 2014/05/30
56
D00009588 F.5.3.1 Pulling out the process unit Addition of note
31 2 2014/05/30
65
D00011417 F.5.3.2 Cleaning around the process unit Addition of note
32 2 2014/05/30
35
D00009588 F.5.4.1 Replace the charging corona Deletion of note
33 2 2014/05/30
67
D00009746 F.5.5.1 Developer charging procedures Addition of maintenance procedure
34 2 2014/05/30
53
2

F.5.6.6 Replacing the intermediate Change of maintenance procedure
D00009588
35 transfer belt, and cleaning of the rollers 2 2014/05/30
74
and the cleaning sheet
F.5.6.11 Replacing the 2nd transfer Addition of the cleaning object
D00009588
36 roller/Lw and the C-clip, and cleaning 2 2014/05/30
79
around the 2nd transfer unit
F.5.10.3 Replacing the registration roller Addition of note
D00009588 and the registration roller bearing,
37 2 2014/05/30
89 cleaning the registration swing home
sensar (PS20)
D00012774 F.5.10.4 Replacing the registration idler Addition of a replacement part
38 1 2014/05/30
80 gear.
F.8.5.1 Replacing the pre-registration Correction of error in writing
D00009589 clutch (CL7) and the horizontal
39 2 2014/05/30
24 conveyance clutch/1 (CL8), horizontal
conveyance clutch/2 (CL9)
D00009589 G.3.2.2 Duct cover Change of disassembling procedure
40 2 2014/05/30
52
D00012777 G.6.3.15 Paper feed belt Correction of error in writing
41 2 2014/05/30
77
42 - G.8. MB-506 1 Addition of disassembling procedure 2014/05/30
D00010016 I.2.1 List of utility menus Addition of items
43 2 2014/05/30
42
D00009590 I.4.1 Service Mode List Addition of items
44 2 2014/05/30
56
D00009590 I.4.3.9 Pre-registration Adj. (Printer Correction of error in writing
45 2 2014/05/30
67 Adjustment)
D00009590 I.4.3.15 Crosswise Dir. Skew Adj. (Printer Change of the adjustment direction
46 2 2014/05/30
73 Adjustment)
D00009590 I.4.3.19 Restart Timing Adjustment (Scan Correction of error in writing
47 2 2014/05/30
77 Adjustment)
D00009590 I.4.3.20 Centering Adjustment (Scan Correction of error in writing
48 2 2014/05/30
78 Adjustment)
D00012774 I.4.3.45 Tray size adjustment (Tray Addition of adjustment item
49 1 2014/05/30
81 adjustment)
D00009591 I.4.4.9 Maximum density initial Addition of adjustment procedure
50 2 2014/05/30
12 adjustment (drum peculiarity adjustment) Addition of spectrophotometers
I.4.5.2 Software DIPSW setting list Addition/correction of the following software DIPSW
DIPSW10-0, DIPSW14-6, DIPSW15-5, DIPSW17-2,
DIPSW20-3/4, DIPSW32-2, DIPSW33-4, DIPSW34-4 /
5/6, DIPSW40-7, DIPSW44-5/6, DIPSW46-3,
D00009695 DIPSW46-7, DIPSW48-7, DIPSW49-4, DIPSW49-6/7,
51 2 2014/05/30
18 DIPSW50-3, DIPSW50-5, DIPSW52-2, DIPSW52-5/6,
DIPSW59-0/1, DIPSW59-2/3, DIPSW59-4, DIPSW59-6,
DIPSW59-7
D00009591 I.4.5.6 Toner band creation condition Correction of error in writing
52 2 2014/05/30
28 (productivity priority setting)
D00009591 I.4.5.7 Restrictions on banner print Reflection of the descriptions of added DIPSW
53 2 2014/05/30
32
D00012779 I.4.5.9 Troubleshooting for image errors Addition of information in countermeasures of image
54 1 2014/05/30
49 troubles
D00009595 I.4.6.1 Maintenance Counter Reflection of the descriptions of added DIPSW
55 2 2014/05/30
01
D00009595 I.4.6.3 Paper Size Counter (Total/copy/ Reflection of the descriptions of added DIPSW
56 2 2014/05/30
03 print)
D00009595 I.4.6.17 Special Parts Counter Addition of information of category
57 2 2014/05/30
17
D00009595 I.4.6.20 Custom Counter Threshold Set Change in setting values
58 2 2014/05/30
19
D00009688 I.4.7.3 Output check procedures Addition of note
59 4 2014/05/30
75
I.4.7.4 IO check mode list Addition/correction of the following IO check mode
D00009695
60 2 IO71-47, IO87-0, IO87-1, IO87-2, IO87-3, IO87-4, 2014/05/30
19
IO87-5, IO87-6, IO87-7, IO99-91
D00009689 I.4.11.1 Outline Correction in ErP restriction
61 3 2014/05/30
10
3

D00009601 I.4.13.2 Test Pattern Output Mode Addition of information
62 2 2014/05/30
63
I.4.13.9 Test pattern number 49 RU color Correction of error in writing
D00012776
63 sensor gamma correction (output paper 4 2014/05/30
31
density adjustment chart i1-iSis/i1-Pro)
D00009601 I.4.13.16 Test pattern number 62 Uneven Addition of note
64 2 2014/05/30
74 density check pattern
D00009601 I.4.15.1 Log Store Setting Change in the storage format of the log file
65 2 2014/05/30
83
D00012774 I.4.17.3 Format Controller HDD Data Addition of adjustment item
66 1 2014/05/30
82
D00012774 I.4.19.1 Package Adjustment Addition of adjustment item
67 1 2014/05/30
83
D00009601 I.5.3.2 IC software DIPSW list Addition/correction of the following IC software DIPSW
68 2 2014/05/30
98 DIPSW3-0, DIPSW4-1, DIPSW7-5
D00009602 I.5.4 CSV File Import/Export Addition of information
69 2 2014/05/30
07
D00009602 I.5.5.4 Method to restore orrection of error in writing
70 2 2014/05/30
11
D00009602 I.5.7 Controller Capture Setting Addition of information of the JDF
71 2 2014/05/30
06
D00009602 I.8.1.13 Lead edge erase quantity Addition of note
72 2 2014/05/30
35
D00012774 I.8.1.19 Fusing Speed(Back Side Offset) Addition of adjustment item
73 1 2014/05/30
86
D00012774 I.8.1.27 Double Feed Detection Addition of information of double feed detection
74 1 2014/05/30
88
D00011418 I.8.1.31 Curl Adjustment of Output Correction of error in writing
75 2 2014/05/30
29
D00012774 I.8.1.33 Mis-centering Detection Addition of adjustment item
76 1 2014/05/30
89
D00009602 I.9.6 Registration unit skew adjustment Addition of note
77 2 2014/05/30
55
D00009602 I.12.2 Centering adjustment (for each Correction of error in writing
78 2 2014/05/30
67 tray)
D00009602 I.12.3 Centering Adjustment (PF) Correction of error in writing
79 2 2014/05/30
68
D00012775 J.1.1 Type Standardization of the describing method with C1100/
80 1 2014/05/30
66 C1085
D00009603 K.1.1 Jam code list Addition of the following jam code
81 2 2014/05/30
05 J-3106
K.2.3 Malfunction code list Correction of the following malfunction code
D00009604
82 2 C-2831, C-2832, C-2833, C-2834, C-2840, C-2841, C- 2014/05/30
95
C123, C-C132, C-C137, C-C138, C-C139, C-D010
K.4. IMAGE TROUBLE Standardization of the describing method with C1100/
83 - 1 2014/05/30
C1085
84 - K.5. IC PROTECTOR 1 ddition of information of IC protector 2014/05/30
D00009610 O.2.1.1 Main body right side Correction of error in writing
85 2 2014/05/30
71
D00009610 O.3.3.3 Original reading area Correction of error in writing
86 2 2014/05/30
78
D00009611 O.9.1 Configuration Correction of error in writing
87 2 2014/05/30
15
D00009611 O.9.3.7 Blade setting mode control Correction of error in writing
88 2 2014/05/30
24
D00009611 O.9.3.8 Belt filming prevention control Correction of error in writing
89 2 2014/05/30
25
D00009611 O.17.3.1 Outline Addition of information
90 2 2014/05/30
89
D00009612 O.19.3.2 Operation Correction of error in writing
91 2 2014/05/30
34
D00009612 O.20.2.14 Cyclone exhaust fan (FM22) Correction of error in writing
92 2 2014/05/30
53 control
O.20.2.15 Paper exit cooling fan/1 Correction of error in writing
D00009612
93 (FM23), paper exit cooling fan/2 (FM25) 2 2014/05/30
54
control
4

D00011418 O.20.2.16 ADU exhaust fan (FM24) Correction of error in writing
94 2 2014/05/30
47 control
D00009612 O.22.1 Switching from color mode to Change of switch timing
95 2 2014/05/30
61 black and white mode
D00010001 PC.2.3.3 Air control Addition of information of the tab paper guide
96 3 2014/05/30
98
D00009682 PG.3.3.1 Outline of de-curler Addition of information of the off mode
97 5 2014/05/30
57
D00009613 Q.2.2.2 Skew adjustment (In the main Change of the adjustment direction
98 2 2014/05/30
58 scan direction)
R.1.1.2 Quality adjustment at the Addition of information of G7 Calibration
installation (IC-602) Addition of information of Maximum density automatic
99 - 2 2014/05/30
adjustment (RU)
Change of work flow
D00012659 S TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE Ver1.5 Addition of information on the TROUBLESHOOTING
100 1 2014/05/30
07 (REPORTS FROM THE MARKET) GUIDE Ver1.5
5

1 - - - Addition of information of the RU-516 2015/01/16
2 - - - Correspondence of the SA tool 2015/01/16
D00009618 A.4. WARNING INDICATIONS ON THE Addition of information
3 2 2015/01/16
64 MACHINE
4 3 2015/01/16
13
D00009587 C.11.2 Functions Addition of information of the DIPSW57-0
5 3 2015/01/16
39
D00009587 C.11.3 Type of paper Addition of information of the DIPSW57-0
6 3 2015/01/16
40
7 5 2015/01/16
76
8 6 2015/01/16
51
9 6 2015/01/16
99
D00012778 C.25.3 Type of paper Addition of information
10 4 2015/01/16
11
11 6 2015/01/16
05
D00009587 D.1.2 Configuration for optional device Addition of information of the RU-516
12 3 2015/01/16
52 (C1070/C1070P/C1060)
D00009587 D.1.4 Configuration for optional device Addition of information of the RU-516
13 2 2015/01/16
54 (C1060L)
D00009625 E.1.6.2 List that can be acquired Correction of error in writing
14 3 2015/01/16
87
D00012776 E.1.10.1 Outline Addition of note
15 2 2015/01/16
01
16 - E.1.11 Real-time Remote Panel - Addition of items 2015/01/16
F.1.6 PF-707 Addition of maintenace parts
D00009588
17 3 Change of maintenance cycle 2015/01/16
23
Correction of error in writing
F.2.5 PF-707 Addition of maintenace parts
D00009588
18 3 Change of maintenance cycle 2015/01/16
42
D00009588 F.4.1 Life value of materials/parts Addition of the materials/parts
19 2 2015/01/16
59 Addition of the count method of banner print
D00009588 F.5.2.1 Cleaning the dust proof glass Correction of error in writing
20 2 2015/01/16
64
D00009588 F.5.3.3 Replacing the drum unit Correction of error in writing
21 2 2015/01/16
66
D00009588 F.5.4.1 Replace the charging corona Correction of error in writing
22 3 2015/01/16
67
D00009746 F.5.5.1 Developer charging procedures Correction of error in writing
23 3 2015/01/16
53
D00009588 F.5.5.2 Replacing the Developing unit/ Correction of error in writing
24 2 2015/01/16
82 Y, /M, /C, /K
F.5.6.6 Replacing the intermediate Correction of error in writing
D00009588
25 transfer belt, and cleaning of the rollers 3 2015/01/16
74
and the cleaning sheet
F.5.13.2 Replacement of the paper exit Addition of information of when installed the RU-516
D00009588
26 drive gear and the paper exit decurler 2 2015/01/16
92
roller
F.8.5.1 Replacing the pre-registration Change of maintenance cycle
D00009589 clutch (CL7) and the horizontal
27 3 2015/01/16
24 conveyance clutch/1 (CL8), horizontal
D00009589 F.8.5.2 Replacing the pre-registration Change of maintenance cycle
28 2 2015/01/16
25 roller and the pre-registration bearing
F.8.5.3 Replacing the horizontal Addition of items
D00013662
29 conveyance roller/1, /2, the horizontal 1 2015/01/16
58
conveyance roller bearing/1, /2
D00009675 F.13.2.1 Cleaning the shutter Correction of error in writing
30 4 2015/01/16
66
6

D00009675 F.13.3.1 Replacing the humidification Correction of error in writing
31 6 2015/01/16
67 rollers/Rt, /Lt and the water feed roller
D00009675 F.20.2.1 Replacing the stacker tray up Correction of error in writing
32 7 2015/01/16
88 down motor (M1)
D00009675 F.20.2.2 Replacing the paper press Correction of error in writing
33 7 2015/01/16
89 solenoid/3 (SD8) Addition of note
34 7 2015/01/16
90 solenoid/1 (SD6)
35 7 2015/01/16
91 solenoid/2 (SD7)
D00009675 F.20.2.5 Replacing the rear stopper Correction of error in writing
36 7 2015/01/16
92 solenoid (SD3)
D00009589 G.3.2.4 Left cover Addition of note
37 2 2015/01/16
54
D00009589 G.3.2.10 Original glass assy Correction of error in writing
38 2 2015/01/16
59
D00009589 G.3.2.11 CCD unit Correction of error in writing
39 2 2015/01/16
60
D00009589 G.3.2.12 Exposure unit, Exposure lamp Correction of error in writing
40 2 2015/01/16
61
D00009589 G.3.2.15 Reinstalling the scanner wire Correction of error in writing
41 2 2015/01/16
64
D00009589 G.3.2.16 Writing unit Addition of items
42 2 2015/01/16
65
D00009589 G.3.2.17 Process unit Correction of error in writing
43 2 2015/01/16
66
D00009589 G.3.2.18 Image correction unit Correction of error in writing
44 2 2015/01/16
67
D00009589 G.3.2.20 Duplex section Correction of error in writing
45 2 2015/01/16
69
D00009695 G.6.3.21 Horizontal conveyance unit Correction of error in writing
46 2 2015/01/16
29
D00009677 G.11.3.7 Pump motor (P1) Correction of error in writing
47 4 2015/01/16
73
D00009678 G.20.2.2 Cover Correction of error in writing
48 4 2015/01/16
15
D00009590 I.3. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS Correction of error in writing
49 3 2015/01/16
55
D00009590 I.4.3.10 Belt Line Speed Adj. (Printer Correction of error in writing
50 2 2015/01/16
68 Adjustment)
I.4.3.28 Printer gamma offset adjustment Correction of error in writing
D00009590
51 (quality adjustment - printer gamma 2 2015/01/16
87
adjustment)
I.4.3.29 Printer Gamma Offset Auto. Correction of error in writing
D00009590
52 (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma 2 Addition of note 2015/01/16
88
Adjustment)
I.4.3.30 Printer Gamma Sensor Adj. Correction of error in writing
D00009590
53 (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma 2 2015/01/16
89
Adjustment)
I.4.3.32 Printer Gamma Offset Auto. (RU) Correction of error in writing
D00009590
91
Adjustment)
I.4.3.33 Printer Gamma Sensor Adj. (RU) Correction of error in writing
D00009590
92
Adjustment)
I.4.4.9 Maximum density initial Change of the adjustment flow when installing
D00009591 adjustment (drum peculiarity adjustment) Addition of information of the measure the density
56 3 2015/01/16
12 procedure of FD-7/FD-5BT and i1iSis XL
Addition of note
D00009695 DIPSW23-0, DIPSW23-4, DIPSW27-2, DIPSW33-2,
57 3 2015/01/16
18 DIPSW33-3, DIPSW34-5, DIPSW34-7, DIPSW35-6,
7

DIPSW59-2, DIPSW59-3, DIPSW59-4
D00009591 I.4.5.7 Restrictions on banner print Addition of restriction
58 3 2015/01/16
32 Addition of note
D00013663 I.4.5.10 New model of the fusing belt and Addition of items
59 1 2015/01/16
01 the fusing paper exit assy
D00009688 I.4.6.16 Check, setting and reset Correction of error in writing
60 3 2015/01/16
64 procedure of the Special Parts Counter
I.4.6.17 Special Parts Counter Addition of count target parts
D00009595
61 3 Change of count condition 2015/01/16
17
I.4.7.4 IO check mode list Addition/correction of the following I/O check mode
D00009695 IO58-0, IO58-1, IO58-2, IO58-3, IO69-80
62 3 2015/01/16
19 Deletion of the following I/O check mode
IO50-20, IO50-21, IO50-22, IO50-23, IO50-24, IO50-25
I.4.9.2 FS-532 Staple paper width Correction of error in writing
D00009600
63 adjustment (staple finisher (main) 2 2015/01/16
76
adjustment)
I.4.9.3 FS-532 FD alignment plate Correction of error in writing
D00009600
77
adjustment)
I.4.9.5 FS-532 Rewind paddle descent Correction of error in writing
D00009600
79
adjustment)
D00009689 I.4.11.1 Outline Delition of note
66 4 2015/01/16
10
D00012774 I.4.17.3 Format Controller HDD Data Correction of error in writing
67 2 2015/01/16
82
D00009601 I.5.3.2 IC software DIPSW list Correction of the following IC software DIPSW
68 3 2015/01/16
98 DIPSW7-5
D00011418 I.8.1.28 Intermediate transfer separation Correction of error in writing
69 2 2015/01/16
26 setting
D00013385 I.8.1.37 PFU Suction Air Level Setting Addition of items
70 1 2015/01/16
70
D00013662 I.8.1.38 Output Paper Separation Setting Addition of items
71 1 2015/01/16
71
D00009603 K.1.1 Jam code list Addition/correction of the following JAM code
72 3 2015/01/16
05 J-1001, J-10002, J-1003, J-7216, J-7550
K.2.3 Malfunction code list Addition/correction of the following malfunction code
C-1480, C-1547, C-3901*, C-3902*, C-3903*, C-3904*,
D00009604
73 3 C-3905*, C-3906*, C-3907*, C- 3908*, C-3909*, 2015/01/16
95
C-3910*, C-4718, C-4719, C-4720, C-4721, C-4727,
C-4728
D00013738 K.5.2.5 RU-509, HM-102 Addition of information of the RU-509
74 1 2015/01/16
53
D00013738 K.5.3.5 RU-509, HM-102 Addition of information of the RU-509
75 1 2015/01/16
54
D00009611 O.9.3.5 Separation claw control Change of operation condition
76 2 2015/01/16
22
D00009611 O.12.3.1 Vertical conveyance control Correction of error in writing
77 2 2015/01/16
42
D00009611 O.14.3.1 Fusing roller drive control Change of operation condition
78 2 2015/01/16
59
D00009611 O.16.2.3 Paper exit drive/OT-502 drive Addition of note
79 2 2015/01/16
78
D00009611 O.17.1 Outline Addition of information
80 2 2015/01/16
84
O.17.2.5 Long correction control and Addition of items
D00013738
81 color density control (periodical 1 2014/09/22
71
adjustment) with RU-509
D00009611 O.17.4.2 Automatic middle correction Correction of error in writing
82 2 2015/01/16
92 control
O.17.4.3 Middle correction for the Addition of items
D00013662
83 measurement (only when RU-509 is 1 2015/01/16
82
installed)
D00010001 PC.2.3.3 Air control Addition of information of the side air openings fixing
84 4 2015/01/16
98 lever
8

D00009613 PE.2.3.3 Paper feed control Addition of information of the paper feed retry control
85 2 2015/01/16
32
D00012777 PS.4.3.1 Stacker tray conveyance Correction of error in writing
86 2 2015/01/16
98
D00009613 Q.2.1.2 About the adjustment procedure Addition of note
87 2 2015/01/16
56
R COLOR ADJUSTMENT Change of configuration
88 - - 2015/01/16
Addition of detailed procedure
S TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE Ver1.7 Addition of information on the TROUBLESHOOTING
89 - - 2015/01/16
(REPORTS FROM THE MARKET) GUIDE Ver1.7
90 - T CONTROLLER FAQ - Addition of information of Controller FAQ 2015/01/16
9
Revision list > bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L C1060L Versio...

1 - - - Addition of C71hc as a machine name 2015/03/27
2 - - - Addition of information of the RU-517 2015/03/27
3 - - - Addition of information of the MK-740 2015/03/27
4 - - - Addition of information of the AU-201S 2015/03/27
5 - - - Move to individual section the information of OT-502 2015/03/27
6 - - - Addition of note of the replacement for SSD 2015/03/27
C.1. bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/ Correction of error in writing
7 - - 2015/03/27
C71hc/C1060, bizhub PRO C1060L Addition of information of the C71hc
8 3 2015/03/27
34
D00009587 C.32.2 Functions Addition of the printer driver
9 3 2015/03/27
46
D.1.1 System configuration (C1070/ Addition of information of the C71hc
D00009587
10 C1070P/C71hc/C1060) 4 Addition of information of the RU-517 2015/03/27
51
Addition of information of the AU-201S
D.1.2 System configuration when Addition of system configration when installing MK-740
D00014086
11 installing MK-740 (C1070/C1070P/ 1 2015/03/27
99
C71hc/C1060)
D.1.3 Configuration for optional device Addition of information of the C71hc
D00009587
12 (C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060) 4 Addition of information of the RU-517 2015/03/27
52
Addition of information of the MK-740
D.1.4 System configuration (C1060L) Addition of information of the C71hc
D00009587 Addition of information of the RU-517
13 4 2015/03/27
53 Addition of information of the MK-740
Addition of information of the AU-201S
D.1.5 Configuration for optional device Addition of information of the C71hc
D00009587
14 (C1060L) 3 Addition of information of the RU-517 2015/03/27
54
Addition of information of the MK-740
D00009588 F.1.2 bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/ Change of the parts number
15 3 2015/03/27
19 C71hc
D00009588 F.1.3 bizhub PRESS C1060/bizhub PRO Change of the parts number
16 3 2015/03/27
20 C1060L
D00009588 F.2.2 bizhub PRESS C1070, C1070P, Change of the parts number
17 3 2015/03/27
39 C71hc, C1060, bizhub PRO C1060L
D00014086 F.5.11.1 How to distinguish the new Addition of item
18 1 2015/03/27
13 fusing unit and the old fusing unit
D00009588 F.5.11.2 Removing/reinstalling the fusing Addition of note
19 2 2015/03/27
93 unit
F.5.11.3 Replacement of the fusing Addition of information of the new type fusing unit
D00009588
20 heater lamp assy/Up and the neutralizing 2 2015/03/27
96
flat spring assy
D00009588 F.5.11.7 Replacement of the fusing Addition of information of the new type fusing unit
21 2 2015/03/27
95 temperature sensor/4 (TH4)
D00009675 F.15.3.1 Replacing the humidification Correction of error in writing
22 7 2015/03/27
67 rollers/Rt, /Lt and the water feed roller
D00009589 G.1.2.6 Photo conductor section Correction of error in writing
23 2 2015/03/27
46
D00009589 G.1.2.7 Intermediate transfer section Correction of error in writing
24 2 2015/03/27
47
D00009589 G.1.2.8 Registration section Correction of error in writing
25 2 2015/03/27
48
G.1.2.9 Fusing section Correction of error in writing
D00009589
26 2 Addition of Items that must not disassemble of the new 2015/03/27
49
type fusing unit
D00009589 G.3.1 List of disassembling and Addition of the disassembling and assembling parts
27 2 2015/03/27
51 assembling parts
D00014086 G.3.2.11 WT-511 (Option) Addition of item
28 1 2015/03/27
14
D00014086 G.3.2.26 Fusing paper exit plate assy Addition of item
29 1 2015/03/27
15
D00009589 G.3.2.29 Temperature sensor/5 (TH5) Addition of information of the new type fusing unit
30 2 2015/03/27
76
D00009677 G.14.3.2 Front door Correction of error in writing
31 4 2015/03/27
68
10

D00009678 G.18.3.2 Punch unit Addition of procedure of disassembling from new type
32 4 2015/03/27
06 FS-531/612
I.4.4.9 Maximum density initial Correction of error in writing
D00009591
33 adjustment (drum peculiarity adjustment) 4 Addition of the adjustment target value (reference) of 2015/03/27
12
C71hc
34 4 2015/03/27
18 DIPSW33-4, DIPSW34-4/5/6, DIPSW35-6,
DIPSW47-5/6, DIPSW52-4, DIPSW52-7, DIPSW56-0/1,
DIPSW56-2, DIPSE56-6
D00009591 I.4.5.7 Restrictions on banner print Addition of the restriction
35 4 2015/03/27
32
D00013663 I.4.5.10 New model of the fusing belt and Addition of note
36 2 2015/03/27
01 the fusing paper exit assy
D00009595 I.4.6.17 Special Parts Counter Change of the parts number
37 4 2015/03/27
17
I.4.7.4 IO check mode list Addition/correction of the following I/O check mode
D00009695
38 4 IO20-15, IO35-21, IO35-22, IO35-23, IO35-24, IO35-25, 2015/03/27
19
IO69-80, IO87-8
D00014086 I.4.7.14 Procedure when IO35-21 or Addition of item
39 1 2015/03/27
34 IO35-25 is used
D00009602 I.5.4 CSV File Import/Export Correction of error in writing
40 3 2015/03/27
07
D00012774 I.8.1.27 Double Feed Detection Addition of note
41 2 2015/03/27
88
D00013662 I.8.1.38 Output Paper Separation Setting Change of the setting item
42 2 2015/03/27
71
D00014086 I.16.1 Conveyance door position Correction of error in writing
43 1 2015/03/27
72 adjustment
K.1.1 Jam code list Addition/correction of the following JAM code
D00009603
44 4 J-3102, J-3106, J-3210, J-3211, J-3212, J-3213, 2015/03/27
05
J-3255, J-5201
D00009604 K.2.3 Malfunction code list Correction of the following malfunction code
45 4 2015/03/27
95 C-1480
17.5.1 Developing preparative rotation Deletion of item
46 - - 2015/03/27
control
D00009611 O.17.5.1 Color registration correction Correction of error in writing
47 2 2015/03/27
96 control
D00009612 O.18.2.1 Image processing flow in the Addition of information
48 2 2015/03/27
10 write section
D00014090 O.18.2.15 IC-602 Calibration correction Addition of item
49 1 2015/03/27
60 (Standard)
D00014090 O.18.2.18 G7 Calibration correction Addition of item
50 1 2015/03/27
61
D00013662 PH.3.2 Operation Correction of error in writing
51 2 2015/03/27
98 Change of the operation condition
D00013616 R.1. COMBINATION OF EXECUTION Change of the execution timing and items
52 2 2015/03/27
64 TIMING AND ITEMS
R.2.4 Maximum density initial adjustment Correction of error in writing
D00013617
53 2 Addition of the adjustment target value (reference) of 2015/03/27
33
C71hc
S TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE Ver1.7 Correction of error in writing
54 - - 2015/03/27
(REPORTS FROM THE MARKET)
11

D00009604 K.2.3 Malfunction code list Correction of the following malfunction code
1 5 2015/04/30
95 C-3503, C-3504
12

- Addition of information of the SD-513, the CR-101, the
1 - - TU-503 and the FD-504 2015/10/30
Deletion of information of the UK-206
D00009586 C.1.3 Paper Correction of error in writing
2 4 2015/10/30
84
3 3 2015/10/30
85
4 4 2015/10/30
95
5 9 2015/10/30
15
D00010531 C.23.2 Functions Correction of error in writing
6 6 2015/10/30
50
D00009622 C.24.2 Functions Addition of information of the folding and stitching
7 4 2015/10/30
87 position performance
8 6 2015/10/30
11
D00009695 E.1.2.1 Jig list Addition of information of the jig of SD-513
9 3 2015/10/30
17
D00015142 E.1.3.1 Tool list Addition of information of the tool of SD-513
0 1 2015/10/30
11
11 - E.1.10 Management Tool - Update to the latest information 2015/10/30
D00014086 F.5.11.1 How to distinguish the new Correction of error in writing
12 2 2015/10/30
13 fusing unit and the old fusing unit
D00009588 F.5.11.2 Removing/reinstalling the fusing Addition of note
13 3 2015/10/30
93 unit
D00014086 G.12.2.3 Conveyance door Addition of information of the new type of the RU-517
14 2 2015/10/30
68
D00009677 G.14.3.8 Color density sensor unit Addition of adjustment procedure after replacing
15 4 2015/10/30
74
D00009591 I.4.4.9 Maximum density initial Correction of error in writing
16 5 2015/10/30
12 adjustment (drum peculiarity adjustment)
17 5 2015/10/30
18 DIPSW33-7, DIPSW36-5, DIPSW42-4, DIPSW54-0,
DIPSW60-7
D00015094 I.4.5.11 Remaining staple amount display Addition of information of the remaining staple amount
18 1 2015/10/30
38 setting display setting
D00009595 I.4.6.7 JAM/JAM Counter Individual Sec. Addition of item
19 2 2015/10/30
D00009595 I.4.6.8 Counter of Each Copy Mode(1) Addition of item
20 2 2015/10/30
D00009595 I.4.6.9 Counter of Each Copy Mode(2) Addition of item
21 2 2015/10/30
D00009595 I.4.6.10 SC Counter/SC Counter Addition of item
22 2 2015/10/30
10 Individual Sec. Correction of error in writing
D00009595 I.4.6.17 Special Parts Counter Addition of item
23 5 2015/10/30
D00009695 I.4.7.4 IO check mode list Addition/correction of the following IO check mode
24 5 2015/10/30
19 IO67-0 to IO67-5, IO71-0 to IO71-99, IO-90-0, IO-93-0
I.4.9.6 SD-510 Fold&staple pitch Addition of note
D00009600
25 adjustment (staple finisher (fold) 3 2015/10/30
80
adjustment)
D00009695 I.4.11.10 List of software DIPSW for CS Addition/correction of the following software DIPSW
26 2 2015/10/30
20 Remote Care DIPSW23-0
D00009689 I.4.13.20 Test pattern number 77 Density Correction of error in writing
27 5 2015/10/30
27 correction pattern manual
13

D00015093 I.8.1.2 Preset Addition of information of the preset
28 1 2015/10/30
63
D00009602 I.8.1.16 Temperature of the lower fusing Modification by change of control
29 2 2015/10/30
37 roller
D00012774 I.8.1.34 Mis-centering Detection Correction of error in writing
30 2 2015/10/30
89
D00015093 I.9.9 Tilt adjustment Addition of item
31 1 2015/10/30
64
D00009689 I.13.5 (Maximum) Paper feed height Correction of error in writing
32 4 2015/10/30
58 adjustment
D00014086 I.16.1 Conveyance door position Addition of information of the new type of the RU-517
33 2 2015/10/30
72 adjustment
D00012778 I.26.6 Horizontal adjustment (LS-506) Change of adjustment procedure
34 2 2015/10/30
06
D00012778 I.26.8 Stacker tray height adjustment Change of adjustment procedure
35 2 2015/10/30
07 (LS-506)
D00012778 I.26.9 Stacker tray levelness adjustment Change of adjustment procedure
36 2 2015/10/30
08 (LS-506)
D00012775 J.1.5 Error list Correction of error in writing
37 4 2015/10/30
70
D00009603 K.1.1 Jam code list Addition/correction of the following jam code
38 5 2015/10/30
05 J-1001, J-7107, J-7368 to J-7374, J-7560 to J-7633
K.2.3 Malfunction code list Addition/correction of the following malfunction code
D00009604 C-1007, C-1242 to C-1280, C-1312, C-1313, C-1413,
39 5 2015/10/30
95 C-1620 to C-1633, C-3501 to C-3192, C-3197, C-C114,
C-D0E8
D00009693 M.20.2 Timing chart of the perfect Correction of error in writing
40 4 2015/10/30
83 binding mode (PB cover paper supply)
M.20.3 Timing chart of the perfect Correction of error in writing
D00009693
41 binding mode (Main body cover paper 4 2015/10/30
84
supply)
O.17.2.5 Long correction control and Change of operation timing of the color density control
D00013738
42 color density control (periodical 2 (periodical adjustment) 2015/10/30
71
adjustment) with RU-509
D00009613 PE.2.3.3 Paper feed control Correction of error in writing
43 3 2015/10/30
32
D00009682 PK.4.3.1 Outline Correction of error in writing
44 5 2015/10/30
64
D00009613 PAC.6.3.2 Glue apply roller control Correction of error in writing
45 2 2015/10/30
50
D00009679 PAC.6.3.3 Glue tank lifting control Correction of error in writing
46 4 2015/10/30
46
D00013616 R.1. COMBINATION OF EXECUTION Addition of information
47 3 2015/10/30
64 TIMING AND ITEMS
D00013617 R.2.3 Density balance adjustment Correction of error in writing
48 2 2015/10/30
32
D00013617 R.2.9 IC-602 Calibration Correction of error in writing
49 3 2015/10/30
40
D00013617 R.2.10 Exact Color Correction of error in writing
50 3 2015/10/30
41
D00013617 R.2.11 G7 Calibration Correction of error in writing
51 3 2015/10/30
42
S TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE Ver1.8 Addition of information on the TROUBLESHOOTING
52 - - 2015/10/30
(REPORTS FROM THE MARKET) GUIDE Ver1.8
D00013663 T.1. IC-308, IC-310 Addition of information
53 4 2015/10/30
04
D00012980 T.2. IC-415 Addition of information
54 3 2015/10/30
76
D00013663 T.3. IC-602 Addition of information
55 3 2015/10/30
05
14
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L
A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Read carefully the safety and important warning items described below to understand them
before doing service work.
A-1
A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 1. IMPORTANT
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L NOTICE
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE
• Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this product as well as
the risk of damage to the product, KONICA MINOLTA, INC. (hereafter called KM) strongly
recommends that all servicing be performed only by KM-trained service technicians.
• Changes may have been made to this product to improve its performance after this Service
Manual was printed. Accordingly, KM does not warrant, either explicitly or implicitly, that the
information contained in this service manual is complete and accurate.
• The user of this service manual must assume all risks of personal injury and/or damage to
the product while servicing the product for which this service manual is intended. Therefore,
this service manual must be carefully read before doing service work both in the course of
technical training and even after that, for performing maintenance and control of the product
properly.
• Keep this service manual also for future service.
• Distributors or KM issue password for customer engineers (CE) as necessary. The
password is required for operations or machine settings that are based on this service
manual. These customer engineers (CE) must manage the password carefully. Never leak
the password to a third party.
A-2
A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 2. DESCRIPTION
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L ITEMS FOR DANGE...
2. DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING

AND CAUTION
2.1 Description items in this Service Manual
In this Service Manual, each of three expressions “ DANGER”, “ WARNING”, and “
CAUTION” are defined as follows.
When servicing the product, the relevant works (disassembling, reassembling, adjustment,
repair, maintenance, etc.) need to be conducted with utmost care.
DANGER : Action having a high possibility of suffering

death or serious injury
WARNING : Action having a possibility of suffering death

or serious injury
CAUTION : Action having a possibility of suffering a slight

wound and property damage
2.2 Description items for safety and important warning items

Symbols used for safety and important warning items are defined as follows:
: Precaution when
servicing the product.
General
Electric hazard High temperature
precaution
: Prohibition when
General Do not touch with Do not
prohibition wet hand disassemble
: Direction when
General
Unplug Ground/Earth
instruction
Illustrations representing the power plug and wall outlet used in the following descriptions are
only typical. Their shapes differ depending on the country or region.
A-3
A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 3. SAFETY
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L WARNINGS
3. SAFETY WARNINGS
3.1 MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY KONICA MINOLTA, INC.
KONICA MINOLTA brand products are renowned for their high reliability. This reliability is
achieved through high-quality design and a solid service network.
Product design is a highly complicated and delicate process where numerous mechanical,
physical, and electrical aspects have to be taken into consideration, with the aim of arriving at
proper tolerances and safety factors. For this reason, unauthorized modifications involve a high
risk of degradation in performance and safety. Such modifications are therefore strictly
prohibited. the points listed below are not exhaustive, but they illustrate the reasoning behind
this policy.
3.1.1 Actions requiring special attention
WARNING
• Do not make any modifications to the product
unless otherwise instructed by KM.
• Do not use any part not specified by KM.
• Do not use any power cord or power plug not

specified by KM.
• Use only the protective fuses specified by KM.

Use of any type of fuse or related part not
specified by KM makes safety devices
inoperative which may result in a fire from
high heat.
• Do not disable fuse functions or use a wire,
metal clip, solder, or other conductor in place
of the fuse.
Fire may result from high heat.
• Do not disable relay functions (for example,
inserting a piece of paper between relay
contacts to hamper circuit action.)
Fire may result from high heat.
A-4
WARNING
• Do not disable safety functions (for example,
interlocks and safety circuits).
Safety devices become inoperative, resulting
in fire from high heat, electric shock, or
injury.
3.2 POWER PLUG SELECTION

In some countries or areas, the power plug provided with the product may not fit the wall outlet
used in the area. In that case, it is the obligation of the customer engineer (hereafter called the
CE) to attach the appropriate power plug or power cord set in order to connect the product to
the supply.
3.2.1 Power Cord Set or Power Plug
WARNING
• Use a power supply cord set which meets the
following criteria:
- provided with a plug having configuration
intended for the connection to wall outlet
appropriate for the product's rated voltage and
current, and kw
- the plug has pin/terminal(s) for grounding, and
- provided with three-conductor cable having
enough current capacity, and
- the cord set meets regulatory requirements for
the area.
Use of inadequate cord set leads to fire or electric
shock.
A-5
WARNING
• Attach power plug which meets the following criteria:
- having configuration intended for the connection
to wall outlet appropriate for the product’s rated
voltage and current, and
- the plug has pin/terminal(s) for grounding, and
- meets regulatory requirements for the area.
Use of inadequate cord set leads to the product
connecting to inadequate power supply (voltage,
current capacity, grounding), and may result in fire
or electric shock.
• The wires in the power supply cord shall be
connected to the terminals of the plug in accordance
with the following:
Color of the wire Terminal of the plug
Marked with "L", "A" or "W"
Brown Black
or colored RED
Marked with "N"
Light Blue White
or colored BLACK
Marked with "E", "PE" or " "

Green-and-Yellow
or colored GREEN
or GREEN-AND-YELLOW
• Wrong connection may cancel safeguards within the
product, and results in fire or electric shock.
3.3 CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE

KONICA MINOLTA brand products are extensively tested before shipping, to ensure that all
applicable safety standards are met, in order to protect the customer and customer engineer
(hereafter called the CE) from the risk of injury. However, in daily use, any electrical
equipment may be subject to parts wear and eventual failure. In order to maintain safety and
reliability, the CE must perform regular safety checks.
A-6
3.3.1 Power Supply

(1) Connection to Power Supply
WARNING
• The power outlet should have a capacity of at
least the maximum power consumption and
be dedicated only to the product.
The current that can be passed through the
outlet is limited and any current exceeding
the limit could result in fire.
• If the wall outlet has two or more receptacles kw
and the product and another electrical

appliance are plugged into this wall outlet,
make sure that the total load does not exceed
the rating of the wall outlet. The current that
can be passed through the outlet is limited
and any current exceeding the limit could
result in a fire.
• Do not use any conversion plug adapter even
if the power plug shape does not match your
wall outlet.
The shapes of the power plug and the wall
outlet are set according to the voltage and
allowable current. Use of a conversion plug
adapter could result in an abnormal voltage
or insufficient current capacity, leading to a
fire. It may also result in an electric shock
due to a grounding failure.
If the plug shape does not match the wall
outlet, request the user to perform power
source installation work.
A-7
WARNING
• Make sure the power cord is plugged into the
wall outlet securely.
If the power plug is left loose in the wall
outlet, contact failure may occur, leading to
abnormal heating of the power plug and a
risk of fire.
(2) Ground Connection
WARNING
• Check whether the product is grounded
properly.
If current leakage occurs in an ungrounded
product, you may suffer electric shock while
operating the product.
Connect power plug to grounded wall
outlet.
• Make sure of correct ground connection.
If the grounding wire is connected to an
inappropriate part, there is a risk of
explosion or electric shock. Do not connect
the grounding wire to any of the following
parts:
a. Gas pipe: Gas explosion or fire may
result.
b. Lightning rod: Risk of electric shock or
fire during lightning.
c. Grounding wire for telephone line: Risk of
electric shock or fire during lightning.
d. Water pipe and faucet: These parts do
not serve as a ground connection
because of a plastic part that is very
often installed midway within the water
pipe.
A-8
(3) Power Plug and Cord
WARNING
• When using the power cord set (inlet type)
that came with this product, make sure the
connector is securely inserted in the inlet of
the product.
When a securing measure is provided,
secure the cord with the fixture properly.
If the power cord (inlet type) is not
connected to the product securely, a
contact problem may lead to increased
resistance, overheating, and risk of fire.
• Do not allow the power cord to be stepped on
or pinched.
Overheating may occur there, leading to a
risk of fire.
• Check whether the power cord is damaged.
Check whether the sheath is damaged.
If the power plug, cord, or sheath is
damaged, replace with a new power cord
(with plug and connector on each end)
specified by KM. Using the damaged power
cord may result in fire or electric shock.
• Do not bundle or tie the power cord.
Overheating may occur there, leading to a
risk of fire.
• Check whether dust is collected around the
power plug and wall outlet.
Using the power plug and wall outlet
without removing dust may result in fire.
• Do not insert the power plug into the wall
outlet with a wet hand.
The risk of electric shock exists.
A-9
WARNING
• When unplugging the power cord, grasp the
plug, not the cable.
The cable may be broken, leading to a risk
of fire and electric shock.
(4) Wiring
WARNING
• Never use multi-plug adapters to plug multiple
power cords in the same outlet.
If used, the risk of fire exists.
• When an extension cord is required, use one
that meets the rated current, rated voltage,
and the relevant safety standards of the
country.
Current that can be passed through the
extension cable is limited and fire may
result from the use of an inappropriate type
of an extension cable.
Do not use an extension cable reel with the
cable taken up. Fire may result.
A-10
3.3.2 Installation Requirements

(1) Prohibited Installation Places
WARNING
• Do not place the product near flammable
materials or volatile materials that may catch
fire.
A risk of fire exists.
• Do not place the product in a place exposed
to water such as rain.
A risk of fire and electric shock exists.
(2) When not Using the Product for a long time
WARNING
• When the product is not to be used for an
extended period of time (for holidays, for
example), instruct the user to turn OFF the
power switch and unplug the power cord from
the power outlet.
Dust collected around the power plug and
outlet may cause fire.
A-11
(3) Ventilation
CAUTION
• The product generates ozone gas during
operation.
If the smell of ozone is present in the
following cases, ventilate the room.
a. When the product is used in a poorly
ventilated room
b. When making a lot of copies
c. When using multiple products at the
same time
(4) Stability
CAUTION
• Be sure to lock the caster stoppers.
In the case of an earthquake, the product
may slide, leading to an injury.
A-12
3.3.3 After Service

(1) Inspection before Servicing
WARNING
• Before conducting an inspection, read all
relevant documentation (service manual,
technical notices, etc.) and proceed with the
inspection following the prescribed procedure
using the recommended personal safety
equipment and using only the prescribed
tools.
Do not make any adjustment not described
in the documentation.
If the prescribed procedure or tool is not
used, the product may break and a risk of
injury or fire exists.
• Before conducting an inspection, be sure to
disconnect the power plugs from the Main
Body and Accessories (Options).
When the power plug is inserted into the
wall outlet, some units are still powered
even if the POWER switch is turned OFF.
A risk of electric shock exists.
CAUTION
• The area around the fixing unit is hot.
You may get burned.
A-13
CAUTION
• Do not leave the machine unattended during
transportation, installation, and/or inspection.
If the machine is left unattended, face
protrusions toward the wall or take other
necessary precautions to prevent a user or
other person in the area from stumbling
over a protrusion of the machine or being
caught by a cable, possibly causing a fall to
the floor or other personal injury.
(2) Work Performed with the Product Powered On
WARNING
• Take every care when making adjustments or
performing an operation check with the
product powered.
If you make adjustments or perform an
operation check with the external cover
detached, you may touch live or high-
voltage parts or you may be caught in
moving gears or the timing belt, leading to a
risk of injury.
• Take every care when servicing with the
external cover detached.
High-voltage exists around the drum unit. A
risk of electric shock exists.
• If it is absolutely necessary to service the
machine with the door open or external
covers removed, always be attentive to the
motion of the internal parts.
A normally protected part may cause
unexpected hazards.
A-14
CAUTION
• Do not keep gazing at a lamp light during the
service procedure with the product powered
ON.
Eyestrain may result.
(3) Safety Checkpoints
WARNING
• When a product fault is reported from a user,
check parts and repair the fault appropriately
with safety in mind.
A damaged product, personal injury, or fire
may result.
• Whenever mounting an option on the
machine, be attentive to the motion of the
other workers performing the task.
Another worker may be injured by a pinch
point between the machine and the option.
• When mounting an option on the machine, be
careful about the clearance between the
machine and the option.
You may be injured with your finger or hand
pinched between the machine and the
option.
• When removing a part that secures a motor,
gear, or other moving part, disassembling a
unit, or reinstalling any of such parts and
units, be careful about moving parts and use
care not to drop any part or unit. During the
service procedure, give sufficient support for
any heavy unit.
You may be injured by a falling part or unit.
A-15
WARNING
• Check the external covers and frame for
possible sharp edges, burrs, and damage.
They can be a cause of injury during use or
servicing.
• When accessing a hard-to-view or narrow
spot, be careful about sharp edges and burrs
on the frame and parts.
They may injure your hands or fingers.
• Do not allow any metal parts such as clips,
staples, and screws to fall into the product.
They can short internal circuits and cause
electric shock or spark bursting into flame.
• Check wiring for pinched and any other
damage.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of
electric shock or fire.
• Check high-voltage cables and sheaths for
any damage.
Damage may lead to product failure and/or
the risk of fire.
• Do not disassemble or adjust the write unit
(PH unit) incorporating a laser.
The laser light can enter your eye, leading
to a risk of loss of eyesight.
• Do not supply power with the write unit (PH
unit) shifted from the specified mounting
position.
The laser light can enter your eye, leading
to a risk of loss of eyesight.
• After replacing a part to which AC voltage is
applied (e.g., optical lamp and fixing lamp), be
sure to check the installation state.
A risk of fire exists.
A-16
WARNING
• Check the interlock switch and actuator for
loosening and check whether the interlock
functions properly.
If the interlock does not function, you may
receive an electric shock or be injured
when you insert your hand in the product
(e.g., for clearing paper jam).
• Make sure the wiring cannot come into
contact with sharp edges, burrs, or other
pointed parts.
Damage may lead to the risk of electric
shock or fire.
• Make sure that all screws, components,
wiring, connectors, etc. that were removed for
safety check and maintenance have been
reinstalled in the original location. (Pay
special attention to forgotten connectors,
pinched cables, forgotten screws, etc.)
A risk of product trouble, personal injury,
electric shock, and fire exists.
• Never use any flammable or combustible
spray, fluid, gas, or similar substance in and
around the product.
Do not use any flammable or combustible
dust spray, in particular, to clean the interior
of the product.
Fire or explosion may result.
CAUTION
• Carefully remove all toner remnants and dust
from electrical parts and electrode units such
as a charging corona unit.
Toner remnants and dust may lead to
product failure and/or the risk of fire.
A-17
CAUTION
• Check electrode units such as a charging
corona unit for deterioration and signs of
leakage.
Damage may lead to product failure and/or
the risk of fire.
• When replacing a battery, replace it with a
new one as specified.
Dispose of the used battery as instructed
on its packaging or by local ordinance.
There is a risk of explosion if the battery is
replaced with an incorrect type.
(4) Handling of Consumables
WARNING
• For handling of consumables (toner,
developer, photoconductor, etc.) and their
storage precautions, see MSDS.
(5) Handling of Service Materials
CAUTION
• Handle with care according to MSDS.
Use of solvent may involve explosion, fire,
or personal injury.
3.4 FUSE
CAUTION
Double pole / neutral fusing
ATTENTION
Double pôle / fusible sur le neutre.
A-18
3.5 Used Batteries Precautions

3.5.1 ALL Areas
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions.
3.5.2 Germany
VORSICHT!
Explosionsgefahr bei unsachgemäßem Austausch der Batterie.
Ersatz nur durch denselben oder einen vom Hersteller empfohlenen gleichwertigen Typ.
Entsorgung gebrauchter Batterien nach Angaben des Herstellers.
3.5.3 France
ATTENTION
Il y a danger d’explosion s’il y a remplacement incorrect de la batterie.
Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du même type ou d’un type équivalent recommandé
par le constructeur.
Mettre au rebut les batteries usagées conformément aux instructions du fabricant.
3.5.4 Denmark
ADVARSEL!
Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering.
Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type.
Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandøren.
3.5.5 Finland, Sweden

VAROlTUS
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin.
Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.
VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.
Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion.
3.5.6 Norway
ADVARSEL
Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri.
Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten.
Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruksjoner.
A-19
A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 4. WARNING
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L INDICATIONS ON THE ...
4. WARNING INDICATIONS ON THE MACHINE

Caution labels shown are attached in some areas on/in the machine.
When accessing these areas for maintenance, repair, or adjustment, special care should be
taken to avoid burns and electric shock.
4.1 Warning indications inside the machine

(Fusing unit)
The fusing unit is

very hot.
To avoid getting
burned DO NOT
TOUCH.
DO NOT put your hand

between the main body
and fusing unit;
otherwise you may
be injured.
A-20
(Weste toner box)

DO NOT throw the weste
toner box into a fire. If it is
thrown into a fire, the weste
toner box may ignite and
cause a dangerous situation.
(Rear side)
A-21
(Process unit)
(Writing unit)
CAUTION
Do not open the cover
during energization
since the light source of
laser is inside.
A-22
(RU-516) Paste when FS-531/FS-612 is connected
The charging roller

assy is very hot.
To avoid getting
burned DO NOT
TOUCH.
RU-517
The charging roller assy

and surrounding metal
plate are very hot.
To avoid getting burned
DO NOT TOUCH.
A-23
(LU-202)
CAUTION
To avoid any unexpected
injury, DO NOT put your hand
into the holes (3 places) on
the bottom plate of the LU.
(FS-531/612)
CAUTION
To avoid injury, DO NOT
put your hand on top of
the printed sheets.
Be sure to hold both
sides of the printed
sheets when removing
them, and DO NOT leave
your hand on the printed
sheets while the primary
(main) tray goes up.
A-24

(5
CAUTION
NEVER put your hand on the top of printed sheets when
removing them from the primary (main) tray.
Failure to do so may cause unexpected injury, such as
getting your fingers squeezed between the main body and
the primary (main) tray going upward. Be sure to hold both
front and rear sides of the stack to remove it from the tray.
CAUTION
NEVER insert your fingers
into the space between the
main body and the primary
(main) tray.
Failure to do so may cause
unexpected injury, such as
getting your fingers
squeezed by the primary
(main) tray sliding
sideways. Please be careful
when removing paper from
the tray.
A-25

(5 CAUTION
NEVER put your hand into the hollow
portion inside the finisher.
The finisher mounted with Punch Kit
PK-522 has a hollow portion, in the
back of which is located a motor.
Touching the motor, you may get
burned. Please do not put your hand
deep into the hollow portion when
removing mishandled paper.
(PB-503)
CAUTION
The paste tank
unit is very hot.
To avoid getting
burned DO NOT
TOUCH.
A-26
(SD-506)
WARNING
Do not touch the edge of the
trimmer blade.
You get injured.

5&
CAUTION : This unit has more than

one power-supply cord. To reduce the risk
of electric shock disconnect all power
suplly cords before servicing.
VORSICHT : Dieses Gerät verfügt über
mehrere Netzkabel. Um daher der
Stromschlaggefahr vorzubeugen, sind vor
Servicearbeiten alle Netzkabel abzutrennen.
ᴾ දॖᴾᾉᴾ䈖䈱䊡䊆䉾䊃䈲㪉ᧄએ਄䈱㔚Ḯ䉮䊷䊄䉕
૶↪䈚䈩䈇䉁䈜䇯ᗵ㔚䈱ෂ㒾䉕㒐ᱛ䈜䉎䈢䉄䈮䇮
䉰䊷䊎䉴೨䈮䈜䈼䈩䈱㔚Ḯ䉮䊷䊄䉕ಾ䉍㔌䈚䈩
䈒䈣䈘䈇䇯
>PET<
A-27
(GP-501) WARNING
This safety message you could
get an electrical shock because
disconnecting power from this
section does not cut off power
from adjacent sections of the
machine.
WARNING
This safety message means
that you might get seriously
hurt or killed if you open the
product and expose yourself to
hazardous voltage. NEVER
remove the screwed on covers.
ALWAYS refer service
requirements to qualified
service personnel.
A-28

)2
CAUTION
NEVER put your hand on
the display panel when
closing the upper part of
the auto ring binder.
Otherwise, you may be
injured. Please be
careful when closing the
upper part of the auto
ring binder.
CAUTION
When the top cover or bypass deck of
the ring binder is opened, be careful
of your head.
Otherwise, you may be injured getting
bumped on your head. Please be
especially careful when removing
mishandled paper.
A-29

)2
WARNING
This safety message means you could get an
electrical shock because disconnecting power
from this section does not cut off power from
adjacent sections of the machine.
WARNING
This safety message means that you might get
seriously hurt or killed if you open the product
and expose yourself to hazardous voltage.
NEVER remove the screws on covers. ALWAYS
refer service requirements
to qualified service personnel.
A-30
(SD-513)
When taking out output sheets from

the bundle exit tray, do not put your
hand into the shutter of the outlet.
If you put your hand into the shutter
while sheets are being delivered
onto the bundle exit tray, it may
cause an unexpected accident.
Before removing out output sheets,
make sure that they have all been
delivered onto the bundle exit
tray.
A-31
(SD-513)
When closing the clamp

section, do not put your hand
between the clamp section
and the main body.
Your hand is caught between
them, it may cause an
unexpected accident.
Be careful to close the clamp
section.
(SD-513)
When the clamp section is opened, the
internal unit inside the saddle stitcher
may be located forward. Do not touch the
motor section of the internal unit with
your hand.
The motor section of the internal unit
may be hot. If you touch it with your
hand, you may burn your hand.
Pay special attention to clear jammed
paper inside the main body of the saddle
stitcher.
A-32
(SD-513) WARNING
Before starting the service,
disconnect the power cord.
Otherwise, it may cause an
electric shock.
WARNING
Be sure to connect this product
to an earthed socket outlet only.
Failure to do so and an unlikely
event of leakage could result in
a fire or electrical shock.
A-33
(SD-513)
WARNING
To avoid electric shock, after turning OFF the power switch,
do not touch the DC power supply unit for a specified time.
If the DC power supply unit is faulty, it may take time
before its voltage drops sufficiently.
CAUTION
For continued protection against risk of fire,
replace only with same type and rating of fuse.
A-34
(TU-503)
Be sure to hold the specified

position;
If you hold other position, it
may cause an unexpected
accident.
Do not put your hand into the

rotary cutter section;
otherwise you may be injured.
CAUTION
• You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised not to touch
by any caution label. Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has come off
or soiled and therefore the caution cannot be read, contact our service office.
A-35
4.2 Warning indications on the boards
WARNING
• To avoid electric shock, after turning OFF the power
switch, do not touch the DC power supply/1 unit for 30
minutes.
switch, do not touch the DC power supply/2 unit for 10
minutes.
A-36
WARNING
do not touch the DC power supply unit for 10 minutes.
WARNING Do not touch power supply unit for 10 min.

after shutting off the machine.
Electric Shock from Stored Charge on Capacitors!
WARNING
WARNING Do not touch power supply unit for 30 min.

Electric Shock from Stored Charge on Capacitors!
WARNING
• Do not open the cover for 50 minutes after turning OFF
the power switch.
A-37
WARNING
There is a possibility of electrical shock caused by
charging voltage.
(RU-509)
WARNING
Do not open the cover for

50 minutes after turning
OFF the power switch.
There is a possibility of
electrical shock caused by
charging voltage.
CAUTION
switch, do not touch the DC power supply/1 for 6 minutes.
switch, do not touch the DC power supply/2 for 6 minutes.
A-38
(SD-513)
CAUTION
CAUTION Electric Shock from Stored Charge on Capacitors!

Do not touch power supply unit for 6 min.
CAUTION
• You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised not to touch
by any caution label. Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has come off
or soiled and therefore the caution cannot be read, contact our service office.
A-39
A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 5. MEASURES
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L TO TAKE IN CASE OF...
5. MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT

1. If an accident has occurred, the distributor who has been notified first must immediately take
emergency measures to provide relief to affected persons and to prevent further damage.
2. If a report of a serious accident has been received from a customer, an on-site evaluation
must be carried out quickly and KM must be notified.
3. To determine the cause of the accident, conditions and materials must be recorded through
direct on-site checks, in accordance with instructions issued by KM.
4. For reports and measures concerning serious accidents, follow the regulations specified by
every distributor.
A-40
B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS > 1. PRECAUTION ON
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L HANDLING THIS MANUAL
B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS

1. PRECAUTION ON HANDLING THIS MANUAL
Be sure to maintain the confidentiality of this manual.
Mishandling of this manual may make you face punishment according to the laws.
B-1
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS > 2. PRODUCT NAME
2. PRODUCT NAME
In this manual, each product is indicated as following names.
(1) bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060: Copier or Main body
bizhub PRO C1060L Copier or Main body
Microsoft Windows Vista: Windows Vista
Microsoft Windows 7 : Windows 7
Microsoft Windows 8: Windows 8
The combination of above OS: Windows Vista
Windows 7, 8
*1 This Service Manual is also applicable to bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060, bizhub PRO C1060L and ineo+ 1070/71hc/
1060/1060L.
B-2
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS > 3. TRADEMARK
3. TRADEMARK
3.1 TRADEMARKS OF OTHER COMPANIES
The indicated company and product names are the trademarks or registered trademarks of each company.
3.2 OWN TRADEMARKS

KONICA MINOLTA, KONICA MINOLTA logo, bizhub, and bizhub PRESS are the registered trademarks of Konica Minolta, Inc..
© 2013 KONICA MINOLTA, INC.
B-3
B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS > 4. ELECTRICAL PARTS AND
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L SIGNALS
4. ELECTRICAL PARTS AND SIGNALS

Those listed by way of example below are not exhaustive, but only some instances among many.
Classification Load symbol Ex. of signal name Description
Sensor PS IN Sensor detection signal
PS
Door PS1
SIG
102 PS
Solenoid SD 24V Power to drive the solenoid
DRV Drive signal
SOL
Clutch CL 24V Power to drive the clutch
DRV Drive signal
SOL
Motor M 24V Power to drive the motor
CONT Drive signal
DRV1 Drive signals of two kinds
DRV2
D1
D2
_U Drive signals (control signals) of three kinds
_V
_W
DRV1
DRV2
DRV3
D1 Drive signals (control signals) of four kinds
D2 Motor, phases A and B control signals
D3
D4
DRV A
DRV
DRV B
DRV
A
/A
B
/B
AB
BB
CLK, PLL PLL control signal
LCK, Lock, LD PLL lock signal
FR Forward/reverse rotation signal
EM, Lock, LCK, LD Motor lock abnormality
BLK Drive brake signal
P/S Power/stop
S/S Operating load start/stop signal
SS
CW/CCW, F/R Rotational direction switching signal
ENB Effective signal
TEMP_ER Motor temperature abnormality detection signal
Fan FM 24V Power to drive the fan motor
CONT, DRIVE Drive signal
HL Speed control signal (2 speeds)
EM, Lock, LCK, FEM Detection signal
Others TH1.S, ANG Analog signal
Ground SG, S.GND, S_GND Signal ground
B-4
B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS > 4. ELECTRICAL PARTS AND
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L SIGNALS
PG, P.GND Power ground

Serial DCD Data carrier detection
communication SIN Serial input
SOUT Serial output
DTR Data terminal operation available
GND Signal ground (earth)
DSR, DSET Data set ready
RTS Transmission request signal
CTS Consent transmission signal
RI Ring indicator
TXD Serial transmission data
RXD Serial reception data
B-5
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS > 5. PAPER FEED DIRECTION
5. PAPER FEED DIRECTION

When the direction in which paper is fed is in parallel with the longer side of paper, the paper feed direction like this is referred to as the
longitudinal feed.
And the paper feed direction that is perpendicular to the longitudinal feed is referred to as the transverse feed.
When specifying the longitudinal feed, "S (abbreviation for Short Edge Feeding)" is added to the paper size. For the transverse feed, no specific
notation is employed.
However, when only the longitudinal feed is specified for one and the same paper size with no specification made for the transverse feed, "S" is
not added even when being fed longitudinally.
<Example>
Paper size Feed direction Notation
A4 Transverse feed A4
Longitudinal feed A4S
A3 Longitudinal feed A3
B-6
C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 1. bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L C71hc/C1060, ...
C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
1. bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060, bizhub PRO C1060L
1.1 Type
Type Console type
Copying method 4-coupled drum tandem laser electrostatic method
Original stand Fixed
Original alignment Left rear standard
Photo conductor type OPC
Writing type 4-beam laser exposure method
Tray capacity Tray1 (500 sheets, 80 g/m2)
Tray2 (1,000 sheets, 80g/m2)
MB-506 (Multi bypass, 250 sheets, 80g/m2)*1 *2
PF-602m (3,000 sheets x 2, 80g/m2) *1
PF-707 (1,390 sheets x 2, 1,850 sheets x 1, 80g/m2) *1
LU-202 (2,500 sheets x 80g/m2)*1
*1 MB-506, PF-602m, PF-707 and LU-202 are the options.
*2 PF-602m and PF-707 are not available when MB-506 is installed.
1.2 Functions
Original Sheet, book, solid object
Max. original size A3 or 11 x 17 (Custom: Maximum 297 x 431.8mm)
Copy magnification Fixed magnification Inch : x 1.000, x 2.000, x 1.545, x 1.294, x 1.214, x 0.785, x 0.772, x
0.647, x 0.500
Metric : x 1.000, x 2.000, x 1.414, x 1.189, x 0.840, x 0.707, x 0.500
Zoom magnification x 0.250 to x 4.000 (each 0.001 step)
Warm-up time 390 seconds or less
First copy out time Color 7.1 seconds or less (A4, 8 1/2 x 11)
(C1070)
Black and white 5.9 seconds or less (A4, 81/2 x 11)
First copy out time Color 7.6 seconds or less (A4, 8 1/2 x 11)
(C1060, C1060L)
Black and white 6.3 seconds or less (A4, 8 1/2 x 11)
Continuous copy speed Color 70 sheets/min. (8 1/2 x 11), 71 sheets/min. (A4)
(C1070, C1070P, C71hc)
Black and white 70 sheets/min. (8 1/2 x 11), 71 sheets/min. (A4)
Continuous copy speed Color 60 sheets per minute (8 1/2 x 11), 61 sheets per minute (A4)
(C1060, C1060L)
Black and white 60 sheets per minute (8 1/2 x 11), 61 sheets per minute (A4)
Continuous copy count Up to 9,999 sheets
Resolution Scan Main scan: 600dpi
Sub scan: 600dpi
Writing Main Scan: 1200dpi (equivalent to 3600dpi)
Sub scan: 1200dpi
Standard memory Image memory capacity: 4GB
System memory capacity C1070, C1060, C1060L: 6GB
C1070P, C71hc: 2GB
System memory C1070/C1060 Maximum 14GB:
2GB+4GB (Standard of the main body) +4GB (IC-602A) +4GB
(UK-104)
C1070P/ C71hc Maximum 14GB:
2GB (Standard of the main body) +4GB x 2 (IC-602B) +4GB (UK-104)
C1060L Maximum 10GB:
2GB+4GB (Standard of the main body) +4GB (IC-602A)
HDD C1070/C1060 Maximum 2TB:
500GB x 3 (Standard of the main body) +500GB (UK-104)
C1070P/ C71hc Maximum 2TB:
500GB x 3 (IC-602B) +500GB (UK-104)
C1060L Maximum 1.5TB:
500GB x 3 (Standard of the main body)
Number of originals to be stored 12353 sheets (A4)
Interface section RJ45 Ethernet, Serial port (RS232-C), Service port (USB-Type A x 3, USB-Type B x 1)
C-1
1.3 Paper
(1) Size and weight
Paper size Tray1 A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, ISOB5S, A5S
11×17, 9×11, 8 1/2×14
8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 S
8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Tab paper (A4, 81/2 x 11)
Custom paper (Maximum 330.2 x 431.8mm, Minimum 139.7 x
182mm)
Tray2 SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, ISOB5S,
A5S
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 8 1/2 x 14,
8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 S
8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Custom paper (Max. 330.2 x 487.7 mm, Min. 139.7 x 182 mm)
ADU SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S,
ISOB5S, A5, A5S, B6S, ISOB6S, A6S
13×19, 12×18, 11×17, 9×11, 8 1/2×14, 8 1/2×11,
8 1/2 x 11S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 S
8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Custom paper (Max. 330.2 x 487.7 mm, Min. 100 x 148 mm)
When using MB-506+MK-740 Custom paper (Max. 330.2 x 1200 mm, Min. 100 x 148 mm)
Weight that can be fed Tray1, Tray2 62g/m2 to 256g/m2 *1 (plain, fine, color specific)
81g/m2 to 256g/m2 *1 (coated)
Weight that can be passed Simplex straight paper exit 62g/m2 to 300g/m2 (plain, fine, color specific)
through paper Simplex back on top output 81g/m2 to 300g/m2 (coated)
ADU
*1 For paper size A4 or smaller than 8 1/2 x 11, it is up to 216g/m2
(2) Type of paper

Type of paper Tray1, Tray2 MB-506 LU-202 PF-602 m PF-707
Plain ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Fine ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Color ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Coated GL, ML, GO, ○*3 ○*3 ○ ○ ○
MO *1 *2
Envelope - - - - ○*7
Label *4 - ○ - - -
OHP sheet*5 ○ ○ - - -
Tab Paper *6 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*8

○: Can be fed, -: Cannot be fed
(Coated type) G: Gloss, M: Matte, L: Laser, O: Offset
*1 Paper less than 81 g/m2 is not guaranteed.
*2 HT-503, HT-504 or HT-506 (option) is required for humidity 50% or more.
*3 When the tray1, tray2 or MB-506 feeds the paper, the paper can be fed only per 1 sheet.
*4 The feed is available but not assured.
*5 The image quality is not assured.
*6 Placement direction is specified. Only for simplex.
*7 Only the lower tray can pass through envelopes. (When installing EF-103)
*8 Can be fed only when the tab paper guide is installed.
1.4 Recommended paper

• The recommended paper is the paper type which can be fed in Q zone and has no extreme image deterioration.
1.4.1 Inch
Paper type Product name
C-2
Plain, Fine Domtor First Choice (90g/m2)

Recycled paper MOHOAWK Color Copy Recycle 54302 (105g/m2)
STAPLES multipurpose paper 50% recycled (105g/m2)
BOISE Aspen Laser (90g/m2)
BOISE Aspen Color Copy ACC-2811 (105g/m2)
Color Hammermill Color Copy Photo White 28lb (105g/m2)
Hammermill Color Copy Cover 60lb (163g/m2)
Hammermill Color Copy Cover 80lb (216g/m2)
Coated-ML New Page FUTURA LASER DULL COVER 80# (216g/m2)
Coated-GO Sappi OPUS GLOSS DIGITAL TEXT (216g/m2)
WAUSAU PAPER Gloss coated (216g/m2)
MOHOAWK color copy ultra gloss White/Blanc 12pt (255g/m2)
Coated-MO MOHOAWK EVERYDAY DIGITAL COATED SILK WHITE (118g/m2)
1.4.2 Metric
Paper type Product name
Plain, Fine Profi (80g/m2)
Original (80g/m2)
Color Color Copy (Mondi) (90g/m2, 100g/m2, 120g/m2, 160g/m2, 200g/m2, 220g/m2, 250g/m2, 280g/m2, 300g/
m2)
SUPERIOR OFFICE COLOR (160g/m2)
KMColor+ (90g/m2)
DCP Blanc White (280g/m2)
Coated-GL Color Copy Coated Glossy (Mondi) (135g/m2, 170g/m2, 200g/m2, 250g/m2)
Coated-ML Color Copy Coated Silk (Mondi) (135g/m2, 170g/m2, 200g/m2, 250g/m2)
Konicaminolta Semi Gloss Refrence (130g/m2)
Coated-GO SILVER IMAGE SUPERGLOSS (250g/m2)
Sappi Magnostar (200g/m2)
1.5 Materials
(1) C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, C1060L
Parts name Useful life Name
Toner bottle/Y 71,000 Counts *1*6 TN619Y*6
64,000 Counts *1*7 TN620Y*7
66,000 Counts *1*8 TN621Y*8
Toner bottle/M 54,500 Counts *1*6 TN619M *6
49,000 Counts *1*7 TN620M *7
51,500 Counts *1*8 TN621M *8
Toner bottle/C 78,000 Counts *1*6 TN619C *6
70,000 Counts *1*7 TN620C *7
63,000 Counts *1*7 TN621C *8
Toner bottle/K 66,500 Counts *1*6 TN619K *6
60,000 Counts *1*7 TN620K *7
67,000 Counts *1*7 TN621K *8
Drum unit 460,000 counts*2 , 410,000 DU-105 *6*8
counts *3 , drive distance of the DU-106 *7
drum 223 km, lubricant applying
roller drive distance 71.4 km,
whichever is earlier.
Developer/Y 1,200,000 counts DV614Y
(The drive distance of the
developing roller/Y 694.2 km) *4
Developer/M 1,200,000 counts DV614M *6*7
DV615M *8
C-3
developing roller/M 694.2 km) *4
Developer/C 1,200,000 counts DV614C *6*7
DV615C *8
developing roller/C 694.2 km) *4
Developer/K 1,200,000 counts DV614K
developing roller/K 694.2 km) *4
Waste toner box 130,000 counts*1 *5 A50UR701##
*1 A4 original at each color 5% coverage is the condition to operate.

*2 C1070, C1070P and C71hc
*3 C1060 and C1060L
*4 The drive distance of the developing roller decides the actual life.
*5 The sensor detects the actual life automatically.
*6 C1070, C1070P and C1060
*7 C1060L
*8 C71hc
1.6 Maintenance
Maintenance cycle Every 220,000 prints*1*6
Every 200,000 prints*2*3
Average number of prints*4 Inch: 55,000 per month*1
Inch: 33,000 per month*2
Inch: 21,000 per month*3*6
Metric: 50,000 per month*1
Maximum number of prints*4 Q zone*5 350,000 per month*1*6 11,700 per day*1*6
300,000 per month*2*3 10,000 per day*2*3
B, C zone*5 150,000 per month 8,500 per day
A zone*5 100,000 per month 5,000 per day
*1 C1070 and C1070P

*2 C1060
*3 C1060L
*4 The print number is a total of black and white, single color, and full colors.
*5 The zones mean the temp&humidity range that is indicated in the following graph.
*6 C71hc
80
70
A
Humidity (%RH)
60
B Q
40
30
20 C
10
10 18 20 23 30
Temperature (°C)
1.7 Machine data

Power source Inch: AC208 to 240V 21A 60Hz
Metric: AC220 to 240V 20A, 50Hz
Power consumption Inch: 4,900W or less (For the whole system excluding the options with a dedicated power code)
Metric: 4,700W or less (For the whole system excluding the options with a dedicated power code)
Dimensions C1070, C1060 or C1060L + 760 (W) x 903 (D) x 1,073 (H*1) mm
OC-506
C1070, C1060 or C1060L + 2,150 (W) x 903 (D) x 1,478 (H*2) mm
DF-626 + LU-202 + FS-612
C1070P or C71hc 760 (W) x 903 (D) x 1,041 (H*1) mm
Weight Approximately 291kg (C1070, C1060, C1060L)
Approximately 286kg (C1070P, C71hc)
*1 The operation panel section is not included.
C-4
*2 The operation panel section is included.
1.8 Operating environment

Temperature 10°C to 30°C
Humidity 10% to 80%RH (with no condensation)
1.9 Note regarding the specifications

Note
• The information herein is possibly changed for an improvement without any notice.
C-5
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 2. HT-511
2. HT-511
2.1 Type
Type Heater type dehumidifier
2.2 Machine data

Power source 220 VAC (supplied from the main body)
Maximum power consumption 40 W
Dimensions 240.6 (W) x 124.1 (D) x 7.8 (H) mm
Weight 232.4 g


Note
C-6
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 3. DF-626
3. DF-626
3.1 Type
Name Reverse automatic document feeder
Type Paper feed section U-turn and output from top method
Read section Sheet through method
Reversal section Switchback reversal method
Exit section Straight paper output method
Install method Top of the main body rear install method
Document alignment Center
Direction Left side of an image side normal
3.2 Functions
Mode Normal original mode, mixed original mode
Scan speed (A4) Scan resolution: 600 dpi 42 sheets per minute
Scan resolution: 300 dpi 70 sheets per minute
3.3 Type of paper

Type Normal original mode (plain) Simplex original mode: 35 g/m2 to 210 g/m 2
Duplex original mode: 50 g/m2 to 128 g/m 2
Mixed original mode (plain) Simplex original mode, duplex original mode: 50 g/m2 to 128 g/m 2
Original size Maximum 297.0 mm × 431.8 mm
Minimum 100.0 mm × 140.0 mm
Possible size for detection Normal original mode Inch
A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S
11 × 17, 8 1/2 × 14, 8 1/2 × 11, 8 1/2 × 11S, 5 1/2 × 8 1/2, 5 1/2 × 8
1/ S
2
8K, 16K, 16KS
Metric
A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, A5, A5S, B6S, A6S
11 × 17, 8 1/2 × 11, 8 1/2 × 11S,
8 1/2 × 13, 8 1/4 × 13, 8 1/8 × 13 1/4, 8 × 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Mixed original mode Refer to the table of mixed combinations.
Capacity 100 sheets (80 g/m2), or 14 mm or less of stacked height
3.4 Originals that are not allowed to be fed

• If you use the following originals, problems likely to occur.
Image Type Predictable Troubles
Stapled or clip-on original Paper feed error, original damaged, or the drive failure which is caused by the jammed clip
Pasted original Paper feed error, original damaged
Book Paper feed error, original damaged
Original whose weight is less than Paper feed error, conveyance trouble
35 g/m2, or over 210 g/m2
Originals that are folded, torn, Paper feed error, original damaged, conveyance trouble
creased
Original with a large amount of Folded corner, jammed original which is caused by the skew
curl (15 mm or more)
OHP Film Paper feed error, conveyance trouble
Label Paper feed error, conveyance trouble
Offset master Paper feed error, conveyance trouble
Gloss original such as the photo Conveyance trouble, original damaged
paper, gloss coated
Clipped, or cutout original Original damaged, conveyance trouble
Cut-and-paste original Folded, or torn cut-and-paste part
3.5 Originals other than the paper feed and the throughput can be guaranteed
• If you use the following originals, the original can be fed partially but problems can occur.
Image Type Predictable Troubles
C-7
Original with a small amount of Folded corner, output error, conveyance trouble
curl (10 mm to 15 mm)
Heat-sensitive paper Folded lead, output error, conveyance trouble
Inkjet paper Paper feed error, conveyance trouble
Paper with smooth surface Paper feed error, conveyance trouble
(coated paper)
Blueprint master original Paper feed error, conveyance trouble
Paper which just output from the Paper feed error, conveyance trouble
main body
Multi-hole paper (limited to a Paper feed error, conveyance trouble
loose leaf or the like)
Original with 2 holes to 4 holes Conveyance trouble
Original which has trails of half- Paper feed error, conveyance trouble, image distortion
fold, or Z-fold (the floating amount
is 15 mm or less)
Original with a rough surface Paper feed error
(such as a letterhead)
3.6 Table of mixed combinations

(1) Inch
Maximum original width
11 inch 81/2 inch 51/2 inch
11 x 17 81/2 x 11 81/2 x 14 81/2 x 11S 51/2 x 81/2 51/2 x 81/2S
11 x 17 Same width Same width - - - -
11 inch
81/2 x 11 Same width Same width - - - -
81/2 x 14 ○ ○ Same width Same width Same width -

Mixed Size
81/2 inch 81/2 x 11S ○ ○ Same width Same width Same width -
51/2 x 81/2 × × Same width Same width Same width -
51/2 inch 51/2 x 81/2S × × × × × Same width
(2) Metric
Maximum original width
297 mm 257 mm 210 mm 182 mm 148 mm
A3 A4 B4 B5 A4S A5 B5S A5S
A3 Same Same - - - - - -
width width
297 mm
A4 Same Same - - - - - -
width width
B4 ○ ○ Same Same - - - -
width width
257 mm
B5 ○ ○ Same Same - - - -
width width
Mixed Size
A4S ○ ○ ○ ○ Same Same - -
width width
210 mm
A5 × × ○ ○ Same Same - -
width width
182 mm B5S × × ○ ○ ○ ○ Same -
width
148 mm A5S × × × × × × ○ Same
width
Same width: 1.5% or less of the lead skew
○: Mixed is possible.
×: Mixed is restricted.
-: Impossible to place
3.7 Machine data

Power source DC24 V (supplied from the main body)
DC5 V (supplied from the main body)
Maximum power consumption 60 W or less
Dimensions 600 (W) x 575 (D) x 130 (H) mm
C-8
Weight Approximately 16.7 kg

Humidity 10% to 80% RH (with no condensation)

Note
C-9
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 4. PF-602m
4. PF-602m
4.1 Type
Type Front loading type two-tray paper feeder
4.2 Functions
Number of trays Two trays (All trays universal)
Maximum tray capacity 6,000 sheets (80 g/m2 standard paper) = 3,000 sheets x 2 trays
4.3 Type of paper

Paper size SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5 *1, B5S, ISOB5S, A5*1,A5S, B6S, ISOB6S *1,
A6S *1
13×19, 12×18, 11×17, 9×11, 8 1/2×14, 8 1/2×11, 8 1/2×11S, 5 1/2×8 1/2 S
8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Tray 1: Custom paper (maximum. 330 x 487mm, minimum 100 x 182 mm)
Tray 2: Custom paper (maximum. 330 x 487mm, minimum 100 x 148 mm)
Applicable paper Plain paper, high quality paper, coated paper*2
Paper weight Tray 1 64g/m2 to 256g/m2
Tray 2 64 g/m2 to 300g/m2
*1 Paper feed available only from tray 2
4.4 Maintenance
MAINTENANCE Same as the main body.
4.5 Machine data

Power source 200 VAC to 240 VAC, 24 VDC, 12 VDC, 5 VDC (supplied both from the main body)
Maximum power consumption DC: 90W or less, AC: 100W or less
Weight Approximately 170kg


Note
C-10
5. HT-504
5.1 Type
Type Fan heater type dehumidifier
5.2 Machine data

Power source 24 VDC, 5 VDC, 200 VAC to 240 VAC (supplied from the main body)
Dimensions Dehumidifier fan heater unit: 197 (W) x 82 (D) x 293 (H) mm
Power source unit: 121 (W) x 80 (D) x 160 (H) mm
Weight Dehumidifier fan heater unit: 1.5kg (per unit)
Power supply unit: 0.9 kg


Note
C-11
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 6. PF-707
6. PF-707
6.1 Type
Type Front loading type suction method 3-tray paper feeder
6.2 Functions
(1) Paper feed
Number of trays 3 trays (All trays universal)
Maximum tray capacity 4,630 sheets (80 g/m2)
Tray 1, 2: 1,390 sheets
Tray 3: 1,850 sheets
6.3 Type of paper

Paper size SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, ISOB5S, A5, A5S, B6S*1, ISOB6S*1,
A6S*1
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2S ,
8K, 16K, 16KS
Custom size paper (Maximum 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm, Minimum 100 mm x 139.7 mm) *2 *5
Custom size paper (Maximum 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm, Minimum 100 mm x 148 mm) *6
Tab paper (A4, 8 1/2 x 11) *4
Type of paper Plain, Fine, Color, Coated*7, Envelope*3
Paper weight 62 g/m2 to 300 g/m2
*1 Use the small size guide.
*2 For the paper whose width is less than 139.7 mm, use the small size guide.
*3 Only tray 3 supports envelopes.
*4 Can be fed only when the tab paper guide is installed.
*5 C1100/C1085
*6 C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060
6.4 Machine data

Power source 12/5/-12VDC, 180 VAC to 264VAC, 50Hz/60Hz common (supplied from the main body)
Inch: 120VAC
Metric: 230VAC
Maximum power consumption*1 DC: 70W or less
AC: 580W or less
Weight 203kg
*1 Excluding the power consumption of HT-506.


Note
C-12
7. HT-506
7.1 Type
7.2 Machine data

Power source (supplied from the 24 VDC, 5 VDC
connected device) Inch: 90 VAC to 132 VAC
Metric: 180 VAC to 264 VAC
Maximum power consumption DC: 6W or less
AC (Inch): 384W or less (per 1 unit)
AC (Metric): 384W or less (per 1 unit)
Dimensions Dehumidifier fan unit + air supply and exhaust duct: 293 (W) x 336 (D) x 176 (H) mm
Weight 6kg
(Dehumidifier fan unit x 3, air supply and exhaust duct x 3, power source unit x 1)


Note
C-13
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 8. LU-202
8. LU-202
8.1 Type
Type Side mount type large volume paper feed unit
8.2 Functions
Maximum tray capacity 2500 sheets (80 g/m2)*1
*1 Stacked height 275 mm
8.3 Type of paper

Paper size SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S
8K, 16K
Custom paper (Maximum 330 x 487mm, Minimum 210 x 182mm)*1
Applicable paper Plain paper, high quality paper, coated paper*2
64 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 *1
*1 Available types of paper weighing 300 g/m2 are limited to specific types.
8.4 Maintenance
MAINTENANCE Same as the main body.
8.5 Machine data

Power source 24 VDC, 12 VDC, 5 VDC, 200 VAC to 240 VAC (50 Hz, 60 Hz) (supplied both from the main body)
Maximum power consumption DC: 70W or less, AC: 50W or less (not including HT-503)


Note
C-14
9. HT-503
9.1 Type
9.2 Machine data

Power source 24 VDC, 5 VDC, 200 VAC to 240 VAC (supplied from the main body)
Dimensions Dehumidifier fan heater unit: 293 (W) x 82 (D) x 197 (H) mm
Weight Dehumidifier fan heater unit: 1.5 kg
Power supply unit: 0.9 kg


Note
C-15
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 10. MB-506
10. MB-506
10.1 Type
Type Multi bypass paper feed unit
10.2 Functions
Tray capacity 250 sheets (80 g/m2)
10.3 Type of paper

Paper size SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, ISOB5S, A5, A5S, B6S, ISOB6S, A6S
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 S
8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Tab paper (A4, 8 1/2 x 11)
Custom paper (Maximum 330.2 x 487.7 mm, Minimum 100 x 148 mm)
Applicable paper Plain, Colored, Fine, Color, Coated*1, Label*2, Tab*3, OHP sheet*4
*1 The paper can be fed only per 1 sheet The Paper less than 81 g/m2 is not guaranteed.
*2 Paper feed is possible, but it is not guaranteed.
*3 Place direction is specified. Only for simplex.
*4 The image quality is not guaranteed.
10.4 Machine data

Power source 24 VDC, 5 VDC (supplied from the main body)
Power consumption Maximum 28 W or less


Note
C-16
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 11. OT-502
11. OT-502
11.1 Type
Type Output tray unit
11.2 Functions
Tray capacity 150 sheets (80 g/m2) *1
*1 The alignment is not guaranteed.
11.3 Type of paper

Paper size Maximum 330.2 mm × 487.7 mm, minimum 100 mm × 148 mm
11.4 Machine data

Dimensions When the output tray is stored in: 342 (W) x 456 (D) x 170 (H) mm
When the output tray is pulled out: 470 (W) x 456 (D) x 229 (H) mm
Weight Approximately 1.9 kg (approximately 0.7 kg for only the output tray)


Note
C-17
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 12. EF-103
12. EF-103
12.1 Type
Type Envelope fusing unit
12.2 Functions
Paper feed method When you use the fusing unit exclusively for envelopes and the paper feed assist parts, the envelope feed is
available.
Document alignment Center
Paper feed mode Only face up exit in the simplex mode.
Paper feed direction Open the flap and feed paper from the opposite side of the flap.
Paper feed specification Paper feed tray Main body *5 Tray 1
Tray 2
PF-707 Tray 1 *5
Tray 2 *5
Tray 3
PF-602m *4 Tray 1
Tray 2
Paper feed tray load PF-707: 100 sheets (The height difference on the top surface of the envelope: 10
capacity mm or less)
Finishing specification Output Tray OT-502
FS-612 Main tray *4
Sub tray *1
FS-531 Main tray *4
Sub tray *1
FS-532 Main tray *2
Sub tray *1
LS-505/506 Sub tray *1
SD-506 Sub tray *1
PB-503 Sub tray *1
Output tray load capacity OT-502: 50 sheets (Evaluation standard paper)
*3
Finishing options which RU-516 *2
can feed the envelop
RU-509 Straight conveyance mode *1
RU-510 Straight conveyance mode *2
FD-503 Straight mode *2
GP-501 Bypass mode *2
GP-502 Through conveyance mode *2
LS-505/506 Coupling mode *1
SD-506 Coupling exit mode *1
PB-503 Relay conveyance mode *1
*1 Paper feed is possible, but it is not guaranteed.
*2 Paper feed is guaranteed as an option itself, but it is not guaranteed as a system. (Because when you use this option, the option that is not
guaranteed (Example: RU-509) is necessary.)
*3 The alignment is not guaranteed.
*4 Not guaranteed. Available only when the DIPSW57-3 is "1".
12.3 Type of paper

Envelope weight 70 g/m2 to 100 g/m2
Envelope size Main body *5 Tray 1 Main scan direction 90.0 mm *7 to 245.0 mm
Sub scan direction 182.0 mm to 375.0 mm
Tray 2 Main scan direction 90.0 mm *7 to 245.0 mm
PF-707 Tray 1 *5 Main scan direction 100 mm *1 to 330.2 mm
Sub scan direction 148 mm to 487.7 mm
C-18
Tray 2 *5 Main scan direction 100 mm *1 to 330.2 mm

Sub scan direction 148 mm to 487.7 mm
Tray 3 Main scan direction 100 mm *1 to 330.2 mm *2
Sub scan direction 148 mm to 487.7 mm *3
PF-602m *4 Tray 1 Main scan direction 90.0 mm *6*7 to 330.2 mm
Tray 2 Main scan direction 90.0 mm *6*7 to 330.2 mm
Recommended envelope *8 Inch 240 mm × 332 mm
Metric 120 mm × 235 mm
The single side seam and the double side seam are recommended.
[1] [2]
[1] Single side seam

[2] Double side seam
The envelope that is not allowed The Envelope with the double-stick tape or the release coated paper on the flap.
to use The envelope with the film window.
*1 When you feed the paper that is less than 139.7 mm, use the paper assist part.
*2 Paper that is larger than 245 mm is not guaranteed. Paper that is larger than 245 mm is available only when the DIPSW57-3 or DIPSW57-0
is "1".
*3 Paper that is larger than 375 mm is not guaranteed. Paper that is larger than 375 mm is available only when the DIPSW57-3 or DIPSW57-0
is "1".
*6 When you feed the paper that is less than 100 mm, the envelop assist guide is necessary.
*7 When you feed the paper that is less than 100 mm, the mis-centering correction control is not performed.
*8 The seal area is not guaranteed.
12.4 Recommended paper

12.4.1 Inch
Size Maker Product name Seam method Recommenda
tion
6 x 9 1/2 Western
Double side
Evaluation
States Sulfite 7059 white (93 g/m2) seam
standard
paper
12.4.2 Metric
Size Maker Product name Seam method Recommenda
tion
C5 162mm x ELCO Evaluation
Double side
229mm 32486 (100 g/m2) seam
standard
paper
C5 162mm x GOESSLER Double side Recommende
229mm 10355 (100 g/m2) seam d paper
12.5 Machine data

Power source Inch: 5 VDC, 24 VDC, 208 VAC to 240 VAC (supplied from the main body)
Metric: 5 VDC, 24 VDC, 220 VAC to 240 VAC (supplied from the main body)
Dimensions 200 (W) × 690 (D) × 235 (H) mm
Weight 16.3 kg (Fusing unit: 16 kg, Paper feed assist parts: 0.3 kg)
C-19


Note
C-20
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 13. RU-516
13. RU-516
13.1 Type
Type Relay conveyance unit with charge control function
13.2 Functions
Functions In order to prevent the sticking together of output papers, the RU-516 neutralizes the paper that is output
from the main body.
13.3 Type of paper

13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2S
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Custom size paper (Maximum 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm, Minimum 100 mm x 139.7 mm *1, Minimum 100
mm x 148 mm *2
Tab paper (A4, 8 1/2 x 11)
Banner: When you use MK-740, you can use banner function. (Same as the main body specification)*2
Type of paper Same as the main body.
Paper weight 55 g/m2 to 350 g/m2 *1
62 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 *2
*1 C1100, C1085
*2 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060
13.4 Machine data

Power source DC24V (supplied from RU-511)*1
DC24V (supplied from RU-509 or FS-531/612) *2
Maximum power consumption 12W or less
Dimensions 40 (W) x 712.8 (D)*3 x 1,022 (H) mm
Weight 10.0 kg (including all enclosed parts)
*1: C1100, C1085
*2: C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060
*3: When you connect the machine to C1100 or C1085, the connector cover on the rear side is not included.


Note
C-21
14. RU-517
14.1 Type
Type Relay conveyance unit with charge control function
14.2 Functions
Functions In order to prevent the sticking together of output papers, the RU-516 neutralizes the paper that is output
from the main body.
14.3 Type of paper

13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2S
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Custom size paper (Maximum 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm, Minimum 100 mm x 148 mm
Tab paper (A4, 8 1/2 x 11)
Banner: When you use MK-740, you can use banner function. (Same as the main body specification)*2
14.4 Machine data

Power source DC24V (supplied from Main body)


Note
C-22
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 15. MK-740
15. MK-740
15.1 Type
Type Banner tray unit
15.2 Functions
Functions To feed banner paper, extend the paper feed tray and the output tray.
15.3 Type of paper

Paper size Custom size paper (Maximum 330.2 mm x 1,200 mm, Minimum 100 mm x 148 mm)
Type of paper Plain, Fine, Color, Coated
15.4 Machine data

Dimensions Paper feed tray When the tray is stored in: 432 (W) x 368 (D) x 200 (H) mm
side When the tray is extended: 583 (W) x 368 (D) x 309 (H) mm
Output tray side When the tray is stored in: 528 (W) x 346 (D) x 28.5 (H) mm
When the tray is extended: 1054 (W) x 346 (D) x 28.5 (H) mm
Weight Paper feed tray Approximately 0.9 kg
side
Output tray side Approximately 1.8 kg


Note
C-23
16. RU-509
16.1 Type
Type Relay conveyance device with the paper cooling and the de-curler function
16.2 Functions
De-curler conveyance mode Reduces paper curl and conveys at an accelerating rate with the post treatment linear velocity.
In the straight conveyance mode Feed without the de-curl process and conveys at an accelerating rate with the post treatment linear
velocity.
Humidifier conveyance mode Executes humidification of HM-102 (option) and conveys at an accelerating rate with the post treatment
linear velocity.
Output paper density adjustment Measures the color density of the density patch that is printed on the paper and feeds back to the image
mode *1 stabilization control of the main body.
*1 C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060 only
16.3 Type of paper

Paper size SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4*1, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, ISOB5S*1, A5, A5S*1, B6S*1,
ISOB6S*1, A6S*1
13 x 19*1, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 *1, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2S
8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Wide paper*2 (A3W, B4W, A4W, A4SW, B5W, B5SW, A5W, 12 x 18W, 11 x 17W, 81/2 x 11W, 81/2 x
11SW, 51/2 x 81/2W, Maximum 324mm x 463mm)
Tab paper*3 (A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2)
Custom size paper Minimum 100mm x 148mm, Maximum 330mm x 487mm *1
Minimum 100mm x 148mm, Maximum 330mm x 463mm *2
Paper weight 64 g/m2 to 300 g/m2*1, 40 g/m2 to 350 g/m2*2
Allowed curl 60mm or less
*1 C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060 only.
*2 1250/1250P/1052 only.
*3 For C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060, A4, 81/2 x 11 only.
16.4 Machine data

Power source 100 VAC (Japan), 120 VAC (North America), 220 VAC to 240 VAC (Europe), 5 VDC (supplied from the
main body)
Maximum power consumption 700 W (including HM-102)
Dimensions 410 (W) x 735 (D) x 1,020 (H) mm


Note
C-24
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 17. HM-102
17. HM-102
17.1 Type
Type Paper humidifier kit
17.2 Function
Functions Humidifies the both sides of the paper, and then adjusts curling.
Tank capacity 20L (equivalent to approximately 100,000 copies)
17.3 Type of paper

Paper size SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4*1, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, ISOB5S*1, A5, A5S*1, B6S*1,
ISOB6S*1, A6S*1
13 x 19*1, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2*2, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2S
8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Custom paper (Maximum 330 x 487mm, Minimum 100 x 148mm)
Paper weight 64g/m2 to 300g/m2 *1*4, 50g/m2 to 350g/m2*2*4
*1 C7000, C7000P, C70hc, C6000, C1070, C1070P, C71hc, and C1060 only
*2 1250, 1250P, and 1052 only
*3 C7000, C7000P, C70hc, C6000: A4, 81/2 x 11 only
*4 For Humidifier ON mode, Envelope or Coated, Color, PrePrinted, Blank Insert Sheet, Embossed, and Embossed2 with the weight under 135
g/m2 or less cannot be used.
17.4 Machine data

Power source 24 VDC, 5 VDC (supplied from RU-509)
Dimensions Humidifier section: 194 (W) x 492 (D) x 83 (H) mm
Water feed tank section: 339 (W) x 646 (D) x 246 (H) mm


Note
C-25
18. RU-510
18.1 Type
Type Paper conveyance unit with paper overlap and reverse functions
18.2 Functions
Double sheets reverse exit Reverses 2 sheets of paper exited from the main body, PI-PFU or GP-501 and conveys to the finishing
conveyance mode *1 unit.
Single sheet reverse exit Reverses a single sheet of paper exited from the main body, PI-PFU or GP-501 and conveys to the
conveyance mode finishing unit.
Straight conveyance mode Conveys papers exited from the main body, PI-PFU or GP-501 to finishing unit without any process.
*1 1250/1250P only
18.3 Type of paper

Paper size SRA3, A3, JISB4*4, ISOB4*5, SRA4*1, SRA4S, A4, A4S, JISB5*4, ISOB5*5, JISB5S*4, ISOB5S*1*5, A5,
A5S*1, A6S*1
13 x 19*1, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 *1, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2S
8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 8 x 13
8K*6, 16K*6, 16KS*6
11SW, 51/2 x 81/2W, Maximum 331mm x 488mm*7)
Custom size paper Minimum 100mm x 148mm, Maximum 330mm x 463mm
*1
Minimum 95mm x 133mm*8, Maximum 331mm x 488mm
*2*7
Paper type Plain, Fine, Coated, Tab Paper, OHP Film, Label Paper, PrePrinted, Blank Insert, Embossed2, Book/
News, Embossed, Envelope: same as the main body.
Paper weight 62 g/m2 to 300 g/m2*1, 40 g/m2 to 350 g/m2*2
2 pages reverse exit conveyance mode *2 40g/ m2 to 216g/ m2
*1 C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060 only.
*2 1250/1250P/1052 only.
*3 For C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060, A4, 81/2 x 11 only.
*4 Default for North America
*5 Default for Europe
*6 For China, Taiwan only
*7 For 1250/1250P/1052: 324mm x 463mm (When using PF-703, LU-410: 324mm x 483mm)
*8 For 1250/1250P/1052: 182mm x 139mm (When using PF-703: 95mm x 133mm. When using PF-706: 95mm x 139mm)
18.4 Machine data

Power source 24/5V DC (supplied from the previous device)
Maximum power consumption 79VA or less
Weight Approx. 35 kg


Note
C-26
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 19. FS-531
19. FS-531
19.1 Type
Type Staple device
19.2 Function
(1) Functions
Sort, group mode Exited into the main tray with no processing made.
Offset sort, offset group mode Executes shifting operation for each copy and exits to the main tray
Sub tray mode Exits paper to the sub tray without any process.
Staple mode Exits to the main tray after being flat-stapled
(2) Staple
Maximum flat stapling sheets 64g/m2 to 80g/m2: 50 sheets (Plain, Fine, Color), 40 sheets (Coated)
81g/m2 to 105g/m2: 40 sheets (Plain), 30 sheets (Fine, Color), 25 sheets (Coated)
106g/m2 to 135g/m2: 30 sheets (Plain, Fine), 25 sheets (Color), 20 sheets (Coated)
136g/m2 to 209g/m2: 20 sheets (Plain, Fine), 15 sheets (Color)
Within the range of the number, up to 200g/m2: 2 sheets can be inserted.
Staple position Corner stapling It is parallel or diagonal
depending on paper size
2 staplings Center spreading 162 mm pitch
(3) Maximum tray capacity

Main tray Sort, group mode, offset 3000 sheets (A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, ISOB5S*1, 9 × 11, 8 1/2 × 11, 8 1/2 × 11S,
(Paper weight 80g/m2) sort, offset group mode
16K, 16KS)
1500 sheets (SRA3 *1, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4 *1, SRA4S, 12×18, 11×17, 8 1/2×14,
8 1/2×13, 8 1/4×13, 8 1/8×13 1/4, 8×13, 8K)
500 sheets (A5, A5S *1, B6S *1, ISOB6S *1, 5 1/2×8 1/2 S *1)
Tab paper *2 (A4, 8 1/2 x 11)
Custom paper (Maximum 314 x 458 mm, Minimum *3 182 x 148 mm)
Staple mode 1000 sheets
Staple sheet Length in the sub scan Other than left
direction: 150 mm to 417 mm
2 to 9 100 sets 50 sets
Sub tray 100 sheets (SRA3, A3, B4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, ISOB5S, A5, A5S, B6S, ISOB6S, A6S,
(Paper weight 80g/m2) 13 × 19, 12 × 18, 11 × 17, 81/2 × 14, 9 × 11, 81/2 × 11, 81/2 × 11S, 51/2 × 8 1/2S, 81/2 × 13, 81/4 × 13, 81/8 ×
131/4, 8 × 13, 8K, 16K, 16KS)
Tab paper *2 (A4, 81/2 x 11)
Custom paper (Maximum 330.2 mm × 487.7 mm, minimum 100 mm × 148 mm)
*1 Sort, group mode only
*2 Operation of the paper exit with the tab area at the trail edge side is not warranty.
*3 128 mm × 148 mm for sort, group mode
19.3 Type of paper

(1) Staple mode
Paper size A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, A5
12×18, 11×17, 9×11, 81/2×14, 81/2×11, 81/2×11S
81/2×13, 81/4×13, 81/8×131/4, 8×13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Tab paper *1 (A4, 81/2 x 11)
Custom paper (Maximum 314 x 458 mm, Minimum 182 x 148 mm)
Applicable paper Plain, Fine, Color, Coated
C-27
Paper curl amount

a [1]
15kjt1c001na
a Curing: 10 mm or less (However, the paper reverse placement and the curl adjustment is possibly
applied for the paper with 5mm or more curl. )
[1] 5 sheets
19.4 Machine data

Dimensions When the main tray is pulled out:
790.5 (W) x 656 (D) x 990 (H) mm
When the main tray is stored in:
674.5 (W) x 656 (D) x 990 (H) mm


Note
C-28
20. FS-612
20.1 Type
Type Multi folding and multi stapling device
20.2 Functions
(1) Function
Non-sort mode Exited into the main tray with no processing made.
Sort/group mode Executes shifting operation for each copy and exits to the main tray
Staple mode Exits to the main tray after being flat-stapled
Saddle stitching mode After the stapling on the center of the paper finishes, folds the paper in the middle and exits to the
booklet tray
Half-Fold mode Folds the paper in the middle and exits to the booklet tray
Tri-folding mode Folds the paper twice and exits to the booklet tray
Punch mode *1 Executes punching operation and exits paper to the main tray or the sub tray
PI mode *2 Feeds the sheet
*1 When PK (option) is mounted. The combination with the non-sort mode, sort/group mode, and staple mode is available.
*2 When PI (option) is mounted. Manual stapling and manual punching are available.
(2) Staple
Maximum flat stapling sheets Plain Fine Color Coat
64g/m2 to 80g/m2 50 sheets 50 sheets 30 sheets 30 sheets
Within the range of the number on this chart, up to 200g/m2: 2 sheets can be inserted.
Staple position Parallel in front/45 degrees in back Slant:1 point Center:2 points
Maximum saddle stitching sheets Plain Fine Color Coat
Within the range of the number on this chart, up to 200g/m2: 1 sheet can be inserted.
Staple position Changeable (128mm to 160mm)
(3) Folding
Maximum center fold 64g/m2 to 105g/m2: 3 sheets
Maximum tri-folding 64g/m2 to 105g/m2: 1 sheet
(4) Maximum tray capacity*1

Main tray Non-sort mode, • 2,500 sheets
(Paper weight 64g/m2 to 300g/ Sort/group mode A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, ISOB5S, 9 x 11, 81/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S,
m2) 16K, 16KS
• 1500 sheets
SRA3 *2, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4S, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2
x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13, 8K
• 500 sheets
A5, A5S *2, B6S *2, ISOB6S *2, 51/2 x 81/2 *2*5, 51/2 x 81/2 S *2
• Tab paper *3 (A4, 81/ x 11)
2
• Custom paper*4 • C8000
Minimum 182 (128) mm x 148 (140) mm,
Maximum 314 mm x 458 mm
• C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/C6000L/
C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/C1060L
Minimum 182 (128) mm x 148 mm,
Maximum 314 mm x 458 mm
Staple Staple sheet Length in the sub Length in the sub
Mode scan direction: scan direction:
418mm or more 417mm or less
C-29
Booklet tray Saddle stitching mode Length in the sub scan direction: 299 mm or less: 15 sets with 5
(Paper weight 64g/m2 to 105g/ sheets
Other than this condition: 20 sets with 5 sheets
m2)
Folding mode Length in the sub scan direction: 299 mm or less: 25 sets with 3
sheets fold
Other than this condition: 33 sets with 3 sheets fold
Tri-folding mode 50 sets with 1 sheet fold
Sub tray • 100 sheets
(Paper weight 64g/m2 to 300g/ SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, ISOB5S, A5, A5S, B6S, ISOB6S,
A6S
m2)
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 8 1/2*5,
51/2 x 8 1/2S, 81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Tab paper *3 (A4, 81/2 x 11)
Custom paper (Maximum 330 x 487 mm, Minimum 100 x 140 mm*5, 100 x 148 mm*6)
*1 The capacity is counted with 80g/m2 paper.

*2 Non-sort mode only
*3 Operation of paper exit with tab area at the trail edge side is not warranty.
*4 ( ) When in non-sort mode
*5 C8000 only
*6 *3 C7000, C7000P, C70hc, C6000, 6000L, C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, and C1060L only
20.3 Type of paper

(1) Staple mode
Paper size A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, A5
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2*2
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Tab paper *1 (A4, 81/2 x 11)
Custom paper (Maximum 314 x 458 mm, Minimum 182 x 140 mm*2, Minimum 182 x 148 mm*3)
Paper curl amount
a [1]
15kjt1c001na
a Curing: 10 mm or less
[1] 5 sheets
*2 C8000 only
*3 C7000, C7000P, C70hc, C6000, 6000L, C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, C1060Lonly
(2) Saddle stitching mode

Paper size A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4S, A4S
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S
8K
(3) Half-Fold mode

Paper size A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4S, A4S
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S
8K
C-30
(4) Tri-folding mode

Paper size A4S
81/2 x 11S
16KS
20.4 Machine data

Dimensions When the main tray is pulled out:
790.5 (W) x 656 (D) x 990 (H) mm
When the main tray is stored in:
674.5 (W) x 656 (D) x 990 (H) mm
Weight 65kg


Note
C-31
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 21. PI-502
21. PI-502
21.1 Type
Type Torque limiter separation type sheet feeding device
21.2 Functions
Automatic sheet feeding Feeds the sheet to FS automatically under the instruction from the main body.
(Online operation)
Manual sheet feeding Feeds the sheet to FS under the instruction from the PI operation panel.
(Offline operation) The following 5 types can be selected for the post processing mode.
1 staple/back mode
2 staples (flat-stapling) mode
Punch Mode (when PK is installed on FS)
Saddle stitching mode
Tri-Fold mode
Note
The tray/Lw only supports the manual sheet feeding.
21.3 Type of paper

Paper size Tray /Up A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, A5
9 × 11, 81/2 × 11, 81/2 × 11S, 51/2 × 81/2*1*2 *5
16K, 16KS
Custom size paper
Maximum 324 mm x 297 mm, minimum 182 mm x 139 mm*1
Maximum 330 mm x 297 mm, minimum 182 mm x 140 mm *5
Tray /Lw SRA3*1*4*5, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, A5
13 x 19*4*5, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 81/2 x 14,
81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2*1*2*5
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Custom size paper*6
Maximum 330 mm x 482 mm, minimum 182 mm x 140 mm *5
Type of paper Plain, Recycle, Color, Special, Coated, Fine
Paper weight 50g/m2 to 300g/m2
Capacity Tray /Up, /Lw 200 sheets (80 g/m2) or 30 mm or less in height
Paper curl amount
[1]
a
15jft1c001na
[1] 5 sheets
*1 1250, 1250P, 1052, and 951 only
*2 C8000 only
*3 C7000, C7000P, C70hc, C6000, C6000L, and C1060L only
*4 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060 + FS-532 only
*5 C1100, C1085 only
*6 The custom size paper is not available for the manual sheet feed.
21.4 Machine data

Weight Approximately 10.5kg
C-32
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 21. PI-502


Note
C-33
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 22. PK-512/513
22. PK-512/513
22.1 Type
Type FS built-in type punching operation device
22.2 Functions
Punching method Stops and punches every paper
Number of holes PK-512: 2 holes/3 holes (inch) or 2 holes/4 holes (metric)
PK-513: 4 holes
Hole diameter
6.5 mm (2 holes/4 holes), 8.0 mm (3 holes)
Hole pitch PK-512: 80 mm (2 holes/4 holes), 108 mm (3 holes)

PK-513: 21, 70, 21 mm
Supported mode Punch mode, straight mode
Applicable post processing mode Sort, group, staple
22.3 Type of paper

Type of paper PK-512 (2 holes) (A3, B4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, A5, A5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S,
51/2 x 81/2S, 81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13, 8K, 16K, 16KS)
PK-512 (3 holes/4 holes) (A3, B4, A4, B5, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 8K, 16K)
PK-513 (A3, B4, A4, B5)
Applicable paper Plain paper, high quality paper, color paper, coated paper (same as the main body)
Punch prohibited paper Label paper, tab paper, transparency film, 2nd base paper, holed paper, and the other paper that may
interfere with the operation of the punch unit or the punch blade.
Paper curling
a [1]
15kjt1c001na
a Curling (10 mm or less)

[1] 5 sheets
22.4 Machine data



Note
C-34
23. FS-532
23.1 Type
Type Staple-cut type multi staple device
23.2 Functions
(1) Functions
Sort, group mode
Offset Sort, offset group mode
OffsetStapleMode
Staple mode
(2) Staple sheet

• Combination condition of the paper type, the paper width (in the sub scan direction), the number of sheets for every range of paper weight
Number of staple sheets
Plain Fine Plain paper and the paper that
is not Fine
Less than 400 400 mm or 320 mm or less 321 mm to 400 mm or Less than 400 400 mm or
Paper weight (g/m2) mm more 399 mm more mm more
49 to 49 - - - - - - -
50 to 61 100 50 50 20 - 35 35
62 to 74 100 50 50 20 - 35 35
75 to 80 100 50 30 30 30 35 35
81 to 91 60 50 30 30 30 35 35
92 to 135 50 50 30 30 30 30 30
136 to 162 40 40 30 30 30 25 25
163 to 216 25 25 25 25 25 20 20
217 to 244 25 25 25 25 25 15 15
245 to 300 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
301 to 350 - - - - - - -
(3) Staple position

Staple position 1 in the back (parallel/45 degrees), 1 in the front (parallel), 2 in the center (pitch: 120 mm,
140 mm and 165 mm)

(a) Sort/group mode
Main tray The main tray quarter position sensor (PS17), the main tray middle position sensor (PS18), the 4000 sheets
sensor (PS19) and the 3000 sheets sensor (PS16) detect the stacked height.
Measure of paper full When SD-510 is not Paper area Sheet
detection (Excluding Z- installed 0.06238 m2 or more 2000 sheets
folding and center folding) (Plain paper 72 g/m2
0.03109 m2 to 0.06237 4200 sheets
to 81 g/m2)
m2
0.03108 m2 or less 750 sheets
When SD-510 is Paper area Sheet
installed 0.06238 m2 or more 2000 sheets
(Plain paper 72 g/m2
0.03109 m2 to 0.06237 3000 sheets
to 81 g/m2)
m2
Measure of paper full Z-folding (Paper weight 20 sheets
detection (Z-Fold, Half- 130g/m2 or less)
Fold)
Center folding (Weight: 20 sheets
130 g/m2 or lower)
Sub tray The sub tray paper full sensor (PS9) detects the stacked height.
Measure of paper full Excluding Z-folding, center 300 sheets
detection folding (Plain paper 80g/
m2)
Z-Folding 20 sheets
C-35
Center folding 40 sheets
(b) Offset Sort, offset group mode

Measure of paper full When SD-510 is Paper area Sheet
detection (Excluding Z- installed and not 0.06238 m2 or more 1500 sheets
folding and center folding) installed
(Plain paper 72 g/m2 0.03109 m2 to 0.06237 1500 sheets
to 81 g/m2) m2
Measure of paper full Z-folding (Paper weight 20 sheets
detection (Z-Fold, Half- 130g/m2 or less)
Fold)
Center folding (Weight: 20 sheets
130 g/m2 or lower)
(c) Staple mode

Measure of paper When SD-510 is 2 to 9 sheets (Paper length: 182 150 sets
full detection installed and not mm to 364 mm)
installed 2 to 9 sheets (Paper length: not 75 sets
182 mm to 364 mm)
10 to 20 sheets 50 sets
23.3 Type of paper

(1) Sort/group mode/offset Sort/offset group mode
Paper size SRA3, SRA4*6, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, A5, ISOB5S, A5S*6, ISOB6S*1*6,
B6S*1*6, A6S*1*6
13 x 19*6, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2*2
8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 8 x 13, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2S*1*6
8K, 16K, 16KS
Wide paper*2 (A3W, B4W, A4W, A4SW, B5W, B5SW, A5W, 12 x 18W, 11 x 17W, 8 1/2 x 11W, 8 1/2 x
11SW, 5 1/2×8 1/2W)
Tab paper*5*7 (A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2)
Custom size Max. 324mm x 483mm*3, Min. 95mm x 133mm*4
paper
Max. 330.2mm x 487.7mm*8, Min. 100mm x 148mm*8
Applicable paper Plain, Fine, Color, Coated, PrePrinted, Book/News, Envelope*1, Embossed, Embossed2, Tab Paper
(same as the main body)
Paper weight 50g/m2 to 350 g/m2
62g/m2 to 300 g/m2 *6
*1 Offset Sort/Offset group mode cannot be used.
*2 1250, 1250P, 1052, and 951 only
*3 For 1250, 1250P, and 1052+PF-703: 95mm x 133mm, For 951+PF-706: 95mm x 139mm (The machines except for PF-703 and PF-706
conform to each product specification)
*4 For 1250, 1250P, and 1052+PF-703, 951+LU-410 (The machines except for PF-703 and LU-410 conform to each product specification)
*6 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, and C1060 only
*7 For C1070, C1070P, C71hc, and C1060: A4 and 81/2 only
*8 For C1070, C1070P, C71hc, and C1060 + PF-707 (The machines except for PF-707 conform to each product specification)
(2) Staple mode

Paper size*1 SRA3, SRA4*7, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, A5,
13 x 19*7, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2*2
8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K
C-36
Wide paper*2 (A3W, B4W, A4W, A4SW, B5W, A5W, 12 x 18W, 11 x 17W, 8 1/2 x 11W, 8 1/2 x 11SW,
5 1/2 x 8 1/2W)
Tab paper*6*8 (A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, 11 x 17, 8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2)
Custom size Maximum 324mm x 483mm*4*5, Min. 203mm x 139mm*3
paper
Maximum 330.2mm x 487.7mm*5*9, Min. 203mm x 148mm*9
Applicable paper Plain, Fine, Color, Coated, PrePrinted, Book/News, Embossed, Embossed2, Tab Paper (same as the
main body)
Paper weight 50g/m2to 300g/m2
62g/m2 to 300 g/m2 *7
*1 Z-folding staple: Maximum 305mm x 229mm, Minimum 210mm x 210mm (Folded paper size)
*2 1250, 1250P, 1052, and 951 only
*3 For 1250, 1250P, 1052, and 951+PF-706 (The machines except for PF-706 conform to each product specification)
*4 For 1250, 1250P, 1052 + PF-703, 951+LU-410 (The machines except for PF-703 and LU-410 conform to each product specification)
*5 Rear corner parallel staple: Maximum 320mm for CD direction
*7 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, and C1060 only
*8 For C1070, C1070P, C71hc, and C1060: A4 and 81/2 x 11 only
*9 For C1070, C1070P, C71hc, and C1060 + PF-707 (The machines except for PF-707 conform to each product specification)
23.3.1 Allowable amount of curling

Paper curl amount
C
The amount is measured with 5 papers overlapped after printed

a Excluding the OHP paper: Amount of curl: 15 mm or less
OHP paper: Amount of curl: 3 mm or less
23.4 Machine data

Power source 24VDC±10% (supplied from the main body)
Dimensions With the main tray: 798 (W) x 723 (D) x 1070 (H) mm
Without the main tray: 544 (W) x 723 (D) x 1070 (H) mm


Note
C-37
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 24. SD-510
24. SD-510
24.1 Type
Type Saddle stitching unit with the center folding and tri-folding
24.2 Functions
(1) Functions
Saddle stitching mode Exits paper to the output tray after being saddle stitched.
Half-Fold mode Exits paper to the output tray after being center folded on 1 or more sheets of paper.
Tri-folding mode Exits paper to the output tray after being tri-folded on 1 or more sheets of paper.
Paper exit Paper conveyance by the belt conveyor

Folding exit tray Large-size paper (sub- Half-fold 1 to 5 sheets 35 copies *1
scanning direction length: Folding & Stapling 2 to 5 sheets 35 copies *1
330 mm or longer)
6 to 10 sheets 23 sheets*2
11 to 20 sheets 15 copies *3
Small-size paper: (sub- Half-fold 1 to 5 sheets 35 copies *1
scanning direction length: Folding & Stapling 2 to 5 sheets 35 copies *1
shorter than 330 mm)
Tri-Fold 1 sheet 50 copies
2 sheets 40 copies
3 sheets 30 copies
*1 20 sheets when 92 g/m2 or heavier paper is used for inside paper or cover, or the paper is fed from PI-502
*2 15 sheets when 92 g/m2 or heavier paper is used for cover, or the paper is fed from PI-502
*3 10 sheets when 92 g/m2 or heavier paper is used for cover, or the paper is fed from PI-502
(3) Performance
Folding and stitching position
performance
Gap in the CD direction a: 1.0 mm or less
24.3 Type of paper

Paper size SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4S, A4S, B5S, ISOB5S
13 x 19*4, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S
8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 8 x 13
8K , 16KS
Wide paper *1 (A3W, A4SW, B4W, B5SW, 12 x 18W, 11 x 17W, 81/2 x 11SW)
Custom size Minimum 120 mm x 240 mm*2, maximum 324 mm x 483 mm*3
Minimum 120 mm x 240 mm*5, maximum 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm*5
Applicable paper Plain, Fine, Color, Coated, PrePrinted, Book/News, Embossed, Embossed2 (same as the main body)
Paper weight Inside paper: 50g/m2 to 216g/m2
Cover: 50g/m2 to 300g/m2
Inside paper: 62g/m2 to 216g/m2*4
Cover: 62 g/m2 to 300 g/m2*5
Maximum saddle stitching sheets Paper weight Sheet
The paper width is 279.4 mm or The paper width is shorter than
longer in the sub scan direction. 279.4 mm in the sub scan
direction.
C-38
40g/m2 to 49g/m2 - -
50g/m2 to 61g/m2 25 sheets -
62 g/m2 to 74 g/m2 20 sheets -
75 g/m2 to 80 g/m2 20 sheets 10 sheets
136g/m2 to 162g/m2 5 sheets 5 sheets
217g/m2 to 244g/m2 Cover only -
245g/m2 to 300g/m2 Cover only -
301g/m2 to 350 g/m2 - -
For the paper that is more than 217g/m2, only the cover is adjustable and 1 sheets is counted as a set of
5 sheets.
Staple position Automatically adjusted according to the paper size (60 mm to 148.5 mm)
*1 Only 1250, 1250P, 1052, 951
*2 1250, 1250P, 1052, and 951+PF-706 (The machines except for PF-706 conform to each product specification)
*3 1250, 1250P, 1052+PF-703, 951+LU-410 (The machines except for PF-703 and LU-410 conform to each product specification)
*4 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060 only
*5 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060 +PF-707 (The machines except for PF-707 conform to each product specification)
(2) Half-Fold mode

Paper size SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4S, A4S, B5S, ISOB5S
13 x 19*4, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S
8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 8 x 13
8K , 16KS
Wide paper *1 (A3W, A4SW, B4W, 12 x 18W, 11 x 17W, 81/2 x 11SW)
Custom size Minimum 120 mm x 240 mm*2, maximum 324 mm x 483 mm*3
Minimum 120 mm x 240 mm*5, maximum 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm*5
Paper weight Inside paper: 50g/m2 to 216g/m2
Cover: 50g/m2 to 300g/m2
Inside paper: 62 g/m2 to 216 g/m2*4
Cover: 62 g/m2 to 300 g/m2*5
Maximum center folding sheets Paper weight Sheet
The paper width is 279.4 mm or The paper width is shorter than
longer in the sub scan direction. 279.4 mm in the sub scan
direction.
40g/m2 to 49g/m2 - -
50g/m2 to 61g/m2 5 sheets -
62 g/m2 to 74 g/m2 5 sheets -
217g/m2 to 244g/m2 1 sheet 1 sheet
245g/m2 to 300g/m2 1 sheet 1 sheet
301g/m2 to 350 g/m2 - -
*1 Only 1250, 1250P, 1052, 951

*2 1250, 1250P, 1052, 951+PF-706 (The machines except for PF-706 conform to each product specification)
*3 1250, 1250P, 1052+PF-703, 951+LU-410 (The machines except PF-703 and LU-410 conform to each product specification)
*4 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060 only
*5 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060 +PF-707 (The machines except for PF-707 conform to each product specification)
C-39
(3) Tri-folding mode

Paper size A4S
81/2 x 11S
16KS
Applicable paper Plain, Fine, Color, Coated*1, PrePrinted, Book/News, Embossed, Embossed2 (same as the main body)
Paper weight Inside papers: 50g/m2 to 105g/m2
Inside paper: 62g/m2 to 216g/m2*2
Maximum tri-folding sheets Paper weight Sheet
40g/m2 to 49 g/m2 -
50g/m2 to 61g/m2 3 sheets
62 g/m2 to 74 g/m2 3 sheets
92 g/m2 to 105 g/m2 1 sheet
106 g/m2 to 135 g/m2 -
136g/m2 to 162g/m2 -
163g/m2 to 216g/m2 -
217g/m2 to 244g/m2 -
245g/m2 to 300g/m2 -
301g/m2 to 350 g/m2 -
*1 Maximum tri-folding sheets: 1 sheet

*2 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060 only
(4) Allowable amount of curling

Paper curl amount
C
The amount is measured with 5 sheets are overlapped after printed

a Excluding the OHP paper: Amount of curl: 15 mm or less
24.4 Machine data

Dimensions 281.3 mm (W) x 596.4 mm (D) x 529.8 mm (H)
Weight SD-510 itself: Approximately 22.6kg
Output tray: Approximately 3.8kg


Note
C-40
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 25. PK-522
25. PK-522
25.1 Type
Type FS built-in type punching operation device
25.2 Functions
Punching method Stops and punches every paper
Number of holes Inch area: 2-Holes/3-Holes
Metric area: 2-Holes/4-Holes
Sweden: 4-Holes
Hole diameter Inch area: φ8.0mm
Metric area: φ6.5mm
Sweden: φ6.5mm
Punch hole accuracy The accuracy is measured with 10 punched papers being overlapped.
a
Inch area: a (a diameter of an inscribed circle of a punched hole): 5.5mm or more
Metric area: a (a diameter of an inscribed circle of a punched hole): 4.0mm or more
Sweden: a (a diameter of an inscribed circle of a punched hole): 4.0mm or more
Hole pitch Inch area: 70 mm (2 holes), 108 mm (3 holes)
Metric area: 80 mm (2 holes/4 holes)
Sweden: 21, 70, 21mm (4 holes)
Supported mode Punch mode, straight mode
Applicable post processing mode Sort, group, staple
25.3 Type of paper

Paper size 2 holes A3, B4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, A5, A5S*2, ISOB4, ISOB5, ISOB5S,
11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2S*2, 51/2 x 81/2*1, 9 x 11,
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13,
8K, 16K, 16KS
3/4 holes A3, B4, A4, B5, ISOB4*3, ISOB5*3,
11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 9 x 11,
8K, 16K
Punching prohibited paper Label, tab, OHP, second original, punched paper, Envelope, and others which cause troubles on the
operation of the punch unit and the punch blade
Paper curl amount
a [1]
15kjt1c001na
[1] 5 sheets
*1 1250, 1250P, 1052, and 951 only
*2 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, and C1060 only
*3 4 holes for Sweden and 3 holes only
25.4 Machine data

Dimensions 156 mm (W) x 592 mm (D) x 180 mm (H)
Weight Approximately 4.5kg

C-41
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 25. PK-522

Note
C-42
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 26. MK-732
26. MK-732
26.1 Type
Type PI paper conveyance unit
26.2 Type of paper

Paper size Maximum 331 mm×488 mm, minimum 182 mm × 139mm
Applicable paper Plain, Fine, Coated, Recycled paper
26.3 Machine data

Weight 3 kg


Note
C-43
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 27. LS-505
27. LS-505
27.1 Type
Type Grip conveyance type horizontal stacker
Conveyance method Entrance conveyance Roller conveyance method
Stacker tray conveyance Grip conveyance method
Sub tray conveyance Roller conveyance method
Coupling conveyance Roller conveyance
Alignment method Movable alignment lever (stacker tray only)
Method of stacking Horizontal stacking Mixed stacking is unavailable (stacker tray only)
Shifting method Conveyance direction shift Shift amount: 20 mm (stacker tray only) *1
*1 The use of the shift is unavailable with the tab paper.
27.2 Functions
(1) Function
Stacker tray non-sort mode Exited into the stacker tray with no processing made.
Stacker tray sort mode Executes shifting operation (20mm) and exits paper to the stacker tray *1
Coupling mode Conveys paper to the succeeding device without any process.

Maximum tray capacity Stacker tray • 5,000 sheets
(Paper weight 80g/m2) SRA3, A3, JISB4 *1, ISOB4 *2 *3 *4 *6 *7, SRA4 *4 *5 *6 *7,
SRA4S, A4, A4S
13 x 19*3 *4 *5 *7, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11 *3 *4 *6 *7, 81/2 x 14,
81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K *4 *5 *6 *7 *8, 16K *4 *5 *6 *7 *8
• 3,000 sheets
Coated paper (Sub-scan direction is 380mm or longer)
• 2,000 sheets
JISB5 *1, ISOB5 *2 *3 *4 *6 *7, A5
Sub tray Straight paper exit: 200 sheets
Z-Folding paper: 20 sheets
Half-folding paper: 40 sheets
*1 Default for North America (C8000/1200/1200P/1051/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 only)
*3 1200/1200P/1051/1250/1250P/1052 only
*4 C8000 only
*5 C6501/C6501P/C65hc only
*6 C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 only
*7 C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060 only
*8 For China, Taiwan only (C6501/C6501P/C65hc/1200/1200P/1051/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 only)
27.3 Type of paper

Paper size Stacker tray SRA3, A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2 *3 *5 *11 *12, SRA4 *4 *5 *11 *12,
SRA4S, A4, A4S, JISB5*1, ISOB5*2 *3 *5 *11 *12, A5
13 x 19*4 *5 *11 *12, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11*3 *5 *11, 81/2 x 14,
81/2 x 11, 81/2x 11S, 81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13, 8K*4
*5 *11 *12, 16K*4 *5 *11 *12
Wide paper *3(A3W, B4W, A4W, A4SW, B5W, A5W, 12 x 18W, 11 x
17W, 81/2 x 11W, 81/2 x 11SW, Max. 324mm x 463mm)
Tab paper *7*8 (A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S,
Max. 324mm x 463mm)
Custom size paper
Max. 324mm x 463mm, Min. 210mm x 148mm *3
Max. 330mm x 483mm, Min. 210mm x 148mm *4 *5 *11 *12
C-44
Sub tray SRA3, A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2 *3 *5 *11 *12, SRA4 *4 *5 *11 *12,
SRA4S, A4, A4S, JISB5*1, JISB5S*1, ISOB5*2 *3 *5 *11 *12,
ISOB5S*2 *3 *5 *11 *12, A5, A5S*4 *5 *11 *12, JISB6S*1*4 *5 *11
*12, A6S*4 *5 *11 *12
13 x 19*4 *5 *11 *12, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11*3 *5 *11 *12, 81/2 x 14,
81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2*3 *5, 51/2 x 81/2S*4 *5 *11 *12,
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13, 8K*4 *5 *6 *11 *12, 16K*4
*5 *6 *11 *12, 16KS*4 *5 *6 *11 *12
Wide paper *3(A3W, B4W, A4W, A4SW, B5W, B5SW, A5W, 12 x
18W, 11 x 17W, 81/2 x 11W, 81/2 x 11SW, 51/2 x 81/2W, Max.
324mm x 463mm)
Tab paper *8 *9 (A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x
11S, 51/2 x 81/2, Max. 324mm x 463mm)
Custom size paper
Max. 330mm x 487mm, Min. 100mm x 148mm *4 *11 *12
Paper weight Stacker tray 50g/m2 to 244g/m2 *3
64g/m2 to 256g/m2 *4 *5 *11 *12
62g/m2 to 256g/m2 *12
Sub tray 40g/m2 to 350g/m2 *3*10
64g/m2 to 300g/m2 *4 *11 *12
64g/m2 to 350g/m2 *5
62g/m2 to 256g/m2 *12
*3 1200/1200P/1051/1250/1250P/1052 only
*4 C6501/C6501P/C65hc only
*5 C8000 only
*7 1 to 15 tab (4 tab and 10 tab are unavailable.) The use of the shift is unavailable with the tab paper.
*8 C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060 is A4 and 81/2 x 11 only
*10 Loading paper weight 49g/m2 or less is not warranty
*11 C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 only
*12 C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060 only
27.4 Machine data

Power source 100VAC to 240VAC, 5VDC (supplied from the main body) *1
Dimensions 785 (W) x 723 (D) x 1,020 (H) mm
*1 C8000/C6501/C6501P/C65hc/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060: Only 5VDC is supplied from the main body


Note
C-45
28. LS-506
28.1 Type
Type Grip conveyance type horizontal stacker
Conveyance method Entrance conveyance Roller conveyance method
Stacker tray conveyance Grip conveyance method
Sub tray conveyance Roller conveyance method
Coupling conveyance Roller conveyance
Alignment method Movable alignment lever (stacker tray only)
Method of stacking Horizontal stacking Mixed stacking is unavailable (stacker tray only)
Shifting method Conveyance direction shift Shift amount: 20 mm (stacker tray only) *1
28.2 Functions
(1) Function
Stacker tray non-sort mode Exits paper to the stacker tray without any process.
Stacker tray sort mode Executes shifting operation (20 mm) and exits to the stacker tray*1
Coupling mode Conveys to the finishing option without any process

Maximum tray capacity Stacker tray • The activation of 5,000 sheets stacked sensor (PS14) or 5,000
(Paper weight 80g/m2) sheets
Paper which the length in the sub scan direction is 195 mm to 488
mm
SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S
8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K
2,000 sheets
Paper which the length in the sub scan direction is 148 mm to
194 mm
B5, ISOB5, A5
Sub tray Straight paper exit: 200 sheets
Z-Fold paper: 20 sheets
Half-fold paper: 40 sheets
28.3 Type of paper

Paper size Stacker tray SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4*3*4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, A5
13 x 19*3*4, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x
11S, 81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K
Tab paper*1 (A4, 81/2 x 11)
Custom size paper
Maximum 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm, minimum 210 mm x 148 mm*7*3
Sub tray SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4*3*4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, ISOB5,
ISOB5S*3*4, A5, A5S*3*4, B6S*3*4, A6S*3*4
13 x 19*3*4, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x
11S, 51/2 x 81/2
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13, 8K, 16K, 16KS
Tab paper*2 (A4, 81/2 x 11)
Custom size paper
Maximum 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm, minimum 100 mm x 148 mm*7
Maximum 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm, minimum 100 mm x 139.7 mm*3
Paper weight Stacker tray 55 g/m2 to 350 g/m2 *3
62 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 *4
40 g/m2 to 350 g/m2 *5
C-46
Sub tray 55 g/m2 to 350 g/m2 *3

62 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 *4
40 g/m2 to 350 g/m2 *5
Paper curl amount
C
The amount is measured with 5 papers that are overlapped after printed
a Other than the OHP paper, the amount of curl is 15 mm or less.
*1 1 to 15 tab (4 tab and 10 tab are unavailable.) The use of the shift is unavailable with tab paper.
*3 C1100, C1085
*4 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060
*5 1250, 1250P, 1052
*6 1250, 1250P, 1052 + PF-703 (The machines except for PF-703 conform to each product specification.)
*7 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060 + PF-707 or MB-506 (The machines except for PF-707 and MB-506 conform to each product specification.)
28.4 Machine data

Power source 100VAC to 240VAC, 5VDC (Only 5VDC is supplied from the main body)
Dimension 785 (W) x 723 (D) x 1,020 (H) mm


Note
C-47
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 29. FD-503
29. FD-503
29.1 Type
Type Multi folding device with punch and PI functions
29.2 Functions
(1) Function
Normal paper exit function Transfer paper exited from the main body is exited into the main tray or the sub tray.
Punching function Transfer paper that is exited by the main body or fed to the PI is punched for each sheet of paper and
exited into the main tray.
Punch hole accuracy The accuracy is measured with 10 punched papers being overlapped.
a
“a” (a diameter of an inscribed circle of a punched hole): 5.0mm or more (2 punched holes), 6.5mm or
more (3 punched holes)
Folding functions Transfer paper that is exited from the main body or fed to the PI is handled for folding (either one of the
following: Z-Fold, Letter fold-out, Letter fold-in, Double parallel fold, Gate fold, and folding) for each
sheet of paper, and exited into the sub tray/main tray (The Z-Fold exit to the main tray while in the FS
connection is limited only to B4, A3, 8 1/2 x 14, 11 x 17, 12 x 18 and 8K.)
PI insertion function The PI tray paper is inserted in the transfer paper exited from the main body.
Manual mode The PI tray paper is punched, folded and stapled, and then exited into the sub tray or the main tray. (The
stapling function is available only when the staple unit is connected to the downstream of the FD.)

Main tray 2500 sheets: A4, A4S, JISB5*4, ISOB5*1 *3 *5 *11 *12, JISB5S*4, ISOB5S*3 *5
(Paper weight 40g/m2 to 350g/m2 *11 *12
*1,
9 x 11*1 *3 *11 *12, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S
64g/m2 to 300g/m2 *2 *11 *12,
16K*2 *3 *6 *11 *12, 16KS*2 *3 *6 *11 *12
64g/m2 to 350g/m2 *3)
1500 sheets: SRA3, A3, JISB4*4, ISOB4*1 *3 *5 *11 *12, SRA4 *2 *3 *11 *12,
SRA4S
13 x 19*2 *3 *11 *12, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K*2*3 *6 *11 *12
500 sheets: A5, A5S*2*3 *11, JISB6S*2 *3 *4 *11 *12, ISOB6S*3 *5 *11 *12,
51/2 x 81/2*1*3, 51/2 x 81/2S*2*3 *11 *12
Others: Tab paper *7*8 (A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2
x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2, Maximum 324mm x 463mm)
Wide paper *1(A3W, B4W, A4W, A4SW, B5W, B5SW, A5W, 12 x
18W, 11 x 17W, 81/2 x 11W, 81/2 x 11SW, 51/2 x 81/2W, Maximum
324mm x 463mm)
Custom size paper Minimum 95mm x 139mm, Maximum 324mm x 463mm*1
Minimum 100mm x 148mm, Maximum 330mm x 483mm*2 *11 *12
Minimum 100mm x 140mm, Maximum 330mm x 483mm*3
Sub tray Folding type: Tri-Fold-in, Tri-Fold-out, Double parallel, Gate
(with folder tray) Paper size: A3, B4, ISOB4*1 *3 *11 *12, A4S, SRA4S,
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S, 8K*2 *3 *6 *11 *12
Custom size paper (Maximum 305mm x 458mm, Minimum 210mm x
279mm)
Paper weight: Letter fold-in, Letter fold-out
50g/m2 to 130g/m2 *1,
64g/m2 to 130g/m2 *2 *3 *11 *12
Double parallel, Gate
50g/m2 to 91g/m2 *1,
64g/m2 to 91g/m2 *2 *3 *11 *12
Tray capacity of folding paper 30 sets or more
(for all types of folding with 80g/m2 paper)*9
Sub tray Tray capacity: 200 sheets
(without folder tray)
C-48
(Paper weight 40g/m2 to 350g/m2 SRA3, A3, JISB4*4, ISOB4*1 *3 *5 *11 *12, SRA4S, A4, A4S, JISB5*4, ISOB5*1*3 *5*11 *12, JISB5S*4,
*1*10,
ISOB5S *3 *5 *11 *12, A5, A5S*2 *3 *11 *12, JISB6S*2 *3 *4 *5 *11 *12, ISOB6S *3 *11 *12, A6S*2 *3
64g/m2 to 300g/m2 *2 *11 *12, *11 *12
64g/m2 to 350g/m2 *3) 13 x 19*2 *3*11 *12, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11*1 *3 *11 *12, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x
81/2*1 *3, 51/2 x 81/2S*2 *3 *11 *12
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
Tab paper *7 *8 (A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2)
Wide paper *1(A3W, B4W, A4W, A4SW, B5W, B5SW, A5W, 12 x 18W, 11 x 17W, 81/2 x 11W, 81/2 x
Custom size paper Minimum 95mm x 139mm, Maximum 324mm x 463mm*1
Minimum 100mm x 148mm, Maximum 330mm x 483mm*2 *11 *12
Minimum 100mm x 140mm, Maximum 330mm x 487mm*3
*1 1200/1200P/1051/1250/1250P/1052 only
*2 C6501/C6501P/C65hc only
*3 C8000 only
*8 C8000/C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060 is A4, 81/2 x 11 only
*9 Paper is stacked in the exiting sequence.
*11 C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 only
*12 C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060
29.3 Type of paper

(1) Punching function
Paper size 2-hole: SRA3, A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2 *3 *4 *9 *10, SRA4S, A4, A4S,
JISB5*1, ISOB5*2 *3 *4 *9 *10, JISB5S*1, ISOB5S *2 *3 *4 *9 *10,
A5, A5S *4 *5 *9 *10
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11*3 *4 *9 *10, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S,
51/2 x 81/2*3 *4
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K*4*5 *6 *9 *10, 16K*4*5 *6 *9 *10, 16KS*4*5 *6 *9 *10
Tab paper *7(A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x
11S, 51/2 x 81/2, Maximum 324mm x 463mm)
3/4-hole: SRA3, A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2 *3 *4 *9 *10 *11, A4, JISB5*1, ISOB5*2
*3 *4 *9 *10 *11,
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11*3 *4 *9 *10, 81/2 x 11,
8K*4 *5 *6 *9 *10, 16K*4 *5 *6 *9 *10
Tab paper *7(A3, A4, B4, B5, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11S, Maximum 324mm
x 463mm)
Applicable paper Plain paper, tab paper
Paper weight 50g/m2 to 216g/m2 (2 sheets overlap mode: 50g/m2 to 91g/m2)*3,
64g/m2 to 216g/m2 *4 *5 *9 *10
(2) Folding functions

Paper size A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2 *3 *4 *9 *10, SRA4S, A4S
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S
8K*4*5 *6 *9 *10
Custom size paper (Maximum 305mm x 458mm, Minimum 210mm x 279mm)
Applicable paper Plain paper
Paper weight Half-Fold, Tri-Fold-in, Tri-Fold- 50g/m2 to 130g/m2 *3,
out, Z-Fold
64g/m2 to 130g/m2*4 *5 *9 *10
Double parallel, Gate 50g/m2 to 91g/m2 *3,
64g/m2 to 91g/m2*4 *5 *9 *10
C-49
(3) PI functions
Paper size SRA3, A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2 *3 *4, SRA4*4 5 *9 *10, SRA4S, A4, A4S, JISB5*1, ISOB5S*2 *3 *4,
JISB5S*1, A5
13 x 19*4*5 *9 *10, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11*3*4 *9 *10, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2 *3
*4,
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K*4*5 *6 *9 *10, 16K*4*5 *6 *9 *10, 16KS*4*5 *6 *9 *10
Custom size paper *8*12
• 1200/1200P/1051/1250/1250P/1052
Minimum 182mm x 139mm, Maximum 324mm x 463mm
• C6501/C6501P/C65hc/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060
• C8000
Applicable paper Plain, Recycle, Fine, Special
Maximum tray capacity 500 sheets (80g/m2) x 2 trays
*3 1200/1200P/1051/1250/1250P/1052 only
*4 C8000 only
*5 C6501/C6501P/C65hc only
*7 For C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000, A4, 81/2 x 11 only
*8 When it is used as the cover in perfect binding mode (Minimum 182mm x 279mm, Maximum 307mm x 483mm)
*9 C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 only
*10 C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060 only
*11 3 holes only
*12 The custom size is not available for the manual sheet paper feed.
29.4 Machine data

Maximum power consumption 180VA or less
Dimensions 400 (W) x 723 (D) x 1231 (H) mm (The main tray is not included in the width)
*1 C8000/C6501/C6501P/C65hc/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060: Only 5VDC is supplied from the main body.


Note
C-50
30. SD-506
30.1 Type
Type Saddle stitching unit with the fore-edge trimming and the multi-folding function
30.2 Functions
(1) Function
Sub tray paper exit mode Exit paper to the sub tray without any process.
Coupling paper exit mode Convey paper to the succeeding device without any process.
Saddle stitching mode Exit paper to the bundle exit tray after the center folding, saddle stitching operation.
Saddle stitching trimming mode Exit paper to the bundle exit tray after the center folding, saddle stitching, trimming operation.
Multi-center folding mode Exit paper to the bundle exit tray after the center folding on 1 or more sheets of paper.
Multi-center folding trimming Exit paper to the bundle exit tray after the center folding and the trimming operation on 1 or more sheets
mode of paper.
Overlap tri-folding mode Exit paper to the tri-folding tray after the letter folding operation on 1 or more sheets of paper.

Sub tray 200 sheets
(Paper weight 80g/m2) Z-Folding 20 sheets
Center folding 40 sheets
Bundle exit tray Folding & Stapling/trimming Stitching sheets Set
Mode 2 to 10 50 or more
11 to 20 30 or more
21 to 40 20 or more
41 to 50 15 or more
Multi-center folding mode 30 sets
Tri-folding paper exit tray Overlap tri-folding mode 20 sets
30.3 Type of paper

(1) Straight/sub tray mode
Paper size SRA3, A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2 *3 *4 *10 *11, SRA4*4 *5 *10 *11, SRA4S, A4, A4S, JISB5*1, ISOB5*2 *3
*4 *10 *11, JISB5S*1, ISOB5S*2 *4 *10 *11, A5, A5S *4 *5 *10 *11, B6S *4 *5 *10 *11, ISOB56*4 *10,
A6S *4 *5 *10 *11
13 x 19 *4 *5 *10 *11, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11*3 *4 *10 *11, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x
81/2*3 *4, 51/2 x 81/2S*4 *5 *10 *11
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K*4 *5 *6 *10 *11, 16K*4 *5 *6 *10 *11, 16KS*4 *5 *6 *10 *11
Wide paper *3 (A3W, B4W, A4W, A4SW, B5W, B5SW, A5W, 12 x 18W, 11 x 17W, 81/2 x 11W, 81/2 x
Tab paper *7 *8 (A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2, Maximum
324mm x 463mm)
Minimum 100mm x 148mm, Maximum.330mm x 483mm*5 *10 *11
Paper weight 40g/m2 to 350g/m2 *3*9
64g/m2 to 300g/m2 *5 *10 *11
64g/m2 to 350g/m2 *4
*1 Default for North America (C8000/1200/1200P/1051/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060 only)
*3 1200/1200P/1051/1250/1250P/1052 only
*4 C8000 only
*5 C6501/C6501P/C65hc only
*6 For China, Taiwan only (C6501/C6501P/C65hc/1200/1200P/1051/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060 only)
*8 C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060 is A4, 81/2 x 11 only
*10 C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 only
*11 C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060 only
C-51

Paper size SRA3, A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2 *3 *4 *8 *9, SRA4S, A4S, B5S
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K *4 *5 *6 *8 *9, 16KS *4 *5 *6 *8 *9
Wide paper *3(A3W, B4W, A4W, A4SW, B5W, B5SW, A5W, 12 x 18W, 11 x 17W, 81/2 x 11W, 81/2 x
11SW, 51/2 x 81/2W, Max. 324mm x 463mm)
Paper weight 50g/m2 to 244g/m2 *3, 64g/m2 to 244g/m2 *4 *5 *8 *9
Maximum saddle stitching sheets Plain, coated, color specific Paper weight Sheet
Plain paper Coated
Color specific *4 *5 *8 *9
50g/m2 to 81g/ 50 *7 30 *7
m2
82g/m2 to 91g/ 30 *7 15 *7
m2
92g/m2 to 20 *7 10 *7
130g/m2
131g/m2 to 15 *7 5 *7
161g/m2
162g/m2 to 10 -
209g/m2
210g/m2 to 5 -
244g/m2
Fine Paper brand 55kg (64g/m2) 70kg (81.4g/m2)
KIMMARI V 50 sheets 50 sheets
RAICHO FINE
KANABISHI
OK PRINCE -
NEW NPi 50 sheets 30 sheets
POD PRINCE
FINE
SHIRAOI
Staple position Automatically adjusted according to the paper size (90mm to 165mm)
[1]
[2]
15ant1c006na
[1] = [Paper Size] /2 ± 2mm

[2] = [Paper Size] /4 ± 2mm
Folding height
[1]
15ant1c011na
Stitching sheets [1] Folding height

A3 B4 A4S B5S
12 x 18 81/2 x 14 81/2 x 11S (260mm or
11 x 17 less)
(301mm to (261mm to
(401mm or
400mm) 300mm)
more)
2 to 5 35mm or less 40mm or less 45mm or less Not defined
6 to 15 45mm or less 50mm or less Not defined
16 to 30 50mm or less 55mm or less
31 to 50 60mm or less 65mm or less
C-52
(The above information is applied when paper weight is 64g/m2 and no thick cover is not used.)
*3 1200/1200P/1051/1250/1250P/1052 only
*4 C8000 only
*5 C6501/C6501P/C65hc only
*6 For China/Taiwan only (C6501/C6501P/C65hc/1200/1200P/1051/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060 only)
*7 1 sheet can be switched to thick paper (200g/m2)
*8 C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 only
*9 C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060 only
(3) Trimming mode

12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K *4 *5 *6 *7 *8, 16KS *4 *5 *6 *7 *8
Wide paper *3 (A3W, B4W, A4SW, B5SW, 12 x 18W, 11 x 17W, 81/2 x 11SW, Maximum 324mm x
463mm)
Paper weight 50g/m2 to 244g/m2 *3
64g/m2 to 244g/m2 *4 *5 *7 *8
Maximum trimming sheets 50 sheets (80g/m2) or 49 sheets (80g/m2) + 1 sheet (200g/m2)
(This is the number of the printed paper before the folding. The number of fore-edge (after folding) is
double.)
*3 1200/1200P/1051/1250/1250P/1052 only
*4 C8000 only
*5 C6501/C6501P/C65hc only
*7 C7000/C7000/C70hc/C6000 only
*8 C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060 only
(4) Multi-center folding mode

12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K *4*5 *6 *7 *8, 16KS *4*5 *6 *7 *8
Wide paper *3 (A3W, B4W, A4SW, B5SW, 12 x 18W, 11 x 17W, 81/2 x 11SW, Max. 324mm x 463mm)
Paper weight 50g/m2 to 244g/m2*3, 64g/m2 to 244g/m2 *4*5 *7 *8
Maximum overlap folding sheets Paper weight Sheet

Folding precision (for 1 sheet)
[1]
15ant1c009na
[1] = [Paper Size] /2 ± 1.5mm
[1] 15ant1c008na
[1] = 1.5mm or less

C-53

*3 1200/1200P/1051/1250/1250P/1052 only
*4 C8000 only
*5 C6501/C6501P/C65hc only
*6 For China/Taiwan only (C6501/C6501P/C65hc/1200/1200P/1051/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060 only)
*7 C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 only
*8 C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060 only
(5) Overlap tri-folding mode

Paper size A4S, 81/2 x 11S
Paper weight 50g/m2 to 91g/m2 *1, 64g/m2 to 91g/m2 *2 *3 *4 *5
Maximum overlap folding sheets Paper weight Sheet

Folding precision (for 1 sheet) Paper size [1] [2] [3]
A4S 97.5 ± 4mm 102.0 ± 4mm 1.5mm or less
81/2 x 11S 91.6 ± 4mm 96.1 ± 4mm
[3]
[3]
[1]
[2]
15ant1c010na
*1 1200/1200P/1051/1250/1250P/1052 only
*2 C6501/C6501P/C65hc only
*3 C8000 only
*4 C7000/C7000/C70hc/C6000/C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060 only
*5 C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060 only
30.4 Machine data

Maximum power consumption 270W
Weight 280kg
Dimensions When the bundle output tray is stored:
1,170 (W) x 775 (D) x 1,020 (H) mm
When the bundle output tray is pulled out
1,170 (W) x 1,441 (D) x 1,020 (H) mm
*1 C8000/C6501/C6501P/C65hc/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060: Only 5VDC is supplied from the main body


Note
C-54
31. SD-513
31.1 Type
Type Saddle stitching unit with the fore-edge trimming and the multi-folding operation device
31.2 Functions
(1) Functions
Saddle stitching mode Exit several sheets to the booklet tray after the half-folding and saddle stitching operation.
Saddle stitching trimming mode Exit several sheets to the booklet tray after the half-folding, saddle stitching and trimming operation.
Multi half-fold mode Exit one sheet or several sheets to the booklet tray after the process of the half-folding.
Multi half-fold trimming mode Exit one sheet or several sheets to the booklet tray after the process of the half-folding and trimming.
Multi tri-folding mode Exit one sheet or several sheets to the tri-folding tray after the process of the tri-folding.
Straight mode Conveys paper to the succeeding device without any process.

Sub tray The sub tray paper full sensor (PS11) detects the full condition.
The approximate capacity of 200 sheets (80 g/m2)
single sheet
The approximate capacity of Z- 20 sheets (80 g/m2)
folding
The approximate capacity of half- 20 sheets (80 g/m2)
fold
Single sheet with crease 100 sheets (The paper feed stops when 100 sheets are fed in
succession.)
Booklet tray The booklet tray paper full sensor (PS44) detects the full condition.
The approximate capacity of Stitching sheets Set
saddle stitching mode (Grain 2 to10 sheets 30 sets
short paper, 91 g/m2) 11 to 25 sheets 18 sets
The approximate capacity of 30 sets
multi half-fold mode (5 sheets
overlap)
Tri-folding tray The tri-folding tray paper full sensor (PS81) detects the full condition.
The approximate capacity of Folding sheets Set
Multi tri-folding mode (80 g/m2) 1 sheet 40 sets
2 sheets 20 sets
3 sheets 13 sets
4 sheets 10 sets
5 sheets 8 sets
C-55
(3) Performance
Paper alignment performance
a b c
>@
d1
d e1 d2
w e w
e2
>@
f g
>@
[1]: Fold position

[2]: Center of paper
Misalignment inside booklet (No a: 1.0 mm or less
trim on both sides) b: 1.0 mm or less
Misalignment between stapling c: 1.0 mm or less (150 mm or more in the main scan direction of the
position and folding booklet)
c: 1.5 mm or less (less than 150 mm in the main scan direction of the
booklet)
Misalignment of stapling position d: (W/4 - 8 mm ±3.0 mm or less)
from the edge (2-point staple)
Staple pitch (2-point staple) e: (W/2 ±3.0 mm or less)
Misalignment of stapling position d1: (W/8 - 8) mm ±3.0 mm or less)
from the edge (4-point staple) d2: (W/8 x 5 - 8) mm ±3.0 mm or less)
Staple pitch (4-point staple) e1: W/4 mm ±3.0 mm or less
e2: W/4 mm ±3.0 mm or less
Misalignment between center of f: 1.0mm or less
paper and folding
Folding skew (2 to 15 sheets) g: 1.5 mm or less
Folding skew (16 to 50 sheets) g: 2.0 mm or less
Multi half-fold performance
[1]
15ant1c009na
[1] = [sub-scanning direction length] / 2 ± 1.5 mm
C-56
[1] 15ant1c008na
[1] = 1.5 mm or less

Multi tri-folding performance
[3]
[3]
[1]
[2]
15ant1c010na
Paper size (paper weight) [1] [2] [3]

A4S (80g/m2) 97.5 mm ± 1.5 mm 102.0 ± 3 mm 1.5 mm or less
81/2 x 11S (20lb) 91.6 mm ± 1.5 mm 96.1 ± 3 mm
Trimmer performance
[1]
Paper size (paper type) Stitching sheets [1]

A4 (J paper, KM Profi) 2 to 15 sheets 1.0 mm or less
81/2 x 11 (Hammermill Tidal 16 to 30 sheets 1.5 mm or less
MP) 31 to 51 sheets 1.5 mm or less
Other than the above 2 to 15 sheets 2.0 mm or less
16 to 30 sheets 3.0 mm or less
31.3 Type of paper

(1) Straight, sub tray mode
Paper Size SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4S, SRA4*6*7, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, ISOB5S, B5S, A5, A5S*6*7, B6S*6*7,
A6S*6*7
13 × 19*6*7, 12 × 18, 11 × 17, 9 × 11, 8 1/2 × 14, 8 1/2 × 11, 8 1/2 × 11S,
5 1/2 × 8 1/2, 5 1/2 × 8 1/2S*6*7 8 1/2×13, 8 1/4×13, 8 1/8×13 1/4, 8×13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Wide paper*8 (A3W, B4W, A4W, A4SW, B5W, B5SW, A5W, 12 × 18W, 11 × 17W, 8 1/2 × 11W, 8 1/2 ×
11SW, 5 1/2 × 8 1/2W)
Tab paper*1 (A3*8, B4*8, A4, A4S*8, B5*8, B5S*8, 11 × 17*8, 8 1/2 × 11, 8 1/2 × 11S*8, 5 1/2 × 8 1/2*8)
Custom size*2 (maximum 324 mm x 483 mm, minimum 95 mm x 133 mm)
Custom size*3 (maximum 330.2 mm × 487.7 mm, minimum 100 mm × 148 mm)
Custom size*4 (maximum 330.2 mm × 487.7 mm, minimum 100 mm × 139.7 mm)
Applicable paper Plain, fine, color, coated, preprinted, book/news, embossed, envelope, embossed2, tab paper (same as
the main body)
Weight 40 g/m2 to 350 g/m2 *2*5
62 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 *3*5
C-57
55 g/m2 to 350 g/m2 *4*5

*1 Operation of paper exit with tab area at the trail edge side is not guaranteed.
*2 1250, 1250P, 1052 + PF-703 (The machines except for PF-703 conform to each product specification)
*3 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060 + PF-707 (The machines except for the PF-707 conform to each product specification.)
*4 C1100, C1085 + PF-707, PF-708 (The machines except for the PF-707 and the PF-708 conform to each product specification.)
*5 Paper weight of the sub tray load that is 49 g/m2 or less is not guaranteed.
*6 Only for the system of C1070, C1070P, C71hc, and C1060
*7 Only for the system of C1100 and C1085
*8 Only for the system of 1250, 1250P, and 1052

Paper Size SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4S, A4S, B5S
12 × 18, 11 × 17, 81/2 × 14, 81/2 × 11S
8 1/2×13, 8 1/4×13, 8 1/8×13 1/4, 8×13
8K, 16KS
Wide paper*11 (A3W, B4W, A4W, A4SW, B5W, B5SW, 12 × 18W, 11 × 17W, 8 1/2 × 11SW)
Custom size*1*2 (maximum 324 mm x 483 mm, minimum*3120 mm x 257 mm)
Custom size*1*9*10 (maximum 330.2 mm × 487.7 mm, minimum*3120 mm × 257 mm)
Weight 50g/m2 to 300g/m2 *2
55 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 *10
62 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 *9
Maximum saddle stitching (2- Plain Body weight Sheet
point staple) sheets*4 50g/m2 to 81g/m2 50 sheets
45 sheets + cover (50 g/m2 to 216 g/m2)
19 sheets + cover (50 g/m2 to 244 g/m2)*5
19 sheets + cover (50 to 256 g/m2)*6
14 sheets + cover (257 to 300 g/m2)*6
162g/m2 to 209g/m2 10 sheet
2 sheets + cover (50 to 300 g/m2) *5
Fine (81.4 g/m2) Paper brand Sheet
KIMMARI V 30 sheets
RAICHO
NEW Npi 29 sheets + cover (50 g/m2 to 216 g/m2)
OK PRINCE 24 sheets + cover (217 g/m2 to 300 g/m2)
SHIRAOI
KANABISHI 50 sheets
C-58
POD PRINCE
Coated, Color paper Body weight Sheet
Grain long paper Body weight Sheet
131g/m2to 161g/m2 5 sheets
162 g/m2 to 300 g/ Not guaranteed
m2
Papers that are less than Body weight Sheet
182 mm in the main scan
direction 50g/m2 to 91g/m2 16 sheets
7 sheets + cover (50 to 216 g/m2)
4-point staple Applicable Paper Size A3, 11 x 17
Custom size*8 (Maximum 297 mm × 483 mm, minimum 279 mm × 257
mm)
Saddle stitching (4-point staple) Plain Body weight Sheet
sheets*4 50g/m2 to 81g/m2 15 to 50 sheets
15 to 45 sheets + cover (50 g/m2 to 216 g/m2)
14 to 40 sheets + cover (217 to 300 g/m2)
82g/m2 to 91g/m2 11 to 30 sheets
8 to 19 sheets + cover (217 g/m2 to 244 g/m2)*5
8 to 14 sheets + cover (244 to 300 g/m2)*5
C-59

Fine (81.4 g/m2) Paper brand Sheet
KIMMARI V 12 to 30 sheets
RAICHO
NEW Npi 12 to 29 sheets + cover (50 g/m2 to 216 g/m2)
OK PRINCE 11 to 24 sheets + cover (217 g/m2 to 300 g/m2)
SHIRAOI
KANABISHI 12 to 40 sheets
POD PRINCE
Coated, color paper Body weight Sheet
*1 When a ratio of the main scan direction to the sub scan direction regarding the custom size paper is less than 0.6 (also 0.78 or more), it is
not guaranteed.
*3 The dimension after the trimming accommodates to the compact disc sleeve size (120 mm × 120 mm).
*4 When the weight differs between each inside paper, define with the heaviest weight.
*5 1250, 1250P, 1052
*6 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, C1100, C1085
*7 The cover of grain long paper is not guaranteed.
*8 Paper feed is possible, but not guaranteed.
*11 Only for the system of 1250, 1250P, and 1052
(3) Trimming mode

Paper Size Conforms to the saddle stitching mode specification.
Weight 50g/m2 to 300g/m2
Maximum trimming sheets Twice the number of saddle stitching paper
Trimming distance 5 mm to 40 mm
C-60
However, when the booklet length after the trimming becomes shorter than 120 mm, trimming is not
available.
Trimming position Fore edge
Trimmer scraps box capacity Trimmer scraps box full sensor (PS96) detects the full condition.
The scraps box can be pulled out during machine operation.
The approximate capacity of the scraps box is 1,700 sheets.*1
*1 Condition: PROFI (80 g/m2), A3, 10 sheets saddle stitching booklet, trimming amount 5 mm
(4) Multi folding mode

Paper Size Half-fold Same specification as saddle stitching mode
Tri-folding A4S, 81/2 × 11S
Weight Half-fold 50g/m2 to 300g/m2
Tri-folding 50g/m2 to 91g/m2
Crease + tri-folding*1 80g/m2 to 216g/m2
Number of overlapped sheets Half-fold *2 Weight Sheet

Tri-folding 50g/m2 to 81g/m2 5 sheets

Crease + tri-folding 80g/m2 to 216g/m2 1 sheet
*1 The position misalignment of the crease line and the fold of paper whose weight is less than 105 g/m2 is not guaranteed.
*2 When the paper weight differs between each multi half fold, define with the heaviest weight.
(5) Allowable amount of curling

Paper curl amount
C
Curling amount "a" 10 mm or less (49 g/m2 or less)
15 mm or less (50 g/m2 to 91 g/m2)
10 mm or less (92 g/m2 or more)
When the booklet is output, the outward curl is not guaranteed.
31.4 Machine data

Power source Inch: 120VAC, 24/5VDC (some are supplied from the main body)
Metric: 230VAC, 24/5VDC (some are supplied from the main body)
Dimensions 1,241 mm (W) × 1,431 mm (D) × 1,020 mm (H) (The width does not include the booklet tray (236 mm).)
Rear console 1,241 mm (W) × 723 mm (D) × 1,020 mm (H)
Front console 800 mm (W) × 830 mm (D) × 1,020 mm (H)
Weight Approximately 337 kg
Rear console 181 kg
Front console 156 kg


Note
C-61
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 32. CR-101
32. CR-101
32.1 Type
Type SD built-in type crease operation device
32.2 Functions
(1) Functions
No-crease mode
Crease mode
Number of creases 1 to 4
Setting unit 0.1 mm
Minimum distance 1.0 mm
between the crease
lines
Prohibited range H1, H2: Crease is unavailable
a: Crease is available
The crease is performed in the order of A, B, C, D.
[1]: Output direction after the paper reverse
[2] Front stopper
[1]
H2
A
B
L a
C
H1
[2]
H1, H2 depends on the paper length in the sub scan direction (L).
Paper length in the sub scan direction (L)
240 mm or longer, less than 336 336 mm or longer, less than 337 337 mm or longer, 488 mm or
mm mm shorter
H1 7 mm 7 mm (L-330) mm
H2 46 mm (L-290) mm (L-290) mm
(2) Applicable mode and number of creases

Number of creases
Mode Cover Only All pages
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Saddle stitching (SD-513) ●*1 × × × × × × ×
Multi half-fold (SD-513) ● × × × × × × ×
Tri-folding (SD-513) *2 × × × × × ● × ×
Perfect binding (PB-503) × ● × ● × × × ×
Free crease + sub tray (SD-513, PB-503, × × × × ● ● ○ ○
FS-532)*3
Free crease + straight, shift (main tray of × × × × ● ● ● ○
FS-532)*3
Punch, Staple (FS-532) × × × × × × × ×
●: Recommended (The accuracy is guaranteed)
○: The selection is possible but not guaranteed.
×: Unable
*1 Unable to combine with FD-504 square-fold mode.
C-62
*2 Crease + multi tri-folding exits one sheet each (overlap is released).

*3 When you crease paper which is heavier than 301 g/m2, limit the conditions to the following.
- Crease to the image side
- Paper exit with the face down to the sub tray or the FS-532 main tray
(3) Performance
Crease performance
Skew j-k: ± 0.7 mm or less

Misalignment j or k: ± 0.7 mm or less corresponding to the setting data
j1 j2 j3
k1 k2 k3
Pitch (maximum 4 j1, j2, j3, k1, k2, k3: ± 0.7 mm or less corresponding to the setting data
lines)
a
[2]
[1]
[1]: Fold line
[2]: Crease groove edge
Position a: 1.0 mm or less
misalignment of (Paper weight: 105g/m2 to 216g/m2)
the fold and the
crease line
Folding position a: ± 3.0 mm or less

misalignment on
the crease
operation
C-63
Folding skew on a: ± 2.0 mm or less

the crease
operation
32.3 Type of paper

Paper Size Crease + saddle stitching, multi half-fold, sub tray, Conforms to the SD-513 saddle stitching, multi half
straight, shift mode mode specification.
Crease + tri-folding mode Conforms to the SD-513 multi tri-folding mode
specification.
Crease + perfect binding mode Conforms to the PB-503 specification.
Weight 80g/m2to 350g/m2 *2*4
80 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 *3
However, the maximum paper weight is based on the function that is combined with the crease mode.
Crease + tri-folding mode*1: 80 g/m2 to 216 g/m2
Allowable amount of curling
C
Curling amount "a" 15 mm or less (50 g/m2 to 91 g/m2)
*1 The position misalignment of the crease line and the fold of paper whose weight is less than 105 g/m2 is not guaranteed.
32.4 Machine data

Power source 24/5VDC (supplied from SD-513)
Weight 6.8 kg or less
Dimensions 211 mm (W) x 460 mm (D) x 137 mm (H) (The depth is to the edge of the creaser drive shaft)


Note
C-64
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 33. TU-503
33. TU-503
33.1 Type
Type SD built-in type top and bottom trimming operation device
33.2 Functions
(1) Functions
No-slit mode
Slit mode
Cut position The top edge and the bottom edge of booklet
Trimming amount 14 mm to 26 mm (50 g/m2 to 61 g/m2)
10 mm to 26 mm (62 g/m2 to 300 g/m2)
The top and the bottom edge individual setting
However, the difference of cutting amount between the top and the bottom edge is within 10 mm and the length in the
main scan direction after the cutting is 120 mm or longer.
Capacity of the slit The slit scraps box full sensor/1 (PS107) and the slit scraps box full sensor/2 (PS115) detect the full condition.
scraps box The scraps box can be pulled out during machine operation.
The approximate capacity of capacity: 4,000 scraps of 13 mm (W) x 420 mm (L) , PROFI (80 g/m2)
(2) Applicable mode list

Slit
Mode
Cover only*1 All pages
Saddle stitching (SD-513) ○ ●
Multi half-fold (SD-513) ○ ●
Tri-folding (SD-513) × ○*2
Perfect binding (PB-502) ○*3 ×
Sub tray (sub tray of SD-513, PB-503, FS-532) ○ ●
Straight, Shift (main tray of FS-532) ○ ○
Punch, Staple (FS-532) × ×
○: The selection is possible but not guaranteed.
×: Unable to select
*1 When the slit is executed only to the cover, refer to the following prohibition conditions.
· Cover length in the main scan direction after slitting is within ± 1.0 mm in contrast with the inside paper length in the main scan direction
· The length of the cover in the sub scan direction is within ± 80.0 mm compared with the length of the inside papers in the sub scan direction.
(With Fore-edge trimming)
· The length of the cover in the sub scan direction is same as the length of the inside papers in the sub scan direction. (Without fore-edge
trimming)
*2 Slit + tri-folding exits one sheet each (overlap is released).
*3 The top and the bottom edge individual setting is not available for the cutting amount.
(3) Performance
Slit performance
m q
m q
Slit straightness m: 0.5 mm or less (single sheets of 65 g/m2 or more)

m: 1.0 mm or less (single sheets of 64 g/m2 or less)
Width accuracy n: ± 0.5 mm or less corresponding to the setting data (65 g/m2 or more)
n: ± 1.0 mm or less corresponding to the setting data (64 g/m2 or less)
C-65
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 33. TU-503
33.3 Type of paper

(1) Slit mode
Paper Size Slit + saddle stitching, multi half-fold, sub tray, Conforms to the SD-513 saddle stitching, multi half
straight, shift mode fold mode specification.
However, the length in the main scan direction
after the slit is 120 mm or longer.
Slit+ tri-folding mode Conforms to the SD-513 multi tri-folding mode
specification.
However, define with the paper size before slit.
Slit + perfect binding mode Conforms to the PB-503 specification.
However, the length in the main scan direction
after the slit is 120 mm or longer.
Weight 50g/m2 to 300g/m2 *1
62 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 *2
55 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 *3
However, the maximum paper weight is based on the specification of the function that is combined with
the slit mode.
C
*1 1250, 1250P, 1052 + PF-703 (The machines except for the PF-703 conform to each product specification.)
33.4 Machine data

Weight Slitter unit (including the rotary cutter and the scraps shutter): 18.7 kg
Scraps box (2 boxes): 1.0 kg x 2
Dimensions 304 mm (W) x 630 mm (D) x 381 mm (H) (The depth is from the edge of the shutter lever shaft to the rear
of the bottom.)


Note
C-66
34. FD-504
34.1 Type
Type SD built-in type flattening a fold operation device
34.2 Functions
(1) Functions
Square-fold mode Square-fold + Saddle stitching (SD-513)
(2) Applicable mode list

Mode Square-fold
Saddle stitching (SD-513) ●*1
Multi half-fold (SD-513) ×
Multi tri-folding (SD-513) ×
Perfect binding (PB-502) ×
Sub tray (sub tray of SD-513, PB-503, FS-532) ×
Straight, Shift (main tray of FS-532) ×
Punch, Staple (FS-532) ×
×: Unable
*1 Unable to combine with CR-101 crease mode.

Booklet tray The booklet tray paper full sensor (PS44) detects the full condition.
(Grain short paper, paper weight Stitching sheets The approximate capacity (sets)
91 g/m2 or less) 5 to 10 30 sets
11 to 25 20 sets
26 to 50 10 sets
(4) Performance
Booklet height performance
Stitching sheets (PROFI, no Paper Size

cover) A3 B4 A4S B5S
12 × 18 81/2 × 14 81/2 x 11S (260 mm or
11 × 17 less)
(301 mm to 400 (261 mm to 300
(401 mm or
mm) mm)
more)
5 h: 15 mm or h: 20 mm or h: 25 mm or h: 30 mm or
less less less less
6 to 15 h: 20 mm or h: 25 mm or h: 30 mm or h: 35 mm or
less less less less
less less less less
less less less less
34.3 Type of paper

Paper Size Conforms to the SD-513 saddle stitching mode specification.
Weight 50 g/m 2 to 216 g/m 2*1
62 g/m 2 to 216 g/m 2* 2
55 g/m 2 to 216 g/m 2* 3
Minimum processing sheets 5 sheets
Maximum processing sheets Conforms to the SD-513 saddle stitching mode specification.
C-67

C
10 mm or less (92 g/m 2 or more)
*1 1250, 1250P, 1052 + PF-703 (The machines except for the PF-703 conform to each product specification.)
34.4 Machine data

Weight Square-fold unit: 11 kg
Clamp up down drive unit: 2 kg
Dimensions 643 mm (W) × 258 mm (D) × 157 mm (H)


Note
C-68
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 35. PB-503
35. PB-503
35.1 Type
Type Simplified perfect binding machine (Consoled hot-melt type)
35.2 Functions
(1) Function
Perfect binding mode Automatically binds and stocks in a book stock section.
Sub tray mode Exits paper to the sub tray without any process
Relay conveyance mode Exits paper to the option (FS-521, FS-532) on the subsequent stage without any process
(2) Binding sheets

Binding sheets Minimum thickness 10 sheets
Maximum thickness Plain: 300 sheets or 30 mm
Color and Coated: 150 sheets or 15 mm
Binding sheets with Z-Fold Simplex printing Number of Z-Fold Maximum number of Total
sheets*1 sheets unfold sheets
Binding sheets*1 Number of Inserted Maximum number of
sheets sheets
1 sheet 200 sheets 201 sheets
2 sheets 150 sheets 152 sheets
Duplex printing Number of Z-Fold Maximum number of Total
sheets unfold sheets
Number of Inserted Maximum number of
sheets sheets
1 sheet 200 sheets 201 sheets
Simplex and duplex mixed When 1 or more unfold sheets is single-sided, the specification is the
printing (printer function) same as the simplex print.
When the z-folded sheet is single-sided, the specification is the same
as the duplex print.
*1 C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060: Switch DIPSW30-5 from 0 (default) to 1 to release the limit of the total
number of sheets.
1250, 1250P, 1052, 1200, 1200P, and 1051: Switch DIPSW37-2 from 0 (default) to 1 to release the limit of the total number of sheets.

Book stock section Maximum 11 books *1 x 2 rows *2 (book thickness: 30 mm)
10 sheets to 30 sheets book 50 sets
31 sheets to 150 sheets book 35 books or until the upper limit is detected.
151 sheets to 300 sheets book Until the upper limit is detected
PB cover paper tray*3 1000 sheets (82g/m2)
500 sheets (216g/m2)
Sub tray 200 sheets (80g/m2)
*1 The available number of books possibly decreases due to curls of papers.
*2 When books have been stacked up to the limit at the first row, the first stack is automatically moved to the second row on the cart. The pile
of books at the first row continues.
*3 The cover paper supply is selectable from the PB cover paper tray, main body tray, PI or PI-PFU (1200, 1200P, 1051, 1250, 1250P, and
1052 only).
(4) Others
Warm-up time Approximately 20 minutes
Cover trimming Selectable from Trim or Not trim.
35.3 Type of paper

(1) Paper size
Perfect binding mode Inside paper: A4, JISB5*1, ISOB5*2*3*5*9*10, A5, A5S*3*9*10, 81/2 x 11, 51/2 x
81/2*3*9, 51/2 x 81/2S*3*9*10, 16K*3*4*9*10
Custom size paper (Maximum 307 (W) x 221 (L) mm,
Minimum 139 (W) x 210 (L) mm)
C-69
Z-fold size (A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2*3*5*9*10, A4S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x

11S, 8K*3*4*9*10)
Cover: Maximum 307mm x 472mm, Minimum 139mm x 279mm
Vertical (main scan direction) Same size as the inside paper.
Horizontal (sub scan direction) Wide size L mm
L= book size in the sub scan direction x 2 + book thickness (book
spine) + 5mm (for trimming)
Sub tray mode SRA3, A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2*3*5*9*10, SRA4*3*9*10, SRA4S, A4, A4S, JISB5*1, ISOB5*2*3*5*9*10,
JISB5S*1, ISOB5S*2*3*9*10, A5, A5S*3*9*10, B6S*3*9*10, ISOB6S*3*9*10, A6S*3*9*10, 8K*3*4*9*10,
16K*3*4*9*10, 16KS*3*4*9*10
13 x 19*3*9*10, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S,
51/2 x 81/2*3*5, 51/2 x 81/2S*3*9*10
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
Wide paper *5 (A3W, B4W, A4W, A4SW, B5W, B5SW, A5W, 12 x 18W, 11 x 17W, 81/2 x 11W, 81/2 x
11SW, 51/2 x 81/2W, Max. 324mm x 460mm)
Custom size: Maximum 330mm x 487mm*3*9*10, 324mm x 463mm*5
Minimum 100mm x 140mm*3, 100mm x 148mm*9*10, 95mm x 139mm *5
Finite tab paper *6*7 : A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2
Relay conveyance mode *8 Paper which can be used by the subsequent option (FS-521/FS-532)
• Large size: SRA3, A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2*3*5*9*10, SRA4*3*9*10, SRA4S
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 13 x 19*3*9*10, 8K*3*4*9*10
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
Wide paper *5 (Max. 324mm x 460mm)
• Small size: A4, A4S, JISB5*1, ISOB5*2*3*5*9*10, JISB5S*1, ISOB5S*2*3*9*10,
16K*3*4*9*10, 16KS*3*9*10
9 x 11, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S
• Minimum size: A5, A5S*3*9*10, JISB6S*1*3*9*10, ISOB6S*2*3*9*10, 51/2 x
81/2*3*5, 51/2 x 81/2S*3*9*10
• Others: Finite tab paper *6*7: A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11,
81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2
Custom size paper:
Maximum 330mm x 487mm*3*9*10, 324mm x 463mm*5
Minimum 100mm x 140mm*3, 100mm x 148mm*9*10, 95mm x
139mm *5
(2) Paper weight

Perfect binding mode Inside paper: 64g/m2 to 91g/m2 *2
64g/m2 to 105g/m2*1*6
Cover: 82g/m2 to 216g/m2*2
81g/m2 to 209g/m2*1*6
Sub tray mode 40g/m2 to 350g/m2 *2
64g/m2 to 350g/m2*1
64g/m2 to 300g/m2*6
Relay conveyance mode 40g/m2 to 350g/m2*2
64g/m2 to 350g/m2*1
64g/m2 to 300g/m2*6
*3 C8000 only
*5 1200/1200P/1051/1250/1250P/1052 only
*7 For C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000/C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060, A4, 81/2 x 11 only
*8 Paper can be fed only when the FS-521, FS-532 is connected as the subsequent stage of the PB-503
*9 C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 only
*10 C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060 only
(3) Applicable paper in each mode

Body Cover -
C-70
Binding Binding PB tray Main tray Sub tray

mode mode
(1250/1250 (C8000/
P/ C7000/
1052/1200/ C7000P/
1200P/ C70hc/
1051) C6000/
C1070/
C1070P/
C71hc/
C1060)
Plain Japa J paper 64g/m2 ○ ○ - - ○
n
Nort Tidal MP 20lb (75g/m2) ○ ○ - - ○
h
Amer
ica
Euro Konica Minolta 80g/m2 ○ - - - ○
pe Original
Konica Minolta 80g/m2 - - - - ○
Profi
Recycled Japa NR-A80 64g/m2 - ○ - - ○
paper n
NR-A100 64g/m2 ○ ○ ○
Nort Hammermill Great 20lb (75g/m2) ○ - - - ○
h White
Amer Recycle Eclips
ica 20lb (75g/m2) - - - - ○
Euro Nautilus 80g/m2 ○ - - - ○

pe
Classic White 80g/m2 ○ - - - ○
Color Japa Konicaminolta CF 80g/m2 - ○ - - ○
n paper
Nort Hammermill Color 28lb (105g/m2) - ○ - - ○
h Copy Photo White
Amer Domtor Microprint
ica 28lb (105g/m2) - ○ - - ○
Color Copy
Gilbert Neutech 28lb (105g/m2) - ○ - - ○
Color Copy
Euro Color copy (mondi) 90g/m2 - ○ - - ○
pe
100g/m2 - ○ - - ○
Fine - - Body Cover - - - - -
Japa Kinmari V 64g/m2 to - - ○ Δ ○
n
91g/m2
NEW NPi FINE 64g/m2 to - - ○ Δ ○
91g/m2
105g/m2 - ○ - - ○
POD prince high 64g/m2 to ○ - ○ ○ ○
quality
91g/m2
OK PRINCE FINE 82g/m2 to
81.4g/m2 - - ○ Δ ○
216g/m2
105g/m2 - ○ - - ○
shiraoi 64g/m2 to - - ○ Δ ○
91g/m2
High quality 64g/m2 to - - ○ Δ ○
91g/m2
KANABISHI 64g/m2 to - - ○ Δ ○
91g/m2
Coated *1 Japa JD 98g/m2 - ○ - - ○
n
NEW AGE 81.4g/m2 - ○ - - ○
NEW AGE BLANC 81.4g/m2 - ○ - - ○
POD GLOSS 64g/m2 to 81g/m2 - - - - ○
COAT
C-71
Nort Kromekote Laser 82g/m2 to 130g/m2 - - ○ Δ ○

h
Amer HIGH GLOSS 131g/m2 to 161g/m2 - - ○ Δ ○
ica Futura Laser 162g/m2 to 216g/m2 - - ○ Δ ○
Δ: Available for a paper curled less than 10mm

*1 Regarding Coated, the matt coated paper is only available for the body.
35.4 Machine data

Power source 120VAC (North America), 230VAC (Europe)
5VDC (supplied from the main body)
Power consumption 1000W or less
Dimensions 1,360 (W) x 1,223 (H) x 755 (D) mm
Binding section 740 (W) x 1,223 (H) x 755 (D) mm
Book stock section 620 (W) x 1,020 (H) x 753 (D) mm
Relay conveyance section


Note
C-72
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 36. IC-602
36. IC-602
36.1 Type
Type AIO to the engine (option)
36.2 Functions
Resolution: Print: 1200 x 1200dpi, 600 x 600dpi
Scan: 200 x 200dpi, 300 x 300dpi, 400 x 400dpi, 600 x 600dpi
Gradation: RIP: 8bit/256 Gradation, 1bit/2 Gradation (Writing section of the main body: Equivalent to 256bit
Gradation)
Printable Area: Same as the main body
Number of Print: 1 to 9999
Continuous Print Speed: A4: 71 ppm (C1070, C1070P, C71hc), 61 ppm (C1060, C1060L)
81/2 x 11: 70 ppm (C1070, C1070P, C71hc), 60 ppm (C1060, C1060L)
Page-description language: Adobe PostScript3 (PS3019), PDF direct print (PDF version 1.7), APPE (version 2.6) (UK-104 and UK-207
is required), PDF and VT (version 2) (UK-104 and UK-207 is required), TIFF direct print (TIFF version 6
compliance), PPML (version 2.2), PCL-5c compatible, PCL XL (PCL6 version 3) compatible
Printer Driver: PPD
• Windows Vista, 7, 8, 8.1, Server 2003, Server 2008, Sever 2008 R2, Server 2012, Server 2012 R2 *1
• Linux CUPS
PS Plug-In
• Windows Vista/7, 8, 8.1, Server 2003, Server 2003 R2, Server 2008, Sever 2008 R2, Server 2012,
Server 2012 R2 *1
• MacOSX 10.5, 10.6, 10.7, 10.8, 10.9, 10.10 (PPC, Intel)
Printing Method: Pserver (IPX, SPX), LPD and LPR (TCP/IP), IPP (TCP/IP), AppleTalk (EtherTalk), Bonjour (TCP/IP), Web
service printing (TCP/IP), NPrinter and RPrinter (IPX, SPX), Raw Port (TCP/IP), SMB
*1 Includes 64bit.
36.3 Paper
Paper size Same as the main body.
Applicable paper Same as the main body.
Paper weight Same as the main body.
36.4 Machine data

C1070 C1070P, C71hc C1060 C1060L
CPU Intel Core i5 2400 3.1GHz Intel Pentium G850 2.9GHz
Memory Maximum 14GB Maximum 14GB Maximum 14GB Maximum 10GB
Details: Details: Details: Details:
2GB+4GB (Standard of 2GB (Standard of the main 2GB+4GB (Standard of 2GB+4GB (Standard of
the main body) body) the main body) the main body)
+4GB (IC-602KitA) +4GB+4GB (IC-602KitB) +4GB (IC-602KitA) +4GB (IC-602KitA)
+4GB (UK-104) +4GB (UK-104) +4GB (UK-104)
SSD 2GB
HDD Maximum 2 tera byte Maximum 2 tera byte Maximum 2 tera byte Maximum 1.5 tera byte
Details: Details: Details: Details:
500GB x 3 (Standard of 500GB x 3 (IC-602 KitB) 500GB x 3 (Standard of 500GB x 3 (Standard of
the main body) +500GB (UK-104) the main body) the main body)
+500GB (UK-104) +500GB (UK-104)
Interface Ethernet (1000BASE-T, 100Base-TX, and 10Base-T) with IPv6, USB

Temperature Same as the main body
Humidity Same as the main body

Note
C-73
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 37. GP-501
37. GP-501
37.1 Type
Type Multi-hole punch unit for ring binding
37.2 Modes of Operation

Bypass mode The paper moves straight from the printer to the finisher without passing through the punch module. In this
mode the paper in not punched.
Punch mode with Punch The paper moves from the printer to the punch module where it gets punched and then is routed to the
finisher.
37.3 Machine data

Punch unit size 12” (305mm) W x 40” (1016mm) H x 30.5” (775mm) D
Weight 170 lbs (80kg) when it is not packaged,
270 lbs (123kg) packaged (Pallet, Carton, PKG Inserts)
Color Top Cover. Orca Black, Lower covers. Cuttle Gray
AC Power Supply to GP-501 External power cord according to market destination.
DC 5V Supply to GP-501 Supplied by system to PCB contained within GP-501
System Power Supply Lines GP-501 Internal Lead-Through
• On upstream side: Wiring with connectors through cover-recess.
• On downstream side: Lock-style connector panel on the left side cover.
37.4 Software
Communication method i) Start-stop synchronization style, full duplex.
ii) 1 Start Bit, 8bit Data length, 1 Parity Bit, 1 Stop bit. Maximum Frame Length: 128 byte
iii) Hard flow control (CTS/RTS).
iv) Baud rate:
[Standard] 19200 bps
[ISW=Log file Transmissions] 78000 bps
Communication Content According Interface Specification (Also refer to Appendix B)
37.5 Electronic
Required signals to UP & RXD, RTS, CTS, TXD
Downstream connected units
37.6 Inputs
(1) Media Input from Printer
Alignment/ skew variance at pick Center justified ± 4mm
up
Line speed 290 to 1250 mm/s (Fixed speeds within this range)
Speed variance at pick up ± 2%
Sheet frequency 120 ppm maximum
(a) For Punching

Paper weight 20lb bond - 80lb cover
Plain Paper: 75gsm - 216gsm
Other Paper: 120gsm - 216gsm
Exception ProClick: LTR & A4 Limited to 200gsm
Paper type See appendix C
Maximum Sheet size Letter configuration 279 x 216mm
A4 configuration 297 x 210mm
(b) For Bypass

Paper weight 16lb bond - 93lb cover
64gsm - 350gsm
Paper type Coated, Pre-printed, High Quality, Plain, Book, Color, Rough, Label, OHP, Index
Transparency weight 5 -10 mil (0.127mm to 0.254mm)
Maximum bypass sheet size 13” x 24.8” (330 x 630mm)
Minimum bypass sheet size 3.74” x 5.47” (95 x 139mm)
C-74
(2) Power
Supply GP-501 individual power supply and power cord required.
Configurations by market Refer to the following table.
Machine Market Voltage (V) Current (A) Frequency (Hz) Paper size
1 US, Canada 115 +10/-15 % 3 60 81/2 x 11
2 Europe, Australia 220-240 +10/-15 % 1.8 50 A4
37.7 Outputs
Alignment/ skew at delivery ± 2mm or less for the pick up position
Speed variance at delivery ± 1% compared to speed variance at pick up
Chip tray capacity 2500 cycles (based on punched sheet count)
37.8 Performance
Punch accuracy Hole size ± 2%
Alignment ±0.5mm
Back gauge depth ±0.3mm
(1) Reliability
MCBJ: Punch 1 in 15,000 (20lb bond)
MCBJ: Bypass 1 in 65,000 (20lb bond)
37.9 Operation Environment, Storage, Transportation

Normal Operation Temperature 10 °C – 30 °C
Normal Operation Humidity 10% - 80%
Storage Temperature -10 °C – 40 °C
Storage Humidity 10% - 80%
37.10 Safety/Regulatory
Noise emissions (measured to Punch Maximum of 78dBA (punching 216gsm cover)
ISO7779) Bypass Maximum of 70dBA
(1) Safety Compliance

UL & CSA standards CAN/USA-C22.2 No. 60950-01
UL60950-1 First Edition
TUV standards IEC 60950-1:2001
EN60950-1:2001
(2) Electromagnetic Compliance

EMC standards EN55024:1998 Amendments A1:2001 & A2:2003
EN61000-3-2:2000
EN61000-3-3:1995 Amendment A1:2001
EN55022:1998 Amendments A1:2000 & A2:2003
EN61000-4-2, EN61000-4-4, EN61000-4-5, EN61000-4-6, EN61000-4-11
FCC standards Class B
Part 15, Subpart B, Section A 15.107A &15.109a
C-75
37.11 Appendix A
Figure 1.1 Front
Figure 1.2 Entrance
37.12 Appendix B
Number Model Die set type Pins Pinshape Hole size Paper size Label artwork
(WxH or D)
1 DS-501 Ring Binder 3 Round 8mm 81/2 x 11
3Hole (0.316")
2 DS-502 Plastic Bind 19 Rectangle 8mm x 2.9mm 81/2 x 11

Cerlox (0.313" x
0.116")
3 DS-503 WireBind –3:1 32 Square 4mm x 4mm 81/2 x 11
Square (0.156" x
0.156")
4 DS-504 WireBind –2:1 21 Rectangle 6.4mm x 5.4mm 81/ x 11
2
Rectangular (0.250" x
0.214")
5 DS-505 Color Coil 44 Round 4.4mm 81/2 x 11
(0.174")
C-76
6 DS-506 VeloBind 11 Round 3.2mm 81/2 x 11

(0.125")
7 DS-507 ProClick 32 Rectangle 5mm x 5.5mm 81/2 x 11

(0.197" x
0.217")
8 DS-508 Ring Binder 4 4 Round 8mm A4
Hole (0.316")
9 DS-509 Plastic Bind 21 Rectangle 8mm x 2.9mm A4

Cerlox (0.313" x
0.116")
10 DS-510 WireBind –3:1 34 Round 4.4mm A4
Round (0.174")
11 DS-511 WireBind –2:1 23 Round 6.38mm A4

Round (0.251")
12 DS-512 Color Coil 47 Round 4.4mm A4

(0.174")
13 DS-513 VeloBind 12 Round 3.2mm A4

(0.125")
14 DS-514 ProClick 34 Rectangle 5mm x 5.5mm A4

(0.197" x
0.217")
15 DS-515 Ring Binder 2 2 Round 8mm A4
Hole (0.316")
16 DS-516 Plastic Bind 20 Rectangle 8mm x 2.9mm A4

Cerlox (0.313" x
0.116")
17 DS-517 WireBind –2:1 23 Rectangle 6.4mm x 5.4mm A4
Rectangular (0.250" x
(Australia) 0.214")
18 DS-518 WireBind –3:1 34 Square 4mm x 4mm A4
Square (0.156" x
(Australia) 0.156")
37.13 Appendix C
Paper Type for Punching
Destination Paper Name Weight (g/m2) Punch *2
(1) US Hammermill Color Copy Paper - 120 Q-Zone
Photo White
Hammermill Tidal MP 75 All
Hammermill Fore MP 75 All
Color Copy (Mondi) *1 120 Q-Zone
Wausau Exact Gloss Coated 215 Q-Zone
(C1S) *1
Hammermill Color Copy Cover *1 163 Q-Zone
216 Q-Zone
Color Copy (Mondi) *1 160 Q-Zone
(2) EU Konica Minolta Original 80 All
Konica Minolta Profi 80 All
Mondi BIO TOP 3 extra 80 All
Mondi Color Copy 200 Q-Zone
*1 For only C6501/C6501P/C65hc
*2 Q-Zone: Guaranteed only in Q-zone
All: Guaranteed in all environments
*Refer to the following graph
C-77
80
70
A
Humidity (%RH)
60
B Q
40
30
20 C
10
10 18 20 23 30
Temperature (°C)
37.14 Glossary of Terms

These terms are common to the punch and the bindery industry.
Cerlox The trade name GBC uses for its Plastic Binding
Color coil A plastic coil that looks like a spring which is threaded through round holes that are punched in the
document then the ends are cut off and crimped. The holes are either 4:1 or 5:1 (4 holes per inch or 5
holes per inch). This type of bind is horizontally flat and even folds around for easy handling of the
document.
Flush-cut covers Covers stock that is the same size as the paper contents and has round corners.
Plastic binding The name that is used to describe most common binding method of GBC.
The 19 and 21 rectangular hole, Plastic Comb type.
ProClick A plastic element that snaps together. This style requires holes that appear to be the same as Twin Loop
but are slightly larger.
The larger holes enable correct operation of the ProClick Pronto finishing devise.
Tabbing (hanging chad) “Tabbing” or “hanging chad” is when a hole is not punched cleanly through the material and a piece of
paper hangs from the edge.
This condition occurs when a die set is worn and usually result in miss-feeds.
Twin loop Looped wire element that is fed into square or round holes in the document in a similar fashion to Plastic
Binding. The holes are either 2:1 or 3:1 (2 holes per inch or 3 holes per inch). It is then squeezed together
or crimped to create an attractive bind that is holizontally flat.
Velobind A heat seal plastic bind that is best known for its security and attractive look. The one draw-back for
VeloBind is that it is not a layflat bind style. It is most often used in the Legal market for its security feature.
C-78
38. GP-502
38.1 Type
Type Automatic Ring Binding Device (Ring Binder)
38.2 Functions
(1) Function
Bind mode Automatically punches and binds papers exited from the previous device and stocks in a book stock
section.
Through conveyance mode Conveys papers exited from the previous device to the succeeding device without any process.
(2) Binding sheets

Front cover (g/m2) Back cover (g/m2) Body weight (g/m2) Minimum (sheets) Maximum (sheets)
75 102
80 96
90 85
Sheet 163 to 216 or OHP 163 to 216 1 sheet 100 7 76
paper: 1 sheet
110 70
120 64
(3) Book stock quantity

The full detection sensor detects the limits of the stock quantity. For the 75g/m2 body and the 216g/m2 front cover, refer to the followings.
7 sheets book Equivalent to the 30 sheets book
or until the upper limit is detected
(4) Others
Punch waste capacity Approximately 2,000 punches
*Detected by the full detection sensor and the punch conter
Element stacker Minimum 16 sheets
*Detected by the full detection sensor
Maximum Approximately 100 sheets
*Defined by the position of the label
38.3 Type of paper

(1) Paper size
Bind mode A4, 81/2 x 11
Requirements for the tab paper
a: Minimum: 5mm
b: Maximum: 13.5mm
b: R Minimum: 4.8mm
[1] [2]
[1] Tab paper with a shoulder: available

[2] Tab paper with no shoulder: unavailable
Through conveyance mode Same as the main body.
C-79
(2) Paper weight

Bind mode Body 75g/m2 to 120g/m2
Cover 163g/m2 to 216g/m2
OHP paper (front cover only)
Insert sheet 75g/m2 to 120g/m2
(3) Type of paper

Bind mode Body Plain, Fine, Coated*1
Cover Plain, Fine, Coated*1, OHP papers*2
Insert sheet Plain, Fine, Coated
*1 Only when it is connected to 1250/1250P/1052
*2 Front cover only. The paper feeding reliability, image, and damage are not assured. Q zone only.
(4) Recommended paper

Paper type Product name Weight Bind mode
Mono Color
Book Cover Book Cover
Inch Bond Hammermill 120g/m2 - - A -
Color Copy
Paper - Photo
White
Hammermill 75g/m2 A - A -
Tidal MP
Hammermill 75g/m2 A - - -
Fore MP
Gloss Wausau Exact 215g/m2 - A - -
Gloss Coated
(CIS)
Hammermill 120g/m2 - - A -
Color Copy
Glossy
Color paper Hammermill 163g/m2 - - - A
Color Copy
Cover 216g/m2 - - - A
Transparency 3M CG3700 - B - B
Metric Business Konicaminolta 80g/m2 A - A -
Original
Konicaminolta 80g/m2 A - A -
Profi
Mondi BIO TOP 80g/m2 A - - -
3 extra
Color paper Mondi Color 100g/m2 - - A -
Copy
120g/m2 - - A -
200g/m2 - A - A
Coated Mondi Color 170g/m2 - - - A
Copy Coated
Glossy
Transparency 3M CG3700 - B - B
* Recommended paper A: Evaluation standard paper for Japan, North America and Europe
Recommended paper B: Paper for original through check. Q zone is recommended
38.4 Performance Specifications

(1) Input conditions
Paper grain No limitation
Centering ±8mm around the center
C-80
Paper curl amount

C
a In the bind mode, 10mm or less

In the through conveyance mode, 15mm or less
(2) Sticking specifications

Sticking specifications Peeling strength of the bind element: 8.9N or more
Sticking accuracy
a Finger skew: ±1.6mm

Sticking length Length: 10 steps in accordance with the book thickness
Step Sticking length x Step Sticking
(mm) length x
(mm)
1 38.6 6 25.4
2 36.8 7 22.6
3 34.0 8 19.9
4 30.9 9 16.7
5 28.5 10 15.8
X±1.8 mm X±1.8 mm
The variability among the sticking lengths in each step: x ±1.8mm
C-81
a The variability among the sticking lengths in a single book (The

variability between 9 elements): 5mm or less
(3) Book specifications

Hole position Position
㩷
3.6mm
Paper center
2.3mm
15.7mm 15.5mm
Hole position misalignment
D D
C
C
Paper center
Sub scan direction a: ±0.5 mm or less

Main scan direction b: ±1.5mm or less
Hole quality
Unacceptable-Protuberance too wide
Acceptable-Protuberance
Acceptable-Paper Fiber 1.5mm

3mm
1.0mm
0.38mm
C Zone B Zone A Zone
Unacceptable-Protuberance too long
Acceptable-Fuzziness
A Zone: Unacceptable. But paper fiber is acceptable.

B Zone: Regardless of 1.5mm or less in width.
C Zone: Regardless.
Element damage Grain damage Regardless of the grain damage such as the scratches by the nail.
Edge damage Regardless of 1.0mm x 1.0mm or less in size, and 1.0mm or less in height.
Hole damage (Back Dent of 0.6mm to 0.9mm in Regardless of 100 dents or less for 1 Box
side only) diameter
Dent of 1.0mm or more in diameter Regardless of 1 dent or less for 1 Box
38.5 Materials
Name RB-101 (Ring binder element for GP-502)
Type GBC ellips
Color 4 Colors
Black: WY1, Clear: WY2, White: WY3, Navy Blue: WY4
Thickness 0.36 to 0.43 mm (Base material only)
Service life 1 year after manufacture. Only for the ones that are saved under the following conditions.
Storage ambient condition: Temperature: 12°C to 32°C, Humidity: 25% to 80%
Transportation ambient condition: Temperature: 0°C to 70°C, Humidity: 0% to 90%
Percent defective 2/1000 sheets
* The incidence ratio about
double-stick tape trouble
C-82
38.6 Machine data

Power source Inch: AC 115V, 60Hz
Metric: AC 230V, 50Hz
Maximum power consumption Inch: 200W or less (2.2A or less)
Metric: 190W or less (0.98A or less)
Weight 183kg
Dimensions 655 (W) x 944 (D*1) x 1,020 (H) mm
*1 Including the power box.


Note
C-83
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
D OVERALL COMPOSITION
1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
1.1 System configuration (C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060)
Note
• This section shows the example of the connection destination of each option.
For the optional device configuration, refer to "D.1.3 Configuration for optional device (C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060)".
[36] [48]
[47]
[46]
[35]
[32]
[34]
[14]
[45]
[9]
[13] [10]
[33] [12]
[11]
[20]
[22]
[44]
[23] [38]
[15] [37]
[2]
[25] [24]
[39]
[3]
[16]
[4]
[40]
[31] [1]
[30]
[5]
[28] [41]
[6]
[42]
[17]
[7]
[20]
[19]
[29]
[8]
[18]
[43]
[20]
[19]
[21]
[27]
[26]
[1] Main body [2] Dehumidifier heater (HT-503)

[3] Large capacity paper feed unit (LU-202) [4] Large capacity paper feed unit (PF-602m) *1
[5] Dehumidifier heater (HT-504) [6] Multi bypass paper feed unit (MB-506)
[7] Large capacity paper feed unit (PF-707)*1 [8] Dehumidifier heater (HT-506)
[9] Video interface kit (VI-507) [10] Upgrade kit (UK-104)
[11] Upgrade kit (UK-207) [12] Image controller (IC-308)
D-1
[13] Image controller (IC-602A)*2 [14] Image controller (IC-415)

Image controller (IC-602B)*3
[15] Output tray (OT-502) [16] Relay conveyance unit (RU-509)
[17] Humidification unit (HM-102) [18] Finisher (Flat stitch type) (FS-531)
[19] Punch kit (PK-512, PK-513) [20] Post inserter (PI-502)
[21] Finisher (Saddle stitch type) (FS-612) [22] Finisher (Flat stitch type) (FS-532)
[23] PI-502 coupling conveyance kit (MK-732) [24] Punch kit (PK-522)
[25] Saddle stitch unit (SD-510) [26] Perfect binder (PB-503)
[27] Saddle stitch unit (SD-506) [28] Large capacity stacker handcart (LC-501)
[29] Large capacity stacker (LS-505) [30] Large capacity stacker (LS-506)
[31] Folding unit (FD-503) [32] Multi-hole punch unit (GP-501)
[33] Die set (DS-***) *4 [34] Relay conveyance unit (RU-510)
[35] Ring binder element (RB-101) [36] Smart Punch unit (GP-502)
[37] Original cover (OC-509) *5 [38] Reverse automatic document feeder (DF-626) *5
[39] Card authentication unit (AU-201/AU-201S), key counter [40] Working table (WT-511) *1
[41] Dehumidifier heater (HT-511) [42] Envelope fusing unit (EF-103)
[43] Electric charge control unit (RU-516) [44] Electric charge control unit (RU-517)
[45] Creaser unit (CR-101) [46] Saddle stitch unit (SD-513)
[47] Folding unit (FD-504) [48] Trimmer unit (TU-503)
*1 The WT-511 can not be installed when you connect the PF-602m and the PF-707.
*2 The IC-602A can be installed for C1070, C1060.
*3 The IC-602B can be installed for C1070P, C71hc.
*4 Selectable arbitrarily in accordance with the number and shape of pins.
Model Paper size The number of pins Shape of pin
DS-501 81/2 x 11 3 Round
DS-502 81/2 x 11 19 Rectangle
DS-503 81/2 x 11 32 Square
DS-504 81/2 x 11 21 Rectangle
DS-505 81/2 x 11 44 Round
DS-506 81/2 x 11 11 Round
DS-507 81/2 x 11 32 Rect.
DS-508 A4 4 Round
DS-509 A4 21 Rectangle
DS-510 A4 34 Round
DS-511 A4 23 Round
DS-512 A4 47 Round
DS-513 A4 12 Round
DS-514 A4 34 Rect.
DS-515 A4 2 Round
DS-516 A4 20 Rectangle
DS-517 A4 23 Square
DS-518 A4 34 Square
*5 Select one of OC-509 or DF-626. However, it is not for C1070P/C71hc since it does not have a scanner and the DF function.
1.2 System configuration when installing MK-740 (C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060)

Note
• This section shows the example of the connection destination of each option when installing MK-740.
For the optional device configuration, refer to "D.1.3 Configuration for optional device (C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060)".
D-2
[23] [24]
[20]
[21] [22] [3]
[2]
[18] [25]
[15]
[4]
[17] [26]
[5]
[19]
[1]
[18]
[12]
[14] [11]
[6]
[17] [10] [7]
[9]
[13] [8]
[16]
[1] Main body [2] Multi bypass paper feed unit (MB-506)
[3] Banner tray unit (MK-740) (Paper feed side) [4] Dehumidifier heater (HT-503)
[5] Large capacity paper feed unit (LU-202) [6] Video interface kit (VI-507)
[7] Upgrade kit (UK-104) [8] Upgrade kit (UK-207)
[9] Image controller (IC-308) [10] Image controller (IC-602A) *1
Image controller (IC-602B) *2
[11] Image controller (IC-415) [12] Dehumidifier heater (HT-511)
[13] Electric charge control unit (RU-516) [14] Humidification unit (HM-102)
[15] Relay conveyance unit (RU-509) [16] Finisher (Saddle stitch type) (FS-612)
[17] Punch kit (PK-512, PK-513) [18] Post inserter (PI-502)
[19] Finisher (Flat stitch type) (FS-531) [20] Banner tray unit (MK-740) (Paper exit side)
[21] Output tray (OT-502) [22] Electric charge control unit (RU-517)
[25] Card authentication unit (AU-201/AU-201S), key counter [26] Working table (WT-511)
*1 The IC-602A can be installed for C1070, C1060.
*2 The IC-602B can be installed for C1070P, C71hc.
*3 Select one of OC-509 or DF-626. However, it is not for C1070P/C71hc since it does not have a scanner and the DF function.
1.3 Configuration for optional device (C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060)

Note
• The combination except as mentioned in the following is prohibited.
• IC-308/415/602 are available with all combinations.
• The options can be connected each other. However, be sure to be careful of the AC connection mode.
• RU-510 has to be connected for connecting GP-501.
• When you use the EF-103, refer to the “C.12.2 Functions” for the available options.
• The connection to RU-516 or RU-517 is optional but strongly recommended.
1.3.1 Coupling combination of the main body and the paper feed option
Coupling combination of the main body and the paper feed option AC power to be connected to
1 MB-506*4 Main body -
2 LU-202*1 Main body -
3 PF-602m*2 Main body -
4 PF-707*3 Main body External (PF-707)
5 LU-202*1 MB-506*4 Main body -
6 No paper feed option Main body -
*1 HT-503 can be connected arbitrarily to LU-202.
*2 HT-504 can be connected arbitrarily to PF-602m.
*3 HT-506 can be connected arbitrarily to PF-707.
*4 MK-740 (paper feed side) can be connected arbitrarily to MB-506.
D-3
1.3.2 Coupling combination of the main body and the finisher option
Coupling combination of the main body and the finisher option AC power to be
connected to
1 Main body*7 RU-509*1 FD-503 LS-505/LS-506 External (RU-509/

FD-503/LS-505/LS-506)
2 Main body*7 RU-509*1 FD-503 LS-505/LS-506 FS-532*2 External (RU-509/

FD-503/LS-505/LS-506)
3 Main body*7 RU-509*1 FD-503 SD-506 External (RU-509/

FD-503)
4 Main body*7 RU-509*1 FD-503 SD-513*10 External (RU-509/

FD-503/SD-513)
5 Main body*7 RU-509*1 FD-503 SD-506 PB-503 External (RU-509/

FD-503/PB-503)
6 Main body*7 RU-509*1 FD-503 SD-513*10 PB-503 External (RU-509/

FD-503/SD-513/PB-503)
7 Main body*7 RU-509*1 FD-503 SD-506 PB-503 FS-532 External (RU-509/

FD-503/PB-503)
8 Main body*7 RU-509*1 FD-503 SD-513*10 PB-503 FS-532 External (RU-509/

FD-503/SD-513/PB-503)
9 Main body*7 RU-509*1 FD-503 SD-506 FS-532 External (RU-509/

FD-503)
10 Main body*7 RU-509*1 FD-503 SD-513*10 FS-532 External (RU-509/

FD-503/SD-513)
11 Main body*7 RU-509*1 FD-503 PB-503 FS-532*2 External (RU-509/

FD-503/PB-503)
12 Main body*7 RU-509*1 FD-503 PB-503 External (RU-509/

FD-503/PB-503)
13 Main body*7 RU-509*1 FD-503 FS-532*2 External (RU-509/

FD-503)
14 Main body*7 RU-509*1 FD-503 External (RU-509/

FD-503)
Main body*7 RU-509*1 FD-503 LS-505/LS-506 SD-506 External (RU-509/
15 FD-503/LS-505/LS-506/
SD-506)
Main body*7 RU-509*1 FD-503 LS-505/LS-506 SD-513*10 External (RU-509/
16 FD-503/LS-505/LS-506/
SD-513)
Main body*7 RU-509*1 FD-503 LS-505/LS-506 PB-503 External (RU-509/
17 FD-503/LS-505/LS-506/
PB-503)
18*6 Main body*7 RU-509*1 FD-503 LS-505/LS-506 LS-505/LS-506 External (RU-509/

FD-503/LS-505/LS-506)
19 Main body*7 RU-509*1 LS-505/LS-506 External (RU-509/

LS-505/LS-506)
20 Main body*7 RU-509*1 LS-505/LS-506 SD-506 External (RU-509/

LS-505/LS-506/SD-506)
21 Main body*7 RU-509*1 LS-505/LS-506 SD-513*10 External (RU-509/

LS-505/LS-506/SD-513)
22 Main body*7 RU-509*1 LS-505/LS-506 FS-532*3 External (RU-509/

LS-505/LS-506)
23 Main body*7 RU-509*1 LS-505/LS-506 PB-503 External (RU-509/

LS-505/LS-506/PB-503)
24 Main body*7 RU-509*1 LS-505/LS-506 SD-506 FS-532*4 External (RU-509/

LS-505/LS-506/SD-506)
25 Main body*7 RU-509*1 LS-505/LS-506 SD-513*10 FS-532*4 External (RU-509/

LS-505/LS-506/SD-513)
Main body*7 RU-509*1 LS-505/LS-506 SD-506 PB-503 External (RU-509/
26 LS-505/LS-506/SD-506/
PB-503)
Main body*7 RU-509*1 LS-505/LS-506 SD-513*10 PB-503 External (RU-509/
27 LS-505/LS-506/SD-513/
PB-503)
28 Main body*7 RU-509*1 LS-505/LS-506 PB-503 FS-532*3 External (RU-509/

LS-505/LS-506/PB-503)
29*6 Main body*7 RU-509*1 LS-505/LS-506 LS-505/LS-506 External (RU-509/

LS-505/LS-506)
30*6 Main body*7 RU-509*1 LS-505/LS-506 LS-505/LS-506 SD-506 External (RU-509/

LS-505/LS-506/SD-506)
D-4
31 Main body*7 RU-509*1 LS-505/LS-506 LS-505/LS-506 SD-513*10 External (RU-509/

LS-505/LS-506/SD-513)
32*6 Main body*7 RU-509*1 LS-505/LS-506 LS-505/LS-506 FS-532*3 External (RU-509/

LS-505/LS-506)
33*6 Main body*7 RU-509*1 LS-505/LS-506 LS-505/LS-506 PB-503 External (RU-509/

LS-505/LS-506/PB-503)
34 Main body*7 RU-509*1 SD-506 External (RU-509/

SD-506)
35 Main body*7 RU-509*1 SD-513*10 External (RU-509/

SD-513)
36 Main body*7 RU-509*1 SD-506 FS-532*4 External (RU-509/

SD-506)
37 Main body*7 RU-509*1 SD-513*10 FS-532*4 External (RU-509/

SD-513)
38 Main body*7 RU-509*1 SD-506 PB-503 External (RU-509/

SD-506/PB-503)
39 Main body*7 RU-509*1 SD-513*10 PB-503 External (RU-509/

SD-513/PB-503)
40 Main body*7 RU-509*1 SD-506 PB-503 FS-532*4 External (RU-509/

SD-506/PB-503)
41 Main body*7 RU-509*1 SD-513*10 PB-503 FS-532*4 External (RU-509/

SD-513/PB-503)
42 Main body*7 RU-509*1 PB-503 External (RU-509/

PB-503)
43 Main body*7 RU-509*1 PB-503 FS-532*3 External (RU-509/

PB-503)
44 Main body*7 RU-509*1 FS-532 External (RU-509)
45 Main body*7 RU-509*1 GP-501 RU-510 FS-532*3 External (RU-509/

GP-501)
46 Main body*7 RU-509*1 GP-501 RU-510 FD-503 FS-532*2 External (RU-509/

GP-501/FD-503)
47 Main body*7 RU-509*1 GP-501 RU-510 FD-503 SD-506 FS-532 External (RU-509/
GP-501/FD-503)
48 Main body*7 RU-509*1 GP-501 RU-510 FD-503 SD-513*10 FS-532 External (RU-509/
GP-501/FD-503/SD-513)
49 Main body*7 RU-509*1 GP-501 RU-510 SD-506 FS-532*4 External (RU-509/

GP-501/SD-506)
50 Main body*7 RU-509*1 GP-501 RU-510 SD-513*10 FS-532*4 External (RU-509/

GP-501/SD-513)
51 Main body*7 RU-509*1 GP-501 RU-510 LS-505/LS-506 FS-532*3 External (RU-509/

GP-501/LS-505/LS-506)
Main body*7 RU-509*1 GP-501 RU-510 LS-505/LS-506 PB-503 External (RU-509/
52 GP-501/LS-505/LS-506/
PB-503)
Main body*7 RU-509*1 GP-501 RU-510 LS-505/LS-506 SD-506 External (RU-509/
53 GP-501/LS-505/LS-506/
SD-506)
Main body*7 RU-509*1 GP-501 RU-510 LS-505/LS-506 SD-513*10 External (RU-509/
54 GP-501/LS-505/LS-506/
SD-513)
55 Main body*7 RU-509*1 GP-501 RU-510 PB-503 External (RU-509/

GP-501/PB-503)
56 Main body*7 RU-509*1 GP-501 RU-510 PB-503 FS-532*3 External (RU-509/

GP-501/PB-503)
57 Main body*7 RU-509*1 GP-502 FS-532*3 External (RU-509/

GP-502)
58 Main body*7 RU-509*1 GP-502 FD-503 FS-532*2 External (RU-509/

GP-502/FD-503)
59 Main body*7 RU-509*1 GP-502 SD-506 FS-532*4 External (RU-509/

GP-502/SD-506)
60 Main body*7 RU-509*1 GP-502 SD-513*10 FS-532*4 External (RU-509/

GP-502/SD-513)
61 Main body*7 RU-509*1 GP-502 LS-505/LS-506 FS-532*3 External (RU-509/

GP-502/LS-505/LS-506)
Main body*7 RU-509*1 GP-502 LS-505/LS-506 PB-503 External (RU-509/
62 GP-502/LS-505/LS-506/
PB-503)
D-5
Main body*7 RU-509*1 GP-502 LS-505/LS-506 SD-506 External (RU-509/

63 GP-502/LS-505/LS-506/
SD-506)
Main body*7 RU-509*1 GP-502 LS-505/LS-506 SD-513*10 External (RU-509/
64 GP-502/LS-505/LS-506/
SD-513)
65 Main body*7 RU-509*1 GP-502 PB-503 External (RU-509/

GP-502/PB-503)
66 Main body*7 RU-509*1 GP-502 PB-503 FS-532*3 External (RU-509/

GP-502/PB-503)
67 Main body*7 RU-509*1 GP-502 FD-503 SD-506 FS-532 External (RU-509/

GP-502/FD-503)
68 Main body*7 RU-509*1 GP-502 FD-503 SD-513*10 FS-532 External (RU-509/

GP-502/FD-503/SD-513)
69 Main body*7 RU-509*1 FD-503 SD-506 GP-502 FS-532 External (RU-509/

GP-502/FD-503)
70 Main body*7 RU-509*1 FD-503 SD-513*10 GP-502 FS-532 External (RU-509/

GP-502/FD-503/SD-513)
Main body*7 RU-509*1 FD-503 LS-505/LS-506 GP-502 FS-532*2 External (RU-509/
71 GP-502/FD-503/LS-505/
LS-506)
72 Main body*7 RU-509*1 FS-531*5*9 External (RU-509)
73 Main body*7 RU-509*1 FS-612*5*9 External (RU-509)
74 Main body*7 FS-531*5*9 -
75 Main body*7 FS-612*5*9 -
76 Main body*8 OT-502*9 -
*1 HM-102 can be connected arbitrarily to RU-509.

*2 SD-510 can be connected arbitrarily to FS-532.
*3 SD-510, PK-522 or PI-502+MK732 can be connected arbitrarily to FS-532.
*4 PK-522 or PI-502+MK732 can be connected arbitrarily to FS-532.
*5 PI-502 and PK-512/513 can be connected arbitrarily to FS-531 and FS-612.
*6 The combination LS-505+LS-506 is unavailable. The combination must be LS-505+LS-505 or LS-506+LS506.
*7 RU-516 can be connected arbitrarily to Main body.
*9 MK-740 (paper exit side) can be connected arbitrarily to FS-531, FS-612 and OT-502.
*10 FD-504, TU-503, or CR-101 can be connected arbitrarily to SD-513.
1.3.3 Combination of the main body and the image controller (IC) option
Combination of the main body and the IC option AC power to be connected
to
1 Main body IC-602*1 - - - -
2 Main body IC-602*1 UK-104 - - -
3 Main body IC-602*1 UK-104 UK-207 - -

4 Main body IC-415 VI-507 - - External (IC-415)
5 Main body IC-308 VI-507 - - External (IC-308)
*1 If the IC option is connected to C1070/C1060, install IC-602A. If the IC option is connected to C1070P/C71hc, install IC-602B.
1.4 System configuration (C1060L)

Note
• For the optional device configuration, refer to "D.1.5 Configuration for optional device (C1060L)".
D-6
[15] [16]
[13]
[14] [17]
[18] [2] [3]

[10]
[4]
[9] [19]
[12] [5]
[1]
[10]
[20] [8]
[22]
[6]
[9] [7]
[11]
[1] Main body [2] Multi bypass paper feed unit (MB-506)
[3] Banner tray unit (MK-740) (Paper feed side) [4] Dehumidifier heater (HT-503)
[5] Large capacity paper feed unit (LU-202) [6] Video interface kit (VI-507)
[7] Image controller (IC-602A) [8] Image controller (IC-415)
[9] Punch kit (PK-512, 513) [10] Post inserter (PI-502)
[11] Finisher (Saddle stitch type) (FS-612) [12] Finisher (Flat stitch type) (FS-531)
[13] Banner tray unit (MK-740) (Paper exit side) [14] Output tray (OT-502)
[17] Electric charge control unit (RU-517) [18] Card authentication unit (AU-201/AU-201S), key counter
[19] Working table (WT-511) [20] Dehumidifier heater (HT-511)
[21] Electric charge control unit (RU-516) -
*1 Select one of OC-509 or DF-626.
1.5 Configuration for optional device (C1060L)

Note
• The combination except as mentioned in the following is prohibited.
• IC-602 and IC-415 are available with all combinations.
• The connection to RU-516 or RU-517 is optional but strongly recommended.
1.5.1 Coupling combination of the main body and the paper feed option
Coupling combination of the main body and the paper feed option AC power to be connected to
1 MB-506*2 Main body -
2 LU-202*1 Main body -
3 LU-202*1 MB-506*2 Main body -
4 No paper feed option Main body -
*1 HT-503 can be connected arbitrarily to LU-202.
*2 MK-740 (paper feed side) can be connected arbitrarily to MB-506.
1.5.2 Coupling combination of the main body and the finisher option
Coupling combination of the main body and the finisher option AC power to be connected
to
1 Main body*3 OT-502*4 -
2 Main body*2 FS-531*1*4 -
3 Main body*2 FS-612*1*4 -
*1 PK-512, 513 and PI-502 can be connected arbitrarily to FS-531 and FS-612.
*4 MK-740 (paper exit side) can be connected arbitrarily to FS-531, FS-612 and OT-502.
D-7
1.5.3 Combination of the main body and the image controller (IC) option
Combination of the main body and the IC option AC power to be connected
to
1 Main body IC-602A - -
2 Main body IC-415 VI-507 External (IC-415)
D-8
D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 2. MAIN BODY UNIT
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L CONFIGURATION
2. MAIN BODY UNIT CONFIGURATION
[19]
[17] [18]
[16]
[15]
[1]
[14] [2]
[3]
[4]
[13] [5]
[6]
[7]
[12] [11] [10] [9] [8]

[1] Scanner section [2] Toner supply section
[3] Write section [4] Developing section
[5] MB-506 (Option) [6] Duplex section
[7] Vertical conveyance section [8] Charging section
[9] Paper feed section [10] Registration section
[11] 2nd transfer section [12] Toner collection section
[13] Reverse and exit section [14] OT-502 (option)
[15] Fusing section [16] Intermediate transfer section
[17] DF-626 (option) [18] Photo conductor section
[19] Operation panel section -
D-9
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 3. PAPER PATH
3. PAPER PATH
3.1 Straight paper exit mode
[8]
[1]
[2]
[7]
[3]
[6] [4]
[5]
[1] Paper feed (common) [2] Bypass tray paper feed

[3] PF paper feed, LU paper feed [4] Vertical conveyance
[5] Tray 2 paper feed [6] Tray 1 paper feed
[7] Paper exit [8] Transfer and fusing conveyance
D-10
3.2 Reversing exit mode
[10]
[1]
[2]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[3]
[6] [4]
[5]

[7] Reversing conveyance [8] Reversal Output
[9] Paper exit [10] -
D-11
3.3 Duplex mode
[10] [11]
[12]
[1]
[9] [2]
[8]
[7] [3]
[6] [4]
[5]

[7] Reversing conveyance/1 [8] Reversing conveyance/2
[9] Paper exit [10] Straight paper exit
[11] Transfer and fusing conveyance [12] ADU conveyance
D-12
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 4. CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM
4. CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM
CCDB Serial USB LAN

I/F I/F I/F
SCIPB NRB
M PS HDD OB RBU HDD
SCDB PRIPB OACB

RU
IC FM
DF
FS FS FD LS SD PB GP GP
DCPS
Write
RU
FUSCB Section PF LU
(EU only) M FM CL SD PS
PRCB
Fusing Unit CDB DDB HV
M FM CL SD PS MB M
[6] [5] [4] [3] [2] [1]
[1] SATA [2] Individual signal line

[3] Other bus [4] UART bus
[5] Clock-synchronized serial bus [6] Image bus
Board name Purpose of board ISW target
Overall control board (OACB) Overall condition control Target
Scanner image processing board (SCIPB) Image processing control for the scanner Target
Printer image processing board (PRIPB) Image processing control for writing Non-target
Printer control board (PRCB) Load control of such as motor, fan, clutch, solenoid and sensor Target
D-13
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 5. IMAGE CREATION PROCESS
5. IMAGE CREATION PROCESS

5.1 Image creation flow and functions
Step Process Function
Step 1 Charging process Forms a charge layer on the photo conductor drum.
Step 2 Laser exposure process Forms an electrostatic latent image on the photo
conductor drum.
Step 3 Developing process Makes the electrostatic latent image to the visible image.
Step 4 Intermediate transfer process Combine the monochromatic (YMCK) visible image on
each photo conductor drum on the transfer belt to form
an image.
Step 5 2nd transfer process Transfers the image on the transfer belt to paper.
Step 6 Separation process Separates paper after the toner transfer from the
transfer belt.
Sub step 1 Drum cleaning Removes the toner on the photo conductor drum after
the intermediate transfer.
Sub step 2 Exposure before charge Removes the potential remains on the photo conductor
drum after the drum cleaning.
Sub step 3 Transfer belt cleaning Removes the toner on the intermediate transfer belt
after the 2nd transfer.
Sub step 4 2nd transfer roller/Lw cleaning Removes the toner on the 2nd transfer roller/Lw after
the 2nd transfer.
Sub step 5 Toner collection Collect the toner that is removed by the drum cleaning
and transfer belt cleaning. (Not displayed in the following
picture.) )
[11] [1]
Step 3
Sub step 3 [2]
[12] [4][3] Step 2
Step 4
Step 1
Sub step 1
[10]
Sub step 2
[9]
[8]
Step 6 [5]
[6]
[7] Step 5 / Sub step 4
[1] Developing unit [2] Writing unit

[3] Charging corona [4] Erase lamp (EL)
[5] Paper [6] 2nd transfer roller/Lw
[7] Discharge section [8] 2nd transfer roller/Up
[9] Transfer belt [10] Blade (drum cleaning)
[11] Blade (Transfer belt cleaning) [12] Drum
5.2 Charging process (Step 1)

Applies the high DC voltage (negative) to the charging corona with the gold coated tungsten wire. Then, discharges the wire to charge the
negative charge to the drum. The charging corona has the charger plate, and it makes the charge on the surface of the drum even. The
photoconductor is prepared for 4 colors (YMCK).
[1]
[2]
[4] [3]
[1] Drum [2] Charge (negative)
D-14
[3] Charging corona [4] Charging plate
5.3 Laser exposure process (Step2)

The charge on the photo conductor drum has a characteristic that it is neutralized and disappears when the light is exposed. With this
characteristic, exposes the laser beam to the image area to create an image on the photo conductor drum. This image is called an electrostatic
latent image. The laser beam which is exposed to each of the YMCK drum corresponds to the color data disassembled into 4 at the image
processing section.
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1] Writing unit [2] Laser beam
[3] Neutralized section [4] Charge (negative)
5.4 Developing process (Step 3)

The non-image points of the electrostatic latent image on the drum is charged negatively while the image points are neutralized. As the toner is
negatively charged, it is attracted to the image points on the drum. As a result, a visible toner image is created on the drum. This operation is
referred to as "development."
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[1] Developing roller [2] Drum

[3] Charge (negative) [4] Toner (negative)
5.5 Intermediate transfer process (Step 4)

The toner on each of the Y, M, C and K photoconductor drums are transferred to the intermediate transfer belt and composed on it. This toner
transfer from the drums to the intermediate belt is referred to as "intermediate transfer" (1st transfer) and it is performed in order of Y, M, C, K.
At the intermediate transfer, a positive high DC voltage bias is applied to the 1st transfer roller that is provided on the back surface of the
intermediate transfer belt. This process makes the intermediate transfer belt surface have a positive potential higher than the potential of the
each drum surface so that the toner on the drums are attracted to the transfer belt.
D-15
[3] [4] [5]
[2]
[1]
[8] [5]
[7]
[6]
[1] Drum/Y [2] 1st transfer roller/Y

[3] Transfer belt [4] Toner/Y
[5] Charge (negative) [6] Drum/M
[7] 1st transfer roller/M [8] Toner/M
5.6 2nd transfer process (Step 5)

The operation to transfer the image that is composed of four colors on the transfer belt to the paper is referred to as 2nd transfer. At the 2nd
transfer, the 2nd transfer roller/Lw which is mounted on the bottom side of the transfer belt conveys the paper while it is pressed against the
transfer belt. At this time, the 2nd transfer roller/Up on the back side of the transfer belt is applied a DC bias (negative) at high voltage, and the
electric field is produced between the 2nd transfer roller/Up and the 2nd transfer roller/Lw mounted inside the 2nd transfer belt. It moves the
toner on the transfer belt onto the paper.
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[1] Transfer belt [2] Paper
[3] 2nd transfer roller/Lw [4] 2nd transfer roller/Up
5.7 Separation process (Step 6)

At the 2nd transfer, the 2nd transfer roller/Up negatively charges the paper on which is being transferred. It causes the paper and the
intermediate transfer belt to attract each other and the paper sticks to the intermediate transfer belt. The operation to separate that absorbed
paper is referred to as "separation."
Apply the AC and DC biases at high voltage to the discharge section to perform the separation. This operation neutralizes the charges of the
paper and the intermediate transfer belt.
D-16
[1]
[2]
[4] [3]
[1] Transfer belt [2] Paper
[3] 2nd transfer roller/Lw [4] Discharge section
5.8 Drum cleaning (Sub step 1)

After the intermediate transfer, a small amount of the toner remains on the drum. The process to remove that toner is referred to as "drum
cleaning."
To conduct the drum cleaning, scrap the toner adhering to the drum with the edge of the urethane rubber plate which is called blade.
[3] [1]
[2]
[1] Drum [2] Cleaning blade
[3] Remaining toner -
5.9 Exposure before the charge (Sub step 2)

After completion of drum cleaning, no toner remains but a subtle potential remains on the drum surface. With this condition, the charging for the
next print is not performed normally. Therefore, the exposure which is different from the laser exposure is performed to neutralize the potential
on the drum surface completely. This process is referred to as "exposure before charging."
This machine uses the erase lamp (EL) for this process.
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1] Drum [2] Erase lamp (EL)
[3] Remaining electric charge -
5.10 Transfer belt cleaning (Sub step 3)

After the 2nd transfer, a small amount of the toner remains on the transfer belt. The process to remove that the toner is the transfer belt
cleaning.
The transfer belt cleaning is conducted in the following way: The edge of the urethane rubber plate, which is called blade, scrapes the toner that
is attached on the transfer belt surface.
D-17
[3] [1]
[2]
[1] Transfer belt [2] Remaining toner

[3] Cleaning blade -
5.11 2nd transfer roller/Lw cleaning (Sub step 4)

The 2nd transfer roller/Lw get dirty because the toner on the transfer belt contacts it directly.
For this reason, high voltage positive and negative DC biases are applied to the 2nd transfer roller/Up one after the other to move the toner on
the 2nd transfer roller/Lw to the transfer belt side. The transfer belt cleaning that is described on the preceding paragraph cleans the toner which
is moved to the transfer belt.
[1]
[3]
[2]
[5] [4]
[1] Transfer belt [2] 2nd transfer roller/Lw
[3] 2nd transfer roller/Up [4] When the DC bias (positive) is applied
[5] When the DC bias (negative) is applied -
5.12 Toner collection (Sub step 5)

The toner that is cleaned at the drum cleaning section and the transfer belt cleaning and the toner that is exited from the developing unit are
collected in the waste toner box via the belt collection pipe, the vertical pipe/1, the vertical pipe/2, the vertical pipe/3 and the horizontal
conveyance pipe.
D-18
[15]
[1]
[2]
[14] [3]
[13] [4]
[12]
[11] [5]
[6]
[10] [8] [7]
[9]
[1] Developing unit/Y waste toner entrance [2] Belt collection pipe
[3] Developing unit/M waste toner entrance [4] Developing unit/C waste toner entrance
[5] Developing unit/K waste toner entrance [6] Horizontal conveyance pipe
[7] Vertical conveyance pipe/1 [8] Vertical conveyance pipe/2
[9] Waste toner box [10] Vertical conveyance pipe/3
[11] Drum/K waste toner inlet [12] Drum/C waste toner inlet
[13] Drum/M waste toner inlet [14] Drum/Y waste toner inlet
[15] Belt waste toner inlet -
D-19
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 6. IMAGE CREATION CONTROL
6. IMAGE CREATION CONTROL

• The image creation is conducted in the order of yellow, magenta, cyan, and black, but the start of the image creation control is when the
drum motor/K (M4) becomes active [1].
• After M4 becomes active, the drum motor/Y (M1) [2], the drum motor/M (M2) [3], the drum motor/C (M3) [4] become active in this order.
• The timing when the developing motor, the erase lamp, the charging corona, the development bias (DC), and the 1st transfer of each color
become active is when each drum motor becomes active.
• The timing when the writing operation becomes active [9] is based on the timing when the charging corona becomes active [5]. The writing
operation becomes active after the drum is rotated for more than one circle for charging.
• The timing when the writing operation becomes active [9] or inactive [10] is based on the ON or OFF timing of the developing bias (AC).
• The timing when the last writing operation becomes inactive [11] is based on the timing when the drum motor and the developing motor and
the erase lamp become inactive.
• These operations are performed in the order of yellow, magenta, cyan, black, and an image is created on each drum.
• While the image is created to each drum, the 1st transfer pressure release motor (M10) and the 2nd transfer pressure release motor (M38)
becomes active after M4 becomes active.
• When M10 presses the transfer belt to the full color position, the base signal for the 2nd transfer V_TOP is output [6].
• The pressure of the transfer belt performs the intermediate transfer (1st transfer) from each drum to the transfer belt in the order.
• The separation (HV2) becomes active [7] after a specified time since the base signal V_TOP becomes active.
• After another specified time, the 2nd transfer (HV2) becomes active [8] and the 2nd transfer from the transfer belt to the paper is performed.
• When a specified period of time elapses after the last sheet passes through the 2nd transfer roller/Lw, 2nd transfer (HV2) and the
separation (HV2) becomes inactive [12] to complete the 2nd transfer operation.
• The timing when the separation (HV2) becomes inactive is based on the timing when the charging corona of each color, developing bias
(DC), and 1st transfer become inactive. The timing when the separation (HV2) becomes inactive is also based on the timing when the
pressure of M10 and M38 released.
• When the charging corona or 1st transfer or the developing bias (DC) becomes inactive, each of them becomes inactive regardless of their
color.
D-20
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [9] [10] [11]
Drum motor/Y (M1)
Developing motor/Y (M5)
Erase lamp/Y (EL1)
Charging corona/Y (HV1)
Writing/Y (LDB1)
Developing bias/Y (DC)(HV1)
Developing bias/Y (AC)(HV1)
1st transfer/Y (HV2)
Drum motor/M (M2)
Developing motor/M (M6)
Erase lamp/M (EL2)
Charging corona/M (HV1)
Writing/M (LDB2)
Developing bias/M (DC)(HV1)
Developing bias/M (AC)(HV1)
1st transfer/M (HV2)
Drum motor/C (M3)
Developing motor/C (M7)
Erase lamp/C (EL3)
Charging corona/C (HV1)
Writing/C (LDB3)
Developing bias/C (DC)(HV1)
Developing bias/C (AC)(HV1)
1st transfer/C (HV2)
Drum motor/K (M4)
Developing motor/K (M8)
Erase lamp/K (EL4)
Charging corona/K (HV1)
Writing/K (LDB4)
Developing bias/K (DC)(HV1)
Developing bias/K (AC)(HV1)
1st transfer/K (HV2)
Intermediate transfer motor (M9)
1st transfer pressure

release motor (M10)
2nd transfer pressure
release motor (M38)
2nd transfer (HV2)
Separation (HV2)
[6] [7][8] [12]
[1] The drum motor/K (M4) becomes active [2] The drum motor/Y (M1) becomes active
[3] The drum motor/M (M2) becomes active [4] The drum motor/C (M3) becomes active
[5] The charging corona/Y becomes active [6] The V_TOP signal is created
[7] The separation becomes active [8] 2nd transfer started
[9] Writing started (1st sheet) [10] Writing ended (1st sheet)
D-21
[11] Writing ended (last) [12] 2nd transfer completed
D-22
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 7. PROCESS SPEED
7. PROCESS SPEED
7.1 bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc
Depending on the combination of the paper weight and the coating of the output image, the machine has 3 types of the process speed.
The process speed has 3 types; 315 mm/s (High), 225 mm/s (Middle), 157.5 mm/s (Low speed).
Weight Paper type
Plain, Fine, Color Coated-GL, Coated-GO, Coated-ML, Coated-MO
Normal Glossy Normal Glossy
62 g/m2 to 74 g/m2 High Middle - -
81 g/m2 to 91 g/m2 High Middle High Middle
177 g/m2 to 216 g/m2 Middle Low Middle Low
257 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 Low Low Low Low
Note
• When the temperature that has been detected for the last 4 hours is estimated less than 17°C: The 1step deceleration is applied to
the process speed for the following weights of papers; 106g/m2 to 135g/m2, 136g/m2 to 176g/m2, 217g/m2 to 256g/m2.
• When the resistance value of the 2nd transfer is more than the specified value, the process speed "High" is changed to "Medium".
• In the normal mode, the arbitrary speed is selectable from the followings: The automatic switchover, the initial speed, the 1step
slow speed.
7.2 bizhub PRESS C1060/PRO C1060L

Depending on the combination of the paper weight and the coating of the output image, the machine has 3 types of the process speed.
The process speed has 3 types; 271 mm/s (High), 225 mm/s (Middle), 157.5 mm/s (Low).
Paper weight Paper type
Plain, Fine, Color Coated-GL, Coated-GO, Coated-ML, Coated-MO
Normal Glossy Normal Glossy
257 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 Low Low Low Low
Note
• When the temperature that has been detected for the last 4 hours is estimated less than 17°C: The 1step deceleration is applied to
the process speed for the following weights of papers; 106g/m2 to 135g/m2, 136g/m2 to 176g/m2, 217g/m2 to 256g/m2.
• When the resistance value of the 2nd transfer is more than the specified value, the process speed "High" is changed to "Medium".
• In the normal mode, the arbitrary speed is selectable from the followings: The automatic switchover, the initial speed, the 1step
slow speed.
D-23
E SERVICE TOOL > 1. bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060,
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L bizhub PRO...
E SERVICE TOOL
1. bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060, bizhub PRO C1060L
1.1 Service material list
1.1.1 Service material list
Parts Number Name Shape Remark
- Isopropyl alcohol
50gaf2c142na
- Aceton
50gaf2c142na
A50UPP0100 Setting toner number 2 30g
000V-18-## Cleaning pad 10pcs/1 pack
50gaf2c144na
65AA-992## Hydro-wipe 10pcs/1 pack
8050fs3005
00GR0026## Multemp FF-RM (Fluotribo MH) 25g
50gaf2c145na
00GR0002## Plas guard No.2 25g
50gaf2c145na
00GR0022## Molykote EM-30L 25g
50gaf2c145na
A0N9PP67## Magnalube-G Teflon Grease 0.75 oz
- WD-40 Company 3-IN-ONE
A4EUPP0000# MH Surf FT-240 30 g
1.2 Jig list

1.2.1 Jig list
A50UPJG3## Temperature sensor positioning jig/Lw Quantity: 1
(for the fusing roller/Lw) The character "C1070-TH-L" is
engraved.
A50UPJG1## Thermostat positioning jig/Up (for the Quantity: 1

thermostat/1 and the thermostat/2) The character "C1070-TS-U" is
engraved.
E-1

A50UPJG2## Thermostat positioning jig/Lw (for the Quantity: 1
thermostat/3) The character "C1070-TS-L" is
engraved.
9J06PJP1## Color chart (A3) Quantity: 1
8050fs3005
9J06PJP2## Color chart (11 x 17) Quantity: 1
8050fs3005
4040PJP1## Test chart (A3) Quantity: 1

Black and white
8050fs3005
4040PJP2## Test chart (11 x 17) Quantity: 1

Black and white
8050fs3005
120A9711## Adjustment chart Quantity: 1

For DF
8050fs3005
65AA995## Fusing adjustment paper (16 sheets, A3) Quantity: 1

For multi feed detection
8050fs3005
00VC-2-0## Drum cover Quantity: 4
8050fs3017
00VD-100## Blower brush Quantity: 1
8050fs3018
56UAPJG0## Multimeter Quantity: 1
8050fs3019
13QEJG01## Stapler positioning jig Quantity: 1

For FS-612
8050fs3022
- Management Tool Quantity: 1

Application for ORU-M Use for
managing the counter information
of the unit.
9J06PJG1 ## DF reading chart Quantity: 1
A0H2RX00## Trimmer unit support board Quantity: 1

For SD-506
E-2

A4F4PJG1## Staple adjustment jig Quantity: 1
For SD-510
A729PJG0## Staple adjustment jig kit Quantity: 1

For SD-513
A1DUPJG1## Cleaning jig Quantity: 1

For cleaning the inside of the
machine
A4F6PPH2## Generator, Motor Crank-wires Quantity: 1

For GP-502
1.3 Tool list

1.3.1 Tool list
- Wrench (17 mm) Quantity: 1
Thickness: 7.5 mm or less
- Wrench (13 mm) Quantity: 1

Thickness: 4.4 mm or less
1.4 Mail remote notification system

1.4.1 Outline
"Mail remote notification system" is a system that allows you to obtain a list print which can be output by the main body with using the Internet
mail (E-mail).
Use of this system dispenses not only with printing the list on the paper but also visiting the users. Send an E-mail with a simple keyword to the
main body, and receive the list prints from the main body by E-mail.
1.4.2 Operating environment

In order to use the functions of "Mail remote notification system", the following conditions must be met. The operation of the functions is
available while in jams, SC, and a low power mode. Under the condition that the main body is not operating, an E-mail sent to the main body
does not get lost but is handled when the main body is activated again.
1. The main body has a server that can receive an E-mail using POP3 or the IMAP protocol.
2. The copier has a mail server that can send an E-mail using SMTP protocol.
3. In the following 4 cases, "Mail remote notification system" does not operate in the main body.
• When the main power switch (SW1) is OFF
• When the sub power switch (SW2) is ON
• The copier is in the auto shut-off mode.
• When the "Enhance Security Mode" is active (the use of the main body NIC is not allowed.)
1.4.3 Major functions

To Send a mail with a simple keyword, allows you to use the following functions.
1. You can receive the list print information of the main body that you want to obtain by E-mail.
List prints that can be obtained are the following 13 types.
• Mode Memory List
• User Management List
• Font Pattern List
• Machine Management List
• Adjustment Data List
• Use Management List
• Counter List
• Coverage Data List
• Communication Log List
• Audit Log Report
• ORU-M Maintenance History
• Maintenance History
• Parameter List
E-3
2. A password that was used for the certification of the mail can be changed.
3. You can receive directions for use of "Mail remote notification system" by using E-mail.
To use the preceding functions, send a mail with a simple keyword (command).
For particulars of the command, refer to E.1.4.5 Operating instructions of the mail remote notification system
1.4.4 Initial setting

To use "Mail remote notification system", register the network parameter on the main body and the account on the mail server.
(1) Setting from the operation panel

Place the IP address of the copier from the operation panel to connect the copier to the network. When this setting has been already made,
proceed to "E.1.4.4.(2) Setting from the Web browser".
(a) Procedure
1.Press [Utility/Counter] on the operation panel.
2.Press [03 Administrator Setting].
3.Press [05 Network Setting].
4.Press [01 NIC Setting].
When IC-602 is installed, press [01 TCP/IP Setting].
5. Enter "IP Address," "Subnet Mask," and "Gateway Address."
6. Restart the main body.
Note
• The system administrator normally assigns the IP address of the copier. For details, contact the system administrator.
(2) Setting from the Web browser

Enter the setting of the mail server from the Web browser. To use the Web browser, make preparations of a PC that can be connected to the
network.
Note
• To place the space in all items is not available. The following characters cannot be used for setting an E-mail address.
( ) < > ; : “ [ ]/
When an improper entry or setting is made on the Web browser, be sure to make corrections following the error message. When
not to correct the error, a program download error occurs.
(a) Procedure
1. Start up the Web browser.
When the proxy is placed on the Web browser, it becomes unavailable to access the main body Web.
For particulars, contact the network administrator. Be sure to avoid setting from 2 or more browsers at a time.
2. Specify the IP address of the copier main body that is entered thorough "(1) Setting from the operation panel".
When you access the Web Utilities of the copier main body, "Main page" is displayed.
Note
• If IC-602 is connected, the screen "PAGE SCOPE Web Connection" appears. To display "Main page" of the Web Utilities,
click the icon "Web Utilities" after you logout.
Copyright © 2000 GoAhead Software, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
3. "Main page screen"

Click [Extension for maintenance].
4. Enter the user name or the CE password in "Extension for maintenance" and press "OK."
User name: ce (small letter, cannot be changed)
Password: Enter the CE password of service mode. (Default: "92729272")
E-4
5. "Extension for maintenance screen"

Click [E-mail Initial Setting].
6. "E-mail Initial Setting screen"
Setting item Details

Enable E-mail notification When you use the mail remote notification system, select "ON." The default is "OFF."
Time difference The time at which a mail was sent out is calculated based on this value. For the time difference
setting, enter the difference from the standard time UTC in the range from -1200 (- 12 hour 00
minute) to +1200 (-12 hour 00 minute). When no value is entered, +0000 (UTC) is placed.
(Example: For Japan, enter + 900.)
Sending mail Place the Host Name or IP address of the SMTP server.
(SMTP) server When you use SSL, check in the "Enable SSL."
SMTP port number Place the port number of the SMTP server. For the default, 25 is placed.
Sending mail (SMTP) server Place the time-out of the SMTP connection. The default is for 5 minutes.
time out
Interval between fetching mails The interval of the main body checking the receiving mail server to see if a mail is newly received.
(An interval can be specified in the range from 1 minute to 60 minutes.) To take the consideration of
the load on the network, this range is placed at the interval of 10 minutes.
Receiving mail server Place the Host Name or IP address of the receiving mail server.
When you use SSL, check in the "Enable SSL."
Kind of mail spool Select either of POP3 and IMAP. For the default, [POP3] is selected.
POP3 (IMAP) Select "Enable default" when you use 110 for POP3, and 143 for IMAP. When you use other than
port number the default, select "Custom" and enter a port number to use.
User name on the server Enter an account name that was assigned to the main body using the receiving mail server.
Password Enter a password to this account name.
E-mail address of this copy Enter the mail address of the main body its own. The address is normally "mail account
machine name@incoming mail server name."
Address
Nickname Enter a nickname that is added to the title (subject) of a mail who was sent from the main body. No
entry causes no problem.
CE password Enter a password that is added to the title (subject) of a mail sent to the main body. The main body
uses this password for the security check.
E-5
Also Notice to the administrator • Not transfer: Default

• Only illegal mail: When a mail received by the main body does not match with this password, or
when the mail size is in excess of a fixed size (10k bytes), transfer the mail.
• all mails: Transfer all mails that use "Mail remote notification system."
Administrator E-mail address When "only illegal mail" or "all mails" is selected, enter an E-mail address for transfer.
Announce delay time in replay Choose whether to indicate in the mail the interval (the amount of time required) from the time when
mail a mail is sent to the main body to the time when the main body receives it. The default is "No."
Enable POP (IMAP) After the mail receiving server makes the authentication, a selection is made to decide whether to
before SMTP send out the mail or not. For the default, "Send" is selected.
Retry polling when the machine POP polling option in machine busy state. For the default, "Send" is selected.
is busy
Enable SMTP Authentication Input the user name and the password when you use it. The default is "No".
7. After completion of entry, click [Apply].

8. Conduct the mail sending, receiving test.
• Click "Test" and a sending test and a receiving test are conducted collectively to check to see if a test mail sent is correctly
received.
When a test failed, recheck the setting items following the error message.
Sending test A mail sending test is made on the SMTP server. A test mail is sent to "E-mail Address for Machine"
that was placed in Step6.
Receiving test A receiving test is made on the incoming mail server. A test mail is received from "E-mail Address
for Machine" that was placed in Step6.
1.4.5 Operating instructions of the mail remote notification system

For commands for communications with the main body and the details of options, refer to the following table.
Command Option Description
Minimum Minimum
input input
GETLOG G ModeMemory M Send back [Mode Memory List] by mail.
UserSetting U Send back [User Management List] by mail.
FontPattern F Send back [Font Pattern List] by mail.
Management Ma Send back [Machine Management List] by mail.
Adjustment A Sent back [Adjustment Data List] by mail.
Parameter P Send back [Parameter List] by mail.
UseManagement UseM Send back [Use Management List] by mail.
Counter C Send back [Counter List] by mail.
CoverageData Cov Send back [Coverage Data List] by mail.
CommunicationLog Com Send back [Communication Log List] by mail.
Audit Log Au Send back [Audit Log List] by mail.
ORUMaintenance O Send back [ORU-M Maintenance History] by mail.
Maintenance Mai Send back [Maintenance History] by mail.
RFIDinformation R Send back [RFID Information List] by mail.
ALL AL Send back all preceding items by mail.
Not specified Send back [Counter List] by mail.
CHPASS C [OldPasswd] [NewPasswd] Change a password that is used for the certification of a
mail.
[OldPasswd] Specify a password that is currently used.
[NewPasswd] Specify a new password.
HELP H Not specified Send a help mail that describes the operating
instructions of the preceding commands.
1.4.6 Mail sending

• A command (option) printed on the mail is not case sensitive and can be identified from the minimum input that is listed on the preceding
table.
• The following information are required on the mail.
• To: E-mail address of this copy machine
• Subject: CE password
• Body: Command and option
Note
• The mail software can be used without any discrimination by OS and a hand-held device or a free mail using browser.
• Use the mail software in the text mode. The HTML mail is not available.
• For the mail software, as a condition for the reception, 128 characters or more are recommended as the maximum number of
characters that are displayed in a line.
E-6
• One or more spaces or tab are required between a command and an option that are written in the mail. The line break is not
available.
• Enter all the commands that are written in the mail in one-byte alphanumeric characters (ASCII characters). When there is any
other characters are used, an error message "No command found" is sent back.
• Start a command that was written in the mail from the line head without space. When there is a space or tab found at the line head,
the line is ignored.
• The maximum number of commands available in a mail is 10. Commands exceeding 10 are ignored.
• Avoid attaching a file to a mail who is sent to the main body. When the attached file size is large, the main body handles that mail
as a nuisance mail.
• Avoid adding a signature to a mail who is sent to the main body. The copier handles a signature on a mail as a command and
send back an error mail.
• In the case the power is shut off while the main body is sending a mail or the main body is printing the list print, the same mail can
be sent back twice.
• The main body can receive up to 5 mails from the mail server at the same time. The main body can receive up to mails from the
mail server at the same time.
1.5 Machine setting data Import

1.5.1 Outline
"Machine setting data Import" is a function that imports the following setting data to the machine by using the Web browser.
• The color measurement chart file of "Scan Gradation/Color Adj (Scan Adjustment)"
• The Web setting file of "Job History List".
Note
• For the information about getting each setting file and the editor commands, contact the Support section of the authorized
distributor.
1.5.2 Setting method

(1) Setting from the touch panel
Configure the IP address of the copier from the touch panel and connect the copier to the network.
When this setting has been already made, proceed to "(2) Setting from the Web browser."
(a) Procedure
1.Select [Utility/Counter] button on the touch panel.
2.Press [03 Administrator Setting].
3.Press [05 Network Setting].
4.Press [01 Machine NIC Setting].
When IC-602 is installed, press [01 TCP/IP Setting].
5. Enter "IP Address," "Subnet Mask," and "Gateway Address."
Note
• The system administrator normally assigns the IP address of the copier. For details, contact the system administrator.
(2) Setting from the Web browser

Input the setting on the web browser to import the setting file to the copier. In order to use the Web browser, make preparations of the PC that
can be introduced into the network.
(a) Procedure
1. Start up the Web browser.
• When the proxy is placed on the Web browser, it becomes unavailable to access the main body Web. For particulars, contact the
network administrator. Be sure to avoid setting from 2 or more browsers at a time.
• Recommended Web browser: Internet Explorer 8.0 or later
2. Specify the IP address of the copier main body that is entered thorough "(1) Setting from the touch panel".
When you access the Web Utilities of the copier main body, "Main page" is displayed.
Note
• If IC-602 is connected, the screen "PAGE SCOPE Web Connection" appears. To display "Main page" of the Web Utilities,
click the icon "Web Utilities" after you logout.
Copyright © 2000 GoAhead Software, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Click [Extension for maintenance].
4. Enter the user name or the CE password in "Extension for maintenance" and press "OK."
E-7
User name: ce (small letter, cannot be changed)
Password: Enter the CE password of service mode. (Default: "92729272")
5. Enter the service mode.

Note
• When the copier is not in the service mode, the setting of [Machine setting data Import] is unavailable.
6. "Extension for maintenance screen"

Click [Machine setting data Import].
7. "Machine setting data Import screen"

According to the importing data, click "Gray Chart" or "A" to "J".
• "Gray Chart": Color measurement chart file of "Scan Gradation/Color Adj (Scan Adjustment)"
• "A" to "J": Web setting file of "Job History List" (For the detailed procedure, refer to "E.1.6.3 Setting method".)

Click [Browse] and select the setting file.
Note
• No error check is proceeded for the Web setting file. Be careful when the import is proceeded.

Click [Submit].
E-8

When the import is completed correctly, the following message is displayed. Deactivate and activate the power switch (SW2) of the
main body.
Note
• To enable the setting data, switch off and on the SW2 and initialize the HDD.
• Access the Web Utility after the initialization of main body and options is completed. The imported setting files are
possibly not take effect when you access the Web Utility soon after the OFF or ON of SW2.
1.6 Job history list

1.6.1 Outline
"Job History List" is the function to refer to the output history of the copier by using Web browser. The job history that is displayed on the
operation panel is stored in the memory and deleted when the SW2 is deactivated. However, with this function, the job history is stored in the
built-in HDD so that the users can refer it even after the SW2 becomes inactive.
1.6.2 Major functions

The job history list allows you to use the following functions.
• Displaying and downloading of job history by 100 data.
• Store of the job history up to 1 million (The number of histories to save is selectable from 100,000, 500,000 or 1 million. Select 0 to
deactivate the job history utility.)
• Up to 10 types (A to J) of setting files can be imported from the CE page.
• The contents that was displayed can be changed for each of the 10 setting files (A to J)
Note
• The history data that is displayed on the output history list of the main body when the job is completed is stored in the built-in
HDD. Therefore the data is not stored in case the proof is output or a jam is caused.
• Send History of the scanned information (Scan to E-mail, Scan to SMB, for example) is not saved.
• If the built-in HDD is damaged, the data cannot be recovered.
• When DIPSW2-0 is "0", "Job History List" is not available.
1.6.3 Setting method

When you use the Job history list in the initialization, the 4 items of the job history are displayed. However import of the customized setting file
can display other items. For the information about getting this setting file and the editor commands, contact the Support section of the
authorized distributor.
The following are the display items of the job history in the initialization
• History number
• Job number
• Mode
• Date and time of occurrence of the job
(1) Setting procedure

1. Display the "Machine setting data Import screen". (Refer to E.1.5.2 Setting method)

Click each symbol (A to J) that is displayed on [Import datatype change] -[Web setting].
E-9
Note
• The setting file that was imported to A is appeared on "Administrator Setting screen" in initial setting, therefore selecting A
is recommended.

When the preparation of the setting file is completed, the following message is displayed. Click [Browse] key, and specify the setting file.
Note
• The setting file name does not need to be [joblogA.html]. The settings are saved in the main body with names of
joblogA.html to joblogJ.html.

Click [Submit].

When the import is completed correctly, the following message is displayed. Deactivate and activate the power switch (SW2) of the main
body.
Note
• To enable the setting data, switch off and on the SW2 and initialize the HDD.
• Access the Web Utility after the initialization of main body and options is completed. The imported setting files are possibly
not take effect when you access the Web Utility soon after the OFF or ON of SW2.

Click [Machine Manager Setting].
7. Enter the user name and the administrator password on "Administrator Setting Log in" the page, and click "OK".
User name: admin (small letter, cannot be changed)
Password: Enter the password of the administrator of the copier(default is "00000000".)
E-10
Note
• They differ from the login user name and the password for the Extension for maintenance
8. "Machine Manager Setting screen"

Click [Job History List].
9. "Job History List screen"
To update the page, you can change the URL in the address bar to the letter from A to J that has imported the customized file.
Example
Before: http://X.X.X.X/goform/joblog.cgi?viw=A
After: http://X.X.X.X/goform/joblog.cgi?viw=B
Note
• In case the customized file is imported to "B".
• When IC-602 is connected, the following is shown.
Example
Before: http://X.X.X.X:30091/goform/joblog.cgi?viw=A
After: http://X.X.X.X:30091/goform/joblog.cgi?viw=B
10. "Job History List screen"

Click [JobHistory list].
Note
• This operation places the customized item number in the order.
• The address bar displays "http://X.X.X.X/goform/joblog.cgi" after the click. However, when IC-602 is connected, "http://
X.X.X.X:30091/goform/joblog.cgi" is shown.
(2) In case the writing of the setting file fails

When the writing of the setting file fails, the following message is displayed. In this case, conduct the following procedure to see if the built-in
HDD has malfunction and requires the replacement of the HDD or not.
1. Conduct the step 1 to step10 of the procedure (a) to see if the import of the setting file is normally completed. When the import of the
setting file fails after you conduct these processes, conduct the step 2 and the following steps.
"Service Mode menu screen"
Press [05 State Confirmation].
Press [01 I/O Check Mode].
3. [I/O Check Mode screen]
Enter "99" with the numeric keys. Confirm that "99-00" is displayed on the message display area.
4. Press the Access button.
5. Enter "03" with the numeric keys. Confirm that "99-03" is displayed on the message display area.
6. Press the start button.
When "NG" is displayed, press the Start button and perform the HDD bad sectors check and the recovery again.
When “OK” appears, conduct the step1 to step10 of the procedure (1) to see if the import of the setting file is normally completed. If the
writing of the setting file fails after you conduct these processes, the trouble of the HDD is considerable. Replace it with new one.
Note
• When the HDD is replaced, execute "Utility" - "Administrator Setting" - "Security Setting" - "HDD Management Setting" -
"HDD Restore/Backup". (Only when the customer has the backed up data)
• The job history data is not restored after the execution of "HDD Restore/Backup".
1.7 Counter list acquisition using USB memory

1.7.1 Outline
Connection of the USB memory to the service port saves the counter list information in the USB memory in the text file format.
1.7.2 List that can be acquired

1. Counter list
2. Mode Memory List
3. User setting list
4. Use management list
5. Audit log report
6. Machine Management List
7. Adjustment Data List
8. Coverage Data List
9. Maintenance History
Note
• When you place DIPSW30-1 to 1, the Parameter List and the Communication Log List are also stored.
• When you select "1" on DIPSW15-0, the ORU-M Maintenance History is also stored.
• When the security enhance mode is enabled, no file is output when you press [HELP] - [Utility] - [Check Job Setting].
E-11
1.7.3 Acquisition method

(1) Preparation
1. Select the service port device setting to [ON].
2. Connect the USB memory to the service port.
(2) Procedure
1. Press [Utility/Counter] on the operation panel.
2. Press [Details Counter].
3. "Details Counter List screen"
Press [HELP] - [Utility/Counter] -[Check Job Setting] on the operation panel.
4. After the following message appears, remove the USB memory.
Note
• Do not remove the USB memory before the message disappears. The data is being output to the file while the message is
displayed. If you remove the USB memory while the message is displayed, you cannot save the file properly.
• ORU-M Maintenance History is output to the file only when DIPSW15-0 is ON.
(3) File storage location

The list print data file is saved to the root directory in the USB memory.
(4) File name

The file name is defined as follows. When the same file name exists, it is overwritten with the new data.
listprint + Machine type + destination code + Serial No. Year_Date_Time.txt
Ex: listprintA1RF001123456_20100107_1010.txt
1.8 Panel log

1.8.1 Outline
The "Panel log" is a function to display the operation history of the main body operation panel and the hard key using Web browser. Because
the panel log is stored in the memory of the main body, it is deleted when the sub power switch (SW2) becomes inactive. However, when Log
Store in "I.4.15.1 Log Store Setting" in the service mode is changed to "ON", the log is stored in the built-in HDD or the USB memory at the time
SC occurs. At this time the panel log is also stored, which helps troubleshooting.
• Items recorded: Touch panel operation, hard key operation
• Items not recorded: Mouse operation, external key board operation
• Maximum storable number: 1024 (deleted by power OFF)
• In security mode: The panel log reference is unavailable as the main body NIC network cannot be connected.
Note
• If the built-in HDD is damaged, the data cannot be recovered.
1.8.2 Log acquisition method

There are 2 methods for storing and using the panel log data.
• Download from Web Utilities to a computer (manual store)
• HDD automatic log store function (auto store)
(1) Download from Web Utilities

1. Display the panel log from the Web Utilities.
2. "Panel log screen"
The following 6 panel log items are displayed.
E-12
• No.: Recorded number (up to 1024)

• scrcode: Screen code at the time it is operated
• kind: Operation kind (hard key or panel pressed)
• detail: Detailed information when it is pressed
• mean: Key type that is pressed
• time: Time that it pressed
3. Click "download" to download it to the computer.
• File type: Tab-delimited text file
(2) HDD automatic log store function

For details on the HDD automatic log store function, refer toI.4.15.1 Log Store Setting.
Note
• The panel log which can be acquired with the HDD automatic log store function is in the JSON format (JavaScript). For details
on the analysis method of this panel log, contact the Support section of the authorized distributor.
1.9 ORU-M Counter Rewrite

1.9.1 Load from external memory
(1) Outline
Read the counter data that is written using Management Tool from the USB memory and write it to the main body. To reduce the down-time, it
can be executed even during printing.
The counter data for the spare unit (not in use) is written in the main body. The target unit is the fusing unit, the intermediate transfer unit, and
the 2nd transfer.
Note
• This function is available only when DIPSW 15-0 is placed to ON.
(2) Preparation
Connect the USB memory to the service port.
Note
• When the counter data file is created in the folder combination mode of Management Tool, save the counter data file in the
following folder configuration of the USB memory.
C1070
ORU_DATA
• The following is the counter data file name.

[Main Body Serial Number]_ORU_DATA.bin
(3) Procedure
1. Be sure that the ordinary operation screen *1 is displayed.
Press [Utility/Counter] button.
2. "Utility screen"
On the Operation panel, press the following buttons.
1→0→C→6→9
3. "ORU-M Counter Rewrite menu screen"
Press [01 Load from external memory].
Note
• If the USB memory is not connected to the connection port, the error message appears not to go on to the file selection
screen.
4. "ORU-M Counter Rewrite [From External] screen"

Press [Next] or [Previous] to select the file to be read and press [OK].
Note
• If you press [Limit], only the file corresponded to the serial number of the machine is displayed.
E-13
5. "ORU-M Counter Rewrite [From External] (item selection) screen"

After you select [Intermediate Trans.], [Fusing], and [2nd Transfer] in "Load Item", check the counter value with [▲] and [▼] and press
[Store Selected Items].
Press [Store All Items] to read the counter data of all of the intermediate transfer unit, the fusing unit, and all of the 2nd transfer.
6. "Pop-up screen"
Press [Yes] to start reading the counter data.
Note
• Be sure not to deactivate the main power switch (SW1) until the reading file completes.
7. "Pop-up screen"
Confirm the message "Completed data loading from external memory" and press [OK].
*1 Default is the [MACHINE] screen.
1.9.2 Store to external memory

(1) Function
Transfers the counter data of the fusing unit, the intermediate transfer unit, and the 2nd transfer unit from the main body to the USB memory.
The saved data can be used in Management Tool.
Note
• This function is available only when DIPSW 15-0 is placed to ON.
(2) Preparation
Note
• Be sure to create a folder as which is shown the following beforehand.
C1070
ORU_DATA
E-14
(3) Procedure
1. Be sure that the ordinary operation screen *1 is displayed.
2. "Utility screen"
1→0→C→6→9
3. "ORU-M Counter Rewrite menu screen"
Press [02 Store to External Memory].
4. "ORU-M Counter Rewrite [To External] screen"
Press [Start Storing].
Note
• When the USB memory is not connected to the connection port, an error message appears.
• Be sure not to deactivate the main power switch (SW1) until the storing file completes.
5. "Pop-up screen"
A pop-up screen is displayed after the saving completes. Check the file name and press [OK].
6. "ORU-M Counter Rewrite [To External] screen"

Confirm that the screen returns to "ORU-M Counter Rewrite [To External] screen", disconnect the USB memory from the service port.
1.10 Management Tool

1.10.1 Outline
"Management Tool" is a software to read and reset the parts counter information of the unit.
(1) Operating environment

The following shows the hardware requirements of the Management Tool.
Applicable OS Windows Vista (32 bit, 64 bit) Home Premium, Business, Enterprise, Ultimate (Service
Pack 2 or later versions)
Windows 7 (32 bit, 64 bit) Home Premium, Professional, Enterprise, Ultimate (Service
Pack 1 or later versions)
Windows 8, Windows 8.1 (64bit) Professional, Enterprise (Service Pack 1 or later
versions)
CPU Conform to OS recommended environment
Hard disk capacity 100 MB or more
Memory capacity Conform to OS recommended environment
Web browser Microsoft Internet Explorer Ver.6.0 (Service Pack 1 or later versions)
Library Windows Vista & Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0 (SP2)
Windows 7 & Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0 (SP2)
Windows 8 & Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5 (SP1)
Display At resolution of 800 x 600 (SVGA) or more
16 bit color or more
Applicable machine bizhub PRESS C8000
bizhub PRESS C7000
bizhub PRESS C6000
bizhub PRESS 1250
bizhub PRESS 1250P
bizhub PRESS 1052
bizhub PRESS C1070
bizhub PRESS C1070P
bizhub PRESS C71hc
bizhub PRESS C1060
bizhub PRO C1060L
bizhub PRESS C1100
bizhub PRESS C1085
Note
• It is possible that compliant OS is limited depending on the RFID tag reader or writer.
It is possible that compliant OS is changed for the future model development.
(2) RFID tag reader and writer

Management Tool uses the RFID tag reader and writer for reading and writing the RFID tag. The following shows the corresponding RFID tag
reader and writer.
• "TMRF-1-U001" (Tamura Corporation)
E-15
• "TWN3" (Elatec Vertriebs GmbH)
Applicable mode USB
: Transparent Virtual COM Port
V24: Transparent Operation
Note
The driver for the RFID tag reader and writer must be installed to the computer beforehand.
• "TMRF-1-U001" (Tamura Corporation)
Vista, 7 dedicated USB driver (Windows Vista, 7)
8 (64 bit) dedicated USB driver (Windows 8)
• "TWN3" (Elatec Vertriebs GmbH)
TWN Serial Port driver (Windows XP (32bit only))
• The following shows the port setting of the TWN Serial Port driver.
Item Value
bit/sec 9600
Data bit 8
Parity None
Stop bit 1
Flow control None
(3) Main functions

The following shows the main functions of the Management Tool.
• Reading and writing the RFID tag of the unit (bizhub PRESS C8000, bizhub PRESS C1100, 1085)
The part information is read from the RFID tag of the unit and displayed on the screen. Select the part whose counter information is reset
and write the reset information on the IC tag.
• Reading and writing the data file of the unit (bizhub PRESS C7000, 6000, and bizhub PRESS 1250, 1250P, 1052, and bizhub PRESS
C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, and PRO C1060L)
Reads the part information from the data file of the unit output from the device and displays it on the screen. Select a part for counter
information reset on the screen, and write the reset information to the data file. (Support to read and write automatically from the USB
memory.)
• Work log management
The counter information and the counter reset information that are caught from the replacement work are saved automatically as a log.
On the work log display, the information can be sorted by the read or reset date and searched by the term such as the customer or the
technician who executed the replacement. Therefore, the previous works can be checked.
• Output of work information with CSV file
Outputs the work information and work log of the replacement work in the CSV format file.
• Printing work information
Prints out the work information and work log of the replacement work.
• Association of the user information and the device
The user information can be associated with the device.
• Export and Import
The work log, user information, and technician information can be exported to the file. Also, the exported file can be imported.
• Serial number setting (bizhub PRESS C8000, and bizhub PRESS C1100, 1085)
When the tag is replaced due to the breakage, the new RFID tag can be recognized to the machine.
• Intermediate transfer steering sensor information setting (bizhub PRESS C8000, and bizhub PRESS C1100, 1085)
The initial value of the intermediate transfer steering sensor can be registered.
• Option
Configure each setting of Management Tool.
• Login Mode
To use the Management Tool, login is required.
2 modes are provided for the login; "Administrator mode" and "Technician mode".
[Administrator mode]
Mode for the login as an administrator
[Technician mode]
Mode for the login as an technician. The administrator registers the technician.
The operable function differs depending on the log in mode.
Number Function name Administrator mode Technician mode
1 Replacement work × ○
2 Work log ○ ○
3 Register user ○ ○
4 Register technician ○ ×
E-16
5 SetPersonal × ○
6 Administrator Setting ○ ×
7 Unit Serial Number Setting × ○
8 Intermediate transfer steering sensor information × ○
setting
9 Option × ○
10 Version ○ ○
○: operable, ×: inoperable
1.10.2 Installation of Management Tool

(1) Installation method
Install the Management Tool in the following steps.
Note
• Log on with the user name which has the Administrator authority to install.
• If any application is running on the computer (including anti-virus program), close it.
• Check that "Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0 (SP2)" ("Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5" for Vista or later) has been installed on the
computer before the installation.
Installation steps
1. Double click the installation program "Setup.exe."
2. Select the language and click [OK].
3. Continue the installation following the instructions on screen.

Note
• Product key input
The Management Tool installer displays the screen to input the product key during installation.
The installation continues when the input product key is proper.
(2) Items to be installed

Once the Management Tool is installed, the following items are registered on the Start menu and the desk top.
Items to be registered for start menu
• Program
• Readme
• Manual
Items to be registered on desktop
• Shortcut of program
Note
• The "Readme" of the Start menu can be set not to be installed.
• Select "Custom" on the set up type and check the items to be installed.
• Whether to create the shortcut of the program registered on the desktop can be selected when installing.
(3) Uninstallation
There are following 2 ways to uninstall the Management Tool.
• Use "Add or Remove Programs" ("Programs and Features" for Windows Vista, Windows 7).
• Execute "Setup.exe" again.
Note
• The user information and the data information (Work log, User information, and Technician information) are saved in the
following folder separately from Management Tool.
• Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8:
C:\Users\Public\Documents\KONICA MINOLTA\Management Tool\
Since those information cannot be deleted by uninstalling, delete them manually.
When reinstalling it without deleting those information, the Management Tool can be started with the information before
uninstallation.
• When uninstalling the Management Tool, all Management Tool programs need to be closed.
E-17
1.10.3 Starting up of Management Tool

(1) Start
There are following 2 ways to start the Management Tool.
• Start from the Start menu of Windows
Click Windows "Start" button - "All Programs" - "KONICAMINOLTA" - "Management Tool" - "Management Tool."
• Start from the shortcut icon on the desktop
Double click "KONICA MINOLTA Management Tool" icon that is created on the desktop.
The login screen appears when it starts.
Note
• Whether to create the "KONICA MINOLTA Management Tool" icon or not can be selected when you install.
(2) The login screen

The login screen appears when the Management Tool starts. Select the login mode, enter the required information and log in.
(a) At 1st time of startup
The administrator password has not been registered soon after the installation. Register the administrator password when the password
setting screen appears after you click the [OK] button.
E-18
(b) At normal startup
For the replacement work, log in the technician mode. Select [Registered technician name], enter the required information and log in.
Note
• The image at the top of the screen can be customized. (Refer to E.1.10.12.(4) Image setting)
• When no technician has been registered, the registered technician name cannot be selected.
For details of registering the technician, refer to E.1.10.11.(2) Register technician.
(3) Operation screen
[1] [2] [3] [4]
[1] Menu bar [2] Navigation

[3] Operation area [4] Login user
1. Menu bar
Specify each function of the Management Tool. (Refer to E.1.10.12 Various setting for the software)
2. Navigation
[1] [2]
[1] Path [2] Image

• Path
The transition of screens from the top screen appears as the path.
• Image
The image can be customized. (Refer to E.1.10.12.(4) Image setting)
3. Login user
The current login user appears.
4. Operation area
The operation panel that is based on the purpose appears.
(4) End
There are following 2 ways to exit the Management Tool.
• Click [Exit] button on the login screen or the top screen
E-19
• Select [Exit] from [File] menu
• Click [x] (close) button on the upper right corner of the screen
• Shut down or log off the computer
1.10.4 Technician mode

The operation procedures for the user who logs in as an registered technician is described as follows.
To execute this mode, register the technician information in the administrator mode. (Refer to E.1.10.11.(2) Register technician)
(1) Top screen
When the login is proceeded successfully, the top screen is displayed.

• To perform unit parts replacement, click the "Replacement work" button. (Refer to E.1.10.4.(2) Replacement work)
• To check the work log, click the "WorkLog" button. (Refer to E.1.10.4.(3) Work log)
• To register the customer information, click the "RegisterUser" button. (Refer to E.1.10.4.(4) Register user)
• To change the password or edit the memo, click the "Set personal info" button. (Refer to E.1.10.4.(5) SetPersonal)
Note
• The image at the left of the screen can be customized. (Refer to E.1.10.12.(4) Image setting)
(2) Replacement work

Perform unit parts replacement.
(a) Type of replacement

Depending on the machine type, the form and media of data differ.
Management Tool is applied to the following machines.
• bizhub PRESS C8000 (Refer to E.1.10.5 bizhub PRESS C8000 replacement procedure)
• bizhub PRESS C7000, 6000 (Refer toE.1.10.6 bizhub PRESS C7000/6000 replacement procedure)
• bizhub PRESS 1250, 1250P, 1052 (Refer to E.1.10.7 bizhub PRESS 1250/1250P/1052 replacement procedure)
• bizhub PRESS C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, bizhub PRO C1060L (refer to E.1.10.8 bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060
and bizhub PRO C1060L replacement procedure)
• bizhub PRESS C1100, 1085 (refer to E.1.10.9 bizhub PRESS C1100, 1085 replacement procedure)
(b) Associating customers

When the device serial number and the user information are properly associated, the user information is displayed on the operation
information automatically.
When it is not configured, " (No User Setting)" is displayed.
To modify the association between the unit that is read and the user, conduct the following procedures.
• Click "Change" to display the user setting screen.
• Select the desired user setting and click [OK].
The user setting of the work information is changed.

Note
• For details on user registration, refer to E.1.10.4.(4) Register user.
E-20
(c) Export the csv format file

The detailed information of the unit that is currently displayed is exported in CSV format.
1. Specify the location where the file is stored.
2. Click [Save].
The CSV file is exported to the specified location.
For details on CSV format, refer to E.1.10.12.(6) Export CSV.
(d) Printing the report

The detailed information of the unit that is currently displayed can be printed as report.
1. The print dialog is displayed.
2. Click [OK].
The report is printed.
For details on print layout, refer to E.1.10.12.(7) Print Report.
(3) Work log

The work conditions of previous replacement work can be checked.
(a) Procedures to display the work log list

1. Click "Work log" on the top screen.
Alternatively, select "Work log" in "Tool" menu.
2. The work log referring method selection screen appears.
• To select the user and display the work log, click "Select user".
Proceed to step 3.
• To select the technician and display the work log, click "Select technician".
Proceed to step 4.
• To display all the work log, click "All".
Proceed to step 5.
3. The "Select user" screen appears.
E-21
Select the user, check the work log, and click "OK".
Proceed to step 5.
4. The "Select technician" screen appears.
Select the technician, check the work log, and click "OK".
Proceed to step 5.
5. The work log list is displayed.
On the work log list, filtering by conditions or sorting displayed items is available.
You can check the detail of the work log information that is selected, export as CSV, and print the report.
For the display filter, the displayed contents differs depending on the display method that is selected on the work log reference method
in step 2.
When "Select user" is selected:
When "Select technician" is selected:
Note
• Click the item name of the work log list so that items can be sorted in descending or ascending order. The mark ▲
indicates that the current display is in ascending order. Click it to change in descending order.
• On the work log list screen, the items that are displayed and their display width can be changed via "Set list view". (Refer
to E.1.10.12.(5) Set list view)
E-22
• Click [Export CSV] to export the work log information that is currently selected in CSV format. (Refer to E.1.10.12.(6)
Export CSV)
• Click [Print] to print the report of the work log information currently selected. (Refer to E.1.10.12.(7) Print Report)
(b) Detailed information

The detailed information of the replacement work log selected on the work log list is displayed.
Change the user that is associated or edit the work information memo.
Note
• Click [Back] or [Next] to switch the work log displayed.
• Click [Export CSV] to export the work log information that is currently displayed in CSV format. (Refer to E.1.10.12.(6) Export
CSV)
• Click [Print] to print the report of the work log information that is currently displayed. (Refer to E.1.10.12.(7) Print Report)
• For details on user association, refer to E.1.10.4.(2).(b) Associating customers.
(c) Import
Import the work log which is exported from Management Tool.
1. Specify the storage location of the work log file that is imported.
2. Click [Open].
3. The password input screen is displayed.
Enter the password that you configured on the work log file when it was exported.
4. Click [OK].
The work log file is imported.
Note
• Use one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols for password.
• The work log information that exists is not imported.
• The invalid work log information is skipped and the import process continues.
• The work log exported by other computer also can be imported. However, the work log information is possibly overlapped.
(d) Export
Export the work log collectively.
2. Click [Save].
3. The password input screen is displayed.
E-23
Configure the password on the export file.
4. Click [OK].
The export of the work log starts.
Note
• The password that is configured on the export file is required for the import.
• The file format "Work log file" is a format to display the contents on the Management Tool. When the file is stored in other
format, the file is unable to open on the Management Tool.
(4) Register user

Register, edit or delete the user information.
(a) User list

Click [RegisterUser] on the top screen.
Alternatively, select "RegisterUser" in "Tool" menu.
Note
• Click the item name of the user information list so that the items can be sorted in descending or ascending order. The mark ▲
indicates that the current display is in ascending order. Click it to change in descending order.
• On the user information list screen, the items that are displayed and their display width can be changed via "Set list view".
(Refer to E.1.10.12.(5) Set list view)
(b) Initial registration

Register the user information.
E-24
1. Click [New] on the user list screen.

2. The registration screen is displayed.
3. Enter "User name."
Use 1 to 64 characters regardless of whether one-byte or two bytes.
4. Select "Type of business".
5. Enter the following items as necessary.
• Enter "User code". Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
• Enter "User ID". Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
• Enter "User office location name". Use 0 to 256 characters regardless of whether one-byte or two bytes.
• Enter "User office location code". Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
• Enter "Contact person name". Use 0 to 64 characters regardless of whether one-byte or two bytes.
• Enter "Contact person ID no". Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
• Enter "Contact telephone". Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
• Register "Machine list".
Enter "Machine serial number to add". Use 1 to 13 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols. Click "Add" to add it to
"Machine list".
Select and click the serial number so that the number is deleted from "Machine list".
• Enter "Remark".
6. Click [Register].
The entered user information is registered and the next user information can be registered.
Note
• Register the serial number of the machine of the user to "Machine list" so that the user information is automatically
associated when the unit information is read during the replacement work.
(c) Edit
Edit a registered user information.
1. Edit the items to be changed.
For the procedure to enter each item, refer to E.1.10.4.(4).(b) Initial registration.
2. Click [OK].
The edited result is reflected to the user information.
(d) Import
Import the user information which is exported from Management Tool.
1. Specify the storage location of the user information file that is imported.
2. Click [Open].
The user information file is imported.
Note
• The user information that exists is not imported.
(e) Export
Export the user information collectively.
E-25
2. Click [Save].
The export of the user information starts.
Note
• The file format "User Information file" is a format to display the contents on the Management Tool. When the file is stored in
other format, the file is unable to open on the Management Tool.
(5) SetPersonal
Change the password of login technician or edit the comment.
(a) Password Change

1. Click "Password change".
The password change screen is displayed. The password can be changed at this time.
2. Click [OK].
The new Password is configured.
Note
(6) Unit serial number setting (bizhub PRESS C8000 and bizhub PRESS C1100, 1085)
The unit serial number is written in the RFID tag.
Note
• When the RFID tag is replaced because of such as physical damage, the new RFID tag can be recognized to the unit.
(a) Procedures of the unit serial number setting

1. Select "Unit Serial Number" from "Tool" menu.
When the RFID tag reader is not recognized, the process does not proceed to step 2. Check that the RFID tag reader is correctly
connected.
2. The wizard starts up and the unit serial number input screen is displayed.
Enter the unit serial number and click "Write".
E-26
Note
• Serial number setting initializes the RFID tag data.
The initialized data cannot be restored.
3. When the RFID tag write in screen is displayed, touch the RFID tag with the RFID tag reader.
4. When the writing process is completed, the result screen is displayed.
(7) Intermediate transfer steering sensor information setting (bizhub PRESS C8000 and bizhub PRESS C1100, 1085)
The initial value of the intermediate transfer steering sensor is written to the RFID tag.
(a) Procedures of the intermediate transfer steering sensor information setting

1. Select "Intermediate transfer steering sensor information setting" from "Tool" menu.
Note
• When the RFID tag reader is not recognized, the process does not proceed to step 2. Check that the RFID tag reader is
correctly connected.
2. The wizard is activated and the intermediate transfer steering sensor information input screen appears.
E-27
Input the intermediate transfer steering sensor information and click "Write".
3. When the RFID tag write in screen is displayed, touch the RFID tag with the RFID tag reader.
Note
• Touch the RFID tag in which the data of the intermediate transfer unit is saved.
4. When the writing process is completed, the result screen is displayed.
(8) Option
Configure each setting of Management Tool.
E-28
(a) Display a confirmation message when a part of the following copiers that requires the replacement is selected:
bizhub PRESS C7000, 6000, 1250, 1250P, 1052, C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, bizhub PRO C1060L
Select whether to display the confirmation message of the target unit after the selection of the part for replacement during the replacement
of the following copiers: bizhub PRESS C7000, 6000, 1250, 1250P, 1052, C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, bizhub PRO C1060L
(b) Locate automatically the data file of the following copiers in the USB memory: bizhub PRESS C7000, 6000,
1250, 1250P, 1052, C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, bizhub PRO C1060L
Configure the activation mode of the replacement of bizhub PRESS C7000, 6000, 1250, 1250P, 1052, C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060,
bizhub PRO C1060L.
• When the box is checked, the replacement is activated in USB memory cooperation mode.
• When the box is not checked, the replacement is activated in folder cooperation mode.
1.10.5 bizhub PRESS C8000 replacement procedure

1. Click "Replacement work" on the top screen.
Alternatively, select "Replacement work" in the "Tool" menu.
connected.
2. A screen to select the machine type appears.
Select "bizhub PRESS C8000" and click [OK] button.

Proceed to step 3.
connected.
3. When the unit read screen appears, touch the RFID tag with the RFID tag reader.
4. When read successfully, the unit information screen appears.

The units read are listed on the left of the screen as buttons.
E-29
5. Select the parts to reset the counted value from the unit information read.
Note
• When you select the intermediate transfer belt of the intermediate transfer unit, the intermediate transfer belt information
screen appears.
Be sure to input the reflectance value which is written on the belt.
6. Click "Reset count".

When the count reset screen appears, contact the RFID tag with the RFID tag reader.
E-30
7. When the count reset is done successfully, the unit information screen is updated.
8. When you cancel the count reset, Click "Undo reset count."
When the canceling count reset screen appears, touch the RFID tag with the RFID tag reader. The count information returns to the condition
when it was read.
9. To read the information of another unit, click "Read another."

→ Return to step3.
Note
• Information of up to 10 units can be read at a time of each replacement work.
When the reading information of more than 10 units, exit the replacement work once and select "Replacement work " on the
top screen again.
• While in the replacement work, the Management Tool cannot be exited.
To exit the Management Tool, exit the replacement work.
1.10.6 bizhub PRESS C7000/6000 replacement procedure

Note
• Depending on the saving destination of the cooperated counter data, there are 2 modes for the replacement on the bizhub PRESS
C7000 and 6000.
• USB cooperation mode:
Execute the counter reset directly to the counter data that is read from the main body to the USB memory with the "Save to
External Memory" of ORU-M.
• Folder cooperation mode:
Move the counter data that is read from the main body to the USB memory to the folder of the client PC once and execute the
counter reset to the counter data in the folder with the "Save to External Memory" of ORU-M.
• It is activated in the mode of the previous replacement, but the mode can be selected with "Option" (Refer to E.1.10.4.(8) Option).
(Default is the USB cooperation mode.)
E-31
Select "bizhub PRESS C7000/6000" and click [OK] button.

Proceed to step 3.
Note
• When it is activated in the USB cooperation mode and the USB memory in which the data file is saved cannot be recognized,
the following warning appears. Select [Yes (Y)] to activate in the folder cooperation mode.
3. Once the reading the data file of the USB memory or the folder completes, the writing screen appears. The read files are shown in a list on
the center of the screen.
Note
• When it is activated in the folder cooperation mode, it cooperates with the folder of the previous replacement.
4. Select the data file which includes the replacement unit from the read data files and click the "Select parts".
E-32
Note
• The unit with "blank" is the target unit of the replacement.
• The display of the unit column shows the condition of the unit.
• Blank:
Unit whose part information is exported from the device (target to replace)
• Completed editing:
Unit whose part to be reset the count has been selected, or whose unit serial number has been registered
• Already written.:
Unit whose part to be reset the count has been written in the data file
• Already imported the device.:
Unit whose part information has been imported to the device
• For the unit with "Already imported the device." on the column, the part to be reset the count cannot be selected.
5. Once the reading of the unit completes, the part selection screen appears.
6. Select the unit to replace, select the part to reset the count, and then click "Back to writing screen".
On the parts selecting screen, the unit serial number (alphanumeric characters in 16-digit) can be input.
Blank is also available when the serial number is not needed.
Conduct the same operation to all units you replace.

Note
• Even if you click the "Back to writing screen" on the parts selecting screen, data file writing is not executed. Data file writing is
executed on the writing screen. For details, refer to the steps 7 and more.
• The unit serial number that is output is reflected when the screen is returned to the writing screen and the writing to the data
file is executed. The display is not updated during the number input or edit. So, the old information before the number input is
E-33
appeared on the following serial numbers: the serial number that is appeared on the button on the left side of the screen; the
serial number that is appeared on the unit information or the machine information.
7. Writing screen appears.

Confirm that the unit with part selected is "Completed editing".
8. Repeat steps 4 to 7 to all data files which include the unit you replace.
9. Click "Write" button.
Note
• To switch to the folder cooperate mode, click the "Reference" button of the writing screen and select the folder.
• In the next replacement, it is activated in the mode of the previous replacement.
This mode can be switched with "Option" (Refer to E.1.10.4.(8) Option).
10. A writing confirmation message appears and the "Completed editing" unit is written in the data file of the USB memory or the PC folder.
Then, the replacement completes.
In the USB cooperate mode, the USB memory can be removed safely once the replacement completes.
* Pop-up screen in the USB cooperation mode
* Pop-up screen in the folder cooperation mode
Note
• Be sure not to disconnect the USB memory until the writing completes since it takes time to complete writing to the USB
memory in the USB cooperation mode.
E-34
• When the USB memory failed to be removed safely, writing to the data file possibly not complete properly. Confirm that no
other program uses the USB memory and write to the data file again.
• In the folder cooperate mode, be careful not to mistake the import data when you cooperate with the C7000 and 6000 main
body.
1.10.7 bizhub PRESS 1250/1250P/1052 replacement procedure

Note
• Depending on the destination of the cooperated counter data, there are 2 modes for the replacement on the bizhub PRESS
1250/1250P/1052.
Execute the counter reset directly to the counter data that is read from the main body to the USB memory with the "Save to
Move the counter data that is read from the main body to the USB memory to the folder of the client PC once and execute the
counter reset to the counter data in the folder with the "Save to External Memory" of ORU-M.
(Default is the USB cooperation mode.)
Select "bizhub PRESS 1250/1250P/1052" and click [OK] button.

Proceed to step 3.
Note
the following warning appears. Select [Yes (Y)] to activate in the folder cooperation mode.
3. Once the reading the data file of the USB memory or the folder completes, the writing screen appears. The read files are shown in a list on
the upper side in the center of the screen. Also, the unit information of the data files that is selected in the data file list is shown in a list on
the lower side in the center of the screen.
Note
4. Select the data file which includes the replacement unit from the read data files and click the "Select parts".
E-35
Note
• The data file that is regarded as a "Replacement object" in the Unit column of the data file list, includes the units that need the
replacement. (equipped with the parts that are the counter reset object.)
• The display of the unit column shows the condition of the all units which are stored in the data file.
• Blank:
Data file with the unit whose part information has been exported from the device, or the unit which has been written. Even
if there is no target unit of the replacement, you can select the part which requires the count reset and you can also
configure the unit serial number.
• Replacement object:
Among the unit whose part information has been exported from the device and the unit which has been written, the data
file with the target unit of the replacement. The unit whose count to be reset can be selected, and the unit serial number
can be configured.
• The edited parts are included:
Data file which includes the unit that already selected the part for the counter reset and the unit that registered the unit
serial number.
Data File which has the all units whose part information are imported to the device.
• The unit with "blank" on the status column of the unit information list is the target unit of the replacement.
• The status column shows the condition of the unit.
• Blank:
Unit whose part information is exported from the device (target to replace)
Unit whose part to be reset the count has been selected, or whose unit serial number has been configured
• Already written.:
Unit whose part to be reset the count has been written in the data file
Unit whose part information has been imported to the device
• For the unit with "Already imported the device." on the status column in the unit information list, the part cannot be selected
for the counter reset.
5. Once the reading of the unit completes, the part selection screen appears.
E-36
6. Select the unit that you replace, select the part you reset the count, and then click "Back to writing screen".
Conduct the same operation to all units you replace.

Note
• Even if you click the "Back to writing screen" on the parts selecting screen, data file writing is not executed. Data file writing is
executed on the writing screen. For details, refer to the steps 7 and more.
• The unit serial number that is been output is reflected when the screen is returned to the writing screen and the writing to the
data file is executed. The display is not updated during the number input or edit. So, the old information before the number
input is appeared on the following serial numbers: the serial number that is appeared on the button on the left side of the
screen; the serial number that is appeared on the unit information or the machine information.
7. Writing screen appears.

Check " Unit includes parts which was replaced " on the unit column of the data file whose parts has been selected on the data file list. Also,
check "Completed editing" with the unit whose parts has been selected on the unit information list.
E-37
8. Repeat steps 4 to 7 to all data files which include the unit you replace.
Note
• To switch to the folder cooperate mode, click the "Reference" button of the writing screen and select the folder.
This mode can be switched with "Option" (Refer to E.1.10.4.(8) Option).
10. A writing confirmation message appears and the unit in the "Completed editing" status is written in the data file of the USB memory or the
PC folder. Then, the replacement completes.
In the USB cooperate mode, the USB memory can be removed safely once the replacement completes.
Note
• When the USB memory failed to be removed safely, writing to the data file possibly not complete properly. Confirm that no
• In the folder cooperate mode, be careful not to mistake the import data when you cooperate with the 1250, 1250P, and 1052
main body.
E-38
1.10.8 bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060 and bizhub PRO C1060L replacement procedure
Note
• There are following 2 modes according to the destination to save the cooperated counter data for the replacement on bizhub
PRESS C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, bizhub PRO C1060L.
Executes the counter reset directly to the counter data that is read from the main body to the USB memory with the "Save to
Moves the counter data that is read from the main body to the USB memory to the folder of the client PC temporarily. Then,
executes the counter reset to the counter data in the folder with the "Save to External Memory" of ORU-M.
(Default is USB cooperation mode.)
You can also execute the same operation with "Replacement work" from "Tool".
2. The machine selection screen appears.
Select "bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060, bizhub PRO C1060L" and click the [OK] button.
Proceed to step 3.
Note
the following warning appears. To activate in the folder cooperation mode, select [Yes (Y)].
3. After the completion of the reading the data file of the USB memory or the folder, the writing screen appears. The read files are shown in a
list on the upper side in the center of the screen. Also, the unit information of the data files that is selected in the data file list is shown in a
list on the lower side in the center of the screen.
Note
4. Select the data file which includes the unit for replacement from the read data files and click "Select parts".
E-39
Note
• The data files of which the unit column in the data file list is "Replacement object" have the target unit (which has a target part
of counter reset).
• The display of the unit column shows the condition of the all units which are stored in the data file.
• Blank:
Data file which has the following unit: The unit whose part information has been output from the device or the unit which
has been written It has no replacement target unit but you can select the part of which you execute the counter reset and
configure the unit serial number setting.
• Replacement object:
Data file which has the replacement target unit among the following units: The units whose part information has been
output from the device or the units which have been written. You can select the part of which you execute the counter
reset and configure the unit serial number setting.
• The edited parts are included:
Data file including the unit of which you have selected the part for the counter reset, or the unit of which you configure the
unit serial number
Data file which has the all units whose part information are imported to the device.
• The unit with "blank" on the status column of the unit information list is the target unit of the replacement.
• The display of the status column means the unit status.
• Blank:
Unit of which the part information is output from the device (replacement target)
Unit of which you have selected the part for the counter reset, or the unit of which you configure the unit serial number
• Already written:
Unit whose part for the counter reset has been written in the data file
Unit of which the part information has been imported to the device
• For the unit with "Already imported the device." on the status column in the unit information list, you cannot select the part for
the counter reset.
5. After the reading of unit completes, the part selection screen appears.
E-40
6. Select the unit that requires the replacement, select the part for the counter reset, and then click "Back to writing screen".
Be sure to conduct the same operation to all units that you execute the replacement.
Note
• Even when you click the "Back to writing screen" button in the part selection screen, the machine does not conduct the
writing to the data file. Writing to the data file is executed on the writing screen. For details, refer to the steps 7 and more.
• The unit serial number is reflected when you return to the writing screen and conduct the writing to the data file. The display is
not updated while the number is input or edited. So, the old information before the number is input appears as the following
serial numbers: The serial number on the button on the left side of the screen, the unit information or the main body
information
7. The writing screen appears.

Confirm that the unit whose part is selected is "Completed editing".
E-41
8. Repeat step 4 to step 7 to all data files which include the unit for the replacement.
Note
• To switch to the folder cooperation mode, click "Reference" button of the writing screen and select the folder.
The activation mode can be switched with "Option" (Refer to E.1.10.4.(8) Option).
10. A writing confirmation message appears and the unit in the "Completed editing" status is written in the data file of the USB memory or the
PC folder. Then, the replacement completes.
In the USB cooperation mode, when the replacement completes, the USB memory can be safely removed.
Note
• When the USB memory failed to be removed safely, writing to data file possibly does not complete properly. Confirm that no
• In the folder cooperate mode, be careful not to mistake the import data when C1070, C1070P, C1060, C1060L is cooperated.
• During the replacement, the Management Tool cannot be exited.
E-42
1.10.9 bizhub PRESS C1100, 1085 replacement procedure

Or select "Replacement work" in "Tool" menu.
2. A screen to select machine type appears.
Select "bizhub PRESS C1100/1085" and click [OK] button.

Proceed to step 3.
connected.
3. When the unit read screen is displayed, touch the RFID tag with the RFID tag reader.
4. When the read process is completed, the unit information screen is displayed.
The units that are read are listed on the left of the screen as buttons.
5. Select the parts and reset the counted value from the unit information that is read.
E-43
Note
• When the intermediate transfer belt of the intermediate transfer unit is selected for the count reset, the intermediate transfer
belt information screen is displayed.
Be sure to input the reflectance value that is written on the belt.
6. Click "Reset count".

When the count reset screen is displayed, contact the RFID tag with the RFID tag reader.
7. When the count reset is done successfully, the unit information screen is updated.
E-44
8. When the count reset requires to be canceled, click "Undo reset count".
When the canceling count reset screen is displayed, touch the RFID tag with the RFID tag reader. The count information returns to the
condition when it was read.
9. To read the information of another unit, click "Read another".

→ Return to step 3.
Note
• Information of up to 10 units can be read at a time of each replacement work.
When the information of more than 10 units requires to be read, exit the replacement work once and select "Replacement work
" on the top screen again.
• While in replacement work, the Management Tool cannot be exited.
1.10.10 Backup file

For the replacement operation of bizhub PRESS C7000, bizhub PRESS C6000, 1250, 1250P, 1052, bizhub PRESS C1070, bizhub PRESS
C1070P, bizhub PRESS C71hc, bizhub PRESS C1060, and PRO C1060L: Back up the data file when you write in the data file.
E-45
Management Tool Management Tool

Machine Machine
Import
Read Read
Output Write Output Write
Writing
folder Backup Backup
Backup
folder
The backup file is created during writing

and saved until next writing.
Note
• If the wrong information is written with Management Tool, take back the backup file to the writing folder to recover the
information.
• When several writings are executed to 1 data file, the data you can recover is the data file which written before the last writing.
• For the backup file in the USB cooperation mode, a backup folder is created automatically and saved in the ORU-DATA folder.
• For the backup file in the folder cooperation mode, a backup folder is created automatically and saved in the folder that is the
same as the data file.
1.10.11 Administrator mode

Register the required information of the Management Tool.
(1) Top screen
When you log in successfully, the top screen appears.

• To check the work log, click the "WorkLog" button. (Refer to E.1.10.11.(3) Administrator Setting)
• To register the customer information, click the "RegisterUser" button. (Refer to E.1.10.4.(4) Register user)
• To register a technician, click the "RegisterTech" button. (Refer to E.1.10.11.(2) Register technician)
• To change the administrator password, click "Admin.setting" button. (Refer to E.1.10.11.(3) Administrator Setting)
(2) Register technician

Register, edit or delete the technician information.
(a) Technician list

Click [RegisterTech] on the top screen.
Alternatively, select "RegisterTech" in the "Tool" menu.
E-46
Note
• The items can be sorted in the descending or ascending order when you click the item name of the technician information list.
The mark ▲ indicates that the current display is in ascending order. Click it to change in descending order.
• The items which appears on the technician information list screen and their display width can be changed via "Set View".
(Refer to E.1.10.12.(5) Set list view)
(b) New resister

Register a new technician information.
The items with "*" must be filled.
1. Enter "Technician name."

Use 1 to 64 characters regardless of whether one-byte or two byte.
2. Enter "Password" and "Password (confirmation)."
Use one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols for password.
3. Enter "Country."
4. Enter "Company name."
5. Enter the following items if you need.
• Enter "Technician code." Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
• Enter "Company code." Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
• Enter "Service office name." Use 0 to 256 characters regardless of whether one-byte or two byte.
• Enter "Service office code." Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
• "Generate a password"
When you click "Generate a password", a password is generated automatically.
Click "Set password" to register the password which is automatically generated, to the "Password" and "Password (confirmation)."
Click "Copy" to copy the password which is automatically generated, to the clipboard.
6. Click [Register].
The entered technician information is registered and the next technician information can be registered.
Note
• Registration Number is determined automatically.
(c) Edit
Edit a registered technician information.
E-47
1. Edit the items to be changed.

• Edit "Technician name." Use 1 to 64 characters regardless of whether one-byte or two byte.
• Edit "Technician code." Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
• Edit "Country." Use 1 to 128 characters regardless of whether one-byte or two byte.
• Edit "Company." Use 1 to 256 characters regardless of whether one-byte or two byte.
• Edit "Company code." Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
• Edit "Service office name." Use 0 to 256 characters regardless of whether one-byte or two byte.
• Edit "Service office code." Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
2. Click [OK].
The edited result is reflected to the technician information.
(d) Import
Import the technician information which is exported from Management Tool.
1. Specify the storage location of the technician information file you import.
2. Click [Open].
The technician information file is imported.
Note
• The existing technician information is not imported.
(e) Export
Export the technician information collectively.
1. Specify the location where you want to store the file.
2. Click [Save].
The export of the technician information starts.
Note
• The file format "Technician Information file" is a format to display the contents on the Management Tool. When the file is
stored in the other format, the file is unable to open on the Management Tool.
(3) Administrator Setting

Change the administrator password.
E-48
1. Enter the current password and the new password.

2. Click [OK].
The new Password is registered.
Note
1.10.12 Various setting for the software

(1) File menu
(a) Import
• Work log
To load the work log which has been exported with the Management Tool, select "Work log" from "Import" in the "File" menu. (Refer to
E.1.10.4.(3).(c) Import)
Note
• It is available only from the top screen or the Work log screen.
• User information
To load the user information which has been exported with the Management Tool, select "User information" from "Import" in the "File"
menu (Refer to E.1.10.4.(4).(d) Import)
Note
• It is available only from the top screen or the Register user screen.
• Technician information
To load the technician information which has been exported with the Management Tool, select "Technician information" from "Import" in
the "File" menu. (Refer to E.1.10.11.(2).(d) Import)
Note
• This menu appears when you log in as an administrator.
• It is available only from the top screen or the Technician information screen.
(b) Export
• Work log
To store the collective work log as a file, select "Work log" from "Export" in the "File" menu. (Refer to E.1.10.4.(3).(d) Export)
Note
• It is available only from the top screen or the Work log screen.
• User information
To store the collective user information as a file, select "User information" from "Export" in the "File" menu. (Refer to E.1.10.4.(4).(e)
Export)
Note
• It is available only from the top screen or the Register user screen.
• Technician information
To store the collective user information as a file, select "Technician information" from "Export" in the "File" menu. (Refer to E.1.10.11.
(2).(e) Export)
Note
• It is available only from the top screen or the Register technician screen.
(2) Tool menu

The functions in "Tool" are available only from the top screen.
(a) Replacement work

To perform the unit parts replacement, select "Replacement work" in the "Tool" menu. (Refer to E.1.10.4.(2) Replacement work)
Note
• This menu appears when you log in to the technician mode.
E-49
(b) Work log

Select "Work log" from "Tool" to check the work log. (Refer to E.1.10.4.(3) Work log)
(c) Register user

Select "Register user" in the "Tool" menu to check, to register, to edit, or to delete the user information. (Refer to E.1.10.4.(4) Register user)
(d) SetPersonal
To change the password of the login technician or to edit comments, select "Set personal info" in the "Tool" menu. (Refer to E.1.10.4.(5)
SetPersonal)
Note
(e) Unit Serial Number Setting

To write the unit serial number in the RFID tag, select "Unit Serial Number" from the "Tool" menu. (Refer to E.1.10.4.(6) Unit serial number
setting (bizhub PRESS C8000 and bizhub PRESS C1100, 1085))
Note
(f) Intermediate transfer steering sensor information setting

The default value of the intermediate transfer steering sensor can be written in the RFID tag when you select "Intermediate transfer steering
sensor information setting" from the "Tool" menu. (Refer to E.1.10.4.(7) Intermediate transfer steering sensor information setting (bizhub
PRESS C8000 and bizhub PRESS C1100, 1085))
Note
(g) Option
Each item of Management Tool can be configured when you select "Option" from the "Tool" menu. (Refer to E.1.10.4.(8) Option)
Note
(h) Register technician

Select "Register technician" in the "Tool" menu to check, to register, to edit, or to delete the technician information. (Refer to E.1.10.11.(2)
Register technician)
Note
(i) Administrator Setting

To change the password of the administrator, select "Administrator Setting" in the "Tool" menu. (Refer to E.1.10.11.(3) Administrator
Setting)
Note
(3) Help menu

(a) Version
To display the version information of the Management Tool, select "Version" in the "Help" menu.
Note
• The image at the top of the screen can be customized. (Refer to E.1.10.12.(4) Image setting)
(4) Image setting

(a) Navigation
"70 x 40 (pixels)" image display area of is provided in the navigation view area. The users can customize the displayed image.
Item Description
Supported file type GIF, JPG, JPEG, BMP, PNG
Image size Image size is arbitrary. *1
Display method Enlarge or reduce the displayed custom image to the area size (70 x 40).
File Name Navigation. (extension*2)
Stored location (Install directory)\Images
Remark When a file exists, a custom image appears. *3
*1 70 x 40 (pixels) size is recommended.
*2 For extension, refer to "Supported file type."
When a file does not exist, a default image that is shown above the chart appears.
E-50
(b) The login screen

"480 x 90 (pixels)" image display area of is provided on the login screen.
Users can customize the displayed image here.
Item Description
File Name Login.(extension*2)
(c) Top screen

"350 x 365 (pixels)*1" image display area of is provided on the login screen (when the main window size is 800 x 600*2). Users can
customize the displayed image here.
Item Description
File Name TopMenu.(extension*3)
*2 Image size (350 x 365) is default value. Enlarge or reduce the displayed image in accordance with the window size.
(d) Version information screen

"460 x 150 (pixels)" image display area of is provided on the version information screen.
Users can customize the displayed image here.
E-51
Item Description
File Name Version.(extension*2)
(5) Set list view

The display items and the display width can be changed.
1. Click [Set list view].
2. The set list view screen appears.
The displayed items differs among screens.
The following figure is the work log set list view screen.
3. Check in the list and configure show or hide of items.

• Items with the check appears.
• The setting can be changed when you click [Show]/[Hide] on the right side of the screen.
4. Configure other conditions if you need.
• Selected column width: Enter the arbitrary value and specify the display width. You can specify it by 0 to 999.
• [Top]:Item display order is moved to top.
• [Bottom]:Item display order is moved to bottom.
5. Click [OK].
The set list view is updated.
(6) Export CSV

The format of the CSV file that Management Tool export is as follows.
Output items
Common information (Replacement work information)
No Item Description
1 User name The user name that is associated to the replacement work is exported.
2 Type of business (user) The type of business that is associated to the replacement work is exported.
3 User code The user code that is associated to the replacement work is exported.
4 User ID The user ID that is associated to the replacement work is exported.
The user office location name that is associated to the replacement work is
5 User office location name (user)
exported.
The user office location code that is associated to the replacement work is
6 User office location code (user)
exported.
7 Contact person name (user) The contact person name that is associated to the replacement work is exported.
The contact person ID number that is associated to the replacement work is
8 Contact person ID no. (user)
exported.
9 Contact telephone (user) The contact telephone that is associated to the replacement work is exported.
10 Technician name The name of the technician who performed replacement work is exported.
11 Technician code The code of the technician who performed replacement work is exported.
12 Country (technician) The country of the technician who performed replacement work is exported.
The company name of the technician who performed replacement work is
13 Company name (technician)
exported.
E-52
The company code of the technician who performed replacement work is

14 Company code (technician)
exported.
The service office name of the technician who performed replacement work is
15 Service office name (technician)
exported.
The service office code of the technician who performed replacement work is
16 Service office code (technician)
exported.
17 Machine name Export the device name.
18 Main Body Serial Number The serial number of the main body is exported.
19 Unit type The unit type is exported.
20 Unit Serial Number The serial number of the unit is exported.
21 Replacement Count The number of times of the unit replacement is exported.
22 Unit removal date The date of the unit removal is exported.
23 Count read date The date when the unit RFID tag is read is exported.
24 Count reset date The date when the count is reset is exported.
25 The last undo reset date The last date when the cancellation of the reset is exported.
26 Number of parts The number of parts in the unit is exported.
Part Information (for each part)
27 Number Assigned from 1 automatically.
28 Replace The replaced parts are outputted as "Changed."
29 Parts name The parts name is exported.
30 Parts Number The parts number is exported.
31 Quantity The quantity of parts is exported.
32 Count The count value of parts is exported.
33 Life cycle The life cycle value of parts is exported.
When the unit type is "intermediate transfer unit" and the parts is "intermediate
34 Supplement 1 transfer belt" with the count reset, "intermediate transfer belt characteristic value
(front)" is exported.
When the unit type is "intermediate transfer unit" and the parts is "intermediate
35 Supplement 2 transfer belt" with the count reset, "intermediate transfer belt characteristic value
(rear)" is exported.
Note
• Break character is "," (comma).
• Each item is enclosed in " " (double quotation marks).
• When no data exist, only " " (double quotation marks) is outputted.
File format
The header (item name) is created on the first row of the file.
For the subsequent rows, each parts information is outputted per one line.
For example, when the unit has 15 parts in it, 15 rows are outputted per replacement work.
1st row Header row (exports the item name)
2nd row Replacement work 1 - part (1)
3rd row Replacement work 2 - part (2)

4th row Replacement work 3 - part (3) N of replaced parts
per replacement work
5th row Replacement work 4 - part (4)
(7) Print Report

Details on the replacement work can be printed as a replacement report.
E-53
Print layout
1.10.13 Error message list

An error message may appear while Management Tool is operating.
The description of error and its error code are displayed.
The error codes and countermeasures are shown below. Follow the countermeasures shown below.
Error code Countermeasures
400-402, 500, 501, 600, 700, 2005-2008, Retry.
2030-2044, 2100-2109, 2130-2140, 2151-2160,
2170-2187, 2194-2196, 2200-2209, 2230-2240,
2251-2260, 2270-2280, 2290-2297, 2303-2329,
2331-2343, 2346-2358, 2362, 2363, 2367,
2405, 2409, 2411, 2500-2509, 2516, 2517,
2520-2523, 2762-2766, 2781-2843, 3000-3006,
3008-3014, 3100, 3101
2402, 2403, 2410, 2411, 5001-5011, 5200-5208 Check the RFID tag and retry.
Note
• When the same error occurs even after retrying, remove the RFID tag reader/writer
from a computer once and insert it again, then reboot the Management Tool.
• When the same error still occurs, contact an administrator.
2400, 2406-2408, 5100-5106 Check whether the RFID tag reader/writer is connected to a computer correctly.
E-54
102, 111-113, 800-802, 854, 855, 860-868, Reinstall the Management Tool.
880-884, 2090-2096, 2600-2611, 2622-2633,
2636-2644, 2710-2720, 3000-3006
2100-2121, 2151-2160, 2170-2180, 2200-2221, The file is not supported.
2251-2260, 2270-2280, 2303-2319, 2322-2329,
2331-2345, 2359 , 2731, 2760, 2761
100 Non-compliant OS is used.
803-808, 914, 915, 950, 951, 2401, 2404, Reboot the Management Tool.
2721-2723, 2730, 2732-2759, 2767-2775, 5102,
5201
2510-2515 Check the printing environment.
1.11 Machine state log store

1.11.1 Outline
This function stores the operation condition of the machine to HDD. When an error occurs, you can aquire the data to a USB memory.
NOTE
• When DIPSW2-0 is "0" or when DIPSW18-7 is "1", this function is not available.
(1) Function
This function limits the items that are saved by "14 Log Store" on the service mode. Therefore, you can aquire the long term log.
• Correction timing (gamma, patch, registration)
• Paper feed request
• Drawing completion
• Paper exit completion (single paper exit)
• Paper exit completion (bundle paper exit): Status report of the post processing machine
• No paper report: No paper report of the selected tray
• Printer operation status
• DF JAM status change
• DF SC status change
• Machine status report
• Tray condition report
• Start, completion, stop of the job
• Finisher status report
• DF condition report
• Temperature and humidity
(2) Usage
Send this log data to KM when an error occurs.
(3) Specifications
Log storage size Up to 10GB (1 file is approximately 10MB.)
Number of saved files Up to 100 files
Log storage area HDD RAW area
Log storage file type dat type
Required USB memory space Approximately 1.5GB
When the free space is less than 1.5GB, all the log files cannot be saved.
Saved data Private information such as the destination addresses are not saved.
1.11.2 Log acquisition

(1) Preparation
(2) Procedure
1. "Service Mode menu screen"
Stop→0→8→5→9→8→7→Clear
Note
• Do not move the screen from the service mode to other screens during the log acquisition.
• During the log acquisition, connect only 1 USB memory to the service port.
2. Disconnect the USB memory from the service port.

3. Check the log on the USB memory.
The following folder is created at the root directly of the USB memory.
EtrnlLog_(Product number)_(Firmware version)_YYYY(Year)_MM(Month)_DD(Date)_hh(Hour)_mm(Minute)
• EtrnlLog_XXXXXXX-XXXX-XXX-XXXX_YYYYMMDDhhmm
E-55
1.12 Real-time Remote Panel

1.12.1 Setting Up Real-time Remote Panel
To use Real-time Remote Panel, you need a Windows computer installed with a browser recommended as follows, or a computer or mobile
device (such as the iPad) installed with VNC Viewer (VNC client application) that supports RFB protocol version 3.8 or later.
(1) Operating environment

Browser use environment
Operating system Windows 7
Windows 8
Web Browser Microsoft Internet Explorer 8 or higher
Mozilla Firefox 18 or higher
Google Chrome 24 or higher
NOTE
• In your browser, JavaScript must be enabled.
VNC Viewer use environment
Operating system Windows 7
Windows 8
Mac OS X 10.7 Lion or later
iOS 5 or later
Android ver. 4.0.3 or later
Application VNC Viewer supporting 16 bit color display and RFB protocol version 3.8 or later
The following applications are available:
• Real VNC Viewer (for Windows, Mac OS, iOS, Android)
• Remoter VNC - Remote Desktop (for iOS)
• PocketCloud Remote Desktop RDP/VNC (for iOS, Android)
(2) Setup procedure

To use Real-time Remote Panel in a browser, set up the regular remote panel first before installing the exclusive plugin.
• For details about how to set up the regular remote panel, refer to Setting Up Remote Panel / Remote Monitor / Multi Monitor.
• For details about the installation procedure, refer to E.1.12.2 Installing Web plugin.
To use Real-time Remote Panel with a VNC Viewer, enable the VNC function of the machine. The connection setting of the VNC Viewer is
also required. For details, refer to each of the following pages.
• E.1.12.3 Enabling VNC Function of the Machine
• E.1.12.4 Setting Connection to VNC Viewer
Real-time Remote Panel is initially activated and the session timeout time is set to 0 minutes (no timeout). To change these settings, refer to
the following page.
• E.1.12.5 Remote Panel Advanced Settings
1.12.2 Installing Web plugin

Files necessary to install the plugin can be downloaded by accessing the download page from Remote Panel of Web Utilities. As downloaded
installation files are compressed, be sure to extract them before installation.
Recommended hardware requirements:
A computer equipped with 32 bit or 64 bit, 1.5 GHz or greater processor and 512 MB or more of RAM
NOTE
• The plugin of Real-time Remote Panel checks the version requested from the machine when Remote Panel is loaded. If the
requested version is newer, a message is displayed to prompt you to install the latest plugin. Keep the latest version installed so
that the plugin functions properly in Remote Panel.
(1) Downloading software

1. Display the [Main page] screen of Web Utilities.
2. Click on [Remote Panel].
Remote Panel is displayed in the browser.

3. Click [Download Page] in the upper right of the screen.
E-56
The [Download Real-time Remote Panel plugin] page is displayed.

4. Click [Download] to save the files in a desired directory.
NOTE
• Two file types are provided on the download page. Click each button to save them in a desired directory of the computer.
Item File Name Type Description
Real-time Remote Panel Setup.exe Installer A file to execute the
Plugin Installer for Windows installation
Real-time Remote Panel RealTime_Remote_Panel_InstallFile.zi Installation file A compressed file including
Plugin InstallFile p the plugin to be actually
installed
(2) Extracting installation file

1. Right-click the installation file, and select [Extract All...] from the pull-down menu.
The [Select a Destination and Extract Files] screen is displayed.

2. As the destination of extraction, specify the folder in which the installer (Setup.exe) is saved, and then click [Extract].
NOTE
• If the location you saved the installation file is not the same as that of the installer, click [Browse...] to specify the folder in
which the installer is saved.
E-57
3. Check the extracted installation file.
Check that the following two folders are saved in the folder specified as the destination of extraction.
[libraries]
[plugins]
NOTE
• Be sure to store the two folders extracted from RealTime_Remote_Panel_InstallFile.zip ([libraries] and [plugins]) and the
installer (Setup.exe) in the same folder. Otherwise, an error message is displayed when the installer is launched.
(3) Installing the plugin

NOTE
• Installing the plugin requires the administrator privilege.
1. Double-click Setup.exe.
The installer starts.
2. Click [Next].
A screen is displayed to prompt you to install Microsoft Visual C++ 2008 Redistributable Package.
NOTE
• For the operation of the plugin, Microsoft Visual C++ 2008 Redistributable Package is required to be installed on the
computer. If this package has already been installed, proceed to step 5.
3. Install Microsoft Visual C++ 2008 Redistributable Package on the computer, and then click [Next].
NOTE
• Microsoft Visual C++ 2008 Redistributable Package can be downloaded from Official Microsoft Download Center.
The [License Agreement] screen is displayed.

4. Select [I accept the agreement] after checking the content, and then click [Next].
E-58
NOTE
• If you disagree, you will not be able to install Job Centro.
• By selecting from the drop-down list, you can change the language of the license agreement.
5. Check the copyright information on the [Information] screen, and then click [Next].
6. Click [Install].
The installation is started.

7. Click [Finish].
E-59
The installation is complete.

NOTE
• When uninstalling the plugin, follow the instructions provided for each OS.
1.12.3 Enabling VNC Function of the Machine

Set up the VNC Function of the machine in the Machine Manager Setting of Web Utilities.
1. Click on [Machine Manager Setting].
2. Click on [Machine Manager Setting].
The password entry dialog box is displayed.

3. Enter "admin" in the User Name text box, and the 8-character administrator password in the password text box, then click on [OK].
The [Machine Manager Setting ] screen is displayed.
4. Click on [Remote Panel Setting/Job History Setting].
The [Remote panel setting/Job history setting] screen is displayed.

5. Click [Remote Panel Advanced Settings] in the upper left of the screen.
The [Remote Panel Advanced Settings] screen is displayed.
E-60
6. Set the VNC password composed of 8 characters, and then click [OK].
The VNC password should be composed of 8 characters using upper cases, lower cases, numbers, and symbols (excluding colons (:),
double quotation marks ("), and commas (,)). Setting a password of the content other than specified is rejected with an error message
displayed in the screen.
When the VNC function is enabled, the display of the button changes to [Disable].
NOTE
• Once the VNC function is enabled or disabled, the setting change cannot be accepted for 10 minutes. To reset the setting, hold
steady for 10 minutes or open the [Remote Panel Advanced Settings] screen again after 10 minutes.
1.12.4 Setting Connection to VNC Viewer

To use the Real-time Remote Panel in the VNC Viewer, enter the IP address of the connection destination (machine) and the VNC password on
the connection setting screen of the application.
The VNC password is required to be set in advance. For details, refer to E.1.12.3 Enabling VNC Function of the Machine
The following procedure is an example showing how to set up the VNC Viewer for iPad "Remoter VNC."
1. Start Remoter VNC.
2. Tap [Discovery List].
3. Tap [Add Session Manually].
4. Tap [Select] of "Server Type," and then select [VNC/ScreenSharing].
E-61
5. Enter the IP address of the machine for "VNC Hostname," and the VNC password for "VNC Password."
6. Tap [Save] in the upper right of the window.

The connection to the machine is completed. The profile selection screen is displayed.
7. Select the profile of the touch panel of the machine, and then enter your password in the login screen.
8. Tap [Unlock].
Remote Panel is displayed.
1.12.5 Remote Panel Advanced Settings

The [Remote Panel Advanced Settings] screen is provided to disable Real-time Remote Panel or to set the time for the session timeout.
1. Follow the procedure in E.1.12.3 Enabling VNC Function of the Machine to display the [Remote Panel Advanced Settings] screen.
2. Make desired settings.
To disable Real-time Remote Panel, click [Disable] in the right side area of [Enable or disable Real-time Remote Panel]. The function is
disabled, and the display of the button changes to [Enable].
To set the session timeout time, enter a desired time on the right side of [Session Timeout], and then click [Setting].
NOTE
• Once Real-time Remote Panel or VNC function is enabled or disabled, the setting change cannot be accepted for 10 minutes.
To reset the setting, hold steady for 10 minutes or open the [Remote Panel Advanced Settings] screen again after 10 minutes.
• ■■■■
E-62
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 1. MAINTENANCE ITEM
F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE
1. MAINTENANCE ITEM
1.1 Maintenance item
1.1.1 Procedure of the periodical maintenance
Note
• For the procedure of the periodic maintenance, refer to F.5 Periodical maintenance procedure bizhub PRESS C1070, C1070P,
C71hc, C1060, bizhub PRO C1060L.
1.1.2 Condition of the count

Note
• For the condition of the count, refer to"I.4.6.17 Special Parts Counter".
1.2 bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc

1.2.1 Total counter
(1) Every 400,000 counts
Nu Unit classification Description Qua Implementation classification Remark
mb ntity Cleani Check Lubric Repla
er ng ation ce
1 External section Filter box ● Actual replacement: 100%
A50UR70A## 1 (special parts counter)
F.4 Life value

er ng ation ce
1 External section Developing dust-proof filter/1 1 ● Actual replacement: 100%
A50U1689## (special parts counter)
Developing dust-proof filter/2 1 ● F.4 Life value
A50U1695##
PH dust-proof filter 1 ●
A50U1688##
Electric component cooling filter 1 ●
A50U1099##
Suction dust-proof filter 1 ●
A50U1649##
1.2.2 Special parts counter

er ng ation ce
1 Paper feed section Paper feed roller rubber ● Service tool: cleaning pad,
Separation roller rubber ● isopropyl alcohol
Pick-up roller ●

er ng ation ce
1 Paper feed section Slide sheet ● · Service tool: cleaning pad,
isopropyl alcohol
· Be sure to clean them at the
same time with the replacement
of the paper feed roller rubber
and the separation roller rubber.
Paper feed roller rubber 2 ●
25SA4096##
Separation roller rubber 2 ●
25SA4096##
F-1

er ng ation ce
1 Toner collection Waste toner box ● The sensor detects its full
1
section A50UR701## automatically

er ng ation ce
1 Write section Dust proof glass/Y, dust proof glass/ ● · Service tool: Hydro-wipe
M, dust proof glass/C, dust proof · Be sure to clean it at the same
glass/K time with the replacement of the
charging corona.
2 Charging section Charging corona/Y ● ● · Actual replacement: 100%
1
A50UR703## (special parts counter)
Charging corona/M ● ● F.4 Life value
1 · Execute the cleaning when it
A50UR703##
is dirty.
Charging corona/C ● ●
1
A50UR703##
Charging corona/K ● ●
1
A50UR703##
3 Registration section Registration cleaning sheet assy ● Service tool: blower brush,
cleaning pad, isopropyl alcohol
Loop roller ● · Service tool: cleaning pad,
Loop driven roller ● isopropyl alcohol
4 Fusing section Fusing separating claw assy ● same time with the cleaning of
the registration cleaning sheet
assy.

er ng ation ce
1 Photo conductor Around the process unit ● Be sure to clean the process
section unit when you pull it out.
2 Intermediate transfer Toner collection sheet 1 ● Actual replacement: 100%
section A1DUR71C## (special parts counter)
Belt cleaning blade 1 ● F.4 Life value
A50UR70K##
Side seal 2 ●
A50U5316##

er ng ation ce
1 Reverse exit section Reverse de-curler roller 1 ●
A50U8605##

er ng ation ce
1 Intermediate transfer Cleaning sheet ● · Service tool: cleaning pad,
section Tension roller ● isopropyl alcohol
Belt driven roller ● same time with the replacement
Assist roller ● of the intermediate transfer belt.
1st transfer roller/Y ● Actual replacement: 100%
1
1st transfer roller/M ● F.4 Life value
1
A50U5012##
F-2
1st transfer roller/C 1 ●

A50U5012##
1st transfer roller/K 1 ●
A50U5012##
2nd transfer roller/Up 1 ●
A50U5004##
Intermediate transfer belt 1 ●
A1DU5042##
2nd transfer unit ● · Service tool: cleaning pad,
isopropyl alcohol
of the 2nd transfer roller/Lw.
2nd transfer roller/Lw 1 ● Actual replacement: 100%
Separation discharging unit 1 ● F.4 Life value
A50UR70B##

er ng ation ce
1 Photo conductor Drum unit/Y 1 ● Actual replacement: 460,000
section Drum unit/M 1 ● counts (quantity) or 100%
(distance), whichever is earlier
Drum unit/C 1 ● F.4 Life value
Drum unit/K ● A5WH0Y0## (C1070, C1070P,
1 C71hc, C1060)
A5WJ0Y0## (C1060L)

er ng ation ce
1 Registration section Registration cleaning sheet assy 1 ●
A50UR70D##
2 Fusing section Fusing paper exit roller/Lw ● · Service tool: cleaning pad,
Fusing paper exit roller/Up ● isopropyl alcohol
Neutralizing ring ● same time with the replacement
of the fusing belt.
Fusing belt 1 ●
A50U7577##
Heat insulating sleeve/Lw1, heat 4 ● ● Service tool: Multemp FF-RM
insulating sleeve/Lw2
A50U7563##
Fusing gear/1 ● ●
1
A50U7527##
Fusing gear/2 ●
1
A50U7522##

er ng ation ce
1 Paper feed section Pick-up roller 2 ●
A1DUR71J##

er ng ation ce
1 Intermediate transfer Transfer belt cleaning unit Actual replacement: 100%
section A50UR706## 1 ● (special parts counter)
F.4 Life value
F-3
Transfer belt separation claw

3 ●
A1DUR719##
(12) Every 1,000,000 counts

er ng ation ce
1 Reverse exit section Paper exit de-curler roller ●
1
A50U8908##
Paper exit drive gear ● Be sure to replace it at the
A03U9095## 1 same time with the replacement
of the paper exit decurler roller.

er ng ation ce
1 Developing section Developer/Y 1 ● Be sure to replace it together
DV614Y with the developing unit at the
Developer/M 1 ● same time.
DV614M (C1070, C1070P)
DV615M (C71hc)
Developer/C 1 ●
DV614C (C1070, C1070P)
DV615C (C71hc)
Developer/K 1 ●
DV614K
Developing unit/Y 1 ● Actual replacement: 100%
Developing unit/M 1 ● F.4 Life value
A50UR702##
Developing unit/C 1 ●
A50UR702##
Developing unit/K 1 ●
A50UR702##
2 Fusing section Belt regulating sleeve 2 ●
A50U7241##
Fusing paper exit roller/Up 2 ●
A50U7609##
Heat insulating sleeve/Up 2 ● ● Service tool: Multemp FF-RM
A03U7295##
Fusing bearing/Lw1, fusing bearing/ 4 ● ●
Lw2
26NA5371##
Fusing bearing/Up 2 ● ●
A1UD7235##
Fusing gear/2 1 ● ●
A03U8095##
Fusing Roller/1 1 ●
A50U7201##
Fusing roller/Lw 1 ●
A50U7401##
A50U7205##
Fusing separating claw assy 5 ●
A50UR72U##
Neutralizing ring 1 ●
A50U7337##
Neutralizing flat spring assy 1 ●
A50UR733##

er ng ation ce
1 Registration section Registration roller 1 ●
F-4
A50U7101##
Registration roller bearing ●
2
A03U8128##
Registration swing home sensor ● · Service tool: blower brush
(PS20) · Be sure to clean it at the same
1 time with the replacement of the
registration roller and the
registration roller bearing.

er ng ation ce
1 Intermediate transfer Belt separation claw solenoid (SD2) ●
1
section 26NA8251##
2nd transfer earth plate assy ● Actual replacement: 100%
2
A50UR70G## (special parts counter)
C-clip ● F.4 Life value
2
V218060086

er ng ation ce
1 Paper feed section Paper feed clutch 2 ●
56AA8201##
Pre-registration clutch 2 ●
56AA8201##
2 Vertical conveyance Intermediate conveyance clutch/1 ●
section (CL5) 1
56AA8201##
3 Duplex section Intermediate conveyance clutch/2 ●
(CL6) 1
56AA8201##
Intermediate conveyance clutch/3 ●
(CL7) 1
56AA8201##

er ng ation ce
1 Registration section Registration idler gear 1 ●
A50U7137##

er ng ation ce
1 Fusing section Fusing heater lamp assy/Up ●
A50UM31A## (Japan)
1
A50UM31E## (North America)
A50UM31F## (Europe)
Fusing temperature sensor/3 (TH3) ●
1
A50UR70F##
1
A50UR70E##

er ng ation ce
1 Intermediate transfer Transfer roller bearing/Y, transfer ●
section roller bearing/M, transfer roller 6
bearing/C
F-5
65AA2638##
Transfer roller bearing/K ●
2
A50U5057##
1.3 bizhub PRESS C1060/bizhub PRO C1060L

1.3.1 Total counter
er ng ation ce
1 External section Filter box 1 ● Actual replacement: 100%
A50UR70A## (special parts counter)
F.4 Life value

er ng ation ce
1 External section Developing dust-proof filter/1 1 ● Actual replacement: 100%
Developing dust-proof filter/2 1 ● F.4 Life value
A50U1695##
PH dust-proof filter 1 ●
A50U1688##
Electric component cooling filter 1 ●
A50U1099##
Suction dust-proof filter 1 ●
A50U1649##

er ng ation ce
1 Paper feed section Paper feed roller rubber ● Service tool: cleaning pad,
Separation roller rubber ● isopropyl alcohol
Pick-up roller ●

er ng ation ce
1 Paper feed section Slide sheet ● · Service tool: cleaning pad,
isopropyl alcohol
of the paper feed roller rubber
and the separation roller rubber.
Paper feed roller rubber 2 ●
25SA4096##
Separation roller rubber 2 ●
25SA4096##

er ng ation ce
1 Toner collection Waste toner box 1 ● The sensor detects its full
section A50UR701## automatically
F-6

er ng ation ce
1 Write section Dust proof glass/Y, dust proof glass/ ● · Service tool: Hydro-wipe
M, dust proof glass/C, dust proof · Be sure to clean it at the same
glass/K time with the replacement of the
charging corona.
2 Charging section Charging corona/Y ● ● Actual replacement: 100%
1
Charging corona/M ● ● F.4 Life value
1
A50UR703##
Charging corona/C ● ●
1
A50UR703##
Charging corona/K ● ●
1
A50UR703##

er ng ation ce
1 Photo conductor Around the process unit ● Be sure to clean the process
section unit when you pull it out.
2 Intermediate transfer Toner collection sheet 1 ● Actual replacement: 100%
section A1DUR71C## (special parts counter)
Belt cleaning blade 1 ● F.4 Life value
A50UR70K##
Side seal 2 ●
A50U5316##
3 Registration section Registration cleaning sheet assy ● Service tool: blower brush,
cleaning pad, isopropyl alcohol
Loop roller ● · Service tool: cleaning pad,
Loop driven roller ● isopropyl alcohol
4 Fusing section Fusing separating claw assy ● same time with the cleaning of
assy.

er ng ation ce
1 Intermediate transfer Cleaning sheet ● · Service tool: cleaning pad,
section Tension roller ● isopropyl alcohol
Belt driven roller ● same time with the replacement
Assist roller ● of the intermediate transfer belt.
1st transfer roller/Y ● Actual replacement: 100%
1
1st transfer roller/M ● F.4 Life value
1
A50U5012##
1st transfer roller/C 1 ●
A50U5012##
1st transfer roller/K 1 ●
A50U5012##
2nd transfer roller/Up 1 ●
A50U5004##
Intermediate transfer belt 1 ●
A1DU5042##
2nd transfer unit ● · Service tool: cleaning pad,
isopropyl alcohol
of the 2nd transfer roller/Lw.
2nd transfer roller/Lw 1 ● Actual replacement: 100%
F.4 Life value
F-7
Separation discharging unit 1 ●

A50UR70B##
3 Reverse exit section Reverse de-curler roller 1 ●
A50U8605##

er ng ation ce
1 Photo conductor Drum unit/Y 1 ● Actual replacement: 410,000
section Drum unit/M 1 ● counts (quantity) or 100%
(distance), whichever is earlier
Drum unit/C 1 ● F.4 Life value
Drum unit/K ● A5WH0Y0## (C1070, C1070P,
1 C71hc, C1060)
A5WJ0Y0## (C1060L)

er ng ation ce
1 Registration section Registration cleaning sheet assy 1 ●
A50UR70D##
Neutralizing ring ● same time with the replacement
of the fusing belt.
Fusing belt 1 ●
A50U7577##
Heat insulating sleeve/Lw1, heat 4 ● ● Service tool: Multemp FF-RM
A50U7563##
1
A50U7527##
Fusing gear/2 ●
1
A50U7522##

er ng ation ce
1 Intermediate transfer Transfer belt cleaning unit Actual replacement: 100%
section A50UR706## 1 ● (special parts counter)
F.4 Life value
2 Paper feed section Pick-up roller
2 ●
A1DUR71J##

er ng ation ce
1 Intermediate transfer Transfer belt separation claw
3 ●
section A1DUR719##

er ng ation ce
1 Reverse exit section Paper exit de-curler roller
1 ●
A50U8908##
F-8
Paper exit drive gear Be sure to replace it at the

A03U9095## 1 ● same time with the replacement
of the paper exit decurler roller.

er ng ation ce
1 Developing section Developer/Y 1 ● Be sure to replace it together
DV614Y with the developing unit at the
Developer/M 1 ● same time.
DV614M
Developer/C 1 ●
DV614C
Developer/K 1 ●
DV614K
Developing unit/Y 1 ● Actual replacement: 100%
Developing unit/M 1 ● F.4 Life value
A50UR702##
Developing unit/C 1 ●
A50UR702##
Developing unit/K 1 ●
A50UR702##
2 Fusing section Belt regulating sleeve 2 ●
A50U7241##
A50U7609##
A03U7295##
Lw2
26NA5371##
A1UD7235##
A03U8095##
A50U7201##
A50U7401##
A50U7205##
A50UR72U##
A50U7337##
A50UR733##

er ng ation ce
1 Registration section Registration roller ●
1
A50U7101##
Registration roller bearing ●
2
A03U8128##
Registration swing home sensor ● · Service tool: blower brush
(PS20) · Be sure to clean it at the same
1 time with the replacement of the
registration roller and the
registration roller bearing.
F-9

er ng ation ce
1 Intermediate transfer Belt separation claw solenoid (SD2) ●
1
section 26NA8251##
2nd transfer earth plate assy ● Actual replacement: 100%
2
A50UR70G## (special parts counter)
C-clip ● F.4 Life value
2
V218060086

er ng ation ce
56AA8201##
56AA8201##
2 Vertical conveyance Intermediate conveyance clutch/1 ●
section (CL5) 1
56AA8201##
3 Duplex section Intermediate conveyance clutch/2 ●
(CL6) 1
56AA8201##
Intermediate conveyance clutch/3 ●
(CL7) 1
56AA8201##

er ng ation ce
1 Registration section Registration idler gear 1 ●
A50U7137##

er ng ation ce
A50UM31A## (Japan)
1
A50UM31F## (Europe)
1
A50UR70F##
1
A50UR70E##

er ng ation ce
1 Intermediate transfer Transfer roller bearing/Y, transfer ●
section roller bearing/M, transfer roller
6
bearing/C
65AA2638##
Transfer roller bearing/K ●
2
A50U5057##
F-10
1.4 DF-626
er ng ation ce
1 Preparation Paper feed and image conditions ● Be sure to check the conditions
at the same time with the
cleaning of the pick-up roller.
Appearance ● ● · Service tool: cleaning pad,
isopropyl alcohol
· Be sure to clean and check
them at the same time with the
cleaning of the pick-up roller.
2 Paper feed section Pick-up roller ● Service tool: cleaning pad,
isopropyl alcohol
Paper feed roller ● · Service tool: cleaning pad,
Separation roller ● isopropyl alcohol
3 Conveyance section Miscellaneous rollers and rolls ● same time with the cleaning of
4 Scanning guide ● the pick-up roller.
5 Reflective sensor section ● · Service tool: blower brush
same time with the cleaning of
the pick-up roller.

er ng ation ce
1 Paper feed section Pick-up roller ● Replace those three parts at the
2
9J073301## same time.
Paper feed roller ●
1
A00J5636##
Separation roller ●
1
A1085639##
1.5 PF-602m
1.5.1 Total counter
er ng ation ce
1 Paper feed section Pick-up rubber ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
Paper feed roller ● cleaning pad
PF separation gear section ● (●) Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
cleaning pad, Multemp FF-RM
2 Conveyance section Vertical conveyance roller/1 ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
Horizontal conveyance roller/1 ● cleaning pad

er ng ation ce
1 Paper feed section Pick-up rubber 2 ●
A03X5652##
Paper feed roller 2 ●
A03X5653##
Separation roller 2 ●
A03X5654##
F-11

er ng ation ce
56AA8201##
Separation clutch 2 ●
56AA8201##
2 Conveyance section Vertical conveyance clutch/1 1 ●
56AA8201##
Vertical conveyance clutch/2 1 ●
56AA8201##
Vertical conveyance clutch/3 1 ●
56AA8201##
Horizontal conveyance clutch/1 1 ●
56AA8201##
56AA8201##
56AA8201##
1.6 PF-707
1.6.1 Total counter
er ng ation ce
1 Vertical conveyance Each roller ● Clean them at the same time
section when you replace the pre-
2 Horizontal Each roller ● registration clutch (CL7).
conveyance section Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
cleaning pad

er ng ation ce
1 Horizontal Pre-registration bearing 2 ●
conveyance section A03U8128##
Pre-registration roller 1 ●
A55C7160##
Horizontal conveyance roller 2 ●
bearing/1
A03U8128##
Horizontal conveyance roller/1 1 ●
A55C7162##
Horizontal conveyance roller 2 ●
bearing/2
A03U8128##
Horizontal conveyance roller/2 1 ●
A55C7162##

er ng ation ce
1 Vertical conveyance Vertical conveyance clutch/3 (CL5), 2 ●
section vertical conveyance clutch/4 (CL6)
56AA8201##
Exit clutch/1 (CL1), vertical 3 ●
conveyance clutch/1 (CL3), vertical
56AA8201##
F-12
2 Paper feed suction Suction belt clutch/1 (CL15), suction 3 ●

section belt clutch/2 (CL16), suction belt
clutch/3 (CL17)
56AA8201##
3 Vertical conveyance Exit clutch/1 (CL1), vertical 3 ●
section conveyance clutch/1 (CL3), vertical
56AA8201##

er ng ation ce
1 Horizontal Pre-registration clutch (CL7) 1 ●
conveyance section A03UM201##
(CL8), /2 (CL9)
A03UM201##

er ng ation ce
1 Horizontal Roller pressure release motor (M10) 1 ●
conveyance section A55CR702##

er ng ation ce
1 Paper feed tray Loop roller bearing/Lw 2 ●
section A03U8128##
Loop roller/Lw 1 ●
A1RG6075##
2 Horizontal Loop roller/Up 1 ●
conveyance section A1RG7161##
1.7 LU-202
1.7.1 Total counter
er ng ation ce
1 Paper feed section Pick-up roller ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
Paper feed roller ● cleaning pad
Pre-registration roller ●
Paper dust removing brush ●
LU separation gear ● (●) Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
cleaning pad, Multemp FF-RM

er ng ation ce
1 Paper feed section Pick-up roller 1 ●
A03X5652##
A03X5653##
A03X5654##
F-13

er ng ation ce
56AA8201##
56AA8201##
1.8 MB-506
er ng ation ce
1 Paper feed section Paper feed roller rubber/BP ● Service tool: cleaning pad,
Pick-up roller/BP ● isopropyl alcohol
Separation roller rubber/BP ●

er ng ation ce
1 Paper feed section Paper feed roller rubber/BP 1 ●
25SA4096##
Separation roller rubber/BP 1 ●
25SA4096##

er ng ation ce
1 Paper feed section Pick-up roller/BP 1 ●
A21ER703##

er ng ation ce
1 Paper feed section Paper feed clutch/BP (CL14) 1 ●
56AA8201##
1.9 OT-502
er ng ation ce
1 Output tray section Paper exit roller 1 ●
A0438907##
Paper exit driven roller/2 4 ●
65AA4818##
Paper holding roller 2 ●
65AA4849##
1.10 EF-103
(1) Every 210,000 counts (When it is connected to C1070, C1070P or C71hc), every 200,000 counts (When it is
connected to C1060)
mb ntity
er
F-14
Cleani Check Lubric Repla

ng ation ce
1 Fusing section Fusing separating claw assy ● · Service tool: cleaning pad,
isopropyl alcohol
same time with the cleaning of
assy of the main body.

er ng ation ce
of the fusing belt.
Fusing belt 1 ●
A57V7202##
Fusing gear/1 ● Service tool: Multemp FF-RM
Fusing gear/2 ●

er ng ation ce
1 Fusing section Heat insulating sleeve/Lw1, heat 4 ● ● Service tool: Multemp FF-RM
A50U7563##
Belt regulating sleeve 2 ●
A50U7241##
A50U7609##
A03U7295##
Lw2
26NA5371##
A50U7527##
A1UD7235##
A03U8095##
A50U7522##
A57V7201##
A57V7401##
A50U7205##
A50U7291##
A50U7337##
A50UR733##

er ng ation ce
1
A50UM31A## (Japan)
F-15

A50UM31F## (Europe)
1
A50UR70F##
1
A50UR70E##
1.11 RU-516
er ng ation ce
1 Conveyance section Charging driven roller 1 ●
A8AK1030##
Charging roller 1 ●
A8AK1031##

er ng ation ce
1 Conveyance section Charging roller bearing 2 ●
A1RF5089 ##
1.12 RU-517
er ng ation ce
1 Conveyance section Charging driven roller 1 ●
A8AK1030##
Charging roller 1 ●
A8AK1031##

er ng ation ce
1 Conveyance section Charging roller bearing 2 ●
A1RF5089 ##
1.13 RU-509, HM-102

1.13.1 Total counter
er ng ation ce
1 Entrance Entrance sensor ● Service tool: blower brush
conveyance section De-curler entrance sensor ●
2 Output paper density Color density detection timing ●
detection section sensor
3 Paper exit section Paper exit conveyance sensor ●
Paper exit sensor ●
4 HM-102 Humidification section entrance ●
sensor
Humidification section conveyance ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
roller cleaning pad
Water feed roller ●
Humidification roller/Rt ●
Humidification roller/Lt ●
F-16
Control roller ●

er ng ation ce
1 Output paper density Shutter ● · Service tool: blower brush
detection section · Only for tandem

er ng ation ce
1 HM-102 Humidification roller/Rt 1 ●
A1TU5001##
Humidification roller/Lt 1 ●
A1TU5002##
Water feed filter 1 ●
A1TU5215##

er ng ation ce
1 HM-102 Water feed roller 2 ●
A1TU5003##
1.14 RU-510
Nu Unit classification Description Qua Implementation classification Materials
mb ntity Cleani Check Lubric Repla Tools used
er ng ation ce
1 Preparation Original through check ●
2 Conveyance section Cleaning of each sensor ● Blower brush
3 Final check Original through check ●
Cleaning of the cover ● Isopropyl alcohol/ cleaning pad
1.15 FS-531
er ng ation ce
1 Conveyance section Shift roller motor ●
Paper exit opening motor ●
Bypass gate solenoid ●
2 Stacker section Paper assist roller ●
(sponge roller)

er ng ation ce
1 Conveyance section Intermediate conveyance roller 6 ●
(sponge roller)
13QE4531##
2 Main tray section Paper exit roller/A 4 ●
(sponge roller)
F-17
122H4825##
Paper exit roller/B 4 ●
(sponge roller)
A04D8904##

er ng ation ce
1 Stacker section Paper assist roller 1 ●
(sponge roller)
20AK4210##
Cleaning plate assy 1 ●
A07RA741##

er ng ation ce
1 Stapler section Stapler unit/Fr 1 ●
A07RA735##
Stapler unit/Rr 1 ●
A07RA736##
1.16 FS-612
er ng ation ce
1 Conveyance section Shift roller motor ●
Paper exit opening motor ●
Bypass gate solenoid ●
2 Stacker section Paper assist roller ●
(sponge roller)
3 Half-Fold/ Folding knife motor ●
Fold&Staple/tri- Tri-folding gate solenoid ●
folding section

er ng ation ce
1 Conveyance section Intermediate conveyance roller 6 ●
(sponge roller)
13QE4531##
2 Main tray section Paper exit roller/A 4 ●
(sponge roller)
122H4825##
Paper exit roller/B 4 ●
(sponge roller)
A04D8904##
3 Stapler section Stapler unit/Fr 1 ●
15JM-501##
Stapler unit/Rr 1 ●
15JM-501##

er ng ation ce
1 Stacker section Paper assist roller 1 ●
(sponge roller)
F-18
20AK4210##
1.17 PI-502
er ng ation ce
1 Paper feed section Pick-up roller/Up, pick-up roller/Lw ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
Paper feed roller/Up, paper feed ● cleaning pad
roller/Lw
Separation roller/Up, separation ●
roller/Lw

er ng ation ce
1 Paper feed section Paper feed roller/Up, paper feed 2 ●
roller/Lw
13QNR705##
Separation roller/Up, separation 2 ●
roller/Lw
13QNR704##

er ng ation ce
1 Paper feed section Pick-up roller/Up, pick-up roller/Lw 2 ●
50BAR701##

er ng ation ce
1 Paper feed section Torque limiter/Up, torque limiter/Lw 2 ●
13QN4073##

er ng ation ce
1 Paper feed section Paper feed clutch/Up, paper feed 2 ●
clutch/Lw
13QN8201##
1.18 FS-532
er ng ation ce
2 Paper conveyance FNS entrance roller ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
section cleaning pad
FNS pass sensor (PS1) ● Service tool: blower brush
Paper overlap sensor/1 (PS32) ●
Paper overlap sensor/2 (PS33) ●
Roller pressure motor home sensor ●
(PS34)
F-19
FNS entrance roller conveyance ● Service tool; Molykote EM-30L

switching cam
FNS entrance roller conveyance ● Service tool; Molykote EM-30L
switching gate/Up
3 Stacker section Cleaning rollers ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
cleaning pad
Stacker empty sensor (PS28) ● Service tool: blower brush
Stacker upper sensor (PS43) ●
Staple scraps box cleaning ●
Stacker entrance roller pressure ● Service tool; Molykote EM-30L
entrance cam
Stack assist plate drive cam ●
Stapler shaft ●
Rear stopper shaft, metal frame ●
sliding position
4 Main tray section Main tray upper limit sensor (PS14) ● Service tool: blower brush
Main tray paper exit sensor (PS10) ●
The rubber surface at the lower side ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
of the gripper, the winding rubber at cleaning pad
the lower side of the gripper
Up down tray drive section ● Service tool; Molykote EM-30L
Paper exit alignment plate shaft ● ● Service tool: Isopropyl alcohol,
cleaning pad, MH surf or
Molykote EM-30L
Cleaning of the cover ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
cleaning pad

er ng ation ce
1 Stacker section Paddle 6 ●
A4F37500##

er ng ation ce
1 Stapler section Staple unit 1 ●
A4F3R714##
1.19 SD-510
er ng ation ce
1 PAPER Rollers ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
CONVEYANCE cleaning pad
SECTION
2 Stapler section Staple guide ● ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
cleaning pad, MH surf
3 Half-Fold/ Knives ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
Fold&Staple/tri- Folding roller ● cleaning pad
folding section
4 Paper exit section Paper exit belt ●
F-20

er ng ation ce
1 Stapler section Staple unit 1 ●
A4F47300##

er ng ation ce
1 ALIGNMENT Paddle/1 2 ●
SECTION A4F4R70D##
Paddle/2 2 ●
A4F4R70E##
Paddle/3 2 ●
A4F4R70F##
1.20 PK-522
er ng ation ce
1 Punch section Cleaning the punch edge ● Service tool: blower brush
Clean the sensor ●
1.21 MK-732
er ng ation ce
1 Conveyance section Conveyance roller cleaning ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
cleaning pad
1.22 LS-505/LS-506
er ng ation ce
2 Conveyance section Cleaning of each sensor ● Service tool: blower brush
cleaning pad

er ng ation ce
1 Conveyance section Paper press solenoid/3 (SD8) 1 ●
15AV8255##
Paper press solenoid/1 (SD6) 1 ●
15AV8252##
Paper press solenoid/2 (SD7) 1 ●
15AV8251##
F-21
Rear stopper solenoid (SD3) 1 ●

15AV8253##
Stacker tray up down motor (M1) 1 ●
15AV8003##
1.23 FD-503
er ng ation ce
Removing the punch unit
Removing from RU
2 Punch section Punch shaft and the punch support ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
board cleaning pad
Punch drive section ● Service tool; Molykote EM-30L
3 Post-process Installing the punch unit
Installing to RU

er. ng ation ce
1 Punch section Cleaning of each sensor ●
2 PI section Cleaning of each sensor ●
3 Main tray section Cleaning of each sensor ●
4 Conveyance section Cleaning of each sensor ●
5 Final check Cleaning of the cover ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
cleaning pad

er ng ation ce
1 Final check Cleaning of the cover ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
cleaning pad

er ng ation ce
1 PI section Paper feed rubber 2 ●
50BAR702##
Separation rubber 2 ●
13QNR704##

er ng ation ce
1 PI section Pick-up rubber 6 ●
50BAR701##

er ng ation ce
1 Conveyance section Roller solenoid/1 (SD5) 1 ●
F-22
15AGR723##
Roller solenoid/2 (SD6) 1 ●
15AGR723##
15AGR723##
15AGR723##
2 Punch section Punch unit 1 ●
A0H0R700## (Japan)
A0H0R701## (US)
A0H0R702## (Europe)
3 Folding conveyance 2nd folding roller solenoid (SD18) 1 ●
section 15AGR761##
4 Main tray section Tray up down motor (M11) 1 ●
129U-108##
1.24 SD-506
er ng ation ce
Removing the rear cover
Removing the unit
2 Right angle Right angle conveyance sensor/1 ● Service tool: blower brush
conveyance section Right angle conveyance sensor/2 ●
Right angle conveyance roller/1 ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
Right angle conveyance roller/2 ● cleaning pad
Right angle conveyance roller/3 ●
Right angle conveyance roller/4 ●
3 Folding section Folding main scan alignment home ● Service tool: blower brush
sensor/Fr1
Folding main scan alignment home ●
sensor/Fr2
Folding entrance roller/1 ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
Folding entrance roller/2 ● cleaning pad
Folding entrance roller/3 ●
4 Saddle stitching Saddle stitching paper sensor ● Service tool: blower brush
section Bundle sensor/1 ●
5 Bundle processing Bundle sensor/2 ●
section
6 Trimmer section Trimmer scraps full sensor ●
Actuator ●
7 Post-process Installing the unit ●
Installing the rear cover ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
cleaning pad
cleaning pad

er ng ation ce
1 Trimmer section Paper holding screw 2 ● ● · Service tool: Molykote EM-30L
A0H26621## · Actual lubrication cycle:
37,500 cuts
F-23

er ng ation ce
1 Trimmer section Trimmer board assy 1 ●
A0H2B622##

er ng ation ce
1 Trimmer section Trimmer blade kit 1 ● ●
A0H2R901##

er ng ation ce
1 Bundle processing Bundle press stage gear 1 ●
section 15AN7719##
2 Trimmer section Trimmer press motor (M32) 1 ●
A0H2M101##

er ng ation ce
1 Trimmer section Trimmer blade motor (M31) 1 ●
A0H2M102##

er ng ation ce
1 Saddle stitching Stapler assy 2 ●
section 15AN-550##

er ng ation ce
1 Saddle stitching Slope unit 1 ●
section 15AN-500##
Saddle stitch unit 1 ●
A0H2A720##
2 Bundle processing Bundle press stage unit 1 ●
section A0H2A530##
3 Trimmer section Trimmer unit 1 ●
A0H2A620##

er ng ation ce
1 Right angle Roller release solenoid/1 (SD5) 1 ●
conveyance section 15AN8251##
Roller release solenoid/2 (SD6) 1 ●
15ANR710##
Roller release solenoid/3 (SD7) 1 ●
15AN8251##
F-24
Right angle conveyance gate 1 ●

solenoid (SD2)
15ANR711##
1.25 SD-513
1.25.1 Periodical maintenance
No. Unit classification Description Qua Implementation classification Remark
ntity Cleani Check Lubric Repla
ng ation ce
2 Entrance Entrance sensor/1 (PS59) ● Blower brush
conveyance section Reverse stacker entrance sensor ●
(PS211)
Entrance sensor/2 (PS60) ●
Horizontal conveyance sensor/1 ●
(PS72)
Reverse stacker empty sensor ●
(PS101)
Slit scraps box set sensor (PS106) ●
Entrance conveyance roller/1 ● Isopropyl alcohol, cleaning pad
Entrance conveyance roller/2 ●
Reverse exit roller/Rt ●
Paper re-feed roller/Lt ●
3 Folding conveyance Horizontal conveyance sensor/2 ● Blower brush
section (PS1)
Horizontal conveyance sensor/4 ●
(PS5)
Tri-folding conveyance sensor ●
(PS12)
2nd folding sensor (PS20) ●
Horizontal conveyance roller/1 ● Isopropyl alcohol, cleaning pad
Horizontal conveyance roller/2 ●
Sub tray conveyance roller/1 ●
Sub tray conveyance roller/2 ●
Sub tray exit roller ●
Horizontal conveyance belt ●
Tri-folding conveyance belt ●
1st Folding Roller ●
2st Folding Roller ●
1st folding stopper slide shaft ● MH Surf
4 Sub tray, tri-folding Tri-folding tray conveyance roller/3 ● Isopropyl alcohol, cleaning pad
tray section Tri-folding tray conveyance roller/4 ●
Tri-folding tray exit roller ●
5 Saddle stitching Saddle stitching stacker empty ● Blower brush
section sensor (PS23)
Booklet set unit empty sensor ●
(PS94)
Saddle stitching alignment/Rr guide ● MH Surf
Saddle stitching alignment/Fr guide ●
6 Booklet movement Booklet set unit slide guide shaft ●
section Booklet hold unit offset guide shaft ●
Booklet hold unit slide guide shaft ●
7 Clamp section Clamp empty sensor (PS37) ● Blower brush
Clamp ● Isopropyl alcohol, cleaning pad
F-25
8 Trimmer section Trimmer scraps box full sensor ● Blower brush

(PS96)
9 Booklet tray section Gripper paper sensor (PS38) ●
Booklet tray paper exit sensor ●
(PS43)
Booklet tray exit roller, grip roller ● Isopropyl alcohol, cleaning pad
Paper exit belt ●
Cleaning of the cover ● Isopropyl alcohol, cleaning pad
1.25.2 Spotted replacement

ng ation ce
1 Trimmer section Trimmer board 1 ●
A729F624##

ng ation ce
1 Trimmer section Press drive screw ● · Service tool: Molykote
· Lubricate at the same time
when you replace the trimmer
blade.
Trimmer blade 1 ●
A729R901##

ng ation ce
1 Clamp section Clamp motor (M23) 1 ● ● · Service tool: Molykote
A729R70G##

ng ation ce
1 Trimmer section Gear ● · Service tool: Molykote
· Lubricate at the same time
when you replace the trimmer
press motor (M32).
Trimmer press motor (M32) 1 ●
A0H2M101##

ng ation ce
1 Clamp section Fore edge finger motor (M52) 1 ● ● · Service tool: Molykote
A729R706##
Finger torque limiter 1 ●
A03X5656##
Fore edge finger gear 1 ● ● · Service tool: Molykote
55VA7903##
Clamp hanging wire 2 ● Only when FD-504 is installed
A65U6908##
2 Booklet tray section Gripper paper exit gear/Fr, /Rr ● · Service tool: Molykote
Gripper lock plate ● · Lubricate at the same time
when you replace the fore edge
finger motor (M52).
Shutter slide shaft ● · Service tool: MH Surf
F-26
Shutter slide plate ● · Lubricate at the same time

when you replace the fore edge
finger motor (M52).

ng ation ce
1 Trimmer section Trimmer blade motor (M31) 1 ●
A0H2M102##

ng ation ce
1 Entrance Reverse exit roller pressure release 1 ● ● · Service tool: Molykote
conveyance section motor (M102)
A65UR70M##
2 Saddle stitching Staple unit 1 ●
section A65U7779##
Clincher 1 ●
A65U7781##
Conveyance guide assy/Up 1 ●
A729R70S##

ng ation ce
1 Saddle stitching Booklet holding motor (M17) 1 ● ● · Service tool: Molykote
section A729R704##
Alignment plate solenoid wiring 1 ●
A65UN165##
2 Clamp section Booklet holding wire/1 2 ●
A65U6290##
Booklet holding wire/2 2 ●
A65U6300##
Booklet holding wire/3 2 ●
A65U6302##

ng ation ce
1 Folding conveyance 2nd folding knife motor (M14) 1 ●
section A65UR70P##

ng ation ce
1 Folding conveyance 1st folding knife motor (M13) 1 ●
section A65UR70N##

ng ation ce
1 Clamp section Fore edge stopper motor (M24) 1 ● ● · Service tool: Molykote
A729R706##
2 Booklet tray section Gripper motor (M26) 1 ●
A4JUM101##
F-27

ng ation ce
1 Trimmer section Trimmer unit 1 ●
A729F621##
1.26 CR-101
ng ation ce
2 Creaser section Reverse stacker empty sensor ● Blower brush
(PS101)
Crease blade ● Isopropyl alcohol, cleaning pad
1.27 TU-503
ng ation ce
2 Conveyance section Registration roller ● Isopropyl alcohol, cleaning pad
Registration driven roller ●
Registration sensor (PS98) ● Blower brush
3 Slitter section Slit cutter drive gear ● Molykote
Horizontal conveyance sensor/1 ● Blower brush
(PS72)
Slit cutter shaft ● ● Cleaning pad/ Molykote
4 Rotary cutter section Slit scraps roller/Lt, slit scraps roller/ ● Isopropyl alcohol, cleaning pad
Rt
5 Final check Around slit scraps box section ● Perform the maintenance when
the slit scraps are inside the
main body.
Original through check ●

ng ation ce
1 Slitter section Slit cutter assy/Fr 1 ●
A65WF701##
Slit cutter assy/Rr 1 ●
A65WF702##
2 Rotary cutter section Rotary cutter assy 2 ●
A65WF700##
1.28 FD-504
ng ation ce
F-28
2 Clamp section SQF clamp plate ● ● Isopropyl alcohol, cleaning pad

MH Surf

ng ation ce
1 Clamp section SQF clamp motor/Fr (M203) 1 ● ● · Service tool: Molykote
A65VR705##
SQF clamp motor/Rr (M202) 1 ● ●
A65VR705##
2 Square-fold section SQF roller cleaning assy/Fr 1 ●
A65VR70A##
SQF roller cleaning assy/Rr 1 ●
A65VR70B##

ng ation ce
1 Square-fold section SQF roller motor (M201) 1 ●
A65VR706##
1.29 PB-503
er ng ation ce
2 Conveyance section Entrance sensor ● Service tool: blower brush
SC entrance sensor ●
Sub tray conveyance roller ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
Intermediate conveyance roller ● cleaning pad
Entrance conveyance roller ●
Cover paper conveyance roller ●
3 SC section Switchback assist roller/Rr ●
Switchback assist roller/Fr ●
Sub scan alignment plate shaft ●
4 Clamp section Paper reference plate ●
Clamp pressure plate shaft 1 ●*5 Service tool: plas guard No. 2
5 Pellet supply section Pellet hopper ● Service tool: blower brush
6 Glue tank section Glue tank ● ●*1 Service tool: tweezers, cleaning
pad, Multemp FF-RM
7 Cover paper supply Paper dust removing brush ● Service tool: blower brush
section Paper dust removing roller ●
Conveyance roller ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
cleaning pad
8 Cover paper table Cover paper folding plate ●*2 Service tool: tweezers, cleaning
section pad
Book spine backing plate ●*2
Book exit belt/Rr ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
Book exit belt/Fr ● cleaning pad
Cover paper conveyance roller/Rt ●
Cover paper conveyance roller/Ft ●
Cover paper table entrance roller ●
Paper dust removing brush ● Service tool: blower brush
Cover paper alignment plate shaft ●*3 Service tool: plas guard No. 2
F-29
9 Book stock section Book load limit sensor ● Service tool: blower brush
Book upper limit LED ●
Booklet sensor/1, booklet sensor/2 ●
Guide shaft/Rt, guide shaft/Lt ●*4 Service tool: plas guard No. 2
Book conveyance belt/Rr ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
Book conveyance belt/Fr ● cleaning pad
Book movement belt ●
Book movement belt/2 ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
10 Relay conveyance Relay conveyance roller/1, relay ● cleaning pad
section conveyance roller/2, relay
conveyance roller/3, relay
conveyance roller/4, relay
conveyance roller/5
Relay paper exit roller/1, relay paper ●
exit roller/2
Relay conveyance entrance sensor ● Service tool: blower brush
Relay conveyance intermediate ●
sensor
Relay conveyance exit sensor ●
cleaning pad
*1 Lubricate to the glue apply roller motor drive connecting gear.
*2 Cleaning of the cover paper folding plate and the book spine backing plate is an abbreviated cleaning. Remove adhered glue as
necessary.
*3 Lubricate to the cover paper alignment plate shaft.
*4 Lubricate to the guide shaft/Rt and guide shaft/Lt.
*5 Lubricate to the clamp pressing board shaft.

(1) Every 750 counts
er ng ation ce
1 Glue tank section Cover paper glue roller drive gear 4 ●
bearing of glue tank section
A0753799##

er ng ation ce
1 Glue tank section Glue tank assy 1 ●
A15XA36A## (100V)
A15XA36E## (120V)
A15XA36F## (240V)

er ng ation ce
1 Cover paper table Roller cutter blade assy 1 ●
section A0756230##

er ng ation ce
1 Cover paper supply Pick-up roller 1 ●
section 55VAR750##
55VAR749##
F-30
55VAR749##

er ng ation ce
1 SC section Switchback roller 1 ●
13GQ4519##

er ng ation ce
1 Pellet supply section Pellet supply cooling fan (FM4) 1 ●
27LA8051##
2 Deodorant unit Exhaust filter/A 2 ●
A15X3017##
Exhaust filter/B 1 ●
A15X3018##

er ng ation ce
1 Conveyance section Entrance gate solenoid (SD1) 1 ●
15ANR714##
2 SC section SC switchback release motor (M13) 1 ●
A0V9M101##
3 Cover paper supply Cover paper feed clutch (CL71) 1 ●
section 56AA8201##
4 Cover paper separation clutch 1 ●
(CL72)
56AA8201##
5 Relay conveyance Sub tray paper exit solenoid (SD4) 1 ●
section 15ANR714##

er ng ation ce
1 SC section FD alignment solenoid (SD11) 1 ●
15AA8251##
SC pressure arm solenoid (SD13) 1 ●
A075B746##

er ng ation ce
1 SC section One-way clutch/A 1 ●
13GQ7709##
One-way clutch/B 1 ●
13GQ7709##
1.30 GP-501
er ng ation ce
F-31
1 Punch section Die Set Pins ● ● 3-IN-ONE (WD-40Company)

Actual lubrication count: 50,000
punches
The use must perform this
maintenance.

er ng ation ce
1 Punch section Die Set Shoulder Bolts ● ● Magnalube-G
TeflonGreaseActual lubrication
count:
200,000 punches
The use must perform this
maintenance.

er ng ation ce
GP removement, Front door open
2 Bypass conveyance Paper Path, Bypass ● ● Alcohol
section
3 Punch conveyance Latching Mechanisms aligner ●
4 section Paper Path, Aligner panels ● ● Alcohol
5 Aligner Idler Rollers ● ●
6 Roller energy drive ● ●
7 Bypass, Punch Optical Sensors ● Blower brush
8 conveyance section Timing Belts ● ● Alcohol
9 Idler Rollers ● ●
10 Drive Rollers ● ●
11 Punch section Back Gauge mechanism ● ● Blower brush/
vacuum cleaner
12 Die Guide ● Vacuum cleaner
13 Paper Path, Punch ● ● Alcohol
14 External section Base ● Vacuum cleaner
15 Door Closing Latch ●
16 Post-process Front door close, GP connected
18 Cleaning of the cover ● Isopropyl alcohol/cleaning
pad

er ng ation ce
1 Punch conveyance Aligner Idler Roller Assembly ● Alcohol
2 section Belt Aligner (Green) 1 ●
3 Punch section Punch drive cams 1 ● Magnalube-G Teflon Grease
Actual lubrication count:
3,000,000 punches

er ng ation ce
1 Punch section Die Set 1 ● ● The replacement is
recommended when the
hanging chips are generated.
F-32

er ng ation ce
1 Punch section Die Set 1 ● ● The replacement is
recommended if hanging chips
are generated.
1.31 GP-502
er ng ation ce
1 Bypass section Bypass Rollers ● ● Isopropyl alcohol/cleaning pad
Entrance sensor ● ● Blower brush
Exit sensor ● ●
2 Vertical conveyance Belts ● ● Isopropyl alcohol/cleaning pad
section Entrance driven roller ● ●
Entrance sensor ● ● Blower brush
Intermediate sensor ● ●
3 Die-set Entrance sensor ● ●
Pinch drive section (bearings) ● ● Magnalube-G TeflonGrease/
Nippeco MP No.1
Oiled Felt ● ● WD-40 Company 3-IN-ONE
4 Skew conveyance Belts ● ● Isopropyl alcohol/cleaning pad
section Entrance drive roller, driven roller ● ●
Exit drive roller, driven roller ● ●
5 Stacker section Paper detection sensor ● ● Blower brush
6 Punch section Punch scraps box ● ● Vacuum cleaner
Around the punch scraps box ● ●
Punch scraps box full sensor ● ● Blower brush
Punch scraps box set sensor ● ●

er ng ation ce
1 Pullback Pad 2 ●
A4F6PP00##
Book Chute Myler 4 ●
A4F6PPH1##

er ng ation ce
1 Punch section Suction Cup: Element Feeder 1 ●
A4F6PP03##
2 Punch Unit Oiled Felt, Die-set 1 ●
A4F6PP01##

er ng ation ce
1 Punch Unit Punch Pin/Plate Assy, Die-set 1 ●
A4F6PP02##
F-33
F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 2. PERIODICALLY REPLACED
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L PARTS LIST
2. PERIODICALLY REPLACED PARTS LIST

2.1 Periodical replacement parts
Note
• For the part number of periodically replaced parts, refer to "Parts guide manual."
• For the replacement procedure of the periodically replaced parts, refer to F.5 Periodical maintenance procedure bizhub PRESS
C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, bizhub PRO C1060L to F.21 Periodical maintenance procedure PB-503.
• The parts count number which are given in the following table represents the number of the special parts count in the service
mode.
2.2 bizhub PRESS C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, bizhub PRO C1060L
Nu Classification Parts name Parts Number Quantity Actual Parts count
mb replacement Number
er cycle
1 External section Developing dust-proof filter/1 A50U1689## 1 F.4 Life value 4
2 Developing dust-proof filter/2 A50U1695## 1 F.4 Life value 5
3 PH dust-proof filter A50U1688## 1 F.4 Life value 6
4 Electric component cooling filter A50U1099## 1 F.4 Life value 7
5 Suction dust-proof filter A50U1649## 1 F.4 Life value 8
6 Filter box A50UR70A## 1 F.4 Life value 3
7 Photo conductor Drum unit/Y A5WJ0Y0##/ 1 F.4 Life value 21, 22
section A5WH0Y0##
8 Drum unit/M A5WJ0Y0##/ 1 F.4 Life value 23, 24
A5WH0Y0##
9 Drum unit/C A5WJ0Y0##/ 1 F.4 Life value 25, 26
A5WH0Y0##
10 Drum unit/K A5WJ0Y0##/ 1 F.4 Life value 27, 28
A5WH0Y0##
11 Charging section Charging corona/Y A50UR703## 1 F.4 Life value 13, 14
12 Charging corona/M A50UR703## 1 F.4 Life value 15, 16
13 Charging corona/C A50UR703## 1 F.4 Life value 17, 18
14 Charging corona/K A50UR703## 1 F.4 Life value 19, 20
15 Developing section Developing unit/Y A50UR702## 1 F.4 Life value 37, 38
16 Developing unit/M A50UR702## 1 F.4 Life value 39, 40
17 Developing unit/C A50UR702## 1 F.4 Life value 41, 42
18 Developing unit/K A50UR702## 1 F.4 Life value 43, 44
19 Developer/Y A3VX700## 1 F.4 Life value 29, 30
20 Developer/M A3VX800## 1 F.4 Life value 31, 32
21 Developer/C A3VX900## 1 F.4 Life value 33, 34
22 Developer/K A3VX600## 1 F.4 Life value 35, 36
23 Intermediate transfer Toner collection sheet A1DUR71C## 1 F.4 Life value 52, 71
24 section Belt cleaning blade A50UR70K## 1 F.4 Life value 53, 54
25 2nd transfer roller/Up A50U5004## 1 F.4 Life value 59, 69
26 Intermediate transfer belt A1DU5042## 1 F.4 Life value 50, 64
27 1st transfer roller/Y A50U5012## 1 F.4 Life value 55, 65
28 1st transfer roller/M A50U5012## 1 F.4 Life value 56, 66
29 1st transfer roller/C A50U5012## 1 F.4 Life value 57, 67
30 1st transfer roller/K A50U5012## 1 F.4 Life value 58, 68
31 Transfer belt cleaning unit A50UR706## 1 F.4 Life value 48, 51
32 Transfer belt separation claw A1DUR719## 3 880,000 70
33 Belt separation claw solenoid (SD2) 26NA8251## 1 1,760,000 * 1 62
1,600,000 * 2
34 Transfer roller bearing/Y, transfer roller 65AA2638## 6 F.4 Life value 47, 61
bearing/M, transfer roller bearing/C
35 Transfer roller bearing/K A50U5057## 2 F.4 Life value 46, 63
36 Side seal A50U5316## 2 F.4 Life value 72, 80
37 2nd transfer roller/Lw A50U5200## 1 F.4 Life value 75, 78
38 Separation discharging unit A50UR70B## 1 F.4 Life value 76, 79
39 2nd transfer earth plate assy A50UR70G## 2 F.4 Life value 77
40 C-clip V218060086 2 F.4 Life value 73
41 Toner collection Waste toner box A50UR701## 1 130,000 1
section
F-34
42 Paper feed section Paper feed roller rubber/1, paper feed 25SA4096## 2 125,000 113, 114
roller rubber/2
43 Separation roller rubber/1, separation 25SA4096## 2 125,000 113, 114
roller rubber/2
44 Pick-up roller/1, pick-up roller/2 A1DUR71J## 2 800,000 117, 118
45 Paper feed clutch/1 (CL1), paper feed 56AA8201## 2 2,000,000 121, 122
clutch/2 (CL2)
46 Pre-registration clutch/1 (CL3), pre- 56AA8201## 2 2,000,000 125, 126
registration clutch/2 (CL4)
47 Vertical conveyance Intermediate conveyance clutch/1 (CL5) 56AA8201## 1 2,000,000 128
section
48 Registration section Registration cleaning sheet assy A50UR70D## 1 600,000 131
49 Registration roller A50U7101## 1 1,400,000 132
50 Registration roller bearing A03U8128## 2 1,400,000 136
51 Registration idler gear A50U7137## 1 2,800,000 137
52 Fusing section Fusing belt A50U7577## 1 600,000 85
53 Heat insulating sleeve/Lw1, heat A50U7563## 4 600,000 90
54 Fusing gear/1 A50U7527## 1 600,000 92
55 Fusing gear/3 A50U7522## 1 600,000 96
56 Fusing Roller/1 A50U7201## 1 1,200,000 83
57 Fusing roller/Lw A50U7401## 1 1,200,000 84
58 Belt regulating sleeve A50U7241## 2 1,200,000 86
59 Fusing paper exit roller/Up A50U7609## 2 1,200,000 87
60 Heat insulating sleeve/Up A03U7295## 2 1,200,000 88
61 Fusing bearing/Lw1, fusing bearing/Lw2 26NA5371## 4 1,200,000 89
62 Fusing Roller/2 A50U7205## 1 1,200,000 91
63 Fusing bearing/Up A1UD7235## 2 1,200,000 93
64 Fusing gear/2 A03U8095## 1 1,200,000 94
65 Fusing separating claw assy A50UR72U## 5 1,200,000 97
66 Neutralizing ring A50U7337## 1 1,200,000 109
67 Neutralizing flat spring assy A50UR733## 1 1,200,000 110
68 Fusing heater lamp assy/Up A50UM31A## 1 3,000,000 98
(Japan)
A50UM31E## (North
America)
A50UM31F##
(Europe)
69 Fusing temperature sensor/3 (TH3) A50UR70F## 1 3,000,000 100
70 Fusing temperature sensor/4 (TH4) A50UR70E## 1 3,000,000 101
71 Duplex section Intermediate conveyance clutch/2 (CL6) 56AA8201## 1 2,000,000 129
72 Intermediate conveyance clutch/3 (CL7) 56AA8201## 1 2,000,000 130
73 Reverse exit section Reverse de-curler roller A50U8605## 1 400,000 133
74 Paper exit de-curler roller A50U8908## 1 1,000,000 134
75 Paper exit drive gear A03U9095## 1 1,000,000 -
* 1 C1070, C1070P , C71hc
*2 C1060, C1060L
2.3 DF-626
er cycle
1 Paper feed section Pick-up roller 9J073301## 2 200,000 378
2 Paper feed roller A00J5636## 1 200,000 379
3 Separation roller A1085639## 1 200,000 380
2.4 PF-602m
er cycle
1 Paper feed section Pick-up rubber A03X5652## 2 300,000 198, 202
2 Paper feed roller A03X5653## 2 300,000 199, 203
F-35
3 Separation roller A03X5654## 2 300,000 199, 203

4 Paper feed clutch/1 56AA8201## 1 2,000,000 200
5 Paper feed clutch/2 56AA8201## 1 2,000,000 204
6 Separation clutch/1 56AA8201## 1 2,000,000 201
7 Separation clutch/2 56AA8201## 1 2,000,000 205
8 Conveyance section Vertical conveyance clutch/1 56AA8201## 1 2,000,000 206
9 Vertical conveyance clutch/2 56AA8201## 1 2,000,000 207
10 Vertical conveyance clutch/3 56AA8201## 1 2,000,000 208
11 Horizontal conveyance clutch/1 56AA8201## 1 2,000,000 210
12 Horizontal conveyance clutch/2 56AA8201## 1 2,000,000 211
13 Pre-registration clutch 56AA8201## 1 2,000,000 209
2.5 PF-707
er cycle
1 Paper feed suction Suction belt clutch/1 (CL15), suction belt 56AA8201## 3 2,000,000 216, 217, 218
section clutch/2 (CL16), suction belt clutch/3
(CL17)
2 Vertical conveyance Vertical conveyance clutch/1 (CL3), 56AA8201## 3 2,000,000 219
section vertical conveyance clutch/2 (CL4), exit
clutch/1 (CL1)
3 Exit clutch/2 (CL2) 56AA8201## 1 2,000,000 220
4 Vertical conveyance clutch/3 (CL5), 56AA8201## 2 2,000,000 221
vertical conveyance clutch/4 (CL6)
5 Horizontal Pre-registration bearing A03U8128## 2 1,000,000 224
6 conveyance section Pre-registration roller A55C7160## 1 1,000,000 225
7 Horizontal conveyance roller/1 A55C7162## 1 1,000,000 212
8 Horizontal Conveyance Roller/1 A03U8128## 2 1,000,000 213
9 Horizontal conveyance roller/2 A55C7162## 1 1,000,000 214
10 Horizontal Conveyance Roller Bearing/2 A03U8128## 2 1,000,000 215
11 Pre-registration clutch (CL7) A03UM201## 1 3,000,000 222
12 Horizontal conveyance clutch/1 (CL8), A03UM201## 2 3,000,000 222
horizontal conveyance clutch/2 (CL9)
13 Roller pressure release motor (M10) A55CR702## 1 5,000,000 229
14 Loop roller/Up A1RG7161## 1 6,000,000 226
15 Paper feed tray Loop roller bearing/Lw A03U8128## 2 6,000,000 227
16 section Loop roller/Lw A1RG6075## 1 6,000,000 228
2.6 LU-202
er cycle
1 Paper feed section Pick-up roller A03X5652## 1 300,000 192
2 Paper feed roller A03X5653## 1 300,000 193
3 Separation roller A03X5654## 1 300,000 193
4 Paper feed clutch 56AA8201## 1 2,000,000 194
5 Pre-registration clutch 56AA8201## 1 2,000,000 195
2.7 MB-506
er cycle
1 Paper feed section Paper feed roller rubber/BP 25SA4096## 1 125,000 116
2 Separation roller rubber/BP 25SA4096## 1 125,000 116
3 Pick-up roller/BP A21ER703## 1 800,000 120
4 Paper feed clutch/BP (CL14) 56AA8201## 1 2,000,000 124
F-36
2.8 OT-502
er cycle
1 OT-502 Paper exit roller A0438907## 1 200,000 187
2 Paper exit driven roller/2 65AA4818## 4 200,000 188
3 Paper holding roller 65AA4849## 2 200,000 189
2.9 EF-103
er cycle
1 Fusing section Fusing belt A57V7202## 1 300,000 159
2 Heat insulating sleeve/Lw1, heat A50U7563## 4 600,000 165
3 Fusing gear/1 A50U7527## 1 600,000 167
4 Fusing gear/3 A50U7522## 1 600,000 176
5 Fusing roller/1 A57V7201## 1 600,000 157
6 Fusing roller/Lw A57V7401## 1 600,000 158
7 Belt regulating sleeve A50U7241## 2 600,000 160
8 Fusing paper exit roller/Up A50U7609## 2 600,000 161
9 Heat insulating sleeve/Up A03U7295## 2 600,000 163
10 Fusing bearing/Lw1, fusing bearing/Lw2 26NA5371## 4 600,000 164
11 Fusing Roller/2 A50U7205## 1 600,000 166
12 Fusing bearing/Up A1UD7235## 2 600,000 168
13 Fusing gear/2 A03U8095## 1 600,000 169
14 Fusing separating claw assy A50UR72U## 5 600,000 177
15 Neutralizing ring A50U7337## 1 600,000 183
16 Neutralizing flat spring assy A50UR733## 1 600,000 184
17 Fusing heater lamp assy/Up A50UM31A## 1 3,000,000 170
(Japan)
A50UM31E## (North
America)
A50UM31F##
(Europe)
18 Fusing temperature sensor/3 (TH3) A50UR70F## 1 3,000,000 172
19 Fusing temperature sensor/4 (TH4) A50UR70E## 1 3,000,000 173
2.10 RU-516
er cycle
1 Conveyance section Charging driven roller A8AK1030## 1 F.4 Life value 356, 357
2 Charging roller A8AK1031## 1 F.4 Life value 376, 377
3 Charging roller bearing A1RF5089## 2 3,150,000 363
2.11 RU-517
er cycle
1 Conveyance section Charging driven roller A8AK1030## 1 F.4 Life value 356, 357
2 Charging roller A8AK1031## 1 F.4 Life value 376, 377
3 Charging roller bearing A1RF5089## 2 3,150,000 363
2.12 RU-509, HM-102

er cycle
1 HM-102 Humidification roller/Rt A1TU5001## 1 300,000 351
2 Humidification roller/Lt A1TU5002## 1 300,000 352
3 Water feed roller A1TU5003## 2 1,500,000 353
F-37
4 Water feed filter A1TU5215## 1 300,000 354
2.13 RU-510
er Cycle
1 Conveyance section Entrance roller/1, entrance roller/2 A4FC7014## 2 20,000,000 365
2 Merging section roller, stacker entrance A4FC7002## 2 20,000,000 366
roller
3 Paper exit roller A4FCR904## 1 20,000,000 368
4 Paper re-feed roller A4FC7019## 1 20,000,000 367
5 Straight gate A4FC7030## 1 20,000,000 364
6 Bearing/K A00V2406## 10 20,000,000 370
7 Bearing Assy A4FCR905## 2 20,000,000 370
8 Entrance conveyance belt A0GE2105## 1 20,000,000 371
9 Paper exit conveyance belt A4FC7015## 1 20,000,000 371
10 Paper exit pulley A4FC7078## 1 20,000,000 372
11 Conveyance pulley A4FC7077## 5 20,000,000 372
12 Entrance motor (M1) A4FCR900## 1 30,000,000 373
13 Paper exit motor (M2) A4FCR900## 1 30,000,000 373
14 Driven roller A0GY7121## 4 50,000,000 369
15 Stack switch motor (M6) A083M100## 1 60,000,000 374
2.14 FS-531
er cycle
1 Conveyance section Intermediate conveyance roller (sponge 122H4825## 6 200,000 284
roller)
2 Main tray section Paper exit roller/A (sponge roller) A04D8904## 4 200,000 285
3 Paper exit roller/B (sponge roller) 13QE4531## 4 200,000 286
4 Stacker section Paper assist roller (sponge roller) 20AK4210## 1 400,000 287
5 Cleaning plate assy A07RA741## 1 400,000 290
6 Stapler section Stapler unit/Fr A07RA735## 1 500,000 288
7 Stapler unit/Rr A07RA736## 1 500,000 289
2.15 FS-612
er cycle
1 Conveyance section Intermediate conveyance roller (sponge 122H4825## 6 200,000 284
roller)
2 Main tray section Paper exit roller/A (sponge roller) A04D8904## 4 200,000 285
3 Paper exit roller/B (sponge roller) 13QE4531## 4 200,000 286
4 Stacker section Paper assist roller (sponge roller) 20AK4210## 1 400,000 287
5 Stapler section Stapler unit/Fr 15JM-501## 1 200,000 277
6 Stapler unit/Rr 15JM-501## 1 200,000 278
2.16 PI-502
er cycle
1 Paper feed section Paper feed roller/Up, paper feed roller/Lw 13QNR705## 2 100,000 309, 314
2 Separation roller/Up, separation roller/Lw 13QNR704## 2 100,000 310, 315
3 Pick-up roller/Up, pick-up roller/Lw 50BAR701## 2 200,000 308, 313
4 Torque limiter/Up, torque limiter/Lw 13QN4073## 2 600,000 311, 316
5 Paper feed clutch/Up, paper feed clutch/ 13QN8201## 2 1,000,000 307, 312
Lw
F-38
2.17 FS-532
er cycle
1 Stacker section Paddle A4F37500## 6 300,000 296
2 Stapler section Staple unit A4F3R714## 1 500,000 295
2.18 SD-510
er cycle
1 Stapler section Staple unit A4F47300## 1 200,000 301
2 ALIGNMENT Paddle/1 A4F4R70D## 2 1,000,000 304
3 SECTION Paddle/2 A4F4R70E## 2 1,000,000 304
4 Paddle/3 A4F4R70F## 2 1,000,000 304
2.19 LS-505/LS-506
er cycle
1 Conveyance section Stacker tray up down motor (M1) 15AV8003## 1 5,000,000 250, 257
2 Paper press solenoid/1 (SD6) 15AV8252## 1 5,000,000 246, 253
5 Rear stopper solenoid (SD3) 15AV8253## 1 5,000,000 247, 254
2.20 FD-503
er cycle
1 Conveyance section Roller solenoid/1 (SD5) 15AGR723## 1 5,000,000 241
2 Roller solenoid/2 (SD6) 15AGR723## 1 5,000,000 241
5 Punch section Punch unit A0H0R700## 1 5,000,000 240
(Japan)
A0H0R701## (US)
A0H0R702##
(Europe)
6 Folding conveyance 2nd folding roller solenoid (SD18) 15AGR761## 1 5,000,000 242
section
7 Main tray section Tray up down motor (M11) 129U-108## 1 5,000,000 243
8 PI section Separation rubber 13QNR704## 2 100,000 235, 238
9 Paper feed rubber 50BAR702## 2 100,000 236, 239
10 Pick-up rubber 50BAR701## 6 200,000 234, 237
2.21 SD-506
er cycle
1 Right angle Roller release solenoid/1 (SD5) 15AN8251## 1 5,000,000 270
2 conveyance section Roller release solenoid/2 (SD6) 15ANR710## 1 5,000,000 271
3 Roller release solenoid/3 (SD7) 15AN8251## 1 5,000,000 270
4 Right angle conveyance gate solenoid 15ANR711## 1 5,000,000 272
(SD2)
5 Saddle stitching Stapler assy 15AN-550## 2 1,000,000 265, 266
6 section Slope unit 15AN-500## 1 2,500,000 -
7 Saddle stitch unit A0H2A720## 1 2,500,000 -
8 Bundle processing Bundle press stage gear 15AN7719## 1 500,000 273
9 section Bundle press stage unit A0H2A530## 1 2,500,000 -
10 Trimmer section Trimmer board assy A0H2B622## 1 18,900 261
F-39
11 Trimmer blade kit A0H2R901## 1 37,500 260

12 Trimmer press motor (M32) A0H2M101## 1 500,000 262
13 Trimmer blade motor (M31) A0H2M102## 1 850,000 263
14 Trimmer unit A0H2A620## 1 2,500,000 264
2.22 SD-513
2.22.1 Spotted replacement parts list
Nu Classification Parts name Parts number Quantity Actual Parts count
mb replacement number
er cycle
1 Entrance Reverse exit roller pressure release A65UR70M## 1 1,000,000 387
conveyance section motor (M102)
2 Folding conveyance 2nd folding knife motor (M14) A65UR70P## 1 1,500,000 389
3 section 1st folding knife motor (M13) A65UR70N## 1 1,700,000 388
4 Saddle stitching Staple unit A65U7779## 1 1,000,000 381
5 section Clincher A65U7781## 1 1,000,000 395
6 Conveyance guide assy/Up A729R70S## 1 1,000,000 258
7 Booklet holding motor (M17) A729R704## 1 1,200,000 390
8 Alignment plate solenoid wiring A65UN165## 1 1,200,000 267
9 Clamp section Clamp motor (M23) A729R70G## 1 400,000 391
10 Fore edge finger motor (M52) A729R706## 1 600,000 392
11 Finger torque limiter A03X5656## 1 600,000 275
12 Fore edge finger gear 55VA7903## 1 600,000 276
13 Clamp hanging wire A65U6908## 2 600,000 259
14 Booklet holding wire/1 A65U6290## 2 1,200,000 268
17 Fore edge stopper motor (M24) A729R706## 1 2,000,000 394
18 Trimmer section Trimmer board A729F624## 1 18,900 383
19 Trimmer blade A729R901## 1 37,500 382
20 Trimmer press motor (M32) A0H2M101## 1 500,000 384
21 Trimmer blade motor (M31) A0H2M102## 1 850,000 385
22 Trimmer unit A729F621## 1 2,500,000 386
23 Booklet tray section Gripper motor (M26) A4JUM101## 1 2,000,000 393
2.23 TU-503
er cycle
1 Slitter section Slit cutter assy/Fr A65WF701## 1 750,000 151
2 Slit cutter assy/Rr A65WF702## 1 750,000 152
3 Rotary cutter section Rotary cutter assy A65WF700## 2 750,000 153
2.24 FD-504
er cycle
1 Clamp section SQF clamp motor/Fr (M203) A65VR705## 1 250,000 399
2 SQF clamp motor/Rr (M202) A65VR705## 1 250,000 398
3 Square-fold sction SQF roller cleaning assy/Fr A65VR70A## 1 250,000 400
4 SQF roller cleaning assy/Rr A65VR70B## 1 250,000 396
5 SQF roller motor (M201) A65VR706## 1 1,000,000 397
2.25 PB-503
er cycle
1 Conveyance section Entrance gate solenoid (SD1) 15ANR714## 1 3,000,000 336
F-40
2 SC section Switchback roller 13GQ4519## 1 600,000 328

3 SC switchback release motor (M13) A0V9M101## 1 3,000,000 325
4 FD alignment solenoid (SD11) 15AA8251## 1 5,000,000 326
5 SC pressure arm solenoid (SD13) A075B746## 1 5,000,000 327
6 One-way clutch/A 13GQ7709## 1 6,000,000 339
7 One-way clutch/B 13GQ7709## 1 6,000,000 340
8 Pellet supply section Pellet supply cooling fan (FM4) 27LA8051## 1 750,000 338
9 Glue tank section Cover paper glue roller drive gear A0753799## 4 750 341
bearing of glue tank section
10 Glue tank assy A15XA36A## 1 2,000 337
(100V) A15XA36E##
(120V) A15XA36F##
(240V)
11 Cover paper supply Pick-up roller 55VAR750## 1 500,000 329
12 section Paper feed roller 55VAR749## 1 500,000 330
13 Separation roller 55VAR749## 1 500,000 330
14 Cover paper feed clutch (CL71) 56AA8201## 1 3,000,000 331
15 Cover paper separation clutch (CL72) 56AA8201## 1 3,000,000 332
16 Cover paper table Roller cutter blade assy A0756230## 1 100,000 333
section
17 Relay conveyance Sub tray exit solenoid (SD4) 15ANR714## 1 3,000,000 324
section
18 Deodorant unit Exhaust filter/A A15X3017## 2 750,000 334
19 Exhaust filter/B A15X3018## 1 750,000 335
2.26 GP-501
2.26.1 Option
er Cycle
1 Punch section Die Set DS-5## 500,000
2 Back Gauge mechanism A0N9PP59## 1 4,000,000 348
2.27 GP-502
Nu Classification Parts name Parts No. Quantity Actual Parts count No.
mb replacement
er Cycle
1 Punch section Pullback Pad A4F6PP00## 2 500,000 358
2 Suction Cup: Element Feeder A4F6PP03## 1 1,000,000 359
3 Book Chute Myler A4F6PPH1## 4 500,000 362
4 Punch Unit Oiled Felt, Die-set A4F6PP01## 1 1,000,000 360
5 Punch Pin/Plate Assy., Die-set A4F6PP02## 1 4,000,000 361
F-41
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 3. ORU-M PARTS
3. ORU-M PARTS
3.1 Life value of the ORU-M parts
(1) ORU-M corresponding parts
ORU-M stands for "Operator Replaceable Unit Management." This function displays the steps, adjustment setting methods and manages
the data when the educated user replaces the parts.
Install the prescribed option and change DIPSW15-0 to 1to enable this function. For ORU-M corresponding parts, some parts that are
provided as an assy of parts larger than those parts replaced normally by the CE so that the user can easily conduct the part replacement
operation.
3.2 ORU-M parts list

(1) ORU-M parts list
The Allow and Restrict of the ORU-M parts can be selected on I.4.16.1 ORU-M Item/Life setting in Service Mode individually.
Parts Target of ORU-M Detection of Detection of Required adjustment Life Life Life
number connector RFID (Standard) (Lower limit) (Upper
disconnection connection limit)*1
49 Intermediate transfer Provided None Blade Setting Mode (for 220,000 66% 333%
unit intermediate transfer) prints*2 (264,000 (1,332,000
Belt line speed adjustment 200,000 prints) prints)
Gamma automatic
prints*3
adjustment
Color registration auto
adjustment
Density balance
adjustment
37: Quantity Developing unit/Y Provided None Toner Density Sensor Init. 1,200,000 50% 120%
38: (Y) prints (Standard x (Standard x
Distance Gamma Automatic 694.2km 0.5) 1.2)
Adjustment
adjustment
Density balance
adjustment
39: Quantity Developing unit/M Provided None Toner Density Sensor Init. 1,200,000 50% 120%
40: (M) prints (Standard x (Standard x
Adjustment
adjustment
Density balance
adjustment
41: Quantity Developing unit/C Provided None Toner Density Sensor Init. 1,200,000 50% 120%
42: (C) prints (Standard x (Standard x
Adjustment
adjustment
Density balance
adjustment
43: Quantity Developing unit/K Provided None Toner Density Sensor Init. 1,200,000 50% 120%
44: (K) prints (Standard x (Standard x
Adjustment
adjustment
Density balance
adjustment
29: Quantity Developer/Y Provided None Toner Density Sensor Init. 1,200,000 50% 120%
30: (Y) prints (Standard x (Standard x
Adjustment
adjustment
Density balance
adjustment
31: Quantity Developer/M Provided None Toner Density Sensor Init. 1,200,000 50% 120%
32: (M) prints (Standard x (Standard x
Adjustment
adjustment
Density balance
adjustment
F-42
33: Quantity Developer/C Provided None Toner Density Sensor Init. 1,200,000 50% 120%
34: (C) prints (Standard x (Standard x
Adjustment
adjustment
Density balance
adjustment
35: Quantity Developer/K Provided None Toner Density Sensor Init. 1,200,000 50% 120%
36: (K) prints (Standard x (Standard x
Adjustment
adjustment
Density balance
adjustment
74: Quantity 2nd transfer unit None None Gamma Automatic 440,000 50% 120%
Adjustment prints*2 (Standard x (Standard x
Density balance 400,000 0.5) 1.2)
adjustment
prints*3
82 Fusing unit Provided None None 600,000 50% 120%
prints (Standard x (Standard x
0.5) 1.2)
21: Quantity Drum unit/Y None None Gamma automatic 460,000 80% 113%
22: adjustment prints*2 (178.4km) (252km)
Distance Color registration auto 410,000
and adjustment
prints*3
Quantity Density balance
223 km of
adjustment
the drum
drive
distance,
71.4 km of
the lubricant
applying
unit drive
distance, or
the quantity
reaches,
whichever
comes
earlier.
23: Quantity Drum unit/M None None Gamma automatic 460,000 80% 113%
and adjustment
prints*3
223 km of
adjustment
the drum
drive
distance,
71.4 km of
the lubricant
applying
unit drive
distance, or
the quantity
reaches,
whichever
comes
earlier.
25: Quantity Drum unit/C None None Gamma automatic 460,000 80% 113%
and adjustment
prints*3
223 km of
adjustment
the drum
drive
distance,
71.4 km of
the lubricant
applying
unit drive
distance, or
F-43
the quantity
reaches,
whichever
comes
earlier.
27: Quantity Drum unit/K None None Gamma automatic 460,000 80% 113%
and adjustment
prints*3
223 km of
adjustment
the drum
drive
distance,
71.4 km of
the lubricant
applying
unit drive
distance, or
the quantity
reaches,
whichever
comes
earlier.
13: Quantity Charging corona/Y None None Gamma Automatic 210,000 57% 143%
14: Time Adjustment prints*2 (40h) (100h)
Density balance 160,000
adjustment
prints*3
70h
15: Quantity Charging corona/M None None Gamma Automatic 210,000 57% 143%
adjustment
prints*3
70h
17: Quantity Charging corona/C None None Gamma Automatic 210,000 57% 143%
adjustment
prints*3
70h
19: Quantity Charging corona/K None None Gamma Automatic 210,000 57% 143%
adjustment
prints*3
70h
3 Filter box None None None When 50% 120%
DIPSW5-6
is 0:
24,000,000
prints
When
DIPSW5-6
is 1:
24,800,000
prints
4 to 8 Dust-proof filter set None None None 600,000 50% 120%
prints
4 Developing dust-proof None None None 600,000 50% 120%
filter/1 prints
5 Developing dust-proof None None None 600,000 50% 120%
filter/2 prints
6 PH dust-proof filter None None None 600,000 50% 120%
prints
7 Electric component None None None 600,000 50% 120%
cooling filter prints
8 Suction dust-proof None None None 600,000 50% 120%
filter prints
117 Pick-up roller/1 None None None 800,000 50% 120%
prints (Standard x (Standard x
0.5) 1.2)
118 Pick-up roller/2 None None None 800,000 50% 120%
prints (Standard x
1.2)
F-44
(Standard x
0.5)
113 Feed separation None None None 125,000 50% 120%
rubber/1 prints (Standard x (Standard x
0.5) 1.2)
114 Feed separation None None None 125,000 50% 120%
rubber/2 prints (Standard x (Standard x
0.5) 1.2)
- Duct cover Provided None None If the duct cover is not mounted, the
same error as the connector
disconnection is detected and notified to
the user.
* The performance of the life upper limit is not guaranteed. It is within the range that CE can select according to the demand of customers.
*2 C1070, C1070P, C71hc
*3 C1060, PRO C1060L
3.3 ORU-M parts replacement timing

(1) ORU-M target unit life setting
The life of the ORU-M target unit can be selected individually on I.4.16.1 ORU-M Item/Life setting of Service Mode. Select the life with
percent.
(2) ORU-M warning icon display

When the life of the ORU-M target unit strays and the following conditions are met, the ORU-M warning icon appears on the Machine Screen.
• The ORU-M function is enabled
• Allowed by I.4.16.1 ORU-M Item/Life setting
3.4 Management of ORU-M parts counter

(1) Counter display
Press [ORU-M(Unit Replace)] on the Utility screen, and then the ORU-M target part counter appears.
Note
• By setting DIPSW15-0 to 1, [ORU-M(Unit Replace)] appears on the Utility screen.
• The content which appears on [ORU-M(Unit Replace)] reflects the setting ofI.4.16.1 ORU-M Item/Life setting.
• When DIPSW37-0 is changed to "1", a password can be changed for [ORU-M(Unit Replace)].
(2) Counter clear

When the user replaces the ORU-M target parts in the ORU-M replacement work mode.
F-45
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 4. LIFE VALUE
4. LIFE VALUE
4.1 Life value of materials/parts
• For the special parts counter, the actual replacement cycles of the following parts are shown in percentage with respect to the end of its
parts life.
Parts name Replacement cycle (reference) Actual replacement cycle
Developing dust-proof filter/1 600,000 counts (total counter) 600,000 counts *1
Developing dust-proof filter/2 600,000 counts (total counter) 600,000 counts *1
PH dust-proof filter 600,000 counts (total counter) 600,000 counts *1
Electric component cooling filter 600,000 counts (total counter) 600,000 counts *1
suction dust-proof filter 600,000 counts (total counter) 600,000 counts *1
Filter box 400,000 counts (total counter) · 24,000,000 counts (DIPSW5-6 = 0, default)
· 24,800,000 counts (DIPSW5-6 = 1)
· Counts for 7 to 460 for each print page depending on the humidity,
the average coverage, or the paper size.
Drum unit/Y · 460,000 counts (special parts Shows one of the following values that is nearer its end of the life.
counter) (C1070, C1070P, C71hc) · The drive distance of the drum/Y: 223 km
· 410,000 counts (special parts · The drive distance of the lubricant applying roller/Y: 71.4 km
counter) (C1060, C1060L) The actual replacement cycle is the earliest timing among the
following.
· 460,000 counts (C1070, C1070P, C71hc), 410,000 counts (C1060,
C1060L) *2
· The drive distance of the drum/Y: 223 km
· The drive distance of the ubricant applying roller/Y: 71.4 km
Drum unit/M · 460,000 counts (special parts Shows one of the following values that is nearer its end of the life.
counter) (C1070, C1070P, C71hc) · The drive distance of the drum/M: 223 km
· 410,000 counts (special parts · The drive distance of the lubricant applying roller/M: 71.4 km
following.
C1060L) *2
· The drive distance of the drum/M: 223 km
· The drive distance of the ubricant applying roller/M: 71.4 km
Drum unit/C · 460,000 counts (special parts Shows one of the following values that is nearer its end of the life.
counter) (C1070, C1070P, C71hc) · The drive distance of the drum/C: 223 km
· 410,000 counts (special parts · The drive distance of the lubricant applying roller/C: 71.4 km
following.
C1060L) *2
· The drive distance of the drum/C: 223 km
· The drive distance of the ubricant applying roller/C: 71.4 km
Drum Unit/K · 460,000 counts (special parts Shows one of the following values that is nearer its end of the life.
counter) (C1070, C1070P, C71hc) · The drive distance of the drum/K: 223 km
· 410,000 counts (special parts · The drive distance of the lubricant applying roller/K: 71.4 km
following.
460,000 counts (C1070, C1070P, C71hc), 410,000 counts (C1060,
C1060L) *1
· The drive distance of the drum/K: 223 km
· The drive distance of the ubricant applying roller/K: 71.4 km
Charging corona/Y · 210,000 counts (special parts The charging time of the charging corona/Y: 70 hours
counter) (C1070, C1070P, C71hc)
· 160,000 counts (special parts
counter) (C1060, C1060L)
Charging corona/M · 210,000 counts (special parts The charging time of the charging corona/M: 70 hours
Charging corona/C · 210,000 counts (special parts The charging time of the charging corona/C: 70 hours
Charging corona/K · 210,000 counts (special parts The charging time of the charging corona/K: 70 hours
Developer/Y 1,200,000 counts (special parts The drive distance of the developing roller/Y: 694.2 km
counter)
F-46
Developer/M · 1,200,000 counts (special parts The drive distance of the developing roller/M: 694.2 km
counter)
Developer/C · 1,200,000 counts (special parts The drive distance of the developing roller/C: 694.2 km
counter)
Developer/K · 1,200,000 counts (special parts The drive distance of the developing roller/K: 694.2 km
counter)
Developing unit/Y · 1,200,000 counts (special parts The drive distance of the developing roller/Y: 694.2 km
counter)
Developing unit/M · 1,200,000 counts (special parts The drive distance of the developing roller/M: 694.2 km
counter)
Developing unit/C · 1,200,000 counts (special parts The drive distance of the developing roller/C: 694.2 km
counter)
Developing unit/K · 1,200,000 counts (special parts The drive distance of the developing roller/K: 694.2 km
counter)
Transfer Belt Cleaning Unit · 880,000 counts (special parts The drive distance of the intermediate transfer belt: 480 km
Toner Collection Sheet · 220,000 counts (special parts The drive distance of the intermediate transfer belt: 120 km
Belt cleaning blade · 220,000 counts (special parts The drive distance of the intermediate transfer belt: 120 km
Side Seal · 220,000 counts (special parts The drive distance of the intermediate transfer belt: 120 km
2nd Transfer Roller/Up · 440,000 counts (special parts The drive distance of the 2nd transfer roller/Up: 240 km
Intermediate Transfer Belt · 440,000 counts (special parts The drive distance of the intermediate transfer belt: 240 km
Transfer roller bearing/Y, transfer · 3,520,000 counts (special parts The drive distance of the intermediate transfer belt: 1920 km
roller bearing/M and transfer counter) (C1070, C1070P, C71hc)
roller bearing/C · 3,200,000 counts (special parts
Transfer Roller Bearing/K · 3,520,000 counts (special parts The drive distance of the intermediate transfer belt: 1920 km
· 3,200,000 counts (special parts
1st Transfer Roller/Y · 440,000 counts (special parts The charging time of the 1st transfer roller/Y: 115 hours
1st Transfer Roller/M · 440,000 counts (special parts The charging time of the 1st transfer roller/M: 115 hours
1st Transfer Roller/C · 440,000 counts (special parts The charging time of the 1st transfer roller/C: 115 hours
1st Transfer Roller/K · 440,000 counts (special parts The charging time of the 1st transfer roller/K: 115 hours
2nd transfer roller/Lw · 440,000 counts (special parts The charging time of the 2nd transfer roller/Lw: 110 hours
Separate Discharging Unit · 440,000 counts (special parts The charging time of the separation discharging plate unit: 110 hours
F-47
2nd Transfer Earth Plate Assy · 1,760,000 counts (special parts The charging time of the 2nd transfer roller/Lw: 440 hours
C-clip · 1,760,000 counts (special parts The charging time of the 2nd transfer roller/Lw: 440 hours
Charging driven roller 350,000 counts (Special parts Charging time of the charging driven roller: 35 hours
counter)
Charging roller 350,000 counts (Special parts Charging time of the charging driven roller: 35 hours
counter)
*1 Count in all color modes
Small size: 1 count for each paper exit in the simplex mode, 2 counts in the duplex mode.
Large size: 2 counts for each paper exit in the simplex mode, 4 counts in the duplex mode.
Banner: 1 count to 5 counts for each paper exit
• To 338 mm: 1 count
• 338.1 mm to 488 mm: 2 counts
• 915.1 mm to 1200 mm: 5 counts
*2 Count only in the full color mode.
• 915.1 mm to 1200 mm: 5 counts
4.2 Life value determining condition

The replacement cycles (number of prints) are values calculated based on the actual life of parts when the print is executed under the following
conditions. The idle running time (when the machine does not create an image) of each part can vary widely depending on the print mode.
Therefore, the actual life cycle can become different between the parts whose replacement cycle (number of sheets) are the same.
Item Description
Printing method Full color 7 copies intermittently (C1070, C1070P, C71hc)
Full color 6 copies intermittently (C1060, C1060L)
Paper size A4
Coverage 5% coverage for each color
Environmental temp/humidity Q zone
F-48
F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 5. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L PROCEDURE bizhub...
5. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/

PRO C1060L
5.1 External section
5.1.1 Replacement of the developing dust-proof filter/1, the developing dust-proof filter/2, the PH dust-proof filter and
the suction dust-proof filter
(1) Periodically replaced parts and cycle
• Developing dust-proof filter/1: Every 100% (special parts counter) (Refer to "F.4. Life value")
• Developing dust-proof filter/2: Every 100% (special parts counter) (Refer to "F.4. Life value")
• PH dust-proof filter: Every 100% (special parts counter) (Refer to "F.4. Life value")
• Suction dust-proof filter: Every 100% (special parts counter) (Refer to "F.4. Life value")
(2) Procedure
1. Open the front door [1] and the toner supply door [2].
2. Remove the suction dust-proof filter [3] from the toner supply door.
Note
[2] [1] • When you reinstall the suction dust-proof filter [1], make
sure that the handle [2] faces upward.
3. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the filter cover [2].
4. Remove the developing dust-proof filter/1 [2], the developing dust-

proof filter/2 [3], and the PH dust-proof filter [4] from the filter cover
[1].
F-49
[6] [5] [1] [3] [2] 5. Reinstall the preceding parts following the removal steps in
reverse.
• When you reinstall the developing dust-proof filter/1 [1] and
developing dust-proof filter/2 [2], align the notches [3] and
projections [4].
• When you reinstall the PH dust-proof filter [5], insert the holes
of the PH dust-proof filter [6] into the projections which are in
the filter cover [7].
6. After the developing dust-proof filter/1, the developing dust-proof
filter/2, the PH dust-proof filter and the suction dust-proof filter are
replaced, conduct the following items.
• For the developing dust-proof filter/1: The counter reset of the
special parts counter number 4
• For the developing dust-proof filter/2: The counter reset of the
[7] [4] special parts counter number 5
• For the PH dust-proof filter: The counter reset of the special
parts counter number 6
• For the suction dust-proof filter: The counter reset of the
5.1.2 Replacement of the filter box

• Filter box: Every 100% (special parts counter) (refer to F.4. Life value)
(2) Procedure
1. Remove 2 screws [1], and loosen 2 screws [2] to remove the filter
box cover [3].
2. Remove the filter box [1].
3. Remove the label [1] of the filter box and then cover the toner
suction inlet [2] with it.
Note
• Make sure to close the toner suction inlet with the label so
that the toner in the filter box does not scatter.
4. Reinstall the preceding parts following the removal steps in

reverse.
5. After the replacement of the filter box, conduct the following step.
• The counter reset of the special parts counter number 3
5.1.3 Replacement of the electric component cooling filter

• Electric component cooling filter: Every 100% (special parts counter) (Refer to "F.4. Life value")
F-50
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the screw cap [1] and the screw [2], and then remove the
filter cover [3].
[3] [1][2]
2. Remove the electric component cooling filter [1].
Note
• When you reinstall the electric component cooling filter
[1], align the hole [2] of the electric component cooling
filter and the hole [3] of the screw.

reverse.
4. After the replacement of the electric component cooling filter,
conduct the following step.
• The counter reset of the special parts counter number7
[2] [3] [1]
5.2 Write section

5.2.1 Cleaning the dust proof glass
(1) Periodically cleaned parts and cycle
• Dust proof glass/Y, dust proof glass/M, dust proof glass/C, dust proof glass/K
: When you replace the charging corona
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the duct cover. (Refer to F.5.3.1 Pulling out the process
[4] [3] [1] [2] unit)
2. Pull out and remove the dust proof glass/Y [1], the dust proof
glass/M [2], the dust proof glass/C [3], and the dust proof glass/K
[4].
3. Clean the glass [2] of each dust proof glass [1] with hydro-wipe.
[2] [1] 4. Reinstall the preceding parts following the removal steps in
reverse.
5. After you clean the dust-proof glass, conduct the following items in
the order.
• Gamma automatic adjustment (Refer to I.4.4.6 Gamma
Automatic Adjustment (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment))
• Density Balance Adjustment
5.3 Photo conductor section

5.3.1 Pulling out the process unit
Note
• Be sure to remove the charging corona before you pull out the process unit.
• Be sure to reinstall the process unit before you install the charging corona.
• Do not pull out the process unit and the duplex section at the same time.
F-51
1. Open the front door/Lt [1] and then loosen 3 screws [2] to remove
the duct cover [3].
Note
• Be sure to loose 3 screws in order of top, lower right and
lower left. When you reinstall the duct cover, tighten the
screws in the same order.
2. Loosen the screw [1], and then open the fan cover [2].
3. Remove 4 charging coronas. (Refer to F.5.4.1 Replace the charging

[2] [1] corona)
4. Loosen 3 screws [1] and then remove the 3 positioning parts [2].
5. Hold the handle [3], and pull out the process unit [4].
6. When you reinstall the process unit, be sure to clean around the
process unit and follow the removal steps in reverse. (Refer to F.
5.3.2 Cleaning around the process unit)
Note
• For the 3 positioning parts [2], reinstall the lower right
positioning parts first of all.At that time, tighten the screw
slightly. Reinstall the positioning parts in order of upper
right, upper left. Tighten the screws slightly and equally.
[4] [3]
5.3.2 Cleaning around the process unit

• Around the process unit
: When you pull out the process unit
(2) Procedure
Note
• Be sure to pull out the process unit after you remove all charging coronas. Otherwise, charging coronas possibly become dirt
when you pull out or insert the process unit.
• Be careful not to exposure the drum unit to the light.
• Do not let the process unit and the duplex section be pulled out at the same time.
F-52
[1] 1. Remove the filter box cover on the back side of the main body, and
check around the filter box.
When a lot of toner scatters, change the filter box and clean the
following toner dirt. (Refer toF.5.1.2 Replacement of the filter box,
F.5.3.3 Replacing the drum unit)
• Clean the process unit stay [1] and the toner pan [2] with a
vacuum cleaner or a hydro-wipe.
• Clean the developing unit exhaust inlet [3] and the ozone inlet
[4] with a vacuum cleaner or a hydro-wipe.
• Clean the stay of drum units of each color [5] with a hydro-
wipe.
Note
• Be sure not to fold the sheet when you clean [1].
• Clean [1] to [4] with a vacuum cleaner and when they are
[2] still not cleaned, use a hydro-wipe.
• Be sure not to clean [5] with a vacuum cleaner. Otherwise,
the drum possibly gets damaged.
[3]
[4]
[5]
2. Clean the toner dirt of the transfer belt cleaning unit [1] and the
[1] [2] separation claw unit [2] with a hydro-wipe. (Refer to F.5.6.1
Removing/reinstalling the intermediate transfer unit)
3. Clean the dirt of the toners of the upper side of the intermediate
[2] [1] transfer unit (ceiling inside the main body) [1] and the upper and
lateral side of the color registration assy [2] with a vacuum cleaner
or a hydro-wipe.
Note
• Clean with a vacuum cleaner and when they are still not
cleaned, use a hydro-wipe.
F-53
4. Clean the following dirt of the toners with a hydro-wipe.
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] • Transfer guide plate/Lw [2]
• Transfer guide plate/Up [3]
• Registration sensor cover [4]
• Registration cleaning sheet assy [5]
Note
• Be sure not to clean [2] and [3] with a vacuum cleaner or
alcohol. Otherwise, the roller possibly gets damaged or
the sheet possibly gets folded or torn.
• You can clean [4] and [5] with a vacuum cleaner only
when they are too dirty.
• Be sure to clean them to the direction of the shaft. When
you clean them to the paper feed direction, the toner falls
to the paper feed path.
• Be careful not to deform the discharging pin and the
sheets.
5. Clean the separation discharging plate unit [1] with a blower brush.
Note
• Be sure not to use a vacuum cleaner or alcohol to clean.
Otherwise, the roller possibly gets damaged or the sheet
possibly gets folded or torn.
• Be sure not to touch the discharging pin and the sheets
because they are easily deformed. Clean with a blower
brush without touching them.
6. After the cleaning completes, feed 10 sheets of A3 paper to check

that there is no problem.
[1] 7. When there is still dirt, remove the 2nd transfer unit to clean the
following dirt of the toner. (Refer to F.5.6.11 Replacing the 2nd
transfer roller/Lw and the C-clip, and cleaning around the 2nd
transfer unit)
• Separation discharging unit [1]
• Transfer guide plate/Lw [2]
• Transfer guide plate/Up [3]
• Entrance sheet [4]
Note
• Remove 2 screws and remove [3], then clean [2] and [3].
• Be sure to use a hydro-wipe when you clean [4].
• Be sure not to fold the sheet when you clean [4].
8. After you clean around the process unit, conduct the following
[2] [3] [4] items.
• Cleaning the dust proof glass (Refer to F.5.2.1 Cleaning the
dust proof glass)
5.3.3 Replacing the drum unit

Note
• Be careful not to exposure the drum unit to the light.
• When you remove the drum unit, be sure to cover it with the drum cover [1].
• Even when other units are replaced, return the process unit to its original position and close the front door/Lt to avoid the drum
from being exposed.
[1]

• Drum unit : Every 100%, or the limit value*1 of the drum unit whichever is earlier (special parts counter) (refer to "F.4. Life Value)
• *1 460,000 counts (C1070, C1070P, C71hc), 410,000 counts (C1060, C1060L)
(2) Procedure
Note
• The product installs 4 drum units one each for yellow, magenta, cyan, and black. They are common parts. Do not use a once-
used drum cartridge for another cartridge, though they are common parts. Otherwise the old remaining toner and the new toner
mix up and the print quality degrade.
F-54
1. Pull out the process unit. (Refer to F.5.3.1 Pulling out the process
unit)
2. Remove the intermediate transfer unit. (Refer to F.5.6.1 Removing/
reinstalling the intermediate transfer unit)
3. Hold the drum unit at its ends [1], and remove the drum unit [2].
Note
• When you install the drum unit, push the drum unit to the
machine until the positions of △[1] matches.
• Be careful not to touch or damage the drum photo
conductor section with bare hands.
• When you leave the drum unit, be sure to spread a sheet
over the unit to protect from light, and put them in a dark
place.
4. Remove 2 screws [1] of a new drum unit, and press the blade.
5. Use a hydro-wipe and apply the setting toner uniformly to surface

[1] [2] of the drum [1]. Turn around both ends of the drum with fingers in
the arrow-marked direction [2] until no more setting toner is visible.
Note
• Be sure to use the setting toner in the main body package.
Never use the toner in the toner bottle since it includes
the carrier.
• Put the setting toner on the paper, and then attach the
setting toner on the hydro-wipe slightly and use it.
• Be sure to turn around the drum with the outer flanges [4]
of the edge [3]. Do not touch the image area.
• Be sure to turn around in the allow direction [2]. Be
careful not to turn around in the reverse direction,
otherwise the blade gets damaged.
6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

7. After replacing the drum unit, conduct the following items.
dust proof glass)
• For the drum unit/Y: Counter reset of the parts counter number
21 and number 22.
• For the drum unit/M: Counter reset of the parts counter
number 23 and number 24.
• For the drum unit/C: Counter reset of the parts counter number
25 and number 26.
[3] [4] • For the drum unit/K: Counter reset of the parts counter number
27 and number 28.
• Color registration automatic adjustment (Refer to I.4.3.12 Color
Registration Auto.Adj. (Printer Adjustment))
• Manual adjustment of color registration (Refer to I.4.3.13 Color
Regist.Gap Measurement (Printer Adjustment))
F-55
• Maximum density initial adjustment (Recommended to be
conducted) (Refer to "I.4.4.9 Maximum density initial
adjustment (drum peculiarity adjustment)")
5.4 Charging section

5.4.1 Replace the charging corona
• Charging corona : Every 100% (special parts counter) (Refer to: F.4. LIFE VALUE)
(2) Procedure
Note
• The product installs 4 charging coronas one each for yellow, magenta, cyan, and black. They are common parts. Do not use a
once-used charging corona for another color, though they are common parts. Otherwise the old remaining toner and the new
toner mix up and the print quality degrade.
1. Remove the duct cover. (Refer to F.5.3.1 Pulling out the process
unit)
2. Push down the charging corona lever to the lower right, and then
pull it out and remove the charging corona [1].
[1]

reverse.
Note
• When you reinstall the charging corona, push it until the
position of the triangle mark [1] is aligned.
4. After you replace the charging corona, conduct the following items.
dust proof glass)
• For the charging corona/Y: The counter reset of the special
parts counter number 13, 14
• For the charging corona/M: The counter reset of the special
• For the charging corona/C: The counter reset of the special
• For the charging corona/K: The counter reset of the special
5.4.2 Cleaning the charging corona

(1) Cleaned parts and cycle
• Charging corona: When it gets dirty.
F-56
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the charging corona. (Refer to F.5.4.1 Replace the
charging corona)
2. Turn the charging corona cleaning jig [1] counterclockwise to
remove it.
[1]
3. When you clean the charging wire, insert the charging corona
cleaning jig [3] from the insertion opening [2] of the charging
[5] corona [1] of each color. Then move it back and forth [5] along the
guide [4].
Note
[2] • The charging wire [6] is cleaned by being scrubbed with
the velvet section [7] of the charging corona cleaning jig
[4] [3].
reverse.
[6] [3]
F-57
5.5 Developing section

5.5.1 Developer charging procedures
1. Peal off the tape [1] on the prepared developing unit.
2. Move the connector [2] of the developing unit to the position in the
picture.
3. Remove 2 screws [3].
4. Release 4 hooks [4], and then remove the developing unit cover [5].
[3] [1]
[2] [4] [5]
5. Supply the developer [1] above the agitator screw.

6. Use the rotation jig [2] in the tool box to rotate the developing gear
in the arrow-marked direction, and supply the developer.
Note
• When all developer cannot be supplied at once, supply
them in a few times.
• Be sure to rotate the developing gear in the arrowed
direction.
• Conduct the operation for each color (YMCK).
[2] [1]
F-58
7. Attach the developing unit cover [1] and move the connector [2] to
[3] the initial position.
Note
• Confirm that the projections [3] at the both sides are put in
the groove of the developing unit cover.
8. Install each developing unit to the main body.

Note
[2] • Install them in order (YMCK in order from the top).
9. After the developer/Y, the developer/M, the developer/C and the

developer/K are supplied conduct the following items.
• For the developer/Y: Counter reset of the parts counter number
29 and number 30
• For the developer/M: Counter reset of the parts counter number
31 and number 32
• For the developer/C: Counter reset of the parts counter number
33 and number 34
• For the developer/K: Counter reset of the parts counter number
35 and number 36
• Cleaning the dust proof glass (Refer to "F.5.2.1 Cleaning the
dust proof glass")
[1] • Toner density sensor initial auto adjustment (Refer to "I.4.4.7
Toner Density Sensor Init. (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment)")
[3] • Gamma auto adjustment (Refer to "I.4.4.6 Gamma Automatic
Adjustment (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment)")
• Density balance adjustment
conducted) (Refer to "I.4.4.9 Maximum density initial adjustment
(drum peculiarity adjustment)")
5.5.2 Replacing the Developing unit/Y, /M, /C, /K

• Developing unit/Y, developing unit/M, developing unit/C, developing unit/K: every 100% (special parts counter) (Refer to "F.4. Life Value")
(2) Procedure
Note
• When you clean the developing unit, be sure to use a hydro wipe that is regarded as a CE tool. When you use the paper or the
cloth other than hydro wipe, a white line possibly causes on the image because of the dust and lint that is stuck in the
developing regulation plate of the developing unit.
• 4 developing units each for yellow, magenta, cyan, and black are equipped. They are common parts. Do not use the used
developing unit as an alternative of another colored developing unit. Otherwise the old remaining toner and the new toner are
mixed up and the print quality degrades.
[1] 1. Pull out the process unit. (Refer to F.5.3.1 Pulling out the process
unit)
2. Disconnect 4 connectors [1].
[3] [2] [1] Note

• After the connector of the developing unit/Y is
disconnected, insert the connector [1] into the connector
holder [2] and fix it with the clamp [3].
F-59
Note
• After the connectors of the developing unit/M, the
developing unit/C, the developing unit/K are
disconnected, be sure to insert the connector [1] into the
connector holder [2].
[1] [2]
[1] 3. Remove the developing unit/Y, the developing unit/M, the

developing unit/C, the developing unit/K [1].
4. Charge the developer to a new developing unit. (Refer to F.5.5.1
Developer charging procedures)
Note
• Attach the individual label which is bundled in the unit to
the developing unit.

reverse.
6. After the replacement of the developing unit/Y, the developing unit/
M, the developing unit/C and the developing unit/K, conduct the
following steps.
• For the developing unit/Y: The counter reset of the special
parts counter number 37 and number 38
• For the developing unit/M: The counter reset of the special
• For the developing unit/C: The counter reset of the special
• For the developing unit/K: The counter reset of the special
• Cleaning the dust proof glass (Refer to "F.5.2.1 Cleaning the
dust proof glass")
• Toner density sensor initial auto adjustment (Refer to "I.4.4.7
Toner Density Sensor Init. (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment)")
• Gamma auto adjustment (Refer to "I.4.4.6 Gamma Automatic
Adjustment (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment)")
• Density balance adjustment
5.6 Intermediate transfer section

5.6.1 Removing/reinstalling the intermediate transfer unit
(1) Procedure for removal
unit)
2. Loosen 2 screws [1] and then remove the tool box cover [2].
F-60
3. Remove the 2 support sticks [1].
Note
• The support sticks are the assist sticks which stand the
removed intermediate transfer unit independently. Be sure
to prepare them beforehand when you remove the
intermediate transfer unit.
4. Loosen the 2 screws [1] and then remove the 2 positioning parts
[2].
Note
• Reinstall the positioning parts [2] with the process unit
pulled out. Also, reinstall the lower positioning part first of
all.
[2] [1]
5. Lift up the handle [1], and remove the intermediate transfer unit [2]
with opening it in the arrow-marked direction [3].
Note
• Be careful not to touch or damage the transfer belt [4] with
bare hands.
• Be sure to hold the ends of the handle of the intermediate
transfer unit [1] using both hands.
• To avoid the drum from being exposed, return the process
unit to its original position and close the front door/Lt
after the intermediate transfer unit is removed. If the drum
is exposed, the maximum density adjustment trouble or
the image memory may occur.
6. Place the 2 support sticks [2] on the intermediate transfer unit [1]
and let the unit stand independently.
(2) Procedure for reinstallation

1. Hold the handle [1] one-handed and remove the 2 support sticks
[3] from the intermediate transfer unit [2].
F-61
2. Lift up the intermediate transfer unit [1] with both hands, and insert
the 2 shafts in the rear of the intermediate transfer unit [2] into the
2 holes of the process unit [3].
3. Turn the intermediate transfer unit [1] in the arrow-marked

direction. Then put the 2 shafts at the front [2] on the 2 projections
of the process unit [3].
Note
• Be careful not to contact the intermediate transfer unit
with the drum.
4. Be sure that the following reinstallation of the parts follows the

removal steps in reverse.
(3) Installing of a new intermediate transfer unit

• Remove the 8 screws [1] and then remove the 8 locking materials
[2].
Note
• Installing and operating the intermediate transfer unit with
the locking materials [2] installed damage the main body
drive section.
[1][2]
• Remove 2 lock screws [1] and stretch the transfer belt pressure.
Note
• Remove the lock screw with the tension plate/Fr and the
tension plate/Rr are pushed.
• Make sure that the rib in the transfer belt is not on the
roller.
[1]
• Apply the setting toner to the transfer belt cleaning unit. (Refer to
F.5.6.2 Replacing the transfer belt cleaning unit)
• Be sure that the following reinstallation of the parts follows the
normal installation steps.
5.6.2 Replacing the transfer belt cleaning unit

• Transfer belt cleaning unit : Every 100% (special parts counter) (Refer to: F.4. LIFE VALUE)
F-62

2. Hold the transfer belt cleaning unit [1], remove the 2 screws [2],
and remove the transfer belt cleaning unit.
Note
• Handle the unit gently when you remove it. The toner that
is accumulated in between the toner guide roller of the
unit and the intermediate transfer belt cleaning blade
sometimes spills. It is normal when the toner is
accumulated because the toner grinds the belt surface. If
the toner is spilled over the separation claw unit, remove
[2] [1] and clean the unit.
[2] [3]
(3) Installation procedure of the new transfer belt cleaning unit

1. Remove 2 lock screws [1] of the transfer belt cleaning unit.
Note
• Release the pressure of the blade [2] in the arrow-marked
direction to remove the lock screws.
[2] [1]
F-63
2. Use a spoon and calmly put the setting toner on the toner storage
[3] [4] [1] of the new transfer belt cleaning unit.
3. Turn the gear [2] in the arrowed direction, and apply the setting
toner on the cleaning roller [3].
Note
• Be sure to use the setting toner in the main body package.
Never use the toner in the toner bottle since it includes
the carrier.
• Be sure to apply the setting toner until the groove [4] of
the toner adjustment sheet is half covered with the setting
toner.
• If the setting toner fails to be applied evenly on the
cleaning roller [4], calmly put the setting toner again on
the part that needs the more setting toner. Then, turn the
gear [3] until the toner is applied evenly around the roller.
[2] [1]
4. Reinstall the transfer belt cleaning unit to the intermediate transfer

unit. (2 screws)
Note
• During the installation of the transfer belt cleaning unit, be
sure to insert the guide part [1] of the transfer belt
cleaning unit into the shaft of the intermediate transfer
unit [2] before the screw is tightened.
[1] [2]
[2] [1]
F-64
5. Rotate the transfer belt with the pressure of the belt cleaning blade
is released [1]. When the side which the setting toner is applied
appears, press the blade. Rotate the transfer belt once with the
blade is pressed.
Note
• Never rotate it in reverse.
6. Reinstall the parts following the removal steps in reverse.

7. After the transfer belt cleaning unit is replaced, conduct the
following step.
• Counter reset of the parts counter number 48 and number 51
[1]
[2]
[3]
5.6.3 Replacing the belt cleaning blade and the side seal
• Belt cleaning blade: Every 100% (special parts counter) (Refer to "F.4. Life Value")
• Side seal: Every 100% (special parts counter) (Refer to "F.4. Life Value")
(2) Procedure
[2] [2] reinstalling the intermediate transfer unit)
2. Remove the transfer belt cleaning unit. (Refer to F.5.6.2 Replacing
the transfer belt cleaning unit)
3. Remove 2 springs [1], and release the pressure of the belt
cleaning blade.
4. Remove C-clip [2] 1 each.
[1]
5. Draw the blade support shaft [1] in the arrowed direction, and
remove the belt cleaning blade [2].
Note
• Take an extra care not to touch or damage the blade of the
belt cleaning blade [2].
[2] [1]
F-65
7. After the belt cleaning blade is installed, replace 2 side seals [1].
[1] [2] Note
• When the new side seal is applied, be sure not to stick it
hard on the belt cleaning blade [2] and the section [3]
When the belt cleaning blade is replaced, be sure to
replace the side seal.
Otherwise, a gap is created between the belt cleaning
blade and the side seal and the toner could spill out.
[3] 8. After the transfer belt cleaning blade is replaced, conduct the
following items in order.
• For the belt cleaning blade: The counter reset of the special
parts counters number 53 and number 54
• Blade setting mode (Refer to I.4.4.5 Blade Setting Mode (Drum
Peculiarity Adjustment))
After the side seals are replaced, conduct the following step.
• For the side seal: The counter reset of the special parts
counter number 72 and number 80
[2] [1]
[3]
5.6.4 Replacing the toner collection sheet

• Toner collection sheet : Every 100% (special parts counter) (Refer to: F.4. LIFE VALUE)
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the intermediate transfer unit. (Refer to F.5.6.1 Removing/
3. Remove 3 screws [1], the toner collection board [2], and the toner
collection sheet [3]
Note
• Do not bend or damage the PET sheet of the toner
collection sheet.

reverse.
5. After you replace the toner collection sheet, conduct the following
items.
[3] [2] • Counter reset of the parts counter number 52 and number 71
5.6.5 Replacing the transfer belt separation claw

• Transfer Belt Separation Claw : Every 880,000 counts (Special parts counter)
F-66
(2) Procedure
2. Remove the screw [1] and remove the transfer belt separation
claw unit [2].
Note
• Be careful not to touch or damage the intermediate
transfer belt [3] with bare hands.
[4]
[3] [2] [1]

3. Remove the screws [1], 1 each, and remove the 3 transfer belt
separation claws [2].
reverse.
5. After the transfer belt separation claw is replaced, conduct the
following items.
• Counter reset of the parts counter number 70
[1] [2]
5.6.6 Replacing the intermediate transfer belt, and cleaning of the rollers and the cleaning sheet
• Intermediate transfer belt : Every 100% (special parts counter) (Refer to: F.4. LIFE VALUE)

• Roller in the intermediate transfer unit
: Every 440,000 counts (special parts counter) *1
*1 C1070, C1070P and C71hc
*2 C1060 and C1060L
(3) Procedure
3. Remove the transfer belt separation claw unit. (Refer to F.5.6.5
Replacing the transfer belt separation claw)
4. Remove the unit stand [1] and the tension release screw [2].
[1] [2]
F-67
5. Attach the unit stand [2] on the positioning shaft/Up [1]
[1] [2]
[1] [3] [2] 6. Hold the 2 handles [1] and tilt the intermediate transfer unit [2] as
illustrated.
Note
• Be sure not to hold nothing but the handles.
7. Remove the 2 support sticks [3].
[2] [1] 8. Remove 2 screws [1], and remove the intermediate transfer handle
assy [2] in the arrowed direction.
9. Insert the tension release screw [2] to the hole [3] and the hole of
the tension roller [4] while you push the tension plate/Fr [1] to the
direction of the arrow. Then, release the tension.
[1] [4] [3] [2]

10. Push the tension plate/Rr [1] inside in the arrowed direction [2] and
rotate the handle support plate [3] in the arrowed direction [4] at a
time.
11. Hook the projection of the handle support plate [5] on the
projection of the tension plate/Rr [6] and fix the tension plate/Rr [1],
and release the tension.
Note
• Push the tension plate/Rr hard and hook it to the
projection surely. When the push amount is insufficient, it
becomes difficult to remove the intermediate transfer belt.
[1] [2] [4] [6] [3] [5]
F-68
12. Remove the C-clip [1] and remove the encoder [2].
13. Remove 3 screws [3], and remove the insulation holder/Fr [4].
[4] [3] [2] [1]

14. Remove the C-clip [1] and remove the bearing [2].
[2] [1]
15. Pull up the intermediate transfer belt [1] and remove it.
Note
• Be sure to reinstall the intermediate transfer belt so that
the side, where the character "UPSIDE" [2] is engraved
inside, comes on the downside.
[1] [2]
F-69
Note
• Be sure to reinstall the intermediate transfer belt so that
the inside rib does not run on the rollers.
16. Use the isopropyl alcohol and clean 3 auxiliary rollers [1], the
[1] driven roller [2], and the tension roller [3].
[4] 17. Use the blower brush and clean the cleaning sheet [4].
[3] 18. Reinstall the preceding parts following the removal steps in
reverse.
19. After the replacement of the intermediate transfer belt, conduct the
following items.
dust proof glass)
• The counter reset of the special parts counter number 50,
number 64
• Belt line speed adjustment (Refer to I.4.3.10 Belt Line Speed
Adj. (Printer Adjustment))
[2] • Manual adjustment of color registration (Refer to I.4.3.13 Color
5.6.7 Replacing the 1st transfer roller/Y, /M, /C and /K and the transfer roller bearing/Y, /M, /C and /K
• 1st transfer roller/Y, 1st transfer roller/M, 1st transfer roller/C and 1st transfer roller/K : Every 100% (special parts counter) (Refer to: F.4.
LIFE VALUE)
• Transfer roller bearing/Y, transfer roller bearing/M, transfer roller bearing/C: every 100% (special parts counter) (Refer to "F.4. Life Value)
• Transfer roller bearing/K: every 100% (special parts counter) (Refer to "F.4. Life Value)
(2) Procedure
[4] [3] [2] [1] 1. Remove the intermediate transfer unit. (Refer to F.5.6.1 Removing/
2. Remove the intermediate transfer belt. (Refer to F.5.6.6 Replacing
the intermediate transfer belt, and cleaning of the rollers and the
cleaning sheet)
3. Remove the 1st transfer roller/Y [1], the 1st transfer roller/M [2],
the 1st transfer roller/C [3] and the 1st transfer roller/K [4].
Note
• Never touch the roller of the new 1st transfer roller.
Be sure to hold the metal shaft of the roller and reinstall
the new 1st transfer roller.
F-70
[1] [2] 4. Remove the claws [1], 2 each, and remove the transfer roller
bearing/Y, the transfer roller bearing/M and the transfer roller
bearing/C [2]
Note
• During the detachment of the transfer roller bearing/Y, the
transfer roller bearing/M and the transfer roller bearing/C
[2], be careful not to lose the springs [3]
[3] • Be careful not to break the claw [1].
• When the transfer roller bearing/Y, the transfer roller
bearing/M and the transfer roller bearing/C [2] are
removed, check that the springs [3] are attached straight.
When the springs [3] are curved or attached obliquely,
adjust the position of the springs [3].
[1] [3] [2]
5. Attach 2 support sticks [1] and place the intermediate transfer unit
[2].
Note
• Be sure not to hold the intermediate transfer motor (M9)
[3] by the hand when you place the intermediate transfer
unit [2].
[3] [2] [1]
[1] [3] [2] 6. Disconnect the connector [1], remove 3 screws [2], and remove
the 1st transfer pressure release motor assy [3].
F-71
7. Remove the pressure release gear/3 [1], remove the E-ring [2],
and remove the pressure release gear [3] and the pin [4].
Note
• Be careful not to lose the pin [4].
[1] [3] [2] [4]

8. Remove the E-ring [2], 1 each, and remove the spacer [2], 1 each,
and remove the bearing [3], 1 each.
[3]
[2] [1]
[2] [3] [1]
9. Hold the tension plate/Fr [1] and remove the tension release screw
[2], and release the fixed tension roller [3].
10. Hold the tension plate/Rr [4] and rotate the support plate [5] in the
arrow-marked direction, and release the fixed tension plate/Rr [4].
[3] [5] [2] [1] [4]
F-72
11. Disconnect the connector [1] (white) and the connector [2] (blue)
and remove 2 screws [2].
[3] [2] [1]

12. Lift up the 1st transfer pressure unit [1] and the 1st transfer
[1] [2] pressure shaft [2] in the arrowed direction [3].
13. Rotate the pressure arms [4] 1 each in the arrowed direction [5],
[3] and release the arm from each pressure cam [6].
[6]
[4] [5]
14. Remove the claws [1], 2 each, and remove each transfer roller
bearing/K [2].
[1]
[2]
[2]
[1]
F-73
reverse.
[3] Note
• When the transfer roller bearing/K [1] is installed, check
that the spring [2] is attached on the projection [3]
straight.
When the springs [2] are curved or attached obliquely,
adjust the position of the springs [2].
16. After the replacement of the 1st transfer roller/Y, the 1st transfer
roller/M, the 1st transfer roller/C and the 1st transfer roller/K,
[1] [2] conduct the following items.
dust proof glass)
• For the 1st transfer roller/Y: The counter reset of the special
parts counter number 55, number 65
• For the 1st transfer roller/M: The counter reset of the special
• For the 1st transfer roller/C: The counter reset of the special
• For the 1st transfer roller/K: The counter reset of the special
[3] [2] [1] After the transfer roller bearing/Y, the transfer roller bearing/M, the
transfer roller bearing/C and the transfer roller bearing/K are
replaced, conduct the following items.
• The counter reset of the special parts counter number 47 and
number 61 of the transfer roller bearing/Y and the transfer
roller bearing/M and the transfer roller bearing/C.
• Counter reset of the special parts counter number 46 and
number 63 or the transfer roller bearing/K
5.6.8 Replacing the 2nd transfer roller/Up

• 2nd transfer roller/Up : Every 100% (special parts counter) (Refer to: F.4. LIFE VALUE)
(2) Procedure
[2] [1] 1. Remove the intermediate transfer unit. (Refer to F.5.6.1 Removing/
2. Remove the intermediate transfer belt. (Refer to F.5.6.6 Replacing
the intermediate transfer belt, and cleaning of the rollers and the
cleaning sheet)
3. Remove the bearing [1], and remove the 2nd transfer roller/Up [2].
Note
• Never touch the roller of the 2nd transfer roller/Up. When
the 2nd transfer roller/Up is held by hand, hold the metal
shaft. If the roller is touched by hand, it affects the image
quality.When you touch the roller, wipe the part with a dry
cloth. Never wipe it with the alcohol.
• When you install a new 2nd transfer roller/Up, wipe it with
hydro-wipe.Do not use an alcohol or a wet cloth.

reverse.
5. After the 2nd transfer roller/Up is replaced, conduct the following
item.
• The counter reset of the special parts counter number 59, 69
5.6.9 Replacing the belt separation claw solenoid (SD2)

• Belt separation claw solenoid (SD2)
: Every 1,760,000 counts (special parts counter) *1
*1 C1070, C1070P and C71hc
*2 C1060 and C1060L
F-74
(2) Procedure
[2] [1] [3] 1. Remove the process unit. (Refer to G.3.2.18 Process unit)
2. Remove the fusing unit. (Refer to F.5.11.2 Removing/reinstalling
the fusing unit)
3. Remove the 2nd transfer unit. (Refer to F.5.6.10 Removing and
reinstalling the 2nd transfer unit)
4. Put the duplex section inside the main body.
5. Disconnect the connector [1].
6. Remove 2 screws [1], and remove the belt separation claw
solenoid assy [2].
Note
• When you reinstall the parts, hook the projection [1] of the
mounting plate [2] on the hole of the main body side.
[1] [2]
[2] [1] 7. Remove the clamp and release the wiring harness, and remove 2
screws [1] and remove the belt separation claw solenoid (SD2) [2].
reverse.
9. After the belt separation claw solenoid (SD2) is replaced, conduct
the following item.
F-75
5.6.10 Removing and reinstalling the 2nd transfer unit

(1) Procedure
1. Pull out the duplex section. (Refer to F.5.12.1 Replacement of the
intermediate conveyance clutch/2 (CL6), and the intermediate
conveyance clutch/3 (CL7))
2. Raise up the 2nd transfer unit [1] in the arrow-marked direction.
3. Remove 2 fastons [2].
[2] Note
• When you reinstall the 2nd transfer unit, confirm that the
2nd transfer earth plate assy [4] nips the shaft [3] of the
2nd transfer roller/Lw.Also, be careful about the directions
of the 2 fastons [2].
[1]
[4] [3]
4. Remove the C-clip [1] and then remove the 2nd transfer unit [2] in
the arrow-marked direction.
Note
• When you hold the 2nd transfer unit, be sure not to bend
the discharging pin or the PET part.

reverse.
[1] [2]
5.6.11 Replacing the 2nd transfer roller/Lw and the C-clip, and cleaning around the 2nd transfer unit
• 2nd transfer roller/Lw: 100% (special parts counter) (Refer to "F.4. Life Value")
• C-clip: 100% (special parts counter) (Refer to "F.4. Life Value")

• 2nd transfer unit: when you replace the 2nd transfer roller/Lw.
F-76
(3) Procedure
1. Remove the 2nd transfer unit. (Refer to F.5.6.10 Removing and
[2] [1] [3] reinstalling the 2nd transfer unit)
2. Clean the 2nd transfer earth plate [1], the pressure material [2],
and the shaft [3] by using the isopropyl alcohol and the cleaning
pad.
[1] [2]
[3]
[3] 3. Remove the separation discharging unit. (Refer to F.5.6.12

Replacing the separate discharging unit)
4. Remove the C-clips [1] 1 each, remove the shafts [2] 1 each, and
remove the 2nd transfer roller/Lw [3] in the arrowed direction.
[2]
[1]
F-77
5. Clean [1] and [2] by using the isopropyl alcohol and the cleaning
pad.
reverse.
7. After you replace the 2nd transfer roller/Lw and the C-clip, conduct
the following items.
• Counter reset of the special parts counter number 75 and
number 78 of the 2nd transfer roller/Lw
• The counter reset of the special parts counter number 73 of
the C-clip.
[2]
[1]
5.6.12 Replacing the separate discharging unit

• Separate discharging plate unit : Every 100% (special parts counter) (Refer to: F.4. LIFE VALUE)
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the 2nd transfer unit. (Refer to F.5.6.10 Removing and
reinstalling the 2nd transfer unit)
2. Remove the separation discharging unit [1] in the arrowed
direction.
Note
• Be careful not to deform the PET parts.
• Be sure not to lose each positioning pin [2] or miss the
installation position, and remove the separation
discharging unit [1]
• When you hold the separate discharging plate unit, be
sure not to bend the discharging pin.

reverse.
[2] 4. After the separation discharging unit is replaced, conduct the
following item.
• The counter reset of the special parts counter number 76, 79
5.6.13 Replacing the 2nd transfer earth plate assy

• 2nd transfer earth plate assy : Every 100% (special parts counter) (Refer to: F.4. LIFE VALUE)
F-78
(2) Procedure
2. Remove the screw [1] 1 each, and remove the 2nd transfer earth
plate assy [2] 1 each.
reverse.
4. After the 2nd transfer earth plate assy is replaced, conduct the
following item.
[2]
[1]
5.7 Toner collection section

5.7.1 Replacing the waste toner box
(1) Periodically replaced parts, cycle
• Waste toner box: Every 130,000 counts (special parts counter)
(2) Procedure
1. Open the waste toner box door [1] and pull the waste toner box [2].
[1] [2]
[1] [2] 2. Remove the label [1] from the waste toner box and then cover the
entrance of the waste toner box [2].
reverse.
4. After you replace the waste toner box, conduct the following steps.
• For the waste toner box: The counter reset of the special parts
counter number 1
5.8 Paper feed section

5.8.1 Replacement of the pick-up roller/1, pick-up roller/2, paper feed roller rubber/1 and paper feed roller rubber/2
• Pick-up roller/1, pick-up roller/2: Every 800,000 counts (special parts counter)
• Paper feed roller rubber/1, paper feed roller rubber/2: Every 125,000 counts (special parts counter)
* Be sure to replace the paper feed roller rubber together with the separation roller rubber at the same time.
F-79
(2) Procedure
1. Pull out the paper feed tray.
2. Remove 2 C-clips [1], and then slide outward 2 bearings [2] to
remove the paper feed roller assy [3].
Note
• When you reinstall the paper feed roller assy, check that
there is no foreign objects such as grease on each roller.
[3] [2] [6] [5] [1] 3. Remove the bearing [1].

4. Remove the C-clip [2], and remove the pick-up roller [3].
Note
• When you reinstall the pick-up roller, be sure to check that
the arrow-marked side [4] comes to the C-clip side [2].
5. Remove the C-clip [5], and remove the paper feed roller [6].
Note
• When you reinstall the paper feed roller, be sure to check
that the arrow-marked side [7] comes to the C-clip side [5].
6. Remove the paper feed roller rubber [8] from the paper feed roller.
Note
[4] [7]
• When you reinstall the paper feed rubber, be sure to
check that the paint-marked side [9] comes to the arrow-
marked side [7].

reverse.
8. After you replace the pick-up roller and the paper feed roller
[9] [8] a03uf2c055ca rubber, conduct the following steps.
• For the pick-up roller/1: The counter reset of the parts counter
number 117
• For the pick-up roller/2: The counter reset of the parts counter
number 118
• For the paper feed roller rubber/1: The counter reset of the
5.8.2 Replacement of the separation roller rubber/1 and separation roller rubber/2
• Separation roller rubber/1, separation roller rubber/2: Every 125,000 counts (special parts counter)
* Replace the separation roller rubber at the same timing as the paper feed roller rubber.
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the paper feed roller assy. (Refer to F.5.8.1 Replacement
of the pick-up roller/1, pick-up roller/2, paper feed roller rubber/1
and paper feed roller rubber/2)
2. Remove 3 screws [1], and then remove the paper stopper plate [2].
Note
• When you remove the paper stopper plate of tray2,
remove it while pushing down the paper lift plate [3].
F-80
3. Remove the C-clip [1], and remove the separation roller [2].
[5] Note
• When you reinstall the paper feed roller, check that there
[3] is no foreign objects such as grease on each roller.
[4]
4. Remove the separation roller rubber [4] from the separation roller
[2] [1] [3].
Note
• When you reinstall the separation roller rubber, be sure to
check that the paint-marked side [5] comes to the C-clip
side [1].

reverse.
6. After you replace the separation roller rubber, conduct the
following item.
5.8.3 Cleaning the slide sheet

• Slide sheet: Every 125,000 counts (special parts counter)
* Be sure to clean the slide sheet together with the separation roller rubber and the paper feed roller rubber at the same time.
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Pull out the paper feed tray.
2. Clean the 2 slide sheets [1] with alcohol.
5.8.4 Replacement of the paper feed clutch/1 (CL1), paper feed clutch/2 (CL2), pre-registration clutch/1 (CL3) and pre-
registration clutch/2 (CL4)
• Paper feed clutch/1 (CL1), paper feed clutch/2 (CL2): Every 2,000,000 counts (special parts counter)
• Pre-registration clutch/1 (CL3), pre-registration clutch/2 (CL4): Every 2,000,000 counts (special parts counter)
F-81
(2) Procedure for pulling out the tray1 at the maximum

1. Pull out the paper feed tray1 [1].
2. Remove 2 stepped screws [2], and then remove the stopper/Rt [3].
3. Remove the screw [4], and then remove the stopper/Lt [5].
4. Pull out the paper feed tray1 [1] at the maximum.
[4] [1] [5]
[2] [3]
(3) Procedure for pulling out the tray2 at the maximum

1. Pull out the paper feed tray2 [1].
2. Remove 2 screws [2], and then remove the stopper/Rt [3].
3. Remove the screw [4], and then remove the stopper/Lt [5].
4. Pull out the paper feed tray2 [1] at the maximum.
[4] [1] [5]
[2] [3]
F-82

1. Loosen the screw [1], and then remove the connector cover [2].
[1] [2]
3. Remove the screw [2]. Loosen the fixing shaft screw [3], and then
remove the paper feed unit [4].
[1] [3] [4] [2]

[9] [10] [4] [3] [1] 4. Disconnect the connector [1].
5. Remove the C-clip [2], and then remove the paper feed clutch [3].
Note
• When you reinstall the paper feed clutch, be sure to match
each stopper [4] and each guide [5].

7. Remove the C-clip [7], and remove the pre-registration clutch [8].
Note
• When you reinstall the pre-registration clutch, be sure to
match each stopper [9] and each guide [10].

[8] [7] [6] [5] [2] a03uf2c057ca
reverse.
9. After you replace the paper feed clutch and the pre-registration
clutch, conduct the following item.
• For the paper feed clutch/1 (CL1): The counter reset of the
• For the paper feed clutch/2 (CL2): The counter reset of the
• For the pre-registration clutch/1 (CL3): The counter reset of the
• For the pre-registration clutch/2 (CL4): The counter reset of the
5.9 Vertical conveyance section

5.9.1 Replacement of the intermediate conveyance clutch/1 (CL5)
• Intermediate conveyance clutch/1 (CL5): Every 2,000,000 counts (special parts counter)
F-83
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the right cover/Lw1 and the right cover/Lw2. (Refer to G.
[2] 3.2.5 Right cover/Up1, right cover/Up2, right cover/Up3, right
cover/Up4, right cover/Lw1, right cover/Lw2)
2. Disconnect the connector [1], and release the wiring harness from
the clamps.
3. Remove 4 screws [2], and remove the vertical conveyance unit [3]
in the arrowed direction.
[1] [3]
[1] [2] [3] [4][5] the clamps.
5. Remove the C-clip [2], and remove the intermediate conveyance
clutch/1 (CL5) [3].
Note
• When you reinstall the intermediate conveyance clutch/1
(CL5) [3], be sure to match the stopper [4] and the guide
[5].

reverse.
7. After the intermediate conveyance clutch/1 (CL5) is replaced,
conduct the following item.
5.10 Registration section

5.10.1 Replacing the registration cleaning sheet assy
• Registration cleaning sheet assy: Every 600,000 counts (special parts counter)
(2) Procedure
2. Remove 2 screws [1], and remove the registration cleaning sheet
assy [2].
reverse.
4. After the registration cleaning sheet assy is replaced, conduct the
following steps.
[2] [1]
F-84
5.10.2 Cleaning of the registration cleaning sheet assy

(1) Periodically cleaned parts, cycle
• Registration cleaning sheet assy: Every 200,000 counts (special parts counter)
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the registration cleaning sheet assy. (Refer to F.5.10.1
Replacing the registration cleaning sheet assy)
2. Clean the PET part [1] by using the blower brush.
3. Remove 2 screws [2], and remove the PET part [1].
[2]
4. Clean the PET part [1] and the registration cleaning stay [2] by
[1] using the isopropyl alcohol.
reverse.
[2]
5.10.3 Replacing the registration roller and the registration roller bearing, cleaning the registration swing home
sensar (PS20)
• Registration roller: Every 1,400,000 counts (special parts counter)
• Registration roller bearing: Every 1,400,000 counts (special parts counter)

• Registration swing home sensor: Every 1,400,000 counts (special parts counter)
* Clean the registration swing home sensor (PS20) at the same time with the replacement of the registration roller and the registration roller
bearing.
(3) Procedure
[4] [3] 1. Pull out the duplex section. (Refer to F.5.12.1 Replacement of the
2. Remove the duplex section cover/Lt and the duplex section cover/
Up. (Refer to F.5.12.1 Replacement of the intermediate
conveyance clutch/2 (CL6), and the intermediate conveyance
clutch/3 (CL7))
3. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the wiring mounting cover/
1 [2].
4. Remove the screw [3], and then remove the wiring mounting
cover/2 [4].
[1] [2]
F-85
5. Pull out the knob [1] in the arrow-marked direction.
[1] [2] 6. Remove the screw [2], and then remove the knob [1].
7. Remove the 3 screws [3], and remove the bearing assy [4].
Note
• The short screws are used for the screws [3]. Be careful
not to use the long screws, because the long screws can
touch and damage the motor system.
[3] [4]
Note
[1] [2] • When you install the bearing assy [1], be sure to follow
the following steps. Otherwise, the gear is possibly
damaged.
1. Loosen 2 screws [2].
2. Install the bearing assy [1].
3. Tighten 2 screws [3].
5. Tighten 1 screw [4].
[4] [3]
8. Disconnect the 4 connectors [1], and release the wiring harness.
[1] 9. Remove the 4 screws [2], and remove the swing drive cover [3].
Note
touch and damage the registration swing motor (M39).
• When you remove and reinstall the swing drive cover, be
sure to pull the registration roller [4] to the front.
[3] [2] [4]
Note
• When you reinstall the swing drive cover, be sure to
match the shaft [1] of the registration swing motor (M39)
and the hole [2].
[1][2]
F-86
10. Clean the registration swing home sensor (PS20) [1] by using the
blower brush.
[1]
11. Disconnect the 2 connectors [1].
[1]
12. Remove the 3 screws [1], and remove the registration roller swing
motor assy [2].
[1] [2] [1]

Note
• When you reinstall the registration swing motor assy, be
sure to match the shaft [1] and the hole [2] of the swing
rack.
[2] [1]
F-87
13. Remove the 4 screws [1].
[4][5] [1] 14. Remove the registration unit [2] while you rotate it in the arrow-
marked direction.
Note
• When you remove and reinstall the registration unit [2], be
sure to pull the registration roller [3] to the front.
• When you reinstall the registration unit [2], be sure to
match each hole [4] of the registration unit and each
projection [5] of the duplex section.
[3] [1] [2]
[4][5]
F-88
Note
• When you reinstall the registration unit, be sure to place
each pressure lever [1] on each metal cam [2].
• When you reinstall the registration unit, be careful not to
touch the pressure levers [1] with the cam [3].
If the pressure levers [1] touch the cams [3], the cams [3]
can be damaged.
[1] [2]
[3]
[2]
15. Remove the screw [1], and then remove each bearing fixing plate
[2].
[4] 16. Remove the registration roller bearing [3].
17. Slide the registration roller bearing [4], and remove the registration
roller assy [5] in the arrow-marked direction.
[2]
[1]
[5]
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-89
[2] [1] 18. Slide the gear [1] in the arrow-marked direction, and remove the
pin [2].
[2] [4] [6] [7] [1] 19. Remove the gear [2], 2 spacers [3], the oscillation rack [4], 2 spring
receivers [5], the spring [6], the roll [7], the E-ring [8], and the
registration roller bearing [9] from the registration roller [1].
reverse.
21. After the registration roller and the pre-registration roller bearing
are replaced, conduct the following items.
[3] [5] [8] [9]
5.10.4 Replacing the registration idler gear.

• Registration idler gear: Every 2,800,000 counts (Special parts counter)
(2) Procedure
[2] [1] intermediate conveyance clutch/2 (CL6), and the intermediate
2. Remove the duplex section cover/Lt. (Refer to F.5.12.1
Replacement of the intermediate conveyance clutch/2 (CL6), and
the intermediate conveyance clutch/3 (CL7))
3. Remove the screw [1], and then remove the knob [2].
4. Remove 3 screws [3], and then remove the bearing assy [4].
Note
touch and damage the motor system.
[3] [4]
Note
[1] [2] • When you install the bearing assy [1], be sure to follow
the following steps. Otherwise, the gear is possibly
damaged.
2. Install the bearing assy [1].
5. Tighten 1 screw [4].
[4] [3]
F-90
5. Remove the E-ring [1], and then remove the registration ring [2].
[2] [1] Note
• When you install the registration ring [2], install it so that
the flat side [3] comes outside.
[3]
6. Remove the E-ring [1], and then remove the spacer [2].
[4] 7. Remove the registration idler gear [4].
[3] Note
• Be careful not to lose the spacer [2] and the spacer [3].
[2]
reverse.
9. After you replace the registration idler gear, perform the following
item.
• Counter reset of the parts counter number 137.
[1]
5.11 Fusing section

5.11.1 How to distinguish the new fusing unit and the old fusing unit
Note
• For the fusing unit, there are a new type and an old type. For the new type of fusing unit, the configuration is changed to increase
the strength.
• The label for identification of new and old types [1] is attached to the new type of the fusing unit.
[1]
[1] Label -
F-91
5.11.2 Removing/reinstalling the fusing unit

Note
• The fusing section is hot immediately after the main power switch (SW1) or the sub power switch (SW2) become inactive. To
prevent burn injuries, be sure to start operations when the temperature cools down sufficiently.
(1) Procedure
2. Release the JAM processing lever [1], and open the reverse exit
section [2].
3. Loosen the screw [3].
4. Pull out the fusing fixing plate [1].
5. Hold 2 handles [1], and pull out the fusing unit [3] to the mark [2].
6. Lift up the fusing unit [3], and remove it.
Note
• When you install the fusing unit, confirm that the mark [2]
of the fusing unit comes to the mark [2] of the duplex
section.

[4] [2] reverse.
Note
• If you remove the fusing duct [1] or the fusing unit cover/
Up2 [2] when the old fusing unit is removed, place it on
the duplex section. At this time, be sure that the fusing
unit cover/Up1 is removed, and tighten the screw in the
following procedure.
If you do not tighten the screw again, the framework of the
fusing unit gets distorted, and misalignment or rupture of
the belt possibly occurs.
• For how to distinguish the new type and the old type of
the fusing unit, refer to "F.5.11.1 How to distinguish the
new fusing unit and the old fusing unit".
• For how to remove the fusing unit cover/Up1, refer to "F.
[1] [3] 5.11.3 Replacement of the fusing heater lamp assy/Up and
the neutralizing flat spring assy".
• When only the fusing duct [1] is removed: Loosen 4
screws [3] and tighten them again. (Recommended)
• When only the fusing unit cover/Up2 [2] is removed:
Loosen 4 screws [4] and tighten them again.
(Recommended)
• The fusing duct [1] is removed and installed again.
Then the fusing unit cover/Up2 [2] is removed. In the
other case, the fusing unit cover/Up2 [2] is removed
and installed again. Then the fusing duct [1] is
removed. : Loosen 4 screws [3] and 4 screws [4], and
tighten them again. (Recommended)
F-92
• Both the fusing duct [1] and the fusing unit cover/Up2
[2] are removed at the same time. : Loosen 4 screws
[3] and 4 screws [4], and tighten them again.
(Required)
[1] [2] Note
• When the fusing duct [1] or the fusing unit cover/Up2 [2] is
removed when the new type fusing unit is removed, be
sure to install it at such as on the table where the surface
is not rough.
If the surface is rough, the framework of the fusing unit
gets distorted, and misalignment or rupture of the belt
possibly occurs.
• When you install the fusing duct [1] or the fusing unit
cover/Up2 [2] to the new fusing unit, be sure not to work
on the duplex section.
If you install on the duplex section, the framework of the
fusing unit gets distorted, and misalignment or rupture of
the belt possibly occurs.
5.11.3 Replacement of the fusing heater lamp assy/Up and the neutralizing flat spring assy
• Fusing heater lamp assy/Up: Every 3,000,000 counts (special parts counter)
• Neutralizing flat spring assy
: Every 1,200,000 counts (Special parts counter) *1
: Every 600,000 counts (Special parts counter) *2
*1 C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/C1060L
*2 EF-103
(2) Procedure
the fusing unit)
2. Remove the screw [1], and remove the fusing knob [2].
3. Open the fusing paper exit plate assy [3].
4. Remove the 4 screws [4], and remove the fusing cover/Fr [5].
[1] [2]
[3] [4] [4] [5]
F-93
5. Remove the 4 screws [1], and remove the fusing cover/Rr [2].
[1]
[1] [2] [1]
[1] [2] 6. Remove the 3 screws [1], and remove the fusing cover/Up1 [2].
7. Remove the 4 screws [1], and remove the fusing duct [2].
[1] [2]
F-94
8. Remove the 2 screws [1], and open the fusing unit/Up [2] in the
arrowed direction.
[1]
[2]
[1]
Note
• If the new fusing unit is used, remove 1 screw [1] on each
side, remove 1 fixing plate [2] each, and open the fusing
unit/Up [3] in the direction of the arrow.
• Be careful not to lose the fixing plates [2].
• When you install the fixing plates [2], fix them firmly so
that there is no gap between the screw [1], the fusing unit
[3], and the fixing plates [2].
[2] [3] [1]
[1] [3] [2]

10. Remove the screw [2], and then remove the heater cover/Fr [3].
[1] [3] [2]
F-95
11. Remove the screw [1], and remove the neutralizing flat spring assy
[2].
Note
• The neutralizing ring [4] is installed inside of the fusing
roller/2 [3].
• When you reinstall the neutralizing flat spring assy [2], be
sure to check that the edge of the neutralizing flat spring
[5] comes inside the neutralizing ring [4].
• When the assemblage completes, check the conduction
between the shaft section of the fusing roller/2 [3] and the
fusing frame. If conduction malfunction occurs, clean the
contact between the neutralizing ring [4].
[1] [3] [2]
[4] [5] [3]

13. Remove the clamp, and release the wiring harness.
14. Remove the 2 screws [2], and remove the gear cover [3].
[1] [3] [2]

15. Remove the screw [1], and remove the heater cover/Rr [2].
[2] [1]
F-96
16. Remove the screw [1], and then remove the heater support plate/
UpRr [2].
Note
• When you reinstall the heater support plate/UpRr [2], be
sure to match the notch [3] of the heater support plate/
UpRr and the projection [4] of the fusing heater lamp assy.
[2] [3][4] [1]

17. Remove the fusing heater lamp assy/Up [1] in the arrow-marked
direction.
Note
• Never touch the lamp section of the fusing heater lamp
assy/Up [1] with bare hands.

reverse.
19. After you replace the fusing heater lamp assy/Up and the
neutralizing flat spring assy, conduct the following item.
• For C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/C1060L
• The counter reset of the parts counter number 98 of the
[1] fusing heater lamp assy/Up
neutralizing flat spring assy,
• For EF-103
fusing heater lamp assy/Up
neutralizing flat spring assy,
5.11.4 Replacement of the fusing bearing/Up, /Lw1, the heat insulating sleeve/Up, /Lw1, the belt regulating sleeve, the
fusing belt, the fusing roller/1, /2, and the neutralizing ring.
• Fusing bearing/Up
• Heat insulating sleeve/Up
• Fusing bearing/Lw1
• Heat insulating sleeve/Lw1: Every 600,000 counts (special parts counter)
• Belt regulating sleeve
• Fusing Belt
: Every600,000 counts (special parts counter) *1
: Every 300,000 counts (special parts counter)) *2
• Fusing roller/1
• Fusing roller/2
: Every 1,200,000 counts (special parts counter)*1
• Neutralizing ring
: Every 1,200,000 counts (Special parts counter) *1
: Every 600,000 counts (Special parts counter) *2
*1 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, and C1060L
*2 EF-103
F-97
(2) Procedure
the fusing unit)
2. Remove the fusing heater lamp assy/Up. (Refer to F.5.11.3
Replacement of the fusing heater lamp assy/Up and the
neutralizing flat spring assy)
3. Remove the 2 screws [1], and remove the fusing entrance guide/
Up [2].
Note
• When you remove the fusing entrance guide/Up [2], be
careful not to drop the fusing entrance guide/Up.
If the fusing entrance guide falls, it could damage the
fusing roller/Lw [3].
[3] [1] [2]
4. Remove the 2 screws [1], and remove the stopper arm/Fr [2].
[3] [6] [4] 5. Remove the 2 screws [3], and remove the stopper arm/Rr [4].
Note
• The engraved mark "F" [5] is on the stopper arm/Fr [2].The
engraved mark "R" [6] is on the stopper arm/Rr [4].
When you reinstall the stopper arm, be sure to check the
engraved mark "F" and the engraved mark "R".
[2] [5] [1]
F-98
6. Push down the pressure release arms [1] 1 each, and hook each
[1] of them on the stopper screw [2].
[2]
[2] [1]
[1] [2] [3] 7. Be careful to insert a paper [1] to prevent the damage with the
fusing belt unit.
8. Hold the belt unit fix shaft [2], and remove the fusing belt unit [3] in
the arrowed direction.
Note
• Never touch the fusing belt with bare hands.
F-99
9. Remove 2 screws [1], and remove the belt unit stay [2].
10. Remove 2 screws [3], and remove the belt unit fix shaft [4].
[6] 11. Remove the C-ring [5], and remove the fusing drive gear/Fr [6].
12. Remove the C-ring [7], and remove the fusing drive gear/Rr [8].
[5]
[3] [2] [1]
[8] [1] [4] [3]
[7]
Note
• The projection [3] is inside of the fusing drive gear/Fr [1]
and the fusing drive gear/Rr [2]. When you reinstall the
fusing drive gear/Fr [1] and the fusing drive gear/Rr [2], be
sure to check that the side [4] where the projection is
cracked comes inside.
[4] [3] [2] [1]
F-100
13. Remove the fusing roller fix plate assy/Fr [2] and the fusing roller
fix plate assy/Rr [3] from the fusing belt unit [1].
Note
• After you reinstall the fusing roller fix plate assy/Fr and
the fusing roller fix plate assy/Rr, be sure to check that the
multemp FF-RM is not applied on the edge of the fusing
roller/2. When the multemp FF-RM is applied, wipe it off.
[1] [2]
[3]
14. Remove the screws [1] 1 each. Remove the heat insulating
sleeves/Up [2] 1 each, the fusing bearings/Up [3] 1 each, the heat
insulating sleeves/Lw1 [4] 1 each, and the fusing bearings/Lw1 [5]
1 each.
Note
• When you reinstall the heat insulating sleeve/Up, the heat
insulating sleeve/Lw1, the fusing bearing/Up, and the
fusing bearing/Lw1, be sure to turn the flanges inside.
• When you reinstall the heat insulating sleeve/Up and the
heat insulating sleeve/Lw1, be sure to apply the multemp
FF-RM to the inside and the outside.
[3] [2] [1] [4] [5] • When you reinstall the fusing bearing/Up and the fusing
bearing/Lw1, be sure to apply the multemp FF-RM on the
outside.
F-101
15. Remove the C-rings [1] 1 each, and remove the belt regulating
sleeves [2] 1 each.
Note
[1] • When you reinstall the belt regulating sleeve, be sure to
turn the flange inside.
[2]
16. Remove the fusing roller/2 [2] and the fusing roller/1 [3] from the
fusing belt [1].
Note
• Never touch the surface of the fusing roller/1 and the
fusing roller/2 with bare hands.
• When you reinstall the fusing belt, be sure to check that
[4] the side where the lot number [4] is printed comes to the
front.
• When you reinstall the fusing roller/1 [3], be sure to check
that the side where the shaft is shorter [5] comes to the
front.
[2] [1] [3] [5] • When you reinstall the fusing roller/2 [2], be sure to check
that the side where the neutralizing ring is attached [6]
comes to the front.
[6]
[1] [3] [2] 17. Remove the neutralizing ring [2] from the fusing roller/2 [1].
Note
• When you reinstall the neutralizing ring [2], be sure to
check that the stopper section [3] contacts with the edge
of the fusing roller/2 [1].
• Be sure to check that the stopper section [3] is not inside
the fusing roller/2 [1].

reverse.
NOTE
• After reinstallation, check the conduction between the
shaft for fusing roller/2 and the fusing frame. If the
conduction fails, clean the contact point of the
neutralizing ring.
19. After the replacement of the fusing bearing/Up, the heat insulating
sleeve/Up, the fusing bearing/Lw1, the heat insulating sleeve/Lw1,
F-102
the belt regulating sleeve, the fusing belt, fusing roller/1, the fusing
roller/2, and the neutralizing ring, conduct the following items.
• For C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, and C1060L
• Fusing bearing/Up: The counter reset of the special parts
counter number 93
• Heat insulating sleeve/Up: The counter reset of the special
• Fusing bearing/Lw1: The counter reset of the special parts
counter number 89
• Heat insulating sleeve/Lw1: The counter reset of the parts
counter number 90
• Heat insulating sleeve: The counter reset of the parts
counter number 86
• Fusing claw unit: The counter reset of the parts counter
number 85
• Fusing roller/1: The counter reset of the special parts
counter number 83
counter number 91
• Neutralizing ring: The counter reset of the special parts
counter number 109
• For EF-103
• Fusing bearing/Up: The counter reset of the special parts
counter number 168
• Heat insulating sleeve/Up: The counter reset of the special
• Fusing bearing/Lw1: The counter reset of the special parts
counter number 164
• Heat insulating sleeve/Lw1: The counter reset of the
• Belt regulating sleeve: The counter reset of the special
• Fusing belt: The counter reset of the special parts counter
number 159
counter number 157
counter number 166
• Neutralizing ring: The counter reset of the special parts
counter number 183
5.11.5 Replacement of the fusing temperature sensor/3 (TH3)

• Fusing temperature sensor/3 (TH3): Every 3,000,000 counts (special parts counter)
(2) Procedure
[1] [2] the fusing unit)
2. Remove the fusing belt unit. (Refer to "F.5.11.4 Replacement of
the fusing bearing/Up, /Lw1, the heat insulating sleeve/Up, /Lw1,
the belt regulating sleeve, the fusing belt, the fusing roller/1, /2,
and the neutralizing ring.")
3. Remove the 4 screws [1], and remove the fusing cover/Up2 [2].
F-103
4. Remove the fusing cover/Up3 [1].
the clamp.
6. Remove the screw [3], and then remove the fusing temperature
sensor/3 (TH3) [4].
reverse.
8. After the replacement of the fusing temperature sensor/3 (TH3),
conduct the following items.
• For C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/C1060L
• - The counter reset of the special parts counter number
[3] [4] [1] 100
• For EF-103
• - The counter reset of the special parts counter number
172
[2]
5.11.6 Replacement of the fusing gear/1, fusing bearing/Lw2, heat insulating sleeve/Lw2, fusing roller/Lw
• Fusing gear/1 : Every 600,000 counts (Special parts counter)
• Heat insulating sleeve/Lw2: Every 600,000 counts (special parts counter)
• Fusing bearing/Lw2
• Fusing roller/Lw
*1 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, and C1060L
*2 EF-103
F-104
(2) Procedure
[6] 1. Remove the fusing unit. (Refer to F.5.11.2 Removing/reinstalling
the fusing unit)
2. Open the fusing unit/Up. (Refer to F.5.11.3 Replacement of the
fusing heater lamp assy/Up and the neutralizing flat spring assy)
3. Remove the faston [1].
4. Remove the clamp, and release the wiring harness.
5. Remove the screw [2] and the wiring harness guide [3].
6. Remove the screw [4], and remove the heater support plate/LwFr
[5].
[7] 7. Remove the screw [6], and remove the fusing roller mounting plate
[7].
[4]
[5]
[1] [2] [3]
[1] [3] [4] 8. Remove the faston [1].

9. Remove the screw [2], and remove the wiring harness guide [3].
10. Remove the screw [4], and remove the heater support plate/LwRr
[5].
[5]
[2]
F-105
Note
• When you reinstall the heater support plate/LwFr [1] and
the heater support plate/LwRr [2], be sure to check that
the shaft of the fusing heater lamp/4 [3] comes into the
hole [4] of the mounting plate.
[1] [2] [3] [4]
Note
• When you reinstall the fusing roller mounting plate [1] and
the heater support plate/LwRr [2], be sure to check that
the metal plate [3] comes inside the flange of the fusing
bearing/Lw2 [4].
[4] [2] [3] [1]
F-106
[2] 11. Insert the paper [1] to prevent the damage of the fusing roller/Lw.
12. Remove the fusing roller/Lw assy [2] in the arrow-marked direction.
Note
• Do not touch the surface of the fusing roller/Lw with bare
hands.
• Be sure that the fusing roller/Lw does not touch the other
parts. If the fusing roller/Lw touches the other parts, the
fusing roller/Lw can be damaged.
• The fusing heater lamp/4 is inside the fusing roller/Lw
assy [2]. Do not drop the fusing heater lamp/4.
[1]
Note
• When you reinstall the fusing roller/Lw assy [1], be sure to
check that the flange [2] of the fusing bearing/Lw2 comes
outside the metal plate [3].
[2] [3] [2] [1]
[3] [4] [1] [2] 13. Remove the fusing heater lamp/4 [2] from the fusing roller/Lw assy
[1]
Note
• Do not touch around the lamp of the fusing heater lamp/4
[2] with bare hands.
• When you reinstall the fusing heater lamp/4 [2], be sure to
check that the white wiring harness [3] comes to the gear
side [4].
F-107
14. Remove the C-ring [1], and remove the fusing gear/1 [2].
Note
[3] • When you reinstall the fusing gear/1 [2], be sure to check
that the projection [3] of the fusing gear/1 comes inside.
• When you reinstall the fusing gear/1 [2], be sure to apply
the multemp FF-RM on the gear.
[1] [2]
15. Remove the C-rings [1], 1 each.
16. Remove the heat insulating sleeve/Lw2 [3] 1 each and the fusing
bearing/Lw2 [4] 1 each from the fusing roller/Lw [2].
Note
• When you reinstall the heat insulating sleeve/Lw2 [3] and
the fusing bearing/Lw2 [4], be sure to check that the
flange comes outside.
• When you reinstall the heat insulating sleeve/Lw2 [3], be
sure to apply the multemp FF-RM to the inside and the
outside.
• When you reinstall the fusing bearing/Lw2 [4], be sure to
[2] [4] [3] [1] apply the multemp FF-RM on the outside the gear.

reverse.
18. After the replacement of the fusing gear/1, fusing bearing/Lw2,
heat insulating sleeve/Lw2, and fusing roller/Lw, conduct the
following items.
• Fusing gear/1: The counter reset of the special parts
counter number 92
• Fusing gear/Lw2: The counter reset of the special parts
[1] [3] [4] counter number 89
• Fusing roller/Lw: The counter reset of the parts counter
number 84
• For EF-103
counter number 167
• Fusing gear/Lw2: The counter reset of the special parts
counter number 164
• Fusing roller/Lw: The counter reset of the parts counter
number 158
5.11.7 Replacement of the fusing temperature sensor/4 (TH4)

• Fusing temperature sensor/4 (TH4): Every 3,000,000 counts (special parts counter)
F-108
(2) Procedure
the fusing unit)
2. Remove the fusing roller/Lw assy. (Refer to "F.5.11.6
Replacement of the fusing gear/1, fusing bearing/Lw2, heat
insulating sleeve/Lw2, fusing roller/Lw")
3. Remove the 2 clamps [1], and release the wiring harness.
Note
• When you reinstall the temperature sensor/4 (TH4), be
sure to put the harness and the connector inside the
fusing unit. Then fix them with the clamps.
If the harness and the connector are not fixed, they could
[2] [1] be drawn into the cover or the drive and cut off.
5. Remove the connector [1].

6. Remove 3 clamps [2] and 3 clamps [3]. Release the wiring harness
[4].
Note
[3] • The working efficiency improves when the fusing paper
exit plate assy is removed before the wiring harness [4] is
installed. (Refer to G.3.2.26 Fusing paper exit plate assy)
• On the new fusing unit, the 3 clamps [3] are not installed
since the model has changed.
Remove only the 3 clamps [2].
[2] [4] [1]
[2] [1] Note

• On the new fusing unit, the wiring harness guide [1] is
attached inside the fusing unit. Be sure that the wiring
harness [2] of the fusing temperature sensor/4 (TH4) is not
placed inside the wiring harness guide [1].
If the wiring harness [2] is placed inside the wiring
harness guide [1], the wiring harness is tensioned when
the fusing roller is pressed.
7. Remove the 2 screws [1], and remove the thermal insulating plate/
[2] [1] [3] Fr [2] and the thermal insulating/Rr [3] in the arrowed direction.
F-109
8. Remove the 2 screws [1], and remove the fusing entrance guide/
Lw [2] in the arrowed direction.
[1] [2]
9. Remove the clamp, and release the wring harness [1].
10. Remove the screw [2], and remove the fusing temperature sensor/
4 (TH4) [3].
Note
• When the fusing roller/Lw is in the pressing state, you
cannot remove the screw [2].
Rotate the gear [4] in the arrowed direction, and release
the pressure.

reverse.
12. After the replacement of the fusing temperature sensor/4 (TH4),
[4] [3] [1] [2] conduct the following items.
• For C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/C1060L
• For EF-103
5.11.8 Replacement of the fusing gear/2, the fusing gear/3

• Fusing gear/2
• Fusing gear/3: Every 600,000 counts (Special parts counter)
*1 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, and C1060L
*2 EF-103
(2) Procedure
the fusing unit)
3. Remove 2 screws [1], and remove the stopper arm/Rr [2].
[2] [1]
4. Disconnect the connector [1], and release the wiring harness.
5. Remove the 3 screws [2], and remove the fusing gear assy [3].
[1] [2] [3]
F-110
6. Remove the bearing [1] and 2 E-rings [2]. Then remove the fusing
gear/2 [3].
Note
• When you reinstall the fusing gear/2 [3], be sure to apply
the multemp FF-RM on the gear.
[1] [2] [3]

[1] [2] Note
• When you reinstall the fusing gear/2 [1], be sure to check
that the metal bearing [2] comes inside the fusing unit.

8. Remove 2 screws [2], and remove the magnet assy [3].
[1] [3] [2]

9. Remove the 3 clamps [1], and release the wiring harness.
[1] [5] [3] 10. Remove the E-ring [2].
11. Remove the actuator [3] while you rotate it in the arrowed
direction. Be careful not to hit the sensors [4].
12. Remove the 2 screws [5], and release the mount of the fusing
pressure position sensor assy [6].
[4] [5] [2] [6] [4]
[2] [3] [1] Note

• When you reinstall the actuator [1], be sure to check that
the pin [2] of the fusing pressure shaft matches the
groove [3] of the actuator.
F-111
13. Remove the 4 screws [1], and remove the fusing drive assy [2].
[1] [2] [1]

14. Remove the fusing gear/3 [1].
[1]
reverse.
Note
• When you reinstall the fusing gear/3, be sure to apply the
multemp FF-RM on the gear.
• When you reinstall the fusing gear/3, be sure to check that
the dent side [1] comes inside.
16. After the replacement of the fusing gear/2 and the fusing gear/3,
counter number 94
counter number 96
• For EF-103
counter number 169
counter number 176
5.11.9 Replacement of the fusing separating claw assy

• Fusing separating claw assy
*1 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, and C1060L
*2 EF-103
(2) Procedure
the fusing unit)
3. Remove 5 screws [2], and remove 5 fusing separating claw assy
[3].
reverse.
5. After the replacement of the fusing separating claw assy, conduct
[2] [1] • For EF-103
F-112
5.11.10 Replacing the fusing paper exit roller/Up

• Fusing paper exit roller/Up
: Every 600,000 counts (special parts counter)*2
*1 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, and C1060L
*2 EF-103
(2) Procedure
the fusing unit)
3. Insert the driver [2], and fix the fusing paper exit plate assy [1].
4. Remove 2 screws [3] and remove the paper exit guide assy [4].
Note
• When you reinstall the paper exit guide assy [4], be sure
to check that the left side is stuck to the arrow-marked
direction.
[4] [3] [1] [2]

5. Remove 2 E-ring [1].
[3] 6. Remove the shaft [2] in the arrow-marked direction, and remove
the 2 fusing paper exit rollers/Up [3].
[2] [1]
7. Remove the bearings [2] 2 each, from the each fusing paper exit
[1] roller/Up [1].
reverse.
9. After the replacement of the fusing paper exit roller/Up, conduct
• For EF-103
5.12 Duplex section

5.12.1 Replacement of the intermediate conveyance clutch/2 (CL6), and the intermediate conveyance clutch/3 (CL7)
(2) Procedure
Note
• Do not let the process unit and the duplex section be pulled out at the same time.
F-113
1. Open the front door [1].
2. Release the lock release lever [2] in the arrowed direction.
3. Tilt the duplex pull out lever [3] in the arrowed direction, and pull
out the duplex section [4].
Note
• During the installation of the duplex section, be sure to
put the duplex section pull out lever back.
[1] [2] [3] [4]

4. Remove the screw [1], and pull out the duplex section pull out
lever [2].
5. Open the jam release lever [3], remove 5 screws [4], and remove
the duplex section cover/Lt [5].
[2] [1]
[4] [3] [4] [5]
6. Remove 6 screws [1] and remove the duplex section cover/Rt [2].
[1] [2]
[1]
F-114
7. Remove 3 screws [1] and remove the duplex section cover/Up [2].
[2] [1]
[1] 8. Remove 5 screws [2], and open the conveyance drive board assy
[3] in the arrowed direction.
[2] [1]
[1]
[8] [6] [9][10] [2] [3] 9. Remove the C-clip [1].
10. Remove the connector [2] and release the wiring harness, and
remove the intermediate conveyance clutch/2 (CL6) [3].
Note
• Be sure to reinstall the intermediate conveyance clutch/2
(CL6) [3] so that the stopper [4] matches the guide [5].
11. Remove the C-clip [6].

12. Remove the connector [7] and release the wiring harness, and
remove the intermediate conveyance clutch/3 (CL7) [8].
Note
• Be sure to reinstall the intermediate conveyance clutch/3
(CL7) [8] so that the stopper [9] matches the guide [10].
[7] [4][5] [1] 13. Reinstall the preceding parts following the removal steps in
reverse.
14. After you replace the intermediate conveyance clutch/2 (CL6) and
intermediate conveyance clutch/3 (CL7), conduct the following
items.
• For the intermediate conveyance clutch/2 (CL6): The counter
reset of the special parts counter number 129
• For the intermediate conveyance clutch/3 (CL7): The counter
reset of the special parts counter number 130
5.13 Reverse and exit section

5.13.1 Replacing the reverse de-curler roller
• Reverse decurler roller: Every 400,000 counts (special parts counter)
F-115
(2) Procedure
2. Open the paper reverse exit section [1].
3. Use the driver or other tools, and release the claw [3] inside the
hole [2] in the arrowed direction and remove the gear cover [4] at a
time.
[1] [2] [3] [4]

4. Rotate the gear [1] in the arrowed direction and move the cam [2],
and remove 2 screws [3] and remove the reverse decurler roller
assy [4] in the arrowed direction.
[3] [2] [4] [1]

[1] [2] Note
• Be sure to reinstall the reverse decurler roller assy so that
the shaft [1] of the reverse decurler roller is inserted into
the bearing [2].
F-116
5. Remove 2 E-rings [2], 2 spacers [3], the bearing [4] from the
[4] [2] reverse decurler roller [1].
6. Remove 2 E-rings [5], 2 spacers [6], the bearing [7], the collar [8],
the mounting plate [9], and the bearing [10] from the reverse
decurler roller [1].
reverse.
8. After the reverse decurler roller is replaced, conduct the following
item.
[3]
[7] [8] [5]

[1]
[9]
[10] [6]
5.13.2 Replacement of the paper exit drive gear and the paper exit decurler roller
• Paper exit drive gear: Every 1,000,000 counts (special parts counter)
• Paper exit decurler roller: Every 1,000,000 counts (special parts counter)
(2) Procedure
2. Remove the left cover. (Refer to G.3.2.4 Left cover)
4. Remove 4 screws [2] and remove the paper exit unit [3] in the
arrowed direction.
[2] [1] [2] [3]
F-117
5. Remove 6 screws [1], and remove the reinforcing plate/Lt [2].
[1]
[1] [2]
6. Remove the E-ring [1] and remove the idler gear/1 [2].
7. Remove the E-ring [3], and remove the paper exit drive gear [4].
[1] [2] [4] [3]

Note
• Be sure to reinstall the paper exit drive gear [1] so that the
arrowed side [2] comes to the front.
[1] [2]
F-118
8. Remove the E-ring [1] and the gear [2].
[2] [1] [3] [4] 9. Remove the E-ring [3] 1 each and remove the bearing [4] 1 each.
10. Remove the paper exit decurler roller [5] in the arrowed direction.
[4] [5] [3]
Note
• Be sure to attach the gear [1] so that the arrowed side [2]
comes to the front.
[1] [2]
11. Remove the E-rings [1], 1 each, and remove 2 bearings [2].
reverse.
13. After you replace the paper exit de-curler roller, conduct the
following items.
• For the paper exit decurler roller: The counter reset of the
[1] [2] [2] [1]
a03uf2c075ca
F-119
(3) Parts replacing procedure when RU-516 is installed

2. Remove the charging control framework unit. (Refer to G.11.2.1
Charging control framework unit)
5. Remove 4 screws [2] and remove the paper exit unit [3] in the
arrowed direction.
[2] [1] [2] [3]

6. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the guide plate/1 [2].
[2] [1]
7. Remove 4 screws [1], and remove the reinforcing plate/Lt [2].
[1] 8. Be sure that the following removal of the parts follows the usual
removal steps.
[1] [2]
F-120
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L PROCEDURE DF-626
6. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE DF-626

6.1.1 Clean the pick-up roller and the paper feed roller
• Pick up roller: Every 50,000 counts (special parts counter)
• Paper feed roller: Every 50,000 counts (special parts counter)
*Be sure to clean the paper feed roller together with the pick-up roller.
(2) Procedure
1. Open the paper feed cover. (Refer to G.4.2.3 The paper feed
[1] cover)
2. Wipe the pick-up roller [1] and the paper feed roller [2] by using the
isopropyl alcohol and the cleaning pad.
[2]
6.1.2 Cleaning the separation roller

• Separation roller: Every 50,000 counts (special parts counter)
*Be sure to clean the separation roller together with the pick-up roller.
(2) Procedure
cover)
2. Wipe the separation roller [1] by using the isopropyl alcohol and
the cleaning pad.
[1]
6.1.3 Replace the pick-up roller and the paper feed roller
• Pick-up roller: Every 200,000 counts (special parts counter)
• Paper feed roller: Every 200,000 counts (special parts counter)
*Replace the pick-up roller, the paper feed roller, and the separation roller at the same timing.
(2) Procedure
[2] cover)
2. Remove 4 screws [1] and the top cover [2].
[1]
F-121
3. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove 2 springs [2] and 2 pieces
[5] [2] [3] [4] of fixation metals [3]. Remove 2 C-clips [4] and the bearing [5], and
then remove the pick-up roller assy and the paper feed roller assy
[6].
[4] [3] [1] [6]
4. Remove the C-ring [1] and the lever [2].

[6] [4] 5. Remove 3 C-rings [3].
6. Remove 2 pins [4].
[3] [3] 7. Remove the belt [5].
[6] 8. Remove 2 pick-up rollers [6].
Note
• Be careful not to lose the pins.
[1]
[5] [2]
9. Remove the C-ring [1] and the bearing [2].

10. Remove the paper feed roller [3].
reverse.
12. After you replace the pick-up roller and the paper feed roller,
[3] conduct the following steps.
• For pick up roller: The counter reset of the special parts
[2] counter number 378.
[1] • For paper feed roller: The counter reset of the special parts
counter number 379.
6.1.4 Replacing the separation roller

• Separation roller: Every 200,000 counts (special parts counter)
*Replace the pick-up roller, the paper feed roller, and the separation roller at the same timing.
(2) Procedure
1. Open the left cover [1].
2. Raise the original feed tray [2].
3. Remove the screw [3] and the mounting plate [4].
Note
• When you remove the mounting plate, be sure to hold the
original feed tray to prevent the tray from falling.
[1] [3] [4] [2]
F-122
4. Hold the section [1] to release the hook [2] of the spring, and then
remove the separation roller assy [3].
Note
• When you reinstall the separation roller assy, be sure to
hook the spring onto the assy.
[1] [3] [2] [1]

5. Remove the shaft opening the holder [1].
Note
• When you open the holder too much, the holder is
damaged.
[1]
6. Remove the separation roller [1] from the shaft.

Note
• Be careful not to lose the pins.

reverse.
8. After you replace the separation roller, conduct the following item.
• For the separation roller: The counter reset of the special parts
counter number 380.
[1]
6.2 Conveyance section

6.2.1 Cleaning of the miscellaneous rolls
• Miscellaneous rolls: Every 50,000 counts (special parts counter)
*Be sure to clean the miscellaneous rollers together with the pick-up roller.
(2) Procedure
1. Raise the original feed tray.
[1] 2. Wipe the rolls [1] by using the isopropyl alcohol and the cleaning
pad.
[1]
F-123
3. Open the left cover.
pad.
5. Open theDF.
pad while you open the before scanning film assy [1].
[2]
7. Remove 4 screws [1] and the conveyance roll assy [2] while you
[2] open the processing guide.
[1]
8. Wipe the rolls [1] by using the isopropyl alcohol and the cleaning
pad.
[1]
6.2.2 Cleaning of the miscellaneous rollers

• Miscellaneous rollers: Every 50,000 counts (special parts counter)
*Be sure to clean the miscellaneous rollers together with the pick-up roller.
(2) Procedure
2. Remove the glass cleaning roller unit. (Refer to G.4.2.12 Glass
cleaning roller unit)
3. Wipe the roller [1] by using the isopropyl alcohol and the cleaning
pad.
[1]
F-124
[1] 5. Wipe the roller [1] by using the isopropyl alcohol and the cleaning
pad.
[1]
6. Remove 4 screws [1] and the conveyance roll assy [2] while you
[2] open the processing guide.
[1]
pad.
[1]
[1] pad while you turn the knob [1].
[2]
6.2.3 Cleaning of the scanning guide

• Scanning guide: Every 50,000 counts (special parts counter)
*Be sure to clean the scanning guide together with the pick-up roller.
(2) Procedure
1. Open the DF.
[1] 2. Open the before scanning film assy [1].
3. Wipe the scanning guide [2] by using the isopropyl alcohol and the
cleaning pad.
[2]
F-125
Note
• Be careful not to damage the film.
6.2.4 Cleaning of the reflective sensor section

• Reflective sensor section: Every 50,000 counts (special parts counter)
*Be sure to clean the reflective sensor section together with the pick-up roller.
(2) Procedure
1. Clean the sensor [1] by using the blower brush.
[1]

[1] 3. Clean the cloth [1] by using the blower brush.
4. Open the DF.

[1] 5. Clean the cloth [2] by using the blower brush while you open the
before scanning film assy [1].
[2]
F-126
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L PROCEDURE PF-602m
7. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE PF-602m

7.1 Precautions on maintenance
CAUTION
• Be sure to unplug the power plug from the power outlet.
7.2 Tray section

7.2.1 Precautions on maintenance of the tray section
Note
• The replacement procedures for the pick-up roller, paper feed roller, and the separation roller in tray 1 are the same for the
procedures in tray 2.
The explanation here takes tray 1 as an example.
• After the installation is completed, rotate the pick-up roller in the paper feed direction (clockwise as seen from the front side) to
see if the paper feed roller rotates smoothly.
The rotation is restricted only in the paper feed direction (clockwise as seen from the front side) and be careful not to rotate the
roller counterclockwise.
• The orientation of the pick-up roller assy and the separation roller assy in the main unit differs from the orientation of the rollers in
the PF.
7.2.2 Replacing the Pick-up rubber/paper feed roller

• Pick-up rubber
: Every 600,000 counts (total counter) (actual replacement cycle: Every 300,000 counts (special parts counter))*1
Every 300,000 counts (special parts counter) *2
• Paper feed roller
*1 C7000, C7000P, C70hc, C6000
*2 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060
(2) Procedure
Note
• The appearance of the collars is the same for the paper feed roller and the separation roller. However, the collar of the paper
feed roller has a one-way mechanism inside. Be sure not to mix up these two rollers.
[3] [4] 2. Open the vertical conveyance unit guide plate [2] (Tray 1 only).
3. Insert a screwdriver or a similar tool into the hole [3], lift up the tray
lock lever [4] slightly, and pull out the tray [5].
[2] [1] [5]
a03xf2c001ca
F-127
4. Points to check when you pull out the tray
Note
• Do not pull out the tray [1] all the way. Hold the tray [1] so
that the stopper [3] on the left side of the tray is pushed
[3] in, and make the pick-up holder assy [2] place horizontally
(paper feed position).
[2] [1]
a03xf2c002ca
[8] [7] [5] [6] 5. Rotate the pick-up roller [1] in the direction of the arrow (clockwise
as seen from the front side) and bring the coupling [2] to the
lengthwise direction.
Note
• Be sure not to rotate the pick-up roller against the
direction of the arrow forcibly, as the roller is designed
not to rotate in that direction.
6. Remove 2 C-clips [3].

7. Remove the bearing/Fr [4].
8. Move the bearing/Rr [5] to the rear side.
Note
• When you install the bearing, hold down the metal plate
[6] of the pick-up roller assy slightly, and insert the flat
[3] [2] [1] part [7] of the bearing/Rr [5] while you keep it horizontally
into the notch [8] of the metal plate. Then, insert the
bearing/Fr [4] in the same manner.
[4] [5]
a03xt3c001ca
F-128
9. Hold the pick-up roller assy [1] by hand and lift and tilt the paper
feed roller [3] so that it rotates on the shaft [2] of the pick-up roller
to remove it from the notch of the bearing [4] and the coupling [5].
Note
• When you remove the pick-up roller assy [1], be careful
not to damage the sensor [6] with the metal plate.
[6]
[4] [5] [1]
[3] [2] a03xt3c002ca
[3] 10. Remove the pick-up roller shaft [2] from the arm [1] of the paper
feed guide plate and then remove the pick-up roller assembly [3].
[2] [1]
a03xt3c003ca
[1] [3] [2] 11. Remove the C-clip [1], pull out the shaft [2], and remove the pick-
up roller [3].
12. Remove the pick-up rubber from the pick-up roller.
13. Replace the pick-up rubber.
a03xt3c004ca
F-129
[1] [2] [4] [3] [5]
15. Slide the bearing [3] and remove the paper feed roller [4] together
with the shaft [5].
a03xf2c007cb
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]

16. Remove the actuator [2] from the shaft [1].
17. Remove the C-clip [3] and pull out the paper feed roller [4] from the
collar [5].
a03xf2c008cb
[2] [1] 18. Replace the paper feed roller.

Note
• The appearance of the collars is the same for the paper
feed roller and the separation roller. However, the collar
[1] of the paper feed roller has a one-way mechanism
inside while the collar [2] of the separation roller has no
one-way mechanism. Be sure not to mix up these two
rollers.

reverse.
a03xf2c009ca 20. After the replacement of the pick-up rubber or the feed roller,
conduct the following steps.
• C7000, C7000P, C70hc, C6000:
For the pick-up rubber: The counter reset of the special parts
counter number 162 for the tray 1, number 166 for the tray 2.
The counter reset of the special parts counter number 163 for
the tray 1, number 167 for the tray 2.
• C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060:
For the pick-up rubber: The counter reset of the special parts
counter number 198 for tray 1, number 202 for the tray 2.
For the feed roller: The counter reset of the special parts
counter number 199 for the tray 1, number 203 for the tray 2.

• Separation roller
*1 C7000, C7000P, C70hc, C6000
*2 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060
(2) Procedure
Note
• The appearance of the collars is the same for the paper feed roller and the separation roller. However, the collar of the paper
feed roller has a one-way mechanism inside. Be sure not to mix up these two rollers.
F-130
[2] [1] [5]
a03xf2c010ca

[3] 5. Disengage the coupling pin [4] from the joint [5] while you press
down the metal plate [3] of the separation roller assy [2], and
remove the separation roller assy [2].
Note
• When you install the separation roller assy, press down
the metal plate [3] of the separation roller assy [2] and
engage the coupling pin [4] to the joint [5].
[5] [4] [2]
[1]
a03xf2c011ca
6. Remove the C-clip [1] of the separation roller assy and remove the
[2] [3] [1]
separation roller [3] together with the shaft [2].
a03xf2c012cb
F-131
[1] [4] [3] [2] 7. Pull out the gear [2], the collar [3] and the separation roller [4] from
the shaft [1] to the arrow-marked direction, and remove them.
8. Replace the separation roller [4].
reverse.
Note
• The appearance of the collars is the same for the paper
feed roller and the separation roller. However, the collar
[5] of the paper feed roller has a one-way mechanism
inside while the collar [6] of the separation roller has no
one-way mechanism, be sure not to mix up these two
rollers.
[6] [5] 10. After replacing the separation roller, conduct the following item.
• C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000: For the separation roller: The
counter reset of the special parts counter number 163 for the
tray 1, number 167 for the tray 2.
• C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060: For the separation roller: The
counter reset of the special parts counter number 199 for the
tray 1, number 203 for the tray 2.
a03xf2c013cb
7.2.4 Replacing the paper feed clutch (CL1/CL4) and the separation clutch (CL2/CL5)
Note
• The replacement procedures for the paper feed clutch and the separation clutch in tray 1 are the same as the tray 2. The tray 2 is
the example here.

• Paper feed clutch/1 (CL1), paper feed clutch/2 (CL4)
: Every 2,400,000 counts (total counter) (actual replacement cycle: Every 2,000,000 counts (special parts counter))*1
• Separation clutch/1 (CL2), separation clutch/2 (CL5)
*1 C7000, C7000P, C70hc, C6000
*2 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the stopper and pull out the tray. (Refer to G.5.2.6 Tray)
[1] [3]
2. Remove the 2 screws [1], bend the stopper [2] in the direction of
the arrow, and remove the paper feed cover [3].
Note
• For easier operation, lift up the under part [4] of the cover
when you install the paper feed cover [3].
• When you install the paper feed cover [3], be sure to insert
the tab [6] into the hole [5] of the metal plate.
[2] [3]
[6]
[4]
[5]
a03xf2c014ca
F-132
3. Remove 1 each of the connectors [1].
[3] [4]
4. Remove the two C-clips [2], and remove the paper feed clutch
(CL1, CL4) [3] and the separation clutch (CL2, CL5) [4].
Note
• When you install the clutch, be sure to engage the stopper
[5] of the clutch with the projection [6] of the metal plate.

reverse.
6. After you replace the paper feed clutch/1 (CL1) and the paper feed
clutch/2 (CL4) and the separation clutch/1 (CL2) and the
separation clutch/2 (CL5), conduct the following steps.
• C7000, C7000P, C70hc, C6000:
[2] [5] [6] [1] For the paper feed clutch/1 (CL1), paper feed clutch/2 (CL4):
For the separation clutch/1 (CL2), separation clutch/2 (CL5):
• C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060:
For the paper feed clutch/1 (CL1), paper feed clutch/2 (CL4):
[5] [6] [2] [1] For the separation clutch/1 (CL2), separation clutch/2 (CL5):
The counter reset of the special parts counter 201 for the tray
1, number 205 for the tray 2.
a03xf2c015ca

7.3.1 Replacing the vertical conveyance clutch/1 (CL7), /2 (CL8), and /3 (CL9)
• Vertical conveyance clutch/1 (CL7), vertical conveyance clutch/2 (CL8), and vertical conveyance clutch/3 (CL9)
*1 C7000, C7000P, C70hc, C6000
*2 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060
(2) Procedure
[2] [1] 1. Remove the following parts.
• Rear cover/Rt (Refer to G.5.2.4 The rear cover/Lt1 and /Rt)
• Rear cover/Lt1 (Refer to G.5.2.4 The rear cover/Lt1 and /Rt)
• Rear cover/Lt2 (Refer to G.5.2.3 Rear cover/Lt2)
2. Remove the four screws [1] and remove the gear mounting plate
[2].
a03xf2c016ca
F-133
[6] [7] [8]
4. Remove the three screws [2] and the three wire binding covers [3].
Note
• When you install the wire binding [4], pass the binding
through the hole in the wire binding cover [3].
5. Remove the three C-clips [5] and remove the vertical conveyance
clutch/1 (MC7) [6], vertical conveyance clutch/2 (MC8) [7], and
vertical conveyance clutch/3 (MC9) [8].
[5] [2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
a03xf2c017ca

reverse.
Note
[1] of the clutch with the projection [2] of the metal plate.
7. After the replacement of the vertical conveyance clutch/1 (CL7),

the vertical conveyance clutch/2 (CL8) and the vertical conveyance
clutch/3 (CL9), conduct the following items.
• C7000, C7000P, C70hc, C6000:
For the vertical conveyance clutch/1 (CL7): The counter reset
of the special parts counter number 170.
[2] For the vertical conveyance clutch/3 (CL9): The counter reset
a03xf2c018ca of the special parts counter number 172.
• C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060:
7.3.2 Replacing the horizontal conveyance clutch/1 (CL10), /2 (CL11), and pre-registration clutch (CL12)
• Horizontal conveyance clutch/1 (CL10), horizontal conveyance clutch/2 (CL11), and pre-registration clutch (CL12)
*1 C7000, C7000P, C70hc, C6000
*2 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060
(2) Procedure
[2].
a03xf2c019ca
F-134
[1]
[4] 4. Remove the three screws [2] and the three wire binding covers [3].
[3] [10] Note
• When you install the wire binding [4], pass the binding
[9]
through the hole in the wire binding cover [3].
[2]
5. Remove the three C-clips [5] and remove the horizontal
conveyance clutch/1 (CL10) [6], horizontal conveyance clutch/2
[5] (CL11) [7], and the pre-registration clutch (CL12) [8].
Note
• When you install the clutches, be sure to match the
[6] [8] [7] stoppers [9] with the cutout of the rear panel [10].
[9] of the clutch with the pin [11].

reverse.
7. After you replace the horizontal conveyance clutch/1 (CL10), the
horizontal conveyance clutch/2 (CL11) and the pre-registration
clutch (CL12), conduct the following item.
• C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000:
For the horizontal transport clutch/1 (CL10): The counter reset
For the horizontal transport clutch/2 (CL11): The counter reset
[1]
[4] [11]
For the pre-registration clutch (CL12): The counter reset of the
special parts counter number 173.
[2] • C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060:
[3] For the horizontal conveyance clutch/1 (CL10): The counter
[9] reset of the special parts counter number 210.
For the horizontal conveyance clutch/2 (CL11): The counter
[5]
reset of the special parts counter number 211.
For the pre-registration clutch (CL12): The counter reset of the
special parts counter number 209.
a03xf2c020ca
F-135
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L PROCEDURE PF-707
8. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE PF-707

CAUTION
8.2 Paper feed tray section

8.2.1 Replacing the loop roller/Lw and the loop roller bearing/Lw
(1) Spotted replaced parts and cycle
• Loop roller/Lw
: Every 6,000,000 counts (special parts counter)
• Loop roller bearing/Lw
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Pull out the tray 3 at the maximum. (Refer to G.4.3.20 Procedure
for pulling out the tray at the maximum)
2. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the fan cover [2].
[2]
3. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the positioning stay [2].
[3] [5] [4] 4. Remove the E-rings [3].
5. Remove the E-rings [4] one each and slide the loop roller bearing/
Lw [5] into the inside.
[2]
[1]
F-136
6. Slide the pulley [1] to the front and remove the pin [2].
[2] 7. Remove the pulley [1] and the belt [3].
8. Slide the loop roller bearing/Lw [4] and the loop roller/Lw [5] to the
[1] arrow marked direction and remove them.
[3] reverse.
10. After you replace the loop roller/Lw and the loop roller bearing/Lw,
[5] [4] conduct the following items.
• For loop roller/Lw: The counter reset of the special parts
counter number 228.
• For loop roller bearing/Lw: The counter reset of the special
parts counter number 227.
8.3 Paper feed suction section

8.3.1 Replacing the suction belt clutch/1 (CL15), the suction belt clutch/2 (CL16), the suction belt clutch/3 (CL17)
(1) Periodically replaced parts and their cycles
• Suction belt clutch/1 (CL15), suction belt clutch/2 (CL16), suction belt clutch/3 (CL17)
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the rear cover/Rt. (Refer to G.6.3.6 Rear cover/Rt)
[4] 2. Remove 1 each of the connectors [1].
3. Remove the wiring harness from the clamps [2], 2 each.
4. Remove the C-clips [3], 1 each, and then remove the suction belt
clutch/1 (CL15) [4], suction belt clutch/2 (CL16) [5] and suction belt
clutch/3 (CL17) [6].
[5] Note
• When you reinstall the suction belt clutch, be sure to
insert the stopper [7] of the clutch over the projection [8]
of the metal frame.

[6] reverse.
6. After you replace the suction belt clutch/1 (CL15), suction belt
clutch/2 (CL16), and suction belt clutch/3 (CL17), conduct the
following items.
[1] • The counter reset of the special parts counter number 216 for
the suction belt clutch/1.
[8]
[3]
8.4 Vertical conveyance section

8.4.1 Replacement of the exit clutch/1 (CL1), /2 (CL2), the vertical conveyance clutch/1 (CL3), /2 (CL4) ,the vertical
conveyance clutch/3 (CL5) and /4 (CL6).
• Exit clutch/1 (CL1), exit clutch/2 (CL2)
• Vertical conveyance clutch/1 (CL3), vertical conveyance clutch/2 (CL4)
• Vertical conveyance clutch/3 (CL5), vertical conveyance clutch/4 (CL6)
F-137
(2) Procedure
[4] 1. Remove the rear cover/Rt. (Refer to G.6.3.6 Rear cover/Rt)
[6] 3. Remove the wiring harness from the clamps [2], 2 each.
4. Remove the C-clips [3], 1 each, and then remove the exit clutch/1
(CL1) [4], exit clutch/2 (CL2) [5], the vertical conveyance clutch/1
(CL3) [6], vertical conveyance clutch/2 (CL4) [7], vertical
[7]
conveyance clutch/3 (CL5) [8], and vertical conveyance clutch/4
(CL6) [9].
Note
• When you reinstall the vertical conveyance clutch, be sure
[5] to insert the stopper [10] of the clutch over the projection
[11] of the metal frame.
[8]
[9] reverse.
6. After you replace the exit clutch/1 (CL1), exit clutch/2 (CL2),
vertical conveyance clutch/1 (CL3), vertical conveyance clutch//2
(CL4), vertical conveyance clutch//3 (CL5) and vertical conveyance
[1]
clutch//4 (CL6), conduct the following items.
the vertical conveyance clutch/1 (CL3), vertical conveyance
[10] clutch/2 (CL4) and the exit clutch/1 (CL1).
• The counter reset of the special parts counter number 220 for
[11] the exit clutch/2 (CL2).
• The counter reset of the special parts counter number 221 for
[3] the vertical conveyance clutch/3 (CL5) and the vertical
conveyance clutch/4 (CL6).
8.5 Horizontal conveyance section

8.5.1 Replacing the pre-registration clutch (CL7) and the horizontal conveyance clutch/1 (CL8), horizontal conveyance
clutch/2 (CL9)
• Pre-registration clutch (CL7)
: Every 3,000,000 counts (Special parts counter)
• Horizontal conveyance clutch/1 (CL8), horizontal conveyance clutch/2 (CL9)
(2) Procedure
[4] [5] [6] 2. Remove 1 each of the connectors [1].
3. Remove the wiring harness from the clamps [2], 2 each.
4. Remove the C-clips [3], 1 each, and then remove the pre-
registration clutch (CL7) [4] and the horizontal conveyance clutch/1
(CL8) [5] and horizontal conveyance clutch/2 (CL9) [6].
Note
• When you reinstall the suction belt clutch, be sure to
insert the stopper [7] of the clutch over the projection [8]
of the metal frame.

reverse.
6. After you replace the pre-registration clutch (CL7), the horizontal
conveyance clutch/1 (CL8) and horizontal conveyance clutch/2
(CL9), conduct the following items.
• Counter reset of the parts counter number 222.
[1]
[2]
[7]
[8]
[3]
8.5.2 Replacing the pre-registration roller and the pre-registration bearing

• Pre-registration roller
• Pre-registration bearing
F-138
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the horizontal conveyance unit. (Refer to G.6.3.21
[1] Horizontal conveyance unit)
2. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the pre-registration
bearing [2].
3. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the gear [4].
[2]
[3]
[4]
[3]
[1] [2] 4. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the pre-registration roller
bearing [2].
5. Slide and remove the pre-registration roller [3].
reverse.
7. After you replace the pre-registration roller and the pre-registration
roller bearing, conduct the following items.
• For the pre-registration roller bearing: Counter reset of the
• For the pre-registration roller: Counter reset of the parts
counter number 225
[3]
8.5.3 Replacing the horizontal conveyance roller/1, /2, the horizontal conveyance roller bearing/1, /2
• Horizontal conveyance roller/1
: Every 1,000,000 counts (total counter) (actual replacement cycle: Every 1,000,000 counts (special parts counter))
• Horizontal conveyance roller bearing/1
• Horizontal conveyance roller/2
• Horizontal conveyance roller bearing/2
F-139
(2) Procedure
Horizontal conveyance unit)
[2] 2. Remove the screw [1], and release the claw [2] and remove the
pressure release unit cover [3].
[3]
[1]
3. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the gear [2].

Note
[2] • When you reinstall the gear [2], be careful not to damage
the gear [2] with a driver.
[1]
F-140
4. Remove 2 E-rings [1], and then remove 2 horizontal conveyance
[2] [1] roller bearings/1 [2].
5. Remove the horizontal conveyance roller/1 [3] by sliding it in the
direction of the arrow.
[3]
[2] [1]
[3] [2] [1] Note
• When you reinstall the horizontal conveyance roller/1 [1],
insert it in the direction of the arrow [3] while you press
the horizontal conveyance roller/1 [1] in the direction of
the arrow [2].
If you do not press the horizontal conveyance roller/1 [1]
in the direction of the arrow [2], the shaft of the roller and
the metal frame are in contact. It interrupts the
reinstallation.
6. Remove 1 screw [1], and then remove the gear [2].

Note
[2] • When you reinstall the gear [2], be careful not to damage
the gear [2] with a driver.
[1]
F-141
7. Remove 2 E-rings [1], and then remove 2 horizontal conveyance
[2] [1] roller bearings/2 [2].
8. Remove the horizontal conveyance roller/2 [3] by sliding it in the
reverse.
10. After you replace the horizontal conveyance roller/1, the horizontal
conveyance roller/2, the horizontal conveyance roller bearing/1,
and the horizontal conveyance roller bearing/2, conduct the
following items.
• For horizontal conveyance roller/1: Counter reset of the special
• For horizontal conveyance roller bearing/1: Counter reset of
[3] the special parts counter number 213
• For horizontal conveyance roller/2: Counter reset of the special
• For horizontal conveyance roller bearing/2: Counter reset of
the special parts counter number 215
[2] [1]
8.5.4 Replacing the loop roller/Up

• Loop roller/Up
(2) Procedure
Horizontal conveyance unit)
[7] 2. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the pulley cover [2], the
belt [3], the pulley [4] and the pin [5].
Note
[8] • When you reinstall the pulley cover [2], be sure to install it
so that the stepped side [6] comes to the E-ring side [1].
3. Remove 2 E-rings [7] and then remove 2 bearings [8].

4. Slide and remove the loop roller/Up [9].
reverse.
6. After you replace the loop roller/Up, conduct the following items.
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [9] [2] [6]
[8]
[7]
8.5.5 Replacement of the roller pressure release motor (M10)

• Roller pressure release motor (M10)
F-142
(2) Procedure
1. Open the open close cover/1 [1], remove 2 screws [2], and remove
the protective cover/Up [3].
[2] [3] [1] [2]

2. Remove the screw [1], and release the claw [2] and remove the
pressure release unit cover [3].
[2] [3] [1]
F-143
3. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove 2 screws [2].
[5][6] [4] 4. Hold the roller pressure release unit [3] and remove 3 screws [4] at
a time, and remove the roller pressure release unit [3].
Note
• Be sure to install the roller pressure release unit [3] so
that the projection [5] matches the hole [6] of PF-707.
• During the installation of the roller pressure release unit
[3], be sure to conduct the following steps: Half tighten 3
screws [4], stick the roller pressure release unit [3] in the
arrowed direction, attach 2 screws [2], and tighten 3
screws [4].
If the screws [4] are fixed first or the screws [2] are
attached without the screws [5] being half tightened, the
roller pressure release unit [3] could deform.
[2] [3] [1]
[2] [1] [3] [2] 5. Remove the connector [1] and release the wiring harness, and
remove 4 screws [2] and remove the roller pressure release motor
assy [3].
6. Remove 3 screws [1] and remove the roller pressure release motor
assy [2].
reverse.
8. After the replacement of the roller pressure release motor (M10),
perform the following items.
• Counter reset of the parts counter No.229
[2] [1]
F-144
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L PROCEDURE LU-202
9. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE LU-202

9.1.1 Precautions on maintenance
CAUTION
9.1.2 Cleaning the pre-registration roller

• Paper dust removing brush
: Actual cleaning cycle: Every 200,000 counts *1
• Pre-registration roller
*1 C6501, C6501P, C65hc, C7000, C7000P, C70hc, C6000, C6000L, C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060
*2 C5501
(2) Procedure
[1] [2] [3] 1. Remove the upper door. (Refer to G.7.2.2 Upper door)
2. Remove the paper feed cover. (Refer to G.7.2.4 The paper feed
cover)
3. Remove the 2 screws [1] and remove the paper dust cleaner brush
[2].
4. Clean the paper dust removing brush [2] and the pre-registration
roller [3].
reverse.
a03wf2c001ca
9.1.3 Removing/installing paper feed roller Assy

(1) Procedure
[1] [2] [3] [5] [10] [9][4][2][1] [6] [8] 1. Remove the upper door. (Refer to G.7.2.2 Upper door)
2. Remove the paper feed cover. (Refer to G.7.2.4 The paper feed
cover)
3. Remove the 2 C-clips [1], and slide the 2 bearings [2] outward.
4. Rotate the paper feed roller assy [5] to the position free from upper
limit sensor (PS109) [3] and the paper empty sensor (PS108) [4].
Then remove the coupling [8] while avoiding the notch [6] and the
arm [7] of the paper feed guide plate, and remove the paper feed
roller assy [5].
Note
• When you remove and install the paper feed roller Assy,
be careful not to damage the upper limit sensor (PS109)
[3] and the paper empty sensor (PS108) [4].
• When you install the paper feed roller Assy, make sure
[6] [7] a03wf2c002ca that the arm [9] is underneath the lever [10].

reverse.
9.1.4 Replacing the paper feed roller/pick-up roller

• Pick-up roller
*1 C7000, C7000P, C70hc, C6000, C6000L
*2 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, C1060L
F-145
(2) Procedure
[2] [3] 1. Remove the paper feed roller assy. (Refer to F.9.1.3 Removing/
installing paper feed roller Assy)
2. Turn over the paper feed roller assy.
3. Remove the bearing [1].
4. Remove the 2 C-clips [2], and remove the coupling bearing [3].
[1] [2] a03wf2c003cb
[2] [5] [1]

5. Slide the coupling bearing [1] and remove the mounting bracket
[2].
6. Remove the C-clip [3] and remove the paper feed roller [4].
Note
• Be sure to reinstall in the same direction with the
removing direction.
7. Remove the pick-up roller [5].
[3] [4]
a03wf2c004cb
[2] [1] 8. Remove the collar [2] from the pick-up roller [1].
reverse.
10. After you replace the paper feed roller and the pick-up roller,
• C7000, C7000P, C70hc, C6000, PRO C6000L:
For paper feed roller: Counter reset of the parts counter
number 150.
For pick up roller: Counter reset of the parts counter number
149
• C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, C1060L:
For paper feed roller: Counter reset of the parts counter
a03wf2c005cb number 193.
For pick up roller: Counter reset of the parts counter number
192

*1 C7000, C7000P, C70hc, C6000, C6000L
*2 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, C1060L
(2) Procedure
1. Open the upper door.
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the cover [2].
[2] [1] a03wf2c006ca
F-146
3. Remove the 2 screws [1] and pull out the front side while you
press down the separation roller [2]. Then remove the coupling [3],
and also the separation roller assy [4].
[3]
[2]
[4] [1] a03wf2c007ca

5. Rotate the shaft to match its D-shaped end with the D-cut of the
metal plate [2], and remove the separation roller [3].
Note
[1] [3] [4] • When you remove and install, be careful not to damage
the protection sheet [4].
[2]
[1]
a03wf2c008cb
[1] [2] 6. Remove the separation roller [1] from the collar [2].
Note
• Be sure to insert the claw [4] of the gear [3] to the hole [5]
of the separation roller [1] in securely.
• Be careful not to let any grease spill or drip on the
separation roller.

reverse.
8. After you replace the separation roller, conduct the following item.
• C7000, C7000P, C70hc, C6000, PRO C6000L: For the
separation roller: The counter reset of the special parts counter
number 150.
• C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, C1060L: For the separation
[3] roller: The counter reset of the special parts counter number
193.
[1]
[5]
[4]
a03wf2c009cb
9.1.6 Replacing paper feed clutch (CL101) /pre-registration clutch (CL102)

• Paper feed clutch (CL101)
• Pre-registration clutch (CL102)
F-147
*1 C7000, C7000P, C70hc, C6000, C6000L
*2 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, C1060L
(2) Procedure
[2] [3] [5] [6] [7] [5] [4] [2] 1. Remove the clutch cover. (Refer to G.7.2.3 The clutch cover)
3. Remove the 2 C-clips [2] and remove the paper feed clutch
(MC101) [3], and remove the pre-registration clutch [4].
Note
• When you install the paper feed clutch and the pre-
registration clutch, be sure to insert the stoppers [5] of the
clutches over the screw [6] and the metal plate [7].

reverse.
5. After you replace the paper feed clutch (CL101) and the pre-
registration clutch (CL102), conduct the following item.
• C7000, C7000P, C70hc, C6000, PRO C6000L: For the paper
feed clutch (CL101): The counter reset of the special parts
[1]
counter number 151. For the pre-registration clutch (CL102):
a03wf2c010ca
The counter reset of the special parts counter number 152.
• C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, C1060L: For the paper feed
clutch (CL101): The counter reset of the special parts counter
number 194. For the pre-registration clutch (CL102): The
counter reset of the special parts counter number 195.
F-148
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L PROCEDURE MB-506
10. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE MB-506

CAUTION

10.2.1 Replacing the pick-up roller/BP, the paper feed roller rubber/BP, and the paper feed clutch/BP (CL14)
• Pick-up roller/BP: Every 800,000 counts (special parts counter)
• Paper feed roller rubber/BP: Every 125,000 counts (special parts counter)
• Paper feed clutch/BP (CL14): Every 2,000,000 counts (special parts counter)
(2) Procedure
[4] [4] 1. Remove the right cover/Up1, the right cover/Up2, the right cover/
[5] [3]
Lw1, and the right cover/Lw2. (Refer to G.3.2.5 Right cover/Up1,
right cover/Up2, right cover/Up3, right cover/Up4, right cover/Lw1,
right cover/Lw2)
3. Remove 4 screws [1], and then remove the guide plate [2].
4. Disconnect the connector [3], and remove 4 screws [4]. Then
remove MB-506 [5].
[1] [2] [1]
5. Remove the 2 springs [1], and release the pressure of the

separation roller/BP [2].
[1] [2] [1]

6. Remove the C-clip [1], and slide the bearing [2] in the arrow-
[1] [2] [5] [6] marked direction.
7. Remove the C-clip [3], and remove the bearing [4].
8. Remove the pick-up roller/assy [5] in the arrow-marked direction.
Note
• When you reinstall the pick-up roller/assy [5], be sure to
check that the arm [6] is on the shaft [7].
[7] [4] [3]
F-149
9. Remove the C-clip [1], and pull out the shaft [2] in the arrow-
marked direction. Then remove the pick-up roller/BP [3].
[1] [3] [2]

10. Remove the E-ring [1], and then remove the bearing [2] and the
drive gear [3].
11. Remove the connector [4], and remove the E-ring [5]. Then
remove the paper feed clutch/BP [6].
Note
• When you reinstall the paper feed clutch/BP [5], be sure to
match each stopper [7] and each guide [8].
[7][8] [6] [4] [5] [3] [2] [1]

12. Remove the C-clip [1], and remove the arm [2] and the cap [3].
Note
• When you reinstall the cap [3], be sure to check that the
dent on the cap matches with the pin [4] and the
projection [5] of the paper feed roller/BP.
[3] [5] [4] [1] [5] [2]

13. Remove the pin [1], and pull out the shaft [2] in the arrow-marked
direction. Then remove the paper feed roller/BP [3].
[3] [1] [2]

14. Remove the paper feed roller rubber/BP [2] from the paper feed
roller/BP [1].
Note
• When you reinstall the paper feed roller rubber/BP, be
sure to turn the paint-marked side [3] to the gear side [4].

reverse.
16. After the replacement of the pick-up roller/BP, paper feed roller
rubber/BP, and the paper feed clutch/BP, conduct the following
items.
• For pick up roller/BP: The counter reset of the special parts
[3] [1] [2] [4] counter number 120
• For paper feed roller rubber/BP: The counter reset of the
• For paper feed clutch/BP: The counter reset of the special
F-150
10.2.2 Replacing the separation roller rubber/BP

• Separation roller rubber/BP: Every 125,000 counts (special parts counter)
(2) Procedure
1. Remove MB-506. (Refer to F.10.2.1 Replacing the pick-up roller/
BP, the paper feed roller rubber/BP, and the paper feed clutch/BP
(CL14))
2. Remove the 2 springs [1], and release the pressure of the
separation roller/BP [2].
[1] [2] [1]

3. Remove the C-clip [1], and pull out the shaft [2] in the arrow-
marked direction. Then remove the cap [3] and the separation
roller/BP [4].
[2] [1] [3] [4]

4. Remove the separation roller rubber/BP [2] from the separation
roller/BP [1].
Note
• When you reinstall the separation roller rubber/BP, be
sure to turn the paint-marked side [3] to the gear side [4].

reverse.
6. After the replacement of the separation roller rubber/BP, conduct
the following item.
[3] [2] [1] [4]
F-151
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L PROCEDURE OT-502
11. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE OT-502

11.1 Replacing the paper hold roller
11.1.1 Periodically replaced parts and cycle
• Paper holding roller: Every 200,000 counts (special parts counter)
11.1.2 Procedure
[1] 1. Remove OT-502. (Refer to G.9.2.1 OT-502)
2. Remove the screws [1], 1 each, and then remove the 2 paper hold
roller assy [2].
[2]
3. After you remove the E-ring [1], pull out the shaft [2], and then
remove the paper hold roller [3].
4. Remove the paper hold roller from the other paper hold roller assy
following Step 3.
5. Reinstall the preceding parts following the removal steps in reverse.
6. After the paper holding roller is replaced, conduct the following item.
[2] [3] [1]

a03uf2c077ca
11.2 Replacing the paper exit roller

• Paper exit roller: Every 200,000 counts (special parts counter)
11.2.2 Procedure
1. Remove OT-502. (Refer to G.9.2.1 OT-502)
Note
• When you reinstall the gear, be sure to place it with its
arrow-marked side [3] on the E-ring side [1].
[3] [1] [2]
F-152
3. Remove 2 E-rings [1], and then remove the bearing [2].
4. Remove the E-ring [3] and the bearing [4].
5. Remove 3 screws [5], and then remove the paper exit roller
mounting plate/Rr [6] and the paper exit roller [7].
7. After the paper exit roller is replaced, conduct the following item.
[2] [1] [6] [5]
[7] [6]
[3] [4]
11.3 Replacing the paper exit driven roller/2

• Paper exit driven roller/2: Every 200,000 counts (special parts counter)
11.3.2 Procedure
1. Remove OT-502. (Refer to G.9.2.1 OT-502)
2. Remove the screws [1], 1 each, and then remove the 4 roller
holders [2].
3. Remove 2 paper exit driven roller assy [4] from the springs [3], 2
each.
[4] [2] [3]
[3] [1]
F-153
4. Remove the E-ring [1], and then remove the bearing [2] and the
paper exit driven roller/1 [3].
[1] [2] [3]

a03uf2c079ca

6. Remove 2 E-rings [2], and then remove the first paper exit driven
roller/2 [3].
[1] [2] [3]

a03uf2c080ca
7. Remove 2 E-rings [1], and then remove the second paper exit
driven roller/2 [2].
8. Remove 2 paper exit driven roller/2 from the other paper exit driven
roller assy following Steps 4 to 7.
10. After you replace the paper exit driven roller/2, conduct the following
item.
[1] [2] a03uf2c081ca
F-154
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L PROCEDURE EF-103
12. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE EF-103

CAUTION
12.2 Fusing section

The maintenance procedure is the same as the fusing section of C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, and C1060L.
However, some parts have a different maintenance cycle.
Maintenance procedure Remark
F.5.11.3 Replacement of the fusing heater lamp assy/Up and the The maintenance cycle of the neutralizing flat spring assy differs.
neutralizing flat spring assy
The following parts have a different maintenance cycle: The fusing
F.5.11.4 Replacement of the fusing bearing/Up, /Lw1, the heat
bearing/Up, the heat insulating sleeve/Up, the fusing bearing/Lw1, the
insulating sleeve/Up, /Lw1, the belt regulating sleeve, the fusing belt,
belt regulating sleeve, the fusing belt, the fusing roller/1, the fusing
the fusing roller/1, /2, and the neutralizing ring.
roller/2, the discharge ring.
F.5.11.5 Replacement of the fusing temperature sensor/3 (TH3)
F.5.11.6 Replacement of the fusing gear/1, fusing bearing/Lw2, heat The following parts have a different maintenance cycle: The fusing
insulating sleeve/Lw2, fusing roller/Lw bearing/Lw2, the fusing roller/Lw.
F.5.11.7 Replacement of the fusing temperature sensor/4 (TH4)
F.5.11.8 Replacement of the fusing gear/2, the fusing gear/3 The periodic maintenance cycle of the fusing gear/2 is different.
F.5.11.9 Replacement of the fusing separating claw assy The maintenance cycles differs.
F.5.11.10 Replacing the fusing paper exit roller/Up The maintenance cycles differs.
F-155
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L PROCEDURE RU-516
13. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE RU-516

CAUTION

13.2.1 Replacing the charging roller and the charging driven roller
• Charging roller
: Every 350,000 counts (total counter) (actual replacement cycle: Every 100% (special parts counter) (Refer to "F.4 Life value"))
• Charging driven roller
(2) Step
1. Remove the screw cover [1].
2. Remove the screw [2], and then remove the cover [3].
[3] [1][2]
3. Loosen the screw [1], and remove the charging roller assy [2] to
the direction of the arrow.
[2] [1]
F-156
[3] [2] Note

• When you reinstall the charging roller assy [1], be careful
that the 2 guide shafts [2] of the charging roller assy align
with the guide rail [3].
[1] [2] [3]
4. Slide the release lever [1] to the direction of arrow [2], and open
[1] [2] [3] the charging roller assy [3].
Note
[3] [2] [1] • Be careful not to open the charging roller assy [1] too
much. When you open the charging roller assy [1] too
much, the gear [2] contacts with the charging driven roller
[3] and possibly gets damaged.
F-157
5. Remove the E-ring [1], and then remove the shaft [2] in the
[3] [2] [1] direction of the arrow.
6. Remove the roller assy [3].
7. Remove the charging driven roller [1] in the direction of the arrow.
[1]
Note
[2] [1] • When the charging driven roller [1] is hard to remove, use
a screwdriver [2] to remove.
• When you use a screwdriver to remove the charging
driven roller [1], be careful not to damage the shaft of the
roller with the screwdriver.
• Be careful not to touch the roller surface.
8. Remove the screw [1], and then remove the neutralizing parts [2].
[2] [1]
F-158
9. Remove the E-ring [1], the bearing [2], and the spacer [3].
Note
• Be careful not to lose the spacer [3].
[1] [2] [3]
[4] [3] [2] [1] 10. Remove the E-ring [1], the gear [2], the pin [3], and 2 bearings [4].
Note
11. Remove the charging roller [5].

reverse.
13. After you replace the charging roller and the charging driven roller,
• For the charging roller: Counter reset of the special parts
counter number 376, 377
• For the charging driven roller: Counter reset of the special
[4] [5]
13.2.2 Replacing the charging roller bearing

• Charging roller bearing
F-159
(2) Step
[1] [2] [1] 1. Remove the charging driven roller. (Refer to F.13.2.1 Replacing
the charging roller and the charging driven roller)
2. Release the claws [1], 2 each. Then remove the charging roller
bearing [2], 1 each.
Note
• When you remove the charging roller bearing[2], be
careful not to lose the springs [3].
• Be careful not to break the claw [1].
[3] • When you install the charging roller bearing [2], check
[4] straight.
When the springs [3] are curved or tilted, adjust the
position of the springs [3].

reverse.
4. After you replace the charging roller bearing, conduct the following
item.
• Counter reset of the special parts counter number 363
[1] [2] [1]
[4]
[3]
F-160

14.1.1 Replacing the charging roller and the charging driven roller
• Charging roller
• Charging driven roller
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the rear cover. (Refer to G.12.2.2 Rear cover)
2. Turn the lever [1] in the direction of the arrow and open the
conveyance door [2].
[2] [1]
3. Remove the screw cover [1].

4. Remove the screw [2], and then remove the cover [3].
[3] [1][2]
Note
• Be sure to install the cover [1] so that the flat spring [2]
faces the inner side than the metal plate [3].
• Be careful not to deform the flat spring [2].
[3] [2] [1]
F-161
5. Loosen the screw [1], and remove the charging roller assy [2] to
the direction of the arrow.
[2] [1]
[3] [2] Note

• When you reinstall the charging roller assy [1], be careful
that the 2 guide shafts [2] of the charging roller assy align
with the guide rail [3].
[1] [2] [3]
6. Slide the release lever [1] to the direction of arrow [2], and open
[1] [2] [3] the charging roller assy [3].
F-162
Note
[3] [2] [1] • Be careful not to open the charging roller assy [1] too
much. When you open the charging roller assy [1] too
much, the gear [2] contacts with the charging driven roller
[3] and possibly gets damaged.
7. Remove the E-ring [1], and then remove the shaft [2] in the
[3] [2] [1] direction of the arrow.
8. Remove the roller assy [3].
9. Remove the charging driven roller [1] in the direction of the arrow.
[1]
Note
[2] [1] • When the charging driven roller [1] is hard to remove, use
a screwdriver [2] to remove.
• When you use a screwdriver to remove the charging
driven roller [1], be careful not to damage the shaft of the
roller with the screwdriver.
F-163
10. Remove the screw [1], and then remove the neutralizing parts [2].
[2] [1]
11. Remove the E-ring [1], the bearing [2], and the spacer [3].
Note
• Be careful not to lose the spacer [3].
[1] [2] [3]
F-164
[4] [3] [2] [1] 12. Remove the E-ring [1], the gear [2], the pin [3], and 2 bearings [4].
Note
13. Remove the charging roller [5].

reverse.
15. After you replace the charging roller and the charging driven roller,
• For the charging roller: Counter reset of the special parts
counter number 376, 377
• For the charging driven roller: Counter reset of the special
[4] [5]
14.1.2 Replacing the charging roller bearing

• Charging roller bearing
F-165
(2) Step
[1] [2] [1] 1. Remove the charging driven roller. (Refer to F.14.1.1 Replacing
2. Release the claws [1], 2 each. Then remove the charging roller
bearing [2], 1 each.
Note
• When you remove the charging roller bearing[2], be
careful not to lose the springs [3].
• Be careful not to break the claw [1].
[3] • When you install the charging roller bearing [2], check
[4] straight.
When the springs [3] are curved or tilted, adjust the
position of the springs [3].

reverse.
4. After you replace the charging roller bearing, conduct the following
item.
• Counter reset of the special parts counter number 363
[1] [2] [1]
[4]
[3]
F-166
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L PROCEDURE RU-50...
15. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE RU-509/HM-102

CAUTION
15.2 Output paper density detection section

15.2.1 Cleaning the shutter
• Shutter: Every 600,000 counts (total counter)
(2) Procedure
1. Remove 2 screw covers [1].
2. Remove 2 screws [2], and then remove the shutter cover [3].
[1] [2]
[3]
3. Loosen 2 screws [1] and then remove the shutter stopper [2] in the
arrow-marked direction.
[1]
[2]
[1] [2] 4. Pull out the shutter [1] and clean the correction plate [2] with a
blower brush.
Note
• Be careful that the shutter [3] falls down when it is pulled
out too much.
15.3 Humidification section (HM-102)

15.3.1 Replacing the humidification rollers/Rt, /Lt and the water feed roller
(1) Periodically replaced parts, spotted replaced parts, cycle
• Humidification roller/Rt: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: every 300,000 counts (Special parts counter))
• Humidification roller/Lt: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: every 300,000 counts (Special parts counter))
• Water feed roller: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: every 1,500,000 counts (Special parts counter))
F-167
(2) Procedure
1. Open the front door.
2. Remove the screw [1] and remove the humidification unit cover [2].
[1] 3. Pull out the humidification unit [3].
[2] [3]
4. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the connector cover Lt [2].
5. Remove the screw [3] and then disconnect the connector [4].
6. Release the wiring harness, and pull out the connector [4] from the
hole [5].
[1] [2]
[5] [3] [4]
F-168
[1] [4] 8. Open the open close plate/Lt assy [2] and remove in the arrow-
marked direction [3].
Note
• When you reinstall the open close plate/Lt assy [2], be
sure to hit the open close plate/Lt assy [2] to the E-ring
[4].
[3] [2]
[1] [2] [4] [3] 9. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the connector cover/Rt [2].
11. Pull out the connector [3] from the hole [4].
14. Open the open close plate/Rt assy [7] and remove in the arrow-
[5] [8] [7] Note
• When you reinstall the open close plate/Rt assy [7], be
sure to hit the open close plate/Rt assy [7] to the E-ring
[9].
[6] [9]
[1] 15. Remove 4 screws [1].
16. Remove the humidification roller assy [2].
[2]
F-169
17. Check point when you reinstall the humidification roller assy
[1] Note
• When you reinstall the humidification roller assy, be sure
to place the projections [1] of the pressure release cam so
that they hit the pressure rollers [2] beforehand. (Execute
this process to all 4 places.)
to turn the gear so that the projection [3] of the gear aligns
with the notch [4] beforehand.
not to miss-align the positions of the projections of the
humidification pressure cam [1] and the gear [3].
[2] [2]
[3]
[4]
F-170
18. Put the humidification roller assy with bottom-up.
[8] [7] [12] [6] [5] [3] 19. Remove 2 C-clips [1], and remove 2 gears [2].
20. Remove the C-clip [3], and remove the gear [5] with 2 bearings [4].
21. Remove the spacer [6].
22. Remove the C-clip [7], and remove the gear [8].
23. Remove the C-clip [9], and remove the gear [10] and the spacer
[11].
24. Remove the gear [12].
[11] [10] [9] [4]
[2] [1] [2]
F-171
25. Remove 2 C-clips [1], and then remove the humidification pressure
[8] [7] cam/FrRt [2] and humidification pressure cam/FrLt [3] and 2
bearings [4].
26. Remove the C-clips [5], and then remove the humidification
pressure cam/RrLt [6].
27. Remove the humidification pressure cam/RrRt [7] and 2 bearings
[8].
28. Remove the humidification roller/Rt [9] and humidification roller/Lt
[10] in the arrow-marked direction [11].
Note
• Remove the control roller [12] releasing to outside.
[6] [5]
[11] [10]
[12] [9]
[4] [3]
[2] [1]
29. Check point when you reinstall the humidification roller/Rt [1] and
[1] [3]
humidification roller/Lt [2]
Note
• When you reinstall the humidification roller/Rt [1] and
humidification roller/Lt [2], be sure to note the following
points.
The humidification roller/Rt is longer than the
humidification roller/Lt.
The side with the groove [3] on the roller shaft comes to
the front side.
Never touch the roller surface with bare hands.
[2]
F-172
30. Remove the C-clips [1], pressure rollers [2], and bearings [3], 4
[4] [5] [6] each.
31. Remove 2 water feed rollers [4] in the arrow-marked direction [5].
Note
• When you reinstall the water feed roller, never touch the
roller surface with bare hands.
[2]
[3] [1]
reverse.
Note
• When you reinstall the pressure roller, be sure that the
bearing [1] comes inside.
33. After you replace the humidification roller/Rt and humidification

roller/Lt and the water feed roller, conduct the following items.
The parts counter of the humidification roller/Rt
• Number 377 (1250/1250P/1052)
• Number 322 (C7000, C7000P, and C70hc)
• Number 351 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, and C1060
The parts counter of the humidification roller/Lt
• Number 378 (1250/1250P/1052)
• Number 352 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, and C1060)
The parts counter of the water feed roller
• Number 379 (1250/1250P/1052)
15.3.2 Replacing the water feed filter

• Water feed filter: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: every 300,000 counts (Special parts counter))
(2) Procedure
[2] 1. Open the front door.
2. Remove the screw [1] and then pull out the water feed tank [2].
[1]
F-173
[1] [2] 3. Remove 3 screws [1] and open the filter cap [2].
[1]
4. Remove the water feed filter [1].
reverse.
6. After you replace the part, be sure to reset the parts counter.
• Number 380 (1250, 1250P, and 1052)
F-174

CAUTION

16.2.1 Replacing the paper re-feed roller drive gear/1 and the paper re-feed roller drive gear/2
• Re-feed roller drive gear/1, re-feed roller drive gear/2
: Spotted replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 40,000,000 feeds)
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the rear cover.
(Refer to G.15.2.3 Rear cover)
[1] [2] [3] 2. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the re-feed roller drive
gear/1 [2] and the re-feed roller drive gear/2 [3].
reverse.
4. After you replace the re-feed roller drive gear/1 and the re-feed
roller drive gear/2, be sure to reset the special parts counter.
• Number 376
16.2.2 Replacing the entrance conveyance motor (M1), the entrance conveyance belt, the paper exit motor (M2), the
paper exit conveyance belt
• Entrance motor (M1)
• Entrance conveyance belt
• Paper exit motor (M2)
• Paper exit conveyance belt
(2) Removing the entrance motor assy, Replacement procedure of the entrance conveyance belt
3. Remove the 5 saddles [2] of the entrance motor mounting plate,
[3] [4] [5] and release the wiring harness.
4. Remove 4 screws [3], the entrance motor assy [4] and the
entrance conveyance belt [5].
Note
When it is reinstalled, temporary tighten the 4 screws [3] and
apply the tension to the entrance conveyance belt [5] by own
weight of the entrance motor assy [4]. Then tighten 4 screws
[3].

reverse.
6. After you replace the entrance conveyance belt, be sure to reset
the special parts counter.
• Number 372
[2] [3] [1]
F-175
(3) Removing the paper exit motor assy, Replacement procedure of the paper exit conveyance belt
1. Remove the re-feed roller drive gear/2. (Refer to F.16.2.1
[5] [2] [4] [1] Replacing the paper re-feed roller drive gear/1 and the paper re-
feed roller drive gear/2)
3. Remove the 3 saddles [2] of the paper exit motor mounting plate,
and release the wiring harness.
4. Remove the 4 screws [3], the paper exit motor assy [4] and the
paper exit conveyance belt [5].
Note
When you reinstall the paper exit motor assy, temporary
tighten the 4 screws [3] and apply the tension to the paper
exit conveyance belt [5] by own weight of the paper exit motor
assy [4]. Then tighten 4 screws [3].

reverse.
6. After you replace the paper exit conveyance belt, be sure to reset
the special parts counter.
• Number 372
[3]
(4) Replacement procedure of the entrance motor (M1) and the paper exit motor (M2)
1. Remove the entrance motor assy and the paper exit motor assy.
[2] [1] [3] (Refer toF.16.2.2.(2) Removing the entrance motor assy,
Replacement procedure of the entrance conveyance belt, F.16.2.2.
(3) Removing the paper exit motor assy, Replacement procedure
of the paper exit conveyance belt)
2. Remove the E-ring [1].
3. Loosen the 2 screws [2] and remove the pulley gear [3].
4. Remove the 4 screws [4]. Then remove the entrance motor (M1)
and the paper exit motor (M2) [6] from the mounting plate [5].
reverse.
6. After you replace the entrance motor (M1) and the paper exit
motor (M2), be sure to reset the special parts counter.
[5] [4] [6] Entrance motor (M1), paper exit motor (M2)
• Number 374
16.2.3 Replacing the paper exit pulley and the conveyance pulley
• Paper exit pulley
: Spotted replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 20,000,000 counts (Special parts counter))
• Conveyance pulley
F-176
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the entrance motor (M1), the entrance conveyance belt,
the paper exit motor (M2), and the paper exit conveyance belt
[3] [4] (Refer to F.16.2.2 Replacing the entrance conveyance motor (M1),
the entrance conveyance belt, the paper exit motor (M2), the paper
exit conveyance belt)
2. Remove the E-ring [1] and then 1 paper exit pulley [2].
3. Remove each 1 of the screws [3] at 5 places, and then remove the
5 paper exit pulleys [4].
Note
• When you reinstall the paper exit pulley [4] be sure that
the gear comes inside.

reverse.
5. After you replace the paper exit pulley and the conveyance pulley,
be sure to reset the special parts counter.
Paper exit pulley, Conveyance pulley
• Number 373 (1250, 1250P, and 1052)
[2] [1]
16.2.4 Replacing the entrance roller/1, /2, paper exit roller, bearing /K and bearing assy
• Entrance roller/1
• Entrance roller/2
• Paper exit roller
• Bearing/K
• Bearing assy
F-177
(2) Procedure
1. Replacing the entrance motor (M1), the entrance conveyance belt,
the paper exit motor (M2), the paper exit conveyance belt
[2] (Refer to "F.16.2.2 Replacing the entrance conveyance motor
(M1), the entrance conveyance belt, the paper exit motor (M2), the
paper exit conveyance belt")
Remove the paper exit pulley, the conveyance pulley.
(Refer to "F.16.2.3 Replacing the paper exit pulley and the
conveyance pulley")
2. Remove the E-rings [1], 1 each.
3. Remove the screw [2], 2 each, and then remove the bearing/K and
the bearing assy [3], 1 each.
*Only the bearing of the paper exit roller [8] is the bearing assy.
Note
• When you reinstall the bearing/K and the bearing assy [3],
be sure that the notch of the bearing/K and the bearing
assy comes in the position [4] as it is shown in the
[3] [1] [6] picture.
• To prevent the notch from opening, when tighten the
screws [2], 1 for each, in counterclockwise order.
• When you reinstall the bearing/K [3] of the entrance roller/
1 [6], entrance roller/2 [7], be sure to apply the Molykote
EM-30L inside the bearing/K [3].
• When you reinstall the bearing/K [3] of the paper exit roller
[8], be sure to apply the Molykote EM-30L on all around of
the spring pins [5] on the front and rear of the shaft.
4. Remove the entrance roller/1 [6], entrance roller/2 [7] and the
paper exit roller [8].
[8] [7] [4] [2] reverse.
6. After you replace the entrance roller/1, entrance roller/2 and the
paper exit roller, bearing/K and bearing Assy, be sure to reset the
parts counter.
Entrance roller/1, entrance roller/2
• Number 366 (1250, 1250P, and 1052)
Paper exit roller
• Number 369 (1250, 1250P, and 1052)
Bearing/K and bearing Assy
• Number 371 (1250, 1250P, and 1052)
[2] [1] [3]
[5]
16.2.5 Replacing the merging section roller and bearing/K

• Junction roller
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 20,000,000 counts (Special parts counter))
• Bearing/K
F-178
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the paper exit motor (M2) and the paper exit conveyance
[2] [1] [3] belt. (Refer to F.16.2.2 Replacing the entrance conveyance motor
paper exit conveyance belt)
2. Remove the conveyance pulley. (Refer to F.16.2.3 Replacing the
paper exit pulley and the conveyance pulley)
3. Remove the screw [1], and remove the knob [2].
4. Remove the screws [3], 2 each, and E-rings [4], 1 each, and then
remove the bearing/K [5], 1 each.
Note
• When you reinstall the bearing/K [7], be sure to that the
notch of the bearing/K comes in the position [6] as it is
[7] [4] [5] shown in the picture.
• When you reinstall the bearing/K [7], be sure to apply the
Molykote EM-30L inside of the bearing/K [7].
5. Remove the merging section roller [7].

reverse.
7. After you replace the merging section roller and bearing/K, be sure
to reset the special parts counter.
Merging section roller
• Number 367 (1250, 1250P, and 1052)
Bearing/K
[6] • Number 371 (1250, 1250P, and 1052)
[3]
[5] [4]
16.2.6 Replacing the stacker entrance roller and bearing/K

• Stacker entrance roller
• Bearing/K
F-179
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the paper exit motor (M1) and the entrance conveyance
[2] [1] [3] [4] belt. (Refer to F.16.2.2 Replacing the entrance conveyance motor
paper exit conveyance belt)
2. Remove the conveyance pulley. (Refer to F.16.2.3 Replacing the
paper exit pulley and the conveyance pulley)
3. Remove the screw [1], and remove the knob [2].
4. Remove each 1 spring [3].
5. Remove the screw [4], 1 each, and the mounting metal fitting [5], 1
each.
6. Remove the E-ring [6], 1 each, and then remove bearing/K [7], 1
each.
[9] [7] [6] [5] Note
• When you reinstall the bearing/K [7], be sure that the
notch of the bearing/K comes in the position [8] as it is
shown in the picture.
Molykote EM-30L inside of the bearing/K [7].
7. Remove the stacker entrance roller [9].

reverse.
9. After you replace the stacker entrance roller and bearing/K, be
sure to reset the parts counter.
Stacker entrance roller
[3] [8] [7] • Number 367 (1250, 1250P, and 1052)
Bearing/K
[5] • Number 371 (1250, 1250P, and 1052)
[4]
[6]
16.2.7 Replacing the re-feed roller and bearing/K

• Paper re-feed roller
• Bearing/K
F-180
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the entrance motor (M1), the entrance conveyance belt,
[3] [6] [1] the paper exit motor (M2) and the paper exit conveyance belt.
(Refer to "F.16.2.2 Replacing the entrance conveyance motor
paper exit conveyance belt")
Remove the paper exit pulley and the conveyance pulley.
(Refer to "F.16.2.3 Replacing the paper exit pulley and the
[2] conveyance pulley")
2. Remove each of the spring [1], 1 each.
3. Remove each of the screws [2], 1 each, and the mounting metal
fitting [3], 1 each.
4. Remove the E-rings [4], 1 each, and then remove 5 bearing/K [5].
Note
[4] [5] [8] • When the bearing/K [5] is reinstalled, be sure that the
notch of the bearing/K [5] comes in the position [6].
Molykote EM-30L inside the bearing/K [5].
5. Remove the paper re-feed roller [8].

reverse.
7. After you replace the paper re-feed roller and bearing/K, be sure to
reset the special parts counter.
Paper re-feed roller
• Number 368 (1250, 1250P, and 1052)
[5] [1] Bearing/K
• Number 371 (1250, 1250P, and 1052)
[3] • Number 370 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, and C1060)
[2]
[4]
16.2.8 Replacing the driven roller

• Driven roller
F-181
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the left cover.
[6] [5] [8] [3] (Refer to G.15.2.4 Left cover)
Remove the rear cover.
(Refer to G.15.2.5 Upper cover)
2. Remove the 2 open close springs [1].
3. Release the release spring/Rt [2] and remove the screw [3]. Then
remove the locking claw [4] and the release spring/Rt [2].
4. Release the release spring/Lt [5] and remove the screw [6]. Then
remove the locking claw [7] and the release spring/Lt [5].
5. Remove the 3 E-rings [8] and remove the pin [9]. Then pull out the
open close lever Assy [10] in the arrow-marked direction.
[7] [9] [10] [2] [4]
[1]
6. Disconnect the 3 connectors [1], remove the saddle and release

[1] the wiring harness.
7. Remove the screw [2], and then remove the open close shaft
Assy/Rt [3].
8. Pull out the straight conveyance guide plate/Up [4] in the arrow-
marked direction.
[2] [1]
[4] [3]
F-182
[3] 9. Remove the 1 screw [1] and then remove the open close lever lock
part [2].
10. Remove 10 screws [3] and 3 screws [4].
11. Remove the 3 saddles [5], and release the wiring harness, and
remove the conveyance cover/Up [6].
[2] [1]
[4] [3]
[5] [6]
12. Remove the holding spring [1], 1 each, and remove the 4 driven
[2] [1] rollers [2], 4 each.
F-183
reverse.
Note
• When you reinstall the driven roller, be sure that the
groove of the drive motor [1] faces down.
14. After you replace the driven roller, be sure to reset the special
parts counter.
• Number 370 (1250, 1250P, and 1052)
[1]
16.2.9 Replacing the straight gate

(1) Periodically replaced parts, spotted replaced parts and the cycle
• Straight gate
(2) Procedure
[2] [3] [1] [2] 2. Disconnect the 2 connectors [1].
3. Remove the saddle [2] of the gate motor mounting plate at 6
places and release the wiring harness.
4. Remove the 3 screws [3] and then remove the fan motor mounting
plate [4].
[3] [4] [1] [2] [3]
5. Remove the straight gate spring [1].

6. Remove the screw [2] and remove the straight gate solenoid arm
[3] [5] [4] [3].
7. Remove the E-ring [4] and remove the bearing [5].
[1] [2]
F-184
8. Remove the straight conveyance guide plate [1].
[4] 9. Remove the E-ring [2] and bearing [3], and pull out the straight
[1] gate [4] in the arrow-marked direction.
reverse.
11. After you replace the straight gate, be sure to reset the special
parts counter.
Straight gate
• Number 365 (1250, 1250P, and 1052)
[3]
[2]
16.2.10 Replacing the stack switch motor (M6)

(1) Periodically replaced parts, spotted replaced parts and cycle
• Stack switch motor (M6)
(2) Procedure
[1] [4] (Refer to G.15.2.3 Rear cover)
2. Remove the saddle [1], and release the wiring harness.
4. Remove the 2 screws [3], and remove the stack switch motor (M6)
[4].
[2] [3]

reverse.
Note
• When you install the stack switch motor (M6), be sure to
fit the gear of the stack switch motor (M6) to the belt [1].
6. After you replace the stack switch motor (M6), be sure to reset the
special parts counter.
Stack switch motor (M6)
• Number 375 (1250, 1250P, and 1052)
[1]
F-185
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L PROCEDURE FS-53...
17. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE FS-531

CAUTION

17.2.1 Replacing the intermediate conveyance roller (sponge roller)
• Intermediate conveyance roller (sponge roller)
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 200,000 counts (Special parts counter))
Note
• When you replace the intermediate conveyance roller (sponge roller), be sure to replace both of 2 sets (4 all) at a time.
(2) Procedure
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and the bearing [2] and then remove the
shaft [3] of the intermediate roller.
[2]
[1]
[3]
15jkf2c004na
[1] 3. Insert a driver into the groove of the sponge roller, prize open and
remove the sponge roller.
15jkf2c005na
4. With each of the depressions [1] of a new sponge roller and the
shaft that is brought together, press the sponge roller until it clicks
to fit it in securely.
[1] reverse.
Note
• When reinstalling, check that the pin on the rear side of
[1] the intermediate conveyance roller shaft is inserted into
the groove on the receiver side securely.
6. After you replace the intermediate conveyance roller, conduct the

15jkf2c006na following item.
The parts counter of the intermediate conveyance roller
• Number 257 (C7000, C7000P, C70hc, C6000, and C6000L)
17.3 Main tray section

17.3.1 Replacing the paper exit roller (sponge roller)
• Paper exit roller/A (sponge roller)
• Paper exit roller/B (sponge roller)
Note
• When you replace the paper exit roller (sponge roller), be sure to replace 3 sets of the paper exit roller/A (6 all) and 2 sets of the
paper exit roller/B (4 all) at a time.
F-186
(2) Procedure
1. Activate the main power switch (SW1) and the sub power switch
(SW2) of the main body.
2. Push up the actuator [1] of the main tray upper limit sensor (PS2)
with fingers and down the main tray [2].
3. Deactivate SW1 and SW2 of the main body, and unplug the power
plug.
[1] [2]
15vlf2c001na
4. Insert a driver into the groove of the sponge roller, prize open and
[1] remove the sponge roller.
15jkf2c002na
[1] reverse.
7. After you replace the paper exit roller/A and the paper exit roller/B,
[1] The parts counter of the paper exit roller/A
• The parts counter of the paper exit roller/A
The parts counter of the paper exit roller/B
15jkf2c003na • Number 256 (C7000, C7000P, C70hc, C6000, and C6000L)
17.4 Stacker section

17.4.1 Replacing the paper assist roller (sponge roller)
• Paper assist roller (sponge roller)
F-187
Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 400,000 counts (Special parts counter))
(2) Procedure
[2] [1] 1. Open the front door.
2. Pull out the stacker unit.
3. Remove the C-clip [2] and then remove the paper assist roller [1].
reverse.
5. After you replace the paper assist roller, conduct the following
item.
The parts counter of the paper assist roller
15jkf2c007na
17.4.2 Replacement of the cleaning plate Assy

• Cleaning plate assy
Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 400,000 counts (Special parts counter))
(2) Procedure
[1]
3. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the cleaning plate Assy [2].
reverse.
5. After you replace the cleaning plate assy, conduct the following
item.
The parts counter of the cleaning plate assy
[2]
a0drf2c001ca
17.5 Stapler section

17.5.1 Replacing the stapler unit
• Stapler unit
Note
• Be sure not to move the stapler unit in the horizontal direction by hand. Otherwise, it causes the timing belt tooth skipping.
(2) Procedure
[3] [4] [1] 1. Open the front door.
3. Remove the cartridge from the stapler.
4. Remove 2 screws [2] from the stapler stand/Fr [1], and then
remove the stapler stand/Fr [1].
Note
• When the screw hole for the screw [2] is too loose, the
screw hole [3] can be used.
• When you reinstall it, be careful not to damage the pet [4].
[2] 15jkf2c008na
F-188
5. Remove the connector cover [1], and then disconnect 2
connectors [2].
6. Remove the screw [3], and then remove the ground cable [4].
[4] [3] [2] [1] 15jkf2c009nb
[2] [1] 7. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the stapler stand/Fr [2]
from the stapler/Fr [3].
[3] 15jkf2c010na
[1] 8. Repeat the steps 4 to 7 to remove the stapler/Rr [1].

reverse.
10. After you replace the stapler unit/Fr and the stapler unit/Rr,
The parts counter of the stapler unit/Fr
The parts counter of the stapler unit/Rr
15jkf2c011na
F-189

CAUTION

18.2.1 Replacing the intermediate conveyance roller (sponge roller)
• Intermediate conveyance roller (sponge roller)
Note
• When you replace the intermediate conveyance roller (sponge roller), be sure to replace both of 2 sets (4 all) at a time.
(2) Procedure
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and the bearing [2] and then remove the
shaft [3] of the intermediate roller.
[2]
[1]
[3]
15jkf2c004na
[1] 3. Insert a driver into the groove of the sponge roller, prize open and
remove the sponge roller.
15jkf2c005na
[1] reverse.
Note
• When reinstalling, check that the pin on the rear side of
[1] the intermediate conveyance roller shaft is inserted into
the groove on the receiver side securely.
6. After you replace the intermediate conveyance roller, conduct the

15jkf2c006na following item.
The parts counter of the intermediate conveyance roller
• Number 257 (C8000, C7000, C7000P, C70hc, C6000, and
C6000L)

18.3.1 Replacing the paper exit roller (sponge roller)
• Paper exit roller/A (sponge roller)
• Paper exit roller/B (sponge roller)
Note
• When you replace the paper exit roller (sponge roller), be sure to replace 3 sets of the paper exit roller/A (6 all) and 2 sets of the
paper exit roller/B (4 all) at a time.
F-190
(2) Procedure
1. Activate the main power switch (SW1) and the sub power switch
with fingers and down the main tray [2].
3. Deactivate SW1 and SW2 of the main body, and unplug the power
plug.
[1] [2]
15vlf2c001na
4. Insert a driver into the groove of the sponge roller, prize open and
[1] remove the sponge roller.
15jkf2c002na
[1] reverse.
7. After you replace the paper exit roller/A and the paper exit roller/B,
[1] The parts counter of the paper exit roller/A
C6000L)
15jkf2c003na The parts counter of the paper exit roller/B
C6000L)
F-191

18.4.1 Replacing the paper assist roller (sponge roller)
• Paper assist roller (sponge roller)
(2) Procedure
3. Open the paper assist section [1] and then lift the paper assist
roller [2].
4. Remove the C-clip [3] and then remove the paper assist roller [2].
reverse.
6. After you replace the paper assist roller, conduct the following
item.
The parts counter of the paper assist roller
C6000L)
[1] • Number 287 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, and C1060L)
[3] [2] 15jmf2c001na

18.5.1 Removing/reinstalling the stapler unit cover
CAUTION
• When you remove the FS from the main body and pull out the stacker unit, FS possibly falls and causes an injury to you.
(1) Procedure
2. Pull out the stacker unit [1].
[1] 15jmf2c002na
3. Remove 2 screws [1] that are provided on the rail stopper, and
[1]
then pull out the stacker unit [2] further.
Note
• To prevent the falling of the FS, put something [3] under
the pulled out stacker unit for balancing.
[1]
[2]
[3] 15jmf2c003na
F-192
4. Remove 5 screws [1] and then remove the stapler unit cover [2].
reverse.
[1]
[2]
15jmf2c004na

Note
• The stapler unit consists of the clincher section and the stapler section.
• Be sure not to move the clincher section and the stapler section in the horizontal direction by hand. Otherwise, it causes the
timing belt tooth skipping.
• After you install the stapler unit, be sure to perform the staple up down position adjustment. (Refer to I.20.9 Staple up/down
position adjustment)

• Stapler unit
(2) Procedure
[2] [1] [3] 1. Enter the service mode and select [State Confirmation]- [I/O Check
Mode]. Perform the output code 72-32: Stapler movement motor
(M11) (A4, 1-stapling position). Then deactivate the main body.
3. Pull out the stacker unit and remove the stapler unit cover. (Refer
to F.18.5.1 Removing/reinstalling the stapler unit cover)
4. Disconnect the connector [1], remove the screw [2] and then
remove the flat stitching stopper release unit/Fr [3].
5. Enter the service mode and select [State Confirmation]- [I/O Check
Mode]. Perform the output code 72-31, and then deactivate the
main body.
15jmf2c005na
[5] 6. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the ground [2] and the
clamp [3].
7. Remove 4 screws [4] to remove the clincher/Fr [5], and then
remove the connector [6].
[6] [4]
[1]
[3] [2]
15jmf2c006na
F-193
[2] [1] 8. Remove the screw [1] and remove the flat stitching stopper release
unit/Rr [2].
9. Disconnect the connector [3] at the rear side of the flat stitching
stopper release unit/Rr [2] and remove the wiring harness from the
clamp [4].
[3] [4]
15jmf2c007na
[2] 10. Remove 4 screws [4] of the clincher/Rr [1] and then remove the
ground [3].
[1] [3] 15jmf2c008na
[3] 11. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the ball bearing bracket [2].
Then rotate the clincher/Rr so that it comes to the position easily
removed and disconnect the connector [4].
Note
• Be careful not to lose the ball bearing retaining spring [5]
and the ball.
[4]
[5] [1]
[2] 15jmf2c009na
[2] 12. Remove the cartridge from the stapler.

13. Remove 4 screws [2] of the stapler/Fr [1], and remove the screw
[1] [3] of the ground cable. Then put out the stapler/Fr [1] and
disconnect the connector [4].
[2]
[3] [4] 15jmf2c010na
F-194
14. Remove 2 screws [2] and remove the mounting plate [3] from the
stapler/Fr [2].
[1] [3] [2] 15jmf2c011na
[1] 15. Remove 2 screws [3] of the sensor cover [2] of the stapler/Rr [1].
After you remove the screws, remove the screw [4] of the ground
cable and then disconnect the connector [5].
Note
• When you reinstall the sensor cover [2], be sure that the
wiring harness does not interfere the stapler rotation
[2]
home sensor (PS13) [7]. Also be sure that the gear does
not nip it.
[5]
[3] [4] [6]

15jmf2c012na
[1] 16. Remove 4 screws [1] to remove the stapler/Rr [2], and then
disconnect the connector [3].
[2] Note
• When you remove the stapler/Rr [2], be careful not to
damage PS13 [4].
[1]
[4] [3]
15jmf2c013na
17. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the mounting plate [3] from the
stapler/Rr [2].
reverse.
19. After you replace the stapler unit/Fr and the stapler unit/Rr,
The parts counter of the stapler unit/Fr
C6000L)
The parts counter of the stapler unit/Rr
[3] [1] [2] 15jmf2c014na C6000L)
F-195
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L PROCEDURE PI-50...
19. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE PI-502

CAUTION

19.2.1 Replacing the pick-up roller/Up and the paper feed roller/Up
(1) Spotted replaced parts, cycle
• Pick-up roller/Up
• Paper feed roller/Up
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the upper cover. (Refer to G.19.2.2 Upper cover)
[1]
[1] [2] 2. Remove 2 C-clips [1] and slide outward the bearings [2] at the left
and right to remove the paper feed roller Assy/Up [3].
[2]
[3]
15jff2c001na
3. Remove the bearing [1] and remove the actuator [2].
[1]
[2]
a04hf2c001ca
4. Remove 2 C-clips [1] and then remove 2 bearings [2].
[2]
[1]
a04hf2c002ca
[2] [3] 5. Remove the C-clip [1].

6. Slide 2 roller shafts [2] in the arrow-marked direction and remove
the pick-up roller/Up [3] and the paper feed roller/Up [4].
Note
• When you reinstall, be sure to assemble them so that the
blue surfaces of the one-way clutches of the pick-up roller
and the paper feed roller come to the front side.
[4] [1] a04hf2c003ca
F-196
[2] [5] [1] 7. Remove the pick-up roller [1] and the paper feed roller [2] from the
one-way clutches [3] and [4].
Note
• When you reinstall the pick-up roller [1], insert the one-
way clutch [3] from the notch [5] side so that the notch [5]
of the pick-up roller matches with the projection [6] of the
one-way clutch.
[7] • When you reinstall the paper feed roller [2], insert the one-
way clutch [4] so that its projection [8] fits to the notch [7]
[4] [3] of the paper feed roller.
[8] [6] a04hf2c004ca 8. Reinstall the parts that were previously mentioned following the
9. After you replace the pick-up roller/Up and the paper feed roller/
Up, conduct the following steps.
For the pick up roller/Up: Counter reset of the parts counter
• Number 264 (C8000)
• Number 392 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 190 (951)
• Number 308 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, C1060L)
• Number 264 (C1100, C1085)
For the feed roller/Up: Counter reset of the parts counter
• Number 265 (C8000)
• Number 393 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 191 (951)
• Number 265 (C1100, C1085)
19.2.2 Replacing the pick-up roller/Lw and the paper feed roller/Lw
• Pick-up roller/Lw
• Paper feed roller/Lw
(2) Procedure
[1] [2]
1. Pull the release lever [1] and open the upper door [2].
2. Perform steps 2 to 7 of "F.19.2.1 Replacing the pick-up roller/Up
and the paper feed roller/Up."
3. Reinstall the parts that were previously mentioned following the
4. After you replace the pick-up roller/Lw and the paper feed roller/
Lw, conduct the following steps.
For the pick up roller/Lw: Counter reset of the parts counter
15jff2c004na • Number 269 (C8000)
• Number 397 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 195 (951)
• Number 269 (C1100, C1085)
For the feed roller/Lw: Counter reset of the parts counter
• Number 270 (C8000)
• Number 398 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 196 (951)
• Number 270 (C1100, C1085)
19.2.3 Replacing the separation roller/Up and the torque limiter/Up

• Separation roller/Up
• Torque limiter/Up
F-197
(2) Procedure
[1]
[1] [2] 2. Remove 2 C-clips [1] and slide outward the bearings [2] at the left
and right to remove the paper feed roller assy/Up [3].
[2]
[3]
15jff2c005na
[2] 3. Release the hooks on the right and left, and then lift the separation
roller assy/Up [2] to remove it.
[1] 15jff2c006na
[1] [2] 4. Remove the C-clip [1] from the separation roller assy/Up and then
remove the separation roller/Up [2] and the torque limiter/Up [3].
[3]
Note
• Be sure to install the separation roller/Up with its 2
notches [4] on the front and fitted to the projections [5].
[4]
6. After you replace the separation roller/Up and the torque limiter/
[5] 15jff2c007na Up, conduct the followings.
For the feed roller/Up: Counter reset of the parts counter
• Number 266 (C8000)
• Number 394 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 192 (951)
• Number 266 (C1100, C1085)
For the torque limiter/Up: Counter reset of the parts counter
• Number 267 (C8000)
• Number 395 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 193 (951)
• Number 267 (C1100, C1085)
19.2.4 Replacing the separation roller/Lw and the torque limiter/Lw

• Separation roller/Lw
• Torque limiter/Lw
F-198
(2) Procedure
[1] [2]
2. Perform steps 2, 3 and 4 of "F.19.2.3 Replacing the separation
roller/Up and the torque limiter/Up."
4. After you replace the separation roller/Lw and the torque limiter/
Lw, conduct the followings.
For the separation roller/Lw: Counter reset of the parts counter
15jff2c008na • Number 271 (C8000)
• Number 399 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 197 (951)
• Number 271 (C1100, C1085)
For the torque limiter/Lw: Counter reset of the parts counter
• Number 272 (C8000)
• Number 400 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 198 (951)
• Number 272 (C1100, C1085)
19.2.5 Replacing the paper feed clutch/Up (CL201) and the paper feed clutch/Lw (CL202)
• Paper feed clutch/Up (CL201)
• Paper feed clutch/Lw (CL202)
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the PI Unit. (Refer to G.19.2.5 PI unit)
[2] [1] [3] [5] 2. Remove the upper cover. (Refer to G.19.2.2 Upper cover)
4. Remove the screw [1] and remove the clutch fixing cover [2].
Note
• When you install the clutch fixing plate, be sure to install
it so that the spring [3] comes under the fixing plate.
• When you install the clutch fixing plate, be sure to engage
the stopper [4] of the clutch with the fixing plate and
install it.
5. Remove the connector [5], remove the E-ring [6] and remove the
paper feed clutch/Up [7].
Note
[4] [7] • When you install the paper feed clutch/Up [7], be sure to
engage the D-cut [8] of the shaft with the paper feed
clutch/Up and install it.
[6] [8]
F-199
[4] 7. Remove 5 screws [3] and disconnect 2 connectors [4].
8. Release the wiring from the saddle and pull out the PIDB mounting
plate [5] toward you.
[3]
[1] [2] [5]
[3]
Note
• When you install the PIDB mounting plate, be sure to
engage the notch [1] of the mounting plate with the
projection [2] of the paper feed clutch/Lw.
[2] [1]
9. Remove the E-ring [1] and remove the conveyance clutch/Lw [2].
Note
• When you install the paper feed clutch/Up [2], be sure to
engage the D-cut [3] of the shaft with the paper feed
clutch/Up and install it.
11. After you replace the paper feed clutch/Up and the paper feed
clutch/Lw, conduct the following steps.
For the paper feed clutch/Up: Counter reset of the parts counter
• Number 263 (C8000)
[1] [3] [2] • Number 263 (C7000, C7000P, C70hc, C6000, and C6000L)
• Number 391 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 189 (951)
• Number 263 (C1100, C1085)
For the paper feed clutch/Lw: Counter reset of the parts counter
• Number 268 (C8000)
• Number 396 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 194 (951)
• Number 268 (C1100, C1085)
F-200
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L PROCEDURE FS-532

CAUTION
20.2 Paper conveyance section

20.2.1 Lubrication of the FNS entrance roller conveyance switching cam, the FNS entrance roller conveyance
switching gate/Up
(1) Periodic lubrication parts and cycle
• FNS entrance roller conveyance switching cam
: Periodical lubrication cycle: Every 1,000,000 counts (total counter) *1
: Periodical lubrication cycle: Every 750,000 counts (total counter) *2
• FNS entrance roller conveyance switching gate /Up
*1 1250, 1250P, 1052, C1070, C1070P, C71hc, and C1060
*2 951
*3 C1100, C1085
(2) Procedure
2. Apply the Molykote EM-30L on the FNS entrance roller
conveyance switching cam [1] and the arm section [2] of the FNS
entrance roller conveyance switching gate/Up.
[1]
[2]

20.3.1 Replacing the paddle
• Paddle
F-201
(2) Procedure
2. Remove each E-ring [1] and then remove the paddle [2], 3 each, in
Note
• When you remove the paddles, be careful not to drop the
E-ring [1] and the axis pin [3].
[3] [2] [1] [1] [2] [3]
3. Remove 3 paddles [2] each from the paddle assy [1].

Note
• When you reinstall the paddles, be sure to install the
paddles in the same direction as they were installed
before.

5. After you replace the paddle, conduct the following steps.
When you connect to 1250, 1250P, and 1052
- Counter reset of the special parts counter number 256
When you connect to 951
[1] [2] [1] [2] - Counter reset of the special parts counter number 170
When it is connected to C1070, C1070P, C71hc, and C1060
When it is connected to C1100, C1085
20.3.2 Lubrication of the stapler shaft and the rear stopper shaft
• Stapler shaft
• Rear stopper shaft
*1 1250, 1250P, 1052, C1070, C1070P, C71hc, and C1060
*2 951
*3 C1100, C1085
(2) Procedure
2. Apply the Molykote EM-30L on 2 stapler shafts [1].
3. Apply the Molykote EM-30L on the rear stopper shaft [2], and
move the rear stopper/Fr [3] and rear stopper/Rr [4].
[2] [3] [4] [1]
F-202

• Staple unit
(2) Procedure
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the wiring mounting cover
[2].
[1]
3. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the connector cover [2].
[2]
[1]
F-203
4. Disconnect 2 connectors [1], and release the wiring harness.
[2] [4] 5. Remove the screw [2] to remove the ground [3], and then release
the wiring harness.
6. Release the wiring harness from the hole [4], remove the screw
[5].
7. While you remove the screw [6], remove the stapler unit assy [7] in
Note
• Be sure to remove the screw [5] before you remove the
[3] screw [6]. Otherwise, the stapler unit assy [7] could
deform.
[5] [1] [7]
[6]
[1] Note
• The staple position changes when you remove the stapler
unit assy.
Be sure to record the current adjustment position [1]
before you remove, and then adjust the position again
when you install. (Refer to I.23.1 Staple position
adjustment)
F-204
8. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the staple unit [2].
[2] removal steps in reverse.
10. After you replace the staple unit, conduct the following item.
Staple Position Adjustment (Refer to I.23.1 Staple position
adjustment)
Counter reset of the parts counter Number 231
Counter reset of the parts counter Number 167
- Staple unit: counter reset of the parts counter number 295
[1]

20.5.1 Cleaning and lubrication of the paper exit alignment plate shaft
• Paper exit alignment plate shaft
: Periodical cleaning cycle: Every 1,000,000 counts (total counter) *1
: Periodical cleaning cycle: Every 750,000 counts (total counter) *2
: Periodic cleaning cycle: Every 700,000 counts (Total counter)*3
*1 1250, 1250P, 1052, C1070, C1070P, C71hc, and C1060
*2 951
*3 C1100, C1085

• Paper exit alignment plate shaft
*1 1250, 1250P, 1052, C1070, C1070P, C71hc, and C1060
*2 951
*3 C1100, C1085
(3) Procedure
1. Remove the upper cover/Fr2. (Refer to G.20.3.7 Upper cover/Fr2)
2. Remove the upper cover/Rr. (Refer to G.20.3.8 Upper cover/Rr)
3. Remove 3 screws [1] and remove the paper exit cover/Up [2].
4. Clean the paper exit alignment plate shaft [1] with the isopropyl
alcohol and apply the MH surf or Molykote EM-30L.
[2] [1]
F-205
[1]
F-206
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L PROCEDURE SD-510
21. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE SD-510

CAUTION
21.2 Alignment section

21.2.1 Replacing the paddle/1, the paddle/2, and the paddle/3
• Paddle/1
• Paddle/2
• Paddle/3
(2) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Fully pull out the SD unit. (Refer to G.21.3.4 SD unit)
2. Remove the stapler unit cover. (Refer to G.21.3.3 Stapler unit
cover)
3. Remove each screw [1], and then remove 2 paddle/1 [2].
F-207
4. Lift up the paper exit guide [1] and remove each screw [2], and
then remove 2 paddle/3 [3]
5. Remove each screw [4], and then remove 2 paddle/2 [5].
7. After you replace the paddle/1, paddle/2 and paddle/3, conduct the
following steps.
- Paddle/1, paddle/2, paddle/3: Counter reset of number 390
[2] [3] When it is connected to C1070, C1070P, C71hc, and C1060
[1]
[4] [5]

• Staple unit

1. Fully pull out the SD unit and install the SD support stay. (Refer to
G.21.3.4 SD unit)
2. Remove the front cover. (Refer to "G.21.3.2 Front cover")
3. Remove the stapler unit cover. G.21.3.3 Stapler unit cover
4. Remove the 2 screws [2] and then remove the SD unit cover/Lt [1]
to the arrow-marked direction.
[1] [2]
F-208
5. Remove the saddle, and release the wiring harness [1].
6. Remove the screw [2] and then remove the ground [3].
[2]
[1] [3]
7. Remove 6 screws [1] and then remove the guide plate [2].
Note
• When you install the guide plate [2], be sure to match the
hole [3] to the projection [4] of the guide plate.
[3][4] [1]
[2]
[1]
8. Remove 2 screws [1] to remove the clincher cover [2].

[3] Note
• Remove the clincher cover [2] to the arrow-marked
direction so that the claws [3] are released from the
projection [4]
[4] • When you remove the clincher cover [2], be sure not to
[5] break the paddle [5].
[2]
[1]
F-209
10. Remove 2 screws [2] and 2 screws [3]. Then remove the stapler
unit assy [4].
Note
[1] • When you remove the screws [3], insert the driver into the
hole [5] and remove them.
[4] [2]
[5] [3]
11. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the stapler unit [2].
[1]
[1] [2]

Note
• When the stapler unit is removed, be sure to adjust the position with the staple adjustment jig.
1. Install the stapler unit [2] with 4 screws [1].
[1]
[1] [2]
F-210
2. Install the connector [1].
3. Install the stapler unit assy [3] with 4 screws [2].
Note
• When you install the stapler unit assy [3], be sure to
[1] match the projection [4] to the hole [5] of the stapler unit
assy.
[3] [2]
[2] [4][5]
4. Loosen 2 screws [2] of the clincher [1].

[4] [3] Note
• Make sure that 2 injections [3] of the clincher do not come
off from 2 slotted holes [4].
• Be careful that if the 2 screws [2] are too loose, the staple
adjustment jig [6] cannot be inserted.
5. Insert the staple adjustment jig [6] between the stapler unit [5] and
the clincher [1], and adjust the horizontal position of the clincher
[1].
Note
• When you insert the staple adjustment jig [6], be sure to
insert it from obliquely upward as indicated by the allow
mark [7].
[5] [7] [2] [1] [6]
6. Loosen 2 screws [2] to fasten the clincher [1].
7. Pull out the staple adjustment jig [6].
9. After you replace the staple unit, conduct the following item.
21.3.2 Cleaning and lubrication of the staple guide/Up and the staple guide/Lw
• Staple guide/Up and staple guide/Lw
: Periodic cleaning cycle: Every 700,000 counts (Total counter)*3
*1 1250, 1250P, 1052, C1070, C1070P, C71hc, and C1060
*2 951
*3 C1100, C1085

• Staple guide/Up and staple guide/Lw
*1 1250, 1250P, 1052, C1070, C1070P, C71hc, and C1060
*2 951
F-211
*3 C1100, C1085
(3) Procedure
1. Fully pull out the SD unit. (Refer to G.21.3.4 SD unit)
[2] [1] 2. Remove the stapler unit cover. (Refer to G.21.3.3 Stapler unit
cover)
3. Clean the staple guide/Up [1] and apply the MH Surf at 2 places [2]
of the guide shaft.
Note
• When you move the stapler unit to the right or the left, be
sure to hold the main body of the stapler.
• When the MH surf is not available, perform only cleaning.
4. Remove the SD unit cover/Lt. (Refer to F.21.3.1 Replacing the

stapler unit)
5. Clean the staple guide/Lw [1] and apply the MH Surf at 2 places [2]
of the guide shaft.
Note
• When you move the stapler unit to the right or the left, be
sure to hold the main body of the stapler.
• When the MH surf is not available, perform only cleaning.

[2] [1]
21.4 Half-fold/folding&staple/tri-folding section

21.4.1 Cleaning the folding roller/1, the folding roller/2
• Folding roller/1, folding roller/2
*1 1250, 1250P, 1052, C1070, C1070P, C71hc, and C1060
*2 951
*3 C1100, C1085
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the folding knife assy /1. (Refer to G.21.3.5 Folding knife
[4] assy/1)
2. Clean the folding roller/1 [2] and the folding roller/2 [3] with the
isopropyl alcohol while you lift up the conveyance guide plate [1].
Note
• Be careful not to adhere the isopropyl alcohol to the PET
parts [4].

reverse.
[3] [2] [4] [1]
F-212
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L PROCEDURE LS-50...
22. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE LS-505/LS-506

CAUTION

22.2.1 Replacing the stacker tray up down motor (M1)
• Stacker tray up down motor (M1)
: Every 1,500,000 counts (Total counter) *1 (Actual replacement cycle: Every 5,000,000 counts (Special parts counter) *2)
*1 The periodical replacement is only for 1200, 1200P, and 1051.
*2 Actual replacement cycle of 1250, 1250P, 1052, 1200, 1200P, 1051, C8000, C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, C1100, and C1085
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the rear cover/Lw. (Refer to G.23.2.2 Cover)
[1] [2] [5] 2. Disconnect 2 connectors [1], and release the wiring harness.
3. Remove 2 screws [2] and remove the sensor mounting plate [3].
4. Remove 4 screws [4] and remove the stacker tray up down motor
(M1) [5].
[3] [4]
5. Check points when you reinstall the stacker tray up down motor
[5] (M1)
Note
• When you reinstall the stacker tray up down motor (M1),
be sure to check that the belt [2] has been engaged with
[4] the gear [1], and then engage it with the gear [3] before
you fasten the stacker tray up down motor (M1) [4].
• When the belt [2] is not horizontally attached between the
gear [1] and the gear [3], rotate the encoder [5]
counterclockwise to make adjustments.
[1] [3]
[2] ls502fs2002c
6. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the motor mounting plate [3]
[2] from the stacker tray up down motor (M1) [2].
reverse.
[3] 8. After you replace the part, be sure to reset the parts counter.
• Number 274, 279 or number 269 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 216 or Number 221 (1200, 1200P, and 1051)
• Number 219 or Number 224 (C8000)
[1]
• Number 250 or number 257 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 219 or number 224 (C1100, C1085)
ls502fs2003c
22.2.2 Replacing the paper press solenoid/3 (SD8)

• Paper press solenoid/3 (SD8)
F-213
(2) Procedure
Note
• When you conduct this operation, be sure to bring the stacker tray down to the bottom in advance.
1. Remove the LC-501 from the main body while the stacker tray is
placed.
[2] 2 2. Remove the C-clip [1].
3. Move the guide rail [2] on the front side to the arrow-marked
direction and release the fixing.
1
[1]
4. Slant the shift unit [1] to the front side so that you can see the
upper surface of it.
Note
• Be sure to slide the shift unit about 10cm to the right in
[1] advance.
• Be careful that the belt [2] does not get pushed down by
the bottom of the shift unit.
5. Release the cable stopper [3] and remove the ribbon cable [5] from
[2]
the connector [4].
[4]
[5]
[3] ls502fs2005c
6. How to handle the ribbon cable

Note
• Slide the lock [2] of the connector [1] for the ribbon cable
[1] in the arrow-marked direction and remove the ribbon
cable [3].
[3] When you reinstall the ribbon cable, insert the cable and
then slide the lock in the reverse direction.
[2]
[1]
[3]
[2]
ls502fs2006c
F-214
8. Move the guide rail [2] on the rear side to the arrow-marked
direction and release the fixing.
9. Remove the belt [5] from the stopper section [4] of the shift unit [3].
[4] [5]
[3]
2
[2]
1
[1] ls502fs2007c
10. Check point when you reinstall the belt

Note
[2] • When you attach the belt [2] to the stopper section [1],
slide the shift unit [3] in the arrow-marked direction and
[1] engage the stopper section with the belt.
[2]
[1]
[3]
ls502fs2008c
[1] [4] 11. Remove the shift unit [2] through the clearance between the belts
[1].
Note
• When you remove the conveyance unit [2], be careful that
the edge stoppers [3] and the paper pressure arms/3 [4]
do not contact the belt [1].
[2]
[4] [3] ls502fs2009c
F-215
12. Remove the connector [1] and cut the wire binding band.
Note
• When you cut the wire binding band, be careful not to cut
the lead wire.
• When you attach the wire binding band, bundle it at the
same place.
13. Remove 2 springs [2].

14. Rotate the wire saddle [5] in the arrow-marked direction and
remove it.
15. Remove 3 screws [3] and remove the paper press solenoid/3 assy
[4].
[1] [3] [5] [4]
[3]
[3] [2] ls502fs2010c
16. Check point when you reinstall the paper press solenoid/3 assy
Note
• When you reinstall the paper press solenoid/3 assy, be
[1]
sure to insert the pin [2] of the shaft into the slit section
[1] at the tip of the solenoid.
[2]
ls502fs2011c
[3] 17. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the solenoid mounting plate [3]
from the paper press solenoid/3 (SD8) [2].
reverse.
[2] ls502fs2012c

F-216
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the front cover/Up and front cover/Lw. (Refer to G.23.2.2
[3] [4]
Cover)
[2] 3. Remove the spring [2].
4. Remove 2 screws [3] and remove the paper press solenoid/1 assy
[4].
Note
[6] • When you reinstall the paper press solenoid/1 assy, be
sure to insert the actuator [6] that is provided at the tip of
the shaft into the slit section [5] at the tip of the solenoid.
[5] [1] a0h1t3c001ca
from the paper press solenoid/1 (SD6) [2].
reverse.
[3] [2]

(2) Procedure
[2] [6] 1. Remove the front cover/Up and front cover/Lw. (Refer to G.23.2.2
[5] Cover)
3. Remove the spring [2].
4. Remove 2 screws [3] and remove the paper press solenoid/2
(SD7) [4].
[3]
Note
• When you reinstall the paper press solenoid/2 (SD7), be

[1] [4] ls502fs2033c reverse.
22.2.5 Replacing the rear stopper solenoid (SD3)

• Rear stopper solenoid (SD3)
F-217

[3] [2] 1. Remove the rear cover/Lw. (Refer to G.23.2.2 Cover)
4. Remove 2 screws [3] and remove the rear stopper solenoid (SD3)
[4].
[1] [4]
from the rear stopper solenoid (SD3) [2].
[2] [3]

[1] 1. Install the solenoid mounting plate [3] to the rear stopper solenoid
(SD3) [2] with 2 screws [1].
[2] [3]
[4] [5] 2. Install the rear stopper solenoid assy [3] aligning with the marking-
off line [2] while you press the plunger with 2 screws [1].
Note
• When you reinstall the rear stopper solenoid (SD3) [3], be
• The actuator [5] can deform. Do not touch the actuator [5].
[2] [1] [3]
F-218
[1] [2] Note

• Check that the rear stopper [1] does not project from the
paper feed surface of the guide plate [2].
• Check that the distance "a" is a standard value.
Standard value "a": 1.5 mm or more
• When the position of the rear stopper and the standard
value "a" are not proper, adjust the installation position of
the rear stopper solenoid assy again.
F-219
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L PROCEDURE FD-50...
23. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE FD-503

CAUTION

23.2.1 Replacing roller solenoids/1 (SD5) to /4 (SD8)
• Roller solenoid/1 (SD5) to roller solenoid/4 (SD8)
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the cord support board/A
[2].
2. Remove the hook of the spring [3] from the shaft [4].
[2]
[4]
[3] fd501fs2001c

4. Remove each of 2 screws [2] and then remove the roller solenoid/
1 (SD5) to roller solenoid/4 (SD8) [3].
[1]
[2] • Number 266 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 209 (1200, 1200P, and 1051)
• Number 208 (C8000)
[3]
• Number 241 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
[2] • Number 208 (C1100, C1085)
[1] 7. Make adjustments of the installation position. (Refer to I.27.1
Roller solenoids/1 (SD5), /2 (SD6), /3 (SD7) and /4 (SD8) position
adjustment)
fd501fs2002c
23.3 Punch section

23.3.1 Replacing the punch unit
• Punch unit
(2) Procedure
[3] 3. Remove the punch unit [3].
• Number 265 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 208 (1200, 1200P, and 1051)
• Number 207 (C8000)
• Number 240 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
fd501fs2003c • Number 207 (C1100, C1085)
F-220
23.3.2 Cleaning the punch shaft and the punch support board
• Punch shaft
: Every 1,400,000 counts (Total counter) (Actual cleaning count: Every 1,000,000 counts (Special parts counter)) *1
: Every 750,000 counts (Total counter)*2
: Every 1,500,000 counts (Total counter)*3
: Every 1,400,000 counts (total counter)*4
• Punch support board
: Every 1,400,000 counts (Total counter) (Actual cleaning count: Every 1,000,000 counts (Special parts counter)) *1
*1 C6501, C6501P, and C65hc
*2 1200, 1200P, 1051
*3 1250, 1250P, 1052, C8000, C7000, C7000P, C70hc, C6000, C1070, C1070P, C71hc and C1060
*4 C1100, C1085
(2) Procedure
[2]
fd501fs2003c
4. Remove the plastic stopper [1], and remove the pin [2].
[2]
5. Remove the punch shaft [3], and clean the periphery. (Isopropyl
alcohol, Cleaning pad)
[1]
[3]
a0h0t3c001ca
6. Clean the inner periphery of the hole [2] of the punch support
[2]
board [1]. (Isopropyl alcohol, Cleaning pad)
[1]
a0h0t3c002ca
23.3.3 Lubricating the punch drive section

(1) Periodically lubricated parts and cycle
• Punch drive section
: Every 1,400,000 counts (Total counter) (Actual lubrication cycle: Every 1,000,000 counts (Special parts counter)) *1
*1 C6501, C6501P, and C65hc
*2 1200, 1200P, and 1051
*3 1250, 1250P, 1052, C8000, C7000, C7000P, C70hc, C6000 , C1070, C1070P, C71hc, and C1060
*4 C1100, C1085
F-221
(2) Procedure
[2]
fd501fs2003c
[1] 4. Lubricate 2 stopper cams [1] and 8 gears [2]. (Molykote EM-30L)
[2]
a0h0t3c003ca
23.4 Folding conveyance section

23.4.1 2nd folding roller solenoid (SD18)
• 2nd folding roller solenoid (SD18)
(2) Procedure
2. Disconnect 3 connectors [1] and then remove the wiring harnesses
from the 7 wiring harness guides [3] of the coupling arm/Rr [2].
[2]
[1]
[3]
fd501fs2047c
F-222
[1] 3. Remove 2 C-clips [1].

4. Remove the shaft [2] and separate the coupling arm/Fr [3] and the
[3] coupling arm/Rr [4].
[4] [2]
fd501fs2048c
[1] [2] 5. Open the front door [1] and then remove the screw [2].
6. Pull out the folding unit [3].
[3] a0h0t3c004ca
[1] 7. Remove the stopper screws [1], 1 each, from the left rail and the
right rail, and pull further out the folding conveyance section.
[1] fd501fs2049c
[2] 8. Open the guide plate [1].

[3].
[3] [1] a0h0t3c005ca
F-223
[2] [1] 10. Disconnect the connector [1].

11. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the 2nd folding roller
solenoid (SD18) [3].
• Number 267 (1250, 1250P, and 1052)
• Number 210 (1200, 1200P, and 1051)
• Number 209 (C8000)
• Number 242 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 209 (C1100, C1085)
14. Make adjustments of the installation position. (Refer to I.27.2 2nd
[3] a0h0t3c006ca
folding roller solenoid (SD18) position adjustment)

23.5.1 Replacing the tray up down motor (M11)
• Tray up down motor (M11)
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 5,000,000 counts) *3
*1 C6501, C6501P, and C65hc
*2 1200, 1200P, and 1051
*3 1250, 1250P, 1052, C8000, C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, C1100, C1085
(2) Procedure
Note
• Be sure to remove the tray up down motor (M11) while you support the up down stay with your hands.
[2] 1. Remove the rear cover (refer to G.24.3.5 Rear cover) and the left
cover/Rr (refer to G.24.3.7 Left cover/Rr).
2. Open the front door and pull out the folding unit.
4. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the tray up down motor
(M11) [3].
[3] • Number 268 (1250, 1250P, and 1052)
• Number 211 (1200, 1200P, and 1051)
[1] • Number 210 (C8000)
• Number 243 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 210 (C1100, C1085)
fd501fs2005c
23.6 PI section
23.6.1 Replacing the pick-up rubber (Upper stage)
• Pick-up rubber
: Every 5,200,000 counts (total counter) (actual replacement cycle: Every 200,000 counts (special parts counter))*1
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: every 200,000 counts (Special parts counter))*3
*1 C6501, C6501P, and C65hc
*2 1200, 1200P, and 1051
*3 1250, 1250P, 1052, C8000, C7000, C7000P, C70hc, C6000 , C1070, C1070P, C71hc, and C1060 , C1100, C1085
F-224
(2) Procedure
[1] 2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the protective cover [2].
[2]
fd501fs2006c

[4] [1] 4. Remove 4 screws [2] and then remove the pick-up unit/Up [3].
Note
• The rear side of the shaft is inserted into the coupling [4].
Be sure to remove the pick-up unit/Up [3] from the front
[3]
side.
• Be careful not to damage 2 actuators [5] of the pick-up
[5] [2] unit/Up.
fd501fs2007c
[1] [2] [4] 5. Remove the hook of the spring [1] from the mounting plate [2].
6. Remove 2 C-clips [3] and then remove the shaft [4].
[3] fd501fs2008c
[4] [3] [2] 7. Remove 2 C-clips [1].

8. Remove the shaft fixing piece [2], and then remove the shaft [3]
from the mounting plate [4].
[1] fd501fs2009c
[1] fd501fs2010c
F-225
[1] [2] 10. Remove the spacer [1] and the belt restriction plate [2].
fd501fs2011c
[1] [2] [3] 11. Remove the belt [3] from the gears [2] and [4], and then remove
the gears [2] and [4], the pins [1] and [5] from the pick-up roller
shaft [4].
[4]
[5] fd501fs2012c
12. Pull out the pick-up roller shaft [1] to the front side, and remove the
pick-up roller assy [2].
[1]
[2] fd501fs2013c
13. Remove the pick-up roller [1] and replace the pick-up rubber [2].
Note
• Be sure to install the pick-up roller so that the one-way
clutch [3] (blue) is on the front side.
[3]
[2] [1] fd501fs2014c
[4] [7] 14. Remove the C-clip [1].

16. Remove the belt restriction plate [3].
17. Remove the belt [4] from the gear [5], and then remove the gear
[5] and the pin [6] from the pick-up roller shaft [7].
18. Pull out the pick-up roller shaft [7] to the rear side, and remove the
pick-up roller assy [8].
19. Remove the pick-up roller and replace the pick-up rubber.
Note
[2] [3] [5] [6] [8] [9] [1]
fd501fs2015c
F-226
[3] [4] [7] 20. Remove 2 C-clips [1].

21. Remove the belt restriction plate [2].
22. Remove the belt [3] from the gear [4], and then remove the gear
[2] [4] and the pin [5] from the pick-up roller shaft [6].
[6] 23. Pull out the pick-up roller shaft [6] from the rear side, and remove
the pick-up roller assy [7].
24. Remove the pick-up roller and replace the pick-up rubber.
Note
[1] [5] [8] [1]
• Number 259 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 202 (1200, 1200P, and 1051)
• Number 201 (C8000, C7000, C7000P, C70hc, and C6000)
• Number 234 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 201 (C1100, C1085)
fd501fs2016c
23.6.2 Replacing the paper feed rubber (Upper stage)

• Paper feed rubber
*1 C6501, C6501P, and C65hc
*2 1200, 1200P, and 1051
(2) Procedure
1. Perform steps 1 to 8 of "F.23.6.1 Replacing the pick-up rubber
[8] (Upper stage)" and remove the pick-up roller unit.
[7] 3. Remove the belt restriction plate [2].
[3] 4. Remove the spacer [3].
5. Remove the belt [4].
6. Remove the gear [5] and the pin [6].
[4]
7. Remove the gear [7] and the pin [8].
[1]
[6] [5] [2]
fd501fs2017c
[2] [3] 8. Remove 2 C-clips [1] and then remove the entire paper feed arm
[2] from the paper feed shaft [3].
[1] fd501fs2018c
F-227
[4] [3] [2] [1] 9. Remove the spacer [1].

10. Remove the actuator [2].
fd501fs2019c
[3] [2] [1] 13. Remove the paper feed arm [1].
15. Remove the paper feed roller assy [3].
fd501fs2020c
[1] 16. Remove the paper feed roller [1] and replace the paper feed
[2] rubber [2].
[3] 17. Reinstall the parts that were previously mentioned following the
Note
fd501fs2021c
• Number 261 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 204 (1200, 1200P, and 1051)
• Number 236 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 203 (C1100, C1085)
23.6.3 Replacing the separation rubber (upper stage)

• Separation rubber
*1 C6501, C6501P, and C65hc
*2 1200, 1200P, and 1051
(2) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Perform steps 1 to 4 of "F.23.6.1 Replacing the pick-up rubber
(Upper stage)" and remove the pick-up unit/Up.
3. Remove 2 bearings [2].
[1] 4. Remove the C-clip [3] and then remove the entire roller shaft from
the mounting plate while you press the separation roller assy [4]
against the front gear [5].
Note
• Pins are employed on the inside of the separation roller
assy [4] and the gear [5] respectively. When you remove
them, be careful that these pins do not get lost. Leave the
C-clip [6] on the front side of the gear as it is and press
[3] [4] [5] [6] fd501fs2022c the roller onto the gear, so that it prevents the pins from
dropping off.
F-228
[1] [2] 5. Remove the separation roller rubber [1] from the separation roller
[2] and replace it.
• Number 260 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 203 (1200, 1200P, and 1051)
• Number 235 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 202 (C1100, C1085)
fd501fs2023c
23.6.4 Replacing the pick-up rubber (Lower stage)

• Pick-up rubber
*1 C6501, C6501P, and C65hc
*2 1200, 1200P, and 1051
(2) Procedure
Note
• A shaft fixing screw is inserted when you remove the PI tray/Up. Be sure to remove this shaft fixing screw from the PI tray/Up
after completion of the replacement of the pick-up roller/Lw. Operating the machine with the shaft fixing screw inserted to the PI
tray/Up damage to the PI section.
[2] [3] 1. Make sure that the PI lift plate/Up [1] has come down fully. If it has
not come down completely, conduct the I/O check (output) (PI/Up:
70-11, PI/Lw: 70-13) in the service mode.
2. Perform steps 1 to 4 of "F.23.6.1 Replacing the pick-up rubber
(Upper stage)" and remove the pick-up unit/Up.
3. Remove 4 screws [2] and then remove the paper feed stopper
plate/Up [3].
[2]
[1] fd501fs2024c
4. Remove the shaft fixing screw [1] and insert it in the shaft fixing
[1] hole [2].
Note
• Be sure to turn the shaft fixing screw [1] until its stem
section disappears completely.
• After completion of the replacement of the pick-up rubber
(lower stage), be sure to remove the shaft fixing screw [1]
from the position [2] and get it back to the position [1].
Operating the machine with the shaft fixing screw inserted
to the position [2] damage to the PI section.
[2] fd501fs2025c
F-229
[5] [3] [1] [2] 5. Remove the spring [2] hooked between the separation roller unit
[1] and the PI tray/Up [3].
7. Remove 4 screws [4] and then remove the PI tray/Up [3].
Note
• When you remove the PI tray/Up [2], be sure to pull it
diagonally up to the left.
[4] [4] fd501fs2026c
[3] 8. Disconnect the connector [1].

9. Remove 4 screws [2] and then remove the pick-up unit/Lw [3].
10. For the subsequent operations, conduct the pick-up rubber (upper
[1] stage) (steps 4 to 25). (Refer to F.23.6.1 Replacing the pick-up
rubber (Upper stage))
11. Replace it with a new pick-up rubber.
[2] [2]
Note
• When you install the PI tray/Up, be sure to remove the
shaft fixing screw and get it back to the original position.
fd501fs2027c
• Number 262 (1250, 1250P, and 1052)
• Number 205 (1200, 1200P, and 1051)
• Number 204 (C8000, C7000, C7000P, and C70hc)
• Number 237 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 204 (C1100, C1085)
23.6.5 Replacing the paper feed rubber (lower stage)

• Paper feed rubber
*1 C6501, C6501P, and C65hc
*2 1200, 1200P, and 1051
(2) Procedure
1. Perform steps 1 to 9 of "F.23.6.4 Replacing the pick-up rubber (Lower stage)."
2. The subsequent operations are the same as the operations for the paper feed rubber (upper stage). (Refer to F.23.6.2 Replacing the
paper feed rubber (Upper stage))
3. Reinstall a new paper feed rubber following the removal steps in reverse.
• Number 264 (1250, 1250P, and 1052)
• Number 207 (1200, 1200P, and 1051)
• Number 239 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 206 (C1100, C1085)
23.6.6 Replacing the separation rubber (lower stage)

• Separation rubber
: Every 2,200,000 counts (total counter) (actual replacement cycle: every 100,000 counts (special parts counter)) *1
: Every 2,250,000 counts (total counter) (actual replacement cycle: every 100,000 counts (special parts counter)) *2
*1 C6501, C6501P, and C65hc
*2 1200, 1200P, and 1051
F-230
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Perform steps 1 to 9 of "F.23.6.4 Replacing the pick-up rubber
(Lower stage)."
2. Remove the 4 screws [1] and then remove the paper feed stopper
plate/2 [2].
3. For the subsequent operations, conduct the separation rubber
(upper stage) (steps 2 to 6). (Refer to F.23.6.3 Replacing the
separation rubber (upper stage)
4. Replace it with a new separation rubber.
[2] • Number 263 (1250, 1250P, and 1052)
• Number 206 (1200, 1200P, and 1051)
fd501fs2028c
• Number 205 (C8000, C7000, C7000P, and C70hc)
• Number 238 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 205 (C1100, C1085)
F-231
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L PROCEDURE SD-50...

CAUTION
24.2 Right angle conveyance section

24.2.1 Replacing the roller release solenoid/1 (SD5)
• Roller release solenoid/1 (SD5)
(2) Procedure
1. Remove SD from the main body.
[2] [1]
15anf2c028na
[4] [5] [3] [6] 3. Disconnect the connector [1].

4. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the roller release solenoid/
1 (SD5) [3].
Note
• When you install the solenoid, make sure that the pin [5]
is hitched to the plunger [4].
• Install it with the wiring harness [6] that is located on the
guide plate side.
[2] [1]
15anf2c029na
5. While you pull the plunger [1], temporarily hold the new roller
[2] release solenoid/1 and adjust the position so that the clearance "a"
between the roller [3] and the guide plate [2] is at a standard value.
Then fully tighten the screws.
a
Standard value "a": 0 mm to 0.5 mm
• Number 288 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 226 (1200, 1200P, and 1051)
[1] • Number 239 (C8000)
• Number 270 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
15anf2c030nb
• Number 236 (C1100, C1085)

F-232
(2) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Open the front door/Rt.
15anf2c031na

2 (SD6) [3].
Note
• When you reinstall it, be sure to check that the pin [5] has
been inserted into the hole on the plunger [4].
guide plate side.
[1] [6] [2] [3] [4] [5]

15anf2c032na
5. While you pull the plunger [1], temporarily hold the new roller
[2]
release solenoid/2 and adjust the position so that the clearance "a"
between the roller [3] and the guide plate [2] is at a standard value.
a Then fully tighten the screws.
Standard value "a": 0 mm to 0.5 mm
• Number 271 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 237 (C1100, C1085)
[1]
15anf2c033nb
24.2.3 Replacing the right angle conveyance gate solenoid (SD2)

• Right angle conveyance gate solenoid (SD2)
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Open the front door/Rt and then remove the screw [1].
3. Remove the hex wrench (short, #2.5) from the trimmer section.
(Refer to F.24.5.3 Replacing the trimmer blade kit)
15anf2c057na
F-233
[3] [2] [1] 4. Remove the E-ring [1] and the pulley [2] and then remove the belt
[3].
[4]
15anf2c058na
6. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the stopper [2].
[2] [1]
15anf2c059nb
[4] [8] [3] 8. Pull the spring [3] in the arrow-marked direction [4] and release it,
and then open the right angle conveyance guide plate [5].
Note
• When you reinstall the spring [3], hook the long arm [6] on
the position between the frame and the E-ring [7] of the
jam release handle shaft and insert the tip of the short arm
[3] into the hole [8].
[1] [2] [6] [7] [5]

15anf2c130ca
F-234
[1] [3] [3] [1]

9. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the entrance conveyance
unit [2].
Note
• When you reinstall, press it against 2 positioning pins [3]
and then tighten the screw [1].
[1]
[2] 15anf2c060na
10. Check point when you reinstall the entrance conveyance unit
[1] [2]
Note
• As the positioning pin [1] has anti-drop grooves, be sure
to insert it fully before you tighten the screw.
a0h2t3c043ca

[3] [2] [1]
12. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the entrance gate solenoid
[3] and the plunger [4].
[4] a0h2t3c044ca
F-235
13. Standard value when you reinstall the entrance gate solenoid
[4]
Note
• When you reinstall, be sure to conduct in the following
[2] [1]
conditions before you tighten the screw [4]; with the
plunger of the entrance gate solenoid not being pulled,
the gap between the entrance gate [1] and the guide plate
[2] is at a standard value "a". With the plunger of the
entrance gate solenoid being pulled, the gap between the
a
entrance gate [1] and the guide plate [3] is at a standard
value "b".
Standard value
b a: 2.0 mm ± 0.3 mm
b: 5.0 mm ± 0.5 mm
[3]
a0h2t3c051ca
[6] [5] [2] [4] [3] 14. Disconnect the connector [1].
16. Remove 2 screws [3] and pull out the arm [4] from the shaft [5] in
the arrow-marked direction [6]. Then remove the right angle
conveyance gate solenoid assy [7].
Note
• When you reinstall the right angle conveyance gate
solenoid assy, press the arm [4] against the D-cut of the
shaft [5] and then tighten the screws [2].
[1] [7]
a0h2t3c045ca
17. Standard value when you reinstall the right angle conveyance gate
solenoid assy
[1] Note
• While you pull the plunger [1], adjust the position so that
the clearance "a" between the right angle conveyance
gate [3] and the guide plate [2] is at a standard value "a".
Then fully tighten the screws [4].
[4] Standard value a: 4.8 mm ± 0.5 mm
[3]
[2]
a0h2t3c052ca
F-236
18. Remove 2 screws [1], mounting plate [2], arm [3], plunger [4], and
[7] [2] [4] [3] the right angle conveyance gate solenoid (SD2) [5].
Note
• When you install the right angle conveyance gate
solenoid, make sure that the wires [6] are located on the
other side of the hole [7] in the mounting plate [2].
• Number 272 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 238 (C1100, C1085)
[1] [5] [6]

a0h2t3c046ca

(2) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Open the front door/Rt and front door/Lt.
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the cover [2].
15anf2c157ca
[2] [6] [3] [1]

3 (SD7) [3].
Note
• When you install the solenoid, make sure that the pin [5]
is hitched to the plunger [4].
guide plate side.
[4] [5]
15anf2c158ca
F-237
5. While you pull the plunger [1] and slightly tighten the new roller
release solenoid/3, adjust the position so that the gap between the
paper feed surface [2] of the guide plate and the roller surface [3]
falls within the standard value. Then secure the roller release
solenoid/3.
Standard value "a": 1.3 mm to 1.8 mm
[1]
• Number 288 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
[3] • Number 226 (1200, 1200P, and 1051)
[2] a • Number 239 (C8000)
• Number 270 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
15anf2c159ca
• Number 236 (C1100, C1085)
24.3 Saddle stitching section

24.3.1 Replacing the stapler assy
• Stapler assy
*2 Actual replacement cycle of 1250, 1250P, 1052, 1200, 1200P, 1051, C6501, C6501P, C65hc, C8000, C7000, C7000P, C70hc, C6000,
C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, C1100, and C1085
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the front door/Lt. (Refer to G.25.3.8 Front door/Lt)
[1]
2. Remove the rear cover/Lt. (Refer to G.25.3.2 Rear cover/Lt)
3. Disconnect 2 connectors [1] from the back side of the stapler, and
release the wires on the stapler side from the clamps.
15anf2c034na
[3] [2] 4. Pull out the saddle stitching unit. (Refer to F.24.3.3 Pulling out the
saddle stitching unit)
5. Tilt the bundle arm [1] to the front.
6. Remove the staple cartridges [2] to the front.
Note
• When you move the stapler Assy, be sure to rotate the
rotating knob [3] first to prevent the belt tooth from
skipping. Otherwise, it causes the belt tooth skipping.
[1] 15anf2c035na
F-238
7. Remove 2 screws [1] on each stapler.
[4]
8. Move the stapler/Lt [2] and stapler/Rt [3] forward, and then remove
the pins [4], 2 for each, from each 2 holes [5] on each stapler.
[5] Then remove the stapler/Lt and stapler/Rt downward.
[1] [1]
[2] [3]
a0h2t3c047ca
9. Check point when you remove or reinstall the stapler/Lt

Note
• When you remove or reinstall the stapler/Lt, be sure not to
bend the guide sheet [6].
[6]
a0h2t3c048ca
[1] [2] 10. Remove the screw [1] and remove the sensor cover [2].
15anf2c038na

Note
• When you reinstall the saddle stitching unit, be careful not
to let the connector [1] make contact with the main body.
12. Remove 3 screws [2], and then remove the saddle stitching guide
plate [3].
[1]
[2] 15anf2c039na
F-239
[3] [4] 13. Remove 2 screws [1] each and then remove the 2 connector
covers [2].
Note
• When you remove the connector covers, while you lift up
the clincher/Lt [3] and clincher/Rt [4].
[1]
[1] [2] 15anf2c040na
[5] [4] [6] 14. Remove each 1 screws [1] and then remove the ground [2].
Note
• When you install the grounds, place the wiring harness on
the lower side and fasten the grounds with screws.
15. Remove each of 1 connectors [3].

16. Remove 2 screws [4] each, and then remove the clincher/Lt [5]
and clincher/Rt [6].
Note
• When you install the clinchers, slide them down
completely, and secure them with screws.
[3] [1]
[1] [3] [2] 15anf2c041na
17. Disconnect the connector [1] and then remove the wiring harness
[3] from the clincher [2].
[3] [1] [2] 15anf2c042na
[4] [5] 18. Reinstall the connector following the removal steps in reverse.
Note
• When you reinstall the wiring harness [4], be sure to wire
the wiring harness to the guide (white) side [5] of the
clincher as you can see in the figure [6].
Do not route the wiring harness to the rear side as you
can see in the figure [7]. Otherwise, the wiring harness
possibly breaks at the clincher operation.
19. Adjust the mounting position of the staplers and the clinchers.
(Refer to F.24.3.1.(3) Procedure for adjusting the mounting
position)
• Number 284, 285 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
[6]
• Number 222, Number 223 (1200, 1200P, and 1051)
• Number 234, Number 235 (C8000, C7000, C7000P, C70hc,
and C6000)
• Number 265, 266 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
[7] 15anf2c043na
F-240
• Number 234, 235 (C1100, C1085)
(3) Procedure for adjusting the mounting position

[7] [7] 1. Rotate the screw [1] clockwise until clicked to make the clinchers
[2] contact with the staplers [3] and lock the clinchers [2], and then
check the step edges [4] of the staplers are aligned with the edges
[5] of the clincher in the sub scan direction [6].
Standard value: 0 ± 0.5 mm
2. When the value is not within the standard value, loosen 2 screws
[7] each and move the staplers in the sub scan direction for the
adjustment while you rotate the screw [1] counterclockwise to
make the clinchers [2] and the stapler [3] closer, and then tighten
the screws [7].
3. Tighten the screw [1] clockwise until it clicks to make the clinchers
[2] contact with the stapler [3] and lock it. Make sure that the
standard surface of the stapler [8] is located in the rear side in the
[11] [11] main scan direction [10] as compared to the inside plate inner
surface [9] of the clincher.
[4] [6] [10]
Standard value "a": 0.2 mm to 0.3 mm
4. When the value is not within the standard value, loosen 2 screws
[8]
A [11] each and move the staplers in the main scan direction for the
adjustment while rotating the screw [1] counterclockwise to make
the clinchers [2] and the stapler [3] closer, and then tighten the
screws [11].
[9]
Note
a
• After the reinstallation, perform the saddle stitching and
check that the stapling is performed without any problem.
• After the adjustment, be sure to perform the adjustment
between the fold line position and the staple position, and
also the tilt adjustment and the gap adjustment of the
clincher.
[5]
(Refer to I.28.4 Staple position adjustment), (Refer to I.28.6
A
Section A Tilt/gap adjustment of the clincher)
[3]
[2]
[1]
15anf2c063nc
24.3.2 Replacing the slope unit

• Slope unit
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 2,500,000 counts (Special parts counter)) *1
*1 1250, 1250P, 1052, 1200, 1200P, 1051, C8000, C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, C1100, and C1085
(2) Procedure
[2] 1. Remove 3 screws [1], and then remove the motor cover [2].
[1] 15anf2c018na
F-241
[1] 2. Remove 2 connectors [1].
15anf2c019na
[2] 3. Hold the bundle arms [1] on both sides in the vicinity of the fulcrum
shaft [2], push them to the rear simultaneously and move the
bundle arms [1] approximately 30 mm.
Note
• When you rotate the bundle arm [1] manually, be sure to
rotate it gently with both hands because the belts on both
sides simultaneously activate the bundle. Otherwise, it
causes the belt tooth skipping.
• Never hold the tip of the bundle arm [1] and rotate it. Be
sure to hold the bundle arm [1] in the vicinity of the
fulcrum shaft [2] and rotate it. It causes the deformation.
[1] 15anf2c020na
[2] [4] 4. Remove 2 screws [2] and 2 screws [3] of the slope unit [1] from the
bottom and top respectively, and then remove the slope unit [1].
Note
• When you reinstall the slope, be sure to align 2
positioning projections [4].

reverse.
[2] [1]
[3] 15anf2c022na
F-242
24.3.3 Pulling out the saddle stitching unit

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the front door /Lt. (Refer to G.25.3.8 Front door/Lt)
2. Remove the slope unit. (Refer to F.24.3.2 Replacing the slope unit)
3. Remove the wire [1] from the screw [2].
Note
• When you remove the 2nd wire [1], hold it with hands and
prevent the horizontal conveyance guide plate/Lt [3] from
falling.
[2] [1]
[3] 15anf2c014na
[1] [2] [1] 4. Move 2 pins [1] to the direction of the arrow to the notch [2] and
release the fixing. Then, remove the horizontal conveyance guide
plate/Lt [3].
Note
• Before you reinstall the horizontal conveyance guide
plate/Lt [3], adjust the position of the fix shaft [4] and
move the pin [1] from the notch.
[4] [3] [4] 15anf2c015na
5. Remove the screw [1] and move the wiring harness cover [4] to the
rear side. Remove the pin [2] from the hole [3], and then remove
the wiring harness cover [4].
[3]
[2]
[1] [4]
15anf2c016na
F-243
[1]
15anf2c017na
7. Remove the screw [1].
[1]
15anf2c069na
[1] [6] [1] 8. Hold the position of the bundle arm [1] near the fulcrum shaft [2].
Move it to the inside [3] slowly, and then remove the guide shaft [4]
from the hole of the shock absorbing guide [5].
Note
• When you narrow the distance of the bundle arms [1], be
sure to move them evenly and slowly.
• When you reinstall, check that the guide shaft [4] is in the
hole of the shock absorbing guide [5].
9. Rotate the bundle arm [1] to the guide plate [6] on the stapler side.
[1]
[3]
[2]
[4] [5]
[3]
[5] [4] [2] [1] 15anf2c021na
F-244
[1] [2] [1] 10. Remove 6 screws (with a washer for each) [1]. Hold shafts [2] and
pull out the saddle stitch unit [3].
Note
• When you pull out, be careful not to let the removed
connector touch the SD main body and cut the wiring
harness.

reverse.
[1]
[1] [2] [3] 15anf2c024nb
24.3.4 Replacing the saddle stitching unit

Note
• Be sure to perform this operation with 2 people because the saddle stitching unit is heavy.

• Saddle stitch unit
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 2,500,000 counts (Special parts counter)) *1
*1 1250, 1250P, 1052, 1200, 1200P, 1051, C8000, C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, C1100, and C1085
(2) Procedure
[3] [4] [5] 1. Pull out the saddle stitching unit. (Refer to F.24.3.3 Pulling out the
saddle stitching unit)
2. Remove 6 screws [1] and the screw [2], and remove the saddle
stitching unit [5] with 2 people by holding the shafts [3] and [4]
while lift up the shaft [3] slightly and shift the saddle stitching unit
to the front side.
Note
• Be sure to hold the saddle stitching unit at the shafts [3]
and [4].
• When reinstalling the saddle stitching unit, check that the
unit is surely placed on the rails [6] before releasing the
unit.

reverse.
[1] [2]
[6]
[1] 15anf2c025na
24.4 Bundle processing section

24.4.1 Replacing the bundle press stage gear
• Bundle press stage gear
: Every 20,250,000 counts (Total counter) *1 (Actual replacement cycle: Every 500,000 counts (Special parts counter) (number of set of
sheets exited to the bundle tray) *2)
*2 Spotted replacement cycle of 1250, 1250P, 1052, 1200, 1200P, 1051, C6501, C6501P, C65hc, C8000, C7000, C7000P, C70hc, C6000,
C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, C1100, and C1085
F-245
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the following parts.
[2]
• Rear cover/Lt (Refer to G.25.3.2 Rear cover/Lt)
• Left cover (Refer to G.25.3.4 Left cover)
2. Rotate the jam cleaning knob [1] in the arrow-marked direction
until it stops.
Note
• When the jam cleaning knob [1] stops, be sure to check
that the bundle registration plate [2] comes to the upper
position [3] after the bundle press stage goes down and
the tension of the wire [4] is released.
• Be sure not to rotate the jam cleaning knob too much.
3. Move the bearing [6] and bearing [7], and then remove the E-ring
[5] and move the gear [8] to the back side.
[8] [7] [3]
[4] [1]
[6]
[5]
a0h2t3c028ca

[2] [3] [1]
5. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the bundle press stage up
down motor (M24).
Note
• Be careful not to lose the pin [3] as it drops off when you
remove the gear [2].
a0h2t3c029ca
6. Remove the E-ring [1], and then remove the bundle press stage
gear [2] and 2 bearings [3] on both sides of the gear.
Note
• After you replace the bundle press stage gear [2], be sure
to apply plas guard Number 2 to the gear.

• Number 291 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 229 (1200, 1200P, and 1051)
• Number 273 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 239 (C1100, C1085)
[1] [2] [3] a0h2t3c030ca
F-246
24.4.2 Replacing the bundle press stage unit

• Bundle press stage unit
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: every 2,500,000 counts (Special parts counter) (number of set of sheets exited to the
bundle tray)) *1
*1 1250, 1250P, 1052, 1200, 1200P, 1051, C8000, C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, C1100, C1085
(2) Procedure
[2]
• Rear cover/Rt (Refer to G.25.3.3 Rear cover/Rt)
• Trimmer unit (Refer to F.24.5.6 Replacing the trimming unit)
2. Rotate the jam cleaning knob [1] in the arrow-marked direction
until it stops.
Note
• When the jam cleaning knob [1] stops, be sure to check
that the bundle registration plate [2] comes to the upper
position [3] after the bundle press stage goes down and
the tension of the wire [4] is released.
• Be sure not to rotate the jam cleaning knob too much.
[3]
[4] [1] a0h2t3c031ca

4. Remove the wiring harness [2] from the clamp [3], and then pull it
[1] out from the hole [4] by following the arrow.
Note
[2] • When you reinstall it, be careful not to nip the wiring
[5] [4] [3] harness [2] with the trimmer unit plate [5].
a0h2t3c032ca
F-247
5. Remove 1 each of the screws at 2 places and remove 1 each of
[1] [2] [4]
the up-down wire [2], and then take it out to the front side of the
machine from the trimmer unit plate [3] by following the arrow.
Note
• When you reinstall it, be sure to lubricate Molykote
EM-30L to each 2 shafts [4].
6. Remove 8 screws [5] and then remove the trimmer unit plate [3].
Note
• Be careful not to damage the trimmer scraps guide [6].
• When you reinstall it, be sure to align the projection [7].
[7] [3]
[5][6][5]
a0h2t3c033ca
7. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove the wiring harness [2]
[3] [1]
from the clamp [3], and then take it out from the hole [4] of the
metal plate to the arrow-marked direction.
8. Remove 2 screws [5] and then remove the bracket [6].
9. Remove 2 screws [7] and then remove the guide plate [8].
[5] [6] [2] [4]
[7] [8]
a0h2t3c034ca
F-248
[1] [3] [2]
11. Remove 3 screws [2] and then remove the bundle registration
motor (M12) [3].
13. Remove 4 screws [5] and then remove the bundle press
movement motor (M17) [6].
[6] [5]
[4]
a0h2t3c035ca
14. Remove the E-ring [1], and then remove the gear [2] and the pin
[1] [2] [3] [3].
15. Remove the E-ring [4] and then remove the gear [5] and the pin
[6].
[4] [5] [6] a0h2t3c036ca
F-249
[2] [6] [3] [4]
17. Cut the wire binding bands [2] and [3] and remove the wiring
harness [4].
Note
• Be sure to let the wire binding bands [2] and [3] into the
shaft hole [5] and install the wire retaining band [6] on the
[2] side between the bands [2] and [3].
[5]
[1]
a0h2t3c037ca
18. Pull out the bundle paper exit tray [1].

[7] [5][10] [6] [2] [3] [4] 19. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the wire mounting plate/Lt
[3].
Note
• Since the wire/Lt [4] has the tension of the spring, be sure
to remove 2 screws [2] with keeping the wire mounting
plate/Lt [3] and lift it up until the tension is released, and
then take it off gently.
[8] 20. Loosen the screws [5] and pull the wire mounting plate/Rt [6]
downward to move it to the opposite side of the shaft [7], and then
remove it to the space between the side plate [8] and the timing
belt [9].
Note
• Since the wire/Rt [10] has the tension of the spring, be
sure to lift up the wire mounting plate/Rt [6] until the
tension is released, and then take it off gently.
[9] [1]
a0h2t3c038ca
21. Check point when you reinstall the wire

Note
• When you reinstall it, be sure to put the wire [1] on 2
pulleys [2].
[1] [2] a0h2t3c039ca
F-250
22. Push the bundle paper exit tray [1] fully to the back.
[6] 23. Remove 2 E-rings [2] and then remove 2 bearings [3] and the drive
shaft [4].
24. Remove 2 E-rings [5] and then remove the bearings [6].
[5]
[3]
[2]
[4] [1]
a0h2t3c040ca
25. While keep holding the bundle paper exit assist roller [1]
[3] [2] [1]
horizontally, push the bundle press stage unit [3] to the back with
holding the shaft [2] to release the roller pin [4] of the bundle paper
exit assist roller arm from the regulation bracket [5]. After the
release, put down the bundle paper exit assist roller [1] gently.
Note
• Once the roller pin [4] of the bundle paper exit assist roller
arm is removed from the regulation bracket [5], the bundle
paper exit assist roller drops off. Therefore, be sure to
hold it with hands.
• When you reinstall it, be sure to put the roller pin [4] under
the regulation bracket [5].
[5]
[4]
a0h2t3c041ca
26. Pull out the bundle paper exit tray [1] to about half.
[4]
Note
• If the bundle paper exit tray [1] is pulled out too much, the
bundle press stage unit [2] drops off from the tray.
27. Pull out the bundle press stage unit [2] to the position in the picture
with holding the bundle press section [3]. Then, pull it out more to
the back with paying the attention to the contacting places [5], [6],
and [7] on the right side, and remove the arm [8].
Note
• After the installation, rotate the jam cleaning knob and be
sure to check that the bundle press stage unit goes up
[2] [3] [8] [1] and down horizontally.
[5]
[6]
[7]
a0h2t3c042ca
F-251
24.5 Trimmer section

24.5.1 Removing/installing the trimmer paddle assy
(1) Procedure
[1] • Rear cover /Lt (Refer to G.25.3.2 Rear cover/Lt)
2. Push the scraps box all the way inside.
3. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the trimmer scraps guide
[2].
Note
• When you reinstall it, check that the scraps box is
inserted all the way and stretch the trimmer scraps guide
[2] tight. When the scraps box is not inserted all the way
and you stretch the trimmer scraps guide, the trimmer
scraps guide is possibly damaged during the operation.
[2] a0h2t3c009ca
4. Remove 4 screws [1], and then remove the trimmer paddle assy
[1] [2].
reverse.
[2] a0h2t3c010ca
24.5.2 Replacing the trimmer board assy

• Trimmer board assy
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: every 18,900 cuts) *3
*1 C6501/C6501P/C65hc
*2 1200, 1200P, and 1051
F-252
(2) Procedure
1. Move the trimmer board to the release position.
[7] [1]
Note
• By the output check code "71-97" in the I/O check mode in
the service mode, move the trimmer press board to the
position where the trimmer board is released.
2. Deactivate the sub power switch (SW2) and the main power switch
(SW1) of the main body and unplug the power plug from the power
outlet.
4. Remove the trimmer paddle assy. (Refer to F.24.5.1 Removing/
installing the trimmer paddle assy)
5. Pull the trimmer board assy [1] horizontally to the back side and
remove it.
[4] Note
[3] • When you reinstall it, aligning the slit [2] of the trimmer
[5]
board assy [1] with the pin [3] and insert it between the
trimmer press plate [4] and the hold plate [5].
• When you insert it, be careful not to bend the guide sheet
[6].
• When you push it into the machine, be sure to push the
[6] movement arm receiver [7] and insert it horizontally.
[2]
a0h2t3c017ca
6. Clean the bottom surface of the actuator [1] and the top surface [2]
[1] of the trimmer blade retaining plate which contacts to the bottom
surface.
Note
• When the trimmer scraps remain or the cleaning is not
conducted properly, the trimmer completion timing differs
and a trimming fault occurs.

8. Reset the trimmer board solenoid operation counter.
Note
• Reset the trimmer board solenoid operation counter by
the output check code "71-95" of the I/O check mode of
[2] a0h2t3c067ca the service mode.
• If the counter is not reset, the trimmer board solenoid
operating timing after the trimmer board is replaced
becomes faster than specified timing (700/500/300 times
of trimming). (In the first operation only)
• After you replace the trimmer board, perform the saddle
stitch with trimming and check that the trimming is
performed without any problem.
• Number 287 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 225 (1200, 1200P, and 1051)
• Number 261 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 230 (C1100, C1085)
24.5.3 Replacing the trimmer blade kit

WARNING
• Pay extra caution when you hold the trimmer blade [1]. Never touch the edge [2] of the blade. You get injured.
• Remove the blade cover only at the replacement. Otherwise, never remove the cover. You get injured.
• Dispose the used trimmer blade as specified by the local authority.
F-253
[2]
[1] a0h2t3c011ca

• Trimmer blade kit
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: every 37,500 cuts) *3
*1 C6501/C6501P/C65hc
*2 1200, 1200P, and 1051
(2) Procedure
1. Move the trimmer board to the release position.
[3] [2] [1]
Note
• Move the trimmer board to the trimmer press upper limit
sensor (PS52) by the output check code ""71-56" in the I/O
check mode in the service mode.
2. Deactivate the sub power switch (SW2) and the main power switch
outlet.
4. Remove the trimmer paddle assy. (Refer to F.24.5.1 Removing/
installing the trimmer paddle assy)
6. Loosen the screws [2] and [3].
[6] WARNING
[7]
• Do not loosen the screws [2] and [3] too much, or the
trimmer blade drops during the operation. Keep the
[4] loosening amount of the screws [2] and [3] to a minimum
requirement for removing the trimmer blade [4].
7. Hold the screws [2] and [3] and slightly lift the screw [3] side. Then
[5] move the trimmer blade [4] in the arrow-marked direction [6] to pull
a0h2t3c012ca
out from the hole [5], and remove it.
8. Put the trimmer blade [4] at a safe place with no fear of falling
down.
WARNING
• Pay extra caution when you handle the trimmer blade [4].
Never touch the edge [7] of the blade. You get injured.
F-254
9. Insert the #2.5 hex wrench [2] onto the mounting slit [1] of the
[1] [2]
trimmer blade, and then slide it from the right [3] to the left [4]
(viewed from the operator) to clean the trimmer scraps.
Note
• Conduct the cleaning with the #2.5 hex wrench which is
one-step thinner than the hex wrench #3 used for the
installation screws of the trimmer blade. Using #3 causes
the deformation of the mounting slit.
• To change the direction of the hex wrench, remove the
wrench once and reinsert it again.
[5] • The bottom of the slit of the left side [4] (viewed from the
operator) is curved in the same manner as the blade [5].
Be sure to scrape the trimmer scraps.
10. Clean the mounting slit [1] of the trimmer blade with the blower
brush.
[4] [3]
a0h2t3c013ca
11. Put a new trimmer blade [1] on the floor and insert 2 new screws
[4]
about a half and a bit length of them [3] into the marked side [2].
WARNING
• Be sure to insert the screws [3] enough to hold the
trimmer blade, otherwise the trimmer blade falls down
during the operation.
Note
• Install the brand-new screws [3] that are shipped with the
trimmer blade kit.
[3] [1] [2]
a0h2t3c014ca
12. Remove the blade cover [4] of the new trimmer blade kit and put
the cover on the old trimmer blade.
13. Hold 2 screws [2] of the new trimmer blade and insert it to the hole
[3]. Then insert 2 screws [2] to the screw grooves [4].
[3]
[2]
[1] [4]
[2]
[4]
a0h2t3c015ca
F-255
14. Tighten the new screw [1] temporarily. Then press 2 screws [1]
[1][2] [4] [6]
and [2] downward [3] until the trimmer blade [4] contacts the
bottom, and then press it to the right side [5] (viewed from the
operator).
15. Tighten 2 screws [1] and [2] with the #3 hex wrench [6].
WARNING
• When you tighten 2 screws [1] and [2], tighten them
[7] temporarily with the torque that bends the tip of the #3
hex wrench [6] approximately 5 degrees [7]. Then fully
[8]
tighten them with the strong torque that bends it
approximately 15 degrees [8].
Note
• Be sure to check and clear the foreign object that
obstacles the operation of the trimmer blade.
[3] [5]
Note
• After you replace the trimmer blade, perform the saddle
performed without any problem.
[2] [1]
a0h2t3c016ca • Number 286 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 224 (1200, 1200P, and 1051)
• Number 260 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 229 (C1100, C1085)
24.5.4 Replacing the trimmer press motor (M32)

• Trimmer press motor (M32)
: Every 20,250,000 counts (Total counter) *1 (Actual replacement cycle: Every 500,000 counts (Special parts counter) *2)
*2 Actual replacement cycle of 1250, 1250P, 1052, 1200, 1200P, 1051, C8000, C7000, C7000P, C70hc, C6000, C1070, C1070P, C71hc,
C1060, C1100, and C1085
(2) Procedure
1. Pull out the trimmer unit. (Refer to F.24.5.6 Replacing the trimming
[2] [3] [6] [4] [2]
unit)
Note
• When you reinstall it, be sure to tighten 4 screws [2] after
you make the tension of the spring [3] over the mounting
plate [4].
4. Remove 4 screws [6] with keeping the trimmer press motor (M32)
[5], and then remove it from the belt [7].
Note
• When you reinstall it, be sure to put the trimmer press
motor (M32) [5] into the round hole [8].
[7] [8] [6]
[5] [1]
a0h2t3c022ca
F-256
5. Loosen the screw [1] and then remove the gear [2] from the
[1] [2] trimmer press motor (M32) [3].
• Number 292 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 230 (1200, 1200P, and 1051)
• Number 262 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 231 (C1100, C1085)
[3] a0h2t3c023ca
24.5.5 Replacing the trimmer blade motor (M31)

• Trimmer blade motor (M31)
: Every 30,000,000 counts (Total counter) *1 (Actual replacement cycle: Every 850,000 counts (Special parts counter) *2)
• Trimmer blade motor (M31)
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 2,500,000 counts (Special parts counter)*3
*1 The periodical replacement is only for 1200/1200P/1051.
*2 Actual replacement cycle of 1200, 1200P, 1051, C8000, C7000, C7000P, C70hc, C6000, C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, C1100, and
C1085
*3 Actual replacement cycle of 1250/1250P/1052
(2) Procedure (previous trimmer unit)

[2] [2]
• Trimmer scraps guide (Refer to F.24.5.1 Removing/installing
the trimmer paddle assy)
[1]
[1] 2. Remove each 4 of the screws [1] at 2 places, and then remove 2
fixing plates [2].
a0h2t3c018ca
[2] [1] 3. Remove 2 screws [1] of the jig for supporting trimmer unit and then
remove the anti-drop bracket [2].
F-257
4. Align the edge of the jig for supporting trimmer unit [1] with the
[4] [2] [3] [1]
corner [4] of the trimmer unit that is based on the hole [2] of the jig
for supporting trimmer unit [1].
[2] [3] [1] 5. Disconnect the connector [1].

Note
• When you reinstall it, be careful not to nip the wiring
harness with the metal plate.
6. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the stopper [3].

7. Reinstall the anti-drop bracket [5] with 2 screws [4] which have
been removed in step 3.
DANGER:
• Be sure not to pull out the trimmer unit to the back side until
the stopper [3] is removed. If the stopper is removed while the
trimmer unit is pulled out to the back side, the trimmer unit
drops.
[4]
[6]
[5] [6]
F-258
9. Disconnect 5 connectors [1] and then remove the wiring harness
[1] from the wiring harness clamp.
[1] a0h2t3c020ca
[3] [4] 10. Hold the lower edges [2] of the trimmer unit [1] and pull out the
trimmer unit to the back side until the stoppers [3] touch to the anti-
drop brackets [4].
Note
• Be sure not to hold the position that is easily damaged
[1] like the electrical parts.
[2]
11. Hold the lower right [2] of the trimmer unit [1], turn it around the
[1] [3]
engaging [3] of the stopper and the anti-drop bracket, and then put
the trimmer unit [1] on the jig for supporting trimmer unit [4].
[2] [4]
[1] a0h2t3c024ca
F-259
13. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the trimmer blade motor
[1] [2] [1] (M31) [2].
Note
• When you reinstall it, be sure that the wiring harness [3]
comes in the position as you can see in the picture.
[3] a0h2t3c025ca
14. Check point when you reinstall the trimmer blade motor (M31)
[2] [1]
Note
• When you reinstall it, be sure to insert the D-cut [1] of the
shaft on the trimmer blade motor (M31) into the D-cut hole
[2] of the planetary gear.
a0h2t3c026ca
15. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the mounting bracket [3]
[2] [4] [3] [5] [1] from the trimmer blade motor (M31) [2].
Note
• When you reinstall it, be sure that the label [4] is in the
same direction as the slotted hole [5] on the mounting
bracket [3].
• Number 298 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 231 (1200, 1200P, and 1051)
• Number 263 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 232 (C1100, C1085)
[1] a0h2t3c027ca
(3) Procedure (new trimmer unit)

[1]
[1] 3. Loosen 3 screws [1] and then remove the trimmer blade motor
(M31) [2].
Note
• When you reinstall it, be sure that the wiring harness [3]
comes in the position as you can see in the picture.
[3] [2]
F-260
4. Check point when you reinstall the trimmer blade motor (M31)
[2] [1]
Note
• When you reinstall it, be sure to insert the D-cut [1] of the
shaft on the trimmer blade motor (M31) into the D-cut hole
[2] of the planetary gear.
a0h2t3c026ca
5. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the mounting bracket [3]
[2] [4] [3] [5] [1] from the trimmer blade motor (M31) [2].
Note
• When you reinstall it, be sure that the label [4] is in the
same direction as the slotted hole [5] on the mounting
bracket [3].

• Number 293 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 231 (1200, 1200P, and 1051)
• Number 263 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 270 (C1100, C1085)
[1] a0h2t3c027ca
24.5.6 Replacing the trimming unit

CAUTION
• Be sure to perform this operation with 2 people because the trimmer unit is heavy.

• Trimmer unit
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: every 2,500,000 counts (Special parts counter)) *1
*1 1250, 1250P, 1052, 1200, 1200P, 1051, C6501, C6501P, C65hc, C8000, C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, C1100, C1085
(2) Procedure for pulling out the trimmer unit

[2] [2]
• Trimmer paddle assy (Refer to F.24.5.1 Removing/installing
the trimmer paddle assy)
[1]
[1] 2. Remove each 4 of the screws [1] at 2 places, and then remove 2
fixing plates [2].
a0h2t3c018ca
F-261
[2] [1] [2]
Note
harness with the metal plate.

5. Hold the configuration parts [3] of the trimmer unit and pull out the
trimmer unit to the back side until the stoppers [4] and [5] touch to
the anti-drop brackets [6] and [7].
[5] [7] [6] [4]
[3]
a0h2t3c019ca
(3) Removing and reinstalling the trimmer unit

1. Conduct by the step 4 of the procedure for pulling out the trimmer
[1] unit (Refer to F.24.5.6.(2) Procedure for pulling out the trimmer
unit)
DANGER:
• Be sure not to pull out the trimmer unit to the back side until
the stopper is removed. If the stopper is removed while the
trimmer unit is pulled out to the back side, the trimmer unit
drops.

from the wiring harness clamp.
[1] a0h2t3c020ca
3. Remove each 2 of the screws [1] at 2 places, and then remove the
[1] [3] [2] [1]
stopper/1 [2] and stopper/2 [3].
4. Hold the configuration parts [5] and pull out the trimmer unit [4] to
the back side.
Note
• Lift the trimmer unit [4] slightly and remove or reinstall it.
Be sure to avoid the projection [6] that prevents the falling
off on the trimmer unit plate.
• Be sure not to hold the position that is easily damaged
like the electrical parts.
CAUTION
• Be sure to perform this operation with 2 people because
the trimmer unit is heavy.

• Number 294 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 234 (1200, 1200P, and 1051)
[5] [4] [5] • Number 233 (C8000)
• Number 264 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 233 (C1100, C1085)
[6]
a0h2t3c021ca
F-262
24.5.7 Lubrication to the trimmer unit

• Paper holding screw
: Every 1,400,000 counts (Total counter) (Actual lubrication cycle: Every 37,500 counts (Special parts counter)) *1
: Every 1,500,000 counts (Total counter) (Actual lubrication cycle: Every 37,500 counts (Special parts counter)) *2*3
• Drive gear/3, drive gear/4
: Every 20,250,000 counts (Total counter) (Actual lubrication cycle: Every 500,000 counts (Special parts counter)) *2
*1 C6501, C6501P, C65hc, C1100, and C1085
*2 1200, 1200P, and 1051
*3 1250, 1250P, 1052, C8000, C7000, C7000P, C70hc, C6000 , C1070, C1070P, C71hc, and C1060
(2) Procedure (previous trimmer unit)

[3] [2] 1. Remove the rear cover/Lt. (Refer to G.25.3.2 Rear cover/Lt)
2. Lubricate Molykote EM-30L to the paper holding screw [1].
3. Lubricate Molykote EM-30L to the drive gear/3 [2] and drive gear/4
[3].
Note
• When you apply the grease, be careful not to spill the
grease to other parts.
[1]
[3] [2]
[1]
a0h2t3c060ca
F-263
(3) Procedure (new trimmer unit)

[3] 1. Pull out the trimmer unit. (Refer to F.24.5.6.(2) Procedure for
pulling out the trimmer unit)
2. Lubricate Molykote EM-30L to the paper holding screw [1].
3. Lubricate Molykote EM-30L to the drive gear/3 [2] and drive gear/4
[3].
Note
• When you apply the grease, be careful not to spill the
grease to other parts.
[2]
[3] [1] [2]
[1]
F-264

CAUTION
25.2 Entrance conveyance section

25.2.1 Replacing the reverse exit roller pressure release motor (M102)
• Reverse exit roller pressure release motor (M102): Every 1,000,000 counts (special parts counter)
(2) Procedure
[2] [3] [1] 1. Remove the rear cover /Rt. (Refer to G.26.3.2 Rear cover/Rt, /Lt)
2. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove 2 screws [2] to remove
the reverse exit roller pressure release motor assy [3].
[2] [1] [3] [4] 3. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the motor mounting plate
[3] from the reverse exit roller pressure release motor (M102) [2].
Note
• When you install the reverse exit roller pressure release
motor (M102) [2], apply Molykote EM-30L to the gear [4] of
the motor.

reverse.
5. After you replace the reverse exit roller pressure release motor
(M102), conduct the following item.
• Counter reset of the parts counter number 409 (1250/1250P/
1052)
• Counter reset of the special parts counter number 387 (C1070,
C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
C1085)
25.2.2 Cleaning of the paper re-feed roller/Lt

• Paper re-feed roller/Lt
: Every 1,000,000 counts (total counter) *1*2
: Every 700,000 counts (total counter) *3
*1 1250/1250P/1052
*2 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060
*3 C1100, C1085
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the slitter unit. (Refer to G.28.3.2 Slitter unit)
2. Clean the paper re-feed roller/Lt [1] with the isopropyl alcohol.
reverse.
25.2.3 Cleaning of the reverse exit roller/Rt

• Reverse exit roller/Rt
F-265

*1 1250/1250P/1052
*2 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060
*3 C1100, C1085
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the creaser unit. (Refer to G.27.3.2 Creaser unit)
[1] 2. Clean the reverse exit roller/Rt [1] with the isopropyl alcohol.
reverse.
25.3 Folding conveyance section

25.3.1 Replacing the 1st folding knife motor (M13)
• 1st folding knife motor (M13): Every 1,700,000 counts (special parts counter)
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the rear cover /Lt. (Refer to G.26.3.2 Rear cover/Rt, /Lt)
[3] [1] [2] 3. Remove the left cover/Rr. (Refer to G.26.3.6 Left cover/Rr)
4. Release the clamp [1].
5. Remove 3 screws [2], and then remove the 1st folding knife motor
assy [3].
F-266
Note
[2] • When you install the 1st folding knife motor assy, be sure
to check that the timing belt [2] is engaged to the gear [1]
of the motor.
• When you install the 1st folding knife motor assy, move
the 1st folding knife away from the folding roller.
[1]
[2] [1] 6. Remove 4 screws [1], and then remove the motor mounting plate
[3] from the 1st folding knife motor (M13) [2].
reverse.
8. After you replace the 1st folding knife motor (M13), conduct the
following item.
1052)
C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
C1085)
[1] [3]
25.3.2 Replacing the 2nd folding knife motor (M14)

• 2nd folding knife motor (M14): Every 1,500,000 counts (special parts counter)
(2) Procedure
[5] 1. Remove the rear cover /Lt. (Refer to G.26.3.2 Rear cover/Rt, /Lt)
2. Remove the sub tray cover. (Refer to G.26.3.10 Upper cover/
RrLt1, /RrLt2, /RrLt3, sub tray cover)
3. Disconnect 2 connectors [1], and release the wiring harness from
[2] the clamp [2].
Note
[1] • When you remove the screw [3], be careful not to drop the
2nd folding knife drive assy [4].
5. Release the claw [5], and remove the 2nd folding knife drive assy
[4].
[3]
[4]
F-267
[4] Note
• When you install the 2nd folding knife drive assy [1], pull
out the arm [2] in the arrowed direction. Hang the claw [5]
on the hole of the metal plate [6] while the 2nd folding
knife [3] is released from the nip of the folding roller [4].
If the 2nd folding knife drive assy is installed with the 2nd
folding knife [3] nipped, the 2nd folding knife [3] could be
distorted.
• When you tighten 5 screws [7], check that the drive
section of the 2nd folding knife drive assy [1] keeps the
arm [2] with the arm pulled out in the arrowed direction.
If you adjust the position of the 2nd folding knife drive
[1] [2] [3] assy [1] after you hang the claw [5] on the hole of the
metal plate [6], the 2nd folding knife [3] could drop off by
its own weight and nipped by the folding roller [4].
[5][6]
[7]
[3] [1] [2] 6. Release the clamp [1].

7. Remove 3 screws [2], and then remove the 2nd folding knife motor
assy [3].
F-268
Note
[2] • When you reinstall the 2nd folding knife motor assy, be
sure to check the belt [2] is engaged to the gear [1] of the
motor.
[1]
[3] 8. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the motor mounting plate
[3] from the 2nd folding knife motor (M14) [2].
reverse.
10. After you replace the 2nd folding knife motor (M14), conduct the
following item.
1052)
C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
C1085)
[1] [2]
25.3.3 Cleaning of the half-folding roller, tri-folding roller

• Tri-folding roller
• Half-folding roller
*1 1250/1250P/1052
*2 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060
*3 C1100, C1085
(2) Procedure
1. Open the sub tray. (Refer to G.26.3.10 Upper cover/RrLt1, /RrLt2, /
RrLt3, sub tray cover)
2. Remove 4 screws [1] and release the wiring harness [2] from the
clamp. Then, remove the folding roller guide home sensor assy [3].
Note
• The folding roller guide home sensor assy [3] is
connected to SD-513 with the wiring harness [2].
When you remove the folding roller guide home sensor
assy [3], be careful not to damage the wiring harness [2].
[2] [1] [3]
F-269
3. Clean the tri-folding roller [1] and 2 half-folding rollers [2] with the
isopropyl alcohol.
reverse.
[1] [2]
25.3.4 Lubrication to the front stopper shaft

(1) Periodic lubrication parts/cycle
• Front stopper shaft
*1 1250/1250P/1052
*2 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060
*3 C1100, C1085
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the sub tray cover. (Refer to G.26.3.10 Upper cover/
[1] RrLt1, /RrLt2, /RrLt3, sub tray cover)
2. Apply the MH Surf at 4 places of the front stopper shaft [1].
reverse.
25.4 Sub tray, tri-folding tray section

25.4.1 Cleaning the tri-folding tray conveyance roller/3
• Tri-folding tray conveyance roller/3
*1 1250/1250P/1052
*2 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060
*3 C1100, C1085
(2) Procedure
1. Open the front console. (Refer to G.26.3.11 Opening and closing
of the front console)
2. Rotate the lever [1] and open the jam processing guide [2].
[1] [2]
F-270
[1]
4. Open the conveyance guide [1] to the arrow-marked direction.
[1]
5. While you lift the rear side of the conveyance guide [1], open the
conveyance guide [1] further to the arrow-marked direction.
[1]
6. Clean the tri-folding tray conveyance roller/3 [1] with isopropyl
alcohol and a cleaning pad.
reverse.
[1]
25.5 Saddle stitching section

25.5.1 Replacing the staple unit
• Staple unit: Every 1,000,000 counts (special parts counter)
(2) Procedure
For the replacement procedure of the staple unit, be sure to refer to "I.29.5 Staple adjustment". Then, be sure to perform the replacement of
the staple unit and staple adjustment at the same time.
After you replace the staple unit, be sure to conduct the following items.
• Counter reset of the special parts counter number 402 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Counter reset of the special parts counter number 381 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Counter reset of the special parts counter number 330 (C1100, C1085)
25.5.2 Replacing the clincher

• Clincher: Every 1,000,000 counts (special parts counter)
F-271
(2) Procedure
For the replacement procedure of the clincher, refer to "I.29.5 Staple adjustment". Then perform the replacement of the clincher and the
stapler adjustment at the same time.
After you replace the clincher, be sure to conduct the following items.
• Counter reset of the special parts counter number 403 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Counter reset of the special parts counter number 395 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Counter reset of the special parts counter number 344 (C1100, C1085)
25.5.3 Replacing the booklet holding motor (M17)

• Booklet holding motor (M17): Every 1,200,000 counts (special parts counter)
(2) Procedure
[1] [2] [3] 1. Remove the left cover/Fr1. (Refer to G.26.3.5 Left cover/Fr1, left
cover/Fr2, left cover/Fr3)
2. Disconnect the connector [1] and release the wiring harness, and
remove 2 screws [2]. Then remove the booklet holding motor assy
[3].
[4] [1] [2] [3] 3. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the motor mounting plate
[3] from the booklet holding motor (M17) [2].
Note
• When you install the booklet holding motor (M17) [2],
apply Molykote EM-30L to the gear [4] of the motor.

reverse.
5. After you replace the booklet holding motor (M17), conduct the
following item.
1052)
C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
C1085)
25.5.4 Lubrication to the saddle stitching alignment plate/Rr

• Saddle stitching alignment plate shaft/Rr
*1 1250/1250P/1052
*2 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060
*3 C1100, C1085
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the left cover/Fr1. (Refer to G.26.3.5 Left cover/Fr1, left
[2] [1] cover/Fr2, left cover/Fr3)
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the metal plate [2].
F-272
3. Apply the MH Surf at the 2 places of the saddle stitching alignment
[1] plate shaft/Rr [1].
reverse.
25.5.5 Lubrication to the saddle stitching alignment plate shaft/Fr

• Saddle stitching alignment plate shaft/Fr
*1 1250/1250P/1052
*2 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060
*3 C1100, C1085
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Open the front console. (Refer to G.26.3.11 Opening and closing
2. Apply the MH Surf at 2 places of the saddle stitching alignment
plate shaft/Fr [1].
reverse.
25.5.6 Replacing the conveyance guide assy/Up

• Conveyance guide assy/Up: Every 1,000,000 counts (Special parts counter)

[1] 1. Remove the upper cover/frLt1. (Refer to G.26.3.9 Upper cover/
FrLt1, /FrLt2)
3. Remove 3 screws [1], and remove the conveyance guide assy/Up
[2].
[1]
[2]
F-273

[1] 1. Fasten the conveyance guide assy/Up [2] temporarily with 3
screws [1].
2. Tighten 3 screws [1] at the position where the apex [3] of
conveyance guide/Lw matches the apex [4] of the conveyance
guide assy/Up.
3. After you replace the conveyance guide assy/Up, conduct the
following step.
• Counter reset of the special parts counter number 433 (1250,
1250P, 1052)
C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
[1] C1085)
[2] [3][4]
25.5.7 Replacing the alignment plate solenoid wiring

• Alignment plate solenoid wiring: Every 1,200,000 counts (special parts counter)
(2) Procedure
2. Remove the screw [1], and then remove the wiring cover [2].
[2] [1]
3. Remove the screw [1], and remove the solenoid cover [2].
[2] [1]
F-274
4. Remove the connector [1], and release the alignment plate
solenoid wiring from the clamp.
5. Remove 2 screws [2], and remove the cover [3].
Note
• When you install the cover [3], be sure not to catch the
alignment plate solenoid wiring between the cover [3] and
the metal plate.
[3] [2] [1]

6. Remove the wiring band [1] from the metal plate [2].
7. Release the alignment plate solenoid wiring from the hole [4] and
the clamp.
[3] [2] [1] [4]

8. Remove 2 screws [1], and remove the cover [2] in the arrow-
marked direction.
[1] [2]
10. Release the alignment plate solenoid wiring [2] from the clamp and
remove the alignment plate solenoid wiring.
reverse.
12. After you replace the alignment plate solenoid wiring, conduct the
following step.
1250P, 1052)
C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
[2] [1] C1085)
25.6 Booklet movement section

25.6.1 Lubrication to the booklet movement unit slide shaft
• Booklet movement unit slide shaft
*1 1250/1250P/1052
*2 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060
*3 C1100, C1085
F-275
(2) Procedure
[2] [1] of the front console)
2. Hold the metal plate [1], and pull out the booklet movement unit [2]
to the trimmer unit side.
3. Apply the MH Surf at 2 places of the booklet movement unit slide

[1] shaft [1].
reverse.
25.6.2 Lubrication to the booklet holding unit slide shaft

• Booklet hold unit slide shaft
*1 1250/1250P/1052
*2 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060
*3 C1100, C1085
(2) Procedure
[2] [1] of the front console)
2. Hold the metal plate [1], and pull out the booklet movement unit [2]
to the trimmer unit side.
F-276
3. Pull out the booklet holding unit [1] to the trimmer unit side.
[1] 4. Apply MH surf at 2 places of the booklet holding unit slide shaft [2].
reverse.
[2]
25.6.3 Lubrication to the booklet set unit slide shaft

• Booklet set unit slide shaft
*1 1250/1250P/1052
*2 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060
*3 C1100, C1085
(2) Procedure
[1] of the front console)
2. Apply the MH Surf at 4 places of the booklet set unit slide shaft [1].
reverse.
25.7 Clamp section

25.7.1 Replacing the fore edge stopper motor (M24)
• Fore edge stopper motor (M24): Every 2,000,000 counts (special parts counter)
(2) Procedure
[2] [3] [2] [1] 1. Remove the right cover/1. (Refer to G.26.3.3 Right cover/1, /2, /3)
2. Disconnect the connector [1] and release the wiring harness.
3. Remove 4 screws [2] and remove the fore edge stopper motor
assy [3].
F-277
4. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the fore edge stopper motor
(M24) [2].
Note
• When you install the fore edge stopper motor (M24) [2],

[1] reverse.
6. After you replace the fore edge stopper motor (M24), conduct the
following item.
1052)
C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
C1085)
[2] [3]
25.7.2 Replacing the fore edge finger motor (M52), the fore-edge finger gear, and the finger torque limiter
• Fore edge finger motor (M52): Every 600,000 counts (special parts counter)
• Fore edge finger gear: Every 600,000 counts (special parts counter)
• Finger torque limiter: Every 600,000 counts (special parts counter)
(2) Procedure
[1] [2] [4] [2] 1. Remove the right cover/1. (Refer to G.26.3.3 Right cover/1, /2, /3)
2. Disconnect the connector [1] and release the wiring harness.
3. Remove 6 screws [2]. While you release the bearing [3], remove
the fore edge finger motor assy [4].
Note
• When you install the fore edge finger motor assy [4], be
sure to match the hole [5] and the bearing [3].
[5] [3]
F-278
[3] [2] 4. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the fore edge finger motor (M52)
[2].
Note
• When you install the fore edge finger motor (M52) [2],
[1]
[1]
[3] [2] 6. Remove E-rings [1] 1 each, spacers [2] 1 each, and bearings [3] 1
each, and remove the finger torque limiter assy [4] in the arrowed
direction.
[4][1]
[3]
[1] [2]
F-279
7. Remove the E-ring [1], the gear [2], the pin [3] and the E-ring [4],
and slide the fore edge finger gear [5] and the finger torque limiter
[6] in the arrowed direction.
8. Remove the pin [7], and remove the fore edge finger gear [5] and
the finger torque limiter [6].
Note
• When you install the fore edge finger gear [5], apply
Molykote EM-30L to the fore edge finger gear [5].

reverse.
10. After you replace the fore edge finger motor (M52), the fore edge
[7] [6] [5] [4] [3] [2] [1] finger gear, and the finger torque limiter, conduct the following
steps.
• Fore edge finger motor (M52): Counter reset of the special
parts counter No.414 (1250/1250P/1052)
• Fore edge finger gear: Counter reset of the special parts
counter number 432 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Finger torque limiter: Counter reset of the special parts counter
number 431 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
parts counter number 392 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
counter number 276 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
number 275 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
parts counter number 341 (C1100, C1085)
counter number 361 (C1100, C1085)
number 360 (C1100, C1085)
25.7.3 Replacing the clamp motor (M23)

• Clamp motor (M23): Every 400,000 counts (special parts counter)
(2) Replacement procedure when FD-504 is not installed

1. Remove the gripper paper exit unit. (Refer to G.26.3.13 Gripper
[3] [2] [4] paper exit unit)
3. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the clamp motor assy [3].
Note
• When you remove the clamp motor assy [3], be careful
that the encoder [4] does not damage the clamp motor
encoder sensor (PS121) [5].
• When you reinstall the clamp motor assy [3], be careful
[1] [5]
F-280
4. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the motor mounting plate
[4] [3] [1] [2] [3] from the clamp motor (M23) [2].
Note
• When you install the clamp motor (M23) [2], apply
Molykote EM-30L to the gear [4] of the motor.

reverse.
6. After you replace the clamp motor (M23), conduct the following
item.
• Counter reset of the parts counter number 413
(3) Replacement procedure when FD-504 is installed

1. Move the SQF clamp plate to the home position with the output
check 71-94 of the I/O Check Mode.
2. Move the up down position of the lifter plate to the home position
with the output check 71-68 of the I/O check mode.
3. Move the front back position of the lifter plate to the home position
4. Perform the pressure of the SQF clamp plate on output check
71-95 in the IO check mode.
5. Turn OFF the sub power switch (SW2) and the main power switch
outlet.
[1] [3] [2] [4] paper exit unit)
7. Release the wiring harness from 3 clamps [1].
8. Remove the screw [2], and then remove the wiring cover [3].
9. Move the SQF roller assy [4] to the arrow-marked direction.
[4] [1] 11. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the clamp motor assy [3].
Note
• When you remove the clamp motor assy [3], be careful
• When you reinstall the clamp motor assy [3], be careful
[5] [3] [2]
12. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the motor mounting plate
[4] [3] [1] [2] [3] from the clamp motor (M23) [2].
reverse.
14. After you replace the clamp motor (M23), conduct the following
item.
1052)
C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
C1085)
25.7.4 Replacing the booklet holding wire/1, booklet holding wire/2 and booklet holding wire/3
• Booklet holding wire/1: Every 1,200,000 counts (Special parts counter)
(2) Procedure
Note
• When you replace the booklet holding wires, be sure not to fold the conveyance guide [1].
F-281
[1]
[3] 1. Open the front console at the maximum. (Refer to G.26.3.11
Opening and closing of the front console)
[1] 2. Remove the E-rings [1], 1 each.
3. Release the pulley [2], 1 each in the arrow-marked direction [3],
and remove the pulley assy [4], 1 each in the arrow-marked
direction [5].
[4] [2]
[5] [2]
[1]
[3]
4. Remove the C-clip [1], 1 each, and remove the wire holding [2], 1
[1] each.
[2]
F-282
Note
• When you install the wire holding [1], be sure to align the
projection [2] of the wire holding with the hole [3] of the
metal plate.
[1] [3] [2]

[3] 5. Remove the 3 screws [1], and release the fixing of the wire
retaining plate [2].
[2]
[1]
7. Release the edge [2] of the booklet holding wire from the wire
[2] retaining plate [1].
[1]
F-283
8. Remove the C-clip [1], 1 each.
[1]
9. Remove the right cover/1. (Refer to G.26.3.3 Right cover/1, /2, /3)
[1] 10. Pull out the shaft [1], 1 each, and release the fixing of the shaft.
F-284
Note
[4] [1] • When you install the shaft [1], be sure to put each wire
into the groove [3] of each pulley [2].
• Be sure not to catch the wire in the gap [4] between
pulleys.
[2][3]
11. Remove the booklet holding wire/1 [2], 1 each, the booklet holding
[1] wire/2 [3], 1 each, and the booklet holding wire/3 [4], 1 each from
the 3 springs [1].
[4] [3] [2]
F-285
reverse.
Note
• The lengths of the booklet holding wire/1 [1], the booklet
holding wire/2 [2], and the booklet holding wire/3 [3] are
different. When you install the booklet holding wire/1 [1],
the booklet holding wire/2 [2], and the booklet holding
wire/3 [3], follow the table to distinguish each wire.
Parts name Length Hook Wire
color color
[3] [2] [1] Booklet holding wire/1 [1] Long Silver Silver
Booklet holding wire/2 [2] Mediu Black Silver
m
Booklet holding wire/3 [3] Short Silver Red
13. After you replace the booklet holding wire/1, the booklet holding
wire/2, and the booklet holding wire/3, conduct the following steps.
• Booklet holding wire/1: Counter reset of the special parts
counter number 428 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
counter number 429 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
counter number 430 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
[3] [2] [1] [2] [3] • Booklet holding wire/1: Counter reset of the special parts
25.7.5 Replacing the clamp hanging wire

• Clamp hanging wire: Every 600,000 counts (special parts counter)
Note
• Replace the clamp hanging wire only when the FD-504 is installed.
F-286
(2) Procedure
[6] [7] paper exit unit)
3. Lift up the bottom sections [2] of both edges of the clamp unit or
push down the [3] of the square fold unit. This operation adjusts
the height of the square fold unit [4]. Move the square fold unit to
the position where the 2 screw holes of the pulley shaft [6] can be
seen from the 2 holes [5].
4. Install the 2 screws [1] to the 2 screw holes on the pulley shaft [6].
CAUTION
• The strong spring [7] has been installed in the pulley shaft
[6].
Be sure to tighten the screw [1]. If the fixing of the pulley
shaft [6] is released during the replacement, the spring [7]
possibly damages the parts or injury is possibly caused.
[3] [5] [2] [1] [4] [3]
5. Remove 5 screws [1], and remove the motor cover [2].

[1]
[1] [2]
6. Remove 1 each of the screws [1], and remove 1 each of the

[1] [2] [2] [1]
rotation levers [2].
F-287
7. Attach the rotation lever [1] to the pulley shaft [2].
[1] [2]
8. Rotate the rotation lever [1] 180 degrees or more to the arrow-
[1] [2][3] [3]
marked direction. Then, fix the rotation lever with the screw [2]
which you removed in step 6. Screw hole of the screw [2] is either
of the 2 screw holes [3].
9. Attach the rotation lever [1] to the pulley shaft [2].

[1] [2]
10. Rotate the rotation lever [1] 180 degrees or more to the arrow-
[1] [3] [2][3]
marked direction. Then, fix the rotation lever with the screw [2]
which you removed in step 6. Screw hole of the screw [2] is either
of the 2 screw holes [3].
F-288
11. Release 1 each of the clamp hanging wires [1] from 1 each of the
[1] hooks [2].
Note
• When you install 1 each of the clamp hanging wires [1] to
[2] 1 each of the hooks [2], be sure to use the precision
screwdriver and hook the clamp hanging wires.
[2] [1] 12. Remove the C-clip [1], 1 each, and remove the wire holding [2], 1
each.
F-289
13. Remove the screw [1], 1 each, and release the fixing of the clamp
[1] [2] hanging wire [2].
14. Loosen the screws [3], 2 each, and release the fixing of the pulley
[5] retaining plate [4]. Then pull out the clamp hanging wire [2] from
the hole [5].
[3]
[4]
[2] [1]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[2] [3] [1] 15. Remove the E-rings [1], 1 each.

16. Remove the screw [2], 1 each, and remove the pulley cover [3], 1
each.
F-290
[3] [2] [1] 17. Slide the spacer [1], 1 each, and the pulley [2], 1 each in the
arrow-marked direction, and remove the clamp hanging wire [3], 1
each.
reverse.
Note
• When you install the clamp hanging wire, check that the
clamp hanging wire is caught in the groove of each pulley.
19. After you replace the clamp hanging wire, conduct the following
item.
1250P, 1052)
C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
C1085)
25.8 Trimmer section

25.8.1 Replacing the trimmer blade
WARNING
• Pay extra caution when holding the trimmer blade [1]. Never touch the edge [2] of the blade. You get injured.
• Remove the blade cover only at the replacement. Otherwise, never remove the cover. You get injured.
• Dispose the used trimmer blade as specified by the local authority.
[1] [2]

• Trimmer blade: Every 37,500 counts (special parts counter)

1. Conduct the home position search of the trimmer press motor
(M32) with the output check 71-82 of the I/O Check Mode. Then,
move the trimmer press board to the home position.
2. Move the trimmer blade to the home position with the output check
71-79 of the I/O Check Mode.
3. Move up the trimmer booklet holding to the home position with the
output check 71-73 of the I/O check mode.
4. Perform the upper limit search of the trimmer press motor (M32)
on the output check 71-81 of the I/O check mode. Move the
trimmer press board to the release position.
[1] [2] [3] outlet.
6. Release the lock mechanism of the trimmer section and open the
front console. (Refer to G.26.3.11 Opening and closing of the front
console)
7. Remove the trimmer paddle assy. (Refer to F.25.8.3 Replacing the
trimming unit)
8. Remove the hexagon socket screw [1].
9. Loosen 2 hexagon socket screws [2].
F-291
WARNING
• If you loosen 2 hexagon socket screws [2] too much, the
trimmer blade [3] possibly falls during the operation. Keep
the loosening amount of 2 hexagon socket screws [2] to a
minimum requirement for removing the trimmer blade [3].
[2] [1] 10. Hold the hexagon socket screw [1] and the hexagon socket screw
[2]. After you pull out the hexagon socket screw [1] a little, slide the
trimmer blade [3] as you pull out from the hole [4] to the direction
of the arrow and remove the trimmer blade.
[3]
[4]
11. Put the trimmer blade [1] at a safe place with no fear of falling
down.
WARNING
• Pay extra caution when you handle the trimmer blade [1].
Never touch the edge [2] of the blade. You possibly get
injured.
[1] [2]
12. Insert the hex wrench [2] onto the mounting slit [1] of the trimmer
blade, and then slide the hex wrench from left to right (viewed from
the operator) and clean the trimmer scraps.
Note
• Conduct the cleaning with the #2.5 hex wrench which is
one-step thinner than the hex wrench #3 used for the
installation screws of the trimmer blade. Using #3 causes
the deformation of the mounting slit.
• To change the direction of the hex wrench, remove the
wrench once and reinsert it again.
• The bottom of the slit of the right side [3] (viewed from the
operator) is curved. Be sure to scrape the trimmer scraps.
[3]
13. Clean the mounting slit [1] of the trimmer blade with the blower
brush.
[2] [1]
F-292

[2] [4] [3] [1] 1. Put a new trimmer blade [1] on the floor and insert 2 new screws
about half and a bit length of them [3] into the marked side [2].
WARNING
• Be sure to insert the screws [3] enough to hold the
trimmer blade, otherwise the trimmer blade falls down
during the operation.
Note
• Install the new screws [3] that are shipped with the
trimmer blade.
2. Remove the blade cover [4] of the new trimmer blade and put that
cover on the old trimmer blade.
[2][4] 3. Hold 2 screws [2] of the new trimmer blade [1] and insert the left
edge of the trimmer blade into the hole [3]. Then insert 2 screws
[2] to the screw grooves [4].
[1]
[3]
4. Tighten the new screw [1] temporarily. Then press the hexagon
socket screw [1] and 2 hexagon socket screws [2] to the rear side
[3] until the trimmer blade [4] contacts the rear side. Then press it
to the left side [5] (viewed from the operator).
5. Tighten the hexagon socket screw [1] and 2 hexagon socket
screws [2] with the hex wrench.
WARNING
• When you tighten the screw [1] and 2 screws [2], tighten
them temporarily first. Then, fully tighten them with high
torque.
When the torque is weak, the fixing of the trimmer blade is
possibly released.
[1] [5] [3] [2] [4] Note
• Be sure to check and clear the foreign object that
obstacles the operation of the trimmer blade.

reverse.
Note
• After replacing the trimmer blade, perform the saddle
performed without problem.
7. After you replace the trimmer blade, conduct the following item.
1052)
C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
C1085)
F-293
25.8.2 Replacing the trimmer board

• Trimmer board: Every 18,900 counts (special parts counter)
(2) Procedure
1. Conduct the home position search of the trimmer press motor
[2] [1] (M32) with the output check 71-82 of the I/O Check Mode. Then,
move the trimmer press board to the home position.
2. Move the trimmer blade to the home position with the output check
71-79 of the I/O Check Mode.
3. Move up the trimmer booklet holding to the home position with the
output check 71-73 of the I/O check mode.
4. Perform the movement to the replacement position of the trimmer
press motor (M32) on the output check 71-84 of the I/O check
mode. Move the trimmer press board to the replacement position.
outlet.
6. Release the lock mechanism of the trimmer section and open the
front console. (Refer to G.26.3.11 Opening and closing of the front
console)
7. Turn the trimmer unit back. (Refer to F.25.8.3 Replacing the
trimming unit)
8. Remove the trimmer paddle assy. (Refer to F.25.8.3 Replacing the
trimming unit)
9. Remove the screws [1] 1 each, and then remove the fixing plates
[2] 1 each.
[2] [1]
F-294
10. Release 2 feed racks [2] to the direction of the arrow while you pull
[2] [3] [4] the trimmer board [1]. Then, remove the trimmer board [1].
Note
• When you pull out the trimmer board [1], be sure not to
damage the trimmer board replacement sensor (PS53) [4]
by the actuator [3] of the trimmer board.
[1] [2]
[2] [1] Note

• When you install the trimmer board [1], be sure not to
bend the guide sheet [2].
F-295
Note
[1] [2] • When you install the trimmer board [1], insert it vertically
and straight so that the trimmer board [1] comes inside of
2 hold plates [2].
[1] [2]
11. Clean the actuator [1] and the part [2] of the trimmer blade
[1] retaining plate where the trimmer blade retaining plate touches the
actuator.
Note
• When the trimmer scraps remain or the cleaning is not
conducted properly, the trimmer completion timing
changes and a trimming fault occurs.

reverse.
Note
• After you replace the trimmer board, perform the saddle
[2] performed without problem.
13. After you replace the trimmer board, conduct the following item.
• Reset the trimmer counter with the output check code "71-78"
of the I/O check mode.
Note
• When the counter is not reset, the trimmer board
moving timing after the trimmer board is replaced
becomes faster than specified timing. (In the first
operation only)

1052)
C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
C1085)
25.8.3 Replacing the trimming unit

• Trimmer unit: Every 2,500,000 counts (special parts counter)
(2) Procedure
CAUTION
• Be sure to perform this operation with 2 people because the trimmer unit is heavy.
F-296
1. Open the front console and release the wire. (Refer to G.26.3.11
[2] [1] Opening and closing of the front console)
2. Pull out the trim scrap box [1].
3. Remove the inner box [2].
4. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the retaining plate assy [2].
[1] [2]
5. Push 2 rails [1] into the inside of SD-513.

[1]
[2] [1] 6. Remove 5 screws [1], and remove the trimmer unit cover [2].
F-297
[3] 7. Remove 4 screws [1], and remove the fixing plate/Fr [2].
8. Remove 3 screws [3], and remove the fixing plate/Rr [4].
[4]
[1] [1]
[2]
[1] [2] 9. Remove 4 screws [1], and remove the locking material [2].
F-298
[2] 10. Turn the guide plate assy [1] in the arrow-marked direction and
remove 2 screws [2].
[1]
[2]
[1] [2] 11. Remove 2 screws [1], and remove the guide plate assy [2].
[1] [2] 12. Hold 2 handles [1], and rotate the trimmer unit [2] in the arrow-
marked direction.
F-299
[3] [1] [2] Note

• When you perform operations such as a replacement with
the trimmer unit [1] being risen, insert a driver [3] into the
hole [2] to fix the unit so that it does not fall down.
13. Hold the handle [1], and rotate the trimmer unit [2] in the arrow-
14. Hold the handle [4], and rotate the trimmer unit [2] in the arrow-
[4] marked direction [5].
15. Hold 2 handles [6], and turn the trimmer unit [2] in the arrow-
[3] [6] [5]
[1] [2] [7]
F-300
[4] 16. Remove screws [1] 1 each, and remove the washers [2] 1 each.
Note
• When you remove screws [1] 1 each, be careful not to lose
washers [2] 1 each.
[1] 17. Remove screws [3] 1 each, and remove the stopper assy [4] 1
[2] each.
[3]
[1][2] [3] [4]

[2] 18. Disconnect the 2 connectors [1].
19. Remove 4 screws [2], and then remove the trimmer paddle assy
[3].
Note
• When trimmer scraps wrap around the trimmer paddle
assy [3], be sure to remove the trimmer scraps.
[3]
[1]
[1] [2] 20. Remove 2 screws [1], and remove the slide board [2].
F-301
22. Hold 2 handles [2], and raise the trimmer unit [3].
[1]
[3] [1]
[2]
23. Hold the handle [1] and the lower position of the front side of the
trimmer unit [2], and hold the handle [3] and the lower position of
the rear side of the unit [4]. Then, remove the trimmer unit [5].
reverse.
25. After you replace the trimmer unit, conduct the following item.
1052)
C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
C1085)
[2] [1] [5] [4]
25.8.4 Replacing the trimmer blade motor (M31)

• Trimmer blade motor (M31): Every 850,000 counts (special parts counter)
F-302
(2) Procedure
trimming unit)
3. Loosen 3 screws [2], and remove the trimmer blade motor assy [3].
Note
• When you reinstall the trimmer blade motor assy [3], be
sure to reinstall it so that the wiring harness [4] comes in
the position in the picture.
[3] [2] [4] [1]

Note
[2] [1]
• When you reinstall the trimmer blade motor assy, be sure
to insert the D-cut [1] on the shaft of the trimmer blade
motor (M31) into the D-cut hole [2] of the planetary gear.
a0h2t3c026ca
[3] [2] 4. Remove 4 screws [1], and remove the trimmer blade motor (M31)
[2].
Note
• When you reinstall the trimmer blade motor (M31) [2], be
sure to reinstall it so that the label [3] comes in the
position in the picture.

reverse.
6. After you replace the trimmer blade motor (M31), conduct the
following item.
1052)
[1] C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
C1085)
25.8.5 Replacing the trimmer press motor (M32)

• Trimmer press motor (M32): Every 500,000 counts (special parts counter)
(2) Procedure
trimming unit)
[1]
F-303
3. Rotate the trimmer unit [1].
[1]
[1] [4] [6] [5] [3] [1] Note
• When you install the trimmer press motor (M32) [2],
tighten 4 screws [1] after you let the tension of the spring
[3] over the mounting plate [4].
5. Remove 4 screws [5] with keeping the trimmer press motor (M32)
[2], and then remove it from the belt [6].
Note
• When you install the trimmer press motor (M32) [2], be
sure to insert the trimmer press motor (M32) [2] into the
round hole [7].
[5] [2] [7]
6. Loosen the screw [1] and then remove the gear [2] from the
[1] [2] trimmer press motor (M32) [3].
reverse.
8. After you replace the trimmer press motor (M32), conduct the
following item.
1052)
C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
C1085)
[3] a0h2t3c023ca
25.8.6 Lubrication to the press drive screw, the gear

• Gear: Every 500,000 counts (special parts counter)*1
• Press drive screw: Every 37,500 counts (special parts counter)*2
*1 Lubricate the gear at the same time when you replace the trimmer press motor (M32).
*2 Lubricate the press drive screw at the same time when you replace the trimmer blade.
(2) Procedure
[3] [2] [1] 1. Rotate the trimmer unit. (Refer to F.25.8.3 Replacing the trimming
unit)
2. Lubricate Molykote EM-30L to the gear [2] from the hole [1].
3. Lubricate Molykote EM-30L to 2 places of the gear [3].
F-304
trimming unit)
5. Lubricate Molykote EM-30L to 2 places of the press drive screw
[1].
reverse.
[1]
[1]
25.9 Booklet tray section

25.9.1 Replacing the gripper motor (M26)
• Gripper motor (M26): Every 2,500,000 counts (special parts counter)
(2) Procedure
[2] [4] [5] [2] [3] [1] 1. Remove the gripper paper exit unit. (Refer to G.26.3.13 Gripper
paper exit unit)
3. Remove 2 screws [2], and remove the gripper motor assy [3].
Note
• When you reinstall the gripper motor assy [3], be sure to
check the belt [4] is engaged to the gear [5] of the motor.
[2] [1] 4. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the motor mounting plate
[2].
5. Remove 2 hexagon socket screws [3], and remove the gear [5]
from the gripper motor (M26) [4].
[3] [5] [4]
F-305
[3] reverse.
Note
• When you install the gear [2] to the gripper motor (M26)
[1], install it so that the distance between the leading edge
of the shaft [3] of the gripper motor and the gear is within
the standard value.
Standard value: a = 3.9 ± 0.5 mm
7. After you replace the gripper motor (M26), conduct the following
item.
a 1052)
[2] [1]
C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
C1085)
25.9.2 Lubrication to the gripper paper exit gear/Fr, the gripper paper exit gear/Rr
• Gripper paper exit gear/Fr: Every 600,000 counts (special parts counter)*
• Gripper paper exit gear/Rr: Every 600,000 counts (special parts counter)*
* Lubricate the gripper paper exit gear/Fr and the gripper paper exit gear/Rr at the same time when you replace the fore edge finger motor
(M52).
(2) Procedure
[1] paper exit unit)
2. Lubricate Molykote EM-30L to the gripper paper exit gear/Fr [1]
and the gripper paper exit gear/Rr [2].
reverse.
[2]
25.9.3 Lubrication to the gripper lock plate

• Gripper lock plate: Every 600,000 counts (special parts counter)*
* Lubricate the gripper lock plate at the same time when you replace the fore edge finger motor (M52).
F-306
(2) Procedure
paper exit unit)
[1] 2. Lubricate Molykote EM-30L to the 2 positions of the gripper lock
plate [1].
reverse.
[1]
25.9.4 Lubrication to the shutter slide shaft and the shutter slide plate
• Shutter slide shaft: Every 600,000 counts (Special parts counter)*
Shutter slide plate: Every 600,000 counts (Special parts counter)*
* Lubricate the shutter slide shaft and the shutter slide plate at the same time when you replace the fore edge finger motor (M52).
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the gripper paper exit unit and put it upside down. (Refer
to G.26.3.13 Gripper paper exit unit)
[2] Note
• When you put the gripper paper exit unit upside down, put
it on A3 or 11 x 17 paper.
If you directly put the gripper paper exit unit on a floor or
a desk, the external section of the gripper paper exit unit
is possibly damaged.
[3]
2. Move down the shutter [1]. Apply MH Surf to 2 places to each of
the shutter slide shaft [2] and inside of the shutter slide plate [3].
reverse.
[1]
[3]
[2]
F-307
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L PROCEDURE CR-101
26. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE CR-101

CAUTION
26.2 Creaser section

26.2.1 Cleaning the crease blade
• Crease blade
: Every 1,000,000 counts (total counter)*1*2
: Every 700,000 counts (total counter)*3
*1 1250/1250P/1052
*2 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060
*3 C1100, C1085
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the creaser unit. (Refer to G.27.3.2 Creaser unit)
2. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the conveyance guide [2].
[1] [2]
3. Clean the crease blade [1] with Isopropyl alcohol and a cleaning
pad.
reverse.
[1]
F-308
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L PROCEDURE TU-503
27. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE TU-503

CAUTION

27.2.1 Cleaning the registration roller
• Registration roller
Every 1,000,000 counts (total counter) *1*2
Every 700,000 counts (total counter) *3
• Registration sensor (PS98)
*1 1250/1250P/1052
*2 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060
*3 C1100, C1085
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the slitter unit. (Refer to G.28.3.2 Slitter unit)
2. Clean the registration roller [1] with Isopropyl alcohol and a
cleaning pad.
3. Use the blower brush and clean the registration sensor (PS98) [2].
reverse.
[1] [2]
27.2.2 Replacing the registration roller

• Registration driven roller
*1 1250/1250P/1052
*2 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060
*3 C1100, C1085
(2) Procedure
2. Open the open close gate/Up [1].
[1]
F-309
3. Clean the registration driven roller [1] with Isopropyl alcohol and a
cleaning pad.
reverse.
[1]
27.3 Slitter section

27.3.1 Lubrication to the slit cutter shaft
• Slit cutter shaft
: Every 1,000,000 counter (total counter)*1*2
: Every 700,000 counter (total counter)*3
*1 1250, 1250P, and 1052
*2 C1070, 1070P, C71hc, C1060
*3 C1100, C1085
(2) Procedure
2. Displace the slit cutter assy [1] horizontally and clean the slit cutter
shaft [2] with a cleaning pad.
Note
[3] • When you clean the slit cutter shaft [2], clean the slit
cutter shaft groove [3] as well.
• When you clean the slit cutter shaft, do not use alcohol. If
you use alcohol, the oil that is applied on the slit cutter
shaft is removed.
3. Apply the Molykote EM-30L on the slit cutter shaft groove [3].
reverse.
[1]
27.3.2 Lubrication to the slit cutter drive gear

• Slit cutter drive gear
*1 1250/1250P/1052
*2 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060
*3 C1100, C1085
F-310
(2) Procedure
2. Apply Molykote on the join section [2] of 2 slit cutter drive gears [1].
reverse.
[1]
[2]
27.3.3 Replacing the slit cutter assy/Fr, /Rr

• Slit cutter assy/Fr, slit cutter assy/Rr: Every 750,000 counts (special parts counter)

[1] [2] 1. Remove rotary cutter assy. (Refer to F.27.4.1 Replacing the rotary
cutter assy)
2. Remove the screw [1], and then remove the sensor bracket [2].
Note
[1] • When you install the sensor bracket [1], adjust the gap
between the bottom [2] of the sensor bracket and the
bottom [3] of the conveyance guide/Up within ± 0.5 mm.
[3] [2] [2] [3]
F-311
4. Remove 5 screws [2], and remove the slitter motor assy [3].
[2] [3] [1] [2]

[1] [2] 5. Remove 2 C-rings [1], and remove 2 bearings [2].
6. Remove the C-ring [1], and remove the gear [2], the pin [3], and
the adjuster ring [4].
[2] [1] [3] [4]

[2] [1] 7. Remove 2 hexagon socket screws [1], and then remove 2 slit
cutter drive gears [2].
[3] [4] [2] [1] 8. Remove the screw [1].

9. Remove 2 C-rings [1], and remove 2 bearings [3] and the spacer
[4].
F-312
10. Move the slit cutter assy/Fr [1] and the slit cutter assy/Rr [2] to the
[3][4]
11. Remove 4 screws [3] and 4 spacers [4]. Then, remove the slit
cutter unit [5] in the arrow-marked direction.
[2] [1] [5]
[2] [1] 12. Remove the slit cutter assy/Fr [1] in the arrow-marked direction.
13. Remove the slit cutter assy/Rr [2] in the arrow-marked direction.
[1] [3] [2] Note

• When you hold the slit cutter assy/Fr [1] and the slit cutter
assy/Rr [2], be sure not to touch the cutter blade [3]. You
possibly get injured.
F-313
Note
• When you install the slit cutter assy/Fr [1] and the slit
cutter assy/Rr [2], reinstall the [5] sections of the slit
cutter shaft/Up [3] and the slit cutter shaft/Lw [4] at the
front side and the [6] sections and the rear side.
[3] [5]
[2] [4] [1]
[6]
F-314

1. Reinstall a new slit cutter assy/Fr and a new slit cutter assy/Rr
following the removal steps in reverse.
2. Remove 1 each of the screws [1], and then remove 1 each of the
slit cutter positioning assy [2].
Note
• The slit cutter positioning assy [2] fixes the positions of
the upper slit cutter and lower slit cutter. Therefore, do not
remove the slit cutter positioning assy [2] until the slit
cutter assy is installed.
If the positions of the upper slit cutter and the lower slit
cutter move, paper cannot be trimmed.
[2] [1] • The upper slit cutter has to be at outside. The lower slit
cutter has to be at inside.
• Be sure to store the slit cutter positioning assy that you
removed.
When you remove the slit cutter assy, be sure to install
the slit cutter positioning assy that you store beforehand.

4. After you replace the slit cutter assy/Fr and the slit cutter assy/Rr,
• For the slit cutter assy/Fr: Counter reset of the special parts
counter number 422 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
[1] [2] • For the slit cutter assy/Rr: Counter reset of the special parts
counter number 423 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• For the slit cutter assy/Rr: Counter reset of the special parts
counter number 351 (1100, 1085P,)
• For the slit cutter assy/Rr: Counter reset of the special parts
27.4 Rotary cutter section

27.4.1 Replacing the rotary cutter assy
• Rotary cutter assy: Every 750,000 counts (special parts counter)
(2) Procedure
2. Remove 2 screws [1], and remove the sensor cover [2].
[2] [1]
3. Disconnect the connector [1], and release the wiring harness [2]
[1] [4] [2] [3] from the clamp of the stay assy [3].
4. Release the wiring harness [2] from the hole [4].
F-315
5. Disconnect 2 connectors [1], and remove 4 screws [2]. Then,
[2] [2] release the fixing of the 2 rotary cutter assy [3].
[1] [3] [1] [3]
6. Remove 3 screws [1], and then remove the stay assy [2].
7. Remove 2 rotary cutter assy [3].
Note
• When you hold the rotary cutter assy [3], be careful not to
touch the cutter blade [4]. You possibly get injured.

reverse.
9. After you replace the rotary cutter assy, conduct the following item.
1250P, 1052)
[2] [1] • Counter reset of the special parts counter number 153 (C1070,
C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
C1085)
[1] [4] [3] [3]
[4] [3]
27.4.2 Cleaning the slit scraps roller/Lt and slit scraps roller/Rt
• Slit scraps roller/Lt, slit scraps roller/Rt
*1 1250/1250P/1052
*2 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060
*3 C1100, C1085
F-316
(2) Procedure
2. Remove rotary cutter assy. (Refer to F.27.4.1 Replacing the rotary
cutter assy)
3. Clean the slit scraps roller/Lt [1] and the slit scraps roller/Rt [2] with
Isopropyl alcohol and a cleaning pad.
reverse.
[1] [2]
F-317
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L PROCEDURE FD-504
28. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE FD-504

CAUTION
28.2 Clamp section

28.2.1 Lubrication to SQF clamp
• SQF clamp plate
*1 1250/1250P/1052
*2 C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060
*3 C1100, C1085
(2) Procedure
1. Move the SQF clamp plate to the home position with the output
[2] check 71-94 of the I/O Check Mode.
[1] with the output check 71-66 of the I/O check mode.
outlet.
paper exit unit)
7. Apply MH surf on the SQF roller scan line [1] and the SQF roller
scan line [2] of the SQF clamp plate.
Note
• When you apply the MH surf, be careful not to let the MH
surf adhere to the booklet press side of the SQF clamp
pressure plate.
• After the lubrication, put back the SQF roller assy [3] to
[2] [3] [1] the home position, rear side of the machine.
When the SQF roller assy is not in the original position, it
contacts with the gripper paper exit unit and the machine
is possibly damaged.
[1] 8. Install the gripper paper exit unit. (Refer to G.26.3.13 Gripper
paper exit unit)
9. Connect the power plug to the power outlet and activate the main
power switch (SW1) and the power switch (SW2) of the main body.
10. After the initial operation, open the booklet tray section door.
(Refer to G.26.3.14 Open and close of the booklet tray section
door)
11. Check 2 booklet press sections [1] on the clamp plate, and wipe off
any MH surf.
28.2.2 Replacing the SQF clamp motor/Rr (M202)

• SQF clamp motor/Rr (M202): Every 250,000 counts (special parts counter)
F-318
(2) Procedure
[3] [2] [1] 1. Remove the gripper paper exit unit. (Refer to G.26.3.13 Gripper
paper exit unit)
3. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the SQF clamp motor/Rr
assy [3].
[3] [1] [2] 4. Remove 2 screws [1], and remove the SQF clamp motor/Rr
(M202) [2].
Note
• When you install the SQF clamp motor/Rr (M202) [2], apply
Molykote EM-30L to the gear of the motor [3].

reverse.
6. After you replace the SQF clamp motor/Rr (M202), conduct the
following item.
1250P, 1052)
C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
C1085)
28.2.3 Replacing the SQF clamp motor/Fr (M203)

• SQF clamp motor/Fr (M203): Every 250,000 counts (special parts counter)
(2) Procedure
[1] [2] [3] 1. Remove the gripper paper exit unit. (Refer to G.26.3.13 Gripper
paper exit unit)
3. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the SQF clamp motor/Fr
assy [3].
[3] [1] [2] 4. Remove 2 screws [1], and remove the SQF clamp motor/Fr (M203)
[2].
Note
• When you install the SQF clamp motor/Fr (M203) [2], apply
the Molykote EM-30L to the gear [3] of the motor.

reverse.
6. After you replace the SQF clamp motor/Fr (M203), conduct the
following item.
1250P, 1052)
C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
C1085)
28.3 Square-fold sction

28.3.1 Replacing the SQF roller motor (M201)
• SQF roller motor (M201): Every 1,000,000 counts (special parts counter)
F-319
(2) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Remove the gripper paper exit unit. (Refer to G.26.3.13 Gripper
paper exit unit)
3. Push down the square-fold unit [1].
5. Remove 2 screws [3], and remove the SQF roller motor (M201) [4].
Note
• When you reinstall the SQF roller motor (M201) [4], be
sure to check the belt [6] is engaged to the gear [5] of the
motor.

reverse.
7. After you replace the SQF roller motor (M201), conduct the
[6] [4] [3] following item.
1250P, 1052)
C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
C1085)
[5]
28.3.2 Replacing the SQF roller cleaning assy/Fr, /Rr

• SQF roller cleaning assy/Fr: Every 250,000 counts (special parts counter)
• SQF roller cleaning assy/Rr: Every 250,000 counts (special parts counter)
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Move the SQF clamp plate to the home position with the output
check 71-94 of the I/O Check Mode.
outlet.
paper exit unit)
7. Move the SQF roller assy [1] to the arrow-marked direction.
[2] [3] 8. Remove the screw [2], and remove the SQF roller cleaning assy/Fr
[3].
9. Remove the screw [4], and remove the SQF roller cleaning assy/
Rr [5].
reverse.
Note
• After you replace the SQF roller cleaning assy/Fr and the
SQF roller cleaning assy/Rr, be sure to move the SQF
roller assy to the original position (rear side).
When the SQF roller assy is not in the original position, it
contacts with the gripper paper exit unit and the machine
[5] [4] is possibly damaged.
11. After you replace the SQF roller cleaning assy/Fr and the SQF
roller cleaning assy/Rr, conduct the following item.
• SQF roller cleaning assy/Fr and SQF roller cleaning assy/Rr:
Counter reset of the special parts counter number 421 (1250,
1250P, 1052)
• SQF roller cleaning assy/Fr: Counter reset of the special parts
• SQF roller cleaning assy/Rr: Counter reset of the special parts
• SQF roller cleaning assy/Fr: Counter reset of the special parts
F-320
• SQF roller cleaning assy/Rr: Counter reset of the special parts
F-321
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L PROCEDURE PB-50...
29. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE PB-503

29.1.1 Replacement of the entrance gate solenoid (SD1), the sub tray paper exit solenoid (SD4)
• Entrance gate solenoid (SD1)
• Sub tray exit solenoid (SD4)
*1 The periodical replacement is only for 1200, 1200P, 1051.
C1060, C1100, and C1085
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the PB from the main body.
[7]
2. Remove the PB left unit. (Refer to G.30.2.23 PB left unit)
3. Remove the upper cover/FrRt. (Refer to G.30.2.13 Upper cover/
[4]
FrRt)
4. Remove the upper cover/RrRt. (Refer to G.30.2.15 Upper cover/
RrRt)
6. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the metal frame [2].
7. Remove 6 screws [3] and disconnect the connectors [4] and [5].
[6] [10] [11]
9. Remove the screws of 3 knobs [7] and remove the knobs.
[9]
10. Remove 2 screws [9] and remove the metal frame [10].
11. Remove 6 screws [8] and remove the conveyance unit [11].
Note
• Put the conveyance unit on a table so that the paper
entrance guide does not contact the floor.
[8]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[5] [3] a0v9t3c013ca
[1] [2] 12. Loosen the screws [1], 2 each, on the upper cover/Rt, and remove
the upper cover/Rt.
a0v9t3c014ca
F-322
13. Release the wiring harness [1], the wiring harness [2], and the
wiring harness [3] from the clamps.
[3]
[1] [2]
[3] [2] 14. Remove the spring [1].

15. Remove 3 screws [2] and then remove the entrance gate solenoid
assy [3].
[1]
[2]
[1] [2] 16. Disconnect the connectors [1] and [2].

17. Release the wiring harness from the clamp [3].
[3]
F-323
18. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the entrance gate solenoid
(SD1) [2].
[2] [1]

20. Remove 3 screws [2] and remove the sub tray exit solenoid assy
[3].
[2]
[1] a0v9t3c015ca
21. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the sub tray exit solenoid assy
[1] [2] (SD4) [2].
23. After the replacement, be sure to reset the parts counter of the sub
tray exit solenoid (SD4).
• Number 295 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 235 (1200, 1200P, 1051)
• Number 295 (C8000, C7000, C7000P, C70hc, C6000)
• Number 324 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 295 (C1100, C1085)
a0v9t3c016ca
[1]
24. Standard 1 value when you reinstall the sub tray exit solenoid
(SD4)
• When you reinstall the sub tray exit solenoid, adjust the
[2] position so that the distance "a" obtains a standard value with
the plunger [2] being pulled.
a a0v9t3c017ca
F-324
25. Standard 2 value when you reinstall the sub tray exit solenoid assy
(SD4)
• While you pull the plunger of the sub tray exit solenoid, adjust
the position so that the distance "a" (the distance between the
paper exit roller and the paper exit driven roller) obtains a
standard value.
Standard value: a = 0 ± 1.5 mm
a a0v9t3c018ca
26. Check point when you reinstall the conveyance unit

a • After you reinstall the conveyance unit, check the points "a"
that is shown in the picture, to see that the conveyance unit
does not contact the upper door. When they are in contact,
loosen 4 fixing screws on the upper cover/Rt and adjust the
position so that the upper door and the upper cover/Rt does
not come in contact.
27. After the replacement, be sure to reset the parts counter of the
entrance gate solenoid (SD1).
• Number 305 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 307 (C8000)
• Number 336 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 307 (C1100, C1085)
a0v9t3c019ca
29.2 Sub compile (SC) section

CAUTION
• Be sure to unplug the power plug of the PB from the power outlet.
• Make sure to unplug the power code of the main body from the power outlet when it is connected to the main body.
29.2.2 Replacing the switchback roller

• Switchback roller
: Every 750,000 counts (Total counter) *1 (Actual replacement cycle: Every 600,000 counts (Special parts counter))
*1 1200/1200P/1051
*2 C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000 , C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, C1100, C1085
*3 1250/1250P/1052
(2) Procedure
[6] [7] [5] [4] [5] 1. Open the upper door [1] to open the SC door [2]. Then close the
upper door [1].
Note
• To keep the SC door open, insert a screwdriver into the
hole [3]. Be sure to remove the screwdriver when you
close the sub clamp door, or the cover gets damaged.
2. Remove the 2 C-clips [4], and slide the 2 bearings [5] into the
inside.
Note
[3] [8] [2] [1] • Before you remove the C-clips, be sure to spread a sheet
of paper and so on under the switchback roller assy to
prevent the C-clips from dropping into inside of the
machine.
3. Release the pulley [7] from the belt [6] gently, and remove the
switchback roller assy [8].
a075f2c001ca
F-325
[2] [1] 4. Check point when you reinstall the switchback roller assy
Note
• After you reinstall the switchback roller assy, use a mirror
to check that the belt [1] is properly looped over the pulley
[2] without any slackness. If the belt has come off the
pulley, remove the SC cover/Up to correct that. (Refer to
G.30.2.12 SC cover/Up)
a075f2c002ca
[9] [4] [3] 5. Remove the E-ring [1], and remove the roller [2] and the pin [3].
[8] Note
• Be sure to install the bearing [4] so that its collar faces
toward the switchback roller.
[6]
7. Remove the E-ring [5], slide the switchback roller [8] in the
direction of the arrow [6] (toward the pulley) and remove the pin
[7]. Then remove the switchback roller [8] in the direction of the
[5]
arrow [9].
• Number 299 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 239 (1200, 1200P, and 1051)
• Number 328 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 299 (C1100, C1085)
[7] [2] [1]

a075f2c003ca
29.2.3 Replacing the SC switchback release motor (M13) and the one-way clutches/A and /B
• SC switchback release motor (M13)
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: every 750,000 counts (Special parts counter)*2)
• One-way clutch/B
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: every 6,000,000 counts (Special parts counter)*2)
• One-way clutch/A
*1 Periodical replacement only for 1200/1200P/1051. C8000 is not supported.
(2) Procedure
[2] [3] [1] 1. Remove the SC cover/Up. (Refer to G.30.2.12 SC cover/Up)
2. Open the upper door [1] to open the SC door [2] and place the
paper [3].
3. Close the SC door [2].
Note
• Before you remove the C-clips, be sure to spread a sheet
of paper under the switchback roller assy to prevent the
C-clips from dropping into the machine inside.
a0v9t3c020ca
F-326
4. Remove the screw [1] and remove the switchback cam [2].
Note
• The switchback cam [2] is tensioned by the spring [4] via
the switchback arm [3]. When you remove the screw [1],
[2]
the spring [4] pulls the switchback arm [3] and the
switchback cam [2] moves. At this time, be careful not to
[3]
drop the screw [1].
[4]
[1]
a0v9t3c021ca
5. Check point when you reinstall the switchback cam

[2] [1] Note
• When you reinstall the switchback cam [2], be sure to
install it following the positional relation with the actuator
[2] as you can see in the picture.
a0v9t3c022ca
[1] [3] 6. Remove 2 E-rings [1] and remove 2 bearings [2].

[2] a0v9t3c023ca
[1] 8. Disconnect 3 connectors [1] and remove the wiring harness from 2
wiring harness clamps [2].
[2] a0v9t3c024ca
F-327
[1] 9. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the SC switchback release

motor assy [2].
[2] a0v9t3c025ca
[1] 10. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the SC switchback release
motor [2].
[2] a0v9t3c026ca
11. Remove the E-ring [1] and remove the one-way clutch/B [2].
[2]
[1] a0v9t3c027ca
[1] 12. Check point when you reinstall the one-way clutch/B
Note
• When you reinstall the one-way clutch/B [1], be sure to
install it in the direction that is shown in the picture.
a0v9t3c028ca
[4] [3] [1] [2] 13. Remove the screw [1] and remove the pressure cam [2].
14. Remove the E-ring [3] and remove the one-way clutch/A [4].
• Special parts count of SC switchback release motor (M13)
number 296 (1250, 1250P, and 1052)
number 236 (1200, 1200P, and 1051)
number 296 (C8000)
number 325 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, and C1060)
a0v9t3c029ca
number 296 (C1100, C1085)
• Special parts count of one-way clutch/A number 339 (C1070,
C1070P, C71hc, and C1060)
• Special parts count of one-way clutch/A number 310 (C1100,
C1085)
F-328
• Special parts count of one-way clutch/B number 340 (C1070,
C1070P, C71hc, and C1060)
• Special parts count of one-way clutch/B number 311 (C1100,
C1085)
17. Check point when you reinstall the pressure cam
[2] [1]
Note
• When you reinstall the pressure cam [1], be sure to install
it following the positional relation with the actuator [2] as
you can see in the picture.
a0v9t3c030ca
[1] 18. Check point when you reinstall the one-way clutch/A
Note
• When you reinstall the one-way clutch/A [1], be sure to
install it in the direction that is shown in the picture.
a0v9t3c033ca
19. Standard value when you reinstall the SC switchback release

motor assy
Note
• When you reinstall the SC switchback release motor assy,
a b be sure that the distances "a" and "b" become same
value.
Standard value: The difference of distances "a" and "b" =
0.2 mm or less
a0v9t3c004ca
29.2.4 Replacing the SC pressure arm solenoid (SD13)

• SC pressure arm solenoid (SD13)
(2) Procedure
[1]
1. Remove the SC unit. (Refer to G.30.2.21 SC unit)
Note
• When you put down the SC unit, be sure not to pin the
wiring harness under it.
• Put the SC unit on a table so that the bottom surface of
the sub scan alignment unit [1] does not contact the floor.
2. Pull out the sub scan alignment unit [1] in the arrow-marked
direction.
a0v9t3c005ca
F-329
[1] 4. Remove 2 screws [2] and remove the SC pressure arm solenoid
(SD13) [3].
• Number 298 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 238 (1200, 1200P, and 1051)
• Number 298 (C8000)
• Number 327 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 298 (C1100, C1085)
[2] a0v9t3c006ca
[1] 7. Standard value when you reinstall the SC pressure arm solenoid
(SD13)
Note
• When you reinstall the SC pressure arm solenoid, adjust
the position so that the distance "a" obtains a standard
value with the plunger [1] being pulled, and then fix with
the screw [2].
Standard value: a = 16.4 ± 1 mm
[2]
a a0v9t3c007ca
29.2.5 Replacing the FD alignment solenoid (SD11)

• FD alignment solenoid (SD11)
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the SC unit. (Refer to G.30.2.21 SC unit)
[1]
Note
• When you put down the SC unit, be sure not to pin the
wiring harness under it.
• Put the SC unit on a table so that the bottom surface of
the sub scan alignment unit [1] does not contact the floor.
2. Remove 4 screws [1] and remove the SC door [2].
[3] [2]
a0v9t3c008ca
F-330
3. Put the SC unit with the FD alignment solenoid assy [4] that is
[2] [3] [4]
faced up.
Note
• Put the SC unit on a table so that the SC switchback
release motor assy [3] does not contact the floor.

5. Remove 2 screws [3] and pull out 2 shafts, and then remove the
sub scan alignment plate [2].
[1] a0v9t3c009ca
[1] 6. Remove the E-ring [1] and remove the sub scan alignment arm [2].
7. Disconnect the connector [3] and remove the screw [4], and then
[5] remove the FD alignment solenoid assy [5].
Note
• When you remove the FD alignment solenoid assy, be
careful not to drop the pin.
[4] [3] [2]

a0v9t3c010ca
[1] [2] 8. Remove 2 screws [1] to remove the mounting plate [2], and then
remove the FD alignment solenoid (SD11) [3].
Note
• When you reinstall the FD alignment solenoid, adjust the
position so that the distance "a" obtains a standard value
with the plunger [4] being pulled.
[4] [3] a0v9t3c011ca
a 9. Reinstall the parts that were previously mentioned following the

• Number 297 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 237 (1200, 1200P, and 1051)
• Number 297 (C8000)
• Number 326 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 297 (C1100, C1085)
a0v9t3c012ca
29.2.6 Lubrication to the sub scan alignment plate shaft

• Sub scan alignment plate shaft
: Every 750,000 counts*1
*1 1250, 1250P, 1052, 1200, 1200P, 1051, C8000, C7000, C7000P, C70hc, C6000, C1070, C1070P, C71hc, and C1060 /C1070/C1070P/
C71hc/C1060
F-331
(2) Procedure
2. Remove the upper cover/Md. (Refer to G.30.2.17 Upper cover/Md)
3. Pull out the clamp unit [1].
4. Apply plas guard Number 2 to the 4 sub scan alignment plate
shafts [2].
reverse.
[2]
[1]
a15xt3c001ca
29.3 Clamp section

29.3.1 Lubrication to the clamp pressing board shaft
• Clamp pressure plate shaft
*1 1250, 1250P, 1052, 1200, 1200P, 1051, C8000, C7000, C7000P, C70hc, C6000, C1070, C1070P, C71hc, and C1060
*2 C1100, C1085
F-332
(2) Procedure
1. Pull out the clamp unit [1].
2. Apply the plas guard No. 2 positions on the clamp pressing board
shaft [2].
[2]
[1]
[2]
a075f2c122ca
29.4 Glue tank section

29.4.1 Replacing the glue apply roller drive gear bearing
• Glue apply roller drive gear bearing
: Every 30,000,000 counts (total counter) *1 (Actual replacement cycle: Every 750 counts (1 count per 8 hours) (Special parts counter)) *2
F-333
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the glue tank unit. (Refer to G.30.2.20 Glue tank unit)
2. Remove 6 screws [1] and remove the tank cover/Lt [2].
[2] [1] a15xt3c006ca
[2] [3] [1] 3. Loosen the screw [1] and remove the gear cover [3] from the notch
[2].
Note
• When you reinstall, be sure to put the gear cover edge [3]
into the notch [2].
a15xt3c007ca
[1] 4. Remove the 4 screws [1].

Note
[2]
a15xt3c008ca
F-334
[1] [5] [4] [2] 5. Remove 2 E-ring [1].
6. Hold the shaft [2] and pull up the glue tank Assy, and remove the
glue apply roller drive gear/1 [3] and glue apply roller drive gear/2
[4] and the bearings [5], 2 for each.
• Number 341 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 312 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 312 (C1100, C1085)
[5] [3] a15xt3c009ca
29.4.2 Lubrication to the glue apply roller drive gear

• Glue apply roller drive gear
*2 C1100, C1085
(2) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Open the front door and move the glue tank unit [1] to the front.
Note
• When you move the glue tank unit, hold the metal plate [2]
on the right side of the glue tank unit.
2. Loosen the screw [1] and remove the gear cover [4].
Note
• When you reinstall, be sure to put the gear cover edge [4]
under the notch [5] on the glue tank.
[5]
[4] [3]
a15xt3c010ca
F-335
3. Apply multemp FF-RM to the glue apply roller drive gear/1 [1] and
[2] [1]
the glue apply roller drive gear/2 [2].
reverse.
a15xt3c011ca
29.4.3 Replacing the pellet supply cooling fan (FM4)

• Pellet supply cooling fan (FM4)
: Every 750,000 counts (special parts counter)*1
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: every 1,500,000 counts (Special parts counter))*2
*1 1200/1200P/1051
*2 1250, 1250P, 1052, C8000, C7000, C7000P, C70hc, C6000, C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, C1100, and C1085
(2) Procedure
[1] [3] 1. Remove the rear cover/Rt. (Refer to G.30.2.5 Rear cover/Rt)
3. Remove 2 screws [2] and remove the pellet supply cooling fan
(FM4) [3].
Note
• When you reinstall the pellet supply cooling fan (FM4) [3],
be sure to reinstall it to the same direction as you can see
in the picture.
• Be sure not to nip the wiring harness.
• Number 309 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
[2] 8050ma3141
• Number 338 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 309 (C1100, C1085)
29.4.4 Replacing the glue tank assy

• Glue tank assy
*1 1250, 1250P, 1052, 1200, 1200P, 1051, C8000, C7000, C7000P, C70hc, C6000, C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, C1100, C1085
F-336
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the glue tank unit. (Refer to G.30.2.20 Glue tank unit)
[2].
[2] a15xt3c012ca
3. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the glue thread cut plate
[1]
[2].
4. Remove 6 screws [3] and remove the tank cover/Lt [4].
5. Remove 4 screws [5] and remove the tank cover/Rt [6].
Note
• When you reinstall it, reinstall it so that the curved part
comes top.
[5] [2] [3]
[4] [6]
[3] [5] a15xt3c013ca
F-337
6. Disconnect 4 connectors [2] of the translucent wiring harnesses of
[1] [3] [2]
the temperature sensor.
Note
• When you reconnect the connector, check the color of the
connector and the number label [3] on the wiring harness,
and connect each connector to the corresponding wiring
harness.
Numbe Color
r
1 White
2 Blue
3 Yellow
4 Black
7. Remove the connector [4] from the metal frame [5].

Note
• When you reinstall it, be sure to place the metal wiring
harness [6] toward the metal plate side [7].
8. Remove the square saddle [8] from the metal frame [7] and put the
connector [4] to the inside of the glue tank unit.
[8] [7] [2] [6] [4] [5] a15xt3c014ca
[1] [2] 9. Remove the wiring harness [1] from the 4 wire saddles [2].
[2] a15xt3c015ca
[1] [2] 10. Remove 4 screws [2] and remove the glue tank assy [1].
Note
[3] [3]
a15xt3c016ca
F-338
[3] [1] [2] [3] 11. Reinstall the parts that were previously mentioned following the
Note
• When you reinstall it, be sure to reinstall it with 2 springs
[1] put on the pin [3] on the bottom of the glue tank assy
and on the projection [4] of the glue tank unit.
• After you replace the parts, be sure to conduct the glue
apply roller gap adjustment. (Refer to I.32.4 Glue apply
roller gap adjustment)
• Number 306 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 249 (1200, 1200P, and 1051)
[4] a15xt3c017ca
• Number 337 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 308 (C1100, C1085)
29.5 Cover paper supply section

29.5.1 Removing/reinstalling the pick-up roller assy and the separation roller assy
(1) Procedure
2. Slightly push up the cover paper tray lock [2] with a screwdriver or
[2] a similar tool and unlock it. Then pull out the cover paper tray [3].
[1]
[3]
a15xt3c002ca
[2] [3] 3. Turn the pick-up roller [1] in the direction of the arrow
(counterclockwise as seen from the front side) to make the
coupling [2] upright.
Note
• Be sure not to rotate the pick-up roller [1] against the
direction of the arrow (clockwise) forcibly, as the roller is
not designed to rotate in that direction.
[1]
a075f2c009ca
F-339
[2] [1]
5. Remove the bearing/Fr [1].
6. Move the bearing/Rr [2] to the rear side.
Note
• When you reinstall them, slightly press down the metal
frame [3] of the pick-up roller assy. Then keep the flat face
[4] of the bearing/Rr [2] horizontally and insert the bearing
into the notch [5] on the metal frame. Then insert the
bearing/Fr [1] in the same manner.
[2] [4]
[5] [3]
a075f2c010ca
[1] [5] [4] 7. Hold the pick-up roller assy [1] by hand and lift and tilt the paper
feed roller [3] so that it rotates on the shaft [2] of the pick-up roller.
Then remove it from the notch of the bearing [4] and the coupling
[5].
Note
• When you remove the pick-up roller assy [1], be careful
not to damage the sensor [7] with the metal frame [6].
[3] [2] [6]
[7]
a075f2c011ca
F-340
[3]
8. Remove the pick-up roller shaft [2] from the arm [1] of the paper
feed guide plate and then remove the pick-up roller assembly [3].
reverse.
Note
• After you install the pick-up roller assy, rotate the pick-up
roller counterclockwise as seen from the front side.
• Make sure the paper feed roller and the belt rotate
smoothly.
• The pick-up roller rotates in counterclockwise direction
only. Be sure not to rotate it in the opposite direction.
[1]
[2]
[3]
a075f2c081ca
[1] 10. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the entrance guide plate
[2].
[2] a075f2c012ca
a075f2c013ca
F-341
[2]
12. Open the frame [1] of the separation roller assy in the direction of
the arrow, and remove the coupling pin [2] on the rear side from
the joint [3]. Then remove the separation roller assy [4].
Note
• When you reinstall, make sure to engage the coupling pin
[2] with the joint [3].
• When you reinstall the separation roller assy [4], fasten it
[3]
with the screws while you press it down.

reverse.
[1]
[4]
a075f2c014ca
29.5.2 Replacing the pick-up roller and the paper feed roller
• Pick-up roller
*1 1250, 1250P, 1052, 1200, 1200P, 1051, C8000, C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, C1100, C1085
(2) Procedure
Note
• The outward appearance of the collar is identical for the paper feed roller and the separation roller. However, the collar of the
paper feed roller has a one-way mechanism on the inside while the collar of the separation roller does not. Be careful not to
confuse one with the other.
1. Remove the pick-up roller assembly. (Refer to F.29.5.1 Removing/
[4] [2] [1]
reinstalling the pick-up roller assy and the separation roller assy)
2. Remove the C-clip [1] of the pick-up roller assy.
3. Slide 2 bearings [2] and remove the pick-up roller [3] together with
the shaft [4].
[3]
a075f2c015ca
F-342
4. Remove the bearing [1] and pull out the pick-up roller [2] from the
[2] [1] shaft [3].
5. Remove the pick-up roller [2] from the collar [4].
6. Replace the pick-up roller.
[4] [3]
a075f2c082ca
[1] 7. Remove the C-clip [1] and pull out the bearing/Fr [2] from the shaft
[3].
8. Move the bearing/Rr [4] and remove the paper feed roller [5]
together with the shaft [3].
[4] [5] [2] [3] a075f2c086ca

[2] [1] 10. Pull out the paper feed roller [3] from the collar [2].
11. Replace the pick-up roller [3].
[3]
a075f2c087ca
[2] [1] 12. Reinstall the parts that were previously mentioned following the
Note
• There is no big difference in the appearance between the 2
collars (one for the paper feed roller, and the other one is
for the separation roller). However, they are different in
the inside. The collar [1] for the paper feed roller has a
one-way mechanism in it, and the other one [2] does not.
Make sure to attach them correctly.
• Number 300, number 301 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
a075f2c016ca
• Number 300, Number 301 (C8000)
• Number 329, number 330 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 300, number 301 (C1100, C1085)

*1 1250, 1250P, 1052, 1200, 1200P, 1051, C8000, C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, C1100, C1085
F-343
(2) Procedure
[3] [2] 1. Remove the separation roller assy. (Refer to F.29.5.1 Removing/
reinstalling the pick-up roller assy and the separation roller assy)
2. Remove the C-clip [1] and remove the separation roller [3] together
with the shaft [2].
[1] a075f2c017ca
[2] [3] [4] [1] 3. Pull out the gear [2], the collar [3] and the separation roller [4] from
the shaft [1] in the direction of the arrow.
4. Replace the separation roller [4].
Note
• There is no big difference in the appearance between the 2
collars (one for the paper feed roller, and the other one is
for the separation roller). However, they are different in
the inside. The collar [5] for the paper feed roller has a
one-way mechanism in it, and the other one [6] does not.
Make sure to attach them correctly.
[6] [5]
• Number 301 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 241 (1200, 1200P, and 1051)
• Number 301 (C8000)
• Number 330 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 301 (C1100, C1085)
a075f2c018ca
29.5.4 Replacing the cover paper pick-up clutch (CL71) and the cover paper separation clutch (CL72)
• Cover paper feed clutch (CL71)
• Cover paper separation clutch (CL72)
*1 1250, 1250P, 1052, 1200, 1200P, 1051, C8000, C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, C1100, C1085
F-344
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the stopper screws, 1 each, attached on the right rail and
the left rail of the cover paper tray and pull out the tray. (Refer to
G.30.2.28 Cover paper tray)
2. Remove the 5 screws [1] and remove the clutch cover [2].
[1] [2]
a075f2c019ca
[4] [2] [3] [5] [6] 3. Disconnect the 3 connectors [1].

4. Remove the C-clips [2], 1 each, and remove the cover paper feed
clutch (CL71) [3] and the cover paper separation clutch (CL72) [4].
Note
• When you reinstall, be sure to insert the stopper [5] of the
clutch over the tab [6] of the metal frame.

• Number 302, number 303 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 302, Number 303 (C8000)
[5] [6] [1] • Number 331, number 332 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
a075f2c020ca • Number 302, number 303 (C1100, C1085)
29.6 Cover paper table section

Note
• The glue tank unit is hot after you deactivate the main power switch (SW1) or the sub power switch (SW2) of the main body. To
prevent burn injuries, leave the unit until it cools enough before you perform the maintenance work.
Note
• Before you perform the maintenance work, be sure to carry out the initial operation so that each part or the unit is at the home
position.
29.6.2 Replacing the roller cutter blade assy

• Roller cutter blade assy
: Every 10,500,000 counts (total counter)*1 (actual replacement cycle: Every 100,000 counts (special parts counter)*2)
C1060, C1100, and C1085
F-345
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the PB from the main body.
2. Remove the conveyance unit/Lw. (Refer to G.30.2.26 Conveyance
unit/Lw)
3. Remove 2 screws [1] and the roller cutter blade Assy [2]. Then
[1] disconnect the connector [3].
Note
• Pull out the cover paper waste box before you remove the
roller cutter assy.
• When you reinstall the roller cutter assy, be sure to route
the wire binding [4] under the cutter motor (M50) [5].
• Push the roller cutter blade Assy [2] against the metal
[2]
plate [6] to reinstall the Assy.

• Number 304 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 244 (1200, 1200P, and 1051)
• Number 333 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 304 (C1100, C1085)
[6]
[1]
[4] [5] [3] a075f2c007ca
29.6.3 Cleaning the cover paper folding plate and the book spine backing plate
• Cover paper folding plate and the book spine backing plate
*2 C1100, C1085
F-346
(2) Simplified cleaning procedure

[1] 1. Carry out the I/O check in service mode in the order of following
output check code, and turn OFF the sub power switch (SW2) and
the main power switch (SW1) with the cover paper folding plate
opened.
"77-55", "77-45", "77-58", "77-61"
[2] 2. Clean the cover paper folding plate [1] and the book spine backing
plate [2].
a075f2c004cb
29.6.4 Lubrication to the cover paper alignment plate shaft

• Cover paper alignment plate shaft
*1 1250, 1250P, 1052, 1200, 1200P, 1051, C8000, C7000, C7000P, C70hc, C6000, C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060
*2 C1100, C1085
F-347
(2) Procedure
1. Turn the knob [1] and move the cover paper alignment plate
inside.
2. Apply plas guard Number 2 to the 4 cover paper alignment plate
shafts [2].
Note
• Apply plas guard Number 2 to the outside of the cover
paper alignment plate bearing on both sides.
[3] [2]
[2] [1]
[3]
a075f2c094ca
29.7 Book stock section

29.7.1 Lubrication to the guide shafts/Rt and /Lt
(1) Periodic lubrication parts/Cycle
• Guide shaft/Rt, /Lt
*2 C1100, C1085
F-348
(2) Procedure
1. Apply the plas guard No. 2 to 4 positions on 4 positions [1] on the
guide shaft/Rt and guide shaft/Lt.
[1]
a15xt3c067ca
29.8 Framework section

29.8.1 Replacing the exhaust filters/A and /B
• Exhaust filter/A
• Exhaust filter/B
*1 1250, 1250P, 1052, 1200, 1200P, 1051, C8000, C7000, C7000P, C70hc, C6000, C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060, C1100, C1085
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the exhaust filter assy [1].
a15xt3c003ca
[2] [1] 2. Pull the filter holding lever [1] in the arrow-marked direction, and
then remove the 2 exhaust filter/A [2].
a15xt3c004ca
F-349
[1] 3. Reverse the exhaust filter assy and slide the exhaust filter/B [1] in
the arrow-marked direction to remove it.
• Number 307, number 308 (1250, 1250P, 1052)
• Number 305, Number 306 (C8000, C7000, C7000P, C70hc,
and C6000)
• Number 334, number 335 (C1070, C1070P, C71hc, C1060)
• Number 305, number 306 (C1100, C1085)
a15xt3c005ca
F-350
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L PROCEDURE GP-501
30. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE GP-501

30.1 Caution for maintenance procedure
DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR SAFTY
These symbols are used in this documentation alert you to danger or important information.
WARNING: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious Injury.
WARNING: Risk of electrical shock. This warning statement indicates situations where there is a risk of death by electric
shock.
CAUTION: This notice indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate
injury.
It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices.
Certain components in this product are susceptible to damage from electrostatic discharge.
Observe all ESD procedures to avoid component damage.
This section contains cleaning and maintenance procedures.
CAUTION
• GP-501 uses screws of inch standard. Therefore, do not mix them with other products (metric standard screws). Otherwise, the
screw hole is damaged.
30.2 DIE SET SERVICE

30.2.1 Die Set Service
The Die Set assembly is not serviceable other than inspection and periodic lubrication. The one exception is the felt pad on the Twin Loop Die
Set can be replaced. If a Die Set is at its end of life, it will tend to cause mis-feeds due to hanging chips. This is a result of die plate wear, and
not pin wear, which cannot be corrected. When this occurs, the Die Set should be replaced with a new one.
30.2.2 Die Set Life Expectancy

The GP-501 Punch Die Sets have a minimum life expectancy of 500K cycles (sheets of paper punched). With periodic lubrication and optimum
paper types, life can exceed this number. Variables that affect life expectancy:
• Failure to follow the lubrication schedule or using the incorrect lubricant.
• Variety and types of paper being punched
• Cover stocks being punched
• Length of the average job
• Other environmental conditions
30.2.3 Die Set Components

(1) Die Set Types
The GP-501 Punch uses two types of Die Sets.
Type Description Bindery Style
Felt Pad Retainer Assembly Felt oiler pad on one side (with magnet and retaining DS-501, 503, 504, 506, 508, 510, 511, 513, 515,
plate) 517, 518
Encircled Felt Oiler Pad Felt oiler pad surrounds the punch pins DS-502, 505, 507, 509, 512, 514, 516
(2) Serviceable Components

• Shoulder bolt and spring [1]
• Punch pins [2]
• Felt pad [3]
• Floating pressure bar spring (not shown).
(3) Felt Pad Retaining Assembly

The twin loop Die Set has a removable felt pad assembly. The felt pad [1] provides lubrication to the punch pins under normal usage and
helps keep them clean. The magnet [2] and retainer [3] keeps the felt pad in place during normal handling and operation.
F-351
Note
• The felt pad assembly on the Twin Loop Die Set is the only assembly that can be replaced.
(4) Reassembling the Felt Pad Assembly

The felt pad assembly consists of the felt pad [1], magnet [2], and retainer [3].
(a) To assemble the felt pad retaining assembly:

1. Lay the die assembly on a table so that the open side of the top
bar is facing up.
2. Lay the felt pad [1] along the punch pins so that it spans all pins.
3. If the pad needs oil, apply it along the full length of the pad.
4. Insert the magnet [2] into the retainer [3].
5. Place the magnet and retainer [1] over the pad [2] and lightly
press them against the pad and the Die Set base. Make sure the
assembly is sitting on the base [3] and that the felt pad is against
the punch pins [4].
F-352
(5) Floating Pressure Bar Spring Replacement
Some Die Sets use springs to hold the top plate above the pressure bar [1]. Detentes in the top plate hold the springs in place [2]. Ensure all
springs are in place.
(a) To replace pressure bar springs:

1. Compress the spring and insert between the top bar and pressure bar.
2. Use a flat screwdriver to position the spring so that the detent holds it in place.
3. Compress the top bar to ensure it moves freely and that it returns.
30.2.4 Checking and Replacing the Die Set

(1) Periodically Checked and replaced parts/Spotted Checked and replaced parts/cycle
• Dieset
: Every 2,000,000 counts (Total counter)*1 (Actual replacement cycle: Every 500,000 counts (Special parts counter)*2) *3
*1 The periodical replacement is only for 1200/1200P/1051/C6501/C6501P/C65hc.
*2 Actual replacement cycle of 1200/1200P/1051/C6501/C6501P/C65hc/C8000/C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060.
*3 Replace as needed. Replacement is recommended if hanging chips are usually generated.
(2) Procedure
Set the Die Set on a table and press the top plate straight down at both ends [1] at the same time and look for a smooth operation. The top
plate and pins should retract fully when you release.
Reinstall the Die Set into the punch and run several sheets of the customer’s paper through the punch. Inspect the holes.
• Holes should be clean and even with no tearing or frayed edges.
• Holes should be punched completely, leaving no chip attached.
• Holes should be straight (no skew) and evenly spaced from the edge of the paper and aligned.
30.2.5 Checking and lubricating the Die Set pins and Die Set shoulder bolts
(1) Periodically Checked and lubricated parts/cycle
• Die Set pins
: Every 200,000 counts (Actual lubrication cycle: Every 50,000 punches) *1
: Every 210,000 counts (Actual lubrication cycle: Every 50,000 punches) *2
• Die Set Shoulder bolts
: Every 800,000 counts (Actual lubrication cycle: Every 200,000 Punches) *1
: Every 750,000 counts (Actual lubrication cycle: Every 200,000 Punches) *2
*1 1200/1200P/1051/C6501/C6501P/C65hc
*2 C8000
(2) Procedure
Inspect the punch pins for signs of wear or mis-alignment. Periodic lubrication extends the life of the Die Sets.
The customer or operator can perform this maintenance between technician inspections.
F-353
(3) To lubricate Die Set pins:

• Lubricate with 3-IN-ONE oil (high quality machine oil).
• Apply oil lightly along the length of the pad [1], but do not over saturate.
• Do not use spray lubricants because they tend to dry up quickly and leave a sticky residue.
For the felt pad retaining assembly instructions, refer to F.30.2.3 Die Set Components.
(4) To lubricate shoulder bolts:

• Lubricate the shoulder bolts and springs [2] using a brush to apply Magnalube-G Teflon Grease.
• Make sure the grease coats the bolts.
30.2.6 Hole Alignment inspection

Inspect the hole alignment on the customer’s punched paper. Fold the punched sheet of paper in half [1] and the punched holes should be
aligned evenly along the edge and centered between the ends [2]. If the punched holes are not aligned, then the Die Set cradle must be
adjusted. For adjustment procedures.
30.3 CHECK, CLEANING, AND LUBRICATION

30.3.1 CHECK, CLEANING, AND LUBRICATION
If operating properly, the GP-501 will punch the same types of copy paper and cover materials handled by the copier and run at the same
speed. Hole quality will vary between different grades of paper.
The following maintenance should be performed according to the schedule.
(1) Table 3.2 Maintenance Schedule

Description Qty. Part Number Period Check Clean Lubricate Replace Materials, Tools
Used
Aligner belt 12,000K X a soft cloth and
(green belt) counts alcohol
Aligner idler 12,000K X a soft cloth and
roller assembly counts alcohol
Aligner idler 3,000K X X a so ft cloth and
rollers counts alcohol
Aligner latching 3,000K X -
mechanisms counts
Back gauge 3,000K X X Blower brush/
solenoid counts vacuum cleaner
Back gauge 1 A0N9PP59## 4,000K X -
mechanism counts
F-354
Base 3,000K X Vacuum

counts cleaner
Die guide 3,000K X Vacuum
counts cleaner
Die set 500K Y -
counts
Punch die (pins) 50K X Oil 3-IN-ONE
counts (WD-40
Company)
Die set shoulder 200K X Grease Magnalube-G
bolts counts Teflon Grease
Door closing 3,000K X -
latch counts
Drive rollers 3,000K X X a so ft cloth and
counts alcohol
Idler rollers 3,000K X X a so ft cloth and
counts alcohol
Optical sensors 3,000K X Blower brush
counts
Paper path, 3,000K X X a so ft cloth and
Aligner Panels counts alcohol
bypass counts alcohol
punch counts alcohol
Punch drive 3,000K Grease Magnalube-G
cams counts Teflon Grease
Roller energy 3,000K X X a so ft cloth and
drive counts alcohol
Timing belts 3,000K X X a so ft cloth and
counts alcohol
30.3.2 External Cleaning

The cover may be cleaned with a soft cloth moistened with mild detergent and warm water.
Do not use chemical cleaners or solvents as these may have a harmful effect. Use detergent sparingly to avoid contact with electrical
components.
WARNING:
• Make sure you disconnect the GP-501 Punch from its power source before cleaning. Failure to observe this warning could result
in death or serious Injury.
30.3.3 Internal Cleaning

Occasionally remove the covers and remove paper dust and chips. Paper dust can accumulate throughout the punch including around the
motors and other electrical components. Use a vacuum cleaner if possible. A small paintbrush can also be used but extreme care should be
used around electrical components.
Non-electrical components may be cleaned with alcohol, an approved cleaner, or a soft cloth moistened with mild detergent and warm water.
Rollers can be cleaned with alcohol.
WARNING:
• Make sure you disconnect the GP-501 Punch from its power source before cleaning. Failure to observe this warning could result
in death or serious Injury.
30.3.4 Operational Inspection

Make sure the punch operates smoothly and produces the desired holes in the customer’s paper.
30.3.5 Internal Inspection

Whenever the cover has been removed for corrective maintenance, visually inspect for defects and problems such as damaged components,
loose screws or nuts, abraded wire insulation, loose terminals, etc. Correct any problems before returning the machine to service.
30.3.6 Cleaning the base

(1) Periodically cleaned parts/cycle
• Base
: Every 3,000,000 counts
(2) Procedure
Chips and paper dust falls to the bottom of the punch. Clean with a vacuum cleaner each time the machine is serviced. The customer can
also do this between the technician’s visits.
F-355
(3) Chip Bin

Remove the Chip bin tray and empty. Vacuum out paper chips and dust from the Chip bin [1], especially at the back around the chip tray
switch.
30.3.7 Cleaning the Die guide

• Die guide
(2) Procedure
Remove the Die Set and clean the guide [1] with a vacuum cleaner.
30.3.8 Checking the Door Latch

The door latch must hold the door closed and ensure that the switch activation tab is depressing the door switch [1]. The switch tab [2] should
press the switch button just so that it is close to bottoming.
(1) Periodically checked parts/cycle

• Door latch
: Every 3,000,000 counts.
(2) Procedure
• Ensure latch holds door closed.
• Ensure switch is activated when the door is closed.
• To adjust the door latch. (Refer to G.31.2.1 Door latch check)
F-356
30.3.9 Cleaning and Checking the aligner paper path and panels
(1) Periodically cleaned and checked parts/cycle
• Aligner paper path and panels
(2) Procedure
Inspect for worn or damaged parts. Clean with alcohol, an approved cleaner, or a soft cloth moistened with mild detergent and warm water as
needed.
(3) To clean the Aligner Panels:

1. Lift the Aligner latches to open panels.
2. Clean surfaces [1].
3. Clean paper alignment channels [2].
30.3.10 Cleaning and Checking the Aligner Idler Roller

(1) Cleaning and Checking the Aligner Idler Roller
Aligner idler rollers press the paper against the green drive belts and align the paper for punching and exiting. To replace the idler rollers.
(Refer to F.30.3.25 Aligner Idler Roller Replacement)
(a) Periodically cleaned and checked parts/cycle

• Aligner Idler Roller
(b) Procedure
• Make sure the aligner rollers are clean.
• Ensure that the idler rollers maintain pressure against the green drive belt.
• Inspect for bent or damaged parts.
WARNING:
• Disconnect the GP-501 Punch from power and retain the power cord in your possession for your safety. Failure to observe
this warning could result in death or serious Injury.
(c) To inspect the aligner idler rollers:

1. Press the top of each roller’s bracket [1]. The roller should move
away from the green belt drive and then when released, they
spring back into place.
F-357
2. Ensure the torsion springs [1] are hooked over the bracket [2].
(d) To clean idler rollers:

1. Clean the idler rollers with a soft cloth and alcohol.
2. Inspect the idler rollers for wear patterns or groves. Surface should be evenly textured and clean.
30.3.11 Cleaning the Aligner (Green) Drive Belt

• Aligner (Green) Drive Belt
: Every 12,000,000 counts. *1
*1 1200/1200P/1051/C8000
(2) Procedure
• Ensure the Aligner Drive Belts are clean.
• Inspect for frayed edges and wear.
(3) To clean the Aligner Drive Belts:

1. Clean Green Drive Belt [1] with a plastic scouring pad.
2. Use the drive knob [2] to turn the belt.
Figure 3.16 Cleaning Green Drive Belt.
To adjust or replace the Aligner Drive Belt. (Refer to F.30.3.26 Aligner Drive Belt Replacement)
30.3.12 Cleaning and Checking the Back Gauge Solenoid

• Back Gauge Solenoid
(2) Procedure
1. Inspect and ensure the Back Gauge solenoid linkage moves freely. Press linkage down and release [1]. Linkage should return.
2. Clean out the solenoid and surrounding area with a vacuum cleaner and canned air [2]. Make sure the solenoid is clean and dry.
Note
• Do not apply lubricants to the solenoid or linkage.
To remove and repair the back gauge. (Refer to F.30.3.28 Replacing the back gauge mechanism, F.30.3.29 Back Gauge Removal)
F-358
30.3.13 Cleaning and Checking the Idler Rollers

• Idler rollers
(2) Procedure
Idler rollers press against the drive rollers and move the paper through the bypass [1] or the punch [2].
Inspect rollers for wear patterns or groves. The roller surface should be even and have a textured surface. Where practical, remove the roller
assembly to clean [3].
Please see the reference page about the mainteinence procedure of each roller.
Bypass Idler roller [3].
Punch Idler roller [4]. (Refer to F.30.3.14 Cleaning and Checking the punch idler rollers)
(3) Cleaning and Checking the Bypass Idler Rollers

Idler rollers press against the drive rollers and move the paper through the bypass. Rollers can usually be serviced without removing the
bypass panel.
1. Separate the punch from the printer.
2. Disconnect the power.
3. Lift the retaining spring over the end of the idler roller shaft. The illustration shows moving the spring [1] on the bypass plate, which has
been removed from the machine for clarity.
4. Pull the released shaft end out of the bushing fork [2], releasing the opposite end of the shaft from the other retaining spring.
5. Clean the idler rollers with a soft cloth and alcohol.
6. Ensure the rollers turn freely on the shaft.
7. To install idler roller assemblies reverse the steps.
F-359
Installation Note:
• Make sure the flat surface of the bushing aligns in the fork.
• Rollers are non-directional so it does not matter which end goes in each fork.
• After the assembly is in place, gently pull the assembly outward and release to ensure it moves freely in the fork.
(4) Cleaning and Checking the punch idler rollers

Idler rollers press against the drive rollers and move the paper through the GP-501 Punch. Most can be serviced without disassembling punch
components. Unplug unit and separate from the printer. (Refer to G.31.3.2 Separating the Punch From the Printer).
Also remove two side panels as described in F.30.3.22 Bypass panel Removal and F.30.3.24 Aligner Panel Removal
(a) Procedure
Inspect rollers for wear patterns or groves [1],[2]. The roller surface should be even and have a textured surface.
Replace per the maintenance schedule.
Note
• Pull out the chip bin to access the idler roller [2]
• Use the drive knob [1] to turn the rollers to continue inspection and cleaning.
F-360
To remove the Punch Idler rollers:

1. Lift the retaining spring [1] over the end of the idler roller shaft.
2. Pull the released shaft end out of the bushing fork [2], releasing
the opposite end of the shaft from the other retaining spring.
Installation Note:
30.3.14 Cleaning and Checking the punch idler rollers

Idler rollers press against the drive rollers and move the paper through the GP-501 Punch. Most can be serviced without disassembling punch
components. Unplug unit and separate from the printer. (Refer to G.31.3.2 Separating the Punch From the Printer).
Also remove two side panels as described in F.30.3.22 Bypass panel Removal and F.30.3.24 Aligner Panel Removal
(1) Procedure
Inspect rollers for wear patterns or groves [1],[2]. The roller surface should be even and have a textured surface.
Replace per the maintenance schedule.
Note
• Pull out the chip bin to access the idler roller [2]
F-361
• Use the drive knob [1] to turn the rollers to continue inspection and cleaning.
(2) To remove the Punch Idler rollers:

1. Lift the retaining spring [1] over the end of the idler roller shaft.
2. Pull the released shaft end out of the bushing fork [2], releasing
the opposite end of the shaft from the other retaining spring.
Installation Note:
F-362
30.3.15 Cleaning and Checking the Drive Rollers

Drive rollers are located opposite the idler rollers.

• Drive rollers
(2) Procedure
Inspect for wear patterns or groves. The roller surface should be even and not glazed.
Some drive rollers are not easily accessible. Those that are [1], should be inspected and cleaned when the idler rollers are removed. Where
practical, make sure the rollers are clean. Clean with a soft cloth and alcohol. Refer to also F.30.3.13 Cleaning and Checking the Idler Rollers.
30.3.16 Checking the Aligner Latch

Latches [1] on both sides of the punch hold the Aligner Panels in place, which in turn keeps even pressure on the idler rollers.

• Aligner Latch
(2) Procedure
• Inspect the latches for worn or damaged parts.
• Open and close the latches and ensure they lock into place when closed.
• Ensure the nylon wheel [2] turns freely on its bearing and that it aligns with its locking.
F-363
30.3.17 Cleaning the Optical Sensors

• Optical Sensors
(2) Procedure
• Inspect and clean Optical Sensors [1] per the maintenance schedule or as needed.
(3) Supplies Needed

Canned air or vacuum cleaner
F-364
Use canned air to blow the debris off each sensor. The illustration shows examples of three sensors [1].
30.3.18 Cleaning and Checking the Bypass Paper Path

• Bypass paper path
(2) Procedure
• Inspect the Bypass panel [1], rollers [2], and entrance guide [3] for wear, damage, and obstructions.
• Inspect the rollers for wear patterns or groves. The surface should be rough and even. Make sure the rollers are clean. Clean rollers with
a soft cloth and alcohol. (Refer to F.30.3.13 Cleaning and Checking the Idler Rollers, F.30.3.15 Cleaning and Checking the Drive Rollers)
• Raise the panel and ensure the magnet holds it in open [4]. Inspect the path for obstructions. Clean as needed.
• Close the panel and check that it is flat and that paper will pass under it.
• Ensure the bypass diverter moves freely and returns to the bypass position.
30.3.19 Cleaning and Checking the Punch Paper Path

• Punch Paper path
(2) Procedure
• Inspect the entire paper path through the punch. Look for wear, damage, and obstructions.
• Inspect the rollers for wear patterns or groves.
• Open the Aligner Panels [1] and U-channel [2] and make sure there are no obstructions.
• Confirm that the latch [3] holds the U-channel tightly in place. Re-shape it if necessary.
• Clean as needed.
F-365
30.3.20 Cleaning and Checking the Timing Belt

• Timing Belt
(2) Procedure
Inspect all timing belts [1], [2] for wear, missing teeth, frayed edges, and cracks. For replacement, refer to F.30.3.43 Belt replacement.
Check for proper deflection of belts. The belts should be slightly loose with approximately 1/4” (6.35mm) deflection [1]. Belts that are too loose
will not drive properly and belts that are too tight can wear out prematurely or damage their driven components. Five belts [2] have tensioners,
it is these five belts that should be checked.
30.3.21 Bypass panel

(1) Tools Needed
• Phillips screwdriver or 1/4" nut driver
• Flat bladed screwdriver
• Needle nose pliers
(2) Procedure
Separate the punch from the printer and remove the rear cover. (Refer to G.31.3.2 Separating the Punch From the Printer, G.31.3.3
Removing the Rear Cover)
F-366
30.3.22 Bypass panel Removal

(1) To remove the Bypass panel:
1. If removing the Bypass panel, remove the side panel cover by
removing the 4 screws [1].
2. Disconnect the grounding strap by removing the screw [1] on the

exit side of the bypass.
3. Unplug the exit side connector [2] at the rear frame.
4. Disconnect the connectors [1] of Enter sensor (S1) and Bypass

sensor (S8).
5. From the rear of the punch, remove one of the E-rings [1] from the
Bypass shaft.
F-367
6. From the side of the punch, slide the shaft towards the end of the
shaft [1] without the E-Ring [2] until the other end of the shaft
clears the nylon bushing and bracket.
7. Lift the opposite end of the shaft [3] and slide it out of the Bypass
panel in the opposite direction of the removed E-Ring [4].
Installation Note
• Make sure the nylon bushing is installed so that it
protrudes through the mounting bracket of the rear frame
into the Bypass panel [5].
8. Rotate the rear of Bypass panel [1] so that it extends past the
entrance side of the punch [2].
9. Remove the Bypass panel.

10. To install the Bypass panel, reverse the steps.
Installation Note
• Position the Bypass panel so that it is outside the shaft
mounting brackets. The nylon bushings go through the
mounting brackets [1], into the Bypass panel [2].
30.3.23 Aligner panels

The entrance side Aligner panel positions the paper in the Back Gauge for punching. The exit side Aligner panel positions the paper for the
finisher. Prior to servicing the Aligner Panels, separate the GP-501 Punch from the printer. (Refer to G.31.3.2 Separating the Punch From the
Printer).
30.3.24 Aligner Panel Removal

Removing the Aligner panels provides access to the paper path and the Aligner Green Drive Belt. The procedure is the same for the entrance
and exit Aligner panels except that the exit side has a docking plate which must be removed first.
F-368
(1) To remove the Aligner panel:

1. If removing the exit side Aligner panel, remove the side panel
cover by removing the 6 screws [1].
Note
• The rest of the steps are the same for both Aligner panels.
2. Release the Aligner latch [1].

3. Remove the E-clips from both ends of the Aligner shaft [2].
4. Remove the shaft nylon bushings [3]
5. Slide the shaft out the front of the punch.

6. Remove aligner latch stop by removing screws [1].
7. Unhook the tension spring from the panel [1].

8. Remove the Aligner panel [2] out the front of the punch.
9. Reverse the steps to install the Aligner panel.
30.3.25 Aligner Idler Roller Replacement

(1) Tools Required
• Flat head screw driver
• Needle nose plyers
F-369
(2) Procedure
1. Pull off E-Clips [1]
2. Remove the pins [2]. During removal of pins hold on to spring with
fingers.
3. Completely remove the springs [3] and then slide roller assembly
[4] down and then out.
Note
• Aligner rollers must be moved downwards. Hence all the
rollers need to be removed.
30.3.26 Aligner Drive Belt Replacement

(1) Procedure
Before replacing the green drive belts, remove the Aligner panels. (Refer to F.30.3.24 Aligner Panel Removal) Then follow the procedures
below for the entrance side or exit side green drive belt service.
(2) Tools Required

• Phillips screw driver
• Nut drivers, 1/4 and 5/16"
• Hex wrenches, 5/64 and 9/64"
• Snap ring pliers
• E-Ring tool
• Twelve inch metal ruler or similar straight edge
CAUTION
• Disconnect the GP-501 Punch from power and retain the power cord in your possession for your safety. Failure to observe
this caution can result in injury.
Note
• Empty the paper chip bin and replace it. This makes it easier to find small parts that you may drop into the bin.
(3) Paper Entrance Side Green Drive Belt Replacement

1. Disconnect the enter sensor (S1) wire from the side frame [1].
2. Remove the 4 screws that secure the front paper chute [1] to
remove the entrance guide [2].
F-370
3. To remove the GP2 aligner latch [1], do the following:
1. Unhook the spring of the GP2 aligner latch on the right end.
2. Remove only one (the one closest to the frame) of the E-rings
of the GP2 aligner latch on the left end (front Door side).
3. Push the GP2 aligner latch in toward the front door until it
clears the rear frame.
4. Pull the entire GP2 aligner latch, door latch out and set it
aside.
4. To remove Entrance Idler Aligner panel [2] assembly. (Refer to F.
30.3.24 Aligner Panel Removal)
5. Remove the fan [7] that prevents access to the flexible cable. To
remove it simply pull it off the shaft.
6. Remove the flexible cable using a hex wrench.
7. Remove the 2 screws [3]
8. Loosen screw from the solenoid link.
9. Remove the solenoid assembly [5] and link from the Diverter
Shaft[6], leave it hanging.
10. Remove the 2 E-Rings of the Entrance Diverter assembly, slide

the Diverter out and set it aside.
11. To remove the Entrance Drive Aligner assembly [7], which is the
large sheet metal assembly that actually contains the green drive
belt and Aligner.
1. Remove the 6 Screws that secure the face of this assembly.
2. Remove the 2 screws that secure this assembly from the side
frame.
3. Disconnect the sensor connector [8]
4. Pull and walk the entire sheet metal assembly of the Paper
Guide Aligner assembly up and outward. You can grab the
assembly at the roller cut out with your fingers.
CAUTION
• As you pull the assembly out, disconnect the sensor
harness behind the assembly as soon as you are able
to reach it. Failure to observe this notice may damage
the wiring.
12. Remove the green drive belt Aligner Roller assembly by removing
the 4 screws [1].
CAUTION
• Leave the Flex Shaft [2] attached.
(4) Green Drive Belt Assembly

1. Stretch the new Belt [3] onto the Aligner Roller assembly, green side out. Rotate the Flex Shaft [2] to confirm that the belt tracks properly.
2. Slide the Aligner into place, loosely attach the 4 Pan Head Screws with the 4 Lock Washers.
1. Check that the metal surface of the Aligner Roller assembly is flush with the Sheet Metal surface of the Paper Guide. A 12" metal ruler
works well to check this adjustment. Slip the ruler under the green drive belt and press it flat against the two surfaces.
2. Adjust the Aligner and snug the screws when perfectly flush.
Note
• The green drive belt should look like the drawing shown in Figure 3.35.
3. As a double check, hold the entire Paper Guide assembly up so that you can visually inspect the alignment between the sheet metal
surface and the metal surface of the Aligner. The green drive belt should appear to be even or parallel, and just floating above the
surface of the sheet metal.
3. To install the Paper Guide assembly into the GP-501 Punch:
F-371
1. As you slide the Paper Guide assembly into place,
- Hook up the Sensor Harness to the Sensor on the back.
- Lift it up slightly to clear the lower Transition Paper Guide.
- Be sure to clear the Sensor Bracket at the top left.
- Be sure that the Flex Coupling Shaft is sticking out of the rear
of the GP-501 Punch properly.
2. Visually check all around the mounting area of the Paper
Guide assembly and that the Sensor Harness is properly
connected.
3. Loosely secure it in place with 3 screws on the left and 3 on
the right.
4. Loosely install the 2 top screws.
5. Once all 8 mounting screws have been properly started you
have good alignment. You may now go back and tighten the
screws until they are snug.
4. Install the Flexible Shaft.
5. Install the curved sheet metal Exit Paper Guide (item 7) with Idler
Roller 4 Screws. Start all 4 screws, (2 on front and 2 on back) then
tighten.
6. Connect the Sensor Wire Harness at the top rear of the Exit Paper
Guide.
7. Install the GP2 Shaft back into place by inserting it first into the
front, then the back.
8. Close the GP2 Flipper Latch.

Repeat the test of rotating the pulleys to ensure smooth rotation of the Idler Rollers.
9. Attach the GP2 Shaft Spring.
10. Install the front E-Ring to secure GP2.
(5) Entrance Aligner Panel Installation

To install the Idler Aligner panel, refer to F.30.3.24 Aligner Panel Removal. Then insert the punch into the printer and finisher and connect the
power cord.
1. Test the GP-501 Punch by doing the following:
1. Run10 copies in bypass mode.
2. Run 1 sheet in punch mode.
3. Run 10 sheets in punch mode.
(a) Test the GP-501 Punch by doing the following:

1. Run 10 copies in bypass mode.
(6) Paper Entrance and Exit Side Green Drive Belt Replacement
1. To remove the GP6 Flipper (C), Door Latch:
1. Remove only one (the one closest to the frame) of the E-Rings
of the GP6 Flipper on the right end (front door side).
2. Push the GP6 Flipper in toward the front door until it clears the
rear frame.
3. Pull the entire GP6 Flipper, door latch out and set it aside.
F-372
2. To remove the Rear Aligner, Idler Paper Guide assembly:
1. Remove 2 E-Rings from the Pivot Shaft.
2. Slide the Shaft all the way out through the front of the GP-501
Punch.
3. Remove the 2 nylon bearings.
4. Remove and set aside the Rear Aligner, Idler Paper Guide
assembly.
3. To remove the curved sheet metal Exit Paper Guide assembly:
1. Remove the 4 screws (2 rear and 2 front) of the curved sheet
metal Exit Paper Guide assembly.
2. Unplug the sensor.
3. Pull the entire sheet metal Exit Paper Guide assembly out, set
aside.
4. To remove the Rear, Drive Side, and Paper Guide Aligner
assembly. This is the large sheet metal assembly within the
GP-501 Punch that contains the green drive belt Aligner.
CAUTION
• Walk the Belt off of the Aligner Pulley at the rear.
1. Remove the 2 screws that hold the block to the frame. The
Coupler is loose and the rear panel will come out.
2. Remove the 6 screws that secure the face of this assembly.
3. Remove the 2 screws that secure this assembly from the top.
4. Pull and walk the entire sheet metal assembly of the Paper
Guide Aligner up and outward. You can grab the assembly at
the roller cut out with your fingers.
CAUTION
• Handle the helical coupling carefully. It is very
delicate.
Note
• In order to access these screws, you must first remove
the Die Set storage shelf and the cable shield attached
to the Die storage shelf at the paper entrance side.
Moving the Die Storage shelf aside will enable better
access to the 2 screws with a short Phillips screw
driver.
CAUTION
• As you do this, disconnect the sensor harness behind
the assembly as soon as you are able to reach it.
Failure to do this can damage the unit.
5. Remove the green drive belt Aligner Roller assembly by

removing the 4 screws (S).
CAUTION
• Leave the Flex Shaft (FS) attached.
6. Remove the green drive belt Aligner Roller assembly by

removing the 4 screws.
CAUTION
• Leave the Coupler attached.
(7) Green Drive Belt Assembly

1. Stretch the new green drive belt onto the Aligner Roller assembly,
green side out.
• Take care when handling the Aligner Roller assembly so as
not to damage the Flex Coupling.
• Rotate the shaft to confirm that the belt tracks properly.
2. Slide the Aligner into place, loosely attach the 4 pan head screws
with the 4 lock washers.
Check that the metal surface of the Aligner Roller assembly is
flush with the sheet metal surface of the Paper Guide. A 12" metal
ruler works well to check this adjustment. Slip the ruler under the
green drive belt and press it flat against the two surfaces. Adjust
the Aligner and snug the screws when perfectly flush.
The green drive belt should look like the drawing shown in Figure
3.41.
To ensure proper assembly, hold the entire Paper Guide assembly
up so that you can visually inspect the alignment between the
sheet metal surface and the metal surface of the Aligner. The
green drive belt should appear to be even and just floating above
the surface of the sheet metal.
F-373
3. To install the Paper Guide assembly into the GP-501 Punch:

1. As you slide the Paper Guide assembly into place:
- Hook up the Sensor Harness to the Sensor on the back.
- Lift it up slightly to clear the lower Transition Paper Guide.
- Be sure to clear the sensor bracket at the top left.
- Be sure that the Flex Coupling shaft is sticking out of the rear
of the GP-501 Punch properly.
2. Visually check all around the mounting area of the Paper
Guide assembly and that the sensor harness is properly
connected.
3. Loosely secure it in place with 3 screws on the left and 3 on
the right.
4. Loosely install the 2 top screws.
5. Once all 8 mounting screws have been properly started go
back and tighten the screws until they are snug.
CAUTION
• Do not over tighten the 2 screws on top.
4. Install the 2 screws to secure the bearing block for the pulley
arrangement at the rear of the GP-501 Punch. Press the block to
the top of the punch before tightening.
5. Install the pulley and belt onto the pulley block. Once properly
aligned, check belt and pulley movement. Tighten the set screw.
6. Install the Die Set storage rack with 3 screws front and 3 screws
back. Remember to attach the ground strap at the middle screw on
the rear (belt side). Start each screw to achieve proper alignment,
then go back over each screw and tighten it.
7. Install the Cable Guard on top of the Die Set storage rack (2
Screws).
8. Install the curved sheet metal Exit Paper Guide with Idler Roller 4
screws.
9. Start all 4 screws, (2 on front and 2 on back) then tighten.
10. Connect the sensor wire harness at the top rear of the Exit Paper
Guide.
11. To install the Idler Aligner Paper Guide:
1. Hold it loosely in place.
2. Press the nylon flange bearings into place, through both
pieces of sheet metal, with the flange to the inside.
3. Slide the shaft through the front of the machine, while holding
the nylon flange bearing in place.
4. Secure with 2 E-rings on the inside of the bearing.
5. Inspect by pressing in on the bottom area of the sheet metal
for:
- A slight deflection of each Idler Roller as you press.
- As you press, you can turn the pulleys at the rear of the
GP-501 Punch and see the Idler Rollers rotate smoothly.
12. Bend the small metal tab back into place.
13. Install the GP6 shaft back into place by inserting it first into the
front, then the back.
14. Close the GP6 Flipper Latch.
Repeat the test of rotating the pulleys to ensure smooth rotation of
the Idler Rollers.
15. Attach the GP6 shaft spring.
16. Install the front E-Ring to secure GP6.
(8) Aligner Panel Installation

To install the Idler Aligner panel, refer to F.30.3.24 Aligner Panel Removal. Then insert the punch into the main body and finisher and connect
the power cord.
(a) Test the GP-501 Punch by doing the following:

1. Run 10 copies in bypass mode.
F-374
30.3.27 Cleaning and checking the energy drive roller

(1) Periodically cleaned and checked parts/ cycle
• Energy drive rollers
: 3,000,000 counts
(2) Procedure
Reference Figure 3.44 Energy Roller as you perform this procedure.
1. Without disconnecting either retaining spring [1], roll one of them
gently to one side to release the Energy Drive Roller shaft from its
mounting bracket.
2. Lift the shaft [2] from the mounting bracket.
3. Using a clean cloth and alcohol, clean the surfaces of the rollers
[3] to remove any paper dust or toner that may have accumulated
over time.
4. Reverse steps 2 & 1 above to replace the shaft into the holder.
5. Ensure the flats of the bearings are seated properly in the
mounting brackets.
6. Ensure the springs are straight on the bearing to apply sufficient
force for the rollers to turn when you rotate the knob at the front of
the machine.
30.3.28 Replacing the back gauge mechanism

The Back Gauge assembly pauses the paper just as the edge has entered the die set. Working properly, the sheet will pause only long enough
for the holes to be punched correctly. The Back Gauge assembly also controls the paper chad falling into the chad bin, significantly reducing the
amount of chad that could flow through the paper path. Some chad falls outside the chad bin and should be cleaned up with a vacuum cleaner
during each servicing.
WARNING
• Disconnect the GP-501 Punch from its power source before removing the Back Gauge assembly.
Failure to observe this warning can result in severe injury or death and damage the punch.
(1) Periodically replaced parts/Spotted replaced parts/cycle

• Back gauge mechanism
: Every 16,000,000 counts (Total counter)*1 (Actual replacement cycle: Every 4,000,000 counts (Special parts counter)*2)
*1 The periodical replacement is only for 1200/1200P/1051.
*2 Actual replacement cycle of 1200/1200P/1051/C8000/C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/C1100/C1085.
(2) Procedure
Remove Back Gauge assembly to clean and service the solenoid or to replace the Back Gauge. Also allows the removal of the Punch
Module.
To repair or replace the Back Gauge, separate the GP-501 Punch from the printer and finisher and then remove the rear cover. (Refer to G.
31.3.1 Preparing the GP-501 punch for service)
(3) Tools Required

Phillips screw driver or 1/4" nut driver
Note
F-375
30.3.29 Back Gauge Removal

(1) To remove the Back Gauge assembly:
1. Turn the Punch Cycle knob [1] so that the punch drive indicator [2]
lines up the position indicator [3].
2. Remove the Die Set and Chip Bin.

3. Remove the two Die Set Chip Brush bracket screws [1].
4. On the rear of the punch, unplug the drive punch flag sensor
connector [1].
5. Remove the 2 Die Set Adjustment Bracket screws [2] and pull the
bracket aside [3].
6. Remove the 2 Back Gauge rear mounting screws [1].
F-376
7. Disconnect the Back Gauge connector from the Punch Controller
PCB [1].
8. Cut wire harness ties as needed to free the solenoid wires.

9. Cut the 2 harness ties on the entrance side of the punch.
10. Remove the grommet from the frame [1].

Note
• If you are not replacing the Back Gauge or are removing it
for access to the Punch Module, it is not necessary to pull
the wire through the hole in the frame. The Back Gauge
can be set aside.
11. Feed the connector through the hole in the frame and the grommet
separately [2].
12. Remove one top screw [1] of chip tray full sensor bracket [2] and
pivot the bracket down.
13. Gently slide the Back Gauge assembly to the rear of the punch [1]
so that it extends through the slot [2] and clears the wiring harness
[3].
CAUTION
• Do not damage the wires in the wiring harness. Failure to
observe this precaution may damage the wiring.
F-377
14. Make sure the left end of the Back Gauge clears the opening on
the front of the punch [1] and pull it out [2] while sliding it to
towards the front.
15. Remove the Back Gauge and rail as an assembly.

16. To install the Back Gauge, reverse these steps.
17. After replacing the Back gauge mechanism, conduct the following
item.
When connecting to C8000/C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000
Counter reset of the parts counter number 317
When connecting to 1250/1250P/1052
When connecting to 951
When connecting to C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060
When connecting to C1100/C1085
(2) Testing
(a) To test the Back Gauge:
1. Install a Die Set.
2. Rotate the punch drive knob to ensure the drive and cams turn easily.
3. Test for proper hole alignment to the paper edge by doing the following.
a. Run 1 page at a time.
b. Run 2 pages at a time.
c. Run 5 pages at a time.
d. Run 10 pages at a time.
e. Run 50 pages at a time.
30.3.30 Solenoid Spring Replacement

(1) Procedure
Removal of spring [1] and [2] -
Grasp the loop of the spring with needle nose plyers and then pull them off the shaft.
Removal of spring [3] -
Grasp the loop of the spring with needle nose plyers and then pull them off the sheet metal part.
30.3.31 Back Gauge Paddle

(1) Procedure
First remove Back gauge assembly as described in "F.30.3.29 Back Gauge Removal".
Deep or angled deep punches may be caused by a broken weld on the Paddle shaft [1]. Inspect the Paddle and press down on it while
holding the linkage to keep the linkage from moving. If the paddle [2] moves, replace the Back Gauge assembly.
F-378
30.3.32 Back Gauge Assembly Adjustment

The Back Gauge can be adjusted up and down for optimum operation for specific Die Sets.
The Back Gauge should be at its highest position for VeloBind or PB Die Sets. If it is not, the Back Gauge Paddle may not completely close the
paper path gap. This can result in paper (especially with excessive curl) slipping through the gap created by the Paddle and the top plate of the
Die Set. This causes a deep punch.
Initially, move the assembly to its highest position and then adjust accordingly after testing each Die Set.
Ensure it is easy to insert and remove three hole Die Sets. If the Die Set is too tight, evenly lower the Back Gauge slightly to achieve the
tightness required, while still retaining the PB and VeloBind functionality mentioned above.
(1) To adjust the Back Gauge:

1. Loosen the 3 phillips head screws [1].
2. Move the entire assembly [2] upward or downward as needed
while keeping it even.
3. While holding the assembly up, tighten the 3 screws.
(2) Testing
(a) To test the Back Gauge adjustment:
1. Run a few sheets of paper and check for skew with each Die Set.
2. Adjust the Back Gauge as needed and re-test.
3. Run 200 to 500 sheets of paper and check for mis-feeding, deep
punching, and skew.
30.3.33 Punch module

(1) Tools Required
• Phillips screw driver or 1/4" nut driver
• Hex wrench, 5/64"
NOTE
(2) Procedure
Remove the module to lubricate the cams, or to service or replace the following components.
• Punch motor
• Drive motor belt
• Punch module brake
• Cams
• Flexible drive coupling
• Punch Module drive rollers
The clutch can be replaced without removing the module. (Refer to F.30.3.36 Punch Clutch Replacement).
F-379
WARNING
• Disconnect the GP-501 Punch from its power source before removing the Back Gauge assembly.
Failure to observe this warning can result in severe injury or death and damage the punch.
30.3.34 Punch Module Removal

The Back Gauge assembly must be removed before removing the Punch Module. (Refer to F.30.3.29 Back Gauge Removal).
(1) To remove the Punch Module:

1. Remove the Back Gauge assembly.
2. Use a 5/64” hex wrench to remove the Punch Cycle knob [1].
3. Remove the 4 Punch Module retaining screws [1] from the front
panel.
4. Release the cable ties on the left wiring harness [1] to free the
Punch Module wiring. Remove the connector from flag sensor [2].
Remove harness from brake and clutch as per image below.
5. Remove the belts in the following order.

1. Remove the bottom left and right vertical belts [1] by walking
the belts over the pulleys.
2. Remove the 4 power supply screws [5].
3. Loosen the belt idler rollers [2] and remove the upper vertical
belt [3].
4. Remove the bottom triangular belt [4] after loosening the
respective tensioner.
F-380
6. Remove the two rear Punch Module screws [1].
7. Cut wire harness ties as needed to release the punch wiring.

8. Unplug the punch connector [1] from the control board.
F-381
9. Carefully slide the Punch Module out the back of the punch.
Ensure that the wiring harness does not get caught or prevent
removal of the module.
30.3.35 Lubricating to the Punch Drive Cams

(1) Periodically lubricated parts/cycle
• Punch drive cams
: Every 12,000,000 counts (Actual lubrication cycle: Every 3,000,000 punches)*1
*1 1200/1200P/1051/C8000
(2) Procedure
Back gauge and rail needs to be removed for accessing punch module cams. refer to F.30.3.29 Back Gauge Removal for removing back
gauge. Use brush for reach to cams for further cleaning operation.
Installation Note
• Make sure the wires on the rear of the punch are not obstructing the Die Set or Chip Bin.
30.3.36 Punch Clutch Replacement

(1) Procedure
Replace if Punch clutch is malfunctioning.
Note
• The Punch clutch can be removed without removing the Punch Module.
(2) Tools Required

• Phillips screwdriver or 1/4" nut driver
• Hex wrench, 5/64"
F-382
(3) To remove the clutch:

1. Unplug the punch flag sensor (S9) connector [1].
2. Slide the fan [1] off the shaft.
3. Remove the lower drive belt [1].
4. Loosen the 2 pulley socket head set screws [1].

5. Remove the pulley and its shaft key [2].
F-383
6. Remove the 2 clutch bracket screws [1].
Installation Note
• When installing the clutch bracket, ensure that the fork of
the clutch engages the tab on the bracket [2].
7. Loosen the 2 clutch socket head set screws [1], slide the Punch
clutch [2] off the shaft, and remove the shaft key [3].
Installation Note
• When installing the Punch clutch, be sure to install the
shaft key. Press the Punch clutch against the drive gear
plate. While pressing the clutch against the plate, tighten
the 2 set screws. The assembly does not require a gap
between the Punch clutch and clutch plate.
8. Cut wire ties as needed and unplug the clutch connector [1] from
the Punch Controller PCB.
9. Slide the back portion of the clutch [1] off the shaft.
The motor drive belt [2] can be removed at the same time.
10. To install the clutch, reverse these steps.
30.3.37 Punch Module Brake Replacement and Adjustment

(1) Procedure
To replace the Punch module brake, first remove the clutch and related drives. (Refer to F.30.3.36 Punch Clutch Replacement). The Punch
module brake must be adjusted while on drive shaft. To adjust the Punch module brake. (Refer to F.30.3.39 Punch Module Brake Adjustment)
(2) Tools Needed

• Feeler gauge, 0.0001" (0.00254 mm)
• Hex wrenches, 0.05" and 3/32"
• Flat blade screwdriver
• Pliers
F-384
30.3.38 Punch Module Brake Replacement

(1) To replace the Punch module brake
1. Remove the 4 socket head set screws [1].
2. Loosen the 2 set screws [2] until the brake pad [3] slides freely on
the shaft.
Installation Note
• When installing the Punch module brake, ensure that the 2
set screws engage the flats on the shaft. To adjust the
Punch module brake. (Refer to F.30.3.39 Punch Module
Brake Adjustment)
3. Remove the E-Ring at the opposite end of the shaft [1].

4. Slide the shaft [2] out of the bearing bracket, away from the clutch
end.
5. Slide the Punch module brake assembly off the shaft.
6. To install the Punch module brake assembly, reverse these steps.
30.3.39 Punch Module Brake Adjustment

(1) Procedure
The Punch module brake can be adjusted without removing the Punch module brake from the shaft. The gap between the brake and the pad
is 0.0001" (0.00254 mm) .
(2) To adjust the Punch module brake

1. Loosen the 2 set screws [1] until the brake pad slides freely on the
shaft.
2. Use a 0.0001" (0.00254 mm) feeler gauge to set the gap between the brake and the brake pad.
3. Tighten the 2 set screws and check the gap.
30.3.40 Punch Module Motor Replacement

(1) Procedure
Replace motor when it malfunctions.
F-385
(2) To replace the Punch Module motor:

1. Cut any wire ties as necessary to release the motor wires.
2. Unplug motor wire connections from the capacitor [1].
3. Remove the metal spring clip [1] from the fan and slide the fan [2]
off the shaft.
Installation Note
• When installing the fan, be sure to align the flat of the fan
hub with the flat on the shaft. Also, make sure the hub and
spring clip are facing away from the motor.
4. Loosen the 2 socket head set screws[1] on the pulley and slide the
pulley and belt off the shaft.
5. Remove the motor mounting 4 nuts [2].
6. To install the motor, reverse these steps.
30.3.41 Punch Module Motor Drive Belt Replacement

(1) Procedure
Replace the belt when it is frayed, missing teeth, or worn out.
(2) To replace the Punch Module drive belts:

1. With the fan removed from the shaft, work the belt [1] off the clutch
gear [2].
2. Install a new belt by looping it over the motor pulley and then work
it onto the clutch gear.
The belt requires no adjustment. It should have slight deflection
when pressed.
30.3.42 Punch Module Drive Roller Replacement

(1) Procedure
Inspect for wear patterns or groves. The roller surface should be even and not glazed.Clean with a soft cloth and alcohol.
(2) Tools Required

• Phillips screw driver or 1/4" nut driver
• Flat bladed screwdriver
F-386
With the Punch Module out of the machine, the punch entrance side [1] and exit [2] drive rollers can be cleaned or replaced.
(3) To clean the punch entrance drive rollers:

1. Remove the idler roller assembly [1].
2. Rotate and clean the drive rollers [2].
(4) To replace the punch entrance drive rollers:

1. Unplug the sensor [1].
2. Remove the 2 screws at the ends of the idler roller assembly [2].
3. Remove the 2 screws at the ends of the drive roller assembly [3].
4. Remove the E-Ring at the end of the drive roller shaft [1].
5. Slide the drive roller shaft and bracket towards the opposite end of
the Punch Module so that the end of the shaft clears the bearing at
the end where you removed the E- Ring [1].
6. Lift the drive roller and bracket out of the Punch Module.
(5) To clean the punch exit drive rollers:

1. Move one retaining spring [1] to the side and then remove the idler
roller assembly [2].
2. Rotate and clean the drive rollers [2].
F-387
(6) To replace the punch exit drive rollers:

1. Move one retaining spring [1] to the side and then remove the idler
roller assembly [2].
2. Remove the 2 screws at each end of the idler roller assembly [3].
3. Remove the E-Ring [4] at the end of the drive roller shaft.
4. Slide the drive roller shaft and bracket towards the opposite end of
the Punch Module so that the end of the shaft clears the bearing at
the end where you removed the E-Ring [4].
5. Lift the drive roller and bracket out of the Punch Module [5].
6. Remove the sensor [6].
7. To install the drive roller, reverse these steps.
30.3.43 Belt replacement

(1) To replace belts:
1. Loosen the screws of the 3 belt idlers [1].
Installation Note
• When setting the belt tension, adjust the belt idlers so that
the belt has approximately 1/4" (6.35mm) of deflection.
2. Remove the belts in order as follows
3. To install and adjust the tension of the belts, reverse these steps.
30.3.44 Tools
Tools (needs to be reviewed by Engineering for current design accuracy)
Tools recommended for service of the GP-501 Punch:
(1) Standard Measure Tools (English as opposed to metric)

• Open end ignition wrench - 1/4" (required only for chad kit installation)
• Phillips screwdriver or 1/4” and 5/16" nut drivers
• Hex wrenches, 3/32", 5/64", and 9/64"
(2) Other Recommended Tools and Supplies

• Wire cutters
F-388
• Screw driver, flat head, small
Supply of wire tie wraps
F-389
31. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE GP-502

The descriptions of the periodical maintenance procedure GP-502 are mentioned in the GP-502 service manual.
F-390
G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 1. ITEMS THAT YOU MUST
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L NOT DISASSEMBLE
G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING
1. ITEMS THAT YOU MUST NOT DISASSEMBLE
1.1 List of Items that you must not disassemble
Note
• The list shows the parts which you must not disassemble in the field.
• For the details of the prohibited actions, refer to "G.1.2.1 Screw-lock applied screw" to "G.1.2.9 Fusing section".
Nu Item
mb
er
1 G.1.2.1 Screw-lock applied screw
2 G.1.2.2 Prohibition of adjusting the volume of boards
3 G.1.2.3 CCD unit
4 G.1.2.4 Mirror unit and exposure unit
5 G.1.2.5 Writing unit cover
6 G.1.2.6 Photo conductor section
7 G.1.2.7 Intermediate transfer section
8 G.1.2.8 Registration section
9 G.1.2.9 Fusing section
1.2 Items that you must not disassemble

1.2.1 Screw-lock applied screw
Note
• The screw-lock is applied to prevent the screw looseness.
• When the machine is used or conveyed, some screws have a possibility to loosen by the oscillation and the load. The screw-lock
is applied to the screws.
• When you loosen or remove the screw which has been applied the screw-lock, be sure to apply the screw-lock again after you
tighten the screw.
1.2.2 Prohibition of adjusting the volume of boards

Note
• Do not change the volume of the boards whose adjustment procedures are not indicated.
1.2.3 CCD unit

(1) Positions from which removing the screws is prohibited
• 7 positioning screws of the CCD unit installation reference plate
[3] [1]
[2] [1]
[1] Screws which you must not remove [2] CCD unit installation reference plate
[3] CCD unit -
G-1
(2) Reason of prohibition

The CCD unit installation reference plate acts as the basis for the installation position of the CCD unit. If you removing this plate, the
displacement of the optical axis of the CCD unit is caused. So, be sure not to remove the mounting screws of the lens reference plate
assembly.
1.2.4 Mirror unit and exposure unit

• Installation positions of the mirror unit and the exposure unit
[2] [1]
[1] Exposure unit [2] Mirror unit

The distance between the mirror unit and the exposure unit affects the magnifications of the original which is read in the sub scan direction.
Therefore, adjusting the installation positions of the mirror unit and the exposure unit arbitrarily is not allowed. However, when the exposure
unit and the scanner wire have been removed, these parts must be reinstalled to the defined position.
1.2.5 Writing unit cover

(1) Prohibited positions from which you remove the screws
• 6 mounting screws of the writing unit cover
[1] [2]
[1] Screws which you must not remove [2] Writing unit cover

The inside of the writing unit is the laser path. Once dust comes into the inside when the cover is opened, it prevents the laser path.
Therefore, do not remove the screw of the writing unit cover.
1.2.6 Photo conductor section

• 1 screw of the stopper plate/Fr on the drum unit
G-2
• 1 screw of the stopper plate/Rr on the drum unit
[1]
[2]
[5] [4] [3]
[1] Screws which you must not remove [2] Stopper plate/Fr
[3] Screws which you must not remove [4] Stopper plate/Rr
[5] Drum Unit

The distance between the drum and the developing roller depends on the installation positions of the stopper plate/Fr and the stopper plate/
Rr. The distance is adjusted at the factory. Therefore, do not remove the screws of the stopper plate/Fr and the stopper plate/Rr.
1.2.7 Intermediate transfer section

• 1 fixing screw of the tension adjusting plate
[1] [2] [3]
[1] Screws which you must not remove [2] Tension adjusting plate
[3] Belt
G-3

The strength of the belt stretch depends on the tension adjusting plate, and is adjusted at the factory. Therefore, do not remove the screws of
the tension adjusting plate.
1.2.8 Registration section

• 2 positioning screws of the registration unit
[1] [2]
[1] Registration unit [2] Screws which you must not remove

The positioning screws adjust the skew of the registration unit. The skew is adjusted at the factory. Therefore, do not remove the positioning
screws of the registration unit.
1.2.9 Fusing section

(1) Fusing swing unit
(a) Positions from which removing the screws is prohibited
• 3 positioning screws of the fusing swing unit
[1] [2]
[1] Fusing swing unit [2] Screws which you must not remove
G-4
(b) Reason of prohibition

The positioning screws adjust the position of the fusing swing unit. The position is adjusted at the factory. Therefore, do not remove the
positioning screws of the fusing swing unit.
(2) New fusing unit

(a) Positions from which removing the screws is prohibited
• 3 adjusting plate positioning screws of the new fusing unit
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[1] Screws which you must not remove [2] New fusing unit
[3] Adjusting plate [4] Fusing roller/2

The positioning screw defines the position of the fusing roller/2 of the new fusing unit. The position is adjusted at the factory. If the fusing
roller/2 is misaligned, the fusing belt is also misaligned, and the belt edge possibly deforms or rupture occurs. Do not remove the adjusting
plate positioning screws from the fusing swing unit.
G-5
G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 2. WARNING AND
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L PRECAUTION ON DISASSEMB...
2. WARNING AND PRECAUTION ON DISASSEMBLING

2.1 Precaution on removing the boards
WARNING
• To prevent the electric shock, do not touch the boards on the following table until a prescribed period of time passes after the
power switch is shut down.
There is a possibility of an electrical shock due to the charging voltage.
Board Standby time
Main body DC power supply/1 For 30 minutes
Main body DC power supply/2 For 10 minutes
DC power supply of RU For 50 minutes
CAUTION
• When you remove the boards, check the safety and important warning items and then remove the boards following the removal
procedure.
• The removal procedures from the connector and the board support are omitted.
• Be sure to use the body earth when you touch the element on the board by necessity.
G-6
G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 3. bizhub PRESS C1070/
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L C1070P/C71hc/C10...
3. bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L

3.1 List of disassembling and assembling parts
Note
• This list shows the explanation of the disassembly and the reassembly of the parts which are considered necessary to replace
(other than periodically replaced parts). However, these parts except for the covers do not require to be disassembled while in
normal service operations.
• For the method of replacing the periodically replaced parts, refer to "F.5.1.1 Replacement of the developing dust-proof filter/1, the
developing dust-proof filter/2, the PH dust-proof filter and the suction dust-proof filter" to "F.5.13.2 Replacement of the paper exit
drive gear and the paper exit decurler roller".
Numb Section Parts name
er
1 Cover Exhaust inlet cover
2 Rear cover
3 Left cover
4 Right cover/Up1
5 Right cover/Up2
6 Right cover/Up3
7 Right cover/Up4
8 Right cover/Lw1
9 Right cover/Lw2
10 Upper cover/Fr
11 Upper cover/Rt
12 Upper cover/Rr1
13 Upper cover/Rr2
14 Upper cover/ Lt
15 Arm cover/Fr
16 Arm cover/Rr
17 Main board unit
18 Overall control board (OACB)
19 Original glass assy
20 WT-511 (Option)
21 Scanner section CCD unit
22 Exposure unit
23 Exposure lamp
24 Scanner unit
25 Removing the scanner wire
26 Reinstalling the scanner wire
27 Write section Writing unit
28 Process section Process unit
29 Image correction unit
30 Toner supply section Toner bottle motor
31 Toner bottle clutch
32 Remaining toner sensor
33 Toner supply motor
34 Duplex section Duplex section
35 Paper feed section Paper feed tray
36 Tray up and down wire/1 (tray 1)
41 Fusing section Fusing paper exit plate assy
42 Temperature sensor/1 (TH1)
44 Thermostat/1 (TS1)
G-7
3.2 Disassembling and assembling procedures

3.2.1 Precautions on disassembling and assembling
Note:
• When disassembling/reassembling the parts, be sure to unplug the power plug of the main body from the power outlet.
3.2.2 Duct cover

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 3 screws [1], and then remove the duct cover [2].
reverse.
[1] [2] [1]
3.2.3 Rear cover

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the filter box cover. (Refer to F.5.1.2 Replacement of the
filter box)
2. Remove the exhaust inlet cover. (Refer to "G.3.2.2 Duct cover")
3. Remove 17 screws [1], and then remove the rear cover [2].
reverse.
[1] [2] [1] [1]
3.2.4 Left cover

(1) Procedure
[2] 1. Loosen 2 screws [1].
2. Remove 9 screws [2] and then remove the left cover [3].
reverse.
[3] [1]
G-8
[2] [1] Note

• When the heat-proof sheet [1] for the charge control unit
(RU-516/RU-517) is attached, be careful that it does not
run off the quadrilateral hole when you install the left
cover [2], as in the picture.
Otherwise, it hits the RU-516/RU-517 and a malfunction
possibly occurs.
3.2.5 Right cover/Up1, right cover/Up2, right cover/Up3, right cover/Up4, right cover/Lw1, right cover/Lw2
(1) Procedure
[3] [4] 1. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the right cover/Lw1 [2].
2. Remove 3 screws [3] and then remove the right cover/Up4 [4].
[1] [2]
[2] [1] 3. Remove 5 screws [1] and then remove the right cover/Up1 [2].
G-9
[3] [1] 4. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the right cover/Up2 [2].
5. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the right cover/Up3 [4].
[2] [4]
[1] 6. Remove 7 screws [1] and then remove the right cove/Lw2 [2].
reverse.
[1] [2]
3.2.6 Top cover/Fr, top cover/Rt, top cover/Rr1, top cover/Rr2, top cover/Lt, arm cover/Fr, arm cover/Rr
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the electric component cooling filter. (Refer to F.5.1.3
Replacement of the electric component cooling filter)
2. Remove the exhaust inlet cover. (Refer to G.3.2.2 Duct cover)
3. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the arm cover/Rr [2].
4. Remove the screw cap, and remove 2 screws [3], and then
remove the top cover/Rr2 [4].
[1] [2] [3] [4]
G-10
5. Loosen 3 screws [1] and then remove the arm cover/Fr [2] in the
remove the top cover/Rr [4].
[1]
[4] [3] [2] [1]

remove the top cover/Rr1 [2].
remove the top cover/Lt [4].
[1] [2] [3] [4]

[4] 9. Open the front door [1] and the toner supply door [2], and remove
4 screws [3].
10. Remove 2 screws [4], and then remove the top cover/Fr [5].
reverse.
[1] [2]
[3] [5]
G-11
3.2.7 Main board unit

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the rear cover. (Refer to G.3.2.3 Rear cover)
2. Remove the right cover/Up3. (Refer to G.3.2.5 Right cover/Up1,
right cover/Up2, right cover/Up3, right cover/Up4, right cover/Lw1,
right cover/Lw2)
3. Remove 20 screws [1] and then open the board cover [2] in the
[1] arrow-marked direction.
[1]
[1] [1]
[1] [2]
4. Remove 5 connectors [1] to release the wiring harness, and

remove the screw [2] to remove the board cover [3].
Note
• When you remove the cover, be careful not to drop the
[2] board cover. Hold the top and bottom of the board cover.
[1] [1] [3]
[1] [1]
G-12
5. To release the wiring harness from the clamps, remove 15
[1] [1] connectors [1].
[1]
[1] [1]
[1] [1]
G-13
Note
• When you reinstall the connectors of the flat cable, hold
the top and bottom [1] of the connectors and insert
them.Be careful not to touch the terminal parts of the flat
cable.
• When you reinstall the connectors of the flat cable,
repeatedly connect and disconnect the connectors for
several times beforehand. This work removes foreign
materials on the terminal surface.
[1]
6. Remove 3 screws [1] and release the wiring harness.

7. Remove 3 screws [2] and remove the wiring mounting cover [3].
8. Remove the clamp [4].
[2] [3] [1] [4]
G-14
9. Remove 9 screws [1] and remove the main board unit [2] in the
[2] arrow-marked direction.
reverse.
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
3.2.8 Overall control board (OACB)

(1) Procedure
1. Open the board cover. (Refer to G.3.2.7 Main board unit)
[1] 2. Disconnect 12 connectors [1] and remove 7 screws [2].
[1]
[2]
[2]
[1] [1] [2] [1] [2]

[2] [3] [1]

6. Remove the screw [2], and remove 2 screws [3], and then remove
the board unit cover/Lt [4].
[1] [4] [2] [3]
G-15
[8] [2] [1] [4] [5] [1] [3] 7. Remove 2 screws [1].
8. Push the edges [4] of the board to the arrow-marked direction
while you hold the fan [2] and support the over all control board
(OACB) [3]. Disconnect the connector [5], and then remove the
over all control board (OACB) [3].
Note
• When the HDD lock password is disabled: when the
overall control board (OACB) [3] is replaced, be sure to
replace the SSD (SSD) [6] of the old overall control board
(OACB) [3] to the new overall control board [7]. (Refer to
"G.3.2.9 SSD (SSD)")
• When the HDD lock password is enabled: when the overall
control board (OACB) [3] is replaced, be sure to replace
the SSD (SSD) [6] and the EEPROM [8] of the old overall
[6] [7] control board (OACB) [3] to the new overall control board
[7]. (Refer to "G.3.2.9 SSD (SSD)")
• When the EEPROM [8] is replaced, be sure to install the
EEPROM [8] so that the "A" part comes in the proper
direction.
[8]
[8] A
[2] [4] [1] [4] [3] 9. Reinstall the preceding parts following the removal steps in
reverse.
Note
• When you reconnect the connector [1], be sure to push
the connector edge [4] to the arrow-marked direction
while you hold the fan [2] and support the over all control
board (OACB) [3]. If you push the position other than the
connector edge [4], the over all control board (OACB) [3]
gets damaged.
3.2.9 SSD (SSD)

Note
• For how to get or replace the SSD (SSD), contact the service manager of Konica Minolta.
• When the HDD lock password is enabled: Before the SSD (SSD) is replaced, be sure to contact the service manager of Konica
Minolta.
G-16
(1) Procedure
1. Open the board cover. (Refer to "G.3.2.7 Main board unit")
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the SSD [2] in the arrow-marked
direction.
Note
• After the SSD (SSD) is replaced, conduct rewriting of the
firmware. (Refer to "J. Rewriting of firmware")
[1] [2]
3.2.10 Original glass assy

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the upper cover/Rt. (Refer to G.3.2.6 Top cover/Fr, top
[1] cover/Rt, top cover/Rr1, top cover/Rr2, top cover/Lt, arm cover/Fr,
arm cover/Rr)
2. Remove each screw [1], remove the 2 original glass mounting
[2] brackets [2], and remove the original glass assy [3].
reverse.
4. After you reinstall the original glass unit, conduct the following
items in the order.
[3] • Restart timing adjustment (scanner adjustment) (Refer to I.
4.3.19 Restart Timing Adjustment (Scan Adjustment))
• Centering adjustment (Scan adjustment) (Refer to I.4.3.20
Centering Adjustment (Scan Adjustment))
• Scan Gradation/Color Adj. (Scan Adjustment) (Refer to I.
4.3.22 Scan Gradation/Color Adj. (Scan Adjustment))
3.2.11 WT-511 (Option)

(1) Step
[2] 1. Loosen 4 screws [1] and remove WT-511 [2].
[1]
G-17
[1] [2] [5] [4] [3] [6] 2. Reinstall the preceding parts following the removal steps in
reverse.
Note
• When MK-740 is installed, tighten the screws in the order
of [1], [2], [3], and [4], and install WT-511 [5].
Both the screws [3] and [4] tighten the metal frame [6] of
MK-740. When the screws are not tightened in the correct
order, the screws [3] and [4] are not fixed enough, and
WT-511 [5] possibly falls.
3.2.12 CCD unit

1. Remove the original glass assy. (Refer to G.3.2.10 Original glass
[1] [1] assy)
2. Remove 9 screws [1], and then remove the CCD board protective
shield [2].
[1] [2]
3. Remove 2 connectors [1].

[1]
4. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the CCD board unit [2].
[2] [1]
[1]
G-18

1. Install the CCD board unit so that the unit comes at the center of
the division and install it with 4 screws.
reverse.
3. Activate the main power and the sub power.
4. Select [Service Mode] - [CD-Mag. Adjustment] and conduct the
adjustment. When the value is not within the standard value,
loosen the mounting screw on the CCD board unit and move the
CCD board unit in the sub scan direction and adjust it. (Refer to I.
4.3.23 CD-Mag. adjustment (scan adjustment))
Note
• Be sure to move the CCD board unit by hand. Do not stick
and move the CCD board unit with a driver or other tools.
It is because the distance between the CCD sensor and
the lens could change.
5. After you install the CCD unit, conduct the following items in the
order.
• Scan Gradation/Color Adj. (Refer to I.4.3.22 Scan Gradation/
Color Adj. (Scan Adjustment))
• Color registration gap measurement/Manual adjustment (Refer
to I.4.3.13 Color Regist.Gap Measurement (Printer
Adjustment))
3.2.13 Exposure unit, Exposure lamp

(1) Procedure
assy)
2. Remove 2 sheets at the referred positions in the illustration [1]
[1]
3. Move the exposure unit [1] to the position where the sheets have
[2]
been removed in the step 2 (where the screw is touchable with the
point of the driver).
[1]
5. Remove the harness from the edge cover [1] and remove the
[2] connector [2].
[1]
G-19
6. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the exposure lamp [2] from the
[1] exposure unit.
Note
• When the exposure unit is removed, be sure not to
damage the exposure lamp.

8. Select [Service Mode] - [ADF Adjustment] - [Read Position Auto
Adj.]. (Refer to I.4.8.8 Read Position Auto Adjustment)
9. After you reinstall the exposure unit and the exposure lamp,
conduct the following items in the order.
• FD-Mag. Adjustment (Refer to I.4.3.21 FD-Mag. Adjustment
[2]
(Scan Adjustment))
• Scan Gradation/Color Adj. (Refer to I.4.3.22 Scan Gradation/
Color Adj. (Scan Adjustment))
Adjustment))
3.2.14 Scanner unit

1. Remove the exhaust inlet cover. (Refer to G.3.2.2 Duct cover)
[1] [2] [1]
2. Remove the top cover/Fr, the top cover/Rt, the top cover/Rr1, the
top cover/Rr2, the top cover/Lt, the arm cover/Fr, and the arm
cover/Rr. (Refer to G.3.2.6 Top cover/Fr, top cover/Rt, top cover/
Rr1, top cover/Rr2, top cover/Lt, arm cover/Fr, arm cover/Rr)
3. Remove 7 saddles [1] and remove the connector [2].
4. Remove 2 clamps [1] and disconnect 4 connectors [2].

[1] [2] [1]
[1]
5. Remove 4 clamps [1] and disconnect the connector [2].
[2]
G-20
6. Remove 10 screws [1] and then remove the scanner unit.
[1]
[1]
[1]
3.2.15 Removing the scanner wire

(1) Procedure
assy)
2. Remove the exposure unit and the exposure lamp. (Refer to G.
3.2.13 Exposure unit, Exposure lamp)
3. Remove the scanner unit. (Refer to G.3.2.14 Scanner unit)
4. Remove the connector [1], and then remove the harness from 2
clamps [2] and the 2 edge covers [3].
[1] [3]
[2] [3]
5. Remove the screw [1], and then remove the angle sensor assy [2].
[1]
[2]
G-21
6. Remove 6 screws [1], and then remove the ADF plate [2].
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2] 7. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove 3 screws [2].
[1]
8. Remove the spring [1] and the belt [2], and then remove the
[2] [1]
scanner motor assy [3].
[3]
9. Remove the spring [1] at the side where there is a hook of the
scanner wire.
[1]
10. Remove the scanner wire at the bead side from the adjustment
anchor.
[1]
[1]
G-22
11. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the scanner drive gear [2].
[3] 12. Remove the bearing [3].
[1] [2]
13. Remove the C-clip [1] and then remove the bearing [2].
[2] [1]
14. Remove the wires [2] from each pulley [1].

15. Remove each screw [3] and then remove 2 pulleys [1] from the
shaft.
[1] [3] [1]
[2]
3.2.16 Reinstalling the scanner wire

(1) Procedure
(a) Overall view
G-23
(b) Installation procedure

(Rear side) 1. Install the rounded bead [1] of the scanner wire (silver) into the
hole that locates at the referred position in the pulley [2]
[3]
[2]
illustration.
Note
• Make sure that the bead is fixed in the hole of the pulley.
2. Loop the wire in the bead side [3] around the pulley 4 times
according to the illustration.
3. Loop the wire in the hook side [4] around the pulley 4 times
Note
[4]
• Make sure that the scanner wire is not curled too tightly
[1] or does not run on the outside of the pulley.
(Front side) 4. Install the rounded bead [1] of the scanner wire (black) into the
hole that locates at the referred position in the pulley [2]
[3]
[2] illustration.
Note
• Make sure that the bead is fixed in the hole of the pulley.
5. Loop the wire in the bead side [3] around the pulley 4 times
6. Loop the wire in the hook side [4] around the pulley 4 times
Note
[4] • Make sure that the scanner wire is not curled too tightly
[1]
or does not run on the outside of the pulley.
(Same for both the front and rear) 7. Apply the tape and then fix the wire around the wire pulley [1]
[1]
(Same for the front and rear side) 8. Equip the front and rear pulleys [1] on the shaft [2] and then fix
them with the screw [3], 1 each.
Note
• Install the pulley in the referred direction in the
illustration.
• Fix the pulley at the referred position in the illustration.
• Apply the screw lock around the screw.
• Be sure to insert the shaft into the hole of the scanner
unit before the pulley [1] is installed.
[2] [1] [2] [1]
[3] [3]
G-24
(Same for the front and rear side) 9. Install the shaft [1] and the shaft bearing [2].
10. Install the gear [4] with the screw [3].
[4] [1] Note
[3] [2]
(Same for the front and rear side) 11. Remove the C-clip [1] and then remove the bearing [2].
Note
[2] [1]
(Front side) 12. Loop the scanner wire [1] in the bead side around the pulley B [2]
and the pulley C [3] in the order, and then hook the fixing bead on
[1] [2]
the adjustment anchor [4].
Note
[3] • Be sure to loop the wire around the groove on the inside
of the pulley C.
[4]
(Front side) 13. Loop the scanner wire [1] in the hook side around the pulley D [2]
and the pulley C [3] in the order.
Note
• Be sure to loop the wire around the groove on the
[3] outside of the pulley D [2].
[1]
[2]
(Front side) 14. Insert the wire through the pulley C [1] into the hole [2] at the left
frame of the scanner.
[1]
[2]
G-25
(Front side) 15. Hook the spring [1] on the wire, and then hook the spring on the
hook [2] at the left frame of the scanner.
[1]
[2]
(Rear side) 16. Install the wire in the same procedure as the front side.
17. Hook the spring [2] on the hooks of the front and rear wires.
[2]
[1]
[2] 18. Remove the tapes that fixes the wire pulleys at the front and rear
sides.
19. Temporarily tighten the scanner motor assy [1] with 3 screws [2]
and then connect the connector [3].
[1] [3]
20. At the position where the fixing screw [1] of the scanner drive
[1] [4] gear is at the right side, slide the scanner motor assy [2] to the
left 3 times. Check that the motor assy moves to the initial
position by the spring [3] force.
21. Rotate the pulley, and check that the belt does not run on the
cogs of the pulley.
22. Tighten and fix the scanner motor assy [2] with 3 screws [4].
I.9.1 Scanner motor belt adjustment
[3]
24. Conduct the adjustment that decides the position of the exposure
[4] [4] unit and the mirror unit.
[2] I.9.2 Positioning adjustments of the exposure unit and the mirror
unit
25. Select [Service Mode] - [Machine Adjustment] - [Scan
Adjustment] - [FD-Mag. Adjustment].
I.4.3.21 FD-Mag. Adjustment (Scan Adjustment)
26. Select [Service Mode] - [ADF Adjustment] - [Read Position Auto
Adj.].
I.4.8.8 Read Position Auto Adjustment
27. Select [Service Mode] - [Machine Adjustment] - [Scan
Adjustment] - [Scan Gradation/Color Adj.].
I.4.3.22 Scan Gradation/Color Adj. (Scan Adjustment)
G-26
3.2.17 Writing unit

(1) Procedure
1. Pull and remove the toner bottle.
2. Remove the right cover/Up1 and the right cover/Up4. (Refer to G.
3.2.5 Right cover/Up1, right cover/Up2, right cover/Up3, right
cover/Up4, right cover/Lw1, right cover/Lw2)
3. Remove 8 screws [1] and then remove the toner bottle unit [2].
Note
• Be sure to clean the toner bottle unit when the toner
adheres.
[1] [2]
4. Remove 8 screws [1] and remove the coupling plate/Fr [2] and the
coupling plate/Rr [3].
[1] [2] [3] [1]

5. Remove the screw [1] and remove the toner pan [2].
[1] [2]
G-27
6. Disconnect each connector [1].
Note
• Be sure to fix the removed connectors [1] with the clamp
[2].
• Be careful not to touch the metal parts of the flat cable.
7. Remove each 2 connectors [3] and remove each screw [4] and
[2] [4] [5] [1] then remove 3 pressing metal plates [5] in the arrow-marked
direction.
8. Remove the writing unit/Y [6], the writing unit/M [7], and the writing
unit/C [8].
[6][7][8] [3]
[4]

Note
• Be sure to fix the removed connectors [1] with the clamp
[2].
• Be careful not to touch the metal parts of the flat cable.
10. Remove 2 connectors [3] and remove the screw [4] and then
[2] [4] [1] [5] remove the pressing metal plates [5] in the arrow-marked direction.
11. Remove the writing unit/K [6].
[6] [3]
[4]
G-28
Note
• If you remove only the writing unit/K [1], be sure to
remove the pressing metal plate of the writing unit/C. Hold
the writing unit/C [2] to remove the writing unit/K [1].
[2] [1]
reverse.
Note
• If you reinstall the pressing metal plate [1], be sure to
place the height adjustment screw [2] on the pressing
metal plate [1].
13. After you replace the writing unit/Y, the writing unit/M, the writing
unit/C, conduct the following item.
dust proof glass)
• Writing initial position memory (Skew initial position memory)
[2] [1] (Refer to I.4.3.11 Skew Initial Position Memory (Printer
Adjustment - Writing Initial Pos. Memory))
• I/O check mode (LD1 to LD4 alarm data clear, LD alarm
measurement) (Refer toI.4.7.1 I/O Check Mode )
• Beam pitch adjustment (Refer to I.4.3.16 Beam Pitch
Adjustment (Printer Adjustment))
After you replace the writing unit/K, conduct the following item.
dust proof glass)
• Writing initial position memory (Skew initial position memory)
(Refer to I.4.3.11 Skew Initial Position Memory (Printer
Adjustment - Writing Initial Pos. Memory))
• I/O check mode (LD1 to LD4 alarm data clear, LD alarm
measurement) (Refer toI.4.7.1 I/O Check Mode )
• CD-Mag. skew adjustment (Refer to I.4.3.15 Crosswise Dir.
Skew Adj. (Printer Adjustment))
• Restart timing adjustment (Refer to I.4.3.1 Restart Timing
• Beam pitch adjustment (Refer to I.4.3.16 Beam Pitch
G-29
3.2.18 Process unit

(1) Procedure
unit)
3. Remove the drum unit/Y, the drum unit/M, the drum unit/C, and the
drum unit/K. (Refer to F.5.3.3 Replacing the drum unit)
4. Remove the developing unit/Y, the developing unit/M, the
developing unit/C, and the developing unit/K. (Refer to F.5.5.2
Replacing the Developing unit/Y, /M, /C, /K)
Note
• Be sure to remove the intermediate transfer unit, drum
unit, and developing unit before you remove the process
unit.
[3][4] [1] [2]
5. Remove 6 screws [1] and then remove the process unit [2].
Note
• Be careful when you remove the process unit since it is
heavy.
• When you reinstall the process unit, be sure to align the
projection [3] of the process unit and the hole [4] of the
guide rail.

reverse.
Note
• When you reinstall the process unit, be sure to reinstall it
with the fan cover [1] being open. If the process unit is
reinstalled with the fan cover [1] closed, the process unit
cannot be pushed back into the main body.
7. After you reinstall the process unit, perform the adjustment in the
following order.
dust proof glass)
• Belt line speed adjustment (Refer to I.4.3.10 Belt Line Speed
Adj. (Printer Adjustment))
Adjustment))
conducted) (Refer to I.4.4.9 Maximum density initial
adjustment (drum peculiarity adjustment))
G-30
3.2.19 Image correction unit

(1) Procedure
unit)
3. Remove 3 screws [2] and then remove the image correction unit
[3].
Note
• Be sure to reinstall the image correction unit so that the
hole [4] of the image correction unit fits to the projection
[5] of the main body.
• Be sure to reinstall the image correction unit so that the
plate [6] of the image correction unit fits to the hole [7] of
[1] [2] [6] [7] the main body.

reverse.
5. After you reinstall the image correction unit, perform the
adjustment in the following order.
dust proof glass)
• Printer gamma sensor adjustment (refer to I.4.3.30 Printer
Gamma Sensor Adj. (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma
Adjustment))
[2] [6][7] [3] • Printer gamma offset auto adjustment (Refer to "I.4.3.29
Printer Gamma Offset Auto. (Quality Adjustment - Printer
Gamma Adjustment)")
Adjustment))
[4]
[5]
G-31
3.2.20 Toner bottle motor, toner bottle clutch, remaining toner sensor, toner supply motor
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the main board unit. (Refer to G.3.2.7 Main board unit)
[4] [10][11] 2. Remove the connector [1], and remove 4 screws [2], and then
remove the toner bottle motor (M15) [3].
3. Remove each connector [4], and remove each C-clip [5], and then
remove the toner bottle clutch/Y (CL10) [6], the toner bottle clutch/
[5] M (CL11) [7], the toner bottle clutch/C (CL12) [8], and the toner
bottle clutch/K (CL13) [9].
Note
• When you reinstall the toner bottle clutches, align the
stopper [10] with the guide [11].
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[1]
[2] [3] [2]
G-32
4. Remove each connector [1], and remove 2 screws [2], and then
[2] remove the remaining toner sensor/Y (PZS1) [3], the remaining
toner sensor/M (PZS2) [5], the remaining toner sensor/C (PZS3)
[5], and the remaining toner sensor/K (PZS4) [6].
Note
• Be careful not to spill the toner when you remove the
remaining toner sensors.
When you remove the remaining toner sensors, be careful
about the static electricity.
[1]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
5. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the wiring mounting cover [2].
[1]
[1] [2]
G-33
6. Remove each connector [1], and remove 2 screws [2], and then
remove the toner supply motor/Y (M19) [3], the toner supply motor/
[2] M (M18) [4], the toner supply motor/C (M17) [5], and the toner
supply motor/K (M16) [6].
reverse.
[1]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[2]
[1]
3.2.21 Duplex section

(1) Procedure
Note
• Since the duplex section is a heavy load, be sure to remove and install with 2 people.
[1] [2] 1. Pull out the duplex section. (Refer to F.5.12.1 Replacement of the
the fusing unit)
3. Remove the wiring harness guide [2] in the arrow-marked direction
with pushing the stopper [1].
G-34
[1] 4. Disconnect 2 connectors [1].
[1] [3] [2] 5. Remove the C-clip [1] and remove the wiring harness arm [3] from
the shaft [2].

Note
• Be careful not to remove 2 black screws [2] since the
screws fix the stopper of the duplex section. If you
remove 2 screws [2], the duplex section could fall.
[1]
[2] [1]
G-35
7. Insert 2 drivers to 2 lift materials [1].
[1]
[1]
8. Hold the handle [1] and the drivers [2] with 2 people, and release
the stopper [5] moving the right side of the duplex section to
direction of the arrow [4].
9. Hold the handle [1] and the drivers [2] with 2 people, and release
the stopper [8] moving the left side of the duplex section to
direction of the arrow [7].
10. Remove the duplex section [9].
Note
• Be careful to handle the duplex section [9] since it has a
risk of falling from the drivers [2] when the duplex section
[6] [1] [4] [5] [3] [9] is skewed.

reverse.
[7] [2] [9] [8]
G-36
3.2.22 Paper feed tray

(1) Procedure for removing the tray1
1. Pull the tray1 at the maximum. (Refer to F.5.8.4 Replacement of
the paper feed clutch/1 (CL1), paper feed clutch/2 (CL2), pre-
registration clutch/1 (CL3) and pre-registration clutch/2 (CL4))
2. Remove 4 screws [1], and remove the tray1 [2].
reverse.
[1] [2] [1]
(2) Procedure for removing the tray2

1. Remove the paper feed unit of the tray2. (Refer to F.5.8.4
Replacement of the paper feed clutch/1 (CL1), paper feed clutch/2
(CL2), pre-registration clutch/1 (CL3) and pre-registration clutch/2
(CL4))
2. Remove 4 screws [1], and remove the tray2 [2].
reverse.
[1] [2] [1]
3.2.23 Tray up down wire/1, tray up down wire/2 (Tray1)

(1) Procedure
[4] [5] the paper feed clutch/1 (CL1), paper feed clutch/2 (CL2), pre-
2. Remove each E-ring [1]. Hold up the paper lift plate, and slide
each pulley [3] in the arrow-marked direction. Release the fixation
of the tray up down wire/1 [4] and the tray up down wire/2 [5].
[2] [3] [1]
G-37
3. Remove each E-ring [1] and remove each wire regulation cover
[2] [1] [2].
Note
• When you reinstall the wire regulation covers [2], be
careful not to nip the tray up down wires.
4. Remove each tray up down wire/1 [3] from the rear side of the tray.
[3]
5. Remove each E-ring [1], and remove each wire regulation cover
[1] [2] [2].
[3]
G-38
[3][4] reverse.
Note
• When you reinstall the tray up down wire/1 [1], be sure to
check that the tray up down wire/1 [1] comes inside of the
tray [2].
check that the tray up down wire/2 [3] comes outside of
the tray [4].
[1][2] [3][4]
3.2.24 Tray up down wire/3, tray up down wire/4 (Tray2)

(1) Procedure
[1] the paper feed clutch/1 (CL1), paper feed clutch/2 (CL2), pre-
2. Remove 12 screws [1], and then remove the tray cover [2].
[1]
[1] [2]
[1]
G-39
3. Release the tray up down wire/5 [2] from the spring [1].
Note
• When you hook the spring [1], be sure to check that the
tray up down wire/5 [2] is winded correctly. (Refer to G.
3.2.25 Tray up down wire/5 (Tray2))
[1] [2]
4. Remove each E-ring [1]. Hold up the paper lift plate, and slide
[4] [5] each pulley [3] in the arrow-marked direction. Release the fix of the
tray up down wire/3 [4] and the tray up down wire/4 [5].
[2] [3] [1]
[2] [1] [2].
Note
• When you install the wire regulation covers [2], be careful
not to nip the tray up down wires.
[3]
G-40
[2] [1] [2].
[3]

[3][4] reverse.
Note
check that the tray up down wire/3 [1] comes inside of the
tray [2].
check that the tray up down wire/4 [3] comes outside of
the tray [4].
[1][2] [3][4]
G-41
3.2.25 Tray up down wire/5 (Tray2)

(1) Procedure
[2] [1] [3] 1. Remove the tray front cover. (Refer to G.3.2.24 Tray up down wire/
3, tray up down wire/4 (Tray2))
2. Disconnect the connector [1]. Remove 2 screws [2], and remove
the gear cover [3].
[2] [1] 3. Remove the E-ring [1], and remove the up down actuator [2].
[3] [1] [2] Note

• When you reinstall the up down actuator [1], be sure to
check that the larger projection side [2] comes to the back
and the smaller projection side [3] comes to the front.
G-42
Note
• When you reinstall the up down actuator [1], be sure to
place the hole [3] to the position in the picture while you
push down the paper lift plate [2].
• When you reinstall the gear cover [4], be sure to check the
following. You can see the hole [3] from the window [5]
while you push down the paper lift plate [2].
[4] [2] [5] [3]
[1] [3]
4. Release the tray up down wire/5 [2] from the spring [1].
[1] [2]
[1] [2] Note
• When you hook the tray up down wire/5 [1] to the spring,
wind the tray up down wire/5 [1] 3 and a half turns around
the pulley [2]. At this time, be sure to check that there is
no overlapping or peculiar winding.
G-43
[2] [3] [1] 5. Remove the E-ring [1], and then remove the gear [2] and the pin
[3].
[1] [2] 6. Remove the pulley [1], and remove the tray up down wire/5 [1].
reverse.
3.2.26 Fusing paper exit plate assy

(1) Step
1. Remove the fusing roller/Lw assy. (Refer to F.5.11.6 Replacement
[3] of the fusing gear/1, fusing bearing/Lw2, heat insulating sleeve/
Lw2, fusing roller/Lw)
[2] 3. Release the 2 springs [2].
4. Remove the E ring [3] and remove the fusing paper exit plate assy
[1] in the direction of the arrow.
reverse.
[1]
[2]
G-44
3.2.27 Temperature sensor/1 (TH1), temperature sensor/2 (TH2), thermostat/1 (TS1), thermostat/2 (TS2)
the fusing unit)
2. Remove the fusing duct. (Refer to "F.5.11.3 Replacement of the
fusing heater lamp assy/Up and the neutralizing flat spring assy")
3. Remove the fusing cover/Up2 and the fusing cover/Up3. (Refer to
"F.5.11.5 Replacement of the fusing temperature sensor/3 (TH3)")
4. Disconnect 2 connectors [1], and release the wiring harness from
the clamp.
[3] [1] [2] 5. Remove 2 screws [1], and remove the temperature sensor/1 (TH1)
[2] and the temperature sensor/2 (TH2) [3].
[4] [5] 6. Remove each 2 faston [2] while you push each 2 projection [1].
Note
• When you remove the fastons, be sure to hold its base
and remove it. Never hold the wire harness and pull out it.
7. Remove each screw [3], and remove the thermostat assy/1 [4] and
the thermostat assy/2 [5].
[3]
[1][2]
[1] [2] 8. Remove 2 screws [1], and remove the thermostat/1 (TS1) and the
thermostat/2 (TS2) [2].

Note
• When you fix the thermostat assy/1 and the thermostat assy/2, be sure to adjust the position by using the thermostat
positioning jig/Up.
G-45
After the fixation of the screws, be sure to apply the screw-lock to them.
• The adjustment method of the thermostat assy/1 and the thermostat assy/2 are same. The following shows the adjustment steps
of the thermostat assy/1.
• Be sure to adjust the position when the fusing roller is cold.
[1] [4] [3] [2] 1. Install TS1 [2] to the thermostat assy/1 [3] with 2 screws [1].
Note
• Be careful not to touch the surface [4] of the thermostat.
[4] [3] [1] [2] [3] [4] 2. Temporarily tighten the thermostat assy/1 with the screw [1].
3. Install 2 fastons [3].
Note
• When you reinstall the fastons [3], be sure to reinstall
them in the direction that is shown in the picture. If you
reinstall the fastons [3] with facing the back side, you
cannot push the projections [4] and you cannot remove
the fastons [3].
[2] [1] [3] [2] [4] 4. Insert the thermostat positioning jig/Up [3] between TS1 [1] and the
fusing belt [2].
5. Adjust the position of TS1 so that the gap amount between TS1 [1]
and the fusing belt [2] becomes equal to the thickness of the
thermostat positioning jig/Up [3]. Then tighten it with the screw [4].
Note
• Be sure to check that the distance "a" becomes equal to
the thickness of the thermostat positioning jig/Up. "a" is
the distance between the thermostat and the fusing belt.
Standard value: “a” = 1.0 ± 0. 2 mm
6. Apply the screw-lock to the screw [4].
7. How to use the thermostat positioning jig/Up

[1]: Adjustment part
C
10
70
-T
[2]: The part must not be inserted between the thermostat and the
S-
U
fusing belt
[3]: The part must be inserted between the thermostat and the
fusing belt
8. Reinstall the other parts following the removal steps in reverse.
[3]
[1]
[2]
3.2.28 Thermostat/3 (TS3)

[1] [2] [3] [1] 1. Remove the fusing unit. (Refer to F.5.11.2 Removing/reinstalling
the fusing unit)
2. Remove the fusing entrance guide/Lw. (Refer to F.5.11.7
Replacement of the fusing temperature sensor/4 (TH4))
3. Release 2 wiring harnesses [1] from the clamp.
4. Remove 2 screws [2], and release the fixation of the thermostat
assy/3 [3].
G-46
[1][2] [3] [1][2] 5. Remove each 2 fastons [2] with pushing each 2 projections [1].
Note
• When you remove the fastons, be sure to hold its base
and remove it. Never hold the wire harness and pull out it.
6. Remove the thermostat assy/3 [3].
[2] [1] 7. Remove 2 screws [1], and remove the thermostat/3 (TS3) [2].

Note
• When you fix the thermostat assy/3, be sure to adjust the position by using the thermostat positioning jig/Lw.
[4] [2] [3] [1] 1. Install TS3 [2] to the thermostat assy/3 [3] with 2 screws [1].
Note
• Be careful not to touch the surface [4] of the thermostat.
[1] [2] 2. Temporarily tighten the thermostat assy/3 [2] with 2 screws [1].
3. Install 2 fastons [3].
Note
• When you reinstall the fastons [3], be sure to reinstall
them in the direction that is shown in the picture. If you
reinstall the fastons [3] with facing the back side, you
cannot push the projections [4] and you cannot remove
the fastons [3].
[4] [3] [4]
G-47
5. Insert the thermostat positioning jig/Lw [3] between TS3 [1] and the
fusing roller/Lw [2].
6. Adjust the position of TS3 so that the gap amount between TS3 [1]
and the fusing roller/Lw [2] becomes equal to the thickness of the
thermostat positioning jig/Lw [3]. Then tighten it with 2 screws [4].
Note
• Be sure to check that the distance "a" becomes equal to
the thickness of the thermostat positioning jig/Lw. "a" is
the distance between the TS3 and the fusing roller/Lw.
Standard value: “a” = 1.0 ± 0.2 mm
[4] [1] [4] [3] [2]
7. Apply the screw-lock to 2 screws [4].
8. How to use the thermostat positioning jig/Lw
[1]: Adjustment part
C
10
70
-T
[2]: The part that must not be inserted between TS3 and the fusing
S-
L
roller/Lw.
[3]: The part that must be inserted between TS3 and the fusing
roller/Lw.
9. Reinstall the other parts following the removal steps in reverse.
[3]
[1]
[2]
3.2.29 Temperature sensor/5 (TH5)

the fusing unit)
2. Remove the fusing roller/Lw assy. (Refer to F.5.11.6 Replacement
of the fusing gear/1, fusing bearing/Lw2, heat insulating sleeve/
Lw2, fusing roller/Lw)
3. Remove the fusing entrance guide/Lw. (Refer to F.5.11.7
Replacement of the fusing temperature sensor/4 (TH4))
4. Remove the screw [1] and remove the binding cover [2].
[2] [1]
5. Disconnect the connector [1] and release the wiring harness [2]
from the clamp.
[2] Note
• When the connector [1] is connected, place the wiring
harness [2] inside the wiring harness guide [3].
[3]
[1] [2]
G-48
6. Release the wiring harness [1] from the clamp.
7. Remove 2 screws [2], and remove the temperature sensor/5 (TH5)
[3].
[2] [1] [2]
[3]

Note
• When you fix the TH5, be sure to adjust the position with the temperature sensor positioning jig/Lw.
1. Connect the connector of the TH5, and install the fusing roller/Lw
following the removal steps in reverse.
2. Temporarily tighten the TH5 [2] with 2 screws [1].
4. Insert the temperature sensor positioning jig/Lw [5] between the
TH5 [3] and the fusing roller/Lw [4].
5. Adjust the position of TH5 [3] so that the gap amount between TH5
and the fusing roller/Lw [4] becomes equal to the thickness of the
temperature sensor positioning jig/Lw [5]. Then tighten it with 2
screws [2].
Note
[1] [2] [3] [5] [1] [4] • Be sure to check that the distance "a" becomes equal to
the thickness of the temperature sensor positioning jig/
Lw. "a" is the distance between the TH5 and the fusing
roller/Lw.
Standard value: “a” = 2.5 ± 0.2 mm
6. Apply the screw-lock to 2 screws [1].

C107 7. How to use the temperature sensor positioning jig/Lw
0-TH-
L [1]: Adjustment part
[2]: The part that must not be inserted between the TH5 and the
fusing roller/Lw.
[1] [2]
3.2.30 HDD1, HDD2, HDD3

Note
• When the HDD lock password is enabled: Before the hard disk/1 (HDD1), the hard disk/2 (HDD2) and the hard disk/3 (HDD3) are
replaced, be sure to contact the service manager of Konica Minolta.
G-49
(1) Procedure
[2] 1. Remove the exhaust inlet cover. (Refer to "G.3.2.2 Duct cover")
2. Remove the rear cover. (Refer to "G.3.2.3 Rear cover")
3. Remove the arm cover/Rr and the upper cover/Rr2. (Refer to "G.
3.2.6 Top cover/Fr, top cover/Rt, top cover/Rr1, top cover/Rr2, top
cover/Lt, arm cover/Fr, arm cover/Rr")
4. Remove the board cover. (Refer to "G.3.2.7 Main board unit")
[1]
5. Remove 6 connectors [1], release each wiring harness, and
remove the 15 screws [2].
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
6. Remove the screws [1] 4 each for the hard disk/1 assy, the hard
[1] [2]
disk/2 assy and the hard disk/3 assy that are removed, and
remove the hard disk mounting plate [2].
[1]
[1] [2] reverse.
Note
• Attach the wiring harness [1] on the clamp [2] so that the
label "UP" [3] comes to the referred position in the
picture.
• Lock the clamp [2] so that the lock section [4] of the clamp
comes to the referred position in the picture.
8. After the hard disk/1 (HDD1), the hard disk/2 (HDD2) and the hard
disk/3 (HDD3) are replaced, conduct the following items.
• HDD data format (Refer to "I.4.17.2 Format HDD All Data")
• HDD replace initial configuration (Refer to "I.4.17.1 HDD
Replace Initial Setting")
[3] [4]
3.2.31 Hard disk/4 (HDD4)

(1) Procedure
Note
• When the HDD lock password is enabled: Before the hard disk/4 (HDD4) is replaced, be sure to contact the service manager of
Konica Minolta.
G-50
1. Remove the exhaust inlet cover. (Refer to "G.3.2.2 Duct cover")
2. Remove the rear cover. (Refer to "G.3.2.3 Rear cover")
3. Remove the arm cover/Rr and the upper cover/Rr2. (Refer to "G.
3.2.6 Top cover/Fr, top cover/Rt, top cover/Rr1, top cover/Rr2, top
[2] cover/Lt, arm cover/Fr, arm cover/Rr")
4. Remove the board cover. (Refer to "G.3.2.7 Main board unit")
5. Remove 2 connectors [1], release each wiring harness, and
remove 4 screws [2].
[1]
[2]
6. Remove the screws [1] 4 each for the hard disk/4 assy that is
removed, and remove the hard disk mounting plate [2].
[1] [2]
[1]

[1] [2] reverse.
Note
• Attach the wiring harness [1] on the clamp [2] so that the
label "UP" [3] comes to the referred position in the
picture.
• Lock the clamp [2] so that the lock section [4] of the clamp
comes to the referred position in the picture.
8. After the hard disk/4 (HDD4) is reinstalled, conduct the following

items.
• HDD data format (Refer to "I.4.17.2 Format HDD All Data")
• HDD replace initial configuration (Refer to "I.4.17.1 HDD
Replace Initial Setting")
[3] [4]
G-51
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 4. DF-626
4. DF-626
Num
Section Parts name
ber
1 Main body DF
2 Cover Paper feed cover
3 Front cover
4 Rear cover
5 Original feed tray front cover
6 Paper feed section Paper feed motor (M8)
8 Conveyance section Registration motor (M2)
9 Reading motor (M1)
10 Reading roller pressure release motor (M4)
11 Glass cleaning motor (M9)
12 Glass cleaning roller unit
13 Reverse exit section Reverse path switching solenoid (SD1)
14 Reverse exit path switching solenoid (SD2)
15 Exit motor (M3)
16 Others DF control board (DFCB)
17 Restriction plate positional VR (VR1)
18 Cooling fan (FM1)

Note
4.2.2 DF
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the top cover/Rr1 and top cover/Rr2. (Refer to G.3.2.6
Top cover/Fr, top cover/Rt, top cover/Rr1, top cover/Rr2, top
cover/Lt, arm cover/Fr, arm cover/Rr)
2. Remove the clamp [1], and then disconnect 2 connectors [2].
[1] [2]
[2] [4] [1] [3] [2] 3. Open the DF [1].
Note
• If you can not open the DF more than 60 degrees, remove
3 screws [2], and change the positions of the stopper/Lt
[3] and the stopper/Rt [4] to the lower side.
G-52

[1]
5. Remove the DF [1].

[1] Note
• When you hold the DF, be sure to hold the part [2] in the
picture. If you hold the part [3], the DF main body can be
curved.

reverse.
[2]
[3]
4.2.3 The paper feed cover

(1) Procedure
[1]
1. Open the left cover [1].
G-53
2. Raise the original feed tray [1].

[1]
3. Remove the 2 shoulder screws [1] and the 2 screws [2].

4. Open the paper feed cover [3].
[2]
[3] [1]

[3] reverse.
Note
• When you tighten the 2 screws [1], be sure to check that
there is no clearance at the craw part [2]. To prevent a
[1] clearance, tighten 2 screws [1] while you press the paper
feed cover [3] in the direction of the arrow.
[2]
4.2.4 Front cover

(1) Procedure
1. Open the DF.
[2] 2. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the front cover [2].
reverse.
[1]
G-54
4.2.5 Rear cover

(1) Procedure
1. Open the DF.
Note
• If you can not open the DF more than 60 degrees, change
the positions of the stopper/Lt [3] and the stopper/Rt [4] to
the lower side. (Refer to G.4.2.2 DF)
[1] [1]

[2] [1] [3] 4. Raise the original feed tray.
5. Remove the screw [1], and then remove the rear cover [2].
Note
• To prevent any damage, remove the rear cover while you
press the part [3] in the picture.

[1] [2] reverse.
Note
• Insert the part [1] in the picture under the paper feed cover
[2].
• Be careful not to damage the rear cover.
4.2.6 Original feed tray front cover

(1) Procedure
G-55
3. Disconnect 2 connectors [1], and remove the original feed tray

front cover [2].
reverse.
[1]
[2]
4.2.7 Paper feed motor (M8)

(1) Procedure
[2] 2. Release the wiring harness from the clamp [1].
[1]
4. Remove 2 screws [1], and remove the paper feed motor assy [2].
reverse.
[2]
4.2.8 Registration motor (M2)

(1) Procedure
[1] [3] 2. Remove the paper feed motor. (Refer to G.4.2.7 Paper feed motor
(M8))
4. Release the wiring harness from the 3 clamps [2].
[2] [4]
G-56

[2]
[1]
7. Remove 4 screws [1], and then remove the registration motor assy
[1] [2].
reverse.
[2]
4.2.9 Reading motor (M1)

(1) Procedure
[2] 2. Remove the paper feed motor. (Refer to G.4.2.7 Paper feed motor
(M8))
3. Remove the registration motor. (Refer to G.4.2.8 Registration
motor (M2))
5. Remove 4 screws [2], and then remove the reading motor assy [3].
reverse.
[2] [1]
4.2.10 Reading roller pressure release motor (M4)

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the front cover. (Refer to G.4.2.4 Front cover)
G-57

[3] 4. Disconnect the 2 connectors [2].
5. Remove the reading roller pressure release motor assy [3].
reverse.
[2] [1]
4.2.11 Glass cleaning motor (M9)

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the front cover. (Refer to G.4.2.5 Rear cover)
[1] 2. Release the wiring harness from 6 clamps [1].
[1] [4] [3] [2]
5. Remove 2 screws [1] and the belt [2]. Then remove the glass
[2] [3] cleaning motor assy [3].
[1]
6. Remove 2 screws [1], and remove the glass cleaning motor [2].
reverse.
[1]
4.2.12 Glass cleaning roller unit

1. Open the DF.
[2] 2. Remove the C-clip [1] and the bearing [2].
[1]
G-58
3. Shift the bearing [1], and remove the belt [2].

[2]
[1]
4. Remove the glass cleaning roller unit [2] while you open the before
[2] read film assy [1].
[1]

Note
• When you install the glass cleaning roller unit, conduct the following adjustment.
1. Insert the wrench [2] to the hole [1] of the plate and align the
[1] wrench and the oval hole [3] of the pulley.
2. Adjust the position of the cleaning roller so that the flat milled
surface [4] faces directly underneath. Then install the belt.
[2]
[3]
[4]
Note
• When you press the main power switch after the
preceding adjustment, be sure to check that the shaft [1]
is at the correct position (home position).
[1]
G-59
4.2.13 Reverse path switching solenoid (SD1)

(1) Procedure
3. Release the wiring harness from the 2 clamps [2] and the clamp
[3].
[1] [2]
4. Remove the screw [1] and the spring [2]. Then remove the reverse
[3] [2] [1] path switching solenoid [3].
reverse.
Note
• When you install the screw [1], align the dowel [2] with the
scale [3] with which the dowel was aligned before the
screw was removed. Then tighten the screw.
[1]
4.2.14 Reverse exit path switching solenoid (SD2)

(1) Procedure
2. Remove the paper feed motor. (Refer to G.4.2.7 Paper feed motor
(M8))
3. Remove the registration motor. (Refer to G.4.2.8 Registration
motor (M2))
[8] [4] 4. Remove the 2 screws [1], and release the wiring harness guide [2].
5. Remove the screw [3], and remove the ground cable.
6. Remove the 2 connectors [4] of the sensor.
[7] [2] [1] [3] 8. Remove the E-ring [6] and the bearing [7].
9. Remove the 4 screws [8], and remove the plate [9].
[4] [5] [8]

[6] [9]
G-60

[3] [4] [5]
12. Remove the screw [3] and the spring [4]. Then remove the reverse
exit path switching solenoid [5].
[2] [1]
reverse.
Note
• When you install the screw [1], align the dowel [2] with the
scale [3] with which the dowel was aligned before the
screw was removed. Then tighten the screw.
[1]
4.2.15 Exit motor (M3)

(1) Procedure
[1] 2. Release the wiring harness from the clamp [1] and the 2 clamps
[2].
[2]

[3] [2] [4] 4. Remove 4 screws [2] and spring [3]. Then remove the exit motor
assy [4].
reverse.
[2] [1] [2]
4.2.16 DF control board (DFCB)

(1) Procedure
2. Disconnect all 15 connectors from the DF control board.
G-61

[2] [4] 4. Remove 4 screws [2], and remove the DF control board [3].
Note
• When you replace the DF control board, be sure to
perform the following operation.
5. Replace the EEPROM [4].

6. Upgrade the firmware.
7. Conduct the ADF original size adjustment.
reverse.
[1] [3] [2]
4.2.17 Restriction plate positional VR (VR1)

cover)
2. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the restriction plate
positional VR cover [2].
[2]
[1]
3. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the restriction plate

[2] positional VR [2].
[1]

1. Open the side edge stop [1] of the original feed tray.
[1]
G-62
2. Reinstall the gear [1].

Note
[1] • Be sure to check the position of the gear and the
restriction plate positional VR.
3. Install the restriction plate positional VR [2] with 2 screws [1].

Note
[2]
• Be sure to match the arrow marks of the gear and that of
the rack gear.
4. Connect the connector.

[1]
5. Install the restriction plate positional VR cover.
Note
• When you replace the restriction plate positional VR, be
sure to perform the following operation.
6. Perform the original width detection adjustment.

7. Deactivate the main power switch and activate it again. Then
check that the size detection operates normally.
4.2.18 Cooling fan (FM1)

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the DF control board. (Refer to G.4.2.16 DF control board
[2] (DFCB))
3. Remove the screw [2], and remove the cooling fan mounting plate
[3].
[1] [3]
4. Remove 2 screws [1], and remove the cooling fan [2].

reverse.
[1]
G-63
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 5. PF-602m
5. PF-602m
Num Section Parts name
ber
1 Cover Right cover
2 Rear cover/Lt2
3 Rear cover/Lt1, rear cover/Rt
4 Front door
5 Tray section Tray
6 Lift wire
7 Paper lift motor/1 (M2), paper lift motor/2 (M3)
8 Conveyance section Vertical conveyance unit
9 Horizontal conveyance unit
10 The multi feed detection board (MFDBR and S)

Note
5.2.2 Right cover

(1) Procedure
[2] [1] 1. Remove the four screws [1] and remove the right cover fixing plate
[2].
a03xf2c021ca
[1] [1] 2. Remove the 13 screws [1] and then remove the right cover [2].
[2] [1]
a03xf2c022ca
reverse.
a03xf2c023ca
G-64
Note
• When you install the right cover, be sure to match the
metal plate [2] on the lower part of the PF main unit with
the groove [1] on the right cover.
5.2.3 Rear cover/Lt2

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the nine screws [1] and remove the rear cover/Lt2 [2].
[2] [1]
[1]
a03xf2c024ca
reverse.
Note
• When you install the rear cover/Lt2, be sure to match the
metal plate [2] of the lower part of the PF main unit with
the groove [1] of the rear cover.
a03xf2c025ca
5.2.4 The rear cover/Lt1 and /Rt

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the rear cover/Lt2. (Refer to G.5.2.3 Rear cover/Lt2)
[3] [4] [3] [1]
2. Remove the six screws [1] and remove the rear cover/Lt1 [2].
3. Remove the eleven screws [3] and remove the rear cover/Rt1 [4].
[3] [2]
a03xf2c026ca
reverse.
Note
• When you install the rear cover/Rt, be sure to match the
metal plate [2] on the lower part of the PF main unit with
the groove [1] on the rear cover.
a03xf2c028ca
G-65
5.2.5 Front door

(1) Procedure
2. Remove the screws [2].
[2] 3. Remove the two screws [3] and the mounting plate [4], and
remove the front door [1] releasing it from the pin [5].
reverse.
[1]
[3]
[4]
[5]
a03xf2c030ca
5.2.6 Tray
Note
• Be sure to perform this operation with 2 people because the try unit is heavy.
• Be sure to pull out the trays one at a time. Do not pull out the two trays at a time to prevent the PF from falling over.
Note
• The removal and installation procedures of tray 1 is the same as tray 2. The following explanation is for tray 1.
• When you raise up the tray, be sure to hold it at the specified positions. Holding it at positions other than those positions
specified damage the tray, thus resulting in a paper feed jam.
G-66
(1) Procedure
[2] [1] [5]
a03xf2c031ca
4. Remove the cushion/3 [1].

[3] [1]
5. Remove the three screws [2] and remove the upper cover/1 [3].
Note
• When you replace the cushion/3, also replace the double-
sided tape that secure the cushion/ 3 with a new one.
[2] a03xf2c060ca
6. Remove the three screws [1] on the right side of the tray and
[3]
remove the rail stopper [2].
7. Pull the tray [3] out more.
[2]
[1]
a03xf2c032ca
G-67
8. Remove the six screws [1], three each on the left rail and the right
[1] [2]
rail, hold the tray [2] by the specified positions [5], and remove it
straight up.
Note
• When you reinstall the tray, make sure that the four knobs
[3] on the rails are properly fitted in the notches [4] of the
tray.
• When you raise up the tray, be sure to hold it at the
specified positions [5] and raise it up with 2 persons. Do
not hold the part that is indicated with [6] as the part can
easily become deformed, which adversely affects the
paper feed resulting in a paper jam.
a03xf2c034ca

[1] [2]
reverse.
Note
• When you install tray 1, make sure not to let the lower part
[1] of the tray cover contact the rail [2].
a03xf2c034ca
5.2.7 Lift wire

Note
• The removing and installing procedure of the lift wire is the same for tray 1 and tray 2.
(1) Procedure
[2] [1] 1. Press the down button [1] to let the lift plate [2] go down to the
bottom of the tray.
a03xf2c035ca
G-68
2. Remove the tray. (Refer to G.5.2.6 Tray)

3. Loosen the three screws [1], and remove the three screws [2].
[3] 4. Disconnect the connector [3] and remove the front cover [4] of the
tray.
[4]
[1]
[2]
a03xf2c036cb
[1] 5. Points to check when you reinstall the tray

Note
• The front cover of tray 1 has the ancillary cover [1],
whereas that of tray 2 does not. When you install the front
covers of each tray, make sure not to mix them up.
a03xf2c037ca
[1] [2] 6. Remove the nine screws [1] and remove the cover [2].
[1] [1]
a03xf2c061ca
G-69
7. Points to check when you reinstall the cover

Note
• When you install the cover [1], make sure to fasten the
gear [3] and the spring [4] with the plate [2] of the tray-
down stopper.
[2] [3] [4]
[1] a03xf2c062ca

9. Slide the bearing [2] to the arrow-marked direction.
[1]
[2]
a03xf2c063ca
10. Slide the pulley/Fr1 [1] and the pulley/Fr2 [2], and pull out the wire
[4] [2] [1] ends of the lift wire/Fr1 [3] and the lift wire/Fr2 [4] from each hole
of the shaft [5].
Note
• The wire end of the shorter wire, lift wire/Fr2 [3], must be
inserted into the shaft hole near the frame of the cover
paper tray. The shaft hole near the center of the tray is
used for the shorter wire/Fr2 [3].
• When you install the pulley, raise the lift plate slightly to
give slack to the wire. Insert the wire ends one at a time
into the shaft hole, and secure them with the pulley/Fr1 [1]
and the pulley/ Fr2 [2]. The wires can be inserted easily in
this way.
• When you install the pulley, be sure to fasten the pulley/
Fr1 [1] first, and then install the pulley/Fr2 [2].
[3] [5]
a03xf2c064ca
G-70
11. Remove the E-rings [1], 1 each, and then remove the wire cover
[1] [2] [3] [5] [4]
[2].
12. Remove the wire/Fr1 [4] and the wire/Fr2 [5] from the pulley [3].
Note
• When you install the wires, make sure that the wires are
properly routed inside the wire covers [2] and are not
crossed each other.
[5] [4]
a03xf2c040ca
13. Pull out the wire ends [4] of the wire/Fr1 [2] and the wire/Fr2 [3]
[3] [2]
through the lift plate arm [1].
Note
• When you pull out the wire, pull it out carefully so as not
to damage it with sharp metal edges.
[1]
[4]
a03xf2c041ca
G-71
[1]
a03xf2c065ca
[1] [2] 15. Remove the lift wire/Rr1 [1] and the lift wire/Rr2 [2] in the same
manner as step 10 to 13.
reverse.
Note
• After completion of the installation, check the lift plate to
see if it is horizontal.
a03xf2c042ca
G-72
5.2.8 Paper lift motor/1 (M2) and /2 (M3)

(1) Procedure
[1] [2]
[2].
3. Remove each of 1 connectors [3].
4. Remove the six screws [4], and remove the paper lift motor assy/1
[5] and the paper lift motor assy/2 [6] toward the rear of the main
unit.
[5] [1] [6]
[4]
[3]
a03xf2c043ca

[3] [1] [2]
a03xf2c044ca
[2] [1] 7. Remove the three screws [1] and remove the paper lift motor cover
[2].
a03xf2c045ca
G-73
[2] [1] 8. Remove the two screws [1] and remove the paper lift motor/1 (M2)
[2] and the paper lift motor/2 (M3) [2].
reverse.
a03xf2c046ca
5.2.9 Vertical conveyance unit

(1) Procedure
1. Remove PF from the main body.
[1] [2] [3]
2. Remove the vertical conveyance clutch/1 (CL7), the vertical
conveyance clutch/2 (CL8), and the vertical conveyance clutch/3
(CL9) (Refer to F.7.3.1 Replacing the vertical conveyance clutch/1
(CL7), /2 (CL8), and /3 (CL9))
3. Remove the front door. (Refer to G.5.2.5 Front door)
4. Remove the two screws [1] and remove the vent duct [2].
5. Remove the two screws [3] and remove the cover [4].
[4]
a03xf2c047ca
6. Loosen the screw [1], and release the filter replacement assy
[1] [8]
retaining mechanism stopper [2].
7. Remove the E-ring [3], pull the shaft [4] toward you, and pull out
the shaft [4] through the hole [6] in the connector cover [5].
8. Release the lock [7] of the wire clamp and press it in toward the
rear panel.
9. Remove the two screws [8] and remove the connector cover [5].
[7] [5]
[1] [2] [4] [5]
[3] [6]
a03xf3c048ca
G-74

[1] 11. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the vertical conveyance
unit [2].
Note
• When you install the vertical conveyance unit [2], be sure
that the two tabs [3] on the vertical conveyance unit are
fitted in the holes [4] in the PF main unit.

reverse.
[4] [1]
[2]
[3]
a03xf2c050ca
5.2.10 Horizontal conveyance unit

(1) Procedure
[1]
1. Remove the vertical conveyance unit. (Refer to G.5.2.9 Vertical
conveyance unit)
2. Remove the horizontal conveyance clutch/1 (CL10), the horizontal
conveyance clutch/2 (CL11), and the pre-registration clutch
(CL12). (Refer to F.7.3.2 Replacing the horizontal conveyance
clutch/1 (CL10), /2 (CL11), and pre-registration clutch (CL12))
3. Disconnect the two connectors [1] and release the wires from the
clamps.
a03xf2c051ca
G-75
[1]
a03xf2c052ca

6. Loosen the two screws [2] and remove the horizontal conveyance
unit [3].
[1]
[2]
a03xf2c053ca

[2] [1] reverse.
Note
• When you install the horizontal conveyance unit, make
sure that the pin [2] is fitted in the notch [1] of the unit.
a03xf2c054ca
5.2.11 The multi feed detection board (MFDBR and MFDBS)

Note
• When you replace the multi feed detection board/S (MFDBS), be sure to replace the multi feed detection board/R (MFDBR) at the
same time.
• When the multi feed detection board is replaced, be sure to conduct the adjustment when you replace the multi feed detection
board (MFDBR, MFDBS). (Refer to I.4.3.14 Adjustment when you replace the multi feed detection board (PF))
G-76
(1) Procedure
1. Loosen the screw [1], and release the filter replacement assy
[1] [8]
retaining mechanism stopper [2].
2. Remove the E-ring [3], pull the shaft [4] toward you, and pull out
the shaft [4] through the hole [6] in the connector cover [5].
3. Release the lock [7] of the wire clamp and press it in toward the
rear panel.
4. Remove the two screws [8] and remove the connector cover [5].
[7] [5]
[1] [2] [4] [5]
[3] [6]
a03xf3c048ca

[1]
6. Open the jam processing lever PF5 [2], and remove the cover [3].
[2] [3]
a03xf2c056ca
[1] [3]
[2]
8. Remove 2 screws [2], and then remove the multi feed detection
board/R (MFDBR) [3].
a03xf2c057ca
G-77
9. Remove the screw [1], slide the cover [2] in the arrow-marked
[2]
direction, and remove the cover down.
Note
• When you install the cover, be sure to insert the tab [3] on
the cover into the hole of the horizontal conveyance unit
[4].
[1] [3] [4] [2]
a03xf3c058ca

[1] [2] [3]
11. Remove 2 screws [2], then remove the multi feed detection board/
S (MFDBS) [3].
reverse.
a03xf2c059ca
G-78
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 6. PF-707
6. PF-707
6.1 Items you must not disassemble or reassemble
6.1.1 Framework panel/1, framework panel/2
(1) Positions from which removing is prohibited
• 8 mounting screws of the framework panel/1
• 22 mounting screws of the framework panel/2
[1]
[2]
[2] [2]
[1] Screws which you must not remove [2] Screws which you must not remove

The framework panel/1 and the framework panel/2 are the parts of the PF framework parts. Therefore, removing the panels has a risk of a
scanning image trouble or a paper feed trouble. Therefore, do not remove the screws of the framework panel/1 and the framework panel/2.

er
1 Cover Right cover
2 Rear cover/Lt4
3 Rear cover/Lt3
4 Rear cover/Lt2
5 Rear cover/Lt1
6 Rear cover/Rt
7 Front door
8 Tray front cover
9 Tray section Tray
10 Lift wire
11 Paper leading edge separation fan/Fr1 (FM9), paper leading edge separation fan/
Fr2 (FM13), paper leading edge separation fan/Fr3 (FM17), paper leading edge
separation fan/Rr1 (FM4), paper leading edge separation fan/Rr2 (FM8), paper
leading edge separation fan/Rr3 (FM12)
12 Paper leading edge shutter solenoid/1 (SD10), paper leading edge shutter solenoid/
2 (SD14), paper leading edge shutter solenoid/3 (SD18)
13 Paper lift motor/1 (M7), paper lift motor/2 (M8), paper lift motor/3 (M9)
14 Paper feed suction unit
15 Paper feed belt
16 Paper suction fan/1 (FM1), paper suction fan/2 (FM2), paper suction fan/3 (FM3),
paper suction fan/4 (FM4), paper suction fan/5 (FM5), paper suction fan/6 (FM6)
17 Paper feed assist fan/Fr1 (FM11), paper feed assist fan/Fr2 (FM15), paper feed
assist fan/Fr3 (FM19), paper feed assist fan/Rr1 (FM12), paper feed assist fan/Rr2
(FM16), paper feed assist fan/Rr3 (FM20)
18 Shutter solenoid/Fr1 (SD5), shutter solenoid/Fr2 (SD10), shutter solenoid/Fr3
(SD15), shutter solenoid/Rr1 (SD6), shutter solenoid/Rr2 (SD11), shutter solenoid/
Rr3 (SD16)
19 Paper feed check window
20 Conveyance section Vertical conveyance unit
21 Horizontal conveyance unit
22 Multi feed detection board (MFDBR, MFDBS)
G-79

CAUTION
6.3.2 Right cover

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 12 screws [1] and then remove the right cover [2].
reverse.
[2]
[1] [1]

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 5 screws [1], and then remove the rear cover/Lt4 [2].
reverse.
[2]
[1]
6.3.4 Rear cover/Lt2, rear cover/Lt3

(1) Procedure
[1] 2. Remove 4 screws [1], and then remove the rear cover/Lt2 [2].
3. Remove 2 screws [3], and then remove the rear cover/Lt3 [4].
reverse.
[3]
[4]
[1] [2]
G-80

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the rear cover/Lt2. (Refer to G.6.3.4 Rear cover/Lt2, rear
cover/Lt3)
[1] 2. Remove 5 screws [1], and then remove the rear cover/Lt1 [2].
reverse.
[2]
6.3.6 Rear cover/Rt

(1) Procedure
[1] 2. Remove 10 screws [1], and then remove the rear cover/Rt [2].
reverse.
[2]
[1]
6.3.7 Front door

(1) Procedure
2. Remove 2 screws [2] and remove the mounting plate [3] and the
washer [4], and then remove the front door [1].
CAUTION
• The front door [1] is heavy. Support it securely when you
remove it.

reverse.
[1]
[2] [3] [4]
G-81
6.3.8 Tray front cover

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 6 screws [1], disconnect the connector [2], and then
remove the tray front cover [3].
Note
• Be noted that the shape of the front cover of the tray 1
differs from the rest.

reverse.
[1]
[3]
[2]
6.3.9 Tray
(1) Procedure for pulling out the tray
2. Insert a driver into the hole [2] and pull out the tray [4] while you lift
[2]
[3] up a little the tray lock lever [3].
[4]
[1]
a0gdt3c048ca
(2) Procedure for pulling out the tray at the maximum

CAUTION
• Be sure to pull out the trays one at a time. Avoid pulling out more than 2 trays at once. It causes the PF to turn over.
G-82
1. Open the front door. (Refer to G.4.3.20 (1) Procedure for pulling
out the tray)
3. Pull out the tray. (Refer to G.4.3.20 (1) Procedure for pulling out
the tray)
reverse.
[1] [2]
(3) Procedure for removing the tray

CAUTION
• Be sure to perform this operation with 2 people because the try unit is heavy.
[3] 1. Pull out the tray completely. (Refer to G.4.3.20 (2) Procedure for
pulling out the tray at the maximum)
2. Remove the tray front cover. (Refer to G.6.3.8 Tray front cover)
3. Remove the screws [1], 2 each, from the left rail and the right rail.
4. Hold the specified area [3] and bring it up. Remove the tray [2].
Note
• When you remove the tray, be sure to hold the specified
area [3] and never hold the parts easily deformed. It
possibly causes damage or the paper feed jam.
[1] [2]

[2] [3] [1] reverse.
Note
• When you reinstall the tray, be sure to insert the 4 knobs
[1] on the rail to the shallow groove [2] for tray 1 and tray
[3]
[2]
[1]
G-83
2. For tray 3, be sure to insert the knobs to the deep

groove [3].
6.3.10 Lift wire

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the tray. (Refer to G.6.3.9 Tray)
[4] [5] [3] 2. Remove the tray front cover. (Refer to G.6.3.8 Tray front cover)
3. Remove the paper leading edge separation fan. (Refer to G.6.3.11
Paper leading edge separation fan /Fr1 (FM9), /Fr2 (FM13), /Fr3
(FM17), /Rr1 (FM4), /Rr2 (FM8), /Rr3 (FM12))
4. Remove the paper lift gear assy. (Refer to G.6.3.13.(1) Removing
procedure of the paper lift gear assy)
Note
• When you reinstall it, insert the screwdriver to the
quadrilateral hole [3]. Rotate the gear [4] to go through the
hole [5] of the gear [4]. Reinstall the gear [2] with the
aligned position.
[2] [1] a0gdt3c096ca
6. Remove 4 E-rings [1] and then remove 1 each of the pulley covers
[7] [2] [1]
[2].
7. Lift the paper lift plate [3] horizontally to loosen 1 each of the lift
wires/Rt [4] back and forth, and then remove it from the pulleys [5]
and [6].
[6] [5] [1] [2] 8. Lift the paper lift plate [3] horizontally to loosen 1 each of the lift
wires/Lt [7] back and forth, and then remove it from the pulleys [6].
Note
• When you hook the lift wire to the pulley, be sure to hook
the shorter lift wire/Lt [7] to the inside and the longer lift
wire/Rt [4] to the outside.
• When you install the wires, make sure that the lift wires
are properly routed inside the wire covers and are not
crossed each other.
[4]
9. Remove the pulleys [5] and [6].
Note
• When you reinstall the pulley, be sure that the metal
bearing comes to the outside.
[3]
a0gdt3c097ca
10. Remove the E-ring [1] and move the bearing [2] into the inside.
[7] [6] [5] [4] [3] [2] [1]
11. Remove the E-ring [3] and move the gear [4] in to the inside and
then remove the pin [5].
12. Remove the E-ring [6] and move the bearing [7] into the inside.
a0gdt3c098ca
G-84
13. Move the pulley [1] into the inside [2] and remove the lift wire/Lt [3]
[2] [1] [4] [3] [5] [6]
from the shaft hole [4]. Move the pulley [5] and remove the lift wire/
Rt [6].
Note
• Be sure to put the shorter lift wire/Lt [7] to the inside and
the longer lift wire/Rt [4] to the outside.
a0gdt3c099ca
14. Pull out the lift wire/Rt and the lift wire/Lt [3] from the hole [2] of the
[2] [1] [3] [4]
lift plate arm [1] to downward.
Note
• When you reinstall it, be sure to put the circular cylindrical
shape wire end [4] from the downside of the hole [2].
• Be sure to install the shorter lift wire/Lt to the lift plate arm
[5] and the longer lift wire/Rt to the lift plate arm [6].
• When you pull or install it, be sure to pull out carefully and
be careful not to damage it with the corner of the metal
plate.

reverse.
[5] [6]
a0gdt3c100ca
6.3.11 Paper leading edge separation fan /Fr1 (FM9), /Fr2 (FM13), /Fr3 (FM17), /Rr1 (FM4), /Rr2 (FM8), /Rr3 (FM12)
Note
• The height inside the trays differ for Tray1, Tray2, and Tray3.
Therefore, remove the tray before you remove the paper leading edge separation fan of Tray1 and Tray2.
For Tray3, you can remove the paper leading edge separation fan while it is installed to the PF.
(1) Procedure for Tray1 and Tray2

[1] 1. Remove the tray. (Refer to G.6.3.9 Tray)
[2]
a0gdt3c006ca
G-85
[2] [3] [2] 3. Disconnect the 2 connectors [1].

4. Remove the screw [2] and then remove the 2 wiring harness clamp
[3].
[1] a0gdt3c135ca
[5] [4] [7] [1] [2] 5. Remove the 3 screws [1] and move the paper leading edge
separation fan/Fr1 and the paper leading edge separation fan/Fr2
[2] in the arrow-marked direction.
6. Remove the 3 screws [4] and move the paper leading edge
separation fan/Rr1 and the paper leading edge separation fan/Rr2
[6] [5] in the arrow-marked direction [6] to remove.
Note
• When you reinstall the paper leading edge separation fan/
Fr1, the paper leading edge separation fan/Fr2, the paper
[3] leading edge separation fan/Rr1, and the paper leading
edge separation fan/Rr2 [5], be sure to press them against
the air duct [7]. Secure the screws so that there is no
space between the contacting section [8].
[8]
a0gdt3c007ca 7. Reinstall the preceding parts following the removal steps in
reverse.
(2) Procedure for Tray3

[1]
1. Remove the stopper and pull out the tray at the maximum. (Refer
to G.6.3.9 Tray)
[2]
a0gdt3c008ca
G-86
[5] [4] [7] [6] [2] [3]

4. Remove the 3 screws [2] and remove the paper leading edge
separation fan/Fr3 [3].
5. Remove 3 screws [4] and remove the paper leading edge
separation fan/Rr3 [5].
Note
• When you reinstall the paper leading edge separation fan/
Fr3 [3] and the paper leading edge separation fan/Rr3 [5],
be sure to press them against the air duct [6]. Secure the
screws so that there is no space between the contacting
section [7].

[1] reverse.
a0gdt3c009ca
6.3.12 Paper leading edge shutter solenoid /1 (SD10), /2 (SD14), /3 (SD18)

(1) Procedure
Note
• The following pictures for the explanation are for the tray1 but the procedure is the same for the trays 2 and 3.
[7] [5] 1. Remove the paper leading edge separation fan. (Refer to G.6.3.11
Paper leading edge separation fan /Fr1 (FM9), /Fr2 (FM13), /Fr3
(FM17), /Rr1 (FM4), /Rr2 (FM8), /Rr3 (FM12))
[6] 2. Disconnect 2 connectors [1].
3. Remove 2 screws [2], and then remove the air duct [3] obliquely
downward [5] along the metal plate [4].
[4] Note
• When you reinstall it, be sure to align the 2 fins [6] of the
air duct [3] with the notch [7] of the metal plate.
[3] [2]
[1]
a0gdt3c001ca
G-87
[1] [3] 4. Remove 2 screws [1] and the connector [2], and then remove the
upper limit sensor mounting plate [3].
[2] a0gdt3c002ca
[1] 5. Remove 4 screws [1], tilt the fan mounting plate [2], and then
remove it in the arrow-marked direction [3].
[3] [2] a0gdt3c003ca
[6] [5] 6. Disconnect the connector [1].

7. Remove the E-ring [2] and then pull out from the shaft [3].
8. Remove the 2 screws [4] and then remove the paper leading edge
shutter solenoid/1 (SD10), the paper leading edge shutter
solenoid/2 (SD14), and the paper leading edge shutter solenoid/3
(SD18) [5].
Note
• When you reinstall it, be sure to install so that the wiring
harness [6] of the paper leading edge shutter solenoid is
in the direction in the picture.
[1] [4] [3] [2]

a0gdt3c004ca
G-88
reverse.
Note
• When you reinstall it, be sure to install the air duct [1]
temporary and fix it with the screws [4] and pull the
plunger [2]. Be sure that the gap A of the plunger gets to
the standard value at the position where the shutter [3]
contacts to the air duct [1].
• Standard value: A = 0.2 mm to 0.7 mm
[4] [1]
a0gdt3c005ca
6.3.13 Paper lift motor /1 (M7), /2 (M8), /3 (M9)

(1) Removing procedure of the paper lift gear assy
Note
• The removing and installing procedure of the paper lift gear assy is common between the trays 1, 2, and 3 but the installation
position is different at some part. This section shows the procedure for the tray 1 and the different parts are described in the
procedure.
1. Pull out the tray at the maximum. (Refer to G.4.3.20 (2) Procedure
[1] for pulling out the tray at the maximum)
2. Remove the tray front cover. (Refer to G.6.3.8 Tray front cover)
[2] a0gdt3c104ca
4. Remove 4 screws [2] (in the case of the trays 1 and 2 [1]) or 4
screws [4] (in the case of the tray 3 [3]), and then remove the
[1]
reinforcing plate [5].
[2] [5]
[3]
[4]
a0gdt3c105ca
G-89
[1] a0gdt3c106ca
6. Remove 5 screws [1], the E-ring [2], and the bearing [3] and then
[1] [4]
remove the paper lift gear assy [4].
reverse.
[3] [2]
[1]
a0gdt3c107ca
(2) Removing procedure of the paper lift motor

1. Remove the paper lift gear assy. (Refer to G.4.3.24 (1) Removing
[2] procedure of the paper lift gear assy)
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the support bracket [2].
[1] a0gdt3c108ca
G-90
Note
[2] [3] [1] • When you reinstall it, be sure to put the pin [2] of the arm
[1] into the hole [3] and the pin [4] into the hole [6] of the
support bracket [5].
[4] [6] [5] a0gdt3c109ca
3. Remove the E-ring [1] and remove the bearing [2].

[5] [1] [2] [4]
Note
• When you reinstall it, be sure to align the bearing [3] on
the opposite side.

[5]
[3]
a0gdt3c110ca
6. Remove 5 screws [1], and then remove the top of the paper lift
[1]
gear assy [2].
Note
• When you reinstall it, be sure to align 3 D-cut [3] positions
of the shaft and then tighten the screw [1].
[2] [3]
[1]
[3]
a0gdt3c111ca
G-91
7. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the paper lift motor [2].
[2] [1]
reverse.
a0gdt3c112ca
6.3.14 Paper feed suction unit

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the tray. (Refer to G.6.3.9.(3) Procedure for removing the
[1] tray)
4. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the paper feed suction unit
[1] [2] [2] in the arrow-marked direction.

reverse.
Note
• When you reinstall the paper feed suction unit, be sure to
align the positioning pin [1] with the hole [2].
[1]
[2]
G-92
6.3.15 Paper feed belt

[2] 1. Remove the paper feed suction unit. (Refer to G.6.3.14 Paper feed
suction unit)
2. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the neutralizing parts/Fr [2].
[1]
[1] 3. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the neutralizing parts assy/
Rr [2].
[2]
4. Remove the screw [1] two each and release the sensor assy [2].
[1] [2] Release the wiring harnesses from the clamp.

[1]

[1]
7. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the suction duct assy [2] and
[3] [2] [1] the wiring harness [3] in the arrow-marked direction.
G-93
Note
[2] [1] • The shaft [1] and the 2 bearings [2] are installed on the
suction duct. However, they are not fixed.
Be careful not to loose them.
[3] 8. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the bearing [2].
[5] 9. Move the bearing [3] and then pull out the belt drive roller assy [4]
from the paper feed belt [5].
Note
• Be sure to check that the paper feed belt is not tilt against
the roller and rotates smoothly.
10. Remove the screw [1] one each and then remove the neutralizing
parts/Fr [2], and the neutralizing parts/Rr [3].
[1] [4] [2]
[3] [1]
[2] [1]
G-94
11. Remove 1 each of the E-rings [1] and the bearings [2] and then
[1] [2] [3] remove the 2 belt driven roller assy/A [3].
12. Remove the E-ring [4] and the bearing [5] and then remove the belt
driven roller assy/B [6].
[6]
[4] [5]
[5] 13. Remove the E-ring [1] and remove the bearing [2].
14. Remove the E-ring [3] and move the bearing [4] in the arrow-
marked direction.
Note
• When you remove or install the E-ring [3], be sure not to
convert the bearing support bracket [5].
[1] [2] [3] [4]

15. Slide the belt driven roller assy/C [1] to the arrow-marked direction
and the remove it. Remove 4 paper feed belts [2].
Note
• When you reinstall the paper feed belt [2], be sure to install
it so that the white line mark comes to the inside.
[1] [2]
6.3.16 Paper suction fan/1 (FM1), /2 (FM2), /3 (FM3), /4 (FM4), /5 (FM5), /6 (FM6)
(1) Procedure
[3] [1] [2] [4] 1. Remove the tray. (Refer to G.6.3.9.(3) Procedure for removing the
tray)
2. Remove the paper feed suction unit. (Refer to G.6.3.14 Paper feed
suction unit)
the clamps.
4. Remove 3 screws [2] and then remove the protecting sheet [3], the
paper suction fan/1 (FM1), the paper suction fan/3 (FM3), and the
paper suction fan/5 (FM5) [4].
the clamps.
paper suction fan/2 (FM2), the paper suction fan/4 (FM4), and the
paper suction fan/6 (FM6) [4].
G-95
[3] [1] [2] [4] 7. Reinstall the preceding parts following the removal steps in
reverse.
6.3.17 Paper feed assist fan/Fr1 (FM11), /Fr2 (FM15), /Fr3 (FM19), /Rr1 (FM12), /Rr2 (FM16), /Rr3 (FM20)
(1) Removing procedure of the side guide assy
1. Pull out the tray completely. (Refer to "G.6.3.9 Tray")
2. Loosen 1 each of the screws [1] of the side guide/Fr and the side
guide/Rr.
[6] 3. Remove each of the screws [2], 2 each, and shorten the
reinforcing plate [3].
[5] [4] 4. Remove the screws [4] and remove the reinforcing hinge [5] from
the pin [6].
Note
• Be careful that the screw [4] is the stepped screw.
[2] [3] [1] [2]

5. Remove 1 each of the screws [1] at the 2 positions, and then
[5] remove 1 each of the mounting metal fittings [2].
6. Lift up the cover/Fr [3] and the cover/Rr [4] and remove them.
Note
• When you remove or install the cover/Fr and the cover/Rr,
be sure to push the flap slightly into the side guide and
not to damage it.
[1] [2] [3] [4] [1] [2] a0gdt3c072ca
G-96

[6] [4] 8. Remove 1 screw [1] and 2 screws [3].
Note
• When you reinstall it, tighten the screws [2] and [3]
temporary and check the parallelism between the side
guide/Fr and the side guide/Rr with the paper, and then
tighten the screws fully.
9. Remove the side guide/Rr [4].

10. While you press the side guide lock lever [5], remove the side
guide/Fr [6].
reverse.
[3] [3] [1]
[2]
[5]
[1]
(2) Removal procedures of the paper feed assist fan/Fr1 (FM11), the paper feed assist fan/Fr2 (FM15), the paper feed
assist fan/Fr3 (FM19).
1. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the cover [2], [3].
[5] [6] [7] [3] [2] Note
• The covers [2], [3] have the projection on the bottom, be
sure to put it into the positioning hole on the side guide.
• Be sure to check that the slide knob [4] moves smoothly
after you install the cover [3].
2. Remove the screw [5] and then remove the side guide fixed plate
[6].
3. Remove 2 screws [7], and then press the side guide lock lever [9]
slightly to remove the lever cover [8].
[8] [9] [1] [4]
4. After removing 9 screws [1], rotate the small size guide [2], release
[1] [4] the magnet, and then remove the cover [3].
Note
• When you reinstall it, be careful that the cover does not
press the E-ring [4].
[1]
[1]
[3] [1] [2]
G-97
5. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the supporting bracket [2]
[2] and the side guide lock lever [3].
[1]
[3]
a0gdt3c076ca

[1]
a0gdt3c102ca
[3] [2] [1]
paper feed assist fan/Fr1 (FM11), the paper feed assist fan/Fr2
(FM15), and the paper feed assist fan/Fr3 (FM19) [3].
Note
harness comes to the position in the picture.
• Be sure to install so that the protecting sheet does not
slack.

reverse.
a0gdt3c103ca
G-98
(3) Removal procedure of the paper feed assist fan/Rr1 (FM12), the paper feed assist fan/Rr2 (FM16), and the paper
feed assist fan/Rr3 (FM20)
[2] [1] Note
2. Remove 2 screws [5] and then press the side guide lock lever [7]
slightly and remove the lever cover [6].
[3] [4] [5] [6] [7] a0gdt3c074ca
[1]
[3]
a0gdt3c076ca
4. Remove the 2 screws [1] and remove the reinforcing hinge [2].
[1] [2]
a0gdt3c101ca
G-99

[1]
a0gdt3c102ca
[3] [2] [1]
paper feed assist fan/Rr1 (FM12), the paper feed assist fan/Rr2
(FM16), and the paper feed assist fan/Rr3 (FM20) [3].
Note
harness comes to the position in the picture.
• Be sure to install so that the protecting sheet does not
slack.

reverse.
a0gdt3c103ca
6.3.18 Shutter solenoid/Fr1 (SD5), /Fr2 (SD10), /Fr3 (SD15), /Rr1 (SD6), /Rr2 (SD11), /Rr3 (SD16)
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the side guide assy/Fr. (Refer to "G.6.3.17 Paper feed
[2] [1] assist fan/Fr1 (FM11), /Fr2 (FM15), /Fr3 (FM19), /Rr1 (FM12), /Rr2
(FM16), /Rr3 (FM20)")
Note
3. Remove 2 screws [5] and then press the side guide lock lever [7]
slightly and remove the lever cover [6].
[3] [4] [5] [6] [7] a0gdt3c074ca
G-100
4. After you remove 10 screws [1], rotate the small size guide [2].
[1] [4] Release the magnet and remove the cover [3].
Note
• When you reinstall it, be careful that the cover does not
press the E-ring [4].
[1]
[1]
[3] [1] [2] a0gdt3c075ca
[1]
[3]
a0gdt3c076ca

[1] [5] [3]
7. Remove 2 screws [2] and then pull out the body [3] of the shutter
solenoid/Fr1 (SD4), the shutter solenoid/Fr2 (SD6), and the shutter
solenoid/Fr3 (SD8) from the plunger [4].
Note
• When you reinstall the body [3] of the shutter solenoid/Rr,
be sure to install so that the wiring harness [5] is in the
direction in the picture.
[4]
[2]
a0gdt3c077ca
G-101
8. Remove 2 E-rings [1] and then pull out the pin [2] and remove the
[3] [1] [2]
plunger [3].
a0gdt3c078ca

[1] [2] [3]
reverse.
Note
a. • When you reinstall it, pull the plunger [1]. Be sure to
install so that the gap A is the standard value at the
position where the shutter [2] contacts to the metal plate
[3].
Standard value "a": = 0.2 mm to 0.7 mm
a0gdt3c079ca
6.3.19 Paper feed check window

(1) Procedure
1. Pull out the tray. (Refer to G.6.3.9 Tray)
[1] 2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the paper feed check
window [2].
reverse.
[2] a0gdt3c126ca
G-102
6.3.20 Vertical conveyance unit

(1) Procedure
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the protective cover [2].
3. Disconnect the connector [3] and then remove the wiring harness
from the clamp [4].
[3]
[4]
[1] [2]
4. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the vertical conveyance

unit [2].
Note
• When you reinstall the vertical conveyance unit [2], be
sure to install it so that its projection [3] and the slit [4] are
aligned to the slit [5] and the projection [6] of PF.

reverse.
[6] [4] [1] [3] [5]
[2]
[1]
G-103
6.3.21 Horizontal conveyance unit

(1) Procedure
2. Remove the rear cover/Lt2. (Refer to G.6.3.4 Rear cover/Lt2, rear
cover/Lt3)
3. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the protective cover [2].
[3] 4. Disconnect the 3 connectors [3] and remove the clamp and
release the wiring harness.
[1] [2]

from 4 clamps [2].
[1]
[2]
6. Pull out the wiring harness [1] to the inside from the hole [2], and
[1] [2] then release the wiring harness.
G-104
[1] 8. Remove the horizontal conveyance unit [1].

reverse.
6.3.22 Multi feed detection board (MFDBR, MFDBS)

Note
same time.
• When the multi feed detection board is replaced, be sure to conduct the adjustment when you replace the multi feed detection
board (PF). (Refer to I.4.3.14 Adjustment when you replace the multi feed detection board (PF))
(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Open the open close cover [1].
G-105
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and release the claw [2], and then remove
the protective cover/Up [3].
[1]
[3]
[2]
[3] [2] [1] 3. Disconnect the connector [1].

4. Remove 2 screws [2], and then remove the multi feed detection
5. Remove the screw [1]. Pull the protective cover/Lw [2] frontward
and remove it.
[3] Note
• When you reinstall it, be sure to put 2 claws [3] of the
protective cover/Lw [2] into the holes [4] of the horizontal
conveyance unit.
[4]
[4] [3]
[1] [2]
G-106

[1] [2] [3] S (MFDBS) [3].
reverse.
G-107
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 7. LU-202
7. LU-202
ber
1 Cover section Upper door
Clutch cover
Paper feed cover
Right cover
Front cover
Rear cover
2 Up down section Replacing the lift wire
3 Paper feed section The paper size VR (VR1)

Note
7.2.2 Upper door

(1) Procedure
[1] [7] [2] 1. Open the upper door [1].
2. Remove the hook [3] of spring [2] from the paper feed guide plate
[4].
Note
• When you attach the spring, be sure to put its hook
through the hole on the plate from the outside.
3. Remove the 2 screws [5]. Slide the door [1] in the direction of the
arrow [6]. Tilt it in the direction of the arrow [7] and remove it..
reverse.
[5] [4] [3] [5] [6] a03wf2c011ca
7.2.3 The clutch cover

(1) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Open the upper door [1].
2. Remove the 4 screws [2] and then remove the clutch cover [3].
reverse.
[3] [2] a03wf2c012ca
G-108
7.2.4 The paper feed cover

(1) Procedure
[3] [1] 1. Remove the upper door. (Refer to G.7.2.2 Upper door)
2. Remove the 2 screws [1] and the 2 screws [2], and remove the
paper feed cover [3].
reverse.
[2] a03wf2c013ca
7.2.5 Right cover

(1) Procedure
2. Remove the 4 screws [2] and remove the right cover [3].
reverse.
[2] a03wf2c014ca
7.2.6 Front cover

(1) Procedure
2. Remove the right cover. (Refer to G.7.2.5 Right cover)
3. Open the front door [1] and remove the 5 screws [2].
[1] 4. Close the front door [1], and remove the front cover [3].
reverse.
[2]
[3] [2]
a03wf2c015ca
G-109
7.2.7 Rear cover

(1) Procedure
[2] [1] [1] [3]
3. Remove the 18 screws [1] and remove the rear cover [2] with the
clutch cover [3].
Note
• When the HT (option) is installed, remove the 4 screws [4].

[1]
reverse.
[1] [1] [4]
a03wf2c016ca
7.2.8 Replacing the lift wire

Note
• When HT-503 (option) is installed, remove it before operation.
• Be sure to press the tray down switch (SW100) while you charge to lower the paper lift plate to the bottom before operation.
• Remove the lift wire in the order of "G.7.2.8.(1) Removing and installing the paper feed motor assy", "G.7.2.8.(2) Removing and
installing the paper lift drive section", "G.7.2.8.(3) Removing and reinstalling the lift wire". Reinstall it following the removal steps
in reverse.
• After you replace the lift wire, carry out the paper lift plate horizontal adjustment. (Refer to I.13.2 Paper lift plate horizontal
adjustment)
• There are 6 lift wires; the lift wire/Fr1 [2], the lift wire/Fr2 [3], the lift wire/Fr3 [4], the lift wire/Rr1 [5], the lift wire/Rr2 [6], and the lift
wire/Rr3 [7]. All of them are wound on the pulleys that are attached to the drive shaft [1]. The 4 lift wires; Fr2, Fr3, Rr2, Rr3 are the
same in the length, and are referred to as the drive wire/A which lifts the paper lift plate [8]. The other 2 lift wires; lift wire/Fr1 and
the lift wire/Rr1 are different in the length and attached to the spring/Fr [9] and the spring/Rr [10]. The lift wire/Fr1 and the lift wire/
Rr1, referred to as the assist wire/C and the assist wire/D respectively, pull down the paper lift plate stabilize the plate.
Drive wire/A (1450 mm) :lift wire/Fr2 [3], /Fr3 [4], Rr2 [6], /Rr3 [7]
Assist wire/C (1240 mm) :lift wire/Fr1 [2]
Assist wire/D (820 mm) :lift wire/Rr1 [5]
• Attach the cylindrical-shaped end [11] of the wire to the drive shaft, and attach the other ball shaped end [12] to the metal plate or
the spring.
[8] [10]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[11]
[4] [1]
[12]
FRONT [9] [3]
[2] a03wf2c017ca
[1] Drive shaft [2] Lift wire/Fr1

[3] Lift wire/Fr2 [4] Lift wire/Fr3
[5] Lift wire/Rr1 [6] Lift wire/Rr2
[7] Lift wire/Rr3 [8] Paper lift plate
[9] Spring/Fr [10] Spring/Rr
G-110
(1) Removing and installing the paper feed motor assy

[1] [2] 1. Remove the LU from the main body.
5. Remove the paper feed clutch (CL101) [1] and pre-registration
clutch (CL102) [2]. (Refer to F.9.1.6 Replacing paper feed clutch
(CL101) /pre-registration clutch (CL102))
6. Remove the 2 screws [3] and remove the duct [4].
[4] [3]
a03wf2c018ca
[1] [2] [12] [11] [6] [3] [4] 7. Remove the wire binding [1] from the saddle [2].
9. Loosen the screw [4] 1 or 2 turns.
Note
• Do not loosen the screw [4] too much. When you loosen
the screw too much, the clearance sponge [5] is possibly
damaged.
10. Push the lower part of the bulkhead plate [6] a few millimeters in
the direction of the arrow [7]. Avoid the actuator [8] and push the
tab [9] to remove the lower limit sensor (PS101) [10].
Note
• When you remove and install PS101, be careful not to
damage it.
• When you install, make sure that the tab [9] is securely
[3] [5] [7] [3] inserted.
11. Slide the upper part of the bulkhead plate [5] to the direction of the
arrow [11], and tilt it until it comes off from the metal plate [12].
[8] [10] [9]

a03wf2c019ca
[6] [3] [4] [6] [8]

12. Remove the 3 connectors [1] and remove the wire binding [2] from
the saddle.
15. Remove the 2 screws [6] and remove the paper feed motor assy
[7] in the direction of the arrow [8].
Note
• The screws [6] are shoulder screws. Make sure to attach
the screws properly so that the metal plate is fitted
securely.

reverse.
[5] [1] [2] [7] [5]

a03wf2c020ca
G-111
(2) Removing and installing the paper lift drive section

[2] [1] [4] 1. Remove the right cover. (Refer to G.7.2.5 Right cover)
3. Remove the screw [1], and remove the sensor cover [2].
4. Remove the 5 connectors [3] and remove the wire binding [4].
[3] a03wf2c021ca
[3] 5. Remove the E-ring [1] and the bearing [2].

6. Remove the 3 screws [3] and the 2 screws [4].
Note
securely.
7. Remove the metal plate [5] and the bearing [6].

Note
• When you install the bearing [6], install it from the inner
side of the metal plate [5].
[2] [1] [6] [5] [4]
a03wf2c022ca
[1] [2] 8. Remove the positioning gear [1].

Note
• When you install it and the paper lift plate is at its lowest
position, align the edge surface of the actuator [3] of the
remaining paper detection gear [2] with the surface [5] of
the remaining paper sensor/4 (PS105) [4]. Install the gear
[1].
• Make sure to attach the gear [1] in the correct direction.
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3] a03wf2c023ca
G-112
[3].
10. Remove the E-ring [4], then remove the gear [5] and the outer
bearing and the inner bearing [6].
[2] [3] [1] [6] [4] [5]

a03wf2c024ca
[3].
[5] [4] [3] [2] [1]

a03wf2c025ca
[3] [2] 13. Remove the 4 screws [1] and the 2 screws [2], and remove the
paper lift drive section [3].
Note
• Be careful not to damage the clearance sponge [4].
securely.
[1] [4]
a03wf2c026ca
G-113
(3) Removing and reinstalling the lift wire

[4] [3] [1] [2]
1. Remove the paper feed motor assy. (Refer to G.7.2.8.(1)
Removing and installing the paper feed motor assy)
2. Remove the paper lift drive section. (Refer to G.7.2.8.(2)
Removing and installing the paper lift drive section)
3. Release the hook [2] of the spring/Rr [1] provided at the back, and
remove the ball shaped wire end [3].
4. Remove the lift wire/Rr1 [7] from the pulley [4], [5] and [6].
5. Remove the E-ring [8] and the pulley [9], and then remove the lift
wire/Rr1 [7].
[5]
[6] [7]
[8] [9] [6]

a03wf2c027ca
[2] [5] [4] [3] [9] [10] [1] 6. Check points when you reinstall the lift wire/Rr1
Note
• When you install the lift wire/Rr1 [1], insert the cylindrical-
shaped end of the wire [3] into the hole of the drive shaft
[2]. Insert the pulley [5] letting the wire through the cutout
[4]. Wind the wire 7 turns clockwise [6] (from the panel [7]
side to outward [8]) in a single layer.
• When you install the lift wire/Rr1, be sure that the lift wire/
Rr2 [9] and the lift wire/Rr3 [10] are not on either side edge
of the pulley. Be sure that the lift wire/Rr1 [1] is wound 1
turn at the panel side [7].
[8] [7]
[6] a03wf2c028ca
G-114
[4] [6] [7] [8] 7. Release the hook [2] of the spring/Fr [1] provided at the front, and
remove the ball shaped wire end [3].
8. Remove the lift wire/Fr1 [6] from the pulley [4] and [5].
9. Remove the E-ring [7] and the pulley [8], and then remove the lift
wire/Fr1 [6].
[1] [2] [3] [5]
a03wf2c029ca
[5] [4] [2] [3] [1] 10. Check points when you reinstall the lift wire/Fr1
Note
• When you install the lift wire/Fr1 [1], insert the cylindrical-
shaped end of the wire [3] into the hole of the drive shaft
[2]. Insert the pulley [5] letting the wire through the cutout
[4]. Wind the wire 7 turns counterclockwise [6] (from the
panel [7] side to outward [8]) in a single layer.
• Before you install the lift wire/Fr1, rotate the shaft
counterclockwise to prevent the lift wire/Fr2 [9] and Fr3
[10] from getting loose.
• Be sure to check that the wires are not loosened and are
[7] [10] [9] [8] [6]
not on either side edges of the pulleys.
a03wf2c030ca
G-115
[11] [10] [12] 11. Remove the E-ring [1] and the pulley [2], and then pull out the wire
end [3].
12. Remove the lift wire/Fr2 [4] from the pulley [5], [6] and [7].
Note
• When you remove the wire from the pulley [5], [6] and [7],
pull the wire out from the convex portion [8] of the wire
cover [9], then move the wire cover.
[9] 13. Remove the screw [10], and remove the wire protective cover [11].
[5] 14. pull the ball shaped wire end [12] and remove it straight up, and
remove the lift wire/Fr2 [4].
[8] Note
• When you remove or install the lift wire, be careful not to
damage it with the metal plate.
[4] [6]
[5] [7]
[1]
[2] [3]
a03wf2c031ca
[8] [7] 15. Remove the 2 E-rings [1] and the pulley [2], and remove the lift
wire/Fr3 [3].
16. In the same manner as Step 12, remove the lift wire/Fr3 [3] from
the pulley [4], the pulley [5] and the pulley [6].
17. In the same manner as step 13 and step 14, remove the screw [7]
and the wire cover [8], and remove the lift wire/Fr3 [3].
[5]
[6] [4] [3]
[2] [1] a03wf2c032ca
G-116
[7] [8] 18. Remove the E-ring [1] that is provided at the back and the pulley
[2], and remove the lift wire/Rr2 [3].
19. In the same manner as Step 12, remove the lift wire/Rr2 [3] from
and the wire protective cover [8], and remove the lift wire/Rr2 [3].
Note
• After you install the lift wire, make sure that the lift wire
[5] does not contact with the metal plates or some other
parts.
[4] [3] [6]
[1] [2] a03wf2c033ca
[7] [8] 21. Remove the 2 E-rings [1] and the pulley [2], and remove the lift
wire/Rr3 [3].
22. In the same manner as Step 12, remove the lift wire/Fr3 [3] from
and the wire protective cover [8], and remove the lift wire/Rr3 [3].
Note
• After you install the lift wire, make sure that the lift wire
[5] does not contact with the metal plates or some other
parts.

reverse.
Note
• After you install, carry out the paper lift plate horizontal
adjustment. (Refer to I.13.2 Paper lift plate horizontal
adjustment)
[6] [3] [4]
[1] [2] a03wf2c034ca
G-117
7.2.9 Paper size VR (VR1)

1. Remove the paper from LU and close the upper door.
[2] [1] [3] [4] 2. Activate the main power switch (SW1) and the sub power switch
(SW2) of the main body. After the paper lift plate stops at its
uppermost position (listen to the sound of the paper lift motor to
figure out the stop status), deactivate the both switches.
4. Loosen 2 screws [2] of the guide plate/Fr [1] and 2 screws [4] of
the guide plate/Rr [3], and widen the guide plate/Fr, the guide
plate/Rr to the maximum width.
5. Remove 3 screws [5] of the paper size VR (VR1) and remove the
VR1.
[5]
a03wf2c035ca

[1] [2] 1. Widen the guide plate/Fr [1], the guide plate/Rr [2] to the maximum
width.
2. Adjust the engagement of the gears of the paper size VR (VR1)
and the detection plate/Rr so that the holes [3] and [4] are aligned.
Then tighten the screw [5].
3. After you install, place the paper in LU and check that the paper
size is properly detected.
[5]
[3] [4]
a03wf2c036ca
G-118
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 8. MB-506
8. MB-506
ber
1 Paper feed section Paper size VR/BP (VR3)

CAUTION
8.2.2 Paper size VR/BP (VR3)

(1) Procedure
1. Remove MB-506. (Refer to F.10.2.1 Replacing the pick-up roller/
[1] BP, the paper feed roller rubber/BP, and the paper feed clutch/BP
(CL14))
2. Remove 6 screws [1], and then remove the bypass cover/Lw [2].
[2]
3. Remove the connector [1].
[1]
4. Slide the side guide/Fr [1] and the side guide/Rr [2] inside.
[3] 5. Remove the screw [3], and then remove the side guide/Fr [1].
6. Remove the screw [4], and then remove the side guide/Rr [2].
[4]
[1] [2]
G-119
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 8. MB-506
7. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the bypass cover/Up [2].
[1] [2]
Note
• The gear [1] has 3 holes. The gear cover [2] has 1 hole.
The side guide rack/1 [3] has 1 hole. The side guide rack/2
[4] has 1 hole.
• When you install the bypass cover/Up, match each hole
[5] [5] to the positions in the picture.
[1] [2] [4]
[3]
[2] [1] 8. Remove the connector [1], and then remove the paper size VR/BP
(VR3) [2].
reverse.
G-120
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 9. OT-502
9. OT-502
ber
1 Paper exit section OT-502

9.2.1 OT-502
(1) Procedure
[2]
2. Remove 6 screws [1] and then remove the OT cover [2].
[1]

4. Remove 4 screws [2] and then remove the OT cover [3].
reverse.
[2] [2]
[1] [3]
G-121
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 10. EF-103
10. EF-103
The procedure is same as the it of the main body fusing unit.
ber
1 Fusing section Temperature sensor/1 (TH1)
G-122
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 11. RU-516
11. RU-516
ber
1 Framework section Charging control framework unit

11.2.1 Charging control framework unit
(1) Step
[1] [2] 1. Remove the charging roller assy. (Refer to F.13.2.1 Replacing the
charging roller and the charging driven roller)
2. Remove screws [1] 2 each, and then remove the option mounting
plate/FrLw [2] and the option mounting plate/RrLw [3].
Note
• The shape of the option mounting plate/FrLw [2] and the
option mounting plate/RrLw [3] differ whether RU-509 or
FS-531/612 is connected to the later stage of RU-516.
However, the step to remove is the same.
[1] [3]
G-123
[2] [1] [3] 3. Remove screw [1] 1 each.

4. Loosen screw [2] 1 each. Then remove the option mounting plate/
FrUp [3] and the option mounting plate/RrUp [4] to the direction of
the arrow.
Note
• Be careful not to remove or loosen screw [2] 1 each too
much. Otherwise, the charging control framework unit [5]
falls.
• The shape of the option mounting plate/FrUp [3] and the
option mounting plate/RrUp [4] differ whether RU-509 or
FS-531/612 is connected to the later stage of RU-516.
However, the step to remove is the same.
5. Remove the charging control framework unit [5] in the direction of

the arrow.
[2] [1] [5] [4]

[2][3] [1] [2][3] reverse.
Note
• When you install the charging control framework unit [1],
be sure to hook the 2 holes [2] of the charging control
framework unit to the 2 screws [3] that have been
loosened in step 4.
G-124
Note
[1][2] [1][2] • When you install the charging control framework unit to
another main body, refer to the following steps. When you
do not install the unit as follows, the charging control
framework unit skews. Therefore, installation possibly
fails or jam possibly occurs.
• Hook the 2 holes [1] of the charging control framework
unit to the 2 screws [2] of the main body.
• Loosen the circled 18 screws.
• Install the option mounting plate/FrUp and the option
mounting plate/RrUp in the reverse order of step 3, 4.
• Install the option mounting plate/FrLw and the option
mounting plate/RrLw in the reverse order of step 2.
• Tighten the circled 18 screws.
• Reinstall the charging roller assy. (Refer to F.13.2.1
Replacing the charging roller and the charging driven
roller)
G-125
12. RU-517
ber
1 Cover Left cover/Up
Left cover/Lw
2 Framework section Charging control framework unit

12.2.1 Left cover/Up, /Lw
(1) Step
1. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the left cover/Up [2].
[1] [2] 2. Remove 6 screws [3], and then remove the left cover/Lw[4].
reverse.
[3] [4] [3]
12.2.2 Rear cover

(1) Procedure
[2] [1] 1. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the rear cover [2].
reverse.
12.2.3 Conveyance door

(1) How to distinguish the new type RU-517 and the old type RU-517
Note
• The RU-517 has a new type [1] and an old type [2]. In the new type RU-517, a screw [3] for the conveyance door adjustment is
added.
G-126
[3]
[1] [2]
[1] New type RU-517 [2] Old type RU-517
[3] Adjustment screw -
(2) Replacement procedure of the old type

1. Remove the left cover/Up. (Refer to G.12.2.1 Left cover/Up, /Lw)
[3] [1] [2] 2. Remove the rear cover. (Refer to G.12.2.2 Rear cover)
3. Open the conveyance door. (Refer to F.14.1.1 Replacing the
4. Remove the screw [1] and release the wire [2].
Note
• Be careful not to open the conveyance door [3] too much
while the wire [2] is released. Otherwise, the exterior of
RU-517 possibly gets damaged.
[2] [1] 5. Disconnect 2 connectors [1] and release the clamp [2].
G-127
6. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the conveyance door [2] and the
hinge assy [3] in the arrowed direction.
reverse.
Note
• Be sure to perform I.16.1 Conveyance door position
adjustment after the conveyance door is installed.
[3] [1] [2]
(3) Replacement procedure of the new type

1. Remove the left cover/Up. (Refer to G.12.2.1 Left cover/Up, /Lw)
[3] [1] [2] 2. Remove the rear cover. (Refer to G.12.2.2 Rear cover)
3. Open the conveyance door. (Refer to F.14.1.1 Replacing the
Note
[2] [1] 5. Disconnect 2 connectors [1] and release the clamp [2].
G-128
6. Remove 1 screw [1] and 2 screws [2]. Remove the conveyance

door [3] and the hinge assy [4] in the direction of the arrow.
reverse.
Note
• Be sure to perform I.16.1 Conveyance door position
adjustment after the conveyance door is installed.
[1] [4] [2] [3]
12.2.4 Charging control framework unit

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the left cover/Up and the left cover/Lw. (Refer to G.12.2.1
[3] [1] [2] Left cover/Up, /Lw)
2. Remove the charging roller assy. (Refer to F.14.1.1 Replacing the
Note
4. Disconnect the connector [1] and release the wiring harness [2]
[1] [2] from the clamp.

[1]
G-129
6. Close the conveyance door [1], and turn the lever [2] in the
[1] [2] direction of the arrow.

[1]

[2][4] [3] [1] 9. Loosen 2 screws [2], and remove the charge control framework
unit [3] in the direction of the arrow.
Note
• When you install the charging control framework unit [3],
be sure to hook the 2 holes of the charging control
framework unit [4] to the 2 screws [2] that have been
loosened.
Note
[3] [1] [2] • When the charging control framework unit [1] is installed,
be careful that the wiring harness [2] does not get caught
by the stay [3].
G-130

reverse.
Note
• When you install the charging control framework unit to
another main body, refer to the following steps. When you
do not install the unit as follows, the charging control
framework unit skews. Therefore, installation possibly
fails or jam possibly occurs.
• Hook the 2 holes [1] of the charging control framework
unit to the 2 screws [2] of the main body.
• Open the conveyance door. (Refer to F.14.1.1 Replacing
[1][2] [3] [1][2] [3] the charging roller and the charging driven roller)
• Loosen the circled 12 screws.
• Attach 6 screws [3] and tighten 2 screws [2].
• Tighten the circled 12 screws.
• Close the conveyance door. (Refer to F.14.1.1 Replacing
• Reinstall the parts following the removal steps in reverse.
[3] [3]
G-131
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 13. MK-740
13. MK-740
ber
1 Paper feed section Paper feed tray

13.2.1 Paper feed tray
(1) Step
1. Release the wire [1] in the direction of the arrow.
2. Pull out the paper feed tray [2] in the direction of the arrow.
[1]
[2]

[2] [1] reverse.
Note
• Install the paper feed tray [1] by pressing the actuator [2]
of MB-506 in the direction of the arrow.
When the actuator [2] is not pressed, the paper feed tray
[1] hits the actuator [2] and the actuator [2] probably gets
damaged or deformed.
G-132
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 14. RU-509/HM-102
14. RU-509/HM-102
14.1 Items you must not disassemble or reassemble
14.1.1 Color density sensor unit
• Mounting screws of the color density detection board/Y, the color density detection board/M, the color density detection board/C, the color
density detection board/K, 2 each
[2]
[1]
[1] Screws which you must not remove [2] Color density sensor unit

The color density detection board detects the color density by the light reflected off the paper. When its position is moved, the density read
value changes.
Do not change the mounting position of the color density detection board. If you misalign the position, the color density detection board has a
risk of detecting the color density improperly.

ber
1 Cover Front door
2 Rear cover
3 Upper cover
4 Humidification section (HM-102) Humidification unit
5 Water feed tank
6 Pump motor (P1)
7 Conveyance section Color density sensor unit
8 Shutter
9 Others RU control board (RUCB)

CAUTION
G-133
14.3.2 Front door

(1) Procedure
2. Remove 2 screws [2] and remove the door support bracket [3] and
the front door [1] in the arrow-marked direction.
Note
remove it.

reverse.
Note
• When you reinstall, check that the front door [1] closes
securely.
[1] [2]
[3]
14.3.3 Rear cover

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the 8 screws [1] and then remove the rear cover [2].
[1] [2]
reverse.
[1] [1] [1]
G-134
14.3.4 Upper cover

(1) Procedure
3. Remove the upper cover [3].
reverse.
[2] [3]
14.3.5 Humidification unit

(1) Procedure
3. Pull out the humidification unit [2].
[1] [2]
G-135
4. Release 4 clamps [1].
[1]
[1] [1]
[3] [1] 5. Cut off the connection of the pipes [3] and [4] while you press the
brackets [1] and [2].
Note
• Discharge water inside the cut pipe [4] to the proper
container, otherwise water leaks when you cut off the
connection of the pipe [4].
[2] [4]
G-136
6. Remove 2 connectors [1] from the board.

[1] 7. Remove the relay connector [2].
8. Remove the screw [3] and then remove the ground.
9. Remove the screw [4] and then cut off the connecting arm.
[2]
[3]
[4]
[2] 10. Remove 4 screws [1] from the right rail and left rail.
11. Remove the humidification unit [2].
Note
• When you remove the humidification unit [2], never hold
the parts easily deformed such as the Jam clearing lever.
• When you reinstall the humidification unit [2], be sure to
fit the groove on the left side of the unit [3] to the rail [4]
before you put the entire unit on the rail.
[1] [3]
[4]
G-137

[2] reverse.
Note
• When you put down the humidification unit, put a table or
something under it not to damage the clamp [1] or the
pipe [2].
[1]
14.3.6 Water feed tank

(1) Procedure
1. Open the front door. (Refer to G.14.3.2 Front door)
4. Release the wiring harness from all clamps [2].
Note
• Be sure to put the removed connector in the water feed
tank tray [3].
[4] [1] [2] [3]
[1] [3] 6. Pull out the humidification unit and remove 2 pipes. (Refer to G.
14.3.5 Humidification unit)
7. Pull out the water feed tank. (Refer to F.15.3.2 Replacing the water
feed filter)
Note
• Be sure to put the pipe to the left [1] beforehand so that it
does not get stuck inside.
8. Put the humidification unit to the original position.

Note
• Be sure to pull out the water feed tank before you put
back the humidification unit so that the pipe does not get
stuck inside.
9. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the water feed tank [3].
[2]

reverse.
Note
• When you reinstall the water feed tank, be sure to place
the positioning hole to the projection of the water feed
tank tray [1].
[1]
G-138
14.3.7 Pump motor (P1)

(1) Procedure
[5] [3] 1. Remove the rear cover. (Refer to G.14.3.3 Rear cover)
2. Disconnect the connector [1], and then release the wiring harness.
4. Remove the pipe [3] and the pipe [4]. Then remove the pump
motor (P1) [5].
Note
• When you remove the pipe [3] and the pipe [4], be careful
not to come off the connecting part [6] from the pump
motor (P1) [5].
• When you install the pipe [3] and the pipe [4], be careful of
the attachment positions.
The pipe [4] comes in front of the pipe [3].
Install the pipe [3] to the upper side of the pump motor
(P1) [5].
[1] [2] [6] [4] Install the pipe [4] to the lower side of the pump motor
(P1) [5].

reverse.
14.3.8 Color density sensor unit

Note
• When you replace the color density sensor unit, replace the shutter at the same time.
(1) Procedure
3. Remove 4 screws [2] and then remove the color density sensor
unit [3].
[1]
[2] [3]
G-139

reverse.
Note
• When you reinstall the unit, press the color sensor unit
while you pull the shutter [1] in the arrow-marked
direction [2]. Be sure to place the projection of the
mounting plate in the hole [3].
5. After you replace the color density sensor unit, perform the
following adjustment. (Delete all the registered adjustment values
and adjust again. )
1. Maximum density initial adjustment (Refer to R.2.4.5
Procedure for the setup)
• Perform the procedure for the setup.
• Prepare a standard paper.
2. Adjustment of color sensor for each paper type (Refer to the
User's Guide)
3. Color density control (Manual adjustment) (Refer to R.2.8
Color Density Control (Manual Adjustment))
4. Any of the following adjustments.
• Exact Color (when IC-602 or Exact Color is used) (Refer to
R.2.10 Exact Color)
• G7 calibration (when IC-602 or the G7 calibration is used)
(Refer to R.2.11 G7 Calibration)
• IC-308/IC-415 calibration (when IC-308/IC-415 is used)
[2] [1]
(Refer to R.2.12 IC-308/IC-415 Calibration)
14.3.9 Shutter
(1) Procedure
[3] 1. Remove the upper cover. (Refer toG.14.3.4 Upper cover)
2. Loosen 2 screws [1] and then remove the stopper [2].
3. To remove the shutter [3], pull out it in the arrow-marked direction.
reverse.
[1] [2]
14.3.10 Note for replacing the board

(1) Procedure
CAUTION
• When the RU control board (RUCB) is replaced, be sure to replace the EEPROM (IC33).
G-140
1. Install EEPROM (IC33) of the old control board [1] to the new
control board [2].
Note
• Be sure to install the "A" sections of the EEPROM (IC33)
in the same direction.
• After you replace the RU control board (RUCB), conduct
rewriting of the firmware.
(Refer to )J. Rewriting of firmware)
[1]
[2]
G-141
15. RU-510
No. Section Parts name
1 Cover Front door
2 Rear cover
3 Left cover
4 Upper cover
5 Others RU control board (RUCB)

CAUTION
15.2.2 Front door

(1) Procedure
1. Open the front door [1] and remove the screw [2] and release the
wire [3].
[1] [2] [3] 2. Remove the 3 screws [4] and then remove the door support
bracket [5] and the front door [1].
Note
remove it.

reverse.
[4]
[5] [4]
G-142
15.2.3 Rear cover

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 5 screws [1] and then remove the rear cover [2].
reverse.
[1]
15.2.4 Left cover

(1) Procedure
[2] reverse.
[1] [1]
G-143
15.2.5 Upper cover

(1) Procedure
3. Remove the upper cover [3].
reverse.
[2] [1]
[3]

1. When the RU control board (RUCB) is replaced, be sure to replace
the EEPROM (IC19).
Install EEPROM (IC19) of the old control board [1] to the new
control board [2].
[1]
[2]
G-144
Note
A • Be sure to install the "A" sections of the EEPROM (IC19) in
the same direction.
• After replacing the RU control board (RUCB), conduct
A rewriting of the firmware.
(Refer to J. Rewriting of firmware)
a04jf2c017ca
G-145
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 16. FS-531
16. FS-531
ber
1 Cover Upper cover/1
2 Upper cover/2
3 Front door
4 Rear cover
5 Left cover
6 Main tray section Main tray
7 Up down wire
8 Stacker section Stacker unit
9 Conveyance section Paper exit opening unit

CAUTION
16.2.2 Upper cover/1

(1) Procedure
[1]
1. Remove 2 caps [1].
2. Open the front door [2], remove 5 screws [3] and then remove the
[3] upper cover/1 [4].
reverse.
[2]
[3] 15jkf2c012na

Note
• When the PI (option) is installed, remove it.
(1) Procedure
[3]
1. Remove the upper cover/1. (Refer to G.16.2.2 Upper cover/1)
[4] 2. Open the front door [1].
3. Remove 2 screws [2], pull out the sub tray [3], and then remove
the upper cover/2 [4].
[1] reverse.
[2] 15jkf2c013na
G-146
16.2.4 Front door

(1) Procedure
[3] 2. Remove 2 screws [3] of the lower hinge plate [2] and then remove
[1] the front door [1].
reverse.
[2]
15jkf2c034na
16.2.5 Rear cover

(1) Procedure
reverse.
Note
[1] • When you reinstall it, be sure to hook the notch [3] of the
rear cover to the projection [4] of the frame.
[1]
[3] [4]
[2]
15jkf2c035nb
16.2.6 Left cover

(1) Procedure
reverse.
[2] 15jkf2c036na
16.2.7 Main tray

CAUTION
• After having lowered the main tray, be sure to unplug the power plug from the power outlet.
G-147
(1) Procedure
[1] with fingers and down the main tray [2].
2. Deactivate the main power switch (SW1) and the sub power switch
outlet.
[2]
15jkf2c014na
[2] 3. Remove 2 screws [1] from the main tray.

4. Lift up the main tray [2] to unhook the up down stay [3], and
remove the main tray [2].
reverse.
[1]
[3]
15jkf2c015na
16.2.8 Replacing the up down wire

CAUTION
• When the tray up down motor is removed, the main tray falls. Therefore, hold the tray with your hand and remove the motor.
Note
• The following procedure for replacing the wire shows the examples on the rear side. The figuration and the winding of wires on
the front side are symmetrical to wires on the rear side.
• When you install the up and down wire, be sure to check the engraved marks "F" on the front side and "R" on the rear side of the
wire bracket.
(1) Procedure
• Front door (Refer to G.16.2.4 Front door)
• Rear cover (Refer to G.16.2.5 Rear cover)
• Main tray (Refer to G.16.2.7 Main tray)
2. Remove 5 screws [1] and remove the reinforcing bracket [2]. Then,
remove the wiring harness from 3 clamps [3] and disconnect the
connector [4].
[2] [1] 15jmf2c015na
G-148
[2] [1] 3. Remove 5 screws [1] and remove the up down motor assy [2].
CAUTION
• When the up down motor assy [2] is removed, the main
tray falls. Therefore, hold the tray with your hand and
remove the up down motor assy.
15jkf2c017na
4. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the wire bracket [3] of the
up down wire [2] on the rear from the up down stay [4].
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
15jkf2c018na
5. Loosen 2 screws [2] of the belt tensioner [1].
[2]
[1]
15jkf2c019na
G-149
6. Remove the E-ring [1], gear [2], and up down pulley/Lw [3].
Remove the up down wire [4].
[5] Note
[3]
• When you remove the up down pulley/Lw, be careful not
to drop 2 pins [5].
[4]
[1] [2]
15jkf2c020na
7. Temporarily tighten the wire bracket [1] of a new up down wire [4]
to the up down stay [2] with 2 screws [3].
Note
• When you install the up down wire [4], the shorter one [5]
faces down and the longer one [6] faces up.
[6]
[2]
[4]
[1]
[5] [3]
15jkf2c021na
8. Fasten the up down wire end with the wire end hole inside of the
up down pulley/Lw [1]. Through the notch [2] and wind 5 turns from
inside to outside with no slack. Then, align with the pin [3] and
insert the up down pulley/L [1] in the shaft.
[3]
[1]
[2]
15jkf2c022na
[2] [1] [4] [3] 9. Insert the wire winded up down pulley [1] in the shaft so that the
pin [3] in which the shaft [2] has been inserted fits in the groove [4]
of the pulley.
15vlf2c009na
G-150
10. Hook the up down wire on the up down pulley/Up [1] and wind the
wire 2 turns around the up down pulley/Lw [2] from inside to
[1]
outside with no slack. Then, through the notch of outside and
fasten with the wire end hole [3].
Note
• Be sure not to overlap the short up down wire (first
winded) and the longer up down wire (latter winded) on
[3]
the up down pulley/Up.
[2]
15jkf2c023na
11. Insert the pin [1] and the gear [2] into the shaft, and fasten them
with the E-ring [3].
[1]
[2]
[3] 15jkf2c024na
12. Use a tension gauge or a spring balance and pull the belt
tensioner [1] with a specified force A [3] and tighten 2 screws [2].
Specified value [3]: A = 2.5kg ± 0.25kg
[3]
[2]
[1]
15jkf2c025na
[2]
13. Loosen 2 screws [2] of the wire bracket [1] on the front and push
down the up down stay [3]. Then, tighten 4 screws [5] and [2] on
the rear and front in a horizontal position.
Note
• Be sure to check that the up down stay [3] is in a
horizontal position. When the stay is aslant, the main tray
up down motor (M3) or the gear is overloaded and has a
[1] risk of the damage.

reverse.
[3]
[4] [5] 15jkf2c026na
16.2.9 Stacker unit

CAUTION
• Be sure to conduct this operation with more than 2 people.
• Be sure to unplug the power plug of the main body from the power outlet.
• When the FS is removed from the main body and you pull out the stacker unit, the FS possibly falls and there is a risk of the
injury.
G-151
(1) Procedure
[2] • Booklet tray
2. Separate the FS from the main body.
4. Remove 2 connectors (CN22, CN23) [2] from the relay board (RB)
[1] on the rear of the stacker unit.
5. Remove the wiring harness from 3 clamps [3].
[3] [1] a0drf2c002ca
6. Remove the C-clip [1] and the shaft [2], and then separate the
[2] [1] coupling arm [3].
[3] a0drf2c003ca
[1] 7. Remove 2 screws [1] that are provided on the rail stopper, and
Note
the pulled out stacker unit for balancing.
[2] [3] [1] 15vlf2c012na
G-152
8. Remove 2 screws [1] and then lift the stacker unit [2] to remove it
[4] from the guide rail [3].
[3] Note
• Be careful of your posture when you remove it so that you
do not suffer backache.
[5]
[1]
reverse.
Note
• When you reinstall the stacker unit [2] to the guide rail [3],
check that the hook [4] is securely fit in the installation
hole [5].
[2] [1]
[3] [5]
[4]
15vlf2c013na
16.2.10 Paper exit opening unit

(1) Procedure
[2]
• Upper cover/1 or PI (option) (Refer to G.16.2.2 Upper cover/1)
• Upper cover/2 (Refer to G.16.2.3 Upper cover/2)
2. Remove 4 screws [1], and then remove the main paper exit
opening cover [2].
[1]
15vlf2c014na
3. Remove the screw [3] of the paper exit opening open close link [2]
on the paper exit opening unit [1].
[2]
[3]
[1]
15jkf2c031na
G-153
[4] [1] [2] 4. Remove 1 camp [1], fixing screw [2] of the earth cord. 2
connectors [3], and 3 screws [4] of the clamp.
[3] 15jkf2c032na
[1] [2] 5. Remove the E-ring [1] and the bearing [2], 1 each on back and
front, and then remove the paper exit opening unit [3].
reverse.
[2] [1]
[3]
15jkf2c033na

CAUTION
• When the FS control board (FNSCB) is replaced, be sure to replace the EEPROM (IC10).
control board [2].
[1]
[2]
a04df2e001ca
A 2. Check the point when you reinstall the EEPROM (IC10)

Note
• Be sure to install the "A" sections of the EEPROM (IC10) in
A the same direction.
After you replace the FS control board (FSCB), conduct
rewriting of the firmware. (Refer to J. Rewriting of firmware)
fd501fs2078c
G-154
17. FS-612
17.1 Items that you must not disassemble or reassemble
17.1.1 Screw not allowed to be removed on the folding stopper
1 screw that you must not remove on the folding stopper
[1]
15jmf2c017na
[1] Screw that you must not remove on the folding stopper -
Note
• For ease of understand, the position of the folding stopper is shown lower than the actual position in the illustration.

Adjust the tilt of the holding stopper on the slide shaft side of the holding stopper. (Refer to I.20.10 Half-fold stopper tilt adjustment) Do not
loosen the screws that you must not remove on the holding stopper. When you loosen those screws, the tilt of the holding stopper is changed
and the adjusting standard of the slide shaft is misaligned.

ber
1 Cover Upper cover/1
2 Upper cover/2
3 Front door
4 Rear cover
5 Left cover
7 Up down wire
8 Stacker section Stacker unit cover
9 Stacker unit
10 Conveyance section Paper exit opening unit

CAUTION
G-155

(1) Procedure
[1]
1. Remove 2 caps [1].
[3] upper cover/1 [4].
reverse.
[2]
[3] 15jkf2c012na

Note
• When the PI (option) is installed, remove it.
(1) Procedure
[3]
1. Remove the upper cover/1. (Refer to G.17.3.2 Upper cover/1)
[4] 2. Open the front door [1].
3. Remove 2 screws [2], pull out the sub tray [3], and then remove
the upper cover/2 [4].
[1] reverse.
[2] 15jkf2c013na
17.3.4 Front door

(1) Procedure
[3] 2. Remove 2 screws [3] of the lower hinge plate [2] and then remove
[1] the front door [1].
reverse.
[2]
15jkf2c034na
G-156
17.3.5 Rear cover

(1) Procedure
reverse.
Note
[1] • When you reinstall it, be sure to hook the notch [3] of the
rear cover to the projection [4] of the frame.
[1]
[3] [4]
[2]
15jkf2c035nb
17.3.6 Left cover

(1) Procedure
reverse.
[2] 15jkf2c036na
17.3.7 Main tray

CAUTION
(1) Procedure
[1] with fingers and down the main tray [2].
2. Deactivate the main power switch (SW1) and the sub power switch
outlet.
[2]
15jkf2c014na
G-157
[2] 3. Remove 2 screws [1] from the main tray.

4. Lift up the main tray [2] to unhook the up down stay [3], and
remove the main tray [2].
reverse.
[1]
[3]
15jkf2c015na
17.3.8 Replacing the up down wire

CAUTION
• When the tray up down motor is removed, the main tray falls. Therefore, remove the motor while you hold the tray with your hand.
Note
• The following procedure for replacing the wire shows the examples on the rear side. The figuration and the winding of wires on
the front side are symmetrical to wires on the rear side.
• When you install the up and down wire, be sure to check the engraved marks "F" on the front side and "R" on the rear side of the
wire bracket.
(1) Procedure
2. Remove 5 screws [1] and remove the reinforcing bracket [2]. Then,
remove the wiring harness from 3 clamps [3] and disconnect the
connector [4].
[2] [1] 15jmf2c015na
[2] [1] 3. Remove 5 screws [1] and remove the up down motor assy [2].
CAUTION
• When the up down motor assy [2] is removed, the main
tray falls. Therefore, remove the up down motor assy
while you hold the tray with your hand.
15jkf2c017na
G-158
4. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the wire bracket [3] of the
up down wire [2] on the rear from the up down stay [4].
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
15jkf2c018na
[2]
[1]
15jkf2c019na
6. Remove the E-ring [1], gear [2] and the up down pulley/Lw [3],
then remove the up down wire [4].
[5] Note
[3]
• When you remove the up down pulley/Lw, be careful not
to drop 2 pins [5].
[4]
[1] [2]
15jkf2c020na
G-159
7. Temporarily tighten the wire bracket [1] of a new up down wire [4]
to the up down stay [2] with 2 screws [3].
Note
• When you install the up down wire [4], the shorter one [5]
faces down and the longer one [6] faces up.
[6]
[2]
[4]
[1]
[5] [3]
15jkf2c021na
8. Fasten the up down wire end with the wire end hole inside of the
up down pulley/Lw [1]. Through the notch [2] and wind 5 turns from
inside to outside with no slack. Then, insert the up down pulley/L
[1] in the shaft to align with the pin [3].
[3]
[1]
[2]
15jkf2c022na
[2] [1] [4] [3] 9. Insert the wire winded up down pulley [1] in the shaft so that the
pin [3] in which the shaft [2] has been inserted fits in the groove [4]
of the pulley.
15vlf2c009na
10. Hook the up down wire on the up down pulley/Up [1] and wind the
wire 2 turns around the up down pulley/Lw [2] from inside to
[1]
outside with no slack. Then, through the notch of outside and
fasten with the wire end hole [3].
Note
• Be sure not to overlap the short up down wire (first
winded) and the longer up down wire (latter winded) on
[3]
the up down pulley/Up.
[2]
15jkf2c023na
G-160
11. Insert the pin [1] and the gear [2] into the shaft, and fasten them
with the E-ring [3].
[1]
[2]
[3] 15jkf2c024na
12. Use a tension gauge or a spring balance to pull the belt tensioner
[1] with a specified force A [3] and tighten 2 screws [2].
Specified value [3]: A = 2.5kg ± 0.25kg
[3]
[2]
[1]
15jkf2c025na
[2]
13. To push down the up down stay [3], loosen 2 screws [2] of the wire
bracket [1] on the front. Then, tighten 4 screws [5] and [2] on the
rear and front in a horizontal position.
Note
• Be sure to check that the up down stay [3] is in a
horizontal position. When the stay is aslant, the main tray
up down motor (M3) or the gear is overloaded and has a
[1] risk of the damage.

reverse.
[3]
[4] [5] 15jkf2c026na
17.3.9 Stacker unit cover

(1) Procedure
2. Remove 5 screws [1] and remove the stacker unit cover [2].
reverse.
[1] 15jmf2c016na
17.3.10 Stacker unit

Note
• Be sure to conduct this operation with more than 2 people.
G-161
• Be sure to unplug the power plug of the main body from the power outlet.
• If you pull out the stacker unit while you remove the FS from the main body, it causes falling of the FS and is at risk of injury.
(1) Procedure
• Booklet tray
2. Separate the FS from the main body.
4. Remove 3 connectors (CN22, CN23, CN24) [1] from the relay
board (RB) [2] on the rear of the stacker unit.
5. Remove the wiring harness from 4 clamps [3].
[3]
a04df2c001ca
[2] [1] 6. Remove the C-clip [1] and the shaft [2], and then separate the
coupling arm [3].
[3] 15jkf2c028na
7. Remove 2 screws [1] that are provided on the rail stopper, and
Note
[1] the pulled out stacker unit for balancing.
[2]
[1]
[3] 15jkf2c029na
8. Remove 2 screws [1] and then lift the stacker unit [2] to remove it
[4] from the guide rail [3].
[3] Note
• Be careful of your posture when you remove it so that you
do not suffer backache.
[5]

reverse.
Note
• When you reinstall the stacker unit [2] to the guide rail [3],
check that the hook [4] is securely fit in the installation
[2] hole [5].
[5]
[3]
[4] [1]
15jkf2c030na
G-162
17.3.11 Paper exit opening unit

(1) Procedure
[2]
• Upper cover/1 or PI (option) (Refer to G.17.3.2 Upper cover/1)
• Upper cover/2 (Refer to G.17.3.3 Upper cover/2)
2. Remove 4 screws [1], and then remove the main paper exit
opening cover [2].
[1]
15vlf2c014na
3. Remove the screw [3] of the paper exit opening open close link [2]
on the paper exit opening unit [1].
[2]
[3]
[1]
15jkf2c031na
[4] [1] [2] 4. Remove 1 camp [1], fixing screw [2] of the earth cord. 2
connectors [3], and 3 screws [4] of the clamp.
[3] 15jkf2c032na
[1] [2] 5. Remove the E-ring [1] and the bearing [2], 1 each on back and
front, and then remove the paper exit opening unit [3].
reverse.
[2] [1]
[3]
15jkf2c033na

Note
• When the FS control board (FNSCB) is replaced, be sure to replace the EEPROM (IC10).
G-163
control board [2].
[1]
[2]
a04df2e001ca
A 2. Check points when you reinstall the EEPROM (IC10)

Note
After you replace the FS control board (FSCB), conduct
fd501fs2078c
G-164
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 18. PK-512/513
18. PK-512/513
18.1 Items that you must not disassemble and adjust
18.1.1 Punch unit
(1) Parts that you must not remove
Do not loosen the following screws that you must not remove.
[1]
[2]
a04ef2c001ca
[1] Punch unit [2] Screws that you must not remove

When those screws are loosened, the prescribed functions are not kept.
18.2 Disassembly/reassembly parts list

ber
1 Punch unit Punch unit
18.3 Disassembly/reassembly procedure

CAUTION
18.3.2 Punch unit

(1) Procedure (old conveyance section)
1. Remove the punch scraps box [1].
[1]
15kjf2c002na
2. Remove the screw [2] and then remove the punch drive board
[1]
cover [1].
[2]
15kjf2c003na
G-165
[3] [4] 3. Remove 2 clamps [1].

4. Disconnect 2 connectors [3] and the relay connector [4] from the
punch drive board (PDB) [2].
[1]
[2]
15kjf2c004nb
[1]
5. Remove 3 screws [2] and then remove the punch unit cover [1].
[2]
15kjf2c005na

[3] [2]
7. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the punch unit [3] from the
[1] FS.
reverse.
[1] [2]
15kjf2c006na
(2) Procedure (new conveyance section)

[1]
G-166
[1] 2. Remove the 2 screws [1], and open the board cover [2].
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
15kjf2c005na

[3] [2]
6. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the punch unit [3] from the
[1] FS.
reverse.
[1] [2]
15kjf2c006na
G-167
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 19. PI-502
19. PI-502
ber
1 Cover Upper cover
2 Rear cover
3 Operation panel cover
4 PI unit PI unit

CAUTION
19.2.2 Upper cover

(1) Procedure
[3] 1. Remove the cap [2] of the upper cover [1].
[2] 2. Remove 4 screws [3] and then remove the upper cover [1].
reverse.
[1]
15jff2c009na
19.2.3 Rear cover

(1) Procedure
[3] 1. Remove the upper cover. (Refer to G.19.2.2 Upper cover)
2. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the connector cover [2].
[4] 3. Remove 3 screws [3] and then remove the rear cover [4].
[1] reverse.
[2]
[3]
15jff2c010na
19.2.4 Operation panel cover

(1) Procedure
[2] [1] 1. Remove the upper cover. (Refer to G.19.2.2 Upper cover)
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and the relay connector [2], and then remove
the operation panel assy [3].
reverse.
[3] 15jff2c011na
G-168
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 19. PI-502
19.2.5 PI unit
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the screw [1] and remove the connector cover [2].
[2] [1]
2. Remove the connector [1] and remove the spring [2].

[1] [2]
3. Open the front door of FS and remove the 2 screws [1].

[1]
4. Move the PI unit [1] in the arrow-marked direction, release 2 locks

[2] [2] of the positioning screw, and remove the PI unit [1].
reverse.
[1]
G-169
20. FS-532
20.1.1 Red-painted screws
Note
• Screws that are difficult to adjust in the field are painted in red to prevent them from being removed.
• Do not remove or loosen red-painted screws in the field.
(1) For the old type

Note
• The following screw is not painted in red for the old type FS-532.
The screw is not painted in red, but do not remove or loosen the screw in the field.
(a) 1 adjustment screw of the PI paper feed path
[1]
[1] Screws which you must not remove -

The installation position of the PI paper feed path is adjusted before the shipment.
If the position of the PI paper feed path shifts, the paper that is fed from the PI is likely to be tilted. Therefore, the installation position must not
be changed.

ber
1 Cover Front door
2 Rear cover
3 Upper cover/Rt1
4 Upper cover/Rt2
5 Upper cover/Fr
6 Upper cover/Rr
7 Upper cover/Md
8 Front cover
9 Sub tray
10 Stacker section Stacker unit
12 Main tray up down motor (M11)
13 Main tray up down drive assy

CAUTION
G-170
20.3.2 Front door

(1) Procedure
[5] [4] [2] 1. Open the front door [1].
4. Remove the screw [4] and then remove the door support bracket
[5] and the front door [1].
Note
remove it.
• When you install the front door [1], be sure to install so
[3] that the shaft [4] is inserted into the hole [5] of the front
door.

[1] reverse.
[4]
[5]
20.3.3 Rear cover

(1) Procedure
2. Loosen 2 screws [2] and then remove the rear cover [3] in the
reverse.
[1]
[3]
[2]
G-171
20.3.4 Upper cover/Rt1

(1) Procedure
2. Remove the upper cover/Rt1 [2] in the arrow-marked direction.
reverse.
[2] [1]
20.3.5 Upper cover/Rt2

(1) Procedure
upper cover/Rt2 [4].
reverse.
[1]
[2] [4]
[3]
G-172
20.3.6 Upper cover/Fr1

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 3 screws [1] and remove the upper cover/Fr1 [2].
reverse.
[2]
20.3.7 Upper cover/Fr2

(1) Procedure
[1] 2. Remove the upper cover/Rt1. (Refer to G.20.3.4 Upper cover/Rt1)
[1] [2]
5. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove the upper cover/Fr2 [2].
reverse.
[1] [2]
G-173
20.3.8 Upper cover/Rr

(1) Procedure
[2] [1] 1. Remove the upper cover/Rt1. (Refer to G.20.3.4 Upper cover/Rt1)
2. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the upper cover/Rr [2].
reverse.
20.3.9 Upper cover/Md

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the upper cover/Rt1. (Refer to G.20.3.4 Upper cover/Rt1)
[1] 2. Remove the upper cover/Fr2. (Refer to G.20.3.7 Upper cover/Fr2)
4. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the upper cover/Md [2].
reverse.
[2] [1]
20.3.10 Front cover

(1) Procedure
1. Open the front door [1] and remove the 5 screws [2].
[1] [2]
[2] [1] 2. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove the front cover [2].
reverse.
G-174
20.3.11 Sub tray

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the upper cover/Rt1.
[1] 2. Remove the upper cover/Fr.
3. Remove the upper cover/Rr.
4. Remove the upper cover/Md.
5. Remove 4 screws [1], and remove the sub tray [2].
reverse.
[1] [2]
20.3.12 Stacker unit

(1) Procedure
[2] [1]
G-175
5. Remove 4 screws [1] and then disconnect 9 connectors [2].

[3] 6. Remove 3 saddles [3] inside the metal frame, and release the
wiring harness.
7. Remove the stopper [4] and then pull out the shaft [5] in the arrow-
marked direction.
Note
• Fix the connector installation plate and the stacker arm to
the back of the stacker unit with tape.
[2] [1]
[5] [2]
[4]
8. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the stacker unit [2] from the
rail [3].
reverse.
[3] [1] [2]
[3] [1]
G-176
20.3.13 Main tray

Note
(1) Procedure
1. Activate the sub power switch (SW2), lower the main tray [1]
blocking the light of the main tray upper limit sensor (PS14) [2]
[3] during up and down operation of the main tray. Deactivate the
main power switch (SW1) and the sub power switch (SW2) of the
main body.
2. Unplug the power plug of the main body from the power outlet.
3. Remove 4 screws [3] and then remove then main tray [1] in the
reverse.
[1] [3]
20.3.14 Main tray up down motor (M11), main tray up-down drive assy
(1) Procedure
Note
1. Activate the sub power switch (SW2), and block the light of the tray
[3] [2] [1]
upper limit sensor (PS16) [2] during up and down operation of the
main tray [1]. Then, lower the main tray until it does not bother the
removal of the paper exit cover [3].
2. Deactivate the sub power switch (SW2) and main power switch
3. Unplug the power plug of the main body from the power outlet.
5. Fully pull out the SD unit. (Refer to G.21.3.4.(1) Procedure for fully
pulling out the SD unit)
6. Disconnect the 2 connectors [2] and remove the screw [1]. Then
remove the saddle arm.
[1] [2]
G-177

[3] [2] [4] [5] [4] 8. Remove the 2 screws [2], and remove the connector mounting
plate [3].
9. Remove the 4 screws [4], and remove the main tray up down
motor [5].
[2] [4] [1] [4]
10. Remove the screw [1], and remove the main tray cover/Rr [2].
11. Remove the 2 screws [3], and remove the paper exit cover/Rr3 [4].
[2] 12. Remove 3 screws [5], and remove the paper exit cover/Rr2 [6].
13. Remove the 5 screws [7], and remove the paper exit cover/Rr1 [8].
[7]
[1]
[8]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[4]
[3]
14. Remove the 2 screws [1], and then remove the exterior mounting
plate/1 [2].
[1] [2] [1]

15. Release the wiring harness [1] from the saddle and remove 2
screws [2], and then remove the exterior mounting plate/2 [3].
[3] [1] [2]
G-178
[1]
17. Remove the screw [1], and remove the metal plate [2].
[2] [1]
18. Remove 6 screws [1] and then remove the main tray up-down
[1] drive assy [2] in the arrow-marked direction.
Note
• Be sure to remove the main tray up-down drive assy [2]
while you hold the main tray by hand.
If not to do so, the main tray drops off.

reverse.
[1]
[2] [1] [1]
[1]

Note
• When the FD control board (FDCB) is replaced, be sure to replace the EEPROM (IC70).
G-179
1. Install EEPROM (IC70) of the old control board [[1] to the new
control board [2].
[1]
[2]

Note
• After you replace the FNS control board (FNSCB), conduct
fd501fs2078c
G-180
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 21. SD-510
21. SD-510
Note
(1) For the old type

Note
• The following screw is not painted in red for the old type SD-510.
The screw is not painted in red, but do not remove or loosen the screw in the field.
(a) 6 attaching screws of the folding knife/1
[2] [3]
[1]
[1] Screws which you must not remove [2] Folding knife assy/1
[3] Folding knife/1 -
(b) 2 attaching screws of the folding knife/2
[2] [3] [1]

[1] Screws which you must not remove [2] Folding knife assy/2
[3] Folding knife/2 -
G-181
(c) 2 fixing screws of the folding roller position fixation metal/Fr, 2 fixing screws of the folding roller position
fixation metal/Rr
[8] [1]
[7] [2]
[6] [5] [4] [3]
[1] Rear side [2] Folding roller mounting metal/Rr

[3] Folding roller position fixation metal/Rr [4] Screws that you must not remove
[5] Screws that you must not remove [6] Folding roller position fixation metal/Fr
[7] Folding roller mounting metal/Fr [8] Front side
(d) 2 fixing screws of the timing belt fixing part for stapler
[1]
[2]
[1] Timing belt fixing part for the stapler [2] Screws that you must not remove
G-182
(e) 3 fixing screws of the stopper motor (M105) assy
[1]
[2]
[1] Stopper motor (M105) assy [2] Screws that you must not remove
(f) 1 fixing screw of the adjustment plate assy/Fr, 1 fixing screw of the alignment plate assy/Rr
[3]
[2] [1]
[1] Adjustment plate assy/Fr [2] Adjustment plate assy/Rr

[3] Screws which you must not remove -
G-183
(g) 1 fixing screw of the timing belt fixing part for the adjustment plate assy
[2]
[1]
[1] Timing belt fixing part for the adjustment plate assy [2] Screws that you must not remove
(h) 1 fixing screw of the adjustment plate assy/Fr, 1 fixing screw of the alignment plate assy/Rr
[1]
[2]
[1] Entrance conveyance motor (M101) [2] Screws that you must not remove

er
1 Cover Front cover
2 Stapler unit cover
G-184
3 SD unit SD unit
4 Folding section Folding knife assy/1

CAUTION
21.3.2 Front cover

(1) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Remove 5 screws [1] and then remove the front cover [2].
reverse.
21.3.3 Stapler unit cover

(1) Procedure
[2][3] 1. Pull out the SD unit. (Refer to G.21.3.4 SD unit)
3. Release 2 claws [2] from the 2 holes [3], and remove the staple
unit cover [4].
reverse.
[1] [4]
G-185
21.3.4 SD unit
(1) Procedure for fully pulling out the SD unit
[3] [1] [2]
3. Pull out the SD unit [1].

4. Remove the screw [2], and then remove the SD support stay/Lt1
[3].
5. Remove the screw [4], and then remove the SD support stay/Rt
[5].
6. Remove the screw [6] to remove the 2 connectors [7], and then
remove the SD arm [8].
[7]
[6] [8]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[5]
[4]
G-186
7. Insert the projection of the SD support stay/Rt [1] into the hole of
the SD unit [2].
8. Install the SD support stay/Rt [4] using the screw [3] that is
removed in step 4.
[1][2] [4] [3] [1][2]

9. Insert the projection of the SD support stay/Lt1 [1] into the hole of
the SD unit [2].
10. Install the SD support stay/Lt1 [4] using the screw [3] that is
removed in step 3.
Note
• When you install the SD support stay/Lt1, be sure to place
the projection [5] to the hole [6] of the SD support stay/
Lt1.
• When you do not install the SD support stay and remove
the SD unit, the rail is deformed or the SD unit falls down.
When you pull out the SD unit, be sure to install the SD
support stay.
[7] [6] [1]
11. Remove the stopper screw [7], and then remove the SD unit.
Note
• When you pull out the SD unit, lift the SD unit upward
[2] slightly.
[4]
[3]
[5]
12. Remove the screw [1], and then remove the SD support stay/Lt2
[2].
[1] [2]
13. Insert the projection of the SD support stay/Lt2 [1] into the hole of
the SD unit [2].
14. Install the SD support stay/Lt2 [4] using the screw [3] that is
removed in step 11.
Note
• When you install the SD support stay/Lt2, be sure to place
the projection [5] to the hole [6] of the SD support stay/
Lt2.
[6] [1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[5]
G-187
(2) Procedure for removing the SD unit

1. Fully pull out the SD unit. (Refer to G.21.3.4.(1) Procedure for fully
[4] [2] pulling out the SD unit)
2. Remove the front cover of the FS. (Refer to G.20.3.10 Front cover)
4. Hold 2 handles [2] and then remove the SD unit [3] in the arrow-
marked direction.
Note
• When you remove or reinstall the SD unit, do not hold the
connecting bracket [4] of the stapler and clincher.
• When you reinstall the SD unit, be sure to place the mark
[5] of the SD unit to the metal frame [7] of the rail [6].
[2]
[1] [5] [3]
[7]
[6]
[2] [1] Note

• When you reinstall the SD unit, be sure to place the rail [1]
of the SD unit on the rail [2] of the finisher.
G-188
21.3.5 Folding knife assy/1

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the SD unit. (Refer to G.21.3.4.(2) Procedure for
removing the SD unit)
[4] 3. Remove the stapler unit cover. (Refer to G.21.3.3 Stapler unit
cover)
[3] 4. Rotate the folding knife drive shaft [1] to adjust the position of the
clunk arm assy [2].
[2] 5. Remove the screw [3], 1 each, release the crank arm assy [2], and
remove the bearing [4], 1 each.
6. Remove the folding knife drive shaft [1 ] in the arrow-marked
direction.
[4] [1]
[3] [2]
Note
[6] [5] [2] [7] [1] • When you install the clunk arm assy [1], be sure to install
it so that the clunk arm [2] faces [3] the opposite direction
[5] to the actuator [4].
• When you install the clunk arm assy [1], be sure to install
the screw [7], 1 each, to prevent the clunk arm [2] from
coming off from the folding knife drive shaft [6].
• When you install the clunk arm assy [1], be careful that
the leading edge of the folding knife assy/1 does not bend
by the contact with the 1st folding roller.
[4] [1] [2] [7] [3]
G-189
7. Remove each E-rings [1], and remove each crank arm assy [2],
[4] the bearings [3], 2 each, and each collar [4].
[3] [1]
[2]
[3] [4]
[1] [2]
8. Remove the folding knife assy/1 [1] in the arrow-marked direction
[6] [1] [2] [2].
9. Remove 2 screws [3] and the assy stay/Fr [4] in the arrow-marked
direction [6].
10. Disconnect the collar [5].
Note
• When you remove the assy stay/Fr, be careful not to drop
the collar [5].
[5] [3] [4]
11. Lift the conveyance guide plate [1], and remove the folding knife
assy/1 [2] in the arrow-marked direction.
Note
• When you remove the folding knife assy/1 [2], be careful
not to drop the collar [3].
[2] [1] [3]
G-190
[2] [1] [3] 12. Disconnect the collar [1].

13. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the assy stay/Rr [3] in the
reverse.
21.3.6 Folding knife assy/2

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the SD unit. (Refer to G.21.3.4 SD unit)
3. Remove the SD support stay/Rt and tilt the SD unit [1] in the
arrow-marked direction. (Refer to G.21.3.4 SD unit)
4. Remove the SD support stay/Lt. (Refer to G.21.3.4 SD unit)
5. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the paper exit guide/1 [2].
7. Remove the screw [4] and then remove the cover [5].
8. Release the spring/1 [6] and the spring/2 [7].
9. Remove the C-clip [8] and pull out the shaft [9] in the arrow-
marked direction, and then remove the spring/1 [6], the spring/2 [7]
and the paper exit guide/2 [10].
[1] [2] [3]
[4] [5] [9] [10]
[6]
[7]
[8]
G-191
10. Remove each spring [1] and then remove each C-clip [2].
[1] 11. Slide the 2 each bearings [3] to the inside, and remove the paper
exit driven roller [4].
[2]
[3]
[3]
[2] [1] [4]
[3]
13. Remove the C-clip [3] and the belt holding material [4], and
[2] remove the belt [7] from the pulley [5] and the paper exit drive gear
[6].
14. Remove the pulley [5] and the bearing [8], and remove the paper
exit roller [9].
[1]
[9]
[4] [6] [7] [5] [8]
[3]
G-192
[3] 15. Mark [2] the mounting position of the folding knife assy/2 mounting
plate [1] with a pencil or something.
16. Remove 4 screws [3] and then remove the folding guide [4].
17. Remove the screw [5], and remove the paper exit guide lock part
[6].
[4] [5] [2] [1]
[6]
[3]
[1] [2] 18. Disconnect the connector [1] and release the wiring harness,
remove 5 screws [2] and a screw [3], and remove the folding knife
assy/2 mounting plate [4].
Note
• When you install the folding knife assy/2 mounting plate
[4], be sure to install it according to the mark [5] that has
been marked in the step 15.
The 2nd folding misalignment occurs when the mounting
plate is not placed in the right place.
19. Remove the folding knife assy/2 [6] in the arrow-marked direction.
[6] [4] [2]

[3]
[5]
[2]
G-193

reverse.
Note
• When you install the folding knife assy/2, be sure not to
grab the blade [1] or not to hit it against other parts.
It could lead to the skew or the damage of the blade.
[1]
G-194
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 22. PK-522
22. PK-522
Note

ber
1 Punch unit Punch unit

CAUTION
22.3.2 Punch unit

(1) Procedure
[1]
15kjf2c002na
2. Remove the screw [1], and remove the shooter [2] in the arrow-
marked direction.
[2] [1]
3. Remove the rear cover of FS-532. (Refer to G.20.3.3 Rear cover)
[2] [1] 4. Remove the connector from the punch drive board (PDB) [1] and
release the wiring harness, and then remove the relay connector
[2].
G-195
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 22. PK-522
[1] [2]
6. Disconnect the 2 connectors [1] and remove the clamp and

[2] [1] [2] [3] release the wiring harness.
7. Remove 6 screws [2], and remove the punch unit [3].
Note
• When you remove the punch unit, be careful not to
damage the conductive PET [4].

reverse.
9. After you reinstall the punch unit, conduct the following items in the
order.
Punch unit mounting position adjustment
(Refer to I.25.2 Punch unit adjustment mounting position
adjustment)
[4] [2]
G-196
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 23. LS-505/LS-506
23. LS-505/LS-506
ber
1 Cover Cover
2 Conveyance section Stacker tray up down wire

CAUTION
23.2.2 Cover
(1) Procedure
1. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the rear cover/Up [2].
[1] [1] 2. Remove 6 screws [3] and then remove the rear cover/Lw [4].
[2]
[1]
[1]
[4]
[3]
[3]
[1] [1] 3. Remove 5 screws [1] and move the front cover/Up [2] to the upper
side.
5. Remove the front cover/Up [2].
[2]
[1] [1]
[3]
G-197
[2]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[3] 8. Remove the screws [1], 1 each, and then remove 3 knobs [2].
10. Remove 2 screws [4] and then remove the front cover/Lw [5].
[5]
[4]
[4]
[1]
[2]
ls502fs2036c
G-198
[2] 11. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the upper cover [2].
[1]
[1]
ls502fs2037c

13. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the front door [1].
reverse.
[1]
[2]
ls502fs2038c
23.2.3 Replacing the stacker tray up/down wire

Note
• When you conduct this operation, be sure to place the stacker tray at the home position (the upper most position) before the
operation.
(1) Procedure
[3] [1] [4] 1. Remove the rear cover/Up and the rear cover/Lw. (Refer to G.
23.2.2 Cover)
3. Remove 2 screws [2] and remove the sensor mounting plate [3].
4. Remove 4 screws [4] and remove the stacker tray up down motor
(M1) [5].
[2] [5] ls502fs2001c
G-199
5. Check points when you reinstall the stacker tray up down motor
[5] (M1)
Note
• When you reinstall the stacker tray up down motor (M1),
be sure to check that the belt [2] has been engaged with
[4] the gear [1]. Then you can engage it with the gear [3]
before you fasten the stacker tray up down motor (M1) [4].
• When the belt [2] is not horizontally attached between the
gear [1] and the gear [3], to make adjustments, you can
rotate the encoder [5] counterclockwise.
[1] [3]
[2] ls502fs2002c
6. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the motor mounting plate [3]
[2] from the stacker tray up down motor (M1) [2].
[3]
[1]
ls502fs2003c
[2] [1] [1] [2] 7. Remove the screws [1], 1 each, and remove the pulley covers [2],
1 each.
ls501f2c001a
G-200
8. Remove the screws [1], 1 each, and remove the pulley covers [2],
1 each.
[2] [1] [1] [2] ls501f2c002a
[4] [3] 9. Remove the screw [1] and remove the wire retaining bracket [2].
10. Remove 4 screws [3] and remove the pulley assy [4].
11. Remove the hexagon socket screw [6] and remove the tip [7] of
the wire/1 [5].
[1] Note
• On the paper exit side, loosen 4 screws [3], bring down
the pulley assy [4] and release the tension of the wire/2 [5]
before you start the operation.
• When you reinstall it, the positions of the pulley assy on
[2] the paper feed side and the paper exit side become
important. Be sure to check the marked position of the
[5] pulley assy on the paper exit side before you remove it.
[7]
[6]
ls501f2c003a
[1] [2] [4] 12. Release the winding of the wire/1 [2] from the pulley [1].
13. Remove the E-ring [3] and then remove the pulley [1] from the
shaft [4].
[3] ls502fs2027c
G-201
14. Remove the wire retaining bracket [2] from the wire/1 [1].
[1] Note
• When you install the wire retaining bracket [2], install it to
the wire/1 [1] so that the bracket comes to the rear side.
[2]
ls501f2c004a
[1] [2] 15. Remove the wire/1 [2] from the pulley [1].
16. Reinstall a new wire/1 following the preceding steps 6 to 12 in
reverse.
ls502fs2028c
[2] 17. Check point 1 when you reinstall the wire

Note
• When 2 wires at both sides are removed at the same time,
the stacker tray comes down. So, be sure to replace the
wires one at a time (The remaining wire holds the stacker
tray in place.) )
• When you attach the pulley to the shaft, be sure to align
the groove [1] of the pulley with the pin [2] that has been
inserted into the shaft.
• Be sure to place it with the bead placement portion [3].
[1] [3] ls502fs2029c
[1] [2] 18. Check point 2 when you reinstall the wire
Note
• When you wind the wire around the pulley, be sure to
wind it 8 turns [3] so that the direction of drawing-out [1]
comes to the rear panel side [2].
• The direction of drawing-out of the wire/1 is symmetrical
to that of the wire/2.
[3] ls502fs2030c
G-202
19. Check point 3 when you reinstall the wire

Note
• When you fix the pulley assy [1] on the paper exit side, be
sure to fix it at the same position as it was removed from.
20. Replace the wire/2 with a new one following the preceding steps 6
to 13.
21. Reinstall other parts following the steps 1 to 6 in reverse.
[1] ls501f2c005a
23.2.4 Caution when setting models using toggle SW (LS-505)

CAUTION
When you use C6501, C6501P, C65hc, 1200, 1200P, 1051, C8000, C7000, C7000P, C70hc and C6000, be sure to switch the toggle
switch on the connector connection of the left side of the LS to SYS2 [1].
[1]
G-203
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 24. FD-503
24. FD-503
24.1.1 Folding/conveyance switching position adjustment section
Note
• Do not remove or loosen the screws [1], screws [2], screws [3] of the folding and the conveyance switching position adjustment
section on the front of the folding conveyance unit. The adjustment scale marked on the folding conveyance frame are used in the
factory.
[1] [3]
[2]
fd501fs2079c

ber
1 Cover section Upper cover/Fr + PI cover/Fr
2 Upper cover/Rr + PI cover/Rr
3 Upper door
4 Rear cover
5 Left cover/Fr
6 Left cover/Rr
7 Paper exit stopper cover
8 Right cover
9 Left cover/Up
10 Mount cover
11 Front door
12 Folding conveyance section 2nd folding conveyance sensor (PS53)
13 3rd folding conveyance sensor (PS54)
14 3rd folding roller
15 Folding conveyance section
16 Main tray section Main tray up down wire
17 PI section Way to distinguish between new and old types of the multi feed detection board/1,
multi feed detection board/2
18 Multi feed detection board/1, /2 (new type)
19 Multi feed detection board/1, /2 (old type)

CAUTION
G-204
24.3.2 Upper cover/Fr + PI cover/Fr

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Open the upper door [1] and the front door [2].
2. Remove 3 screws [3], pull out the PI cover/Fr [5] to the front side
while you raise it together with the upper cover/Fr [4].
[5]
[4]
[2]
[3] fd501fs2029c
[1] 3. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove the PI cover/Fr [3]
together with the upper cover/Fr [2].
[3]
[2]
fd501fs2030c
24.3.3 Upper cover/Rr + PI cover/Rr

(1) Procedure
1. Open the upper door [1].
[1]
2. Remove 3 screws [2] and pull out the PI cover/Rr [4] to the rear
side while you raise it together with the upper cover/Rr [3].
[4]
[3]
[2]
fd501fs2031c
G-205
24.3.4 Upper door

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the upper cover/Fr, the PI cover/Fr, the upper cover/Rr
and the PI cover/Rr.
[5] 2. Close the upper door [1].
3. Remove the E-ring [2] and then remove the bearing [4] of the
upper door open close shaft [3].
4. With the bearing [5] that is shifted to the front side, remove the
upper door [1].
[4]
[2]
[3]
fd501fs2032c
24.3.5 Rear cover

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the rear cover/Lw [2].
[1]
[2]
fd501fs2033c
24.3.6 Left cover/Fr

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the left cover/Fr [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
fd501fs2034c
G-206
24.3.7 Left cover/Rr

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 5 screws [1] and then remove the left cover/Rr [2].
[1]
[2]
[1] fd501fs2035c
24.3.8 Paper exit stopper cover

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the paper exit stopper
[2]
cover [2].
[1]
fd501fs2036c
24.3.9 Right cover

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the right cover [2].
[2]
[1]
fd501fs2037c
G-207
24.3.10 Left cover/Up

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the upper cover/Fr, the PI cover/Fr, the upper cover/Rr
and the PI cover/Rr.
2. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the left cover/Up [2].
[2]
[1]
fd501fs2038c
24.3.11 Mount cover

(1) Procedure
2. Remove 3 screws [2] of the handle and then remove the handle.
3. Remove 4 screws [3] and then remove the mount cover [4].
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
fd501fs2039c
24.3.12 Front door

Note
• When you remove the front door, be sure to support it so that it does not fall down.
G-208
(1) Procedure
2. Remove the screws [2].
3. Remove the mount cover [3].
[2] 4. Remove 3 screws [4] while you push up the front door so that it
does not fall down, and then remove the support plate [5].
5. Remove the front door [1].
[1]
[3]
[4]
[5]
fd501fs2040c
24.3.13 Cleaning the 2nd folding conveyance sensor (PS53)

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the front door and pull out the folding unit. (Refer to G.
24.3.12 Front door)
[1]
2. Open the guide plates [1] and [2].
3. Clean the 2nd folding conveyance sensor (PS53) [3].
[2]
[3]
fd501fs2041c
G-209
24.3.14 Cleaning the 3rd folding conveyance sensor (PS54)

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the front door and pull out the folding unit. (Refer to G.
[1] 24.3.12 Front door)
2. Remove the screw [1] and turn over the sensor mounting plate [2].
[2]
fd501fs2042c
3. Clean the 3rd folding conveyance sensor (PS54) [1].
[1]
fd501fs2043c
24.3.15 Cleaning the 3rd folding roller

(1) Procedure
1. Open the front door and pull out the folding unit. (Refer to G.
[2] [1]
24.3.12 Front door)
2. Remove the stand cover. (Refer to G.24.3.11 Mount cover)
3. The 2 springs [2] are hooked to the shaft [1]. Remove them from
the shaft [1].
4. Remove the screw [3] and then remove 2 springs [2], the support
[5] plate [4] and the guide plate [5].
[4]
[3]
fd501fs2044c
G-210
[1] 5. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the guide plate [2].
[2]
fd501fs2045c
6. Clean the 3rd folding roller [1].
[1]
fd501fs2046c
24.3.16 Folding conveyance section

CAUTION
• The folding conveyance section is heavy. Be sure to conduct this operation with 2 people.
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the front door and the rear cover.
2. Disconnect 3 connectors [1] and then remove the wiring harnesses
from the 7 wiring harness guides [3] of the coupling arm/Rr [2].
[2]
[1]
[3]
fd501fs2047c
[1] 3. Remove 2 C-clips [1].

4. Remove the shaft [2] and separate the coupling arm/Fr [3] and the
[3] coupling arm/Rr [4].
[4] [2]
fd501fs2048c
G-211
[1] 5. Remove the stopper screws [1], 1 each, from the left rail and the
right rail and pull further out the folding conveyance section.
[1] fd501fs2049c
[1] 6. Remove screws [1], 3 each, from the left rail and right rail.
[1]
fd501fs2050c
G-212
7. Hold the folding conveyance section [3] at the specified places [1]
and [2] and remove it while you lift it up.
[3] CAUTION
• Be careful of your posture when you remove it. Be sure to
conduct this operation with 2 people so that you do not
suffer backache.
Note
[1] • When you lift up the folding conveyance section, be sure
to hold the shaft at the places [1] and [2]. When you hold it
at other places such as the roller shaft or the guide plate,
the deformation occurs.
[2]
fd501fs2051c
8. Keep the folding conveyance section [1] stand upright when it has
[1] been removed, or lay it down on the right-side [2].
Note
• Be careful not to lay it with the left side [3] down. The
[2] guide plate gets deformed.
[3]
fd501fs2052c
[2] 9. Check points when you reinstall the folding conveyance section
Note
• When you install the folding conveyance section, make
sure that all 4 hooks [1] of the rails have engaged the
attaching holes [2] of the folding conveyance section.
• Push the top to the right and engage the upper rail and
[1] push the bottom to the left to engage the lower rail.
[1]
[2] fd501fs2053c
G-213

reverse.
Note
• When you install the folding conveyance section, pull out
[2]
the rail further than the length of the stopper [1]. Use the
stopper screw [2] to fasten it tentatively at its fully pulled-
[1] out position and fix the rail on the opposite side with the
tape [3]. It prevents the rail from moving to inside for an
easy and smooth operation.
[3] fd501fs2054c
24.3.17 Main tray up/down wire

(1) Procedure
1. Check points when you remove or reinstall the main tray up and
down wire
[1] Note
• The following procedure for replacing the up down wire
shows the examples on the rear side. The figuration and
the winding of wires on the front side are symmetrical to
wires on the rear side.
• There are 2 types of up down wires that are provided, one
[1] on the front side and the other [3] on the rear side. Be
[2] sure to use the wire with the correct wire mounting plate
direction when you install it. The direction of the wire
mounting plate distinguished between these 2 wires when
the shorter wire [2] is placed under the longer wire.

Rear cover (Refer to G.24.3.5 Rear cover)
Left cover/Fr (Refer to G.24.3.6 Left cover/Fr)
Left cover/Rr (Refer to G.24.3.7 Left cover/Rr)
Front door (Refer to G.24.3.12 Front door)
[3]
[2]
fd501fs2056c
G-214
3. Remove 2 connectors [1] and 5 screws [2], and then remove the
gear box [4] together with the up down motor (M11) [3].
[3] CAUTION
• When the gear box is removed, the up down stay is
possibly fall down. So, when you remove the gear box, be
[1] sure to support the stay with your hands.
[4]
[2]
fd501fs2057c
4. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the wire mounting plate [3]
[2] of the up down wire/Rr [2] from the up down stay [4].
[4]
[3]
[1]
fd501fs2058c
G-215
[5] 5. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the gear [3] together with
[5] the 2 bearings [2].
6. Remove the E-ring [4] and then remove the gear [6] together with
[4] the 2 bearings [5].
[9].
Note
[6] • When you remove the gear [8], be careful not to drop the
pin [9].
[2]
[1]
[3]
[7] [9]
[8]
fd501fs2059c
[1]
[2]
fd501fs2060c
G-216
9. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the up down pulley/RrLw
[2] and the pin [3].
Note
• When you remove the up down pulley/RrLw [2], be careful
not to drop the pin [3].
[3]
[2]
[1]
fd501fs2061c
10. Temporarily tighten the wire mounting plate [2] of a new up down
wire/Rr [1] to the up down stay [3] with 2 screws [4].
Note
• Place the shorter wire below the longer one with the wire
supporting part of the mounting plate outside to install the
up down wires.
[1]
• There are 2 types of up down wires, one for the front side
[4]
and the other for the rear side. These 2 wires are different
[2] in the direction of the wire mounting plates. Be sure to
use a wire that fits with the direction of a wire mounting
[3] plate.
fd501fs2062c
11. Fasten the new up down wire/Rr [1] with the wire end [3] that is
provided on the inside of the up down pulley/RrLw [2] and insert it
into the shaft [6]. Rotate the up down pulley/RrLw [2] and wind it
5.5 turns clockwise from inside to outside around the up and down
pulley with no slack. Then insert the up down pulley/RrLw [2] fully
[1] onto the shaft so that it coincides with the pin [4] and fasten it with
[2]
the E-ring [5]. If the angle does not coincide with the pin [4], move
up and down the front side of the up down tray to change the angle
of the shaft [6].
[3]
[4]
[6]
[5]
fd501fs2063c
G-217
12. Hook up the up down wire/Rr [1] onto the up down pulley/RrUp [3]
through the relay pulley/Rr [2].
[3] [1]
[2]
fd501fs2064c
13. Wind the up down wire/Rr [1] 2 turns counterclockwise from inside
to outside around the up down pulley/RrLw [2] with no slack and
fasten it with the wire end [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
fd501fs2065c
14. The route along which the up down wire/Rr passes

The route along which the up down wire/Rr passes is, on the
whole, as the drawings are shown in the left.
fd501fs2066c
G-218
15. Pull up the wire tensioner [1] upward with a designated force "A,"
with a tension gauge or a spring balance. Fasten it with the 3
screws [2].
Specified value: A = 2.5kg ± 0.25kg
[2]
[1]
fd501fs2067c
16. Reinstall the 3 gears [1] following the removal steps in reverse.
[1]
fd501fs2068c
17. With the up down stay [1] that is held in a horizontal position,
[4]
tighten the 2 screws [3] of the wire mounting plate [2].
[1] Note
• Move the up and down stay up and down and check to see
if it moves smoothly. If it does not move smoothly, adjust
[5] it again so that it becomes horizontal.
• Check the up down wire [4] if it gets behind the actuator
plate [5]. If it gets behind the douser, an unnecessary load
[3] [2] is applied to the up down wire [4] when the up down stay
[1] goes up.

reverse.
fd501fs2069c
24.3.18 Way to distinguish between new and old types of the multi feed detection board /1 (MFDB/1) and /2 (MFDB/2)
Note
• Both of the multi feed detection board/1 (MFDB/2) and the multi feed detection board/2 (MFDB/2) have the new type [1] and the old
type [2].
• Each of the new and old types of the multi feed detection board/1 (MFDB/1) and the multi feed detection board/2 (MFDB/2) has
different mounting metal frames and PI drive boards (PIDB) that correspond to each detection board. Therefore the new and old
types of the multi feed detection board/1 (MFDB/1) and the multi feed detection board/2 (MFDB/2) are incompatible.
G-219
[1]
[2]
24.3.19 Multi feed detection board /1 (MFDB/1) and /2 (MFDB/2) (new type)
Note
• When the multi feed detection board is replaced, be sure to conduct the adjustment in replacing the multi feed detection board
(PI). (Refer to I.4.7.5 Adjustment when you replace the multi feed detection board (PI) (new type) )
(1) Procedure
1. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the multi feed detection
board/1 (MFDB/1) cover [2].
[2] [1] fd501fs2070c

board/1 (MFDB/1) [3].
[3] [2] [1]
G-220
4. Open the front door and then open the conveyance guide plate/2
[1] in the upper right direction.
[1] fd501fs2072c

6. Remove the wiring harness of the multi feed detection board/1
(MFDB/1) from the wiring harness guide [2].
[2]
[2] 7. Turn around the conveyance guide plate/2 assy [1] inside the
machine and pull it to the outside.
board/2 cover [3].
Note
• When you turn it around, or when disassembling or
reassembling it, be careful not to damage the wiring
harness.
[1] [3] fd501fs2074c

reverse.
[3] [2] [1]
G-221
(2) Note for installing the multi feed detection board/1 (MFDB/1) and the multi feed detection board/2 (MFDB/2)
• The shape of multi feed detection board/1 (MFDB/1) [1] and Multi
[2] feed detection board/2 (MFDB/2) [2] are different. When you
reinstall them, be sure to place them at the proper positions.
[1]
24.3.20 Multi feed detection board /1 (MFDB/1) and /2 (MFDB/2) (old type)
Note
• When you replace the multi feed detection board/1 (MFDB/1), be sure to replace the multi feed detection board/2 (MFDB/2) at the
same time.
• When the multi feed detection board is replaced, be sure to conduct the adjustment in replacing the multi feed detection board
(PI). (Refer to I.4.7.6 Adjustment when you replace the multi feed detection board (PI) (old type))
(1) Procedure
board/1 (MFDB/1) cover [2].
[2] [1] fd501fs2070c

[1]
[3] [2] fd501fs2071c
4. Open the front door and then open the conveyance guide plate/2
[1] in the upper right direction.
[1] fd501fs2072c
G-222

6. Remove the wiring harness of the multi feed detection board/1
(MFDB/1) from the wiring harness guide [2].
[2] fd501fs2073c
[2] 7. Turn around the conveyance guide plate/2 assy [1] inside the
machine and pull it to the outside.
board/2 cover [3].
Note
• When you turn it around, or when disassembling or
reassembling it, be careful not to damage the wiring
harness.
[1] [3] fd501fs2074c

reverse.
[3] [2] [1] a0h0t3c007ca
(2) Note for installing the multi feed detection board/1 (MFDB/1) and the multi feed detection board/2 (MFDB/2)
[2] • The multi feed detection board/1 (MFDB/1) and the multi feed
detection board/2 (MFDB/2) are installed on the same type board.
Be careful not to confuse one with the other when you install them.
• Be sure to confirm the marking on the board when you install it.
Multi feed detection board/1 (MFDB/1) [1]: 15AG
Multi feed detection board/2 (MFDB/2) [2]: 56UA
• The connector shape is different for the multi feed detection board/
1 (MFDB/1) and the multi feed detection board/2 (MFDB/2). So,
even if it is installed, the connector cannot be connected.
[1] fd501fs2076c

Note
• When the FD control board (FDCB) is replaced, be sure to replace the EEPROM (IC68).
G-223
control board [2].
Note
• Be sure to place the SW3 [3] same as the old FDCB. (Refer
to L.2.17.1 FD control board (FDCB))
[1]
[2] [3]
fd501fs2077c
A 2. Check points when you reinstall the EEPROM (IC68)

Note
After you replace the FD control board (FDCB), conduct
fd501fs2078c
G-224
25. SD-506
25.1 Items not allowed to be disassembled/reassembled
25.1.1 Trimmer blade home sensor (PS50), Trimmer blade upper limit sensor (PS51)
• 1 fixing screw of the mounting plate on each trimmer blade home sensor (PS50) and trimmer blade upper limit sensor (PS51)
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]
a0h2t3c061ca
[1] Screw not allowed to be adjusted or removed [2] Mounting plate

[3] Trimmer blade upper limit sensor (PS51) [4] Screw not allowed to be adjusted or removed
[5] Mounting plate [6] Trimmer blade home sensor (PS50)

• The trimmer blade home sensor (PS50) detects the home position of the trimmer blade. Once the home position is out of alignment, the
trimmer blade gets out from the trimmer press plate. It prevents the paper from entering to the trimmer section and causes the trimming
error or damages the trimmer blade retaining plate. Therefore, be sure not to change the installation position of PS50.
• The trimmer blade upper limit sensor (PS51) detects the upper limit of the trimmer blade after the completion of the trimming. Once the
upper limit detection is out of alignment, the paper fails to be trimmed because the trimmer blade stops before the completion. The
trimmer blade and the trimmer board get damaged because the trimmer blade cuts in the trimmer board deeply. Therefore, be sure not to
change the installation position of PS51.
25.1.2 Trimmer completion sensor (PS62)

• 1 fixing screw of the trimmer completion sensor (PS62) mounting plate
[3] [2] [1]
a0h2t3c062ca
[1] Mounting plate [2] Screws which you must not adjust and remove
[3] Trimmer completion sensor (PS62) -

• The trimmer completion sensor (PS62) detects the completion of the trimming. Once the timing of the trimmer completion is out of
alignment, the paper fails to be trimmed or the trimmer blade. The trimmer board get damaged because the trimmer blade cuts in the
trimmer board deeply. Therefore, be sure not to change the installation position of PS50.
25.1.3 Wire slack prevention sensor (PS66)

• 1 fixing screw of the wire slack prevention sensor (PS66) mounting plate
G-225
(a) Previous trimmer unit
[3] [2] [1]

a0h2t3c063ca
[1] Mounting plate [2] Screws which you must not adjust and remove
[3] Wire slack prevention sensor (PS66) -
(b) New trimmer unit
[3] [2] [1]
[1] Wire slack prevention sensor (PS66) [2] Mounting plate

[3] Screws which you must not adjust and remove -

• The wire slack prevention sensor (PS66) detects the slack of the winding wire on the trimmer blade. Once the detection position is out of
alignment, the wire is removed from the winding pulley and damages the trimmer unit. Therefore, be sure not to change the installation
position of PS66.
25.1.4 Trimmer press upper limit sensor (PS52), Trimmer press home sensor (PS53)
• 1 fixing screw of the trimmer press upper limit sensor (PS52) mounting plate
• 1 fixing screw of the trimmer press home sensor (PS53) actuator
[4] [5] [6]
[3] [2] [1] a0h2t3c064ca
[1] Screws which you must not adjust and remove [2] Actuator
[3] Trimmer press home sensor (PS53) [4] Trimmer press upper limit sensor (PS52)
G-226
[5] Screws which you must not adjust and remove [6] Mounting plate

• The trimmer press home sensor (PS53) detects the home position of the trimmer press plate. Once the home position is out of alignment,
the opening is not opened enough for the paper. The paper fails to enter to the trimming section and a error occurs. Therefore, be sure
not to change the position of the actuator of PS53.
• The trimmer press upper limit sensor (PS52) detects the upper limit of the trimmer press. Once the upper limit position is out of alignment,
the opening is not opened enough for the paper. As a result, the paper fails to enter to the trimming section and an error occurs, or the
opening is not enough for replacing the trimmer blade. Therefore, be sure not to change the installation position of PS52.
25.1.5 Trimmer press brake

• 1 gap adjusting screw of the trimmer press brake
[2] [1] a0h2t3c065ca
[1] Trimmer press brake [2] Screw not allowed to be adjusted or removed

• The trimmer press brake pushes the timing belt and prevents the trimmer press motor (M32) from rotating too much which caused by the
inertia of the trimmer press board. Once the gap between the trimmer press brake and the timing belt changes, it damages the timing belt
or disables the brake. Therefore, be sure not to adjust the gap adjusting screw of the trimmer press brake.
25.1.6 Fixing screw of the trimmer press timing belt

• All screws which fix the driving system of the trimmer press
[1] [2]
a0h2t3c066ca
[1] Screws which you must not adjust and remove (all screws [2] Screws that you can remove
that are shown in the picture)

• The right paper holding screw and the left paper holding screw drives the trimmer press plate through the timing belt. Once the part such
as a gear of the driving system is removed, the parallelism of the trimmer press plate is not guaranteed because of the belt tooth skipping.
Therefore, be sure not to remove the attaching screw of the cover which fixes the driving system and the bearing fixing screw.

ber
1 Cover Rear cover/Lt
2 Rear cover/Rt
3 Left cover
4 Upper cover/Fr
G-227
5 Upper cover/Rr3
6 Sub tray cover
7 Front door/Lt
8 Front door/Rt
9 Folding section Folding unit

CAUTION
25.3.2 Rear cover/Lt

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove 8 screws [1], and then remove the rear cover/Lt [2].
reverse.
[1] [2] 15anf2c002na
25.3.3 Rear cover/Rt

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove 8 screws [1], and then remove the rear cover/Rt [2].
reverse.
[2] [1] 15anf2c003na
G-228
25.3.4 Left cover

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove 7 screws [1], slide the bottom of the left cover [2] to the
outside, and remove it to the bottom.
reverse.
[2] [1] 15anf2c004na
25.3.5 Upper cover/Fr

(1) Procedure
[3] [2] 1.
2. Remove the 5 screws [1] on the front, 2 screws [2], 1 screw [3] on
the left, and 3 screws [4] under the cover.
3. Loosen a screw [5].
4. Lift up and remove the upper cover/Fr [6].
Note
[1] • When you remove the upper cover/Fr [6], pull the screw
[5] to the front to so that the tip of the screw does not
catch the upper cover/Fr [6].

reverse.
[6]
[4] [5] 15anf2c005nb
G-229
25.3.6 Upper cover/Rr3

(1) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Remove the rear cover/Lt. (Refer to G.25.3.2 Rear cover/Lt)
2. Remove 2 screw caps [1] and then remove 2 screws [2].
4. Loosen the screw [4] and then remove the upper cover/Rr3 [5].
Note
• When you remove the upper cover/Rr3 [5], pull the screw
[4] to the front so that the tip of the screw does not catch
the upper cover/Rr3 [5].

reverse.
[5]
[3] [3] [3]
[4] 15anf2c006na
25.3.7 Sub tray cover

(1) Procedure
[2] [3] [2] 1. Remove the upper cover/Fr. (Refer to G.25.3.5 Upper cover/Fr)
2. Remove the upper cover/Rr3. (Refer to G.25.3.6 Upper cover/Rr3)
3. Remove 2 screws [1] and 4 screws [2], and then remove the sub
tray cover [3].
reverse.
Note
• When you reinstall the sub tray cover [3], pull the screw
[4] to the outside.
[3] [1] [4] [1]
15anf2c007na
G-230
25.3.8 Front door/Lt

(1) Procedure
1. Open the front door/Lt [1].
[6] [5] [4]
2. Remove the screw [2], and then remove the front door stopper/Lt
[3].
3. Remove 2 screws [4], and slide the hinge [5] upward to remove the
fulcrum [6], and then remove the front door/Lt [1].
Note
• Support the front door/Lt [1] with your hand so that it does
not fall down When you remove the screw [4].

reverse.
[3] [2]
[1]
15anf2c008na
25.3.9 Front door/Rt

(1) Procedure
[5] [4] [6] 1. Open the front door/Rt [1].
2. Remove the screw [2], and then remove the front door stopper/Rt
[3].
3. Remove 2 screws [4]. Slide the hinge [5] upward to remove the
fulcrum [6], and remove the front door/Rt [1].
Note
• Support the front door/Rt [1] with your hand so that it
does not fall down when you remove the screw [4].

reverse.
[2] [3]
[1] 15anf2c009na
G-231
25.3.10 Folding unit

CAUTION
• Be sure to perform this operation with 2 people because the folding unit is heavy.
(1) Procedure
[5] [4] [2] 1. Remove the front door/Rt. (Refer to G.25.3.9 Front door/Rt)
3. Remove 2 screws [1] and 2 clamps [2] from the rear of the folding
unit.
Note
• Be sure not to drop the clamps [2].
4. Remove the screw [3] and the ground [4].

6. Remove the clamp and fall drop the wiring harness [7] from the
hole [6] on the wiring harness guide.
[3] [1] [6] [7] [1]
15anf2c010na
7. Pull out the folding unit.

8. Pull out the folding unit. Remove 2 screws [1], separate the notch
[2] from the hole [3] and remove the lower cover/2 [4].
9. Loosen the screw [5], remove the 2 screws [6] and remove the
lower cover/1 [7].
10. Remove 2 screws [8], separate the notch [10] from the shaft [9]
and remove the lower cover/3 [11].
[8] [11] [1] [4] [6] [7]
[2] [9] [10] [3] [5]
15anf2c011na
G-232
11. Check points when you reinstall the lower cover/3

Note
• Install the lower cover/3 [11] between 2 pins [2] of the
shaft [1]. If it is installed at an improper position, other
parts are damaged in storing the folding unit.
[1] [2] 15anf2c071na
[1] 12. Remove 4 screws [1], and then lift up and remove the folding unit
[2] with 2 people.
Note
• When you reinstall it, be sure to align the positioning pin
[3] with the hole.
[3] [2]
[3]
[1] 15anf2c012na
[7] [6]
[5]
reverse.
Note
• When you hold the folding unit, be sure to hold the shafts
[4] at the front and rear or the upper top of the side plate
[5]. Never hold the jam release lever [6] or the handle [7].
They get damaged.
• When you place the folding unit, place it on the table not
to contact the guide plate [8] on the front with the floor.
Because it is projected from the bottom of the unit.
[8] [4]
15anf2c013na
G-233

Note
• When the SD control board (SDCB) is replaced, be sure to replace the EEPROM (IC68).
1. Remove the EEPROM (IC68) from the old SD control board (SDCB)
[1] and install it into the new SD control board (SDCB) [2].
Note
the same direction.
• Be sure to place the SW3 [3] same as the old SDCB. (Refer
to L.2.18.1 SD control board (SDCB))
• After you replace the SD control board (SDCB), conduct
[1]
[2]
A
[3]
a0g6f3c053ca
G-234
26. SD-513
Note

1 Cover Rear cover /Rt
2 Rear cover /Lt
3 Right cover/1
4 Right cover/2
5 Right cover/3
6 Front cover/1
7 Front cover/2
8 Front cover/3
9 Left cover/Fr1
10 Left cover/Fr2
11 Left cover/Fr3
12 Left cover /Rr
13 Upper cover/RrRt1
19 Upper cover/FrRt1
22 Upper cover/FrLt1
23 Upper cover/FrLt2
24 Upper cover/RrLt1
27 Sub tray cover
28 Paper exit load section Gripper paper exit unit
29 Front console Front console

CAUTION
26.3.2 Rear cover/Rt, /Lt

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 6 screws [1] and then remove the rear cover/Rt [2].
[1] [2]
G-235
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the power cord cover [2].
[1] 3. Remove the power cord [3].
[3] [2]
4. Remove 6 screws [1] and then remove the rear cover/Lt [2].
[2] [1]

Note
• 2 PET sheets [2] are attached on the back side of the rear
cover/Lt [1].
Be sure to reinstall the rear cover/Lt and the rear cover/Rt
to the original position.
[2] [1]
26.3.3 Right cover/1, /2, /3

(1) Procedure
2. Remove the upper cover/FrRt1, the upper cover/FrRt2, and the
upper cover/FrRt3. (Refer to G.26.3.8 Upper cover/FrRt1, /FrRt2, /
FrRt3)
G-236
[2] [1] [1] 4. Remove 7 screws [1] and then remove the right cover/1 [2].
[1]
[1] [2] 6. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the right cover/2 [2].
[3] [2] [1] 7. Pull out the trim scrap box [1] in the arrow-marked direction.
8. Remove 5 screws [2] and then remove the right cover/3 [3].
reverse.
26.3.4 Front cover/1, /2, /3

(1) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Remove the upper cover/FrLt2. (Refer to G.26.3.9 Upper cover/
FrLt1, /FrLt2)
2. Remove the upper cover/FrRt3. (Refer to G.26.3.8 Upper cover/
FrRt1, /FrRt2, /FrRt3)
4. Remove the left cover/Fr1 and the left cover/Fr2. (Refer to G.
26.3.5 Left cover/Fr1, left cover/Fr2, left cover/Fr3)
5. Remove 3 screws [1], and then remove the front cover/1 [2].
G-237
[2] [1] 6. Remove 3 screws [1], and then remove the front cover/2 [2].
[1] [2] 7. Remove 7 screws [1], and then remove the front cover/3 [2].
reverse.
[1]
26.3.5 Left cover/Fr1, left cover/Fr2, left cover/Fr3

(1) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Remove the upper cover/FrLt2. (Refer to G.26.3.9 Upper cover/
FrLt1, /FrLt2)
2. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the left cover/Fr3 [2].
[1] [2]
G-238
[1] [2] [3] 4. Open the saddle stitching section door [1].
reverse.
26.3.6 Left cover/Rr

(1) Procedure
[2] [1] 1. Remove 7 screws [1] and then remove the left cover/Rr [2].
reverse.
26.3.7 Upper cover/RrRt1, /RrRt2, /RrRt3, /RrRt4, /RrRt5, /RrRt6

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove 3 screw covers [1].
[1] [2] 2. Remove 5 screws [1], and remove the upper cover/RrRt1 [2].
G-239
G-240
reverse.
26.3.8 Upper cover/FrRt1, /FrRt2, /FrRt3

(1) Procedure
[1]
2. Remove 4 screws [1], and remove the upper cover/FrRt1 [2].

[2] [1]

[1]

[2] [1]
G-241

reverse.
26.3.9 Upper cover/FrLt1, /FrLt2

(1) Procedure
[1]
2. Remove 3 screws [1], and remove the upper cover/FrLt1 [2].
[1] [2]
[1]
4. Remove 2 screws [1], and remove the upper cover/FrLt2 [2].
reverse.
[1] [2]
G-242
26.3.10 Upper cover/RrLt1, /RrLt2, /RrLt3, sub tray cover

(1) Procedure
[1]
2. Remove 5 screws [1] and remove the upper cover/RrLt1 [2].

[2] [1]
3. Hold the handle [1], and open the sub tray [2] in the arrow-marked
[2] [1] direction.
[1] 4. Remove 3 screws [1], and then remove the sub tray cover [2].
[2] [1]
G-243
[2] [1]
[1]
reverse.
[2] [1]
26.3.11 Opening and closing of the front console

(1) Procedure
1. Open the entrance door [1].
[3] 2. Remove the screw cover [2].
3. Insert a driver into the hole [3] vertically, and then move the lock
[4] board [4] in the arrow-marked direction and release the lock.
4. Hold the handle [5] with the lock released, and open the front
console [6] a little in the arrow-marked direction.
5. Pull out a driver from the hole [3].
[5]
[2] [6] [1]
G-244
6. Insert a driver into the hole [1] vertically, and then rotate the sub
[1] lock [2] in the arrow-marked direction and release the lock.
7. Hold the handle [3] and open the front console [4].
[2]
[3]
[4]
Note
[1] • If SD-513 is not terminated normally and the trimmer press
unit is left open, the front console cannot be opened
because the lock mechanism of the trimmer section [1]
works.
When you open the front console in this condition,
remove the screw cover [2] and turn the screw [3] in the
arrow-marked direction to release the lock mechanism [1].
WARNING
• When you release the lock mechanism [1] to open the
front console, be careful not to put your hands in a
gap of the trimmer press unit.
If you touch the trimmer blade, you could get injured.
[3] [2]
[1] [2] 8. When you open the front console further, remove 2 screws [1] and
release 2 wires [2].
26.3.12 Front console

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the left cover/Fr2. (Refer to G.26.3.5 Left cover/Fr1, left
[1] [1]
G-245
3. Remove 4 screws [1] each and remove the coupling plate/1 [2] and
[2] [1] the coupling plate/2 [3].
[2] [1]
5. Remove 3 screws [1] each and remove the coupling plate/3 [2] and
the coupling plate/4 [3].
[2]
[1]
[3]
G-246
6. Close the front console [1]. Then, separate the front console [1]
and the rear console [4] while you pull out the wiring harness [3]
from the hole [2].
Note
• Be careful not to damage the wiring harness [3] with the
edge of the hole [2] or the caster.
• Before you move the removed front console, be sure to lift
the open close caster to the highest position.
When the open close caster is moved down and you move
the front console, the open close caster possibly contacts
with steps on the floor and is damaged. (Refer to I.29.2 1st
folding skew adjustment)
[4] [2] [1]
reverse.
[3]
26.3.13 Gripper paper exit unit

(1) Procedure
2. Remove the upper cover/FrRt1, the upper cover/FrRt2 and the
upper cover/FrRt3. (Refer to G.26.3.8 Upper cover/FrRt1, /FrRt2, /
FrRt3)
3. Move down the clamp unit [1] to the position where the bottom [2]
of the clamp unit [1] is lower than the metal plate [3].
Note
• If you do not move down the clamp unit [1], the clamp unit
[1] contacts the gripper paper exit unit and the gripper
paper exit unit cannot be removed.
[1] [2] [3]

[1] [2] [3] Note
• When you have not installed the FD-504, hold the [2]
section of the clamp unit [1] from the downside and lift it
down.
• To prevent the booklet from being damaged and got dirty,
be careful not to touch the tape [3] of the clamp unit [1].
G-247
Note
• When you have installed the FD-504, push down the [1]
section of the FD-504.
[1]
[1]

5. Remove 7 screws [2], and remove the gripper paper exit unit [4]
while you hold the handle [3].
[1]
[4] [3]
[2]
G-248
Note
[1] • When you put the gripper paper exit unit [1] upside down,
put it on A3 or 11 x 17 paper [2].
If you directly put the gripper paper exit unit [1] on a floor
or a desk, the external section of the gripper paper exit
unit [3] is possibly damaged.
[2] [3]

[2] reverse.
Note
• When you install the gripper paper exit unit [1], be sure
not to damage the connector [3] of the paper exit motor
(M28) [2].
[3] [1]
26.3.14 Open and close of the booklet tray section door

Note
• The booklet tray section door is equipped with the lock mechanism so that the door does not open during the machine operation.
When the machine completes the operation normally, the lock mechanism is released. However, when the machine does not
complete the operation normally, the lock mechanism becomes active and the booklet tray section door does not open.
In order to open the booklet tray section door when the machine does not complete the operation normally, release the lock
mechanism by following procedures.
G-249
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the upper cover/FrRt3. (Refer to G.26.3.8 Upper cover/
[2] FrRt1, /FrRt2, /FrRt3)
2. Insert a driver into the screw [1] and rotate in the direction of the
arrow.
3. Release the lock mechanism [2] and open the booklet tray section
door [3].
[1] [3]
26.3.15 Moving up and down of the booklet holding

(1) Procedure
[1] [2] [3] 1. Remove the left cover/Fr1. (Refer to G.26.3.5 Left cover/Fr1, left
2. When you turn the encoder [1], the booklet holding/Fr [2] and the
booklet holding/Rr [3] move down.
Note
• When you rotate the encoder [1], be sure to hold and
rotate the encoder [1] with your arms form the left side of
the machine.
The encoder possibly rotates when the booklet holding
moves down and you could get injured.
3. When you turn the encoder [1] further, the booklet holding/Fr [2]
moves up.
4. When you turn the encoder [1] further, the booklet holding/Rr [3]
moves up.
Note
• When you move up the booklet holding, rotate the
encoder [1] until no load is applied on the encoder.
When you get your hands off of the encoder with the load,
the booklet holding falls down and the encoder rotates in
the reverse direction and you possibly get injured.

Note
• When the SD control board (PCB1) is replaced, be sure to replace the EEPROM (IC70).
control board [2].
[1]
[2]
G-250

Note
• After you replace the FNS control board (FNSCB), conduct
fd501fs2078c
G-251
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 27. CR-101
27. CR-101
27.1.1 Creaser unit
(1) Crease blade fixing plate
(a) Positions from which removing is prohibited
• 4 screws that fix the crease blade fixing plate/Up and the crease blade fixing plate/Lw
[1] [3]
[3] [2] [4]

[1] Crease blade fixing plate/Up [2] Crease blade fixing plate/Lw
[3] Screws not allowed to be removed [4] Crease blade

The install positions of the crease blade fixing plate/Up and the crease blade fixing plate/Lw are adjusted during the production process.
If you remove 4 screws that fix the crease blade fixing plate/Up and the crease blade fixing plate/Lw, the position of the crease blade moves
and the crease error occurs.
Therefore, removing screws that lead up to the disassembly of the crease blade fixing plate/Up and the crease blade fixing plate/Lw is not
allowed.
(2) Crease guide

• 8 screws that fix the crease guide
G-252
[1]
[2]
[2]
[1]
[1] Crease guide [2] Screws not allowed to be removed

The install position of the crease guide is adjusted on the manufacturing process.
When you remove 2 screws that fix each crease guide, the interval of the crease guide changes and crease error occurs.
Therefore, removing screws that lead up to the disassembly of the crease guide is not allowed.
(3) Trimmer receiver

• 4 screws that fix the trimmer receiver
• 3 screws that keep the position of the trimmer receiver
G-253
[1] [2]
[3]
[2]
[1] Trimmer receiver [2] Screws not allowed to be removed (Screws that fix the
trimmer receiver)
[3] Screws that you must not remove (screws that keep the -
position of the trimmer receiver)

The install position of the trimmer receiver is adjusted during the production process.
When you remove 4 screws that fix the trimmer receiver and the 3 screws that hold the trimmer receiver, the position of the trimmer
receiver changes and crease error occurs.
Therefore, removing screws that lead up to the disassembly of the trimmer receiver is not allowed.

1 Creaser unit Creaser unit

CAUTION
G-254
27.3.2 Creaser unit

(1) Procedure
[5] [3] [2] [1] 1. Open the entrance door [1].
2. Remove the screw [6], and remove the knob (number: SD6) [3].
Note
• A unique number is printed on the knob [3] for the
reference when you release the jam.
When you install the knob [3], be sure not to mistake other
knobs for the knob [3].
3. Remove 4 screws [4], and remove the creaser cover [5].
[4]
[4] 4. Rotate the crank [1], and close the crease blade [2].
6. Remove 4 screws [4], and pull out the creaser unit [5].
reverse.
[1] [2] [3] [5]
G-255
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 28. TU-503
28. TU-503
28.1.1 Slitter unit
(1) Slitter rail
• 6 screws that fix the slitter rail
[2]
[1]
[2]
[4] [3]
[1] Slitter rail [2] Screws not allowed to be removed
[3] Slit cutter Assy /Fr [4] Slit cutter Assy /Rr

The install position of the slitter rail is adjusted on the manufacturing process.
When you remove 6 screws that fix the slitter rail, the slitter rail that regulates the movement of the slit cutter assy tilts. The slit position
possibly changes.
Therefore, removing screws that lead up to the disassembly of the slitter rail is not allowed.
(2) Actuator
• 1 screw that fixes the actuator of the slit cutter assy/Fr
• 1 screw that fixes the actuator of the slit cutter assy/Rr
G-256
[1] [2] [1] [2]
[4] [3]
[1] Actuator [2] Screws not allowed to be removed


The install position of the actuator is adjusted during the production process.
When you remove each screw that fixes the actuator, the position of the actuator possibly moves and the home position cannot be detected
properly. Then, the slit position possibly misaligned.
Therefore, removing screws that lead up to the disassembly of the actuator is not allowed.
(3) Pulley shaft

• 2 screws that fix the pulley shaft
G-257
[2] [4] [4] [2]
[1] [3] [3] [1]
[6] [5]
[1] Pulley shaft [2] Screws not allowed to be removed
[3] Pulley [4] Belt

The install position of the pulley shaft is adjusted during the production process.
When you remove 1 screw that fixed each pulley shaft, the position of the pulley changes and the tension of the belt changes. The slit
position possibly changes.
Therefore, removing screws that lead up to the disassembly of the pulley shaft unit is not allowed.
(4) Slit cutter assy coupling screw

• 2 screws that couple the upper section and the lower section of the slit cutter assy/Fr
• 2 screws that couple the upper section and the lower section of the slit cutter assy/Rr
G-258
[4] [4]
[3] [2] [1] [3]

[3] Screws not allowed to be removed [4] Slit cutter

The coupling position of the slit cutter assy is adjusted on the manufacturing process.
When you remove the screw that couples the upper section and lower section of the slit cutter assy, the position of the upper slit cutter and
the lower slit cutter changes. The trimming operation possibly becomes unavailable.
Therefore, removing screws that lead up to the disassembly of the slit cutter assy is not allowed.
(5) Slitter unit positioning pin assy

• 2 screws that fix the slitter unit positioning pin assy
[1]
[2]
[1] Positioning pin assy [2] Screws not allowed to be removed

The installation position of the positioning pin assy is adjusted on the manufacturing process.
When the position of the positioning jig changes, the slitter unit and the slit possibly tilt.
Therefore, removing screws that lead up to the disassembly of the positioning pin assy is not allowed.
G-259

1 Slitter unit Slitter unit

CAUTION
28.3.2 Slitter unit

(1) Procedure
[4] [5] [2] [3] 1. Open the entrance door [1].
5. Remove 6 screws [6], and remove the slitter cover [7].
Note
• Depending on the installation place of the slitter cover [7],
the slit scraps box could not be removed. Therefore, when
you reinstall the slitter cover [7], move the slitter cover [7]
to the right side.
[6] [1]
[7] [6]
6. Disconnect 4 connectors [1], and remove 6 screws [2].
[1] [1]
[2] [2]
7. Pull the handle [1].
[1] [2]
G-260
8. Hold the handle [1], and pull out approximately two thirds of the
slitter unit [2].
[1] [2]
9. Hold the positions [1], and remove the slitter unit [2].
[1]
Note
• When you remove the slitter unit [1], do not push the
handle [2].
When the handle [2] is pushed, the slit scraps shutter [3]
opens. Then, you cannot push the slitter unit [1].
• When you put the slitter unit [1] with the slit scraps
shutter [3] opened, the slit scraps shutter [3] or the handle
[2] is possibly damaged.
[2] [3] [1]

10. Remove the screw [1], and then remove the TU support stay [2].
[2] [1]
11. Install the TU support stay [2] with the screw [1] that you removed
on the step 9.
reverse.
[1] [2]
G-261
29. FD-504
Note

1 Square-fold unit Square-fold unit

CAUTION
29.3.2 Square-fold unit

(1) Procedure
[1] [2] [3] [4] 1. Remove the gripper paper exit unit. (Refer to G.26.3.13 Gripper
paper exit unit)
Note
• When you remove the square-fold unit [1], be sure not to
move the SQF roller assy [2] to the inside beyond the
specified position [3].
The booklet pressure section of the SQF roller assy [2]
and the SQF clamp plate [4] possibly contact and the
booklet pressure section is possibly damaged.

[1]
[2] [1] 3. Remove 7 screws [1], and remove the metal frame [2].
G-262
4. Remove 5 screws [1], and then release the fixing of the square-
fold unit [2].
[1] [2]
5. Install the 4 screws [1] and 2 handles [2] that were used at the
[2] installation.
Note
• After you install the square-fold unit [3], be sure to remove
the handle [2].
If the unit is operated with the handle is installed, the
machine could damaged.
[1] [3]
6. Hold the handle [1] and remove the square-fold unit [2].
[1] [2]
[3] [2] [1] reverse.
Note
• When you install the square-fold unit, lift up the sub lock
[1] of the SD-513 to move away and insert the driver [3]
into the hole [2] to fix the sub lock [1].
If the sub lock [1] is not moved away, you cannot install
the square-fold unit.
29.3.3 Note for disassembling the FD-504 (1)

(1) Procedure
Note
• When you remove FD-504 from the system configuration, be sure to perform following procedure and install the coupling screw.
When the coupling screw is not installed, the clamp section of SD-513 is possibly damaged.
G-263

paper exit unit)
2. Remove the coupling screw [1].
[1]
[3] 3. Adjust the height of the square-fold unit [3] so that the D-cut side
[2] of the pulley [1] turns down and is horizontal.
[1]
[2]
Note
• When you adjust the height of the square-fold unit [1], be
sure not to touch the booklet pressure side [2] of the SQF
clamp plate.
• Adjust the height of the square-fold unit [1] so that the
height of the front and rear becomes flat.
[2] [1]
G-264
4. Check that the hole [2] of the pulley [1] turns up.
[2] [1] Note
• When the hole [2] does not turn up, adjust the height of
the rear side [3] of the square-fold unit and let the hole [2]
turn up.
Be careful not to change the height of the front side [4] of
the square-fold unit so as not to change the position of
the D-cut that you adjusted on the step 3.
[3] [4]
5. Install the coupling screw that you removed on the step 1 to the
screw hole [1].
Note
• When the screw hole [1] does not turn down, repeat the
step 3 and the step 4.
[1]
29.3.4 Note for disassembling the FD-504 (2)

(1) Procedure
Note
• When you remove the FD-504 from the system configuration, be sure to use the following screws to install the guide plate.
If you use incorrect screws, the screws contact the drive section and the clamp section of the SD-513 could be damaged.
[4] [3] 1. Use 2 long silver screws [1] and install the booklet fixing plate [3]
to the clamp/Lt [2].
2. Use 2 short black screws [4] and install the booklet fixing plate [3]
to the clamp/Rt [5].
[5] [2] [1]
G-265
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 30. PB-503
30. PB-503
ber
1 Cover Front door
2 Front cover
3 Booklet door
4 Rear cover/Rt
5 Rear cover/Lt
6 Left cover
7 Relay conveyance gear cover/Fr
8 Relay conveyance gear cover/Rr
9 Pellet supply cover
10 SC cover/Fr
11 SC cover/Up
12 Upper cover/FrRt
13 Upper cover/FrLt
14 Upper cover/RrRt
15 Upper cover/RrLt
16 Upper cover/Md
17 Others Deodorant unit
18 Pellet supply section Pellet supply unit
19 Glue tank section Glue tank unit
20 SC section SC unit
21 Clamp section Clamp unit
22 Others PB left unit
23 Book stock section Book lift wire
24 Cart wire
25 Conveyance section Conveyance unit/Lw
26 Relay conveyance section Relay conveyance unit
27 Cover paper supply section Cover paper tray
28 Cover paper lift wire

CAUTION
G-266
30.2.2 Front door

(1) Procedure
[5] [4] [3] [2] 1. Open the front door [1].
2. Remove the screw [2] and then remove the wire [3].
3. Remove 2 screws [4], and then remove the front door [1] from the
lower pin [6] with the mounting bracket [5] on the front door [1].
reverse.
Note
• When you reinstall the wire [3], tighten the screw at the
position in the picture. (To prevent the wire from
contacting with the tab.)
[1]
[6]
a15xt3c018ca
G-267
30.2.3 Front cover

(1) Procedure
2. Lift the lever [1] and pull out the cover paper tray.
4. Release the notches [3] at 2 positions from the screws [4] and pull
out the projection [5] from the hole [6], and then remove the front
cover [7].
reverse.
[5]
[2] [7]
[3] [4] [1] a15xt3c019ca
G-268
30.2.4 Booklet door

(1) Procedure
[1] [6] [5] [4] [3] [2] 1. Open the booklet door [1].
2. Remove the screw [2] and then remove the wire [3].
3. Remove 2 screws [4], and then remove the booklet door [1] from
the lower pin [6]. Do not remove the mounting bracket [5] from the
booklet door [1].
4. Remove the mounting bracket [5] from the booklet door [1].
reverse.
[6] a15xt3c020ca
30.2.5 Rear cover/Rt

(1) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Remove the deodorant unit. (Refer to G.30.2.18 Deodorant unit)
2. Remove 9 screws [1], and then remove the rear cover/Rt [2].
Note
• When you install the rear cover, make sure to attach the
metal plates [3] to the bottom of the rear cover.

reverse.
[3] a15xt3c021ca
G-269
30.2.6 Rear cover/Lt

(1) Procedure
[3] [4] 1. Remove the deodorant unit. (Refer to G.30.2.18 Deodorant unit)
2. Remove 8 screws [1], and then remove the rear cover/Lt [2].
Note
• When you reinstall it, be sure to place it with the
projection [3] put into the notch of the upper cover/RrLt
[4], and with its bottom [5] put on the metal frame [6].

reverse.
[1] [2] [1]
[5] [6] a15xt3c022ca
30.2.7 Left cover

(1) Procedure
[2] [3] 1. Loosen 2 screws [1].
reverse.
[1] a15xt3c023ca
G-270
30.2.8 Relay conveyance gear cover/Fr

(1) Procedure
[2] 1. Open the relay conveyance door.
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the relay conveyance gear
cover/Fr [2].
reverse.
Note
• When you reinstall it, be sure to put the claw of the plate
in the hole of the relay conveyance gear cover/Fr.
[1] a15xt3c024ca
30.2.9 Relay conveyance gear cover/Rr

(1) Procedure
[2] 1. Open the relay conveyance door.
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the relay conveyance gear
cover/Rr [2].
reverse.
Note
• When you reinstall it, be sure to put it in the hole of the
relay conveyance gear cover/Rr.
[1] a15xt3c025ca
30.2.10 Pellet supply cover

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the deodorant unit. (Refer to G.30.2.18 Deodorant unit)
RrRt)
3. Remove the relay conveyance gear cover/Rr. (Refer to G.30.2.9
Relay conveyance gear cover/Rr)
4. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the magnet catch/Rr [2].
[1] [2] a15xt3c026ca
G-271
5. Loosen the screw [1].

[4]
7. Open the pellet supply door [3]. Remove the pellet supply cover [5]
in the arrow-marked direction [6] carefully so as not to damage the
wire harness [4].
Note
• When you remove or installing the glue supply cover, be
careful not to cut or damage the wire binding [4].

reverse.
[5] [6] [3]
[2]
[1] a15xt3c027ca
30.2.11 SC cover/Fr
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the relay conveyance gear cover/Fr. (Refer to G.30.2.8
[2]
Relay conveyance gear cover/Fr)
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the magnet catch/Fr [2].
[1]
a15xt3c028ca
G-272
3. Remove the screw [1] and remove the SC cover/Fr [2] to the
[4] [3]
Note
• When you reinstall it, be sure to put 2 claws on the upper
side [3] into the holes [4], and put the claw on the lower
side [5] to the inside of the metal frame.

reverse.
[2]
[1]
[6] [5] a15xt3c029ca
30.2.12 SC cover/Up
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the pellet supply cover. (Refer to G.30.2.19 Pellet supply
[1]
unit)
2. Remove the SC cover/Fr. (Refer to G.30.2.11 SC cover/Fr)
3. Slightly lift up the circled part [2] to remove 4 screws [1] and
remove the SC cover/Up [3] in the arrow-marked direction [4].
reverse.
[3] [4]
[1] [2] a15xt3c030ca
G-273
30.2.13 Upper cover/FrRt

(1) Procedure
[4] [2] [1] 1. Remove the PB left unit. (Refer to G.30.2.23 PB left unit)
2. Open the upper door [1].
4. Pull the left part of the upper cover/FrRt [3] in the arrow-marked
direction [4]. Then release the cover from the projection [5] and
disconnect it from the connector [6].
Note
• When you reinstall it, be sure to put the connector [6]
under the upper cover/FrRt [3] properly. Be careful not to
let the cables get caught between the cover and the frame.

reverse.
[3]
[6] [5] a15xt3c031ca
30.2.14 Upper cover/FrLt

(1) Procedure
2. Remove the relay conveyance gear cover/Fr. (Refer to G.30.2.8
Relay conveyance gear cover/Fr)
4. Open the relay conveyance door.
6. Remove 7 screws [4] and then remove the upper cover/FrLt [5].
Note
[5] [4] harness [6].

reverse.
[3] [2] [1] [6] a15xt3c032ca
30.2.15 Upper cover/RrRt

(1) Procedure
2. Remove 4 screws [2] and then remove the upper cover/RrRt [3].
reverse.
[2] a15xt3c033ca
G-274
30.2.16 Upper cover/RrLt

(1) Procedure
2. Remove the relay conveyance gear cover/Rr. (Refer to G.30.2.9
[1]
Relay conveyance gear cover/Rr)
4. Remove 7 screws [1] and then remove the upper cover/RrLt [2].
reverse.
[2]
[1] a15xt3c034ca
30.2.17 Upper cover/Md

(1) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Remove the PB left unit. (Refer to G.30.2.23 PB left unit)
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the upper cover/Md [2].
reverse.
a15xt3c035ca
30.2.18 Deodorant unit

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the exhaust filter assy [1].
a15xt3c003ca
G-275
[1] [2] 2. Remove 3 screws [1] and tilt the deodorant unit [2]. Disconnect the
connector [3] and then remove the deodorant unit [2].
Note
• When you reinstall it, be sure to put 2 claws [2] in the
holes [5].
[4] [5]
[3] a15xt3c036ca

[3] reverse.
Note
[2] • When you connect the loop connector [1] to the connector
[2], the operational check with no error indication without
connecting the deodorant unit is enabled. After the
operation, be sure to remove the loop connector [1] and
put it inside [4] of the rear cover/Lt [3].
[4] • After you install it, be sure to check that the deodorant
fans/1 (FM97) and the deodorant fans/2 (FM98) of the
deodorant unit are rotating.
[1]
a15xt3c037ca
G-276
30.2.19 Pellet supply unit

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the rear cover/Rt. (Refer to G.30.2.5 Rear cover/Rt)
2. Remove the pellet supply cover. (Refer to G.30.2.10 Pellet supply
cover)
[2] a15xt3c045ca
G-277
[2] [3] [1] 5. Loosen 2 screws [1].

6. Remove 2 screws [2] and remove the pellet supply unit [3] upward.
Note
• When you remove the unit, be careful not to spill the
pellet.

reverse.
[2] a15xt3c046ca
30.2.20 Glue tank unit

CAUTION
• The glue tank unit is hot after the deactivation of the main power switch (SW1) or the sub power switch (SW2) of the main body.
To prevent burn injuries, perform the maintenance work after the temperature of the unit downs.
G-278
(1) Procedure
[2]
RrRt)
3. Remove the screw [1], disconnect 2 connectors [2], and then
remove the suction unit [3].
5. Remove the C-clip [5] and pull out the pin [6] straight up to release
the coupling arm [7].
[3]
[1]
[4] [5] [6] [7]

a15xt3c047ca
[2] [1] 6. Remove 2 screws [1] and then uncouple the belt coupling bracket
[2].
a075f2c119ca
G-279
7. Pull out the glue tank unit [1] and remove 4 screws [2].
[2] [2]
Note
• When you move the glue tank unit, be sure to hold it by
the metal frame [3] on the right side of the unit.
• When you remove the screw [2], be careful to avoid an
injury from sharp metal edges around the screw.
8. Pull out the glue tank unit [1].

9. Remove the roller [5] from the rail [4] and remove the glue tank
unit.
reverse.
Note
• After you install the glue tank unit, make a test print.
Check that no glue is squeezed out of the top and bottom
edges of the created book and no pages come off the
cover when you open the book.
[4] [5] [1] [3] a15xt3c048ca
[1] Note
• Never loosen or tighten the 2 screws because they are
keeping the levelness and the vertical position of the glue
tank unit.
a15xt3c049ca
30.2.21 SC unit
(1) Procedure
[2] [3] 1. Remove the PB left unit. (Refer to G.30.2.23 PB left unit)
2. Remove the upper cover/Md. (Refer to G.30.2.17 Upper cover/Md)
3. Remove the pellet supply unit. (Refer to G.30.2.19 Pellet supply
unit)
4. Remove the SC cover/Up. (Refer to G.30.2.12 SC cover/Up)
5. Remove the upper cover/FrRt. (Refer to G.30.2.13 Upper cover/
FrRt)
6. Disconnect 5 relay connectors [1].
7. Remove the wires [3] that are connected to the SC unit [2] from
saddles.
[1] a15xt3c050ca
G-280
[1]
9. Remove 2 screws [2] and remove the wire [3] and the knob [4].
Then remove the belt [5].
Note
• After you install the belt [5], check that the lug belt is
properly installed with no slack and turns smoothly when
the knob is turned.
10. Hold the metal frames [6] on the rear and the front side of the unit,
and remove the SC unit [7] to the arrowed direction.
[6] [7] [6]
[1]
[4]
[5] [3] [2]

a15xt3c051ca

reverse.
Note
• When the SC unit [1] is removed, the lock arm [2] is
released from the stopper [3]. Therefore, when you install
the SC unit, be sure to put the lock arm [2] under the
stopper [3] while you lift and tilt the unit in the direction of
the arrow [4].
[2] [4] [3]
[1]
a075f2c042ca
G-281
30.2.22 Clamp unit

(1) Procedure
[1]
2. Remove the pellet supply unit. (Refer to G.30.2.19 Pellet supply
unit)
4. Remove the E-ring [2] and pull out the pin [3] down to release the
coupling arm [4].
5. Release the wiring harness [5] between the connector [1] and the
coupling arm [4] from the saddles.
[3] [2]
[4] [5] a15xt3c052ca
G-282
[2] [3] 6. Pull out the clamp unit [1] carefully watching the wire binding and
the coupling arm on the rear of the unit.
7. Remove the 2 screws [2] and then remove the lock bracket [3].
9. Hold the left metal frame and the right metal frame [5] to lift the
clamp unit [1]. Release the 4 notches [6] from the hooks [7] and
remove the clamp unit.
Note
• When you reinstall the clamp unit, make sure that the 4
hooks [7] are properly fitted in the notches [6] of the unit.

reverse.
Note
[5] [4]
• After you install the clamp unit, make a test print and
binding to check that the cover and inside papers are
neatly aligned without skewing.
[1]
[6] [7]
a15xt3c053ca
30.2.23 PB left unit

(1) Procedure
[1] 2. Remove the rear cover/Lt. (Refer to G.30.2.6 Rear cover/Lt)
5. Remove 2 screws (with washer) [1].
[1]
a15xt3c054ca
G-283
a15xt3c055ca
a15xt3c056ca
[1] 8. Loosen 4 screws [1].
a15xt3c057ca
G-284
9. Remove the screws [1] at 2 positions, 2 each.

Note
• As the screw [1] is longer than other screws, be careful
when you reinstall.
[1]
a15xt3c058ca
[1] 10. Remove the clamps [1] at 4 positions.
[1] a15xt3c059ca
G-285
[2] [7] [1] [6] [3] 11. Rotate the PB left unit [2] around the wiring harness section [1] on
the rear side and remove it from the PB right unit [3].
Note
• The PB left unit [2] is rotated up to about 90 degrees.
• When you rotate the PB left unit [2], be sure to rotate it
around the wiring harness section [1] and be careful not
to damage the wiring harness.
• When you reinstall it, put the bottom of the PB left unit [5]
on the brackets [4] on the lower side and then put the pins
[6] on the upper side into the holes [7].

reverse.
[5] [4] a15xt3c060ca
30.2.24 Book lift wire

(1) Procedure
[3] [1] 1. Perform the I/O check in the service mode in the following order of
the output check code. Deactivate the sub power switch (SW2)
and the main power switch (SW1) after you move the carriage
section to its lowest position.
"77-55", "77-45", "77-58", "77-61"
4. Release the wiring harness [1] from the saddles and remove 2
screws [2] and then remove the wiring harness bracket [3].
[2] a15xt3c066ca
G-286
[3] [2] [3] 5. Remove 3 screws [1] and remove the 4 mounting brackets [2] on
the front and rear of the book stock unit.
Note
• When you reinstall, route the book lift wires/Fr [3] and/Rr
[1] [1] [4] between 2 screws and a screw [1], and secure them
with the mounting brackets [2].
6. Loosen the 2 screws [6] of the tension bracket/Fr [5].

Note
• When you install the tension bracket/Fr [5], be sure to
[5] [6]
tighten the screws [6] while you pull down the bracket by
the specified tension.
Standard value: 5kgf
7. Loosen the 2 screws [8] of the tension bracket/Rr [7].

Note
• When you install the tension bracket/Rr [7], be sure to
tighten the screws [8] while you pull down the bracket by
the specified tension.
Standard value: 5kgf
[4]
[1]
[1]
[8] [7] [2]

a15xt3c038ca
G-287
[11] 8. Remove the E-ring [1], pulley [2], pin [3], and the wire end [4].
Then remove the book lift wire/Fr [5].
[4]
Note
[2] • Install the book lift wire/Fr [5] as following. Route the wire
so that it comes out of the lower right [6] of the pulley [2].
Loop the wire over the pulley [7], then loop it over the [8],
[1] [9], [10] pulleys in that order. Then wind the wire 6 times
[5]
counterclockwise [11] over the pulley [2], and put the wire
end [4] into the pulley.
[3]
[7]
[2]
[6]
[5]
[9]
[2]
[8]
[10]
a15xt3c039ca
[5] 9. Remove the E-ring [1], then remove the washers [2] and [3], spring
[4], and the gear [5].
[3] 10. Remove the coupling [6] and the pin [7].
[2]
[4]
[1]
[6]
[7]
a15xt3c040ca
G-288
11. Remove the E-ring [1], pulley [2], pin [3], and the wire end [4].
[4] [2] [1] [3] Then remove the book lift wire/Rr [5].
Note
• Install the book lift wire/Rr [5] as following. Route the wire
so that it comes out of the lower left [6] of the pulley [2].
[5] Loop the wire over the pulley [7], then loop it over the [8],
[9], [10] pulleys in that order. Then wind the wire 6 times
counterclockwise [11] over the pulley [2], and put the wire
[11] end [4] into the pulley.
reverse.
[5]
[6]
[9]
[8]
[10]
a15xt3c041ca
30.2.25 Cart wire

(1) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the mounting plate/Rr [2].
Note
• When you reinstall it, be sure to open the registration
plate/Fr [3] and the registration plate/Rr [4] fully and then
install the mounting plate/Rr [2].
2. Remove 2 screws [5] and then remove the mounting plate/Fr [6].
Note
• When you reinstall it, temporarily hold the mounting plate/
Fr [6] and hook the tension gauge on the hole [7]. Then
pull it in the arrow-marked direction [8] with the standard
[3] [4] value and then fully tighten it.
Standard value: 1kgf to 1.5kgf
• Check that the wires are not crossed or they do not
contact the metal frame.
[8] [7] [5] [6]

a15xt3c061ca
G-289
[1] [2] [4] [3] [6] [5] 3. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the mounting metal fitting/
Rr [2].
4. Remove the wire [3] from the pulley [4] and release it from the
saddles [5].
Note
• When you install the wire [3] on the pulley [4], be sure to
hook it on the pulley [6] with the mounting plate/Rr on the
upper side.
5. Remove the screw [7] and remove the mounting metal fitting/Fr [8].
6. Remove the wire [9] from the pulley [10] and release it from the
saddles [11].
Note
• When you install the wire [9] on the pulley [10], be sure to
hook it on the pulley [12] with the mounting plate/Rr on
the upper side.
[10] [7]
[8]
[11] [9]
[12]
a15xt3c062ca
[2] [4] [3] [1] 7. Remove the screw [1] and release the wire.
Note
• When you reinstall it, be sure to put the edge part [3]
between the projections [4].

reverse.
a15xt3c063ca
30.2.26 Conveyance unit/Lw

(1) Procedure
[7] [5] [7] 1. Disconnect 3 connectors [1] and release the wire binding from 6
saddles.
2. Remove the screw [2] and slide the coupling [3] into the arrow-
marked direction.
4. Release the conveyance unit/Lw [6] from the hooks [5] and remove
[4] [4]
the unit.
Note
• When you reinstall, be sure to align it to the projection [7].

reverse.
[6] [1]
[2]
[3]
a075f2c063ca
G-290
30.2.27 Relay conveyance unit

(1) Procedure
[3] [1] [2]
2. Remove the upper cover/FrLt. (Refer to G.30.2.14 Upper cover/
FrLt)
3. Remove the upper cover/RrLt. (Refer to G.30.2.16 Upper cover/
RrLt)
5. Remove the E-rings [1] at 2 positions and remove the spacer [2],
and then release the arm [3].
Note
• When you release the arm [3], the conveyance guide plate
[4] falls. Hold it by your hand during the operation.
[4]
6. Put down the conveyance guide plate [4].

[5] a15xt3c064ca

9. Hold 2 shafts [2] and remove the relay conveyance unit [3].
Note
• When you remove the relay conveyance unit [3], insert a
thin driver into the hole [5] so that the relay conveyance
[6] door [4] does not close. When you move down the relay
conveyance door [4] lower than the horizontal position,
the gear [6] comes off from the dumper gear [7] and the
[7] dumper adjustment is misaligned.

reverse.
[5] [4] [2] [1]
[1] [3]
[2] a15xt3c065ca
G-291
30.2.28 Cover paper tray

CAUTION
• As the cover paper tray is heavy, be sure to perform the following work with 2 people.
Note
• When you lift the cover paper tray, be sure to hold it by the specified positions. Holding it at positions other than those positions
specified damage the tray, thus resulting in a paper feed jam.
(1) Procedure
2. Slightly push up the cover paper tray lock lever [2] with a
screwdriver or a similar tool and pull out the cover paper tray [3].
[2]
[1]
[3]
a15xt3c042ca
3. Remove the 2 stopper screws [2], 1 for each right rail and the left
rail [1] and pull out the cover paper tray.
[2] [1]
a075f2c065ca
G-292
4. Remove 4 screws [1], 2 for each left rail and the right rail, hold the
cover paper tray [2] by the specified positions [5], and remove it
straight up.
Note
• When you install the cover paper tray, make sure that the
4 knobs [3] on the rails are properly fitted in the notches
[4] of the cover paper tray.
• When you lift the cover paper tray, be sure to hold the
specified positions [5] by 2 people. Do not hold the part
[6] as the part can easily become deformed, which
adversely affects the paper feed resulting in a paper jam.
[5] [1] [6] [2] 5. Reinstall the preceding parts following the removal steps in
reverse.
[2] [1] [5]

[3] [4]
a075f2c066ca
G-293
30.2.29 Cover paper lift wire

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the cover paper tray. (Refer to G.30.2.28 Cover paper
[2] tray)
3. Disconnect the connector [2], and remove the cover paper tray
front cover [3].
[1] [1] [3]
a075f2c067ca
[5] [3] [2] [1] 4. Remove the E-ring [1], and remove the knob [2] and the belt [3].
5. Remove 6 screws [4] and remove the gear cover [5].
[4]
a075f2c068ca
[1] 6. Remove the E-ring [1].
a075f2c069ca
G-294
[3] [2] 7. Change the position of the pulley [1], and pull out the wire ends of
the lift wire/Fr1 [2] and the lift wire/Fr2 [3] from each hole of the
shaft [4].
Note
• The wire end of the shorter wire, lift wire/Fr2 [3], must be
inserted into the shaft hole that is near the frame of the
[1]
cover paper tray. The wire end of the shorter wire, lift wire/
Fr2 [3], must be inserted into the shaft hole that is near
the frame of the cover paper tray.
• When you install the pulley, lift the cover paper lift plate
slightly to loosen the wires and insert the wire ends one
by one into the shaft holes. Then secure them with the
pulley [1].
[4]
a075f2c070ca
8. Remove the E-rings [1], 1 each, and then remove the wire cover
[2] [2].
9. Remove the cover paper lift wire/Fr1 [4] and the cover paper lift
wire/Fr2 [5] from each pulley [3].
[4] Note
• When you install the wires, make sure that the wires are
[1]
properly routed inside the wire covers [2] and are not
[5]
[3] crossed each other.
[4] [5]
a075f2c071ca
10. Pull out each wire end [2] through each hole of the cover paper lift
plate arm [1].
Note
• When you pull out the wire, pull it out carefully so as not
to damage it with sharp metal edges.
[2]
[1]
a075f2c072ca
G-295
11. Remove 6 screws [1] and remove the gear cover [2].
[1]
[1] [2]
[1]
[2]
a075f2c073ca
[3] [2] 12. Remove the E-ring [1] and the gear [2].
Note
• When you remove the gear [2], be careful not to drop and
lose the bearing [3].
[1] a075f2c074ca
[3] [4] 13. Remove the bearing [1] and the E-ring [2], and then remove the
gear [3].
Note
• When you remove the gear [3], be careful not to drop the
pin [4].
[1] [2] a075f2c075ca
[1] 14. Remove the E-ring [1] and the gear [2].
Note
• When you remove the gear [2], be careful not to drop the
bearing [3].
[3] [2] a075f2c076ca
G-296
[1] [3] 15. Remove the E-ring [1] and the gear [2].
Note
• When you remove the gear [2], be careful not to drop and
lose the pin [3].
[2] a075f2c077ca
[1] [2] [3] 16. Remove the E-ring [1].

17. Pull out the cover paper lift wire/Rr1 [2] and the cover paper lift
wire/Rr2 [3] from the shaft holes in the same manner as step 7.
a075f2c078ca
[2] [1] 18. Remove the cover paper lift wire/Rr1 [1] and the cover paper lift
wire/Rr2 [2] in the same manner as step 8 to step 10.
reverse.
Note
• When you pull out the wire end [3] of the cover paper lift
wire/Rr2 [2], lift the cover paper lift plate until the cover
paper lift plate arm [4] appears.
• The wire/Fr is gray in color and the wire/Rr is black.
• When the installation is completed, make sure that the lift
plate is horizontal.
[3] [4]
a075f2c079ca
30.2.30 Binding mode procedure with manual operating function

• When a problem occurs at the clamp section or the cover paper table section, the binding can be checked with the manual operation.
Note
• Disconnect the connector (CN5) on the PB control board (PBCB) after the check. (Manual operation forbidden state)
G-297
(1) Procedure
2. Connect the connector [2] to the connector (CN5) [1] on the PB
control board (PBCB).
[2] [1] a15xt3c043ca
3. Press the button/1 [1].

[1] [2] [3] 4. Open the front door and pull out the clamp unit.
5. Place the inside paper in the clamp unit.
6. Adjust the clamp alignment plate/Fr and the clamp alignment plate/
Rr to the inside paper edge on the shorter side by hand.
8. Place the clamp unit.
Note
• Place the clamp unit gently. When you place it roundly,
the misalignment of inside papers occurs because the
clamp alignment plate is widened.
9. Close the front door.

Note
• Disconnect the connector (CN5) on the PB control board
(PBCB) after the check.
a15xt3c044ca
30.2.31 Multi feed detection boards/S (MFDBS) and /R (MFDBR)

Note
same time.
• When the multi feed detection board is replaced, be sure to conduct the adjustment in replacing the multi feed detection board.
(Refer to I.4.7.7 Adjustment when you replace the cover paper multi feed detection board (PB))
G-298
(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the conveyance unit/Lw [1]. (Refer to G.30.2.26
Conveyance unit/Lw)
2. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the cover of the multi feed
detection board/S (MFDBS) [3].
[2]
[3] a075f2c095ca

[1] [2]
S (MFDBS) [3].
[3]
a075f2c096ca
5. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the cover of the multi feed
detection board/R (MFDBR) [2].
[1]
[2] a075f2c097ca
G-299

[1] [2]
reverse.
[3]
a075f2c098ca
(2) Note for installing the multi feed detection board/S (MFDBS) and the multi feed detection board/R (MFDBR)
• The multi feed detection board/S (MFDBS) and the multi feed
[2]
detection board/R (MFDBR) are installed on the same type board.
Be careful not to confuse one with the other when you install them.
• Be sure to confirm the marking on the board when you install it.
Multi feed detection board/S (MFDBS) [1]: 56UA
Multi feed detection board/R (MFDBR) [2]: 15AG
• The connector shape is different for the multi feed detection board/
S (MFDBS) and the multi feed detection board/R (MFDBR). So,
even if it is installed, the connector cannot be connected.
[1] a075f2c099ca
G-300
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 31. GP-501
31. GP-501
31.1 Centering punched holes
Die Set Position Cradle Adjustment, The die set position cradle is set in the factory; however, because of the punched-hole spacing on the PB
die sets, there is a minimal amount of paper on each edge of the punched paper. The die set position cradle may have to be fine adjusted to
center the punched-hole pattern in the paper. Listed below are the step-by-step instructions to adjust the die set to the proper position.
1. The punched-hole alignment must be checked on a piece of
punched paper. Fold the punched sheet of paper in half [1] and the
[1] punched-holes should be aligned evenly along the edge and
[2]
centered between the ends [2]. If the punched-holes are not
aligned, then the die set cradle must be adjusted to align the
punched holes.
Note
• The paper path is always constant, if the holes are not
centered, you must adjust the die set cradle.
2. The two back covers on the GP-501 Punch must be removed to
access the die set position cradle [1]. (Refer to G.31.3.3 Removing
the Rear Cover.)
3. Before adjusting the die set position cradle, you must first note what
direction the die set cradle [1] must move.
G-301
4. Loosen the lock-down screw [1].

5. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, turn the adjustment screw [2]
clockwise or counter-clockwise to move the die set position cradle.
6. Observe the punched paper. If the punched-holes are too close to

the rear of the machine, then you must turn the adjustment screw
counter-clockwise [1].
7. If the punched-holes are too close to the front of the machine, then
you must turn the adjustment screw clockwise [1].
Note
• Seven full turns of the adjustment screw result in a 1/4"
(6.35 mm) change in the punched hole position.
8. Before tightening the lock-down screw [1], tilt or bias the assembly
towards the bottom of the machine [2] and tighten the lock-down
screw. This will ensure positive engagement between the locking
lever and the die set.
9. Run a test sample of punched paper and recheck paper alignment.
Re-adjust if necessary.
G-302
31.2 Door latch

31.2.1 Door latch check
(1) Procedure
1. Ensure the door latch holds the door closed and that the activating
bracket tab [1] depresses the door switch [2]. The tab should press
the switch button just so that it is close to bottoming out.
31.2.2 Door Latch Adjustment

(1) To adjust the door latch:
2. Loosen the two adjustment screws [1] on the door latch.
3. Do one of the following.
• To move the door in, move the latch towards the front of the
door.
• To move the door out, move the latch away from the front of
the door.
4. Tighten the 2 screws [1] and close the door.
5. Test its operation.
31.2.3 Door Latch and Switch Replacement

(1) To replace the door latch:
G-303
(2) To replace the door switch:

3. Unplug connectors from switch [2].
31.3 Preparing the GP-501 punch for service

31.3.1 Preparing the GP-501 punch for service
Most service requires that the GP-501 Punch be separated from the printer and finisher and the rear cover be removed.
WARNING
• Disconnect the unit from power and maintain the cord in your possession. Failure to observe this warning can result in injury or
electrical shock.
(1) Procedure
• Unplug the unit from power.
• Disconnect the communication cable
• Empty Chip Bin
31.3.2 Separating the Punch From the Printer

Follow the instructions as described in Installation Manual.
31.3.3 Removing the Rear Cover

Separate the punch from the printer and finisher first. (Refer to G.31.3.2 Separating the Punch From the Printer.)
Note
• It is not necessary nor recommended that you remove the top cover.
(1) Procedure
(2) Tool Required

• Phillips screwdriver or 1/4" hex head nut driver
(3) To remove the rear cover:

1. Remove the 5 screws on the entrance side [1] and remove the 6
rear cover screws [2].
2. Slide the cover out from under the top cover. Do not remove the
top cover.
31.4 Leveling and aligning to the printer

The punch must be level and in line with the printer and finisher. If the printer and GP-501 Punch are moved or relocated, the system must be
re-leveled.
Note
• It is important that the punch is not twisted or skewed. It must be level front to back and side to side.
G-304
(1) Procedure
Raise or lower the GP-501 Punch’s castors to level it.
(2) Tool Required

• 2 3/8" open ended wrenches
• Level
(3) To level the punch:

1. Remove the rear cover and put the punch back in line with the
printer and finisher.
2. Place the level on a flat surface of the top [1] and determine which
castor needs adjustment.
3. Loosen the locking nut [1] of the castor.

4. From below the frame and at the top of the castor [2], adjust the
height of the castor as needed.
5. Check the level and adjust as necessary.
6. Tighten the locking nut [1].
7. Ensure punch is level and in line with main body and finisher.
8. Install rear cover.
G-305
32. GP-502
The descriptions of the disassembling and reassembling procedure GP-502 are mentioned in the GP-502 service manual.
G-306
G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 33. COMMERCIALLY
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L AVAILABLE PARTS
33. COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE PARTS

33.1 Reinstalling the status indicator light
33.1.1 Configuration
[2] [1]
[1] Screw (M4 x 8, 2 pieces)*1 [2] Status indicator light
*1 Do not use the screws whose lengths are more than M4 x 8 because they damage the HDD.
33.1.2 Connector
(1) Connector position
[1]
[1] CN495 -
(2) Connector specifications

Connector Pin Signal name Description Output timing Type of signal
Number
495 1 PAT1_DR Light ON signal L signal output when Open collector
the printing available
2 PAT2_DR L signal output while
in the scanning or the
printing operation
3 PAT3_DR L signal output when
an abnormal stop
occurs due to jams,
no paper, or no toner
4 PAT4_DR L signal output when
the toner supply
message is displayed
5 24V 24V DC source At all times 24V, 500mA
6 GND Ground - -
G-307
33.1.3 Procedure
[2] [1] [3] 1. Remove the upper cover/Rr2. (Refer to G.3.2.6 Top cover/Fr, top
cover/Rt, top cover/Rr1, top cover/Rr2, top cover/Lt, arm cover/Fr,
arm cover/Rr)
2. Remove the cable pull out cover [2] and the status indicator light
installation cover [3] of the upper cover/Rr2 [1].
[2] [1] 3. Pass the wiring harness [1] of the status indicator light through the
hole in the cable pull out cover [2].
[1] [4] [2] [3] 4. Pass the wiring harness [1] of the status indicator light through the
hole in the main body [2].
5. Connect the connector [4] of the status indicator light to CN495 [3].
Note
• Pull the wiring harness [1] to the position where it does not
touch and damage the plate.
[1] [2] [3] 6. Install the upper cover/Rr2 [1].

7. Install the status indicator light [3] using 2 screws [2].
G-308
33.2 Key counter (KCT)

33.2.1 Connector
[2]
[1]
[1] CN493 [2] Jumper connector (CN493R)
33.2.2 Procedure
[2] [1] 1. Remove the key counter cover [2] of the upper cover/Rr2 [1], and
connect to the inside connector.
G-309
H CLEANING/LUBRICATION > 1. CLEANING/LUBRICATION
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L PROCEDURES
H CLEANING/LUBRICATION
1. CLEANING/LUBRICATION PROCEDURES
The descriptions of the cleaning and the lubrication are mentioned in the maintenance section of each device.
H-1
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 1. CHECKPOINTS
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING
1. CHECKPOINTS
1.1 Checking before you start work
When you conduct the claims in the field, it is necessary to check the following points first:
1. Are the power supply and voltage secured in accordance with the specifications?
2. Did you properly install the ground line to the power supply?
3. Any equipment that repeatedly consumes a lot of electricity is connected to the same power supply? (for example: Electric noise sources
such as elevator and air conditioner)
4. Are environmental conditions suitable for the machine?
• High temperature and high humidity, direct sunlight, air ventilation, and so on.
• Levelness of the location on which the machine is installed.
5. Does the cause of poor images lie in the original itself?
6. Is density selected properly?
7. Is the original glass stained?
8. Is proper paper used for copy?
9. Are copy consumables replaced with new ones at their life? (for example: Developer, drum, cleaning blade, and so on)
10. Is toner filled?
1.2 Checkpoints when you conduct the on-site service

When you repair the machine, be sure to pay due attention to the following items.
1. Be sure to unplug the power plug from the power outlet. Also, when you operate the machine during the power distribution, be careful of the
scan of the exposure unit and be sure not to get caught by the gear.
2. The fusing section is hot. Be careful not to get burned for handling it.
3. The developing unit is magnetized strongly. Be careful not to bring a watch and an instrument near to the unit.
4. Be careful not to damage the drum with a tool.
5. Be careful not to touch IC directly with bare hands.
I-1
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 2. UTILITY
2. UTILITY
2.1 List of utility menus
This machine is provided with setting menu for various adjustments/settings. Data adjusted/set with this mode is stored in NVRAM board (NRB).
Note
• For details on the utility, refer to "User's guide."
• Some items on the following list are not displayed at the default setting.
• In order to display items that are not displayed at the default settings, change the optional configurations or each setting.
2.1.1 Hierarchy
• 01 Scan Address Register
• 01 Address Edit
• 02 E-mail Title Setting
• 03 E-mail Text Setting
• 02 User Setting
• 01 System Setting
• 01 Language Setting
• 02 Unit Setting
• 03 Feed Tray Setting
• 01 Paper Setting
• 02 Auto Tray Selection Setting
• 03 Type Selection for Auto Paper
• 04 Dehumidify Fan Heater Setting
• 04 Reset Setting
• 01 Auto Reset Setting
• 02 Job Reset Setting
• 05 Default Screen Setting
• 07 Set Zoom Ratio Setting
• 07 Power Save Setting
• 01 Power Save Function Setting
• 02 ErP Setting
• 03 Energy-saving Mode for Monochrome
• 08 Date/Time Setting
• 09 Operation/Info.Sound Setting
• 01 Volume Setting
• 02 Information sound item setting
• 10 Key Response Time
• 11 Shortcut Key Register
• 01 Application Setting
• 02 Quality Adjustment (copy)
• 03 Quality Adjustment (scan)
• 04 Quality Adjustment Area Setting
• 05 Output Setting
• 12 Service Port Device Setting
• 13 Mouse Setting
• 02 Initial Setting
• 01 Copy Initial Setting
• 02 Scan Initial Setting
• 03 Common Setting
• 04 Copy Setting
• 05 Scan Setting
• 06 Printer Setting
• 01 Gray Text Outline
• 02 Select Prior Output Tray
• 07 Image Quality Setting
• 01 Original Density Shift
• 02 ACS Adjustment
• 08 Password Change
• 03 Administrator Setting
• 01 Power Save Setting
• 01 Power Save Function Setting
• 02 ErP Setting
• 03 Energy-saving Mode for Monochrome
• 03 Weekly Timer Setting
• 01 Weekly Timer ON/OFF Setting
• 02 Time Setting
• 03 Date Setting
• 04 Select Time for Power Save
• 05 Password Non-Business Hours
• 04 Restrict User Access
• 01 Lock/Delete Mode Memory
• 01 Copy Mode Memory
• 02 Scan Mode Memory
• 02 Change Restrict Setting
• 03 Scan Restrict Setting
I-2
• 04 Sample Print Restrict

• 05 Expert Adjustment
• 01 Auto Background Density Adjustment
• 02 Erase Correction
• 01 Non-Image Area Erase
• 02 Erase Operation Setting
• 03 ADF Frame Erase
• 03 Printer Adjustment
• 01 Restart Timing Adjustment
• 02 Centering Adjustment
• 03 FD-Mag. Adjustment
• 04 CD-Mag. Adjustment
• 05 Lead Edge Erase Adjustment
• 06 Registration Loop Adj.
• 07 Pre-registration Adjustment
• 08 JAM Setting for Print Job
• 04 Finisher Adjustment
• 01 Staple Finisher Adjustment
• 01 Stapler(Main) Adjustment
• 01 Staple Position Adjustment
• 02 Staple Paper Width Adjustment
• 03 FD alignment plate adjustment
• 04 Exit Guide Unit Paper Width
• 05 Rewind Paddle Descent Adj.
• 06 Rewind Function Operation
• 07 Upper Gripper Operation
• 08 Output Alignment Operation
• 02 Stapler(Fold) Adjustment
• 01 Fold & staple pitch adjustment
• 02 Fold & staple paper width adjustment
• 03 Fold&Staple Staple Pos. Adj.
• 04 Fold&Staple Fold Pos. Adj.
• 05 Half-Fold Fold Position Adj.
• 06 Tri-Fold Adjustment
• 01 Tri-Fold Position Adjustment
• 02 Double Fold Plate Adjustment
• 07 Half-fold strength adjustment
• 03 Staple finisher (punch) adjustment
• 01 Vertical position adjustment (CD)
• 02 Horizontal position adjustment (FD)
• 03 Registration adjustment
• 04 Staple finisher (PI) adjustment
• 01 PI Registration Adjustment
• 02 Multi folder adjustment
• 01 Multi folder (punch) adjustment
• 01 Paper width adjustment
• 02 Punch Vertical Position Adj.
• 01 2-Hole Punch
• 02 3-Hole Punch
• 02 Multi folder (fold) adjustment
• 01 Half-Fold Position Adj.
• 02 Tri-Fold-in Pos. Adj.
• 03 Tri-Fold-out Pos. Adj.
• 04 Double Parallel Pos. Adj.
• 05 Z-Fold Position Adj.
• 06 Gate Position Adj.
• 03 Stacker Adjustment
• 01 Paper Width Adjustment
• 02 Paper Length Adjustment
• 04 Saddle Stitcher Adjustment
• 01 Staple Center Position
• 02 Staple Paper Width Adjustment
• 03 Staple Pitch Adjustment
• 05 Tri-Fold Position Adj.
• 06 Fold Paper Width Adj.
• 07 Trimming Adjustment
• 01 2 Position Staple
• 02 4 Position Staple(Front 2)
• 03 4 Position Staple(Rear 2)
• 02 Staple Paper Width Adj.
I-3
• 05 Fold Skew Adjustment

• 08 Fore-edge Trimming Adj.
• 09 Parallel Trimming Adjustment
• 10 2-Side Slitting Adjustment
• 11 Crease Position Adjustment
• 01 Half-Fold Crease Position
• 02 Tri-Fold Crease Position
• 03 PB Cover Crease Position
• 12 Flattening a Fold (Strength)
• 13 Flattening a Fold (Freq.)
• 14 Staple Offset Adjustment
• 15 Staple Tip Adjustment
• 05 Perfect Binder Adjustment
• 01 Cover Trimming Adjustment
• 02 Cover Lead Edge Adj.
• 03 Spine Corner Forming Pos.
• 04 Glue Start Position
• 05 Glue Finish Position
• 06 Temperature Adjustment
• 07 Sub Compile CD Width Adj.
• 08 Clamp CD Width Adjustment
• 09 Cover Up/Down CD Width Adj.
• 10 Clamp FD Position Adj.
• 06 Relay Stacker Adjustment
• 01 Fold & Staple Stopper Adjustment
• 02 Half-Fold Stopper Adjustment
• 03 Punch Adjustment
• 01 Vertical Position Adj.
• 02 Horizontal Position Adj.
• 03 Registration Adjustment
• 04 Paper Edge Detect Sensor Adjustment
• 05 2 Pos. Staple Pitch Adj.
• 06 Post Inserter Tray Size
• 07 Output Quantity Limit
• 08 Curl Adjustment
• 05 Scan Adjustment
• 06 Process Adjustment
• 01 Front & Back Density
• 02 Maximum Density Adjustment
• 03 Max. Density Auto Adj. (RU)
• 04 Development Output Setting
• 07 Quality Adjustment
• 01 Printer Gamma Offset Adj.
• 02 Printer Gamma Offset Auto.
• 03 Printer Gamma Sensor Adj.
• 04 Stabilization Adj. Setting
• 05 Custom Screen
• 06 Controller Image Compression
• 07 Printer Gamma Offset Auto. (RU)
• 08 Printer Gamma Sensor Adj. (RU)
• 09 Tone Curve for Each Tag Set.
• 08 Execute Adjust Operation
• 09 ADF Adjustment
• 01 ADF Original Stop Pos. Adj.
• 02 ADF Orig. Stop Pos. Auto
• 04 FD-Mag. Auto Adjustment
• 05 Line Detection Setting
• 10 Corner Staple(Back) Angle Setting
• 06 List/Counter
• 07 Size Setting
• 01 Original Glass Original Size Search
• 02 K Size
• 03 ADF/Original Glass Priority Setting
• 04 Tab Width Setting of A4 Tab
• 08 Annotation Setting
• 09 Perfect Binder Setting
• 01 Usable Paper Weight Select
I-4
• 02 Paper Count Limit for PB

• 03 Unfitting Cover Stop Setting
• 10 Operation Screen Customize
• 01 Font Weight Setting
• 02 Copy Screen Customize Set
• 03 Scan Screen Customize Set
• 04 Machine Function Key Setting
• 02 Administrator Registration
• 03 Scan Address Register
• 01 Address Edit
• 02 E-mail Title Setting
• 03 E-mail Text Setting
• 04 User Auth./Account Track
• 01 Authentication Method
• 02 User Authentication Set
• 01 Management Setting
• 02 User Registration
• 03 User Counter
• 03 Account Track
• 01 Account Track Registration
• 02 Account Track Counter
• 04 Print without Authentication
• 05 Auth. Device Setting
• 01 Auth. Unit Selection
• 06 External Server Setting
• 07 User/Account Common Setting
• 05 Network Setting
• 01 NIC Setting
• 02 E-mail Initial Setting
• 03 http Communication Setting
• 06 Common Setting
• 07 Copy Setting
• 08 Scan Setting
• 09 System Connection
• 01 Administrator Call
• 10 Security Setting
• 01 Administrator Password
• 02 HDD Management Setting
• 01 HDD Lock Password
• 02 Delete Temporary Data Setting
• 03 Delete All Data Setting
• 04 Delete hold Job
• 05 Delete HDD Job
• 06 HDD Restore/Backup
• 01 HDD ALL Backup
• 02 HDD ALL Restore
• 03 HDD BOX Backup
• 04 HDD BOX Restore
• 05 Controller Backup
• 06 Controller Restore
• 07 HDD Encryption Setting
• 08 Hold Job Auto Delete Period
• 03 Enhanced Security Mode
• 11 OpenAPI Auth. Management
• 04 Touch Panel Adjustment
2.2 Start and exit

2.2.1 Start method
1. Be sure that the ordinary operation screen *1 appears.
2. "Utility screen"
Utility screen appears.
*1 Default is [Machine Screen].
2.2.2 Exit method

1. "Utility screen"
Press [Exit] to return to the ordinary operation screen.
2. The new settings become effective.
I-5
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 3. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS
3. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

3.1 Priority for Adjustment/Setting after replacing parts
Conduct the following adjustment on the items list in this order when replacing the parts on the list. Proper operation/image quality is not
guaranteed without conducting those adjustment after the parts replacement.
Note
• When you replace the board due to the damage on the printer image processing board (PRIPB), use the NVRAM board (NRB) that
was installed on the damaged PRIPB for the new PRIPB. Contact the service manager of the authorized distributor if it is
considered that NRB is also damaged.
• The NVRAM board (NRB) stores various adjustment data, setting data and counter data. Therefore, when replacing the NRB,
perform all adjustments and settings, and be sure to replace the parts for control correction (Drum, developer, cleaning blade).
For details, contact the service manager of the authorized distributor.
• When replacing a board due to PB control board (PBCB), SD control board (SDCB) , SD control board (PCB1), FD control board
(FDCB), RU control board (RUCB) or FNS control board (FNSCB) being damaged, be sure to use the non-volatile memory
(EEPROM) that was installed on the damaged control board on the new control board. Install the new EEPROM and perform all
adjustments for the PB, SD, FD, RU or FS if it is considered that the EEPROM is also damaged.
Classification Replacement parts/Others Description
After PM Implementation PM cycle setting counter reset
Drum Drum unit/Y, drum unit/M, drum unit/C, drum Setting toner number 2 application
(Refer to F.5.3.3 Replacing unit/K Dust-proof glass cleaning (write unit)
the drum unit) (Refer to F.5.3.3 Replacing the drum unit) Special Parts Counter (Reset)
Gamma Automatic Adjustment
Color Registration Auto.Adj.
Color Registration Manual
Density Balance Adjustment
Maximum density initial adjustment (execution is recommended)
Developing Developer/Y, /M, /C, /K Dust-proof glass cleaning (write unit)
(Refer to F.5.5.1 Developer Developing Unit/Y, /M, /C, /K Developer charge (manual)
charging procedures) Developer unit replacement adjustment (recommended)
Toner density sensor initial auto adjustment*1
Special parts counter (Reset)*1
Gamma Automatic Adjustment*1
Color registration auto adjustment*1
Density Balance Adjustment*1
*1 Not needed when the developer unit replace adjustment is
executed.
Intermediate Trans. Intermediate transfer belt Transfer unit installation direction (with UPSIDE mark in rear)
(Refer to F.5.5 (Refer to F.5.6.6 Replacing the intermediate Setting toner number 2 application
Intermediate transfer transfer belt, and cleaning of the rollers and Dust-proof glass cleaning (write unit)
section) the cleaning sheet) Special Parts Counter (Reset)
Blade setting mode
Belt Line Speed Adj.
Transfer belt cleaning unit Setting toner number 2 application
(Refer to F.5.6.2 Replacing the transfer belt Special Parts Counter (Reset)
cleaning unit)
Transfer belt cleaning blade Special Parts Counter (Reset)
(Refer to F.5.6.3 Replacing the belt cleaning Blade setting mode
blade and the side seal)
1st transfer roller/Y, 1st transfer roller/M, 1st Dust-proof glass cleaning (write unit)
transfer roller/C, and 1st transfer roller/K Special Parts Counter (Reset)
(Refer to F.5.6.7 Replacing the 1st transfer
roller/Y, /M, /C and /K and the transfer roller Gamma Automatic Adjustment
bearing/Y, /M, /C and /K)
2nd transfer roller/Lw 2nd transfer roller/Lw installation direction (the longer shaft is on
(Refer to F.5.6.11 Replacing the 2nd transfer the front side)
roller/Lw and the C-clip, and cleaning around
the 2nd transfer unit)
Image correction unit Dust-proof glass cleaning (write unit)
Printer Gamma Sensor Adjustment
Printer Gamma Offset Auto.
Color registration sensor/Fr (PS60) and color Belt line speed adjustment
registration sensor/Rr (PS62) Gamma Automatic Adjustment
I-6
Total process mount Drum unit, intermediate transfer belt, transfer Setting toner number 2 application (Drum, transfer belt cleaning
belt cleaning unit, transfer belt cleaning blade unit, transfer belt cleaning blade)
Dust-proof glass cleaning (writing unit)
Special Parts Counter (Reset)
Blade Setting Mode (2nd transfer)
Belt Line Speed Adj.
Scanner CCD unit FD-Mag. Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)
(Refer to G.3.2.12 CCD unit) CD-Mag. Adjustment (scanner adjustment)
Scan gradation and color adjustment
Exposure unit Positioning adjustments of the exposure unit and the mirror unit
(Refer to G.3.2.13 Exposure unit, Exposure Read position adjustment (ADF adjustment)
lamp)
FD-Mag. adjustment (scan adjustment)
Exposure lamp (L1) Scan gradation and color adjustment
(Refer to G.3.2.13 Exposure unit, Exposure
lamp)
Original glass Restart Timing Adjustment (scanner adjustment)
(Refer to G.3.2.10 Original glass assy) Centering adjustment (Scan adjustment)
Scanner wire Scanner motor belt adjustment
(Refer toG.3.2.15 Removing the scanner wire, Positioning adjustments of the exposure unit and the mirror unit
G.3.2.16 Reinstalling the scanner wire)
Read position adjustment (ADF adjustment)
FD-Mag. adjustment (scan adjustment)
Write Writing unit/K Dust-proof glass cleaning (write unit)
(Refer to G.3.2.17 Writing (Refer to G.3.2.17 Writing unit) Writing initial position memory (Skew initial position memory)
unit) I/O Check Mode (LD1 to LD4 alarm data clear, LD alarm
measurement)
CD-Mag. Skew Adj.
Restart Timing Adjustment
Beam Pitch Adjustment
Writing unit/Y, writing unit/M, writing unit/C Dust-proof glass cleaning (write unit)
(Refer to G.3.2.17 Writing unit) Writing initial position memory (Skew initial position memory)
I/O Check Mode (LD1 to LD4 alarm data clear, LD alarm
measurement)
Beam Pitch Adjustment
Dust-proof glass/Y, dust-proof glass/M, dust- Gamma Automatic Adjustment
proof glass/C, dust-proof glass/K Density Balance Adjustment
(Refer to G.3.2.17 Writing unit)
Charging Charging corona/Y, charging corona/M, Dust-proof glass cleaning (write unit)
(Refer to F.5.4.1 Replace charging corona/C, and charging corona/K Special Parts Counter (Reset)
the charging corona) (Refer to F.5.4.1 Replace the charging
corona) Gamma Automatic Adjustment
Fusing Fusing belt Fusing belt installation direction (with rot number on the front
(Refer to F.5.14 Fusing (Refer to F.5.11.4 Replacement of the fusing side)
section) bearing/Up, /Lw1, the heat insulating sleeve/
Up, /Lw1, the belt regulating sleeve, the fusing
belt, the fusing roller/1, /2, and the neutralizing
ring.)
Temperature sensor/5 (TH5) Adjust the position with the temperature sensor positioning jig/Lw
(Refer to G.3.2.29 Temperature sensor/5 (the jig is required)
(TH5))
I-7
Thermostat/1 (TS1) Adjust the position with the thermostat positioning jig/Up (the jig
(Refer to G.3.2.27 Temperature sensor/1 is required)
(TH1), temperature sensor/2 (TH2),
thermostat/1 (TS1), thermostat/2 (TS2))
Thermostat/2 (TS2) Adjust the position with the thermostat positioning jig/Up (the jig
(TH1), temperature sensor/2 (TH2),
thermostat/1 (TS1), thermostat/2 (TS2))
Thermostat/3 (TS3) Adjust the position with the thermostat positioning jig/Lw (the jig
(TH5))
Boards Printer image processing board (PRIPB) NVRAM board (NRB) replacement
Overall control board (OACB) Machine NIC setting
(Refer to G.3.2.8 Overall control board When HDD Lock Password is disabled:
(OACB)) SSD replacement
When HDD Lock Password is enabled:
SSD replacement
EEPROM replacement
SSD Rewriting of firmware
Note
· For acquiring or replacing the SSD,
contact the support section of the Konica
Minolta.
(Refer to G.3.2.9 SSD (SSD))
Printer control board (PRCB) Rewriting of firmware
Hard disk/1, /2, /3 (HDD1, 2, 3) Format HDD data
(Refer to G.3.2.30 HDD1, HDD2, HDD3) HDD replace initial setting
Hard disk/4 (HDD4) Format HDD data
(Refer to G.3.2.31 Hard disk/4 (HDD4)) HDD replace initial setting
PF-602m Double feed detection board (MFDBS, Double feed detection board adjustment
MFDBR)
(Refer to G.5.2.11 The multi feed detection
board (MFDBR and MFDBS))
PF-707 Double feed detection board (MFDBS, Double feed detection board adjustment
MFDBR)
(Refer to G.6.3.22 Multi feed detection board
(MFDBR, MFDBS))
DF-626 DF control board (DFCB) Rewriting of firmware
ADF original size adjustment
ADF original stop position auto adjustment, ADF original stop
position adjustment
ADF Registration Loop Adj
Feed paper check
Sensor check
Read position auto adjustment, read position adjustment
FD-Mag. auto adjustment and FD-Mag. adjustment
Scanning light adjustment
Mixed original size adjustment
Restriction plate positional VR (VR1) ADF original size adjustment
First slider, second slider, scanner wire, Read position auto adjustment, read position adjustment
scanner assy, DF original glass, glass
movement unit, step sheet
EF-103 Same as the fusing section of the main body
RU-509, RU-510 RU control board (RUCB) Rewriting of firmware
EEPROM replacement
FS-531, FS-612, FS-532 FNS control board (FNSCB) Rewriting of firmware
EEPROM replacement
Stapler unit Clincher positioning (require the jig)
*FS-531, FS-532 do not require the adjustment.
SD-510 SD control board (SDCB) Rewriting of firmware
Stapler unit Clincher positioning (require the jig)
PK-511, PK-522 Punch drive board (PDB) Paper Edge Detect Sensor
Paper size sensor (PS305) Paper Edge Detect Sensor
LS-505, LS-506 LS control board (LSCB) Toggle switch setting*1
Rewriting of firmware
Grip conveyance home sensor adjustment
I-8
Paper width adjustment

Paper length adjustment
*1 LS-505 only
FD-503 FD control board (FDCB) DIPSW setting of the boards
EEPROM replacement
Double feed detection board (MFDB) Double feed detection board adjustment
PI drive board (PIDB) Double feed detection board adjustment
SD-506 SD control board (SDCB) DIPSW setting of the boards
EEPROM replacement
Trimmer board assy I/O Check Mode (trimmer board solenoid operation counter
(Refer to F.24.5.2 Replacing the trimmer reset)
board assy)
SD-513 SD control board (PCB1) EEPROM replacement
Trimmer board assy I/O check mode (Trimmer board movement operation counter
(Refer to "F.25.8.2 Replacing the trimmer clear)
board")
Stapler unit Staple position adjustment
(Refer to "F.25.5.1 Replacing the staple unit")
Clincher
(Refer to "F.25.5.2 Replacing the clincher")
PB-503 PB control board (PBCB) DIPSW setting of the boards
EEPROM replacement
Double feed detection board adjustment
Double feed detection board (MFDBS, Double feed detection board adjustment
MFDBR)
I-9
bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 4. SERVICE MODE
4. SERVICE MODE
4.1 Service Mode List
This machine is provided with a service mode for various adjustments/settings. Data adjusted/set with this mode is stored in NVRAM board
(NRB).
NOTE
• Some items on the following list are not displayed at the default setting.
• In order to display items that are not displayed at the default settings, change the optional configurations or each setting.
4.1.1 Hierarchy
• 01 Machine Adjustment
• 01 Printer Adjustment
• 01 Centering Auto Adjustment
• 02 Centering Sensor Gap Adjustment
• 05 Lead Edge Erase Adjustment
• 06 Registration Loop Adj.
• 07 Pre-registration Adj.
• 08 Belt Line Speed Adj.
• 09 Writing Initial Pos. Memory
• 01 Skew Initial Position Memory
• 10 Color Registration Auto.Adj.
• 11 Color Regist. Gap Measurement
• 12 PFU Double feed Detect Adj.
• 13 Crosswise Dir. Skew Adj.
• 14 Beam Pitch Adjustment
• 15 Color Regist. Manual Adj.
• 16 Recall Standard Data
• 02 Scan Adjustment
• 04 Scan Gradation/Color Adj.
• 06 Sensor Check
• 07 CCD Check
• 08 Line Mag. Setting
• 03 Quality Adjustment
• 01 Printer Gamma Adjustment
• 01 Printer Gamma Offset Adj.
• 02 Printer Gamma Offset Auto.
• 03 Printer Gamma Sensor Adj.
• 04 Printer Gamma Curve Adj.
• 05 Printer Gamma Offset Auto. (RU)
• 06 Printer Gamma Sensor Adj (RU)
• 02 Sharpness Adjustment
• 03 Contrast Adjustment
• 04 Image Distinction Level
• 01 Dot Detect Adjustment
• 02 Color Text Adjustment
• 03 Dot/Text Area Adjustment
• 05 ACS Adjustment
• 06 Density Adjustment
• 01 AE(AES) Adjustment
• 02 Copy Density Adjustment
• 03 BackgroundRemoval
• 07 Tone Adjustment
• 01 Tone Adjustment (RGB, YMC)
• 04 Non-Image Area Erase Check
• 05 Tray Adjustment
• 01 Tray Size Adjustment
• 02 Process Adjustment
• 01 High Voltage Adjustment
• 01 1st Transfer Manual Adj.
• 02 2nd Transfer Manual Adj.
• 03 Sep. Current Manual Adj.
• 04 Pre-transfer Guide Confirm
• 02 Drum Peculiarity Adjustment
• 01 Blade Setting Mode
• 02 Gamma Automatic Adjustment
• 03 Toner Density Sensor Init.
I-10
• 04 Toner Density Revert

• 05 Max Density Initial Adj.
• 06 All Dev. Unit Replace Adj.
• 03 Sensor Output Confirm
• 01 IDC Sensor Output
• 02 Toner Density Sensor Output
• 03 Humidity/Temperature Output
• 04 1st Trans. Resistance Meas.
• 05 2nd Trans. Resistance Meas.
• 04 Process Fine Adjustment
• 01 Background Margin Fine Adj.
• 02 Develop AC Bias Fine Adj.
• 03 Develop AC Frequency
• 04 Toner Density Fine Adj.
• 05 Fusing Temperature Fine Adj.
• 05 Interval/Quantity Adj.
• 01 Drum Small Rotation Interval
• 01 Software DIPSW Setting
• 02 Service Center TEL/FAX
• 03 Serial Number Setting
• 04 Setup Date/Business Setting
• 04 Counter/Data
• 01 Maintenance Counter
• 02 Collection Data
• 01 Paper Size Counter(Total)
• 02 Paper Size Counter(Copy)
• 03 Paper Size Counter(Printer)
• 04 ADF Counter
• 05 Coverage Data History
• 06 Paper JAM History
• 07 JAM Counter
• 08 Counter of Each Copy Mode(1)
• 09 Counter of Each Copy Mode(2)
• 10 SC Counter
• 11 JAM Counter Individual Sec.
• 12 SC Count Individual Sec.
• 13 SC Data of Time Series
• 14 Maintenance History
• 01 Maintenance Counter Reset
• 02 Parts History in Time Series
• 15 Each Paper Type Counter
• 16 ORU-M Maintenance History
• 03 Parts Counter
• 01 Special Parts Counter 1
• 01 All Items
• 02 Waste Toner / Filter
• 03 Charging Corona / Drum
• 04 Developing
• 05 Intermediate Transfer
• 06 2nd Transfer
• 07 Fusing
• 08 Main Body Tray / Bypass Tray
• 09 Paper Transportation
• 10 EF
• 11 OT
• 12 PFU/LCT
• 13 FD
• 14 LS
• 15 SD
• 16 FS
• 17 PB
• 18 GP
• 19 HM
• 20 RU
• 02 Special Parts Counter 2
• ADF
• Others
• 03 Voluntary Part Counter
• 04 Total Counter Histrory
• 05 Custom Counter Threshold Set
• 05 State Confirmation
• 01 I/O Check Mode
• 06 ADF Adjustment
• 01 ADF Original Size Adj.
• 02 ADF Orig. Stop Position
• 03 ADF Orig. Stop Pos. Auto.
I-11
• 04 ADF Registration Loop Adj.

• 05 Feed Paper Check
• 06 Sensor Check
• 07 Read Position Adj.
• 08 Read Position Auto Adj.
• 10 FD-Mag. Auto Adjustment
• 11 Scanning Light Adjustment
• 12 Mixed Original Size Adj.
• 13 Line Detection Setting
• 14 ADF Scan Glass Auto Cleaning
• 01 Staple Finisher Adjustment
• 01 Staple Finisher (Main) Adj.
• 01 Staple Position Adjustment
• 03 FD Alignment Plate Adj.
• 04 Exit Guide Paper Width Adj.
• 05 Rewind Paddle Descent Adj.
• 02 Staple Finisher (Fold) Adj.
• 01 Fold&Staple Pitch Adj.
• 02 Fold&Staple Paper Width Adj.
• 03 Fold&Staple Staple Position
• 04 Fold&Staple Fold Position
• 05 Half-Fold Fold Position Adj.
• 01 Tri-Fold Position Adjustment
• 02 Double Fold Plate Adjustment
• 07 Half-Fold Strength Adj.
• 03 Staple Finisher (Punch) Adj.
• 01 Vertical Position Adj. (CD)
• 02 Horizontal Position Adj. (FD)
• 04 Paper Edge Detect Sensor
• 04 Staple Finisher (PI) Adj.
• 01 Tray Size Adjustment
• 02 PI Registration Adjustment
• 02 Multi Folder Adjustment
• 01 Multi Folder (Punch) Adj.
• 01 Paper Width Ajustment
• 02 Punch Vertical Position Adj.
• 01 2-Hole Punch
• 02 3-Hole punch
• 02 4-Hole punch
• 02 Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.
• 02 Tri-Fold-in Pos. Adj.
• 03 Tri-fold-out Pos. Adj.
• 04 Double Parallel Pos. Adj.
• 05 Z-Fold Position Adj.
• 06 Gate Position Adj.
• 07 Fold Registration Loop Adj.
• 03 Stacker Adjustment
• 07 Trimming Adjustment
• 08 Trimmer Receiver Adj.
• 05 Fold Skew Adjustment
I-12
• 08 Fore-edge Trimming Adj.

• 09 Parallel Trimming Adjustment
• 10 Trans. Entrance Paper Width
• 11 2-Side Slitting Adjustment
• 12 Crease Position Adjustment
• 01 Half-Fold Crease Position
• 02 Tri-Fold Crease Position
• 03 PB Cover Crease Position
• 13 Flattening a Fold (Strength)
• 14 Flattening a Fold (Freq.)
• 15 Spine Fold Line Adjustment
• 16 Staple Offset Adjustment
• 17 Registration Loop Adjustment
• 18 Staple Tip Adjustment
• 19 Saddle Position Adjustment
• 20 Trimmer Recover Adj.
• 05 Perfect Binder Adjustment
• 01 Cover Trimming Adjustment
• 02 Cover Lead Edge Adj.
• 03 Spine Corner Forming Pos.
• 04 Glue Start Position
• 05 Glue Finish Position
• 06 Temperature Adjustment
• 07 Sub Compile CD Width Adj.
• 08 Clamp CD Width Adjustment
• 09 Cover Up/Down CD Width Adj.
• 10 Clamp FD Position Adj.
• 06 Relay Stacker Adjustment
• 01 Fold & Staple Stopper
• 02 Half-Fold Stopper Adj.
• 03 Punch Adjustment
• 01 Vertical Position Adj.
• 02 Horizontal Position Adj.
• 04 Paper Edge Detect Sensor
• 05 2 Pos. Staple Pitch Adj.
• 06 Post Inserter Tray Size
• 07 Output Quantity Limit
• 08 Curl Adjustment
• 08 Firmware Version
• 09 CS Remote Care
• 01 CS Remote Care
• 02 Log FW Address Setting
• 03 Log Forwarding Time Setting
• 10 List Output
• 11 Test Mode
• 01 Running Test Mode
• 02 Test Pattern Output Mode
• 12 ISW
• 01 ISW
• 13 Setting Data
• 01 Load from External Memory
• 02 Store to External Memory
• 14 Log Store
• 01 Log Store Setting
• 02 Execute Log Storing
• 15 ORU-M Setting
• 01 ORU-M Item/Life Setting
• 02 ORU-M Life Threshold Setting
• 03 ORU-M Password Setting
• 16 HDD Setting
• 01 HDD Replace Initial Setting
• 02 Format HDD All Data
• 03 Format Controller HDD Data
• 04 Transfer HDD Data
• 17 Auth. Device Setting
• 01 Auth. Unit Selection
• 02 Loadable Driver Install
• 18 Startup Setting
• 01 Package Adjustment
• 02 Setup Setting 1
I-13
• 02 Setup Date/Business Setting
• 03 Service Center TEL/FAX
• 04 Mono Energy-save Mode
• 03 Setup Setting 2
• 02 Serial Number Setting
• 03 Non-Image Area Erase Check
• 04 NIC Setting
NOTE
• Service Mode of GP-502 is mentioned in the GP-502 service manual.
4.2 Start and exit

4.2.1 Start method
You can access the service mode while the power is both turned ON and OFF.
In either way, the started service mode is the same, but how to exit differs.
Note
• Do not let people who is not concerned in the service know how to enter the service mode.
• When you leave the site during the service mode operation, unauthorized changes could occur for any values. When you finish
the setting of the service mode, or when you have to leave the site during the operation, be sure to press [Exit] to the basic
screen.
(1) Start-up from power ON

1. Be sure that the ordinary operation screen *1 appears.
2. "Utility screen"
Stop → 0 → 0 → Stop → 0 → 1
When the CE password has been configured, entering the password is required to enter the service mode.
3. "Service Mode Menu screen"
The service mode appears.
(2) Start-up from power OFF

1. While you press the [Utility/Counter] button, activate the sub power switch (SW2).
When the CE password has been configured, entering the password is required to enter the service mode.
The service mode appears.
4.2.2 Exit method

Exit methods differ according to the condition of the power switch, ON or OFF.
(1) When the power is ON

Press [Exit] to back to "Utility screen".
2. The new settings become effective.
(2) When the power is OFF

Deactivate the SW2.
2. After the reboot, the new settings become effective.
4.3 Machine Adjustment

4.3.1 Restart Timing Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)
(1) Function
Change the restart timing of the registration roller and adjust the image position on the paper in the sub scan direction.
(2) Usage
Adjust the image leading edge timing of the printer.
Note
• Be sure the Scanner FD-Mag. Adjustment (Printer Adjustment) has been adjusted in advance. (Refer to I.4.3.5 FD-Mag.
(3) Procedure
Press [01 Machine Adjustment].
2. "Machine Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [01 Printer Adjustment].
3. "Printer Adjustment menu screen"
Press [01 Restart Timing Adjustment].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [Restart Timing Adjustment]
I-14
4. "Restart Timing Adjustment screen"

Press [▼] or [▲] to select the item that you want to adjust and press [Print Mode].
This adjustment is available for each paper tray (each tray or ADU), paper size (large or small) and the paper type (plain paper or the thick
paper) respectively.
Note
• Large size: Paper size 300 mm or more in the sub scan direction
• Small size: Paper size less than 300 mm in the sub scan direction
• Thick: Paper weight 177 g/m2 or more
5. "PRINT MODE screen"

Configure the print setting according to the selected item and press the start button. Then output the test pattern (number 16 or number
33).
6. Check the image leading edge timing.
• Standard value: 20 ± 0.5 mm
20
57gaf3c007na
7. When the value is not within the standard value, press [Exit PrintMode].
Enter a value through the numeric buttons and press [Set].
• Setting range
: -60 (short) to +60 (long)
• 1 step = 0.1 mm
9. Repeat steps 4 to 8 until the standard value can be obtained.
4.3.2 Centering auto adjustment (printer adjustment - centering adjustment)

(1) Function
Store the misalignment amount of each paper feed tray and configure the target value of the registration swing. Fix the image write position
aligning to the configured target value of the registration swing.
(2) Usage
Adjust when you install the main body, PF, or the mis-centering amount is large on particular feed tray.
Note
• Be sure the Printer CD-Mag. (Printer Adjustment) has been adjusted in advance. (Refer to I.4.3.6 CD-Mag. Adjustment (Printer
Adjustment))
• To adjust the centering adjustment, usually perform this adjustment. When you want to perform the fine adjustment, perform "I.
4.3.4 Centering adjustment (printer adjustment - centering adjustment)".
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Centering Adjustment].
4. "Centering adjustment mode menu screen"
Press [01 Centering Auto Adjustment].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [Centering Adjustment] → [Centering Auto Adjustment]
5. "Centering Auto Adjustment screen"
This adjustment is available for each paper feed tray (each tray or ADU), paper size (common, large size, small size or 8 1/2× 5 1/2 (tray
1 to 2, bypass, ADU)) and the paper size (plain paper or thick paper) respectively.
I-15
Note
• Thick paper can only be selected for ADU
• Paper thickness: Paper weight 177 g/m2 or more
• The value on each item is the current value. This value is corrected by adding the value of the centering sensor gap
adjustment for the corresponding item to the current value on each item.

Configure the print setting according to the selected item, press the start button and output the test pattern (number 16 or number 33).
Note
• 5 sheets are printed for the test pattern. (The configured quantity can be changed, but print 5 sheets normally.)
• After the adjustment, the correction value is applied to the current value. (Configuration value: 1 step = 0.01 mm)
4.3.3 Centering sensor gap adjustment (printer adjustment - centering adjustment)

(1) Function
In order to correct the error of the installation position of the centering sensor, match the image writing position and the paper sensor position.
(2) Usage
Adjust when you install the main body, PF, or clean or replace the centering sensor.
Note
• Be sure that the centering adjustment (printer adjustment- centering adjustment) has been adjusted before this adjustment.
(Refer to I.4.3.2 Centering auto adjustment (printer adjustment - centering adjustment))
Adjustment))
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Centering Sensor Gap Adj.].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [Centering Adjustment] → [Centering Sensor Gap Adj.]
5. "Centering Sensor Gap Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
Select Tray1 and press the Start key to output the test pattern (number 16).
7. Fold the printed paper into 2 along the center in the main scan direction, and measure how much the left lines and right lines misalign
from each other.
• Standard value: within ± 1.5 mm
9. "Centering Sensor Gap Adj. screen"
• Setting range: -100 (image in front) to +100 (image in back)
• 1 step = 0.1 mm
4.3.4 Centering adjustment (printer adjustment - centering adjustment)

(1) Function
Change the laser writing timing and adjust the image writing position.
(2) Usage
Adjust the image centering in the printer main scan direction.
Note
Adjustment))
• To adjust the mis-centering, use the "I.4.3.2 Centering auto adjustment (printer adjustment - centering adjustment)" normally.
Perform this adjustment when you want to perform the fine adjustment.
(3) Procedure
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [Centering Adjustment] → [Centering Adjustment]
5. "Centering Adjustment screen"
I-16
This adjustment is available for each paper feed tray (each tray or ADU), paper size (common, large size, small size or 8 1/2× 5 1/2 (tray
1 to 2, bypass, ADU)) and the paper size (plain paper or thick paper) respectively.
Note

Configure the print setting according to the selected item. To output the test pattern (number 16 or number 33), press the Start button.
7. Fold the printed paper into 2 along the center in the main scan direction, and measure how much the left lines and right lines misalign
from each other.
• Standard value: within ± 1.5 mm
• Setting range: -40 (image in front) to +40 (image in back)
• 1 step = 0.1 mm
4.3.5 FD-Mag. Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
Change the speed of the polygon motor and adjust the image magnification.
(2) Usage
This adjustment changes the speed of the polygon motor and adjusts the image magnification.
Note
• Be careful when you adjust because there are 2 following types of method for the printer magnification adjustment in the sub
scan direction.
1. FD-Mag. Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)
Perform this adjustment when the magnification in the sub-scanning direction has changed because of the worn registration
roller or the paper shrinkage by heat.
2. Belt Line Speed Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)
Perform this adjustment under the conditions that is not mentioned in Number 1.
• As the default, the magnification in the sub-scanning direction can be adjusted. When the difference between the magnifications
that are configured for the front and back of the paper is less than 1%, productivity does not decrease. However, productivity
decreases when the difference between the magnifications that are configured for the front and back of the paper is greater than
1%.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 FD-Mag. Adjustment].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [FD-Mag. Adjustment]
4. "FD-Mag. Adjustment screen"
Select the item that you want to adjust and press [Print Mode].
This adjustment can be performed for both sides at a time (all trays) or for the back side (each tray).
Select A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the Start key to output the test pattern (number 16 or number 33).
6. Check the magnification in the sub scan direction.
• Standard value
: ± 0.5% or less (when in life-size)
: 205.7 ± 1 mm or less
I-17
205.7 1
57gaf3c003na
Select the item that you want to adjust.
• Setting Range
Printer FD-Mag. (both sides at a time): -100 (short) to +100 (long)
Other than the above: -80 (short) to +20 (long)
• 1 step = 0.01%
9. Enter a value through the numeric buttons and press [Set].
4.3.6 CD-Mag. Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
This adjustment changes the laser writing pitch and the magnification in the image process.
(2) Usage
Adjust the magnification in main scanning direction.
(3) Procedure
Press [04 CD-Mag. Adjustment].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [CD-Mag. Adjustment]
4. "CD-Mag. Adjustment screen"
Select the item that you want to adjust and press [Print Mode].
This adjustment can be performed for both sides at a time (all trays) or for the back side (each tray).
6. Check the magnification in the main scan direction.
• Standard value
: 190 ± 1 mm or less
190
57gaf3c004na
Select the item that you want to adjust.
• Setting range: -100 (short) to +100 (long)
• 1 step = 0.01%
4.3.7 Lead Edge Erase Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the image erasure amount of the leading edge.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the image erasure (deleted) amount of the leading edge is not within the standard value.
Note
• This adjustment method is for C1070, C1060, C1060L (copier version). C1070P, C71hc (printer version) does not have the
adjustment method.
I-18
(3) Preparation
Be sure the printer FD-Mag. Adjustment has been adjusted.
(4) Procedure
Press [05 Lead Edge Erase Adjustment].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [Lead Edge Erase Adjustment]
4. "Lead Edge Erase Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
Place the test chart to the original glass, choose a paper A3 or 11x17, and press the Start key.
6. Check the leading edge erasure amount.
• Standard value "a": 4 mm or less
a
57gaf3c029nb
7. When the value is not within the standard value, press [Exit Print Mode].
8. "Lead Edge Erase Adjustment screen"
• Setting Range
: -20 (narrower) to +40 (wider)
• 1 step = 0.1 mm
4.3.8 Registration Loop Adj. (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the paper loop amount in the registration roller section.
(2) Usage
Adjust to remove the paper skew and the crease, or the paper jamming in the registration section.
(3) Procedure
Press [06 Registration Loop Adj.].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [Registration Loop Adj.]
4. "Registration Loop Adj. screen"
This adjustment can be performed for the feed tray (trays, ADU), paper size (large, small, 150 mm or less of the width), and the paper
type (plain paper, thick paper).
Note

Configure the print setting according to the selected item, press the start button and output the test pattern (number 16 or number 33).
6. If the problem is not solved, press [Exit PrintMode].
7. "Registration Loop Adj. screen"
• 1 step = 0.1 mm
8. Repeat the steps 4 to 7 until an appropriate value is obtained.
4.3.9 Pre-registration Adj. (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the paper loop amount in the pre-registration roller section.
I-19
(2) Usage
Adjust to remove the paper skew and the crease, or the paper jamming in the pre-registration section.
(3) Procedure
Press [07 Pre-registration Adj.].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [Pre-registration Adj.]
4. "Pre-registration Adj. screen"
Press [▼] or [▲] to select the item that you want to adjust. Then press [Print Mode].
This adjustment is available for each paper tray (each tray or ADU), paper size (large or small) respectively.
Note
• Large size: The paper size is 300 mm or more in the sub scan direction
• Small size: The paper size is less than 300 mm in the sub scan direction

7. "Pre-registration Adj. screen"
• 1 step = 0.1 mm
4.3.10 Belt Line Speed Adj. (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
This adjustment changes line speed of the transfer belt.
(2) Usage
• Perform this adjustment to fix an offset on the peripheral speed of the belt that determines line speed from the part tolerance of the belt
driving system.
• To fix the offset, perform this adjustment when you replace the transfer belt unit.
• Adjust the magnification in sub-scan direction.
Note
• Bs careful that there are 2 following types of method for the printer magnification adjustment in the sub scan direction.
1. FD-Mag. Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)
Perform this adjustment when the magnification in the sub-scanning direction has changed because of the worn registration
roller or the paper shrinkage by heat.
Adjust the rotation speed of the polygon motor. Used to perform the fine adjustment of the magnification.
2. Belt Line Speed Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)
Perform this adjustment under the conditions that is not mentioned in Number 1.
Adjust the speed of the intermediate transfer motor (M9). Used to perform the rough adjustment of the magnification.
(3) Procedure
Press [08 Belt Line Speed Adj.].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [Belt Line Speed Adj.]
4. "Belt Line Speed Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
• Standard value
: 205.7 ± 1 mm or less
205.7 1
57gaf3c003na
8. "Belt Line Speed Adj. screen"
I-20

• 1 step = 0.01%
Note
• Configuration range is available from -100 to +100, but the optimum value is from +3 to +29. An error code possibly occur
when you enter the value that is not within the optimum value.
4.3.11 Skew Initial Position Memory (Printer Adjustment - Writing Initial Pos. Memory)
(1) Function
Store the initial position of the skew adjustment mechanism of the write unit in the NVRAM board (NRB).
(2) Usage
Execute only when the write unit is replaced to the new one.
(3) Procedure
Press [09 Writing Initial Pos. Memory].
4. "Writing Initial Pos. Memory screen"
Press [01 Skew Initial Position Memory].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [Writing Initial Pos. Memory] → [Skew Initial Position Memory]
5. "Skew Initial Position Memory screen"
Select the color of the replaced write unit and press [Start].
4.3.12 Color Registration Auto.Adj. (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
The following color registration misalignment are automatically adjusted relative to K: Main scan, sub scan, horizontal (main scanning
direction magnification), and skew (tilt) of Y, M, C.
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment when there is a color registration error.
Note
• Perform this adjustment when the malfunction code C-4520 occurs.
(3) Procedure
Press [10 Color Registration Auto.Adj.].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [Color Registration Auto.Adj.]
4. "Color Registration Auto.Adj. screen"
Press [Start].
5. The color registration adjustment starts and a message "Completed" is shown in about 2 minutes. If the error message appears, perform
an error correction referring to the following solutions.
• Error 1: The pattern of the prescribed number has not been detected.
The patch density is possibly too light. Check around the drum unit and perform the Gamma Automatic Adjustment. Then conduct this
adjustment again.
• Error 2: The difference of the color registration is too much.
Check the installation position of the write unit.
Output the test pattern to check the image density. When the image density is abnormal, perform the gamma automatic adjustment.
• Error 3: Other
The other malfunction other than the auto color registration adjustment possibly occur. Restart the main body in the normal mode and
check the malfunction code.
6. • "Color Registration Auto.Adj. screen"
Misalignment amounts of Y, M, and C of "Main Scan", "Sub Scan", "Horizontal", and "Skew" relative to K are displayed on the panel.
(unit: pixel)
4.3.13 Color Regist.Gap Measurement (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
Measure the misalignment amount of Y, M, and C relative to K of "Main Scan", Mag.(ALL) (whole magnification in main scanning), "Mag.
(PART)" (partial magnification in main scanning), "Sub Scan", "Incline" (skew), and "Scan Bend" (main scanning), and adjust Mag.(PART)
manually.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when there is a color registration error.
I-21
Adjust after the main body has been moved.

Note
• This adjustment is for C1070, C1060, C1060L (copier version). It does not work for C1070P, C71hc (printer version). Perform
''Color registration automatic adjustment (printer adjustment) '' for C1070P, C71hc.
Adjustment))
• Be sure the Color Registration Auto.Adj. (Printer Adjustment) has been adjusted in advance. (Refer to I.4.3.12 Color Registration
Auto.Adj. (Printer Adjustment))
(3) Procedure
Press [11 Color Regist.Gap Measurement].
4. "Color Regist. Gap Meas., Manual Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper. Press the Start key to output the test pattern.
Place the outputted test pattern [1] on the original glass securely against the original positioning plate/Lt [2] and the original positioning
plate/Rr [3], and close the DF or the platen cover.
Note
• When you place the test pattern onto the original glass, be sure to take care of the setting direction (with printing face down)
and the position.
• Check that the settings for all colors (Y, M, C, K) in the [Test Pattern Output Mode] is configured to 255. If not, it causes an
error.
[3]
[2]
[1]
8050fs1011

Press [Exit PrintMode].
7. "Color Regist. Gap Meas., Manual Adj. screen"
Press [Start] to scan the test pattern using the scanner.
8. Shows the misalignment amount of Y, M, and C relative to K of "Main Scan", "Mag.(ALL)" (whole magnification in main scanning), "Mag.
(PART)" (partial magnification in main scanning), Sub Scan, "Incline" (skew), and "Scan Bend" (main scanning) at "Rest" section on the
touch panel. (unit: pixel)
9. Make sure that the screen displays "OK" for all the items. If the value is out of standard, "NG" and an error code appears.
If "NG" appears for "Main Scan", "Mag.(ALL)", "Sub Scan", or "Incline", perform the Color Registration Auto.Adj. again.
Note
• When "NG" appears for the sub scan direction even after Color Registration Automatic Adjustment is conducted a second
time, perform the color registration manual adjustment. (Refer to "I.4.3.17 Color Registration Manual Adjustment (Printer
Adjustment)")
Error code Description Cause
Error 1 Cannot detect the chart pattern Chart misplacement
Error 2 The chart is placed upside down Chart misplacement
Error 3 Cannot detect the chart pattern Different chart is placed
Error 4 Adjustment impossible Software bug
Error 5 Value is out of standard Readjust
Error 6 Non-volatile data abnormality Check the installation position of the
NVRAM board
I-22
Error 7 Accessing to the unassigned memory Software bug

Error 8 Memory-related error Software bug
Error 9 Program error Software bug
Error 10 Chart is skewed Chart misplacement
Error 11 Image header information read error Software bug
Error 12 Parameter setting error Software bug
Error 13 Measurement error Chart misplacement or chart failure
10. When "NG" appears for "Main Scan", "Horiz.(All)", "Horiz.(Part)", adjust the "Horiz. (part)" in the following steps.
1. Open the front door [1] and the toner supply door [2].
2. Loosen 3 screws [3] and remove the duct cover [4].
3. Remove 2 screws [5] and remove the filter cover [6].
[1] [3] [6] [2]
[4] [5]
4. Rotate the adjustment gear with "NG" (Y: [1], M: [2], C: [3]) up and down to adjust the "Horiz. (part)".
• Refer to the "Rest" of "Mag (PART)" (unit: pixel) shown at the touch panel, and move the adjusting gear.
• Moving the adjusting gear upward reduces the "Rest" of the "Mag.(PART)" (negative) and moving the plate down increases the
"Rest" (positive).
• The adjusting gear can be adjusted to 7 positions for each up and down. The center [4] is the base position.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
5. Reinstall the duct cover which was removed in step 2.

Note
• If the test pattern is printed while the duct cover is removed, C-4726 occurs.
11. Press [Return] to return to the [Printer Adj. Menu] screen.
12. Perform the Color Registration Auto.Adj. (Printer Adjustment) (Refer to I.4.3.12 Color Registration Auto.Adj. (Printer Adjustment))
4.3.14 Adjustment when you replace the multi feed detection board (PF)
(1) Function
Adjust the ultrasonic sensor sensitivity of the multi feed detection boards (MFDBR, MFDBS).
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment when you replace the PF multi feed detection board (MFDTB) or the PF drive board (PFDB). Adjust it when the multi
feed is not detected properly due to specific types of paper (such as thin paper, coated paper with less stiffness, and thick paper).
I-23
Note
• Adjustment error occurs because of the temperature of the sensor surface. Make the adjustment at a temperature close to the
environment in which the copier is used (20°C to 30°C). (In case you brought a new part from outdoors, make the adjustment
after the temperature of the sensor surface and the room temperature become the same)
(3) Procedure
3. "Printer Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [12 PFU Double feed Detect Adj.].
4. Open the front door [1] of the PF, and open the jam processing guide PF2 [2] and the jam processing guide PF5 [3] in the horizontal
conveyance section (PF-602m).
[1]
[3] [2]
a03uf3c025ca
Open the PF front door [1] and then open the open and close cover/1 [2] of the horizontal conveyance section (PF-707).
[1]
[2]
5. Insert a sheet of paper [1] (part number 65AA995##, fusing adjustment paper, A3 16 sheets) while you turn the knob PF4 [2], and close
the jam processing guides PF2 [3] and PF5 [4]. (you can also use 200 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 paper.) (PF-602m).
[4] [1]
[3] [2]
a03uf3c026ca
Insert a sheet of paper (part number 65AA995##, fusing adjustment paper, A3 16 sheets [1] and close the open and close cover/1 [2] (you
can also use 200 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 paper) (PF-707).
I-24
[1]
[2]
6. " PFU Double feed Detect Adjustment screen"

Press [Start].
7. If the multi feed detection adjustment is normally completed, the screen displays "Completed". If abnormally completed, it displays "Error".
When the screen displays an error message, repeat steps 4 to 6.
Note
• When an error occurs, the adjustment data is not written but the data before the adjustment remains.
8. Pull out the paper that is inserted in step 5.

9. Enter the I/O check mode.
10. Enter "18" with the numeric keys. Confirm that "18-00" appears on the message display area.
13. Insert a sheet of paper that the customer mainly uses (paper weight 50 g/m2 to 300 g/m2) to the position of the paper that is inserted in
step 5. Then, press the Start key and confirm that "0" appears on the input check display.
14. Insert another sheet of paper (2 sheets in all) that customer mainly uses, and confirm that "1" appears on the input check display.
15. Pull out the inserted papers, and install the parts removed.
4.3.15 Crosswise Dir. Skew Adj. (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the G5 lens in the writing unit/K and correct the image distortion of K in the main scanning direction.
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment when there is a skew in the main scan direction.
Note
• Color registration adjustment do not correct the image distortion of K in the main scanning direction. (Adjusts YMC only.)
• To change the image distortion of K in the main scanning direction, you can also conduct [Chart Adjustment] of [Both Side Adj.]
in the User Mode.
(3) Procedure
Press [13 Crosswise Dir. Skew Adj.].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [Ceosswise Dir. Skew Adj.]
4. "Crosswise Dir. Skew Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
Note
• When you press the start key, G5 lenses of YMCK are adjusted and the color registration adjustment (for approximately 2
minutes) is automatically started. When the adjustment is completed, test pattern (number 16 or number 33) is printed.
6. Check the skew in main scanning direction.

• Standard value: ± 0.3% or less (difference between 280 mm diagonal lines "a, b" is 0.84 mm or less)
a03uf3c001ca
I-25
• Setting range: -30 to +30

• 1 step = 0.01 mm
9. Repeat step 4 to step 8 until the standard value can be obtained.
4.3.16 Beam Pitch Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
This adjustment changes the write clock to adjust the beam pitches of LD1 to LD4.
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment after you replace the write unit.
Note
• Be sure to complete "I.4.3.11 Skew Initial Position Memory (Printer Adjustment - Writing Initial Pos. Memory)" and "I.4.3.12 Color
Registration Auto.Adj. (Printer Adjustment)" before this adjustment.
(3) Procedure
Press [14 Beam Pitch Adjustment].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [Beam Pitch Adjustment]
4. "Beam Pitch Adjustment screen"
Confirm that the current value of [Y] is "0".
When it is other than 0, enter "0" through the numeric buttons and press [SET].
Change all the current values for each color to "0" in the same way and press [Print Mode].
Select A3 or 11 x 17 paper (105 g/m2 or less) and press the Start key.
6. Check the beam pitch misalignment on the 3rd column of the test chart.
The outputted charts shows from the top the conditions with the values +10, +5, ± 0, -5 and -10 to or from the current value of each colors.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[1] Current +10 [2] Current +5

[3] Current [4] Current -5
[5] Current -10 -
7. When the moires on the top and bottom are even or there is no moire [1], or the white thin line and the black thin line on the left and right
are even or there is no thin line [4]: No need to adjust.
When the moire on the bottom is strong [2] or when the white thin line appears on the left side and the black one on the right side [5]:
Adjust in "+" direction.
I-26
When the moire on the top is strong [3] or when the black thin line appears on the left side and the white one on the right side [6]: Adjust
in "-" direction.
[2] [3]
[1]
[4] [5] [6]
[1] The moires on the top and bottom are even or there is [2] The moires on the bottom is strong
no moire
[3] The moires on the top is strong [4] The white thin line and the black thin line on the left and
right are even or there is no thin line
[5] The white thin line and the black thin line on the left and [6] The white thin line appears on the left side and the
right are even or there is no thin line black one on the right side
8. If there are any abnormalities, press [Exit PrintMode].

9. "Beam Pitch Adjustment screen"
• Setting range: -100 to +100
4.3.17 Color Registration Manual Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
Manually adjust the offset value in the sub scan direction for the color registration misalignment amount.
(2) Usage
• Perform this adjustment when there is an offset on the misalignment amount of each color after the "Color Registration Auto.Adj. (Printer
Adjustment)".
• Check the image and the misalignment in the direction of the sub-scan of "Color Regist. Gap Measurement (Printer Adjustment)". Perform
this adjustment when the misalignment amount in the direction of the sub-scan of each color for K has an offset.
[1]
[2]
[1] The test pattern for manual adjustment of color [2] Misalignment amount for color M.
registration
I-27
Note
Adjustment))
• Be sure the Color Registration Auto.Adj. (Printer Adjustment) has been adjusted in advance. (Refer to I.4.3.12 Color Registration
Auto.Adj. (Printer Adjustment))
• Be sure that the color registration gap measurement (Printer Adjustment) has been completed before this adjustment. (Refer to
I.4.3.13 Color Regist.Gap Measurement (Printer Adjustment))
(3) Procedure
Press [15 Color Regist. Manual Adj.].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [Color Regist. Manual Adj.]
4. "Color Regist. Manual Adj. screen"
Select the color that you want to adjust.
5. Enter a value through the numeric buttons when you need, and press [SET].
• Setting range: -80 (the picture moves to the paper feed direction) to +80 (the picture moves to the opposite of the paper feed
direction)
• 1 step = 1.3μm
• Default setting value: Y = -8, M = 0, C = 0
6. Check the measured misalignment amount in the direction of the sub-scan of "Color Regist. Gap Measurement (Printer Adjustment)".
Otherwise, check the image. When the misalignment amount does not converge, repeat the step 4 to step 5.
4.3.18 Recall Standard Data (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
Reset the adjustment values of the printer adjustment to the factory initial data or the installation initial data.
(2) Usage
The same adjustment table is changed since the user can change some parts of the printer adjustment. Therefore, conduct this adjustment
when the adjustment values cannot be initialized because of the erroneous operation by the user.
Note
• Adjustment data of "Color Registration Auto.", "Color Registration Manual", "PFU Dfeed detect Adj.", and "CD-Mag. Skew Adj."
are not restored.
(3) Procedure
Press [16 Recall Standard Data].
4. "Recall Standard Data screen"
Press [Factory Initial Data] or [Installation Initial Data].
Note
• When you select [Factory Initial Data], each configuration value returns to the factory initial data.
• When you select [Installation initial data] each configuration value returns to the adjustment values stored when the code
"91-00" of the I/O check mode was conducted.
5. Press [Yes] to restore the standard data.

Press [No] to cancel the operation.
4.3.19 Restart Timing Adjustment (Scan Adjustment)

(1) Function
This adjustment changes read start timing when you scan original in the sub-scan direction.
(2) Usage
Adjust the image leading edge timing when you scan in platen mode.
Note
• Be sure the "Restart Timing Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)" has been adjusted before you perform this adjustment. (Refer to I.
4.3.1 Restart Timing Adjustment (Printer Adjustment))
adjustment method.
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Scan Adjustment].
I-28
3. "Scan Adjustment Menu screen"

Press [01 Restart Timing Adjustment].
4. [Restart Timing Adjustment screen]
Press [Print Mode].
6. Check the scan image leading edge timing.
• Standard value: 0 ± 1.5 mm
• Setting range: -30 (image slow) to +30 (image fast)
• 1 step = 0.1 mm
4.3.20 Centering Adjustment (Scan Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the centering of images in the main scan direction when you scan from the original glass.
(2) Usage
Adjust an image mis-centering in the main scan direction when you scan from the original glass.
Note
• Be sure the Centering Adjustment (Printer Adjustment) has been adjusted in advance. (Refer to I.4.3.4 Centering adjustment
(printer adjustment - centering adjustment))
adjustment method.
(3) Procedure
Select "Original Glass Centering" and press [Print Mode].
5. "Copy screen"
Place the test chart to the original glass. Choose the paper A3 or 11x17, and press the start key.
6. Fold the printed paper into 2 along the center in the main scan direction, and measure how much the left line and the right line misalign
from each other.
• Standard value
: 0 +/- 1.5 mm or less
• Setting range: -57 (move the image back) to +57 (move the image front)
• 1 step = 0.1 mm
I-29
4.3.21 FD-Mag. Adjustment (Scan Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the magnification in the direction of the sub-scan in original grass mode. This adjustment changes scan speed.
(2) Usage
Adjust the magnification in the sub-scanning direction in original grass mode and DF mode.
Note
• This adjustment method is for C1070 and C1060 and C1060L (copier version). C1070P and C71hc (printer version) does not have
the adjustment method.
(3) Procedure
Press [Print Mode].
• Standard value
: 200 ± 1 mm or less
200
57gaf3c005na
• Setting range: +990 (short) to +1010 (long)
• 1 step = x 0.001
4.3.22 Scan Gradation/Color Adj. (Scan Adjustment)

Note
• In this adjustment, use the special chart and the gradation data. Contact the service manager of the authorized distributor for
acquiring these items.
(1) Function
Conduct the gradation correction of the scanner.
(2) Usage
When the color reproduction is in a poor condition, usually conduct the "Gamma Automatic Adj." of the "Process Adjustment".
Conduct this adjustment if the color reproduction is in a poor condition (especially in a highlight area) after you replace the CCD unit,
exposure lamp (L1), original glass or each scanner mirror.
CAUTION
• Scanner gradation (gamma) has been adjusted for each machine at the factory. Please note that if the [Reset Adj. Data] in the
"Scan Gradation/Color Adj. screen" is pressed, the scanner gradation data is overwritten to the average value.
• Once [Adj. data reset] is pressed, previous data cannot be restored.
Note
adjustment method.
(3) Procedure
1. After the replacement, place a "Color chart" on the original glass, A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the Start key.
Note
• Press the hard key on the operation panel, not the soft key on the touch panel.
2. Check if there is no image background or the problem in the color balance.

3. If there is abnormality, enter Service mode.
I-30

Press [04 Scan Gradation/Color Adj.].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Scan Adjustment] → [Scan Gradation/Color Adj.]
7. "Scan Gradation/Color Adj. screen"
Press [Reset Adj. Data].
CAUTION
• Scanner gradation (gamma) has been adjusted for each machine at the factory. Please note that if the [Reset Adj. Data] in
the "Scan Gradation/Color Adj. screen" is pressed, the scanner gradation data is overwritten to the average value.
• Once [Adj. data reset] is pressed, previous data cannot be restored.
8. Press the [YES] key to overwrite the scanner gradation data to the average value.
Press [No] to cancel the operation and return to the previous screen.
4.3.23 CD-Mag. adjustment (scan adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the magnification of the scanner section in the main scan direction.
(2) Usage
Use this adjustment when you replace the CCD unit.
Note
• Be sure that the printer CD-Mag. adjustment (printer adjustment) has been adjusted before this adjustment. (Refer to I.4.3.6 CD-
Mag. Adjustment (Printer Adjustment))
(3) Procedure
Press [05 CD-Mag. Adjustment].
Press [Print Mode].
Place the color chart to the original glass and choose the paper A3 or 11x17. Press the start key.
6. Check the difference between "A" on the color chart and "A" on the output test print.
Enlarged view of the color chart
• Standard value
: +/- 1.0 mm
• When the value is too short: Change the setting value to the plus.
• When the value is too long: Change the setting value to the minus.
• Adjustment range: 990 to +1010
• 1 step = x 0.001
4.3.24 Sensor check (scan adjustment)

(1) Function
Check the sensor output of sensors which is related with the scanner.
(2) Usage
Check the detecting condition of each sensor for troubleshooting.
Note
• This function is for C1070, C1060, and C1060L (copier version). C1070P and C71hc (printer version) does not have this function.
(3) Procedure
I-31

Press [07 Sensor Check].
4. "Sensor Check screen"
ON or OFF indicates the condition of following detection sensors.
• Scanner home sensor 1: PS67
• Original size detection cover: SW6
• Original size search 20 degrees: PS68
• Original size detection 1: PS69
• Original size detection 2: PS70
4.3.25 CCD check (scan adjustment)

(1) Function
Displays the status of the CCD.
(2) Usage
Use this adjustment when you handle the trouble about the CCD sensor.
Note
(3) Procedure
Press [07 CCD Check]
4. "CCD Check screen"
The highest value and the lowest value for each of the clamp and the gain are shown.
• The following table shows the range of the normal value.
(CCD)
• Clamp: The output value have to be within the value on the following table.
Clamp management value The lowest value The highest value
R 600 1500
G 600 1700
B 600 1600
• Gain: The output value have to be within the value on the following table.
Gain management value The lowest value The highest value
R 20 238
G 10 222
B 70 247
4.3.26 Line magnification setting (scan adjustment)

(1) Function
Select whether you use the adjustment value which is specified at the factory. Also, you can check the current magnification adjustment
value.
(2) Usage
• After you replace the CCD unit, select "OFF".
The line magnification calibration value that is adjusted for each unit changes to control the differences in the reading performance on
each scanner (CCD). So after you replace the CCD unit, be sure to perform the setting of the default generic value.
• You can disable the original calibration adjustment value when the image failure and other problems whose cause is the individual CCD
performance difference occurs.
Note
(3) Procedure
Press [08 Line Mag. Setting ].
4. "Line Mag. Setting screen"
Select [ON] or [OFF].
I-32
Note
• When you change the setting, the function becomes available after you deactivate and activate the main power switch again.
4.3.27 Recall Standard Data (Scan Adjustment)

(1) Function
Restore the scan adjustment configuration values to factory initial data or installation initial data.
(2) Usage
Therefore, conduct this adjustment when the adjustment values cannot be initialized because of the erroneous operation by the user or CE.
Note
• Adjustment data for "Scan Gradation/Color Adjustment", "Sensor Check", "CCD Check", "Line Magnification Setting" are not
restored.
(3) Procedure
Note
• When you select [Installation initial data] each configuration value returns to the adjustment values stored when the code

4.3.28 Printer gamma offset adjustment (quality adjustment - printer gamma adjustment)
(1) Function
Change the printer gamma curve and adjust the gradation and the background density in a highlight area.
Note
• This adjustment can only be applied to IDC sensor gamma corrections. When Color Density Control is being used, this
adjustment is not necessary.
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment when the color reproduction of the highlighted gradation is not good.
Note
• Be sure the Gamma Automatic Adjustment has been adjusted in advance. (Refer to I.4.4.6 Gamma Automatic Adjustment (Drum
• Normally, adjust the printer gamma on C1070 or C1060 or C1060L (copier version) with "I.4.3.29 Printer Gamma Offset Auto.
(Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment)".
Perform this adjustment for C1070P, C71hc (printer version) or when you want to make fine adjustments of the printer gamma.
• Do not conduct this adjustment when you conduct "Output Paper Density Adj."
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Quality Adjustment].
3. "Quality Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [01 Printer Gamma Adjustment]
4. "Printer Gamma Adjustment screen"
Press [01 Printer Gamma Offset Adj].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Quality Adjustment] → [Printer Gamma Adjustment] → [Printer Gamma Offset Adj.]
5. "Printer Gamma Offset Adj. screen"
Press [Next] or [Previous] to select the screen that you want to adjust.
Note
• Screen 1, screen 2, and stochastic correspond to the screen names in the user mode.
• Contone is a screen that is used in the character section of the screen.
• Contone does not require the adjustment.
6. Press [Print Mode].

7. Place the A4 or 8 1/2 x 11 paper. Press the Start key to output the test pattern.
8. Check the printed test pattern.
• Make sure that the highlight density starting section of C and K is uniform, and even between the gray reference lines [1].
I-33
[1]
Y
M
C
K
9. If they are not even, press [Exit PrintMode].

10. "Printer Gamma Offset Adj. screen"
Press the button of a color (C or K) to adjust, enter a value through the numeric button and press [SET].
Setting range: -128 (light) to +127 (dark)
12. Take notice of the gray gradation pattern [1] that is created in C, M and Y, make sure that the gray balance at the square marks line [2]
and [3] is the same.
Y
M
C
K
[1]
[6] [5] [4] [2] [3]
13. If the gray balance is not the same, press the color (Y or M) to adjust, enter a value through the numeric buttons and press [SET].
• How to match the gray balance
Take notice of the gray block [4] that is made up of 49 patches that are created in C, M and Y.
In the 49 patches, M gets darker toward right, and Y gets darker downward. C remains unchanged.
The patch [5] at the center is the same color as the gray [2]. The patches [6] that are positioned at the 4 corners of the patch [5] is the
same color as the gray [3].
Out of the 49 patches, select a gray of the same gray balance as the gray [6].
Example:
• When a patch on the lower right side is more suitable than the patch [5] at the center: Adjust M and Y in the darker direction.
• When a patch on the upper left side is more suitable than the patch [5] at the center: Adjust M and Y in the lighter direction.
4.3.29 Printer Gamma Offset Auto. (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment)
(1) Function
Change the printer gamma curve and adjust the gradation and the background density in a highlight area automatically.
Note
(2) Usage
Note
• When you conduct this adjustment, be sure to use the plain paper or the color copy paper. Otherwise, the adjustment is not
conducted properly because the color of the test pattern varies depending on the paper color.
• To adjust the printer gamma, perform this adjustment. When a fine adjustment of the printer gamma is required, perform "I.
4.3.28 Printer gamma offset adjustment (quality adjustment - printer gamma adjustment)."
• This adjustment method is for C1070 and C1060 and C1060L (copier version). For C1070P and C71hc (printer version), perform
"I.4.3.28 Printer gamma offset adjustment (quality adjustment - printer gamma adjustment)".
• Do not conduct this adjustment when you conduct "Output Paper Density Adj."
(3) Procedure
I-34

Press [02 Printer Gamma Offset Auto.].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Quality Adjustment] → [Printer Gamma Adjustment] → [Printer Gamma Offset Auto.]
5. "Printer Gamma Offset Auto. screen"
Note
• The adjustable screens are the same as the ones in Printer Gamma Offset Adj.
• The printer gamma offset value of each YMCK displayed are the current values, and they are linked with the "Printer Gamma
Offset Adj." values.
6. Press [Readjust]. To readjust, press [Yes], and press [No] to cancel the operation.
Note
• When the adjustment value greatly differs from 0, press [Reset Adj. Data] to reset the printer gamma offset value to 0. Then
press [Readjust].

Place A4 or 8 1/2 x 11 paper and press the Start key to print a test pattern.
Returns to the adjustment screen automatically when the test pattern is printed.
plate/Rr [4].
Note
• Place the test pattern so that the green triangular mark [2] comes to the left side. (printed side face down)
[3] [4]
[2]
[1]
a03uf3c030ca
10. Place 10 sheets of copy paper (white) on top of the test pattern and close the DF or the platen cover.
Note
• Be sure to use the white copy paper. Otherwise, the printer gamma cannot be corrected properly.
11. Press [Start].

12. The test pattern is scanned and the current YMCK values are updated.
Note
• Since the scanned result at the first scan is not examined, a "Completed" message does not appear after the first scan.
• The quality examination of the value is made from the second scan. Make sure to repeat steps 8 to 11 several times until the
message "Completed normally" appears.

Press [Print Mode].
14. Perform the steps 8 to 11.
15. Confirm that the message "Completed normally" appears.
If the screen shows the message other than "Completed normally", repeat steps 13 to 14.
4.3.30 Printer Gamma Sensor Adj. (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment)
(1) Function
The printer gamma correction that is performed automatically on the regular basis uses the IDC sensor to read the pattern on the transfer belt.
Therefore the correction is possibly inaccurate depending on the characteristic changes of the IDC sensor. This adjustment uses the scanner
to correct the IDC sensor.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when a color reproduction is in a poor condition because of a replacement of the IDC sensor.
Do not conduct this adjustment unless the IDC sensor is replaced.
Note
• When you conduct this adjustment, be sure to use the plain paper or the color copy paper. Otherwise, the adjustment is not
conducted properly because the color of the test pattern varies depending on the paper color.
• When you press [Reset Adj. Data] and [Yes], the adjusted Printer Gamma Sensor Adjustment is reset to the main body ROM
initial setting data (average value). Press [No] not to reset the data.
I-35
• This adjustment is the adjustment method for C1070 and C1060 and C1060L (copier version).
• When RU-509 is not connected to C1070P and C71hc (printer version), execute the calibration of the controller.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Printer Gamma Sensor Adj.].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Quality Adjustment] → [Printer Gamma Adjustment] → [Printer Gamma Sensor Adj.]
5. "Printer Gamma Sensor Adjustment screen"
Select the screen that you want to adjust.
Note
• The adjustable screens are the same as the ones in Printer Gamma Offset Adjustment.

8. "Place output image on original glass...screen"
plate/Rr [4].
Note
• Place the test pattern so that the green triangular mark [2] comes to the left side. (printed side face down)
[3] [4]
[2]
[1]
8050fs1017
9. Place 10 sheets of copy paper (white) on top of the test pattern and close the DF or the platen cover.
Note
• Be sure to use the white copy paper. Otherwise, the printer gamma cannot be corrected properly.
10. Press [Start].

11. If the chart is scanned and it is normal, the gamma sensor adjustment and the printer gamma correction carries out, and then the
"Completed" message appears.
12. When an abnormality occurs, an error code appears for every cause. Correct the error referring to the following and repeat steps 6 to 11.
Error code Error Descriptions
Error 1 A crossmark cannot be detected Chart misplacement
Error 2 The chart is placed upside down Chart misplacement
Error 3 Cannot detect the chart pattern Different chart is placed
Error 4 Adjustment impossible Software bug
Error 5 Value is out of standard Readjust
Error 6 Non-volatile data abnormality Check the installation position of the
NVRAM board
Error 7 Accessing to the unassigned memory Software bug
Error 8 Memory-related error Software bug
Error 9 Program error Software bug
Error 10 Chart is skewed Chart misplacement
Error 11 Image header information read error Software bug
Error 12 RGB data abnormalities Chart is different, or the software bug
Error 13 Parameter setting error Software bug
Error 31 Sensor value error Readjust
Error 51 Regression calculation error Readjust
Error 52 Sequential number overflow Software bug
Error 53 Regression order error Software bug
I-36
Error 54 Select screen information error Software bug

Error 55 Color information error Software bug
4.3.31 Printer gamma curve adjustment (quality adjustment - printer gamma adjustment)
(1) Function
Adjusts the halftone characteristics of the engine to the gamma curve of the IC controller (IC-308/IC-415).
(2) Usage
Use when a tone jump occurs on the sequential tone when you print on IC-308/IC-415.
Note
• After you perform this adjustment, re-create the target of the color density control.
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Printer gamma curve adjustment].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Quality Adjustment] → [Printer Gamma Adjustment] → [Printer Gamma Curve Adj.]
5. "Printer gamma curve adjustment screen"
Select the item that you want to adjust. Enter a value through the numeric buttons and press [SET].
• Setting Range
: - 10 to + 10
Note
• Be sure to change only the IDC sensor side.
• When you change the RU side, be sure to delete all the table of the color density manual control.
4.3.32 Printer Gamma Offset Auto. (RU) (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment)
(1) Function
Change the printer gamma curve and adjust the gradation and the background density in a highlight area automatically.
Note
(2) Usage
Note
• Be sure to confirm that each setting value of Y, M, C and K from [11 Test Mode] - [02 Test Pattern Output Mode] is not "0" before
this adjustment. When any of the setting value Y, M, C, K is "0", proper adjustment is not available.
• Do not use a colored paper or an embossed paper for this adjustment. When you use the colored paper or the embossed paper,
this adjustment is not performed properly.
• To adjust the printer gamma, perform this adjustment. When a fine adjustment of the printer gamma is required, perform "I.
4.3.28 Printer gamma offset adjustment (quality adjustment - printer gamma adjustment)."
• This adjustment is available when RU-508 or RU-509 is connected.
(3) Procedure
Press [05 Printer Gamma Offset Auto. (RU)].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Quality Adjustment] → [Printer Gamma Adjustment] → [Print Gamma Offset Auto.(RU)]
Note
• The adjustable screens are the same as the ones in Printer Gamma Offset Adj.
• The printer gamma offset value of each YMCK displayed are the current values, and they are linked with the "Printer Gamma
Offset Adj." values.
6. Press [Readjust]. To readjust, press [Yes], and press [No] to cancel the operation.
Note
• When the adjustment value greatly differs from 0, press [Reset Adj. Data] to reset the printer gamma offset value to 0. Then
press [Readjust].
I-37

Select the paper tray. Press the Start key to output the test pattern.
Note
• Each set of test patterns to measure the color and to check the result is outputted in twice.

The color of the test pattern is measured and the current YMCK values are updated.
Confirm that the message "Completed normally" appears.
10. When the screen shows a message other than "Completed normally", it displays an error code every cause. Correct the error referring to
the following and repeat steps 7 to 9.
Error code Error Countermeasures
Error 5 Standard value cannot be obtained. Readjust
(Readjust)
Error 14 Startup is out of the adjustment standard Readjust
Error 18 Output paper sensor value abnormality Readjust or replace the output paper
density sensor
4.3.33 Printer Gamma Sensor Adj. (RU) (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment)
(1) Function
The printer gamma correction that is performed automatically on the regular basis uses the IDC sensor to read the pattern on the transfer belt.
Therefore the correction is possibly inaccurate depending on the characteristic changes of the IDC sensor. This adjustment corrects the IDC
sensor using the color value from the output paper color density sensor of RU-508 or RU-509.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when a color reproduction is in a poor condition because of a replacement of the IDC sensor.
Do not conduct this adjustment unless the IDC sensor is replaced.
Note
• Be sure to confirm that each setting value of Y, M, C and K from [11 Test Mode] - [02 Test Pattern Output Mode] is not "0" before
this adjustment. When any of the setting value Y, M, C, K is "0", proper adjustment is not available.
• Do not use a colored paper or an embossed paper for this adjustment. When you use the colored paper or the embossed paper,
this adjustment is not performed properly.
• To reset the data to the factory default, press [Reset Adj. Data]. Press [Yes] to reset the printer gamma sensor adjustment to the
factory default data, and [No] to keep the current data.
• This adjustment is available when RU-508 or RU-509 is connected.
(3) Procedure
Press [06 Print. Gamma Sensor Adj. (RU)].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Quality Adjustment] → [Printer Gamma Adjustment] → [Printer Gamma Sensor Adj.(RU)]
5. "Printer Gamma Sensor Adjustment screen"
Select the screen that you want to adjust.
Note
• The adjustable screens are the same as the ones in Printer Gamma Offset Adjustment.

7. Select the paper tray. Press the Start key to output the test pattern.
8. If the test pattern is measured and it is normal, the gamma sensor adjustment, the printer gamma correction carries out, and "Completed"
message appears.
9. When an abnormality occurs, the screen shows an error code for every cause. Correct the error referring to the following and repeat steps
6 to 8.
Error code Error Countermeasures
Error 4 Input sensor value abnormality Check the size of the test pattern, check the
output paper density sensor
Error 31 Acquired sensor value abnormality Readjust
(gradation reverse)
Error 51 Regression calculation error Readjust
4.3.34 Sharpness Adjustment (Quality Adjustment)

(1) Function
Conduct the sharpness adjustment when you want to adjust the sharpness or to reduce the moire..
I-38
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment to change the center value of the sharpness adjustment in the user mode.
Note
• This adjustment reflects only to the scanned image.
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Sharpness Adjustment].
4. "Sharpness Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
Place a "Color chart" on the original glass, select A3 or 11 x 17 paper, and press the Start key.
6. Press [Exit PrintMode].
7. As necessary, enter a value through the numeric buttons and press [SET].
Setting range: -5 (soft, less moire) to +5 (sharp, more moire)
4.3.35 Contrast Adjustment (Quality Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the contrast.
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment to change the center value of the contrast adjustment in the user mode.
Note
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Contrast Adjustment].
4. "Contrast Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
Place a "Color chart" on the original glass, select A3 or 11 x 17 paper, and press the Start key.
Setting range: -5 (contrast decrease) to +5 (contrast increase)
4.3.36 Dot Detect Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Image Distinction Level)

(1) Function
Adjust the threshold value of original image distinction.
(2) Usage
Adjust when the dot distinction result differs from the original.
Note
• The scanned original is judged to the text, the picture, the dot, or the colored text by the image process. The screen to use is
decided according to the result.
• Use this adjustment for raising the judgment precision of the original to prevent it from misreading the area.
• To widen the judgment area of the picture, adjust it in the user mode.
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Image Distinction Level].
4. "Image Distinction Level screen"
I-39
Press [01 Dot Detect Adjustment].

5. "Dot Detect Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Select A3 paper, place the original you want to adjust on the original glass, and press the start button.
7. Dot detection pattern is outputted.
This output pattern shows how the original image is judged.
• Cyan section: Distinguished as dot
• White part: Judged as picture
• Black section: Distinguished as black text
• Magenta section: Distinguished as colored text
9. "Dot Detect Adjustment screen"
Enter a value through the numeric buttons when you need, and press [Set].
Setting range: -5 (dot area decrease) to +5 (dot area increase)
4.3.37 Color Text Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Image Distinction Level)

(1) Function
Adjust the color text distinction threshold value of the original image.
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment to change the center value of the color text distinction function in the user mode.
Note
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Color Text Adjustment].
5. "Color Text Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Select A3 or 11 x 17 paper, place the original to adjust on the original glass, and press the start button.
7. Color text detect pattern is printed.
9. "Color Text Adjustment screen"
Enter a value through the numeric buttons when you need, and press [SET].
Setting range: -5 (color text area decrease) to +5 (color text area increase)
4.3.38 Dot/Text Area Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Image Distinction Level)

(1) Function
Adjust the dot distinction and text distinction threshold values of the original image.
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment to change the center value of the text photo distinction function in the user mode.
Note
(3) Procedure
I-40

Press [03 Dot/Text Area adjustment].
5. "Dot and Text Area Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Select A3 paper, place the original you want to adjust on the original glass, and press the start button.
7. Dot and a text detection pattern is outputted.
• Cyan section: Distinguished as dot
• White part: Judged as picture
9. "Dot/Text Area Adjustment screen"
Setting range: -5 (dot area increase, text area decrease) to +5 (dot area decrease, text area increase)
4.3.39 ACS Adjustment (Quality Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the color, black and white distinction threshold value.
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment when ACS (Automatic color selection) function does not work properly.
Note
(3) Procedure
Press [05 ACS Adjustment].
4. "Place original and touch [Scan] screen"
Place an original that the ACS does not work properly on the original glass and press the [Scan].
5. Next to the "Judge:", the result "Color" or "Black" appears.
Setting range: -2 (black) to + 2 (color)
4.3.40 AE(AES) Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Density Adjustment)

(1) Function
This adjustment moves the printer gamma curve in parallel with the shade direction without changing the form to adjust the copy density.
(2) Usage
Adjust to change the center value that is selected in the automatic copy density function in the user mode.
Note
(3) Procedure
Press [06 Density Adjustment].
4. "Density Adjustment screen"
Press [01 AE(AES) Adjustment].
5. "AE (AES) Adj. screen"
To increase the density of the resulting copy with the background density automatically adjusted, enter a number in the darker direction.
To reduce the density, enter a number in the lighter direction.
Setting range: -5 to +5
6. In the copy mode, check the automatic background copy that was output.
7. Repeat the steps 1 to 7 until an appropriate density is obtained.
I-41
4.3.41 Copy Density Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Density Adjustment)

(1) Function
(2) Usage
Adjust the density for copying.
Perform this adjustment to change the center value of the "Density Shift" in the user mode.
Note
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Copy Density Adjustment].
5. "Copy Density Adjustment screen"
Press [▼] or [▲] to select the item to adjust.
Select the mode that you adjust and select A3 or 11 X 17 paper. Then place a "Color chart" on the original glass and press the Start key.
9. "Copy Density Adjustment screen"
4.3.42 Back. Removal (Quality Adjustment - Density Adjustment)

(1) Function
(2) Usage
Adjust the background density (density of highlighted area) for copying.
In the user mode only a batch adjustment is enabled. Therefore, it is impossible to perform the adjustment respectively for original settings or
color modes.
Note
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Background Removal].
5. "Background Removal screen"
Press [▼] or [▲] to select the item to adjust.
Select the mode that you want to adjust and select A3 or 11 x 17 paper. Then place a "Test chart" on the original glass and press the
Start key.
9. "Background Removal screen"
Setting range: -5 (light) to 5 + (dark)
4.3.43 Tone Adjustment (RGB/YMC) (Quality Adjustment - Tone Adjustment)

(1) Function
Perform the fine adjustment of the tone for the copy, scanner image and improve the gray balance.
I-42
(2) Usage
This adjustment is not required in the field because this adjustment is completed at the factory. However, when the gray balance is bluish,
perform this adjustment to improve it.
Note
adjustment method.
(3) Procedure
1. "Service Mode Menu screen" Press [01 Machine Adjustment].
2. "Machine Adjustment Menu screen" Press [03 Quality Adjustment].
3. "Quality Adjustment Menu screen" press [07 Tone Adjustment].
4. "Tone Adjustment Menu screen" press [01 Tone Adjustment (RGB/YMC)].
5. "Tone Adjustment (RGB/YMC) screen" press [Print Mode].
6. "PRINT MODE screen" select [Full Color] and place the color chart on the original glass. Press start key.
8. "Tone Adjustment (RGB/YMC) screen" select the color that you want to improve the gray balance from R, G, B, Y, M, C.
Input the adjustment value and press [Set].
Setting range: -5 (light) to 5 + (dark)
4.3.44 Non-Image Area Erase Check

(1) Function
When you conduct the function of the Non-Image Area Auto Erase function under a bright light source, the function could not operate
normally. In that case, check the level of the external light and check whether the Non-Image Area Auto Erase function operates normally.
The results are shown in the following patterns.
OK Works normally
NG1 The function operates normally. However, the data which the Non-Image Area Auto Erase
function could not operate correctly is found (In the case which the function could not operate
correctly with dark originals).
NG2 In the case which the Non-Image Area Auto Erase function does not operate correctly.
(2) Usage
Use this function when you install a new machine or move a installation location.
Use this function when the Non-Image Area Auto Erase function does not operate correctly since the environment of the installation location
changes.
Note
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Non-Image Area Erase Check ].
3. "Non-Image Area Erase Check screen"
Press [Start].
Note
• When you start this check, confirm that ADF or the original cover open fully.Also, confirm that there are no scratches or no
dirt on the original glass.
4. The check is conducted, and the message "OK" appears for the normal condition. For "NG1" and "NG2", reinstall the machine so that the
external light does not come in, and then conduct the check again.
4.3.45 Tray size adjustment (Tray adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the size detection accuracy of each tray.
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment when the paper size is detected wrongly.
(3) Procedure
Note
• When you adjust the tray size of the LU-202, press the tray down switch (SW100) twice, and lower the up down plate to the
lowest position.
When you adjust the tray size while the up down plate is at its upper position, you cannot adjust accurately.
• The up down plate of the MB-506 does not move down on the adjustment mode.
When you move down the plate, exit from the adjustment mode.
(You can adjust the tray size of the MB-506 even when the up down plate is not at its lowest position. )
I-43

Press [05 Tray Adjustment].
3. "Tray Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [01 Tray Size adjustment ].
4. Select (Large) of the tray that you want to adjust.
5. Adjust the width of the side guide of the tray that you want to adjust to 297 mm.
6. Press [Start].
7. Select (Small) of the tray that you want to adjust.
8. Adjust the width of the side guide of the tray that you want to adjust to 148 mm.
9. Press [Start].
4.3.46 Recall Standard Data (Quality Adjustment)

(1) Function
Restore the quality adjustment configuration values to factory initial data or installation initial data.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the initialization cannot be done because of the various change by CE.
(3) Procedure
Note
• When you select [Installation initial data], each configuration value returns to the adjustment values stored when the code

4.4 Process adjustment

4.4.1 1st Transfer Manual Adj. (High Voltage Adjustment)
Do not conduct this adjustment in the field.
4.4.2 2nd Transfer Manual Adj. (High Voltage Adjustment)

4.4.3 Separation current manual adjustment (High voltage adjustment)

4.4.4 Pre-transfer Guide Confirm (High Voltage Adjustment)

4.4.5 Blade Setting Mode (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment)

(1) Function
To prevent the damage to the transfer belt and the cleaning blade, clean after the toner attached on the transfer belt.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when you replace the intermediate transfer belt and the cleaning blade.
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Process Adjustment].
2. "Process Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [02 Drum Peculiarity Adj.].
3. "Drum Peculiarity Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [01 Blade Setting Mode].
[Service Mode] → [Process Adjustment] → [Drum Peculiarity Adj.] → [Blade Setting Mode]
4. "Blade Setting Mode screen"
Press [Intermediate Transfer Belt]. It completes in about 15 seconds then the message of the completion appears on the screen.
I-44
4.4.6 Gamma Automatic Adjustment (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment)

(1) Function
The maximum density correction, V0 correction, Vm correction, and a gamma correction are executed all at once for each line speed and a
quality mode.
(2) Usage
Executes the image stabilization control that is executed automatically and periodically on arbitrary timing.
Executes before color calibration of the controller.
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Gamma Automatic Adjustment].
[Service Mode] → [Process Adjustment] → [Drum Peculiarity Adj.] → [Gamma Automatic Adjustment]
4. "Gamma Automatic Adjustment screen"
Press [Start]. The adjustment is complete in about 1 minute. The charger DC bias value for each process speed (line speed 1, line speed
2, line speed 3, line speed 4) and each color (Y, M, C, K) appears. The message of the completion appears on the screen.
Note
• An error code appears when there is any trouble. Correct the error referring to the following list.
Error 1: Unable to execute the gamma correction because of the gamma sensor output abnormality. When the error occurs,
use the previous correction value to control it.
4.4.7 Toner Density Sensor Init. (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment)

(1) Function
Use the TCR sensor to measure the developer permeability in the developing unit, and store the TCR sensor output voltage in the NVRAM
board (NRB).
(2) Usage
Carry out this adjustment after new developer is charged, and adjust the standard toner concentration of the developer.
Note
• After you replace the developer, do not execute printing without carrying out this adjustment. Otherwise, a proper image density
cannot be obtained, and you must replace the developers.
• The value that appears after the adjustment is the TCR sensor output voltage.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Toner Density Sensor Init.].
[Service Mode] → [Process Adjustment] → [Drum Peculiarity Adj.] → [Toner Density Sensor Init.]
4. "TonerDensitySensorInit.Auto screen"
Select the color of a developer that has been newly charged and then press the [Start].
5. A message "Completed" appears.
4.4.8 Toner Density Revert (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment)

(1) Function
Supply toner automatically for the developing unit with lower output value of the TCR sensor than the standard (low toner concentration) until
the toner density reaches the standard.
Note
• When the toner density is high, change the test pattern density of the target color to 128 (change the density of other colors to
0), output 10 sheets of test pattern number 1, and check the toner density again.
(2) Usage
Recover to the normal toner density when the toner density of each color is low.
When SC that alerts low toner density occurs, recover the toner density with this recovery mode (start up the service mode).
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Toner Density Revert].
[Service Mode] → [Process Adjustment] → [Drum Peculiarity Adj.] → [Toner Density Revert]
4. "Toner Density Revert screen"
Select the color(s) which you want to recover the density.
I-45
5. Press [Start] to supply the toner to the developing unit with lower than the standard density value. When the toner concentration reaches
to the standard value, the main body stops.
Note
• The output value on the touch panel indicates the toner density (%). The operation status (activation or deactivation)
indicates the status of the toner supplying operation.
4.4.9 Maximum density initial adjustment (drum peculiarity adjustment)

(1) Function
The check and the optimization for the maximum density for each YMCK color is available.
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment when the density which the spectrophotometer measured is not target density. Perform this adjustment mainly after
the change of the machine status such as the installation or the maintenance.
Note
• Maximum density initial adjustment is already adjusted at the factory setting.
(3) Adjustment target value of C1070/C1070P/C1060/C1060L (reference)

The following shows the target density according to the spectrophotometer and the standard paper.
Acceptable target density range of each color Y, M, C: -5% to +5%, K: -5% to +10%
(a) Spectrolino (recommended)

Standard paper Type of Y M C K
paper
POD GLOSS COAT 128 g/m2 (coated, for Japan) Coated- 0.98 1.54 1.51 1.85
GL
MOHAWK EVERYDAY DIGITAL COATED SILK WHITE Coated- 0.97 1.52 1.52 1.82
118 (coated, for North America) GL
Konica Minolta Semi Gloss Reference 130 (coated, for Coated- 0.97 1.53 1.49 1.77
Europe) GL
Mondi Color Copy 90 g/m2 (Plain) Plain 0.93 1.45 1.39 1.65
(b) FD-7, FD-5BT (recommended)

paper
GL
Europe) GL
(c) ES-1000, ES-2000, i1Pro, i1Pro2 (with UV filter)

Note
· Absolute value: This value (density) includes the density of the paper
· Relative value: This value (density) excludes the density of the paper
Absolute value
paper
GL
Europe) GL
Relative value (Relative)

paper
GL
Europe) GL
I-46
(d) i1iSis XL
paper
GL
Europe) GL
(4) Adjustment target value of C71hc (reference)

The following shows the target density according to the spectrophotometer and the standard paper.
Acceptable target density range of each color Y, M, C: -5% to +5%, K: -5% to +10%
(a) Spectrolino (recommended)

paper
GL
Europe) GL
(b) FD-7, FD-5BT (recommended)

paper
GL
Europe) GL
(c) ES-1000, ES-2000, i1Pro, i1Pro2 (with UV filter)

Note
· Absolute value: This value (density) includes the density of the paper
· Relative value: This value (density) excludes the density of the paper
Absolute value
paper
GL
Europe) GL
Relative value (Relative)

paper
GL
Europe) GL
I-47
(d) i1iSis XL
paper
GL
Europe) GL
(5) Preparation
1. Prepare a standard paper.
Note
• When there is no standard paper, do not change the maximum density initial adjustment at the installation.
When there is the standard paper, perform the density balance adjustment with the combination of Dot190 (screen) and the
standard paper in advance.
2. Prepare one of the following spectrophotometers.

• Spectrolino (recommended), FD-7, FD-5BT (recommended)
• ES-1000, ES-2000, i1Pro, i1Pro2 (one of the spectrophotometers that EFI controller recommends)
• Other spectrophotometers (such as i1iSis XL)
3. Specify one paper for the daily density management.
Note
• Standard papers are recommended. However, when the user assigns the paper, counsel with the user and decide the paper.
• Perform the density balance adjustment with the combination of Dot190 (screen) and the paper for the density management
in advance or before the record of target density.
I-48
(6) Procedure for the setup or the update of the target value for the density management
(a) Adjustment flow
Measure and adjust the maximum density
1.Reset the maximum density adjustment value.
2.Perform the gamma automatic adjustment.
When there is no standard paper; When there is the standard paper;
3.Output the image for measurement.
4.Measure the density.
When the density is within the target:
When the density is not within the target:
5.Change the maximum density

initial adjustment value.
When RU-509 is not installed: When RU-509 is installed:
Output the image for measurement.
Measure the density.
Record the measurement result. Register the target density.
Completed
Record the target density
(b) Measurement and adjustment procedures of the maximum density

1. Press [Utility/Counter] - [03 Administrator Setting] - [01 System Setting] - [05 Expert Adjustment] - [06 Process Adjustment] - [02
Maximum Density Adjustment].
2. "Maximum Density Adjustment screen"
Select "0" for all adjustment values of YMCK and press [OK].
I-49
3. Enter the service mode and perform the gamma automatic adjustment. (Refer to I.4.4.6 Gamma Automatic Adjustment (Drum
4. Select Screen1 (Dot190) in the "Test Pattern Output Mode" on the service mode and output the test pattern number 69. (Refer to I.
4.13.17 Test pattern number 69 Maximum density adjustment pattern)
Note
• Use standard papers.
When there is no standard paper, proceed to (c) Recording the target density (when RU-509 is installed) or (d) Recording
the target density (when RU-509 is not installed). (Refer toI.4.4.9.(6).(c) Recording the target density (when RU-509 is
installed), I.4.4.9.(6).(d) Recording the target density (when RU-509 is not installed))
When there is the standard paper, perform the density balance adjustment with the combination of Dot190 (screen) and
the standard paper in advance.
5. Measure the density on the test pattern number 69 that you output.
The method differs depending on the spectrophotometer that you use.
• Measure the density with Spectrolino (Refer to I.4.4.9.(8).(a) Measure the density with Spectrolino)
• Measure the density with FD-7, FD-5BT (Refer to I.4.4.9.(8).(b) Measure the density with FD-7, FD-5BT)
• Measure the density with ES-1000, ES-2000, i1Pro, i1Pro2 (Refer to I.4.4.9.(8).(c) Measure the density with ES-1000, ES-2000,
i1Pro, i1Pro2)
• Measure the density with i1iSis XL (Refer to I.4.4.9.(8).(d) Measure the density with i1iSis XL)
Note
• For the method to measure the density with other spectrophotometers, refer to the manual of each spectrophotometer.
6. Check the measurement result of each color.

Compare the result with the adjustment target value (reference). When the density is within the target, the operation is complete. When
the density is not within the target density, perform the following adjustments.
7. Go back to the top screen of the service mode.
Press [05 Max Density Initial Adj.].
[Service Mode] → [Process Adjustment] → [Drum Peculiarity Adj.] → [Max Density Initial Adj.]
11. "Maximum Density Initial Adjustment screen"
Adjust the value according to the result of each color. Then, press [OK].
• The result is lower than the target density: increase the value of the target color.
• The measurement result is higher than the target density: decrease the value of the target color.
Note
• The change differs according to the paper.
(Reference) The change for POD GLOSS COAT 128 g/m2 (Spectrolino)
• Y: Changes for Δ0.012 by one step
• M: Changes for Δ0.021 by one step
• C: Changes for Δ0.026 by one step
• K: Changes for Δ0.021 by one step
12. Perform the step 3 to step 6, and check the measurement result.
When the density is not within the target density, perform the adjustments again.
(c) Recording the target density (when RU-509 is installed)

1. Specify a paper type for the daily density management and place the papers on the tray.
Note
• Standard papers are recommended. However, when the user assigns the paper, counsel with the user and decide the
paper.
• Perform the density balance adjustment with the combination of Dot190 (screen) and the paper for the density
management before the record of target density.
I-50
Press [Print Mode].

3. "Print Mode screen"
Select the paper for the density management. Press the start key and output the chart.
Press [Exit PrintMode].
Press [Confirm Target Density].
6. "Confirm Target Density screen"

Press [Register Target Density].
Note
• The information of the registered target density is displayed on the "Registered Data" column.
• The density data that you measured on the step 3 is displayed on the "Measured Data" column.
• The paper type that you used on the step 3 is displayed on the "Paper Type" column.
7. "Register Target Density screen"

Input the registered name of the target density data.
8. Press [OK] and register (update) the target density data.
Note
• When you press [Cancel], the target density data is not registered (updated).

Press [Confirm Target Density], and check that the information on "Registered Data" is updated.
(d) Recording the target density (when RU-509 is not installed)

1. Specify a paper type for the daily density management and place the papers on the tray.
Note
• Standard papers are recommended. However, when the user assigns the paper, counsel with the user and decide the
paper.
• Perform the density balance adjustment with the combination of Dot190 (screen) and the paper for the density
management before the record of target density.
2. Select Screen1 (Dot190) in the "Test Pattern Output Mode" on the service mode and output the test pattern number 69. (Refer to I.
4.13.17 Test pattern number 69 Maximum density adjustment pattern)
Note
• Use paper for the daily density management.
I-51
• Measure the density with ES-1000, ES-2000, i1Pro, i1Pro2 (Refer to I.4.4.9.(8).(c) Measure the density with ES-1000, ES-2000,
i1Pro, i1Pro2)
Note
• When you measure the target density, use the spectrophotometer of the user.
4. Write down the measurement results of the YMCK maximum density.

Note
• Be sure to inform each color measurement result of YMCK to the user because it is the target value for daily maximum
density management.
(7) Procedure for maintenance

(a) Adjustment flow
When RU-509 is not installed: When RU-509 is installed:
1.Reset the maximum density adjustment value. 1.Measure the density with RU-509.
2.Perform the gamma automatic adjustment. 2.Compare with the registered target value.
3.Output the image for measurement. Completed. Or, adjust and measure again.
4.Measure the density.
When measuring with the standard paper: When measuring with other than a standard paper:
(When there is the standard paper) (When there is no standard paper)
5.Compare with the adjustment 5.Compare with the target density

target value (reference). which you record at the set up.
Completed. Or, adjust and measure again. Completed. Or, adjust and measure again.
(b) When RU-509 is not installed

I-52
3. Enter the service mode and perform the gamma automatic adjustment. (Refer to I.4.4.6 Gamma Automatic Adjustment (Drum
4. Output the test pattern number 69 in the "Test Pattern Output Mode" on the service mode. (Refer to I.4.13.17 Test pattern number 69
Maximum density adjustment pattern)
Note
• Use standard papers.
When the user does not have the standard paper, use paper for the daily density management.
Perform the density balance adjustment with the combination of Dot190 (screen) and the standard paper or Dot190
(screen) and the paper for the density management in advance.
• Measure the density with ES-1000, ES-2000, i1Pro (Refer to I.4.4.9.(8).(c) Measure the density with ES-1000, ES-2000, i1Pro,
i1Pro2)
Note
• When you print the test pattern on the paper for the daily density management, use the spectrophotometer of the user.
6. Check the measurement result of each color.

When you measure the density with the standard paper, compare it with the adjustment target value (reference). When the density is
within the target, the operation is completed. When the density is not within the target density, perform the following procedures.
When you measure with the paper for the daily density management, compare the result with the target density that you recorded on
the setup. When the value is within the target density, the operation is complete. When the density is not within the target density,
perform the following procedures.
7. Go back to the top screen of the service mode.
Press [05 Max Density Initial Adj.].
[Service Mode] → [Process Adjustment] → [Drum Peculiarity Adj.] → [Max Density Initial Adj.]
Adjust the value according to the result of each color. Then, press [OK].
• The result is lower than the target density: increase the value of the target color.
• The measurement result is higher than the target density: decrease the value of the target color.
Note
• The change differs according to the paper.
(Reference) The change for POD GLOSS COAT 128 g/m2 (Spectrolino)
• Y: Changes for Δ0.012 by one step
• M: Changes for Δ0.021 by one step
• C: Changes for Δ0.026 by one step
• K: Changes for Δ0.021 by one step
12. Perform the step 3 to step 6, and check the measurement result.
When the density is not within the target density, perform the adjustments again.
(c) When RU-509 is installed

3. Select [Service Mode] - [02 Process Adjustment] - [02 Drum Peculiarity Adj.] - [05 Max Density Initial Adj.].
I-53
Press [Print Mode].

Place a paper for the density management, that you specify on the step 1 of the target density registration, on the tray. Then, change
the paper setting of the tray to the setting that is the same as the paper setting on the target density registration.
Note
• If you conduct the tray select of the print mode on [Utility/Counter] - [03 Administrator Setting] - [01 System Setting] - [05
Expert Adjustment] - [06 Process Adjustment] - [03 Max. Density Auto Adj. (RU)], you can change the paper setting of the
tray to the setting that is the same as the paper setting on the target density registration. (Refer to R.2.5 Maximum density
auto adjustment (RU))
6. Select the paper for the density management. Press the start key and output the chart.
Note
• At this time, the color sensor of the RU measures the color of the chart.

Press [Confirm Target Density].
8. "Confirm Target Density screen"

Compare the "Registered Data" and the "Measured Data".
Note
• The information of the registered target density is displayed on the "Registered Data" column.
• The density data that you measured on the step 4 is displayed on the "Measured Data" column.
• The paper type that you use on the step 4 is displayed on the "Paper Type" column.
9. When the "Measured Data" is not within the standard range (Y, M, C:-5% to +5%, K: -5% to +10%) compared with the "Registered
Data", change the adjustment value according to the measurement result of each color. Then, repeat step 4 to step 7.
• When the measurement result is lower than the target density: Increase the value of the target color.
• When the measurement result is higher than the target density: Decrease the value of the target color.
10. When the Y, M, C, K values on the "Measured Data" are within the standard values, press [Close].
Note
• If you press [Register Target Density], the registered data of the target density value is updated. Therefore, do not press
[Register Target Density].
(8) Measure the density with the spectrophotometer

(a) Measure the density with Spectrolino
Measure the averaged density of the 5 patches for CMYK.
I-54
[1] [2]
[3]
[4] [5]
[1] Measurement patch 1 [2] Measurement patch 2

[5] Measurement patch 5 -
The color measurement condition of Spectrolino
· The light source of the measurement: D50
· White standard: Abs
· The visual field of the measurement: 2 degrees
· Filter: UV Cut (Spectrolino), M2 light (FD-7)
· Density: ANSI T
· Measurement mode: Reflectance
(b) Measure the density with FD-7, FD-5BT

1. Activate FD-5BT.
2. Use the up down move button [1] on the home screen, and move the cursor to [Sheet] or [Sample].
[1] [2] [3]

[1] Up Down move button [2] Return button
[3] OPTION button -
3. Press the OPTION button and display the option screen.

4. Move the cursor to [Menu] on the option screen, and press the OPTION button.
I-55
5. Move the cursor to [Density Options] on the menu screen, and press the OPTION button.
6. Change the following items to the configurations mentioned in the table.

Setting item Configurations
Means. Cond. M2 (UV Cut)
Den. White Ref. Absolute value
Density Status T
Density Filter Auto
Note
• For detailed information on the configuration, refer to the manual attached to FD-7 or FD-5BT.
I-56
7. Press the return button and the menu screen is displayed.

8. Move the cursor to [Calibration] on the menu screen, and press the OPTION button.
9. Press the FD-5BT on the white calibration plate [1], and perform the white calibration.
[1]
[1] White calibration plate -
10. When "Calibrating..." is no longer displayed, take the FD-5BT away from the plate.
11. Press the return button twice, and the menu screen is displayed.
12. After you move the cursor to [Sample], move the opening of the FD-5BT [6] on the patch that you measure.
Press the FD-5BT and measure the density of CMYK patches [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] on the test pattern number 69.
I-57
[1] [2]
[3]
[4] [5]
[6]

[5] Measurement patch 5 [6] Opening
13. Calculate the average of the maximum density for each of C, M, Y, and K by the 5 patch densities of CMYK which you measured. Use
Excel or another application for the calculation.
(c) Measure the density with ES-1000, ES-2000, i1Pro, i1Pro2

1. The following procedure describes how to measure the density using ColorPort (X-Rite Corporation) as an example.
2. Start "ColorPort".
Note
• ColorPort is just one example of a color measurement application. Konica Minolta does not guarantee its measurement
accuracy.
• Color Port can be downloaded from the following URL.
http://www.xrite.com/product_overview.aspx?Action=support&ID=719
3. Create a target.
1. Select [i1Pro] on [Device].
2. Select [CMYK] on the [Color Space].
3. Select [New] on [Patch Set].
4. The "Customize Screen" appears. Enter any name on [Name].

5. Click [+] until [Total Patches] reaches to [20].
6. Click [Save] and save the target to any directory. Select TIFF for [Files of Type].
I-58
4. Adjust the setting of the measurement condition

1. Click [Measure Target] tab.
2. Select the target that you created on [Target].
3. Select [i1Pro] on [Device].
5. Perform the calibration

1. Select [Spot] on [Measurement Mode] of the "Configuration Screen". Click [Calibrate].
2. Follow the instructions on the screen and perform the calibration.
6. Measure the target

1. Measure the 5 maximum density patches of K.
Continue the measurement by each color: The 5 maximum density patches of C, the 5 maximum density patches of M, and the 5
maximum density patches of Y.
I-59
[1] [2]
[3]
[4] [5]

[5] Measurement patch 5 -
7. Check the result
1. Select the patch that you want to check.
2. Click [1].
I-60
[1]
3. Click [Measurement Info] on the "Info Screen".
[1]
4. Select [Density] on the "Info Screen". Select [T] for [Status].

5. Check the result.
8. Save the data

1. Click [Save Data] [1].
I-61
[1]
2. Select the format that you want to output on [Format].

3. Be sure that all the items on [Device] and [Colormetric] are not checked.
4. Check [VCMY] on [Density]. Select [T] on [Status].
5. Click [Save].
9. Open the saved CSV file in Excel.
I-62
10. Calculate the average maximum density [1] of each of the 5 colors (Y, M, C, K).
[1]
Note
• After the average maximum density is measured and calculated by the above procedure, compare the absolute value of
the adjustment target value (reference) with the average maximum density.
(d) Measure the density with i1iSis XL

1. Start "ProfileMaker Measure tool".
Note
• ProfileMaker is just one example of a color measurement application. Konica Minolta does not guarantee its measurement
accuracy.
• ProfileMaker5 can be downloaded from the following URL.
http://www.xrite.com/product_overview.aspx?ID=757&Action=support
2. Prepare the script data for the test pattern number 69.
I-63
Note
• Be sure to obtain the script data from CSES.
CSES ID: DLBT1412496JP (Japanese), CSES ID: DLBT1412496EN (English)
3. Connect the USB dongle to the PC.

Note
• When there is no USB dongle, you cannot measure density.
4. Click [Instrument Configuration].

5. Select [Eye-One iSis] at the [Instrument] and select [Reflection].
When [OK] is displayed, close [Instrument Configuration].
6. Click [Chart] and display [Test Chart Measurement].

Select [Open...] from [Test Chart].
7. Select the script data (iSis_8c_100_50_10.txt) for i1iSis.

Note
• Be sure to obtain the script data from CSES.
CSES ID: DLBT1412496JP (Japanese), CSES ID: DLBT1412496EN (English)
I-64
8. Click [Start...].
9. Insert the test pattern number 69 to i1iSis XL.
I-65
10. When the measurement normally finishes and the following message is displayed, click [Close].
11. Click the [Optical density] tab.
I-66
12. Check [Offset Data], and then select [ANSI T] at [Filter Standard].
13. Select a desired color from C, M, Y, or K at the [Color Channel].
I-67
14. Click [Export Density...] and save the text file (.txt).
Note
• When you move the mouse on the patch, you can confirm the positioning information [1] and the density information [2] of
the patch.
[1] [2]
[1] Positioning information of the patch [2] Density information of the patch
I-68
15. Open Excel. Select the saved text file (.txt) from [File] - [Open].
16. Calculate the average of the 5 maximum density patch for each color: Y, M, C, and K.
• Maximum density patch position of Y: B4, B18, H11, N4, N18
• Maximum density patch position of M: B3, B17, H10, N3, N17
• Maximum density patch position of C: B2, B16, H9, N2, N16
• Maximum density patch position of K: B1, B15, H8, N1, N15
4.4.10 All developing unit replacement adjustment

(1) Function
Perform the batch adjustments that are required after you replace the developer or the developing unit.
On this mode, following items are selected and the automatic adjustment screen or the manual adjustment screen is displayed.
1. Toner density sensor initial automatic adjustment (automatic adjustment)
2. Gamma adjustment (automatic adjustment)
3. Color registration adjustment (automatic adjustment)
4. Density balance adjustment (manual adjustment)
(2) Usage
Use this function when you want to perform the adjustment operation efficiently after you replace the developer or the developing unit.
(3) Procedure
Press [06 All Dev. Unit Replace Adj.].
4. "Register ORU-M Replacement Unit screen"
Check the color of the developer unit that you replaced.
5. Press "Next".
6. The message "Selected unit counter reset Yes/No? " is displayed.
7. Press [Yes].
Note
• When you press [Yes], the counter of the selected developer is reset.
8. "Automatic Adjust screen"

Press [Start]. [TonerDenditySensorInit.Auto], [Gamma Adjustment], [Color Registration Adjustment] are adjusted automatically and the
screen moves to the [Density Balance Adjustment] screen.
9. Perform the [Density Balance Adjustment] (Refer to the User's Guide).
I-69
After all adjustments are completed, press [Next] and back to the "Drum Peculiarity Adjustment screen".
4.4.11 IDC sensor output (sensor output confirm)

Measure the uncharged potential of the transfer belt by the IDC sensors (IDCS), and check the sensor light volume for the maximum density
correction. (% display)
4.4.12 Toner Density Sensor Output (Sensor Output Confirm)

(1) Function
Displays the output value of the TCR sensor.
(2) Usage
Check the toner density level in the developer for troubleshooting.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Sensor Output Confirm].
3. "Sensor Output Confirm screen"
Press [02 Toner Density Sensor Output].
4. "Toner Density Sensor Output screen"
Press [Next] or [Previous] to select the process speed (line speed 1: 315 mm/s, line speed 2:271mm/s, line speed 3: 225 mm/s, line
speed 4: 157.5mm/s) to check.
Note
• In C1070, C1070P or C71hc, you can check the line speed 1, line speed 3, line speed 4.
• For C1060 or C1060L, you can check the line speed 2, line speed 3, line speed 4.
5. Select the color that you want to check.

6. Press [Start] to display the output value of the selected items.
7. Press [STOP] to end the check.
8. When you check another line speed, repeat steps 4 to 7.
4.4.13 Humidity/Temperature Output (Sensor Output Confirm)

(1) Function
Check the output of the temperature and humidity sensor on the main body and option.
(2) Usage
Check the temperature and humidity inside the machine.
Check the detecting condition of each sensor for troubleshooting.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Sensor Output Confirm].
Press [03 Humidity/Temperature Output].
4. "Humidity/Temperature Output screen"
Press [Start] to display the humidity and the temperature value of the following items.
• Humidity and Temperature sensor 1: Temp/humidity sensor/1 (TEM/HUM1)
• Temperature-humidity sensor 2: Temp humidity sensor/2 (TEM/HUM2)
• Fusing top middle temperature sensor: TH1
• Fusing top edge temperature sensor: TH2
• Fusing top edge end temperature sensor: TH3
• Fusing bottom middle temperature sensor: TH5
• Fusing bottom edge temperature: TH4
5. Press [STOP] to end the check.
4.4.14 1st transfer resistance measurement (sensor output confirm)

(1) Function
Displays the measured analog value (v) of the voltage which is applied to the 1st transfer roller.
(2) Usage
• Check the output value when the image trouble occurred because of the poor transfer to handle the trouble.
• When the value is 7,000 or more, the cause possibly be the error of the contact or the pressure.
(3) Procedure
I-70
Press [03 Sensor Output Confirm]

Press [04 1st Trans. Resistance Meas.]
4. "1st Transfer Resistance Measurement screen"
Select the process speed (line speed 1: 315 mm/s, line speed 2: 271 mm/s, line speed 3: 225 mm/s, line speed 4: 157.5 mm/s) that you
want to check.
Note
• In C1070, C1070P or C71hc, you can check the line speed 1, line speed 3, line speed 4.
• For C1060 or C1060L, you can check the line speed 2, line speed 3, line speed 4.
5. Press [Start] to display the output value of the selected items.

6. When you check another line speed, repeat step 4 to step 5.
4.4.15 2nd transfer resistance measurement (sensor output confirm)

(1) Function
Displays the measured analog value (-v) of the voltage which is applied to the 2nd transfer roller/Up.
(2) Usage
• Check the output value when the image trouble occurred because of the poor transfer to handle the trouble.
• When the value is 7,500 or more, the cause possibly be the error of the contact or the pressure.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Sensor Output Confirm]
Press [05 2nd Trans. Resistance Meas.].
4. "2nd Transfer Resistance Measurement screen"
Press [Start] to display the output value.
4.4.16 Background Margin Fine Adj. (Process Fine Adjustment)

(1) Function
Change potential difference between the charging potential and the developing bias.
• Image background: Increase the covered margin.
• White spot image, carrier damages to the drum and blade: Decrease the covered margin.
Note
• Do not perform this adjustment when there is no problem. Unnecessary adjustment possibly cause an image failure (image
background, white spot image) or damages to the drum and the cleaning blade.
• There are several adjustment to reduce the image background. As a priority of the adjustment, adjust in the following order.
1) Develop AC Frequency
2) Covered Margin Fine Adjustment
3) Toner Density Fine Adjustment
• To change the covered margin, conduct the gamma automatic adjustment after you change the setting. (Refer to I.4.4.6 Gamma
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the image background, white spots image, or the carrier scattering occurs.
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Process Fine Adjustment].
3. "Process Fine Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [01 Background Margin Fine Adj.].
[Service Mode] → [Process Adjustment] → [Process Fine Adjustment] → [Background Margin Fine Adj.]
4. "Background Margin Fine Adjustment screen"
Select the color(s) you want to adjust and enter the adjustment value with the numeric buttons, and press [SET].
Adjustment range: -5 (carrier scattering, white spot image that is caused by carrier prevention) to +5 (image background prevention)
1 step = 10V
Note
• Take care that carrier scattering, white spot image that is caused by carrier prevention and the image background
prevention are trade-off. When either of them is improved, the other is worsened.
5. Press [Default] to restore the default settings.
4.4.17 Develop AC Bias Fine Adj. (Process Fine Adjustment)

(1) Function
Change the developing AC bias.
• Up the developing AC bias: Improve the developing ability.
• Down the developing AC bias: Reduce the carrier scattering.
I-71
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the noisy image, the white spots image, or the low developing ability occurs.
Note
• After you change the configuration value, conduct the auto gamma adjustment.I.4.4.6 Gamma Automatic Adjustment (Drum
Peculiarity Adjustment)
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Develop AC Bias Fine Adj.].
[Service Mode] → [Process Adjustment] → [Process Fine Adjustment] → [Develop AC Bias Fine Adj.]
4. "Develop AC Bias Fine Adj. screen"
Adjustment range: -5 (noisy image prevention) to +5 (improve developing ability)
1 step = negative side: 40V, positive side: 80V
4.4.18 Develop AC Frequency (Process Fine Adjustment)

(1) Function
Change frequency of the developing AC bias to inhibit the image background, graininess, or the darker at the trailing edge of the paper.
(2) Usage
When the image background and graininess get worse, increase the frequency of the developing AC bias for the improvement.
When the darker at the trailing edge of the paper get worse, lower frequency of the developing AC bias for the improvement.
Note
• Take care that "image background, graininess" and "the darker at trailing edge of the paper" are trade-off. When either of them
is improved, the other is worsened.
• After you change the configuration value, conduct the auto gamma adjustment. (Refer to I.4.4.6 Gamma Automatic Adjustment
(Drum Peculiarity Adjustment))
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Develop AC Frequency].
[Service Mode] → [Process Adjustment] → [Process Fine Adjustment] → [Develop AC Frequency]
4. "Develop AC Frequency screen"
Adjustment range: -5 (improve reproducibility of outline characters on a colored background) to +5 (image background prevention)
1 step = 0.4kHz
4.4.19 Toner Density Fine Adj. (Process Fine Adjustment)

(1) Function
Change the TCR sensor control voltage.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the image background, toner scattering, carrier scattering, or the white spot from carrier occurs.
Note
• To reflect the change immediately, conduct the toner refresh mode (Machine Screen - Adjustment - Execute Adjust Operation)
and the gamma automatic adjustment. (Refer to I.4.4.6 Gamma Automatic Adjustment (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment))
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Toner Density Fine Adj.].
[Service Mode] → [Process Adjustment] → [Process Fine Adjustment] → [Toner Density Fine Adj.]
I-72
4. "Toner Density Fine Adj. screen"

Adjustment range: -5 (image background, toner scattering prevention) to +5 (carrier scattering, white spot from carrier prevention)
1 step = 0.3%
4.4.20 Fine adjustment of fusing temperature (process fine adjustment)

(1) Function
You can perform the fine adjustment for the fusing temperature and the control temperature of the machine.
(2) Usage
Change the fusing temperature according to the paper type or the installation environment of the machine. As the result, the fusing quality is
improved or the paper curl is reduced.
(3) Procedure
Press [05 Fusing Temperature Fine Adj.].
4. "Fusing Temperature Fine Adjustment screen"
Select the temperature that you want to perform the setting for the top fusing belt or the lower fusing roller.
Temperature of the top fusing belt: -15°C, -10°C, -5°C, 0°C, +5°C, +10°C
Temperature of the lower fusing roller: -15°C, -10°C, -5°C, 0°C, +5°C, +10°C, +15°C, +20°C
Note
• Basically, change the temperature of the fusing belt/up
• When you do not want to change the gloss much, mainly change the temperature of the fusing roller/Lw.
• When you want to reduce the paper curl, increase the same temperature for both fusing belt/Up and the fusing roller/Lw
5. Press [OK].
4.4.21 Drum Small Rotation Interval (Interval/Quantity Adj.)

(1) Function
Change interval of the low humidity environment correction control (rotates drums periodically).
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when image failures caused by a uneven drum charging potential (that occurs easily with the low humidity) occurs.
(3) Procedure
Press [05 Interval/Quantity Adj.].
3. "Interval/Quantity Adj. Menu screen"
Press [01 Drum Small Rotation Interval].
[Service Mode] → [Process Adjustment] → [Interval/Quantity Adj.] → [Drum Small Rotation Interval]
4. "Drum Small Rotation Interval screen"
Enter the adjustment value with the numeric buttons and press [SET].
Adjustment range: +1 to +5
1 step = 1 minute
4.4.22 Recall Standard Data

(1) Function
Reset the adjustment values of the process adjustment to the factory initial data or the installation initial data.
Note
• Items that can be recalled
• 1st Transfer Manual Adj.
• 2nd Transfer Manual Adj.
• HV Adj.(Separation AC)
• HV Adj.(Separation DC)
• Maximum density initial adjustment
• Background margin fine adjustment
• Develop AC bias fine adjustment
• Develop AC frequency
• Toner density fine adjustment
• Fine adjustment of fusing temperature
• Drum small rotation interval
I-73
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the initialization cannot be done because of the change by CE.
(3) Procedure
Note
• When you select [Installation initial data], each configuration value returns to the adjustment values stored when the code

4.5 System setting

4.5.1 Software DIPSW setting procedures
(1) OUTLINE
Configure the software DIPSW.
Note
• Do not change any switch that is not described in the service manual.
(2) Procedure
Press [03 System Setting].
2. "System Setting Menu screen"
Press [01 Software DIPSW Setting].
[Service Mode] → [System Setting] → [Software DIPSW Setting]
3. "Software switch setting mode screen"
Press [▲] / [▼] or numeric buttons after you press the "DIPSW number" and "Bit number" buttons.
4. Press [On (1)] or [Off (0)] to configure the selected bit number ON/OFF.
(3) Software DIPSW setting screen
[1]
[2] [3] [4] [5]
[1] DIPSW data (indicates the 8bit values of the selected [2] DIPSW number
DIPSW numbers in hexadecimals from 00 to FF.)
[3] Bit number (0 to 7) [4] Bit data: 1:ON, 0:OFF
[5] Numeric buttons [6]
4.5.2 Software DIPSW setting list

Default setting
DIPSW Bit Function Set value
Japan Inch Metric
1 0 Display of process adjustment on user screen • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
• 1: Enabled
I-74
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
1 Note display when the fusing JAM occurs 0 0 0
Displays the handling for the fusing JAM on
"Paper Setting" screen - [Change IndividualSet].
To enable this setting, enable the DIPSW1-0
Process adjustment user screen display.
2 Print stop method after the display of the toner • Stops after you eject the paper 1 1 1
3 supply or the waste toner full. in the machine: 1-3=0, 1-2=0 0 0 0
(Decide the copier operation when the machine • Stops at a break between the
detects no toner or the waste toner full.) ) copy set: 1-3=0, 1-2=1
• Stops at the end of the current
job: 1-3=1, 1-2=0
• Does not stop: 1-3=1, 1-2=1
4 Print prohibition when the maintenance count is • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
reached • 1: Enabled
5 Number of the allowed print quantity after the • 1,000Print: 1-7=0, 1-6=0, 1-5=0 0 0 0
6 machine reaches the maintenance count • 2,000Print: 1-7=0, 1-6=0, 1-5=1 0 0 0
• 3,000Print: 1-7=0, 1-6=1, 1-5=0
7 • 4,000Print: 1-7=0, 1-6=1, 1-5=1 0 0 0
• 5,000Print: 1-7=1, 1-6=0, 1-5=0
• 1,000Print: 1-7=1, 1-6=0, 1-5=1
• 1,000Print: 1-7=1, 1-6=1, 1-5=0
• 1,000Print: 1-7=1, 1-6=1, 1-5=1
2 0 Hard disk drive connection recognition • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
• 1: Enabled (C1070P, (C1070P, (C1070P,
C71hc) 1 C71hc) 1 C71hc) 1
(C1070, (C1070, (C1070,
C1060, C1060, C1060,
C1060L) C1060L) C1060L)
1 Toner amount save level setting (for the image • 0: Normal 0 0 0
area) • 1: Strong
· Function: Switches the control level for the
image tag area when you select [ON] for "Paper
Setting" - "Process Adjustment" - "Toner Amount
Save". When you select "1" on this setting, the
limit becomes stronger.
· Usage: Select "1" on this setting when you
select [ON] for "Toner Amount Save" but the
paper wrap error is not improved well.
Note
· Change only DIPSW2-2 but not this setting
when you want to reduce the effect on the
color reproduction of the image area.
2 Toner amount save level setting (for the text or 0 0 0
the graphic area)
· Function: Switches the control level for the
text or the graphic area when you select [ON] for
"Paper Setting" - "Process Adjustment" - "Toner
Amount Save". When you select "1" on this
setting, the limit becomes stronger.
· Usage: Select "1" on this setting when you
select [ON] for "Toner Amount Save" but the
paper wrap error is not improved well.
Note
· Change this setting in priority to DIPSW2-1.
3 Selection of the degree of the color text blur 0 0 0
prevention (for image area)
· Function: Switches the control level when
"Text, Graphics, Image" of "Color Text Blur
Prevention" becomes active for the driver setting
on the printer output. The setting switches the
control level for the image tag area. When you
select "1" on this setting, the limit becomes
stronger. However, select "Text, Graphics,
Image" to enable "Color Text Blur Prevention".
· Usage: Use this function when you activate
"Color Text Blur Prevention" with "Text,
Graphics, Image" is selected but the toner
spillage of the image range (high contrast
pattern in a graphic) is not improved well. To
improve the smudge by the toner spillage, select
"1" on this setting.
I-75
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
4 Selection of the degree of the color text blur 0 0 0
prevention (for text or graphic area)
· Function: Switches the control level when
"ON" is selected on "Text, Graphics" of "Color
Text Blur Prevention" for the driver setting on the
printer output. When you select "1" on this
setting, the limit becomes stronger.
· Usage: Use this function when you activate
"Text, Graphics, Image" or "Text, Graphics" of
"Color Text Blur Prevention" but the toner
spillage is not improved well. The smudge by the
toner spillage on the thin lines is more improved
likewise the character area. Select "1" on this
setting to improve the smudge by the toner
spillage in the area.
5 Density balance 255 value correction • 0: ON 0 0 0
· Function: When you select "0" on this setting, • 1: OFF
the density balance adjustment is performed in
the maximum density area of the screen
"Dot190", "Dot175", and "Dot150". When you
select "1" on this setting, the density balance
adjustment is not performed in the maximum
density area of any screen.
· Usage: Likewise the C7000, select "1" on this
setting when you do not want to perform the
density balance adjustment in the maximum
density area.
6 Bar code leaving function for the density valance • 0: Not Leave 0 0 0
chart (i1iSis XL, i1Pro) • 1: Leave
· Function: Prints the bar codes depending on
values which are printed in the density valance
chart.
· Usage: You can enter the value on the i1iSis
XL or i1Pro by bar cords.
7 Polygon motor rotation speed switchover • 0: Speed when the print 0 0 0
Polygon motor rotation speed switchover is completes
available to reduce the operation sound during • 1: 2/3 speed
idling.
The default setting keeps the speed of the
previous print.
3 0 PF Air-blow adjustment • 0: Not display the air-blow 0 0 0
Specify the setting to "1" so that it enables the adjustment button
air blow adjustment without feeding sheets when • 1: Display the air-blow
a jam occurs due to the paper feed from PF. adjustment button
(When confirming how much the paper is floated
and performing the air-blow adjustment in the
halt condition after a jam)
· Procedure
On the Machine Screen, select [Adjustment] -
[PFU Air Assist Adjustment] to select the tray
that needs the adjustment.
Select [Manual].
By pressing [Start] on the screen that is shown,
the air starts blowing. Then, change each setting
as needed.
Press [Stop] or [Close] when the air level is
proper.
· Adjustable items
Lead Edge Air Level Setting (Following the
setting changes, the air level changes)
Side Air Level Setting (Following the
configuration changes, the air level changes)
(When performing the air-blow adjustment
without canceling the job after cleaning the jam)
· Procedure
After you clean the JAM, press "Paper Setting"
on the screen where "Press [Start] to restart is
shown..
Select the tray that needs the adjustment and
select [Change Setting] - [Air-blow].
Change each setting as needed and press [OK].
Note
· Blow-out of the air cannot be checked.
· Adjustable items
I-76
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
Lead Edge Air Level Setting
Side Air Level Setting
1 Malfunction code latch (C1540 to 1562, C3501 • 0: Latch released 0 0 0
to 3912, 3917) • 1: Latched
2 Reverse de-curler roller preliminary rotation • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
• 1: Enabled
3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
4 • 1: - 0 0 0
5 The maximum stacking capacity selection in • 0: Stops at the tray middle 0 0 0
small-size (longer side 250 mm to 319 mm) of position sensor (PS6) (loading
FS in the shift mode 1500 sheets)
• 1: Stops at the tray lower limit
sensor (PS3) (loading 3000
sheets)
6 I/O check mode output15 memory clear • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
• 1: Enabled
7 Carrying over the job for next day • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
Switches the function of carrying over the job for • 1:Disabled
next day
4 0 Air assist shutter control (PF) 0 0 0
1 Expansion of the maximum size for the FS-531 • 0: Maximum size for paper exit 0 0 0
main tray paper exit 314 mm × 458 mm
· Function: Expands the maximum size for the • 1: Maximum size for paper exit
FS-531 main tray paper exit from 314 mm × 458 330 mm × 470 mm
mm to 330 mm × 470 mm.
· Usage: Select "1" on this setting to expand the
maximum size for the FS-531 main tray paper
exit.
Note
· It is not guaranteed to exit to the main tray
paper exit (314 mm × 458 mm or larger).
· When you select "1" on this setting, select
"0"(Disabled) on DIPSW31-1 and DIPSW20-0.
· Be sure to use the paper (324 mm × 470 mm
or smaller) because the paper (324 mm or
longer in the main scan direction) causes a
paper jam.
· The thin paper (314 mm × 458 mm or larger)
drops off from the FS-531 main tray.
· The paper (314 mm × 458 mm or larger)
cannot be offset.
2 - • 0: - 0 1 0
3 • 1: - 0 0 1
4 EQUIOS linkage • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
· Function: Notifies to the controller whether the • 1: Enabled
job is a sample print job or a job that is specified
to delete after output.
· Usage: Configure to "1" to save the confirmed
print job temporarily that is sent from EQUIOS.
Notification to EQUIOS when a job is output is
performed as follows.
- [Sample Output]: Nothing is noted to EQUIOS.
- [Output]: Notes that the print is performed, and
notes the total record of printing and sample
output.
- [With Job Delete]: Notes that the job has
completed, and notes the printing record (not the
job deletion).
Note
· The memory switch number 113 of the
controller must be configured to "1"
(Enabled).
5 APS when change magnification • 0: Enabled 0 1 0
• 1:Disabled
I-77
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
6 Operation when stores the maximum hold job • 0: Not deleted automatically 0 0 0
(for the job list screen) • 1: Deleted automatically
· Function: This DIPSW configures the
operation of when the stored hold job has
reached the maximum number. When the stored
hold job has reached the maximum number, you
cannot save the new job. In this case, normally,
you need to delete the unnecessary jobs
manually. When this setting is "1", the oldest job
is automatically deleted.
· Usage: When you save the new job when the
stored hold job reaches the maximum number: If
you want to delete the oldest job automatically,
change this setting to "1".
Note
· This DIPSW changes the operation of when
you conduct the following operation in the
job list screen.
- [Job Ticket] - [New Store]
- [Page Edit] - [New Store]
- [Comb.]
- [Copy]
· When you save the new job from the PC,
configure the operation with DIPSW23-1.
7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
5 0 • 1: - 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 Auto speed down mode • 0: Auto 0 0 0
· Function: When the power becomes active, • 1:Restrict
switches the control that reduces the process
speed by 1 step under the low temperature and
the humidity environment. The target is the
speed down that is executed to supply a gap of
the power source capacity. The power source
capacity is required in the 2nd transfer section.
· Usage: Change this setting to "1" when you do
not execute the speed down in the condition.
Note
· When this setting is selected to "1", color
change can be occur because of the transfer
trouble as a side effect.
3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
4 Fusing jam blank paper cleaning • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
To clean the toner on the fusing belt, a screen to • 1:Disabled
select whether to feed the blank paper or not
appears on the touch panel at printing after the
fusing related jam process.
The blank paper is output to the tray other than
during printing.
5 - • 0: - 1 1 1
• 1: -
6 Life message display timing of the filter box • 0: 23,200,000 counts: near life 0 0 0
· Function: Decides the timing that the near life • 24,000,000 counts: life
and the life reaching of the filter box are • 1: 24,000,000 counts: near life
displayed on the touch panel. • 24,800,000 counts: life
· Usage: Use this function when you delay the
display timing for the near life message and the
life message depending on the use condition of
the main body.
Count up: Counts 7 to 184 for 1 side depending
on the condition.
7 Printing at reaching life of the filter box • 0: Allow 0 0 0
• 1:Restrict
6 0 Faulty part isolation: FD-fold, punch function • 0: Normal 0 0 0
1 Faulty part isolation: FD main tray paper exit • 1: Unusable 0 0 0
2 Faulty part isolation: FD post insert function 0 0 0
3 Faulty part isolation: FS staple function 0 0 0
4 Faulty part isolation: FS main tray paper exit 0 0 0
5 Faulty part isolation: FS 0 0 0
I-78
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
6 Faulty part isolation: LS main tray paper exit 0 0 0
(1st)
7 Faulty part isolation: LS main tray paper exit 0 0 0
(2nd)
7 0 Faulty part isolation: SD-506, SD-513 saddle 0 0 0
stitch
1 Faulty part isolation: SD-506, SD-513 multi 0 0 0
center fold
2 Faulty part isolation: SD-506, SD-513 multi tri- 0 0 0
fold
3 Faulty part isolation: SD-506, SD-513 trimming 0 0 0
4 Faulty part isolation: SD-506 straight 0 0 0
conveyance and sub tray paper exit, SD-513
straight conveyance
5 Faulty part isolation: PB cover paper insertion 0 0 0
6 Faulty part isolation: PB binder function 0 0 0
7 Faulty part isolation: PB 0 0 0
8 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
1 • 1: - 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 Custom size counter threshold setting • 0: Not display 0 0 0
When you configure the DIPSW to 1, the custom • 1: Display
size threshold of the counter per size can be
configured. Change the threshold from "Service
Mode" - "04 Counter, Data" - "Custom Counter
Threshold Setting."
Note
· For the custom size paper, sometimes it is
counted as 2 even when the paper length in
the sub scan direction is shorter than the
value that is adjusted in DIPSW33-2, 3 TC
double count size setting.
This case occurs when this configuration
value is included in the threshold configured
the range of DIPSW8-7.
9 0 Printer resolution change • TAG mode:9-1=0, 9-0=0 0 0 0
1 · Function : Enabled for a 600dpi printer image. • Simple:9-1=0, 9-0=1 0 0 0
When you change the 600dpi image resolution • Printer resolution change:
to 1200dpi, this function polish the edge. 9-1=1, 9-0=0
· Usage: Choose "Simple" when you avoid to • Printer resolution change:
cut off the edge as a side effect. When you 9-1=1, 9-0=1
choose "Resolution change", this process is
enabled not only for texts and lines, but also for
bitmapped images.
2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
3 • 1: - 0 0 0
4 Copy quantity limit • No limit: 9-7=0, 9-6=0, 9-5=0, 0 0 0
5 9-4=0 0 0 0
• 1 sheet: 9-7=0, 9-6=0, 9-5=0,
6 9-4=1 0 0 0
• 3 sheets: 9-7=0, 9-6=0, 9-5=1,
9-4=0
• 5 sheets: 9-7=0, 9-6=0, 9-5=1,
9-4=1
• 9 sheets: 9-7=0, 9-6=1, 9-5=0,
9-4=0
• 10 sheets: 9-7=0, 9-6=1, 9-5=0,
9-4=1
• 20 sheets: 9-7=0, 9-6=1, 9-5=1,
9-4=0
• 30 sheets: 9-7=0, 9-6=1, 9-5=1,
9-4=1
• 50 sheets: 9-7=1, 9-6=0, 9-5=0,
9-4=0
I-79
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
7 • 99 sheets: 9-7=1, 9-6=0, 9-5=0, 0 0 0
9-4=1
• No limit: 9-7=1, 9-6=0, 9-5=1,
9-4=0
• No limit: 9-7=1, 9-6=0, 9-5=1,
9-4=1
• No limit: 9-7=1, 9-6=1, 9-5=0,
9-4=0
• No limit: 9-7=1, 9-6=1, 9-5=0,
9-4=1
• No limit: 9-7=1, 9-6=1, 9-5=1,
9-4=0
• No limit: 9-7=1, 9-6=1, 9-5=1,
9-4=1
10 0 Banner setting • 0: Normal operation mode 1 1 1
· Function: Switch the display on [User Setting] - • 1: Banner operation mode
[Common Setting] - [Banner].
· Usage: Select "0" when you do not want the
user to use the banner print. When you select
"0" on this setting, [Banner] is not displayed.
Note
· For the conditions and the settings of
banner printings, refer to "I.4.5.7 Restrictions
on banner print".
1 Hard disk image memory • 0: Disabled 1 1 1
• 1: Enabled
2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
3 • 1: - 0 0 0
4 Display the finisher name on the "Machine" • 0: OFF 0 0 0
screen. • 1: ON
· Function: In the "Machine" screen in the user
mode, switches names of finisher options that
are displayed.
· Usage: When many finisher options are
installed, use this function to clear option types
in the "Machine" screen.
5 Custom size tolerance setting • 0: ± 2 mm 0 0 0
• 1: ± 10 mm
6 Image rotation for the custom size paper and • 0: Rotate 0 0 0
large size paper • 1: Not rotate
7 Ticket edit reset confirm screen • 0: OFF 0 0 0
· Function: This function switches to display the • 1: ON
confirmation pop-up screen or not, when you
push the "Cancel" button in the ticket edit and
the page edit.
· Usage: Change this setting to "1" when you
display the confirmation pop-up screen for the
prevention of improper operations.
11 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
1 Productivity down during toner supplying • 0: The productivity is not 0 0 0
operation reduced during the toner
Toner empty possibly be indicated after you supplying operation
replace the toner bottle. It occurs when the toner • 1: The productivity is reduced
is not supplied to the toner hopper due to the during the toner supplying
low fluidity of the toner in the toner bottle. operation
When this problem occurs, change this setting to
1 to prevent the toner empty indication with the
toner bottle not empty.
Note
· When this setting is configured to 1, it
performs the toner bottle rotation operation
(toner supplying operation to the toner
hopper) longer time than usual control. At
this time, the paper interval is widened to
reduce the productivity.
2 Release the limitation for SD-506, SD-513 multi • 0: Limited 0 0 0
half-fold • 1: Not Limited (Up to 50 sheets)
Note
· If "1" is selected for this setting, a jam or
folding error could occur.
I-80
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
3 Automatic restart of the job under suspension • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
• 1: Enabled
4 Switch of the message on the malfunction code • 0: Please turn on power again 0 0 0
screen. • 1: Please call service
Function: Switches the message when the
malfunction code occurs.
Usage: You can recover some malfunction
codes by the reboot of the power, so the
message "Please turn on power again" is
displayed on the default setting. Select "1" to let
the user call service on any malfunction codes.
5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
6 Automatic paper supply • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
7 Jam code display • 1: Enabled 1 1 1
12 0 Counter per mode (2) • 0: Number 1 to Number 9 Not 0 0 0
display the count per color
mode
• 1: Number 1 to Number 9
Display the count per color
mode
1 OFF setting of auto low power and auto shut off • 0: One is possible 0 0 0
• 1: Both are possible
2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
3 • 1: - 0 0 0
4 Retry control disabling setting for a banner in the • 0: Enabled (The retry control is 0 0 0
bypass tray performed.)
· Function: Performs the retry control when a • 1: Disabled (The retry control is
banner (488mm or more and 1200mm or less, not performed.)
and 128g/m2or more) fed from the bypass tray
is jammed because of the paper feed roller.
Make this control not to be performed.
· Usage: When you perform the retry control, the
productivity decreases. Select "1" for
DIPSW12-4 to secure productivity.
Note
· The banner print is out of specification
except when MK-740 is installed.
5 Auto shut off in the Europe mode • 0: OFF 0 0 0
· Function: Switches whether the auto shut off • 1: No low power, auto shut off
is executed without the execution of the auto low in 240 minutes
power, from "Utility" - "02 User Setting" - "01
System Setting" - "07 Power Save Setting" - "01
Power Save Function Setting".
· Usage: Change this setting to "1" to execute
the auto shut off in 240 minutes without the auto
low power.
6 Erratic pagination detection • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
Select 0 on this setting and the machine detects • 1: Disabled
the erratic pagination during the job and the print
operation is stopped. The following patterns can
be detected; page missing, page switching,
page disorder, page overlapping, and the miss-
inserted number of the blank page.
7 Konica Minolta logo when the power switch • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
activates • 1:Disabled
13 0 Faulty part isolation: Multi punch function (GP) • 0: Normal 0 0 0
1 Faulty part isolation: PB-503 subsequent stage • 1: Unusable 0 0 0
FNS
2 Faulty part isolation: RU-509 humidifier function 0 0 0
3 Faulty part isolation: RU-509 color sensor unit 0 0 0
4 GP-502 Ring bind unit isolation • 0: Usable 0 0 0
• 1: Unusable
I-81
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
5 Switches the exit tray for waste paper • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
· Function: When this setting is changed to "1", • 1: Enabled
outputs any waste paper (sample print, AE
(AES) adjustment chart, waste tab) in a sub tray
that is the nearest to the main body and
available.
· Usage: When the machine outputs the inside
paper in a sub tray, this function outputs and
classifies the waste paper into the other tray.
6 Black-and-white quality adjustment of Network 0 0 0
scanner
The purpose of this setting is to improve the
gradation of the black-and-white 2-value scan.
When you select "1" on this setting, the error
diffusion operation is performed in the black-
and-white mode of the Network scanner. Also,
"Quality Adjustment" in "Scan Settings" can be
adjusted.
Note
· This setting is enabled only when the
IC-602 is connected. When the other
controller is connected, do not select "1" on
this setting.
· When this setting is selected to "1", the
recognition rate of OCR is decreased.
7 Staple jam recovery operation setting • 0: Page recovery 0 0 0
The missing pages or uneven stapling occurs • 1: Copy recovery
when the staple jam in the finisher occurs, or the
operator removes the paper remaining inside the
stacker. To prevent the missing pages or
uneven stapling, select "1" on this setting to
display an additional message for the jam
cleaning.
14 0 Recall the previous job when you reserve the • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
next job • 1: Enabled
The setting condition for the copy can be kept
for the next job by "Pre-Job Recall."
1 Utility counter display switchover • 0: Normal display 0 0 0
• 1: Counter display per size
2 Printer 1200dpi compression mode • Standard (image area 0 0 0
3 Use this mode when the image deterioration resolution priority): 14-3=0, 1 1 1
occurs on the border of the image area or the 14-2=0 (Controller image
jaggy occurs on the outlines of the letters or compression setting: Same as
lines of the image area. "Resolution Priority")
Configure to the standard compression (image • Anti-aliasing compression
area resolution priority): 14-3=0, 14-2=0, so that (image area resolution priority):
the image area is also processed in 1200dpi. 14-3=0, 14-2=1
Note • Standard (image area gradation
· This setting is associated with "Utility" - priority): 14-3=1, 14-2=0
"Administrator Setting" - "System Setting" - (Controller image compression
"Expert Adjustment"- "Image Quality Setting setting: Same as "Gradation
"- ""06 Controller Image Compression." Priority")
• Anti-aliasing compression
(image area gradation priority):
14-3=1, 14-2=1
4 For copitrak • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
Configure to 1 when you connect the billing • 1: Enabled
management device from copitrak. The interface
specification is as follows.
· RS232C
· Baud rate 9600
· Bits 8
· No parity
· No flow control
5 ISO Metric mode • 0: JIS 0 0 1
Note • 1:ISO
· Regardless of this DIPSW setting, the
original size is always JIS series.
I-82
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
6 HDD Encryption button display • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
Displays [Encrypt] button with [Utility] - • 1: Enabled (On PRESS C1060,
[Administrator Setting] - [Security Setting] - PRO C1060L, the productivity
[HDD Management Setting]. is lowered. )
Validate when you want to encrypt the hold job
that is stored in HDD.
7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
15 0 ORU-M operator release setting • 0: ORU-M unavailable 0 0 0
• 1: ORU-M available
1 Switch of the parts counter display on the • 0: Display parts counter 0 0 0
counter list. • 1: Not display parts counter
Function: Disables the display of the parts
counter on the counter list.
Usage: Change this setting to "1" when you do
not want users to output the parts counter
information.
2 Display change setting for the life warning and • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
icon • 1:Disabled
· Function: Changes the display for the life
warning of the replacement parts and the icon
that are shown in the operation section. Change
this setting to "1" enables you to use the parts
unless there are any problems in the image
quality even the parts reach their life in the
counter display. The purpose of this function is
to reduce the down-time and the cost.
The following items are the target to change the
display.
<Details Counter screen>
· Photo conductor life (YMCK)
· Developer life (YMCK)
· Transfer belt cleaning life
· Charging corona (YMCK)
<Icon>
· Maintenance icon
· Usage: Change this setting to "1" when you do
not display the life warning and icons.
Note
· When you change this setting to "1",
change DIPSW1-4 to "0" and "Print
prohibition when the maintenance count is
reached" to "Disabled".
3 Finishing option alarm stop • Stops immediately after 0 0 0
4 Select the alarm stop condition. Alarm stop detection: 15-4=0, 15-3=0 0 0 0
means to detect the next function. • Stops at a break between the
FD, FS, and LS tray lower limit, FD, FS, LS, and print that is configured after
SD tray paper full, FD and PK punch scraps full, detection: 15-4=0, 15-3=1
FS staple scraps full, SD trimming scraps full • Does not stop during the print:
15-4=1, 15-3=0
• Does not stop during the print:
15-4=1, 15-3=1
5 CS Remote Care recognition • 0: Disabled 0 1 0
6 Address reset after the scan • 1: Enabled 0 0 0
7 IP scanner allow setting without a key counter • 0: Restrict 0 0 0
This setting allows to use the scanning function • 1: Allow
without key counter inserted.
16 0 Scanner magnification setting • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
• 1: Enabled
I-83
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
1 Color density control (periodical control) • 0: Not perform 0 0 0
switching when Fiery controller calibration is • 1: Perform
performed
· Function: Switches whether to perform the
periodic adjustment of color density control
before output of the chart of the Fiery controller
calibration.
· Usage: When the color density control is used,
performing the control before Fiery calibration is
necessary. Select "1" on this setting to perform
the color density control before the Fiery
calibration automatically.
Note
When [ON] is selected to [Periodical Adj.
Execution] for the color density control, this
DIPSW is valid.
2 Switch of the fusing jam confirmation screen • 0: Display 0 0 0
· Function: After a jam of J-3102 or J-3106 is • 1: Not display
cleared, a confirmation screen appears on the
touch panel. This confirmation screen shows the
procedure to check the remained paper in the
fusing unit. This DIPSW switches whether to
show the confirmation screen or not.
· Usage: To hide the confirmation screen,
configure to "1".
Note
· The display of the confirmation screen is
recommended.
· When the confirmation screen is hid,
explain to the user that checking remained
paper is required each time jam is cleared.
· When this setting is "0", change DIPSW56-6
to "1". The confirmation screen appears only
when DIPSW56-6 is "1".
3 Count of the key counter in printer mode • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
· Function: Decide whether to count the printer • 1: Enabled
output on the key counter or not when you use
the key counter.
· Usage: To count on the key counter, select "1"
in this setting.
4 Utility menu mode installation date display • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
• 1:Disabled
5 Dehumidification heater temperature control • Environment temperature + 6 0 0 0
6 (LU, PF) °C: 16-6=0, 16-5=0 0 0 0
When you connect the option dehumidifier • Environment temperature + 8
heater of LU or PF and when you configure the °C: 16-6=0, 16-5=1
dehumidifier fan heater control to [Compulsive • Environment temperature +10
ON] in the Utility mode, this switch is used to °C: 16-6=1, 16-5=0
configure the control temperature. • Environment temperature + 6
°C: 16-6=1, 16-5=1
7 ORU-M developing unit counter setting • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
User can enter the life counter (distance and the • 1: Enabled
quantity) of the developing unit.
17 0 Faulty part isolation: PI-502 function (FS-532) • 0: Normal 0 0 0
1 Faulty part isolation: SD-510 fold & staple, multi • 1: Unusable 0 0 0
half fold, Multi tri-fold function
I-84
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
2 Image leading edge erase setting mode • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
· Function: 2 functions are included. • 1:Disabled
(1) Switch the default value of the leading edge
erase amount of the test pattern.
- "0": 10 mm
- "1": 0 mm
(2) Configure the reset amount of [Paper
Setting] - [Process Adjustment] - [Lead Edge
Erase Quantity].
- "0": 0 to 8 mm (Setting value of IO-87 in IO
check mode)
- "1": 0 mm
· Usage: When you configure the default value
of the leading edge erase amount of the test
pattern to 0 mm, configure this setting to "1".
Note
· When this setting is configured to "0",
configure the value of the [Lead Edge Erase
Quantity] by IO check mode: IO-87.
(Recommended value: 7 mm)
· The [Lead Edge Erase Quantity] is not
applied to the paper whose weight is 136 g/
m2 or more.
· The lead edge erase quantity of the test
pattern is not applied to number 16, 33, 40,
49, 54, 75, 76, and 77.
3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
4 Density selection at scanning tab paper • Brightness level 80: 17-6=0, 0 0 0
5 (Configure the background optical density at 17-5=0, 17-4=0 0 0 0
scanning tab paper.) ) • Brightness level 40 (weakest):
6 17-6=0, 17-5=0, 17-4=1 0 0 0
• Brightness level 60: 17-6=0,
17-5=1, 17-4=0
17-5=1, 17-4=1
17-5=0, 17-4=0
17-5=0, 17-4=1
17-5=1, 17-4=0
• Brightness level 255
(strongest): 17-6=1, 17-5=1,
17-4=1
7 Default change for the tray humidifier setting • 0: ON 0 0 0
Switch the default value of humidifier ON and • 1: OFF
OFF (which is selected automatically based on
the paper type) for the plain or the fine paper on
the paper setting of the tray.
18 0 Faulty part isolation: Tray/1 • 0: Normal 0 0 0
1 Faulty part isolation: Tray/2 • 1: Unusable 0 0 0
2 Paper weight limit (136 g/m2or more) switching • 0: Limited paper weight (under 0 0 0
when the lead edge erase quantity is configured 136 g/m2)
· Function: Makes to set the lead edge erase • 1: Unlimited paper weight
quantity for the thick paper whose weight is 136
g/m2or more.
· Usage: Select "1" for DIPSW18-2 when a
fusing separation error occurs at the thick paper
whose weight is 136 g/m2or more.
3 Faulty part isolation: Tray 3 (LU) • 0: Normal 0 0 0
• 1: Unusable
I-85
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
4 Print during dehumidification heater temperature • 0: Restrict 0 0 0
control (LU and PF) • 1: Allow
· Function: Select whether to print or not during
the dehumidification operation when the
dehumidification is attached to the LU or PF.
· Usage: Select "1" on this setting so that the
printing becomes available when the machine
does not accept the printing during the
dehumidification.
Note
· When you select "1" on this setting under
the high-humidity condition, the no feed jam
easily occurs.
5 Faulty part isolation: FS center folding, saddle • 0: Normal 0 0 0
stitch • 1: Unusable
6 Faulty part isolation: PI 0 0 0
7 Faulty part isolation: HDD 0 0 0
19 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
1 • 1: - 1 1 1
2 Stamp print outside the original image for printer • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
job • 1: Enabled
· Function: This DIPSW changes the print
position and the print method of the printer job
stamp. (Stamp: Date/Time, Page Number, Set
Numbering)
<For DIPSW19-2=0>
· Date/Time, Page Number
- Print position: Based on paper (when the crop
mark is not in use), based on crop mark (when
the crop mark is in use)
- Print method: Overwrite method
· Set Numbering
- Print position: Based on original
- Print method: Overlay method
<For DIPSW19-2=1>
· Date/Time, Page Number, Set Numbering
- Print position: Based on paper
- Print method: Overwrite method
· Usage: To print the stamp outside the original
image, change this setting to "1".
3 Bypass + Size automatic detection of profile • 0: Enable (Detects 0 0 0
status automatically)
· Function: When "1" is configured, the size • 1: Disable (Does not detect
automatic detection is disabled in Bypass + automatically)
Paper profile setting status.
· Usage: When you want to fix the paper profile
that is applied to the bypass tray when the paper
is loaded after the bypass tray becomes empty,
configure to "1".
Note
· When reset in tray setting, the profile
setting is released, and the size automatic
detection is enabled.
4 Switch alignment speed of the SD-513 FD • 0: Normal Control 0 0 0
alignment claw • 1: Low speed control
∙ Function: Switches the alignment speed of the
FD alignment claw (fold alignment claw).
∙ Usage: Select "1" when the FD alignment claw
mark is left at the trail edge (fore edge) side in
the paper exit direction of fold & staple, half-fold,
or tri-fold output.
Note
∙ When "1" is selected, the productivity of
fold & staple, half-fold, or tri-fold (simplex
print) are lowered.
5 Faulty part isolation: PK • 0: Normal 0 0 0
• 1: Unusable
6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
7 • 1: - 0 0 0
20 0 Expansion of the maximum size for the FS-612 • 0: Maximum size for paper exit 0 0 0
main tray paper exit 314 mm × 458 mm
I-86
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
· Function: Expands the maximum size for the • 1: Maximum size for paper exit
FS-612 main tray paper exit from 314 mm × 458 331 mm × 487 mm
mm to 331 mm × 487 mm.
· Usage: Select "1" on this setting to expand the
maximum size for the FS-612 main tray paper
exit.
Note
· It is not guaranteed to exit to the main tray
paper exit (314 mm × 458 mm or larger).
· When you select "1" on this setting, select
"0"(Disabled) on DIPSW31-1 and DIPSW4-1.
· Be sure to use the paper (324 mm × 470 mm
or smaller) because the paper (324 mm or
longer in the main scan direction) causes a
paper jam.
· The thin paper (314 mm × 458 mm or larger)
drops off from the FS-531 main tray.
· The paper (314 mm × 458 mm or larger)
cannot be offset.
1 Image scanning area with image shift • 0: Normal 0 0 0
• 1: Original priority
2 Total page number standard in stamp mode • 0: Based on original 0 0 0
• 1: Based on transfer paper
3 Toner band creation condition • For A4 width: 20-4=0, 20-3=0 0 0 0
4 · Function: Adjusts the creation intervals of the • Productivity priority: 20-4=0, 0 0 0
toner band. 20-3=1
· Usage: When you give the priority to • Restricted: 20-4=1, 20-3=0,
productivity in a high temperature environment • Restricted: 20-4=1, 20-3=1,
and the small size print, widen the creation
interval of the toner band to increase the
productivity. However, the life of the belt
cleaning blade becomes shorter. (Refer to I.
4.5.6 Toner band creation condition (productivity
priority setting))
5 Curl adjustment setting after auto reset • 0: Not reset 0 0 0
Reset the value of "Paper Setting" - "Curl • 1: Reset
Adjustment" to 0 at the auto reset and configure
whether to reset the humidifier setting to default
or not.
Note
· The default (ON or OFF) of the humidifier
setting differs depending on the paper type
and the paper weight.
6 Switches the cleaning amount at the paper • Normal: 20-7=0, 20-6=0 0 0 0
7 interval • Normal x 1.5 times: 20-7=0, 0 0 0
· Function: Switches number of times of the 20-6=1
cleaning operation for the 2nd transfer roller. • Normal x 2 times: 20-7=1,
· Usage: When the dirt occurs in a 75 mm cycle 20-6=0
on the back side of the paper, change this • Normal (same as 00): 20-7=1,
setting to increase the number of times of the 20-6=1
cleaning operation for the 2nd transfer roller.
Note
· When the number of times of the cleaning
operation for the 2nd transfer roller is
increased, the productivity is reduced.
21 0 PB perfect binding limit number switchover • 0: Fine, Color, Coated table 0 0 0
• 1: Plain table
1 PB warm-up control switchover (effective by • 0: Warm-up during power ON 1 1 1
power OFF or ON after the setting change) • 1: No warm-up during power
ON
2 PB heater control switchover (effective by power • 0: Heater activates 0 0 0
OFF or ON after the setting change) automatically in 1 minute after
perfect binding finish.
• 1: Heater does not deactivates
automatically in 1 minute after
perfect binding finish.
3 301 g/m2 to 350 g/m2 paper exit with its face up • 0: Restrict 0 0 0
• 1: Allow
I-87
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
4 SD-510 paper exit tray book feed amount • 0: Auto 0 0 0
· Function: When this setting is change to "1", • 1: 1 copy output
outputs the bundle of papers by 1 copy and do
not store them on the paper exit tray.
· Usage: Use this function for a user who has a
device that conveys the books by 1 copy to the
following procedure. Change this setting to "1"
when the paper exit tray belt is connected to the
paper exit opening and conveys a book.
5 Enable or disable the FS-532 overlap • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
conveyance of the 92 g/m2 to 216 g/m2 papers. • 1: Enabled
· Function: For the paper overlap conveyance
of FS-532, switches whether to apply the
conveyance for thick papers or not. In the status
of the factory default, the overlap conveyance of
the thick paper is not executed in order to
reduce the switch back sound.
· Usage: Change this setting to "1" to increase
the productivity of the paper between 92 g/m2 to
216 g/m2 in the staple mode or the punch staple
mode.
6 Number of PK-522 punch holes • 2 holes: 21-7=0, 21-6=0 0 1 0
7 Note • 2 holes or 3 holes: 21-7=0, 0 0 1
· The number of punch holes is configured 21-6=1
automatically before the shipment from the • 2 holes or 4 holes: 21-7=1,
factory so that there is no need to change it 21-6=0
in the field. However, change the number in • 4 holes (Sweden): 21-7=1,
the case of connecting the punch unit which 21-6=1
is different from the destination.
22 0 Machine NIC setting • 0: Disabled 1 1 1
• 1: Enabled
1 Number of the punch holes of PK-511, PK-512, • 2-Hole: 22-2=0, 22-1=0 1 1 0
2 and PK-513 (effective by power OFF or ON after • 2/3-hole switchover: 22-2=0, 0 0 1
the setting change) 22-1=1
Change the prohibition control by paper size, • 2/4-hole switchover Swedish 4-
which differs depending on the number of the holes: 22-2=1, 22-1=0
punch holes. Also change the number of the • -: 22-2=1, 22-1=1
holes on the punch hole select screen of the
user mode.
3 Image position for the custom size original • 0: Based on user selection 0 0 0
(when using DF) • 1: Based on APS at DF
4 Power save key function • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
• 1:Disabled
5 Release of the [Trimmer Receiver Adj.] button of • 0: Not displayed 0 0 0
the SD-506 and the SD-513 for users • 1: Displayed
· Function: This DIPSW switches whether to
deslpay the [Trimmer Receiver Adj.] button in
"MACHINE screen" - "Adjustment" - "Finisher
Adjustment" - "Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.".
· Usage: To display the [Trimmer Receiver Adj.]
button, change this setting to "1".
6 Operation when staple empty of FS • 0:Staple supply request 0 0 0
• 1: Selecting between staple
supply or staple release
7 Auto execution of refreshing the photo conductor • 0: Execute 0 0 0
and the lubricant apply brush • 1: Not execute
· Function: To improve the image stripes in the
FD direction due to the uneven application of the
lubricant, the photo conductor refreshing control
and the lubricant apply brush refreshing control
are regularly conducted automatically. Enable or
disable these controls.
· Usage:
- When the low coverage image is printed: If the
productivity has the most priority, select "Not
execute".
Note
· When you select "Not execute", image
stripes in the FD direction due to cleaning
fault easily occur. "Execute" is
recommended.
I-88
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
23 0 Switches to Russian font for WebLCD display • 0: Not use Russian font 0 0 0
· Function: Displays Russian font (new font) for (conventional font)
Web LCD. • 1: Use Russian font (new font)
· Usage: Select "1" for DIPSW23-0 when Fiery
by EFI is connected and Russian is not
displayed properly on the Fiery setting change
screen (Web LCD).
Note
· Select "1" for DIPSW23-0 when the machine
is installed in Russia.
1 Operation when stores the maximum hold job • 0: Not delete automatically 0 0 0
500 hold jobs can be stored at maximum. This (restrict to receive the copier
function configures the operation when 500 jobs hold job or the printer hold job)
are stored. • 1: Delete the oldest hold job
and receive the new job
2 Precision of the color registration automatic • 0: Normal 0 0 0
correction (during printing) • 1: Fine
Change the accuracy of the color registration
correction that is performed periodically during
printing. If the fine is selected, the registration
accuracy improves by approximately 0.5 pixels,
but the correction time takes 2 minutes longer.
3 Control of the color registration automatic • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
correction (periodical correction) • 1:Disabled
Disable the color registration correction that is
performed periodically and reduce the down
time during the continuous printing. (Power ON
correction operates when the fusing temperature
is lower than the specified temperature.)
4 Image rotation function when the custom size • 0: Not rotate (including the in- 0 0 0
document data is exported by house production controller job)
PageScopeDirectPrint • 1: Rotate (only in-house
· Function: Prohibits image rotation when the production controller job)
custom size document data exported by
PageScopeDirectPrint outputs in the custom
size paper or larger paper than the document
size. (DIPSW23-4=0: Default)
· Usage: Select "0" for DIPSW23-4 when
images on the data output by
PageScopeDirectPrint is rotated. To rotate
images, select "1" for DIPSW23-4.
Note
· The image can be rotated in the
DIPSW23-4=1 setting only when the in-house
production controller job is used.
5 - • 0: - 1 1 1
6 • 1: - 0 0 0
7 Punch auto switching (PK, FD) (effective by • 0: Disabled 1 1 1
power OFF or ON after the setting change) • 1: Enabled
24 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
I-89
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
1 Image stabilization control during idling • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
Switches the image stabilization control during • 1: Enabled
idling.
When the environmental humidity during idling
reaches the specified level while this setting is
disabled, the image stabilization control is
executed before you start the next job.
Since the image stabilization control is executed
at the start of the job after the idling, there is a
waiting time at the start of printing.
While this setting is enabled, the image
stabilization control is executed when the
environmental humidity during idling reaches the
specified level.
Since the image stabilization control is executed
when the environmental humidity during idling
reaches the specified level, there is a fewer
waiting time at the start of printing. However,
since the number of executing the image
stabilization control increases under the
environment with the large humidity gap, the
lives of the developer and drum are shorten.
2 Image stabilization control • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
• 1:Disabled
3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
4 • 1: - 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
25 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 Color registration automatic correction control • Enabled: 25-4=0, 25-3=0 0 0 0
4 Change the timing of the periodical color • Disabled: 25-4=0, 25-3=1 0 0 0
registration correction control or disable the • No performed during printing:
correction. 25-4=1, 25-3=0
Enabled: Suspend the print at every specified • -: 25-4=1, 25-3=1
print to perform the correction.
Disable: Correction is omitted temporarily to
reduce down time when the machine cannot be
used with the malfunction code related to the
IDC sensor.
No performed during printing: Correction that is
performed by the suspension of print at every
specified print is performed after the print job to
reduce down time.
5 Precision of the color registration automatic • 0: Normal 0 0 0
correction • 1: Speed priority
Change the accuracy of the color registration
correction that is performed automatically. If the
speed preference is selected, the correction time
can be shorten. Correction time of "speed
preference" is approximately 30 seconds.
6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
7 • 1: - 0 0 0
26 0 Trigger judgment of the color registration • 0: Process mount temperature 0 0 0
automatic correction • (Execute the color registration
Configure the standard and judge the timing correction when the process
when to execute the color registration correction. mount temperature changes
more than the specified level
from the previous correction.)
• 1: Number of print pages
• (Execute the color registration
correction after printing
specified pages from the
previous correction.)
1 - • 0: - 1 1 1
2 • 1: - 0 0 0
I-90
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
3 Multi feed detection (PI, FD) (effective by power • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
OFF or ON after the setting change) • 1:Disabled
4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
5 • 1: - 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
27 0 FS-612 Saddle stitch, multi half fold for SRA3 • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
· Function: For C1060L+FS-612, supports • 1: Enabled
SRA3 with the PI function of FS-612 (only the
lower tray), half fold, saddle stitch. Enlarges the
largest size of the custom size up to 320 mm ×
450 mm.
· Usage: Configure to "1" when you want to use
SRA3 or custom size (Maximum 320 mm × 450
mm) for PI function, half fold, saddle stitch.
1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
2 RU-516 connection detection • 0: Unconnected 0 0 0
· Function: Configure the connection status of • 1: Connected
the RU-516.
· Usage: When you connect the RU-516, select
"1" on this setting.
Note
· When this setting is "0" while the RU-516 is
connected, the jam (J-7550) possibly occurs.
· When this setting is "1" while the RU-516 is
not connected, the malfunction code
(C-1480) occurs.
3 Fusing separation fan abnormality detection • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
Enables the main body temporarily when a fan • 1:Disabled
abnormality of the fusing separation fan/1
(FM10), fusing separation fan/2 (FM11) and the
fusing separation fan/3 (FM12) occurs.
Note
· Disable this setting to perform the printing
operation without rotating the fan when an
error code related to FM10, FM11, FM12
occurs.
Therefore, a wrapping jam in the fusing
section possibly occur.
4 RU-517 connection detection • 0: Unconnected 0 0 0
· Function: Configure the connection status of • 1: Connected
RU-517 + OT-502.
· Usage: When you connect RU-517 + OT-502,
select "1" on this setting.
Note
· When this setting is "0" while RU-517 +
OT-502 is connected, jam possibly occurs.
· When this setting is "1" when RU-517 +
OT-502 is not connected, door open is
detected in RU-517 and printing is canceled.
5 Envelope 2nd transfer paper width correction • 0: Switched according to the 0 0 0
value 2nd transfer resistance
· Function: Prevents the transferability to the detection voltage
envelope from decreasing during a job. This • 1: 2.22 Fixed
phenomenon occurs when the 2nd transfer
output is insufficient, due to the change of the
2nd transfer resistance detection voltage value
when envelope is fed.
· Usage: Configure to "1" when the envelope
mode is used, and the image that is printed on
the envelope gets blurred. This malfunction
occurs when the range of [Paper Setting] -
[Process Adj.] - [2nd Transfer Output Adj.
(Front)] is configured in the + direction
(approximately +90 or more).
I-91
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
6 Bypass NFJAM downstream paper exit allowed • 0: Allow 0 0 0
· Function: If bypass jam occurs during printing, • 1:Restrict
stops the main body after paper exit.
· Usage: Configure to "0" if you want to exit
paper when bypass jam occurs.
Note
· Paper exit is possible for simplex, paper
exit is possible for duplex only before the
image is read.
7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
28 0 FNS pre-purge enable or disable • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
· Function: This DIPSW switches enable and • 1:Disabled
disable of the pre-purge mode of the finisher.
· Usage: To disable the pre-purge mode, use
this DIPSW.
1 FD-503 pre-purge enable or disable 0 0 0
· Function: This DIPSW switches enable and
disable of the pre-purge mode of the FD-503.
· Usage: To prevent the machine from
outputting the non-folded paper to the sub tray
which is the folded paper tray, use this DIPSW.
· Note
When the DIPSW28-0 is "0", this DIPSW is
enabled.
2 During the ring bind mode of GP-502, enable or 0 0 0
disable the control for the sheet number
limitation due to the paper weight.
· Function: In the ring bind mode of GP-502, it
has a limit for the number of sheets; 102 sheets
for 75 g/m2 to 91 g/m2 paper and 72 sheets for
92 g/m2 to 135 g/m2. When this setting is
changed to "1", the limitation becomes invalid.
· Usage: Change this setting to "1" to increase
the maximum number of sheets in the ring bind
mode of GP-502.
Note
· As a protection when the quantity limitation
is disabled, change DIPSW28-3 to enabled (1)
so that the hard limit works.
· When this switch is "1", an error possibly
occurs in the finish.
3 Enable or disable the alarm of the booklet • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
thickness over in the ring bind mode of GP-502 • 1: Enabled
· Function: Switches the method for detecting
the upper limit of loaded booklet in the ring bind
mode of GP-502. There are 2 methods for
detecting the upper limit of the loaded booklet;
number count by the weight and the thickness
detection sensor. As the default, only the
number count is enabled. Use the setting and
enable or disable the thickness detection
sensor.
· Usage: Change this setting to "1" to enable the
thickness detection sensor.
Note
· When the number limitation is disabled (1)
with DIPSW28-2, change this setting to "1"
so that the hard limit works.
4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
5 • 1: - 0 0 0
6 1 1 1
I-92
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
7 Cycle down timing change • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
· Function: Moves to the end process of the FS • 1: Enabled
after all sheets inside the main body are exited.
· Usage: Configure to "1" when you want to
cycle down after the paper is exited from the FS.
Note
· When the FS is not connected, moves to
the end process after all sheets are exited
from the main body.
· When this setting is "1", the life of the main
body possibly becomes short.
29 0 Default switch on the ticket edit screen • 0: Current Sheet 0 0 0
Configure where to reflect the default with • 1: All Sheet
"Paper Setting" - "Paper Type" on the job ticket
edit screen.
1 LS main tray paper exit limit switchover • 0: Limit by weight 0 0 0
• 1: 5000 sheets uniformly
2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
3 Switches the shift direction for the 2nd page • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
during the reverse 2 repeat • 1: Enabled
· Function: Switches the shift direction for the
2nd page (right image and left image) during the
reverse 2 repeat.
· Usage: When this setting is changed to "0",
this function is executed based on the images
(shifts to the right and the left in reverse). When
this setting is changed to "1", this function is
executed based on the paper (shifts to the right
and the left).
4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
5 • 1: - 0 0 0
6 PB perfect binding minimum number of the • 0: Follow the setting of the 0 0 0
inside paper Utility menu
• 1: 6 sheets (81 g/m2 to 91 g/
m2, 92 g/m2 to 105 g/m2, 106
g/m2 to 135 g/m2)
7 Switches the print operation to other sheets • 0: Prints on other sheets (back 0 0 0
during the tray setting difference on the front and side is blank)
back, or the size setting difference of the • 1: Prints on the same sheets
transfer paper
· Function: Switches the operation during the
duplex print when the paper size differs on the
front side and the back side.
· Usage: Change this setting and the operation
is switched.
30 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
1 Restriction of the display of the service mode • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
"List output" • 1: Enabled
2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
3 • 1: - 1 1 1
4 0 0 0
5 PB perfect binding limit (includes Z-Fold) • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
• 1:Disabled
6 Control the display of "Classified copy count by • 0: Display 0 0 0
paper size" on the counter list • 1: Hide
· Function: Switches whether to show
"Classified copy count by paper size" on the
counter list of the list print.
· Usage: "Classified copy count by paper size"
operates in the different specific from the
threshold of "TC double count size setting" by
DIPSW33-2 and DIPSW33-3.To avoid the
confusion when TC is used for billing, change
this setting to "1" so that "Classified copy count
by paper size" is not appeared.
I-93
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
7 FS sub tray full alarm detection • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
· Function: Disables only the job stop control • 1:Disabled
and output unavailable control when the FS sub
tray is full. This mode is for continuous output
that does not stop at a 10 sheets limit.
· Usage: Configure to "1" to output 10 sheets or
more continuously. However, DIPSW52-4 must
be configured to "0" at the same time.
Note
· In this mode, continuous output is
performed without detecting FS sub tray full,
and does not stop at a 10 sheets limit on
banner print. Do not select this mode for
other use.
· When MK-740 is installed, remove the
sheets once in 10 sheets of output.
31 0 - • 0: - 1 1 1
• 1: -
1 SRA4, SRA3 main tray paper exit of FS-612 and • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
FS-531 • 1: Enabled
2 Z-fold and center folding maximum paper exit • 50 sheets: 31-3=0, 31-2=0 1 1 1
3 capacity: FS-532 main tray • 40 sheets: 31-3=0, 31-2=1 1 1 1
Z-fold and center folding maximum paper exit • 30 sheets: 31-3=1, 31-2=0
capacity: FD-503 main tray • 20 sheets: 31-3=1, 31-2=1
· Function: You can configure the setting of Z-
fold and center folding maximum capacity of the
paper which exits to the FS-532 and the FD-503
main tray.
· Usage Use this setting to respond to the
request of the user to increase the number of
loading sheets. However, when you increase the
number of loading sheets too much, a jam
possibly occurs by the bend of the folding, or
sheets possibly fall from the main tray. (effective
by power OFF or ON after the setting change)
4 FS-532 Z-fold + Staple number limit • 5 sheets: 31-5=0, 31-4=0 0 0 0
5 Enter the maximum number of FS-532 Staple Z- • 8 sheets: 31-5=0, 31-4=1 0 0 0
Folded paper included in 50 sheets (A3 size). • 10 sheets: 31-5=1, 31-4=0
• 3 sheets: 31-5=1, 31-4=1
6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
7 • 1: - 0 0 0
32 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1
2 Guide mark printing on the test pattern number • 0: Not print the guide mark. 1 1 1
16 and number 33 • 1: Print the guide mark.
Function: The machine prints the guide mark
which indicates the tray information, the printing
side information, and the printing direction on
the test pattern number 16 and number 33.
· Usage: When you adjust with the test pattern
number 16 and number 33 for each tray, print
the tray information, the printing side
information, and the printing direction on the
output test pattern.
· Output tray: Indicated by the number of the
guide marks.
· Printing side: The guide mark is printed only on
the front side. (No guide mark on the back side)
· Printing direction: The guide mark is printed
from the leading edge of the printing direction.
Here are the relations between the tray and the
number of guide marks.
Main body tray 1: 1
Main body tray 2: 2
PF-707 upper tray: 7
PF-707 middle tray: 8
PF-707 lower tray: 9
PF-602m upper tray: 7
PF-602m lower tray: 8
LU-202: 4
MB-506: 5
I-94
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
3 Toner near empty sound alert • 0: Sound alert OFF 0 0 0
Function: When the toner is near empty, alerts • 1: Sound alert ON
by the sound.
Usage: Configure this setting to "1" when you
want to be alerted the toner near empty by the
sound.
4 Erratic pagination detection notification • 0: Not display the error code 0 0 0
Function: When the erratic pagination is (Exit papers when the erratic
detected, displays the error code and the pop-up pagination occurs).
message without exiting the paper. • 1: Displays the error code (C-
Usage: Use this setting when the erratic E018) and the notification of the
pagination occurs and you want to stop printing erratic pagination
with the error code (C-E018) without exiting the
paper.
When this setting is configured to "1" and the
erratic pagination occurs, a pop-up message is
displayed. When you press the OK button, the
notification to reboot the machine is displayed.
5 Display of the message to remove papers when • 0: Exits the paper in the stacker 0 0 0
FS or SD job is canceled or capacity limit is forcibly and releases the mode.
over. • 1: Displays the message that
Function: Displays the pop-up message when a directs to remove the remained
job of staple or saddle stitch is canceled or the paper without exiting the
capacity limit is over. remained paper in the stacker
Usage: When a job is canceled or the limit is forcibly.
over, a user can select whether to exit papers
forcibly or to remove papers.
When this setting is configured to "1", the
message to select whether to exit papers
forcibly or remove papers is displayed.
6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
7 • 1: - 0 0 0
33 0 TC black and white large size count method • 0: 1 count 0 1 0
Configure the count number to the double count • 1: 2 count
size paper which is configured with DIPSW33-2
and DIPSW33-3 in black and white printing.
1 TC color large size count method 0 1 0
Configure the count number to the double count
size paper which is configured with DIPSW33-2
and DIPSW33-3 in color printing.
2 TC double count size setting • 330 mm or more in the sub 1 0 1
3 Configure the threshold of the double count size scan direction: 33-3=0, 33-2=0 0 1 0
in the sub scan direction. • 355 mm or more in the sub
Paper whose length in the sub scan direction is scan direction (except for the
more than the specified length is counted as the U.S): 33-3=0, 33-2=1
double count size with the combination of • 420 mm or more in the sub
DIPSW33-2 and DIPSW33-3. scan direction (the U.S):
Note 33-3=1, 33-2=0
- In the case of the custom size paper, it is • All size is counted as a small
possibly counted as 2 even when the paper size: 33-3=1, 33-2=1
length is shorter than this configuration
value.
This case occurs when this configuration
value is included in the threshold
configuration range of DIPSW8-7.
· Reflected to the large size of the counter in
PageScope Web Connection and "Copy
count of each paper size" during list print.
4 Custom counter switchover in the banner setting • 0: Banner priority 0 0 0
Switches whether to count papers as the banner • 1: Custom size priority
size or count papers as the custom size.
Note
· For the conditions and the settings of
banner printings, refer to "I.4.5.7 Restrictions
on banner print".
5 Billing counter display • 0: Display the billing count 0 0 0
Change the billing count display in “Billing Total • 1: Do not display the billing
Counter” setting. count
I-95
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
6 Counter display when the bill counter setting is • 0: Display items other than the 0 0 0
adjusted billing total counter
When you select "1" on this setting, the counter • 1: Display the billing total
items other than "Billing Total Counter" are not counter only
shown on the "Utility" screen.
Note
· This setting is valid when the DIPSW33-7 is
adjusted to "1".
7 Charge count setting • 0:Disabled 0 0 0
When you configure this setting to 1, "Total • 1: Enabled (displays "Billing
Counter" in the utility mode is changed to "Billing Total Counter")
Total Counter."
The following are displayed on the Fee
Collection Menu screen (Operation panel and
Web Utility) when you use exclusively for
envelopes (when EF-103 is used).
The following is shown.
· Large envelope size counter (298.0 mm or
more)
· Small envelope size counter (297.0 mm or
less)
Note
· Default of the size coefficient is "1".
However, it can be changed by Stop9 in
Service Mode.
34 0 Large size envelope count method • 1 count: 34-1=0, 34-0=0 0 0 0
1 For the envelope print, specifies the counting • 2 counts: 34-1=0, 34-0=1 0 0 0
condition for the large size paper. • 3 counts: 34-1=1, 34-0=0
Note • 4 counts: 34-1=1, 34-0=1
· The count method depends on "Custom
Size Counter Threshold Setting" in the
service mode. Envelopes which is included
in the division of the threshold of 298 mm or
more are multiplied by factors.
2 Small size envelope count method • 1 count: 34-3=0, 34-2=0 0 0 0
3 For the envelope print, specifies the counting • 2 counts: 34-3=0, 34-2=1 0 0 0
condition for the small size paper. • 3 counts: 34-3=1, 34-2=0
• 4 counts: 34-3=1, 34-2=1
4 Banner count method • 2 count: 34-6=0, 34-5=0, 0 0 0
5 Specifies the counting condition when the 34-4=0 1 1 1
banner paper that is 488 mm or longer in the • 3 count: 34-6=0, 34-5=0,
6 sub scan direction is printed. 34-4=1 0 0 0
Note • 4 count: 34-6=0, 34-5=1,
· For the conditions and the settings of 34-4=0
banner printings, refer to "I.4.5.7 Restrictions • 5 count: 34-6=0, 34-5=1,
on banner print". 34-4=1
• 6 count: 34-6=1, 34-5=0,
34-4=0
• 1 count: 34-6=1, 34-5=0,
34-4=1
• 2 count: 34-6=1, 34-5=1,
34-4=0
• 2 count: 34-6=1, 34-5=1,
34-4=1
7 Count setting for 2-color printing when the • 0: Count the full color counter. 0 0 0
envelope fusing (EF-103) is installed • 1: Count the single color
· Function: Switches the counter to count in the counter.
following conditions: When the envelope fusing
(EF-101) is installed. When documents are
printed in 2-color printing function of the driver
setting. When 1 color among C, M, and Y is
selected, or when K and 1 color among C, M,
and Y are selected (two colors in total).
· Usage: Select "1" on this setting to make the
method for count-up single color when the
envelope fusing is installed the same as the
method when the normal fusing is installed.
35 0 Faulty part isolation: Tray3 (PF) • 0: Normal 0 0 0
1 Faulty part isolation: Tray4 (PF) • 1: Unusable 0 0 0
2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
3 • 1: - 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
I-96
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
5 0 0 0
6 Faulty part isolation: High voltage power supply • 0: Normal 0 0 0
of RU-516 and RU-517 • 1: Unusable
7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
36 0 MB-504 connection recognition • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
• 1: Enabled
1 Enable or disable the fusing swing control • 0: No control 1 1 1
· Function: Enable or disable the swing • 1: Control
operation of the fusing unit.
When you feed the large size paper after the
small size paper, gloss lines which the small
size paper edge makes could occur in the paper
edges. "1" (Control) is selected in the default to
prevent this trouble.
· Usage: For users who feed only 1 size paper,
when sickly gloss lines are shown in the paper
edges, select "0" (No control) in this setting.
2 - • 0: - 1 1 1
• 1: -
3 Switch of the registration swing control • 0: Swing control is deactivated 1 1 1
· Function: Switches the use of the registration • 1: Swing control is activated
swing control.
· Usage: Use this function and deactivate the
registration swing control temporarily to check
the condition when such as the centering error
occurs.
4 - • 0: - 1 1 1
• 1: -
5 Switch of the timing for enabling the start • 0: Enable when the operation 0 0 0
direction of the FS-532 FS button stops by the FS button only
• 1: Enable at all times
6 Control to enable or disable the HDD extended • 0: Standard configuration 0 0 0
configuration • 1: Extended configuration
· Function: Select the configuration information
of the HDD.
· Usage: Change this setting to "0" when 3
HDDs are in a configuration. Change this setting
to "1" when 4 HDDs are in a configuration.
7 Format HDD mode • 0: Standard format mode 0 0 0
· Function: Specify the format HDD mode • 1: Forced format mode
- Standard format mode: Backup and format the
authentication information which is saved to the
HDD. An error occurs when the backup of the
information fails.
- Forced format mode: Delete and format the
authentication information which is saved to the
HDD.
· Usage: Select "0" in this setting when you want
to leave the authentication information during
the format HDD. When "0" is selected and an
error occurs, or when you want to delete the
authentication information, select "1" in this
setting.
37 0 ORU-M password authentication setting • 0: password authentication 0 0 0
Activate the password authentication in entering invalid
the ORU-M mode. • 1: password authentication
valid
1 ORU-M print mode display setting • 0: Display 0 0 0
Configure whether to display the sample output • 1: Not display
button on the ORU-M mode.
2 ORU-M replace reason input setting • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
Configure whether to input the reason when you • 1:Disabled
replace the parts in the ORU-M mode.
I-97
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
3 ORU-M printer gamma offset adjustment priority • 0: Scanner automatic 0 0 0
setting adjustment priority
Perform the printer gamma offset adjustment • 1: RU automatic adjustment
after completion of the replacement of the priority
developing unit or developer in the ORU-M
mode. This setting configure the printer gamma
offset automatic adjustment method with both
RU and the scanner connected.
Note
· The priority of the adjustments varies
depending on whether the scanner and RU
are connected.
· When the RU is connected while the
scanner is not, RU automatic adjustment is
performed.
· When RU is not connected but the scanner
is connected, the scanner automatic
adjustment is performed.
· When both RU and scanner is not
connected, manual adjustment is selected.
4 Guidance display for replacing the ORU-M • 0: Display the guidance to 0 0 0
developing unit charge the developer
On ORU-M mode, select whether to display the • 1: Not display the guidance to
guidance for charging the developer. charge the developer
5 Output the hold job for specified number • 0: OFF 0 0 0
This setting displays the pop-up screen to input • 1: ON
the number of copies when the machine outputs
the hold job. With this setting, the number of
copies to output can be changed.
6 Increasing the limit number of SD-510 saddle • 0: Not increase (The limit 0 0 0
stitching number is 5.)
· Function: Increase the limit number of the • 1: Increase (The limit number is
SD-510 saddle stitching from 5 to 16 under the 16 or 12.)
following conditions.
-Paper weight: 92 g/m2 to 105 g/m2
-Paper size in the sub scan direction: 279.4 mm
or more
· Usage: When you want to increase the limit
number on the preceding conditions, change this
setting to "1".
Note
· The saddle stitching that is available when
this setting is "1" is not guaranteed.
· When the paper weight of the cover is 217
g/m2 to 300 g/m2, the limit number is 12.
(The cover page whose paper weight is 217
g/m2 or more is counted as 5 pages for 1
page.)
7 1 to N and face up print at 2-sided printing • 0: 1 to N and Face down 0 0 0
· Function: When you use IC-602, this DIPSW • 1: 1 to N and Face up
changes the paper exit setting when the Plug-in
driver setting is configured as follows.
- Select [2-Sided].
- Select [Face Up].
- Do not select [N to 1].
When this setting is configured to "0", the
machine prints as 1 to N and face down which
differs from the setting. When this setting is
configured to "1", the machine prints as 1 to N
and face up as configured in the setting.
· Usage: When you want to print as 1 to N and
face up during 2-sided printing, configure this
setting to "1".
38 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
1 • 1: - 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
I-98
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
4 Prohibition release of humidifier setting • 0: Prohibition 0 0 0
· Function: Normally, humidifier setting cannot • 1: No prohibition
be used for color paper and coated paper under
135 g/m2. This DIPSW releases the prohibition.
· Usage: When you want to use the humidifier
setting for color paper and coated paper under
135 g/m2, change this setting to "1".
Note
· When you activate the humidifier setting for
color paper and coated paper under 135 g/
m2, moisture possibly remains on the paper
surface. In that case, wrapping jam to the
conveyance roller possibly occurs.
5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
6 • 1: - 0 0 0
7 Process stop during the option standby • 0: Process stop operation 0 0 0
· Function: Stop the main body operation when • 1: No process stop operation
the option operation takes time.
· Usage: To improve the productivity a little,
change this setting to "1".
Note
· If you select "1" in this setting, the
durability of the materials such as the drum
or the developer gets worse.
39 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
1 • 1: - 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
40 0 0 0 0
1 Main body disposal mode • 0: Restrict 0 0 0
SW that allows you to delete all HDD data and • 1: Allow
the part of the data on the NVRAM board (NRB)
and SSD when you dispose the machine.
Note
· Setting this mode to "1" and executing the
following step disable restoring the NVRAM
board (NRB) and reusing the machine.
Therefore, do not execute the steps except
when you throw away the machine.
"Utility" - "03 Administrator Setting" - "10
Security Setting" - "02 HDD Management
Setting" - "03 Delete All Data Setting" -
"Execute Deletion" on "Mode 1" to "Mode 8"
· Meet the following conditions to enable
"Delete All Data Setting".
· "1" is selected on DIPSW40-1.
· The security enhance mode is deactivated.
· The condition of the HDD is Ready.
· After you change the setting of DIPSW40-7,
reboot the power.
2 Forced ISW mode • 0: The normal ISW mode 0 0 0
· Function (when this setting is "1"): The • 1: The ISW mode which
operation starts in the scanner and the DF ISW enables the rewriting of the
mode when you activate the machine. scanner and the DF programs
· Usage: Use when an error occurs on the
normal scanner and DF ISW, and you cannot
rewrite the firmware.
3 Alert send setting without key counter • 0: Send 0 0 0
This setting does not allow alert to be sent to the • 1: Send the alert only when the
client machine even when the vendor machine is printer setting is adjusted
not Ready.
4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
5 • 1: - 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
I-99
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
7 IC-602 controller connection • 0: Not connected 0 0 0
· Function: Switch the connections of the KM • 1: Connected (C1070P, (C1070P, (C1070P,
controllers and the outsourced controllers. C71hc) 1 C71hc) 1 C71hc) 1
· Usage: Select "0" on this setting when you (C1070, (C1070, (C1070,
connect IC-308 or IC-415 to C1070, C1060, or C1060, C1060, C1060,
C1060L. Select "1" on this setting when you C1060L) C1060L) C1060L)
connect the C1070P/C71hc to the IC-602B.
41 0 Decrease setting of the photo conductor • No decrease: 41-1=0, 41-0=0 0 0 0
1 memory • Decrease level medium: 0 0 0
· Function: Specify the lower limit of the 41-1=0, 41-0=1
develop DC bias while the image stabilization • Decrease level large: 41-1=1,
adjustment. 41-0=0
· Usage: Use this function when the previous • -: 41-1=1, 41-0=1
image appears as the image lag (the photo
conductor memory) after approximately 188 mm
(the drum cycle).
Note
· If the decrease level becomes strong, the
image density can increases.
2 Switch the roller release execution after the jam • 0: Release 0 0 0
occurs • 1: No release
· Function: Switch the pressure release roller
either to release or not after a jam occurs.
· Usage: In this setting, the pressure release
roller does not press the jam paper and you can
remove the jammed paper without using the jam
cleaning knob. Select "1" in this setting when
you use the paper on which the knob enables
the jam cleaning easier.
3 Drum speed gap setting (the drum speed for • 0%: 41-4=0, 41-3=0 0 0 0
4 transfer belt) • 0.30%: 41-4=0, 41-3=1 0 0 0
· Function: Specify the speed gap between the • 0.60%: 41-4=1, 41-3=0
drum speed and the belt speed. • 0.90%: 41-4=1, 41-3=1
· Usage: If the image missing occurs on the high
smoothness paper, adjust the speed gap using
this function and decrease the missing.
Note
· Since the accuracy of the color registration
correction reduces when this setting
becomes effective, be sure not to change the
default setting except when the missing
occurs.
5 Switch the fusing speed control at the middle • 0: Normal (the fusing loop is 0 0 0
speed controlled)
· Function: Stop the fusing entrance loop • 1: The fusing speed is fixed at
control at the middle speed, and convey the the middle speed (225 mm/s)
paper at the constant speed.
· Usage: Use this function when the transfer
jitter occurs at the position 140 mm from the
paper trailing edge.
6 Standard of the temporal correction condition for • 0: Conduct under the specified 1 1 1
the color registration condition in DIPSW26-0.
· Function: Select the standard of the timing for • 1: Complex judgment (judged
the color registration correction. by "OR" on both of the
· Usage: Use this function when the color DIPSW26-0 settings)
registration jitter changes even if the
temperature change in the machine is
controlled. If the color registration is not
corrected when you use the machine, select "1"
in this setting and correct the color registration
periodically changing the number of prints.
0: Conduct the color registration control under
the condition of DIPSW26-0 settings.
1: Conduct the color registration control when
whichever condition is satisfied, the temperature
change in the machine or the specified number
of prints.
I-100
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
7 2nd transfer output adjustment range • 0: - 50 to + 50 0 0 0
enlargement setting • 1: - 120 to + 120
· Function: Changes the adjustment range of
[2nd Transfer Output Adj.] in [Paper Setting] -
[Process Adj.], 2nd Transfer-Lead Edge, 2nd
Transfer-Rear Edge.
· Usage: When the electrostatic offset (a
phenomenon that the previous image applies
after the fusing belt goes round) occurs in
envelope, adjusts the 2nd transfer output setting
adjustment width within the range of -50 to +50
(default). When no improvement is made in this
range, change DIPSW41-7 to 1. Enlarge the
adjustment width to -120 to +120 and readjust
the adjustment width.
Note
· When 2nd transfer output is raised, the
transferability decreases. When output is
raised too much, the transfer is hardly
performed.
42 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
1 • 1: - 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 Halftone Text Enhancement level setting • 0: Display in 5 levels 0 0 0
· Function: This DIPSW switches the level of • 1: Display in 3 levels
the Halftone Text Enhancement in [User Setting]
- [Printer Setting] - [Outline Process] - [Halftone
Text Enhancement]. All the enhancement levels
are available with the display in 5 levels.
<Level of the Halftone Text Enhancement (The
larger the value becomes, the stronger the
Halftone Text Enhancement becomes.)>
- [Weak+]=1 (DIPSW42-4=0), 3 (DIPSW42-4=1)
- [Normal]=2 (DIPSW42-4=0), 4 (DIPSW42-4=1)
- [Strong+]=3 (DIPSW42-4=0), 5
(DIPSW42-4=1)
- [Strong(+1)]=4 (DIPSW42-4=0), not displayed
(DIPSW42-4=1)
- [Strong(+2)]=5 (DIPSW42-4=0), not displayed
(DIPSW42-4=1)
· Usage: When this setting is configured to "1"
on Ver.1.8, the display in 3 levels is also applied
after the firmware version is upgraded. However,
our recommendation is to configure to "0".
Note
· When you strengthen the level of the
Halftone Text Enhancement, minuscule
outline letters possibly are not printed
clearly.
5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
6 Draw method of the numbering text section • 0: Overlay method 0 0 0
· Function: Switch the draw method of the • 1: Overwrite method
overlay text section.
The overlay method of "0" is the existing model
type. The original information remains on the
background.
For the overwrite method of "0", the original
information does not remain on the background
(only the stamp color remains).
· Usage: To prevent the stamp peeling when
you add the overlay stamp (numbering) for the
original which has the dark-colored background,
use this function.
7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
43 0 • 1: - 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 1 1 1
I-101
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 Tear up jam prevention control • 0: Enable 0 0 0
· Function: (When OT-502 is mounted) When a • 1: Disable
jam occurs in the paper exit section, pulling out
ADU tears up the paper.
To prevent the tear up jam, exit the paper
forcibly when a jam occurs and the paper
remains in the main body paper exit section.
· Usage: When you do not exit the jammed
paper in the main body exit section to the tray of
OT-502, change this setting to "1".
44 0 Monochrome mode speed change control while • 0: Monochrome mode is 0 0 0
the thick paper feed enabled
· Function: Select the settings of the drum Bk • 1: Monochrome mode is
speed change control (the instant gain-up disabled
control) when the thick paper is inserted.
· Usage: When you select "1" in this setting, the
instant gain-up control becomes inactive during
the monochrome mode.
Note
· If you change DIPSW44-0 to "0" and
DIPSW44-4 to "0", the instant gain-up control
of the drum Bk becomes active.
1 - • 0: - 1 1 1
2 • 1: - 1 1 1
3 1 1 1
4 Monochrome mode speed change control while • 0: 157 mm/s line speed enabled 0 0 0
the thick paper feed (low speed) • 1: 157 mm/s line speed
· Function: Select the settings of the drum Bk disabled
speed change control (the instant gain-up
control) when the thick paper is inserted.
· Usage: When you select "0" in this setting, the
gain-up control becomes active while the
monochrome mode speed is low.
Note
· If you change DIPSW44-0 to "0" and
DIPSW44-4 to "0", the instant gain-up control
of the drum Bk becomes active.
5 Coverage setting for the exit toner band (Y, M, • 0%: 44-6=0, 44-5=0 0 0 0
C, Bk) • 3%: 44-6=0, 44-5=1
· Function: To avoid the deterioration of the • 1.5%: 44-6=1, 44-5=0
toner in low coverage, discharge the toner • 5%: 44-6=1, 44-5=1
according to the coverage of this DIPSW setting.
The default is 0% and no discharge.
· Usage: If the continuation print in the high
coverage (approximately 50 % or more) is
conducted after the continuation print in the low
coverage, a lot of toner scatters from the
developing unit. In this case, dirt due to the
scattered toner, gray background, or an image
deterioration tends to occur. Therefore, change
this setting to prevent these troubles.
Note
· For the toner (Bk), the configured coverage
is applied only when DIPSW49-6, DIPSW49-7
are configured to 0.
· For the toner (Bk), the toner amount that is
configured in DIPSW49-6, 7 has the higher
priority in discharge.
· When you change this setting, the life of the
belt cleaning blade becomes shorter. Also,
the productivity slightly decreases.
· For details, refer to "I.4.5.9 Troubleshooting
for image errors".
I-102
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
6 Coverage setting for the exit toner belt (Y, M, C, 0 0 0
Bk)
· Function: To avoid the deterioration of the
toner in low coverage, discharge the toner
The default is 0% and no discharge.
coverage, a lot of toner scatters from the
developing unit. In this case, dirt due to the
scattered toner, gray background, or an image
deterioration tends to occur. Therefore, change
this setting to prevent these troubles.
Note
· For the toner (Bk), the configured coverage
is applied only when DIPSW49-6, DIPSW49-7
are configured to 0.
· For the toner (Bk), the toner amount that is
configured in DIPSW49-6, 7 has the higher
priority in paper output.
belt cleaning blade becomes shorter. Also,
the productivity slightly decreases.
· For details, refer to "I.4.5.9 Troubleshooting
for image errors".
7 Display the "Highest Speed" button • 0: Not display 0 0 0
· Function: Display or not the "Highest Speed" • 1: Display
button in the "Utility" - "02 User Setting" - "03
Common Setting" - "Fusing Stability".
· Usage: For the user who gives more priority to
the speed than to the quality, select "1" in this
setting and release the "Highest Speed" button.
45 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
1 • 1: - 1 1 1
2 0 0 0
3 Prohibit timer of the print job reception setting • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
after the gamma automatic adjustment • 1: Enabled
Function: This setting prohibits the reception of
the print job from IC to the engine during
"Gamma Automatic Adjustment".
Usage: On the daily color proof, when the print
job is received during "Gamma Automatic
Adjustment", the job is output after the gamma
automatic adjustment. When you perform the
paper density adjustment after the "Gamma
Automatic Adjustment" and you do not want to
output the print job, configure this setting to "1".
Note
· The time of the printer prohibit timer can be
configured on "UTILITY" - "Copy Setting" -
"Printer Prohibit Timer".
· This function is available only when the
configuration includes the scanner.
4 Output all to USB memory on the system • 0: Not display 0 0 0
information screen • 1: Display
Function: Displays the "Output All to USB"
button on "System Information" screen.
Usage: Change this setting to "1" when you
want to output the list print information
collectively during the print output and check the
setting information of the engine.
I-103
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
5 Staple pitch adjustment value setting on SRA3 • 0: Adjustment range: -20 to +20 0 0 0
Function: Changes the staple pitch adjustment • 1: Adjustment range: -49 to +20
range on SRA3 when the saddle stitching option
(SD-506) is attached.
Usage: Change this setting to "1" when you
want to narrow down the staple pitch on the
saddle stitching on SRA3.
Note
· When you change this setting to "1", the
staple pitch adjustment is out of the
specification.
display on the touch panel is not changed
from "Adj. Range: -20 to +20 1step = 1.0mm".
6 Setting of the face up paper exit for print jobs • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
when the envelope fusing is installed • 1: Enabled (Fixed on the face
Function: When the envelope fusing is installed, up paper exit)
performs the face up paper exit for print jobs
from the IC.
Usage: Select "1" on this setting when you
output the calibration chart of the envelope size
or the spot color chart from ColorCentro
7 Business card scan setting • 0: Smallest size "100mm x 0 0 0
Function: Change the smallest size that can be 148mm"
scanned. • 1: Smallest size "55mm x
Usage: Change this setting to "1" when you 55mm"
want to scan the business card size.
Note
When you change this setting to "1", the item
that is displayed on "UTILITY" -
"Administrator Setting" - "System Setting" -
"Size Setting" - "Original Glass Small Size" is
not changed.
46 0 Countermeasure for the photo conductor • 0: Not execute 0 0 0
memory while the speed priority is chosen • 1: Execute (wait for 1 cycle of
· Function: Change the transfer output timing the photo conductor after the
when you select "Speed" in the stabilization 1st transfer resistance detection
adjustment frequency setting. control is executed)
· Usage: Use this function when the previous
image appears as the image lag (the photo
conductor memory) after approximately 188 mm
(the drum cycle) because of too much 1st
transfer output.
Note
· Before you change this setting, be sure to
press [Utility] - [03 Administrator Setting] -
[01 System Setting] - [05 Expert Adjustment]
- [06 Process Adjustment], and decide
whether to decrease 5% on the 1st transfer
output of each YMCK or not. If the 1st
transfer output is reduced too much, white
spots can occur. If white spots occur, adjust
the 1st transfer output by 1 % with checking
the image.
· If you select "1" in this setting, activate the
transfer output 1 cycle before the image is
written to the drum. Thus the time before the
first print gets slightly longer.
· Since the drum rotation number increases,
the drum life gets shorter.
1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
I-104
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
2 Display "Development Output Setting" in [Expert • 0: OFF 0 0 0
Adjustment] - [Process Adjustment] • 1: ON
· Function: Display [04 Development Output
Setting] in [Utility] - [03 Administrator Setting] -
[01 System Setting] - [05 Expert Adjustment] -
[06 Process Adjustment].
· Usage: Use this function when the image is
darker in the area from the paper leading edge
to the line 44m or the image is darker
(development memory) in the area of 44 mm
backward from the image erasure. Select
"Down" in "Development Output Setting" to
prevent the development memory.
Note
· If you select "Down" in "Development
Output Setting", the unevenness of the
background can occur.
After you select "Down" and return to the
user mode, the gamma automatic adjustment
starts.
3 Sample print setting • 0: 1 sheet 0 0 0
· Function: Switch whether to print 1 sheet, or • 1: 1 set
to print 1 set for sample print.
· Usage: When the dirt occurs during mass
printing but not every time, switches to sample
print by sets, and confirms dirt on sample print.
4 Slow conveyance speed of the developer • 0: Normal conveyance speed 0 0 0
· Function: Accelerate the slow conveyance • 1: Accelerate the conveyance
speed of the developer. speed of the developer
· Usage: Change this setting to "1" when white
spots occurs by the developing screw pitch on
the rear trailing edge of the paper on the slow
printing.
5 Weak rotate control of the intermediate transfer • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
belt • 1: Enabled
Function: Operates the intermediate transfer
belt once per an hour
Usage: Select "1" when you deactivate the
machine and leave it for a long time in the high
temperature and the high humidity environment
and a color registration error occurs soon after
the machine is activated. When the machine is
inactive for a long time in the high temperature
and the high humidity environment, winkle
appears on the intermediate transfer belt.
Therefore the belt cannot read the patch for the
image stabilization control normally. In this case,
the error codes of C-2840, C-2841, C-4521,
C-4522, C-4631, C-4632, C-4633, C-4634,
C-4641, C-4642, C-4643, C-4644, C-4661,
C-4662 and C-4663 occur.
Note
· When you change this setting to "1", select
"---min." on Auto Shut OFF from "Utility" -
"Power Save Function Setting".
machine operates except in the low
temperature and the low humidity
environment.
fusing temperature of the auto low power is
not executed.Therefore recovery time from the
auto low power is long.
6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
7 • 1: - 1 1 1
47 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
I-105
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
5 Setting of the fusing belt and the fusing paper • Fusing belt (Old), fusing paper 1 1 1
6 exit plate assy exit plate assy (Old): 47-6=0, 1 1 1
· Function: A new model that improves the 47-5=0
fusing separation performance is introduced for • Fusing belt (New), fusing paper
the fusing belt and the fusing paper exit plate exit plate assy (Old): 47-6=0,
assy. This DIPSW changes the control method 47-5=1
of the fusing temperature. • Restricted: 47-6=1, 47-5=0
· Usage: Change this DIPSW according to • Fusing belt (New), fusing paper
whether the used fusing belt and the fusing exit plate assy (New): 47-6=1,
paper exit plate assy are new or old. 47-5=1
Note
· Refer to "I.4.5.10 New model of the fusing belt
and the fusing paper exit assy" to distinguish
between the new model and the old model.
7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
48 0 Enabling the Paper Setting to be changed any • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
time • 1: Enabled
· Function: Normally, while the machine is
printing, you cannot change the Paper Setting of
the trays which are used for job. This DIPSW
abolishes the restriction. When this setting is "1",
you can change the Paper Setting any time.
Note
· If you change the settings other than the
Both Sides Adjustment, malfunctions such
as a paper mismatch and a jam possibly
occur. Be careful of the content and timing of
the setting change.
1 Release the combination restriction of "Frame/ • 0: Do not release the restriction 0 0 0
Fold eraser" and "2 repeat" • 1: Release the restriction
Release the combination restriction of "Frame/
Fold eraser" and "2 repeat" of "Application
Setting" in copy function.
Note
· Enable only for copy function
· 4 repeat is not included
2 Release the combination restriction of "high 0 0 0
accuracy, rimless copy" and "binding margin"
When you select the booklet layout (high
accuracy, rimless copy) mode with the job from
IC, "Binding margin" cannot be used with the job
ticket edit of the main body.Configure to "1" to
release this restriction.
3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
4 Setting of the display of the toner amount and • 0: Not display 0 0 0
the replacement count of the toner bottle • 1: Display
Function: Display "Toner Info." on the machine
screen to display the toner amount of each color
and the replacement count of the toner bottle.
Usage: Select "1" on this setting when the user
wants to check the toner amount and the
replacement count of the toner bottle. Count the
number of times of the toner bottle replacement
and correct the count information on CSRC and
manage the stock of the toner bottle.
5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
6 • 1: - 0 0 0
7 Displays fusing warm-up time and image • 0: Displayed on warm-up during 0 0 0
stabilization control time power ON, during fusing warm-
· Function: Restricts the timing that the warm- up, and during stabilization
up indicator is displayed to the Machine Screen. control.
· Usage: Configure the setting to "1" when the • 1: Only the Warm-up during
user does not want to display the indicator other power ON is displayed.
than when the power is activated.
49 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
1 • 1: - 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
I-106
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
4 Prevents paper feed delay due to mixture of • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
magnification and paper length of polygon 3 • 1: Enabled
sides in a row
· Function: Avoid the false detection of C-4104.
When paper is mixed, and the magnification in
main scanning for the front and back of the
paper changes 3 prints in a row, false detection
of C-4104 occurs when either of the following
conditions are met.
· When switching from the A4 size or larger to
smaller than the A4 size, and RU-509 is not
connected.
· Specific timing when the print interval is wide
such as image development.
When you select "1" on this setting, you can
change the control of the paper conveyance and
the write section. Therefore, you can prevent
C-4104 from occurring.
· Usage: To avoid the false detection of C-4104
under a specified condition, configure the setting
to "1".
Note
· When you select "1" on this screen, the
productivity is possibly lowered.
· When you select "1" on this setting, the
settings of the paper conveyance and the
polygon are also changed. Therefore, be sure to
select "0" when the mis-detection of C-4104
does not occur.
5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
6 Coverage setting for the exit toner band • 0%: 49-7=0, 49-6=0 0 0 0
7 (exclusively for toners (Bk)) • 2%: 49-7=0, 49-6=1 0 0 0
· Function: To avoid the toner deterioration in • 3%: 49-7=1, 49-6=0
low coverage, discharge only the toner (Bk) • 5%: 49-7=1, 49-6=1
The default is 0 % and no discharge.
coverage, a lot of toner (Bk) scatters from the
developing unit. When the gray background
occurs due to the scattered toner (Bk), change
this setting.
Note
· Among the coverage that is configured in
DIPSW44-5, 6, the coverage that is
configured in DIPSW49-6, 7 discharges only
from the toner (Bk).
transfer belt cleaning blade gets shorter. The
productivity is slightly lowered.
*For the details of the parts, refer to "I.4.5.9
Troubleshooting for image errors".
50 0 Details counter list switch (also refer to • Both the details counter and the 0 0 0
1 DIPSW15-2) icon are displayed: 50-1=0, 0 0 0
· Function: When DIPSW15-2 is "0", switches 50-0=0
whether to display the details counter or the icon • The details counter is displayed
respectively. only: 50-1=0, 50-0=1
· Usage: When either the details counter or the • The icon is displayed only:
icon must be hidden, change this setting. 50-1=1, 50-0=0
Note • -: 50-1=1, 50-0=1
· When DIPSW15-2 is "1", both the details
counter and the icon are not displayed.
2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
I-107
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
3 Scanner character blur improvement filter setting • 0: Improve character blur. 0 0 0
Function: Switch to the filter which is • 1: Improve the dotted moire
appropriate to the image quality of the scanned image quality.
document.
Usage: Configure this setting to "1" when
character blur does not occur but when dotted
moire occurs.
Note
When you change the setting to "1", the
dotted moire is reduced. However, the
resolution of the character becomes low.
(Trade-off)
4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
5 Spine setting of Perfect Bind 2-in-1 • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
· Function: Normally, when you select [Cover • 1: Enabled
Print 2 in 1] during perfect bind printing, the
spine becomes blank. When this setting is "1",
the machine outputs the image of the front cover
and the back cover without making a gap.
Therefore, the spine does not become blank.
· Usage: In order not to make the spine blank
when you print in [Cover Print 2 in 1], configure
this setting to "1".
Note
· When you configure this setting to "1", be
sure to change the software switch 98 of the
controller to [ON].
([Controller Administrator Setting Menu] -
[System Setting] - [Software Switch Setting])
6 • 0: - 0 0 0
7 - • 1: - 0 0 0
51 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
52 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 1 1 1
3 Registration motor gain-up control • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
Function: Enlarge the margin of the step out of • 1: Enabled
the registration motor (M45) on the specified • The gain up control of the
paper feed condition. registration motor is performed
Usage: When the paper is thick and hard that is only when the following
out of specification, the registration motor (M45) conditions are met.
possibly steps out. In this case, select "1". • Front side feed from PF-707
Note • Paper weight setting 257 g/m2
Use this control only when the user uses the
to 300 g/m2
thick paper (300 g/m2 or more) that is out of • The paper length in the sub
the product specification and jams (J-3101, scan direction is 353 mm or
J-3102) caused by the registration motor more
occur frequently.
This function functions only when "1" is
selected on the DIPSW and the specified
paper feed condition is met.
I-108
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
4 Banner paper FS sub tray full detection mode • 0: FS sub tray full detection 0 0 0
· Function: If "0" is configured when a banner sensor control
paper is output, the full detection sensor stops • 1: FS sub tray 10-sheets soft
the paper exit. count control
If "1" is configured, printing stops when 10
sheets are output, and "Please remove paper
from sub tray then touch [OK]" appears.
· Usage: Configure "1" if output stops even
though the output sheets are fewer than the
stack limit. This phenomenon happens due to
stacked paper creep, and false detection in the
FS sub tray full detection sensor, when MK-740
is used. When MK-740 is used, configure this
DIPSW to "1".
Note
· This mode does not depend on paper size.
Paper types other than banner are also
counted.
· When 10 sheets are output, remove the
sheets. Press the "OK" button on the
operation screen to restart printing.
· 10-sheets soft count control is performed
only when paper is output in the FS sub tray.
5 Feed failed jam detection setting on the • Enable only for envelopes: 0 0 0
6 registration section 52-6=0, 52-5=0 1 1 1
Function: Normally, monitors the sensor • Restricted: 52-6=0, 52-5=1
condition on the registration section and detects • Apply to all: 52-6=1, 52-5=0
the feed failed jam (papers are partly • Apply to none: 52-6=1, 52-5=1
overlapped). Configure the coverage of this feed
failed jam detection.
Usage:
· If the jam detection does not function properly
when paper other than envelopes are fed,
change to "Enable only for envelopes: 52-6=0,
52-5=0".
· If the jam detection does not function properly
during envelope feed, and if the jam detection
does not function properly at all paper feed,
change the setting "Apply to none: 52-6=1,
52-5=1". However, when you change to "Apply
to none" and the double feed occurs for the
envelope, the conveyance motor does not
possibly stop.
Note
· After you change the setting, explain the
operational conditions to the user.
· When paper is fed from PF, and the paper is
other than envelopes, PF is detected as multi
feed.
7 Toner forcible output control switch setting • 0: Disabled (Forcible paper exit 0 0 0
· Function: When near empty of the toner bottle process) (C1070/ (C1070/ (C1070/
is detected, stop printing, and the toner is • 1: Enabled (Forcible paper exit C1070P/ C1070P/ C1070P/
supplied from the toner bottle. When a toner is process) C1060/ C1060/ C1060/
not detected within a specified period of time, C1060L C1060L C1060L
confirm near empty. )1 )1 )1
· Usage: Used when the toner bottle does not (C71hc) (C71hc) (C71hc)
supply the toner, and near empty is detected
wrongly.
Note
productivity is lowered.
53 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
1 • 1: - 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
54 0 SD-513 non-staple detection function • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
• 1:Disabled
I-109
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
· Function: When the non-staple is detected for
the SD-513 saddle stitching, displays a jam code
and stops the job.
· Usage: When you do not want to stop the job
by non-staple detection, change this setting to
"1".
1 Switch of SD-513 fore-edge trim scrap box • 0: Default value (control 0 0 0
capacity according to the sheet number
∙ Function: Switches the allowance number of of booklet and the amount of
trimming times that changes the machine status trimming)
to the trimmer restriction from the fore-edge • 1: Extend (twice as the default
trimmer scraps box full. value)
∙ Usage: Select "1" when you want to extend the
period in which the "Fore-edge trimmer scraps
box full" display turns to the trimmer restriction
(time for the trimmer scraps disposal).
Note
∙ Booklets are possibly exited with fore-edge
trimmer scraps. Press marks of trimmer
scraps are possibly left on booklets. Trimmer
scraps are possibly caught in the trimmer
shutter and they possibly causes an error
code.
2 Faulty part isolation: SD-513 • 0: Normal 0 0 0
3 Faulty part isolation: SD-513 entrance section • 1: Unusable 0 0 0
reversal stacker
4 Switch of the number of overlapped coated • 0: Always 1 sheet 0 0 0
paper at the SD-513 entrance conveyance • 1: Control according to weight
section (1 to 3 sheets)
• Function: Switches the number of overlapped
coated paper at the entrance conveyance
section when the saddle stitching or multi half
that uses coated paper is conducted.
• Usage: Select "1" when you want to increase
the productivity of the saddle stitching or multi
half that uses coated paper.
Note
• Overlapped paper fails to fall to the reverse
exit section due to electrostatic suction, and
a jam possibly occurs.
5 Switch of TU-503 slit cutter rotation speed • 0: Normal Rotation 0 0 0
∙ Function: Switches the rotation speed of the • 1: High speed rotation
slitter motor (M108).
∙ Usage: Select "1" when you want to improve
the slit straightness.
Note
∙ The life of the slit cutter and the slit motor
(M108) is possibly shortened.
6 Faulty part isolation: SD-513 sub tray exit • 0: Normal 0 0 0
Note • 1: Unusable
· This setting is valid when the DIPSW7-2 is
"1".
7 Faulty part isolation: SD-513 non-staple 0 0 0
detection
55 0 SD-513 input unit • 0: Fixed to mm 0 0 0
· Function: Configures the unit of each input • 1: Interlocked with the unit
value that is related to SD-513. setting
· Usage: To change the unit to inch, configure
this setting to "1". Then, select [Inch(Decimal
Point)] in [Utility] - [User Setting] - [System
Setting] - [Unit Setting].
Note
·When you select " Inch(Fraction)", operates
in " Inch(Decimal Point)".
I-110
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
1 G7 calibration switching • 0: Exact Color is used 0 0 0
· Function: Switches the calibration mode when • 1: G7 calibration is used
the IC-602 is used.
· Usage: To use the G7 calibration, change this
setting to "1".
Note
· The following data has no reciprocal usage
between G7 calibration and Exact Color.
- ICC profile (Printer profile and device link
profile)
- Spot color table
· After you switch the mode, deletion of the
old data is recommended.
2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
3 Stamp outside print of printer job • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
· Function: When a printer job is output, prints a • 1: Enabled
stamp on the outside when the stamp is
configured under the following conditions.
- Stamp type: Page number
- Print position: Other than the center
- Output setting: Booklet, Adhesive binding,
perfect bind, ring bind
4 Paper size minimum input unit • 0: 0.1 mm/0.005 inch (when 0 0 0
· Function: Changes the minimum input unit for you use the IC-602)
the paper size. • 1: 1 mm/0.025 inch (when you
· Usage: The minimum input unit of the paper use the Fiery controller)
size differs between the Fiery controller and the
main body. Therefore, the paper size that you
registered for the paper profile is possibly
changed when you deactivate and activate the
power switch.
In order to prevent that problem, change this
setting to "1" when you use the Fiery controller.
5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
6 • 1: - 0 0 0
7 Proof copy function setting • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
· Function: Configure the output operation on • 1: Enabled
the proof copy.
· Usage: When you press the Proof copy button
on the COPY screen, "Hold + Print" is applied
automatically. Then the screen moves to the
hold job list screen.
After one set is output and the job is hold, Job
Ticket Edit screen opens automatically.
After the operator checks the output, the
operator edits the ticket, outputs the sample
again, or saves and outputs as necessary.
56 0 Both sides adjustment default display tab switch • [Scan Meas.] ([Gap] for 0 0 0
1 · Function: This DIPSW switches the tab that is C1070P/C71hc): 56-0=0, 0 0 0
displayed as default in the Both Sides 56-1=0
Adjustment screen. • [Gap]: 56-0=0, 56-1=1
· Usage: Use to change the tab that is displayed • [Front]: 56-0=1, 56-1=0
as default. • [Front]: 56-0=1, 56-1=1
2 Shows Color Density Control OFF Setting (each • 0: [OFF] does not appear. 0 0 0
tray) • 1: [OFF] appears.
· Function: Shows [OFF] in "Each Paper Type
Color Adj. Data" from [Paper Setting] - [Color
Density].
· Usage: When you want to manage the ON and
OFF of Color Density (periodical control) by
each tray, configure to "1". [OFF] is displayed in
"Each Paper Type Color Adj. Data" of [Paper
Setting]. When a job is output from the tray that
[OFF] is selected, Color Density (periodical
control) is not performed during the output.
Note
· If you reset the Paper Setting of the tray
when "1" is configured, Color Density
Control of each tray becomes [OFF].
I-111
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
3 Tone Curve Adjustment screen switch • 0: Depends on how to enter the 0 0 0
· Function: There are 2 adjustment screens (for adjustment screen
touch and for mouse) for the tone curve • 1: Always the adjustment
adjustment of the job ticket edit. This DIPSW screen for a mouse
configures how to display the adjustment
screen.
<When this setting is "0">
When you click [Tone Curve Adj.] with a mouse,
an adjustment screen for the mouse appears.
When you touch [Tone Curve Adj.], an
adjustment screen for touching appears.
<When this setting is "1">
When a mouse is connected, the adjustment
screen for the mouse always appears regardless
of how to enter the adjustment screen.
· Usage: When you always want to display the
adjustment screen for a mouse, change this
setting to "1".
4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
5 • 1: - 0 0 0
6 Switch of the fusing jam process screen • 0: For no inspection window 1 1 1
· Function: New model of the fusing unit has a • 1: For inspection window
inspection window to check the remained paper.
When the inspection window is attached to the
fusing unit, there is a procedure to check the
remained paper through the inspection window
in the jam process screen of J-3102 or J-3106.
This DIPSW switches the jam process screen.
· Usage: When you use the fusing unit that does
not have a inspection window, change this
setting to "0".
7 Display of the remaining staple amount • 0: OFF 0 0 0
· Function: This DIPSW changes the staple • 1: ON
icon on the MACHINE screen and enables you
to check the remaining amount. This DIPSW
displays the [Amount Info.] button on the
MACHINE screen.
· Usage: Use this DIPSW when you check the
remaining staple amount of the FS-532, the
SD-506, and the SD-513.
Note
Remaining staple amount display setting".
57 0 Moderate envelope prohibition 2 • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
· Function: Moderates the prohibition when you • 1: Enabled
use EF-103. When you select "1" on this setting,
you can use the following paper feed trays and
speed settings.
<Paper feed tray (envelope size) >
- The paper feed tray when this setting is "0"
- PF-707 tray 3: Main scan 245.1 mm to 330.2
mm, sub scan 375.1 mm to 487.7 mm
- PF-707 tray 1, 2: Main scan 100.0 mm to 330.2
- Main Body tray 1, 2: Main scan 90.0 mm* to
245.0 mm, sub scan 182.0 mm to 375.0 mm
*: When you feed the paper that is less than 100
mm, the mis-centering correction control is not
performed.
<Speed setting (Paper Setting) >
- The speed setting when this setting is "0"
- High
· Usage: When you want to use these paper
feed trays or speed setting, change this setting
to "1".
Note
· The paper feed trays or the speed setting
that become available when you change this
setting to "1" are not guaranteed.
paper setting of the main body tray is reset
each time EF-103 and the main body fusing
unit are replaced.
I-112
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
2 • 1: - 0 0 0
3 Moderate envelope prohibition • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
· Function: Moderate the prohibition of the • 1: Enabled
paper feed tray and the paper exit tray when you
use EF-103. When you select "1" on this setting,
you can use following paper feed trays and
paper exit trays.
<Paper feed tray (envelope size) >
- The paper feed tray when this setting is "0"
- PF-707 tray 3: main scan 245.1 mm to 330.2
- PF-602m tray 1: main scan 90.0 mm* to 330.2
mm, sub scan 182.0 to 487.0 mm
- PF-602m tray 2: main scan 90.0 mm* to 330.2
mm, sub scan 148.0 to 487.0 mm
*: When you feed the paper whose length is less
than 100 mm, you need the envelop assist
guide. When you feed the paper that is less than
100 mm, the mis-centering correction control is
not performed.
<Output tray>
- The paper exit tray when this setting is "0"
- FS-531: Main tray
- FS-612: Main tray
· Usage: When you want to use these paper
feed trays or paper exit trays, select "1" on this
setting.
Note
· The paper feed trays or the paper exit trays
that become available when you select "1"
on this setting are not guaranteed.
4 Paper setting switch after the Maximum Density • 0: Keep the paper setting after 0 0 0
Auto Adjustment (RU) the adjustment.
· Function: When you enter the printing mode • 1: Return to the paper setting
from [Utility Menu] - [03 Administrator Setting] - before the adjustment.
[01 System Setting] - [05 Expert Adjustment] -
[06 Process Adjustment] - [03 Max. Density Auto
Adj. (RU)], the paper setting of the tray switches
automatically to the setting of the Maximum
Density registration. Configure whether you
keep the paper setting which is switched
automatically as the paper setting of the tray,
even after the Maximum Density Auto
Adjustment (RU) completes.
· Usage: When you want to limit the keeping of
the paper setting which is switched automatically
to only during the Maximum Density Auto
Adjustment, configure this setting to "1".
5 Fusing midstream wrap JAM detection setting • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
· Function: Disable the detection of the fusing • 1:Disabled
midstream wrap JAM (J-3106).
· Usage: Change this setting to "1" when J-3106
is detected falsely.
6 Maintenance counter counting condition • 0: Maximum 2 counts 1 1 1
· Function: Change the counting condition of the • - To 337.9 mm: 1 count
maintenance counter. • - 338 mm to 1200 mm: 2 counts
Note • 1: Maximum 5 counts
· Do not change this setting on the field. • - To 388 mm: 1 count
• - 388.1 mm to 488 mm: 2
counts
• - 488.1 mm to 686 mm: 3
counts
• - 686.1 mm to 915 mm: 4
counts
• - 915.1 mm to 1200 mm: 5
counts
I-113
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
7 TC custom size count method • 0: Normal 0 0 0
· Function: When DIPSW33-4 is 1, switch the • - Inf. 1 to 5: Coefficient 1
count coefficient of the custom size of the total • 1: Increase the coefficient
counter. • - Inf. 1: Coefficient 1
The count that you configure on DIPSW33-0, • - Inf. 2: Coefficient 2
DIPSW33-1, and DIPSW33-2/3 is multiplied by • - Inf. 3: Coefficient 3
the coefficient. • - Inf. 4: Coefficient 4
Note • - Inf. 5: Coefficient 5
· When DIPSW33-4 is 0, the coefficients of
Inf. 1 to Inf. 5 are 1, regardless of this setting.
58 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
1 Displays the shortcut button of color density • 0: Do not display the shortcut 0 0 0
control (periodical adjustment) ON/OFF setting button
· Function: Displays a shortcut button of • 1: Display the shortcut button
[Adjustment] - [Color Density Control] - [Basic
Setting] - [Periodical Adj. Execution] in the
"MACHINE" screen.
· Usage: When you want to activate and
deactivate the periodic adjustment of the color
density control frequently, change this setting to
"1".
2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
3 • 1: - 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
59 0 Timing threshold of the intermediate transfer belt • 67.5 m: 59-1=0, 59-0=0 0 0 0
reverse control • 135m: 59-1=0, 59-0=1
· Function: Rotates the intermediate transfer • 108m: 59-1=1, 59-0=0
belt in the reverse direction according to the • 27m: 59-1=1, 59-0=1
1 drive distance timing of the intermediate transfer • 67.5m: 59-1=0, 59-0=0 0 0 0
belt which is configured with DIPSW. • 135m: 59-1=0, 59-0=1
· Usage: Increases the frequency of the • 108m: 59-1=1, 59-0=0
intermediate transfer belt reverse rotation when • 27m: 59-1=1, 59-0=1
a go-through occurs at the intermediate transfer
belt, and reduces the transfer belt cleaning
blade go-through.
Note
2 Control change period setting when the drum • Until the lubricant applying 0 0 0
3 unit is replaced roller drives up to 5 km: 59-3=0, 0 0 0
· Function: When you replace the drum unit to a 59-2=0
new one, the amount of the lubricant application • Until the lubricant applying
is increased for a specified period. roller drives up to 2 km: 59-3=0,
In order to handle the image troubles that the 59-2=1
increase of the lubricant cause, the following • Until the lubricant applying
controls are performed after the replacement of roller drives up to 8 km: 59-3=1,
the drum unit. 59-2=0
· Toner band creation for discharge • At all times: 59-3=1, 59-2=1
· Increase of the reverse rotation amount of the
intermediate transfer belt
· Increase of the toner band supply frequency to
the transfer belt cleaning unit
Change the period of time that these controls
are performed.
· Usage: Use this setting when an image error
occurs after you replace the drum unit to a new
one.
In addition, use this setting when you change
the period of time that the exit toner band is
created when you change DIPSW59-6 to "1".
Note
· When the DIPSW44-5, 6 is "0", the coverage
is 1.5%.
I-114
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
4 Paper weight unit change setting • 0: lb Cover 0 0 0
· Function: On "Paper Setting" - "Weight" - • 1: A Book-kg
"Change Unit", change "lb Cover" to "A Book-
kg".
· Usage: Select "1" on this setting when users
use the paper whose weight unit is "A Book-kg".
5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
6 Transfer cleaning belt control when you change • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
the drum unit • 1: Enabled
· Function: When you change the drum, creates
the exit toner band for a specified period.
· Usage: The brand new drum unit applies much
lubricant. Therefore, mixture of the lubricant and
paper dust is easily created.
When printings are operated consistently with
low coverage at this condition, toner possibly
goes through at the intermediate transfer. In
order to prevent this problem, increase the
coverage and stabilize the lubricant load amount
to the developer.
Note
· When DIPSW44-5, 6, DIPSW49-6, 7 are
configured to "0", the coverage is 1.5%.
· When DIPSW44-5, 6 are configured to other
than "0", the coverage is the value that you
configured on DIPSW44-5, 6.
· However, when DIPSW49-6, 7 are
configured to other than "0", the coverage
(Bk) is the value that you configured on
DIPSW49-6, 7.
transfer belt cleaning blade gets shorter. The
· When the exit toner band that you
configured on DIPSW59-6 is completed but
DIPSW44-5, 6 or DIPSW49-6, 7 are
configured, the exit of the exit toner band
continues.
*For details, refer to "I.4.5.9 Troubleshooting
for image errors".
7 2nd transfer unit pressure release setting on the 0 0 0
exit toner band creation
· Function: When the coverage setting of the
exit toner band (DIPSW44-5, 6 or DIPSW49-6,
7) are on, releases the pressures of the 2nd
transfer unit and the intermediate transfer unit.
· Usage: The solid image on the intermediate
transfer belt that the coverage setting of the exit
toner band forms possibly causes the dirt on the
2nd transfer roller. Use this function when you
want to prevent the dirt on the back that the dirt
of the 2nd transfer roller causes.
Note
When you change this setting, the
*For details, refer to "I.4.5.9 Troubleshooting
for image errors".
60 0 Switch of SD-513 fore-edge trimmer width • 0: Minimum 5 mm 0 0 0
∙ Function: Switches the minimum value of the • 1: Minimum 2 mm
fore-edge trimmer width.
∙ Usage: Select "1" when you want to configure
5 mm or less as the fore-edge trimmer width.
Note
∙ Trimmer scraps are possibly attached on
booklets due to electrostatic.
I-115
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
1 FS612 106 g/m2 to 135 g/m2 • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
Prohibition moderation of 30 sheets for staple • 1: Enabled
and 20 sheets for fold & staple
· Function: For the paper of 106 g/m2 to 135 g/
m2, expands the staple limit of FS612 up to 30
sheets and the fold & staple limit up to 20
sheets.
You can configure the item "Staple/106-135g/m2
" of "Finisher Adjustment" - "Output Quantity
Limit" up to 30.
You can also assign the fold & staple 106 g/m2
to 135 g/m2 limit setting to the item
"Fold&Staple/81-105g/m2" and configure up to
20.
(You can also assign the fold & staple 62 g/m2
to 105 g/m2 limit setting to the item
"Fold&Staple/62-80g/m2" and configure up to
20.)
· Usage: For the paper of 106 g/m2 to 135 g/m2,
when you want to conduct the staple of 30
sheets (Maximum) and the fold & staple of 20
sheets (Maximum) with the FS612, change this
setting to "1".
Note
· For the panel display section (the item for
weight and the adjustment range +2 to +20)
which is related to this handling, there is no
change as with when the setting is "0".
jam and the paper alignment fault possibly
occur.
2 Switch the SD-513 loading limit detection of the • 0: Continuously output 8 sets 0 0 0
tri-fold tray (only 5 sheets set) • 1: Same with 1- to 4-sheet set
∙ Function: Switches how to detect the loading (Some sheets are exited after
limit of the tri-fold tray (only 5 sheets set). the paper full sensor is
∙ Usage: Select "1" when you want to output 9 or activated.)
more sets of the tri-fold tray in succession.
Note
∙ Loading 9 sets of the tri-fold tray (5 sheets
set) is not guaranteed. The tri-fold set
possibly falls from the exit tray.
3 Switch of the maximum number of SD-513 • 0: 50 sheets , 49 sheets + cover 0 0 0
saddle stitching sheets (55 g/m2 to 256 g/m2), 44
• Function: Switches the maximum number of sheets + cover (257 g/m2 to
saddle stitching sheets (other than color paper,
300 g/m2)
coated paper) whose weight is 62 g/m2 to 91 g/
• 1: 40 sheets, 39 sheets + cover
m2 and 182 mm or more in the FD direction.
• Usage: Select "1" when staple buckling occurs (55 g/m2 to 256 g/m2), 40
at saddle stitching of paper (other than color sheets + cover (257 g/m2 to
paper, coated paper) whose weight is 62 g/m2 300 g/m2)
to 91 g/m2 and 182 mm or more in the FD
direction.
Note
∙ Before you change this setting, conduct the
staple adjustment (Mechanical adjustment).
I-116
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
4 Envelope PF707 upper tray and middle tray • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
prohibition moderation • 1: Enabled
· Function: To handle envelopes, makes the
upper tray and the middle tray of the PF707
available.
· Usage: For the use of the upper tray and the
middle tray of the PF707 to print envelopes,
change to "1".
Note
· When you activate several DIPSW among
the following 3 pairs at the same time, the
operation is not supported: "DIPSW60-4 to
DIPSW60-7", "DIPSW57-0", "DIPSW57-3"
When you activate and use 1 pair among the
DIPSW above, be sure to deactivate all the
other DIPSW.
· When you use the upper tray and the
middle tray of the PF707 to print envelopes,
the paper passage is not assured.
5 Envelope quick mode prohibition moderation 0 0 0
· Function: Prints envelopes in the quick mode.
· Usage: To print envelopes at high speed,
change to "1".
Note
When you activate and use 1 pair among the
DIPSW above, be sure to deactivate all the
other DIPSW.
paper passage is not assured.
6 Envelope lower tray of main body prohibition 0 0 0
moderation for the size of 90 mm × 205 mm
· Function: Makes the lower tray of the main
body available to print envelopes. To output the
envelope of which the size is 90 mm × 205 mm,
attach the envelope kit for the size of 90 mm ×
205 mm.
· Usage: To use the lower tray of the main body
to print envelopes, change to "1".
Note
When you activate and use 2 pairs among
the DIPSW above, be sure to deactivate all
the other DIPSW.
· When you use the lower tray of the main
body to print envelopes, the paper passage
is not assured.
7 Envelope PF707 largest size prohibition 0 0 0
moderation
· Function: Enables the output of envelopes of
which the size is larger than the supported
largest size of envelope from PF707.
· Usage: To output envelopes of which the size
is larger than the supported largest size of
envelope (as envelope of 287 mm × 382 mm)
from PF707, change to "1".
Note
When you activate and use 3 pairs among
the DIPSW above, be sure to deactivate all
other DIPSW.
· The paper passage which is larger than the
supported largest size of envelope is not
assured.
I-117
4.5.3 Service Center TEL/FAX

(1) Usage
Register the telephone number and the fax number of a service center that appears in the help information or when a malfunction occurs.
(2) Procedure
Press [02 Service Center TEL/FAX].
3. "Service Center TEL/FAX setting screen"
Press either [Service Center TEL (16)] or [Service Center FAX (16)] you want to configure.
4. Enter the telephone number or fax number you register through the numeric buttons.
Note
• When a number is less than 16 digits, be sure to use hyphen (-) to fill up the blanks.
5. Press [OK] to register the data.

Press [Cancel] to cancel the updating.
4.5.4 Serial Number Setting

(1) Usage
Configure and display the serial number of the main body and options.
Note
• The serial number of the main body cannot be changed.
(2) Procedure
Press [03 Serial Number Setting].
3. "Serial Number Setting screen"
Select the option, then a keyboard screen appears. Enter a serial number using the alphanumeric buttons.
4. Press [OK] to register the data.
4.5.5 Setup date/type of business setting

(1) Usage
Adjust the starting date of the total counter that is shown on the utility mode and the type of business of the client that CSRC notifies.
(2) Procedure
Press [04 Setup Date/Business Setting].
3. "Setup Date/Type of Business Setting screen "
Select the type of the business. Not to select the type of the business, select [Unknown].
4. "Setup Date/Type of Business Setting screen "
Enter an installation date with the numeric buttons. Press [Set] to highlight the Year, Month, and Date you want to enter.
5. Press [OK] to update the data.
4.5.6 Toner band creation condition (productivity priority setting)

(1) Function
• Adjust the creation intervals of the toner band.
• When the inside temperature is 35°C or more and the paper width is less than 260mm, 120mm toner band (YMCK color 30mm x full width
in the main scan direction) is created for about every 50 sides. Productivity is reduced to 97% since this control widens the paper interval.
Note
• When the inside temperature is high (35°C or more) + print a small size, the intermediate transfer cleaning blade wears fast in
the range where the paper does not pass. Therefore, the creation interval of the toner band is shorten as the default to keep the
cleaning blade life.
(2) Usage
When you give the priority to productivity in a high temperature environment and the small-size print, widen the creation interval of the toner
band to increase the productivity. However, the life of the belt cleaning blade becomes shorter.
Mode DIPSW20-3 DIPSW20-4
For A4 width 0 0
Productivity priority 1 0
Restricted 0 1
Restricted 1 1
I-118
(a) Supply intervals of the toner band in "For A4 width" mode (default) (run distance of the belt (unit: mm))
Temperature inside the Paper width Remark
body 260 mm or more Less than 260 mm
35 °C or more 270,000 mm 13,500 mm Default.
Less than 35 °C 270,000 mm 270,000 mm
(b) Supply intervals of the toner band in "Productivity priority" setting (belt run distance (unit: mm))
Temperature inside the Paper width Remark
body 260 mm or more Less than 260 mm
35 °C or more 270,000 mm 270,000 mm Give the priority to productivity, and reduce the toner
Less than 35 °C 270,000 mm 270,000 mm consumption.
However, the intermediate transfer cleaning blade life
can become short.
4.5.7 Restrictions on banner print

(1) Restrictions
Restrictions on the banner print are listed as follows.
• Only the composition that includes MK-740 ensures banner print. When MK-740 is not connected, the machine is not guaranteed.
• Only for the printer output (Copier is not supported).
• Continuous feeding is unavailable. (1 sheet print only for 1 job)
• More differences appear in the print accuracy that is compared to the normal size.
• The simplex paper exit or the face up paper exit is only available.
• HDD Store is disabled.
• When the banner print is selected, print the banner paper only.
• Available paper in the banner print: 488 mm or more and 1200 mm or less
• Scanning is unavailable.
• When you use IC-602, jobs of combine, booklet, image repeat, and adhesive bind cannot be output. (When you use the Fiery controller,
the jobs can be output. )
• The banner page (cover page that the sender or title of the print job are printed) cannot be output.
• When a PCL type job is input, the job appears in "Incomp. History". A PCL type job is input in the following examples.
• Job that is created in the PCL driver
• When a file type other than PS, PDF, EPS, TIFF, PPML (ZIP) is selected in direct print
• PCL font list that is located in [Controller] in the "MACHINE" screen
• Proof copy cannot be output
Note
• Errors could occur depending on the size of the image data.
• Usage the banner print too many times shortens the lives of materials and parts.
(2) How to use

Change the following settings when you use the banner print.
• DIPSW 10-0 "Banner setting": 1
• DIPSW10-1 "Hard disk image memory": 0
• [User Setting] - [Common Setting] - [Banner]: [ON]
Note
• The setting on [Banner] and the setting on DIPSW10-1 are associated.
When you select [ON], DIPSW10-1 is automatically changes to "0".
When you select [OFF], DIPSW10-1 is automatically changes to "1".
• When the paper size for banner print is selected in the paper setting of MB-506 and when you select [OFF] in [Banner], the paper
setting of MB-506 is reset.
• When you select [ON] in [Banner], "Banner Mode" appears in the Machine screen.
I-119
(3) Counter
The counting condition of the banner print differs depending on the following DIPSW settings.
• DIPSW33-0 "TC black and white large size count method"
• DIPSW33-1 "TC color large size count method"
• DIPSW33-2, 3 "TC double count size setting"
• DIPSW33-4 "Custom counter switchover in the banner setting"
• DIPSW34-4, 5, 6 "Banner count method"
• DIPSW57-7 "TC custom size count method"
(a) Total counter

• Banner priority: DIPSW33-4=0 (default)
• When you print the banner (length of the sub scan direction is 488 mm or more), it is counted as "Long paper".
• The number of counted value of "Long paper" differs depending on the settings of the DIPSW34-4, 5, 6.
DIPSW34-6 DIPSW34-5 DIPSW34-4 Counted value
(Default=0) (Default=1) (Default=0)
0 0 0 2 counts
0 0 1 3 counts
0 1 0 4 counts
0 1 1 5 counts
1 0 0 6 counts
1 0 1 1 count
1 1 0 2 counts
1 1 1 2 counts
• Custom size priority: DIPSW33-4=1
• When you print the banner (length of the sub scan direction is 488 mm or more), it is counted as "Inf. 1 to 5".
• The count coefficient of "Inf. 1 o 5" differs depending on the settings of the DIPSW 57-7.
• DIPSW57-7=0 (Default)
• Inf. 1 to 5: Coefficient 1
• DIPSW57-7=1
• Inf. 1: Coefficient 1
Note
• On the custom size priority, the count that you configure on DIPSW33-0, DIPSW33-1, and DIPSW33-2/3 is multiplied by the
coefficient.
• For the custom size threshold, refer to "I.4.6.20 Custom Counter Threshold Set".
(b) Paper Size Counter

• Banner priority: DIPSW33-4=0 (default)
• When you print the banner (length of the sub scan direction is 488 mm or more), it is counted as "Long paper".
• Custom size priority: DIPSW33-4=1
• When you print the banner (length of the sub scan direction is 488 mm or more), it is counted as "Inf. 1 to 5".
Note
• For the custom size threshold, refer to "I.4.6.20 Custom Counter Threshold Set".
(c) Maintenance Counter

• 915.1 mm to 1200 mm: 5 counts
4.5.8 Setting of the toner amount and the replacement count of the toner bottle
(1) Function
• Displays "Toner Info." button on the Machine Screen.
• When the toner amount is 25% or less, the toner display becomes yellow and blinks.
I-120
[2] [1]
[1] Toner Info. [2] Blinking yellow
(2) Usage
• When you select "1" on DipSW48-4, the replacement count of the toner bottle, the toner amount are displayed on the toner info screen.
Users can check the information.
When the toner amount is 25% or less, the toner display becomes yellow and blinks.
• Counter of Each Copy Mode (2) manages the number of times of the toner bottle replacement. You can correct the count information on
CSRC and manage the stock of the toner bottle. (Refer to I.4.6.9 Counter of Each Copy Mode(2))
Note
• The replacement count of the toner bottle is counted when the main body detects the toner near empty or that the toner is
removed and placed. The counter does not count when you press [Complete Replacement] button.
• Counter of Each Copy Mode (2) manages the replacement count of the toner bottle regardless of the setting of DipSW48-4.
• The toner amount displays 6 steps: 0%, 1%, 25%, 50%, 75%, 100%.
The toner amount is reset when the main body detects that the toner is placed after the toner is removed.
• The drive time of the toner supply motor calculates the toner amount display of 25% to 100 %.
1 % is displayed when the near empty is detected. 0 % is displayed when no toner is detected.
• When you replace the toner that is not empty, press the [Complete Replacement] button and reset the toner amount.
• When you use IC-602, the toner amount is notified to the controller. For the details, refer to the user's guide.
[1] [2] [3]

[1] Replacement count of the toner [2] Toner amount
[3] Complete Replacement -
4.5.9 Troubleshooting for image errors

Trouble Main cause Countermeasure
The image background or scatter by the toner The developer is degenerated when the DIPSW44-6=1, DIPSW44-5=0
occurs. Then, the dirt or the image images with low coverage is created (recommended).
deterioration occurs. continuously. Because inside the machine DIPSW49-7=0, DIPSW49-6=0
(Y, M, C, Bk) gets dirty by the mass toner scatter after Configure the DIPSW as above.
images with high coverage are created.
I-121
When the condition is not improved, change

DIPSW44-5, 6 and increase the coverage
more.
The image background or scatter only by the The developer is degenerated when the DIPSW49-7=1, DIPSW49-6=0
toner (Bk) occurs. Then, the dirt or the image images with low coverage is created (recommended).
deterioration occurs. continuously. Because inside the machine DIPSW44-6=0, DIPSW44-5=0
gets dirty by the mass toner scatter after Configure the DIPSW as above.
images with high coverage are created. When the condition is not improved, change
Especially, the image background of the toner DIPSW49-6, 7 and increase the coverage of
(Bk) easily occur because it includes the the toner (Bk) more.
carbon. Therefore, you can check easily.
An image error occurs because the transfer The brand new drum unit applies much DIPSW44-6=0, DIPSW44-5=0
belt cleaning blade goes through, after you lubricant at the beginning. When you print DIPSW49-7=0, DIPSW49-6=0
replace the drum unit to a new one. images with low coverage continuously at this DIPSW59-6=1
condition, the foreign materials are DIPSW59-3=0, DIPSW59-2=0
accumulated with the lubrication, and the (recommended).
toner cannot removed perfectly. As a result, Configure the DIPSW as above.
the toner is transferred. (Transfer belt When the condition is not improved,
cleaning blade goes through) configure DIPSW59-3=1 and DIPSW59-2=1.
Always create the exit toner band.
An image error occurs by the transfer belt The foreign material is accumulated with the DIPSW59-6=1
cleaning blade through occurs even after you lubricant at the edge of the transfer belt DIPSW59-3=0, DIPSW59-2=0 (default)
configure the DIPSW44-5, 6 or the cleaning blade. Therefore, the toner is not DIPSW59-1=1, DIPSW59-0=1
DIPSW49-6, 7. removed perfectly and the dirt is transferred. Configure the DIPSW as above, and increase
the frequency of the reverse control of the
intermediate transfer belt.
Dirt on the back side occurs. The dirt on the 2nd transfer roller by the solid DIPSW59-7=1
image on the coverage increase is not Configure the DIPSW as above. Separate the
cleaned perfectly and the dirt is transferred. 2nd transfer unit and the intermediate transfer
unit.
(1) Function
On printing, create the exit toner band between images that are transferred to the intermediate transfer belt. Suppress the error which occurs
when the toner supply amount is low.
Configure the coverage that is used for the exit toner band by each DIPSW.
Note
• The coverage that you configure on DIPSW is the sum of the coverage that is used for the exit toner band creation, and the
coverage that is used for printings.
Example: When the exit toner band of coverage 3% is configured, and you print the image of coverage approximately 2%,
creates the exit toner band of coverage approximately 1% (the difference).
The details of the DIPSW setting are as follows.
• DIPSW44-6, 5
Configure these DIPSWs when the image background, the toner scatter dirt, or the image deterioration occurs as a result of printings with
high coverage after you perform the printings with the low coverage continuously.
Note
• When DIPSW49-7, 6 are configured, the toner amount of Bk follows DIPSW49-7, 6.
• When you activate this setting, the productivity is slightly lowered.
DIPSW44-6=0 0% (Not created)
DIPSW44-5=0
(default)
DIPSW44-6=0 3%
DIPSW44-5=1
DIPSW44-6=1 1.5%
DIPSW44-5=0
(Recommended)
DIPSW44-6=1 5%
DIPSW44-5=1
• DIPSW49-7, 6
After the continuous printings with low coverage, print with high coverage and create the exit toner band only for Bk. Image background
occurs easily for Bk.
Note
• When you activate this setting, the productivity is slightly lowered.
DIPSW49-7=0 0% (Not created)
DIPSW49-6=0
(default)
DIPSW49-7=0 2%
DIPSW49-6=1
DIPSW49-7=1 3%
DIPSW49-6=0
(Recommended)
DIPSW49-7=1 5%
I-122
DIPSW49-6=1
• DIPSW59-1, 0
Change the timing (drive distance of the intermediate transfer belt) of the reverse control of the intermediate transfer belt that you
configured on DIPSW59-6.
Note
• When you configure DIPSW59-1=1, DIPSW59-0=1, the productivity is slightly lowered.
DIPSW59-1=0 Every 67.5 m
DIPSW59-0=0
(default)
DIPSW59-1=0 Every 135 m
DIPSW59-0=1
DIPSW59-0=0
DIPSW59-0=1
• DIPSW59-3, 2
When DIPSW59-6 is "1", configure the slide distance of the lubrication apply brush. The exit toner band is created for that period.
DIPSW59-3=0 5 km
DIPSW59-2=0
(default:
recommended)
DIPSW59-3=0 2 km
DIPSW59-2=1
DIPSW59-3=1 8 km
DIPSW59-2=0
DIPSW59-3=1 At all times
DIPSW59-2=1
• DIPSW59-6
The application amount of the lubrication to the drum unit is large after you replace the drum unit. Therefore, when the toner supply
amount is low, the toner possibly goes through at the transfer belt cleaning blade.
In order to stabilize the load amount of the lubrication to the developer, create the exit toner band with coverage 1.5% for a specified
period of time since you replace the drum unit.
Note
• When you configure DIPSW59-6=1, the productivity is slightly lowered.
DIPSW59-6=0 Not create the exit toner band
(default)
DIPSW59-6=1 Create the exit toner band
• DIPSW59-7
When you create the exit toner band, some toner is not transferred to the paper.
When the toner adheres on the 2nd transfer unit too much and the toner cleaning function of the 2nd transfer unit cannot clean all of the
dirt, the back side of the paper gets dirty.
When you select "1" on DIPSW59-7, the 2nd transfer unit separates from the intermediate transfer unit when the exit toner band is
created. Therefore, the toner does not adhere to the 2nd transfer unit, and you can prevent the dirt.
Note
• When you select 1 (ON) on DIPSW59-7, the productivity is slightly lowered.
4.5.10 New model of the fusing belt and the fusing paper exit assy
(1) Outline
• The fusing belt [2] and the fusing paper exit plate assy [3] are installed in the fusing unit [1].
• A new model that improves the fusing separation performance is introduced for the fusing belt and the fusing paper exit plate assy.
• Change the DIPSW47-5 and 6 according to whether the used fusing belt and the fusing paper exit plate assy are new or old.
This is because the control method of the fusing temperature differs between the new model and the old model.
• By changing the DIPSW, change the control method of the fusing temperature.
I-123
[1] [2]
[3]
[1] Fusing unit [2] Fusing belt

[3] Fusing paper exit plate assy -
(2) How to distinguish between the new model and the old model
(a) Fusing belt
• The color of the belt surface differs between the new model and the old model.
• New model [1]: Pink [3]
• Old model [2]: Red [4]
[3] [4]
[1] [2]
[1] New model [2] Old model

[3] Pink [4] Red
Note
• Refer to "F.5.11.4 Replacement of the fusing bearing/Up, /Lw1, the heat insulating sleeve/Up, /Lw1, the belt regulating sleeve,
the fusing belt, the fusing roller/1, /2, and the neutralizing ring." to replace the fusing belt.
(b) Fusing paper exit plate assy

• The number of screws differs between the new model and the old model.
• New model [1]: 3 screws [3]
• Old model [2]: 1 screw [4]
I-124
[3] [4]
[1] [2]
[1] New model [2] Old model

[3] 3 screws [4] 1 screw
Note
• Refer to "G.3.2.26 Fusing paper exit plate assy" to replace the fusing paper exit plate assy.
• The configuration of the parts differs between the new model and the old model.
• New model: The part is configured as a assy. (Parts Number: A50UR73A##)
• Old model: The part is not configured as a assy.
(3) DIPSW setting

• Change the DIPSW47-5 and 6 according to whether the used fusing belt and the fusing paper exit plate assy are new or old.
• By changing the DIPSW, change the control method of the fusing temperature.
DIPSW47-6 DIPSW47-5 Fusing belt Fusing paper exit Remark
plate assy
0 0 Old Old
0 1 New Old
1 0 Restricted
1 1 New New Default
4.5.11 Remaining staple amount display setting

(1) Outline
• When the DIPSW56-7 "Display of the remaining staple amount" is "1", the following information appears in the MACHINE screen.
• Remaining amount indicator of the staple
• [Amount Info.] button
(When you press the [Amount Info.] button, the Amount Information screen appears.)
• User can check the remaining staple amount with the remaining amount indicator and the Amount Information screen.
• Target finisher: FS-532, SD-506, SD-513
Note
• When you attach the new staple cartridge, be sure to reset the remaining amount count. (Refer to I.4.5.11.(3) Operation of staple
cartridge replacement)
I-125
[1] [2]
[3]
[1] Remaining amount indicator [2] [Amount Info.] button

[3] Amount Information screen -
(2) Remaining amount detection of the staple

• The machine counts the used staple amount and calculates the remaining staple amount.
("Remaining staple amount" = "number of staples of full staple cartridge" - "used staple amount")
• The remaining staple amount is displayed in 4 steps in the remaining amount indicator and the Amount Information screen.
• When several finishers are connected:
• Remaining amount indicator: The information of the finisher which has a smaller remaining amount is displayed.
• Amount Information screen: The information of all the connected finishers is displayed.
Staple display
Amount
Remaining staple Remainin Informatio
amount Lamp g amount Letter n screen
indicator
2501 to 5000 None 3 steps White 3
(white)
501 to 2500 None 2 steps White 2
(white)
500 or less None 1 step Red 1
(red)
0 Red None Red 0
I-126
[3] [4] [5]
[1]
[2]
[1] Staple display [2] Amount Information screen
[3] Lamp [4] Remaining amount indicator
[5] Letter -
(3) Operation of staple cartridge replacement

Note
• When you attach the new staple cartridge, be sure to reset the remaining amount count. When you do not reset the remaining
amount count, the remaining amount is not correctly displayed.
• When you attach the partly used staple cartridge, the remaining amount is not correctly displayed.
1. Attach the new staple cartridge.
2. "MACHINE screen"
Touch [Amount Info.] and display the Amount Information screen.
Note
• If you replace the staple cartridge when the remaining staple amount is empty, the Amount Information screen appears
automatically.
• If you replace the staple cartridge when the power source is deactivated, the Amount Information screen does not
automatically appear.
3. "Amount Information screen"

Touch [Complete Replacement] and display the confirmation screen.
4. "Confirmation screen"
Press [OK]. The remaining amount count is reset.
I-127
4.6 Counter and data

4.6.1 Maintenance Counter
(1) Outline
Setting or resetting of the maintenance counter cycle.
Note
• You can select the maintenance cycle by the paper count or the drive distance (m) of the transfer belt cleaning unit of the
intermediate transfer unit. For default, the drive distance is selected.
• The count condition of the paper count differs depending on the paper size in the sub scan direction.
• 915.1 mm to 1200 mm: 5 counts
(2) Counter reset

After the maintenance is completed, reset the maintenance count using this mode.
Note
• Be sure to reset the maintenance counter after the periodic maintenance (every 120,000 m).
Otherwise, the periodic check alert message and the icon do not disappear.
• You cannot reset the value of [Total].
• When you select "1" on the software DIPSW15-2, the periodic maintenance alert message and the icon are hidden. You can use
the parts unless there are any problems in the image quality even the parts reach their life in the counter display. Change the
setting and reduce down time and the cost.
(a) Procedure
Press [04 Counter /Data].
2. "Counter/Data Menu screen"
Press [01 Maintenance Counter].
3. "Maintenance Counter screen"
Press [Counter Clear] to reset the maintenance counter.
4. "Reset confirm screen"
Press [Yes] to reset the counter.
The counter is reset, and the start date is automatically inputted.
Press [No] to cancel.
(3) Maintenance cycle setting

Configure the maintenance counter.
Note
• The maintenance counter is predetermined. Be sure not to change the count value normally. The default is as follows.
• C1070, C1070P, C71hc: Distance 120,000, number of sheets 220,000
• C1060, C1060L: Distance 120,000, number of sheets 200,000
(a) Procedure
Press [01 Maintenance Counter].
Enter high digits of the cycle with the numeric buttons.
Press [OK] to register the data.
Press [Cancel] to cancel the operation.
4.6.2 Data collection procedures

Display the following counter and data of the main body on the touch panel.
The counter and the data also can be checked through the CS Remote Care, list output and the mail remote notification system.
• Paper Size Counter (Total)
• Paper Size Counter (Copy)
• Paper Size Counter (Printer)
• ADF Counter
• Coverage Data History
• Paper JAM History
• JAM Counter
I-128
• Counter of Each Copy Mode (1)

• Counter of Each Copy Mode (2)
• SC Counter
• JAM Counter Individual Sec.
• SC Count Individual Sec.
• SC Data of Time Series
• Maintenance History
• Maintenance Counter Reset
• Parts History in Time Series
• Each paper type counter
• ORU-M Maintenance History
(1) Procedure
Press [04 Counter /Data]
Press [02 Collecting Data].
3. "Collecting Data Menu screen"
Press the counter or the data item that you want to check.
4. "Counter/Data screen"
Press [Next] or [Previous] to scroll the pages.
Note
• [Counter Clear] appears on each screen of [Jam Counter Individual Sec.] and [SC Counter Individual Sec.]
"Count Reset screen" appears when [Counter Clear] is pressed. Press [Yes] to reset the sectional count. Press [No] to
cancel the count reset.
Reset these data when you visit customers for the maintenance so that you can check the number of the jam and the
malfunction that is counted after the last visit.
• On the individual confirmation screen of [ORU-M Maintenance History], select the item that you want to check and press
[Information View] to check the information of the item that you selected.
4.6.3 Paper Size Counter (Total/copy/print)

Confirm the number of printings of each paper size.
Note
• Maximum count: 99,999,999
• 1 count is made for the paper of all types regardless of the paper size.
Num CSRC parameter Paper Size Remark
ber
01 P1 00 Others
02 P1 01 A3
03 P1 02 A4 SEF
04 P1 03 A5
05 P1 04 A6
06 P1 05 B4
07 P1 06 B5 SEF
08 P1 07 B6
09 P1 08 12 x 18
10 P1 09 11 x 17
11 P1 0A 8.5 x 14
12 P1 0B 8.5 x 11 SEF
13 P1 0C 7.25 x 10.5
14 P1 0D 5.5 x 8.5
15 P1 0E F4
16 P1 0F Postcard 100 mm x 148 mm
17 P1 10 4x6
18 P1 11 8K
19 P1 12 16K
20 P1 13 Long paper *1
21 P1 14 A2
22 P1 15 SRA3
23 P1 16 SRA4
24 P1 17 13x19
25 P1 *** changes depending on the setting value.
18 Inf. 1 (***mm)
Custom size, paper length in sub scan direction: 196 mm or less*2
19 Inf. 2 (***mm)
27 P1 1A Inf. 3 (***mm) *** changes depending on the setting value.
I-129
Num CSRC parameter Paper Size Remark

ber
1B Inf. 4 (***mm)
29 P1 1C Inf. 5 (***mm) Custom size, paper length in sub scan direction: 391 mm to 487 mm
30 P1 1D A4 LEF
31 P1 1E B5 LEF
32 P1 1F 8.5 x 11 LEF
*1 When you change DIPSW33-4 to "1", the banners (length in the sub scan direction is 488 mm or more) are counted as "Inf. 1 to 5". (Refer to
I.4.5.7 Restrictions on banner print)
*2 When DIPSW 8-7 is 0. When DIPSW8-7=1, follow the setting of the I.4.6.20 Custom Counter Threshold Set.
4.6.4 ADF Counter

Confirm the number of originals that are fed in each DF mode.
Note
• Number 01 and Number 02 counter do not double count with other counters.
• 1 count for single-sided, 2 counts for double-sided.
Number CSRC parameter Item Remark
01 F0 00 Number of originals that are fed in ADF mode (1 side)
02 F0 01 Number of originals that are fed in ADF mode (2 sides)
03 F0 08 Number of mixed original fed in ADF (1 side)
04 F0 09 Number of mixed original fed in ADF (2 sides)
05 F0 11 Number of 1-sided Z-folded original fed
06 F0 12 Number of 2-sided Z-folded original fed
4.6.5 Coverage Data History

Confirm the average coverage of 5,000 print sheets of the latest 30 data for each of Y, M, C and K.
Note
• This coverage is a calculated value that is based on the colored area and the transfer paper area, and is different from the toner
consumption of the actual printing.
• Up to 30 most recent coverage data are stored and deleted in the chronological order.
Number CSRC parameter Printer counter Coverage (%)
01 V0 00 B/W accumulated coverage rate (00.0 to 99.9)
02 V0 01 B/W section 1 coverage rate
11 V0 0A B/W section 10 coverage rate
12 V0 0B B/W section 11 coverage rate
13 V0 0C B/W section 12 coverage rate
14 V0 0D B/W section 13 coverage rate
15 V0 0E B/W section 14 coverage rate
16 V0 0F B/W section 15 coverage rate
27 V0 1A B/W section 26 coverage rate
28 V0 1B B/W section 27 coverage rate
I-130

29 V0 1C B/W section 28 coverage rate
30 V0 1D B/W section 29 coverage rate
31 V0 1E B/W section 30 coverage rate
32 V0 1F
33 V0 20 Yellow accumulated coverage rate
34 V0 21 Yellow section 1 coverage rate
43 V0 2A Yellow section 10 coverage rate
44 V0 2B Yellow section 11 coverage rate
45 V0 2C Yellow section 12 coverage rate
46 V0 2D Yellow section 13 coverage rate
47 V0 2E Yellow section 14 coverage rate
48 V0 2F Yellow section 15 coverage rate
59 V0 3A Yellow section 26 coverage rate
60 V0 3B Yellow section 27 coverage rate
61 V0 3C Yellow section 28 coverage rate
62 V0 3D Yellow section 29 coverage rate
63 V0 3E Yellow section 30 coverage rate
64 V0 3F
65 V0 40 Magenta accumulated coverage rate
66 V0 41 Magenta section 1 coverage rate
75 V0 4A Magenta section 10 coverage rate
76 V0 4B Magenta section 11 coverage rate
77 V0 4C Magenta section 12 coverage rate
78 V0 4D Magenta section 13 coverage rate
79 V0 4E Magenta section 14 coverage rate
80 V0 4F Magenta section 15 coverage rate
I-131

91 V0 5A Magenta section 26 coverage rate
92 V0 5B Magenta section 27 coverage rate
93 V0 5C Magenta section 28 coverage rate
94 V0 5D Magenta section 29 coverage rate
95 V0 5E Magenta section 30 coverage rate
96 V0 5F
97 V0 60 Cyan accumulated coverage rate
98 V0 61 Cyan section 1 coverage rate
107 V0 6A Cyan section 10 coverage rate
108 V0 6B Cyan section 11 coverage rate
109 V0 6C Cyan section 12 coverage rate
110 V0 6D Cyan section 13 coverage rate
111 V0 6E Cyan section 14 coverage rate
112 V0 6F Cyan section 15 coverage rate
123 V0 7A Cyan section 26 coverage rate
124 V0 7B Cyan section 27 coverage rate
125 V0 7C Cyan section 28 coverage rate
126 V0 7D Cyan section 29 coverage rate
127 V0 7E Cyan section 30 coverage rate
128 V0 7F
4.6.6 Paper JAM History

With respect to the latest 100 jam data, it is possible to confirm the jam code, the total count, the date of the occurrence, the time of the
occurrence, the tray, the paper size, the magnification, the paper type, and the paper weight.
4.6.7 JAM/JAM Counter Individual Sec.

Confirm the number of jam occurrences for each jam code. (Except idling JAM)
Note
• Maximum count: 999,999
• (The stationary jam is not included in the count.)
• Jam code appears on the user mode screen when you change the DIPSW11-7 to 1.
Numb CSRC Item
er Parameter (jam code)
001 J0 00 J-1001
002 J0 01 J-1002
003 J0 02 J-1003
004 J0 03 J-1051
005 J0 04 J-1101
I-132
Numb CSRC Item

006 J0 05 J-1151
007 J0 06 J-1201
008 J0 07 J-1251
009 J0 08 -
010 J0 09 -
011 J0 0A J-1501
012 J0 0B J-1502
013 J0 0C J-1551
014 J0 0D J-1552
015 J0 0E J-1601
016 J0 0F J-1602
017 J0 10 J-1603
018 J0 11 J-1604
019 J0 12 J-1605
020 J0 13 J-1606
021 J0 14 J-1607
022 J0 15 J-1608
023 J0 16 J-1609
024 J0 17 J-1610
025 J0 18 J-1611
026 J0 19 J-1613
027 J0 1A J-1614
028 J0 1B J-1615
029 J0 1C J-1616
030 J0 1D J-1617
031 J0 1E J-1618
032 J0 1F J-1619
033 J0 20 J-1620
034 J0 21 J-1621
035 J0 22 J-1622
036 J0 23 J-1623
037 J0 24 J-1624
038 J0 25 J-1625
039 J0 26 J-1626
040 J0 27 J-1627
041 J0 28 J-1628
042 J0 29 -
043 J0 2A -
044 J0 2B J-1631
045 J0 2C J-1632
046 J0 2D J-1633
047 J0 2E -
048 J0 2F -
049 J0 30 -
050 J0 31 -
051 J0 32 -
052 J0 33 -
053 J0 34 -
054 J0 35 J-1651
055 J0 36 J-1652
056 J0 37 J-1653
057 J0 38 J-1654
058 J0 39 J-1655
059 J0 3A J-1656
060 J0 3B J-1657
061 J0 3C J-1658
062 J0 3D J-1663
I-133
Numb CSRC Item

063 J0 3E J-1664
064 J0 3F J-1665
065 J0 40 J-1666
066 J0 41 J-1667
067 J0 42 J-1668
068 J0 43 -
069 J0 44 J-1670
070 J0 45 J-1671
071 J0 46 J-1672
072 J0 47 J-1673
073 J0 48 J-1674
074 J0 49 J-1675
075 J0 4A J-1676
076 J0 4B J-1701
077 J0 4C J-1702
078 J0 4D -
079 J0 4E J-1704
080 J0 4F J-1705
081 J0 50 J-1706
082 J0 51 J-1707
083 J0 52 J-1708
084 J0 53 J-1709
085 J0 54 J-1710
086 J0 55 J-1751
087 J0 56 J-1752
088 J0 57 J-1753
089 J0 58 J-1754
090 J0 59 J-1901
091 J0 5A J-1902
092 J0 5B J-1903
093 J0 5C J-3101
094 J0 5D J-3102
095 J0 5E J-3151
096 J0 5F J-3152
097 J0 60 J-3201
098 J0 61 J-3202
099 J0 62 J-3203
100 J0 63 J-3204
101 J0 64 J-3205
102 J0 65 J-3206
103 J0 66 J-3207
104 J0 67 J-3209
105 J0 68 J-3251
106 J0 69 J-3252
107 J0 6A J-3253
108 J0 6B J-3254
109 J0 6C J-5101
110 J0 6D J-9201
111 J0 6E J-9202
112 J0 6F J-9251
113 J0 70 J-9252
114 J0 71 J-9301
115 J0 72 J-9351
116 J0 73 J-9401
117 J0 74 J-9451
118 J0 75 -
119 J0 76 -
I-134
Numb CSRC Item

120 J0 77 J-6603
121 J0 78 J-6613
122 J0 79 J-6623
123 J0 7A J-6633
124 J0 7B J-6605
125 J0 7C J-6615
126 J0 7D J-6604
127 J0 7E J-6614
128 J0 7F J-6624
129 J0 80 J-6634
130 J0 81 J-6601
131 J0 82 J-6611
132 J0 83 J-6621
133 J0 84 J-6606
134 J0 85 J-6607
135 J0 86 J-6698
136 J0 87 J-6699
137 J0 88 J-7101
138 J0 89 J-7102
139 J0 8A J-7103
140 J0 8B J-7104
141 J0 8C J-7105
142 J0 8D J-7107
143 J0 8E J-7108
144 J0 8F J-7109
145 J0 90 J-7110
146 J0 91 J-7111
147 J0 92 J-7216
148 J0 93 J-7217
149 J0 94 J-7218
150 J0 95 J-7219
151 J0 96 J-7220
152 J0 97 J-7221
153 J0 98 J-7222
154 J0 99 J-7223
155 J0 9A J-7224
156 J0 9B J-7225
157 J0 9C J-7226
158 J0 9D J-7227
159 J0 9E J-7228
160 J0 9F J-7229
161 J0 A0 J-7230
162 J0 A1 J-7231
163 J0 A2 J-7235
164 J0 A3 J-7236
165 J0 A4 J-7237
166 J0 A5 J-7243
167 J0 A6 J-7248
168 J0 A7 J-7249
169 J0 A8 J-7250
170 J0 A9 J-7251
171 J0 AA J-7265
172 J0 AB J-7266
173 J0 AC J-7272
174 J0 AD J-7281
175 J0 AE J-7282
176 J0 AF J-7283
I-135
Numb CSRC Item

177 J0 B0 J-7290
178 J0 B1 J-7401
179 J0 B2 J-7402
180 J0 B3 J-7403
181 J0 B4 J-7404
182 J0 B5 J-7405
183 J0 B6 J-7406
184 J0 B7 J-7407
185 J0 B8 J-7408
186 J0 B9 J-7409
187 J0 BA J-7410
188 J0 BB J-7411
189 J0 BC J-7412
190 J0 BD J-7431
191 J0 BE J-7432
192 J0 BF J-7433
193 J0 C0 J-7434
194 J0 C1 J-7435
195 J0 C2 J-7436
196 J0 C3 J-7437
197 J0 C4 J-7438
198 J0 C5 J-7439
199 J0 C6 J-7440
200 J0 C7 J-7441
201 J0 C8 J-7442
202 J0 C9 J-7501
203 J0 CA J-7502
204 J0 CB J-7503
205 J0 CC J-7504
206 J0 CD J-7505
207 J0 CE J-7506
208 J0 CF J-7507
209 J0 D0 J-7508
210 J0 D1 J-7509
211 J0 D2 J-7510
212 J0 D3 J-7511
213 J0 D4 J-7512
214 J0 D5 J-7513
215 J0 D6 J-7514
216 J0 D7 J-7515
217 J0 D8 J-7516
218 J0 D9 J-7517
219 J0 DA J-7518
220 J0 DB J-7519
221 J0 DC J-7520
222 J0 DD J-7521
223 J0 DE J-7522
224 J0 DF J-7523
225 J0 E0 J-7524
226 J0 E1 J-7530
227 J0 E2 J-7531
228 J0 E3 J-7532
229 J0 E4 J-7533
230 J0 E5 J-7535
231 J0 E6 J-7550
232 J0 E7 J-7551
233 J0 E8 J-7552
I-136
Numb CSRC Item

234 J0 E9 J-7553
235 J0 EA J-7554
236 J0 EB J-7555
237 J0 EC J-7556
238 J0 ED J-7557
239 J0 EE J-7558
240 J0 EF J-7561
241 J0 F0 J-7562
242 J0 F1 J-7563
243 J0 F2 J-7564
244 J0 F3 J-7565
245 J0 F4 J-7566
246 J0 F5 J-7567
247 J0 F6 J-7568
248 J0 F7 J-7569
249 J0 F8 J-7570
250 J0 F9 J-7571
251 J0 FA J-7572
252 J0 FB J-7573
253 J0 FC J-7574
254 J0 FD J-7575
255 J0 FE J-7576
256 J0 FF J-7577
257 J1 00 J-7578
258 J1 01 J-7579
259 J1 02 J-7580
260 J1 03 J-7581
261 J1 04 J-7582
262 J1 05 J-7583
263 J1 06 J-7584
264 J1 07 J-7585
265 J1 08 J-7621
266 J1 09 J-7622
267 J1 0A J-7623
268 J1 0B J-7624
269 J1 0C J-7625
270 J1 0D J-7626
271 J1 0E J-7590
272 J1 0F J-7591
273 J1 10 J-7592
274 J1 11 J-7593
275 J1 12 J-7594
276 J1 13 J-7595
277 J1 14 J-7596
278 J1 15 J-7597
279 J1 16 J-7601
280 J1 17 J-7602
281 J1 18 J-7603
282 J1 19 J-7604
283 J1 1A J-7605
284 J1 1B J-7606
285 J1 1C J-7607
286 J1 1D J-7608
287 J1 1E J-7660
288 J1 1F J-7661
289 J1 20 J-7662
290 J1 21 J-7663
I-137
Numb CSRC Item

291 J1 22 J-7664
292 J1 23 J-7665
293 J1 24 J-7666
294 J1 25 J-7667
295 J1 26 J-7668
296 J1 27 J-7669
297 J1 28 J-7670
298 J1 29 J-7671
299 J1 2A J-7672
300 J1 2B J-7673
301 J1 2C J-7674
302 J1 2D J-7675
303 J1 2E J-7676
304 J1 2F J-7677
305 J1 30 J-7678
306 J1 31 J-7679
307 J1 32 J-7680
308 J1 33 J-7681
309 J1 34 J-7682
310 J1 35 J-7683
311 J1 36 J-7684
312 J1 37 J-7685
313 J1 38 J-7686
314 J1 39 J-7687
315 J1 3A J-7688
316 J1 3B J-7689
317 J1 3C J-7690
318 J1 3D J-7691
319 J1 3E J-7692
320 J1 3F J-7693
321 J1 40 J-7694
322 J1 41 J-7695
323 J1 42 J-7696
324 J1 43 J-7697
325 J1 44 J-7698
326 J1 45 J-7611
327 J1 46 J-7612
328 J1 47 J-3112
329 J1 48 J-3120
330 J1 49 J-3208
331 J1 4A J-3106
332 J1 4B J-7589
333 J1 4C J-7633
334 J1 4D J-7560
335 J1 4E J-7627
336 J1 4F J-7628
337 J1 50 J-7629
338 J1 51 J-7630
339 J1 52 J-7631
340 J1 53 J-7632
341 J1 54 J-3210
342 J1 55 J-3211
343 J1 56 J-3212
344 J1 57 J-3213
345 J1 58 J-3255
346 J1 59 J-5201
347 J1 5A J-7634
I-138
Numb CSRC Item

348 J1 5B J-7635
349 J1 5C J-7586
350 J1 5D J-7587
351 J1 5E -
352 J1 5F -
353 J1 60 -
354 J1 61 -
355 J1 62 -
356 J1 63 -
357 J1 64 -
358 J1 65 -
359 J1 66 -
360 J1 67 -
361 J1 68 -
362 J1 69 -
363 J1 6A -
364 J1 6B -
365 J1 6C -
366 J1 6D -
367 J1 6E -
368 J1 6F -
369 J1 70 -
370 J1 71 -
371 J1 72 -
372 J1 73 -
373 J1 74 -
374 J1 75 -
375 J1 76 -
376 J1 77 -
377 J1 78 -
378 J1 79 -
379 J1 7A -
380 J1 7B -
381 J1 7C -
382 J1 7D -
383 J1 7E -
384 J1 7F -
385 J1 80 -
386 J1 81 -
387 J1 82 -
388 J1 83 -
389 J1 84 -
390 J1 85 -
391 J1 86 -
392 J1 87 -
393 J1 88 -
394 J1 89 -
395 J1 8A -
396 J1 8B -
397 J1 8C -
398 J1 8D -
399 J1 8E -
400 J1 8F -
401 J1 90 -
402 J1 91 -
403 J1 92 -
404 J1 93 -
I-139
Numb CSRC Item

405 J1 94 -
406 J1 95 -
407 J1 96 -
408 J1 97 -
409 J1 98 -
410 J1 99 -
411 J1 9A -
412 J1 9B -
413 J1 9C -
414 J1 9D -
415 J1 9E -
416 J1 9F -
417 J1 A0 -
418 J1 A1 -
419 J1 A2 -
420 J1 A3 -
421 J1 A4 -
422 J1 A5 -
423 J1 A6 -
424 J1 A7 -
425 J1 A8 -
426 J1 A9 -
427 J1 AA -
428 J1 AB -
429 J1 AC -
430 J1 AD -
431 J1 AE -
432 J1 AF -
433 J1 B0 -
434 J1 B1 -
435 J1 B2 -
436 J1 B3 -
437 J1 B4 -
438 J1 B5 -
439 J1 B6 -
440 J1 B7 -
441 J1 B8 -
442 J1 B9 -
443 J1 BA -
444 J1 BB -
445 J1 BC -
446 J1 BD -
447 J1 BE -
448 J1 BF -
449 J1 C0 -
450 J1 C1 -
451 J1 C2 -
452 J1 C3 -
453 J1 C4 -
454 J1 C5 -
455 J1 C6 -
456 J1 C7 -
457 J1 C8 -
458 J1 C9 -
459 J1 CA -
460 J1 CB -
461 J1 CC -
I-140
Numb CSRC Item

462 J1 CD -
463 J1 CE -
464 J1 CF -
465 J1 D0 -
466 J1 D1 -
467 J1 D2 -
468 J1 D3 -
469 J1 D4 -
470 J1 D5 -
471 J1 D6 -
472 J1 D7 -
473 J1 D8 -
474 J1 D9 -
475 J1 DA -
476 J1 DB -
477 J1 DC -
478 J1 DD -
479 J1 DE -
480 J1 DF -
481 J1 E0 -
482 J1 E1 -
483 J1 E2 -
484 J1 E3 -
485 J1 E4 -
486 J1 E5 -
487 J1 E6 -
488 J1 E7 -
489 J1 E8 -
490 J1 E9 -
491 J1 EA -
492 J1 EB -
493 J1 EC -
494 J1 ED -
495 J1 EE -
496 J1 EF -
497 J1 F0 -
498 J1 F1 -
499 J1 F2 -
500 J1 F3 -
501 J1 F4 -
502 J1 F5 -
503 J1 F6 -
504 J1 F7 -
505 J1 F8 -
506 J1 F9 -
507 J1 FA -
508 J1 FB -
509 J1 FC -
510 J1 FD -
511 J1 FE -
512 J1 FF -
4.6.8 Counter of Each Copy Mode(1)

Confirm the status of use of each copy mode.
Note
I-141
Num CSRC Item Count conditions

ber Parameter
001 F1 00 1-1 mode
002 F1 01 1-2 mode
003 F1 02 2-1 mode
004 F1 03 2-2 mode
005 F1 04 ADF 1-1 mode
006 F1 05 ADF 1-2 mode
007 F1 06 Mixed original mode
008 F1 07 Tab original
009 F1 08 Z-folded original mode
010 F1 09 LEF: Portrait, SEF: Landscape (Reg.)
011 F1 0A LEF: Landscape, SEF: Portrait (Reg.)
012 F1 0B LEF: Portrait, SEF: Landscape (Rev.)
013 F1 0C LEF: Landscape, SEF: Portrait (Rev.)
014 F1 0D -
015 F1 0E -
016 F1 0F -
017 F1 10 -
018 F1 11 Custom size original
019 F1 12 1 point staple (upper left)
020 F1 13 1 point staple (upper right)
021 F1 14 2 points staple (left bind)
022 F1 15 2 points staple (top bind)
023 F1 16 Right & left bind (output)
024 F1 17 2 points staple (right bind)
025 F1 18 Top bind (output)
026 F1 19 Tri-folding
027 F1 1A Saddle stitch
028 F1 1B Stacker 5000 sheets full alarm
029 F1 1C Group
030 F1 1D Offset group
031 F1 1E Sort
032 F1 1F Offset sort
033 F1 20 Face down
034 F1 21 Face up
035 F1 22 1toN
036 F1 23 Nto1
037 F1 24 -
038 F1 25 Cover sheet
039 F1 26 Trim
040 F1 27 Real size copy
041 F1 28 Fixed zoom ratio E4
042 F1 29 Fixed zoom ratio E3
043 F1 2A Fixed zoom ratio E2
044 F1 2B Fixed zoom ratio E1
045 F1 2C Fixed zoom ratio R4
046 F1 2D Fixed zoom ratio R3
047 F1 2E Fixed zoom ratio R2
048 F1 2F Fixed zoom ratio R1
049 F1 30 Arbitrary zoom 1
052 F1 33 ZOOM
053 F1 34 -
054 F1 35 Maximum ZOOM
055 F1 36 Minimum ZOOM
056 F1 37 APS
057 F1 38 AMS
I-142

ber Parameter
058 F1 39 EE
059 F1 3A Arbitrary density 1
060 F1 3B Arbitrary density 2
061 F1 3C Interrupted copy
062 F1 3D Cancel automatic image rotation
063 F1 3E -
064 F1 3F -
065 F1 40 Combine 1 Sheet
066 F1 41 Booklet
067 F1 42 Adhesive binding
068 F1 43 -
069 F1 44 -
070 F1 45 Page copy
071 F1 46 -
072 F1 47 Non-image area auto erase
073 F1 48 -
074 F1 49 -
075 F1 4A -
076 F1 4B Standard-size repeat
077 F1 4C Frame Erasure
078 F1 4D Center erasure
079 F1 4E Original paper position adjustment
080 F1 4F All-image area
081 F1 50 Shift
082 F1 51 -
083 F1 52 -
084 F1 53 -
085 F1 54 -
086 F1 55 Date and time
087 F1 56 Page
088 F1 57 Numbering
089 F1 58 Print quantity: 1
090 F1 59 Print quantity: 2 to 5
091 F1 5A Print quantity: 6 to 10
092 F1 5B Print quantity: 11 or more
093 F1 5C Time while the power remote 1 is on
094 F1 5D Time while the power remote 2 is on
095 F1 5E -
096 F1 5F -
097 F1 60 Time in the LOW-POWER mode.
098 F1 61 Time in Warm-up
099 F1 62 Time during the front door is open
100 F1 63 Operation time in 1 side straight exit
101 F1 64 Operation time in 1 side reverse exit
102 F1 65 Operation time in 2 sides print
103 F1 66 Operation time in ADF mode
104 F1 67 Morning correction count
105 F1 68 APS sensor active time
106 F1 69 -
107 F1 6A -
108 F1 6B Number of saddle stitching job
109 F1 6C Saddle stitcher tri-folding tray full alarm
110 F1 6D Number of ADF NF occurred
111 F1 6E -
112 F1 6F -
113 F1 70 -
114 F1 71 Number of the scanner scanned
I-143

ber Parameter
115 F1 72 Number of electrode cleaned
116 F1 73 Number of memory overflow
117 F1 74 Number of the fusing alarm occurred
118 F1 75 Number of no toner stop occurred
119 F1 76 -
120 F1 77 -
121 F1 78 -
122 F1 79 -
123 F1 7A -
124 F1 7B Compression memory overflow
125 F1 7C -
126 F1 7D -
127 F1 7E Staple finisher main tray alarm
128 F1 7F Staple finisher staple alarm
129 F1 80 Saddle stitcher trash full alarm
130 F1 81 -
131 F1 82 -
132 F1 83 -
133 F1 84 -
134 F1 85 -
135 F1 86 -
136 F1 87 -
137 F1 88 Saddle stitcher staple alarm
138 F1 89 -
139 F1 8A -
140 F1 8B -
141 F1 8C -
142 F1 8D -
143 F1 8E Punch
144 F1 8F Z-Folding
145 F1 90 Multi folder trash full alarm
146 F1 91 Hold the job number (copy)
147 F1 92 Hold + output job number (copier)
148 F1 93 Hold the job number (printer)
149 F1 94 Hold + output job number (printer)
150 F1 95 Number of the output hold job
151 F1 Number of the output hold job (the job is deleted after the
96
output)
152 F1 97 HDD Store job (Hold → HDD Store)
153 F1 98 HDD Store job read print job
154 F1 99 HDD Store job read hold job
155 F1 9A HDD Store job read print + hold the job
156 F1 9B -
157 F1 9C -
158 F1 9D -
159 F1 9E -
160 F1 9F -
161 F1 A0 -
162 F1 A1 -
163 F1 A2 -
164 F1 A3 -
165 F1 A4 -
166 F1 A5 -
167 F1 A6 -
168 F1 A7 -
169 F1 A8 -
170 F1 A9 -
I-144

ber Parameter
171 F1 AA -
172 F1 AB -
173 F1 AC -
174 F1 AD -
175 F1 AE -
176 F1 AF -
177 F1 B0 -
178 F1 B1 -
179 F1 B2 -
180 F1 B3 -
181 F1 B4 -
182 F1 B5 -
183 F1 B6 -
184 F1 B7 -
185 F1 B8 -
186 F1 B9 -
187 F1 BA -
188 F1 BB -
189 F1 BC Perfect bind (cover blank)
190 F1 BD Perfect bind (cover print 1-in-1)
191 F1 BE Perfect bind (cover print 2-in-1)
192 F1 BF Perfect bind (cover print 3-in-1)
193 F1 C0 Perfect binder cover tray mode
194 F1 C1 Number of sets for perfect bind
195 F1 C2 Number of sets for the perfect bind (With the cover trim)
196 F1 C3 Number of sets for the perfect bind (Without the cover trim)
197 F1 C4 Number of perfect binder sub tray output paper
198 F1 C5 Number of perfect binder sub compile output paper
199 F1 C6 Times of pulling out PB cover tray
200 F1 C7 The number of the perfect binder front door open and close
201 F1 The number of the stacker cover of the perfect binder open
C8
and close
202 F1 C9 -
203 F1 CA -
204 F1 CB -
205 F1 CC -
206 F1 CD -
207 F1 CE -
208 F1 CF -
209 F1 D0 -
210 F1 D1 -
211 F1 D2 -
212 F1 D3 -
213 F1 D4 -
214 F1 D5 -
215 F1 D6 -
216 F1 D7 -
217 F1 D8 Sample print sheets
218 F1 D9 Sample print sheets in printer job
219 F1 DA Sample print sheets in printer job (large size)
220 F1 DB -
221 F1 DC -
222 F1 DD Output offset mode by designated job
223 F1 DE Offset mode by specified numbers
224 F1 DF Output offset mode by specified pages
225 F1 E0 Number of offset job for 1 set + set pages
226 F1 E1 Continued job for next day
I-145

ber Parameter
227 F1 E2 Corner crop mark setting
228 F1 E3 Center crop mark setting
229 F1 E4 Tab paper used job
230 F1 E5 Number of needless tab paper exit job
231 F1 E6 Number of the job ticket edit
232 F1 E7 Sample output number
233 F1 E8 600dpi output quantity
234 F1 E9 Multi punch
235 F1 EA -
236 F1 EB -
237 F1 EC -
238 F1 ED -
239 F1 EE -
240 F1 EF -
241 F1 F0 -
242 F1 F1 -
243 F1 F2 -
244 F1 F3 Colored Paper : White
245 F1 F4 Colored Paper : Blue
246 F1 F5 Colored Paper : Goldenrod
247 F1 F6 Colored Paper : Gray
248 F1 F7 Colored Paper : Green
249 F1 F8 Colored Paper : Ivory
250 F1 F9 Colored Paper : Orange
251 F1 FA Colored Paper : Pink
252 F1 FB Colored Paper : Red
253 F1 FC Colored Paper : Yellow
254 F1 FD Colored Paper : Cream
255 F1 FE Colored Paper : Others
256 F1 FF Colored Paper : User Color
4.6.9 Counter of Each Copy Mode(2)

Confirm the status of use of each copy mode.
Note
ber parameter
001 F2 00 ACS
002 F2 01 Full color
003 F2 02 Black and white
004 F2 03 Single color (Y)
005 F2 04 Single color (M)
006 F2 05 Single color (C)
007 F2 06 Single color (R)
008 F2 07 Single color (G)
009 F2 08 Single color (B)
010 F2 09 Original Type: Text/Photo (Print)
011 F2 0A Original Type: Text/Photo (Photo)
012 F2 0B Original Type: Text/Photo (Print)
013 F2 0C Original Type: Photo (Photo)
014 F2 0D Original Type: Copied
015 F2 0E Original Type: Inkjet
016 F2 0F -
017 F2 10 Screen: Auto
018 F2 11 Select screen: Screen1
019 F2 12 Select screen: Screen2
020 F2 13 Select screen: Stochastic
021 F2 14 Original Type: Text
I-146

ber parameter
022 F2 15 Original Type: Map
023 F2 16 Glossy
024 F2 17 Density shift
025 F2 18 Background removal
026 F2 19 Red adjustment
027 F2 1A Green adjustment
028 F2 1B Blue adjustment
029 F2 1C Hue adjustment
030 F2 1D Saturation adjustment
031 F2 1E Brightness adjustment
032 F2 1F Color balance adjustment
033 F2 20 Sharpness adjustment
034 F2 21 Contrast adjustment
035 F2 22 Image distinction level
036 F2 23 Paper type select: Plain
037 F2 24 Paper type select: Coated-ML
038 F2 25 Paper type select: Colored paper
039 F2 26 Paper type select: Fine
040 F2 27 Paper type select: Coated-GL
041 F2 28 Paper type select: Tab paper
042 F2 29 Paper type select: Color specific
043 F2 2A Paper type select: Coated-GO
044 F2 2B Paper type select: Coated-MO
045 F2 2C Paper weight select: 1
046 F2 2D Paper weight select: 2
047 F2 2E Paper weight select: 3
048 F2 2F Paper weight select: 4
049 F2 30 Paper weight select: 5
054 F2 35 Main tray: face up output
055 F2 36 Number of no toner stop occurred (Y)
056 F2 37 Number of no toner stop occurred (M)
057 F2 38 Number of no toner stop occurred (C)
058 F2 39 Number of no toner stop occurred (K)
059 F2 3A Number of waste toner recovery box full
060 F2 3B Number of color registration adjustment
061 F2 3C Number of auto stability control
062 F2 3D Paper weight select: 10
063 F2 3E -
064 F2 3F -
065 F2 40 -
066 F2 41 Paper type select: Envelope
067 F2 42 -
068 F2 43 Polygon motor operation time
069 F2 44 Develop motor operation time (color)
070 F2 45 Develop motor operation time (black)
071 F2 46 ON Time of PCL (Color)
072 F2 47 ON Time of PCL (Black)
073 F2 48 -
074 F2 49 -
075 F2 4A -
076 F2 4B -
077 F2 4C -
078 F2 4D -
I-147

ber parameter
079 F2 4E -
080 F2 4F -
081 F2 50 -
082 F2 51 Manual toner refresh mode count
083 F2 52 N of Belt Refresh Performed
084 F2 53 -
085 F2 54 -
086 F2 55 -
087 F2 56 -
088 F2 57 Right & left bind (originals)
089 F2 58 Upper binding (original)
090 F2 59 Inside print multi tri-fold
091 F2 5A Outside print multi tri-fold
092 F2 5B Inside print tri-fold-in
093 F2 5C Outside print tri-fold-in
094 F2 5D Inside print tri-fold-out
095 F2 5E Outside print tri-fold-out
096 F2 5F Inside print double parallel
097 F2 60 Outside print double parallel
098 F2 61 Inside print Gate
099 F2 62 Outside print gate
100 F2 63 Multi half fold
101 F2 64 Inside print half-fold
102 F2 65 Outside print half-fold
103 F2 66 Main tray output
104 F2 67 Stacker tray output
105 F2 68 Stacker pile setting permit
106 F2 69 Fold & staple tray output
107 F2 6A Tri-fold tray output
108 F2 6B Folding sub tray output
109 F2 6C Stacker sub tray output
110 F2 6D Fold & staple sub tray output
111 F2 6E Staple sub tray paper exit
112 F2 6F Number of main tray output job
113 F2 70 Stacker tray output job number
114 F2 71 Fold & staple tray output job number
115 F2 72 Tri-fold tray output job number
116 F2 73 Folding sub tray job number
117 F2 74 Stacker sub tray job number
118 F2 75 Fold & staple sub tray job number
119 F2 76 Staple sub tray job number
120 F2 77 Multi half fold job number
121 F2 78 Inside print half-fold job number
122 F2 79 Outside print half-fold job number
123 F2 7A Large envelope
124 F2 7B Small envelope
125 F2 7C -
126 F2 7D -
127 F2 7E -
128 F2 7F -
129 F2 80 -
130 F2 81 -
131 F2 82 -
132 F2 83 -
133 F2 84 -
134 F2 85 -
135 F2 86 Number of paper inserter
I-148

ber parameter
136 F2 87 Number of perfect bind (copy) job
137 F2 88 Number of perfect bind (printer) job
138 F2 89 Color density control
139 F2 8A Color density control (Large)
140 F2 8B -
141 F2 8C S.M.A.R.T (0) Start/Stop Count
142 F2 8D S.M.A.R.T (0) Load Cycle Count
143 F2 8E S.M.A.R.T (0) Reallocated Sector Count
144 F2 8F S.M.A.R.T (0) Power On Hours
145 F2 90 S.M.A.R.T (1) Start/Stop Count
146 F2 91 S.M.A.R.T (1) Load Cycle Count
147 F2 92 S.M.A.R.T (1) Reallocated Sector Count
148 F2 93 S.M.A.R.T (1) Power On Hours
151 F2 96 S.M.A.R.T (2) Reallocated Sector Count
152 F2 97 S.M.A.R.T (2) Power On Hours
155 F2 9A S.M.A.R.T (3) Reallocated Sector Count
156 F2 9B S.M.A.R.T (3) Power On Hours
157 F2 9C -
158 F2 9D -
159 F2 9E -
160 F2 9F -
161 F2 A0 -
162 F2 A1 -
163 F2 A2 -
164 F2 A3 -
165 F2 A4 Toner save inactive
166 F2 A5 Toner save minimum
167 F2 A6 Toner save middle
168 F2 A7 Toner save maximum
169 F2 A8 Number of ADF grain detection execution
170 F2 A9 Total number of ADF grain detection
171 F2 AA Number of the ADF glass cleaning
172 F2 AB Separation print job number
173 F2 AC Spine Corner Forming
174 F2 AD The Number of Crease (1 piece)
175 F2 AE The Number of Crease (2 piece)
176 F2 AF The Number of Crease (3 piece)
177 F2 B0 The Number of Crease (4 piece)
178 F2 B1 Fold&Staple/Multi Half Fold Crease
179 F2 B2 Multi Tri-Fold Crease
180 F2 B3 Crease Position (Spine)
181 F2 B4 Crease Position (Gutter)
182 F2 B5 Crease Position (Spine + Gutter)
183 F2 B6 Staple Fold & Staple(4 Position)
184 F2 B7 2-Side Slitting Only(All Sheets)
185 F2 B8 2-Side Slitting Only(Cover Only)
186 F2 B9 Fold&Staple/Multi Half Fold Slit(All)
187 F2 BA Fold&Staple/Multi Half Fold Slit(Cover)
188 F2 BB Multi Tri-Fold Crease 2-Side Slitting
189 F2 BC Perfect Bind 2-Side Slitting
190 F2 BD Spine Corner Forming Job Number
191 F2 BE Crease Job Number
192 F2 BF 2-Side Slitting Job Number
I-149

ber parameter
193 F2 C0 4-Position Staple Job Number(Fold&Staple)
194 F2 C1 External Finisher
195 F2 C2 Main SW OFF Count
196 F2 C3 -
197 F2 C4 -
198 F2 C5 -
199 F2 C6 -
200 F2 C7 -
201 F2 C8 -
202 F2 C9 -
203 F2 CA -
204 F2 CB -
205 F2 CC -
206 F2 CD -
207 F2 CE -
208 F2 CF -
209 F2 D0 -
210 F2 D1 -
211 F2 D2 -
212 F2 D3 -
213 F2 D4 -
214 F2 D5 -
215 F2 D6 -
216 F2 D7 -
217 F2 D8 -
218 F2 D9 -
219 F2 DA -
220 F2 DB -
221 F2 DC -
222 F2 DD -
223 F2 DE -
224 F2 DF -
225 F2 E0 -
226 F2 E1 -
227 F2 E2 -
228 F2 E3 -
229 F2 E4 -
230 F2 E5 -
231 F2 E6 -
232 F2 E7 -
233 F2 E8 -
234 F2 E9 -
235 F2 EA -
236 F2 EB -
237 F2 EC -
238 F2 ED -
239 F2 EE -
240 F2 EF -
241 F2 F0 -
242 F2 F1 -
243 F2 F2 -
244 F2 F3 -
245 F2 F4 -
256 F2 F5 -
247 F2 F6 -
248 F2 F7 -
249 F2 F8 -
I-150

ber parameter
250 F2 F9 -
251 F2 FA -
252 F2 FB -
253 F2 FC -
254 F2 FD -
255 F2 FE -
256 F2 FF -
4.6.10 SC Counter/SC Counter Individual Sec.

SC counter/SC counter individual sec.
Note
• When the service mode DIPSW 3-1 is 1 (Latched), C35## to C39## are not counted.
Number CSRC Item
Parameter (SC Code)
001 E0 00 C-0001
002 E0 01 C-0002
003 E0 02 -
004 E0 03 C-0101
005 E0 04 C-0102
006 E0 05 C-0103
007 E0 06 C-0104
008 E0 07 C-0113
009 E0 08 C-0114
010 E0 09 C-0115
011 E0 0A C-0116
012 E0 0B C-0117
013 E0 0C C-0118
014 E0 0D C-0119
015 E0 0E C-0120
016 E0 0F C-0121
017 E0 10 C-0122
018 E0 11 C-0123
019 E0 12 C-0124
020 E0 13 C-0125
021 E0 14 C-0126
022 E0 15 C-0127
023 E0 16 C-0128
024 E0 17 C-0129
025 E0 18 C-0130
026 E0 19 C-0138
027 E0 1A C-0139
028 E0 1B C-0140
029 E0 1C C-0141
030 E0 1D C-0142
031 E0 1E C-0143
032 E0 1F C-0144
033 E0 20 C-0145
034 E0 21 C-0146
035 E0 22 C-0147
036 E0 23 C-0148
037 E0 24 C-0149
038 E0 25 C-0150
039 E0 26 C-0151
040 E0 27 C-0152
041 E0 28 C-0153
042 E0 29 C-0154
043 E0 2A C-0155
I-151
Number CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
044 E0 2B C-0156
045 E0 2C C-0157
046 E0 2D C-0158
047 E0 2E C-0159
048 E0 2F C-0160
049 E0 30 C-0161
050 E0 31 C-0162
051 E0 32 C-0163
052 E0 33 C-0201
053 E0 34 C-0202
054 E0 35 C-0204
055 E0 36 C-0205
056 E0 37 C-0208
057 E0 38 C-0209
058 E0 39 C-0211
059 E0 3A C-0212
060 E0 3B C-0213
061 E0 3C C-0215
062 E0 3D C-0218
063 E0 3E C-0221
064 E0 3F C-0224
065 E0 40 C-0227
066 E0 41 C-0228
067 E0 42 C-0229
068 E0 43 C-0230
069 E0 44 C-0231
070 E0 45 C-0232
071 E0 46 C-0233
072 E0 47 C-0234
073 E0 48 C-0235
074 E0 49 C-0236
075 E0 4A C-0237
076 E0 4B C-0301
077 E0 4C C-0302
078 E0 4D C-0303
079 E0 4E C-0304
080 E0 4F C-0306
081 E0 50 C-0307
082 E0 51 C-0308
083 E0 52 C-0309
084 E0 53 C-0310
085 E0 54 C-0311
086 E0 55 C-0312
087 E0 56 C-0313
088 E0 57 C-0314
089 E0 58 C-0315
090 E0 59 C-0316
091 E0 5A C-0317
092 E0 5B C-0318
093 E0 5C C-0319
094 E0 5D C-0320
095 E0 5E C-0321
096 E0 5F C-0322
097 E0 60 C-0323
098 E0 61 C-0324
099 E0 62 C-0325
100 E0 63 C-0326
I-152
Number CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
101 E0 64 C-0327
102 E0 65 C-0328
103 E0 66 C-0329
104 E0 67 C-0330
105 E0 68 C-0331
106 E0 69 C-0332
107 E0 6A C-0333
108 E0 6B C-0334
109 E0 6C C-0335
110 E0 6D C-0336
111 E0 6E C-0337
112 E0 6F C-0338
113 E0 70 C-0339
114 E0 71 C-0340
115 E0 72 C-0341
116 E0 73 C-0342
117 E0 74 C-0343
118 E0 75 C-0344
119 E0 76 C-0345
120 E0 77 C-0346
121 E0 78 C-0347
122 E0 79 C-0348
123 E0 7A C-0349
124 E0 7B C-0350
125 E0 7C C-0351
126 E0 7D C-0352
127 E0 7E C-0353
128 E0 7F C-0354
129 E0 80 C-0355
130 E0 81 C-0356
131 E0 82 C-0357
132 E0 83 C-0358
133 E0 84 C-0359
134 E0 85 C-0360
135 E0 86 C-0361
136 E0 87 C-0362
137 E0 88 C-0363
138 E0 89 C-0364
139 E0 8A C-0365
140 E0 8B C-0366
141 E0 8C C-0367
142 E0 8D C-0368
143 E0 8E C-0369
144 E0 8F C-0370
145 E0 90 C-0371
146 E0 91 C-0372
147 E0 92 C-0373
148 E0 93 C-0374
149 E0 94 C-0401
150 E0 95 C-0402
151 E0 96 C-0403
152 E0 97 C-0404
153 E0 98 C-0405
154 E0 99 C-0406
155 E0 9A C-0407
156 E0 9B C-0408
157 E0 9C C-0409
I-153
Number CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
158 E0 9D C-0410
159 E0 9E C-0411
160 E0 9F C-0412
161 E0 A0 C-0413
162 E0 A1 C-0414
163 E0 A2 C-0415
164 E0 A3 C-0416
165 E0 A4 C-0417
166 E0 A5 C-0418
167 E0 A6 C-0419
168 E0 A7 C-0420
169 E0 A8 C-0421
170 E0 A9 C-0422
171 E0 AA C-0423
172 E0 AB C-0424
173 E0 AC C-0425
174 E0 AD C-0426
175 E0 AE C-0427
176 E0 AF C-0428
177 E0 B0 C-0429
178 E0 B1 C-0430
179 E0 B2 C-0431
180 E0 B3 C-0432
181 E0 B4 C-0433
182 E0 B5 C-0434
183 E0 B6 C-0435
184 E0 B7 C-0436
185 E0 B8 C-0437
186 E0 B9 C-0438
187 E0 BA C-0439
188 E0 BB C-0440
189 E0 BC C-0441
190 E0 BD C-1005
191 E0 BE C-1006
192 E0 BF C-1007
193 E0 C0 C-1009
194 E0 C1 C-1010
195 E0 C2 C-1011
196 E0 C3 C-1012
197 E0 C4 C-1013
198 E0 C5 C-1014
199 E0 C6 C-1017
200 E0 C7 C-1101
201 E0 C8 C-1102
202 E0 C9 C-1103
203 E0 CA C-1104
204 E0 CB C-1105
205 E0 CC C-1106
206 E0 CD C-1107
207 E0 CE C-1108
208 E0 CF C-1109
209 E0 D0 C-1110
210 E0 D1 C-1111
211 E0 D2 C-1112
212 E0 D3 C-1113
213 E0 D4 C-1114
214 E0 D5 C-1115
I-154
Number CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
215 E0 D6 C-1116
216 E0 D7 C-1124
217 E0 D8 C-1125
218 E0 D9 C-1126
219 E0 DA C-1127
220 E0 DB C-1132
221 E0 DC C-1137
222 E0 DD C-1141
223 E0 DE C-1144
224 E0 DF C-1147
225 E0 E0 C-1153
226 E0 E1 C-1154
227 E0 E2 C-1155
228 E0 E3 C-1156
229 E0 E4 C-1157
230 E0 E5 C-1158
231 E0 E6 C-1159
232 E0 E7 C-1170
233 E0 E8 C-1171
234 E0 E9 C-1172
235 E0 EA C-1173
236 E0 EB C-1174
237 E0 EC C-1175
238 E0 ED C-1176
239 E0 EE C-1177
240 E0 EF C-1179
241 E0 F0 C-1180
242 E0 F1 C-1181
243 E0 F2 C-1201
244 E0 F3 C-1202
245 E0 F4 C-1203
246 E0 F5 C-1204
247 E0 F6 C-1205
248 E0 F7 C-1206
249 E0 F8 C-1211
250 E0 F9 C-1212
251 E0 FA C-1213
252 E0 FB C-1214
253 E0 FC C-1215
254 E0 FD C-1216
255 E0 FE C-1221
256 E0 FF C-1222
257 E1 00 C-1223
258 E1 01 C-1224
259 E1 02 C-1225
260 E1 03 C-1226
261 E1 04 C-1227
262 E1 05 C-1228
263 E1 06 C-1229
264 E1 07 C-1230
265 E1 08 C-1231
266 E1 09 C-1232
267 E1 0A C-1233
268 E1 0B C-1234
269 E1 0C C-1235
270 E1 0D C-1241
271 E1 0E C-1242
I-155
Number CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
272 E1 0F C-1243
273 E1 10 C-1244
274 E1 11 C-1245
275 E1 12 C-1246
276 E1 13 C-1247
277 E1 14 C-1248
278 E1 15 C-1249
279 E1 16 C-1250
280 E1 17 C-1251
281 E1 18 C-1252
282 E1 19 C-1253
283 E1 1A C-1254
284 E1 1B C-1255
285 E1 1C C-1256
286 E1 1D C-1257
287 E1 1E C-1258
288 E1 1F C-1259
289 E1 20 C-1260
290 E1 21 C-1261
291 E1 22 C-1262
292 E1 23 C-1263
293 E1 24 C-1264
294 E1 25 C-1265
295 E1 26 C-1266
296 E1 27 C-1267
297 E1 28 C-1268
298 E1 29 C-1269
299 E1 2A C-1270
300 E1 2B C-1271
301 E1 2C C-1272
302 E1 2D C-1273
303 E1 2E C-1274
304 E1 2F C-1275
305 E1 30 -
306 E1 31 -
307 E1 32 -
308 E1 33 -
309 E1 34 -
310 E1 35 C-1281
311 E1 36 C-1282
312 E1 37 C-1290
313 E1 38 C-1291
314 E1 39 C-1292
315 E1 3A C-1293
316 E1 3B C-1294
317 E1 3C C-1295
318 E1 3D C-1296
319 E1 3E C-1297
320 E1 3F C-1298
321 E1 40 C-1299
322 E1 41 C-1301
323 E1 42 C-1302
324 E1 43 C-1303
325 E1 44 C-1304
326 E1 45 C-1305
327 E1 46 C-1306
328 E1 47 C-1307
I-156
Number CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
329 E1 48 C-1308
330 E1 49 C-1309
331 E1 4A C-1310
332 E1 4B C-1311
333 E1 4C -
334 E1 4D -
335 E1 4E C-1330
336 E1 4F C-1331
337 E1 50 C-1332
338 E1 51 C-1333
339 E1 52 C-1334
340 E1 53 C-1341
341 E1 54 C-1342
342 E1 55 C-1351
343 E1 56 C-1352
344 E1 57 C-1353
345 E1 58 C-1354
346 E1 59 C-1355
347 E1 5A C-1356
348 E1 5B C-1357
349 E1 5C C-1358
350 E1 5D C-1359
351 E1 5E C-1360
352 E1 5F C-1361
353 E1 60 C-1364
354 E1 61 C-1402
355 E1 62 C-1403
356 E1 63 C-1404
357 E1 64 C-1406
358 E1 65 C-1407
359 E1 66 C-1408
360 E1 67 C-1411
361 E1 68 C-1412
362 E1 69 -
363 E1 6A C-1431
364 E1 6B C-1432
365 E1 6C C-1433
366 E1 6D C-1435
367 E1 6E C-1436
368 E1 6F C-1437
369 E1 70 C-1438
370 E1 71 C-1439
371 E1 72 C-1440
372 E1 73 C-1441
373 E1 74 C-1442
374 E1 75 C-1451
375 E1 76 C-1452
376 E1 77 C-1454
377 E1 78 C-1455
378 E1 79 C-1456
379 E1 7A C-1499
380 E1 7B C-1501
381 E1 7C C-1502
382 E1 7D C-1504
383 E1 7E C-1505
384 E1 7F C-1506
385 E1 80 C-1507
I-157
Number CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
386 E1 81 C-1508
387 E1 82 C-1509
388 E1 83 C-1510
389 E1 84 C-1511
390 E1 85 C-1512
391 E1 86 C-1513
392 E1 87 C-1514
393 E1 88 C-1515
394 E1 89 C-1516
395 E1 8A C-1517
396 E1 8B C-1518
397 E1 8C C-1519
398 E1 8D C-1520
399 E1 8E C-1521
400 E1 8F C-1522
401 E1 90 C-1523
402 E1 91 C-1524
403 E1 92 C-1525
404 E1 93 C-1526
405 E1 94 C-1527
406 E1 95 C-1528
407 E1 96 C-1530
408 E1 97 C-1531
409 E1 98 C-1532
410 E1 99 C-1534
411 E1 9A C-1537
412 E1 9B C-1538
413 E1 9C C-1540
414 E1 9D C-1541
415 E1 9E C-1542
416 E1 9F C-1543
417 E1 A0 C-1544
418 E1 A1 C-1545
419 E1 A2 C-1546
420 E1 A3 C-1547
421 E1 A4 C-1548
422 E1 A5 C-1549
423 E1 A6 C-1550
424 E1 A7 C-1551
425 E1 A8 C-1552
426 E1 A9 C-1553
427 E1 AA C-1554
428 E1 AB C-1555
429 E1 AC C-1556
430 E1 AD C-1557
431 E1 AE C-1558
432 E1 AF C-1559
433 E1 B0 C-1560
434 E1 B1 C-1561
435 E1 B2 C-1562
436 E1 B3 C-1565
437 E1 B4 C-1566
438 E1 B5 C-1567
439 E1 B6 -
440 E1 B7 -
441 E1 B8 -
442 E1 B9 C-2001
I-158
Number CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
443 E1 BA C-2004
444 E1 BB C-2201
445 E1 BC C-2202
446 E1 BD C-2203
447 E1 BE C-2204
448 E1 BF C-2211
449 E1 C0 C-2212
450 E1 C1 C-2213
451 E1 C2 C-2214
452 E1 C3 C-2220
453 E1 C4 C-2221
454 E1 C5 C-2222
455 E1 C6 C-2223
456 E1 C7 C-2224
457 E1 C8 C-2225
458 E1 C9 C-2231
459 E1 CA C-2232
460 E1 CB C-2233
461 E1 CC C-2234
462 E1 CD C-2241
463 E1 CE C-2242
464 E1 CF C-2243
465 E1 D0 C-2244
466 E1 D1 C-2302
467 E1 D2 C-2303
468 E1 D3 C-2304
469 E1 D4 C-2305
470 E1 D5 C-2306
471 E1 D6 C-2307
472 E1 D7 C-2401
473 E1 D8 C-2402
474 E1 D9 C-2403
475 E1 DA C-2404
476 E1 DB -
477 E1 DC -
478 E1 DD -
479 E1 DE -
480 E1 DF -
481 E1 E0 -
482 E1 E1 -
483 E1 E2 -
484 E1 E3 C-2431
485 E1 E4 C-2432
486 E1 E5 C-2433
487 E1 E6 C-2434
488 E1 E7 C-2441
489 E1 E8 C-2442
490 E1 E9 C-2443
491 E1 EA C-2444
492 E1 EB C-2451
493 E1 EC C-2452
494 E1 ED C-2453
495 E1 EE C-2454
496 E1 EF C-2455
497 E1 F0 C-2456
498 E1 F1 C-2457
499 E1 F2 C-2458
I-159
Number CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
500 E1 F3 C-2470
501 E1 F4 C-2701
502 E1 F5 C-2702
503 E1 F6 C-2703
504 E1 F7 C-2704
505 E1 F8 C-2711
506 E1 F9 C-2712
507 E1 FA C-2713
508 E1 FB C-2714
509 E1 FC C-2720
510 E1 FD C-2721
511 E1 FE C-2801
512 E1 FF C-2802
513 E2 00 C-2803
514 E2 01 C-2804
515 E2 02 C-2811
516 E2 03 C-2812
517 E2 04 C-2813
518 E2 05 C-2814
519 E2 06 C-2821
520 E2 07 C-2822
521 E2 08 C-2823
522 E2 09 C-2824
523 E2 0A C-2831
524 E2 0B C-2832
525 E2 0C C-2833
526 E2 0D C-2834
527 E2 0E C-2840
528 E2 0F C-2841
529 E2 10 C-3101
530 E2 11 C-3102
531 E2 12 C-3103
532 E2 13 C-3104
533 E2 14 C-3105
534 E2 15 C-3301
535 E2 16 C-3302
536 E2 17 C-3303
537 E2 18 C-3304
538 E2 19 C-3305
539 E2 1A C-3307
540 E2 1B C-3308
541 E2 1C C-3501
542 E2 1D C-3502
543 E2 1E C-3503
544 E2 1F C-3504
545 E2 20 C-3508
546 E2 21 C-3509
547 E2 22 C-3510
548 E2 23 C-3511
549 E2 24 C-3512
550 E2 25 C-3513
551 E2 26 -
552 E2 27 C-3515
553 E2 28 -
554 E2 29 C-3517
555 E2 2A C-3518
556 E2 2B C-3519
I-160
Number CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
557 E2 2C C-37xx
558 E2 2D C-3801
559 E2 2E C-3802
560 E2 2F C-3803
561 E2 30 C-3804
562 E2 31 -
563 E2 32 C-3807
564 E2 33 C-3901
565 E2 34 C-3902
566 E2 35 C-3903
567 E2 36 C-3904
568 E2 37 C-3905
569 E2 38 C-3906
570 E2 39 C-3907
571 E2 3A C-3908
572 E2 3B C-3909
573 E2 3C C-3910
574 E2 3D C-3911
575 E2 3E C-3912
576 E2 3F C-3913
577 E2 40 C-3917
578 E2 41 C-4101
579 E2 42 C-4102
580 E2 43 C-4103
581 E2 44 C-4104
582 E2 45 C-4501
583 E2 46 C-4502
584 E2 47 C-4503
585 E2 48 C-4504
586 E2 49 C-4505
587 E2 4A C-4506
588 E2 4B C-4507
589 E2 4C C-4508
590 E2 4D C-4511
591 E2 4E C-4512
592 E2 4F C-4513
593 E2 50 C-4514
594 E2 51 C-4515
595 E2 52 C-4516
596 E2 53 C-4517
597 E2 54 C-4518
598 E2 55 C-4520
599 E2 56 C-4521
600 E2 57 C-4522
601 E2 58 -
602 E2 59 -
603 E2 5A -
604 E2 5B -
605 E2 5C C-4601
606 E2 5D C-4602
607 E2 5E C-4603
608 E2 5F C-4604
609 E2 60 -
610 E2 61 -
611 E2 62 -
612 E2 63 -
613 E2 64 C-4631
I-161
Number CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
614 E2 65 C-4632
615 E2 66 C-4633
616 E2 67 C-4634
617 E2 68 -
618 E2 69 -
619 E2 6A -
620 E2 6B -
621 E2 6C C-4661
622 E2 6D C-4662
623 E2 6E C-4663
624 E2 6F -
625 E2 70 -
626 E2 71 -
627 E2 72 C-4705
628 E2 73 -
629 E2 74 -
630 E2 75 C-4709
631 E2 76 C-4713
632 E2 77 C-4714
633 E2 78 C-4715
634 E2 79 C-4716
635 E2 7A C-4717
636 E2 7B C-4718
637 E2 7C C-4719
638 E2 7D C-4720
639 E2 7E C-4721
640 E2 7F C-4722
641 E2 80 C-4723
642 E2 81 C-4724
643 E2 82 C-4725
644 E2 83 C-4840
645 E2 84 C-4850
646 E2 85 C-5001
647 E2 86 C-5002
648 E2 87 C-5003
649 E2 88 C-5010
650 E2 89 C-5025
651 E2 8A C-5100
652 E2 8B C-5101
653 E2 8C C-5121
654 E2 8D C-5301
655 E2 8E -
656 E2 8F -
657 E2 90 C-5305
658 E2 91 C-5307
659 E2 92 C-5308
660 E2 93 C-5309
661 E2 94 C-5310
662 E2 95 C-5311
663 E2 96 C-5312
664 E2 97 C-5313
665 E2 98 C-5401
666 E2 99 C-5402
667 E2 9A C-5403
668 E2 9B C-5404
669 E2 9C C-5405
670 E2 9D C-6102
I-162
Number CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
671 E2 9E C-6103
672 E2 9F C-6401
673 E2 A0 -
674 E2 A1 C-6702
675 E2 A2 C-6703
676 E2 A3 C-6704
677 E2 A4 -
678 E2 A5 C-6706
679 E2 A6 C-6707
680 E2 A7 -
681 E2 A8 -
682 E2 A9 C-6710
683 E2 AA -
684 E2 AB -
685 E2 AC -
686 E2 AD -
687 E2 AE -
688 E2 AF -
689 E2 B0 C-6717
690 E2 B1 -
691 E2 B2 -
692 E2 B3 C-6720
693 E2 B4 -
694 E2 B5 C-6722
695 E2 B6 C-6724
696 E2 B7 C-6725
697 E2 B8 C-6751
698 E2 B9 -
699 E2 BA C-6801
700 E2 BB C-6F01
701 E2 BC C-7001
702 E2 BD C-8001
703 E2 BE C-8002
704 E2 BF C-8101
705 E2 C0 C-8102
706 E2 C1 C-8103
707 E2 C2 C-8106
708 E2 C3 C-8107
709 E2 C4 C-8302
710 E2 C5 C-8401
711 E2 C6 C-9401
712 E2 C7 C-9402
713 E2 C8 C-C101
714 E2 C9 C-C102
715 E2 CA -
716 E2 CB C-C104
717 E2 CC -
718 E2 CD -
719 E2 CE -
720 E2 CF -
721 E2 D0 C-C109
722 E2 D1 C-C111
723 E2 D2 C-C112
724 E2 D3 C-C113
725 E2 D4 C-C114
726 E2 D5 C-C116
727 E2 D6 C-C117
I-163
Number CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
728 E2 D7 C-C118
729 E2 D8 C-C119
730 E2 D9 C-C120
731 E2 DA C-C121
732 E2 DB C-C123
733 E2 DC C-C124
734 E2 DD C-C136
735 E2 DE C-C150
736 E2 DF C-C151
737 E2 E0 C-C152
738 E2 E1 C-C156
739 E2 E2 C-D010
740 E2 E3 C-D020
741 E2 E4 -
742 E2 E5 -
743 E2 E6 -
744 E2 E7 C-D030
745 E2 E8 -
746 E2 E9 -
747 E2 EA -
748 E2 EB C-D040
749 E2 EC -
750 E2 ED -
751 E2 EE -
752 E2 EF C-D050
753 E2 F0 -
754 E2 F1 -
755 E2 F2 -
756 E2 F3 C-D060
757 E2 F4 C-D070
758 E2 F5 C-D080
759 E2 F6 C-D0C0
760 E2 F7 C-D0D0
761 E2 F8 C-D0D1
762 E2 F9 C-D0E1
763 E2 FA C-D0E3
764 E2 FB C-D0E4
765 E2 FC C-D0E5
766 E2 FD C-D0EF
767 E2 FE C-D0F0
768 E2 FF C-D0F1
769 E3 00 C-E001
770 E3 01 C-E002
771 E3 02 C-E003
772 E3 03 C-E004
773 E3 04 C-E005
774 E3 05 C-E006
775 E3 06 C-E007
776 E3 07 C-E008
777 E3 08 C-E010
778 E3 09 C-E012
779 E3 0A -
780 E3 0B C-E014
781 E3 0C C-E015
782 E3 0D -
783 E3 0E C-4611
784 E3 0F C-4612
I-164
Number CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
785 E3 10 C-4613
786 E3 11 C-4614
787 E3 12 C-4641
788 E3 13 C-4642
789 E3 14 C-4643
790 E3 15 C-4644
791 E3 16 C-6104
792 E3 17 C-6105
793 E3 18 C-4726
794 E3 19 C-5006
795 E3 1A C-5007
796 E3 1B C-4727
797 E3 1C C-4728
798 E3 1D C-E018
799 E3 1E C-5014
800 E3 1F C-1276
801 E3 20 C-1277
802 E3 21 C-1278
803 E3 22 C-1279
804 E3 23 C-1280
805 E3 24 C-1312
806 E3 25 C-1313
807 E3 26 C-1413
808 E3 27 C-1620
809 E3 28 C-1621
810 E3 29 C-1622
811 E3 2A C-1623
812 E3 2B C-1625
813 E3 2C C-1626
814 E3 2D C-1627
815 E3 2E C-1628
816 E3 2F C-1629
817 E3 30 C-1630
818 E3 31 C-1632
819 E3 32 C-1633
820 E3 33 C-1480
821 E3 34 -
822 E3 35 -
823 E3 36 -
824 E3 37 -
825 E3 38 -
826 E3 39 -
827 E3 3A -
828 E3 3B -
829 E3 3C -
830 E3 3D -
831 E3 3E -
832 E3 3F -
833 E3 40 -
834 E3 41 -
835 E3 42 -
836 E3 43 -
837 E3 44 -
838 E3 45 -
839 E3 46 -
840 E3 47 -
841 E3 48 -
I-165
Number CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
842 E3 49 -
843 E3 4A -
844 E3 4B -
845 E3 4C -
846 E3 4D -
847 E3 4E -
848 E3 4F -
849 E3 50 -
850 E3 51 -
851 E3 52 -
852 E3 53 -
853 E3 54 -
854 E3 55 -
855 E3 56 -
856 E3 57 -
857 E3 58 -
858 E3 59 -
859 E3 5A -
860 E3 5B -
861 E3 5C -
862 E3 5D -
863 E3 5E -
864 E3 5F -
865 E3 60 -
866 E3 61 -
867 E3 62 -
868 E3 63 -
869 E3 64 -
870 E3 65 -
871 E3 66 -
872 E3 67 -
873 E3 68 -
874 E3 69 -
875 E3 6A -
876 E3 6B -
877 E3 6C -
878 E3 6D -
879 E3 6E -
880 E3 6F -
881 E3 70 -
882 E3 71 -
883 E3 72 -
884 E3 73 -
885 E3 74 -
886 E3 75 -
887 E3 76 -
888 E3 77 -
889 E3 78 -
890 E3 79 -
891 E3 7A -
892 E3 7B -
893 E3 7C -
894 E3 7D -
895 E3 7E -
896 E3 7F -
897 E3 80 -
898 E3 81 -
I-166
Number CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
899 E3 82 -
900 E3 83 -
901 E3 84 -
902 E3 85 -
903 E3 86 -
904 E3 87 -
905 E3 88 -
906 E3 89 -
907 E3 8A -
908 E3 8B -
909 E3 8C -
910 E3 8D -
911 E3 8E -
912 E3 8F -
913 E3 90 -
914 E3 91 -
915 E3 92 -
916 E3 93 -
917 E3 94 -
918 E3 95 -
919 E3 96 -
920 E3 97 -
921 E3 98 -
922 E3 99 -
923 E3 9A -
924 E3 9B -
925 E3 9C -
926 E3 9D -
927 E3 9E -
928 E3 9F -
929 E3 A0 -
930 E3 A1 -
931 E3 A2 -
932 E3 A3 -
933 E3 A4 -
934 E3 A5 -
935 E3 A6 -
936 E3 A7 -
937 E3 A8 -
938 E3 A9 -
939 E3 AA -
940 E3 AB -
941 E3 AC -
942 E3 AD -
943 E3 AE -
944 E3 AF -
945 E3 B0 -
946 E3 B1 -
947 E3 B2 -
948 E3 B3 -
949 E3 B4 -
950 E3 B5 -
951 E3 B6 -
952 E3 B7 -
953 E3 B8 -
954 E3 B9 -
955 E3 BA -
I-167
Number CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
956 E3 BB -
957 E3 BC -
958 E3 BD -
959 E3 BE -
960 E3 BF -
961 E3 C0 -
962 E3 C1 -
963 E3 C2 -
964 E3 C3 -
965 E3 C4 -
966 E3 C5 -
967 E3 C6 -
968 E3 C7 -
969 E3 C8 -
970 E3 C9 -
971 E3 CA -
972 E3 CB -
973 E3 CC -
974 E3 CD -
975 E3 CE -
976 E3 CF -
977 E3 D0 -
978 E3 D1 -
979 E3 D2 -
980 E3 D3 -
981 E3 D4 -
982 E3 D5 -
983 E3 D6 -
984 E3 D7 -
985 E3 D8 -
986 E3 D9 -
987 E3 DA -
988 E3 DB -
989 E3 DC -
990 E3 DD -
991 E3 DE -
992 E3 DF -
993 E3 E0 -
994 E3 E1 -
995 E3 E2 -
996 E3 E3 -
997 E3 E4 -
998 E3 E5 -
999 E3 E6 -
1000 E3 E7 -
1001 E3 E8 -
1002 E3 E9 -
1003 E3 EA -
1004 E3 EB -
1005 E3 EC -
1006 E3 ED -
1007 E3 EE -
1008 E3 EF -
1009 E3 F0 -
1010 E3 F1 -
1011 E3 F2 -
1012 E3 F3 -
I-168
Number CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
1013 E3 F4 -
1014 E3 F5 -
1015 E3 F6 -
1016 E3 F7 -
1017 E3 F8 -
1018 E3 F9 -
1019 E3 FA -
1020 E3 FB -
1021 E3 FC -
1022 E3 FD -
1023 E3 FE -
1024 E3 FF -
4.6.11 SC data of time series

For the latest 20 items of error codes, check the SC Code, Total Counter, Date, Time, Machine (00: Idling, 01: Scan, 02: Print, 03: Scan/Print).
4.6.12 Maintenance Counter Reset (Maintenance History)

(1) Usage
Check the maintenance frequency.
(2) Specifications
• The latest 10 items of the maintenance counter reset history appears.
• Item
• Reset Date
• Maintenance Counter
• Maintenance Limit Data
• Counter Average
• Counter Reset Count
(3) Confirmation steps of Maintenance Counter Reset

Press [14 Maintenance History].
2. "Maintenance History screen"
Press [01 Maintenance Counter Reset].
3. "Maintenance Counter Reset screen"
Check the maintenance counter reset history.
4.6.13 Parts History in Time Series (Maintenance History)

(1) Usage
Check the maintenance frequency for respective parts.
(2) Specifications
• The latest 50 items of the maintenance counter reset history appears
• Item
• Number
I-169
(Number of the special parts counter)

• Parts Name
• P/N
• Counter, Limit
• Replacement Count
• ORU
(The mark "*" means that the part is replaced in the ORU-M mode. )
(3) Confirmation steps of Parts History in Time Series

Press [14 Maintenance History].
2. "Maintenance History screen"
Press [02 Parts History in Time Series].
3. "Parts History in Time Series screen"
Check the special parts counter reset history.
4.6.14 Counter of each paper type

Check the number of originals that are fed for each paper type and the weight.
Note
• For each type of paper that is specified in the tray setting, small size paper is 1 count for each paper exit of the single side and 2
counts of the double side, large size paper is 2 counts for the single side and 4 counts for the double side.
Number Item
1 Plain (62-74)
2 Plain (75-80)
3 Plain (81-91)
4 Plain (92-105)
5 Plain (106-135)
6 Plain (136-176)
7 Plain (177-216)
8 Plain (217-256)
9 Plain (257-300)
10 Fine (62-74)
11 Fine (75-80)
12 Fine (81-91)
13 Fine (92-105)
14 Fine (106-135)
15 Fine (136-176)
16 Fine (177-216)
17 Fine (217-256)
18 Fine (257-300)
19 Color (62-74)
20 Color (75-80)
21 Color (81-91)
22 Color (92-105)
23 Color (106-135)
24 Color (136-176)
I-170
Number Item
25 Color (177-216)
26 Color (217-256)
27 Color (257-300)
28 Coated-GL(62-74)
29 Coated-GL (75-80)
30 Coated-GL (81-91)
31 Coated-GL (92-105)
32 Coated-GL (106-135)
33 Coated-GL (136-176)
34 Coated-GL (177-216)
35 Coated-GL (217-256)
36 Coated-GL (257-300)
37 Coated-GO (62-74)
40 Coated-GO (92-105)
41 Coated-GO (106-135)
42 Coated-GO (136-176)
43 Coated-GO (177-216)
44 Coated-GO (217-256)
45 Coated-GO (257-300)
46 Coated-ML (62-74)
49 Coated-ML (92-105)
50 Coated-ML (106-135)
51 Coated-ML (136-176)
52 Coated-ML (177-216)
53 Coated-ML (217-256)
54 Coated-MO (257-300)
55 Coated-MO (62-74)
58 Coated-MO (92-105)
59 Coated-MO (106-135)
60 Coated-MO (136-176)
61 Coated-MO (177-216)
62 Coated-MO (217-256)
63 Coated-MO (257-300)
64 Envelope (62-74)
65 Envelope (75-80)
66 Envelope (81-91)
67 Envelope (92-105)
68 Envelope (106-135)
69 Envelope (136-176)
70 Envelope (177-216)
71 Envelope (217-256)
72 Envelope (257-300)
4.6.15 ORU-M Maintenance History

(1) Usage
Check the frequency of the unit replacement, then predict the timing of replacing the ORU-M target part and collect each type of information.
(2) Specifications
Item
• Information of ORU-M maintenance history:
Unit replacing Start-End date and the Start-End time, Downtime (m), Total Counter, End Status (Normal, error)
• Information of each ORU-M maintenance unit:
I-171
Parts Name, P/N, Serial Number, Life Cycle, Replacement Count, Replace Reason (Periodical Replacement, Image Trouble, Transport
Trouble or JAM)
• Information of total ORU-M maintenance:
Maintenance Count, Replace Unit Number, Downtime Average
Maximum storable number
• The data of the latest 125 replacements of the ORU-M corresponding unit are stored.
When one of the ORU-M counters is reset, up to 125 data including the latest replacement date and the replaced unit information are
stored.
Example
When you replace 4 units at a maintenance, the data of the latest 25 maintenance can be stored.
(Maintenance date (1 record) + 4 units replaced (4 records) = 5 records
With this function, the following items can be checked.
Name of replaced unit
Part No. (P/N)
Serial Number
Life cycle
Replacement Count
Replace Reason (PM, CM (image quality), CM (machine broken))
• The down time of the latest 50 units are stored.
Measures the length of time between the time of entering the ORU-M replacement screen and the time of exiting it.
Up to 50 data (replacement time and replacement date) of each ORU-M corresponding unit are stored. The data older than that are
stored as an averaged value.
(3) ORU-M maintenance history check procedures

1. "ORU-M Maintenance History screen"
Check the ORU maintenance history.
[1] [2]
[1] Information of ORU-M total maintenance history: [2] ORU-M maintenance history information
2. To check the object unit of each maintenance, select the maintenance to display and then press [Information View].
3. "Information View screen"
Check the maintenance of each unit.
I-172
4.6.16 Check, setting and reset procedure of the Special Parts Counter
Displays the counter of the target part.
When the target part is replaced, reset the counter of that part to manage the service history.
(1) Checking, setting and resetting procedure

Press [03 Parts Counter].
[Service Mode] → [Counter/Data] → [Parts Counter]
3. "Parts Counter Menu screen"
Press [01 Special Parts Counter 1] or [02 Special Parts Counter 2].
4. "Special Parts Counter menu screen"
Press the button that includes the target parts from the menu.
5. "Special Parts Counter screen"
As necessary, press [Next] or [Previous] to scroll the "Special Parts Counter screen" pages and check the counter.
6. To reset the counter, press [▼] or [▲] to select the target item.
7. Press [Counter Clear].
Press [No] to cancel and return to "Special Parts Counter screen"
4.6.17 Special Parts Counter

Note
• Be sure to reset the parts counter after you replace any of the following parts. Otherwise, the image failure or the jam occurs.
1. Number 003 filter box
2. Number 013 to number 020 charging corona/Y, charging corona/M, charging corona/C, charging corona/K
3. Number 021 to number 028 drum unit/Y, drum unit/M, drum unit/C, drum unit/K
4. Number 029 to number 036 developer/Y, developer/M, developer/C, developer/K
5. Number 053, number 054 transfer belt cleaning blade
6. Number 055 to number 058 1st transfer roller/Y, 1st transfer roller/M, 1st transfer roller/C, 1st transfer roller/K
• When the counter exceeds the limit, the color of the character changes.
Numb CSRC Category Parts name Parts Number Count conditions
er parameter
001 Z1 00 Waste Toner / Filter Waste toner box A50UR701 *1
The waste toner full sensor (PS33)
detects the limit automatically.
002 Z1 01 - - -
003 Z1 02 Waste Toner / Filter Filter Box (%) A50UR70A Counts for 7 to 460 for each print
page according to the humidity, the
average coverage or the paper
size.
Shows the count in percentage
with respect to the end of its parts
life.
004 Z1 03 Developing dust-proof filter/1 A50U1689 *1
(%) Shows the count in percentage
life.
The counters number 004 to 008
are reset simultaneously.
005 Z1 04 Developing dust-proof filter/2 A50U1695 *1
(%) Shows the count in percentage
life.
006 Z1 05 PH dust-proof filter (%) A50U1688 *1
life.
007 Z1 06 Electric component cooling A50U1099 *1
filter (%) Shows the count in percentage
life.
I-173

er parameter
008 Z1 07 Suction dust-proof filter (%) A50U1649 *1
life.
009 Z1 08 - - -
010 Z1 09 - - -
011 Z1 0A - - -
012 Z1 0B - - -
013 Z1 0C Charging Corona / Charging Corona/Y (Page) A50UR703 *2
Drum When this counter is reset, number
014 is also reset.
014 Z1 0D Charging Corona/Y(Time %) A50UR703 Counts the charging time of the
charging colona/Y and shows the
count in percentage with respect to
the end of its parts life.
When this counter is reset, number
013 is also reset.
015 Z1 0E Charging Corona/M (Page) A50UR703 *2
016 is also reset.
016 Z1 0F Charging Corona/M(Time %) A50UR703 Counts the charging time of the
charging colona/M and shows the
015 is also reset.
017 Z1 10 Charging Corona/C (Page) A50UR703 *2
018 is also reset.
018 Z1 11 Charging Corona/C(Time %) A50UR703 Counts the charging time of the
charging colona/C and shows the
017 is also reset.
019 Z1 12 Charging Corona/K (Page) A50UR703 *1
020 is also reset.
020 Z1 13 Charging Corona/K(Time %) A50UR703 Counts the charging time of the
charging colona/K and shows the
019 is also reset.
021 Z1 14 Drum Unit/Y (Page) A5WH0Y0 (C1070, *2
C1070P, C71hc, When this counter is reset, number
C1060) 022 is also reset.
A5WJ0Y0 (C1060L)
022 Z1 15 Drum unit/Y (%) A5WH0Y0 (C1070, Counts the running distance of the
C1070P, C71hc, drum/Y and the lubricant applying
C1060) roller/Y and the number of sheets.
A5WJ0Y0 (C1060L) Shows the count that is closest to
its end of the life in percentage with
respect to the end of the life.
021 is also reset.
023 Z1 16 Drum Unit/M (Page) A5WH0Y0 (C1070, *2
A5WJ0Y0 (C1060L)
024 Z1 17 Drum unit/M (%) A5WH0Y0 (C1070, Counts the running distance of the
C1070P, C71hc, drum/M and the lubricant applying
C1060) roller/M and the number of sheets.
023 is also reset.
I-174

er parameter
025 Z1 18 Drum Unit/C (Page) A5WH0Y0 (C1070, *2
A5WJ0Y0 (C1060L)
026 Z1 19 Drum unit/C (%) A5WH0Y0 (C1070, Counts the running distance of the
C1070P, C71hc, drum/C and the lubricant applying
C1060) roller/C and the number of sheets.
025 is also reset.
027 Z1 1A Drum Unit/K (Page) A5WH0Y0 (C1070, *1
A5WJ0Y0 (C1060L)
028 Z1 1B Drum unit/K (%) A5WH0Y0 (C1070, Counts the running distance of the
C1070P, C71hc, drum/K and the lubricant applying
C1060) roller/K and the number of sheets.
027 is also reset.
029 Z1 1C Developing Developer/Y (Page) A3VX700 (C1070, *2
C1070P, C1060, When this counter is reset, number
C1060L) 030 is also reset.
A3VX760 (ineo+1070,
ColorPress71)
A3VX700 (C71hc)
A3VX760 (ineo+71hc)
030 Z1 1D Developer/Y (Distance %) A3VX700 (C1070, Counts the drive distance of the
C1070P, C1060, developing roller/Y and shows the
C1060L) count in percentage with respect to
A3VX760 (ineo+1070, the end of its parts life.
ColorPress71) When this counter is reset, number
A3VX700 (C71hc) 029 is also reset.
A3VX760 (ineo+71hc)
031 Z1 1E Developer/M (Page) A3VX800 (C1070, *2
A3VX860 (ineo+1070,
ColorPress71)
A3VX801 (C71hc:
Other than Europe)
A3VX851 (C71hc:
Europe)
A3VX861 (ineo+71hc)
032 Z1 1F Developer/M (Distance %) A3VX800 (C1070, Counts the drive distance of the
C1070P, C1060, developing roller/M and shows the
A3VX801 (C71hc: 031 is also reset.
Other than Europe)
A3VX851 (C71hc:
Europe)
A3VX861 (ineo+71hc)
033 Z1 20 Developer/C (Page) A3VX900 (C1070, *2
A3VX960 (ineo+1070,
ColorPress71)
A3VX901 (C71hc)
A3VX961 (ineo+71hc)
034 Z1 21 Developer/C (Distance %) A3VX900 (C1070, Counts the drive distance of the
C1070P, C1060, developing roller/C and shows the
A3VX961 (ineo+71hc)
I-175

er parameter
035 Z1 22 Developer/K (Page) A3VX600 (C1070, *1
A3VX660 (ineo+1070,
ColorPress71)
A3VX600 (C71hc)
A3VX660 (ineo+71hc)
036 Z1 23 Developer/K (Distance %) A3VX600 (C1070, Counts the drive distance of the
C1070P, C1060, developing roller/K and shows the
A3VX660 (ineo+71hc)
037 Z1 24 Developing Unit/Y (Page) A50UR702 *2
038 is also reset.
038 Z1 25 Developing unit/Y (Distance A50UR702 Counts the drive distance of the
%) developing roller/Y and shows the
037 is also reset.
039 Z1 26 Developing Unit/M (Page) A50UR702 *2
040 is also reset.
040 Z1 27 Developing unit/M (Distance A50UR702 Counts the drive distance of the
%) developing roller/M and shows the
039 is also reset.
041 Z1 28 Developing Unit/C (Page) A50UR702 *2
Resetting this counter also resets
No.042.
042 Z1 29 Developing unit/C (Distance A50UR702 Counts the drive distance of the
%) developing roller/C and shows the
041 is also reset.
043 Z1 2A Developing Unit/K (Page) A50UR702 *1
044 is also reset.
044 Z1 2B Developing unit/K (Distance A50UR702 Counts the drive distance of the
%) developing roller/K and shows the
043 is also reset.
045 Z1 2C - - -
046 Z1 2D Intermediate Trans. Transfer roller bearing/K A50U5057 Counts the drive distance of the
(Distance %) intermediate transfer belt and
shows the count in percentage with
respect to the end of its parts life.
063 is also reset.
047 Z1 2E Transfer roller bearing/Y, the 65AA2638 Counts the drive distance of the
transfer roller bearing/M, and intermediate transfer belt and
the transfer roller bearing/C shows the count in percentage with
(distance %) respect to the end of its parts life.
No.061.
048 Z1 2F Transfer belt cleaning unit A50UR706 Counts the drive distance of the
(distance %) intermediate transfer belt and
When you reset this counter,
number 051 to number 054,
number 071 to number 072,
number 080 are also reset.
I-176

er parameter
049 Z1 30 Intermediate Transfer Unit - *1
046 to number 048, number 050 to
number 061, number 063, number
064 to number 072, number 080
are also reset.
050 Z1 31 Intermediate Transfer Belt A1DU5042 *1
064 is also reset.
051 Z1 32 Transfer Belt Cleaning Unit A50UR706 *1
51 to number 54, number 71,
number 72, number 80 is also
reset.
052 Z1 33 Toner Collection Sheet A1DUR71C *1
071 is also reset.
053 Z1 34 Belt Cleaning Blade(Page) A50UR70K *1
054 is also reset.
054 Z1 35 Belt Cleaning Blade(Distance A50UR70K Counts the drive distance of the
%) intermediate transfer belt and
053 is also reset.
055 Z1 36 1st Transfer Roller/Y A50U5012 *2
065 is also reset.
056 Z1 37 1st Transfer Roller/M A50U5012 *2
066 is also reset.
057 Z1 38 1st Transfer Roller/C A50U5012 *2
067 is also reset.
058 Z1 39 1st Transfer Roller/K A50U5012 *1
068 is also reset.
059 Z1 3A 2nd Transfer Roller/Up A50U5004 *1
069 is also reset.
060 Z1 3B - - -
061 Z1 3C Intermediate Trans. Transfer Roller Bearing/YMC 65AA2638 *2
No.047.
062 Z1 3D Intermediate Separation Claw 26NA8251 Counts the operation time and
Solenoid (operation time) displays it.
063 Z1 3E Transfer Roller Bearing/K A50U5057 *1
No.046.
064 Z1 3F Intermediate transfer belt A1DU5042 Counts the drive distance of the
050 is also reset.
065 Z1 40 1st transfer roller/Y (Time %) A50U5012 Counts the charging time of the 1st
transfer roller/Y and shows the
055 is also reset.
066 Z1 41 1st Transfer Roller/M (Time A50U5012 Counts the charging time of the 1st
%) transfer roller/M and shows the
056 is also reset.
I-177

er parameter
067 Z1 42 1st Transfer Roller/C (Time A50U5012 Counts the charging time of the 1st
%) transfer roller/C and shows the
057 is also reset.
068 Z1 43 1st Transfer Roller/K (Time A50U5012 Counts the charging time of the 1st
%) transfer roller/K and shows the
058 is also reset.
069 Z1 44 2nd transfer roller/Up A50U5004 Counts the drive distance of the
(Distance %) 2nd transfer roller/Up and shows
the count in percentage with
059 is also reset.
070 Z1 45 Transfer belt separation claw A1DUR719 Counts the operation time and
(number of times) displays it.
071 Z1 46 Toner collection sheet A1DUR71C Counts the drive distance of the
052 is also reset.
072 Z1 47 Side seal (distance %) A50U5316 Counts the drive distance of the
intermediate transfer belt and
080 is also reset.
073 Z1 48 2nd transfer C-clip (Time%) V218060086 Counts the charging time of the
2nd transfer roller/Lw and shows
the count in percentage with
074 Z1 49 2nd Transfer Unit A50UR705 *1
075, number 076, number 078,
number 079 are also reset.
075 Z1 4A 2nd transfer roller/Lw A50U5200 *1
078 is also reset.
076 Z1 4B Separate Discharging Unit A50UR70B *1
079 is also reset.
077 Z1 4C 2nd Transfer Earth Plate A50UR70G Counts the chargin time of the 2nd
Assy (Time %) transfer roller/Lw and shows the
078 Z1 4D Discharging time of the 2nd A50U5200 Counts the chargin time of the 2nd
transfer roller/Lw (%) transfer roller/Lw and shows the
075 is also reset.
079 Z1 4E Separation discharging plate A50UR70B Counts the charging time of the
unit discharging time (%) separation discharging unit and
076 is also reset.
080 Z1 4F Intermediate Trans. Side Seal A50U5316 *1
072 is also reset.
081 Z1 50 - - -
082 Z1 51 Fusing Fusing Unit A50UR707 (Japan) *1
A50UR708 (North When this counter is reset, number
America) 083 to number 103, number 109 to
A50UR709 (Europe) number 110 are also reset.
I-178

er parameter
083 Z1 52 Fusing Roller/1 A50U7201 *1
084 Z1 53 Fusing Roller/Lw A50U7401 *1
085 Z1 54 Fusing Belt A50U7577 *1
086 Z1 55 Belt Regulating Sleeve A50U7241 *1
087 Z1 56 Fusing Paper Exit Roller/Up A50U7609 1 count for each paper exit in the
single side mode, 2 counts in the
double side mode.
088 Z1 57 Heat Insulating Sleeve/Up A03U7295 *1
089 Z1 58 Fusing Bearing/Lw 26NA5371 *1
090 Z1 59 Insulating Sleeve/Lw A50U7563 *1
091 Z1 5A Fusing Roller/2 A50U7205 *1
092 Z1 5B Fusing Gear/1 A50U7527 *1
093 Z1 5C Fusing Bearing/Up A1UD7235 *1
094 Z1 5D Fusing Gear/2 A03U8095 *1
095 Z1 5E Fusing Temperature Sensor/2 A50UM506 *1
096 Z1 5F Fusing Gear/3 A50U7522 *1
097 Z1 60 Fusing separating claw assy A50UR72U *1
098 Z1 61 Fusing Heater Lamp Assy/Up A50UM31A (Japan) *1
A50UM31E (North
America)
A50UM31F (Europe)
099 Z1 62 Fusing Heater Lamp/4 A50UM32A (Japan) *1
A50UM32E (North
America)
A50UM32F (Europe)
100 Z1 63 Fusing Temperature Sensor/3 A50UR70F *1
101 Z1 64 Fusing Temperature Sensor/4 A50UR70E *1
102 Z1 65 Fusing Temperature Sensor/1 65AA8801 *1
103 Z1 66 Fusing Temperature Sensor/5 A50UR72Y *1
104 Z1 67 - - -
105 Z1 68 - - -
106 Z1 69 - - -
107 Z1 6A - - -
108 Z1 6B - - -
109 Z1 6C Fusing Neutralizing Ring A50U7337 *1
110 Z1 6D Neutralizing Flat Spring Assy A50UR733 *1
111 Z1 6E - - -
112 Z1 6F - - -
113 Z1 70 Main body tray, bypass Paper Feed/Separation Roller 25SA4096 1 count for each exit of paper from
tray Rubber/1 tray 1.
114 Z1 71 Paper Feed/Separation Roller 25SA4096 1 count for each exit of paper from
Rubber/2 tray 2.
115 Z1 72 - - -
116 Z1 73 Main body tray, bypass MB506 Paper Feed/ 25SA4096 1 count for each paper exit from
tray Separation Roller Rubber/BP bypass.
117 Z1 74 Pick-up Roller/1 A1DUR71J 1 count for each exit of paper from
tray 1.
118 Z1 75 Pick-up Roller/2 A1DUR71J 1 count for each exit of paper from
tray 2.
119 Z1 76 - - -
120 Z1 77 Main body tray, bypass MB506 Pick-up Roller/BP A21ER703 1 count for each paper exit from
tray bypass.
121 Z1 78 Paper Feed Clutch/1 56AA8201 1 count for each exit of paper from
tray 1.
122 Z1 79 Paper Feed Clutch/2 56AA8201 1 count for each exit of paper from
tray 2.
123 Z1 7A - - -
124 Z1 7B Main body tray, bypass MB506 Paper Feed Clutch/ 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit from
tray BP bypass.
125 Z1 7C Pre-registration Clutch/1 56AA8201 1 count for each exit of paper from
tray 1.
I-179

er parameter
126 Z1 7D Pre-registration Clutch/2 56AA8201 1 count for each exit of paper from
tray 2.
127 Z1 7E - - -
128 Z1 7F Paper conveyance Intermediate Conveyance 56AA8201 1 count for each exit of paper from
Clutch/1 tray 2.
129 Z1 80 Intermediate Conveyance 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit in the
Clutch/2 single side mode, 1 count in the
double side mode.
130 Z1 81 Intermediate Conveyance 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit in the
Clutch/3 single side mode, 1 count in the
double side mode.
131 Z1 82 Registration Cleaning Sheet A50UR70D 1 count for each paper exit in the
Assy single side mode, 2 counts in the
double side mode.
132 Z1 83 Registration Roller A50U7101 1 count for each paper exit in the
double side mode.
133 Z1 84 Decurler Roller A50U8605 1 count for each paper exit in the
double side mode.
134 Z1 85 Paper Exit Decurler Roller A50U8908 1 count for each paper exit
135 Z1 86 ADU Conveyance Clutch A03UM201 1 count for each paper exit in the
duplex mode (not counted in the
simplex mode).
136 Z1 87 Registration Roller Bearing A03U8128 1 count for each paper exit in the
double side mode.
137 Z1 88 Registration idler gear A50U7137 1 count for each paper exit in the
double side mode.
138 Z1 89 ADU Pre-regist. Clutch A03UM201 1 count for each paper exit in the
duplex mode (not counted in the
simplex mode).
139 Z1 8A - - -
140 Z1 8B - - -
141 Z1 8C - - -
142 Z1 8D - - -
143 Z1 8E Others Exposure ON Time A0EDM310 Accumulation of time when the
lamp is on. 1 count per second.
Outputted per minute.
144 Z1 8F Main Power Switch A4EUM600 1 count for each activation of the
image control (the times that the
CPU is started except with the sub
power SW, CSRC, SHUTOFF, WT)
145 Z1 90 Sub Power Switch A50UM603 1 count for each deactivation with
main SW_OFF
146 Z1 91 Door Switch 40AA8501 1 count for each time the front door
opens.
147 Z1 92 Toner Supply Door Switch 12QR8601 1 count for each time the replenish
toner door opens
148 Z1 93 - - -
149 Z1 94 - - -
150 Z1 95 - - -
151 Z1 96 SD TU503 Slit Cutter Assy/Fr A65WF701 1 count for each entrance reversal
output in the slit mode
152 Z1 97 TU503 Slit Cutter Assy/Rr A65WF702 1 count for each entrance reversal
153 Z1 98 TU503 Rotary Cutter Assy A65WF700 1 count for each entrance reversal
154 Z1 99 TU503 Registration Roller A65W6500 1 count for each entrance reversal
I-180

er parameter
155 Z1 9A CR101 Creaser Motor A65XM103 1 count for each booklet exit during
the saddle stitching, half-folding +
crease
2 count for each booklet exit during
the tri-folding + crease
the perfect binding + back cover
crease
the perfect binding + cover gutter
crease
the perfect binding + back cover
crease + cover gutter crease
Counts according to the number of
creases (1 to 4) for 1 sheet exit
during the sub tray, through
conveyance + crease
156 Z1 9B EF EF103 Fusing Unit A57VR701 (Japan) *1
A57VR702 (North When this counter is reset, number
America) 157 to number 177, number 183 to
A57VR703 (Europe) number 184 are also reset.
157 Z1 9C EF103 Fusing Roller/1 A57V7201 *1
158 Z1 9D EF103 Fusing Roller/Lw A57V7401 *1
159 Z1 9E EF103 Fusing Belt A57V7202 *1
160 Z1 9F EF103 Belt Regulating A50U7241 *1
Sleeve
161 Z1 A0 EF103 Fusing Paper Exit A50U7609 1 count for each paper exit in the
Roller/Up single side mode, 2 counts in the
double side mode.
162 Z1 A1 EF103 Fusing Temperature A50UM506 *1
Sensor/2
163 Z1 A2 EF103 Heat Insulating A03U7295 *1
Sleeve/ Up
164 Z1 A3 EF103 Fusing Bearing/Lw 26NA5371 *1
165 Z1 A4 EF103 Heat Insulating A50U7563 *1
Sleeve/ Lw
166 Z1 A5 EF103 Fusing Roller/2 A50U7205 *1
167 Z1 A6 EF103 Fusing Gear/1 A50U7527 *1
168 Z1 A7 EF103 Fusing Bearing/Up A1UD7235 *1
169 Z1 A8 EF103 Fusing Gear/2 A03U8095 *1
170 Z1 A9 EF Fusing Heater Lamp A50UM31A (Japan) *1
Assy/Up A50UM31E (North
America)
A50UM31F (Europe)
171 Z1 AA EF103 Fusing Heater Lamp/4 A50UM32A (Japan) *1
A50UM32E (North
America)
A50UM32F (Europe)
172 Z1 AB EF103 Fusing Temperature A50UR70F *1
Sensor/3
173 Z1 AC EF103 Fusing Temperature A50UR70E *1
Sensor/4
174 Z1 AD EF103 Fusing Temperature 65AA8801 *1
Sensor/1
175 Z1 AE EF103 Fusing Temperature A50UR72Y *1
Sensor/5
176 Z1 AF EF103 Fusing Gear/3 A50U7522 *1
177 Z1 B0 EF103 fusing separating claw A50UR72U *1
assy
178 Z1 B1 - - -
179 Z1 B2 - - -
180 Z1 B3 - - -
181 Z1 B4 - - -
182 Z1 B5 - - -
183 Z1 B6 EF EF103 Neutralizing Ring A50U7337 *1
I-181

er parameter
184 Z1 B7 EF103 Neutralizing Flat A50UR733 *1
Spring Assy
185 Z1 B8 - - -
186 Z1 B9 - - -
187 Z1 BA OT OT502 Paper Exit Roller A0438907 1 count for each paper exit (when
OT-502 is mounted).
188 Z1 BB OT502 Paper Exit Roller/2 65AA4818 1 count for each paper exit (when
OT-502 is mounted).
189 Z1 BC OT502 Paper Holding Roller 65AA4849 1 count for each paper exit (when
OT-502 is mounted).
190 Z1 BD - - -
191 Z1 BE - - -
192 Z1 BF PFU, LCT LU202 Pick-up Roller A03X5652 1 count for each paper exit from
LCT.
193 Z1 C0 PF602 Feed/Sep. Roller A03X5653, A03X5654 1 count for each paper exit from
LCT.
194 Z1 C1 LU202 Paper Feed Clutch 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit from
LCT.
195 Z1 C2 LU202 Pre-registration Clutch 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit from
LCT.
196 Z1 C3 - - -
197 Z1 C4 - - -
198 Z1 C5 PFU, LCT PF602m Pick-up Rubber A03X5652 1 count for each exit of paper from
(Tray 3) PFU tray 3.
199 Z1 C6 PF602m Feed roller and A03X5653, A03X5654 1 count for each exit of paper from
separation roller (tray 3) PFU tray 3.
200 Z1 C7 PF602m Paper feed clutch/1 56AA8201 1 count for each exit of paper from
(tray 3) PFU tray 3.
201 Z1 C8 PF602m Separation clutch/1 56AA8201 1 count for each exit of paper from
202 Z1 C9 PF602m Pick-up rubber (tray A03X5652 1 count for each exit of paper from
4) PFU tray 4.
203 Z1 CA PF602m Feed roller and A03X5653, A03X5654 1 count for each exit of paper from
separation roller (tray 4) PFU tray 4.
204 Z1 CB PF602m Paper feed clutch/2 56AA8201 1 count for each exit of paper from
205 Z1 CC PF602m Separation clutch/2 56AA8201 1 count for each exit of paper from
206 Z1 CD PF602m Vertical conveyance 56AA8201 1 count for each exit of paper from
clutch/1 PFU tray 3.
207 Z1 CE PF602m Vertical conveyance 56AA8201 1 count for each exit of paper from
208 Z1 CF PF602m Vertical conveyance 56AA8201 1 count for each exit of paper from
209 Z1 D0 PF602m Pre-registration 56AA8201 1 count for each exit of paper from
clutch PFU tray 3 or PFU tray 4
210 Z1 D1 PF602m Horizontal 56AA8201 1 count for each exit of paper from
conveyance clutch/1 PFU tray 3 or PFU tray 4
211 Z1 D2 PF602m Horizontal 56AA8201 1 count for each exit of paper from
conveyance clutch/2 PFU tray 3 or PFU tray 4
212 Z1 D3 PF707 horizontal conveyance A55C7162 1 count for each exit of paper from
roller/1 PFU tray 3 and PFU tray 4 and
PFU tray 5.
213 Z1 D4 PF707 horizontal conveyance A03U8128 1 count for each exit of paper from
roller bearing/1 PFU tray 3 and PFU tray 4 and
PFU tray 5.
214 Z1 D5 PF707 horizontal conveyance A55C7162 1 count for each exit of paper from
roller/2 PFU tray 3 and PFU tray 4 and
PFU tray 5.
215 Z1 D6 PF707 horizontal conveyance A03U8128 1 count for each exit of paper from
roller bearing/2 PFU tray 3 and PFU tray 4 and
PFU tray 5.
216 Z1 D7 PF707 Suction Belt Clutch/1 56AA8201 1 count for each exit of paper from
PFU tray 3.
I-182

er parameter
PFU tray 4.
PFU tray 5.
219 Z1 DA PF707 Vert. Conv. CL1/2, 56AA8201 1 count for each exit of paper from
Exit CL1 PFU tray 3.
220 Z1 DB PF707 Exit Clutch/2 56AA8201 1 count for each exit of paper from
PFU tray 4.
221 Z1 DC PF707 Vert. Conv. Clutch/3,/4 56AA8201 1 count for each exit of paper from
PFU tray 3 and PFU tray 4.
222 Z1 DD PF707 Regist. CL A03UM201 1 count for each exit of paper from
PFU tray 3 and PFU tray 4 and
PFU tray 5.
223 Z1 DE PF707 horizontal conveyance A03UM201 1 count for each exit of paper from
CL1/2 PFU tray 3 and PFU tray 4 and
PFU tray 5.
224 Z1 DF PF707 Pre-registration A03U8128 1 count for each exit of paper from
Bearing PFU tray 3 and PFU tray 4 and
PFU tray 5.
225 Z1 E0 PF707 Pre-registration Roller A55C7160 1 count for each exit of paper from
PFU tray 5.
226 Z1 E1 PF707 Loop Roller/Up A1RG7161 1 count for each exit of paper from
PFU tray 5.
227 Z1 E2 PF707 Loop Roller Bearing/ A03U8128 1 count for each exit of paper from
Lw PFU tray 5.
228 Z1 E3 PF707 Loop Roller/Lw A1RG6075 1 count for each exit of paper from
PFU tray 5.
229 Z1 E4 PF707 roller pressure release A55CR702 2 counts for each ON of horizontal
motor conveyance/2 pressure release PS
230 Z1 E5 - - -
231 Z1 E6 - - -
232 Z1 E7 - - -
233 Z1 E8 - - -
234 Z1 E9 FD FD503 Pick-up Rubber (Up) 50BAR701 Counts the paper feed from PI
upper tray.
235 Z1 EA FD503 Sep. Rubber (Up) 13QNR704 Counts the paper feed from PI
upper tray.
236 Z1 EB FD503 Paper Feed Rubber 50BAR702 Counts the paper feed from PI
(Up) upper tray.
237 Z1 EC FD503 Pick-up Rubber (Lw) 50BAR701 Counts the paper feed from PI
lower tray.
238 Z1 ED FD503 Sep. Rubber (Lw) 13QNR704 Counts the paper feed from PI
lower tray.
239 Z1 EE FD503 Paper Feed Rubber 50BAR702 Counts the paper feed from PI
(Lw) lower tray.
240 Z1 EF FD503 Punch Unit A0H0R700, 1 count for each paper exit in the
A0H0R701, punch mode.
A0H0R702
241 Z1 F0 FD503 Roller Solenoid 15AGR723 1 count for each paper exit in the
punch or folding mode (all size).
242 Z1 F1 FD503 2nd folding roller 15AGR761 • 1 count for each paper exit in the
solenoid folding mode (all size)
• 1 count for each paper exit in the
punch mode (paper length 220
mm or larger).
243 Z1 F2 FD503 Tray Up-down Motor 129U-108 1 count for each paper exit to the
main tray.
244 Z1 F3 - - -
245 Z1 F4 - - -
246 Z1 F5 LS LS1 (LS-505, LS-506 1st 15AV8252 1 count for each paper exit in the
tandem) paper press non-sort and sort mode (all size).
solenoid/1
I-183

er parameter
247 Z1 F6 LS1 (LS-505, LS-506 1st 15AV8253 1 count for each paper exit in the
tandem) rear stopper non-sort and sort mode (all size).
solenoid
tandem) paper press non-sort and sort mode (Length
solenoid/2 295 mm or more and Width 226
mm or more).
tandem) paper press non-sort mode and the sort mode.
solenoid/3
250 Z1 F9 LS1 (LS-505, LS-506 1st 15AV8003 Counts operation number of times
tandem) stacker tray up down of the stacker tray up down motor.
motor
251 Z1 FA - - -
252 Z1 FB - - -
253 Z1 FC LS LS2 (LS-505, LS-506 2nd 15AV8252 1 count for each paper exit in the
tandem) paper press non-sort and sort mode (all size).
solenoid/1
254 Z1 FD LS2 (LS-505, LS-506 2nd 15AV8253 1 count for each paper exit in the
tandem) rear stopper non-sort and sort mode (all size).
solenoid
255 Z1 FE LS2 (LS-505, LS-506 2nd 15AV8251 1 count for each paper exit in the
tandem) paper press non-sort and sort mode (Length
solenoid/2 295 mm or more and Width 226
mm or more).
256 Z1 FF LS2 (LS-505, LS-506 2nd 15AV8255 1 count for each paper exit in the
tandem) paper press non-sort mode and the sort mode.
solenoid/3
257 Z7 00 LS2 (LS-505, LS-506 2nd 15AV8003 Counts operation number of times
tandem) stacker tray up down of the stacker tray up down motor.
motor
258 Z7 01 SD SD513 Conveyance Guide A729R70S On the fold & staple/half-fold mode,
Assy/Up 1 count for each paper exit to the
fold & staple section
259 Z7 02 SD513 Clamp Hanging Wire A65U6908 1 count for each book exit in the
fold & staple mode/half-folding
mode when FD-504 has been
installed.
260 Z7 03 SD506 Trimmer Blade Kit A0H2R901 1 count for each booklet exit
completion in the trimming mode.
Counts when the new trimming unit
is mounted.
261 Z7 04 SD506 Trimmer Board Assy A0H2B622 1 count for each booklet exit
is mounted.
262 Z7 05 SD506 Trimmer Press Motor A0H2M101 1 count for each booklet exit
is mounted.
263 Z7 06 SD506 Trimmer Blade Motor A0H2M102 1 count for each booklet exit
is mounted.
264 Z7 07 SD506 Trimmer Unit A0H2A620 1 count for each booklet exit
is mounted.
265 Z7 08 SD506 Stapler Assy/Rt 15AN-550 1 count for each paper exit in the
saddle stitch mode.
Counts when either the new
trimming unit or the previous
trimming unit is mounted.
266 Z7 09 SD506 Stapler Assy/Lt 15AN-550 1 count for each paper exit in the
saddle stitch mode.
I-184

er parameter
267 Z7 0A SD513 Alignment Plate Sol A65UN165 1 count for each book exit in the
Wiring fold & staple mode/half-folding
mode
268 Z7 0B SD513 Booklet Holding Wire/ A65U6290 1 count for each book exit in the
1 fold & staple mode/half-folding
mode
269 Z7 0C SD513 Booklet Holding Wire/ A65U6300 1 count for each book exit in the
mode
270 Z7 0D SD506 Roller Release SD/ 15AN8251 1 count for each paper exit to the
1,/3 folding section.
271 Z7 0E SD506 Solenoid 15ANR710 1 count for each paper exit to the
folding section.
272 Z7 0F SD506 FNS Solenoid/2 15ANR771 1 count for each paper exit to the
stacker.
273 Z7 10 SD506 Bundle Press Stage 15AN7719 1 count for each time the bundle up
Gear and down section moves up (PS45
is ON).
274 Z7 11 SD513 Booklet Holding Wire/ A65U6302 1 count for each book exit in the
mode
275 Z7 12 SD513 Finger Torque Limiter A03X5656 1 count for each book exit in the
mode
276 Z7 13 SD513 Fore Edge Finger 55VA7903 1 count for each book exit in the
Gear fold & staple mode/half-folding
mode
277 Z7 14 FS FS612 Stapler Unit/Fr 15JM-501 1 count for each exit in the 1-staple
at front, 2-staples, saddle stitching
mode.
278 Z7 15 FS612 Stapler Unit/Rr 15JM-501 1 count for each exit in the 1-staple
at front, 2-staples, saddle stitching
mode.
279 Z7 16 FS531/FS612 Shift Roller A10UA736 1 count each time an even number
Motor of the print is exited in the sort
mode.
280 Z7 17 FNS Paper Exit Opening A10UA736 1 count for each starting job for the
Motor size A4R and 8.5 x 11R, and 1
count at exiting these size in staple
mode.
1 count for each start of saddle
stitch, half-folding.
281 Z7 18 FS612 Folding Knife Motor 120H8001 1 count for each paper exit in the
saddle stitch mode, half-folding
mode, tri-folding mode.
282 Z7 19 FS531/612 Bypass Gate 15JKR703 1 count for each paper exit for the
Solenoid A4, B5, 8.5 x 11 and 16K sizes in
the staple mode.
283 Z7 1A FS612 Tri-folding Gate 15JKR703 1 count for each paper exit in the
Solenoid tri-folding mode.
284 Z7 1B FS531/612 Paper Exit Roller/ 122H4825 1 count for each paper exit to the
A FNS main tray.
1 count for each paper exit in the
staple mode.
I-185

er parameter
285 Z7 1C FS531/612 Paper Exit Roller/ A04D8904 1 count for each paper exit to the
B FNS main tray.
1 count for each paper exit in the
staple mode.
286 Z7 1D FNS Intermediate Conv. 13QE4531 1 count for each paper exit in the
Roller staple mode or saddle stitching
mode or half-folding mode or tri-
folding mode.
287 Z7 1E FS531/612 Paper Assist 20AK4210 1 count for each paper exit in the
Roller staple mode or saddle stitching
mode or half-folding mode or tri-
folding mode.
288 Z7 1F FS531 Stapler Unit/Fr A07RA735 1 count for each exit in the 1-staple
at front, 2-staples.
289 Z7 20 FS531 Stapler Unit/Rr A07RA736 1 count for each exit in the 1-staple
at front, 2-staples.
290 Z7 21 FS531 Cleaning Plate Assy A07RA741 1 count for each paper in the staple
mode.
291 Z7 22 - - -
292 Z7 23 - - -
293 Z7 24 - - -
294 Z7 25 - - -
295 Z7 26 FS FS532 Staple Unit A4F3R714 1 count for each booklet exit in
either of the 1-staple at front or 1-
staple at rear mode.
2 counts for each booklet exit
completion in the 2-staple mode.
296 Z7 27 FS532 Paddle A4F37500 1 count for each paper exit
completion to the staple stacker.
297 Z7 28 FS532 Idler Roller/1 A0GY7121 1 count for each paper exit
298 Z7 29 FS532 Idler Roller/2 A0GY7122 1 count for each paper exit
299 Z7 2A - - -
300 Z7 2B - - -
301 Z7 2C FS SD510 Staple Unit A4F47300 2 counts for each booklet exit
completion in the saddle stitching
mode.
302 Z7 2D SD510 2nd Folding Gate A0HTM200 1 count for each paper exit in the
Solenoid tri-folding mode.
303 Z7 2E SD510 Rear Gripper Solenoid 26NA8251 1 count for each paper (356 mm or
more in length) exit completion to
the staple stacker (saddle stitching
or bundle center-folding or tri-
folding)
304 Z7 2F SD510 Paddle A4F4R70D, 1 count for each paper exit
A4F4R70E, completion to the staple stacker
A4F4R70F (Saddle stitching or bundle half-
folding or tri-folding)
305 Z7 30 - - -
306 Z7 31 - - -
307 Z7 32 FS PI502 Paper Feed Clutch/Up 13QN8201 1 count for each PI upper paper
feed
308 Z7 33 PI502 Pick-up Roller/Up 50BAR701 1 count for each PI upper paper
feed
309 Z7 34 PI502 Paper Feed Roller/Up 13QNR705 1 count for each PI upper paper
feed
310 Z7 35 PI502 Separation Roller/Up 13QNR704 1 count for each PI upper paper
feed
311 Z7 36 PI502 Torque Limiter/Up 13QN4073 1 count for each PI upper paper
feed
312 Z7 37 PI502 Paper Feed Clutch/Lw 13QN8201 1 count for each PI lower paper
feed
313 Z7 38 PI502 Pick-up Roller/Lw 50BAR701 1 count for each PI lower paper
feed
314 Z7 39 PI502 Paper Feed Roller/Lw 13QNR705 1 count for each PI lower paper
feed
I-186

er parameter
315 Z7 3A PI502 Separation Roller/Lw 13QNR704 1 count for each PI lower paper
feed
316 Z7 3B PI502 Torque Limiter/Lw 13QN4073 1 count for each PI lower paper
feed
317 Z7 3C - - -
318 Z7 3D FS PK-522 Punch Unit A4FAW02 (Japan, 2- Number of sheets output in the
holes) punch mode
A4FAW12 (North
America, 2-holes or 3-
holes)
A4FAW22 (Europe 2-
holes or 4-holes)
A4FAWG2 (Swedish,
4-holes)
319 Z7 3E PK511 Punch Unit A04E0Y0 Number of punching by PK
320 Z7 3F PK512 Punch Unit A04F0Y1, A04F0Y0 Number of punching by PK
321 Z7 40 PK513 Punch Unit A04G0G0 Number of punching by PK
322 Z7 41 - - -
323 Z7 42 - - -
324 Z7 43 PB PB503 Sub Tray Paper Exit 15ANR714 1 count for each paper exit in the
SD PB sub tray
325 Z7 44 PB503 SCswitchback A0V9M101 1 count for each paper exit in the
Release Motor PB stack section
326 Z7 45 PB503 FD Alignment 15AA8251 1 count for each paper exit in the
Solenoid PB stack section
327 Z7 46 PB503 SC Pressure Arm A075B746 1 count for each paper exit in the
Solenoid PB stack section
328 Z7 47 PB503 Switchback Roller 13GQ4519 1 count for each paper exit from
the PB
329 Z7 48 PB503 Pick-up Roller 55VAR750 1 count for each book exit in the
PB tray cover mode
330 Z7 49 PB503 Paper Feed/Sep. 55VAR749 1 count for each book exit in the
Roller PB tray cover mode
331 Z7 4A PB503 Cover Paper Pick-up 56AA8201 1 count for each book exit in the
Clutch PB tray cover mode
332 Z7 4B PB503 Cover Paper Sep. 56AA8201 1 count for each book exit in the
Clutch PB tray cover mode
333 Z7 4C PB503 Roller Cutter Blade A0756230 1 count for each book exit when
Assy the PB cover paper trimming is
used.
334 Z7 4D PB503 Exhaust Filter/A A15X3017 1 count for each paper exit in the
PB stack section
335 Z7 4E PB503 Exhaust Filter/B A15X3018 1 count for each paper exit in the
PB stack section
336 Z7 4F PB503 Entrance gate 15ANR714 1 count for each book exit in other
solenoid than PB tray cover mode
337 Z7 50 PB503 Glue Tank Assy A15XA36A, Time during which tank applying
A15XA36E, roller rotates. 1 count per 1 hour.
A15XA36F
338 Z7 51 PB503 Pellet Supply Cooling 27LA8051 1 count for each paper exit in the
Fan PB stack section
339 Z7 52 PB503 One-way Clutch/A 13GQ7709 1 count for each paper exit in the
PB stack section
340 Z7 53 PB503 One-way Clutch/B 13GQ7709 1 count for each paper exit in the
PB stack section
341 Z7 54 PB503 Glue Roller Gear A0753799 Time during which tank applying
Bearing roller rotates. 1 count per 8 hours.
342 Z7 55 - - -
343 Z7 56 - - -
344 Z7 57 GP GP501 Aligner Idler Roller A0N9PP3X 1 count for each paper exit in the
Assy multi punch mode.
345 Z7 58 GP501 Bypass Assembly A0N9PP54 1 count for each paper exit
346 Z7 59 GP501 Roller Energy Drive A0N9PP1J 1 count for each paper exit in the
multi punch mode.
I-187

er parameter
347 Z7 5A GP501 Belt Aligner (Green) A0N9PP2X 1 count for each paper exit in the
multi punch mode.
348 Z7 5B GP501 Back Gauge A0N9PP59 1 count for each paper exit in the
Mechanism multi punch mode.
349 Z7 5C - - -
350 Z7 5D - - -
351 Z7 5E HM HM102 Humidification Roller/ A1TU5001 1 count for each paper exit
Rt
352 Z7 5F HM102 Humidification Roller/ A1TU5002 1 count for each paper exit
Lt
353 Z7 60 HM102 Water Feed Roller A1TU5003 1 count for each sheet with the
humidification being active.
354 Z7 61 HM102 Water Feed Filter A1TU5215 1 count for each sheet with the
355 Z7 62 HM102 Pump Motor A1TUR704 1 count for each sheet with the
356 Z7 63 RU RU516, RU517 charging A8AK1030 Small size: 1 count for each paper
driven roller (number of exit with charging in the simplex
sheets) mode, 2 counts in the duplex mode
Large size: 2 counts for each paper
exit with charging in the simplex
mode, 4 counts in the duplex mode
357 is also reset.
357 Z7 64 RU516, RU517 charging A8AK1030 Counts the charging time of the
driven roller (time %) charging driven roller and displays
it in percentage with respect to the
end of the life.
356 is also reset.
358 Z7 65 GP GP502 Pull Back Pad A4F6PP00 1 count for each paper that is
stacked in the GP stacker.
359 Z7 66 GP502 Suction Cup A4F6PP03 1 count for each paper that is
360 Z7 67 GP502 Die Set Felt A4F6PP01 1 count for each paper that is
361 Z7 68 GP502 Die Set A4F6PP02 1 count for each paper that is
362 Z7 69 GP502 Book Chute Mylar A4F6PPH1 1 count for each paper that is
363 Z7 6A RU RU516, RU517 charging A1RF5089 *1
roller bearing
364 Z7 6B RU510 Straight Gate A4FC7030 1 count for each paper reversed in
RU and exited (2 counts for the
overlapped paper in RU and
exited)
365 Z7 6C RU510 Entrance Roller/1,/2 A4FC7014 1 count for each paper exit
366 Z7 6D RU510 Stacker Ent./Merge A4FC7002 1 count for each paper exit
Roller
367 Z7 6E RU510 Paper Re-feed Roller A4FC7019 1 count for each paper exit
368 Z7 6F RU510 Paper Exit Roller A4FCR904 1 count for each paper exit
369 Z7 70 RU510 Driven Roller A0GY7121 1 count for each paper exit
370 Z7 71 RU510 Bearing/K A00V2406, 1 count for each paper exit
A4FCR905
371 Z7 72 RU510 Ent,/Exit Conv. Belt A0GE2105, 1 count for each paper exit
A4FC7015
372 Z7 73 RU510 Conv./Exit Pulley A4FC7077, 1 count for each paper exit
A4FC7078
373 Z7 74 RU510 Entrance/Paper Exit A4FCR900 1 count for each paper exit
Motor
374 Z7 75 RU510 Stack Switch Motor A083M100 1 count for each paper reversed in
RU and exited (2 counts for the
overlapped paper in RU and
exited)
375 Z7 76 RU510 Re-feed Roller Gear A4FC7022, 1 count for each paper exit
A4FC7023
I-188

er parameter
376 Z7 77 RU516, RU517 charging A8AK1031 Small size: 1 count for each paper
roller (number of sheets) exit with charging in the simplex
Large size: 2 counts for each paper
exit with charging in the simplex
377 is also reset.
377 Z7 78 RU516, RU517 charging A8AK1031 Counts the charging time of the
roller (time %) charging driven roller and displays
it in percentage with respect to the
end of the life.
376 is also reset.
378 Z7 79 ADF DF626 Pick-up Roller 9J073301 1 count for each paper passes
through the ADF
379 Z7 7A DF626 Paper Feed Roller A00J5636 1 count for each paper passes
through the ADF
380 Z7 7B DF626 Separation Roller A1085639 1 count for each paper passes
through the ADF
381 Z7 7C SD SD513 Staple Unit A65U7779 2 counts for each booklet exit
completion in the fold & staple
mode for 2 stapling.
382 Z7 7D SD513 Trimmer Blade A729R901 1 count for each booklet exit
completion in the trimming mode
383 Z7 7E SD513 Trimmer Board A729F624 1 count for each booklet exit
384 Z7 7F SD513 Trimmer Press Motor A0H2M101 1 count for each booklet exit
385 Z7 80 SD513 Trimmer Blade Motor A0H2M102 1 count for each booklet exit
386 Z7 81 SD513 Trimmer Unit A729F621 1 count for each booklet exit
387 Z7 82 SD513 Reverse Exit Roller A65UR70M On the fold & staple/half-fold mode,
Pressure Release Motor 1 count for each paper exit to the
On the bundle tri-folding mode
without the crease and the slit, 1
count for each bundle tri-folding
exit completion.
On the bundle tri-folding mode with
the crease or the slit, 1 count for
each tri-folding exit completion.
When the sub tray paper exit or the
through conveyance is performed
with the crease or the slit or the
reverse inside SD-513, 1 count for
each paper exit completion.
388 Z7 83 SD513 1st Folding Knife A65UR70N On the fold & staple/half-fold mode,
Motor 1 count for each paper exit to the
On the bundle tri-folding mode
without the crease and the slit, 1
count for each bundle tri-folding
exit completion.
On the bundle tri-folding mode with
the crease or the slit, 1 count for
each tri-folding exit completion.
389 Z7 84 SD513 2nd Folding Knife A65UR70P 1 count for each booklet exit
Motor completion in the tri-folding mode.
390 Z7 85 SD513 Booklet Holding Motor A729R704 2 counts for each booklet exit
I-189

er parameter
391 Z7 86 SD513 Clamp Motor A729R70G 1 count for each book exit in the
mode
392 Z7 87 SD513 Fore Edge Finger A729R706 1 count for each book exit in the
Motor fold & staple mode/half-folding
mode
393 Z7 88 SD513 Gripper Motor A4JUM101 1 count for each book exit in the
mode
394 Z7 89 SD513 Fore Edge Stopper A729R706 1 count for each book exit in the
Motor fold & staple mode/half-folding
mode
395 Z7 8A SD513 Clincher A65U7781 2 counts for each booklet exit
396 Z7 8B FD504 SQF Roller A65VR70B 2 count for each booklet exit for a
CleaningAssy/Rr booklet that has 19 pages or less in
the SQF mode
4 count for each booklet exit for a
booklet that has 29 pages or less in
the SQF mode
the SQF mode
the SQF mode
397 Z7 8C FD504 SQF Roller Motor A65VR706 2 count for each booklet exit for a
the SQF mode
the SQF mode
the SQF mode
the SQF mode
398 Z7 8D FD504 SQF Clamp Motor/Rr A65VR705 1 count for each booklet exit
completion in the SQF mode.
399 Z7 8E FD504 SQF Clamp Motor/Fr A65VR705 1 count for each booklet exit
completion in the SQF mode.
400 Z7 8F FD504 SQF Roller A65VR70A 2 count for each booklet exit for a
CleaningAssy/Fr booklet that has 19 pages or less in
the SQF mode
the SQF mode
the SQF mode
the SQF mode
*1 Count in all color modes
• Up to 338 mm: 1 count
• 915.1 mm to 1200 mm: 5 counts
*2 Count only in the full color mode.
• Up to 338 mm: 1 count
I-190

• 915.1 mm to 1200 mm: 5 counts
Note
• For details on the paper size you must count or the setting of the count condition, refer to I.4.6.1 Maintenance Counter.
4.6.18 Voluntary Part Counter (Parts Counter)

Used to control the service history of each part that is not registered as a special part.
For 30 data from Number 01 up to 30, confirm and reset of the name, P/N (parts number), limit value and the print count.
• Take 1 count for each print page of all paper exits with no discrimination made by paper size.
• When the counter exceeds the limit, the color of the character changes into red.
(1) Setting and check procedure

Press [02 Voluntary Part Counter].
[Service Mode] → [Counter/Data] → [Parts Counter] → [Voluntary Part Counter]
4. "Voluntary Part Counter screen"
Press [Next] or [Previous] to scroll the "Voluntary Part Counter screen" pages, and press [▼] or [▲] to select the data number.
5. Select either [Parts Name Setting], [P/N Setting], or [Limit Setting].
6. Enter the data that you want to configure or change.
[Parts Name]: Enter the part name. (8 digits)
[P/N]: Enter the part number. (9 digits)
[Limit]: Enter the limit value. (8 digits)
7. Press [OK] to update the data.
(2) Reset procedure

Press [04 Counter/Data]
2. "Counter/Data screen"
Press [02 Voluntary Part Counter].
4. "Voluntary Part Counter screen"
Press [Next] or [Previous] to scroll the "Voluntary Part Counter screen" pages, and press [▼] or [▲] to select the item to configure or
check.
5. Press [Counter Clear].
Press [No] to cancel and return to "Voluntary Part Counter screen."
(3) Relationship between data number and CSRC parameter

Number Parts Name P/N Counter Limit Installation date
CSRC parameter CSRC parameter CSRC parameter CSRC parameter CSRC parameter
(Z4) (Z3) (G0) (H0) (H3)
001 00 00 00 00 00
002 01 01 01 01 01
003 02 02 02 02 02
004 03 03 03 03 03
005 04 04 04 04 04
006 05 05 05 05 05
007 06 06 06 06 06
008 07 07 07 07 07
009 08 08 08 08 08
010 09 09 09 09 09
011 0A 0A 0A 0A 0A
012 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B
013 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C
014 0D 0D 0D 0D 0D
015 0E 0E 0E 0E 0E
016 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F
017 10 10 10 10 10
018 11 11 11 11 11
019 12 12 12 12 12
I-191
020 13 13 13 13 13
021 14 14 14 14 14
022 15 15 15 15 15
023 16 16 16 16 16
024 17 17 17 17 17
025 18 18 18 18 18
026 19 19 19 19 19
027 1A 1A 1A 1A 1A
028 1B 1B 1B 1B 1B
029 1C 1C 1C 1C 1C
030 1D 1D 1D 1D 1D
4.6.19 Total Counter History

(1) Function
When the main body is active, the value of the total counter is backed up periodically to SDD.
(a) Specifications
• While the main body is active, the value of the total counter and the black counter is backed up to SDD once every hour.
• Backup starts one hour after the sub power switch (SW2) is activated. However, backup is not performed while the machine is switched
to Auto Shut OFF.
• The number of backup data that you can refer to is 400.
(2) Usage
When an error occurs with the NVRAM board (NRB) and the data is deleted, refer to the previous total counter history.
Note
• When the data of the NVRAM board (NRB) is deleted, you cannot return the total counter value to the previous value.
• You can use this function to refer to the previous total counter history.
(3) Procedure for backup data reference

Press [04 Counter /Data]
Press [04 Total Counter History].
3. "Total Counter History screen"
Refer to "Date" and check the latest "Total Counter" and the "Black Counter" history.
Press [Next] or [Previous] to check up to 400 histories.
4.6.20 Custom Counter Threshold Set

(1) OUTLINE
Select the custom size paper length threshold in the sub scan direction for I.4.6.3 Paper Size Counter (Total/copy/print).
Note
• This setting is valid when the DIPSW8-7=1.
(2) Procedure
Press [04 Custom Counter Threshold Set].
[Service Mode] → [Counter/Data] → [Custom Counter Threshold Set]
3. "Custom Size Counter Threshold Setting screen"
Select the custom size that you want to configure.
• [Infinite1]: "Inf. 1" on the paper size counter.
Note
• The value larger than that of [Infinite4] by 1 mm up to 1200 mm is assigned to "Inf. 5".
• Be sure to configure the values as the following.
Infinite1<Infinite2<Infinite3<Infinite4
• Setting range: 0 to 12000
• 1 step = 0.1 mm
5. Press [Cancel] to reset the setting to default.
I-192
4.7 State confirmation

4.7.1 I/O Check Mode
(1) OUTLINE
This mode provide self-diagnostic functions (input output check function) to check the condition of the input (checking the each signal to
sensors) and the output (checking and the adjustment of the load operation).
(2) "I/O Check Mode screen"
[1]
[2] [3] [4]
[1] Input check [2] Output check

[3] I/O check code [4] Multi code
4.7.2 Input check procedures

(1) Usage
Check input condition of each signal to the sensors.
(2) Procedure
2. "State Confirmation menu screen"
[Service Mode] → [State Confirmation] → [I/O Check Mode]
3. "I/O Check Mode screen"
Enter an input check code with the numeric buttons.
4. To use the multi mode, press [High/Low]. *
5. Enter the multi code with the numeric keys.
6. The condition of the sensor (such as 000/001) appears in the message box "IN".
7. When you execute another input check, repeat step 3 to step 6.
* The Access button of the hard key can be used.
4.7.3 Output check procedures

(1) Usage
Load operations can be checked and adjusted (output check) using this output check.
Note
• Be sure to perform the initial operation before the output check. When the initial operation cannot be completed due to the
malfunction code, check that the part that moves by the output check and other parts do not interfere.
(2) Procedure
2. "State Confirmation menu screen"
[Service Mode] → [State Confirmation] → [I/O Check Mode]
Enter an input check code with the numeric buttons.
4. To use the multi mode, press [High/Low].*1
5. Enter the multi code with the numeric keys.
6. Press [Start].*2
The load that is specified operates.
7. Press [Stop].*2
The load that is specified completes.
I-193
8. Repeat steps 3 to 7 to perform the other load or the signal output check.
* The Access button of the hard key can be used.
*2 The start key and the stop key of the hard key can be used.
4.7.4 IO check mode list

Input check Output check
Co Mul
de ti Classific Symb
Name
Display and Classific Symb
Name
Restrictive
ation ol signal source ation ol conditions
0 0 High TEM/ Temp humidity sensor/1 Display of
voltage, HUMS (the humidity outside humidity (%)
analog 1 machine)
1 signal TEM/ Temp humidity sensor/1 Display of
HUMS (the temperature outside temperature (°C)
1 machine)
5 TEM/ Temp humidity sensor/2 Display of
HUMS (process mount humidity) humidity (%)
2
6 TEM/ Temp humidity sensor/2 Display of
HUMS (process mount temperature (°C)
2 temperature)
7 TEMS Registration temperature Display of
6 sensor temperature (°C)
1 0 High M15, Toner bottle motor (low Does not
voltage, CL10 speed), toner bottle clutch/ operate when
analog Y the toner is in
signal the intermediate
hopper toner.
1 M15, Toner bottle motor (high Does not
CL10 speed), toner bottle clutch/ operate when
Y the toner is in
the intermediate
hopper toner.
2 M15, Toner bottle motor (non- Does not
CL10 volatile), toner bottle operate when
clutch/Y the toner is in
the intermediate
hopper toner.
3 M15, Toner bottle motor (low Does not
M the toner is in
the intermediate
hopper toner.
M the toner is in
the intermediate
hopper toner.
clutch/M the toner is in
the intermediate
hopper toner.
C the toner is in
the intermediate
hopper toner.
C the toner is in
the intermediate
hopper toner.
clutch/C the toner is in
the intermediate
hopper toner.
K the toner is in
the intermediate
hopper toner.
I-194

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
K the toner is in
the intermediate
hopper toner.
clutch/K the toner is in
the intermediate
hopper toner.
12 High PZS1 Remaining toner sensor/Y • 000: No toner M15 Toner bottle motor
voltage, • 001: Toner
13 analog PZS2 Remaining toner sensor/M • 000: No toner M15 Toner bottle motor
signal • 001: Toner
14 PZS3 Remaining toner sensor/C • 000: No toner M15 Toner bottle motor
• 001: Toner
15 PZS4 Remaining toner sensor/K • 000: No toner M15 Toner bottle motor
• 001: Toner
16 PS34 Waste toner door sensor • 000: Open
• 001: Close
17 PS33 Waste toner full sensor • 000: Empty High PS33 Waste toner full sensor full Available when
• 001: Full voltage, detection the waste toner
analog box is attached.
30 signal M15, Toner bottle motor (low Operates with or
CL10 speed), toner bottle clutch/ without the
Y intermediate
hopper toner.
Note
Be sure to use
them after you
pull out the
toner bottle to
prevent the
toner adhesion.
31 M15, Toner bottle motor (high Operates with or
Y intermediate
hopper toner.
Note
To prevent the
toner adhesion,
be sure to use
them after you
pull out the
toner bottle.
32 M15, Toner bottle motor (non- Operates with or
CL10 volatile), toner bottle without the
clutch/Y intermediate
hopper toner.
Note
To prevent the
toner adhesion,
be sure to use
them after you
pull out the
toner bottle.
33 M15, Toner bottle motor (low Operates with or
M intermediate
hopper toner.
Note
Be sure to use
them after you
pull out the
toner bottle to
prevent the
toner adhesion.
I-195

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
M intermediate
hopper toner.
Note
Be sure to use
them after you
pull out the
toner bottle to
prevent the
toner adhesion.
clutch/M intermediate
hopper toner.
Note
To prevent the
toner adhesion,
be sure to use
them after you
pull out the
toner bottle.
C intermediate
hopper toner.
Note
To prevent the
toner adhesion,
be sure to use
them after you
pull out the
toner bottle.
C intermediate
hopper toner.
Note
Be sure to use
them after you
pull out the
toner bottle to
prevent the
toner adhesion.
clutch/C intermediate
hopper toner.
Note
Be sure to use
them after you
pull out the
toner bottle to
prevent the
toner adhesion.
K intermediate
hopper toner.
Note
Be sure to use
them after you
pull out the
toner bottle to
prevent the
toner adhesion.
I-196

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
K intermediate
hopper toner.
Note
Be sure to use
them after you
pull out the
toner bottle to
prevent the
toner adhesion.
clutch/K intermediate
hopper toner.
Note
Be sure to use
them after you
pull out the
toner bottle to
prevent the
toner adhesion.
2 0 HV1 High voltage unit/1 Do not use in
(charger/Y) the field.
1 HV1 High voltage unit/1 Do not use in
(charger/M) the field.
(charger/C) the field.
(charger/K) the field.
3 0 HV2, High voltage unit/2 (1st Do not use in
M10 transfer/Y), 1st transfer the field.
pressure release motor
(color mode pressure
position)
1 HV2, High voltage unit/2 (1st Do not use in
M10 transfer/M), 1st transfer the field.
position)
M10 transfer/C), 1st transfer the field.
position)
M10 transfer/K), 1st transfer the field.
position)
M10 transfer/K), 1st transfer the field.
(black and white mode
pressure position)
M10 transfer/Y, 1st transfer/M, the field.
1st transfer/C, 1st transfer/
K), 1st transfer pressure
release motor (color mode
pressure position)
M10, transfer/Y, 1st transfer/M, the field.
M38 1st transfer/C, 1st transfer/
K), 1st transfer pressure
pressure position), 2nd
transfer pressure release
motor
I-197

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
M10, transfer/K), 1st transfer the field.
M38 pressure release motor
(black and white mode
motor
M10 transfer/Y, low voltage), the field.
pressure position)
M10 transfer/M, low voltage), the field.
pressure position)
M10 transfer/C, low voltage), the field.
pressure position)
M10 transfer/K, low voltage), the field.
pressure position)
M10 transfer/K, low voltage), the field.
release motor (black and
white mode pressure
position)
M10 transfer/Y, 1st transfer/M, the field.
1st transfer/C, 1st transfer/
K, low voltage), 1st
motor (color mode
pressure position)
M10, transfer/Y, 1st transfer/M, the field.
M38 1st transfer/C, 1st transfer/
K, low voltage), 1st
motor (color mode
motor
M10, transfer/K, low voltage), the field.
M38 1st transfer pressure
release motor (black and
white mode pressure
position), 2nd transfer
40 High HV2 High voltage unit/2 (1st Voltage (0 to
voltage, transfer voltage monitor/Y) 1023)
41 analog HV2 High voltage unit/2 (1st Voltage (0 to
signal transfer voltage monitor/M) 1023)
42 HV2 High voltage unit/2 (1st Voltage (0 to
transfer voltage monitor/C) 1023)
43 HV2 High voltage unit/2 (1st Voltage (0 to
transfer voltage monitor/K) 1023)
44 HV2 High voltage unit/2 (1st Current (0 to
transfer current monitor/Y) 1023)
transfer current monitor/M) 1023)
I-198

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
transfer current monitor/C) 1023)
transfer current monitor/K) 1023)
4 0 High HV2 High voltage unit/2 Do not use in
voltage, (separation DC, separation the field.
analog AC)
2 signal HV2 High voltage unit/2 Do not use in
(separation DC) the field.
5 0 IDCS IDC sensor output voltage 0-255 is
displayed on
"Input check"
5 IDCS IDC sensor output voltage 0-255 is
displayed on
"Input check"
8 0 HV2 High voltage unit/2 (2nd
transfer, non-volatile)
8 HV2 High voltage unit/2 (2nd
transfer, guide plate)
11 0 Paper PS39 Paper empty sensor/1 • 000: No paper
feed, • 001: Paper
1 conveya PS44 Paper empty sensor/2 • 000: No paper
nce • 001: Paper
3 PS73 Paper empty sensor/BP • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
4 PS108 Paper empty sensor • 000: No paper
(LU-202) • 001: Paper
5 PS3 Paper empty sensor/1 • 000: No paper
(PF-602m) • 001: Paper
(PF-602m) • 001: Paper
(tray 3) (PF-707) • 001: Paper
(tray 4) (PF-707) • 001: Paper
(tray 5) (PF-707) • 001: Paper
12 0 PS40 Remaining paper sensor/1 • 000: ON
• 001: OFF
1 PS45, Remaining paper sensor/ • 000: PS45
PS46 2Up, remaining paper OFF, PS46
sensor/2Lt OFF
• 001: PS45
OFF, PS46
ON
• 010: PS45
ON, PS46
OFF
• 011: PS45
ON, PS46 ON
3 PS102 Remaining paper sensor/1, Remaining
/ remaining paper sensor/2, display (0% to
PS103 remaining paper sensor/3, 100%)
/ remaining paper sensor/4
PS104 (LU-202)
/
PS105
4 VR2 Remaining paper VR/1 Remaining
(PF-602m) display (0% to
100%)
(PF-602m) display (0% to
100%)
(tray 3) (PF-707) display (0% to
100%)
I-199

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
100%)
100%)
13 0 PS41 Paper size sensor/1 • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
2 PS47 Paper size sensor/2Rt • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
3 PS48 Paper size sensor/2Lt • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
6 PS74 Paper size sensor/BP1 • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
7 PS75 Paper size sensor/BP2 • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
8 PS5 Paper size sensor/Rt1 • 000: No paper
(PF-602m) • 001: Paper
9 PS6 Paper size sensor/Lt1 • 000: No paper
(PF-602m) • 001: Paper
10 PS13 Paper size sensor/Rt2 • 000: No paper
(PF-602m) • 001: Paper
11 PS14 Paper size sensor/Lt2 • 000: No paper
(PF-602m) • 001: Paper
12 PS110 Paper size sensor/Rr • 000: No paper
(LU-202) • 001: Paper
13 PS111 Paper size sensor/Fr • 000: No paper
(LU-202) • 001: Paper
14 0 VR1 Paper size VR/1 Display of AD
1 VR2 Paper size VR/2 Display of AD
3 VR3 Paper size VR/BP Display of AD
(PF-602m)
(PF-602m)
6 VR1 Paper size VR (LU-202) Display of AD
10 VR1 CD paper size VR/1 (tray Display of AD
3) (PF-707)
4) (PF-707)
5) (PF-707)
20 VR3 FD paper size VR/1 (tray Display of AD
3) (PF-707)
4) (PF-707)
5) (PF-707)
15 2 High - Mode memory clear Not reset when
voltage, DIPSW3-6 is
analog OFF
98 signal - CSRC memory Use when you
initialization configure CSRC
Not reset when
DIPSW3-6 is
OFF
16 0 Paper PS38 Upper limit sensor/1 • 000: Other
feed, than upper
conveya limit
nce • 001: Upper
limit
I-200

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
1 PS43 Upper limit sensor/2 • 000: Other
than upper
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
3 PS71 Upper limit sensor/BP • 000: Other
than upper
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
4 PS109 Upper limit sensor and • 000: Other
/ lower limit sensor (LU-202) than upper
PS101 limit
• 001: Upper
limit
(PF-602m) than upper
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
(PF-602m) than upper
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
17 20 HTR4 Dehumidification heater • 000: Not
set signal (tray 3) (PF-707) installed
• 001: Installed
21 HTR5 Dehumidification heater • 000: Not
• 001: Installed
22 HTR6 Dehumidification heater • 000: Not
• 001: Installed
18 4 Paper MFDB Double feed detection
feed, S, board/S, double feed
conveya MFDB detection board/R
nce R (PF-602m)
6 Paper PS20 Registration swing home • 000: Other M39 Registration swing motor
feed, sensor than home (front side move)
conveya position
nce • 001: Home
position
7 PS20 Registration swing home • 000: Other M39 Registration swing motor
sensor than home (rear side move)
position
• 001: Home
position
8 PS20 Registration swing home • 000: Other M39 Registration swing motor
sensor than home (home position search)
position
• 001: Home
position
24 MFDB Multi feed detection board/
S, S, multi feed detection
MFDB board/R (PF-707)
R
19 0 Paper PS37 Paper feed sensor/1 • 000: No paper
1 conveya PS42 Paper feed sensor/2 • 000: No paper
nce • 001: Paper
3 PS72 Paper feed sensor/BP • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
4 PS106 Paper feed sensor • 000: No paper
(LU-202) • 001: Paper
5 PS2 Paper feed sensor/1 • 000: No paper
(PF-602m) • 001: Paper
I-201

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
6 PS10 Paper feed sensor/2 • 000: No paper
(PF-602m) • 001: Paper
10 PS14 Paper suction sensor/1 • 000: No paper
(tray 3) (PF-707) • 001: Paper
(tray 4) (PF-707) • 001: Paper
(tray 5) (PF-707) • 001: Paper
20 0 PS107 Pre-registration sensor • 000: No paper
(LU-202) • 001: Paper
1 PS4 ADU pre-registration • 000: Paper
sensor • 001: No paper
2 PS6 ADU conveyance sensor • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
3 PS12 Intermediate conveyance • 000: No paper
sensor/1 • 001: Paper
4 PS13 Intermediate conveyance • 000: No paper Paper SD6 Pick-up solenoid/BP
sensor/2 • 001: Paper feed,
5 PS36 Vertical conveyance • 000: No paper conveya SD100 Pick-up solenoid (LU-202)
sensor • 001: Paper nce
6 PS2 Registration sensor • 000: No paper SD1 Pick-up solenoid/1
• 001: Paper (PF-602m)
7 PS18 Leading edge sensor • 000: No paper SD5 Pick-up solenoid/2
• 001: Paper (PF-602m)
8 PS27 Paper exit sensor • 000: Paper
• 001: No paper
9 PS10 Reverse, exit sensor • 000: Paper
• 001: No paper
10 PS8 ADU jam sensor • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
11 PS29 Paper exit full sensor • 000: Other
than full
• 001: Full
12 PS7 ADU stop sensor • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
13 PS11 Decurler sensor • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
15 PS2 Paper exit sensor • 000: No paper
(RU-517) • 001: Paper
20 Paper SD5 Shutter solenoid/Fr1 (tray
feed, 3) (PF-707)
21 conveya SD6 Shutter solenoid/Rr1 (tray
nce 3) (PF-707)
22 SD10 Shutter solenoid/Fr2 (tray
4) (PF-707)
23 SD11 Shutter solenoid/Rr2 (tray
4) (PF-707)
24 SD15 Shutter solenoid/Fr3 (tray
5) (PF-707)
25 SD16 Shutter solenoid/Rr3 (tray
5) (PF-707)
32 SD4 Paper leading edge shutter
solenoid/1 (tray 3)
(PF-707)
solenoid/2 (tray 4)
(PF-707)
solenoid/3 (tray 5)
(PF-707)
21 0 CL1 Paper feed clutch/1
1 CL2 Paper feed clutch/2
4 CL14 Paper feed clutch/BP
5 CL101 Paper feed clutch (LU-202)
I-202

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
(PF-602m)
(PF-602m)
10 Paper PS2 Paper feed sensor/1 (tray • 000: No paper CL15 Suction belt clutch/1
feed, 3) (PF-707) • 001: Paper (PF-707)
11 conveya PS6 Paper feed sensor/2 (tray • 000: No paper CL16 Suction belt clutch/2
nce 4) (PF-707) • 001: Paper (PF-707)
12 PS10 Paper feed sensor/3 (tray • 000: No paper CL17 Suction belt clutch/3
5) (PF-707) • 001: Paper (PF-707)
22 0 CL3 Pre-registration clutch/1
1 CL4 Pre-registration clutch/2
5 CL102 Pre-registration clutch
(LU-202)
23 0 M29 Paper lift motor/1
1 M28 Paper lift motor/2
3 M49 Paper lift motor/BP (Down)
4 M49 Paper lift motor/BP (Up)
5 Paper PS109 Upper limit sensor and • 000: Other M100 Paper lift motor (LU-202:
feed, / lower limit sensor (LU-202) than lower down)
conveya PS101 limit
nce • 001: Upper
limit
• 002: Lower
limit
6 PS109 Upper limit sensor and • 000: Other M100 Paper lift motor (LU-202:
/ lower limit sensor (LU-202) than upper up)
PS101 limit, lower
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
• 002: Lower
limit
7 PS1 Upper limit sensor/1 • 000: Other M2 Paper lift motor/1
(PF-602m) than upper (PF-602m)
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
8 PS9 Upper limit sensor/2 • 000: Other M3 Paper lift motor/2
(PF-602m) than upper (PF-602m)
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
11 PS3 Upper limit sensor/1 (tray • 000: Other M7 Paper lift motor/1 (tray 3)
3) (PF-707) than upper (PF-707)
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
24 0 PS19 2nd transfer roller pressure • 000: Other M38 2nd transfer pressure
release home sensor than home release motor (home
position position search)
• 001: Home
position
I-203

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
1 PS19 2nd transfer roller pressure • 000: Other M38 2nd transfer pressure
release home sensor than home release motor (strong
position pressing position)
• 001: Home
position
release home sensor than home release motor (weak
position pressing position)
• 001: Home
position
release home sensor than home release motor (release
position position move)
• 001: Home
position
25 0 PS31 Front door sensor • 000: Close M45 C1070, C1070P, C71hc:
• 001: Open Registration motor (315
mm/s)
1 PS35 Vertical conveyance door • 000: Close M45 C1060, C1060L:
sensor • 001: Open Registration motor (271
mm/s)
2 PS32 Toner supply door sensor • 000: Close M45 Registration motor (225
• 001: Open mm/s)
4 M45 Registration motor (157.5
mm/s)
5 Paper MS2 Interlock switch/2 (LU-202) • 000: OFF M45 Registration motor (paper
feed, • 001: ON feed line speed)
6 conveya MS1 Interlock switch/1 (LU-202) • 000: OFF M45 C1070, C1070P, C71hc:
nce • 001: ON Registration motor (the
hard timer becomes active:
315 mm/s)
7 SW10 Tray down switch (LU-202) • 000: OFF M45 Registration motor
0 • 001: ON (reverse rotation)
8 PS18 Leading edge sensor • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
9 PS23 Front door open close • 000: Close
sensor (PF-602m) • 001: Open
10 PS21 Horizontal conveyance • 000: Close
door sensor/1 (PF-602m) • 001: Open
11 PS24 Vertical conveyance door • 000: Close
sensor (PF-602m) • 001: Open
door sensor/2 (PF-602m) • 001: Open
14 PS30 Process stand open close • 000: Close
sensor • 001: Open
19 PS1 Front door sensor • 000: Close
(PF-707) • 001: Open
guide plate sensor/Rt • 001: Open
(PF-707)
guide plate sensor/Lt • 001: Open
(PF-707)
22 PS33 Vertical conveyance guide • 000: Close
plate sensor (PF-707) • 001: Open
26 0 Paper M42 C1070, C1070P, C71hc:
feed, Loop motor (315 mm/s)
1 conveya M42 C1060, C1060L: Loop
nce motor (271 mm/s)
2 M42 Loop motor (225 mm/s)
4 M42 Loop motor (157.5 mm/s)
5 M42 Loop motor (ADU line
speed)
6 M42 Loop motor (Paper feed
line speed)
I-204

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
10 M5 Loop motor 1 (PF-707: 985
mm/s)
11 M5 Loop motor 1 (PF-707: 700
mm/s)
12 M6 Loop motor 2 (PF-707: 985
mm/s)
13 M6 Loop motor 2 (PF-707: 700
mm/s)
27 0 M43 Reverse exit motor
(forward rotation: the
speed of the reverse exit)
1 M43 C1070, C1070P, C71hc:
Reverse exit motor
(reverse rotation: 315 mm/
s)
2 M43 C1060, C1060L: Reverse
exit motor (reverse
rotation: 271 mm/s)
3 M43 Reverse exit motor
(reverse rotation: 225 mm/
s)
(reverse rotation: 157.5
mm/s)
(reverse rotation: the
speed at the reversal
section)
10 M44 Decurler motor (forward
rotation: the speed of the
reverse exit)
11 M44 C1070, C1070P, C71hc:
Decurler motor (reverse
rotation: 315 mm/s)
12 M44 C1060, C1060L: Decurler
motor (reverse rotation:
271 mm/s)
13 M44 Decurler motor (reverse
rotation: 225 mm/s)
rotation: 157.5 mm/s)
rotation: the speed at the
reversal section)
20 M30 Paper exit motor (forward
rotation: the speed of the
reverse exit)
21 M30 C1070, C1070P, C71hc:
Paper exit motor (forward
rotation: 315 mm/s)
22 M30 C1060, C1060L: Paper
exit motor (forward
rotation: 271 mm/s)
rotation: 225 mm/s)
31 Paper PS28 Paper exit pressure home • 000: Other M30 Paper exit motor (reverse
feed, sensor than home rotation: continuous)
conveya position
nce • 001: Home
position
32 PS28 Paper exit pressure home • 000: Other M30 Paper exit motor (reverse
sensor than home rotation: home position)
position
• 001: Home
position
I-205

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
sensor than home rotation: weak pressure)
position
• 001: Home
position
sensor than home rotation: middle pressure)
position
• 001: Home
position
sensor than home rotation: strong pressure)
position
• 001: Home
position
28 0 M11 Paper feed motor/Up
1 M1 Paper feed motor (LU-202)
2 M1 Paper feed motor (PF-602)
3 M12 Paper feed motor/Lw
10 M2 Vertical conveyance motor
(PF-707)
11 M3 Horizontal conveyance
motor (PF-707)
12 M1 Paper feed belt motor
(PF-707)
16 Paper PS41 Roller pressure release • 000: Release M10 Roller pressure release
feed, sensor (PF-707) • 001: Pressure motor (pressure applied)
conveya
nce
17 M10 Roller pressure release
motor (pressure released)
motor (the pressure is
repeatedly applied and
released)
motor (home position
search)
40 CL8 Horizontal conveyance
clutch/1 (PF-707)
41 CL9 Horizontal conveyance
clutch/2 (PF-707)
42 CL7 Pre-registration clutch
(PF-707)
46 Paper PS17 Loop sensor/Lw (PF-707) • 000: No paper
47 conveya PS19 Horizontal conveyance • 000: No paper
nce sensor/1 (PF-707) • 001: Paper
48 PS20 Horizontal conveyance • 000: No paper Paper CL1 Exit clutch/1 (PF-707)
sensor/2 (PF-707) • 001: Paper feed,
49 PS21 Horizontal conveyance • 000: No paper conveya CL2 Exit clutch/2 (PF-707)
sensor/3 (PF-707) • 001: Paper nce
50 PS18 Pre-registration sensor • 000: No paper CL3 Vertical conveyance
(PF-707) • 001: Paper clutch/1 (PF-707)
51 PS25 Paper leading edge sensor • 000: No paper CL4 Vertical conveyance
(PF-707) • 001: Paper clutch/2 (PF-707)
52 PS26 Exit sensor/1 (PF-707) • 000: No paper CL5 Vertical conveyance
• 001: Paper clutch/3 (PF-707)
53 PS27 Exit sensor/2 (PF-707) • 000: No paper CL6 Vertical conveyance
• 001: Paper clutch/4 (PF-707)
54 PS28 Vertical conveyance • 000: No paper
sensor/1 (PF-707) • 001: Paper
I-206

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
58 PS32 Loop sensor/Up (PF-707) • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
59 - Interlock 24V detection • 000: OFF
(PF-707) • 001: ON
29 0 Paper CL5 Intermediate conveyance
feed, clutch/1
1 conveya CL6 Intermediate conveyance
nce clutch/2
2 CL7 Intermediate conveyance
clutch/3
3 SD2 Belt separation claw
solenoid
5 FM1, Paper feed assist fan/Fr,
FM2 paper feed assist fan/Rr
(LU-202)
6 SD1 ADU lock solenoid
7 FM3, Paper feed assist fan/Fr12,
FM4 paper feed assist fan/Rr12
(tray 3) (PF-602m)
(tray 3) (PF-602m)
(tray 4) (PF-602m)
(tray 4) (PF-602m)
11 Paper PS20 Pre-registration sensor • 000: No paper CL12 Pre-registration clutch
feed, (PF-602m) • 001: Paper (PF-602m)
12 conveya PS17 Vertical conveyance • 000: No paper CL7 Vertical conveyance
nce sensor/1 (PF-602m) • 001: Paper clutch/1 (PF-602m)
13 PS27 Vertical conveyance • 000: No paper CL8 Vertical conveyance
sensor/2 (PF-602m) • 001: Paper clutch/2 (PF-602m)
14 PS26 Vertical conveyance • 000: No paper CL9 Vertical conveyance
15 PS18 Horizontal conveyance • 000: No paper CL10 Horizontal conveyance
16 PS19 Horizontal conveyance • 000: No paper CL11 Horizontal conveyance
17 SD2, Shutter solenoid/Fr1,
SD3 shutter solenoid/Rr1
(PF-602m)
19 SD6, Shutter solenoid/Fr2,
SD7 shutter solenoid/Rr2
(PF-602m)
21 SD4 Tray lock solenoid/1
(PF-602m)
22 SD8 Tray lock solenoid/2
(PF-602m)
23 CL2 Separation clutch/1
(PF-602m)
24 CL5 Separation clutch/2
(PF-602m)
25 FM9, Ventilation fan/1,
FM10 ventilation fan/2
(PF-602m)
26 Paper TEMS/ Temperature sensor/1 Display of DH3, Fan heater/Up,
feed, 1 (Inside the tray) (PF-602m) temperature (°C) FM11, dehumidification fan/1,
conveya FM12 dehumidification fan/2
nce (HT-504)
I-207

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
28 TEMS/ Temperature sensor/2 Display of DH4, Fan heater/Lw,
2 (Inside the tray) (PF-602m) temperature (°C) FM13, dehumidification fan/3,
FM14 dehumidification fan/4
(HT-504)
30 TEMS Temperature sensor/1 Display of HTR1 Dehumidifier heater/1,
1 (Inside the tray) (LU-202) temperature (°C) temperature control tray
33°C, heating pipe 70°C
(tray 3) (LU-202)
S, S, multi feed detection
MFDB board/R (PF-602m)
R
33 Paper TEMS/ Temperature sensor/1 0 to 255 FM21, Dehumidifier fan/Rt1,
feed, 1 (PF-707) FM22 dehumidifier fan/Lt1 (tray
conveya 3) (PF-707)
34 nce TEMS/ Temperature sensor/5 Display of
5 (tray 3) (PF-707) temperature (°C)
35 TEMS/ Temperature sensor/2 0 to 255 Paper FM23, Dehumidifier fan/Rt2,
2 (PF-707) feed, FM24 dehumidifier fan/Lt2 (tray
conveya 4) (PF-707)
nce
34 TEMS/ Temperature sensor/6 Display of
37 TEMS/ Temperature sensor/3 0 to 255 Paper FM25, Dehumidifier fan/Rt3,
3 (PF-707) feed, FM26 dehumidifier fan/Lt3 (tray
conveya 5) (PF-707)
nce
34 TEMS/ Temperature sensor/7 Display of
42 Paper FM9, Paper leading edge
feed, FM10 separation fan/Fr1, paper
conveya leading edge separation
nce fan/Rr1 (tray 3) (PF-707)
(tray 3) (PF-707)
44 FM13, Paper leading edge
FM14 separation fan/Fr2, paper
leading edge separation
fan/Rr2 (tray 4) (PF-707)
(tray 4) (PF-707)
46 FM17, Paper leading edge
FM18 separation fan/Fr3, paper
leading edge separation
fan/Rr3 (tray 5) (PF-707)
(tray 5) (PF-707)
48 FM1, Paper suction fan/1, paper
FM2 suction fan/2 (tray 3)
(PF-707)
(PF-707)
(PF-707)
60 Paper PS4 Handle release sensor/1 • 000: ON SD1 Tray lock solenoid/1 (tray
feed, (tray 3) (PF-707) • 001: OFF 3) (PF-707)
61 conveya PS8 Handle release sensor/2 • 000: ON SD2 Tray lock solenoid/2 (tray
nce (tray 4) (PF-707) • 001: OFF 4) (PF-707)
62 PS12 Handle release sensor/3 • 000: ON SD3 Tray lock solenoid/3 (tray
(tray 5) (PF-707) • 001: OFF 5) (PF-707)
63 FM7, Exhaust fan/1, exhaust
FM8 fan/2 (PF-707)
I-208

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
32 0 Optics M20 Polygon motor/Y (1/1
rotation)
1 M21 Polygon motor/M (1/1
rotation)
2 M22 Polygon motor/C (1/1
rotation)
3 M23 Polygon motor/K (1/1
rotation)
4 M20, Polygon motor/Y, polygon
M21, motor/M, polygon motor/C,
M22, polygon motor/K (1/1
M23 rotation)
5 M20 Polygon motor/Y (rotates
at the adjustment value)
6 M21 Polygon motor/M (rotates
7 M22 Polygon motor/C (rotates
8 M23 Polygon motor/K (rotates
9 M20, Polygon motor/Y, polygon
M21, motor/M, polygon motor/C,
M22, polygon motor/K (Rotate at
M23 the adjustment value)
33 0 Optics INDEX Index board/Y • 000: Normal M20, Polygon motor/Y, index
B1 • 001: Abnormal INDEX board/Y
B1
1 INDEX Index board/M • 000: Normal M21, Polygon motor/M, index
B2 • 001: Abnormal INDEX board/M
B2
2 INDEX Index board/C • 000: Normal M22, Polygon motor/C, index
B3 • 001: Abnormal INDEX board/C
B3
3 INDEX Index board/K • 000: Normal M23, Polygon motor/K, index
B4 • 001: Abnormal INDEX board/K
B4
4 INDEX Index board/Y, /M, /C, /K • 000: Normal M20, Polygon motor/Y, polygon
B1, • 001: Abnormal M21, motor/M, polygon motor/C,
INDEX if any of the M22, polygon motor/K, index
B2, color is found M23 , board/Y, index board/M,
INDEX INDEX index board/C, index
B3, B1, board/K
INDEX INDEX
B4 B2,
INDEX
B3,
INDEX
B4
35 17 M24 Tilt correction motor/Y
(Movement to the default
position)
18 M25 Tilt correction motor/M
position)
19 M26 Tilt correction motor/C
position)
I-209

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
21 M24, Tilt correction motor/Y, / Moving to the
M25, M, /C, /K center reference
M26, position (fixed
M27 value)
Note
· When this IO
is used, the
factory initial
data cannot be
reproduced.
· When this IO
is used, follow
"I.4.7.14
Procedure when
IO35-21 or
IO35-25 is
used". When
you do not
follow the
correct
procedure, a
malfunction
code possibly
occurs.
22 M24 Tilt correction motor/Y Moving to the
center reference
position (fixed
value)
Note
· When this IO
is used, the
factory initial
data cannot be
reproduced.
23 M25 Tilt correction motor/M Moving to the
center reference
position (fixed
value)
Note
· When this IO
is used, the
factory initial
data cannot be
reproduced.
24 M26 Tilt correction motor/C Moving to the
center reference
position (fixed
value)
Note
· When this IO
is used, the
factory initial
data cannot be
reproduced.
I-210

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
25 M27 Tilt correction motor/K Moving to the
center reference
position (fixed
value)
Note
· When this IO
is used, the
factory initial
data cannot be
reproduced.
· When this IO
is used, follow
"I.4.7.14
Procedure when
IO35-21 or
IO35-25 is
used". When
you do not
follow the
correct
procedure, a
malfunction
code possibly
occurs.
36 3 PS60 Color registration sensor/ 0-255 is
Fr displayed on
"Input check"
4 PS62 Color registration sensor/ 0-255 is
Rr displayed on
"Input check"
37 0 - LD alarm measurement LD alarm value
can be checked
on the
adjustment list of
the list output.
91 - LD1 to LD4 alarm data LD alarm value
clear/Y can be checked
on the
adjustment list of
the list output.
clear/M can be checked
on the
adjustment list of
the list output.
clear/C can be checked
on the
adjustment list of
the list output.
clear/K can be checked
on the
adjustment list of
the list output.
clear/Y, /M, /C, /K can be checked
on the
adjustment list of
the list output.
39 0 M9, Intermediate transfer Base line
IDCS1 motor, IDC sensor correction for the
color registration
41 0 Main M1 C1070, C1070P, C71hc:
body Drum motor/Y (315 mm/s)
1 M1 C1060, C1060L: Drum
motor/Y (271 mm/s)
2 M1 Drum motor/Y (225 mm/s)
4 M1 Drum motor/Y (157.5 mm/
s)
I-211

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
5 M2 C1070, C1070P, C71hc:
Drum motor/M (315 mm/s)
6 M2 C1060, C1060L: Drum
motor/M (271 mm/s)
7 M2 Drum motor/M (225 mm/s)
9 M2 Drum motor/M (157.5 mm/
s)
10 M3 C1070, C1070P, C71hc:
Drum motor/C (315 mm/s)
11 M3 C1060, C1060L: Drum
motor/C (271 mm/s)
12 M3 Drum motor/C (225 mm/s)
14 M3 Drum motor/C (157.5 mm/
s)
15 M4 C1070, C1070P, C71hc:
Drum motor/K (315 mm/s)
16 M4 C1060, C1060L: Drum
motor/K (271 mm/s)
17 M4 Drum motor/K (225 mm/s)
19 M4 Drum motor/K (157.5 mm/
s)
20 M9 C1070, C1070P, C71hc:
Intermediate transfer
motor (315 mm/s)
21 M9 C1060, C1060L:
Intermediate transfer
motor (271 mm/s)
22 M9 Intermediate transfer
motor (225 mm/s)
24 M9 Intermediate transfer
motor (157.5 mm/s)
42 0 FM3 Power supply cooling fan/2
1 FM4, Power supply cooling fan/
FM5 3, power supply cooling
fan/4
3 FM8, Fusing exhaust fan, fusing
FM9 belt exhaust fan (high
speed rotation)
4 FM8, Fusing exhaust fan, fusing
FM9 belt exhaust fan (low
speed rotation)
6 FM22 Cyclone exhaust fan
7 FM26, Developing fan/1,
FM27, Developing fan/2,
FM28 Developing fan/3
8 FM23, Paper exit cooling fan/1,
FM25, paper exit cooling fan/2,
FM24 ADU exhaust fan
9 FM6, Drum motor cooling fan/1,
FM7 drum motor cooling fan/2
10 FM17 Transfer belt fan
11 FM19, Tucking fan/1, tucking fan/
FM20, 2, tucking fan/3
FM21
12 FM30 ADU reverse motor fan
13 FM29 ADU cooling fan
15 FM33, Fusing roller cooling fan/1,
FM34 Fusing roller cooling fan/2
18 FM1 Image processing cooling
fan
20 FM2 Power supply cooling fan/1
22 FM10 Fusing separation fan/1
(non-volatile rotation)
I-212

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
32 FM13 Fusing intake fan
33 FM16 Intake fan
34 FM18 PH cooling fan
36 FM14 Exhaust fan/Rr
37 FM15 Exhaust fan/Fr
40 LU-202 FM3, Dehumidifier fan/1,
FM4 dehumidifier fan/2 (High
speed rotation) (LU-202)
41 FM3, Dehumidifier fan/1,
FM4 dehumidifier fan/2 (Low
speed rotation) (LU-202)
42 PF-602 FM11, Dehumidifier fan/1,
m FM12 dehumidifier fan/2
(PF-602m)
43 FM13, Dehumidifier fan/3,
FM14 dehumidifier fan/4
(PF-602m)
44 PF-707 FM21, Dehumidifier fan/Rt1,
FM22 dehumidifier fan/Lt1
45 FM23, Dehumidifier fan/Rt2,
46 FM25, Dehumidifier fan/Rt3,
43 6 Main KCT Key counter
45 0 Main TH1 Fusing temperature Display of body L1, The fusing heater lamp/1,
body sensor/1 (temperature of temperature (°C) L2 , the fusing heater lamp/2,
the fusing belt central L3, L4 the fusing heater lamp/3,
section) the fusing heater lamp/4
(Proper temperature
control)
1 TH2 Fusing temperature Display of L1, The fusing heater lamp/1,
sensor/2 (temperature of temperature (°C) L2 , the fusing heater lamp/2,
the fusing belt edge) L3, L4 the fusing heater lamp/3,
the fusing heater lamp/4
(Proper temperature
control)
sensor/2 (temperature temperature (°C) L2 , the fusing heater lamp/2,
around the sensor) L3, L4 the fusing heater lamp/3,
(Proper temperature
control)
the fusing belt edge) L3, L4 the fusing heater lamp/3,
(Proper temperature
control)
4 TH 5 Fusing temperature Display of L1, The fusing heater lamp/1,
the fusing roller/Lw central L3, L4 the fusing heater lamp/3,
(Proper temperature
control)
the fusing roller/Lw edge) L3, L4 the fusing heater lamp/3,
(Proper temperature
control)
I-213

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
sensor/1 (temperature temperature (°C) L2 , the fusing heater lamp/2,
around the sensor) L3, L4 the fusing heater lamp/3,
(Proper temperature
control)
the fusing belt central L3, L4 the fusing heater lamp/3,
(Temperature control when
they are idling)
11 TH1 Fusing temperature Display of L1 Fusing heater lamp/1 Becomes active
sensor/1 (temperature of temperature (°C) when the
the fusing belt central temperature at
section) the center
section of the
fusing belt is
lower than a
prescribed level.
the fusing belt edge) temperature at
the edge of the
fusing belt is
lower than a
prescribed level.
the edge of the
fusing belt is
lower than a
prescribed level.
the edge of the
fusing belt is
lower than a
prescribed level.
15 TH 5 Fusing temperature Display of L4 Fusing heater lamp/4 Becomes active
the fusing roller/Lw central temperature at
section) the center
section of the
fusing roller/Lw
is lower than a
prescribed level.
the fusing roller/Lw edge) temperature at
the center
section of the
fusing roller/Lw
is lower than a
prescribed level.
47 0 M46 C1070, C1070P, C71hc:
Fusing motor (forward
rotation: 315 mm/s)
1 M46 C1060, C1060L: Fusing
motor (forward rotation:
271 mm/s)
2 M46 Fusing motor (forward
rotation: 225 mm/s)
4 M46 Fusing motor (forward
I-214

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
5 Main PS24 Fusing pressure position • 000: Other M47 Fusing pressure release
body sensor/1 than pressure motor (Pressure release
release position move)
position
• 001: Pressure
release
position
6 PS26 Fusing pressure position • 000: Other M47 Fusing pressure release
sensor/2 than the motor (Normal pressure
pressure position move)
position
• 001: Pressure
position
7 PS25 Fusing pressure position • 000: Other M47 Fusing pressure release
sensor/3 than weak motor (Weak pressure
pressure position move)
position
• 001: Weak
pressure
position
8 M46, C1070, C1070P, C71hc:
M47 The fusing motor becomes
active (315 mm/s) after the
pressure operation of the
fusing roller.
9 M46, C1060, C1060L: The
M47 fusing motor becomes
active (271 mm/s) after the
fusing roller.
10 M46, The fusing motor becomes
M47 active (225 mm/s) after the
fusing roller.
12 M46, The fusing becomes active
M47 (157.5 mm/s) after the
fusing roller.
14 Main PS23 Fusing loop sensor • 000: No paper M46, C1060, C1060L: The
body • 001: Paper M47, fusing motor becomes
L1, L2, active (271 mm/s) after the
L3, L4 pressure operation of the
fusing roller (The proper
temperature control is
performed for all heaters at
the same time.)
15 PS22 Fusing paper exit sensor • 000: No paper M46, C1060, C1060L: The
• 001: Paper M47, fusing motor becomes
L1, L2, active (271 mm/s) after the
L3, L4 pressure operation of the
fusing roller (The proper
temperature control is
performed for all heaters at
the same time.)
16 PS21 Fusing swing home sensor • 000: Other M40 Fusing swing motor (home
than home position search)
position
• 001: Home
position
17 PS21 Fusing swing home sensor • 000: Other M40 Fusing swing motor (ON:
than home Drive, OFF: Stop)
position
• 001: Home
position
18 SD3 Fusing separation shutter
solenoid
19 M40 Fusing swing motor (ON:
Start the interval operation,
OFF: Stop)
I-215

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
48 0 Main PS50, 1st transfer pressure • 000: Other M10 1st transfer pressure
body PS51 sensor/1, 1st transfer than home release motor (rotates
pressure sensor/2 position constantly)
• 001: Home
position
1 PS50, 1st transfer pressure • 000: Other M10 1st transfer pressure
PS51 sensor/1, 1st transfer than home release motor (stops at the
pressure sensor/2 position release position)
• 001: Home
position
2 PS50, 1st transfer pressure • 000: Other M10 1st transfer pressure
PS51 sensor/1, 1st transfer than home release motor (stops at the
pressure sensor/2 position black and white mode
• 001: Home pressure position)
position
3 • 000: Other M10 1st transfer pressure
than home release motor (stops at the
position color mode pressure
• 001: Home position)
position
50 0 Peculiar M8 C1070, C1070P, C71hc:
function Developing motor/Y (315
s mm/s)
1 M8 C1060, C1060L:
Developing motor/Y (271
mm/s)
2 M8 Developing motor/Y (225
mm/s)
4 M8 Developing motor/Y (157.5
mm/s)
5 M7 C1070, C1070P, C71hc:
Developing motor/M (315
mm/s)
6 M7 C1060, C1060L:
Developing motor/M (271
mm/s)
7 M7 Developing motor/M (225
mm/s)
9 M7 Developing motor/M
(157.5 mm/s)
10 M6 C1070, C1070P, C71hc:
Developing motor/C (315
mm/s)
11 M6 C1060, C1060L:
Developing motor/C (271
mm/s)
12 M6 Developing motor/C (225
mm/s)
14 M6 Developing motor/C (157.5
mm/s)
15 M5 C1070, C1070P, C71hc:
Developing motor/K (315
mm/s)
16 M5 C1060, C1060L:
Developing motor/K (271
mm/s)
17 M5 Developing motor/K (225
mm/s)
19 M5 Developing motor/K (157.5
mm/s)
51 0 EL 1 Erase lamp/Y
1 EL 2 Erase lamp/M
2 EL 4 Erase lamp/C
3 EL 3 Erase lamp/K
54 0 M19 Toner supply motor/Y
3 M18 Toner supply motor/M
I-216

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
6 M17 Toner supply motor/C
9 M16 Toner supply motor/K
12 CL10 Toner bottle clutch/Y
13 CL11 Toner bottle clutch/M
14 CL12 Toner bottle clutch/C
15 CL13 Toner bottle clutch/K
22 M13 Toner collection motor/1
23 M14 Toner collection motor/2
55 0 SD4 Color registration shutter
solenoid
56 0 - Status indicator light (PAT
1 is on)
1 - Status indicator light (PAT
2 is on)
3 is on)
4 is on)
58 0 Peculiar TCRS TCR sensor/Y detection 0 to 65535 TCRS TCR sensor/Y
function 1 signal (pulse count 1
s value)
1 TCRS TCR sensor/M detection 0 to 65535 TCRS TCR sensor/M
2 signal (pulse count 2
value)
2 TCRS TCR sensor/C detection 0 to 65535 TCRS TCR sensor/C
value)
3 TCRS TCR sensor/K detection 0 to 65535 TCRS TCR sensor/K
value)
59 0 - Fusing unit identification • 001: Envelope
signal fusing unit
• 002: Normal
fusing unit
2 PS23 Fusing loop sensor • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
3 PS22 Fusing paper exit sensor • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
67 0 SD-513 SD-513 PCB5 Rear console jam
indication board (direction
up towards the folding
conveyance section, jam
display LED of the sub tray
section)
1 PS211 Reverse stacker entrance • 000: Paper PCB5 Rear console jam
sensor • 001: No paper indication board (jam
display LED of the
entrance conveyance
section)
2 PS121 Clamp motor encoder • 000: PCB5 Rear console jam
sensor Transparent indication board (jam
• 001: Light display LED of the tri-
blocked folding tray section)
3 PS123 1st folding knife motor • 000: PCB6 Front console jam
encoder sensor Transparent indication board (saddle
• 001: Light stitching section, jam
blocked display LED of the booklet
movement section)
4 PS122 2nd folding knife motor • 000: PCB6 Front console jam
encoder sensor Transparent indication board (clamp
• 001: Light section, jam display LED
blocked of the booklet tray section)
I-217

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
5 PCB6 Front console jam
indication board (jam
display LED of direction
down towards the folding
conveyance section)
69 1 RU-509 SD1 Humidification section gate
solenoid
2 SD2 De-curler gate solenoid/1
3 SD3 De-curler gate solenoid/2
6 RU-509 - Humidifier unit setting • 000: ON
signal (DIPSW 4) • 001: OFF
7 - Subsequent stage • 000:
connection detection Connected
• 001: Not
connected
8 - HM-102 connection • 000: Not
detection connected
• 001:
Connected
9 - RU-509 connection • 000: Not
detection connected
• 001:
Connected
10 - Water tank full sensor • 000: Other
than full
• 001: Full
15 RU-509 M10 Humidification section
roller pressure motor/Lt
(home position search)
16 M10 Humidification roller Enabled after
pressure home sensor/Lt you conduct the
(Press) home position
search (69-15)
17 RU-509 PS1 Entrance sensor • 000: Paper M1 Entrance conveyance
• 001: No paper motor (400 mm/s)
18 PS2 De-curler entrance sensor • 000: Paper M2 Intermediate conveyance
• 001: No paper motor (400 mm/s)
19 PS3 Color density detection • 000: Paper M4 Paper exit motor (1000
timing sensor • 001: No paper mm/s)
20 PS4 Paper exit conveyance • 000: Paper M5 De-curler pressure motor
sensor • 001: No paper (home position search)
21 PS5 De-curler pressure home • 000: Home M5 De-curler pressure motor/ Enabled after
sensor/Lw position Lw you conduct the
• 001: Other home position
than home search (69-20)
position
22 PS6 De-curler pressure home • 000: Other M6 De-curler pressure motor/
sensor/Up than home Up (home position search)
position
• 001: Home
position
23 M6 De-curler pressure motor/ Enabled after
Up you conduct the
home position
search (69-22)
25 FM1, Entrance paper fan/1, /2, /
FM2, 3
FM3
26 FM4, Ventilation assist fan/1, /2
FM5
FM16, 6
FM17
FM19, 9
FM20
29 FM21 Ventilation assist fan/3
I-218

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
30 RU-509 SW1 Door switch • 000: Open JAMIB Jam indication board
• 001: Close
31 M3 De-curler conveyance
motor (400 mm/s)
33 RU-509 PS7 Humidification section • 000: Paper M7 Humidification section
entrance sensor • 001: No paper entrance conveyance
motor (400 mm/s)
34 PS8 Water tank empty sensor • 000: No water P1 Pump motor
• 001: Water
35 PS9 Humidification section • 000: Other M9 Humidification section
roller pressure home than home roller pressure motor/Rt
sensor/Rt position (home position search)
• 001: Home
position
36 PS10 Humidification section • 000: Other M9 Humidification section Enabled after
roller pressure home than home roller pressure motor/Rt you conduct the
sensor/Lt position (Press) home position
• 001: Home search (69-35)
position
37 M8 Humidification section
conveyance motor (400
mm/s)
40 PS12 Paper exit sensor • 000: Paper
• 001: No paper
41 RU-509 FM6, Humidification section
FM7, paper fan/1, /2, /3
FM8
44 FM9, Humidification section
FM10, paper fan/4, /5, /6
FM11
49 CDDB Color density detection Display top 8 bit CDLE Color density LED/Y, Color
Y board/Y (LED OFF) out of 16bit DY, density LED/M, Color
CDLE density LED/C, Color
DM, density LED/K
CDLE
DC,
CDLE
DK
50 CDDB Color density detection Display top 8 bit SD5 Shutter solenoid
M board/M (LED OFF) out of 16bit
51 CDDB Color density detection Display top 8 bit
C board/M (LED OFF) out of 16bit
K board/K (LED OFF) out of 16bit
Y board/Y (LED ON) out of 16bit
M board/M (LED ON) out of 16bit
C board/C (CDDBC) out of 16bit
K board/K (LED ON) out of 16bit
80 RU-516 HV, High voltage unit, paper
/RU-517 M30 exit motor (main body)
70 1 FD PS1 FD entrance sensor • 000: Paper FD M1 Entrance conveyance
• 001: No paper motor
2 PS4 PI exit sensor • 000: No paper M2 Punch conveyance motor
• 001: Paper
3 PS5 Punch conveyance sensor • 000: Paper M3 Intermediate conveyance
4 PS7 Main tray folding paper full • 000: Full M4 1st folding motor (F
sensor • 001: Other rotation)
than full
I-219

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
5 PS8 2 holes punch home • 000: Other M4 1st folding motor (R
sensor than home rotation)
position
• 001: Home
position
6 PS9 3 holes home sensor, 4 • 000: Other M5 2nd folding motor (F
holes home sensor than home rotation)
position
• 001: Home
position
7 PS10 Alignment plate home • 000: Other M5 2nd folding motor (R
position
• 001: Home
position
8 PS11 Punch registration home • 000: Other M6 3rd folding motor (F
position
• 001: Home
position
9 PS12 Punch scraps box set • 000: Not M6 3rd folding motor (R
sensor installed rotation)
• 001: Installed
10 PS13 Intermediate conveyance • 000: No paper M7 PI conveyance motor
sensor • 001: Paper
11 PS16 Sub tray exit sensor • 000: No paper M8 Paper lift motor/Up (down)
• 001: Paper
12 PS17 Sub tray paper full sensor • 000: Full M8 Paper lift motor/Up (up)
• 001: Other
than full
13 PS18 Main tray paper exit • 000: No paper M9 Paper lift motor/Lw (down)
14 PS20 Main tray upper limit • 000: Other M9 Paper lift motor/Lw (up)
sensor than upper
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
15 PS22 Main tray lower limit • 000: Other M17 Main tray exit motor
sensor than lower
limit
• 001: Lower
limit
16 PS23 Main tray empty sensor • 000: Paper
• 001: No paper
17 PS26 Punch scraps full sensor • 000: Full
• 001: Other
than full
21 FD M10 Punch motor (3 holes)
22 FD PS2 Folding exit sensor • 000: No paper M10 Punch motor (2 holes)
• 001: Paper
23 CN90 Main tray connection • 000: M11 Tray up down motor (home
recognition (CN90 Connected position search)
connection) • 001:
Unconnected
24 PS51 1st folding conveyance • 000: Paper M12 Alignment motor (home
sensor • 001: No paper position search)
25 PS52 Folding entrance sensor • 000: Paper
• 001: No paper
26 PS53 2nd folding conveyance • 000: Paper FD M13 Punch registration motor
27 PS54 3rd folding conveyance • 000: Paper M14 1st folding release motor
sensor • 001: No paper (conveyance position
move)
28 PS55 1st folding cam home • 000: Pressure M14 1st folding release motor ON: Folding
sensor • 001: Release (folding position move) position OFF:
Conveyance
position
I-220

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
29 PS56 2nd folding cam home • 000: Pressure M15 2nd folding release motor
sensor • 001: Release (conveyance position
move)
30 PS57 3rd folding cam home • 000: Pressure M15 2nd folding release motor ON: Folding
sensor • 001: Release (folding position move) position OFF:
Conveyance
position
31 PS58 S size conveyance sensor • 000: No paper M16 3rd folding release motor
• 001: Paper (conveyance position
move)
32 PS6 Punch registration sensor • 000: No paper M16 3rd folding release motor ON: Folding
• 001: Paper (folding position move) position OFF:
Conveyance
position
33 FDOB Staple selection switch • 000: ON
• 001: OFF
34 FDOB Punch selection switch • 000: ON
• 001: OFF
35 FDOB Folding selection switch • 000: ON
• 001: OFF
36 FDOB Start or stop switch • 000: ON
• 001: OFF
37 FDOB Multi feed function select • 000: ON
switch • 001: OFF
39 PS46 Sub tray folding paper full • 000: Other
sensor than full
• 001: Full
40 PS31 PI conveyance sensor/Up • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
41 PS37 PI conveyance sensor/Lw • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
42 PS32 PI upper limit sensor/Up • 000: Other
than upper
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
43 PS33 PI paper empty sensor/Up • 000: Other
than full
• 001: Full
44 PS34 PI lift plate home sensor/ • 000: Other
Up than home
position
• 001: Home
position
45 PS35 L size sensor/Up • 000: Paper
• 001: No paper
46 PS36 S size sensor/Up • 000: Paper
• 001: No paper
48 PS38 PI upper limit sensor/Lw • 000: Other
than upper
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
49 PS39 PI paper empty sensor/Lw • 000: Other
than full
• 001: Full
50 PS40 PI lift plate home sensor/ • 000: Other
Lw than home
position
• 001: Home
position
51 PS41 L size sensor/Lw • 000: Paper
• 001: No paper
52 PS42 S size sensor/Lw • 000: Paper
• 001: No paper
53 PS43 PI cover open close • 000: Open
sensor • 001: Close
I-221

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
54 PS44 PI paper set sensor/Up • 000: Paper
• 001: No paper
55 PS45 PI paper set sensor/Lw • 000: Paper
• 001: No paper
61 PS47 PI max paper size sensor/ • 000: Paper FD SD1 Entrance gate solenoid
Up • 001: No paper
62 PS48 PI max paper size sensor/ • 000: Paper SD3 S size gate solenoid
Lw • 001: No paper
63 SD4 L size gate solenoid
64 FD - FD connection detection • 000: Not SD5 Roller solenoid/1
signal connected
• 001:
Connected
65 SD6 Roller solenoid/2
68 SD9 Sub tray gate solenoid
69 SD12 Paper exit solenoid
70 SD13 PI pick-up solenoid/Up
71 SD14 PI pick-up solenoid/Lw
72 SD15 Folding gate solenoid
74 SD18 2nd folding roller solenoid
75 CL1 PI registration clutch/Up
76 CL2 PI registration clutch/Lw
1 1 (CLK output)
89 FDOB FD operation board (lit all
LEDs)
90 JAMIB Jam indication board (lit all
LEDs)
71 1 SD-506 PS1 Entrance sensor • 000: No paper SD-506 M1 Entrance conveyance
• 001: Paper motor
2 PS2 Horizontal conveyance • 000: No paper M2 Horizontal conveyance
sensor/1 • 001: Paper motor
3 PS3 Horizontal conveyance • 000: No paper M3 Folding entrance motor
sensor/2 • 001: Paper
4 PS4 Horizontal conveyance exit • 000: No paper M4 Folding conveyance motor
sensor • 001: Paper (F rotation)
5 PS5 Right angle conveyance • 000: Paper M4 Folding conveyance motor
sensor/1 • 001: No paper (R rotation)
6 PS6 Right angle conveyance • 000: Paper M6 Right angle conveyance
sensor/2 • 001: No paper motor
7 PS7 Folding sensor/1 • 000: Paper M29 Stapler motor/Rt (1 staple)
• 001: No paper
8 PS8 Folding passage sensor • 000: No paper M30 Stapler motor/Lt (1 staple)
• 001: Paper
9 PS17 Overlap home sensor • 000: Other M5 Bundle exit motor
than home
position
• 001: Home
position
10 PS18 Folding main scan • 000: Home M8 Folding sub scan
alignment home sensor/ position alignment exit motor
Fr1 • 001: Other
than home
position
11 PS49 Folding main scan • 000: Home
alignment home sensor/ position
Fr2 • 001: Other
than home
position
I-222

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
12 PS20 1st folding blade home • 000: Home
sensor/1 position
• 001: Other
than home
position
13 PS21 1st folding blade home • 000: Other
sensor/2 than home
position
• 001: Home
position
14 PS22 2nd folding blade home • 000: Home
sensor/1 position
• 001: Other
than home
position
15 PS23 2nd folding blade home • 000: Other
sensor/2 than home
position
• 001: Home
position
16 PS24 Folding exit home sensor • 000: Other
than home
position
• 001: Home
position
17 PS9 Tri-folding exit sensor • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
18 PS10 Tri-folding paper full • 000: Full
sensor • 001: Other
than full
19 PS11 Sub tray exit sensor • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
20 PS12 Sub tray paper full sensor • 000: Full
• 001: Other
than full
21 PS44 Folding sensor/2 • 000: Paper SD-506 M5 Bundle exit motor (home
• 001: No paper position search)
22 PS19 Folding main scan • 000: Other
alignment home sensor/Rr than home
position
• 001: Home
position
23 PS46 Guide shaft home sensor • 000: Other
than home
position
• 001: Home
position
24 HS2, Clincher start sensors/Rt ,/ • 000: Clinch SD-506 M7 Folding main scan
HS4 Lt • 001: No clinch alignment motor/Fr (home
position search)
25 M7 Folding main scan Enabled after
alignment motor/Fr you conduct the
(alignment) home position
search (71-24)
27 M8 Folding sub scan
alignment exit motor
29 M9 Saddle stitching alignment
motor/Rt (home position
search)
30 M9 Saddle stitching alignment Enabled after
motor/Rt (inner movement) you conduct the
home position
search (71-29)
31 M10 Bundle arm motor (home
position search)
I-223

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
32 M10 Bundle arm motor (inner Enabled after
movement) you conduct the
home position
search (71-31)
33 SD-506 PS13 Saddle stitching paper • 000: Paper M11 Bundle clip motor (home
sensor • 001: No paper position search)
34 PS14 Bundle sensor/1 • 000: Paper M12 Bundle registration motor
• 001: No paper (home position search)
35 PS15 Bundle sensor/2 • 000: Paper M13 Overlap motor (home
• 001: No paper position search)
36 PS16 Bundle registration plate • 000: Home M14 Folding main scan
home sensor position alignment motor/Rr (home
• 001: Other position search)
than home
position
37 PS25 Stapler movement home • 000: Other M14 Folding main scan After you
sensor than home alignment motor/Rr conduct the
position (forward movement) home position
• 001: Home search (71-36)
position
38 PS26 Clincher up down home • 000: Home
sensor position
• 001: Other
than home
position
39 PS27 Saddle stitching press • 000: Other SD-506 M15 Stapler movement motor
home sensor than home (home position search)
position
• 001: Home
position
40 PS28 Saddle stitching alignment • 000: Other M15 Stapler movement motor
home sensor/Rt than home (staple position movement)
position
• 001: Home
position
41 PS29 Saddle stitching alignment • 000: Other M16 Saddle stitching alignment
home sensor/Lt than home motor/Lt (home position
position search)
• 001: Home
position
42 PS33 Bundle clip upper limit • 000: Other M16 Saddle stitching alignment
sensor than upper motor/Lt (inner movement)
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
43 PS30 Bundle clip lower limit • 000: Other M17 Bundle press movement
sensor than lower motor (home position
limit search)
• 001: Lower
limit
44 PS32 Bundle arm home sensor • 000: Other M18 1st folding blade motor
than home (home position search)
position
• 001: Home
position
45 PS31 Bundle arm rotation home • 000: Other M19 2nd folding blade motor
position
• 001: Home
position
46 PS34 Bundle registration home • 000: Other M20 Clincher up down motor
position
• 001: Home
position
I-224

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
47 PS35 Bundle press stage up • 000: Other M20 Clincher up down motor When you
down home sensor than home (stapling) perform the
position output check,
• 001: Home place 2 or more
position sheets on the
clincher or
remove the
staple cartridge.
48 PS45 Bundle press stage up • 000: Other M21 Saddle stitching press
down limit sensor than upper motor (home position
limit search)
• 001: Upper
limit
49 PS37 Bundle press home sensor • 000: Home M22 Bundle arm rotation motor
position (home position search)
• 001: Other
than home
position
50 PS47 Bundle press lower limit • 000: Lower M23 Bundle press motor (home
sensor limit position search)
• 001: Other
than lower
limit
51 PS48 Scraps press home sensor • 000: Home M24 Bundle press stage up
position down motor (home
than home
position
52 PS40 Scraps box set sensor • 000: Not M25 Guide shaft motor (home
installed position search)
• 001: Installed
53 PS41 Trimmer scraps full sensor • 000: Full M31 Trimmer blade motor
• 001: Other (home position search)
than full
54 PS36 Bundle press movement • 000: Other M31 Trimmer blade motor
home sensor than home (trimming position)
position
• 001: Home
position
55 PS38 Bundle arm assist home • 000: Other M32 Trimmer press motor
position
• 001: Home
position
56 PS39 Bundle arm assist upper • 000: Upper M32 Trimmer press motor
limit sensor limit (upper limit search)
• 001: Other
than upper
limit
57 SW1 Staple empty switch/Rt • 000: Staple M32 Trimmer press motor Enabled after
• 001: No staple (pressing) you conduct the
home position
search (71-55)
58 SW2 Staple empty switch/Lt • 000: Staple M32 Trimmer press motor Enabled after
• 001: No staple (movement to trimmer you conduct the
board release position) home position
search (71-55)
59 HS1 Stapler home sensor/Rt • 000: Home M10 Bundle arm motor (inner
position movement)
• 001: Other
than home
position
60 HS3 Stapler home sensor/Lt • 000: Home M23 Bundle press motor
position (pressing)
• 001: Other
than home
position
I-225

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
61 PS50 Trimmer blade home • 000: Other M24 Bundle press stage up
sensor than home down motor (up)
position
• 001: Home
position
62 PS51 Trimmer blade upper limit • 000: Upper M24 Bundle press stage up
sensor limit down motor (home
• 001: Other position search for the
than upper bundle registration plate)
limit
63 PS52 Trimmer press upper limit • 000: Other M26 Bundle arm assist motor
sensor than upper (home position search)
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
64 PS53 Trimmer press home • 000: Other
sensor than lower
limit
• 001: Lower
limit
65 PS42 Front door sensor/Rt • 000: Close SD-506 M33 Trimmer paddle motor
• 001: Open (forward rotation)
66 PS43 Front door sensor/Lt • 000: Close M33 Trimmer paddle motor
• 001: Open (reverse rotation)
67 PS54 Bundle sensor/4 • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
68 PS55 Trimmer registration • 000: Other
sensor than
registration
position
• 001:
Registration
position
69 PS56 Folding sub scan • 000: Other
alignment home sensor than home
position
• 001: Home
position
70 PS57 Bundle exit sensor/2 • 000: Paper
• 001: No paper
71 PS58 Bundle tray set sensor • 000: Installed SD-506 SD1 Entrance gate solenoid
• 001: Not
installed
72 PS59 Trimmer board • 000: Not SD2 Right angle conveyance
replacement sensor replace gate solenoid
• 001: replace
73 SD3 Horizontal conveyance
gate solenoid
74 SD4 Roller release solenoid/4
75 SD-506 PS61 Bundle tray paper full • 000: Other SD5 Roller release solenoid/1
sensor than full (roller press)
• 001: Full
(roller release)
77 SD-506 PS60 Folding entrance sensor • 000: Paper SD6 Roller release solenoid/2
• 001: No paper
(roller press)
(roller release)
80 SD8 Folding unit lock solenoid
(lock)
81 SD-506 PS62 Trimmer completion • 000: Other SD8 Folding unit lock solenoid
sensor than complete (release)
• 001: Complete
82 SD11 Trimmer board solenoid
(ON once)
I-226

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
83 SD-506 PS66 Wire slack prevention • 000: Without SD11 Trimmer board solenoid
sensor slack (ON twice)
• 001: With
slack
84 - New trimming unit • 000: SD12 Brake solenoid
• 001: Not
connected
86 CL1 Tri-folding exit clutch
87 FM1 Scraps removal fan motor
88 SD-506 - FNS connection detection • 000: Not
signal connected
• 001:
Connected
90 SD-506 JAMIB Jam indication board (LED
/2 ON)
95 - Trimmer board solenoid Reset after
operation counter reset replace the
trimmer board
96 - Series of trimming
operation
97 M32 Trimmer press motor
(Move the trimmer board
replace position after
home position search)
98 M32, Trimmer board forced
SD11 movement (Activate SD11
after the trimmer press
motor moves to the
trimmer board replacement
position)
0 SD-513 SD-513 M49 Entrance motor
1 PS59 Entrance sensor/1 • 000: Paper M62 Paper re-feed motor
• 001: No paper
2 PS60 Entrance sensor/2 • 000: Paper M101 Reverse exit motor
• 001: No paper
3 PS1 Horizontal conveyance • 000: Paper M1 Conveyance motor
sensor/2 • 001: No paper
4 PS3 Horizontal conveyance • 000: Paper M6 Sub tray paper exit motor
5 PS5 Tri-folding tray paper exit • 000: Paper M12 Folding roller motor <Condition>
sensor • 001: No paper •Each parts: HP
<Prior
execution>
1. 71-46
2. 71-41
3. 71-42
<Remark>
M12 stops
automatically
after a specified
period of time.
6 PS10 Sub tray exit sensor • 000: Paper M54 Horizontal conveyance
7 PS12 Tri-folding conveyance • 000: Paper M65 Slitter registration roller
sensor • 001: No paper motor
8 PS22 Half folding paper exit • 000: Paper M108 Slitter motor
9 PS74 Tri-folding tray paper exit • 000: Paper M28 Paper exit motor
10 PS23 Saddle stitching stacker • 000: Paper M29 Paper exit belt motor
empty sensor • 001: No paper
11 PS94 Booklet set unit empty • 000: Paper M113, Rotary cutter motor/Fr,
sensor • 001: No paper M114 rotary cutter motor/Rr
12 SD-513 PS37 Clamp empty sensor • 000: Paper
• 001: No paper
I-227

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
13 SD-513 PS38 Gripper paper sensor • 000: Paper SD-513 FM3, Fall assist fan/Rr, fall
• 001: No paper FM4 assist fan/Fr
14 PS43 Booklet tray paper exit • 000: Paper
15 PS98 Registration sensor • 000: Paper M30, Stapler motor, clincher <Condition>
• 001: No paper SD1 solenoid (Home position •Each parts: HP
search)
16 - FD-504 connection • 000: M30, The string of the staple <Condition>
detection signal Connected SD1 operation •Each parts: HP
• 001: Not <Prior
connected execution>
1. 71-49
2. 71-59
3. 71-15
<Remark>
When you
perform the
output check,
place 2 or more
sheets on the
clincher or
remove the
staple cartridge.
17 - TU-503 connection • 000: SD7 Sub tray gate solenoid
detection signal Connected
• 001: Not
connected
18 - CR-101 connection • 000: SD4 Saddle stitching alignment
detection signal Connected plate release solenoid/Md
• 001: Not
connected
19 SD-513 PS72 Horizontal conveyance • 000: Paper SD-513 SD11 Booklet holding solenoid <Condition>
sensor /1 • 001: No paper •Each parts: HP
<Prior
execution>
1. 71-53
2. 71-70
20 SD-513 PS62 Entrance section door • 000: Open SD-513 SD14 Front console open close
sensor • 001: Close solenoid
21 PS65 Conveyance gate home • 000: Other SD12 Trimmer brake solenoid
sensor than home
position
• 001: Home
position
22 PS66 Reverse exit gate home • 000: Other - The string of trimming <Prior
sensor than home operation execution>
position 1. 71-77
• 001: Home 2. 71-81
position
23 PS97 CD alignment plate home • 000: Other M45 Entrance gate motor
sensor/Lw than home (Home position search)
position
• 001: Home
position
24 PS99 Paper re-feed roller • 000: Other M46 Reverse exit gate motor
pressure release gate than home (Home position search)
sensor position
• 001: Home
position
25 PS103 Front stopper home sensor • 000: Other M63 CD alignment motor/Lw
than home (Home position search)
position
• 001: Home
position
26 PS104 CD alignment plate home • 000: Other M63 CD alignment motor/Lw
sensor/Up than home (Standby position
position movement (297 mm))
• 001: Home
position
I-228

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
27 PS105 Reverse exit roller • 000: Other M66 Paper re-feed roller
pressure release home than home pressure release motor
sensor position (Home position search)
• 001: Home
position
28 PS106 Slit scraps box set sensor • 000: Set M104 Leading stopper motor
• 001: Not set (Home position search)
29 PS107 Slit scraps box full sensor/ • 000: Paper M104 Front stopper motor
1 • 001: No paper (Standby position
movement (420 mm))
30 PS6 Horizontal conveyance • 000: Other M50 CD alignment motor/Up
roller pressure release than home (Home position search)
home sensor/1 position
• 001: Home
position
31 PS7 Horizontal conveyance • 000: Other M50 CD alignment motor/Up
roller pressure release than home (Standby position
home sensor/2 position movement (297 mm))
• 001: Home
position
32 PS11 Sub tray paper full sensor • 000: Other M50, CD alignment motor/Up,
than full M63 CD alignment motor/Lw
• 001: Full (Standby position
movement (297 mm)
simultaneous drive)
33 PS13 FD alignment belt home • 000: Home M102 Entrance roller pressure
sensor/1 position release motor (Home
than home
position
34 PS14 FD alignment belt home • 000: Home M102 Entrance roller pressure
sensor/2 position release motor (Press)
• 001: Other
than home
position
35 PS15 1st folding stopper home • 000: Other M7 Horizontal conveyance
sensor than home roller pressure release
position motor/1 (Home position
• 001: Home search)
position
36 PS16 1st folding knife home • 000: Other M8 Horizontal conveyance
sensor/1 than home roller pressure release
position motor/2 (Home position
• 001: Home search)
position
37 PS17 1st folding knife home • 000: Other M7 Horizontal conveyance
position motor/1 (Press)
• 001: Home
position
38 PS18 2nd folding knife home • 000: Other M8 Horizontal conveyance
position motor/2 (Press)
• 001: Home
position
39 PS19 2nd folding knife home • 000: Other M11 FD alignment belt motor
sensor/2 than home (Home position search)
position
• 001: Home
position
40 PS20 2nd folding sensor • 000: Paper M9 1st folding stopper motor
• 001: No paper (Home position search)
41 PS21 Half folding conveyance • 000: Home M13 1st folding knife motor <Condition>
belt home sensor position (Home position search) •Each parts: HP
• 001: Other <Prior
than home execution>
position 1. 71-46
I-229

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
42 PS75 Conveyance gate home • 000: Other M14 2nd folding knife motor
sensor than home (Home position search)
position
• 001: Home
position
43 PS81 Tri-folding tray paper full • 000: Other M48 Half folding conveyance <Condition>
sensor than full belt motor (Home position •Each parts: HP
• 001: Full search) <Prior
execution>
1. 71-46
44 M55 Conveyance route switch
motor (Home position
search)
45 PS89 Jam processing guide • 000: Open M59 Folding roller pressure
open close sensor/1 • 001: Close switch motor (Home
position search)
46 PS90 Jam processing guide • 000: Open M67 Folding roller guide motor <Condition>
open close sensor/2 • 001: Close (Home position search) •Each parts: HP
<Prior
execution>
1. 71-41
2. 71-43
47 PS92 Jam processing guide • 000: Open M58 Booklet holding unit <Condition>
open close sensor/3 • 001: Close movement motor (Home •Each parts: HP
position search)
48 PS127 Sub tray open close • 000: Open M58 Booklet holding unit <Condition>
sensor • 001: Close movement motor (Booklet •Each parts: HP
holding position <Prior
movement) execution>
1. 71-51
2. 71-70
49 PS129 Folding roller guide home • 000: Other M18 Saddle stitching alignment <Condition>
sensor than home motor/Rr (Home position •Each parts: HP
position search)
• 001: Home
position
50 PS25 Saddle stitching alignment • 000: Other M18 Saddle stitching alignment <Condition>
plate home sensor/Rr than home motor/Rr (Standby position •Each parts: HP
position movement (297 mm)) <Prior
• 001: Home execution>
position 1. 71-53
2. 71-15
3. 71-59
4. 71-49
51 PS26 Saddle stitching alignment • 000: Other M19 Saddle stitching alignment <Condition>
plate home sensor/Fr than home motor/Fr (Home position •Each parts: HP
position search)
• 001: Home
position
52 PS27 Booklet holding home • 000: Other M19 Saddle stitching alignment <Condition>
sensor than home motor/Fr (Standby position •Each parts: HP
position move (297 mm)) <Prior
position 1. 71-54
2. 71-56
3. 71-53
4. 71-51
53 PS28 Booklet set unit position • 000: Other M17 Booklet holding motor <Condition>
sensor than home (Home position search) •Each parts: HP
position
• 001: Home
position
54 PS29 Booklet movement unit • 000: Other M20 Booklet set motor (Home <Condition>
position sensor/Lt than home position search) •Each parts: HP
position
• 001: Home
position
I-230

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
55 SD-513 PS73 Booklet movement unit • 000: Other SD-513 M20 Booklet set motor (paper <Condition>
position sensor/Rt than home standby position •Each parts: HP
position movement) <Prior
position 1. 71-59
2. 71-51
3. 71-56
4. 71-54
56 SD-513 PS47 Front console open close • 000: Open SD-513 M21 Booklet movement motor <Condition>
sensor • 001: Close (Home position search) •Each parts: HP
57 PS56 Saddle stitching alignment • 000: Other M21 Booklet movement motor <Condition>
plate home sensor/Md than home (Clamp position movement •Each parts: HP
position (297 mm)) <Prior
position 1. 71-59
2. 71-51
3. 71-54
4. 71-56
58 PS63 Saddle stitching section • 000: Open M64 Stapler movement motor
door sensor • 001: Close (Home position search)
59 PS83 Booklet holding unit home • 000: Other M51 Saddle stitching alignment <Condition>
sensor than home motor/Md (Home position •Each parts: HP
position search)
• 001: Home
position
60 PS95 Stapler home sensor • 000: Other M51 Saddle stitching alignment <Condition>•Eac
than home motor/Md (Standby h parts:
position position movement (297 HP<Prior
• 001: Home mm)) execution>1.
position 71-532. 71-153.
71-494. 71-515.
71-546. 71-59
61 PS125 Clamp up down position • 000: Other
sensor/Fr than home
position
• 001: Home
position
62 PS128 Clamp up down position • 000: Other M52 Fore edge finger motor
sensor/Rr than home (Home position search)
position
• 001: Home
position
63 SD-513 PS101 Reverse stacker empty • 000: Paper SD-513 M52 Fore edge finger motor <Prior
sensor • 001: No paper (Press) execution>
1. 71-56
64 PS115 Slit scraps box full sensor/ • 000: Other M23 Clamp motor (Home
2 than full position search)
• 001: Full
65 SD-513 PS31 Clamp open close home • 000: Other SD-513
sensor than home
position
• 001: Home
position
66 PS33 Lifter plate size home • 000: Other M22 Lifter plate movement <Condition>
sensor than home motor (Home position •Each parts: HP
position search) <Prior
position 1. 71-69
67 PS34 Lifter plate position sensor • 000: Other M22 Lifter plate movement <Condition>
than home motor (A3 standby position •Each parts: HP
position 1. 71-66
68 PS35 Fore edge stopper home • 000: Other M39 Lifter plate up down motor <Condition>
sensor than home (Home position search) •Each parts: HP
position
• 001: Home
position
I-231

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
69 PS36 Fore edge stopper position • 000: Fore M25, Clamp up down motor, <Condition>
sensor edge stopper M53 SQF clamp up down motor •Each parts: HP
store position (Home position search)
• 001: Fore
edge stopper
lift up position
70 PS30 Clamp up down home • 000: Other M25, Clamp up down motor, <Condition>
sensor/Rr than home M53 SQF clamp up down motor •Each parts: HP
position (Stops at the top)
• 001: Home
position
71 PS70 Clamp up down home • 000: Not M24 Fore edge stopper motor <Condition>
sensor/Fr detected (Home position search) •Each parts: HP
• 001: Detected <Prior
execution>
1. 71-69
72 PS86 Trimmer booklet holding • 000: Other M24 Fore edge stopper motor <Condition>
home sensor than home (paper standby position •Each parts: HP
position 1. 71-69
2. 71-71
73 PS44 Booklet tray paper full • 000: Other M60 Trimmer booklet holding <Condition>
sensor than full motor (Home position •Each parts: HP
• 001: Full search) <Prior
execution>
1. 71-69
74 PS124 Booklet tray section door • 000: Open M33 Trimmer board movement <Prior
sensor • 001: Close motor (the trimmer board execution>
moves 1 mm) 1. 71-77
75 PS39 Gripper open close home • 000: Other
sensor than home
position
• 001: Home
position
76 PS40 Gripper open close sensor • 000: Release
• 001: Pressure
77 PS41 Gripper angle sensor/1 • 000: Other M31, 1 pitch movement of the <Condition>
than booklet M32, trimmer board movement •Each parts: HP
receive M33, motor after home posiotion
position M35 search of the trimmer unit
• 001: Booklet
receive
position
78 PS42 Gripper angle sensor/2 • 000: Other M33 Trimmer board movement
than paper motor (the trimmer counter
exit position clear)
• 001: Paper
exit position
79 PS48 Trimmer scraps box set • 000: Not set M31 Trimmer blade motor <Prior
sensor • 001: Set (Home position search) execution>
1. 71-77
80 PS49 Trimmer blade home • 000: Other M31 Trimmer blade motor <Prior
sensor than home (trimmer position move) execution>
position 1. 71-77
• 001: Home
position
81 PS50 Trimmer blade upper limit • 000: Other M32 Trimmer press motor <Prior
sensor than upper (opening upper limit execution>
limit position movement) 1. 71-82
• 001: Upper 2. 71-79
limit (Blade 3. 71-73
pressure)
82 PS51 Trimmer press upper limit • 000: Other M32 Trimmer press motor <Prior
sensor than the (Home position search) execution>
opening upper 1. 71-77
limit
• 001: Opening
upper limit
I-232

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
83 PS52 Trimmer press home • 000: Other M32 Trimmer press motor <Prior
sensor than home (Pressing) execution>
position 1. 71-77
• 001: Home
position
84 PS53 Trimmer board • 000: Other M32 Trimmer press motor <Prior
replacement sensor than timing of (Movement to trimmer execution>
replacement board release position) 1. 71-82
• 001: Timing of 2. 71-79
replacement 3. 71-73
85 PS54 Trimmer completion • 000: Other M32 Trimmer press motor <Prior
sensor than trimmer (Movement to trimmer execution>
completion board release position 1. 71-77
• 001: Trimmer after home position
completion search)
86 SD-513 PS55 Wire slack prevention • 000: Without SD-513 M30, Stapler motor (clinch <Condition>
sensor "Slack" M17 position movement), •Each parts: HP
• 001: With booklet holding motor <Prior
"Slack" (moving up position execution>
movement) 1. 71-49
2. 71-59
3. 71-58
4. 71-49
5. 71-59
6. 71-58
7. 71-15
<Remark>
When you
perform this
output check, be
sure to place 2
sheets or more
on the clincher
or remove the
staple cartridge.
87 PS93 Trimmer shutter open • 000: Close
close sensor • 001: Open
88 SD-513 PS96 Trimmer scraps box full • 000: Full SD-513 M26 Gripper motor (Home <Condition>
sensor • 001: Other position search) •Each parts: HP
than full <Prior
execution>
1. 71-94
2. 71-68
3. 71-66
4. 71-95
5. 71-69
6. 71-96
89 PS114 Slitter home sensor/Fr • 000: Other M112 Slitter movement motor/Fr
position
• 001: Home
position
90 PS108 Slitter home sensor/Rr • 000: Other M112 Slitter movement motor/Fr
than home (width 277 mm position
position movement)
• 001: Home
position
91 PS110 Slitter shutter open close • 000: Open M106, Slitter movement motor/Rr,
sensor • 001: Close M112 Slitter movement motor/Fr
(277 mm width position
movement)
92 PS204 SQF roller position sensor/ • 000: Without M106 Slitter movement motor/Rr
2 SQF roller (Home position search)
• 001: With SQF
roller
93 PS205 SQF clamp pressure • 000: Other M106 Slitter movement motor/Rr
release home sensor/Fr than home (277 mm width position
position movement)
• 001: Home
position
I-233

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
94 PS206 SQF clamp open close • 000: Other M202, SQF clamp motor/Rr, SQF <Condition>
sensor/Fr than pressure M203 clamp motor/Fr (home •Each parts: HP
• 001: Pressure position search)
95 PS201 SQF clamp pressure • 000: Other M202, SQF clamp motor/Rr, SQF <Prior
release home sensor/Rr than home M203 clamp motor/Fr (pressure) execution>
position 1. 71-94
• 001: Home 2. 71-68
position 3. 71-66
96 PS202 SQF clamp open close • 000: Other M201 SQF roller motor (Home <Condition>
sensor/Rr than pressure position search) •Each parts: HP
• 001: Pressure <Prior
execution>
1. 71-94
2. 71-68
3. 71-66
4. 71-95
5. 71-69
97 PS203 SQF roller position sensor/ • 000: Without M107 Creaser motor (Home
1 SQF roller position search)
• 001: With SQF
roller
98 PS109 Creaser home sensor • 000: Other
than home
position
• 001: Home
position
99 - FNS connection detection • 000:
signal Connected
• 001: Not
connected
72 1 FS-531/ PS1 Sub tray exit sensor • 000: No paper FS-531/ M1 FNS Conveyance motor
612 • 001: Paper 612 (667 mm/sec)
2 PS4 FNS entrance sensor • 000: Paper
• 001: No paper
3 PS19 Sub tray paper full sensor • 000: Other FS-531/ M2 Shift roller motor (home
than full 612 position search)
• 001: Full
4 PS12 Paper exit home sensor • 000: Close
position
• 001: Other
than close
position
5 PS16 Gate home sensor • 000: Home
position
• 001: Other
than home
position
6 PS6 Main tray paper exit • 000: No paper FS-531/ M3 Main tray up down motor
sensor • 001: Paper 612 (home position search)
7 PS18 Shift roller home sensor • 000: Home M3 Main tray up down motor
position (lower limit move)
• 001: Other
than home
position
8 M3 Main tray up down motor
(a few sheet up down
movement in staple mode)
10 FS-531/ PS3 Main tray lower limit • 000: Other FS-612 M4 Clincher rotation motor
612 sensor than lower (home position search)
limit
• 001: Lower
limit
11 FS-531/ M5 Alignment motor/Up (home
612 position search)
12 FS-531/ PS2 Main tray upper limit • 000: Other M5 Alignment motor/Up (A4S Available only
612 sensor than upper standby position move) from the home
limit position
• 001: Upper
limit
I-234

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
13 PS7 Stapler paper exit upper • 000: Upper M5 Alignment motor/Up Available only
limit sensor limit (alignment operation) from the A4
• 001: Other position
than upper
limit
14 PS15 Counter reset sensor • 000: No paper M5 Alignment motor/Up Available only
• 001: Paper (standby position move) after the
alignment
operation
16 M7 Stapler roller motor (staple
mode)
17 FS-531/ PS5 Stacker entrance sensor • 000: No paper M7 Paper exit roller motor
612 • 001: Paper (folding mode)
18 PS8 Alignment home sensor/ • 000: Other
Up than home
position
• 001: Home
position
19 PS9 Paper exit belt home • 000: Other
sensor than home
position
• 001: Home
position
20 PS11 Stapler movement home • 000: Other
sensor than home
position
• 001: Home
position
21 FS-612 PS13 Stapler rotation home • 000: Other FS-531/ M8 Paper exit opening motor
sensor than home 612 (home position search)
position
• 001: Home
position
22 PS14 Clincher rotation home • 000: Other M8 Paper exit opening motor Available only
sensor than home (opening moved: in A4S from the home
position stapling mode) position
• 001: Home
position
23 FS-531/ PS20 Stacker empty sensor • 000: No paper
612 • 001: Paper
24 MS1 Door switch • 000: Close
• 001: Open
25 PS31 Stapler motor home • 000: Home
sensor/Fr position
• 001: Other
than home
position
26 PS30 Stapler motor home • 000: Home FS-531/ M14 Stapler motor/Fr (initial
sensor/Rr position 612 operation performed)
• 001: Other
than home
position
27 SW4 Staple empty switch/Fr • 000: Staple M14 Stapler motor/Fr (stapling
• 001: No staple operation performed)
28 SW2 Staple empty switch/Rr • 000: Staple M9 Stapler motor/Rr (initial
• 001: No staple operation performed)
29 SW4 Staple empty switch/Fr (U- • 000: Staple M9 Stapler motor/Rr (stapling
shaped staple) • 001: No staple operation performed)
30 SW2 Staple empty switch/Rr (U- • 000: Staple
shaped staple) • 001: No staple
31 SW3 Cartridge set switch/Fr • 000: Cartridge FS-531/ M11, Stapler rotation motor,
• 001: No 612 M4 Clincher rotation motor
cartridge (FS-61 (home position search)
2 only)
32 SW1 Cartridge set switch/Rr • 000: Cartridge M11, Stapler movement motor,
• 001: No M4 Clincher rotation motor
cartridge (FS-61 (A4, 1 staple position)
2 only)
I-235

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
35 FS-612 PS33 Clincher motor home • 000: Home
sensor/Fr position
• 001: Other
than home
position
36 PS32 Clincher motor home • 000: Home FS-531/ M13 Stacker entrance motor
sensor/Rr position 612 (670 mm/sec)
• 001: Other
than home
position
38 FS-612 M6 Stapler rotation motor
39 M16 Alignment motor/Lw (home
position search)
41 FS-612 PS22 Folding knife home sensor • 000: Home M18 Saddle stitching stopper
position motor (home position
• 001: Other search)
than home
position
42 PS23 Saddle stitching stopper • 000: Other M18 Saddle stitching stopper Available only
home sensor than home motor (A4S stopper from the home
position release) position
• 001: Home
position
43 PS24 Alignment home sensor/ • 000: Other M19 Folding knife motor (1
Lw than home cycle performed)
position
• 001: Home
position
44 PS25 Folding paper exit sensor • 000: No paper M20 Folding transfer motor
• 001: Paper (high speed forward
rotation)
45 PS26 Folding pass-through • 000: No paper FS-531/ SD4 Paper exit opening
sensor • 001: Paper 612 solenoid
46 PS29 Folding full sensor • 000: Other SD5 Bypass gate solenoid
than full
• 001: Full
47 FS-612 SD6 Tri-folding gate solenoid
48 FS-531/ SD51 Paper assist solenoid
612
49 FS-531/ PS201 Paper pass-through • 000: No paper FS-612 SD7, Flat stitching stopper
612 sensor/Up (PI) • 001: Paper SD8 release solenoid/Fr, /Rr
50 PS206 Paper pass-through • 000: No paper
sensor/Lw (PI) • 001: Paper
53 FS-531/ M21 Sub tray exit motor (667
612 mm/sec)
55 M12 Gate motor (position
search)
57 FS-531/ PS301 Punch home sensor (PK) • 000: Home
612 position
• 001: Other
than home
position
58 PS306 Punch encoder sensor • 000: FS-531/ M51 Paper assist motor (F
(PK) Transparent 612 rotation)
• 001: Light
blocked
59 PS302 Punch scraps box full • 000: Full
sensor (PK) • 001: Other
than full
60 PS304 Punch scraps box set • 000: Not
sensor (PK) installed
• 001: Installed
I-236

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
61 PS303 Punch shift home sensor • 000: Other
(PK) than home
position
• 001: Home
position
62 PS305 Paper size sensor swing • 000: No paper
(edge detection 5) (PK) • 001: Paper
65 PS305 Paper size sensor swing • 000: No paper FS-531/ M302 Punch shift motor (home
(edge detection 2) (PK) • 001: Paper 612 position search) (PK)
66 PS305 Paper size sensor swing • 000: No paper M302 Punch shift motor (PK)
69 M301 Punch motor (home
position search) (PK)
70 M301 Punch motor (2-hole PK
punch execute)
73 FS-531/ PS202 Paper empty sensor/Up • 000: Paper
612 (PI) • 001: No paper
74 PS203 Paper set sensor/Up (PI) • 000: Paper
• 001: No paper
75 PS205 Tray upper limit sensor/Up • 000: Upper
(upper tray) (PI) limit
• 001: Other
than upper
limit
76 PS204 Tray lower limit sensor/Up • 000: Lower
(upper tray) (PI) limit
• 001: Other
than lower
limit
77 PIOB Sheet feeder manual start • 000: ON
clear switch • 001: OFF
78 PIOB Sheet feeder manual • 000: ON
punch button switch (PI) • 001: OFF
79 PIOB Sheet feeder manual • 000: ON
function selection button • 001: OFF
switch (PI)
80 MS20 Upper door open close • 000: Close
1 switch (PI) • 001: Open
81 PS207 Paper empty sensor/Lw • 000: Paper
(PI) • 001: No paper
82 PS212 Paper set sensor/Lw (PI) • 000: Paper
• 001: No paper
83 PS209 Tray upper limit sensor/Lw • 000: Other FS-531/ M203 Conveyance motor (667
(lower tray) (PI) than upper 612 mm/sec) (PI)
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
84 PS210 Tray lower limit sensor/Lw • 000: Other CL201 Conveyance clutch/Up (PI)
(lower tray) (PI) than lower
limit
• 001: Lower
limit
85 CL202 Conveyance clutch/Lw (PI)
86 FS-531/ PS208 L size sensor/Lw (PI) • 000: Paper M201 Tray lift motor/Up (move
612 • 001: No paper down: home position
search)
87 M201 Tray lift motor/Up (move
up) (PI)
88 M202 Tray lift motor/Lw (move
down: home position
search) (PI)
I-237

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
89 M202 Tray lift motor/Lw (move
up) (PI)
90 SD201 Pick-up solenoid/Up (PI)
91 SD202 Pick-up solenoid/Lw (PI)
92 CL203 Registration clutch (PI)
96 FS-531/ - FNS connection detection • 000: Not
612 signal connected
• 001:
Connected
99 FS-531/ - Paperless running mode
612
1 FS-532 PS1 FNS entrance sensor • 000: Paper FS-532 M1 FNS entrance motor (1000
• 001: No paper mm/s)
2 PS5 Paper overlap sensor/3 • 000: Paper M2 FNS conveyance motor/2
• 001: No paper (1000 mm/s)
3 PS6 Staple center position • 000: Other M3 FNS conveyance motor/3
sensor than the (1000 mm/s)
center position
• 001: Center
position
4 PS7 Staple scraps box full • 000: Other M4 FNS conveyance motor/4
sensor than full (1000 mm/s) (MK-732)
• 001: Full
5 PS8 Sub tray exit sensor • 000: No paper M5 Stacker entrance motor
• 001: Paper (1000 mm/sec)
6 PS9 Sub tray paper full sensor • 000: Other M6 Paper exit motor (1000
than full mm/s)
• 001: Full
7 PS10 Main tray paper exit • 000: No paper
8 PS11 Stack assist home sensor • 000: Other FS-532 M8 Stack assist motor (Home
than home position search)
position
• 001: Home
position
9 PS12 Stack alignment home • 000: Other M9 Stacker alignment motor
sensor than home (home position move)
position
• 001: Home
position
10 PS13 Paper exit home sensor • 000: Other M9 Stacker alignment motor Available only
than home (A4S standby position from the home
position move) position
• 001: Home
position
11 PS14 Main tray upper limit • 000: Other M9 Stacker alignment motor Available only
sensor than upper (Alignment operation) from A4S
limit position
• 001: Upper
limit
12 PS15 Paper removal sensor • 000: No paper M9 Stacker alignment motor Available only
• 001: Paper (A4S standby position after the
move) alignment
operation
13 PS16 3000 sheets sensor • 000: Other M10 Paper exit opening motor
than 3,000 (Home position move
sheets (Close))
position
• 001: 3,000
sheets
position
14 PS17 Main tray quarter position • 000: Other M10 Paper exit opening motor Available only
sensor than the (Opening big (In A4S from the home
quarter staple mode)) position
position
• 001: Quarter
position
I-238

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
15 PS18 Main tray middle position • 000: Other M11 Main tray up down motor
sensor than the (Home position move)
middle
position
• 001: Middle
position
16 PS19 4000 sheets sensor • 000: Other
than 4,000
sheets
position
• 001: 4,000
sheets
position
17 PS20 Paper exit alignment plate • 000: Other
home sensor than home
position
• 001: Home
position
18 PS21 Paper exit alignment plate • 000: Other FS-532 M12 Paper exit alignment plate
up down home sensor than home motor (Home position
position search)
• 001: Home
position
19 PS22 Stapler movement home • 000: Other M12 Paper exit alignment plate Available only
sensor than home motor (Move from home from the home
position position to A4S shelter position
position
20 PS23 Main tray home sensor • 000: Other M12 Paper exit alignment plate Available only
than home motor (Move from A4S from A4S
position shelter position to alignment
• 001: Home alignment position) position
position
21 PS24 Gripper home sensor/Up • 000: Other M12 Paper exit alignment plate Available only
than home motor (Move from after the
position alignment position to A4S alignment
• 001: Home shelter position) operation
position
22 PS25 Gripper exit sensor/Lw • 000: Other M13 Paper exit alignment plate
than home up down motor (Home
position position search)
• 001: Home
position
23 PS26 Small size paper alignment • 000: Other M13 Paper exit alignment plate Available only
home sensor than home up down motor (Move from from the home
position home position to alignment position
position
24 PS27 Stack rear home sensor • 000: Other M14 Stapler movement motor
than home (Home position move)
position
• 001: Home
position
25 PS28 Stacker empty sensor • 000: No paper M14 Stapler movement motor
• 001: Paper (move to the A4 size 1-
stapling position)
26 PS29 Stacker rear stopper home • 000: Other M15 Tray shift roller motor
position
• 001: Home
position
27 PS30 Stacker paper press home • 000: Other M16 Gripper exit motor/Up
position
• 001: Home
position
I-239

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
28 PS31 Conveyance gate home • 000: Other M17 Gripper exit motor/Lw
position
• 001: Home
position
29 PS32 Paper overlap sensor/1 • 000: Paper M18 Small size paper alignment
• 001: No paper motor (Home position
search)
30 PS33 Paper overlap sensor/2 • 000: Paper M19 Stacker movement motor
• 001: No paper (Home position search)
31 PS34 Roller pressure motor • 000: Other M20 Stacker rear stopper motor
home sensor than home (Home position search)
position
• 001: Home
position
32 PS35 Staple scraps box set • 000: Not M21 Stacker paper press motor
sensor installed (Home position search)
• 001: Installed
33 PS36 Bypass gate home sensor • 000: Other M22 Conveyance gate motor
position
• 001: Home
position
34 PS37 Exit paper press home • 000: Other M18 Small size paper alignment Only available
sensor than home motor (moves to the after 72-29 is
position standby position of the performed.
• 001: Home paper whose length in the
position feed direction is 231 mm
or more)
35 PS38 Rewind paddle release • 000: Other M18 Small size paper alignment Restrictive
home sensor than home motor (moves to the conditions: Only
position standby position of the available after
• 001: Home paper whose length in the 72-34 is
position feed direction is 230 mm performed.
or less)
36 M25 Bypass gate motor (Home
position search)
37 FS-532 PS41 Staple empty sensor • 000: Staple M26 Exit paper press motor
• 001: No staple (Home position search)
38 PS40 Stapler home sensor • 000: Home M27 Roller pressure motor
position (Home position search)
• 001: Other
than home
position
39 PS42 Cartridge set sensor • 000: Cartridge M28 Rewind paddle release
• 001: No motor (Home position
cartridge search)
40 PS43 Stack upper section • 000: Paper
41 PS44 Stacker rear alignment • 000: Not
sensor detected
• 001: Detected
42 PS45 Door sensor • 000: Open FS-532 M31 Stapler motor (stapling) Available after
• 001: Close initialization
43 PS46 Main tray near empty • 000: No paper
44 FS-532 FM1 Large size paper
alignment fan
45 FS-532 - SD-510 connection • 000: Not
detection (SD-510) connected
• 001:
Connected
46 PS120 Tray exit sensor /1 • 000: No paper
(SD-510) • 001: Paper
47 PS121 Tray exit sensor/2 • 000: No paper
(SD-510) • 001: Paper
I-240

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
48 PS122 Tray lift up sensor • 000: Not
(SD-510) detected
• 001: Detected
49 FS-532 M120 Saddle stitching exit motor
(SD-510)
50 FS-532 PS101 Stacker empty sensor /Up • 000: No paper M101 SD entrance motor (1000
(SD-510) • 001: Paper mm/sec) (SD-510)
51 PS102 SD entrance sensor • 000: No paper M102 SD stapler motor (stapling)
(SD-510) • 001: Paper (SD-510)
52 PS103 Stapler home sensor • 000: Other M103 Stapler movement motor
(SD-510) than home (Home position search)
position (SD-510)
• 001: Home
position
53 PS104 Staple empty sensor • 000: Staple M104 Saddle stitching alignment
(SD-510) • 001: No staple motor (Home position
search) (SD-510)
54 PS105 Stapler shift home sensor • 000: Other M105 Stopper motor (Home
(PS-510) than home position search) (SD-510)
position
• 001: Home
position
55 PS106 Alignment home sensor • 000: Other M106 Center paddle motor
position (SD-510)
• 001: Home
position
56 PS107 Stopper home sensor • 000: Other M107 1st folding knife motor
position (SD-510)
• 001: Home
position
57 PS108 Center paddle home • 000: Other M108 Folding roller motor
sensor (SD-510) than home (Rotate) (SD-510)
position
• 001: Home
position
58 PS114 Lower paddle home • 000: Other M109 Lower paddle motor
sensor (SD-510) than home (Home position search)
position (SD-510)
• 001: Home
position
59 PS110 1st folding knife home • 000: Other M110 2nd folding knife motor
sensor (SD-510) than home (Home position search)
position (SD-510)
• 001: Home
position
60 PS111 2nd folding knife home • 000: Other
sensor (SD-510) than home
position
• 001: Home
position
61 PS112 2nd folding sensor • 000: Not FS-532 SD101 2nd folding gate solenoid
(SD-510) detected (SD-510)
• 001: Detected
62 PS113 Folding exit sensor • 000: No paper SD102 Rear gripper solenoid
(SD-510) • 001: Paper (SD-510)
64 PS115 Stacker empty sensor /Lw • 000: No paper
(SD-510) • 001: Paper
65 FS-532 M302 Punch shift motor (Home
position search) (PK-522)
66 M302 Punch shift motor
(PK-522)
69 FS-532 PS301 Punch home sensor (for • 000: Other M301 Punch motor (Home
2/4-Hole) (PK-522) than home position search) (PK-522)
position
• 001: Home
position
I-241

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
70 PS307 Punch home sensor (for • 000: Other M301 Punch motor (2-hole PK 72-69 must have
3/4-Hole) (PK-522) than home punch execute) (PK-522) been performed
position in advance.
• 001: Home
position
71 PS306 Punch encoder sensor • 000: M301 Punch motor (3/4-hole PK 72-69 must have
(PK-522) Transparent punch execute) (PK-522) been performed
• 001: Light in advance.
blocked
72 PS302 Punch scraps box full • 000: Full
sensor (PK-522) • 001: Other
than full
73 PS304 Punch scraps box set • 000: Not FS-532 JAMIB Jam indicator board
sensor (PK-522) installed (Illuminate all LEDs)
• 001: Installed
74 PS303 Punch shift home sensor • 000: Other
(PK-522) than home
position
• 001: Home
position
75 PS305 Paper size sensor • 000: No paper
(PK-522) • 001: Paper
(PK-522) • 001: Paper
77 PS305 Paper size sensor • 000: No paper FS-532 LED1 Main tray upper limit LED
(PK-522) • 001: Paper (Illuminate LED)
(PK-522) • 001: Paper
(PK-522) • 001: Paper
80 - PK connection detection • 000:
(PK-522) Connected
• 001: Not
connected
81 SW1 Paper exit switch • 000: ON
• 001: OFF
82 PS206 Paper pass-through • 000: No paper
sensor/Lw (PI-502) • 001: Paper
83 PS201 Paper pass-through • 000: No paper FS-532 M203 Conveyance motor (667
sensor/Up (PI-502) • 001: Paper mm/sec) (PI-502)
84 PS203 Paper set sensor/Up • 000: No paper CL201 Conveyance clutch/Up
(PI-502) • 001: Paper (PI-502)
85 PS205 Upper limit sensor/Up • 000: Other CL202 Conveyance clutch/Lw
(upper tray) (PI-502) than upper (PI-502)
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
86 PS204 Lower limit sensor/Up • 000: Other M201 Tray lift motor/Up (move
(upper tray) (PI-502) than lower down: home position
limit search) (PI-502)
• 001: Lower
limit
87 PIOB Sheet feeder manual start • 000: OFF M201 Tray lift motor/Up (Up)
clear switch (PI-502) • 001: ON (PI-502)
88 PIOB Sheet feeder manual • 000: OFF M202 Tray lift motor/Lw (Move
punch button switch • 001: ON down: Home position
(PI-502) search) (PI-502)
89 PIOB Sheet feeder manual • 000: OFF M202 Tray lift motor/Lw (Up)
function selection button • 001: ON (PI-502)
switch (PI-502)
90 MS20 Upper door open close • 000: Open SD201 Pick-up solenoid/Up
1 switch (PI-502) • 001: Close (PI-502)
91 PS207 Paper empty sensor/Lw • 000: No paper SD202 Pick-up solenoid/Lw
(PI-502) • 001: Paper (PI-502)
92 PS208 Large size sensor/Lw • 000: No paper CL203 Registration clutch
(PI-502) • 001: Paper (PI-502)
I-242

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
93 PS209 Upper limit sensor/Lw • 000: Other PIOB PI control board (illuminate
(lower tray) (PI-502) than upper all LEDs) (PI-502)
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
94 PS210 Tray lower limit sensor/Lw • 000: Other
(lower tray) (PI-502) than lower
limit
• 001: Lower
limit
95 PS202 Paper empty sensor/Up • 000: No paper
(PI-502) • 001: Paper
96 PS212 Paper set sensor • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
97 - PK connection detection • 000: Not
(PI-502) connected
• 001:
Connected
99 - FS connection detection • 000: Not
connected
• 001:
Connected
73 1 LS (1st PS4 Entrance sensor • 000: No paper LS (1st M2 Conveyance motor
tandem) • 001: Paper tandem)
2 PS10 Sub tray exit sensor • 000: No paper M2 Conveyance motor
• 001: Paper
3 PS7 Conveyance sensor/1 • 000: No paper M3 Sub tray exit motor
• 001: Paper
• 001: Paper
5 PS17 Conveyance sensor/3 • 000: No paper M6 Coupling conveyance
6 PS18 Coupling exit sensor • 000: No paper M6 Coupling conveyance
7 PS3 Stacker tray upper limit • 000: Other M4 Grip conveyance motor
sensor than upper
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
8 PS6 Paper empty sensor • 000: No paper M4 Grip conveyance motor
• 001: Paper
9 PS13 2,000 sheets stacked • 000: OFF M7 Alignment motor (initial
sensor • 001: ON operation)
10 PS19 Paper detection sensor • 000: OFF M7 Alignment motor
• 001: ON
11 PS14 5,000 sheets stacked • 000: OFF M5 Shift unit motor (home
sensor • 001: ON position search)
12 PS9 Sub tray full sensor • 000: Other M5 Shift unit motor
than full
• 001: Full
13 PS1 Stacker tray set sensor • 000: Not M1 Stacker tray up down
installed motor (down)
• 001: Installed
14 RS1 Hand cart reset switch • 000: Not M1 Stacker tray up down
installed motor (up)
• 001: Installed
15 PS15 Stacker tray arm release • 000: OFF SD1 1st gate solenoid
sensor • 001: ON
16 TOB Paper exit switch • 000: OFF SD10 2nd gate solenoid
• 001: ON
17 MS1 Front door switch • 000: Close SD9 Front stopper solenoid
• 001: Open
18 RS2 JAM door switch • 000: Close SD3 Rear stopper solenoid
• 001: Open
19 PS8 Sub tray door sensor • 000: Close SD8 Paper press arm solenoid/
• 001: Open 3
I-243

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
20 MS2 Stacker tray upper limit • 000: Other SD6 Paper press arm solenoid/
switch than upper 1
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
21 MS3 Stacker tray lower limit • 000: Other SD4 Front door lock solenoid
switch than lower
limit
• 001: Lower
limit
22 PS12 Alignment home sensor • 000: Other SD11 Tandem conveyance lock
than home solenoid
position
• 001: Home
position
23 PS11 Shift unit home sensor • 000: Other SD2 Job partition solenoid
than home
position
• 001: Home
position
24 PS5 Grip conveyance home • 000: Other SD7 Paper press solenoid/2
sensor than home
position
• 001: Home
position
25 FM1, Paper cooling fan motor/
FM2, Fr, Paper cooling fan
FM3, motor/Mi, Paper cooling
FM6 fan motor/1, /2
26 FM5 Paper cooling fan motor/Rr
32 LS (1st - FNS connection detection • 000: Not
tandem) signal connected
• 001:
Connected
74 1 LS (2nd PS4 Entrance sensor • 000: No paper LS (2nd M2 Conveyance motor
tandem) • 001: Paper tandem)
2 PS10 Sub tray exit sensor • 000: No paper M2 Conveyance motor
• 001: Paper
• 001: Paper
• 001: Paper
5 PS17 Conveyance sensor/3 • 000: No paper M6 Coupling conveyance
6 PS18 Coupling exit sensor • 000: No paper M6 Coupling conveyance
7 PS3 Stacker tray upper limit • 000: Other M4 Grip conveyance motor
sensor than upper
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
8 PS6 Paper empty sensor • 000: No paper M4 Grip conveyance motor
• 001: Paper
9 PS13 2,000 sheets stacked • 000: OFF M7 Alignment motor (initial
sensor • 001: ON operation)
10 PS19 Paper detection sensor • 000: OFF M7 Alignment motor
• 001: ON
11 PS14 5,000 sheets stacked • 000: OFF M5 Shift unit motor (home
sensor • 001: ON position search)
12 PS9 Sub tray full sensor • 000: Other M5 Shift unit motor
than full
• 001: Full
13 PS1 Stacker tray set sensor • 000: Not M1 Stacker tray up down
installed motor (down)
• 001: Installed
I-244

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
14 RS1 Hand cart reset switch • 000: Not M1 Stacker tray up down
installed motor (up)
• 001: Installed
15 PS15 Stacker tray arm release • 000: OFF SD1 1st gate solenoid
sensor • 001: ON
16 TOB Paper exit switch • 000: OFF SD10 2nd gate solenoid
• 001: ON
17 MS1 Front door switch • 000: Close SD9 Front stopper solenoid
• 001: Open
18 RS2 JAM door switch • 000: Close SD3 Rear stopper solenoid
• 001: Open
19 PS8 Sub tray door sensor • 000: Close SD8 Paper press arm solenoid/
• 001: Open 3
20 MS2 Stacker tray upper limit • 000: Other SD6 Paper press arm solenoid/
switch than upper 1
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
21 MS3 Stacker tray lower limit • 000: Other SD4 Front door lock solenoid
switch than lower
limit
• 001: Lower
limit
22 PS12 Alignment home sensor • 000: Other SD11 Tandem conveyance lock
than home solenoid
position
• 001: Home
position
23 PS11 Shift unit home sensor • 000: Other SD2 Job partition solenoid
than home
position
• 001: Home
position
24 PS5 Grip conveyance home • 000: Other SD7 Paper press solenoid/2
sensor than home
position
• 001: Home
position
25 FM1, Paper cooling fan motor/
FM2, Fr, Paper cooling fan
FM3, motor/Mi, Paper cooling
FM6 fan motor/1, /2
26 FM5 Paper cooling fan motor/Rr
32 LS (2nd - FNS connection detection • 000: Not
tandem) signal connected
• 001:
Connected
76 1 RU-510 PS7 Gate home sensor • 000: Other
than home
position
• 001: Home
position
2 PS8 Stack switch home sensor • 000: Other
than home
position
• 001: Home
position
3 - Subsequent stage • 000:
• 001: Not
connected
7 PS5 Stacker jam sensor • 000: Paper
• 001: No paper
21 RU-510 M5 Gate motor (home position
move)
24 - M6 Stack switch motor (home
position move)
I-245

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
29 RU-510 PS1 Entrance sensor • 000: Paper M1 Entrance conveyance
40 - FNS connection detection • 000: Not
signal connected
• 001:
Connected
42 PS4 CD alignment home • 000: Other RU-510 M4 CD alignment motor (home
sensor than home position move)
position
• 001: Home
position
43 PS2 Paper exit sensor • 000: Paper M2 Paper exit motor
• 001: No paper
44 PS6 Entrance jam sensor • 000: Paper
• 001: No paper
46 PS3 FD alignment home sensor • 000: Other RU-510 M3 FD alignment motor (home
than home position move)
position
• 001: Home
position
49 MS1 Interlock switch • 000: ON
• 001: OFF
52 RU-510 FM1, Stack assist fan /Fr, /Rr
FM2
90 JAMIB JAM indicator board (lit all
LEDs)
77 1 PB PS1 Entrance sensor • 000: Paper PB M1 Entrance conveyance
2 PS2 SC entrance sensor • 000: Paper M2 Intermediate conveyance
3 PS3 Cover paper entrance • 000: No paper SD1 Entrance gate solenoid
4 PS4 Sub tray exit sensor • 000: No paper SD2 Bypass gate solenoid
• 001: Paper
5 PS5 Sub tray full sensor • 000: Full SD3 Sub tray gate solenoid
• 001: Other
than full
6 SD4 Sub tray exit solenoid
7 M11 SC entrance conveyance
motor
8 PB PS12 SC switchback arm • 000: Press M12 SC switchback
pressure detection sensor • 001: Release conveyance motor (F
rotation)
9 PS13 SC switchback spring • 000: Release M12 SC switchback
pressure detection sensor • 001: Press conveyance motor (R
rotation)
10 PS14 SC alignment HP sensor • 000: Other M13 SC switchback release
than home motor (home position
position search)
• 001: Home
position
11 PS16 SC paper detection sensor • 000: Paper M13 SC switchback release
• 001: No paper motor (High pressing
position move)
12 PS17 SC roller release sensor • 000: Release M13 SC switchback release
• 001: Press motor (Low pressing
position move)
13 PS18 Clamp entrance movement • 000: Other M15 SC alignment motor (home
HP sensor than home position search)
position
• 001: Home
position
14 PS19 Clamp entrance roller • 000: Release M15 SC alignment motor (A4 77-13 must have
release sensor • 001: Press standby position move) been performed
in advance.
I-246

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
15 PS21 Clamp alignment HP • 000: Other M15 SC alignment motor
sensor than home (alignment)
position
• 001: Home
position
16 PS22 Clamp HP sensor • 000: Other M17 SC bundle conveyance
than home motor
position
• 001: Home
position
17 PS23 Clamp pressure sensor • 000: Release M18 SC roller release motor
• 001: Press (home position search)
18 PS24 Clamp rotation HP sensor • 000: Other M18 SC roller release motor
than home (movement to the pressing
position position)
• 001: Home
position
19 PS25 Clamp rotation pressure • 000: Release M19 Clamp entrance movement
sensor • 001: Press motor (home position
search)
20 PS26 Cover paper table upper • 000: Other M19 Clamp entrance movement The following
limit sensor/Fr than upper motor (movement to the adjustments
limit entrance position) must have been
• 001: Upper made in
limit advance.
1. 77-19
2. 77-29
3. 77-31
4. 77-32
21 PS27 Cover paper table upper • 000: Other M20 Clamp entrance roller
limit sensor/Rr than upper release motor (home
limit position search)
• 001: Upper
limit
22 PS28 Clamp paper sensor • 000: Paper M20 Clamp entrance roller
• 001: No paper release motor (pressing
position move)
23 PS29 Booklet thickness sensor • 000: Not SD11 FD alignment solenoid
detected
• 001: Detected
24 SD12 SC stopper solenoid
25 SD13 SC pressure arm solenoid
26 PB PS33 Glue tank HP sensor • 000: Other M21 Clamp alignment motor
than home (home position search)
position
• 001: Home
position
27 PS36 Pellet supply remaining • 000: Pellet M21 Clamp alignment motor
sensor • 001: No pellet (A4 standby position
move)
28 PS37 Pellet supply passage • 000: Detected M21 Clamp alignment motor
sensor • 001: Not (alignment)
detected
29 PS38 Pellet supply arm upper • 000: Other M22 Clamp motor (home
limit sensor than upper position search)
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
30 PS39 Pellet supply arm home • 000: Other M22 Clamp motor (movement
sensor than lower to the clamp position)
limit
• 001: Lower
limit
31 M32 Glue apply roller motor • 000: Abnormal M23 Clamp rotation motor 77-19 must have
• 001: Normal (home position search) been performed
in advance.
I-247

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
32 PS3 Paper exit sensor • 000: Paper M23 Clamp rotation motor 77-19 must have
• 001: No paper (movement to the compile been performed
position) in advance.
33 PS41 Cover paper alignment HP • 000: Other SD91 Straight gate solenoid
sensor than home
position
• 001: Home
position
34 PS42 Cover paper conveyance • 000: Other M31 Glue tank movement The following
arm HP sensor/Rt than home motor (home position adjustments
position search) must have been
• 001: Home made in
position advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-29
35 PS43 Cover paper conveyance • 000: Other M31 Glue tank movement The following
arm HP sensor/Lt than home motor (tank forward adjustments
position movement) must have been
position advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-29
3. 77-34
4. 77-49
5. 77-51
36 PS44 Cover paper switchback • 000: Paper M31 Glue tank movement The following
sensor • 001: No paper motor (tank backward adjustments
movement) must have been
made in
advance.
1. 77-35
2. 77-55
3. 77-29
4. 77-34
5. 77-49
6. 77-51
37 PS45 Cover paper sensor/Rt • 000: Paper M32 Glue apply roller motor Be sure that the
• 001: No paper warm-up
completes.
38 PS46 Cover paper sensor/Lt • 000: Paper SD31 Glue tank up solenoid/1
• 001: No paper
39 PS47 Cover paper table HP • 000: Home SD32 Cover paper glue up
sensor/Fr position solenoid
• 001: Other
than home
position
40 PS53 Cover paper table HP • 000: Home H1 Glue tank heater
sensor/Rr position
• 001: Other
than home
position
41 PS48 Cover paper folding plate • 000: Other H2 Glue apply roller heater
HP sensor/Rt than home
position
• 001: Home
position
42 PS49 Cover paper folding plate • 000: Other
HP sensor/Lt than home
position
• 001: Home
position
43 PS50 Cover paper folding plate • 000: Not PB M34 Pellet supply arm motor
encoder sensor detected (home position search)
• 001: Detected
I-248

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
44 PS51 Cover paper folding plate • 000: Not at M34 Pellet supply arm motor The following
position sensor the reference (movement to the supply adjustments
position position) must have been
• 001: At the made in
reference advance.
position 1. 77-55
2. 77-29
3. 77-34
45 PS52 Cover paper folding • 000: Release M41 Cover paper alignment 77-55 must have
pressure sensor • 001: Press motor (home position been performed
search) in advance.
46 SW41 Cutter home sensor • 000: Home M41 Cover paper alignment The following
position motor (A3 standby position adjustments
• 001: Other move) must have been
than home made in
position advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-45
3. 77-57
4. 77-60
47 SW42 Cutter home sensor • 000: Home M41 Cover paper alignment The following
position motor (alignment) adjustments
• 001: Other must have been
than home made in
position advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-45
3. 77-57
4. 77-60
5. 77-46
48 MS2 Front door switch • 000: Open M42 Booklet exit motor 77-55 must have
• 001: Close been performed
in advance.
49 PS57 Booklet door sensor • 000: Open M43 Cover paper conveyance The following
• 001: Close arm motor/Rt (home adjustments
position search) must have been
made in
advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-29
3. 77-34
50 PS61 Booklet end sensor • 000: Not M43 Cover paper conveyance The following
detected arm motor/Rt (roller adjustments
• 001: Detected pressure) must have been
made in
advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-29
3. 77-34
4. 77-49
51 PS62 Cover paper conveyance • 000: Other M44 Cover paper conveyance The following
belt movement HP sensor than home arm motor/Lt (home adjustments
position position search) must have been
position advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-29
3. 77-34
52 PS63 Cover paper belt home • 000: Other M44 Cover paper conveyance The following
sensor than home arm motor/Lt (roller adjustments
position pressure) must have been
position advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-29
3. 77-34
4. 77-51
I-249

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
53 PS64 Cover paper belt lower • 000: Other M45 Cover paper conveyance 77-55 must have
limit sensor than lower motor (F rotation) been performed
limit in advance.
• 001: Lower
limit
54 PS65 Book load limit sensor • 000: Upper M45 Cover paper conveyance 77-55 must have
limit motor (R rotation) been performed
• 001: Other in advance.
than upper
limit
55 PS66 Booklet sensor/1 • 000: Paper M46, Cover paper table up down
• 001: No paper M47 motor/Fr, /Rr (home
position search)
56 PS67 Booklet sensor/2 • 000: Paper M46, Cover paper table up down The following
• 001: No paper M47 motor/Fr, /Rr (book spine adjustments
corner creation) must have been
made in
advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-29
3. 77-34
4. 77-49
5. 77-50
6. 77-51
7. 77-52
8. 77-19
9. 77-31
10. 77-30
11. 77-32
12. 77-45
13. 77-58
14. 77-61
57 PS68 Booklet stopper HP sensor • 000: Other M48 Cover paper folding motor/ 77-55 must have
than home Rt (home position search) been performed
position in advance.
• 001: Home
position
58 PS69 Cart set sensor • 000: Not M48 Cover paper folding motor/ The following
installed Rt (movement to the open adjustments
• 001: Installed position) must have been
made in
advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-45
59 OB/2 Booklet stock operation • 000: SW ON M48 Cover paper folding motor/ The following
board • 001: SW OFF Rt (movement to the close adjustments
position) must have been
made in
advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-45
3. 77-58
60 - - M49 Cover paper folding motor/ 77-55 must have
Lt (home position search) been performed
in advance.
61 SW1 Upper door switch/1 • 000: Close M49 Cover paper folding motor/ The following
• 001: Open Lt (movement to the open adjustments
position) must have been
made in
advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-45
62 M50 Cutter motor (home 77-55 must have
position search) been performed
in advance.
63 M50 Cutter motor (cut position 77-55 must have
movement) been performed
in advance.
I-250

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
64 PBCB PB connection detection • 000: Not SD41 Cover paper lift solenoid The following
signal connected adjustments
• 001: must have been
Connected made in
advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-29
3. 77-34
4. 77-49
5. 77-57
65 - Cover paper tray set • 000: Installed
detection signal • 001: Not
installed
66 PB PS71 Cover paper empty sensor • 000: Paper PB
• 001: No paper
67 - power plug connection • 000: Power M61 Cover paper belt motor
detection signal detected
• 001:
68 PS74 Cover paper tray upper • 000: Other M62 Cover paper belt
limit sensor than upper movement motor (home
limit position search)
• 001: Upper
limit
69 PS75 Cover paper conveyance • 000: Paper M62 Cover paper belt 77-68 must have
sensor/1 • 001: No paper movement motor (A4 been performed
standby position move) in advance.
70 PS76 Cover paper conveyance • 000: Paper M62 Cover paper belt
sensor/2 • 001: No paper movement motor (book
stock alignment)
71 PS77 Cover paper conveyance • 000: Paper M63 Cover paper belt up down
sensor/3 • 001: No paper motor (home position
search: upper limit)
72 PS78 Cover paper conveyance • 000: Paper M63 Cover paper belt up down The following
sensor/4 • 001: No paper motor (movement to the adjustments
lower position) must have been
made in
advance.
1.77-68
2.77-69
73 PS79 Cover paper conveyance • 000: Paper M64 Booklet movement motor
74 PS80 Waste box full sensor • 000: Full M65 Booklet stopper motor
• 001: Other (home position search)
than full
75 PS81 Waste box set sensor • 000: Not M65 Booklet stopper motor (A4 77-74 must have
installed standby position move) been performed
• 001: Installed in advance.
76 M73 Cover paper tray lift motor
77 M74 Cover paper feed motor
78 SD71 Cover paper pick up
solenoid
79 SD72 Cover paper tray solenoid
80 PS82 Cover paper tray knob • 000: Release M71 Cover paper tray fan/1
sensor • 001: Lock
81 TH2 Glue tank temperature 0 to 255 M72 Cover paper tray fan/2
sensor/Up
82 TH3 Glue tank temperature 0 to 255 CL71 Cover feed clutch
sensor /Md
83 TH4 Glue tank temperature 0 to 255 CL72 Cover paper separation
sensor /Lw clutch
84 TH1 Glue apply roller 0 to 255 SD80 Front door lock solenoid
temperature sensor (locked)
85 OB1 Manual operation board • 000: Glue SD80 Front door lock solenoid
apply SW ON (released)
• 001: Glue
apply SW OFF
I-251

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
86 OB1 Manual operation board • 000: M80 Exhaust fan/1
Alignment SW
ON
• 001:
Alignment SW
OFF
87 OB1 Manual operation board • 000: Start SW - Multi feed clock output
ON signal
• 001: Start SW
OFF
88 MS1 Pellet supply door switch • 000: Open JAMIB Jam indication board/1, /2
• 001: Close /1 (all the lights on)
JAMIB
/2
89 TH1 Glue apply roller • 000: Normal OB/1 Manual operation board
temperature sensor (high • 001: Abnormal (all the lights on)
temperature abnormality)
90 TH1 Glue apply roller • 000: Normal M4, Exhaust fan/2
temperature sensor (low- • 001: Abnormal M81 Pellet supply cooling fan
91 TH2 Glue tank temperature • 000: Normal SD61 Booklet door lock solenoid
sensor/Up (high • 001: Abnormal (lock)
92 TH2 Glue tank temperature • 000: Normal SD61 Booklet door lock solenoid
sensor/Up (low- • 001: Abnormal (release)
93 TH3 Glue tank temperature • 000: Normal
sensor/Md (high • 001: Abnormal
94 TH3 Glue tank temperature • 000: Normal
sensor/Md (low- • 001: Abnormal
95 TH Glue tank temperature • 000: Normal M71, Cover paper feed 77-96 must have
sensor /Lw (high • 001: Abnormal M72, operation for the been performed
temperature abnormality) M73, adjustment of the multi in advance.
M74, feed detection board
SD71,
SD72,
CL71,
CL72
96 TH Glue tank temperature • 000: Normal - All initial operation
sensor/Lw (low- • 001: Abnormal
78 01 GP-501 S1 Enter sensor • 000: No Paper GP - Entrance stepper motor
• 001: Paper
02 S2 Stepper 1 speed sensor • 000: No Paper - Exit stepper motor
• 001: Paper
03 S3 Punch module sensor • 000: No Paper - Transport motor
• 001: Paper
04 S5 Back Gauge sensor • 000: No Paper - Punch motor
• 001: Paper
05 S6 Stepper 2 speed sensor • 000: No Paper - Divert solenoid
• 001: Paper
06 S7 Exit sensor • 000: No Paper - Backstop solenoid
• 001: Paper
07 S8 Bypass sensor • 000: No Paper - Punch brake
• 001: Paper
08 S9 Punch flag sensor • 000 : Home - Punch clutch
position
• 001 : Punch
operation
09 - Chip tray switch • 000: Installed - Punch stepper motor
• 001: Not punch operation
installed
10 - Die set switch • 000: Installed
• 001: Not
installed
I-252

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
11 - Door switch • 000: Close
• 001: Open
13 S4 U-channel sensor • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
16 - GP connection detected • 000: Not
connected
• 001:
Connected
79 1 PB PS91 Relay conveyance • 000: Paper PB M92 Relay conveyance motor
intermediate sensor • 001: No paper (1000 mm/s)
2 PS92 Relay conveyance door • 000: Open M91 Relay conveyance exit
sensor • 001: Close motor (1000 mm/s)
3 PS93 Relay conveyance • 000: Paper OB2 Booklet stock operation
entrance sensor • 001: No paper board (JAM display LED
ON)
4 PS94 Relay conveyance exit • 000: Paper M33 Pellet supply pipe motor
sensor • 001: No paper (home position search)
5 M33 Pellet supply pipe motor The following
(upper limit position move) adjustments
must have been
made in
advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-29
3. 77-34
4. 77-44
5. 79-05
6 PS96 Pellet supply pipe home • 000: Other
sensor than home
position
• 001: Home
position
7 PS95 Pellet supply pipe upper • 000: Not
limit sensor detected
• 001: Detected
80 0 ADU SD5 Paper exit solenoid
81 2 CL9 ADU pre-registration clutch
3 CL7 Intermediate conveyance
clutch/3
84 0 M41 C1070, C1070P, C71hc:
ADU reverse motor (315
mm/s) (forward rotation)
1 M41 C1060, C1060L: ADU
reverse motor (271 mm/s)
(forward rotation)
2 M41 ADU reverse motor (225
4 M41 ADU reverse motor (157.5
5 M41 ADU reverse motor (the
speed at the reversal
section) (forward rotation)
6 M41 ADU reverse motor (the
speed at the duplex
conveyance path) (reverse
rotation)
7 M41 ADU reverse motor (1,000
mm/s) (the speed of the
reverse exit)
86 0 ADU PS5 ADU roller pressure • 000: ON M33 ADU roller pressure
release home sensor • 001: OFF release motor
1 PS5 ADU roller pressure • 000: ON M33 ADU roller pressure
release home sensor • 001: OFF release motor (pressure
release position)
2 PS5 ADU roller pressure • 000: ON M33 ADU roller pressure
position)
I-253

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
3 PS14 ADU pre-registration roller • 000: ON M32 ADU pre-registration roller
pressure release home • 001: OFF pressure release motor
sensor
sensor (pressure release position)
sensor (pressure position)
6 PS15 Conveyance roller • 000: ON M35 Conveyance roller
pressure release home • 001: OFF pressure release motor/1
sensor/1
sensor/1 (pressure release position)
sensor/1 (pressure position)
9 PS16 Conveyance roller • 000: OFF M36 Conveyance roller
pressure release home • 001: ON pressure release motor/2
sensor/2
sensor/2 (pressure release position)
sensor/2 (pressure position)
12 PS17 Loop roller pressure • 000: ON M34 Loop roller pressure
release position)
position)
15 PS3 Registration roller pressure • 000: ON M31 Registration roller pressure
release position)
position)
18 PS9 Reverse exit pressure • 000: Other M37 Decurler pressure release
home sensor than home motor
position
• 001: Home
position
home sensor than home motor (pressure release
position position)
• 001: Home
position
home sensor than home motor (pressure position 1)
position
• 001: Home
position
home sensor than home motor (pressure position 2)
position
• 001: Home
position
I-254

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
87 0 Adjustm - Leading edge erase • Change the
ent, quantity batch setting (0 setting values
special mm) on [Lead Edge
mode Erase
Quantity] of all
trays at once.
• When
DIPSW17-2 is
0, this setting
value
becomes the
default value
of [Lead Edge
Erase
Quantity].
• The
recommended
value is 7 mm.
1 - Leading edge erase • Change the
quantity batch setting (1 setting values
mm) on [Lead Edge
Erase
Quantity] of all
trays at once.
• When
DIPSW17-2 is
0, this setting
value
becomes the
default value
of [Lead Edge
Erase
Quantity].
• The
recommended
value is 7 mm.
mm) on [Lead Edge
Erase
Quantity] of all
trays at once.
• When
DIPSW17-2 is
0, this setting
value
becomes the
default value
of [Lead Edge
Erase
Quantity].
• The
recommended
value is 7 mm.
mm) on [Lead Edge
Erase
Quantity] of all
trays at once.
• When
DIPSW17-2 is
0, this setting
value
becomes the
default value
of [Lead Edge
Erase
Quantity].
• The
recommended
value is 7 mm.
I-255

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
mm) on [Lead Edge
Erase
Quantity] of all
trays at once.
• When
DIPSW17-2 is
0, this setting
value
becomes the
default value
of [Lead Edge
Erase
Quantity].
• The
recommended
value is 7 mm.
mm) on [Lead Edge
Erase
Quantity] of all
trays at once.
• When
DIPSW17-2 is
0, this setting
value
becomes the
default value
of [Lead Edge
Erase
Quantity].
• The
recommended
value is 7 mm.
mm) on [Lead Edge
Erase
Quantity] of all
trays at once.
• When
DIPSW17-2 is
0, this setting
value
becomes the
default value
of [Lead Edge
Erase
Quantity].
• The
recommended
value is 7 mm.
mm) on [Lead Edge
Erase
Quantity] of all
trays at once.
• When
DIPSW17-2 is
0, this setting
value
becomes the
default value
of [Lead Edge
Erase
Quantity].
• The
recommended
value is 7 mm.
I-256

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
mm) on [Lead Edge
Erase
Quantity] of all
trays at once.
• When
DIPSW17-2 is
0, this setting
value
becomes the
default value
of [Lead Edge
Erase
Quantity].
• The
recommended
value is 7 mm.
90 0 - Finishing option Perform after
adjustment data EEPROM installation
storage PB-503, FD-503,
SD-506,
SD-513, FS-531,
FS-612, RU510
4 - Bill counter clear
91 0 - Main body adjustment data Perform after
NVRAM board storage installation
92 0 - NVRAM board data reset Cannot adjust in
the field
93 0 - Finishing option Cannot adjust in
adjustment data EEPROM the field
storage (Factory initial PB-503, FD-503,
data) SD-506 ,
SD-513,
FS-531/612
94 0 - Adjustment value list
display
1 - Operation panel all lit
96 0 - Main body adjustment data Cannot adjust in
NVRAM board storage the field
(Factory initial data)
97 0 - Image memory (DRAM)
capacity check (1 color)
98 0 - Image memory (DRAM)
check
6 - Image processing board
line memory (SDRAM)/Y
check
line memory (SDRAM)/M
check
line memory (SDRAM)/C
check
line memory (SDRAM)/K
check
99 1 HDD/ Hard disk capacity
1,
HDD/
2,
HDD/3
2 HDD/ Hard disk remaining
1, capacity
HDD/
2,
HDD/3
I-257

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
3 HDD/ Hard disk bad sectors
1, check
HDD/
2,
HDD/3
50 - The non-volatile paper The paper
setting initialization setting is all
erased. The
machine reboots
automatically
when the
procedure
completed.
91 - Unit counter correction Use this function
(Correct 23 bit to 31 bit of when an
special parts counter abnormality
(number 49, 74, and 82) to occurs on the
0. ) special parts
counter (number
49, 74, 82) when
you replace the
unit.
When you use
the ORU-M,
modify the data
in the USB
memory by
[ORU-M Counter
Rewrite] after
you perform this
IO.
92 - File system initialization Temporarily
stored or HDD
job all cleared.
The machine
reboots
automatically
when the
procedure
completed.
93 - Job history data Erases all the
initialization output history on
HDD. The
machine reboots
automatically
when the
procedure
completed.
4.7.5 Adjustment when you replace the multi feed detection board (PI) (new type)
(1) Usage
When the multi feed detection board (MFDB) of PI or the PI drive board is replaced, conduct this adjustment.
Also, perform this adjustment when multi feed of the special paper (thin paper, coated paper with less stiffness, thick paper) cannot be
detected properly.
Note
environment in which the copier is used (20 °C to 30 °C).
(In the case you brought a new part from outdoors, make the adjustment after the temperature of the sensor surface and the
room temperature become the same)
(2) Procedure
1. Replace the multi feed detection board/1, multi feed detection board/2. (Refer to chapter II "Maintenance4.3.5 Registration section")
(Refer to G.24.3.19 Multi feed detection board /1 (MFDB/1) and /2 (MFDB/2) (new type))
6. Open the FD upper door and the FD front door to turn the jam clearing knob [1]. Insert a 1 sheet of paper [2] (P/N 65AA-991#, fusing
adjustment paper, 16 sheets/A3) between the multi feed detection board/1 and multi feed detection board/2 [3] (200g/m2 to 300g/m2
paper can also be used).
I-258
Note
• Turn the jam clearing knob until the paper hits the roller [4], thus confirming that the paper is between the multi feed
detection board/1 and multi feed detection board/2.
[2]
[3]
[1] [4] a03uf3c028ca
7. Press the Start key to activate the output check mode. Connect the tester (voltmeter) to the following positions of the PIDB.
+ terminal: test pin Number TP51 (GAIN) [1]
- terminal: test pin Number TP11 (SGND) [2]
Range: DC 20V
Note
• Because the FD activates, do not drop any metal material on the board, or do not connect the tester pin to an irrelevant
terminal.
It causes the board to short the circuit and damage it.
VR2 [1]
[2] LED1
8. In the PIDB volume (VR2), configure the power voltage to the standard value.
Standard value: 9.0 ± 0.1V
9. Press the Stop key and pull out the paper that you inserted in step 6.
10. Insert a 1 sheet of paper that customer mainly uses (paper weight 50 g/m2 to 300 g/m2), and confirm that the LED of PIDB (LED1)
activates.
LED ON: No multi feed (0 or 1 sheet of paper)
LED OFF: Multi feed (2 sheets of paper)
11. Insert another sheet of paper (2 sheets in all), that customer mainly uses, and check that the LED deactivates.
12. If there is a detection error, return to step 6 to conduct the adjustment again. In step 8, adjust the power voltage to the value1.0V lower
than the previous adjustment.
13. Repeat the step 9 to step 12 until the detection error is resolved.
4.7.6 Adjustment when you replace the multi feed detection board (PI) (old type)
(1) Usage
When the multi feed detection board (MFDB) of PI or the PI drive board is replaced, conduct this adjustment.
detected properly.
Note
• The multi feed detection board/1 and multi feed detection board/2 are adjusted in the manufacturing process as a pair of upper
and lower. Be sure to replace them as a pair.
I-259
(2) Procedure
1. Replace the multi feed detection board/1, multi feed detection board/2. (Refer to chapter II "Maintenance4.3.5 Registration section")
(Refer to G.24.3.20 Multi feed detection board /1 (MFDB/1) and /2 (MFDB/2) (old type))
2. Check the stamp letter [1] that is placed on the multi feed detection board/1 and multi feed detection board/2, and rotate the rotary switch
[2] on the PI drive board (PIDB) that is shown in the following table.
Stamp letter Rotary switch
A 1
B 2
C 3
D 4
E 6
F 7
Note
• The rotary switch5 is not used.
[1]
[2] a03uf3c027ca

7. Open the FD upper door and the FD front door to turn the jam clearing knob [1]. Insert a 1 sheet of paper [2] (P/N 65AA-991#, fusing
adjustment paper, 16 sheets/A3) between the multi feed detection board/1 and multi feed detection board/2 [3] (200 g/m2 to 300 g/m2
paper can also be used).
Note
• Turn the jam clearing knob until the paper hits the roller [4], thus confirming that the paper is between the multi feed
detection board/1 and multi feed detection board/2.
[2]
[3]
[1] [4] a03uf3c028ca
8. Press the Start key to activate the output check mode. Connect the tester (voltmeter) to the following positions of the PIDB.
- terminal: test pin Number TP11 (SGND) [2]
Range: DC 20V
I-260
Note
• Because the FD activates, do not drop any metal material on the board, or do not connect the tester pin to an irrelevant
terminal.
VR2
LED1
[1] [2] a03uf3c029ca
9. In the PIDB volume (VR2), configure the power voltage to the standard value.
10. Press the Stop key and pull out the paper that is inserted in step 4.
11. Insert a 1 sheet of paper that customer mainly uses (paper weight 50 g/m2 to 300 g/m2), and confirm that the LED of PIDB (LED1)
activates.
13. If there is a detection error, return to step7 to conduct the adjustment again. In step9, configure the power voltage to the value1.0V lower
than the previous adjustment.
14. Repeat the steps 10 to 13 until the detection error is resolved.
4.7.7 Adjustment when you replace the cover paper multi feed detection board (PB)
(1) Usage
When the cover paper multi feed detection board of PB or the PB control board (PBCB) is replaced, conduct this adjustment.
detected properly.
Note
• The multi feed detection board/S and the multi feed detection board/R are adjusted in the manufacturing process as a pair. Be
sure to replace them as a pair.
(2) Procedure
1. Replace the multi feed detection board/S and multi feed detection board/R. (Refer to G.30.2.31 Multi feed detection boards/S (MFDBS)
and /R (MFDBR))
2. Check the stamp letter [1] that is placed on the cover paper multi feed detection board/S and the cover paper multi feed detection board/
R, and rotate the rotary switch [2] on the PBCB that is shown in the following table.
Stamp letter Rotary switch
A 1
B 2
C 3
D 4
E 5
I-261
[1]
[2]
564Af3c001cb
3. Insert a 1 sheet of paper (P/N 65AA-9910, fusing adjustment paper, 16 sheets/A3) in the cover paper tray of the PB.
(200 to 300 g/m2 paper can also be used.)
4. Select the output check code "77-96" of the I/O check mode in the service mode.
5. Press the Start key.
Perform the all initializing operation.
6. After the operations, press the Stop key.
7. Select the output check code "77-95" of the I/O check mode in the service mode.
The paper is fed from the cover paper tray and stops at the conveyance section.
Note
• Confirm that the paper is between the multi feed detection board/1 and the cover paper multi feed detection board/2.
9. After the operations, press the Stop key.

10. Connect the tester (voltmeter) to the following positions of the PBCB.
- terminal: test pin Number TP24 (AGND) [2]
Range: DC 20V
Note
• Because the PB activates, do not drop any metal material on the board, or do not connect the tester pin to an irrelevant
terminal.
[1]
VR4 [2] 564Af3c002cd
11. In the PBCB volume (VR4), configure the power voltage to the standard value.
12. Pull out the paper that is inserted in step 8.
13. Insert a 1 sheet of paper that customer mainly uses (paper weight 50 g/m2 to 300 g/m2), and confirm that the LED of PBCB (LED1)
activates.
15. If there is a detection error, return to step 3 to conduct the adjustment again. In step11, configure the power voltage to the value 1.0V
lower than the previous adjustment.
16. Repeat steps 3 to 14 until the detection error is resolved.
I-262
4.7.8 FD, SD-506, SD-513, FS-531/612 and PB adjustment data EEPROM storage
(1) Usage
The adjustment data of FD, SD-506, SD-513, FS-531, FS-612, and PB which are adjusted in the field are backed up to the nonvolatile
memory (EEPROM) of the FD control board (FDCB), the SD control board (SDCB), the SD control board (PCB1), the FNSCB (FNS control
board) and the PB control board (PBCB). When you need, select [Installation Initial Data] in Recall Standard Data (Finisher adjustment data)
in the Service Mode for recall.
Note
• Only 1 type of data can be backed up. When you back up again, data is overwritten.
• When several units of FD, SD-506, SD-513, FS-531, FS-612, and PB are connected, the data is backed up to all EEPROM.
To back up the data of the 1 option respectively, connect only the target option to the main body.
(2) Procedure
2. Enter "90" with the numeric keys.
Confirm that "90-00" appears on the message display area.
4. "NOW" appears while in the back-up. When the back up completes, "FIN" appears and the current finisher adjustment data is backed up
in the EEPROM.
4.7.9 Main body adjustment data NVRAM board storage

(1) Usage
Adjustment data of the main body which are adjusted in the field are backed up to the NVRAM board (NRB). When you need, select
[Installation Initial Data] in Recall Standard Data (Machine Adjustment data), (Process Adjustment data) and recall it..
Note
• Only 1 type of data can be backed up. When you back up again, data is overwritten.
(2) Procedure
4. "NOW" appears while in the back-up. Then when it completes, "FIN" appears and the current machine adjustment data and the process
adjustment data are backed up in the NRB.
4.7.10 Printer image processing board line memory check

(1) Usage
When the image of a particular color is misaligned in the sub scan direction and a notable image trouble occurs, check whether there is any
abnormality on the line memory of the printer image processing board (PRIPB).
(2) Procedure
3. Press the Access key.
4. Enter one of the followings with the numeric keys.
Check that "98-##" (## represent the multi code number) appears in the message display area.
Multi Code 06: Printer image processing board line memory (SDRAM) check/Y
Multi Code 07: Printer image processing board line memory (SDRAM) check/M
Multi Code 08: Printer image processing board line memory (SDRAM) check/C
Multi Code 09: Printer image processing board line memory (SDRAM) check/K
During the operation-"NOW" appears
The operation succeeded - "OK" appears
The operation failed - "NG" appears
When "NG" appears, replace PRIPB.
4.7.11 Hard disk check

(1) Usage
Check the total capacity and remaining capacity of image memory area of the copier hard disk (HDD).
(2) Procedure
3. Press the Access key.
4. Enter one of the followings with the numeric keys.
Check that "99-##" (## represent the multi code number) appears in the message display area.
Multi Code01: HDD image memory area capacity check
Multi Code02: HDD image memory area remaining capacity check
• Capacity check: Capacity of the HDD image memory area appears.
• Residual capacity check: Remaining capacity of the HDD image memory area appears.
I-263
• The remaining capacity of the channel which shows the smallest value among HDD1, HDD2, HDD3 appears.
4.7.12 Hard disk replacing procedure

(1) Usage
Perform the following steps when you change the hard disk for troubleshooting of an error code.
(2) Procedure
Confirm that "99-00" is displayed on the message display area.
3. Press [High/Low].
Confirm that "99-03" is displayed on the message display area.
The bad sectors check and the recovery of the hard disk are executed.
During the operation-"NOW" is displayed. when the check and recovery are completed, the result is displayed.
The operation succeeded - "OK" is displayed
The operation failed - "NG" is displayed
When "NG" is displayed, press the Start key to perform the bad sectors check and recovery again.
6. Deactivate the sub power switch (SW2) and main power switch (SW1).
7. Replace the HDD. (Refer toG.3.2.30 HDD1, HDD2, HDD3, G.3.2.31 Hard disk/4 (HDD4))
Note
• When you replace HDDs of the main body, be sure to replace HDD1, HDD2, and HDD3.
• When you replace the HDD of UK-104, be sure to replace only the HDD4.
8. Activate the main power switch (SW1).

Note
• Use "Start-up from power OFF" to enter the service mode. (Refer to I.4.2.1 Start method)
10. Conduct the format HDD data. (Refer to I.4.17.2 Format HDD All Data)
Note
• When the "HDD Lock Password" is enabled on the "Enhanced Security Mode" and an error occurred on the HDD, contact
the support section of the Konica Minolta.
• When the HDD data is backed up by the customer, they can be restored. For the details, refer to the user's guide.
11. Activate and deactivate the sub power switch (SW2).
4.7.13 Replacing procedure of the write unit

(1) Usage
Perform this adjustment after you replace the write unit.
(2) Procedure
Press [05 State Confirmation] and then press [01 I/O Check Mode].
3. Perform the LD1 to LD4 alarm data clear corresponding to the color of the replaced write unit.
"Output check"
• 37-91: LD1 to LD4 alarm data clear/Y
• 37-92: LD1 to LD4 alarm data clear/M
• 37-93: LD1 to LD4 alarm data clear/C
• 37-94: LD1 to LD4 alarm data clear/K
4. Perform the LD alarm measurement by 37-00 of "Output check"
37-00: LD alarm measurement
Note
• You can check the LD alarm data (laser power of the laser diode) from the "Adjustment Data List" in the "List output."
• The value appeared for "Default" on the adjustment data list is a value of when 37-00 is performed after LD alarm clear by
37-9*.
• "000" is normally displayed on the "Setting" on the adjustment data list. When you perform 37-00 in the field, the LD alarm
data measured result appears, and is overwritten each time 37-00 is performed.
• The value of the LD alarm level increases with the deterioration of the laser diode.
• Steps 1 to 3 are the procedures for the history management at replacing the write unit.
4.7.14 Procedure when IO35-21 or IO35-25 is used

(1) Outline
IO35-21 or IO-35-25 is possibly used in the following cases.
• Solution of the malfunction code (C-45**)
• To analyze the image trouble, the writing unit of another color is used.
Note
• When you use the IO35-21 or IO-35-25, follow the correct procedure as follows.
If you do not follow the correct procedure, a position error occurs to the motor inside the writing unit and a malfunction code
possibly occurs.
• If you use the IO35-21 or IO-35-25, the factory initial condition cannot be reproduced.
I-264
(2) Step
1. Write down the current data of [Crosswise Dir. Skew Adj.].
1. Select [Service Mode] - [Machine Adjustment] - [Printer Adjustment] - [Crosswise Dir. Skew Adj.].
Write down the value of [Current Data].
2. Change the Setting Data of [Crosswise Dir. Skew Adj.] to "0".
Enter "0" through the numeric buttons, and then press [SET].
3. Print the test pattern of [Crosswise Dir. Skew Adj.].
Press [Print Mode].
Select the A3 or the 11 x 17 paper. Press the Start key to output the test pattern (Number 16 or Number 33).
Note
• When the Start key is pressed, the Color Registration Adjustment (approximately 2 minutes) is performed automatically.
When the adjustment is completed, test pattern (number 16 or Number 33) is printed.
4. Perform IO35-21 or IO35-25.
1. Select [Service Mode] - [State Confirmation] - [I/O Check Mode].
Enter "35" with the numeric keys.
Press [High/Low].
Enter "21" or "25" with the numeric keys.
The targeted tilt correction motor moves to the center standard position.
5. Change the setting data of [Crosswise Dir. Skew Adj.] to the value that was wrote down in step 1.
1. Select [Service Mode] - [Machine Adjustment] - [Printer Adjustment] - [Crosswise Dir. Skew Adj.].
Enter the value that was wrote down in step 1 through the numeric buttons, and then press [SET].
6. Print the test pattern of [Crosswise Dir. Skew Adj.].
Press [Print Mode].
Select the A3 or the 11 x 17 paper. Press the Start key to output the test pattern (Number 16 or Number 33).
Note
• When the Start key is pressed, the Color Registration Adjustment (approximately 2 minutes) is performed automatically.
When the adjustment is completed, test pattern (number 16 or Number 33) is printed.
7. When the skew of the main scan direction is not within the standard value, perform the adjustment.
1. Check the skew of the main scan direction in the test pattern of step 6.
2. When the value is not within the standard, perform the adjustment. (Refer to I.4.3.15 Crosswise Dir. Skew Adj. (Printer Adjustment))
4.8 ADF adjustment

4.8.1 ADF original size adjustment
(1) Function
Select the maximum width (A3 position) and the minimum width (B6 position) for the restriction plate positional VR (VR1).
(2) Usage
• Use this function if original sizes are detected mistakenly.
• Use this function when an original jam occurs.
• Conduct this adjustment when the restriction plate positional VR (VR1) is replaced.
Note
adjustment method.
(3) Procedure
Press [06 ADF Adjustment].
2. "ADF adjustment mode menu screen"
Press [01 ADF Original Size Adj.].
3. Widen the original restriction plate [1] to the A3 position.
[1] 4. "ADF Original Size Adj. screen"
Choose [Maximum Width], and press [start].
5. When "OK" appears as a adjustment result, the adjustment is
completed.
Note
• The adjustment results and the adjustment data of the
maximum width and the minimum width are shown in the
frame in the lower right the control panel.
I-265
6. Narrow the original restriction plate [1] to the B6 position.

[1] 7. "ADF Original Size Adj. screen"
Choose [Minimum Width], and press [Start].
8. When "OK" appears as a adjustment result, the adjustment is
completed.
Note
• When the adjustment result is NG, the trouble of the restriction plate positional VR (VR1), the faulty of the wiring to VR1 and the
faulty of the DF control board (DFCB) is conceivable.
4.8.2 ADF original stop position

(1) Function
This function executes the manual adjustment for the original stop position and the reading position of each mode of DF.
(2) Usage
Use this function when the result is "NG" on "I.4.8.3 ADF original stop position auto adjustment".
Note
• Be sure the Scanner FD-Mag. Adjustment has been adjusted in advance. (Refer to I.4.8.9 FD-Mag. Adjustment)
adjustment method.
(3) Procedure
(a) Restart Timing (Front) and Restart Timing (Back)
Press [02 ADF Orig. Stop Position].
3. "ADF Orig. Stop Position screen"
Choose "Restart Timing(Front)" or "Restart Timing(Back)".
Press [Print Mode].
Select the original setting and the copy mode according to the item that you want to adjust, load an "Adjustment chart" on the DF, and
press the start key.
Note
• When you adjust "Restart Timing(Back)", turn over the adjustment chart and place it to the DF.
6. Confirm that the gap of A width of the adjustment chart and the copy sample is within the standard value.
Standard value: within ± 1.5 mm
A
Enter a value through the numeric buttons and press [<<SET].
Setting range: -40 (image faster) to +40 (image slower)
1 step = 0.1 mm
I-266
(b) Centering (Front) and Centering (Back)

Press [02 ADF Orig. Stop Position].
Choose "Centering(Front)" or "Centering(Back)".
Press [Print Mode].
Select the original setting and the copy mode according to the item that you want to adjust, load an "Adjustment chart" on the DF, and
press the start key.
Note
• When you adjust "Centering(Back)", turn over the adjustment chart and place it to the DF.
6. Confirm that the gap of B width of the adjustment chart and the copy sample is within the standard value.
Setting range: -44 (to front) to +44 (to back)
1 step = 0.1 mm
4.8.3 ADF original stop position auto adjustment

(1) Function
• Conduct the auto adjustments of the original stop position and the read position in DF each mode.
• Check the skew level.
(2) Usage
Use this function when you replace the DF.
Note
• Be sure the Scanner FD-Mag. Adjustment has been adjusted in advance. (Refer to I.4.8.9 FD-Mag. Adjustment)
adjustment method.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 ADF Orig. Stop Pos. Auto].
3. "ADF Orig. Stop Pos. Auto screen"
Select the item that you want to adjust from [Restart Timing(Front)], [Restart Timing(Back)], [Centering(Front)], [Centering(Back)].
Note
• Conduct the adjustment to all items.
4. "ADF Orig. Stop Pos. Auto screen"

Place the "adjustment chart" on the DF and press [Start].
I-267
Note
• When you adjust "Restart Timing(Back)" or "Centering(Back)", turn over the adjustment chart and place it to the DF.
5. Check that the result is "OK" and press [<<Set].

Note
• The adjustment result, the position check, and the skew level are displayed in the lower right frame of the operation panel.
• The value of [Position Adj.(mm)] is reflected to the current value when [<<Set] is pressed.
6. When the adjustment result is "NG", check and correct the skew level of the original. If the errors still occur, conduct the manual
adjustment in "I.4.8.2 ADF original stop position".
4.8.4 ADF Registration Loop Adj.

(1) Function
Adjust the original loop amount at the DF registration roller section.
(2) Usage
Adjust to remove the paper skew and crease, or the paper jamming in the registration section.
Note
adjustment method.
(3) Procedure
Press [04 ADF Registration Loop Adj.].
3. "ADF Registration Loop Adj. screen"
Choose whichever you want to adjust from [Front] or [Back], and press [Print Mode].
Choose the "adjustment chart" on the DF and press the Start Key.
6. "ADF Registration Loop Adj. screen"
Setting range: -5 (smaller) to +5 (larger)
1 step = 1 mm
4.8.5 Feed paper check

(1) Function
This function checks the paper feed in each paper feed mode of DF.
(2) Usage
When an original jam occurs, use this function if there is an error in the paper feed path.
Note
(3) Procedure
Press [05 Feed Paper Check].
3. "Feed Paper Check screen"
Select the item that you want to adjust from [Simplex(High Speed)], [Simplex(Mixed)], [Duplex], [AMS(Mixed)].
4. Place an original in the paper feed tray.
Note
• When you select [Simplex(Mixed)] or [AMS(Mixed)], place the mixed original according to the specifications on the paper
feed tray.
5. Press [Start] to start the operation.

Note
• Press [Start] to start the operation. Press [Start] to stop the operation when the machine is operating. Press [Start] again to
restart the operation when the machine is stopping.
• Press [Cancel] to finish the test forcibly while in the test operation.
• [Start] is not accepted unless an original is placed in the paper feed tray.
6. Feed all originals that is placed. When the all originals are fed, the paper feed test is completed.
4.8.6 Sensor check

(1) Function
Execute the sensor check to the paper path of the original.
I-268
(2) Usage
Use this function when a paper jam of the original occurs.
Note
(3) Procedure
Press [06 Sensor Check].
3. "Sensor Check screen"
To check the screen display, operate the desired sensor using paper.
Paper: 1, No paper: 0
Sensor check list
Operation peculiarity and panel display
Symbol Panel display Parts and signal names
1 0
PS1 Feed Open&Shut Paper feed open close sensor Opened Closed
PS2 Read Open&Shut Read open close sensor Opened Closed
PS3 Regist Registration sensor Paper (light No paper
blocking) (exposure)
PS4 After separate After separate sensor Paper (exposure) No paper (light
blocking)
PS5 Output Paper exit sensor Paper (exposure) No paper (light
blocking)
PS6 Read Roller Read roller sensor Pressed (light Released
PS7 Reverse roller Reverse roller sensor Pressed (light Released
SW6 ADF Open DF open close switch Opened Closed
PS8 Reverse Regist Reverse registration sensor Paper (light No paper
PS9 Before Read Before read sensor Paper (light No paper
VR1 Restriction Restriction plate positional VR Analog value
PS10 Length Sensor 1 Length sensor/1 Paper No paper
PS11 Length Sensor 2 Length sensor/2 Light blocked Transparent
PS12 Length Sensor 3 Length sensor/3 Paper No paper
PS21 Glass home position Glass cleaning home sensor Home position Other than home
position
PS14 Empty Empty sensor Paper No paper
PS16 Lift up upper limit Lift-up upper limit sensor Transparent Light blocked
PS15 Lift up lower limit Lift-up lower limit sensor Light blocked Transparent
PS19 Consolidation 1 Mixed original sensor/1 Paper No paper
PS20 Original set Original set sensor Placed Unset
4.8.7 Read Position Adjustment

(1) Function
Adjust the read position of the original.
(2) Usage
Use this function when the result is "NG" on "I.4.8.8 Read Position Auto Adjustment".
Note
adjustment method.
(3) Procedure
Press [07 Read Position Adj.].
3. "Read Position Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
Select the copy settings (the original setting and the mode) according to the item that you want to adjust, and load an "Adjustment chart"
on the DF. Then select A4 paper, and press the Start key.
I-269
5. Check if the gap between the adjustment chart and a copy is within the standard value.
A
7. "Read Position Adjustment screen"
Setting range: -89 (image faster) to +89 (image slower)
1 step = 1 mm
4.8.8 Read Position Auto Adjustment

(1) Function
Adjust the read position of the original.
(2) Usage
Use this function when you have replaced the 1st slider, the 2nd slider, the scanner wire assy, the DF original glass, the glass movement unit,
the step sheet.
Note
adjustment method.
(3) Procedure
Press [08 Read Position Auto Adj.].
3. Open the reverse automatic document feeder.
4. Place the DF reading chart [1] so that the triangular mark faces to the original glass side (down-pointing) and the apex of a triangle faces
to the left side (the black sheet side).
[1]
5. "Read Position Auto Adj. screen"

Press [Start].
6. Check that the result is "OK".
Note
• The adjustment result and the position check are displayed in the lower right frame of the operation panel.
7. If the adjustment result is "NG", check and correct the place position of the chart. If the errors still occur, conduct the manual adjustment in
"I.4.8.7 Read Position Adjustment".
4.8.9 FD-Mag. Adjustment

(1) Function
Adjust the read magnification in the DF paper feed direction.
I-270
(2) Usage
Use this function when the result is "NG" on "I.4.8.10 FD-Mag. Auto Adjustment".
Note
adjustment method.
(3) Procedure
2. "ADF Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
Place an "Adjustment chart" in the DF, select A4 paper, and press the Start key.
5. Check if the gap between the adjustment chart and a copy is within the standard value.
A
1 step = 0.1%
4.8.10 FD-Mag. Auto Adjustment

(1) Function
Adjust the read magnification in the DF paper feed direction.
(2) Usage
Use this function when you replace the DF.
Note
adjustment method.
(3) Procedure
2. "ADF Adjustment screen"
Press [10 FD-Mag. Auto Adjustment].
3. "FD-Mag. Auto Adjustment screen"
Place the "adjustment chart" on the DF and press [Start].
4. Check that the result is "OK" and press [<<Set].
Note
• The adjustment result appears in the lower right frame of the operation panel.
• The value of [Magnification Adj.(%)] is reflected to the current value when [<<Set] is pressed.
5. If the adjustment result is "NG", check and correct the place position of the chart. If the errors still occur, conduct the manual adjustment in
"I.4.8.9 FD-Mag. Adjustment".
4.8.11 Scanning light adjustment

(1) Function
Adjust the scanning light of the DF.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when you correct the difference with the original glass (placed by a hand).
Note
adjustment method.
I-271
(3) Procedure
Press [11 Scanning Light Adjustment].
3. "Scanning Light Adjustment screen"
Select the item that you want to correct from [R], [G], [B].
Note
• Be sure to conduct the adjustment for R, G, B following the same steps.
4. "Scanning Light Adjustment screen"

Enter a value and press [<<Set].
1 step = 1
4.8.12 Mixed original size adjustment

(1) Function
Conduct the accuracy adjustment in the driving length detection which is used in the DF mixed original copy mode.
(2) Usage
Specify the threshold of each size decision using by the detected length when you feed the standard sizes (the large size and the small size).
Note
adjustment method.
(3) Procedure
Press [12 Mixed Original Size Adj.].
3. Place the "adjustment chart" on the DF.
4. "Mixed Original Size Adjustment screen"
Press [Start] to start the adjustment.
5. Check that the result is "OK".
Note
• The adjustment result appears in the lower right frame of the operation panel.
4.8.13 Line detection setting

(1) Function
If an original is placed on the DF tray when the DF cover is closed, this function detects lines (detects the dirt on the original glass in
advance). You can change each setting regarding the line detection setting.
(2) Usage
Use this function when you change the settings of the line detection.
Note
(3) Procedure
Press [13 Line Detection Setting].
3. "Line Detection Setting screen"
For the Detection Level, the Warning Display, and the Scan Prohibit Configuration., select any settings that you want and press [OK].
• Detection level: Select that perform the line detection operation or not, and the detection level.
Strict Easily detects the dirt on the glass.
Medium Standard level.
Mild Difficult to detect the dirt on the glass.
OFF Do not detect the dirt on the original glass.
• Warning Display: Select how to display the warning screen that encourage to clean the dirt on the original glass.
• Scan Prohibit Setting: Select whether the machine performs the reading with the dirt being detected.
4.8.14 ADF scan glass auto cleaning

(1) Function
Switch whether the DF scan glass auto cleaning is conducted or not.
(2) Usage
Use this function when you change the setting of auto cleaning.
I-272
Note
• If this setting becomes active, the scan speed gets lower.
(3) Procedure
Press [14 ADF Scan Glass Auto Cleaning].
3. "ADF Scan Glass Auto Cleaning screen"
Select [ON] or [OFF] and press [OK].
4.9 Finisher adjustment

4.9.1 FS-532 Staple Position Adjustment (staple finisher (main) adjustment)
(1) Function
Adjust the staple position while in stapling by FS.
The staple pitch can be adjusted when you adjust the stop position of the stapler movement motor (M14) in this setting.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the staple position is not within the standard value by FS.
(3) Procedure
Press [07 Finisher Adjustment].
2. "Finisher Adjustment menu screen"
Press [01 Staple Finisher Adjustment].
3. "Staple Finisher Adjustment menu screen"
Press [01 Stapler(Main) Adjustment].
4. "Staple Finisher(Main) Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [01 Staple Position Adjustment].
5. "Staple Position Adjustment screen"
Select the Staple Mode that you want to adjust from [2 Position Pitch(120 mm)], [2 Position Pitch(140 mm)], [2 Position Pitch(165 mm)],
[Rear Diagonal], [Rear Parallel] and [Front Parallel]. Then press [Print Mode].
6. Select A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the Start key to output the test pattern (number 16 or number 33).
7. Check the Staple position "a" of the output paper in accordance with the selected Staple Mode.
• For [2 Position Pitch(120 mm)], [2 Position Pitch(140 mm)] and [2 Position Pitch(165 mm)]
Standard value: a = 120, 140, 165 ± 3 mm
• For [Rear Parallel]

• For [Rear Diagonal]

I-273
• For [Front Parallel]

a
9. "Staple Position Adjustment screen"
Enter a value through the numeric buttons and press [SET].
Range ([2 Position Pitch(120 mm)], [2 Position Pitch(140 mm)] and [2 Position Pitch(165 mm)]): -5 (narrower) to +5 (wider)
1 step = 1.0 mm
Setting range ([Rear Diagonal]: -5 (in front) to +5 (in back)

Range ([Rear Parallel], [Front Parallel]): -3 (in front) to +3 (in back)
1 step = 1.0 mm
4.9.2 FS-532 Staple paper width adjustment (staple finisher (main) adjustment)
(1) Function
Changes the CD adjustment plate width of the staple bundle.
In this adjustment, change the driving amount of the stacker alignment motor (M9) to align the paper width and the alignment width.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when there is a misalignment in the main scan direction in a bundle of paper while in stapling by FS.
(3) Procedure
2. [Finisher Adjustment menu screen]
I-274

5. Select [2 Position Pitch (120 mm)] and press [Print Mode].
6. Put the A4 size paper on the tray and press the start key to output the test pattern (number 16 or number 33).
7. Check the misalignment "a" of the output paper in the main scan direction.
Standard value: a = ± 1.0 mm or less
8. When the value is not within the standard value, press [Exit PrintMode] and [Return].
Press [02 Staple Paper Width Adj.].
10. "Staple Paper Width Adj. screen"
Press [▼] or [▲], and select [All].
13. Check the alignment when the paper is stacked on the stacker and stops in the following conditions.
• CD adjustment plate: Closed
• FD alignment plate: Closed
• Rewind paddle: Descent
For the target value of the adjustment, refer to the followings.
• The interval between the paper and the CD adjustment plate: 0 mm
• The interval between the paper and the FD alignment plate: -2 mm (shorter compared to the paper length)
• The contact area between the paper and the rewind paddle: 2 mm (with the paper is pressed)
When you adjust the paper width, remove the stacked paper, and open and close the front door of the finisher to perform the initial
operation.
Note
∙ When the operation stops due to the paper lack or jam during printing, be sure to open and close the front door and perform
the initial operation.
∙ For the adjustment, be sure to conduct I.5.13.2 Staple paper width adjustment (staple finisher (main) adjustment), I.4.9.3 FS-532
FD alignment plate adjustment (staple finisher (main) adjustment), I.4.9.5 FS-532 Rewind paddle descent adjustment (staple finisher
(main) adjustment) in order.
∙ If the size of the paper that you want to adjust exceeds 230 mm, the FD alignment plate moves to the standby position because
the paper is too long. Be careful that the paper jam possibly occurs at the paper exit section if the stacker is pulled out in this
condition.
14. Press [Exit PrintMode] to adjust the interval between the paper and the CD alignment plate.
Setting range: -20 (wider) to +20 (narrower)
1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.3 FS-532 FD alignment plate adjustment (staple finisher (main) adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the pushing of the FD alignment plate for the stacker while in alignment.
In this adjustment, change the driving amount of the small size paper alignment motor (M18) to adjust the amount of a bundle of paper which
pushed by the FD alignment part can be adjusted.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when there is a misalignment in the sub scan direction in a bundle of paper while in stapling by FS for the paper
whose length in the sub scan direction is 230 mm or more.
I-275
(3) Procedure
Select [01 Staple Finisher Adjustment].
a
Press [03 FD Alignment Plate Adj.].
10. "FD Alignment Plate Adjustment screen"
operation.
Note
∙ For the adjustment, be sure to conduct I.4.9.2 FS-532 Staple paper width adjustment (staple finisher (main) adjustment), I.5.13.3 FD
Alignment Plate Adjustment (staple finisher (main) adjustment), I.4.9.5 FS-532 Rewind paddle descent adjustment (staple finisher
condition.
14. Press [Exit PrintMode] to adjust the interval between the paper and the FD adjustment plate.
1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.4 FS-532 Exit guide unit paper width adjustment (staple finisher (main) adjustment)
(1) Function
Adjust the position of the paper exit alignment plate (front and back) while in paper exit alignment.
In this adjustment, change the driving amount of the paper exit alignment plate motor (M12) to adjust the alignment intervals of the paper exit
alignment plate.
(2) Usage
Adjust an uneven paper stack (main scanning direction) on the main tray in non-staple mode by the FS.
Note
• This adjustment is effective only for the paper more than 182 mm width (B5S) in the main scan direction in the straight output,
or the paper more than 210 mm width (A4) in the shift output. This adjustment is invalid for the minimum size paper (A5S, B6S,
51/2 x 81/2S) since it does not operate the output alignment.
(3) Procedure
I-276

Press [04 Exit Guide Paper Width Adj.].
5. "Exit Guide Unit Paper Width Adjustment screen"
Press [▼] or [▲] to select the paper size that you want to adjust.
7. Place the paper that you want to adjust and press the Start key to output some test pattern (number 16 or number 33).
8. Check the misalignment "a" of the stacked paper.
a0u0f3c003ca
Note
• Check the misalignment between exit paper and the exit alignment plate under the operation as a reference for the
adjustment.
• Too narrow adjustment causes uneven paper exit in the sub scan direction.
The paper is stacked on the main tray and stops while the paper exit alignment plate is closed.
Check the alignment. For the target value of the adjustment, refer to the followings.
• The interval between the paper and the paper exit alignment plate: 0 mm
operation.
Note
9. Press [Exit PrintMode] to adjust the position of the paper exit alignment plate.
10. "Exit Guide Unit Paper Width Adjustment screen"
1 step = 0.1 mm
Adjustment standard value (at the alignment operation): Paper width 0 mm to +1 mm
4.9.5 FS-532 Rewind paddle descent adjustment (staple finisher (main) adjustment)
(1) Function
Adjust the rewind paddle descent (time) in stacking.
In this adjustment, adjust the stop position of the rewind paddle release motor (M28) to adjust the alignment intervals in the FD direction.
(2) Usage
When there is a misalignment in the FD direction, conduct this adjustment.
(3) Procedure
I-277
a
Press [05 Rewind Paddle Descent Adj.].
10. "Rewind Paddle Descent Adjustment screen"
operation.
Note
∙ For the adjustment, be sure to conduct I.4.9.2 FS-532 Staple paper width adjustment (staple finisher (main) adjustment), I.4.9.3
FS-532 FD alignment plate adjustment (staple finisher (main) adjustment), I5.13.5 Rewind Paddle Descent Adjustment (staple finisher
condition.
14. Press [Exit PrintMode] to adjust the rewind paddle descent.
15. "Rewind Paddle Descent Adjustment screen"
Setting range: -10 (Weak) to +10 (Strong)
1 step = 0.2 mm
4.9.6 SD-510 Fold&staple pitch adjustment (staple finisher (fold) adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the staple intervals for the saddle stitch mode by the SD.
In this setting, adjust the stop position of the stapler movement motor (M103) to adjust the Staple Pitch.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the staple intervals of the saddle stitching by SD are not within the standard value.
(3) Procedure
3. "Staple Finisher Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [02 Staple Finisher(Fold) Adj.].
4. "Stapler(Fold) Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [01 Fold&Staple Pitch Adjustment].
5. "Fold&Staple Pitch Adjustment screen"
7. Load the paper which you want to adjust the size on the tray and press the Start key to output the test pattern (Number 16).
8. Check the interval "a" between the staples against the paper size "b."
Standard value: a = b/2 ± 3 mm
I-278
a
b
fs503fs3011c
10. "Fold&Staple Pitch Adjustment screen"
Range: -300 (narrower) to +300 (wider)
1 step = 0.1 mm
Note
• The variable range of fold&staple pitch is from 60 mm to 148.5 mm. Therefore, you cannot perform the adjustment after
which the fold&staple pitch exceeds the variable range.
4.9.7 SD-510 Fold&staple paper width adjustment (staple finisher (fold) adjustment)
(1) Function
Changes the CD adjustment plate width of the staple bundle.
In this adjustment, change the driving amount of the saddle stitching alignment motor (M104) to adjust the paper width and the alignment
width.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when there is a misalignment in the main scan direction in a bundle of paper while in stapling by SD.
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Fold&Staple Paper Width Adj.].
7. Load the selected size paper which you want to adjust on the tray and press the Start key to output the test pattern (number 16 or number
33).
8. Check to see if the bundle of papers is misaligned (a: a misalignment occurs when the paper width setting is larger than the paper width)
and if the bundle is curved (b: the curve occurs when the paper width setting is smaller than the paper width).
Standard value "a": 1.0 mm or less
a
fs503fs3012c
9. When there is a misalignment or a paper curvature, press [Exit PrintMode].

10. Enter a value through the numeric buttons and press [SET].
Range: -50 (narrower) to +50 (wider)
1 step = 0.1 mm
I-279
4.9.8 SD-510 Fold&staple staple position adjustment (staple finisher (fold) adjustment)
(1) Function
Adjust the staple position for the Fold & Staple by the SD.
In this setting, adjust the stop position of the stopper motor (M105) to adjust the staple position in the FD direction.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the staple position of the Fold & Staple by SD is not within the standard value.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Fold&Staple Staple Position].
5. "Fold&Staple Staple Position Adjustment screen"
33).
8. Check the misalignment "a" between the staple position and the fold position of the printed paper.
Standard value "a": = ± 1 mm
10. "Fold&Staple Staple Position Adjustment screen"
Range: -50 (output upper side becomes longer) to +50 (output upper side becomes shorter)
1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.9 SD-510 Fold&staple fold position adjustment (staple finisher (fold) adjustment)
(1) Function
Adjust the fold position on the Fold & Staple mode by the SD.
In this setting, adjust the stop position of the stopper motor (M105) to adjust the folding position.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the fold position of the Fold & Staple by SD is not within the standard value.
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Fold&Staple Fold Position].
I-280
7. Load the paper which you want to adjust the size on the tray and press the Start key to output the test pattern (number 16 or number 33).
8. Check the misalignment "a" on the edge of the outputted paper.
a
10. "Fold&Staple Fold Position Adjustment screen"
1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.10 SD-510 Half-fold fold position adjustment (staple finisher (fold) adjustment)
(1) Function
Adjust the fold position on the multi half fold mode by the SD.
In this setting, adjust the stop position of the stopper motor (M105) to adjust the folding position.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the fold position of the half-fold by SD is not within the standard value.
(3) Procedure
Press [05 Half-Fold Fold Position Adj.].
5. "Half-Fold Fold Position Adjustment screen"
Standard value "a": = ± 2.0 mm
a
10. "Half-Fold Fold Position Adjustment screen"
1 step = 0.1 mm
I-281
4.9.11 SD-510 Tri-fold position adjustment (staple finisher (fold) adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the fold positions on the multi tri-fold-in mode by the SD.
In the 1st Fold position adjustment, change the stop position of the stopper motor (M105) to adjust the folding position.
In the 2nd fold position adjustment, change the timing that the 2nd folding knife motor (M110) starts to rotate since the 2nd folding sensor
(PS112) becomes active to adjust the folding position.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the folding position of multi tri-folding by SD is not within the standard value.
Note
• When you adjust both the single fold and the double fold, be sure to start with the single fold.
• The position of the 1st fold is based on the leading edge of the paper and the position of the 2nd fold is based on the position of
the 1st fold. So, the dimension "b" in the step7 varies when either position of the 1st fold and the 2nd fold is changed.
(3) Procedure
Press [06 Tri-Fold Adjustment].
5. "Tri-Fold Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [01 Tri-Fold Position Adjustment].
6. "Tri-Fold Position Adjustment screen"
Select the paper size that you want to adjust and press [Print Mode].
8. Check "a" and "b" on the outputted paper.
Paper size Standard value (mm)
a ± 2.0 b ± 2.0
A4S 95.0 101.0
81/2 x 11S 89.4 95.0
[1]
a
[2]
a03uf3c019ca
[1] First fold [2] Double fold
Select the paper size that you want to adjust.
11. Press [Single Fold].
12. Enter a value through the numeric buttons and press [SET].
Setting range: -50 ( longer) to +50 (shorter)
1 step = 0.1 mm
• The dimension "a" in the step7 gets larger when the setting data is moved to the positive side and gets smaller when it is moved to
the negative side.
13. Press [Double Fold].
14. Enter a value through the numeric buttons and press [<<SET].
Setting range: -50 (shorter) to +50 (longer)
1 step = 0.1 mm
• The dimension "b" in the step7 gets larger when the setting data is moved to the positive side and gets smaller when it is moved to
the negative side.
4.9.12 SD-510 Double fold plate adjustment (staple finisher (fold) adjustment)
(1) Function
Adjust the pushing level of the 2nd folding knife on the Multi 3-Fold mode by the SD.
In this adjustment, change the time of the forward rotation of the 2nd folding knife motor (M110) to adjust the degree of how much the 2nd
folding knife motor is pushed in.
(2) Usage
Conduct the adjustment in case of the wide shift in the 2nd folded bunch on the Multi 3-Fold mode by the SD.
(3) Procedure
I-282

5. "Tri-Fold Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [02 Double Fold Plate Adjustment].
6. "Double Fold Plate Adjustment screen"
8. Check the wide shift in the 2nd folded bunch on the edge of the output paper.
9. Press [Exit PrintMode] in case of wide shift.
10. "Double Fold Plate Adjustment screen"
Range: -50 (shallower) to +50 (deeper)
1 step = 0.1 mm
Note
• Push deeper in case of the wide shift.
• Push shallower when the box folding occurs in the thin paper.
• Push deeper when the overlap on the solid image shifts the 2nd folding positions of the cover, the 2nd paper and the
succeeding sheets of paper.
11. Repeat the steps 6 to 10 until the shift in the bunch is resolved.
4.9.13 SD-510 Half-fold strength adjustment (staple finisher (fold) adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the folding roller pressing time on the Fold & Staple Mode or the Multi 3-Fold Mode by the SD.
In this setting, adjust the low speed conveyance time of the folding roller motor (M108) to adjust the folding pressure. However, setting the
pressing time longer decrease the productivity.
(2) Usage
Lengthen the roller pressing time when you want to strengthen the book fold.
Note
• The productivity is reduced depending on the length of the roller pressing time.
(3) Procedure
Press [07 Half-Fold Strength Adj.].
5. "Half-Fold Strength Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Place paper in the page quantity of the book that you want to created and press the Start key to output the test pattern (number 16 or
number 33).
7. Check the fold of the printed book, and press [Exit PrintMode] when the fold is weak.
8. "Half-Fold Strength Adjustment screen"
Range: 0 to +10 (add time)
1 step = 1 second
9. Repeat the steps 4 to 7 until an appropriate Fold strength is obtained.
4.9.14 PK-522 Vertical position adjustment (crosswise direction) (staple finisher (punch) adjustment)
(1) Function
Adjust the punch position of the punch kit (PK) in the main scan direction.
In this adjustment, change the driving amount of the punch shift motor (M302) to adjust the shift amount of the punch unit.
I-283
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the punch position of the punch kit (PK) in the main scan direction is not within the standard value.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Staple Finisher(Punch) Adj.].
4. "Stapler(Punch) Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [01 Vert. Position Adj.(CD)].
5. "Punch Vert. Position Adj.(CD) screen"
Press [▼] or [▲] to select the paper size you want to adjust.
33).
8. Fold the output paper in half in the main scan direction, and measure the gap "a" between the center line of the print and the center of the
punch hole.
[1]
[2]
15knf3c002nb
[1] Center of the paper [2] Center of the punch hole
10. "Punch Vert. Position Adj.(CD) screen"
Range: -50 (to front) to +50 (to back)
1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.15 PK-522 Horizontal position adjustment (paper feed direction) (staple finisher (punch) adjustment)
(1) Function
Adjust the punch position of the punch kit (PK) in the sub scan direction.
In this adjustment, adjust the stop timing of the conveyance motor to adjust the punch position in the sub scan direction.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the punch position of the punch kit (PK) in the sub scan direction is not within the standard value.
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Horizontal Position Adj.(FD)].
5. "Punch Horiz. Position Adj.(FD) screen"
33).
8. Check the punch position "a" of the output paper in the sub scan direction.
Standard value a: 12.0 mm ± 3.0mm
I-284
15knf3c001nb
10. "Punch Horiz. Position Adj.(FD) screen"
Setting range: -50 ( longer) to +50 (shorter)
1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.16 PK-522 Registration adjustment (staple finisher (punch) adjustment)

(1) Function
Change the registration loop amount of punching to adjust the paper skew.
In this adjustment, change the driving time of the FNS entrance motor (M1) when the paper strikes the entrance roller and a loop is formed to
adjust the loop.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the punch hole of the punch kit (PK) is not straight.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Registration Adjustment].
5. "Punch Registration Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Load the paper in the tray or PI, and press Start to print the test pattern (number 16 or number 33).
7. When the trouble is not solved, press [Exit PrintMode].
8. "Punch Registration Adjustment screen"
1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.17 PK-522 Paper edge sensor adjustment (staple finisher (punch) adjustment)
(1) Function
Adjust the sensitivity of the paper size sensor automatically to detect the paper edge as the standard of the punch hole properly.
(2) Usage
Adjust the sensitivity of the sensor after you replace the punch drive board (PDB) or the paper size sensor (PS305).
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Paper Edge Detect Sensor Adjustment].
5. "Paper Edge Detect Sensor Adjustment screen"
Press [Start].
6. A message "Completed" appears when the adjustment is finished successfully.
I-285
4.9.18 PI-502 Tray size adjustment (staple finisher (PI) adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the detection size of the PI tray.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the paper size is not correctly detected at the cover sheet tray of the PI.
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Staple Finisher(PI) Adjustment].
4. "Stapler(PI) Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [01 Tray Size adjustment ].
5. "PI Tray Size Adjustment screen"
Select [Upper Tray] or [Lower Tray], and press [A4] or [81/2 x 11].
6. Load A4 or 8 1/2 x 11 paper in the selected tray of PI and press [Start] (When you selected [81/ x 11] in step 4, load 81/ x 11 paper in
2 2
the tray).
8. When you adjust another tray, repeat the steps 5 to 7.
9. Exit the service mode, and check if the paper size in the PI is correctly detected.
4.9.19 PI-502 PI registration adjustment (staple finisher (PI) adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the punch registration loop at both the upper stage and lower stage of the post inserter.
(2) Usage
When a punch skew and crease occur, conduct this adjustment.
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Staple Finisher(PI) Adjustment].
4. "Stapler(PI) Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [02 PI Registration Adjustment].
5. "PI Registration Adjustment screen"
Select either [PI Upper Tray] or [PI Lower Tray].
6. Load the paper which you want to adjust the size in the selected PI tray, and feed the paper in the manual mode.
7. Check the outputted paper
1 step = 1.0 mm
Note
• When there is a too much punch skew, adjust the value to the positive side.
• When there is a too much paper crease, adjust the value to the negative side.
4.9.20 FD-503 Paper width adjustment (multi folder (punch) adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjusts the position of the alignment plate while in alignment.
(2) Usage
Adjust the misalignment of punch holes for punching by FD.
(3) Procedure
2. "Finisher Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [02 Multi Folder Adjustment].
3. "Multi Folder (Fold) adj. menu screen"
Press [01 Multi Folder(Punch) Adj.].
4. "Multi Folder(Punch) Adj. menu screen"
Press [01 Paper Width Adjustment].
5. "Paper Width Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
I-286
Note
• Large size: Sub scan direction of the paper is more than 298 mm
• Small size: Sub scan direction of the paper is less than 297 mm
6. Load the paper which you want to adjust in the tray, configure the number of copies to 10 and press the Start key.
7. Check the diameter of the through-hole when the ejected paper is stacked.
Holes Standard value (mm)
2-Holes φ5.0 or larger
10. Enter the setting data through the numeric buttons and press [<<Set].
• [+]: Reduce equal jitters
• [-]: Reduce ragged jitters

1 step = 0.1 mm
Note
• When the alignment plate is wider than an appropriate position, the punch centering is displaced, and when too narrow, the
punch holes are apt to disperse.
4.9.21 FD-503 Punch vertical position adjustment (multi folder (punch) adjustment)
(1) Function
(2) Usage
Adjust the position of the punch holes that FD makes in the sub scanning direction.
2-hole or 3-hole is selectable.
(3) Procedure
Press [01 Multi Folder(Punch) Adj.].
Press [02 Punch Vertical Position Adj.].
5. "Punch Vertical Position Adj. screen"
Select [2-Hole] or [3-Hole].
Press [Print Mode].
8. Check the distance "a" from the outputted paper leading edge to the punch holes center position.
Holes Standard value "a"
(mm)
2-Holes 10.5 ± 4.0
3-Holes 9.5 ± 4
I-287
fs503fs3013c
• [+]: Move to the edge of the paper
• [-]: Move to the center of the paper
(2-Hole)
(3-Hole)

1 step = 0.1 mm
12. Repeat the steps 6 to 11 until the standard value can be obtained.
13. To configure the other punch hole or the paper size, repeat the steps 5 to 12.
4.9.22 FD-503 Half fold position adjustment (multi folder (fold) adjustment)
(1) Function
Adjust the paper stop position when you fold the paper.
(2) Usage
Adjust the fold position on the half fold mode by the FD.
(3) Procedure
3. "Multi Folder Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [02 Multi Folder(Fold) Adj.].
Press [01 Half-Fold Position Adj.].
5. "Half-Fold Position Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
Standard value "a": = ± 1.5 mm
I-288
• [+]: Lengthen the top side of the output.
• [-]: Shorten the top side of the output.

1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.23 FD-503 Tri-fold-in position adjustment (multi folder (fold) adjustment)

(1) Function
(2) Usage
Adjust the fold positions on the tri-fold-in mode by the FD.
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Tri-Fold-in Pos. Adj.].
5. "Tri-Fold-in Pos. Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
a ± 1.5 b ± 1.5
A3 139.0 142.0
B4 120.3 123.3
A4S 98.0 101.0
SRA4S 105.7 108.7
12 x 18 151.4 154.4
11 x 17 142.9 145.9
81/2 x 14 117.5 120.5
81/2 x 11S 92.1 95.1
8K 129.0 132.0
[1]
a
[2]
a03uf3c019ca
I-289
9. "Tri-Fold-in Pos. Adj. screen"

• [+]: Widen
• [-]: Narrow

1 step = 0.1 mm
• [+]: Widen
• [-]: Narrow

1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.24 FD-503 Tri-fold-out position adjustment (multi folder (fold) adjustment)

(1) Function
(2) Usage
Adjust the fold positions on the tri-fold-out mode by the FD.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Tri-Fold-out Pos. Adj.].
5. "Tri-Fold-out Pos. Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
a ± 1.5 b ± 1.5
A3 282.0 144.0
B4 243.7 123.3
A4S 199.0 101.0
SRA4S 214.3 108.7
12 x 18 306.8 156.4
11 x 17 289.9 147.9
81/2 x 14 238.1 120.5
81/2 x 11S 187.3 95.1
8K 262.0 134.0
I-290
a [1]
[2]
a03uf3c020ca
9. "Tri-Fold-out Pos. Adj. screen"
• [+]: Narrow
• [-]: Widen

1 step = 0.1 mm
• [+]: Widen
• [-]: Narrow

1 step = 0.1 mm
15. To configure the other paper size, repeat the steps 5 to 14.
4.9.25 FD-503 Double parallel position adjustment (multi folder (fold) adjustment)
(1) Function
(2) Usage
Adjust the fold positions on the double parallel mode by the FD.
Note
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Double Parallel Pos. Adj.].
5. "Double Parallel Pos. Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
a ± 1.5 b ± 1.5
A3 208.5 103.8
I-291
B4 180.5 89.8
A4S 147.0 73.0
SRA4S 158.5 78.8
12 x 18 227.1 113.1
11 x 17 214.4 106.7
81/2 x 14 176.3 87.7
81/2 x 11S 138.2 68.6
8K 193.5 96.3
b
[1]
[2]
a03uf3c021ca
9. "Double Parallel Pos. Adj. screen"
• [+]: Widen
• [-]: Narrow

1 step = 0.1 mm
• [+]: Widen
• [-]: Narrow

1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.26 FD-503 Z-fold position adjustment (multi folder (fold) adjustment)

(1) Function
(2) Usage
Adjust the fold positions on the z-fold mode by the FD.
Note
(3) Procedure
I-292

Press [05 Z-Fold Position Adj.].
5. "Z-Fold Position Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
a ± 1.5 b ± 1.5
A3 105.5 108.5
B4 91.5 94.5
A4S 74.8 77.8
SRA4S 80.5 83.5
12 x 18 114.8 117.8
11 x 17 108.5 111.5
81/2 x 14 94.0 -
81/2 x 11S 70.4 73.4
8K 98.0 101.0
[2] a [1]
a03uf3c022ca
8 1／2×14
[1] a
a03uf3c031ca
9. "Z-Fold Position Adjustment screen"
• [+]: Widen
• [-]: Narrow

1 step = 0.1 mm
• [+]: Widen
• [-]: Narrow

1 step = 0.1 mm
I-293
4.9.27 FD-503 Gate position adjustment (multi folder (fold) adjustment)

(1) Function
(2) Usage
Adjusts the fold position on the gate fold mode by the FD.
Note
• When you adjust the single fold, the double fold and the triple fold, be sure to conduct the single fold, the double fold and the
triple fold in this order.
(3) Procedure
Press [06 Gate Position Adj.].
5. "Gate Position Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
7. Check the length of 2 places that are indicated with "a", "b" and "c".
a ± 1.5 b ± 1.5 c ± 1.5
A3 103.5 213.0 106.5
B4 89.5 185.0 92.5
A4S 72.8 151.5 75.8
SRA4S 78.5 163.0 81.5
12 x 18 112.8 231.6 115.8
11 x 17 106.5 218.9 109.5
81/2 x 14 87.4 180.8 90.4
81/2 x 11S 68.4 142.7 71.4
8K 96.0 198.0 99.0
b
a
[1]
c [2]
[3]
a03uf3c023ca
[1] First fold [3] Triple Fold

[2] Double fold
9. "Gate Position Adj. screen"
10. Press [Fold 1].
• [+]: Widen
• [-]: Narrow

1 step = 0.1 mm
12. Press [Fold 2].
• [+]: Narrow
• [-]: Widen
I-294

1 step = 0.1 mm
14. Press [Fold 3].
• [+]: Widen
• [-]: Narrow

1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.28 FD-503 Fold registration loop adjustment (multi folder (fold) adjustment)
(1) Function
Adjust the fold registration loop amount.
(2) Usage
Adjust the paper loop amount at the FD registration roller and correct the paper skew, crease, or the paper jam at the roller.
(3) Procedure
Press [07 Fold Registration Loop Adj.].
5. "Fold Registration Loop Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Select the A3 or the 11 x 17 paper. Press the Start key to output the test pattern (number 16 or number 33).
7. When the trouble is not solved, press [Exit PrintMode].
8. "Fold Registration Loop Adjustment screen"
1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.29 LS-505/LS-506 Paper width adjustment (stacker adjustment)

(1) Function
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when a paper exit mis-alignment occurs in the main scan direction of the LS stacker tray.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Stacker Adjustment].
3. "Stacker Adjustment menu screen"
I-295
When several stackers are connected, select either [Stacker No.1] or [Stacker No.2].
Press [Print Mode].
6. Select the A3 or the 11 x 17 paper and press the Start key to output the test pattern (number 16 or number 33).
• [+]: Reduce bends
• [-]: Reduce jitters

1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.30 LS-505/LS-506 Paper length adjustment (stacker adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the lead edge stopper position.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when a paper exit mis-alignment occurs in the sub scan direction of the LS stacker tray.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Stacker Adjustment].
3. "Stacker Adjustment menu screen"
Press [02 Paper Length Adjustment].
4. "Paper Length Adjustment screen"
When several stackers are connected, select either [Stacker No.1] or [Stacker No.2].
Press [Print Mode].
• [-]: Reduce the dispersion

1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.31 SD-506 Staple center position adjustment (saddle stitcher position adjustment)
(1) Function
Adjust the position of the alignment plate while in alignment.
(2) Usage
Adjust the staple center position for the saddle stitch mode by the SD.
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.].
I-296
3. "Saddle Stitcher Adjustment Menu screen"

Press [01 Staple Center Position].
4. "Stapling Center Position Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Check the misalignment between the staple center and the paper center.
a
fs503fs3300c
• [+]: Move to the back
• [-]: Move to the front

1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.32 SD-506 Staple paper width adjustment (saddle stitcher position adjustment)
(1) Function
Adjust the position of the saddle stitching alignment plate while in alignment.
(2) Usage
Adjust an uneven binding in a bundle of paper in saddle stitch mode by the SD.
Note
• Make sure that the folding skew adjustment of the mechanical adjustment has been completed.
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Staple Paper Width Adj.].
Press [Print Mode].
a
fs503fs3012c
I-297


1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.33 SD-506 Staple pitch adjustment (saddle stitcher position adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the staple intervals for the saddle stitch mode by the SD.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the staple intervals of the saddle stitching by SD are not within the standard value.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Staple Pitch Adjustment].
4. "Staple Pitch Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Check the interval "a" between the staples against the paper size "b."
Standard value: a = b/2 ± 2 mm
a
b
fs503fs3011c
• [+]: Widen
• [-]: Narrow

1 step = 1.0 mm
• There are restrictions of the setting range depending on the size of the paper. Minimum value is determined based on the stapler
movable range and the maximum value is determined so that the saddle stitching alignment plate and stapler do not interfere with
each other.
B5S: Setting is not possible (fixed to 91 mm)
B4: -20 mm to +20 mm (108.5 to 148.5 mm)
A4S: -14 mm to +14 mm (91 to 119 mm)
A3: -20 mm to +16.5 mm (128.5 to 165 mm)
I-298
4.9.34 SD-506 Half-fold position adjustment (saddle stitcher position adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the fold position on the multi half fold mode by the SD.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the folding position of half folding by SD is not within the standard value.
(3) Procedure
Press [Print Mode].
a
• [+]: Lengthen the top side of the output.
• [-]: Shorten the top side of the output.

1 step = 0.1 mm
• If there is the misalignment that is given in the step 6, enter a configuration value on the positive side.
4.9.35 SD-506 Tri-fold position adjustment (saddle stitcher position adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the fold positions on the multi tri-fold-in mode by the SD.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the folding position of multi tri-folding by SD is not within the standard value.
Note
• The position of the single fold is based on the leading edge of the paper and the position of the double fold is based on the
position of the single fold. So, the dimension "b" in the step 7 varies when either position of the single fold and the double fold
is changed.
(3) Procedure
Press [05 Tri-Fold Position Adj.].
Press [Print Mode].
I-299

a b
A4S 97.5±1.5 102.0±3.0
81/2 x 11S 91.6±1.5 96.1±3.0
[2] b [1]
fs503fs3015c
Select the size of the paper that you want to adjust.
• [+]: Narrow
• [-]: Widen

1 step = 0.1 mm
• [+]: Widen
• [-]: Narrow

1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.36 SD-506 Fold paper width adjustment (saddle stitcher position adjustment)
(1) Function
Adjust the alignment width while in alignment (sub scan direction).
(2) Usage
When there is an uneven edge with the bundle paper at the folding or multi tri-folding mode by SD, conduct this adjustment.
(3) Procedure
Press [06 Fold Paper Width Adj.].
4. "Fold Paper Width Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
5. Set the paper of the paper size that you want to adjust. Press the Start key to output the test pattern (number 16 or number 33).
6. Check the printed pages for misalignment.
a: When the paper width setting is configured wider than the actual paper width, misalignment occurs randomly.
b: When the paper width setting is configured narrower than the actual paper width, misalignment occurs in the 1 direction.
I-300
fs503fs3302c
Setting range: -50 (narrower) to +50 (wider)
1 step = 0.1 mm

1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.37 SD-506 Trimming adjustment (saddle stitcher position adjustment)

(1) Function
Change the registration position of the book for trimming.
(2) Usage
Adjust the misalignment in the trimmed fore-edge or the excess trimming by the SD.
(3) Procedure
Press [07 Trimming Adjustment].
4. "Trimming Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Check the trimming distance "a" on the cover paper.
Standard value "a": 2 mm or more
Note
• Trimming distance less than 2 mm causes trimming fault.
a
fs503fs3301c
• [+]: Widen
• [-]: Narrow
I-301
Sitting Range: -400 to +400

1 step = 0.1 mm
Note
• Since the minimum dimension (from the spine to the fore edge) after the trimming is limited to 122 mm, the setting data up
to +400 fails to be reflected depending on the size of the paper.
4.9.38 SD-506 Trimmer receiver adjustment (saddle stitcher position adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the shift interval and the move pitch of the trimmer board.
(2) Usage
Adjust the poor trimming (for example, fluff on the cut end) in the trimming by the SD.
(3) Procedure
Press [08 Trimmer Receiver Adj.].
4. " Trimmer Receiver Adjustment Menu screen"
Select the options for "01 Count Select for Move" (number of cuts that are counted until the trimmer board moves) and "02 Moving Pitch
Select" (travel distance of the trimmer board when it moves).
4.9.39 SD-513 Staple Center Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the staple center position for the saddle stitching mode by SD-513.
By this adjustment, adjust the staple position in the main scan direction by the change of the drive amount of the saddle stitching alignment
motor/Fr (M19), the saddle stitching alignment motor/Md (M51), and the saddle stitching alignment motor/Rr (M18).
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the staple position in the main scan direction of the saddle stitching by SD-513 is not within the standard value.
(3) Procedure (2 position staple)

Press [04 Saddle Stitcher Adjustment].
Press [01 Staple Center Adjustment].
4. "Staple Center Position Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [01 2 Position Staple].
Press [Print Mode].
6. Set the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the Start key to output the test pattern (No.16).
7. Check the misalignment "a" between the staple center and the paper center.
Standard value "a": ± 3 mm
I-302
>@
[1] Direction of the paper exit on the booklet tray -
8. When the value is not within the standard value, press [Close].
Enter the setting data through the numeric buttons and press [<<Set].
Change the staple position in the main scan direction for the paper on the booklet tray.
• [+]: Move to the front
• [-]: Move to the rear
Configuration range: -20 to +20
1 step = 0.1 mm
(4) Procedure (4 position staple (front) or 4 position staple (rear))

Press [01 Staple Center Adjustment].
4. "Staple Center Position Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [02 4 Position Staple (Front 2)] or [03 4 Position Staple (Rear 2)].
Press [Print Mode].
6. Set paper in size that you want to adjust on the Tray and press the Start key to output the test pattern (No.16).
7. Check the length between the edge of the paper and the staple center "a" and "b" against the paper length in the main scan direction "W".
Staple position Standard value
Front 2 position staple "a" = W / 4 ± 3 mm
Rear 2 position staple "b" = 3 x W/4 ± 3 mm
>@
Change the staple position in the main scan direction for the paper on the booklet tray.
• [+]: Move to the front
I-303
• [-]: Move to the rear

1 step = 0.1 mm
Note
• There are restrictions of adjustment range for each size of paper.
Paper size Adjustable range
Front center position (a) Rear center position (b)
11 x 17 -10 mm to +10 mm -3 mm to +10 mm
A3 -10 mm to +1 mm -5 mm to +10 mm
4.9.40 SD-513 Staple Paper Width Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the position of the saddle stitching alignment plate during the alignment.
By this adjustment, match the paper width and the alignment width by the change of the drive amount of the saddle stitching alignment motor/
Md (M51), and the saddle stitching alignment motor/Rr (M18).
(2) Usage
Adjust when there is the uneven binding or the bending in a bundle of paper in saddle stitching mode by SD-513.
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Staple Paper Width Adjustment].
4. "Staple Paper Width Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
a
fs503fs3012c
8. "Staple Paper Width Adjustment screen"
• [+]: Reduce the curve
• [+]: Reduce the misalignment

1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.41 SD-513 Staple Pitch Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the staple pitch for the saddle stitching by the SD-513.
By this adjustment, adjust the staple pitch by the change of the drive amount of the saddle stitching alignment motor/Fr (M19), the saddle
stitching alignment motor/Md (M51), and the saddle stitching alignment motor/Rr (M18).
I-304
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the staple pitches of the saddle stitching by SD-513 are not within the standard value.
(3) Procedure (2 position staple)

4. "Staple Pitch Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [01 2 Position Staple].
Press [Print Mode].
7. Check the distance "a" between staples against the booklet length "W" in the main scan direction.
Standard value "a": W / 2 ± 3 mm or less
>@
a
W
• [+]: Widen
• [-]: Narrow

1 step = 1.0 mm
Note
• There are restrictions of adjustment range depending on paper size and input value of other finisher adjustments.
When the input value of "Staple Paper Width Adjustment" and "Staple Center Position" is "0", the pitch adjustable range is
as follows.
Booklet length in the main scan direction Pitch adjustable range
(W)
Less than 140 mm 0 mm to 5 mm
140 mm or more and less than 165 mm -20 mm to +15 mm
165 mm or more and less than 296 mm -20 mm to +20 mm
296 mm or more and less than 325 mm ( W / 2 - 168 mm) to +20 mm
325 mm or more ( W / 2 - 168 mm) to +10 mm
I-305
(4) Procedure (4 position staple (front) or 4 position staple (rear))

4. "Staple Pitch Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [02 4 Position Staple (Front 2)] or [03 4 Position Staple (Rear 2)].
Press [Print Mode].
7. Check the distance "a" or "b" between staples against the paper length "W" in the main scan direction.
Staple position Standard value
Front 2 position staple "a" = W/4 ± 3 mm or less
Rear 2 position staple "b" = W/4 ± 3 mm or less
[1]
• [+]: Widen
• [-]: Narrow
1 step = 1.0 mm
Note
• There are restrictions of adjustment range depending on paper size.
Paper size Pitch adjustable range
Front 2 position staple Rear 2 position staple
11 x 17 -10 mm to +10 mm -10 mm to +10 mm
A3 -10 mm to 0 mm -10 mm to +10 mm
4.9.42 SD-513 Tri-Fold Position Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the fold positions on the multi tri-fold mode by the SD-513.
In the 1st fold position adjustment, adjust the folding position by the change of the drive amount of the 1st folding stopper motor (M9) and the
FD alignment belt motor (M11).
In the 2nd Fold position adjustment, adjust the folding position by the change of the timing that the 2nd folding knife motor (M14) starts to
rotate since the 2nd folding sensor (PS20) becomes active.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the fold positions of multi tri-fold by SD-513 is not within the standard value.
(3) Procedure
I-306
Press [04 Tri-Fold Position Adj.].

Press [Print Mode].
6. Confirm "a" and "b" on the output paper.
Paper Size Standard value (mm)
a b
A4S 97.5±1.5 102.0±3.0
8 1 / 2 x 11S 91.6±1.5 96.1±3.0
[2] b [1]
fs503fs3015c
[1] 1st fold [2] 2nd fold
9. Press [1st Fold].
Change the length from the inside leading edge to the 1st folding.
• [+]: Narrow
• [-]: Widen

1 step = 0.1 mm
Note
• The setting range of 81/ x 11S is -100 to +30.
2
11. Press [2nd Fold].

Change the length from the inside leading edge to the 2nd folding.
• [+]: Narrow
• [-]: Widen

1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.43 SD-513 Fold Skew Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the pushing amount of the FD alignment plate during the alignment of the sub scan direction.
By this adjustment, adjust the amount that the FD alignment plate pushes the bundle of paper by the change of the drive amount of the FD
alignment belt motor (M11).
(2) Usage
When there is an uneven edge on the bundle paper at the saddle stitching, multi half fold, or multi tri-folding mode by the SD-513, conduct this
adjustment.
When there is a static electricity sticking on the bundle paper, conduct this adjustment.
Note
• Before this adjustment, be sure to conduct the fold paper width adjustment. (Refer to I.4.9.45 SD-513 Fold Paper Width
Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment))
I-307
(3) Procedure
Press [05 Fold Skew Adjustment].
4. "Fold Skew Adjustment screen"
Press [Single Fold] or [Multi Fold] that you want to adjust and then press [Print Mode].
Standard value "b": 1.0 mm or less
Standard value c: 1.5 mm or less (2 sheets stapling to 15 sheets stapling)
Standard value "c": 2.0 mm or less (16 sheets stapling to 50 sheets stapling)
a
Adjust the push amount of the FD alignment plate.
• [+]: Pushing amount large
• [-]: Pushing amount small
1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.44 SD-513 Half-Fold Position Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the fold position on the saddle stitching and half-fold mode by SD-513.
By this adjustment, adjust the folding position by the change of the drive amount of the 1st folding stopper motor (M9) and the FD alignment
belt motor (M11).
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the fold position of the saddle stitching and half-fold by SD-513 is not within the standard value.
(3) Procedure
4. "Half-Fold Position Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Check the misalignment "a" on the edge of the exited paper.
Standard value "a": 3 mm or less
I-308
=?
[1] Direction of paper exit -
• [+]: Make the front side of the exited paper longer
• [+]: Make the front side of the exited paper shorter

1 step = 0.1 mm
• If there is the misalignment like the step 6, enter a setting value on the [+] side.
4.9.45 SD-513 Fold Paper Width Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the alignment width during the alignment (sub scan direction).
Match the paper length and the alignment width by the change of the drive amount of the 1st folding stopper motor (M9) and the FD alignment
belt motor (M11).
(2) Usage
When there is an uneven edge on the bundle paper at the saddle stitching, multi half fold, or multi tri-folding mode by the SD-513, conduct this
adjustment.
(3) Procedure
Press [07 Fold Paper Width Adjustment].
4. "Fold Paper Width Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
Standard value "b": 1.0 mm or less
Standard value c: 1.5 mm or less (2 sheets stapling to 15 sheets stapling)
Standard value "c": 2.0 mm or less (16 sheets stapling to 50 sheets stapling)
I-309
• [+]: Widen
• [-]: Narrow

1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.46 SD-513 Fore-edge Trimming Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)

(1) Functions
Adjust the trim amount on the trimmer mode.
Adjust the trim amount by the change of the drive amount of the clamp up down motor (M25) and the SQF clamp up down motor (M53) (when
FD-504 is installed).
(2) Usage
Adjust the misalignment in the fore-edge trimming or the excess trimming by the SD-513.
(3) Procedure
Press [08 Fore-edge Trimming Adjustment].
4. "Fore-edge Trimming Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Check the trimming distance "a" on the exited cover paper.
Standard value a: 5 mm or more
Note
• When the trim amount is 5 mm or less, the operation error possibly occurs.
Therefore, when you configure a value less than 5 mm for the trim amount, the actual trim amount is controlled so as not to
be less than 5 mm.
a
fs503fs3301c
I-310

• [+]: Make larger
• [-]: Make smaller

1 step = 0.1 mm
Note
• Since the minimum dimension (from the spine to the fore edge) after the trimming is limited to 120 mm, the congiguration
value up to +400 fails to be reflected depending on the size of the paper.
4.9.47 SD-513 Parallel Trimming Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the parallel trimming by SD-513.
Adjust the parallel amount of the fore-edge trimming by the change of the drive amount of the clamp up down motor (M25) or the SQF clamp
up down motor (M53).
Note
• This adjustment is available only when FD-504 is equipped.
When you adjust the parallel trimming when the FD-504 is not installed, perform the trimming tilt adjustment (mechanical
adjustment). (Refer to I.29.8 Trimmer skew adjustment)
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment when the fore-edge trimming is not parallel on the trim by SD-513.
(3) Procedure
Press [09 Parallel Trimming Adjustment].
4. "Parallel Trimming Adjustment screen"
Select [Front] or [Rear] and press [Print Mode].
6. Check the parallel amount "a" of the fore-edge trimming.
Paper size (paper type) Stitching sheets a
A4 (J paper, KM Profi) 2 to 15 sheets 1.0 mm or less
81/2 × 11 (Hammermill Tidal MP) 16 to 30 sheets 1.5 mm or less
Other than the above 2 to 15 sheets 2.0 mm or less
8. "Parallel Trimming Adjustment screen"
I-311
Press [Front] for the change of the trimmer amount of the front side of the exited paper.
Press [Rear] for the change of the trimmer amount of the rear side of the exited paper.
• [+]: Strong trimmer amount
• [-]: Weak trimmer amount
Setting range: 0 to +30
1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.48 SD-513 Trans. Entrance Paper Width (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the stop position of the entrance alignment plate.
By this adjustment, match the paper width and the alignment width by the change of the drive amount of the CD alignment motor/Up (M50) or
the CD alignment motor/Lw (M63).
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment when the slit position has variability on the slit by TU-503.
Perform this adjustment when the crease line is tilted on the crease by CR-101.
Note
• Be sure to adjust "Plate (Bottom)" at first.
• When the crease line tilts, be sure to conduct the crease unit skew mechanical adjustment before this adjustment. (Refer to I.
30.1 Creaser unit skew adjustment)
(3) Procedure (When you adjust the variability of the slit position.)
Press [10 Trans. Entrance Paper Width].
4. "Trans Entrance Paper Width Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
5. Press [Output Setting].
6. Press [Default Set].
8. Press [2-Side Slit] and enter any value for the slitting.
10. When the slit position has variability, press [Close].
Press [Plate (Bottom)].
Adjust the alignment width under the CD alignment plate.
• [+]: Widen
• [-]: Narrow
1 step = 0.1 mm
Press [Plate (Top)].
Adjust the alignment width on the CD alignment plate.
• [+]: Widen
• [-]: Narrow
1 step = 0.1 mm
17. Repeat steps 4 to 16 until the variability of the slit position can be decreased.
(4) Procedure (When you adjust the skew of the crease line.)
Press [10 Trans. Entrance Paper Width].
Press [Print Mode].
6. Press [Default Set].
8. Press [Crease] and enter any value for the crease position.
I-312
10. Check the crease skew amount "a" - "b" of the output paper.
Standard value "a" - "b": ± 0.7 mm or less
>@
b
[1] Crease -
Press [Plate (Bottom)].
Adjust the alignment width under the CD alignment plate.
• [+]: Widen
• [-]: Narrow
1 step = 0.1 mm
Press [Plate (Top)].
Adjust the alignment width on the CD alignment plate.
• [+]: Widen
• [-]: Narrow
1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.49 TU-503 2-Side Slitting Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)

(1) Functions
Adjust the slit position on the slit by TU-503.
Adjust the slit positions of front and rear by the change of the drive amount of the slitter movement motor/Fr (M112) and the slitter movement
motor/Rr (M106).
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment when the slit cut amount on the slit by TU-503 is not within the standard value.
(3) Procedure
Press [11 2-Side Slitting Adjustment].
4. "2-Side Slitting Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Press [2-Side Slit] and configure the slitting range.
• (1): Enter [10.0].
• (2): Enter [10.0].
Configuration range: 8.0 mm to +26.0 mm
7. Press [OK] twice.
9. Check the paper width "a" of the output paper.
Standard value "a": 277 mm ± 1.0 mm or less (fine weight 64 g/m2 or less)
Standard value "a": 277 mm ± 0.5 mm or less (other than the above)
I-313
>@
>@
>@
[1] Slit position [2] Direction of paper exit
Press [Front] or [Rear].
Press [Front] for the change of the trimmer amount of the front side of the exited paper.
Press [Rear] for the change of the trimmer amount of the rear side of the exited paper.
• [+]: Strong trimmer amount
• [-]: Weak trimmer amount
1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.50 CR-101 Crease Position Adjustment - Half-Fold Crease Position (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)
(1) Function
Adjust the crease line position on the crease half-fold or the crease saddle stitching by SD-513 and CR-101.
Adjust the crease line position by the change of the drive amount of the reverse exit motor (M101).
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment when the misalignment between the fold line and the crease line is not within the standard value.
Note
• Before you adjust the position of the crease line, perform the half-fold position adjustment. (Refer to I.4.9.44 SD-513 Half-Fold
Position Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment))
• When you change the paper weight of the paper that you use, the fold line is possibly misaligned against the crease position.
Therefore, be sure to check that the distance between the fold line and the crease position is within the standard value when
you change the paper weight.
• If the fold position and the crease position are different, the fold position is possibly pulled toward the crease position and
change.
(3) Procedure
Press [12 Crease Position Adjustment].
4. "Crease Position Adjustment screen"
Press [01 Half-Fold Crease Position].
5. "Half-Fold Crease Position Adjustment screen"
To move away the crease position from the fold position, enter [20] (total 40) to each setting value of the [All] and the paper that you want
to adjust.
8. Check that the crease position is away from the fold position.
If the crease position overlaps with the fold position, enter [-20] (total -40) to the position where [20] is entered and output the test pattern.
9. Press [Close].
Return the set value to "0" or the original value.
12. Press the start key and output the test pattern (number 16) from the same tray as step 7.
13. Line up the output [1] of step 8 and the output [2] of step 12 and check the length of the following "a" and "b".
"a": The length from the leading edge to the fold position [3] of the upper surface of the exited paper
"b": The length from the leading edge to the crease groove edge [5] of the upper surface of the exited paper
Standard value "a" - "b": ± 1 mm or less
I-314
a
[1]
[3] [4]
b
[6] [5] [2]
[1] Output when the crease position is away from the fold [2] Output when "0" or the original value is entered in the
position setting value
[3] Fold position [4] Crease position
[5] Crease groove edge [6] Direction of paper exit
Change the length from the leading edge of the exited paper upper surface to the crease position.
• [+]: Lengthen
• [-]: Shorten
1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.51 CR-101 Crease Position Adjustment - Tri-Fold Crease Position (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)
(1) Function
Adjust the crease line position on the crease tri-folding by SD-513 and CR-101.
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment when the misalignment between the fold line and the crease line is not within the standard value.
Note
• Before you adjust the position of the crease line, perform the tri-fold position adjustment. (Refer to I.4.9.42 SD-513 Tri-Fold
Position Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment))
• When you change the paper weight of the paper that you use, the fold line is possibly misaligned against the crease position.
Therefore, be sure to check that the distance between the fold line and the crease position is within the standard value when
you change the paper weight.
• If the fold position and the crease position are different, the fold position is possibly pulled toward the crease position and
change.
(3) Procedure
4. "Crease Position Adjustment screen"
Press [02 Tri-Fold Crease Position].
5. "Tri-Fold Crease Position Adjustment screen"
Press [1st Fold].
6. To move away the crease position from the 1st fold position, enter [20] (total 40) to each setting value of [All] and the paper that you want
to adjust.
7. Press [2nd Fold].
8. To move away the crease position from the 2nd fold position, enter [20] (total 40) to each setting value of [All] and the paper that you want
to adjust.
11. Check that the crease position is away from the fold position.
If the crease position overlaps with the fold position, enter [-20] (total -40) to the position where [20] is entered and output the test pattern.
12. Press [Close].
Return the set value of [1st Fold] and [2nd Fold] to "0" or the original value.
I-315
16. Line up the output [1] of step 11 and the output [2] of step 15 and check the length of the following "a", "b", "c", and "d".
"a": The length from the inside leading edge to the 1st fold position [3]
"b": The length from the inside leading edge to the 2nd fold position [5]
"c": The length from the inside leading edge to the 1st fold crease groove edge [7]
"d": The length from the inside leading edge to the 2nd fold crease groove edge [8]
Standard value "a" - "c": ± 1 mm or less
Standard value "b" - "d": ± 1 mm or less
a b
[6]
[1]
[4] [3] [5]
[9] c d
[7]
[2]
[8]
[1] Output when the crease position is away from the fold [2] Output when "0" or the original value is entered in the
position setting value
[3] 1st folding position [4] 1st folding crease position
[5] 2nd folding position [6] 2nd folding crease position
[7] 1st fold crease groove edge [8] 2nd fold crease groove edge
[9] Direction of paper exit -
19. Press [1st Fold] or [2nd Fold].
Change the length from the inside leading edge to the crease position of the 1st folding (or the 2nd folding).
• [+]: Lengthen
• [-]: Shorten
1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.52 CR-101 Crease Position Adjustment - PB Cover Crease Position (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)
(1) Function
Adjust the crease line position on the crease perfect bind by CR-101 and PB-503.
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment when the misalignment between the fold line on the spine and the crease line is not within the standard value.
(3) Procedure
4. "Crease Position Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [03 PB Cover Crease Position].
5. "PB Cover Crease Position Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
I-316
7. Check the misalignment amount "a" between the fold line of the spine and the 1st crease line. Also, check the misalignment amount "b"
between the fold line of the spine and the 2nd crease line.
Standard value "a": ± 1 mm or less
Standard value "b": ± 1 mm or less
[4] [4]
[1] [3]
a
b
[2]
[1] 1st crease groove edge [2] Fold line of the spine
[3] 2nd crease groove edge [4] Crease of gutter
9. "PB Cover Crease Position Adjustment screen"
10. Press [Crease line 1] or [Crease line 2].
Change the length from the leading edge of the perfect binding cover upper surface to the crease position of the spine.
• [+]: Lengthen
• [-]: Shorten
1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.53 FD-504 Flattening a Fold (Strength) (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)

(1) Functions
Adjust the flattening strength on the square-fold by FD-504.
Adjust the flattening strength by the change of the drive amount of the lifter plate up down motor (M39).
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment when you want to change the form of the spine.
The change on this adjustment is applied at a constant rate for "Spine Corner Forming Strength" on the User Mode.
(3) Procedure
Press [13 Flattening a Fold (Strength)].
4. "Flattening a Fold (Strength) Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
5. Enter "C" through the numeric keys and enter "5".
6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper (J paper or plain paper (60g/m 2 to 80 g/m 2 )) and press the start key to output the test pattern (No.16).
7. Check a corner is formed on the spine of the output booklet and there is no wrinkle [1] around the corner on both the cover and back
cover.
[1]
8. If no corner is formed or a wrinkle exists around the corner on the cover and the back cover, press [Close].
I-317
9. "Flattening a Fold (Strength) Adj. screen"

Adjust the strength for creating the flattening.
• [+]: Strengthen (Strong flattening)
• [-]: Weaken (Weak flattening)
1 step = 0.1 mm
10. Repeat the steps 4 to 8 until an appropriate status is obtained.
4.9.54 FD-504 Flattening a Fold (Frequency) (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)

(1) Functions
Adjust the flattening frequency on the square-fold by FD-504.
Change the drive time of the SQF roller motor (M201) and adjust the number of times that the SQF roller moves back and forth.
(2) Usage
When the booklet has a bulge, increase the frequency of the flattening.
When the spine is damaged or dirty, decrease the frequency of the flattening.
(3) Procedure
Press [14 Flattening a Fold (Frequency)].
4. "Flattening a Fold (Frequency) Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Check the spine of the exited booklet.
7. Press [Close] when you perform the adjustment.
8. "Flattening a Fold (Frequency) Adj. screen"
• [+]: Increase the number of times of the back and forth movement of the roller
• [-]: Decrease the number of times of the back and forth movement of the roller
1 step = One back and forth movement of the SQF roller
4.9.55 FD-504 Spine Fold Line Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the folding strength of the cover on the square-fold by FD-504.
Adjust the insertion amount of the folding knife by the change of the drive amount of the 1st folding knife motor (M13).
(2) Usage
Weaken the folding strength when the fold line on the center of the spine is appealing.
Note
• When you weaken the folding strength, the cover position error or the jam possibly occur.
(3) Procedure
Press [15 Spine Fold Line Adjustment].
4. "Spine Fold Line Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Check the fold line of the cover of the exited booklet.
7. Press [Close] when you perform the adjustment.
8. "Spine Fold Line Adjustment screen"
Adjust the strength of the fold line on the center of the spine.
• [+]: Strengthen
• [-]: Weaken
1 step = 0.5 mm
4.9.56 SD-513 Staple Offset Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the staple position (sub scan direction) on the saddle stitching by SD-513.
I-318
Adjust the stop position of the stapler head by the change of the drive amount of the stapler movement motor (M64).
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment when the staple error or the misalignment of the fold line and the staple position occurs.
(3) Procedure
Press [16 Staple Offset Adjustment].
4. "Staple Offset Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Check the misalignment amount "a" between the fold line and the stapling position.
Standard value "a": = ± 1 mm or less
>@
8. "Staple Offset Adjustment screen"
Enter the setting data through the numeric buttons and press [Set].
Move the position of the staple against the fold line when the fore edge of the booklet on the booklet tray is up and the booklet is open.
• [+]: Right
• [-]: Left
1 step = 0.1 mm
Note
• The error of the staple is likely to occur when the misalignment amount between the fold line and the stapling position is
large.
4.9.57 TU-503 Registration Loop Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the paper loop amount before the registration roller.
Adjust the paper loop amount by the change of the drive time of the paper re-feed motor (M62).
(2) Usage
When the 2-side sitting by TU-503 is tilted, perform this adjustment.
(3) Procedure
Press [17 Registration Loop Adjustment].
4. "Registration Loop Adjustment screen"
Select the paper type [Plain] or [Thick] that you want to adjust and then select [Print Mode].
Note
• Plain: Paper whose weight is less than 217 g/m 2
• Thick: Paper whose weight is 217 g/m 2 or more
6. Check the slit tilt amount "a-b".
Standard value "a" - "b": ± 1.0 mm or less (fine weight 64 g/m2 or less)
Standard value "a" - "b": ± 0.5 mm or less (other than the above)
I-319
=?
b
a
=?
=?
[1] Direction of paper exit [2] Slit position
Adjust the registration loop amount.
• [+]: Make loop amount larger
• [+]: Make loop amount smaller
1 step = 0.1 mm
Note
• When the tilt of the 2-side slitting is large, increase the loop amount.
• When the wrinkle on the leading side of the paper is large, decrease the loop amount.
4.9.58 SD-513 Staple Tip Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the push strength of the clincher on the saddle stitching by SD-513 and adjust the shape of the staple.
(2) Usage
When the staple tip is off the surface, strengthen the push amount of the clincher.
To curl the shape of the staple (direct the staple tip to inside), weaken the push amount.
Note
• The adjustment is not much effective according to the booklet thickness.
(3) Procedure
Press [18 Staple Tip Adjustment].
4. "Staple Tip Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Check the floating amount "a" of the staple and the bending angle "b" of the leading edge of the staple.
• When the staple length "c" is 5 mm or more
Standard value "b": 0 degrees or more (The tip of the staple is directed to the paper side.)
c
a b
• When the staple length "c" is less than 5 mm

I-320
c
a
8. "Staple Tip Adjustment screen"
The procedure varies depending on the number of papers in a booklet.
• [+]: The staple is horizontal.
• [-]: The staple is curled.
Note
• When the booklet thickness is over 4 mm, the adjustment of staple shape (push amount of the clincher) is not available.
• When the booklet length in the main scan direction is less than 182 mm, the adjustment of staple shape (push amount of the
clincher) is not available.
9. Repeat steps 4 to 8 until the condition is improved.
4.9.59 SD-513 Saddle Position Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the misalignment of the folding line and the rear staple in the sub scan direction on the saddle stitching by SD-513.
Adjust the home position of the booklet movement unit by the change of the stop position of the booklet movement motor (M21). Adjust the
position so that the edge line of the clincher and the edge line of the booklet movement unit match.
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment when misalignment occurs only for the rear stapling position against the folding line.
(3) Procedure
Press [19 Saddle Position Adjustment].
4. "Saddle Position Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Check the misalignment amount "a" between the rear staple position and the folding line.
>@
8. "Saddle Position Adjustment screen"
Move the position of the rear staple against the fold line when the fore edge of the booklet on the booklet tray is up and the booklet is
open.
• [+]: Right
• [-]: Left
1 step = 0.1 mm
I-321
4.9.60 SD-513 Trimmer Receiver Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)

(1) Function
Change the frequency of movement and the move pitch of the trimmer board.
Move the trimmer board forcibly.
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment when the poor trimming (for example, fluff on the cut end) in the fore-edge trimming by the SD-513 occurs.
(3) Procedure
Press [20 Trimmer Receiver Adjustment].
4. "Trimmer Receiver Adjustment Menu screen"
Select the item that you want to adjust. Select the configuration value.
• "01 Count Select for move"
Select the number of times of the trimming before the trimmer board moves.
Configuration value (number of times): [700], [500], [300]
• "02 Moving Pitch Select"
Select the movement amount when the trimmer board moves.
Configuration value (mm): [1.0], [1.5], [2.0]
• "03 Forcibly Move"
Press "Start" and move the trimmer board for 1 pitch forcibly.
4.9.61 PB-503 Cover trimming adjustment (perfect binder adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjusts the trimming position of the right-side edge of the cover paper.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the trimming position on the leading edge of the right cover does not fit to the leading edge of the left cover.
Note
• In order to align the leading edges on the left cover and the right cover, perform I.4.9.62 PB-503 Cover lead edge adjustment
(perfect binder adjustment) first and then perform the cover trimming adjustment.
(3) Procedure
Press [05 Perfect Binder Adjustment].
3. "Perfect Binder Adjustment menu screen"
Press [01 Cover Trimming Adj.].
4. "Cover Trimming Adjustment screen"
Press [Perfect Binder Tray] or [Except PB Tray] to select the tray that you want to adjust.
6. To make test prints and carry out perfect binding, select the paper type and press the start button.
7. Check the cover of the created book if its right-side edge and the left-side edge align with each other.
[3]
[2] [1] 1050fs3357c
[1] Trimming position [3] Left cover paper

[2] Right cover paper
8. Press [Exit PrintMode] to change the trimming position of the right cover paper.
9. "Cover Trimming Adjustment screen"
• [+]: Widen
• [-]: Narrow
I-322

1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.62 PB-503 Cover lead edge adjustment (perfect binder adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the length which the left side of the cover paper exceeds the length (width) of inside pages.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the length which the left side of the cover paper exceeds the length (width) of inside pages is not adequate.
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Cover Lead Edge Adj.].
4. "Cover Lead Edge Adj. screen"
Press [PB tray] or [Except PB Tray] to select the tray that you want to adjust.
5. Press [▼] or [▲] to select the paper size of the cover paper.
Select the size of the paper from the following options.
All Size
A4
B5
A5
8.5X11
16K
A5S
5.5x8.5S
Custom (220 mm to 379 mm)
Note
• The paper sizes described here are the book (the inside pages) finished sizes.

8. Check that the width of the left cover paper is longer than the width of the inside pages by specified amount.
[3] [4]
[5]
[1]
[2] 1050fs3358c
[1] Body [4] Length differential

[2] Right cover paper [5] Edge of the left cover paper
[3] Left cover paper
9. To change the width of the left cover paper, press [Exit PrintMode].
10. "Cover Lead Edge Adjustment screen"
• [+]: Keep away the cover lead edge from the body
• [-]: Bring the cover lead edge close to the body
I-323

1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.63 PB-503 Spine corner form position adjustment (perfect binder adjustment)
(1) Function
Adjusts the corner folding position of the cover paper.
(2) Usage
Adjust when the spine corner form position is not adequate.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Spine Corner Forming Pos.].
4. "Spine Corner Forming Position Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Check that the corner edges of the cover paper are created uniformly in the main scan direction.
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
1050fs3359c
[1] Right cover paper [3] Cover paper

[2] Main scan direction [4] Left cover paper
7. When the corner edges of the cover paper are not created uniformly, press [Exit PrintMode].
8. "Spine Corner Forming Position Adj. screen"
Select either of [Front Adj.] or [Rear Adj.].
• [+]: Become angular
• [-]: Reduce angles

1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.64 PB-503 Glue start position adjustment (perfect binder adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjusts the start position for applying the glue to inside pages.
I-324
(2) Usage
Adjust when the start position for applying the glue to inside pages is not adequate.
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Glue Start Position].
4. "Glue Start Position screen"
Press [Ahead] or [Back] to select which start position, for applying during the forward movement or backward movement, that you want to
adjust.
All Size
A4
B5
A5
8.5X11
16K
A5S
5.5x8.5S
Note
• [Back] does not require the adjustment.

8. Check that the glue applying start position to the inside pages is appropriate.
[3]
[1]
[2] 1050fs3360c
[1] Start position for frontward applying [3] Body

[2] Start position for backward applying
9. To adjust the start position, press [Exit PrintMode].

10. "Glue Start Position screen"
• [+]: Reduce
• [-]: Increase
(Ahead)
(Back)
I-325
1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.65 PB-503 Glue finish position adjustment (perfect binder adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjusts the position where to finish applying the glue.
(2) Usage
Adjust when the completion position for applying the glue to inside pages is not adequate.
(3) Procedure
Press [05 Glue Finish Position].
4. "Glue Finish Position screen"
Press [Ahead] or [Back] to select which finish position, for applying during the forward movement or backward movement, to be adjusted.
All Size
A4
B5
A5
8.5X11
16K
A5S
5.5x8.5S
Note

8. Check that the glue applying start position to the inside pages is appropriate.
[3]
[1]
[2] 1050fs3361c
[1] Finish position for backward applying [3] Body

[2] Finish position for frontward applying
9. To adjust the finish position, press [Exit PrintMode].

10. "Glue Finish Position screen"
• [+]: Increase
• [-]: Reduce
(Ahead)
(Back)
I-326

1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.66 PB-503 Temperature adjustment (perfect binder adjustment)

(1) Function
Control the temperature of the glue apply roller temperature sensor (TH1), the glue tank temperature sensor/Up (TH2), the glue tank
temperature sensor/Md (TH3), and the glue tank temperature sensor/Lw (TH4) provided in the glue tank.
(2) Usage
Adjust it when the applied glue does not harden or when the cover paper easily comes unglued.
(3) Procedure
Press [06 Temperature Adjustment].
4. "Temperature Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Check that the glue applied has dried appropriately.
7. To adjust the dryness of the glue, press [Exit PrintMode].
8. "Temperature Adjustment screen"
Select the option where the temperature is configured.
The following options are provided.
• Glue Tank - Top
• Glue Tank - Mid
• Glue Tank - Low
• Glue apply roller
• Glue Tank - Top
Setting range: 128 °C to 136 °C
Default: 132 °C
• Glue Tank - Mid
Setting range: 140 °C to +145 °C
Default: 145 °C
• Glue Tank - Low
Default: 185 °C
• Glue apply roller
Default: 165 °C
4.9.67 PB-503 Sub compile CD width adjustment (perfect binder adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjusts the alignment width of the inside pages when you align in the main scan direction.
(2) Usage
Adjust when the alignment width of the inside pages in the main scan direction is not adequate.
(3) Procedure
Press [07 Sub Compile CD Width Adj.].
4. "Sub Compile CD Width Adj. screen"
Press [▼] or [▲] to select the paper size.
I-327

All Size
A4
B5
A5
8.5X11
16K
A5S
5.5x8.5S
Note
5. "Sub Compile CD Width Adj. screen"

• [+]: Reduce the dispersion
• [-]: Reduce the distortion

1 step = 0.1 mm
6. Create multiple books in normal copy mode, and check the alignment of the second and the later book.
Change configuration value that is configured in step5 until a properly aligned book is created.
4.9.68 PB-503 Clamp CD width adjustment (perfect binder adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjusts the alignment width of the inside pages when you align in the main scan direction.
(2) Usage
Adjust when the alignment width of the inside pages in the main scan direction is not adequate.
(3) Procedure
Press [08 Clamp CD Width Adjustment].
4. "Clamp CD Width Adjustment screen"
All Size
A4
B5
A5
8.5X11
16K
A5S
5.5x8.5S
Note
5. "Clamp CD Width Adjustment screen"

I-328

1 step = 0.1 mm
6. Create multiple books in normal copy mode, and check the alignment of the second and the later book.
Change configuration value that is configured in step5 until a properly aligned book is created.
4.9.69 PB-503 Cover up down CD width adjustment (perfect binder adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjusts the positional relation in the main scan direction between the cover paper and the inside pages.
(2) Usage
Adjust when the positional relation in the main scan direction between the cover paper and the inside pages is not adequate.
(3) Procedure
Press [09 Cover Up/Down CD Width Adj.].
4. "Cover Up/Down CD Width Adjustment screen"
Press [Perfect Binder Tray] or [Except PB Tray] to select the tray that you want to adjust.
6. To make test prints and carry out perfect binding, select the paper type and press the start button..
7. Check if the relation between the main scan position of the cover and that of the inside pages are appropriate.
8. To adjust the relation of their main-scanning positions, press [Exit PrintMode].
9. "Cover Up/Down CD Width Adjustment screen"

1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.70 PB-503 Clamp FD position adjustment (perfect binder adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjusts the alignment width of the inside pages when you align in the sub scan direction.
(2) Usage
Adjust when the alignment width of the inside pages in the sub scan direction is not adequate.
(3) Procedure
Press [10 Clamp FD Position Adj.].
4. "Clamp FD Position Adjustment screen"
All Size
I-329
A4
B5
A5
8.5X11
16K
A5S
5.5x8.5S
Note

7. Check if the sub scan direction of all the inside pages are properly aligned.
8. To adjust the alignment width in the sub scan direction of the inside pages, press [Exit PrintMode].
9. "Clamp FD Position Adjustment screen"

1 step = 0.1 mm
Note
• If the setting is too wide, pages are misplaced in the sub scan direction.
• If the setting is too narrow, mark of the FD alignment plate appears.
4.9.71 RU-510 Paper Width Adjustment (Relay Stacker Adjustment)

(1) Functions
Adjust the position of the alignment plate operates in the main scan direction on the relay stacker (RU).
(2) Usage
Adjust it when the punch holes are misarranged in the main scan direction.
(3) Procedure
Press [06 Relay Stacker Adjustment].
3. "Relay Stacker Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [Print Mode].
5. Place 10 sheets of paper that you want to adjust the size. .
Change the setting to "10" to select the punch.
Press the start button.
1. [+]: To reduce the tilts
2. [-]: To reduce the randomness
I-330
Adjustment range: -20 to +20

1 step = 0.1mm
4.9.72 RU-510 Paper Length Adjustment (Relay Stacker Adjustment)

(1) Functions
Adjust the position of the alignment plate operates in the sub scan direction on the relay stacker (RU).
(2) Usage
Adjust it when the punch holes are misarranged in the paper path direction.
(3) Procedure
Press [06 Relay Stacker Adjustment].
3. "Relay Stacker Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [02 Paper Length Adjustment].
Press [Print Mode].
6. Place 10 sheets of paper that you want to adjust the size.
Change the setting to "10" to select the punch.
Press the start button.
• [+]: To reduce the tilts
• [-]: To reduce the dispersion
Adjustment range: -50 to +50

1 step = 0.1mm
4.9.73 FS-612 Fold & Staple Stopper Adjustment

(1) Function
Adjust the staple position in the sub scan direction during the saddle stitch.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the staple position of the saddle stitching by FS-612 is not within the standard value.
Note
• Be sure the Half-Fold Stopper Adjustment has been adjusted in advance. (Refer to I.4.9.74 FS-612 Half-Fold stopper adjustment)
(3) Procedure
I-331
Press [01 Fold & staple Stopper].

3. "Fold & Staple Stopper screen"
33).
6. Check the saddle stitching staple position of the output paper.
15sjf3c100na
8. "Fold & Staple Stopper screen"
• [+]: Move to the left
• [-]: Move to the right

1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.74 FS-612 Half-Fold stopper adjustment

(1) Function
Adjust the folding position during the half fold and the saddle stitch.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the folding position of half folding and the saddle stitching by FS-612 is not within the standard value.
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Half-Fold Stopper Adj.].
3. "Half-Fold Stopper Adj. screen"
33).
6. Check the misalignment "a" on the edge of the output paper.
a
15sjf3c101na
8. "Half-Fold Stopper Adj. screen"
• [+]: Shorten the top side of the paper exit.
• [-]: Lengthen the top side of the output.
I-332

1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.75 PK-512/513 Vertical Position Adj. (Punch Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the punch position of the punch kit (PK) in the main scan direction.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the punch position of the punch kit (PK) in the main scan direction is not within the standard value.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Punch Adjustment].
3. "Punch Adjustment menu screen"
Press [01 Vertical Position Adj.].
4. "Punch Adjustment <Vertical Position Adjustment> screen"
6. Place the paper that you want to adjust the size on the tray and press the Start key to output test pattern (Number 16).
7. Fold the output paper in half in the main scan direction, and measure the gap "a" between the center line of the print and the center of the
punch hole.
Standard value "a": = ± 1mm
[1]
[2]
15knf3c002nb
[1] Center of the paper [2] Center of the punch hole
9. "Punch Adjustment <Vertical Position Adjustment> screen"
• [+]: Move to the back
• [-]: Move to the front

1 step = 0.1mm
4.9.76 PK-512/513 Horizontal Position Adj. (Punch Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the punch position of the punch kit (PK) in the sub scan direction.
I-333
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the punch position of the punch kit (PK) in the sub scan direction is not within the standard value.
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Horizontal Position Adj.].
4. "Punch Adjustment <Horizontal Position Adjustment> screen"
Select [PI Tray] or [Main Body Tray], and press [Print Mode].
5. Place paper in the tray or PI, and press Start to print the test pattern (Number 16).
6. Check the punch position "a" of the output paper in the sub scan direction.
Standard value a: 10.5mm ± 5.0mm
a
15knf3c001nb
8. "Punch Adjustment <Horizontal Position Adjustment> screen"
• [+]: Wider
• [-]: Narrower

1 step = 0.1mm
4.9.77 PK-512/513 Registration Adjustment (Punch Adjustment)

(1) Function
Change the registration loop amount of punching to adjust the paper skew.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the punch hole of the punch kit (PK) is not straight.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Registration Adjustment].
4. "Punch Adjustment <Registration Adjustment> screen"
Select the item that you want to adjust, and press [Print Mode].
5. Place paper in the tray or PI, and press Start to print the test pattern (Number 16).
7. "Punch Adjustment <Registration Adjustment> screen"
Setting range: -20 (larger) to +20 (smaller)
1 step = 0.8mm
I-334
4.9.78 PK-512/513 Paper Edge Detect Sensor (Punch Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the sensitivity of the paper size sensor automatically to detect the paper edge as the standard of the punch hole properly.
(2) Usage
Adjust the sensitivity of the sensor after you replace the punch drive board (PDB) or the paper size sensor (PS305).
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Paper Edge Detect Sensor Adjustment].
4. "Paper Edge Detect Sensor Adjustment screen"
Press [Start].
5. A message "Completed" appears when the adjustment is finished successfully.
4.9.79 FS-612 Tri-Fold Adjustment

(1) Function
Adjust the 1st folding position of the multi tri-folding mode.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the 1st folding position of the multi tri-folding by FS-612 is not within the standard value.
Note
• The 2nd folding position (dimension "b") is mechanically adjusted. (Refer to I.20.12 Tri-folding position adjustment )
(3) Procedure
3. "Tri-Fold Adjustment screen"
33).
5. Check "a" on the outputted paper.
a b c
A4S 95 ± 2 101 ± 2 101 ± 2
81/2 x 11S 89 ± 2 95 ± 2 95 ± 2
16KS 88±2 91±2 91±2
c
a
[1]
b 15sjf3c102na
[1] First fold
7. "Tri-Fold Adjustment screen"
• [+]: Narrow
• [-]: Widen
I-335

1 step = 0.1 mm
4.9.80 FS-612 2 Position Staple Pitch

(1) Function
Change the stop position of the stapler unit and adjust the staple interval.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the staple intervals of the saddle stitching and flat stapling by FS-612 are not within the standard value.
(3) Procedure
Press [05 2 Pos. Staple Pitch Adj.].
3. "2 Position Staple Pitch Adjustment screen"
Press [Fold&Staple] or [Staple].
5. Press the Start key to output the test pattern (number 16 or number 33).
6. Check the staple pitch of the output paper.
Standard value a: 128 mm ± 6 mm
[1] Staple
[2] Folding & Stapling
a 15sjf3c103na
[1]
a
15sjf3c104na
[2]
8. "2 Position Staple Pitch Adjustment screen"
• [+]: Widen
• [-]: Narrow
I-336
Setting range: +128 (narrower) to +160 (wider)

1 step = 1mm
4.9.81 PI-502 Post Inserter Tray Size

(1) Function
Adjust the detection size of the PI tray.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the paper size is not correctly detected at the cover sheet tray of the PI.
(3) Procedure
Press [06 Post Inserter Tray Size].
3. "Post Inserter Tray Size screen"
Press [Next] or [Previous], select the upper tray or lower tray, and press [A4S] or [81/2 x 11S].
4. Load A4S or 81/ x 11S paper in the selected tray of PI and press [Start]. (When you selected [81/ x 11S] in step 3, load 81/ x 11S
2 2 2
paper in the tray.)
6. When you adjust another tray, repeat the steps 3 to 5.
7. Exit the service mode, and check if the size of the paper that is placed in the PI is correctly detected.
4.9.82 FS-531/612 Output Quantity Limit

(1) Function
Configure the maximum number of sheets for stapling, saddle stitching, multi half fold, and the multi tri-fold in FS-531 and FS-612.
(2) Usage
Change the maximum setting when the staples are buckled or the paper folded is not enough.
(3) Procedure
Press [07 Output Quantity Limit].
3. "Output Quantity Limit screen"
Enter the maximum number of sheets for each item with the numeric buttons and press [<<SET].
4.9.83 FS-531/612 Curl Adjustment

(1) Function
Changes the pressure of the paper exit de-curler roller of the main body to adjust the paper curl amount.
(2) Usage
To configure the setting to adjust the paper curl amount of the FS-612 and FS-531.
Conduct this adjustment when the paper leading edge buckling of the 1st folding or the misalignment of the ejected paper because of the
paper curl occurs depending on the paper type while the tri-folding is selected.
(3) Procedure
Press [08 Curl Adjustment].
3. "Curl Adjustment setting screen"
With the setting button of each item, select the pressure of the paper exit de-curler roller of the main body from "+2, +1, 0".
Note
• The curling direction changes depending on the paper type, weight, humidification, and loaded direction in the tray. Therefore,
be sure to check the condition of the ejected paper and adjust the setting.
• See the following as the guide.
1. Face up paper exit
• "Simplex (Tri-Fold 62-80 g/m 2 : Inside Print)":
When the leading edge of the 1st fold paper is buckled with the default "+2", change it to "+1" or "0".
• "Simplex (Tri-Fold 81-105 g/m 2 : Inside Print)":
When the leading edge of the 1st fold paper is buckled with the default "0", change it to "+1" or "+2".
2. Face down paper exit
• "Simplex (Except Tri-Fold Print Side=Front)":
Paper tends to be curled convexly. When the convexly curled amount is too much on the main tray with the default "0",
change it to "+1" or "+2".
• "Simplex (Print Side=Back)":
I-337
With the default "+2", paper tends to be curled concavely. When the concavely curled amount is too much on the main
tray, change it to "+1" or "0".
• "Duplex":
When the concavely curled amount is too much on the main tray with the default "+1", change it to "0". When the
convexly curled amount is too much, change it to "+2".
4.9.84 Recall Standard Data

(1) Function
Reset various setting values of the finisher adjustment to the factory initial data or the installation initial data.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the initialization cannot be done because of the various change in the finisher adjustment items by CE.
Note
• The adjustment data of "Stacker Adjustment (LS)", "Trimmer Receiver Adj. (SD)", "Paper Edge Detect Sensor Adjustment (PK)",
"Post Inserter Tray Size (PI)", and "Output Quantity Limit (FS-531 and FS-612)" are not restored.
(3) Procedure
Press [07/09 Recall Standard Data].
Note
• Selecting [Factory Initial Data] recalls the factory initial data.
• Selecting [Installation initial data] recalls the adjustment values stored when the code "90-00" of the I/O check mode was
conducted.
4.10 Firmware Version

(1) Usage
Display the firmware version of the main body and options.
Note
• Ask the administrator of this machine whether to enhance the security or not. To enhance the security, check the firmware
version and the checksum value. To rewrite the firmware, refer to J.3.1 Usage of the USB memory ISW. To check the checksum
value, refer to J.2.3.1 Firmware checksum check.
• When the administrator wants to enhance the security, check that the firmware version of the image control I1 is the version
(the following three versions) which ISO/IEC15408 certificate. When it is not, rewrite the firmware version to the certificated one.
• Image control program (Image Control I1): A50U0Y0-00I1-G00-11
• Controller control program (IC Controller P): A50U0Y0-00P1-G00-11
• Image control program (OS I4): A50U0Y0-00I4-G00-11
• When you install the machine and upgrading the firmware version, be sure to check that the firmware version of the machine
and the identification number of the user's guide are matched.If the numbers are not matched, provide the user's guide whose
number corresponds to the firmware version of the machine to the administrator.
• [Image control] that appears on the touch panel represents the firmware version of the overall control board (OACB).
(2) Procedure
Press [08 Firmware Version].
2. "Firmware Version menu screen"
Press [01 Firmware Version].
3. "Indication of Firmware Version screen"
Each firmware version appears.
4.11 CS Remote Care

4.11.1 Outline
The CS Remote Care is a system that manages the main body. The main body and the CS Remote Care center computer send and receive the
various kinds of the management data of the main body through the phone line, E-mail, or the WebDAV server.
It enables the main body to call the center computer at an anomalous occurrence. Also the center computer can inquire for the various data of
the main body regularly.
The data that CS Remote Care handles can be classified into the following groups.
a. Data that allow you to grasp the use conditions of the main body, such as the total count and the PM count.
b. Data that give us the general information of when and how often an abnormality occurred with the main body.
c. All sorts of adjustment data
Note
• When the security enhanced mode is configured to ON, the use of the main body NIC is not allowed.
4.11.2 Setup procedure of the CS Remote Care (When using E-mail)

Note
• Main body NIC can be used. CSRC cannot be used for the EFI controller NIC.
Be careful for the mail account and the DIPSW setting when you use the E-mail CS Remote Care and the mail remote notification
system at the same time. For details, Refer to "I.4.11.5 List of combinations of E-mail CS Remote Care and Mail remote notification
system."
I-338
• Conduct the settings of the mail address and the mail server that you use for the E-mail system of CS Remote Care beforehand.
• Press [Utility/Counter] → [Administrator Setting] → [Network Setting] → [E-mail Initial Setting] to perform the setting.
Otherwise configure from [E-mail Initial Setting] on [Extension for maintenance] of Web Utilities. (Refer to I.4.11.6 Mail initial
setting)
• When you conduct the setup again for the main body that has done the CS Remote Care setup once, conduct RAM clear for CS
Remote Care first and then setup again. (Refer to I.4.11.15 Initialization of RAM for CS Remote Care)
(1) When you use E-mail (Duplex)

1. Device registration on CS Remote Care center
Pre-register the device with the application on the center side. (This step can be skipped when you send the initial connection mail from
the machine to the center.) After the initial connection, in this case, register the device at the center side.)
For the device registration method at the center side, refer to the user's guide on the CS Remote Care center application.
2. I/O check mode, data collection clear valid
Configure [03-6] to "On (1)" from [Service Mode] → [System Setting] → [Software DIPSW Setting].
3. CS Remote Care memory initialization
1. Press [Service mode] → [State Confirmation] → [I/O Check Mode].
2. Enter "15" with numeric keys and confirm that "015-00" appears on the screen.
3. Press the [Access] button.
5. Press [Start] button and confirm that the output check display switches to "FIN".
4. CS Remote Care function ON
5. CS Remote Care system selection
Press [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → [CS Remote Care] and then [E-mail].
6. Communication method selection
Press [Duplex] on [CS Remote Care setting] screen.
7. ID code entry
1. Press [ID code].
2. Enter the 7-digit serviceman ID with numeric keys and press [ID code] again.
8. Press [Detail Setting] to display the [E-mail (Duplex) Setting Menu] screen.
9. Basic setting
1. Press [Basic Setting] on the [E-mail (Duplex) Setting menu] screen.
2. Press [Center ID] and enter the center ID (5 digits).
• The serial number that is input from [Service Mode] → [System Setting] → [Serial Number Setting] appears on [Device ID].
3. Press [Cryptogram] to make a selection to decide whether it is encrypted or not.
• Defaul value (for inch area): Not Use Encryption
• Default value (except inch area) :Use Encryption
4. Press [OK].
10. Date and time setting for the CS Remote Care
1. Press [Date and Time Setting] on the [E-mail (Duplex) Setting menu] screen.
2. Press [Setting Time] to enter the year, month, day, and the time.
• Press [Set] to move the cursor among the year, month, day, hour, and minute fields.
3. Press [Time Zone] to enter the time zone.
• Press [ +/- ] to switch plus or minus of the time zone.
4. Press [OK].
11. Response Timeout Setting
1. Press [Response Timeout Setting] on the [E-mail (Duplex) Setting menu] screen.
2. Enter the response timeout (10 minute to 1440 minutes, default: 30 minutes).
3. Press [OK].
12. Activate and deactivate the power switch (SW2) of the main body.
13. Initial connection
Conduct the initial connection in one of the following steps.
• Initial connection from the center side
Send the initial connection mail from the center side to the mail address of the machine. The initial connection completes when the
machine receives the initial connection mail.
• Initial connection from the machine
Send the initial connection mail from the machine to the center. In this case, configure the E-mail address of the center on the [E-mail
(Duplex) Setting Menu] → [Basic Setting] → [E-mail] and press [First Call]. In case the device pre-registration at the center side is
skipped, it turns to be the temporary registered status when the center receives the initial connection mail. The initial connection is
completed when the device is registered at the center side.
Note
• When the CS Remote Care related window is opened while you receive the initial connection mail from the center, the
information being created is destroyed and the CS Remote Care setting screen appears.
• For the method of sending the initial connection mail from the center side, refer to the user's guide on the CS Remote Care
center application.
• Mail transmission is possible only between the center and the main body that the initial connection has been established.
• After when the initial registration is done, the center mail address appears on [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → [CS
Remote Care] → [Detail Setting] → [Basic Setting] → [E-mail].
• When the transmission error occurs against the center, check the error code that appears. (Refer to I.4.11.16 CS Remote
Care error code list)
• You can transfer the log information to the WebDAV server. Refer to I.4.11.8 Log forwarding function for the details.
(2) When you use E-mail (Simplex (from the machine to the center))
Pre-register the device with the application on the center side. The pre-registration of the device at the center side can be skipped. After
the initial connection, in this case, register the device at the center side.)
I-339

Press [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → [CS Remote Care] and then [E-mail].
Press [Simplex] on [CS Remote Care setting] screen.
7. ID code entry
1. Press [ID code].
8. Press [Detail Setting] to display the [E-mail (Simplex) Setting Menu] screen.
9. Basic setting
1. Press [Basic Setting] on the [E-mail (Simplex) Setting menu] screen.
3. Press [E-mail] and enter the mail address of the center.
5. Press [OK].
1. Press [Date and Time Setting] on the [E-mail (Simplex) Setting menu] screen.
4. Press [OK].
11. Regular send setting
1. Press [Periodical Transmission Setting] on the [E-mail (Simplex) Setting menu] screen.
2. Configure the regular send schedule to the center.
• Every month: Send it regularly to the center on the same date. Sent date is configured at the end of the month by [End of Month].
• Every week: Send it regularly to the center on the same time and the same day of the week.
• Every day: Send it regularly to the center on the same time everyday.
Reference:
• To distribute the access to the center, the default time of the periodical transmission setting after the RAM clear is calculated from
the serial number.
3. Press [OK].
12. Fixed Date/Time Setting
1. Press [Fixed Date/Time Setting] on the [E-mail (Simplex) Setting menu] screen.
2. Enter the fixed date and time.
3. Press [OK].
13. Collecting Data Setting
1. Press [Collecting Data Setting] on the [E-mail (Simplex) Setting menu] screen.
2. Select the data that you want to collect.
• Basic data
• Account track data
• Machine adjustment data
• Coverage data
3. Press [OK].
15. Initial connection
1. Press [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → [CS Remote Care] → [Detail Setting] → [Basic Setting].
2. Press [First Call] to send the initial connection mail to the center.
3. Once the mail delivery completes normally, CS Remote Care setting screen appears. (Once the mail sending to the SMTP server
normally, the registration on the machine completes.)
4. The initial connection completes when the center receives the initial connection mail. In case the device pre-registration at the center
side is skipped, it turns to be the temporary registered status when the center receive the initial connection mail. The initial connection
is completed when the device is registered at the center side.
Note
4.11.3 Setup procedure of the CS Remote Care (When using phone line modem)
Conduct the following procedure to setup when you use the phone line modem as the CR Remote Care system.
Note
• When you conduct the setup again for the main body that has done the CS Remote Care setup once, conduct RAM clear for the
CS Remote Care first and then setup again (Refer to I.4.11.16 CS Remote Care error code list)
I-340
• Use the Data modem of ITU-T V.34/V.32 bis/V.32 compliance, AT command compliance.
(1) When you use the phone line modem

2. Modem connection
Deactivate the power of the modem, connect the main body and the modem with a modem cable, and the modem and the wall outlet with
a modular cable.
For the connection of a modular cable, refer to the instructions of the modem that you use.
Press [Modem] on [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → [CS Remote Care].
7. ID code entry
1. Press [ID code].
8. Press [Detail Setting] to display the [Modem Setting Menu] screen.
9. Basic setting
1. Press [Basic Setting] on the [Modem Setting Menu] screen.
3. Press [Center Telephone Number] to enter the center phone number.
• Use [P], [T], [W], [-], and so on as needed.
4. Press [Machine Phone Number] to enter the machine phone number.
• Use [P], [T], [W], [-], and so on as needed.
5. Press [OK].
1. Press [Date/Time Setting] on the [Modem Setting Menu] screen.
4. Press [OK].
11. Modem initialization AT command entry
Note
• Change the initialization AT command of the modem as needed. (Normally no need to change.) )
• For the detail of the AT command, refer to the instruction of the modem used.
1. Press [AT command] on the [Modem Setting Menu] screen.
2. Press [Initial command] to enter the AT command.
3. Press [OK].
12. DIPSW setting for the CS Remote Care
Note
• Normally no need to change the setting, but conduct the setting as needed according to the connection environment.
1. Press [Software DIPSW Setting] on the [Modem Setting Menu] screen.
2. Specify DIP-SW as needed. (Refer to I.4.11.9 Input procedure of software DIPSW for CS Remote Care)
14. First call execution
1. Press [Basic Setting] on the [Modem Setting Menu] screen.
2. Press [First Call] to start the initial transmission.
• When the connection to the center completes successfully, the CS Remote Care setting screen appears.
• When the transmission error occurs against the center, check the error code that appears. (Refer to I.4.11.16 CS Remote Care
error code list)
• In case the device pre-registration at the center side is skipped, it turns to be the temporary registered status when the center
receives the initial call. The initial connection is completed when the device is registered at the center side.
Note
4.11.4 Setup procedure of the CS Remote Care (When using WebDAV server)
Conduct the following procedure to setup when you use the http communication as a CR Remote Care system.
Note
• Main body NIC can be used. CSRC cannot be used for the EFI controller NIC.
• When you conduct the setup again for the main body that has done the CS Remote Care setup once, conduct RAM clear for CS
Remote Care first and then setup again. (Refer to I.4.11.15 Initialization of RAM for CS Remote Care)
• Be sure to perform the communication setting before the http proxy server is used or the authentication is required for the Web
server.
I-341
• Press [Utility/Counter] → [Administrator Setting] → [Network Setting] → [http Communication Setting] to perform the setting.
Otherwise configure from [CSRC http Communication Setting] on [Extension for maintenance] of Web Utilities. (Refer to I.
4.11.7 http communication setting)
(1) When you use http (Duplex)

Press [http] on [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → [CS Remote Care].
Press [Duplex] on [CS Remote Care setting] screen.
7. ID code entry
1. Press [ID code].
8. Press [Detail Setting] to display the [http (Duplex) Setting Menu] screen.
9. Basic setting
1. Press [Basic Setting] on the [http (Duplex) Setting menu] screen.
The serial number that is input appears.
3. Press [Web Server] and enter the URL of the Web server (Less than 255 one-byte characters)
5. Press [OK].
10. Heart Beat setting *1
1. Press [Heart Beat Setting] on the [http (Duplex) Setting menu] screen.
2. Press [Heart Beat Setting] to make a selection to decide whether the Heart Beat function is made valid or invalid.
• Defaul value (for inch area): Disable
• Default value (except inch area): Enable
3. Press [Heart Beat Interval] to enter the transmission interval of the Heart Beats (1 minute to 256 minutes, default: 30 minutes).
4. Press [Heart Beat Send] to make a selection to decide whether the fixed time transmission of the Heart Beat is made valid or invalid.
5. Press [Heart Beat Fix Send Time] to enter the time for the Heart Beat transmission at the fixed time.
6. Press [OK].
Note
• 1* Heart Beat function is a function to notify that the machine is on active mode by you upload the Heart Beat file
periodically to the registered Web server. Heart Beat file contains the information of the total counter and the status.

1. Press [Date/Time Setting] on the [http (Duplex) Setting menu] screen.
4. Press [OK].
12. Activate and deactivate the sub power switch (SW2) of the main body.
1. Press [Basic Setting] on the [http (Duplex) Setting menu] screen.
3. Once the initial call completes normally, CS Remote Care setting screen appears. (Once the initial connection file is stored in the Web
server normally, the registration on the machine completes.)
• The initial connection completes when the center receives the initial connection file. In case the device pre-registration at the
center side is skipped, it turns to be the temporary registered status. The initial connection is completed when the device is
registered at the center side.
Note
14. Deactivate and activate the sub power switch (SW2) of the main body.*2
Note
• 2* The Heart Beart function does not work when SW2 of the main body is not turned OFF/ON after the First Call finishes.
I-342
(2) When you use http (Simplex (from the machine to the center))
Press [http] on [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → [CS Remote Care].
Press [Simplex] on [CS Remote Care setting] screen.
7. ID code entry
1. Press [ID code].
8. Press [Detail Setting] to display the [http (Simplex) Setting Menu] screen.
9. Basic setting
1. Press [Basic Setting] on the [http (Simplex) Setting menu] screen.
The serial number that is input appears.
3. Press [Web Server] and enter the URL of the Web server (Less than 255 one-byte characters)
5. Press [OK].
10. Heart Beat setting *1
1. Press [Heart Beat Setting] on the [http (Duplex) Setting menu] screen.
2. Press [Heart Beat Setting] to make a selection to decide whether the Heart Beat function is made valid or invalid.
3. Press [Heart Beat Interval] to enter the transmission interval of the Heart Beats (1 minute to 256 minutes, default: 30 minutes).
4. Press [Heart Beat Send] to make a selection to decide whether the fixed time transmission of the Heart Beat is made valid or invalid.
(Default: Enable)
5. Press [Heart Beat Fix Send Time] to enter the time for the Heart Beat transmission at the fixed time.
6. Press [OK].
Note
• 1* Heart Beat function is a function to notify that the machine is on active mode by you upload the Heart Beat file
periodically to the registered Web server. Heart Beat file contains the information of the total counter and the status.

1. Press [Date/Time Setting] on the [http (Simplex) Setting menu] screen.
4. Press [OK].
12. Regular send setting
1. Press [Periodical Transmission Setting] on the [http (Simplex) Setting menu] screen.
2. Configure the regular send schedule to the center.
• Every month: Send it regularly to the center on the same date. Sent date is configured at the end of the month by [End of Month].
• Every week: Send it regularly to the center on the same time and the same day of the week.
• Every day: Send it regularly to the center on the same time everyday.
Reference:
• To distribute the access to the center, the default time of the periodical transmission setting after the RAM clear is calculated from
the serial number.
3. Press [OK].
13. Fixed Date/Time Setting
1. Press [Fixed Date/Time Setting] on the [http (Simplex) Setting menu] screen.
2. Enter the fixed date and time.
3. Press [OK].
14. Collecting Data Setting
1. Press [Collecting Data Setting] on the [http (Simplex) Setting menu] screen.
2. Select the data that you want to collect.
I-343
• Basic data
• Account track data
• Machine adjustment data
• Coverage data
3. Press [OK].
15. Activate and deactivate the sub power switch (SW2) of the main body.
1. Press [Basic Setting] on the [http (Simplex) Setting menu] screen.
3. Once the initial call completes normally, CS Remote Care setting screen appears. (Once the initial connection file is stored in the Web
server normally, the registration on the machine completes.)
• The initial connection completes when the center receives the initial connection file. In case the device pre-registration at the
center side is skipped, it turns to be the temporary registered status. The initial connection is completed when the device is
registered at the center side.
Note
17. Deactivate and activate the sub power switch (SW2) of the main body.*2
Note
• 2* The Heart Beart function does not work when SW2 of the main body is not turned OFF/ON after the First Call finishes.
4.11.5 List of combinations of E-mail CS Remote Care and Mail remote notification system
To change a combination of the E-mail CS Remote Care and the Mail remote notification system, refer to this table to configure the DIPSW
setting or the mail account setting.
Mail remote
E-mail CS Remote
notification
Care using the Configurati
Case system Setting item Remark
machine NIC on value
Notification
E-mail used
system
"Use the mail remote notification
system" of the main body NIC Web ON
utility
1 ○ ○ (*2)
"Service Mode - Software DIPSW": 15-5
1
(*1)
system" of the main body NIC Web ON
2 ○ - utility -
0
(*1)
system" of the main body NIC Web ON (*3)
3 - ○ utility -
1
(*1)
system" of the main body NIC Web OFF
4 - - utility -
1
(*1)
*1 Service mode - Software DIPSW setting: 15-5 (CS remote care function active, 0=OFF, 1=ON)
*2 Mail remote notification system and CS Remote Care using the main body NIC share the same mail account.
*3 Even when the mail remote notification system is not used, select "Yes" and conduct the mail initial setting.
4.11.6 Mail initial setting

Configure the mail address and the mail server for the machine NIC.
Note
• E-mail initial setting can be done in the [Extension for maintenance] of Web Utilities. Refer to E.1.4.4 Initial setting for Web
Utilities.
1. Press the [Utility/Counter].
2. Press [Administrator Setting] → [Network Setting] → [E-mail Initial Setting].
3. Conduct the following settings.
• [Use E-mail System]: Select [ON].
• [Time Zone]: Configure the time zone.
• [Trans(SMTP) Mail Server]: Configure the host name of the AMTP server or IP address. When you input the host name, configure the
DNS server on [Machine NIC Setting].
• [SMTP port number]: Configure the port number of the SMTP server.
• [Trans Mail Server Timeout]: Configure the timeout period (sec).
• [New-arrival Check Interval]: Configure the interval (min) for checking the new-arrivals.
I-344
• [Receive mail server]: Configure the IP address of the receiving mail server. When you input the host name, configure the DNS server
on [Machine NIC Setting].
• [Receive Mail Server Type]: Configure the type of the receive mail server (POP3/IMAP).
4. Press [Next] to conduct the following settings.
• [POP3/IMAP Port Number]: Configure the port number of the receive mail server.
• [Receive Mail Account]: Configure the account name.
• [Receive Mail Password]: Configure the account password.
• [E-mail Address for Machine]: Configure the E-mail address for machine NIC.
• [POP (IMAP) before SMTP Authentication]: Make a setting whether to use the POP (IMAP) before SMTP Authentication or not.
• [SSL Encryption of SMTP]: Configure whether to encrypt the SMTP communication.
• [SSL Encryption of POP (IMAP)]: Configure whether to encrypt the POP (IMAP) communication.
5. Press [Next] to conduct the following settings.
• [SMTP Authentication]: Select whether to use the SMTP authentication or not.
• [SMTP Authentication User ID]: Adjust the user ID of the SMTP authentication.
• [SMTP Authentication Password]: Adjust the password of the SMTP authentication.
6. Press [Test] and press [Yes] on the confirmation screen to conduct the sending and receiving test.
7. Press [OK].
4.11.7 http communication setting

Be sure to perform the following settings when the http proxy server is used or the authentication is required for the Web server.
Note
• http communication setting can be configured in the [Extension for maintenance] of Web Utilities. Refer to E.1.4.4 Initial setting for
Web Utilities.
1. Press the [Utility/Counter].
2. Press [Administrator Setting] → [Network Setting] → [http Communication Setting].
3. Conduct the following settings.
• [Enable Proxy Server]: Select whether to use the proxy server or not.
• [Proxy Server Address]: Configure the host name of the proxy server or IP address. When you input the host name, configure the DNS
server on [Machine NIC Setting].
• When the proxy server authentication is required, follow the following procedures.
(Ex.) When the proxy server name: www.example.com, user name: user and password: password, enter
"user:password@www.example.com."
• Proxy Server Port: Configure the port number of the proxy server.
• [Enable SSL]: Configure whether to use SLL or not.
• [Enable Authentication]: Configure whether to use the Web server authentication or not.
• [Authentication User Name]: Configure the user name of the Web Server authentication.
• [Authentication Password]: Configure the password of the Web Server authentication.
4. Press [OK].
4.11.8 Log forwarding function

The log information of this machine (such as the static state or the abnormality) can be forwarded to the WebDAV server on the scheduled time
every day (simplex: The machine to the WebDAV server).
To use the log forward function, perform the following setting.
1. Press [Service Mode] - [CS Remote Care] - [Log FW Address Setting].
2. Perform the following settings.
• [WebDAV Server IP Address]: Configure the IP address of the WebDAV server for the forwarding.
• [Store Directory]: Configure the directory of the WebDAV server.
• [Enable Proxy Server]: Configure the use of the proxy server (Default: OFF).
• [Proxy Server IP Address]: Configure the IP address of the proxy server.
• [Proxy Server Port Number]: Set the port number of the proxy server.
• [Enable SSL]: Configure whether to use of the SSL (Default: OFF).
• [Authentication]: Configure whether to use of the Web server authentication (Default: OFF).
• [User Name]: Configure the user name of the Web server authentication.
• [Password]: Configures the password of the Web server authentication.
3. Press [OK].
4. Press [Service Mode] - [CS Remote Care] - [Log Forwarding Time Setting].
• [Forward Log]: Press [ON] to enable the log forwarding (Default: OFF).
• [Log Forwarding Time]: Configure the time for forwarding the log.
5. Press [OK].
4.11.9 Input procedure of software DIPSW for CS Remote Care

Note
• DIPSW bits data are written into the NVRAM board (NRB) every time a change is made. In case you changed bit data by accident,
be sure to restore the previous state.
Input procedure
2. Press [CS Remote Care] → [CS Remote Care] on [Service Mode menu] screen.
3. Press [ID Code] on [CS Remote Care setting] screen.
5. Press [Detail setting].
6. Press [Software DIPSW Setting] on the Utility menu screen.
7. Select the DIPSW number on "Software DIPSW Setting."
• Use the left arrow key or the numeric keys.
8. Select the DIPSW bit number.
• Use the left arrow key or the numeric keys.
9. Select [ON (1)] or [OFF (0)].
I-345
10. Press [Return] to return to the "Setting menu screen."

Note
• About functions of each switch, refer to .I.4.11.10 List of software DIPSW for CS Remote Care
4.11.10 List of software DIPSW for CS Remote Care

Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
1 0 Dial mode • 0: Pulse dial 1 1 1
• 1: Tone dial
1 Modem reception • 0: Receive (Issue ATA by RING 0 0 0
delivery)
• 1: Not receive (Not issue ATA
by RING delivery)
2 Reservation • 0: - 0 0 0
3 • 1: - 0 0 0
4 Baud rate • 1200bps: 1-7=0, 1-6=0, 1-5=1, 0 0 0
5 1-4=1 0 0 0
• 2400bps: 1-7=0, 1-6=1, 1-5=0,
6 1-4=0 0 0 0
7 • 4800bps: 1-7=0, 1-6=1, 1-5=0, 1 1 1
1-4=1
• 9600bps: 1-7=0, 1-6=1, 1-5=1,
1-4=0
• 19200bps: 1-7=0, 1-6=1, 1-5=1,
1-4=1
• 38400bps: 1-7=1, 1-6=0, 1-5=0,
1-4=0
• 57600bps: 1-7=1, 1-6=0, 1-5=0,
1-4=1
2 0 Auto call on SC occurrence • 0: OFF 1 1 1
1 Auto call on date specification • 1: ON 1 1 1
2 Auto call on the part replacement 1 1 1
3 Auto call on the drum replacement 1 1 1
4 Auto call on the periodic maintenance (PM) 1 1 1
5 ORU-M start and finish notification • 0: Not notify 1 1 1
• 1: Notify
• 1: -
7 Automatic calling when reset fixed replacement • 0: OFF 0 0 0
parts • 1: ON
3 0 Reservation • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
1 Auto call on the toner supply • 0: OFF 1 1 1
• 1: ON
• 1: -
3 Notification of waste toner box full • 0: OFF 1 1 1
4 Call on fusing cleaning web count over • 1: ON 1 1 1
5 Call on Toner collection filter count over 1 1 1
6 Call on fusing external heating count over 1 1 1
• 1: -
4 0 CS Remote Care communication mode • Data modem: 4-1=0, 4-0=0 0 0 0
1 • FAX (not used): 4-1=0, 4-0=1 1 1 1
• E-mail: 4-1=1, 4-0=0
• http: 4-1=1, 4-0=1
3 • 1: - 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
5 0 Modem redial interval • 1 minute: 5-3=0, 5-2=0, 5-1=0, 1 1 1
1 5-0=1 1 1 1
• 2 minutes: 5-3=0, 5-2=0, 5-1=1,
2 5-0=0 0 0 0
I-346
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
3 • 3 minutes: 5-3=0, 5-2=0, 5-1=1, 0 0 0
5-0=1
• 4 minutes: 5-3=0, 5-2=1, 5-1=0,
5-0=0
• 5 minutes: 5-3=0, 5-2=1, 5-1=0,
5-0=1
• 6 minutes: 5-3=0, 5-2=1, 5-1=1,
5-0=0
• 7 minutes: 5-3=0, 5-2=1, 5-1=1,
5-0=1
• 8 minutes: 5-3=1, 5-2=0, 5-1=0,
5-0=0
• 9 minutes: 5-3=1, 5-2=0, 5-1=0,
5-0=1
• 10 minutes: 5-3=1, 5-2=0,
5-1=1, 5-0=0
5 • 1: - 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
6 0 Modem redial times • 0 to 9: 000 0000 to 000 1001 0 0 0
1 • 10: 000 1010 1 1 1
• 11 to 99: 000 1011 to 110 0011
2 (6 to 0 bit) 0 0 0
3 1 1 1
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
• 1: -
7 0 Redial for response time out • 0: Not redial 1 1 1
• 1: Redial
2 • 1: - 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
8 0 Retransmission interval on E-mail delivery error • 0 minute: 8-3=0, 8-2=0, 8-1=0, 0 0 0
1 8-0=0 1 1 1
• 10 minutes: 8-3=0, 8-2=0,
2 8-1=0, 8-0=1 1 1 1
3 • 20 minutes: 8-3=0, 8-2=0, 0 0 0
8-1=1, 8-0=0
• 30 minutes: 8-3=0, 8-2=0,
8-1=1, 8-0=1
• 40 minutes: 8-3=0, 8-2=1,
8-1=0, 8-0=0
• 50 minutes: 8-3=0, 8-2=1,
8-1=0, 8-0=1
• 60 minutes: 8-3=0, 8-2=1,
8-1=1, 8-0=0
• 70 minutes: 8-3=0, 8-2=1,
8-1=1, 8-0=1
• 80 minutes: 8-3=1, 8-2=0,
8-1=0, 8-0=0
• 90 minutes: 8-3=1, 8-2=0,
8-1=0, 8-0=1
• 100 minutes: 8-3=1, 8-2=0,
8-1=1, 8-0=0
• 110 minutes: 8-3=1, 8-2=0,
8-1=1, 8-0=1
• 120 minutes: 8-3=1, 8-2=1,
8-1=0, 8-0=0
6 • 1: - 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
I-347
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
9 0 Retransmission times on E-mail delivery error • 0 to 9: 000 0000 to 000 1001 0 0 0
1 • 10: 000 1010 1 1 1
• 11 to 99: 000 1011 to 110 0011
2 (6 to 0 bit) 0 0 0
3 1 1 1
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
• 1: -
10 0 Time zone setting • -12 to -1: 1111 0100 to 1111 0 0 0
1 1111 0 0 0
• 0: 0000 0000
2 • 1 to 12: 0000 0001 to 0001100 0 0 0
3 (7 to 0 bit) 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
11 0 Timer 1 • 0 second to 31 seconds: 0000 0 0 0
1 RING receive → CONNECT receive 0000 to 0001 1111 0 0 0
• 32 seconds: 0010 0000
2 • 33 seconds to 255 seconds: 0 0 0
3 0010 0001 to 1111 1111 0 0 0
4 (7 to 0 bit) 0 0 0
5 1 1 1
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
1 Dial calling complete → CONNECT receive 0000 to 0011 1111 0 0 0
• 64 seconds: 0100 0000
3 0100 0001 to 1111 1111 0 0 0
4 (7 to 0 bit) 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 1 1 1
7 0 0 0
13 0 Timer 3 • 0: - 0 0 0
1 Not used • 1: - 1 1 1
2 0 0 0
3 1 1 1
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
14 0 Timer 4 • 0 to 31 (x 100 milliseconds): 0 0 0
1 Connection → Start request telegram delivery 0000 0000 to 0001 1111 0 0 0
• 32 (x 100 milliseconds): 0010
2 0000 0 0 0
3 • 33 to 255 (x 100 milliseconds) : 0 0 0
4 0010 0001 to 1111 1111 0 0 0
(7 to 0 bit)
5 1 1 1
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
1 Waiting time for the response from other side 0000 to 0001 1101 1 1 1
• 30 seconds: 0001 1110
3 0001 1111 to 1111 1111 1 1 1
4 (7 to 0 bit) 1 1 1
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0

Konica Minolta Bizhub PRESS C1070 C1070P C71hc C1060 Bizhub PRO C1060L Service Manual

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Konica Minolta Bizhub PRESS C1070 C1070P C71hc C1060 Bizhub PRO C1060L Service Manual

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

SERVICE MANUAL

PA THEORY OF OPERATION DF-626..........................................................................................PA-1

PB THEORY OF OPERATION PF-602m/HT-504/505..................................................................PB -1

PC THEORY OF OPERATION PF-707/HT-506.............................................................................PC-1

PD THEORY OF OPERATION LU-202/HT-503.............................................................................PD-1

PE THEORY OF OPERATION MB-506..........................................................................................PE-1

PG THEORY OF OPERATION EF-103..........................................................................................PG-1

PH THEORY OF OPERATION RU-516..........................................................................................PH-1

PI THEORY OF OPERATION RU-517.............................................................................................PI-1

PK THEORY OF OPERATION RU-509/HM-102............................................................................PK-1

PL THEORY OF OPERATION RU-510...........................................................................................PL-1

PM THEORY OF OPERATION FS-531.........................................................................................PM-1

PN THEORY OF OPERATION FS-612..........................................................................................PN-1

PO THEORY OF OPERATION PK-512/513...................................................................................PO-1

PP THEORY OF OPERATION PI-502............................................................................................PP-1

PQ THEORY OF OPERATION FS-532..........................................................................................PQ-1

PR THEORY OF OPERATION SD-510..........................................................................................PR-1

PS THEORY OF OPERATION PK-522..........................................................................................PS-1

PT THEORY OF OPERATION MK-732..........................................................................................PT-1

PU THEORY OF OPERATION LS-505..........................................................................................PU-1

PV THEORY OF OPERATION LS-506...........................................................................................PV-1

PW THEORY OF OPERATION FD-503........................................................................................PW-1

PX THEORY OF OPERATION SD-506..........................................................................................PX-1

PY THEORY OF OPERATION SD-513..........................................................................................PY-1

PZ THEORY OF OPERATION CR-101..........................................................................................PZ-1

PAA THEORY OF OPERATION TU-503......................................................................................PAA-1

PAB THEORY OF OPERATION FD-504......................................................................................PAB-1

PAC THEORY OF OPERATION PB-503.....................................................................................PAC-1

PAD THEORY OF OPERATION GP-501.....................................................................................PAD-1

PAE THEORY OF OPERATION GP-502.....................................................................................PAE-1

S TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE Ver1.8 (REPORTS FROM THE MARKET)...................................S-1

bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C1060/PRO C1060L Version 1.5

No. ID Title Ver. Descriptions of revision Date

No. ID Title Ver. Descriptions of revision Date

No. ID Title Ver. Descriptions of revision Date

bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C1060/PRO C1060L Version 1.7

No. ID Title Ver. Descriptions of revision Date

No. ID Title Ver. Descriptions of revision Date

No. ID Title Ver. Descriptions of revision Date

bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L Version 1.8

No. ID Title Ver. Descriptions of revision Date

bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L Version 1.9

bizhub PRESS C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060/PRO C1060L Version 2.0

No. ID Title Ver. Descriptions of revision Date

A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

2. DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING

DANGER : Action having a high possibility of suffering

WARNING : Action having a possibility of suffering death

CAUTION : Action having a possibility of suffering a slight

2.2 Description items for safety and important warning items

3.1.1 Actions requiring special attention

• Do not use any part not specified by KM.

• Do not use any power cord or power plug not

• Use only the protective fuses specified by KM.

3.2 POWER PLUG SELECTION

3.2.1 Power Cord Set or Power Plug

Marked with "E", "PE" or " "

3.3 CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE

3.3.1 Power Supply

and the product and another electrical

(2) Ground Connection

(3) Power Plug and Cord

3.3.2 Installation Requirements

(2) When not Using the Product for a long time

Tab Paper 6 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○8